A    LATIN    GRAMMAR 

FOR 

SCHOOLS    AND    COLLEGES 


BY 

GEORGE   M.  LANE,   PH.D.,  LL.D. 

PROFESSOR   EMERITUS   OF    LATIN    IN 
HARVARD   UNIVERSITY 


REVISED  EDITION 


NEW   YORK      CINCINNATI      CHICAGO 

AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 


Copyright,  1898,  1903,  by  GARDINER  M.  LANE  and  LOUISA  VAN  RENSSBLABK. 

All  rights  reserved. 
w.  P.    5 


PREFACE    TO    THE    FIRST    EDITION. 

GEORGE  MARTIN  LANE  died  on  the  thirtieth  of  June,  1897. 
His  Latin  Grammar,  in  the  preparation  of  which  he  had  been 
engaged,  during  the  intervals  of  teaching  in  Harvard  University, 
for  nearly  thirty  years,  was  at  that  time  approaching  completion. 
The  first  two  hundred  and  ninety-one  pages  had  been  stereo- 
typed ;  the  pages  immediately  following,  on  the  Relative  Sentence 
and  the  Conjunctive  Particle  Sentence  through  quod  and  quia 
(pages  292-302),  together  with  the  chapter  on  the  Infinitive 
(pages  374-386),  were  ready  for  stereotyping;  of  the  remainder 
of  the  book,  pages  303—373  and  387—436  were  in  the  form  of  a 
first  draught ;  finally,  he  had  received  a  few  weeks  before  his 
death,  but  had  never  examined,  the  manuscript  of  the  chapter 
on  Versification  (pages  442-485),  written  at  his  invitation  by 
his  former  pupil,  Dr.  Herman  W.  Hayley,  now  of  Wesleyan 
University. 

It  was  found  that  my  dear  and  honoured  master  had  left  a  writ- 
ten request  that  his  work  should  be  completed  by  me,  in  consul- 
tation with  his  colleagues,  Professors  Frederic  De  Forest  Allen 
and  Clement  Lawrence  Smith.  A  month  had  scarcely  passed 
when  scholars  everywhere  had  another  heavy  loss  to  mourn  in 
the  sudden  death  of  Professor  Allen.  Almost  immediately  after- 
wards, Professor  Smith  left  this  country,  to  take  charge  for  a  year 
of  the  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  in  Rome,  but  not  be- 
fore we  had  agreed  that  circumstances  required  the  early  publica- 
tion of  the  book,  notwithstanding  his  absence.  I  was  thus  deprived 
of  two  eminent  counsellors,  whose  knowledge  and  experience  would 
have  been  of  inestimable  assistance. 

About  one  hundred  and  twenty  pages  (303-373  and  387-436), 
exclusive  of  Versification,  were  yet  to  receive  their  final  form. 
Professor  Lane  had  determined  the  order  in  which  the  topics 
contained  in  these  pages  should  be  treated,  and  no  change  has 
been  made  in  that  order.  Most  of  the  main  principles  of  syntax, 


340331 


Preface. 


too,  have  been  left  exactly  as  they  were  expressed  in  his  draught. 
This  draught  was  written  some  years  ago,  and,  although  he  had 
corrected  and  annotated  it  from  time  to  time,  there  is  no  doubt 
that  in  writing  it  out  afresh  he  would  have  made  many  alterations 
and  improvements  which  are  not  indicated  in  his  notes.  Conse- 
quently, he  is  not  to  be  held  responsible  for  errors  and  omissions  in 
the  pages  which  had  not  received  his  final  approval.  Yet  I  con- 
ceived it  my  duty  to  preserve,  so  far  as  possible,  the  very  lan- 
guage of  his  corrected  draught;  and  this,  in  the  statement  of 
almost  all  the  main  principles,  I  have  been  able  to  do.  Some 
modifications  and  some  radical  alterations  were  inevitable ;  in 
particular,  the  treatment  of  quamvis,  quando,  quin,  the  Supine, 
and  Numerals  seemed  to  call  for  much  amplification  and 
rearrangement.  I  have  also  deemed  it  necessary  to  add  some 
seventy  sections1  under  various  heads,  and  Dr.  Hayley  has  been 
good  enough  to  write  sections  2458—2510,  which  precede  his 
chapter  on  Versification.  But,  in  general,  my  principal  functior 
has  been :  first,  to  provide  additional  Latin  examples  of  the  prin- 
ciples which  Professor  Lane  had  formulated ;  secondly,  to  enter, 
under  the  various  principles,  historical  statements  regarding  the 
usage  in  the  Latin  writers,  drawn  from  the  best  authorities  at  my 
disposal. 

Professor  Lane's  own  method  was  far  from  that  of  a  compiler. 
He  took  nothing  for  granted  without  thorough  investigation,  how- 
ever well  established  it  might  seem,  and  he  followed  the  dic- 
tum of  no  man,  however  widely  accepted  as  an  authority.  For 
example,  his  many  pupils  and  correspondents  will  remember 
how  untiring  he  was  in  his  efforts  to  arrive  at  accuracy  in  even 
the  minutest  points  of  inflection.  Thus,  for  the  List  of  Verbs 
(§§  922—1022),  he  made  entirely  new  collections,  and  admitted 
no  form  among  the  '  principal  parts '  unless  actually  found  repre- 
sented in  the  authors.  In  the  details  of  syntax,  he  was  equally 
indefatigable;  the  sections  on  the  Locative  Proper  (1331-1341), 
for  instance,  contain  the  result  of  an  immense  amount  of  painful 

1  The  sections  which  I  have  added  are  as  follows:  1866,  1873,  1878,  1879, 
1880,  1887,  1890,  1901,  1902,  1903,  1907,  1909,  1913,  1922,  1927,  1935,  1964, 
*975»  1978,  1979,  1980,  1981,  1982,  1983,  1984,  1989,  1990,  2011,  2012,  2013, 

2014,  2015,  2O68,  2O86,  2088,2097,  2III,  2122,  2152,  2155,  2255,  2264,  2267, 
2271,  2273,  2275,  2276,  2277,  228l,  2289,  2292,  2345,  2357,  2400,  2406,  2407, 
2408,  2409,  2410,  2411,  2412,  2413,  2414,  2740-2745. 

vi 


Preface. 


research.  He  devoted  much  anxious  thought  to  the  definitions 
and  the  titles  of  the  various  constructions :  thus,  the  distinction 
between  the  Present  of  Vivid  Narration  (1590)  and  the  Annal- 
istic  Present  (1591)  seems  obvious  now  that  it  is  stated;  but  to 
reach  it  many  pages  of  examples  were  collected  and  compared. 
He  held  that  examples  printed  in  the  grammar  to  illustrate  syn- 
tactical principles  should  never  be  manufactured ;  they  should  be 
accurately  quoted  from  the  authors,  without  other  alteration  than 
the  omission  of  words  by  which  the  construction  under  illustra- 
tion was  not  affected.  He  was  careful,  also,  not  to  use  an  example 
in  which  there  was  any  serious  doubt  as  to  the  text  in  that  part 
which  covered  the  principle  illustrated  by  the  example.  To 
'  Hidden  Quantity '  he  had  given  much  attention,  and  many  of 
the  results  of  his  studies  in  this  subject  were  published,  in  1889, 
in  the  School  Dictionary  by  his  friend  Dr.  Lewis.  Since  that  time 
he  had  found  reason  to  change  his  views  with  regard  to  some 
words,  and  these  changes  are  embodied  in  the  present  book,  in 
which  he  marked  every  vowel  which  he  believed  to  be  long  in 
quantity. 

The  order  in  which  the  divisions  and  subdivisions  of  grammar 
are  here  presented  will  not  seem  strange  to  those  who  are  ac- 
quainted with  the  recent  grammars  published  by  Germans.  It  is 
the  scientific  order  of  presentation,  whatever  order  a  teacher  may 
think  fit  to  follow  in  his  actual  practice.  The  table  of  contents 
has  been  made  so  full  as  to  serve  as  a  systematic  exposition  of 
the  scheme,  and  to  make  needless  any  further  words  upon  it  here. 
In  the  Appendix  Professor  Lane  would  have  inserted,  out  of  defer- 
ence to  custom,  a  chapter  on  the  Arrangement  of  Words ;  but 
the  draught  of  it  which  he  left  was  too  fragmentary  for  publica- 
tion. Since  the  proper  preparation  of  the  chapter  would  have 
greatly  delayed  the  publication  of  the  book,  it  was  thought  best 
to  omit  it  altogether,  at  least  for  the  present.  This  topic,  in  fact, 
like  some  others  in  the  Appendix,  belongs  rather  to  a  treatise  on 
Latin  Composition  than  to  a  Latin  Grammar. 

For  the  indexes,  and  for  much  valuable  help  in  proof  reading, 
I  heartily  thank  Dr.  J.  W.  Walden,  another  of  Professor  Lane's 
pupils. 

In  the  course  of  his  work,  Professor  Lane  frequently  consulted 
his  colleagues  and  other  distinguished  scholars  both  in  this  country 
and  in  Europe.  He  gratefully  welcomed  their  advice,  and  care- 

vii 


Preface. 


fully  considered  and  often  adopted  their  suggestions.  Had  he 
lived  to  write  a  preface,  he  would  doubtless  have  thanked  by  name 
those  to  whom  he  considered  himself  as  under  particular  obliga- 
tion, whether  from  direct  correspondence  or  through  the  use  of 
their  published  works ;  but  it  is  obvious  that  the  information  in 
my  possession  will  not  allow  me  to  attempt  this  pleasant  duty. 
Of  Professor  Lane's  pupils,  also,  not  a  few,  while  in  residence  as 
advanced  students  at  the  University,  were  from  time  to  time  en- 
gaged in  the  collection  of  material  which  he  used  in  the  gram- 
mar. They,  like  his  other  helpers,  must  now  be  content  with 
the  thought  of  the  courteous  acknowledgment  which  they  would 
have  received  from  him. 

MORRIS  H.  MORGAN. 

HARVARD  UNIVERSITY, 
CAMBRIDGE,  May,  1898* 


PREFATORY   NOTE    TO   THE 
REVISED    EDITION. 

IN  this  Revised  Edition  many  changes  and  corrections  in  details 
have  been  introduced  throughout  the  book,  but  no  alterations  have 
been  made  in  the  treatment  of  broad  general  principles,  except  in 
the  chapter  on  Sound  (§§  16-179).  This  has  been  very  largely 
rewritten  and  extended  from  nineteen  to  thirty-one  pages  by  my 
friend,  Professor  Hanns  Oertel,  of  Yale  University,  who  has  also 
been  kind  enough  to  make  the  changes  in  the  chapters  on  For- 
mation and  Inflection  rendered  necessary  by  his  rewriting  of  the 
sections  on  Sound.  In  this  rewriting  Mr.  Oertel  has  proceeded 
upon  the  ideas  that  in  a  school  grammar,  even  an  advanced  one, 
phonology  should  play  a  subordinate  part ;  that  nothing  should  be 
introduced  that  cannot  be  illustrated  from  such  Latin  and  Greek 
as  are  available  to  the  student ;  and  that  those  points  should  be 
emphasized  which  assist  in  the  analyzing  of  compounds  and  in  the 
understanding  of  word-formation  and  inflection.  With  these  ideas, 
which  necessarily  prevent  the  introduction  of  some  important 
topics  treated  in  works  on  phonetics,  I  am  in  entire  sympathy. 

My  thanks  are  due  to  not  a  few  scholars  and  reviewers  who  have 
pointed  out  passages  in  the  first  edition  which  in  their  opinion 
called  for  changes.  Some  of  their  suggestions  I  have  adopted ; 
with  others  I  have  found  myself  unable  to  agree. 

M.  H.  M. 

HARVARD  UNIVERSITY, 

CAMBRIDGE,  May,  1903. 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 


THE   REFERENCES    ARE   TO    SECTIONS. 


Parts  of  Latin  Grammar,  i. 

PART   FIRST  :    WORDS,  2-1022. 
Parts  of  Speech,  2-15. 

(A.)     SOUND,  16-179. 

Alphabet,  16-30. 

Sources  of  our  Pronunciation,  31. 

Vowels,  32-46. 

Long  and  Short,  33-36.     Pronunciation,  37-42.     Classification,  43-46. 

Diphthongs,  47-50. 

Nature  and  Kinds,  47,  48.     Pronunciation,  49,  50. 

Consonants,  51-81. 

Pronunciation,  51-72.     Classification,  73-81. 

Syllabic  and  Unsyllabic  Function,  82,  83. 

Accent,  84-98. 

Nature,  84.  Marks  of  Accent,  85.  The  Classical  Accent,  86-88.  Ear- 
lier Recessive  Accent,  89-91.  Proclitics  and  Enclitics,  92-94. 

Change  of  Sound,  95-174. 

Vowel  Change:  Of  Diphthongs,  95-101 ;  108.  Of  Simple  Vowels,  102- 
107.  Loss,  110-113.  Hiatus,  114-116.  Synizesis,  117.  Contraction,  118. 
Elision,  119.  Combination  into  Diphthongs,  120.  Lengthening,  121-123. 
Shortening,  124-132.  Transfer  of  Quantity,  133.  Variation,  134.  Quan- 
titative Vowel  Gradation,  135.  Qualitative  Vowel  Changes,  136-143. 
Assimilation,  144.  Qualitative  Vowel  Gradation,  145. 

Consonant  Change:  Disappearance  or  Change  of  Single  Consonants, 
146-161.  Change  in  Consonant  Groups,  162-179.  Assimilation,  163-166. 
Consonantal  Glides,  167.  Disappearance,  168-171.  Development  of 
Anaptyctical  Vowel,  172.  Dissimilation,  173.  Changes  within  Com- 
pounds, 174. 

Syllables,  175-179. 

Defined,  175,  176.     Length  of  Syllables,  177,  178.     Loss,  179. 


Table  of  Contents. 


(B.)     FORMATION,  180-396. 
Definitions,  180-198. 

Roots,  183-189.  Present  Stems  as  Roots,  190-194.  Stems,  195-197. 
Primitives  and  Denominatives,  198. 

Formation  of  the  Noun,  199-364. 

Without  a  Formative  Suffix,  199.  Formative  Suffixes,  200-203.  For- 
mation of  the  Substantive:  Primitives,  204-245.  Denominatives,  246-279. 
Formation  of  the  Adjective:  Primitives,  280-297.  Denominatives,  298-341. 
Comparison,  342-364. 

Formation  of  Denominative  Verbs,  365-375. 
Composition,  376-396. 

Of  Nouns,  379-390.    Of  Verbs,  391-396. 

(C.)     INFLECTION,  397-1022. 
Definition,  397. 

(A.)      INFLECTION  OF  THE  NOUN,  398-712. 

General  Principles,  398-431. 

Case  Endings,  398.  The  Stem,  399-401.  Gender,  402-413.  Number, 
414-418.  Case,  4I9-431- 

The  Substantive,  432-607. 

Stems  in  -a-  (  The  First  Declension],  432-445.  Stems  in  -o-  (  The  Second 
Declension),  446-466.  Consonant  Stems  (The  Third  Declension],  467-512. 
Stems  in  -i-  (The  Third  Declension),  513-569.  Gender  of  Consonant 
Stems  and  -i-  Stems,  570-584.  Stems  in  -u-  ( The  Fourth  Declension), 
585-595.  Stems  in  -e-  (  The  Fifth  Declension),  596-607. 

The  Adjective,  608-643. 

Stems  in  -o-  and  -a-,  613-620.  Consonant  Stems,  621-626.  Stems  in 
-i-,  627-636.  Numeral  Adjectives,  637-643. 

The  Pronoun,  644-695. 

Personal  and  Reflexive,  644-651.  Personal  and  Reflexive  Possessive, 
652-655.  Other  Pronouns,  656-^659.  Demonstrative,  660-670.  Deter- 
minative, 671-675.  Pronoun  of  Identity,  676-678.  Intensive,  679-680. 
Relative,  Interrogative,  and  Indefinite,  681-694.  Correlative  Pronouns, 
695- 

The  Adverb,  Conjunction,  and  Preposition,  696-712. 

Nouns  as  Adverbs,  696-698.  Accusative,  699-702.  Ablative,  703-707. 
Locative,  708-709  Other  Endings,  710.  Correlative  Adverbs,  711.  Sen- 
tences as  Adverbs,  712. 

(B.)      INFLECTION   OF  THE  VERB,  713-1022. 

General  Principles,  tf  13-742. 

The  Stem,  714-720.     The  Person  Ending,  721-731.     Nouns  of  the  Verb, 
732.      Principal    Parts,   733-735.      Designation   of    the    Verb,    736-737, 
Theme,  738-740.    /Classes  of  Verbs,  741-742. 
Primitive  Verbs,  743-791. 

Root  Verbs,  743-744.  Inflection  of  sum,  745-750.  possum,  751-753- 
do,  754-757-  bib$,  sero,  sist5, 758.  inquam,  7 59-761.  66,762-767.  queo 

xii 


Table  of  Contents. 


and  nequeo,  768.  edo,  769-771.  volo,  nolo,  malo,  772-779.  fero,  780- 
781.  Verbs  in  -ere  (  The  Third  Conjugation),  rego,  782-783.  Verbs  in 
-io, -ere,  784-791.  capio,  784-785.  §16,780-787.  £16,788-790.  Others 
in  -16,  -ere,  791. 

Denominative  Verbs,  792-797. 

Verbs  in -are  (The  First  Conjugation),  laudo,  792-793.  Verbs  in  -ere 
( The  Second  Conjugation],  moneo,  794-795.  Verbs  in  -ire  (The  Fourth 
Conjugation],  audio,  796-797. 

Deponent  Verbs,  798-801. 

Periphrastic  Forms,  802-804. 

Defective  Verbs,  805-817. 

Redundant  Verbs,  818-823. 

Formation  of  Stems,  824-919. 

Variable  Vowel,  824-827.  The  Present  System:  Present  Indicative 
Stem,  828-840.  Present  Subjunctive,  841-843.  Imperative,  844-846. 
Imperfect  Indicative,  847-848.  Imperfect  Subjunctive,  849-850.  Future, 
851-853.  The  Perfect  System  :  Perfect  Indicative  Stem,  854-875.  Perfect 
Subjunctive,  876-878.  Perfect  Imperative,  879.  Pluperfect  Indicative, 
880.  Pluperfect  Subjunctive,  881.  Future  Perfect,  882-884.  Short  or 
Old  forms  of  the  Perfect  System,  885-893.  Nouns  of  the  Verb:  The 
Infinitive,  894-898.  Gerundive  and  Gerund,  899.  Supine,  900.  Present 
Participle,  901-903.  Future  Participle,  904-905.  Perfect  Participle, 
906-919. 

List  of  Verbs  arranged  according  to  the  Principal  Parts,  920-1022. 


PART   SECOND:   SENTENCES,  1023-2299. 

Definitions,  1023-1061. 

The  Simple  Sentence,  1023-1025.  The  Subject,  1026-1034.  The  Predi- 
cate, 1035-1036.  Enlargements  of  the  Subject,  1038-1047.  Enlargements 
of  the  Predicate,  1048-1054.  Combination  of  Sentences,  1055.  The  Com- 
pound Sentence,  1056-1057.  The  Complex  Sentence,  1058-1061. 

Agreement,  1062-1098. 

Of  the  Verb,  1062-1076.  Of  the  Substantive,  1077-1081.  Of  the  Ad- 
jective, 1082-1098. 

THE   SIMPLE   SENTENCE,  1099-1635. 

(A.)      USE   OF  THE  NOUN,  1099-1468. 

Number  and  Gender,  1099-1110. 
Case,  1111-1437. 

NOMINATIVE,  1113-1123.  Nominative  of  Title,  1114-1116.  Of  Excla- 
mation, 1117.  Vocative  Nominative  and  Vocative  Proper,  1118-1123. 

ACCUSATIVE,  1124-1174.  Of  the  Object,  1132-1139.  Emphasizing  or 
Defining,  1140-1146.  Of  the  Part  Concerned,  1147.  Of  the  Thing  Put 

xiii 


Table  of  Contents. 


On,  1148.  Of  Exclamation,  1149-1150.  Of  Space  and  Time,  1151-1156. 
Of  the  Aim  of  Motion,  1157-1166.  Two  Accusatives  Combined,  1167- 
1174. 

DATIVE,  1175-1225.  /.  The  Complementary  Dative :  (i.)  The  Essential 
Complement:  With  Verbs,  1180-1199  With  Adjectives,  1200-1204.  (2.) 
The  Optional  Complement:  Of  the  person  or  thing  interested,  1205-1210. 
The  Emotional  Dative,  1 21 1.  The  Dative  of  the  Possessor,  1212-1216.  Of 
Relation,  1217-1218.  77.  The  Predicative  Dative:  Of  Tendency  or  Result, 
1219-1222.  Of  Purpose  or  Intention,  1223-1225. 

GENITIVE,  1226-1295.  /.  With  Substantives:  In  General,  1227-1231.  Of 
the  Subject,  Cause,  Origin,  or  Owner,  1232-1238.  Of  Quality,  1239-1240. 
Partitive,  1241-1254.  Of  Definition,  1255-1259.  Objective,  1260-1262. 
77.  With  Adjectives,  1263-1270.  777.  With  Verbs:  Of  Valuing,  1271-1275. 
With  refert  and  interest,  1276-1279.  With  Judicial  Verbs,  1280-1282. 
With  Impersonals  of  Mental  Distress,  1283-1286.  With  Verbs  of  Memory, 
1287-1291.  Of  Participation  and  Mastery,  1292.  Of  Fulness  and  Want, 
1293-1294.  IV.  The  Genitive  of  Exclamation,  1295. 

ABLATIVE,  1296-1400.  7.  The  Ablative  Proper:  Of  Separation  and 
Want,  and  of  Departure,  1302-1311.  Of  Source,  Stuff,  or  Material,  1312- 
1315.  Of  Cause,  Influence,  or  Motive,  1316-1319.  Of  Comparison,  1320- 
1330.  77.  The  Locative  Ablative :  The  Locative  Proper,  1331-1341.  The 
Ablative  used  as  Locative:  Of  Place  in,  on,  or  at  which,  1342-1349.  Of 
Time  at  which  or  within  which,  1350-1355.  777.  The  Instrumental  Abla- 
tive:  (l.)  The  Ablative  of  Attendance:  Of  Accompaniment,  1356-1357. 
Of  Manner,  1358-1361.  Ablative  Absolute,  1362-1374.  Ablative  of  Qual- 
ity, 1375.  Of  the  Route  Taken,  1376.  (2.)  The  Instrumental  Proper:  Of 
Instrument  or  Means,  1377-1384.  Of  Specification,  1385.  Of  Fulness, 
1386-1387.  Of  Measure,  Exchange,  and  Price,  1388-1392.  Of  the  Amount 
of  Difference,  1393-1399.  Two  or  more  Ablatives  Combined,  1400. 

Use  of  Cases  with  Prepositions,  1401-1437. 

In  General,  1401-1409.  With  the  Accusative,  1410-1416.  With  the 
Ablative,  1417-1421.  With  the  Accusative  or  the  Ablative,  1422-1425. 
Combination  of  Substantives  by  a  Preposition,  1426-1428.  Repetition  or 
Omission  of  a  Preposition,  1429-1430.  Two  Prepositions  with  one  Sub- 
stantive, 1431-1432.  Position -of  Prepositions,  1433-1437. 

Use  of  Adverbs,  1438-1453. 

Use  of  Degrees  of  Comparison,  1454-1468. 

(B.)      USE  OF  THE  VERB,    1469-1635. 

Voice,  1469-1492. 

Active,  1469-1471.     Passive,  1472-1485.     Deponents,  1486-1492. 

Mood,  1493-1586. 

THE  INDICATIVE,  1493-1533.  In  Declarations,  1493-1498.  In  Ques- 
tions, 1499-1533-  Yes  or  No  Questions,  1502-1510.  Positive  and  Nega- 
tive Answers,  1511-1514.  Alternative  Questions,  1515-1525.  Pronoun 
Questions,  1526-1530.  Some  Applications  of  Questions,  1531-1533. 

THE  INFINITIVE  OF  INTIMATION,  1534-1539. 

xiv 


Table  of  Contents. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE,  1540-1570.  The  Subjunctive  in  Declarations: 
/.  Of  Desire:  Of  Wish,  1540-1546.  Of  Exhortation,  Direction,  Statement 
of  Propriety,  1547-1552.  Of  Willingness,  Assumption,  Concession,  1553. 
//.  Of  Action  Conceivable,  1554-1562.  The  Subjunctive  in  Questions, 
1563—1570. 

THE  IMPERATIVE,  1571-1586.     Of  Command,  1571-1580.    Of  Prohibi- 
tion, 1581-1586. 
Tense,  1587-1635. 

OF  THE  INDICATIVE,  1 587-1633.  Present,  1587-1593.  Imperfect,  1594- 
1601.  Perfect,  1602-1613.  Pluperfect,  1614-1618.  Future,  1619-1625. 
Future  Perfect,  1626-1632.  The  Future  Active  Participle  with  sum,  1633. 

OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE,  1634-1635. 

THE   COMPOUND   SENTENCE,   OR  COORDINATION, 

1636-1713. 

Without  a  Connective,  1637-1642. 

With  a  Connective,  1643-1692. 

Conjunctions,  1643.      Copulative,  1644-1666.      Disjunctive,  1667-1675. 
Adversative,  1676-1686.     Other  Words  as  Connectives,  1687-1692. 
The  Intermediate  Coordinate  Sentence,  1693-1713. 

The  Subordinate  Idea  unindicated  by  the  Mood,  1695-1704.  The  Sub- 
ordinate Idea  indicated  by  the  Subjunctive,  1705-1713. 

THE   COMPLEX   SENTENCE,   OR   SUBORDINATION, 

1714-2299. 

Definitions  and  Classifications,   1714-1716.     Primary  and  Secondary 
Tenses,  1717.     Virtual  Futures,  1718. 
Mood  of  the  Subordinate  Sentence,  1720-1731. 

The  Indicative,  1721.    The  Subjunctive  :  In  Indirect  Discourse,  and  in 
cases  of  Attraction,  1722-1729.     Of  Repeated  Action,  1730.     As  in  the 
Simple  Sentence,  1731. 
Tense  of  the  Subordinate  Sentence,  1732-1772. 

Of  the  Indicative,  1732-1739.  Of  the  Subjunctive,  1740-1772.  Sequence 
of  Tenses,  1745-1772.  Tense  subordinate  to  an  Indicative,  1746-1761. 
Tense  subordinate  to  a  Subjunctive,  1762-1765.  Tense  subordinate  to  a 
Noun  of  the  Verb,  1766-1769.  Subjunctive  due  to  another  Subjunctive  or 
to  an  Infinitive,  1770-1772. 
The  Indirect  Question,  1773-1791. 

In  General,  1773-1774.  Yes  or  No  Questions,  1775-1777.  Alternative. 
Questions,  1778-1784.  Pronoun  Questions,  1785.  Original  Subjunctives, 
1786.  Indicative  Questions  apparently  Indirect,  1787-1791. 

The  Relative  Sentence,  1792-1837. 

Agreement  of  the  Relative,  1801-1811.  Moods  in  the  Relative  Sentence, 
1812-1830.  Relative  Sentences  of  Purpose,  1817.  Of  Characteristic  or 
Result,  1818-1823.  Of  Cause  or  Concession,  1824-1830.  Correlative  Sen- 
tences, 1831.  Relative  Sentences  Combined,  1832-1834.  The  Relative 
introducing  a  main  Sentence,  1835-1837. 

XV 


Table  of  Contents. 


The  Conjunctive  Particle  Sentence,  1838-2122. 

Introduced  by  quod,  1838-1855.  quia,  1856-1858.  quom  or  cum,  1859- 
1881.  quoniam,  1882-1884.  quotiens,  quotienscumque,  1885-1887. 
quam,  1888-1898.  quamquam,  1899-1902.  quamvis,  1903-1907.  tam- 
quam,  1908-1910.  antequam,  priusquam,  1911-1922.  postquam,  ubf, 
ut,  cum  primum,  simul  atque,  1923-1934.  ut,  1935-1970.  ubl,  1971. 
quo,  1972-1976.  quominus,  I977~1979-  quin,  1980-1990.  dum,  donee, 
quoad,  quamdiu,  1991-2009.  quando,  2010-2014.  51,2015-2115.  etsi, 
tametsi,  etiamsi,  2116.  quasi,  tamquam  si,  ut  or  velut  si,  2117-2122. 

Connection  of  Separate  Sentences  or  Periods,  2123-2159. 

Without  a  Connective,  2124-2127.  With  a  Connective,  2128-2158. 
Affirmative  Coordination,  2159. 

Nouns  of  the  Verb,  2160-2299. 

THE  INFINITIVE,  2160-2236.  Definitions,  2160-2163.  The  Infinitive  of 
Purpose,  2164-2165.  With  Adjectives,  2166.  The  Infinitive  as  Object: 
The  Complementary  Infinitive,  2168-2171.  The  Accusative  with  the  In- 
finitive, 2172-2206.  The  Infinitive  as  Subject,  2207-2215.  The  Infinitive 
of  Exclamation,  2216.  Tenses  of  the  Infinitive,  2218.  Present,  2219-2222. 
Perfect,  2223-2231.  Future,  2232-2236. 

THE  GERUNDIVE  AND  GERUND,  2237-2268.  Definitions,  2237-2242- 
Nominative,  2243-2249.  Accusative,  2250-2253.  Dative,  2254-2257.  Gen- 
itive, 2258-2264.  Ablative,  2265-2268. 

THE  SUPINE,  2269-2277.  Definitions,  2269.  Supine  in  -um,  2270-2273. 
Supine  in  -u,  2274-2277. 

THE  PARTICIPLE,  2278-2299.  Definition,  2278.  Time  of  the  Participle, 
2279-2281.  The  Attributive  Participle,  2282-2286.  The  Substantive  Par- 
ticiple, 2287-2292.  The  Appositive  Participle,  2293-2296.  The  Predica- 
tive Participle,  2297-2299. 

APPENDIX,  2300-2745. 

Some  Occasional  Peculiarities  of  Verbs,  2300-2307. 

The  Conative  Use,  2301-2303.  The  Causative  Use,  2304.  The  Poten- 
tial Use,  2305.  The  Obligatory  Use,  2306.  The  Permissive  Use,  2307. 

Indirect  Discourse,  2308-2334. 

Definitions,  2308-2311.  Mood,  2312-2320.  Tense,  2321-2324.  Pronoun, 
2325.  Conditional  Periods  in  Indirect  Discourse,  2326-2334. 

Use  of  Pronouns,  2335-2403. 

Personal,  2335.  Reflexive,  2336-2343.  Equivalents  for  a  Reciprocal 
Pronoun,  2344-2345.  Possessive,  2346.  Demonstrative,  2347-2364.  De- 
terminative, 2365-2370.  Pronoun  of  Identity,  2371-2373.  Intensive,  2374- 
2384.  Interrogative,  2385-2386.  Relative,  2387.  Indefinite,  2388-2403. 

Numerals,  2404-2428. 

Classification,  2404.  List  of  Numerals,  2405.  Notation,  2406-2411. 
Some  forms  of  Numerals,  2412-2418.  Some  uses  of  Numerals,  2419-2422, 
Other  Numerals,  2423.  Fractions,  2424-2428. 

xv  i 


Table  of  Contents. 


Prosody,  2429-2739. 

RULES  OF  QUANTITY,  2429-2472.  In  Classical  Latin,  2429-2457. 
Position,  2458.  Hidden  Quantity,  2459-2463.  Peculiarities  of  Quantity  in 
Old  Latin,  2464-2469.  Iambic  Shortening,  2470-2472. 

FIGURES  OF  PROSODY,  2473-2510.  Hiatus,  2473-2480.  Elision,  2481- 
2492.  Ecthlipsis,  2493-2496.  Semi-Hiatus  or  Semi-Elision,  2497.  Syna- 
loepha,  2498.  Synizesis,2499.  Synaeresis,  2500.  Dialysis,  2501.  Diae- 
resis, 2502.  Hardening,  2503.  Softening,  2504.  Diastole,  2505-2506. 
Systole,  2507.  Syncope,  2508.  Tmesis,  2509.  Synapheia,  2510. 

VERSIFICATION,  2511-2739.  Definitions,  2511-2548.  Numeri  Italici, 
2549.  The  Saturnian,  2550-2554.  Dactylic  Rhythms,  2555-2580.  Iambic 
Rhythms,  2581-2627.  Trochaic  Rhythms,  2628-2649.  Logaoedic  Rhythms, 
2650-2674.  Dactylo-Trochaic  Rhythms,  2675-2681.  Anapaestic  Rhythms, 
2682-2690.  Cretic  Rhythms,  2691-2697.  Bacchiac  Rhythms,  2698-2706. 
Choriambic  Rhythms,  2707.  Ionic  Rhythms,  2708-2717.  Lyric  Metres 
of  Horace,  2718-2737.  Lyric  Strophes  of  Catullus,  2738.  Index  of  Hora- 
tian  Odes  and  their  metres,  2739. 

Abbreviations  used  in  citing  the  Authors,  2740-2745. 
Index  of  Subjects. 
Index  of  Latin  Words. 


LATIN    GRAMMAR 


I.  Latin  Grammar  has  two  parts.  I.  The  first  part 
treats  of  words :  (A.)  their  sound ;  (B.)  their  forma- 
tion; (C.)  their  inflection.  II.  The  second  part  shows 
how  words  are  joined  together  in  sentences. 


PART   FIRST  *  WORDS 


PARTS    OF    SPEECH. 

2.  The  principal  kinds  of  words  or  PARTS  OF  SPEECH  are  Nouns 
Verbs,  and  Conjunctions. 

3.  I.  NOUNS  are  Substantive  or  Adjective. 

4.  (A.)  NOUNS  SUBSTANTIVE,  otherwise  called  Substantives,  are 
divided,  as  to  meaning,  into  Concrete  and  Abstract. 

5.  (T.)  CONCRETE  SUBSTANTIVES  denote  persons  or  things.     Concrete 
Substantives  are  subdivided  into  Proper  Names,  which   denote   individual 
persons  or  things:  as,  Cicero,  Cicero;  Roma,  Rome;  and  Common  Names, 
otherwise  called  Appellatives,  which    denote    one   or  more  of   a   class :    as, 
homo,  man ;   taurus,  bull. 

6.  Appellatives   which  denote  a  collection   of    single   things  are    called   Collec- 
tives:  as,  turba,  crowd ;  exercitus,  army.     Appellatives  which  denote  stuff,  quan- 
tity, material,  things  not  counted,  but  having  measure  or  weight,  are  called  Material 
Substantives:  as,  vinum,  wine  ;  ferrum,  iron  ;  faba,  horsebeans. 

7.  (2.)  ABSTRACT   SUBSTANTIVES   denote   qualities,   states,   conditions  : 
as,  rubor,  redness ;  aequitas,  fairness ;  solitudo,  loneliness. 

8.  (B.)  NOUNS     ADJECTIVE,    otherwise     called    Adjectives,    at- 
tached to  substantives,  describe  persons  or  things:  as,  ruber,  red;. 
aequus,y#/r/  solus,  alone. 

9.  PRONOUNS   are   words   of   universal    application  which   serve 
as  substitutes  for  nouns. 

Thus,  taurus,  bull,  names,  and  ruber,  red,  describes,  particular  things  ;  but  ego, 
/,  is  universally  applicable  to  any  speaker,  and  meus,  mine,  to  anything  belonging 
to  any  speaker. 


io- 1 7-] 


Words :  Sound. 


10.  ADVERBS  are  mostly  cases  of  nouns  used  to  denote  manner,  place, 
time  or  degree  :  as,  subitd,  suddenly  ;  foras,  out  of  doors  ;  diu,  long ;  valde, 
mightily,  very. 

11.  PREPOSITIONS  are  adverbs  which  are  used  to  modify  as  prefixes  the 
meaning  of  verbs,  or  to  define  more  nicely  the  meaning  of  cases :  as,  voco, 
I  call,  evoc5,  I  call  out ;  ex  urbe,fr0m  town. 

12.  II.  VERBS    are    words    which    denote    action,    including 
existence  or  condition:  as,  regit,  he  guides  ;  est,  he  is;  latet, 
he  is  hid. 

13.  III.  CONJUNCTIONS  connect  sentences,  nouns,  or  verbs  :  as, 
et,  and;  Bed,  but. 

14.  INTERJECTIONS  are  cries  which  express  feeling,  and  are  not  usually  a  part  of 
the  sentence :  as,  a,  ah  ;  heu,  alas. 

15.  There  is  no  ARTICLE  in  Latin :   thus,  mensa  may  denote  table,  a  table, 
or  the  table. 


A.    SOUND. 

ALPHABET. 

1 6.    In  Cicero's  time,  the  sounds  of  the  Latin  lan- 
guage were  denoted  by  twenty-one  letters  (DN.  2,  93). 


Character 

Name 

pronounced         Character 

Name 

pronounced 

A 

a 

ah 

M 

em 

em 

B 

be 

bay 

N 

en 

en 

C 

ce 

kay 

O 

o 

0 

D 

de 

day 

P 

pe 

pay 

E 

e 

eh 

Q. 

qu 

koo 

F 

ef 

tf 

R 

er 

air 

G 

ge 

\ 

es 

ess 

H 

ha 

hah 

T 

te 

tay 

1 

i 

ee 

V 

u 

00 

K 

ka 

kah 

X 

ix 

eex 

L 

el 

el 

The  names  given  above  are  those  employed  by  Roman  grammarians. 
The  sound  indicated  by  -ay  is  only  approximate ;  the  true  sound  is  that  of 
the  French  §  in  fite ;  see  39.  The  names  of  the  letters  are  indeclinable ; 
for  their  gender,  see  412. 

17.  Two  other  letters  were  also  in  use  to  represent  Greek  sounds  in 
Greek  words  ;  these  were  always  called  by  their  Greek  names,  and  were 
placed  at  the  end  of  the  alphabet;  they  are  Y,  named  ii  (42),  and  Z, 
named  zeta  (71). 


The  Alphabet.  [18-24. 


18.  ORIGIN  OF  THE   ALPHABET.     The  Latin  alphabet,  which  originally  con- 
sisted of  capitals  only,  was  adapted  from  the  alphabet  of  Chalcidian  colonies  in  Italy. 

19.  SPELLING.     The  signs  for  the  Greek  sounds  denoted  by  <£  and  x,  and  perhaps 
also  that  for  0,  these  three  sounds  being  unknown  in  Latin,  were  used  as  numerals 
(2407).     In  words  borrowed  from  the  Greek  the  Romans  at  first  represented  0  by  t, 
<£  by  p,   and  \  by  c  :    as,  tus,  incense,  for  flu'os  ;  Poeni,  Punians,  for  <£oiVuces ; 
calx,  chalk,  for  x<xAif .     Occasionally  also  the  Latin  mute  was  doubled :  as,  strup- 
pus,  strap,  for  o-rpo^os.     Later,  about  the  middle  of  the  second  century  B.C.,  th,  pn, 
and  ch  begin  to  be  used:  as,  cothurnus,   boot,  for  KoBopvo-; ;  amphora,/ar,  for 
d/u$6pa  ;  Achaea  for  'A^aia.     In  some  instances  these  aspirates  were  next  introduced 
even  into  words  purely  Latin  :  as,  chommodus,  affable,  for  commodus,  an  affec- 
tation ridiculed  by  Catullus  (Cat.  84)  and  disapproved  by  Quintilian  (1,5,  20).     But 
pulcher,  pretty,  is  the  usual  spelling  for  pulcer  (formed  by  the  suffix  -cro-  from 
the  stem  of  the  verb  polio,  I  polish).     Even  Cicero  (O.  160)  aspirated  the  c  in  this 
word  as  a  concession  to  popular  usage,  as  he  did  the  t  in  Cethegus,  Karthago, 
and  the  p  in  triumphus,  while  he  retained  the  unaspirated  explosive  in  the  proper 
names  Orclvius,  name  of  a  'gens,'  Mato,  Oto,  CaepiS,  and  in  sepulcrum, 
tomb;  corona,  crown;  and  lacrima,  tear.     In  a  similar  manner  Greek  p  was  at 
first  transcribed  by  r  :  as,  rumpia,  a  kind  of -weapon,  for  po/n^aia  ;  but  later  by  rh  : 
as,  rhetor,  rhetorician,  for  pijrwp. 

20.  The  letters  C  (first  written  <)  and  K  were  at  an  early  period  used  promiscu- 
ously, and  C  stood  for  both  unvoiced  k  and  voiced  g  :    as,  VIRCO,  virgo,  virgin. 
Afterwards  K  dropped  out  of  general  use  except  in  the  abbreviations  K.  or  Kal.  for 
kalendae,y£r.rt  of  the  month,  and  K.  for  the  proper  name  Kaeso  (Quint,  i,  7,  10). 
About  300  B.C.  the  sign  <  or  C  was  used  for  the  unvoiced  k  alone,  while  a  separate 
sign,  which  became  G,  was  set  apart  for  the  voiced  g.     But  C  continued  to  be  used 
for g  in  the  abbreviations  C  for  Gaius,  O  for  Gaia,  and  Cn.  for  Gnaeus.     Occa- 
sionally q  is  written  for  c,  almost  always  before  the  vowels  O  and  u  :  as,  qum  for 
cum,  with  ;  qolunt  for  colunt,  they  cultivate  ;  pequnia,  money.     But  ordinarily 
q  is  found  before  unsyllabic  (consonantal)  u  (v)  only  (22). 

21.  Before  the  introduction  of  Y  and  Z  (17),  u  was  used  for  the  Greek  Y:  as, 
Burrus,  later  Pyrrhus  (Cic.   O.   160);   and  s,  or,  as  a  medial,  ss,  for  Z  :  as, 
sona,  belt,  later  zona;  massa,  lump,  for  /xa£a;  malacisso,  I  soften,  for  na\a.Ki£o>. 
By  a  blunder,  y  was  occasionally  introduced  in  words  of  Latin  origin  :  as,  lacryma, 
tear,  for  lacrima,  which  was  wrongly  supposed  to  be  derived  from  Greek  SaKpu. 

22.  The  characters  I  and  V  represent  not  only  the  two  vowels  i 
and  u,  but  also  their  cognate  semivowels  (52)  i  and  u   (83),  called 
commonly  consonant  i  and  u,  but  with  less  ambiguity  unsyllabic  i  and 
u  (82;  83).     They  are  equivalent  to  the  English  y  and  w  respectively. 

23.  In  words  like  maior,  simple  i  was  commonly  written  for  the  sound 
of  ii  (153,  2;  82;  83).     But  Cicero  in  such  cases  wrote  ii:  as,  aiio,  I  say, 
Maiia,  Troiia    (Quint,  i,  4,    n).      In   the   same  way   Lucretius   spelled 
Graiiugenarum,  of  Greek-born  men,  and  EIIVS,  of  him,  cvuvs,  whose,  occur 
in  inscriptions.     Sometimes  the  same  sound  is  represented  by  a  taller  letter, 
1  i longaj  especially  in  the  imperial  age:  as,  MA!OR, greater.     There  are  also 
cases  in  which  the  two  designations  were  confounded,  a  double  i   being 
written,  and  one  or  the  other  letter  made  taller:  as,  EiIvs  or  Elivs,  of  him. 

24.  The  tall  i,  I  longa,  was  used  not  only  to  represent  unsyllabic  i  (22),  but,  begin- 
ning with  Sulla's  time,  also  for  long  vowel  i  (29,  2,  b):  as,  S!GNA,  signs;  QV!NQVE, 
five.     It  also  represents  sometimes  double  i:  as,  vis  for  viis,  in  the  roads.     At  the 
beginning  of  words  it  occurs  without  reference  to  quantity  for  both  short  and  long  i, 
and,  by  mistake,  I  is  elsewhere  found  for  short  i. 


25~3°-J  Words :  Sound. 


25.  The  emperor  Claudius  (A.D.  41-54)  introduced  a  separate  sign  for  unsyilabic 
u  (22),  restricting  the  sign  v  to  the  vowel  u  (Quint,  i,  7,  26  ;  Ta.  n,  14) ;  but  it  did 
not  become  current. 

26.  In  schoolbooks  and  most  texts  of  the  authors,  the  vowel  u  is  printed 
U,  u,  and  the  consonant  V,  v.     A  character,  J,  j,  was  introduced  in  the 
ijth  century,  to  indicate  the  consonant  i.     But  this  character  is  no  longer 
usual  in  editions  of  the  authors  or  in  schoolbooks. 

27.  The  distinction  between  u  and  v  is  not  always  made  very  consistently :  q 
has  regularly,  and  g  and  s  have  sometimes,  an  aftersound  of  w,  best  represented  by 
y;  but  the  usual  practice  is  to  write  u,  as  in  the  following  disyllables :  quorum, 
of -whom;  anguis,  snake;  suavis,  sweet,     qu  is  always  counted  as  a  single  sound 
(177).     See  also  2504. 

28.  For  the  intermediate  sound  (103)  between  i  and  u,  as  in  the  first  syllable  of 
lubet,  libet,  it  pleases,  and  in  the  second  syllable  of  optimus,  optumus,  best 
(Quint,  i,  4,  8  ;  7,  21),  the  emperor  Claudius  invented  a  separate  character.     It  failed 
of  acceptance,  as  did  also  the  sign  which  he  attempted  to  introduce  for  ps. 

29.  The  same  characters  were  ordinarily  used  to  denote  both  long  and 
short  vowels.     But  at  different  periods  long  vowels  were  sometimes  indi- 
cated in  inscriptions  thus : 

(i.)  Long  a,  e,  or  u  was  sometimes  doubled:  as,  AARA,  altar ;  PAASTORES, 
shepherds;  LEEGE,  bylaw;  ivvs,  right.  This  doubling,  which  was  never  frequent, 
seems  to  have  been  introduced  into  Latin  from  the  Oscan  by  the  poet  Accius.  It 
occurs  most  frequently  in  inscriptions  about  the  year  150  B.C.,  but  sporadically  much 
later  :  as,  CONVENTVVS,  of  the  assembly ;  ARBITRATVV,  by  the  decree  ;  and  in  other 
stems  in  -u-  (593). 

(2.)  Long  i  was  often  denoted  (a.)  By  the  spelling  ei  (after  the  pronunciation 
of  this  diphthong  had  been  changed  to  z,  98) :  as,  DAREI,  be  given  ;  REDIEIT,  hath 
come  back  ;  INTERIEISTI,  hast  died.  Some  Roman  grammarians  prescribed  this  spell- 
ing for  every  long  i ;  others  tried  to  regulate  the  use  of  ei  for  i  by  special  rules.  At 
the  end  of  the  republic,  the  spelling  EI  had  given  way  to  uniform  I.  (b.)  Since  the 
time  of  Sulla,  by  a  taller  letter  ('  i  longa  ')  :  as,  F!XA,  fastened  (23,  24). 

J3.)  A  mark  called  zn_apex  (~}J"3)  was  often  put  over  a  long  vowel :  as,  FECIT, 
e;  HORTENSIVS;  DVVMVIRATVS,  duum-virate.  The  apex  was  written  '  in  the 
imperial  age  ;  the  form  ~,  which  occurs  in  an  inscription,  was  adopted  by  the  gramma- 
rians, and  is  still  in  use  to  mark  the  long  vowels.  It  may  be  mentioned  that  inscrip- 
tions which  employ  the  apex  are  by  no  means  consistent  in  its  use,  and  that  late 
inscriptions  have  it  over  short  and  long  vowels,  apparently  for  decorative  purposes. 
Quintilian  i,  7,  2  prescribes  it  only  for  cases  which  otherwise  might  be  ambiguous  :  as, 
MXLVS  (malus),  mast,  to  distinguish  it  from  MALVS  (malus),  bad. 

30.  In  schoolbooks,  a  long  vowel  is  indicated  by  a  horizontal  line  over 
it :  as,  ara,  altar ;  mensis,  month ;  5rdo,  series.     A  short  vowel  is  some- 
times indicated  by  a  curved  mark :  as,  p€r,  through ;  dux,  leader ;  but  this 
mark  is  unnecessary  if  long  vowels  are  systematically  marked.     Usually 
the  quantity  of  the  vowels  in  each  word  is  definitely  fixed ;  but  in  a  few 
cases  the  same  vowel  may  be  now  short,  now  long,  as  in  English  the  ee  of 
been  is  pronounced  long  by  some  (bean],  short  by  others  (bin).     Thus  (2446) 
mihi,  ibi  were  sometimes  pyrrhics  (w  w>   2522),  sometimes  iambi  (y — , 
2521).     See  for  other  cases  134,  2443,  2452,  2453.     Such  vowels  of  variable 
quantity  are  termed  common  and  marked  ±L  or  ^  :  as  mihf,  to  me  (2514). 


Vowels.  [3I-35- 


PRONUNCIATION. 

31.  The  pronunciation  of    Latin  sounds  may  be  approximately 
determined  :  (a)  from  the  description  of  the  native  grammarians  and 
incidental  allusions   in  other  Latin   authors  ;    (b)  from   variations   in 
spelling  ;  (c)  from  the  Greek  transliteration  of  Latin  words  ;  (d)  from 
the  Latin  transliteration  of  foreign  words ;  (<?)  from  the  development 
of  the  sounds  in  languages  derived  from  the  Latin. 

VOWELS. 

32.  Vowels  are  sounds  which  are  produced  by  the  vibrations  of  the 
vocal  chords  (this  may  be  easily  felt  by  placing  a  finger  on  the  throat  at  the 
Adam's  apple)  and  without  any  audible  friction  or  any  obstruction   any- 
where in  the  passage  above  the  vocal  chords.     The  difference  in  the  sound 
of  the  vowels  is  due  to  the  different  shape  which  the  position  of  the  tongue 
and  the  lips  gives  in  each  case  to  the  cavity  of  the  mouth.     During  the 
pronunciation  of  pure  vowels  no  air  escapes  through  the  nose. 

33.  The  simple  vowels,  a,  e,  i,  o,  u  (y),  are  either 
long  or  short.     The  sound  of  a  long  vowel   is  con- 
sidered to  be  twice  the  length  of  that  of  a  short. 

34.  That  a  long  vowel  is  equal  to  two  shorts  is  a  rule  of  metrical  theory  (see  2515). 
In  actual  pronunciation,  there  were  undoubtedly  various  degrees  of  length,  as  in 
English:  e.g.,  sea,  seize  (long),  cease  (half-long). 


QUANTITY  OF   VOWELS. 

The  quantity  of  vowels  must  in  general  be  learned  by  observation ;  but 
some  convenient  helps  for  the  memory  may  be  found  in  2429;  and  the 
quantity  of  many  vowels  may  be  ascertained  by  the  general  principles  given 
in  35  and  36.  Except  in  the  case  of  Hidden  Quantity  (2459),  the  quantity 
of  vowels  is  in  general  ascertained  from  verse.  But  some  information  may 
also  be  gleaned  from  such  rhetorical  prose  as  exhibits  well  defined  habits  in 
the  rhythmical  endings  selected  for  sentences  (clausulae,  Cic.  O.  191-226). 

(A.)    SHORT  VOWELS. 

35.  A  vowel  is  short : 

(i.)  Before  another  vowel  or  h  (124)  :  as,  eos,  eveho ;  compare  taceo 
with  tacere.  For  exceptions  in  classical  Latin,  see  127;  for  exceptions  in 
early  Latin  see  126. 

(2.)  Before  nt  and  nd  (128)  if  not  the  result  of  contraction  :  as,  calen- 
dae,  centum  ;  compare  amant,  amandus,  with  amare. 

(3.)  Before  final  t  and  m,  and,  in  words  of  more  than  one  syllable, 
before  final  r  and  1  (132) :  compare  amat,  amem,  with  amas  and  ames. 


J6-44-] 


Words :  Sound. 


(B.)    LONG   VOWELS. 

36.  All  vowels  are  long  which  are : 

(1)  Weakened  from  a  diphthong  (96-101 ;  108),  or  which  are  the  result 
of  contraction  (118)  :  as,  concido  from  caedS ;  c5go  from  co-ago. 

(2)  Lengthened  by  compensation  (121) :  as,  quini  for  *  quincni. 

(3)  Before  nf,  ns,  often   before  nc  followed  by  a  consonant,  and,  in 
some  cases,  before  gn  (122). 

PRONUNCIATION   OF   VOWELS. 

37.  The  following  English  sounds  come  nearest  to  the  Latin  pro- 
nunciation of  the  vowels : 

38.  LONG  VOWELS,     a  had  the  sound  of  a  in  father ;  e  that 
of  a  mfate  (but  see  39);  I  that  of  *  in  machine  ;  6  that  of  o  in 
tone  ;  u  that  of  u  in  rule. 

39.  It  must  be  noted,  however,  that  all  English  long  vowels,  save  a  as 
in  father,  are  more  or  less   diphthongal,   that  is,   they  become   gradually 
closer  (46)  ;   a  in  fate  ends  in  a  vanishing  sound  of  ee  (not  heard  in  the 
$  of  French  f$te),  and  o  in  no  ends  in  the  sound  of  oo.     Similarly  the  long  e 
sound  in  he  becomes  closer  and  ends  in  a  sound  similar  to  the  y  in  year.     In 
Latin  all  long  vowels  had  one  sustained  sound. 

40.  SHORT  VOWELS,     a  sounded  approximately  like  the  English 
a  in  the  first  syllable  of  aha;  e,  i,  o,  and  u  sounded  like  e  in  step,  i  in 
pit,  o  in  obey,  and  u  in  pull  respectively. 

41.  Latin  short  a  did  not  differ,  except  in  quantity,  from  long  a  ;  it  never  had  the 
'  flat '  sound  of  English  a  in  fat.     In  the  case  of  the  other  vowels,  i,  e,  o,  and  u, 
the  long  vowels  were  closer  (46)  than  the  short  ones.     This  is  the  same  difference 
which  the  English  shows  in  keen  (long  and  close)  and  kin  (short  and  open)  ;  pool 
(long  and  close)  and  pull  (short  and  open).     For  this  reason,  open  i  is  sometimes 
represented  by  e  in  inscriptions:  as,  ANEMA  for  anima,  wnl;   and  vea  was  the 
rustic  pronunciation  for  via,  road  (Varro,  R.  K.  i,  2,  14). 

42.  Y,  which  was  a  sound  borrowed  from  the  Greek  (17),  sounded  like 
German  ii.  The  sound,  which  is  missing  in  English,  is  formed  with  the 
tongue  in  position  for  i  (in  kin)  and  the  lips  rounded  as  for  oo  (in  moon). 

CLASSIFICATION   OF  VOWELS. 

43.  Vowels  are  divided  according  to  the  position  of  the  tongue.     Latin 
i  and  e  are  called  front  vowels,  because  the  front  part  of  the  tongue  is 
elevated.     This  elevation  is  greater  for  i  than  for  e.     Latin  o  and  u  are 
called  back  vowels,  because  they  require  an  elevation  of  the  rear  part  of 
the  tongue.     This  elevation  is  greater  for  u  than  for  o.     Latin  a  holds  an 
intermediate  position,  no  part  of  the  tongue  being  raised,  while  the  front 
part  is  depressed. 

44.  In  the  formation  of  i  and  e,  the  tongue  approaches  the  hard  palate ; 
hence  these  two  vowels  are  also  called  palatal  vowels.     Similarly,  o  and  u 
are  called  velar  or  guttural  vowels,  because  in  their  formation  the  tongue 
approaches  the  soft  palate  (velum  palati). 

6 


Diphthongs.  [45-52. 


45.  o  and  u  require  a  rounding  of  the  lips  (labia) ;  hence  they  are  called 
labial  vowels.     The  same  is  true  for  y. 

46.  Comparing  the  vowels  in  English  keen  and  kin,  it  will  be  noted  that 
the   passage   between   the  tongue   and  the  hard  palate  is  narrower  in  the 
former  than   in   the  latter  case.     The  ee  in  keen  is  therefore  said  to  be  a 
narrow  or  close  vowel,  while  the  /'  in  kin  is  wide  or  open.     See  41. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

47.  Two  unlike  (43-46)  vowels  pronounced  under 
one  stress  and  as  one  syllable  form  a  Diphthong.     All 
diphthongs  are  long. 

In  all  diphthongs  the  transition  from  one  vowel  to  the  other  is  gradual. 
A  diphthong  is,  therefore,  not  formed  simply  by  pronouncing  two  vowels  in 
succession,  but  the  vocal  organs  pass  through  all  the  intermediate  positions 
and  consequently  the  sound  is  constantly  changing. 

48.  In  their  origin  diphthongs  are  of  two  kinds  :  (a.)  primitive  diphthongs  :  as  in 
foedus,  treaty ;  aurum,  gold ;  or  (b.)  secondary  diphthongs,  the  result  of  vowels 
meeting  in  formation,  composition,  or  inflection  :  see  120. 

49.  The  diphthongs  which  occur  in  classical  Latin  are  au, 
ae,  oe,  and  the  rare  ui  and  eu. 

au  sounded  like  on  in  house,  ae  had  the  sound  of  short  Latin  a  rapidly 
combined  with  the  sound  of  e  in  English  men.  But  it  is  the  common 
practice  now  to  give  to  ae  the  sound  of  ay  or  ai  in  ay,  aisle,  although  the 
difference  between  Latin  ae  and  the  earlier  ai  from  which  it  descended  is 
thus  obliterated,  oe  had  the  sound  of  short  Latin  o  rapidly  followed  by 
the  sound  of  e  in  English  men.  But  it  is  now  customary  not  to  distinguish 
between  Latin  oe  and  oi,  and  to  give  to  both  the  sound  of  oi  in  boil,  ui  is 
pronounced  by  combining  Latin  short  u  and  i  (40,  41)  with  the  stress  on  the  i 
like  French  out ;  eu  by  combining  Latin  short  e  and  u  with  stress  on  the  u. 

50.  Besides  these,  the  following  diphthongs  occur  in  the  older  inscriptions :  ai 
pronounced  as  ai  in  aisle  :  ei  as  ei  in  eight ;  oi  as  oi  in  boil ;  and  ou  which  sounded 
very  much  like  the  final  o  in  no,  go,  which  is  really  a  diphthong  (see  39). 

CONSONANTS. 

51.  Consonants  are  formed  by  stopping  the  breath  somewhere  in  the 
cavity   of   the   mouth   or   by   squeezing    it   through   a   narrow   channel   or 
aperture. 

52.  SEMIVOWELS.     There  is  no  sharp  line  of  demarcation  between  con- 
sonants and  vowels.     Some  vowels  in  unsyllabic  function  (82,  83)  notably 
i  (/)  and  u  (?/)  (corresponding  to  English  y  and  w),  though  usually  classed 
as'consonants,  are  so  closely  related  to  the  vowels  that  they  are  termed 
semivowels  (2504).     To  these  may  be  added  also  the  liquids  1  and  r.     Con- 
tact of  the  semivowels  i  and  u  with  their  corresponding  vowels  i  and  u  is 
avoided  in  classical  times.     See  for  -vu-  107  c;   for  -quu-  157;   and  for 
-ii-  104,  c  (on  obiicio) ;  458  (B6I  for  *B6iI).     See  153,  3. 

7 


53-62.]  Words :  Sound. 


PRONUNCIATION    OF    CONSONANTS. 

53.  Most  of  the  consonants  are   pronounced  as  in 
English.     The  following  points  must  be  noticed  : 

54.  b  before  a  surd,  as  s  or  t,  has  the  sound  of  p.     The  spelling  b  is 
here  simply   etymological  :    as,   abs,    pronounced  aps   (the   b   retained    in 
spelling  because  of  ab) ;  urbs,  pronounced  urps  (the  b  retained  because  of 
the  oblique  cases  urbis,    urbi,  etc.) ;    obtero,  pronounced  optero  (Quint. 
J>  7>  ?)»  where  the  spelling  of  the  preposition  ob  was  kept  (164). 

55.  c  has  always  the  sound  of  English  k. 

56.  d  before  the  surd  s  is  pronounced  t ;  the  spelling  d  is  preserved  for 
etymological  reasons  only  :  as,  adsum,  pronounced  atsum. 

57.  g  always  has  the  sound  of  English  g  in  go,  never  that  of  g  in  gentle. 
gu,  when  it  makes  one  syllable  with  the  following  vowel,   is  pronounced 
like  English  gw :  as,  sanguine  like  sanguine. 

58.  h  has  a  weak  sound  as  h  in  British  English  (Southern),  and  by  some 
was  not  counted  as  a  consonant.     Consequently  the  same  uncertainty  ex- 
isted  as  to  initial  h.     The  omission  of  initial  h  is  recognized  in  classical 
Latin  for  anser  (originally  *hanser).     Elsewhere  the  omission  of  initial  h 
in  spelling,  as  ostia  for  hostia,  is  rare  until  the  third  century  A.D. 

Very  rarely  h  is  written  between  two  vowels  to  denote  that  each  should  be  pro- 
nounced separately  (like  our  diaeresis  in  coextensive):  as,  aheneus,  bronze,  with  ae 
separate  (n6a);  but  aes,  bronze,  with  diphthongal  ae. 

59.  Unsyllabic  (22)  or  consonant  i  has  the  sound  of  English  y  in  year. 

60.  There  were  two  varieties  of  1.     One  was  like  the  English  /,  guttural 
in  character,  because  in  its  pronunciation  not  only  the  blade  (front  part)  of 
the  tongue  touched  the  gums,  but  in  addition  to  this  the  rear  part  of  the 
tongue  was  elevated  toward  the  soft  palate.     The  other  1  was  purely  dental, 
and  formed  without  such  back  elevation.     This  second  variety  appeared  in 
the  combination  11,  or  whenever  1  was  followed  by  the  front  vowels  (43)  e 
or  i,  or  when  it  was  final.     Elsewhere  1  was  guttural. 

61.  From  the  earliest  times  final  m  in  unaccented  syllables  had  a  faint 
sound  or  was  even  inaudible  (Quint.  9,  4,  39).     Consequently  it  is  often 
omitted  in  writing  in  the  older  inscriptions  both  before  an  initial  vowel  or 
consonant:  as,  POCOLO  for  pocolom  ;  OINO  for  oinom  (unum),  and  the 
grammarian  Verrius   Flaccus  proposed  to  write  only   half  an  M  for  final 
m  before  a  voweL     In  prosody,  therefore,  final  m  did  not  prevent  elision 
(2493).     The  same  is  seen  in  prose  in  cases  like  animadverts,  I  pay  heed 
to,  from  animum  adverto,  /  turn  my  mind  toward  (395) ;  venire,  to  be  sold 
for  venum  ire,  to  goto  sale  (1165).     But  in  monosyllables  where  m  closes 
the  accented  syllable,  it  did  not  vanish  (2494,  2495),  an(^  tn's  difference  in 
the  treatment  of  final  m  is  reflected  in  the  Romance  languages. 

62.  n  stands  for  two  sounds.     It  represents  the  dental  nasal,  as  n  in 
English   now.     But   before   the   gutturals   k,  c,   g,  q,  and   the   compound 
x  (=  cs),  it  represents  the  guttural  nasal  which  is  written  ng  in  English 
sing,  wrong,  •  This  second  n  is  sometimes  called  n  adulterinum  or  '  spuri- 
ous n,'  thus:  nc  (in  avunculus)  as  in  uncle ;  ng  (in  angulus)  as  in  angle ; 
ngu  (in  sanguine)  as  in  sanguine;  nqu  (in  inquit)  as  inkw  in  inkwiper ;  nx 
(in  pinxit)  as  in  lynx. 

8 


Consonants.  [63-74. 


63.  Dental  n  before  s  had  a  reduced  sound,  and  is  therefore  sometimes  omitted 
in  writing :  as,  CESOR  for  censor ;  COSOL  for  consul,  in  older  inscriptions  ;  and 
formosus  by  the  side  of  formpnsus  ;  vicesimus  by  the  side  of  vicensimus, 
Cicero  omitted  the  n  in  the  adjective  suffix  -ensis  :  as,  foresia,  of  the  Jorum; 
hortesia,  garden  plants. 

64.  q,  in  classical  Latin,  appears  only  in  the  combination  qu,  sounded 
like  English  qu  or  kw  (27).     r  was  trilled. 

65.  s,  in  classical  Latin  was  always  unvoiced  (surd,  75)  like  English  s  in 
so,  sin,  never  voiced  (sonant,  75)  as  English  s  in  ease,     su,  when  it  makes 
one  syllable  with  the  following  vowel,  is  like  sw  in  sweet  (27). 

66.  In  old  Latin,  final  s  after  a  short  vowel  and  before  a  consonant  seems  to  have 
been  reduced  in  sound  or  to  have  disappeared  altogether.     In  the  older  inscriptions  it 
is  often  omitted  in  the  ending  of  the  nominative  singular  -us,  and  in  the  pre-Cicero- 
nian  poets  final  S  often  does  not  make  position  (2468).     But  such  omission  was  con- 
sidered vulgar  in  Cicero's  time  (Cic.  O.  161  ;  Quint.  9,  4,  38). 

67.  In  the  archaic  period  Latin  s  stood  also  for  the  voiced  sibilant  (English  s  in 
ease,  z  in  zeal),  as  in  ASA,  altar  (154). 

68.  t  is  always  sounded  as  in  time,  never  as  in  nation.    The  pronuncia- 
tion of  ci  and  ti  with  the  c  and  t  as  sibilants  (as  in  English  cinder,  nation) 
is  very  late. 

69.  v  is  like  the  English  w. 

70.  x  is  a  compound  consonant,  standing  for  cs,  and  so  sounded,  .never 
as  English  gs  or  gz. 

71.  z,  being  a  Greek  sound,  should  have  retained  its  Greek  pronuncia- 
tion.    This  differed  in  the  different  dialects  ;   in  the  Attic  of  the  fourth 
century  B.C.  it  was  approximately  that  of  English  z  in  zeal,  while  its  earlier 
value  was  zd.     The  Romans  had  great  difficulty  in  pronouncing  this  sound 
(Quint.  12,  10,  27  f.),  but  the  grammarian  Velius  Longus  expressly  states 
that  it  should  not  be  pronounced  as  a  compound  sound  (zd). 

72.  About  100  B.C.  the  combinations  ch,  ph,  and  th  were  introduced  in 
Greek  words  to  represent  x»  $>  ar>d  6 ;  as  Philippus,  for  the  older  PILIPVS. 
Somewhat   later  these  combinations  were  in  general  use  in  some   Latin 
words  (19).     ch  is  thought  to  have  been  pronounced  like  kh  in  blockhead, 
ph  as  in  uphill,  and  th  as  in  hothouse.     But  in  practice  ch  is  usually  sounded 
as  in  the  German  mac  hen  or  ich,  ph  as  in  graphic  >  and  th  as  in  pathos. 


in  th( 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  CONSONANTS. 

73.  EXPLOSIVES.     Consonants  which  are  formed  by  stopping  the  breath 
"ic  oral  cavity  and  then  suddenly  removing  the  obstruction  are  called 

explosives.     They  cannot  be  prolonged  in  sound.     They  are:   c,  k,  q,  g; 
t,  d  ;  p,  b.     These  are  often  called  mutes. 

74.  CONTINUANTS.     Consonants  which  may  be  prolonged  in  sound  are 
called  continuants.     They  are:  unsyllabic  (83)  i  (59)  and  u  (66);  1  (60),  r; 
1,  s,  f ;  n  (62),  m. 


75-82.]  Words  :  Sound. 


75.  VOICED  and  UNVOICED.     If  during  the  emission  of  breath  the  vocal 
chords  vibrate  (32),  the  consonant  is  said  to  be   voiced  or  sonant:    g;  d; 
b;  n  (62),  m;   1  (60),  r;    unsyllabic  (83)  i   (59)  and  u  (69);    otherwise  it 
is  said  to  be  unvoiced  or  surd :  c,  k,  q  ;  t ;  p ;  h,  s,  f. 

76.  NASALS.     lu  the  majority  of  consonants,  the  breath  escapes  through 
the  cavity  of  the  mouth,  and  the  cavity  of  the  nose  is  closed  in  the  rear  by 
means  of  the  raised  soft  palate.     Those  consonants  in  which  the  breath 
escapes  through  the  nose,  while  the  oral  cavity  is  closed,  are  called  nasals : 
as,  n,  m,  n  adulterinum  (see  62). 

77.  CLASSIFICATION  ACCORDING  TO  PLACE  OF  FORMATION     Consonants 
are  further  divided  according  to  the  place  where  the  breath  is  stopped  or 
squeezed,     (i.)  If   the   breath   is  stopped   by  the  lips,  as  in   p,  b,  m,  or 
squeezed  through  the  lips,  as  in  v  (English  w),  we  speak  of  labials.     (2.)   If 
the  breath  is  forced  through  an  opening  between  the  upper  teeth  and  the 
lower  lip,  as  in  f,  we  speak  of  a  labiodental.     (3.)  Sounds  which  are  pro- 
duced by  the  point  of  the  tongue  touching  the  upper  gums  and  teeth,  as 
t,  d,  n,  r,  or  by  the  formation  of  a  narrow  median  channel  in  the  same  place, 
like  s,  or  of  a  lateral  channel,  like  1  (60),  are  called  dentals.     (4.)  Palatals 
are  formed  by  an  elevation  of  the  front  part  of  the  tongue  against  the  for- 
ward section  of  the  palate,  like  i  consonant  (English y).     (5  )  If  the  back 
of  the  tongue  touches  or  approaches  the  rear  part  of  the  palate  as  in  k,  q, 
c,  g,  n  adulterinum  (English  ng  in  sing),  and  1  (60),  we  speak  of  gutturals 
(velars] ;  see  44. 

78.  SPIRANTS.     Sounds  which  are  produced  by  friction  of  the  breath 
are  called  spirants :  as,  s,  f,  and  h. 

79.  SIBILANTS.    On  account  of  its  hissing  sound,  s  is  called  a  sibilant. 
English  s,  z,  th  are  sibilants. 

80.  DOUBLING  OF  CONSONANTS.    In  English,  double  consonants  as  the 
ft,  nn,  pp,  mm  in  motto,  Anna,  tapping,  grammar,  are  sounded  exactly  like 
the  corresponding  single  consonants  in  cot,  pan,  tap,  ram.     In  Latin,  on  the 
other  hand,  double  consonants  (geminatae)  were  pronounced  as  they  are 
in  modern  Italian.     In  the  case  of  explosives  (73),  as  in  mitto,  after  the 
tongue  had  come  in  contact  with  the  roof  of  the  mouth  (=  first  t)  a  short 
pause  ensued  before  the  explosion  took  place  (=  second  t).     In  the  case 
of  continuants  (74),  as  in  summus,   Apollo,  the  mm   or  11  was  sounded 
appreciably  longer  than  a  single  m  or  1,  and  at  the  beginning  of  the  second 
half  of  the  long  continuant  there  was  a  slight  increase  of  force. 

81.  Consonants  were  not  doubled  in  writing  till  after  200  B.C.:    as,  FVISE  for 
fuisse,  to  have  been,  and  for  more  than  a  century  afterward  the  usage  is  variable  : 
as,  in  the  same  inscription,   ESSENT,  they  might  be,  by  the  side  of  SVPERASES,  tliou 
mayest  have  conquered ,  but  it  must  not  be  inferred  that  they  were  pronounced  as 
single  consonants. 

SYLLABIC   AND    UNSYLLABIC    FUNCTION. 

82.  Whenever  two  or  more  sounds  are  combined  in  a  syllable,  one  of 
them  excels  in  acoustic  prominence:  as,  a  in  English  pat;  win  the  group 
pnd  in  opnd  (opened]  ;  /  in   the   group  tld  in  bottld  (bottled}',  and  s  in  the 
group  pst.     This  sound  is  said  to  have  syllabic  function  or  to  be  syllabic ;  in 
the  examples  given,  a,  n,  /,  and  s  are  respectively  syllabic.     All  the  othei 
members  of  each  group  are  termed  unsyllabic. 

10 


Accent.  L83~88- 


83.  Vowels  are  almost  always  used  in  syllabic  function.     When,  in  rare 
cases,  they  are  unsyllabic,  this  fact  is  usually  indicated  in  phonetic  works  by 
an  inverted  half-circle,  ^,  placed  under  the  vowel ;  so  in  the  case  of  diph- 
thongs to  indicate  the  subordinate  member:  as  ai,  oe,  ui  (49).    Latin  omnia 
and  English  glorious,  when  pronounced  as  words  of  two  syllables,  would  be 
written   omnia    (2503),  glorious.     When  sounds  other  than   vowels  have, 
in  rare  cases,  syllabic  function,  this  fact  is  noted  in  phonetic  works  by  a 
point,  .,  or  circle,  0,  under  the  letter:  as,  Latin  *agrs,  *agrs  (ni,  b),  Eng- 
lish opnd,  opnd. 

ACCENT. 

84.  The  relative  force  with   which   the   different  syllables  of  a 
word  are  uttered  varies.     Such  variation  in  emphasis  is  called  stress 
accentuation. 

The  degrees  of  stress  are  really  infinite,  but  for  practical  purposes  it  is 
sufficient  to  distinguish  between  (i.)  the  strongest  stress  (chief  accent); 
(2.)  a  weaker  suess  (secondary  accent) ;  and  (3.)  absence  of  stress  (atonic 
syllable).  In  the  English  contradict,  the  last  syllable  has  the  chief  accent, 
a  secondary  accent  falls  on  the  first,  and  the  second  syllable  is  unstressed. 

85.  It  is  not  customary  to  indicate  the  place  of  accents  in  Latin  by  special  signs. 
When,  for  special  reasons,  signs  are  used,  '  denotes  the  chief  accent,  *    the  secondary 
accent,  while  the  unstressed  syllables  are  left  unmarked. 

THE    CLASSICAL   ACCENT. 

86.  In  classical  Latin  the  place  of  the  chief  accent  may  be  determined 
by  the  following  rules. 

(i.)  Words  of  two  syllables  have  the  accent  on  the 
penult  (175):  as, 

h6mo  ;  acer. 

(2.)  Words  of  more  than  two  syllables  have  the 
accent  on  the  penult  when  that  syllable  is  long  (177); 
otherwise  on  the  antepenult :  as, 

paiaster,  onustus  (177)  ;  muliebris,  ge~netrix  (178)  ;  arbores,  arbu- 
tus, gladiolus. 

87.  A  short  penult  retains  the  accent  in  the  genitive  and  vocative 
with  a  single  I  from  stems  in  -io-  (456,  459)  :    as,  genitive,  consili; 
imperi;    genitive    or    vocative,   Verglli;     Valeri;    Mercuri.      For 
calefacis,  &c.,  see  394. 

88.  In  a  few  words  which  have  lost  a  syllable  the  accent  is  retained  on  the  last 
syllable;   such  are  (i.)  compounds  of  the  imperatives  die  and  due  (113) :   as,  edu'c; 
(2.)  nominatives  of  proper,names  in  -as  and  -is  for  Tatis  and  -Itis  :   as,  Arplnas, 
for  Arpln§tis;    Laen§s ;    Maecenas;    Quiris ;    Samnis ;    also  nostrils, 
vostras  ;    (3.)  words  compounded r with  the  abbreviated  (113)  enclitics  -c  for  -c? 
and  -n  for  -ne  :    as,  illic  ;  tanton ;    audistin  (for  the  shortening  of  the  final 
syllable:    as,   viden,  dost  see7,   see   129);    (4.)  audit,   contracted  from   audivit 
(154,  893).     The  Latin  grammarians  prescribe  the  circumflex  (90)  tor  all  these  long 
syllables. 

II 


89-93*]  Words:  Sound. 


EARLIER   RECESSIVE    ACCENT. 

89.  In  the  preliterary  period  of  the  Latin  language,  the  accent  tended  to 
go  as  far  from  the  end  of  the  word  as  possible  (recessive  accent).  Thus, 
while  the  classical  accentuation  is  inimicus,  the  older  period  accented 
inimicus.  In  literary  Latin  this  early  recessive  accent  has  survived,  only 
in  Plautus's  accentuation  of  words  of  the  form  w  w  w  ^  (proceleusmatic 
or  fourth  paeon,  see  2521),  in  which  he  stresses  the  first  syllable:  as, 
facilius  (classical  facilius) ;  v61uerat  (classical  voluerat).  But  in  many 
instances  the  early  recessive  accent  may  be  traced  in  literary  Latin  by  the 
phonetic  changes  which  it  produced  (102  ff.). 

QO.  MUSICAL  ELEMENT.  The  native  Latin  grammarians  slight  the  stress  accent- 
uation and  pay  much  attention  instead  to  the  variations  in  pitch.  But  they  are  so 
greatly  dependent  on  their  Greek  models  that  they  are  unsafe  guides  in  this  matter. 
It  is,  however,  probable  that  a  stressed  vowel  was  uttered  on  a  higher  key  (acute)  than 
an  unstressed  vowel  (grave),  and  that  in  certain  syllables  the  long,  accented  vowel 
showed  a  rise  and  fall  (circumflex) :  as,  illic  (88). 

91.  The  force  of  the  Latin  stress  accent  must  have  varied  at  different 
periods  and  in  different  localities,  as  it  now  varies  in  the  Romance  countries. 
The  early  recessive  accent  seems  to  have  been  fairly  emphatic ;  but  the 
stress  in  classical  Latin  was  probably  weak  and  the  difference  between 
accented  and  unaccented  syllables  was  much  less  marked  than  it  is  in 
English. 

PROCLITICS   AND    ENCLITICS. 

Q2.  PROCLITICS  are  unaccented  words  which  are  pronounced  as  a 
part  of  the  following  word:  they  are  :  (i.)  The  relative  and  indefinite 
pronouns  and  their  derivatives  ;  (2.)  Prepositions. 

(a.)  Thus,  quo  die,  pronounced  qu5die  ;  qui  vixit,  quivixit ;  genus  unde 
Latinum,  ge"nus  undeLatinum.  Similarly  quamdiu,  as  long  as;  iamdiu, 
this  longtime.  A  distinction  is  thus  made  between  the  interrogative  qualis  (1526), 
which  is  accented,  and  the  relative  qualis  (1831)  which  is  proclitic  (Quint,  i,  5,  26); 
cf.  the  English  -who,  which  is  accented  when  interrogative,  and  proclitic  when  relative 
(b.)  circum  litora,  pronounced  circumlitora ;  ab  oris,  pronounced  aboris 
(Quint,  i,  5,  27)  ;  in  inscriptions  and  manuscripts  prepositions  are  often  united  in  writ- 
ing with  the  following  word.  Phrases  like  extemplo,  suddenly,  invicem  (94), 
in  turn,  are  commonly  written  and  accented  as  one  word.  But  the  preposition  is 
accented  when  it  is  followed  by  a  monosyllabic  unempha_tic  (and  therefore  enclitic)  per- 
sonal pronoun  :  as,  in  me;  abs  te  (but  abs  te,  if  te  is  emphatic).  All  preposi- 
tions used  as  adverbs  (1402)  have  an  independent  accent. 

93.  ENCLITICS  are  words  which  have  no  accent  of  their  own,  but  are 
pronounced  as  a  part  of  the  word  preceding.  This  increase  of  the  num- 
ber of  syllables  produced  certain  accentual  changes,  all  the  details  of 
which  are  not  clear.  When  the  enclitic  was  monosyllabic  the  place  of  the 
accent  seems  to  have  been  determined  as  in  86;  thus  vides,  but  vidgsne ; 
Latio,  but  Lati6que.  Again,  when  by  the  addition  of  a  monosyllabic  en- 
clitic the  accent  falls  on  the  fourth  syllable  from  the  end,  a  secondary  (84,  85) 
accent  was  probably  placed  on  the 'penult:  as,  peri'cula,  but  periculaque. 
The  Roman  grammarians  agree,  however,  in  demanding  that  everywhere 
the  syllable  preceding  the  enclitics  -que,  -ne,  -ve,  and  -ce  should  be  ac- 
cented. In  deinde  and  subinde  there  is  authority  for  placing  the  accent 
on  the  first  syllable. 

12 


Vowel  Change :  Change  of  Diphthongs.     [94-96. 

Enclitics  are  :  (i.)  Unemphatic  personal  and  indefinite  pronouns  :  as,  ip  me,  pro- 
nounced ,  in  me  ;  da  mihi,  damihi;  sic  tibi,  sictibi ;  si  quis,  siquis  ;  ne 
quid,  nequid.  ,  (2.)  Verbs  when  used  as  auxiliaries  :  as,  possum  for  pot(e) 
sum  (752);  qui  libet  (2401);  videlicet,  ilicet,  scilicet  (712);  quamvis 
(1903) ;  the  forms  of  esse  in  compound  tenses  (719),  so  that  est  is  frequently  com- 
bined, even  in  writing,  with  the  preceding  past  participle  (747).  (3.)  The  particles  -ne 
(-p),  -ve,  and  -ce  (-c):  as,  satisne  or  shortened  satin;  Hyrcanisve  Ara- 
bisve;  istice  or  shortened  istic  (90),  adhuc  (90).  (4.)  The  copulative  conjunc- 
tion -que  :  as,  Latioque,  liminaque  .  (5.)  The  preposition  cum  when  it  follows 
(1435)  *ts  case-  (6-)  ihe  Particle  quidem:  as,  si  quidem,  siquidem  (131). 
(7.)  Other  enclitics  are:  -met  (650):  as,  eg6met ;  -dem  :  as,  ibidem  ;  -nam  : 
as,  ubinam  ;  -dum  (1573):  as,  ag6dum  ;  -inde  :  as,  d6inde,  prdinde  (which 
are  disyllabic  in  verse),  and  subinde  ;  -turn  ;  as,  etiamtum  ;  -per  :  as,  parum- 
per  ; ,  the  vocative  when  it  was  closely  joined  to  the  preceding  word,  e.g.  an  imperative  : 
as,  die  puer  (106). 

94.  Two  words  expressing  what  is  really  one  single  idea  are  often  bound 
together  by  one  accent,  one  of  them  acting  the  part  of  either  a  proclitic  or 
enclitic. 

Thus,  with  the  earlier  recessive  accent  (89),  lupiter  (133;  389;  originally  a  voc- 
ative which  came  to  be  used / as  nominative ;  for  the  change  of  pater  to  piter  see 
104) ;  invicem,  in  turn  ;  de"nuo  for  de  r]6vo  (106) ;  with  the  later,  classical  accent, 
legislator,  paterfamilias,  orbisterrarum,  ext6mpl5.  imprimis.  When 
unemphatic  ille  and  iste  preceded  their  noun  and  had  practically  the  value  of  our 
definite  article  they  formed  a  unit  with  the  following  noun  and  thus  the  accent  might 
fall  on  their  last  syllable:  as,  il!6  pater,  iste  canis.  This  use  is  particularly 
common  in  vulgar  and  late  Latin  (see  112). 


CHANGE    OF    SOUND. 
(A.)   VOWEL   CHANGE. 

CHANGE   OF   DIPHTHONGS   IN   ACCENTED   SYLLABLES. 

95.  Of  the  six  original  diphthongs  au,  ou,  eu,  and   ai,  oi, 
ei,    the  only   one    which    preserved   its    original    sound  in   the 
classical  period  is  au.     Of  the  rest  only  ae  (for  older  ai)  and, 
in  a  few  words,  oe  (for  older  oi)  remained  diphthongs  ;  all  the 
others  had  become  monophthongs. 

96.  CHANGE  OF  ai.    ai  is  common  in  inscriptions:  as,  AIDILIS,  PRAITOR.     To- 
ward the  end  of  the  republic  the  two  elements  of  the  diphthong  had  been  partially 
assimilated  to  ae  (49):  as,  aedilis  (Quint,  i,  7,  i8);     This  is  its  pronunciation  in 
the  classical  period.     Between   130  and   100   B.C.   ai  is  displaced  by   ae   in   public 
documents ;  but  the  old-fashioned  ai  was  often  retained  in  private  inscriptions.     Still 
later  the  two  elements  completely  converged  to  e.     In  provincial  Latin  e  is  found 
as  early  as  200  B.C.:  as,  CESVLA  for  CAESVLLA  ;  in  Rome  itself  the  pronunciation 
'Cecilius'  for  Caecilius,  and  'pretor '  for  praetor  was  derided  as  boorish  ;  but  by 
71  A.D.  ae  was  verging  toward  e  even  in  the  court  language :  the  coins  of  Vespasian 
have  IVDEA  as  well  as  IVDAEA.     In  the  3d  and  4th  century  A.D.  e  became  the  prev- 
alent sound. 

13 


97-103.]  Words:  Sound. 


97.  CHANGE  OF  au.    The  diphthong  au,  which  was  preserved  in  educated  speech, 
was  changed  to  6  in  rustic  and  colloquial  pronunciation  (see  the  anecdote  related  by 
Suetonius,    Vesp.   22)  :  as,   copo,   innkeeper,   for  caupo ;    plSstrum   for  plau- 
Strum   (barge),  cart;    Clodius  for  Claudius.      Some  of    these   gained   literary 
currency:    as,   codex,  book,   caudex,   block-,    focale,  neckcloth,   fauces,  >hroat. 
The  form  sodes  (1572)  for  si  audes  =  si  audes  (Cic.  O.  154)  is  a  colloquialism. 

98.  CHANGE  OF  ei.     ei  as  a  genuine  diphthong  is  common  in  old  inscriptions  : 
as,  SEI  ;  SEIVE;  ADEITVR  ;  DEIXERVNT;  FEIDA.     In  classical  Latin  it  has  passed 
into  i:  thus,  si,  if;  sive,  either;  adltur,  is  approached ;  dixerunt,  they  said; 
fida,  faithful.     An  intermediate  stage  between  the  old  diphthong  ei  and  the  classical 
I  was  a  very  close  (46)  e:  as,  PLOIRVME  (465)  for  plurimi ;  IOVRE  (501,  507)  for 
iuri.     For  the  orthographical  use  of  ei  as  a  spelling  for  the  long  i-sound,  see  29. 

99.  CHANGE  OF  oi.     The  development  of  oi  was  parallel  to  that  of  ai.     It  first 
passed  into  oe  :  as,  COIRAVERVNT  and  COERAVERVNT,  they  cared ;  OITILE,  useful, 
and  OETI,  to  use  ;  LOIDOS  and  LOEUOS,  play,  — all  in  old  Latin.     In  classical  Latin 
it  has  further  been  changed  in  accented  syllables  to  u  :  as,  curaverunt,  utile,  uti, 
ludus.     But  oe  was  retained  in  classical  Latin  (i. )  when  a  secondary  diphthong  (48), 
the  result  of  contraction  (120),  and  (2.)  in  a  few  words  like  foedus,  treaty,  perhaps 
as  an  archaizing,  legal  term  ;  foedus,  ugly ;  poena,  penalty,  perhaps  through  the 
influence  of  Greek  noiv^  (in  the  verb  punire,  to  punish,  the  regular  u  appears) ; 
proelium,  skirmish ;  foetor,  stench  ;  and  moenia,  walls,  perhaps  because  there 
was  a  word  munia,  services.     The  connection  of  non,  not,  with  noenum  (455  ; 
1444  ;  699)  is  difficult  because  of  the  unusual  development  of  oe  to  O,  for  which  the 
Praenestine  form  CORAVERONT  is  the  only  parallel. 

100.  CHANGE  of  ou.     OU,  found  in  inscriptions  down  to  about  90  B.C.,  passed, 
in  classical  Latin,  into  u  :  as,  POVBLICOM,  NOVNTIATA,  IOVIJEX;  later  publicum, 
fublic,  nuntiata,  notified,  iudex,  judge. 

101.  CHANGE  OF  eu.     Primitive  (48)  eu  appears  in  classical  Latin  only  in  the 
interjections  eu,  heu,  §heu,  heus.     Every  other  original  eu  had,  even  in  old  Latin, 
passed  into  ou  and  developed  like  the  latter:  as,  *neumen  (Greek  vev/ua)  became 
first*noumen,  then  (100)  numen.     With  the  exceptions  noted  above,  the  diphthong 
eu,  as  it  appears  in  Latin,  is  always  of  secondary  origin  (48),  the  result  of  the  two 
vowels  e  and  u  meeting  in  composition  :  as,  neu,  neither,  from  ne-ve  ;  neuti- 
quam,  from  ne  and  utiquam  (124). 

WEAKENING   IN    UNACCENTED    SYLLABLES. 

102.  The  vowel  of  an  unstressed  (atonic)  syllable  is  often  weak- 
ened, changing  its  quantity  or  quality  or  both.     This  is  especially  the 
case  in  syllables  immediately  preceded  by  the  chief  accent  (posttonic 
syllables}.     The  following  changes  took  place  at  an  early  period  when 
Latin  still  possessed  the  old,  recessive  accent  (89). 

WEAKENING   OF    SIMPLE   VOWELS   IN    MEDIAL   SYLLABLES. 

103.  (a.)  AtONic  MEDIAL  e  before  a  single  consonant  was  weakened  (with  the 
exceptions  given  under  b.)  to  i  :  as,  cdlli^O,  collect,  from  lego  ;  6bsidep,  besiege, 
from  sedeo  ;  c6rtaminis,  of  the  contest,  from  certamen  (224) ;  flaminis,  from 
flamenco).     And  so  probably  hie (664)  arose    from     *hec    or  *hoc  (105, £•)  when 
used  as  proclitic  (92).     Before  the  labials  p,  b,  f,  and  m  this  weakened  sound  was 
intermediate  between  i  and  u   (28),  and  both  spellings  occur:  as,  quadripes  and 
quadrupes,  four-footed;   alimentum,   nourishment;  monumentum,  monu- 
ment.    The  choice  of  i  or  U  was  probably  governed  by  the  quality  of  the  stressed 
vowel  in  the  preceding  syllable:  viz.,  u  after  o  and  u,  and  i  after  a,  e,  and  i.     But 
such  distinction  is  only  imperfectly  maintained  in  classical  Latin. 


Vowel  Change:   Weakening.     [104—107. 


(b.)  But  before  two  consonants,  before  r,  before  vowels,  and  after  i,  atonic  e  does 
not  change:  as,  16vamentum  (224),  but  le"vaminis,  of  consolation ;  6bsessus 
(but  bbsideo),  possessed;  sdcietas,  society,  from  the  stem  socie-  (but  n6vitas 
from  the  stem  nove-) ;  generis,  of  the  kind ;  adeunt,  they  approach. 

104.  (c.)  Atonic  medial  a,  except  in  the  cases  mentioned  below  under  (d.),  (e.), 
and  (/.),  was  first  weakened  to  e  and  then  underwent  the  same  changes  as  atonic 
medial  e  (103):  as  (before  single  consonants),  conficio,  accomplish,  from  facio ; 
i'nsili5,/«w;/  in,  from  salio  (1019);  redditus,  restored,  from  datus ;  tricipi- 
tem,  three-headed,  from  *tricapitem  (caput),  Cic.  O.  159;  occiput,  back  of  th* 
At;ad,and  sinciput,  jo/e  (478).  In  compounds  of  iacio  (940),  -iaciS  is  weakened  in 
early  Latin  to  -iecio  (as,  coniecio,  940),  but  later  to  -icio  (as,  subicio).  This 
last  form  may  be  due  to  syncope  (in,  a)  of  the  radical  a.  The  spelling  -iiciS  (as, 
subiicio)  is  late  and  faulty  (52).  It  does  not  occur  in  republican  inscriptions  and 
owes  its  origin  to  a  confusion  of  the  two  forms  coniecio  and  cpnicio.  (On  the 
quantity  of  the  vowel  of  the  prepositions  in  these  compounds  of  iacio,  see  122  e) ; 
(before  p,  b,  f,  m)  accipio,  accept,  and  bccupo,  occupy,  from  capiS;  cdntu- 
bernahs,  room-mate,  from  taberna ;  abripio,  to  snatch  away,  from  rapid ; 
(before  two  consonants)  pepercl,  I  have  spared,  from  parco  ;  accentus,  accent, 
from  cantus  ;  (before  r)  pe"peri,  I  brought  forth,  from  parid. 

(d.)  But  an  a  in  the  preceding  syllable  may  protect  the  atonic  a :  as,  adagio, 
adagium,  proverb,  but  prSdigium,  miracle  (144). 

(e.)  Atonic  medial  a  before  the  guttural  nasal  (62)  n  followed  by  g  changed  to  i 
(138) :  as,  attingo,  touch,  from  tango. 

(/.)  Atonic  medial  a  before  1  followed  by  any  consonant  save  1  changed  to  u 
(both  1  and  u  being  guttural,  60, 44) :  as,  e"xsultare,  to  leap  up,  from  saltSre ;  but 
f  6f  elli,  /  deceived,  from  f  allo. 

IO5-  Of-)  ATONIC  MEDIAL  o,  when  followed  by  a  single  consonant,  first  changed 
to  e  and  then  underwent  all  further  changes  of  medial  atonic  e  :  as,  hominis, 
from  *homon-is  (485);  imaginis,  for  *imagonis,  226  (nominative  imago, 
485) ;  cupidinis,  for  *cupidonis,  225,(nominative  cupido,  485) ;  virginis,  for 
*virgonis  (nominative  virgo,  470);  "ilico,  from  *in-sloco,  on  the  spot  (169,  6). 

(h.)  Before  twa  consonants  or  before  guttural  1, (60)  atonic  medial  o  changed  to 
u  :  as,  6untis,  from  *  6ontis  (Greek  Zofro?) ;  sedulo,  from  se  do!5  (1417).  But 
a  preceding  v  or  u  protects  o  (107,  c). 

(i.)  Before  r,  atonic  medial  o  was  retained:  as,  t6mporis,  o/  time;  except 
when  u  in  the  preceding  syllable  induced  a  change  to  u  :  as,  fulguris,  of  lightning 
(for  the  -r  in  the  nominative  singular  fulgur  instead  of  -S,  see  154). 

106.  (£. )  Medial   -ay-,  -OV-,  and  -iv-  in  posttonic  syllables  were  weakened  to 
u  :    as,  dgnuo  from  denovo  (94) ;  ablup  from  ablavo.    The  form  puer,  boy, 
arose  from  the  older  POVER  in  enclitic  vocatives  (93,  7)  and  was  thence  transferred 
to  the  nominative  like  piter  in  lupiter  (94). 

WEAKENING  OF   SIMPLE  VOWELS   IN  FINAL  SYLLABLES. 

107.  (a.)  In  final  syllables  unaccented  original  e  before  s  and  t  was  weakened  to 
i :  as,  salutis,  of  safety,  from  older  salutes  (507). 

(b  )  Final  i  became  e :  as.  ante  for  *  anti  (Greek  a-vri  and  anti-cipare) ;  nom- 
inative singular  mare,  from  the  stem  mari-  (526). 

(c.)  In  final  syllables  o  before  consonants  changed  to  u  except  when  preceded  by 
U  or  v:  as,  fllius,  son,  for  old  Latin  fllios  (452)  ;  ferunt,  they  carry,  for  older  fe- 
ront ;  femur,  thigh,  nomin.  sg.  from  the  stem  femor-  (489) ;  genus,  kind,  for 
*  genos,  Greek  ye'vo<;  ;  but  vivont,  they  live  :  salvom,  safe.  Not  long  before  the 
beginning  of  our  era  o  here  also  changed  to  u  and  appears  to  have  coalesced  with  the 
preceding  v  (Quint,  i,  7,  26):  as,  in  inscriptions  :  INGENVS  (nomin.  sg  )  for  inge- 
nuos;  SERVM^  slave  (ace.  sg.),  for  servom;  NOVM  for  novom,  something  new; 


io8-iii.]  Words:  Sound. 


so  also  bourn,  oxen  (gen.  pi.),  for  bovom  (494).  But  inasmuch  as  the  majority  of 
orms  in  the  paradigms  of  these  words  retained  their  v,  it  was  restored  in  most  cases, 
by  analogy,  to  the  forms  which  had  lost  it:  as,  servum  for  serum,  because  of 
servi,  servo,  etc. ;  vivunt  fur  viunt,  because  of  vivo,  vivis,  vivit,  etc. 

M.)  When  the  stems  fac-  (facere,  do),  cap-  (capere,  take)  appear  as  second 
members  of  compounds,  their  a  changes  in  final  syllables  to  e  :  as,  artifex,  artisan  ; 
auceps,  bird-catcher.  After  the  analogy  of  these  words,  compounds  with  dicere 
and  ire  have  e  in  the  nom.  sg. :  as,  iudex,  iudicis,/W#?  (from  ius  and  dicere); 
comes,  companion  (from  com,  with,  and  ire) ;  see  136,  2. 

WEAKENING    OF   DIPHTHONGS    IN    UNACCENTED   SYLLABLES. 

108.  Diphthongs,  whether  medial  or  final,  are  treated  alike  in  atonic 
syllables. 

(a.)  Atonic  ei,  oi,  and  ai  (ae)  became  i  :  as,  lupi,  -wolves  (nom.  pi.),  for 
*lupoi  (Gr.  AV'KOI)  ;  belli,  in  war  (loc.  sg.,  460,  1338),  for  *bellei  (_Greek  oZ*ei) 
or  *belloi  (Greek  OIKOI)  ;  existimo,  /  consider,  from  aestimo  ;  concido,  I  strike 
down,  from  caedo ;  Cicero,  O.  159,  mentions  inicum,  unfair,  for  *inaecum, 
and  concisum  for  *concaesum ;  so  also,  probably,  hie,  this,  arose  from  hoic 
(662)  when  used  as  a  proclitic  (92). 

(b.)  Atonic  ou  and  au  became  u  :  as,  include,  /  include,  from  claudo; 
accusare,  to  accuse,  from  causa. 

log.  There  are  not  a  few  cases  in  which  the  atonic  vowel  does  not  conform  to  the 
rules  given  above  (102-108).  These  are  usually  compounds  which  show  the  vowel  of 
the  simple  verb.  Some  of  these  were  formed  at  a  time  when  the  early  recessive  accent 
was  no  longer  in  force  and  consequently  there  was  no  cause  for  weakening;  in  others 
the  vowel  of  the  simple  verb  was  by  analogy  substituted  for  the  weakened  vowel  of 
the  compound :  as,  appeto,  /  strive  after,  from  peto,  which  ought  to  have  i  like 
colligo,  collect,  from  lego ;  intermedius,  intermediate,  but  dimidius,  half; 
defraudare,  to  cheat,  by  the  side  of  defrudare  from  fraudare;  instead  of  the 
common  redargue,  /  refute,  Scipio  Africanus  minor  Pauli  filius  (185-129  B.C.)  said 
rederguo,  and  pertisum  for  pertaesum,  but  both  Cicero  (O.  159)  and  Lucilius 
discountenance  pertisum  as  the  sign  of  a  pedantic  prig.  In  a  few  cases  the  reverse 
process  took  place,  and  the  weakened  vowel  which  arose  in  the  compound  was  trans- 
ferred to  the  simple  verb :  as,  cludo,  /  close  (958),  for  claudo,  which  owes  its  u  to 
compounds  like  occludS.  For  a  case  where  the  vowel  of  the  preceding  syllable  acted 
as  a  stay  to  the  expected  change,  see  104,  d. 

LOSS   IN   UNACCENTED   SYLLABLES. 

110.  Only  vowels  which  are  short  and  atonic  may  be  lost.     The 
loss  of  a  medial  vowel  is  called  Syncope ;  of  an  initial  vowel,  Aphae- 
resis;  of  a  final  vowel  Apocope. 

111.  SYNCOPE.     («.)  Loss  of  a  posttonic  vowel,  entailing  the  loss  of  a  syllable, 
occurs  in  ardus   (Lucil. ;  for  a  see  128)  for  the  common  aridus,  dry ;   caldus  by 
the  side  of  calidus,  -warm  (Quint,  i,  6,  19);  reppuli,  I  pushed  back,  and  rettuli, 
I  carried  back,  stand  for  *r6pepuli  and  *retetuli  (861);  pergo,  I  proceed,  stands 
for  *perreg5  from  rego  (cf.  cor-rigo,  e-rigo,  where  the  e  is  weakened,  103,  and 
porrigo,  porgo,  where  it  is  either  weakened  or  lost),  hence  it  forms  its  perfect 


(801),  gives  gaudeo,  I  rejoice,  converting  au  to  au  before  the  following 
.  (128);  in  a  similar  way  auceps,  bird-catcher,  is  formed  from  *  aviceps  (avis,  bird, 

16 


Vowel  Change.  [112-114. 


and  capere,  catch);  claudere,  lock,  from  *  clavidere  (clavis,  key);  aetas,  age, 
for  aevitas  (262);  praeco,  herald,  for  *  praevico  (105,  g)  prae-voco  (211);  also 
with  chance  of  ou  to  u  (100),  prudens,  prudent,  for  *proudens  from  provi- 
dens  foreseeing;  nuper,  lately,  from  *noyiper;  nuntius,  messenger,  from 
*nov'entius  (333) ;  iucundus,><y/w/,  from  iuvicundus  (Cic.  Fin.  2,  14).  But 
forms  like  poclum,  cup,  saeclum,  age,  do  not  belong  here,  as  they  are  original  and 
not  derived  by  syncope  from  poculum,  saeculum  ;  cf.  172. 

(b.)  Where,  through  the  loss  of  a  vowel,  1  or  r  would  come  to  stand  between  two 
consonants,  or  where  they  would  be  final  and  preceded  by  a  consonant,  1  and  r  become 
syllabic  (83)  and  the  syllable  is  thus  maintained.  Syllabic  1  is  represented  by  ul, 
syllabic  r  by  er  (172,  3).  The  development  of  such  intercalary  vowels  as  u  before  1 
and  e  before  r  is  called  Anaptyxis  (172).  Thus,  *sacri-dots  (cf.  sacri-legium) 
became  first  *sac£dots  by  syncope,  then  sacerdSs,  priest,  by  anaptyxis;  *acribus 
(cf.  acri-monia,  pungency)  first  became  *acrbus  then  acerbus,  pungent ;  *agri- 
los  (267,  cf.  agri-cola,  farmer)  became  first  *  ag£los,  then  *agerlos,  and 
finally,  by  assimilation  of  the  r  to  1  (166,  7),  agellus,  small  field;  from  *  dis-ficilter 
(adverb  from  dis-  and  facilis)  arose  *  diffic|ter  and  difficulter,  with  difficulty. 
The  nominative  sg.  of  the  following  words  is  to  be  explained  thus,  ager  (451)  was 
originally  *  agros  (cf .  Greek  «ypo?),  which  changed  successively  to  *  agrs,  *  agers, 
and  ager  (for  the  loss  of  -s  see  171,  i  and  3).  Similarly  *  acris,  passing  through 
the  stages  of  *acrs,  *acers,  became  acer  (627),  and  *famlos  by  way  of  *famls, 
*famuls,  became°  famul  (455),  to  which  later  the  common  ending  of  nouns  of  the 
O-declension  was  added,  giving  famulus. 

112.  APHAERESIS.     Aphaeresis  hardly  occurs  in  literary  Latin.     In  the  pronoun 
iste  the  initial  i  is  sometimes  dropped  (667) ;  this  loss  implies  an  accented  ultima 
(94).     A  trace  of  prehistoric  aphaeresis  is  found  in  the  prefix  po-  for  *  apo  (Greek 
an-d)  in  p5no,  /place,  for  po-s(i)no  (in,  a). 

113.  APOCOPE.     Under  the  same  conditions  under  which  a  medial  vowel  was 


Similarly  the  final  -e  of  the  enclitics  -ce,  -ne,  not,  and  -ne  interrogative  was  lost : 
*  si-ce  became  sic,  so;  *  qul-ne,  quin,  -why  not ;  habesne,  haben,  hast  thou  ; 
the  imperatives  die,  say,  due,  lead,  and  fac,  do,  stand  for  earlier  dice,  duce, 
face  (846) ;  the  shortened  form  em  for  eme  (imperative  of  emere,  take}  has  been 
turned  into  an  interjection  (1149).  In  the  same  way  nee  arose  by  the  side  of  ne- 
que  ;  ac  by  the  side  of  atque  (158).  Final  -e  has  also  been  dropped  in  the 
nominative  sg.  of  a  number  of  polysyllabic  neuter  stems  in  -all  and  -ari  (546)  :  as, 
animal,  animal,  for  *animale,  exemplar,  pattern,  for  *  exemplare.  See 
536>  537-  It  must,  however,  be  remembered  that  in  most  of  the  cases  given  the  loss 
of  a  final  vowel  would  also  result  from  elision  (119)  before  the  initial  vowel  of  the 
following  word. 

COMBINATION   OF    ADJACENT   VOWELS. 

114.  HIATUS.  A  succession  of  two  vowel  sounds  not  making  a 
diphthong  is  called  Hiatus. 

When  in  the  formation  of  words  by  means  of  suffixes  or  prefixes  or 
through  the  loss  of  an  intervening  consonant,  two  vowels  come  into  con- 
tact within  a  word  we  speak  of  internal  hiatus;  the  term  external  hiatus 
comprises  those  cases  where,  in  connected  discourse,  the  final  vowel  of  one 
word  comes  into  contact  with  the  initial  vowel  of  the  following  word.  For 
the  latter  kind,  see  2474. 


115—118.]  Words :  Sound. 


115.  The  treatment  of  vowels  in  internal  hiatus  is  four-fold:   (i.) 
The  hiatus  may  remain;    (2.)  the  two  vowels  may  be  fused  into  one 
(Contraction)*,  (3.)  one  of  the  two  vowels  may  be  dropped  (Elision)  ; 
and  (4.)  the  two  vowels  may  be  combined  into  a  diphthong. 

116.  HIATUS  is  maintained  (a.)  between  two  adjacent  vowels  the  second 
of  which  is  long  and  accented  (according  to  the  classical  accentuation) :  as, 
coggi,   /  forced,  and  coSctus,  forced  (937)  ;  but  c5go  (118,  3).    For  coepi, 
instead  of  coepi,  /  began,  see  120. 

(b.)  In  many  prepositional  compounds  when  the  members  were  still  felt 
to  be  independent :  as,  praeesse  (the  contracted  form  praesse  is  found  in 
inscriptions) ;  deerunt,  they  will  be  wanting,  by  the  side  of  derunt ;  coa- 
lesco,  grcnv  together  (the  contracted  form  colesco  appears  in  Varro) ; 
cooptare,  cob'pt,  cooperio,  /  cover  up  (by  the  side  of  rare  coptare,  co- 
perire) ;  coitus,  meeting,  by  the  side  of  coetus  (120). 

(c.)  A  comparatively  large  number  of  vowel  combinations  remain  un- 
changed :  as  ea  and  ea  in  earn,  her,  and  mea,  by  my  (fern,  sing.) ;  ia  and  ia  in 
maria,  seas,  viatoris,  of  the  traveller ;  ua  and  ua  in  belua,  monster, 
sua,  through  her  (fern,  sg.) ;  ie  in  quies,  quiet ;  ue  in  lues,  pestilence  ;  ei 
in  mei,  of  me  ;  ui  in  tui,  of  thee ;  eo  in  me5,  by  my  (masc.  sing.). 

117.  SYNIZESIS.     In  these  combinations  the    first  vowel  is  sometimes 
made   unsyllabic  (83).     This  is  called  synizests  (2499)  and  is  not  rare  in 
poets,  being  often  the  only  means  of  adapting  a  word  to  the  requirements 
of  certain  metres.     Thus,  fortuitus  ( w  ^)  must  appear  in  a  hexame- 
ter as  fortvitus  (fortyitus).     See  2499.  25°3- 

118.  CONTRACTION,     (i.)  Two  like  vowels  may  unite  in  one  long  vowel ; 
rapidity  of  utterance  was  favourable  to  such  fusion.     In  compounds,  the 
desire  to  keep  the  members  distinct  often  prevented  it.     So  always  nemo, 
nobody,  for  *neemo  from  *ne-hemo,  no  man  (for  the  loss  of  h,  see  58,  150  ; 
for  e  in  *hemo,  see  144) ;  and  by  the  side  of  the  open  forms,  nil  from  nihil, 
nothing;  vemens  from  vehemens,  rapid  (connected  with  the  verb  veho) ; 
rarely  derunt,  they  will  be  wanting,  and  desse,  to  be  wanting,  for  deerunt, 
deesse ;  deleram,  I  had  destroyed,  from    *deleeram  for  deleveram   (for 
the  loss  of  v,  see  153),  see  890;  passum,  of  paces,  for  passuum  (591). 

(2.)  A  diphthong  absorbs  the  following  vowel :  as,  praetor,  older  prai- 
tor,  praetor,  from  *prai-itor,  who  goes  before ;  inscriptions  show  praerunt 
for  praeerunt,  they  will  be  before ;  for  praebere,  to  furnish,  the  open  form 
praehibere  occurs  in  Plautus  (1004). 

(3.)  If  two  unlike  vowels  are  contracted  at  all,  they  usually  unite  in  the 
long  sound  of  the  first  vowel.  Thus,  o  and  a  yield  5:  as,  cogo,  I  force, 
from  co-ago;  cogito,  I  think,  from  co-agito.  Similarly  Varro  has  co- 
lescat,  it  may  conibine,  for  co-alescat.  o  and  e  yield  o  :  as,  promo,  bring 
out,  como,  put  up,  for  pro-emo,  co-emo  (953).  e  and  a  yield  e  :  as,  dego, 
I  pass  away,  from  de-ago  (937)-  i  and  e  in  the  termination  of  the  vocative 
of  -io-  stems  probably  contracted  to-i;  as  fili  from  *filie,  459.  But  in 
denominative  (365)  and  other  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  a  and  6  contract 
into  o  :  as.  amo,  /  love,  from  *ama-o  (cf.  Greek  rtfj.d-w) ;  and  a  and  e  into 
e  :  as,  ames,  thou  tnayest  love,  for  *ama-es. 

18 


Vowel  Change.  [119-122. 


ng.  ELISION.  Only  rarely  the  first  of  two  successive  vowels  is  dropped:  as, 
nullus,  no,  for  *ne-ullus;  likewise  the  final  vowel  of  the  first  member  of  nominal 
compounds:  as,  multangulus,  with  many  corners,  for  *multi-angulus  (cf. 
multi-cavus,  with  many  holes)  ;  flexanimus,  heart-rending,  for  *flexi- 
animus  (cf.  flexi-pes,  with  bent  feet). 

120.  COMBINATION  INTO  DIPHTHONGS.     The  union  of  two  successive  vowels 
into  a  diphthong  is  equally  rare  :  o  and  i  are  combined  to  oi,  oe,  in  coetus,  meeting, 
by  the  side  of  the  open  form  coitus  (116,  b~)  ;  the  perfect  COCpl  (812),  I  began,  owes 
its  diphthong  oe  to  forms  in  which  the  e  was  short  and  unaccented,  such  as  the  rare 
present  forms  coepid  for  c6-6pio  (813) ;  for  cogpi  (813,  863)  would  have  remained 
unchanged  (116,  a),     neuter,  with  the  accent  on  the  e,  was  pronounced  as  three 
syllables,  later  eu  became  diphthongal;    neutiquam   with  synizesis  (117)   of  e. 
e  and  1  sometimes  contract  to  ei  in  rei  (60 1,  602)  and  in  demde,  dem  in  the 
classic  poets. 

LENGTHENING. 

121.  COMPENSATIVE  LENGTHENING.     When  certain  groups  of 
consonants  are  simplified  by  the  dropping  of  a  consonant,  its  time  is 
absorbed  by  a  preceding  short  vowel,  which  thereby  becomes  long. 
This  is  called  Compensation.     In  many  cases  compensative  lengthen- 
ing is  due  to  the  loss  of  a  preliterary  sonant  a  (170,  2)  :  as, 

canus,  gray,  from  *casnus  (cf.  cas-cus,  very  old}.  See  for  other  cases 
of  this  lengthening,  170,  5,  qumi,  for  *quincni;  170,  6,  ignosco,  for  *in- 
gnosco. 

122.  INDUCED  LENGTHENING.      Before  certain  groups  of  con- 
sonants short  vowels  have  a  tendency  to  become  long:  as, 

(a.)  The  prefixes  in-  and  con-  before  s  or  f  lengthened  their  vowels  in 
classical  Latin  (Cic.  O.  159):  as,  insanus,  mad;  infelix,  unhappy;  con- 
suevit,  he  grew  used  to;  cSnfecit,  he  accomplished.  Elsewhere  also  the 
vowel  before  ns  and  nf  appears  to  have  been  lengthened :  as,  fons,  fountain  ; 
pensus,  weighty  (Gell.  9,  6);  forensis,  forensic ;  censor,  censor;  mensa, 
table;  mensis,  month;  Valens ;  Clemens;  the  o  of  insons,  guiltless, 
however,  is  marked  as  short  by  the  grammarian  Probus. 

(b.)  A  similar  lengthening  of  the  vowel  before  nc  followed  by  t  or 
s  appears  :  as,  unctus,  anointed,  from  unguo  (Gell.  9,  6) ;  iunctus, /#/'«<?</, 
from  iungo  (954),  coniunx,  spouse,  genit.  coniugis  (472)  ;  quinctus, 
fifth,  whence  quintus  (170,4)  and  quinque,  five,  derive  their  I;  sanctus, 
hallowed. 

(c.)  Spellings  like  slGNVM,  sign  (well  supported  in  inscriptions),  and 
D!GNE,  worthily  (less  well  supported)  show  that  i  was  at  times  lengthened 
before  gn.  The  grammarian  Priscian  demands  this  lengthening  for  all 
vowels  preceding  the  ending  -gnus,  -gna,  -gnum. 

(d.}  A  lengthened  vowel  before  r  followed  by  a  consonant  is  als.o  certain 
for  some  words  like  ordo,  order  ;  forma,  shape. 

(e.)  Some  speakers  appear  to  have  lengthened  the  vowel  of  prepositions 
like  con-,  sub-,  ob-,  in  the  compounds  of  iacio  (104,  f) ;  as  obicit.  This 
practice,  which  is  disapproved  by  Gellius  (4,  17),  probably  arose  from  the 
transfer  by  analogy  of  the  quantity  of  the  first  syllable  in  forms  like  con- 
ieciant  (940)  to  that  of  the  shortened  form.  In  the  same  wav  the  occasional 
spelling  CONIVNX,  spouse,  for  coniunx,  may  owe  its  long  5  to  the  analogy  of 
coiunx,  COIVGI  (170,  6). 

19 


123-127.]  Words:  Sound. 


(f.)  Many  verb  stems  ending  in  -g  have  a  long  vowel  in  the  past  parti- 
ciple before  the  suffix  -to-:  as,  tectus,  covered,  from  tego  (916);  tactus, 
touched,  from  tango  (925)  ;  pactus,  fixed,  from  pango  (925)  ;  fictus, 
moulded,  from  fingo  (954)  ;  pictus,  painted,  from  pingS.  The  evidence  for 
a  in  maximus  is  very  scanty :  one  case  of  A  with  the  apex  (29,  3)  in  a  faulty 
inscription. 

( g.)  Of  the  induced  lengthenings  enumerated  above,  only  those  given  in 
(a.)  (6.)  (f.)  seem  to  have  been  universal  in  classical  Latin.  The  rest  appear 
to  have  been  local  peculiarities,  which,  while  making  inroads  upon  the 
literary  language,  never  gained  full  recognition. 

123.  (i.)  ANALOGICAL  LENGTHENING.  In  noun  stems  in  -o  the  stem  vowel  is 
lengthened  in  the  genitive  plural  -prum  (449,  462),  by  analogy  to  the  steins  in  -a 
(435) :  as,  servSrum,  of  slaves,  like  mensarum,  of  tables.  For  other  cases  see 
122,*. 

(2.)  METRICAL  LENGTHENING.  On  the  lengthening  of  a  vowel  (or  a  syllable) 
under  the  influence  of  verse-ictus,  see  2505. 


SHORTENING. 

124.  A  vowel  originally  long  is  regularly  shortened  in  classi- 
cal Latin  before  another  vowel,  even  though  an  h  intervene  :  as, 

taceS,  /  am  silent,  from  the  stem  tace-  (365) ;  seorsum,  apart,  deor- 
sum,  downward,  from  se(v)orsum,  de(v)orsum  (153). 

125.  In  simple  words  a  diphthong  occurs  before  a  vowel  only  in  one  or  two  proper 
names :  as,  Gnaeus,  Annaeus,  in  which  it  remains  long,  and  in   Greek  words. 
But  the  diphthong  ae  of  the  prefix  prae  is  sometimes  shortened  before  a  vowel :  as, 
pra~eacutus;  praeeunt ;  pra~ehibe5;  hence  prehendo  for  *prae-hendo. 
Sometimes  it  coalesces  with  a  following  vowel :  as,  praebptavisti. 

126.  An  increased  tendency  to  shorten  a  long  vowel  before  another  vowel  can  be 
traced  in  the  history  of  the  language:  thus,  classical  fui,  /  was,  for  Plautus's  fui 
(750) ;  clueo,  /  am  called,  for   Plautus's   clueo ;    perfect  pluit,  it  rained,  for 
Varro's  pluit  (cf.  pluvit,  823,  947) ;  pius,  pious,  for  Ennius's  plus;  see  also  765. 

127.  But  even  in  classical  Latin   there  are  cases  where   a 
vowel  before  another  vowel  remains  long:  thus, 

(i.)  Regularly,  the  i  of  fio,  /  am  made,  except  before  -er-,  as  in  fierem 
(788,  789). 

(2.)  In  dius,  godly,  for  divus  (153),  and  the  old  ablatives  diu,  dio,  open 
sky  (used  only  in  the  expression  sub  diu,  sub  dio,  i.  e.  sub  divo). 

(3.)  In  the  ending  ei  of  the  genitive  and  dative  sg.  of  stems  in  -e-  (601) 
when  an  i  precedes  :  as,  diei,  of  a  day,  aciei,  of  the  battle  line,  but  rei,  of  the 
thing,  for  older  rei. 

(4).  It  may  be  mentioned  here  that  rei  is  said  to  occur  in  verse  6  times  (Plaut. 
G.  2,  Lucr.  G.  2,  D.  2)  ;  rei  9  times  (Plaut.  G.  2,  Ter.  G.  4,  D.  i,  Juv.  G.  i,  Sulp. 
Apoll.  G.  i)  ;  rei  27  times  (Plaut.  G.  2,  D.  3,  Enn.  D.  i,  Ter.  G.  9,  D.  8,  Lucil.  G. 
i,  D.  i,  Lucr.  G.  2).  fidei  G.  3  times  (Plaut.,  Enn.,  Lucr.)  ;  fidei  n  times  (Enn. 
D.  i,  Man.  G.  2,  D.  i,  Sil.  G.  4,  D.  i,  Juv.  G.  2);  fidei  5  times  (Ter.  G.  i,  D.  3, 
Hor.  i).  ei  35  times  (Plaut.  18,  Ter.  8,  Lucr.  9);  ei  some  17  times  (Plaut.  12, 
Ter.  2,  German,  i,  Ter.  Maur.  2);  ei  23  times  (Plaut.  n,  Ter.  8,  Lucil.  3,  Cat.  i). 

20 


Vowel  Change.  [  1 2  8- 1 30. 


(5.)  Gaius  retains  its  §  before  the  vowel  i:   thus,  Gaius  (trisyllabic). 

(6.)  In  the  pronominal  genitives  in  -fus  (618),  the  quantity  of  i  varied. 
The  older  dramatists  use  I ;  later,  i  was  shortened,  but  variations  in  its  quan- 
tity seem  to  have  continued  until  long  after  the  end  of  the  republic;  Cicero, 
DO.  3,  183,  measures  illius  ;  Quintilian  i,  5,  18  umus  ;  the  grammarian 
Priscian  prescribes  -ius  for  all  except  alterius,  which  should  always  have  i, 
and  utrius,  in  which  the  i  is  common  (30).  In  verse  the  i  is  often  short, 
except  in  neutrius;  utriusque  has  always  short  i. 

(7.)  The  penult  is  long  in  the  endings  -ai,  -ais,  -01,  -61s,  and  -ei,  -els, 
from  stems  in  -aio-,  -oio-,  and  -eio-  (458)  or  -ia-  (437)  :  as,  Gal,  Boi, 
Pompei,  plebei :  Gals,  Bois,  Pompeis,  plebeis,  Bais ;  aulai,  pictai. 

(8.)  Diana  has  I  as  often  as  i.  ohe  has  6;  gheu  has  6  in  comedy,  other- 
wise e. 

(9.)  In  many  Greek  words  a  long  vowel  comes  before  another  vowel;  as,  aer, 
Aeneas,  Medea.  But  early  importations  from  Greek  followed  the  general  rule  and 
shortened  the  vowel :  as,  platSa  (TrAareta),  balingum,  balneum  (jSaAaveioc). 

128.  A  long  vowel  preceding  unsyllabic  i  or  u  followed  by  a  consonant  is  short- 
ened:    as,  gauded  for  * gaudeo  (cf.  gavisus,  in);    claudo  for  claudS  (cf. 
clauis,  in). 

Similarly  a  long  vowel  (unless  long  by  contraction:  as,  nuntius,  in,  a, 
contio)  preceding  a  liquid  or  nasal  followed  by  a  consonant  is  shortened  :  as,  synco- 
pated ardus  from  aridus  (m),  habentem,  from  the  stem  habe-.  For  cases  of 
induced  lengthening  of  the  vowel  before  n  followed  by  certain  consonants,  see  122. 

129.  IAMBIC  SHORTENING.     The  law  of  iambic  shortening  (2470) 
produced  a  number  of  important  changes  :  tbus, 

(i.)  In  old  dramatic  verse  iambic  words  (\j )  often  shorten  the  long 

vowel.  The  poets  after  Plautus  and  Terence  preserve  the  long  vowel. 

(a.)  Nouns ;  G.  eri,  boni,  preti.  D.  cani,  ero,  malo.  L.  domi,  heri. 
Ab.  levi,  manu,  domo,  bona,  fide.  Plural :  N.  fores,  viri.  D.,  Ab.  bonis. 
Ac.  foris,  viros,  bonas.  (b.)  Verbs :  eo,  volo,  ago ;  ero.  dabo ;  vides  ; 
loces ;  voles ;  dedi,  dedin ;  roga,  veni ;  later  poets  sometimes  retain  cave, 
vale,  and  vide.  .The  vowel  may  also  be  shortened  when  -n  (1503)  is  added  and  s 
is  dropped  before  -n  (170,  2) :  rogan,  abin  ;  viden  is  also  retained  by  later  poets. 

(2.)  In  a  few  pyrrhic  words  (w  w)  in  -i,  which  were  originally  iambic 
(w ),  the  poets  in  all  periods  retained  final  -I  at  pleasure :  these  are, 

mih!,  tibf,  sibf;  ibl,  ubf;  also  alicub!.  The  i  of  bi  is  always  short  in 
necubi  and  sicubi,  and  usually  in  ubinam,  ubivis,  and  ubicumque ;  ibidem 
is  used  by  the  dramatists,  ibidem  in  hexameter,  ubique  has  always  I. 

130.  The  following  instances  show  that  this  law  operated  in  prose 
speech  also  : 

(i.)  In  iambic  words  of  the  a-  declension  (432)  the  final  -a  of  the  nomi- 
native singular  was  shortened ;  hence  *equa  became  equa,  mare.  From 
these  iambic  words  short  final  -a  spread  so  that  all  Stems  in  -a-  shorten  the 
final  a  of  the  nom.  sg.  (434). 

(2.)  The  final  -a  in  the  nominative  plural  of  neuter  nouns  of  the  o- 
declension  (446),  which  appears  in  triginta,  thirty,  was  likewise  shortened, 
first  in  iambic  words  like  iuga,  yokes,  bona,  goods,  then  everywhere  (461). 

(3.)  This  law  explains  the  short  final  vowel  in  homo  (2442)  by  the  side  of 
sermo  (2437,  <:)  and  similar  cases,  like  the  adverbs  modo,  cito  (2442),  bene,  male 
(2440).  In  the  same  way  arose  the  short  final  O  of  the  first  person  in  conjugation 
(2443)  '•  as>  volo,  dabo,  dixero  by  the  side  of  scribo ;  so  also  viden  for  viden 
(129,  i ;  170,  2). 

21 


131-135-]  Words :  Sound. 


(4.)  Of  imperatives  only  puta,  used  adverbially  (2438,  c),  ave,  have  (80^ ; 
Quint,  i,  6,  21  ;  but  Martial  scans  have)  as  a  salutation  and  cave,  used  as  an 
auxiliary  (1711),  show  the  short  final  vowel  in  classical  Latin.  Elsewhere  the  long 
vowel  has  been  restored,  as  am  a,  mone  (845). 

(5.)  According  to  this  rule  calefacio,  maledicS  changed  to  calefacio,  male- 
dico. 

131.  A  long  final  vowel  is  shortened  when  an  enclitic  is  added  to  the 
word :  as  siquidem  from  si  ;  quoque  from  qu5. 

132.  A  long  vowel  is  regularly  shortened,  in  the  classical  period, 
before  final  -t  and  -m  and,  in  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  also 
before  final  r  and  1. 

Thus,  soror,  sister,  for  Plautus's  soror,  from  the  stem  soror-  (487)  ; 
utar,  /  may  use,  for  Plautus's  utar  (cf  utaris)  ;  bacchanal  for  Plautus's 
bacchanal ;  animal,  exemplar  from  the  stems  animal-  (530)  and  ex- 
emplar- (537);  but  the  long  vowel  is  retained  in  the  monosyllables  fur, 
thief,  sol,  sun ;  ponebat,  he  placed,  for  Plautus's  ponebat  (cf.  pSnebas)  ; 
iubet,  he  commanded,  for  Plautus's  iubet ;  eram,  /  was,  but  eras  ;  rexerim, 
/  may  have  ruled,  but  rexeris  (877) ;  -um  in  the  genitive  plural  of  -o-  stems 
is  for  -um  (462) ;  mensam,  table,  for  *mensam  from  the  stem  mensa- ; 
rem,  from  re-  (res),  spem  from  spe-  (spes). 

TRANSFER   OF   QUANTITY. 

133.  (r.)  In  a  few  cases  the  length  of  the  vowel  has  been  transferred  to 
the  following  consonant,  the  length  of  which  is  then  indicated  by  doubling 
it  (81):  as,  littera  for  litera,  LEITERAS  :  luppiter  for  lupiter ;  parricida 
for  pari-cida,  murder  of  a  member  of  the  same  clan  (*paro-,  member  of  a 
clan,  Doric  ira6s,  a  relative) ;  cuppa  for  cupa,  barrel.     The  legal  formula  si 
paret,  if  it  appear,  was  vulgarly  pronounced  si  parrel  (Festus). 

(2.)  Since  the  doubled  unsyllabic  i  (i)  between  vowels  (23;  166,  9; 
153,  2)  is  commonly  written  single,  the  vowel  preceding  it  is  often  errone- 
ously marked  long:  as,  aio  wrongly  for  aio,  /'.  e.  aiio,  /  say;  maior 
wrongly  for  maior,  /'. e.  ma\ior,  greater  ;  peior  wrongly  forpeior,  i.e.  peiior, 
worse  ;  eius,  of  him,  cuius,  of  whom,  huius,  of  him,  all  wrongly  for  eius, 
cuius,  huius  i.e.  ejius,  cuiius,  huiius  (153,  2).  In  all  these  words  the 
first  syllable  was  long  but  not  the  vowel. 

VARIATIONS    OF   QUANTITY. 

134.  (i.)  In  some  foreign  proper  names  and  in  a  very  few  Latin  words  the  quan- 
tity of  a  vowel  varied.     Vergil  has  Sychaeus  and  Sychaeus  within  six  verses; 
also  Asia  and  Asia,  Lavinium  and  Lavmius ;  so  also  glomus  (Lucr.),  glo- 
mus  (Hor  );  coturnix  (Plant.,  Lucr.),  coturnix  (Ov.). 

(2.)  Sometimes  such  variations  in  vowel  quantity  are  only  apparent :  thus,  the  occa- 
sional long  final  -e  of  the  active  infinitive  (dare,  promere)  has  probably  a  different 
origin  from  the  usual  -6.  For  metrical  lengthening,  see  2505. 

QUANTITATIVE   VOWEL   GRADATION. 

135.  The  same  stem  often  shows  a  long  vowel  in  some  of  its  forms  and 
a  short  vowel  in  others.     In  most  cases  these  variations  of  quantity  were 
not  developed  on  Latin  soil  but  inherited  from  a  much  earlier  period.     Such 
old   inherited   differences   in   vowel  quantity  are  called  quantitative  vowel 
gradation. 

22 


Vowel  Change.  [  1 36- 1 43. 


(i.)  Instances  of  this  are  pr5  for  *prod  (149;  cf.  prodesse)  and  pro-  (Greek 
wpd);  ne  and  ne-  in  nescius;  the  couples  rego,  I  rule,  rexi;  veho,  I  draw, 
vexi;  venio,  I  come,  veni,  where  the  long  vowel  is  characteristic  of  the  perfect 
stein  (862)  ;  voco,  I  call,  and  vox  voice;  rego,  /  rule,  and  rex,  ruler ;  Ieg5,  / 
read,  and  lex,  bill;  sedeo,  I  sit,  and  Sedes,  seat;  fides,  confidence,  and  Fldo, 
I  trust ;  dux  (cf.  duels),  leader,  and  duco,  I  lead,  where  verb  and  noun  are  differ- 
entiated by  the  quantity  of  the  root  vowel ;  and  many  others. 

(2.)  Sometimes  the  reduction  of  the  vowel  in  certain  forms  amounts  to  complete 
loss,  as  in  the  adverbial  ending  -is-  in  magis  (346,  363)  compared  with  the  compara- 
tive suffix  -ios,  -ios  (Nom.  -ior,  Genit.  -iSris) ;  in  the  oblique  cases  of  the  stem 
caron-  (nomin.  sg.  caro,  497),  where  the  suffix  becomes  -n-  (545),  genitive 
car-n-is;  in  the  suffix  -ter,  which  becomes  -tr-  in  all  cases  but  the  nom.  sg.(pater, 
patris,  etc.,  470,  487)  ;  in  the  feminine  -tr-i-c-  to  the  suffix  -tor- }  but  the  nom. 
sing.  Caecilis  (465)  for  Caecilios  is  probably  due  to  syncope. 


QUALITATIVE   VOWEL   CHANGES. 

136.  (r.)  i  before  an  r  which  goes  back  to  an  earlier  voiced  s  (154)  was 
changed  to  e  :  as,  cineris,  of  ashes,  for  *cinisis,  from  the  stem  cinis  (491) ; 
Falerii,  for  *Falisii,  cf.  Falis-cus ;  (formed  like  Etruria,  for  *Etrusia, 
cf.  Etrus-ci). 

(2  )  In  the  nominative  singular  of  compounds  like  iudex,  judge  (from  ius  and 
dicere),  comes,  companion  (from  com,  -with,  and  ire,  go},  the  i  of  the  second 
member  of  the  compounds  is  changed  to  e  .(470)  after  the  analogy  of  words  like 
artifex,  artisan,  etc.  (107,  d). 

137.  e  before  -gn-  became  i:  as,  ilignus,  from  the  stem  ilec-  (cf.  ilex). 

138.  e  before  the  guttural  nasal  (62)  followed  by  a  guttural  mute  was  changed 
to  i:  as,  septingenti,  from  septem ;  singuli,  from  the  stem  sem-  in  semel 
(for  the  assimilation   of  m  see  164,  3);  obtingo  (925),  /  attain,  for  *6btengo 
(104,  c)  from  *ob-tango  (104,  <?). 

139.  A  similar  change  took  place  in  the  group  -enl-  which  became  first  -inl- 
and then  -ill-:  as,  *signilum,  diminutive  of  signum  (for  i,   see   122,  c),   first 
changed  by  syncope  (in)  from  *signilum  to  *signlum,  then  to  *sigenlum 
(172,  3),  then  to  *siginlum,  and  finally  to  sigillum.0 

140.  o  before  nc  became  u:  as,  homunculus,  manikin  for  *homonculus, 
from  the  stem  homon-  (485);  nuncupare,  name,  for  *non-cupare  (non-  for 
nom-  (164,  3)  =  syncopated  nomen);   hunc,  him,  for  *honc,  from  hom-ce 
(662). 

141.  O  before  1  followed  by  any  consonant  save  1  was  changed  to  u:  as,  cultus, 
tilled,  for  *coltus,  from  colere  ;  multa,yf«^,  for  old  Latin  molta.     But  o  before 
11  is  retained  :  as,  collis,  hill. 

142.  e  before  guttural  1  (60)  was  changed  to  o:  as,  solvo,  /  undo,  from  *se- 
Iu5  (se-,  as  in  se-cordia,  luo  =  Greek  AV'<D);  culmen,  top,  for  *celmen,  from 
*cel!5  in  ex-cell5 ;  yolo,  /  wish,  for  *velo ;  but  e  is  preserved  before  dental  1 
(60):  as  in  velle,  velim  (773).     Before  1  followed  by  any  consonant  save  1  this  o 
changes  to  U  ( 141) :  as,  vult. 

143.  In  a  number  of  words,  notably  in  voster,  your,  vorsus,  turned,  vortex, 
eddy,  and  votare,  forbid,  the  forms  with  o  were  replaced,  about  the  second  century 
B.C.  by  forms  with  e  :  as,  vester,  versus,  vertex,  vetare  (Quint,  i,  7,  25). 

23      x 


1 44~  *  49«]  Words:  Sound. 


ASSIMILATION. 

144.  In  a  few  cases  a  vowel  is  influenced  by  the  vowel  of  a  neighbouring 
syllable :  as, 

nisi,  unless,  for  *nesi ;  iis,  for  eis,  to  them  (671,  674);  dii,  diis,  gods,  for 
del,  dels  (450) ;  nihil,  rut/UMgtiat  *nehil ;  homo,  man,  for  *hemo  (cf.  nemo, 
from  ne-hemo,  118);  see  also  104,  d ;  105,  /. 

QUALITATIVE  VOWEL   GRADATION. 

145.  The  same  stem  often  shows  different  vowels  in  different  forms.     In 
most  of  these  cases  this  difference  was  inherited  from  a  very  early  period 
and  continued  in  the  Latin.     Such  old  inherited  variation  of  the  quality  of 
the  stem-vowel  is  called  qualitative  vowel  gradation.     The  qualitative  vari- 
ations may  be  accompanied  by  quantitative  changes  (135). 

Often  the  verb  and  the  noun  are  thus  distinguished  by  different  vowels :  as,  tego, 
/  cover,  and  toga,  a  garment,  toga ;  precor,  /  beg,  and  procus,  suitor,  cf.  Eng- 
lish to  sing  and  a  song,  to  bind,  and  a  bond.  The  different  tenses  of  some  verbs  show 
a  like  gradation:  as,  capio,  I  take,  cepi  ;  facio,  I  make,  fed,  cf.  English  /  sing, 
I  sang;  I  bring,  I  brought.  The  same  occurs  in  derivation  :  as  doceo,  /  teach,  by 
the  side  of  decet ;  noceo,  /  harm,  by  the  side  of  nex  (nec-s).  The  two  vowels 
which  occur  most  frequently  in  such  gradation  are  e  and  O :  as  in  stems  in  -O-, 
domine,  dominus  (for  dominos) ;  as  variable  vowel  (824);  genos  (genus, 
107,  c)  in  the  nom.  sg.  by  the  side  of  *genes-  in  the  oblique  cases  (gen.  generis 
for  *genesis,  154) ;  honos  by  the  side  of  hones-  in  hones-tus  ;  modus,  meas- 
ure, for  *modos  (originally  a  neuter  -s-  stem  like  genus  (487,  491),  but  trans- 
ferred later  to  the  -o-  declension),  by  the  side  of  modes-  in  modes-tus,  seemly. 
See  187. 

(B.)   CONSONANT  CHANGE. 

146.  In  a  number  of  words  which  belong  more  or  less  clearly  to  the 
stem  of  the  pronoun  quo-  (681),  cu-  (157),  the  initial  c  has  disappeared 
before  u :  as, 

uter,  -which  of  the  two,  ubl,  -where,  unde,  -whence  (711).  For  the  conjunction 
Ut,  Utl,  that,  connection  with  this  pronominaj  stem  is  much  more  doubtful.  The 
c-  appears  in  the  compounds  with  si  and  ne  :  as,  si-cubi  (cf.  si-quidem,  si- 
quando),  si-cunde,  ne-cubi,  ne-cunde,  ne-cuter. 

147.  d  varies  in  a  few  words  with  1 :   as  old  Latin  dacruma,  tear,  for  later 
lacrima;  dingua,  tongue,  for  later  lingua;  odor,  smell,  by  the  side  of  oleo, 
/  smell. 

148.  Very  rarely,  before  labials,  final  d  of  the  preposition  ad  varies  with  r :  as, 
old  Latin  arfuerunt,  they  -were  present,  for  later  adfuerunt  (2257);    arvor- 
sum,  against,  for  advorsum.     The  only  instances  of  this  in  classical  Latin  are 
arbiter,  umpire,  and  arcesso  (970),  /  summon,  which  shows  r  before  a  guttural. 

149.  (i.)  Final  d  after  a  long  vowel  disappeared  in  classical  Latin  :    thus,  in  the 
ablative  singular  of  -a-  and  -o-  stems  (426).  and  in  the  ablative-accusative  forms 
med,  ted,  sed  (648).     The  prepositions  pr5  and  se  (1417)  originally  ended  in  -d 
which  is  still  seen  in  prodesse,  be  of  advantage,  prod-ire,  go  forth  ;  sed-itio, 
a  going-apart,   sedition.     According  to  the  grammarians,  the  negative  baud  pre- 
served its  d  before  vowels,  but  lost  it  before  consonants  (1450). 

24 


Consonant  Change.  [150-154. 


(2.)  Late  inscriptions  confuse  final  -d  and  -t :  as  FECID  (729),  ALIVT  for  aliud. 
But  in  very  old  Latin  -d  in  the  third  person  singular  seems  to  be  the  remnant  of  a 
secondary  ending  (cf.  the  Greek  distinction  of  primary  -TCU  and  secondary  -TO). 

150.  In  a  number  of  words  f  varies  dialectically  with  h.     In  some  of  these  f 
appears  to  have  been  original,  in  others  h  :  as,  old  Latin  fordeum,  barley,  for  classi- 
cal hordeum  ;  old  Latin  haba,  bean,im  classical  faba.     The  word  filum,  thread, 
appears  as  *hilum  in  nihil,  nothing,  for  *ne-hilum. 

151.  h  being  a  weak  sound  (58)  was  often  lost  between  two  like  vowels,  espe- 
cially in  rapid  utterance :  as,  nil,  nothing,  prendere,  take,  vemens,  rapid,  by  the 
side  of  nihil,  prehendere,  vehemens ;  and  always  nemo,  nobody,  for  *ne- 
hemo,  no  man. 

152.  In  some  words  h  between  two  vowels  is  not  original,  but  goes  back  to  a 
guttural  aspirate  gh.     Before  consonants  this  guttural  appears :  as,  veho,  /  draw , 
vectus  (953)  from  a  stem  vegh-,  traho,  /  drag,  tractus  (953)  from  a  stem 
tragh-. 

J53-  (*•)  Y  not  ^frequently  disappeared  between  two  like  vowels:  as,  ditior, 
richer,  for  divitior  ;  sis  (Cic.  O.  154),  for  si  vis  (774) ;  latrina,  for  lavatrina ; 
finisse,  for  finivisse  ;  deleram,  for  deleveram ;  and  later  also  in  perfect 
forms  in  which  the  preceding  and  following  vowel  differed:  as,  amasse,  for  ama- 
visse.  The  abbreviated  forms  of  the  perfects  in  -vi  (890)  were  common  in  Cicero's 
(O-  157)  and  Quintilian's  (i,  6,  17)  time,  v  also  disappeared  before  o  in  deorsum, 
seorsum. 

(2.)  Old  and  original  unsyllabic  i  (82;  83)  disappeared  everywhere  between 
vowels.  Wherever  unsyllabic  i  appears  between  vowels  it  represents  double  jy[,  and 
is  the  result  of  the  assimilation  of  g  to  i  (166,  9),  or  d  to  j,  (166,  9),  or  of  the  com- 
bination of  two  j's  :  as  in  ei-jus,  quoi.-ius  (eius,  quoius  =  cuius,  688).  See 
23  ;  166,  9.  In  all  these  cases  the  first  i  joined  to  the  preceding  vowel  (83)  formed 
with  it  a  diphthong,  and  the  syllable  is  thus  long  (133,  2). 

(3.)  The  combinations  of  unsyllabic  (83)  u  with  the  vowel  u  and  of  unsyllabic 
i  with  the  vowel  i  were  avoided  in  classical  Latin ;  see  52. 

(4.)  In  composition,  unsyllabic  (82)  i  after  a  consonant  became  syllabic  in  quo- 
niam,  since,  for  quondam  (164,  5),  and  etiam,  also,  for  et^am  (both  compounds 
with  iam). 

154.  In  early  Latin  s  between  two  vowels  was  voiced  (75),  and  in  the 
fourth  century  B.  c.  this  voiced  s  changed  into  r.  According  to  Cicero  (Fam. 
9,  21,  2)  L.  Papirius  Crassus,  consul  in  336  B.C.,  changed  his  family  name 
Papisius  to  Papirius.  Old  inscriptions  show  frequently  s  for  r:  as,  ASA, 
altar,  AVSELii.  This  change  of  intervocalic  s  to  r  plays  an  important  part 
in  declension,  conjugation,  and  derivation  :  as, 

Nominative  ius,  right,  genitive  iuris ;  spero,  /  hope,  derived  from  spes ; 
nefarius,  -wicked,  from  nefas;  gero,  I  carry,  from  a  stem  ges-  which  appears  in 
ges-sl,  ges-tus  (953) ;  er5,  /  shall  be,  from  the  stem  es-  in  esse ;  the  sub- 
junctive ending  -sem  in  es-sem  appears  as  -rem  after  vowels :  as,  starem  ;  the 
infinitive  ending  (894,  89;)  -se  in  es-se  appears  as  -re  after  vowels :  as,  legere, 
for  *legese,  to  read,  stare,  for  *stase,  to  stand.  Where  all  oblique  cases  show 
-r-  and  only  the  nominative  singular  -s,  the  latter  is  sometimes  changed  to  -r  by 
analogy :  as,  arbor,  tree,  honor,  honour,  for  original  arbos,  honos,  by  analogy 
to  the  oblique  cases  arboris,  arbpri,  honoris,  honor!,  etc.  (487,  488).  The 
final  -s  of  the  prefix  dis-  follows  this  rule :  as,  dir-imo,  /  take  apart,  for  *dis- 
emo  ;  but  an  initial  s-  of  the  second  member  of  a  compound  remains  unchanged: 
as,  de-sino,  /  stop. 


1 5  5  - 1 6 1 .]  Words  :  Sou  nd. 


155.  Wherever  intervocalic  s  is  found  in  classical  Latin  it  is  not  original,  but 
the  result  (a.)  of  earlier  -ns-  :  as,_  formosus,  handsome,  for  formonsus  (63); 
(b.)  of  earlier  -ss-  (170,   7):  as,  usus  for  *ussus,  use  (159);  causa,  thing,  for 
caussa  (Quint,  i,   7,  20)  ;  or  (c.)  it  occurs  in  borrowed  words  like  asinus,  ass. 
(d.)  There  are  a  few  words  in  which  an  r  in  a  neighbouring  syllable  seems  to  have 
prevented  the  change:  as  miser,  miserable  (173). 

156.  Before  the  o  described  in  142  qu  changed  to  c  :  as,  incola,  inhabitant,  for 
*inquola,  from  *inquela  ;  the  stem  quel-  appears  in  in-quil-inus,  lodger. 

157.  As  v  before  u  (107,  £•),  so  qu  was  not  tolerated  before  u,  but 
changed  to  c. 

Hence  when,  about  the  beginning  of  our  era,  the  o  of  quom,  when, 
sequontur,  they  followed,  changed  to  u  (107,  c),  they  became  cum,  secun- 
tur ;  thus  equos  but  ecus,  horse  (452)  ;  reliquom  but  RELICVM,  the  rest ; 
loquor,  /  speak,  but  locutus  (978).  Much  later,  in  the  second  century  of 
our  era,  the  grammarians  restored  the  qu  before  u  by  analogy  to  those 
forms  in  the  paradigm  in  which  qu  came  before  other  vowels :  as,  sequun- 
tur  for  secuntur  by  analogy  to  sequor,  sequeris,  sequitur,  sequimur, 
sequimini,  etc. ;  equus,  equum,  for  ecus,  ecum,  by  analogy  to  equi, 
equ5,  eque,  equorum,  equis,  equos. 

] 

stem 
que 
(170,  4). 

159.  When  in  the  process  of  early  word  formation  a  t  was  followed  by 
another  t,  the  combination  tt,  unless   followed  by  r,  changed  to   ss :  as, 
obsessus,  besieged,  sat  upon,  for  *obsettus,  from  #obsed-tus  (cf.  sedeo). 
After  long  vowels,  nasals,  and  liquids  this  double  ss  was  simplified  to  s 
(170,  7):  as,  usus  from  *ut-tus,  ttsed  (cf.  utor) ;  scansus,  climbed,  from 
*scant-tus  for  *scandtus  (cf.  scandS). 

In  this  way  arose  a  suffix  -sus  (906,  912)  for  the  past  participle  of  verbs  ending 
in  a  dental,  and  this  spread  to  other  verbs  (912)  :  as  mansus,  stayed,  from  maneS 
(1000),  pulsus,  pushed,  from  pello  (932).  The  regular  participles  of  these  two 
verbs  still  appear  in  the  derivative  verbs  mantare  and  pultare,  which  presuppose 
the  past  participles  *mantus  and  *pultus  (371).  if  the  double  tt  was  followed  by 
r  it  changed  tost:  as,  assestrix  from  *assettrix,  while  *assettor  changed  to 
assessor. 

160.  But  wherever  the  combination  tt  arose  in  historical  times  it  re- 
mained unchanged  :  as,  attineo ;  cette,  syncopated  for  ce"-d(i)te,  i.  e.  the 
particle  ce  (93,  3)  which  is  here  proclitic,  and  the  imperative  date,  give. 

161.  Initial  dv  (du)  changed  to  b,  unless  the  v  (u)  was  converted  into  the  corre- 
sponding vowel  :  as,  bis,  twice,  for  *duis  (cf.  duo) ;  Widens  for  *duidens,  by  the 
side  of  old  Latin  duidens  with  vocalic~u  :  bonus,  good,  for  duonus",  by  the  side  of 
trisyllabic  duonus;  bellum,  war,  for  *duellum,  by  the  side  of  duellum  with 
vocalic  u;   bes,   two  thirds,   for  *dues    (2427).     Cicero   (O.  1^3)   notes   that   the 
change  of  duellum  to  bellum  affected  even  the  proper  name  Duellius  (name  of 
the  admiral  who  won  the  naval  victory  over  the  Carthaginians  in  260  B   c.)  which  was 
changed  to   Bellius.      Plautus  always  scans  dyellum   disyllabic  with  synizesis 
(25°3)- 

26 


Consonant  Change.  [162-165. 


CHANGES   OF    CONSONANT   GROUPS. 

162.  Many  groups  of  consonants  undergo  changes  in  order  to  facilitate 
their  pronunciation  in  rapid  speech.     These  changes  involve  (a.)  Assimila- 
tion of  consonants;   (b.)  the  development  of  consonantal  glides;  (c.)  the 
loss  of  one  member  of  the  group ;  and  (d.)  the  development  of  a  vowel 
between  the  consonants. 

ASSIMILATION. 

163.  Of  two  successive  consonants  belonging  to  different  syllables  (175),  the  first 
is,  as  a  rule,  assimilated  to  the  second  (regressive  assimilation),  rarely  the  second  to 
the  first  (progressive  assimilation).     A  consonant  may  be  assimilated,  either  entirely 
or  partially,  to  another  consonant. 

Assimilation  is  very  common  in  prepositions  prefixed  to  a  verb. 

164.  PARTIAL  ASSIMILATION,     (i.)  A  voiced  mute  before  an  unvoiced 
consonant  became  unvoiced  :  as,  rex,  king,  for  *regs  (cf.  regis) ;   rexi,  / 
guided,  for  *regsi  (cf.  rego) ;  rectus,  guided,  for  *regtus;  scrips!,  I  wrote, 
for  *scribsi  (cf.  scribo) ;  scriptus,  written,  for  *scribtus  ;  traxi,  I  dragged, 
for  *traghsi,  tractus,  dragged,  for  *traghtus  (152).     The  spelling  did  not 
always  conform  to  this  pronunciation :  as,  urbs,  city,  pronounced  urps  (54) 
but  spelled  with  b  by  analogy  to  the  oblique  cases  urbis,  urbem,  etc. ; 
obtineo,  I  get,  pronounced  optined. 

(2.)  An  unvoiced  mute  before  a  voiced  consonant  became  voiced.  The  preposi- 
tions ob,  ab,  sub,  for  *Op,  *ap,  *sup,  owe  their  final  b  to  their  frequent  position 
before  voiced  mutes :  as,  ooduco,  abdico,  sub  divo.  The  forms  *op  (still  pre- 
served in  op-erio,  I  close,  1019)  *ap  (preserved  in  ap-erio,  I  open,  1019;  cf. 
Greek  aird)  and  *sup  (preserved  in  the  adjective  supinus,  supine)  were  then 
crowded  out  by  ob,  ab,  and  sub. 

(3.)  Nasals  changed  their  place  of  articulation  to  that  of  the  following  consonant. 
Thus,  dental  n  before  the  labials  p  and  b  became  labial  m  :  as,  imbibo,  I  drink  in, 
impended,  /  hang  over.  Labial  m  before  the  gutturals  C  and  g  became  guttural 
n  (62):  as,  princeps,  leader,  singuli,  severally  (the  original  labials  appear  in 
primus,  semel  (138));  hunc  for  *homce  (662).  Labial  m  before  the  dentals 
t,  d,  s  became  dental  n  :  as,  consecro,  /  consecrate,  from  com  (cum)  and 
sacro ;  tantus,  so  great,  from  tarn ;  quondam,  once,  from  quom;  tandem, 
at  length,  from  tarn.  But  sometimes  the  etymological  spelling  was  retained :  as, 
quamdiu,  as  long  as.  But  m  does  not  change  to  n  before  t  or  s  in  the  inflection 
of  verbs  and  nouns,  where  mt,  ms  develop  into  mpt,  mps  (167):  as,  sumptus, 
sumpsi,  from  sumo. 

(4.)  p  and  b  before  n  changed  to  m:  as,  somnus,  sleep,  for  *sop-nus  (cf. 
sopor);  omnis,  all,  for  *op-nis  (cf.  opes);  Samnium,  for  *Sabnium 
(cf.  Sabini). 

(5.)  m  before  unsyllabic  i  (i)  became  n  :  as,  quoniam  (with  vocalic  i  ;  153,  4), 
since,  for  *quoniam  from  quom  iam  (1882);  coniung5,  I  join  together,  for 
*comiungo. 

(6.)  c  between  n  and  1,  and  before  m,  changed  to  g :  as,  angulus,  corner,  with 
anaptyctical  (172)  vowel  u  for  *anglus,  from  *anclus  (cf.  ancus) ;  segmen- 
tum,  section,  from  the  stem  sec-  in  secare. 

165.  It  appears  that  at  a  very  early  period  the  neighbourhood  of  a  nasal  changed 
an  unvoiced  mute  into  a  voiced  one:  as,  e-mungo,  /  clean  out,  by  the  side  of 
mucus  ;  pangS,  I  fix,  by  the  side  of  pac-  in  pax,  peace  (gen.  pac-is). 

27 


1 66,  167.]  Words:  Sound. 


166.  ENTIRE  ASSIMILATION,     (r.)  One  mute  is  assimilated  to  another:  thus  p 
or  b  to  c :  as,  suc-curro,  /  assist ;  t  or  d  to  c  :  as,  sic-cus,  dry  (cf.  sit-is, 
thirst),  accipi5,  /  accept ;  d  to  g :  as,  agglutino,  /  glue  on  ;  t  or  d  to  qu:  as, 
quicquam,  anything  ;  t  or  d  to  p  :  as,  appellS,  I call ;  quippe,  why?  (1690). 

(2.)  A  mute  is  assimilated  to  a  spirant:  thus,  p  to  f  in  officina,  -workshop,  for 
*opficma,  syncopated  form  of  *opificma ;  d  to  f :  as,  affero,  /  bring  hither ; 
when  t  is  thus  assimilated  to  s  the  result  is  ss  after  a  short  vowel,  and  s  after  a  long 
vowel  (170,  7)  or  when  final  (171);  as,  in  the  -s-  perfects,  concuss!,  /  shook,  for 
*concutsi  (concutiS,  961) ;  messui,  I  mo-wed,  for  *metsui  (meto,  835) ;  suasi, 
lad-vised, for  *suatsi  (suade5,  1000);  clausi, 7^/n//,for*clautsi  (claud5, 958); 
haesi,  I  stuck,  forhaes-si  (868)  from  haerere,  stem  haes- (154);  in  the  same  way 
possum,  /  can,  for  *pOtsum  (cf.  pot-est,  752)  ;  prosum,  /  am  of  advantage, 
for  *protsum  (cf.  prod-esse);  legens,  reading,  for  *legents  (from  the  stem 
legent-,  cf.  genitive  legent-is).  An  s  is  never  assimilated  to  a  following  t :  as, 
haustus,  drained  (1014),  from  tne  stem  haus-,  present  hauriS  (154).  Forms 
like  the  rare  hausurus  (Verg.)  are  made  after  the  analogy  of  dental  stems. 

(3.)  One  spirant,  s,  is  assimilated  to  another,  f :  as,  difficilis,  difficult,  diff er5, 
I  am  unlike,  from  dis  and  facilis,  fero. 

(4.)  A  mute  is  assimilated  to  a  nasal:  thus  d  to  m  in  mamma,  woman's  breast, 
from  the  stem  mad- (cf.  made5,  1006);  ramus,  branch,  ramentum,  splinter, 
from  the  stem  rad-  (cf.  rado,  958)  with  simplification  of  the  double  m  after  the 
long  vowel,  d  to  n  in  mercenarius,  hireling,  from  the  stem  merced-,  reward, 
(for  mercennarius,  see  133,  i) ;  p  to  m  in  summus,  highest,  from  the  stem  sup- 
(cf.  super).  A  progressive  assimilation  of  nd  to  nn  belongs  to  the  Oscan  dialect, 
and  occurs  only  very  rarely  in  Latin  :  as,  tennitur  (Ter.),  distennite  (Flaut.)  See 
924;  950. 

(5.)  One  nasal,  n,  is  assimilated  to  another,  m :  as  immotus,  unmoved.  But 
an  m  before  n  is  never  assimilated :  as,  amnis,  river. 

(6).  Mutes  or  nasals  are  assimilated  to  liquids;  thus  n  to  1 :  as,  homullus, 
manikin,  for  *homon-lus  (cf.  homun-culus);  ullus  (274) ;  d  to  1 :  as,  sella, 
seat,  for  *sed-la  from  the  stem  sed-  (cf.  sedeo);  caelum,  chisel,  from  the  stem 
caed-  (cf.  caedo)  with  simplification  of  the  double  1  after  the  diphthong  (170,  7) ;  n  to 
r :  as,  irruS,  I  rush  in  ;  and  with  progressive  assimilation  n  to  a  preceding  1 :  as,  tollo, 
I  lift,  for*tolno  (833);  fallo,  /  cheat  (932);  pello,  I  push  (932).  ^  But  no  assimi- 
lation is  to  be  assumed  for  parricida,  which  does  not  stand  for  patricida  (133,  i). 

(7.)  One  liquid,  r,  is  assimilated  to  another,  1 :  as,  pellicio,  I  lead  astray  (956), 
for  *per-licio ;  agellus,  small  field,  for  *agerlos ;  pullus,  clean,  from  *pur- 
los  (cf.  purus,  clean). 

(8.)  A  spirant,  s,  is  assimilated  to  a  preceding  liquid  in  velle,  wish,  for  *velse, 
ferre,  carry,  for  *ferse  (the  infinitive  ending  -se  appears  in  es-se,  895)  ;  facil- 
limus,  easiest,  for  *facilsimus  (345);  sacerrimus,  holiest,  for  *sacersimus 
(344).  But  where  Is  and  rs  are  not  original  but  the  result  of  lightening  (170,  3  ;  10) 
they  remain  unchanged:  as,  arsi,  I  burnt,  for  *artsl  from  the  stem  ard-  (cf.  ardeo, 
1000) ;  alsl,  I  felt  cold,  for  *alcsi  from  the  stem  alg-  (cf.  algeo,  1000). 

(9.)  g  and  d  were  assimilated  to  a  following  unsyllabic  i  (i)  the  result  being 
(153,  2)  ii  (ij);  thuspeiior,  worse,  for  *ped-ior,  from  the  stem  ped-  (532),  whence 
also  the  superlative  pessimus  for  *petsimus  (166,  2);  maiior,  greater,  for 
*mag-ior  (the  stem  mag-  appears  in  magis) ;  aiio,  /  say,  for  *ag-io  (the  stem 
ag- appears  in  ad-ag-ium,  pr5d-ig-ium,  219).  These  forms  were  pronounced 
by  Cicero  with  doubled  j  (23),  and  traces  of  the  spelling  with  double  ii  are  still  found 
(23),  though  in  common  practice  only  one  i  is  written  (153,  2).  On  the  confusion  of 
syllabic  quantity  with  vowel  quantity  in  these  words,  see  133,  2. 

CONSONANTAL   GLIDES. 

167.  Pronunciation  of  two  successive  consonants  is  sometimes  facilitated 
by  the  insertion  of  a  consonant  which  serves  as  a  glide.     Such  insertion  is 
not  frequent. 

28 


Consonant  Change.  [168-170. 


In  inflection  a  p  was  thus  developed  between  m  and  s,  between  m  and  1,  and 
between  m  and  t  (elsewhere  mt  changed  to  nt,_see  164,  3):  as,  sumpsi,  /  took, 
sumptus,  taken,  from  sumere  for  *sumsl,  *sumtus  ;  and  in  the  corresponding 
forms  of  como,  demo,  promo  (953) ;  exemplum,  pattern,  for  *exemlum 
from  the  stem  em-,  take  (cf.  eximere,  103,  a). 


DISAPPEARANCE. 

1 68.  A  word  may  be  lightened  by  the  disappearance  of  an 
initial,  a  medial,  or  a  final  consonant. 

Disappearance  of  an  initial  consonant  is  sometimes  called  Aphaeresis,  of  a  medial, 
Syncope,  of  a  final,  Apocope. 

169.  INITIAL  DISAPPEARANCE,    (i.)  Initial  tl  changed  to  1:  as,  latus,  borne, 
for  *tlatus  from  tollo  (187,  917). 

(2.)  Initial  gn  changed  to  n :  as,  natus,  born,  for  earlier  GNATVS  from  the  stem 
gen-,  gna  (187);  nosco,  I  find  out,  for  gnosc5,  GNOSCIER  (897);  narus, 
knowing,  for  the  more  frequent  gnarus,  navus,  active,  for  gnavus.  Cf.  the 
compounds  co-gnatus,  co-gnosco,  i-gnarus,  i-gnavus  (170,  6)  which  pre- 
serve the  g.  But  Gnaeus  retained  its  G. 

(3.)  Initial  d  when  followed  by  consonant  i  (i),  disappeared:  as,  lovis,  lupiter, 
for  *DjiOvis,  *Diupiter.  Where  the  i  was  vocalic,  d  was  retained:  as,  dius. 

(4.)  Initial  stl-  first  changed  to  si  and  then  to  1:  as,  Old  Latin  stlocus,  place, 
stlis,  law-suit  (Quint,  \,  4,  16),  STLOC,  SLIS,  classical  locus,  Us;  also  latus, 
wide,  for  *stlatus.  That  a  form  *slocus  existed  is  proved  by  Ilic5  (698,  703) 
from  *in-sloco,  on  the  spot  (170,  2). 

170.  MEDIAL  DISAPPEARANCE,    (i.)  c,  g,  p,  and  b  disappear  before  s  fol- 
lowed by  an  unvoiced  consonant:  as,  sescenti,  six  hundred,  f.pr  *sexcenti  from 
sex ;  illustris,  resplendent,  for  *illucstris  from  luceo ;  disc5,  /  learn,  from 
*dicsco  for  *di-tc-sco   (834),  a  reduplicated  present  from  the  root  dec-  (cf. 
decet)  like  gigno  (from  the  root  gen-),  and  sidp  (for  *si-sd-5,  170,  2,  from  the 
root  sed-,  829).     Sometimes  prepositions  follow  this  rule:  as,  asportd,  /  carry  off, 
for  *absporto,  suscipio,  I  undertake,  for  *subscipio  (subs  formed  from  sub 
like  abs  from  ab ;    sub-cipio  gives  succipio) ;   occasionally  also  ecferp,  for 
exfero,  /  carry  out.      But  more  frequently  prepositional  compounds  remain  un- 
changed: as,  obscurus,  dark;  abscedo,  /  -withdraw.     In  some  words  thejost 
consonant  has  been  restored  by  analogy  :  as,  sextus,  sixth,  for  *sestus  (cf .  Sestius) 
after  sex  ;  textor,  -weaver,  for  *testor  after  texo. 

(2.)  s  before  voiced  consonants  was  voiced  (75)  and  is  dropped.  If  a  consonant 
precedes  the  s  this  is  dropped  also.  In  either  case  the  preceding  vowel  is  lengthened. 
Voiced  s  alone  is  dropped:  as,  primus,  first,  for  *pris-mus  (cf.  pris-cus); 
canus,  gray,  for  *casnus  (cf .  cas-cus) ;  adverb  pone,  behind,  for  *posne  (cf. 
pos,  1410);  dilabi,  glide  apart,  for  *dislabi ;  Idem,  the  same,  for  ISDEM  (678); 
iudex,  judge,  for  iusdex,  tredecim,  thirteen,  for  *tresdecim.  And  with  sub- 
sequent shortening  of  the  final  syllable  (130,  3)  abin,  goest  thozt?  for  abisn(e), 
viden,  seest  thou?  for  videsn(e).  Voiced  s  with  the  preceding  consonant  is 
dropped  :  as,  traduce,  /  lead  across,  trano,  /  swim  across,  for  transducd, 
transno  ;  but  in  these  prepositional  compounds  the  -ns  was  often  retained:  as, 
transmitto,  /  send  across ;  seni,  six  each,  for  *secsni ;  semenstris,  every  six 
months,  for  secsmenstris ;  seviri,  the  Board  of  Six,  for  secsviri ;  ala,  wing, 
for  *acsla  (cf.  ax-ilia,  Cic.  O.  153) ;  mavolo  (779)  for  magsvolofrom  magis- 
vo!5,  396 ;  toles  (plural),  goiter,  for  *tonsles  (cf.  tonsillae,  tonsils) ;  pilum, 
pestle,  for  *pinslum  from  pinsere,  crush ;  two  consonants  and  voiced  s  are 
dropped  in  scala,  stair,  for  *scand-sla  (cf.  scando). 


29 


Words:  Sound. 


(3.)  C  falls  away  when  it  stands  between  a  liquid  and  t,  s,  m,  or  n  :  as,  ultus, 
avenged,  for  *ulctus  from  ulc-iscor  (980) ;  mulsi  for  *mulcsi  from  both  mul- 
ge5, 1  milk,  and  mulceo,  /  stroke  ;  similarly  other  stems  in  -c  and  -g  (1000,  1014); 
quernus,  oaken,  for  *quercnus  from  quercus  ;  tortus,  turned,  for  *torctus 
from  torqueo  (tor  the  change  of  qu  to  c,  see  158);  for  fortis,  brave,  forctis  is 
found  in  old  Latin. 

(4.)  c  drops  out  when  it  stands  between  n  and  t :  as,  quintus,  fifth,  for  older 
quinctus  (2412),  from  quinque  (for  the  change  of  qu  to  C,  see  158;  for  the  long 
1  in  quinque,  see  122,  l>).  But  verbs  having  stems  in  -nc  or  -ng  retain  the  c  in 
their  past  participles:  as,  vinctus,  bound,  from  vincire  (1014)  ;  iunctus,  joined, 
from  iungere  (954).  In  pastus  (965)  c  has  dropped  out  between  s  and  t. 

(5.)  The  group  -ncn-  was  simplified  to  simple  -n-,  and  the  preceding  vowel  was 
lengthened:  as,  qumi,y£?£  each,  for  *quinc-m  (317);  co-mveS,  -wink  and  blink, 
for  con-cmveo. 

(6.)  n  before  gn  was  dropped  and  the  preceding  vowel  lengthened:  as,  i-gnos- 
co,  I  forgive,  for  *in-gnosco,  co-gn5sc5,  /  know,  for  *con-gnosc5.  In  this 
manner  (170,  5;  6)  arises  a  form  c5-  by  the  side  of  con-  (122,  e) :  as,  co-necto, 
co-nubium/cS-ligatus  (Gell.  2,  17,  8). 

(7.)  In  the  imperial  age,  ss  after  long  vowels  and  diphthongs  was  regularly  changed 
to  s  :  as,  clausi,  /  closed ;  usus,  used  (166,  2)  ;  but  always  esse,  to  eat  (769)  ;  11 
changed  to  1  after  diphthongs  :  as,  caelum,  chisel  (\66,  6)  ;  also  when  preceded  by 
i  and  followed  by  i  :  as,  villa,  country-place,  but  vilicus  (adject.)  ;  mille,  thou- 
sand, but  mllia  (642).  Elsewhere  11  was  retained  after  long  vowels :  as,  pullus 
(166,  7),  clean  ;  rallum,  ploughshare,  from  rad5  with  suffix  -lo-  (209).  In 
Cicero's  time  (Quint,  i,  7,  20)  the  spelling  was  still  caussa  (155,  l>),  matter  ;  cassus 
(93°)>  fallen  ;  divissi5  (cf.  912),  division.  Vergil  also,  according  to  Quintilian, 
retained  the  doubled  consonants,  and  the  best  manuscripts  of  both  Vergil  and  Plautus 
frequently  show  11  and  ss  for  later  1  and  s,  as  do  inscriptions :  as,  PROMEISSERIT, 
he  might  have  promised  (49  B.C.)  ;  ACCVSSASSE,  to  have  accused. 

(8.)  After  a  long  vowel  d  was  dropped  before  consonant  u  (v) :  as,  svavis, 
s-weet,  for  *svadvis  from  svad-  (cf.  svade5). 

(9.)  r  before  st  was  dropped:  as,  tostus,  roasted  (1004)  for  *torstus  from  the 
stem  tors-  (cf.  torreo  with  assimilated  -rs-,  166,  8). 

(10.)  -rts-  changed  to  -rs  :  as,  arsi,  I  burnt,  for  *artsi  (1000).  -rcsc-  changed 
to  -sc-  :  as,  posco,  I  demand,  for  *porcsco  (834). 

(n.)  In  ipse,  self,  for  *is-pse,  an  s  has  disappeared  before  -ps- 

(12.)  d  (t)  disappears  between  r  and  c :  as,  cor-culum  for  cord(i)-culum 
(275)- 

171.  FINAL  DISAPPEARANCE,  (i.)  A  word  never  ends  in  a  doubled  consonant: 
as,  es  for  *es-s,  thou  art,  which  Plautus  and  Terence  still  scan  as  a  long  syllable ; 
and  the  following  cases  of  assimilation :  ter  for  *terr  from  *ters  (cf.  terr-uncius, 
a  quarter  of  an  as,  a  farthing,  1272,  for  *ters-uncius,  166,  8)  ;  far,  spelt,  for 
*farr,  from  *fars  (489)  ;  fel,  gall,  for  *fell,  from  *fels  (482) ;  in  miles,  soldier, 
for  *miless  from  *milets  (cf.  Gen.  militis,  477)  the  final  syllable  is  still  long  in 
Plautus.  hoc,  this,  for  *hocc  from  *hod-c(e)  (the  neuter  *hod  from  the  stem 
ho-,  as  istud,  illud  (107,  c)  from  isto-,  illo-)  counts  as  a  long  syllable  even  in 
classical  poetry. 

(2.)  No  Latin  word  can  end  in  two  explosives:  thus,  final  t  is  dropped  in  lac, 
milk  (478)  ;  final  d  in  cor,  heart  (476). 

(3.)  When  final  s  was  preceded  by  r  or  1,  it  was  assimilated  to  these  liquids,  and 
final  rr  and  11  were  then  simplified  to  r  and  1.  See  the  examples  under  (i).  Wherever 
final  -rs  and  -Is  appear  they  are  not  original  but  the  result  of  the  disappearance  of  an 
intervening  consonant:  as,  puls,  pottage,  for  *pults  (533)  ;  pars,  part,  for  *p arts 
(533)  5  all  with  syncope  (in)  of  the  vowel  i  in  the  nominative  sg. 

3° 


Consonant  Change.  [i  72-1 74. 

(4.)  Original  final  ns  was  changed  to  s  and  the  preceding  vowel  was  lengthened : 
as,  sanguis,  blood  (2452),  for  *sanguins  from  the  stem  sanguin-  (486).  Wher- 
ever final  -ns  appears  it  is  not  original  but  the  result  of  the  disappearance  of  an  inter- 
vening consonant:  as,  ferens,  carrying,  for  *ferents,  from  the  stem  f erent- ; 
irons,  foliage,  for  *fronds,  from  the  stem  frond-. 

(5.)  A  dental  mute  before  final  s  is  dropped  :  as,  heres,  heir,  for  *hereds  (475); 
virtus,  virtue,  for  *virtuts  (477);  nox,  night,  for  *nocts  (533);  a  labial  or  gut- 
tural mute  is  retained :  as,  fornax  (x  —  cs),  furnace,  from  the  stem  fornac-  (531) ; 
lex,  law,  from  the  stem  leg-  (472)  ;  urbs,  city,  from  the  stem  urb-  (480);  ops 
from  the  stem  op-,  help  (480). 

DEVELOPMENT   OF    AN    ANAPTYCTICAL  VOWEL. 

172.  Certain  consonant  groups,  notably  those  containing  a  liquid,  are 
sometimes  eased  by  the  insertion  of  a  vowel  which  develops  between  the 
consonants.     This  is  called  Anaptyxis  (Greek  avairTva-fffw,  unfold).     It  is 
the  opposite  of  syncope  of  vowels  (no,  in). 

(i.)  The  suffix  -clo-  (242),  changed  to  -culo-,  being  thus  no  longer  distin- 
guishable from  the  diminutive  suffix  -culo-  (267) :  as,  pSculum,  cup,  for  ppclum 
(Plant.);  vehiculum,  carriage,  for  yehiclum  (Plant.).  Hut  -clo-  is  more 
common  in  Plautus  than  -culo-,  especially  after  long  vowels.  The  suffixes  -blo- 
(245),  and  -bli-  (294)  always  show  the  anaptyctical  vowel.  Its  colour  depends  on 
the  nature  of  the  1  (60)  :  as,  stabulum,  resting-place;  stabilis,  steady.  The  group 
-ngl-  also  changes  to  -ngul-  :  as,  angulus  (164,  6). 

(2.)  In  words  borrowed  from  the  Greek  an  unfamiliar  sequence  of  consonants  was 
so  lightened ;  as,  mina,  tnina,  for  *mna  (it.va) ;  and  in  Old  Latin  drachuma 
(Plaut.)  for  later  drachma,  drachma  (SpaXM1?) ;  techina,  trick,  from  Greek  T«?X»"?  ; 
Tecumessa  for  Tecmessa  (Te/c/otijo-aa). 

(3.)  Before  syllabic  (83)  1  and  r  a  vowel  is  developed  (in,  b) :  as,  incertus, 
uncertain,  for  *inc£tus  ;  facultas,  capability,  for  facltas.  Likewise  before 
syllabic  n  (139). 

DISSIMILATION. 

173.  (i.)  To  avoid  the  repetition  of  the  same  liquid  in  successive  syllables  1  is 
sometimes  changed  to  r :  as,  caeruleus,  sky-blue,  for  *caeluleus,  from  caelum  ; 
Parilia,  by  the  side  of  Palilia,  from  Pales ;  the  suffix  -clo-  appears  as  -crp- 
after  an  1:  as,  lavacrum,  bath,    simulacrum,  image  (241);   the  suffix  -ali- 
under  like  conditions  changes  to  -ari-';  as,  molare,  of  a  mill  (313),  but  augurale, 
of  an  augur. 

(2.)  In  a  few  cases  repetition  is  avoided  by  dropping  the  sound  once :  as,  prae- 
stigiae,  jugglery,  for  praestrigiae.  This  also  applies  to  the  spirant  s  followed 
by  a  consonant,  a  combination  which  is  not  tolerated  in  successive  syllables  :  as  in  the 
reduplicated  perfects  steti,  for  *stesti ;  spopondi,  for  *spospondl  (859),  where 
the  second  syllable,  and  in  quisquiliae,  sweepings,  for  *squisquiliae,  where  the 
first  syllable  was  lightened. 

CHANGES   WITHIN   COMPOUNDS. 

174.  The  final  syllable  of  the  first  member  of  compounds  (181)  some- 
times undergoes  certain  changes  by  analogy  to  other  compounds  : 

(i.)  The  final  -a  of  a-stems,  by  analogy  to  the  more  frequent  -o-stems,  usually 
changed  to  -O,  which  in  atonic  syllables  became  -i  (105)  :  as,  ali-ger,  -winged,  for 
*alo-ger  from  ala-. 

(2.)  Stems  in  -on-  substitute  -o-  for  -on-  by  analogy  to  the  -o-stems  :  as, 
homi-cida,  murderer,  for  *homo-cida  (105)  from  homon-  (Nom.  hom5). 

(3.)  Some  stems  in  -s  substitute  -o-  by  analogy  to  the  -o-stems  :  as,  foedi- 
fragus,  treaty-breaking,  for  *foedo-fragus  from  the  stem  foedos-  (Nom. 
foedus,  Gen.  foederis;  154). 

31 


1 7 5-1 8 3.]  Words:  Sound. 


SYLLABLES. 

175.  A  word  has  as  many  syllables  as  it  has  separate  vowels 
or  diphthongs.     The  last  syllable  is  called  the  Ultima  ;  the  last 
syllable  but  one  is  called  the  Penult ;  the  last  syllable  but  two 
is  called  the  Antepenult. 

176.  The  quantity  of  single  sounds  (e.  g.  the  quantity  of  a  vowel)  must 
be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  quantity  of  the  group  of  sounds  or  the 
syllable  of  which  the  single  sound  forms  a  part. 

LENGTH    OF   SYLLABLES. 

177.  A  syllable  is  long  if  its  vowel  is  long,  or  if  its 
vowel  is  followed  by  two  consonants  or  by  x  or  z  :  as, 

ducebas ;  volvunt.  In  ducebas  both  the  vowels  and  the  syllables  are 
long;  in  volvunt  the  vowels  are  short,  but  the  syllables  are  long;  in  cases 
like  the  last  the  syllables  (not  the  vowels)  are  said  to  be  long  by  position,  h 
does  not  count  as  a  consonant  (58)  and  qu  (or  qv,  27)  has  the  value  of  a 
single  consonant  only  :  thus,  in  adhuc  and  aqua  the  first  syllable  is  short. 

178.  In  prose  or  old  dramatic  verse  a  syllable  with  a  short  vowel  before 
a  mute  or  f  followed  by  1  or  r  is  not  long :  as  tenebrae.     In  other  verse, 
however,  such  syllables  are  sometimes  regarded  as  long.     In  compounds 
such  syllables  are  long  in  any  verse :  as  obruit. 

LOSS   OF   SYLLABLES. 

179.  The  first  of  two  successive  syllables  which  begin  with  the  same 
sound  is  sometimes  lost.     This  is  called  Haplology. 

Thus,  semodius  for  semimodius,  half  a  bushel ;  calamitosus  for  *ca- 
lamitatosus,  from  the  stem  calamitat-  (262)  and  suffix  -oso-  (336) ;  volunta- 
rius,  for  voluntatarius  (262,  309) ;  consuetude,  for  consuetitiido  (264).  See 
also  255  ;  379. 


B.     FORMATION. 

1 80.  FORMATION  is  the  process  by  which  stems  are  formed 
from  roots  or  from  other  stems. 

x8x.  A  word  containing  a  single  stem  is  called  a  Simple  word  :  as, 
magnus,  great,  stem  magnp-;  animus,  soul,  stem  animo-.  A  word  con- 
taining two  or  more  stems  is  called  a  Compound  word  :  as,  magnanimus, 
great-souled,  stem  magnanimo-. 

182.  Most    inflected   words   consist   of  two   parts:    a   stem,    which    is 
usually  a  modified  root  (195),  and  an  inflection  ending:  thus,  in  ductori, 
for  a  leader,  the  root  is  due-,  lead,  the  stem  is  ductor-,  leader,  and  -I  is  the 
inflection  ending,  meaning  y^r. 

ROOTS. 

183.  A  ROOT  is  a  monosyllable  which  gives  the  fundamental 
meaning  to  a  word  or  group  of  words. 

32 


Present  Stems  as  Roots.        [184-192. 


184.  A  root  is  not  a  real  word  ;  it  is  neither  a  noun,  naming  something, 
nor  a  verb,  denoting  action.     Thus  i  u  g-,yoke,  does  not  mean  a  yoke  nor  / 
yoke  ;  it  merely  suggests  something  about  yoking.     The  root  becomes  a  real 
word  only  when  an  inflection  ending  is  added,  or,  more  commonly,  both  a 
formative  suffix  and  an  inflection  ending  :  as,  iug-u-m,  a  yoke. 

185.  Roots  are   common  to  Latin  and  its   cognate  languages,   such  .  as 
the  Sanskrit  and  the  Greek.     When  a  root  is  named  in  this  book,  the  specific 
Latin  form  of  the  root  is  meant.     This  often  differs  somewhat  from  the  form 
of  the  root  which  is  assumed  as  applicable  to  all  the  cognate  languages. 

186.  Almost  all  roots  are   noun   and   verb  roots ;  that  is,  roots  with  a  ] 
meaning  which  may  be  embodied  either  in  a  noun  or  in  a  verb,  or  in  both. 
Besides  these  there  is  a  small  class,  less  than  a  dozen  in  number,  of  pro- 
noun roots.     There  are  many  words  which  cannot  be  traced  back  to  their 
roots. 

187.  A  root  sometimes  has  two  or  more  forms :  as,  f  i  d-  (for  f  e  i  d-), 
f  o  e  d-,  f  i  d-,  trust ;  g  e  n-,  g  n-,  sire  ;  t  o  1,  t  1,  bear  ;  see  135,  145. 

Thus,  fid-  is  found  in  fid-us,  trusty,  fid-ucia,  confidence,  fid-uci5, 
I  pledge,  fid-uciarius,  in  trust,  fid-ere,  put  trust  in,  fid- ens,  courageous, 
fid-entia,  courage;  foed-  in  foed-us,  pledge  of  faith,  foed-eratus,  bound 
by  a  pledge  of  faith;  fid-  in  fid-es,  faith,  fid-elis,  faithful,  fid-eliter, 
faithfully,  fid-elitas,  faithfulness,  per-fid-us,  faithless,  per-fid-ia,  faithless- 
ness, per-fid-iosus,  full  of  faithlessness,  per-fid-iose,  faithlessly,  gen-  in 
gen-itor,  sire,  gn-  in  gi-gn-ere,  beget,  gn-a-in  gna-tus,  son. 

1 88.  A  root  ending  in  a  vowel  is  called  a  Vowel  Root:  as,  d  a-,  give;  a  root  end- 
ing in  a  consonant  is  called  a  Consonant  Root :  as,  r  u  p-,  break.     Roots  are  con- 
veniently indicated  by  the  sign  V  •'  as,  >/t  e  g-,  to  be  read  '  root  t  e  g-.' 

189.  A  root  or  a  part  of  a  root  is  sometimes  doubled  in  forming  a  word;  this  is 
called  Reduplication:  as,  mur-mur,  murmur ;  tur-tur,  turtle-dove ;  po-pul-US, 
people;  ul-ul-Sre,  yell. 

PRESENT   STEMS   AS   ROOTS. 

190.  Many  nouns  are  formed  from  the  present  stems  of  verbs, 
which  take  the  place  of  roots.      Stems  thus  used  are  mostly  those 
of  verbs  in  -are  and  -ire. 

Thus,  from  ora-,  stem  of  orare,  speak,  are  formed  ora-tor,  speaker,  and 
5ra-ti5,  speech ;  from  audi-,  stem  of  audire,  hear,  are  formed  audi-tor, 
hearer,  and  audi-tio,  hearing. 

191.  Verbs  in  -ere,  and  those  in  -are  and   -ire  in  which  the    a   or   I 
is  confined  to  the  present  system  (868,  874)  usually  have  parallel  nouns 
formed  directly  from  a  root  :  as, 

doc-tor,  teacher,  doc-umentum,  lesson,  doc-ilis,  teachable  (y/doc-, 
docere) ;  sec-tor,  cutter  (Vsec-,  secare)  ;  dom-itor,  tamer,  dom-inus, 
master,  dom-itus,  tamed  (\/dom-,  domare)  ;  sarc-ina,  package  (Vsarc-, 
sarcire). 

192.  But  a  noun  is  sometimes  exceptionally  formed  from  the  present  stem  of  a  verb 
in  -ere:   as,   mone-ta,  mint  (monere);   ace-tum,  vinegar  (acere);    vire- 
tum,    a  green  (virere);    suade-la,  persuasion   (suadere) ;    habe-na,    rein 
(habere);    ege-nus,    needy   (egere);    vere-cundus,    shamefast   (vereri); 
vale-tudo,  health  (valere). 

3  33 


1 93  - 1 99.]  Words  :  Formation. 


193.  Verbs  in   -ere,  and  particularly  such   as  have  a   present    in   -no, 
-sco,  -t5  or   -i5  (832),  usually  have  their  parallel  nouns  formed  directly  from 
a  root  :  as, 

vic-tor,  conqueror  (^vic-,  vincere)  ;  incre-mentum,  growth  (^cre-, 
crescere);  pul-sus,  a  push  (\/pol-,  pellere). 

194.  Sometimes,  however,  nouns  are  formed  from  such  verb  stems,  and  not  from 
roots:  as,  lecti-stern-ium,  a  couch-spreading  (sternere,    Vster-,   stra-); 
vinc-ibilis,    conquerable  (vincere,   Vvic-);    pasc-uum,  pasture  (pascere, 
Vpa-);  pect-en,  comb  (pectere,  y/pec-);  fall-ax,  deceitful  (fallere,  Vfal-). 

STEMS. 

195.  A  STEM  is  that  part  of   a  word  which  contains  its  mean- 
ing, and  is  either  a  root  alone   or  more  commonly  a  root  with 
an  addition  called  a  Formative  Suffix. 

Thus,  in  the  word  ducis,  leader's,  the  stem,  which  is  identical  with  the 
root  due-,  means  leader;  a  root  thus  serving  as  a  stem  is  called  a  Root 
Stem  ;  in  ductoris,  le.iders,  the  stem  is  formed  by  the  formative  suffix  -tor-, 
denoting  the  agent,  attached  to  the  ^  d  u  c-. 

196.  New  stems  are  formed  by  adding  a  suffix  to  a  stem.     Thus, 
from  orator-,  speaker,  is  formed  by  the  addition  of  the  suffix  -io-,  a 
new  stem  6rator-io-,  N.  oratorius,  speaker's. 

197.  The  noun  has  usually  only  one  form  of  the  stem.     The  verb  has 
different  stems  to  indicate   mood  and   tense  ;    these  stems  are  all   based 
on  two  principal  tense  stems,  the  present  and  the  perfect  active. 

PRIMITIVES    AND    DENOMINATIVES. 

198.  I.  A  stem  or  word   formed  directly  from  a  root  or  a 
verb  stem  is   called  a  Primitive.     II.  A  stem  or  word  formed 
from  a  noun  stem  is  called  a  Denominative. 


(a.)  Primitives:  from  ^reg-,  reg-,  guide  :  rex,  stem  reg-,  king;  reg- 
num,  stem  reg-no-,  kingdom  ;  rectus,  stem  rec-to-,  guided;  regere,  stem 
reg-e-,  guide.  From  5ra-,  stem  of  orare,  speak:  orator,  stem  orator-, 
speaker;  oratio,  stem  5ra-tion-,  speech. 

(b.}  Denominatives:  from  noun  stem  reg-,  king:  reglna,  stem  reg-In3-, 
queen  ;  regius,  stem  reg  io-,  regalis,  stem  reg-ali-,  royal.  From  oration-, 
speech:  oratiuncula,  stem  oratiun-cula-,  little  speech.  From  reg-no-, 
kingdom:  regnare,  stem  regna-,  to  rule.  From  ius,  law:  iurare,  swear, 
stem  iiira  (154). 

(A.)     FORMATION    OF    THE    NOUN. 

WITHOUT   A    FORMATIVE    SUFFIX. 

199.  Some  roots  are  used  as  noun  stems  :  as,  due-,  N.  dux,  leader 
(Vduc-,  lead};  reg-,  N.  rex,  king  (\/re  g-,  guide]  ;  particularly  at  the 
end  of  a  compound  :  as,  con-iug-,  N.  coniunx,  yoke-fellow^  spouse  (com-, 
-,  yoke}-,  tubi-cin-,  N.  tubicen,  trumpeter  (tuba-,  ^c  an-,  flay}. 

34 


Formative  Suffixes  of  the  Noun.     [200—203. 


WITH   A   FORMATIVE   SUFFIX. 

200.  SIMPLE  formative  suffixes  are  vowels:  as,  -a-,  -o-,  -i-,  -u-; 
also  -io-,  -uo-,  (-vo-)  ;  or  such  little  syllables  as  -mo-,  -min-;  -ro-f  -lo-; 
-on-;  -no-,  -ni-,  -nu-;    -to-,  -ti-,   -tu-;    -ter-,  -tor-;    -unt-  (-nt-);  -es- 
(-er-),  -or-  ;    these  syllables  sometimes  have  slight  modifications  of 
fjrm.     COMPOUND  suffixes   consist  of  one  or  more  simple  suffixes 
attached  to  a  simple  suffix  :  as,  -tor-io-,  -ti-mo-,  &c.,  &c. 

201.  The  following  are  examples  of  noun  stems  formed  from  roots 
or  verb  stems  by  simple  suffixes  added  : 

STEM.        NOMINATIVE.        FROM.  STEM.        NOMINATIVE.        FROM. 

fug-a-  fuga,  flight  fug-,  fly  som-no-  somnus,  sleep    sop-,  sleep 

fid-o-  fidus,  trusty  fid-,  trust  pie-no-    plenus,/«//       ple-,^?// 

ac-u-  acus,/m  ac-,/0/«*  reg-no-    regnum,  realm  re  g-,  guide 

od-io-  odium,  hate  od-,/iate  da-to-      datus,  given       da-, 

pluv-ia-  pluvia,  rain,  plov-,  wet  lec-to-     lectus,  bed 

ar-vo-  arvom,  tilth  ar-,  till  gen-ti-     gens,  race 

al-vo-  alvos,  belly  al-,  mirture  sta-tu-     status,  stand 

sal-vp-  salvos,  safe  sal-,  safe  rec-tor-  rector,  ruler 

fa-ma  fama,  tale  i  a.-,  tell  e-unt-,     iens,  going 

teg-min-  tegmen,  coverts  g-,  cover  rege-nt-  regEns,  £*££'*£'  rege-, 

sel-la-  sella,  seat  s  e  d-,  sit  gen-er-    genus,  race        gen-,  beget 

err-on-  err5,  stroller  erra-,  stroll  Fur-6r-     furor,  madness  f  u  r-,  rave 

202.  Formative  suffixes  are  often  preceded  by  a  vowel,  which  in 
many  instances  is  a  stem  vowel,  real  or  presumed  ;    in  others,  the 
vowel  has  come  to  be  regarded  as  a  part  of  the  suffix  itself. 

Thus,  -lo-  :  filio-lo-,  N.  filio-lu-s,  little  son  (fflio-)  ;  hortu-lu-s,  little 
garden  (horto-,  105,  h)  ;  but  -ulo-  :  reg-ulu-s,  petty  king  (reg-)  ;  ger-ulu-s, 
porter  (\jg  e  s-,  bear),  -ci-  :  pugna-ci-,  N.  pugna-x,/«//  of  fight  (pugna-re)  ; 
but  -aci-  :  fer-ax,  productive  (^f  e  r-,  bear),  -to-:  lauda-to-,  N.  lauda-tu-s, 
/ra/j^(lauda-re);  but-ato-:  d_ent-atus,/^M<?t/(denti-).  -tu-:  equita-tu-, 
N.  equita-tu-s,  cavalry  (equita-re)  ;  but  -atu-:  sen-atu-s,  senate  (sen-). 
-la-:  suade-la-,  N.  suade-la,  persuasion  (suade-re,  192);  but  -ela-: 
loqu-ela,  talk  (>/l  o  qu-,  speak},  -tat-  :  civi-tat-,  N.  civi-ta-s,  citizenship 
(civi-)  ;  but  -itat-  :  auctor-ita-s,  authority  (auctor-).  -cio-  :  aedili-cio-, 
N  aedili-ciu-s,  of  an  aedile  (aedili-);  but  -icio-  :  patr-iciu-s,  patrician 
(pair-),  -timo-:  fini-timo-,  N.  fini-timu-s,  bordering  (fini-)  ;  but-itimo-: 
leg-itimu-s,  of  the  law  (leg-). 


, 

leg-,  lie 
gen-,  beget 
sta-,  stand 
reg-,  guide 
i-,  go 


203.  There  are  many  formative  suffixes  of  nouns.  The  commonest  only 
can  be  named,  and  these  may  be  conveniently  grouped  as  below,  by  their 
meanings.  Compound  suffixes  are  arranged  with  reference  to  the  last  ele- 
ment of  the  suffix  :  thus,  under  the  adjective  suffix  -io-  (304)  will  be  found 
-c-ip-,  -ic-io-,  -t5r-io-,  and  -ar-io-.  In  many  instances  it  is  difficult  to 
distinguish  between  simple  and  compound  suffixes. 

35 


204-209.]  Words :  Formation. 

I.     THE    SUBSTANTIVE. 

(A.)      PRIMITIVES. 

I.     THE    AGENT. 

204.  The  suffixes  -tor-,  -o-,   -a-,  -lo-,  and  -on-,  are  used 
to  denote  the  Agent :  as, 

STEM.  NOMINATIVE.  FROM. 

lee-tor-  lector,  reader  VI eg-,  read 

scrib-a-  scriba,  writer,  V  s  c  r  I  b-,  -write 

fig-ulo-  figulus,  potter  V  f  i  g-,  mould 

err-on-  err5,  stroller  erra-re,  stroll 

(i.)     -tor-  (N.  -tor). 

205.  -tor-,    N.  -tor,  or   -SOT-,    N.    -sor  (159,  202),  is  the  com- 
monest  suffix   of    the    agent ;    the   feminine   is    -tri-ci-,    N.    -tri-x. 
-tor-  is  sometimes  used    in  a  present  sense,   of  action  repeated  or 
occurring  at  any  time,  and  sometimes  in  a  past  sense. 

206.  (a.)  -tor-    (-sor-),  in  the  present  sense,  often  denotes  one 
who  makes  a  regular  business  of  the  action  of  the  root  or  verb. 

ora-tor-,  N.  ora-tor,  spokesman,  speaker  (5ra-re)  ;  lee-tor,  reader  (\/leg-, 
read}.  Workmen  and  tradesmen  :  ara-tor,  ploughman,  pas-tor,  shepherd, 
pic-tor,  painter,  su-tor,  shoemaker.  Semi-professional :  capta-tor,  legacy- 
hunter,  dela-tor,  professional  informer.  Government  officials :  cen-sor, 
appraiser,  censor,  impera-tor,  commander,  prae-tor,  (leader],  praetor,  dicta- 
tor, lie-tor.  Of  the  law  :  ac-tor,  manager,  accusa-tor,  accuser,  spon-sor, 
bondsman,  tu-tor,  guardian.  From  presumed  verb  stems  (202)  :  sen-ator, 
senator  (sen-)  ;  via-tor,  wayfarer  (via-)  ;  fundi-tor,  sltnger  (funda-).  -tro-, 
N.  -ter,  has  the  meaning  of  -tor- :  as,  aus-tro-,  N.  aus-ter  ( scorcher],  south- 
wester  (V  a  u  s-,  burn}. 

207.  In  the  present  sense  -tor-  (-sor-)  is  also  used  to  indicate  permanent  character, 
quality,   capability,  tendency,  likelihood:    as,   bella-tor,   a  man_of  -war,  -warlike; 
dellbera-tor,   a  man  of  caution;    cessa-tor,    a   loiterer;    deri-sor,   a   mocker, 
ironical;  consump-tor,  apt  to  destroy,  destructive  ;  aedifica-tor,  building-mad. 

208.  (b.)  -tor-    (-sor-),    in  a  perfect  sense,  is  used   particularly  in  old 
Latin,  or  to  denote  an  agent  who  has  acquired  a  permanent  name  by  a 
single  conspicuous  action.     In  this  sense  it  usually  has  a  genitive  of   the 
object,  or  a  possessive  pronoun  :  thus, 

castlga-tor  meus,  my  mentor,  or  the  man  -who  has  upbraided  me;  olivae 
inven-tor,  the  deviser  of  the  olive  (Aristaeus)  ;  reper-tor  Vltis,  the  author  of 
the  vine  (Bacchus) ;  patriae  libera-tores,  the  emancipators  of  the  nation. 

(2.)     -o-  (N.  -u-s),  -a-  (N.  -a)  ;  -lo-  (N.  -lu-s) ;   -on-  (N.  -6). 

209.  -o-  and  -a-  stems  may  denote  vocation  or  class  ;  many  are  compounds. 
-o-,    N.    -u-s:    coqu-o-,    N.'    coqu-o-s    or    coc-u-s,   cook    (\/coqu-,    cook}  ; 
causidic-u-s,  pleader   (causa-,    ^dic-,   speak},     -a-,    N.    -a:    scrib-a-,    N. 
scrib-a,   clerk   (^scrib-,  write]  \    agricol-a,   husbandman   (agro-, 

till}. 

36 


The  Substantive:  Action.       [210-219. 


210.  -u-lo-,  N.  -u-lu-s  (202):  ger-ulo-,  N.  ger-ulu-s,  bearer  (y'ges-,  bear); 
fig-lllu-S,  potter  ( y'  f  i  g-,  shape,  mould). 

211.  -on-,  N.  -o- :  err-5n-,  N.  err-6,  stroller  (erra-re);  especially  in  com- 
pounds: praed-6,  robber  (praeda-ii) ;  praec-5  for  *praevoco,  herald  (prae- 
voca-re);  CQmb'ib-O,  fellow-drinker  (com-,  ^  b i b-,  drink). 


II.     THE  ACTION. 

212.  The   suffixes   -a-,   -io-,    -ia-  ;   -min-  ;_  -i-6n-,  -ti-on-  ; 
-la-;   -ma-,    -na-  ;    -ta-,    -tu-  ;    -er-,  -or-,    -or-,    are  used  to 
denote  the  Action  :    as, 

STEM.  NOMINATIVE.  FROM. 

od-io-  odium,  hate  V°d-,  hate 

ac-tion-  actio,  action  V  a  g-,  do 

ques-tu-  questus,  complaint  V  qu  e  s-,  complain 

fur-  or-  furor,  rage  ^iur-,rave 

213.  Words  denoting  action  (1470)  in  a  substantive  form  have  a  wide 
range  of  meaning  ;  they  may  denote,  according  to  the  connection,  action  in- 
transitive, transitive,  or  passive,  complete  or  incomplete;  if  the  verb  denotes 
condition  or  state,  the  word  of  action  often  comes  very  near  to  denomina- 
tives of  quality  ;  furthermore  the  idea  of  action  is  often  lost,  and  passes 
over  to  result,  concrete  effect,  means  or  instrument,  or  place. 

(i.)     -a-  (N.  -a)  ;  -io-  (N.  -iu-m)  ;  -ia-  (N.  -ia),  -ie-  (N.  -ie-s). 

214.  -a-,  N.  -a,  is  rare  in  words  of  action:  fug-a-,  N.  fug-a,  flight  (y'fug-, 
fly)  ;    most   words   are  concrete  :    mol-a,   mill  (  J  m  o  1-,  grind)  ;   tog-a,   covering 

-,  cover). 


215.  -ur-a-,  N.  -ur-a,  is  rare:  fig-ura-,  N.  fig-ura,  shape  (y'f  i  g-,  shape). 

216.  -tur-a-,  N.  -tur-a,  or  -siir-a-,  N.  -sur-a  (159,  202),  akin  to  the  agent 
in  -tor-  (-sor-)  :  arma-tura-,  N.  arma-tura,  equipment  (arma-re)  ;  pic-tura, 
painting,  i.e.,  act  of  painting  or  picture  (\/  p  i  g-,  paint).     Words  parallel  with 
official  personal  names  (206)  denote  office:  cen-sura,  taxing,  censor's  office 
(cf.  censor-);  prae-tura,  praetorship  (cf.  praetor-). 

217.  -io-,  N.  -iu-m,  sometimes  denotes  the  effect  or  the  object. 
The  line  cannot  always  be  drawn  very  sharply  between  these  stems 
in   -io-  (many  of  which  may  be  formed  through  a  presumed  noun 
stem),  and  denominatives  in  -io-  (249). 

218.  (a.)  -io-  is  rarely  suffixed  to  simple  roots  or  verb  stems  :  od-io-,  N. 
od-iu-m,  hate,  hateful  thing,  hateful  conduct  (  v'o  d-,  hate)  ;  some  words  become 
concrete:  lab-iu-m,  lip  (^lab-,  lick). 

219.  (b.)  Most  primitives  in  -io-  are  compounds:  as,  adag-iu-m,  proverb 
(ad,  Va§->  speak)  ;  ingen-iu-m,  disposition  (in,  Vgen-,  beget)  \  discid-iu-m, 
separation,  exscid-iu-m,  destruction  (di-,  ex,  \fscid-,  cleave)  ;  incend-m-m, 
conflagration  (in,  y/cand-,  light);   obsequ-iu-m,  compliance  (ob-,   \/sequ-, 
follow)',    conloqu-iu-m,  parley   (com-,    Vloqu-,   talk)',    obsid-iu-m,   sieg* 
(ob,  V  s  e  d-,  sit). 

37 


2  2  o—  228.]  Words  :  Formation. 

220.  -t-io-,   N.  -t-iu-m:   spa-tio-,   N.  spa-tiu-m,  stretch  (Jspa-,  span, 
stretch);    solsti-tiu-m,  sun-stand,   solstice   (sol-,    ^Sta-,    stand")  ;    ini-tiu-m,  a 
beginning  (in,   ^i-,  go). 

221.  -ia-,  N.  -ia:  fur-ia-,  N.  fur-iae,  plural,  ravings,  madness  (s/f  ur-, 
rave)  ;    pluvia,    rain    (V  p  1  u  v-,    rain).      Most    sterns    in    -ia-    are    com- 
pounds, used  in  the  plural  only,  often  with  concrete  or  passive  meaning  : 
delic-iae,    allurements,   pet    (de,    V*ac-,    allure)  ;    excub-iae,  patrol    (ex, 
Vcub-,  lie}. 

222.  -ie-,   N.  -ie-s,  a  variation  of  -ia-,  usually  denotes  result  (604)  :  ser-ie-, 
N.  ser-ie-s,  row  (^ser-,  string);  spec-ie-s,  sight,  looks  (./spec-,  spy,  see); 
pernic-ie-s,  destruction  (per,  ^  n  e  c-,  murder). 

223.  -t-ie-,  N.  -t-ie-s  :   permi-tie-,  N.    permi-tie-s,  -wasting  away  (per, 
^  m  i-,  less). 

(2.)  -min-  (103)  (N.  -men)  ;  -din-,  -gin-  (105,  g)  (N.  -do,-  go). 

224.  -min-,  N.  -men  (202),  usually  active,  occasionally  passive,  is 
very  common  ;  it  sometimes  denotes  the  means,  instrument,  or  effect. 

certa-min-,  N.  certa-men,  contest  (certa-re)  ;  cri-men,  charge  (\fcer-, 
c  ri-,  sift)  ;  spec-imen,  what  is  inspected,  sample  (^  s  p  e  c-,  spy,  see)  ;  lu-men, 
light  (^1  u  c-,  light)  ;  flu-men,  flood,  stream  (\'  f  1  u  gu-,  flow)  ;  ag-men,  what 
is  led,  train  (^ag-,  lead).  Words  in  -min-  often  mean  nearly  the  same  as 
those  in  -mento-  (239)  :  as,  leva-men,  leva-mentu-m,  lightening  ;  teg- 
umen,  teg-umentu-m,  covering. 

225.  e-din-,  -i-din-  (202):  -e-din-,  N.  -e-d5:   grav-edin-,  N.  grav-edo, 
(heaviness),  catarrh  (y/grav-,  heavy),     -i-din-,   N.  -l-do  :    CUp-ldin-,  N.  cup- 
Id5,  desire  (^cup-,  desire);   lib-ido,  whim  (y/lib-,  yearn). 


226.  -a-gin-,   -i-gin-   (202):   -a-gin-,   N.  -a-go  :    vora-gin-,   N.   vora-go, 
gulf   (vora-re)  ;    ima-go,    representation    (*ima-,    cf.    imitari).      -i-^gin-,    N. 
-I-g5:    orl-gin-,    N.    orl-gO,  source   (ori-ri)  ;    cal-lgo,  darkness  (^cal-,  hide). 
A  Tew  denominatives  have  -u-gin-,   N.   -u-go  :   aer-ugin-,   N.  aer-ug5,  copper 
rust  (aer-). 

(3.)     -i-on-  (N.  -i-6)  ;  -ti-5n-  or  -si-6n-  (N.  -ti-6  or  -si-o). 

227.  -i-6n-,  N.  -i-6:  opin-ion-,  N.  opin-io,  notion  (opina-ri)  ;  condic-i5, 
agreement  (com-,  ^d  i  C-,  say)  ;  contag-io,  touch  (com-,   ^  t  a  g-,  touch).     Some 
words  are  concrete  :  leg-io,  pick,  legion  (  ^1  e  g-,  pick).     A  few  are  denominatives  : 
commun-io,  mutual  participation  (communi-). 

228.  -ti-6n-,  N.  -ti-o,  or  -si-6n-,  N.  -si-o  (159,  202),  is  very 
common,  and  may  denote  action  either  intransitive,  transitive,  or 
passive,  or  the  manner  or  possibility  of  action. 

cogita:tion-,  N.  cogita-tio,  a  thinking,  a  thought  (cogita-re)  ;  existima- 
tio,  judging,  reputation  (exlstima-re)  ;  coven-tio,  commonly  con-tio,  meet- 
ing, speech  (com-,  \|  v  e  n-,  come)  ;  depul-sio,  warding  off  (  de-,  V  p  o  1-,  push  )  ; 
oppugna-tio,  besieging,  method  of  besieging  (oppugna-re)  ;  occulta-tio, 
hiding,  chance  to  hide,  possibility  of  hiding  (occulta-re).  Some  words  denote 
the  place  where  :  sta-tio,  a  stand  (V  st  a-,  stand)  ;  some  become  collectives  or 
concretes:  saluta-tio,  greeting,  to>ee,  guests  at  a  levee  (saluta-re);  muni-tio, 
fortification,  i.e.,  act  of  fortifying  or  works  (mum-re). 

38 


The  Substantive:    Action.       [229-237. 


(4.)     -e-la-  (N.  -e-la),  -te-la-  (N.  -te-la). 

229.  -e-la-,  N.  -e-la  (202) :  suade-la-,  N.  suade-la,  persitasion  (suade-re) : 
loqu-ela,  talk  (^  1  o  qu-,  talk} ;  quer-ela  or  quer-ella,  complaint  (^qu  e  s-,  com- 
plain).   Some  words  are  concrete :  cande-la,  candle  (cande-re). 

230.  -te-la-,  N.  -te-la_-:  conrup-tela-,  N.  conrup-tela,  a  seduction  (com-, 
J  T  u  p-,  spoil,  ruin} ;  tu-tela,  protection  (y  t  U-,  watch,  protect}. 

(5.)     -ma-  (N.  -ma),  -na-   (N.  -na)  ;   -tri-na-  (N.  -tri-na). 

231.  -ma-  and  -na-  are  rare,  and  denote  result  or  something  concrete,     -ma-, 
N.  -ma:   fa-ma-,  N.  fa-ma,  tale  (y/fa-.te//);   -na,  N.  -na :  ur-na,  pitcher 
(y/urc-  in  urc-eus,  pitcher,  170,3);  with  original  suffix  -sna  (170,2):  lu-na, 
moon  (v  1  u  C-,  light);  scala,  stairs  (y  s  C  an  d-,  mount). 

232.  -ina-,    N.    -ina:    ang-ina-,    N.  angina,  choking  (Vang-,  choke) \ 
pag-ina,  page  (\/pag-,  fasten] ;    sarc-ina,  package  (\/sarc-,  patch}.  ^  -ina-, 
N.   -ina  (202):    ru-ina-,    N.  ru-ina,  downfall  (>/ru-,  tumble)',    -ina-  is  very 
common  in  denominatives:    pisc-ina,  fish-pond  (pisci-). 

233.  -tri-na-,  N.  -tri-na,  akin  to  the  agent  in  -tor-:  doc-trina-,  N.  doc- 
trina,  teaching,  either  the  act  of  teaching  or  what  is  taught  (\/doc-,  teach} ; 
su-trlna,  shoemaking,  shoemaker's  trade,  shoemaker's  shop  (\/SU-,  sew}. 

(6.)     -ta-  or  -sa-  (N.  -ta  or  -sa)  ;  -tu-  or  -su-  (N.  -tu-s  or  -su-s). 

234.  -ta-,  N.  -ta,  or  -sa-,   N.  -sa  (159),  is  rare,  and  sometimes  denotes  result, 
or  something   concrete:    as,   no  ta-,    N.    no-ta,   mark   (Jgno-,   know);   por-ta 
(passage),  gate  (y/por-,  fare);   fos-sa,  ditch  (yffod-,  dig);    repul-sa,  repulse 
(re-,  y/  p  o  1-,  push) ;  offen-sa,  offence  (ob,  ^  f  e  n  d-,  strike). 

235.  -tu-,  N.  -tu-s,  or  -su-,  N.  -su-s  (159,  202),  denotes  the  action  and  its 
results:  ques-tu-,  N.  ques-tu-s,  complaint  (\/ques-,  complain);  gem-itus, 
groan  (<l gem-, groan}.     Stems  in  -a-tu-,  N.  -a-tu-s,  sometimes  denote  office 
or  officials  :  consul-atu-,  N.  consul-atu-s,  being  con siil,  consulship  (consul-) ; 
sen-atu-s,  senate  (sen-),     -tu-  is  seldom  passive:  vi-su-s,  active,  sight,  pas- 
sive, looks  (^vid-,  see) ;  appara-tu-s,  preparation,  either  a  getting  ready,  or 
what  is  got  ready   (appara-re).      The   supine    (2269)    i§   the   accusative   or 
ablative  of  substantives  in  -tu-  (-su-).     Most  words  in  -tu-  (-su-)  are  defective 
in  case,  and  are  chiefly  used  in  the  ablative  (430). 

(7.)    -er-  for  -es-  (N.  -us)  ;  -or-  (N.  -or). 

236.  Neuter  stems  in  -er-  (for  -es-),  or  in  -or-  (for  -os-),  N.  -us,  denote 
result,  or  have  a  concrete  meaning  :  gen-er-,  N.  gen-us,  birth,  race  (V^e  n-, 
beget);    op-er-,    N.   op-us,   work   (\/op-,   work) ;   frig-or-,    N.   frig-us,   cold 
(\/frig-,  cold),     -es  with  lengthened  e  is  sometimes  used  in   the  nomina- 
tive  of    gender    words:    as,    nub-es,    cloud    (^nub-,    veil) ;    sed-es,    seat 
(\/sed-);    vat-es,   bard,     -n-er-,    -n-or-,    N.   -n-us :   vol-ner-,    N.   vol-nus, 
wound  (\/vol-,  tear);   fac-inor-,  N.  fac-inus,  deed  (\/fac-,  do,  202). 

237.  -or-  (for  an  older  form  -6s-,   154),   N.  -os,  commonly  -or, 
masculine,   denotes   a   state.      Many   substantives   in    -or-    have  a 
parallel  verb,  usually  in  -ere  (368),  and  an  adjective  in  -ido-  (287). 

39 


238-245-]  Words:   Formation. 


od-6r-,  N.  od-6s  or  od-or  smell  (Vod-,  smell,  cf.  ole-re) ;  pall-or,  pale- 
ness (cf.  palle-re) ;  cal-or,  'warmth  (cf.  cale-re);  urn -or,  moisture  (cf. 
ume-re) ;  am-or,  love  (cf.  ama-re) ;  ang-or,  choking,  anguish  (Vang-, 
choke}. 

III.     THE    INSTRUMENT    OR    MEANS. 

238.  The  suffixes  -men-to,  -tro-,  -cro-  or  -culo,  -lo-,  -bro- 
or  -bulo-,  are  used  to  denote  the  Instrument  or  Means :  as, 

STEM.  NOMINATIVE.  FROM. 

orna-mento-  ornamentum,  embellishment  6rna-re,  embellish. 

ara-tro-  aratrum,  plough  ara-re,  plough 

po-culo-  poculum,  drinking-cup  Vpo-,  drink 

pa-bulo-  pabulum,  fodder  <jpa-,feed 

239.  -men-to-,   N.   -men-tu-m    (202),   is  one  of  the  commonest 
suffixes ;  it  sometimes  denotes  result  of  action,  rarely  action  itself. 

pig-mento-,  N.  pig-mentu-m,  paint  (V  p  i  g-,  paint]  ;  experi-mentu-m, 
test  (experi-ri) ;  6rna-mentu-m,  ornament  (orna-re);  frag-mentu-m,  frag- 
ment (\/frag-,  break);  cae-mentu-m,  quarried  stone  (\/caed-,  cut] ;  incre- 
mentu-m,  growth  (in,  Vcfe-,  grow);  al-imentu-m,  nourishment  l^al-, 
nurture};  doc-umentu-m,  lesson  (\/doc-,  teach}.  See  also  -min-  (224). 
-men-ta-,  N.  -men-ta,  F.,  is  rare:  ful-menta,  prop  (Vfulc-,  prop}\ 
ra-menta,  scraping  (^rad-,  scrape}. 

240.  -tro-,   N.   -tru-m  (202)  :    ara-tro-,  N.  ara-tru-m,  plough   (ara-re) ; 
fer-etru-m,  bier  (Vfer-,  bear} ;  ros-tru-m,  beak  (y'r5d-,  peck}.     Sometimes 
-stro-:    mon-stru-m,  warning  (\/mon-,  mind);  lu-stra,   plural,  fen,  jungle 
(\/lu-,  wash} ;    lu-stru-m,  purification   (\/lou-,  wash},      -tra-,    N.   -tra,  F. : 
mulc-tra-,    N.   mulc-tra   (also   mulc-tru-m,    Ne.),   milking-pail  (Vmulg-, 
milk),     -es-tra- :   fen-estra,  window. 

241.  -cro-,   N.  -cru-m,  used  when  an  1  precedes :  ful-cro-,  N.  ful-cru-m, 
couch-leg  (y/f ulc-,/ro/).     -cro-  sometimes  denotes  the  place  where:    ambula- 
cru-m,  promenade  (ambula-re);  sometimes  the  effect :  simula-cru-m,  likeness 
(simula-re). 

242.  -culo-,   N.  -culu-m    (202):    po-culo-,   N.   po-culu-m,  cup   (Vpo-, 
drink);    fer-culu-m,   tray   (Vfer-,   bear},     -culo-    sometimes    denotes    the 
place  where  :  cub-iculu-m,  sleeping-room  (\/cub-,  lie}  ;  cena-culu-m,  origi- 
nally dining-room,  usually  garret  (cena-re). 

243.  -u-lo-,  N.  -u-lu-m-  (202):   chiefly  after  c  or  g:  vinc-ulo-,  N.  vinc- 
ulu-m,  bond  (y'vinc-,  bind);   cing-ulu-m,  girdle  (Jcing-,  gird),     -u-la-, 
N.  -u-la,  F.,  reg-ula,  rule  (^re  g-,  guide). 

244.  -bro-,    N.  -bru-m    (202):    cri-bro-,    N.    cri-bru-m,   sieve    (>/cer-, 
cri-,  sift) ;  la-bru-m,  wash-basin  (\/lav-,  wash),     -bra-,  N.  -bra,  F. :  dola- 
bra,  chisel,  mattock  (dola-re)  ;    late-bra,  hiding-place  (VI  at-,  hide). 

245.  -bulo-,  N.  -bulu-m  (202):  pa-bulo-,  N.  pa-bulu-m,  fodder  (Vpa-, 
keep} ;  vena- bulu-m,  hunting-spear  (vena-rl) ;  pat-ibulu-m,  pillory  (Vpat-, 
stretch},    -bulo-  sometimes  denotes  the  place  where :  sta-bulu-m,  standing- 
place,  stall  (Vsta-,  stand),     -bula-,  N.  -bula,  F.,  rare  :  su-bula,  awl 

sew);  ta-bula,  board  (\/ta-,  stretch) ;  fa-bula,  talk  (\/fa-,  talk). 

40 


The  Substantive:    Quality.     [246-254. 

(B.)     DENOMINATIVES. 
I.     THE    QUALITY. 

246.  The  suffixes    -io-,    -ia- ;    -ta-,    -tat-,   -tut-,   -tu-din-, 

are  used  to  denote  the  Quality :  as, 

STEM.  NOMINATIVE.  FROM. 

conleg-io-  conlegium,  colleagueship  conlega-,  N.  conlega,  colleague 

audac-ia-  audacia,  boldness  audaci-,  N.  audax,  bold 

civi-tat-  civitas,  citizenship  civi-,  N.  civis,  citizen 

magni-tiidin-  magnitude,  greatness        magno-,  N.  magnus,  great 

247.  These  abstracts   are   feminine,  and   come   chiefly  from  adjectives 
or  participles,  except  those  in  -io-,  which  are  neuters,  and  come  mostly  from 
substantives.     Sometimes  the  same  stem  takes  two  or  more  of  these  suffixes  : 
as,  clari-tat-  or  clari-tudin-,  brightness  (claro-);  iuven-tut-,  in  poetry  iuven- 
tat-  or  iuven-ta-,  yotith  (iuven-). 

(i.)     -io-  (N.  -iu-m),  -ia-  (N.  -ia),  -ie-  (N.  -iSs). 

248.  -ie-  sometimes  occurs  as  collateral  form  to  -ia-  (604)  ;  -io-  or 
-ia-  is  sometimes  attached  to  other  suffixes  :  thus,  -t-io-,  -t-ia-  (-t-ie-)j 
-mon-io-,  -mon-ia- ;  -cin-io-. 

249.  -io-,  N.  -iu-m,  chiefly  used  in  compounds,  denotes  belonging 
to,  with  a  very  wide  range  of  meaning ;    many  of  these  words  are 
clearly  neuter  adjectives  in  -io-  (305).     Suffixed  to  personal  names  -io- 
often  denotes  the  condition,  action,  or  employment,  which  gives  rise 
to  the  name  ;  this  meaning  sometimes  passes  over  to  that  of  result, 
relation  of  persons,  collection  of  persons,  or  place. 

250.  (a.)  From  simple  noun  stems:  sen-io-,  N.  sen-iu-m,  feeble  old  age 
(sen-);   somn-iu-m,  dream  (somno-) ;   sav-iu-m,  love-kiss  (suavi-) ;    silent- 
iu-m,  silence  (silenti-)  ;  crepund-ia,  plural,  rattle  (*crepundo-) ;   mendac- 
iu-m,  lie  (mendaci-);   s5lac-iu-m,  comfort  (*solaci-,  comforting}. 

251.  (/>.)  Direct  compounds    (377):    aequinoct-iu-m,  equinox  (aequo-, 
nocti-);   contubern-iu-m,  companionship  (com-,  taberna-) ;   privileg-iu-m, 
special  enactment  (privo-,  leg-). 

252.  (c.}  Indirect  compounds  (377),  chiefly  from  personal  names  :  consil- 
iu-m,  deliberating  together,  faculty  of  deliberation,  conclusion,  advice,  delibera- 
tive body  (consul-)  ;   auspic-iu-m,  taking  auspices,  auspices  taken   (auspic-) ; 
remig-iu-m,   rowing,   oars,   oarsmen    (remig-) ;    conleg-iu-m,   colleagueship, 
corporation  (conlega-)  ;    aedific-iu-m,  building  (*aedific-,  builder] ;  perfug- 
iu-m,  asylum  (perfuga-). 

253.  -t-io-  N.  -t-iu-m,  rare :    servi-tio-,   N.   servi-tiu-m,   slavery,  slaves 
(servo-) ;  calvi-tiu-m,  baldness  (calvo-). 

254.  -mon-io-,  N.  -mon-iu-m  (202):  testi-monio-,  N.  testi-moniu-m, 
evidence  (testi-);  matr-im5niu-m,  marriage  (matr-) ;  patr-im6niu-m,/o/r/'- 
mony  (patr-). 

2*  41 


255-265-]  Words:  Formation. 


255.  -_cin-io-,  N.  -cin-iu-m,  rare  :  latrS-cinio-,  N.  latro-ciniu-m,  rob- 
lery  (latron-) ;  patro-cmiu-m,/r0^Y/0«  (patrono-). 

256.  -ia-,  N.  -ia,  is  very  common  indeed,  forming  abstracts  from 
nouns,  mostly  adjectives  or  present  participles. 

audac-ia-,  N.  audac-ia,  boldness  (audaci-) ;  miser-ia,  wretchedness  (mis- 
ero-);  abundant-ia,  plenty  (abundant!-);  scient-ia,  knowledge  (scienti-); 
milit-ia,  warfare  (milit-)  ;  victor-ia,  victory  (victor-);  mater-ia,  timber 
(mater-) ;  custod-ia,  guard  (cust5d-). 

257.  -ie-,  N.  -ie-s :  pauper-ie-,  N.  pauper-ie-s,  moderate  means  (pau- 
per-).    Most  stems  in  -ie-  are  primitive  (222). 

258.  -t-ia-,  N.  -t-ia,  is  suffixed  to  a  few  adjective  stems,  chiefly  in  -o: 
iusti-tia-,  N.  iusti-tia,  Justice  (iusto-) ;  mali-tia,  wickedness  (malo-) ;  pudici- 
tia,  shamefastness  (pudico-)  ;    tristi-tia,  sadness  (tristi-). 

259.  -t-ie-,  N.  -t-ie-s,  particularly  as  a  collateral  form  of  -t-ia-  in  the  N.> 
Ac.,  and  Ab.  singular  (604)  :  molli-tie-,  N.  molli-tie-s,  softness  (molli-). 

260.  -mon-ia-,  N.  -mon-ia  (202) :  acri-monia-,  N.  acri-m5nia,  sharpness 
(acri-) ;  parsi-monia,  economy  (parso-).   Analogously  from  roots,  quer-imonia, 

iplaint  (^qu  e  s-,  complain} ;  al-im5nia,  nurture  (^a  1-,  nurture). 


com. 


(2.)     -ta-  (N.  -ta),  -tat-  (N.  -ta-s),  -tut-  (N.  -tu-s), 
-tu-din-  (N.  -tii-d5). 

261.  -ta-,  N.  -ta:  chiefly  poetic:   iuven-ta-,  N.  iuven-ta,  youth  (iuven-)j 
senec-ta,  age  (sen-ec-). 

262.  -tat-,  N.  -ta-s  (202),  is  one  of  the  very  commonest  suffixes. 
pie-tat-,  N.  pie-ta-s,  dutifulness  (pio-,  105);  felici-ta-s,  happiness  (felici-); 

civi-ta-s,  citizenship,  the  community  (civi-) ;  facili-ta-s,  easiness,  facul-ta-s, 
ability  (facili-);  cari-ta-s,  dearness  (caro-) ;  auctor-ita-s,  authority  (auctor-)i 
liber-ta-s,/r^^w  (libro-,  in,  b] ;  maies-ta-s,^;/^^  (maios-) ;  volun- 
ta-s,  wish  (*volunti-,  179) ;  venus-ta-s,  grace  (venusto-,  179);  ae-ta-s,  age 
(aevo-,  m,rt) ;  tempes-ta-s,  kind  of  time,  weather  (tempes-j. 

263.  -tut-,  N.  -tu-s,  only  in  iuven-tut-,  N.  iuven-tu-s,  youth  (iuven-), 
senec-tu-s,  age  (senec-),  servi-tu-s,  slavery  (servo-),  and  vir-tu-s,  manhood 
(viro-,  in). 

264.  -tu-din-,  N.  -tu-do,  suffixed  to  adjective  stems  :  magni-tudin-,  N. 
magni-tudo,  greatness  (magno-) ;  forti-tudo,  courage  (forti-) ;  and  to  a  few 
participles:   consue-tudo,  custom  (consueto-,   179);   sollici-tud5,  anxiety 
(sollicito-) ;  analogously  vale-tudo,  health  (*valeto-,  valere). 

II.     THE    PERSON    CONCERNED. 

265.  The  suffixes  -ario-,  -on-,  -ion-,  -li-,  -no-,  and  some  others,  are 
used  to  denote  the  Person  concerned  or  occupied  with  a  thing  :  as, 

STEM.  NOMINATIVE.                                     FROM. 

sic-ario-  sicarius,  assassin  sica-,  N.  sica,  dagger 

ale-6n-  aleo, gambler  alea-,  N.  alea,  die 

lud-ion-  ludio,  player  ludo-,  N.  ludus,  play 

aedi-li-  aedilis,  aedile  aedi-,  N.  aedis,  house 

tribu-no-  tribunus,  tribune  tribu-,  N  tribus,  tribe 

42 


The  Substantive:   Diminutives.     [266-271. 


III.    THE    PLACE. 

266.  Neuters  with  the  suffixes  -torio-,  -ario-,  -Hi-,  -to-,  or  -eto- 
are  often  used  to  denote  the  Place:   as, 

STEM.  NOMINATIVE.  FROM. 

audi-t5rio-  audi-t5rium,  lecture-room  auditor-,  N.  auditor,  hearer 

aer-ario-  aerarium,  treasury  aer-,  N.  aes,  money 

ov-ili-  ovile,  sheepfold  ovi-,  N.  ovis,  sheep 

murt-eto-  murteta,  myrtlegroves  murto-,  N.  murtus,  myrtle 

IV.    DIMINUTIVES. 

267.  The  suffixes  -lo,  -la-,  or  -cu-lo-,   -cu-la-,   are  used 
to  form  substantives  with  a  Diminutive  meaning.     Diminutives 
may  denote : 

268.  (i.)  Actual  smallness:  as,  securicula,  a  little  hatchet',  ventulus, 
a  bit  of  wind ;  specula,  a  ray  of  hope. 

269.  (2.)  Imputed  smallness:    implying,   (a.)  admiration,   affection,   or 
compassion  ;   (b.)  contempt  or  irony.     This  diminutive,  which  usually  serves 
to  add  point  to  sentences  themselves  of  a  playful,  patronizing,  or  slurring 
character,  is  very  hard  to  translate ;  little  and  small  are  often  inadequate  ; 
old  or  poor  will  sometimes  do ;  but  usually  recourse  must  be  had  to  free 
translations  adapted  to  the  particular  context :  as, 

oratiuncula,  a  gem  of  a  speech,  an  attempt  at  a  speech  ;  matercula,  an 
anxiotts  mother,  poor  mamma,  dear  mamma  ;  lectulus,  one's  own  little  bed ; 
anellus  aureolus,  a  gay  gold  ring ;  Graeculi,  our  Greek  cousins,  the  good 
people  in  Greece  ;  Graeculus,  a  regular  Greek,  your  gentleman  from  Greece  ; 
muliercula,  a  pretty  girl,  a  lady  gay,  one  of  the  gentler  sex,  a  mere  woman, 
an  unprotected  female,  a  maiden  all  forlorn  ;  lacrimula,  a  wee  tear,  a  crocodile 
tear ;  volpecula,  Master  Reynard,  dan  Rttssel ;  tonstricula,  a  common  barber 
girl ;  popellus,  rabble  ;  nummuli,  filthy  lucre ;  mercedula,  an  apology  for 
pay  ;  ratiuncula,  a  first  rate  reason  ;  cauponula,  a  Imu  tavern. 

270.  Some  diminutives  have  entirely  lost  the  diminutive  meaning  :  as,  puella, 
girl,  not  necessarily  little  girl;   others   have  changed   their  original   meaning:    as, 
avunculus,    uncle,   originally  grandpapa ;   angui'lla,  eel,  originally  little  snake. 
Some  words  are  only  found   in  the   diminutive  form  :    as,  Stella,    star    (*ster-). 
Diminutives  usually  have  the  gender  of  their  primitives ;   exceptions  are  rare :   as, 
rana,  frog,  F.,  ranunculus,  tadpole^  M. 

(i.)     -lo-  (N.,  M.  -lu-s,  Ne.  -lu-m),  -la-  (N.  -la). 

271.  Stems  in  -o-,  -a-,  or  a  mute  (-g-,  -c-,  -d-,  or  -t-),  take 
-lo-  or  -la-,  which  is  usually  preceded  by  -u-  (202). 

hortu-lo-,  N.  hortu-lu-s,  little  garden  (horto-)  ;  oppidu-lu-m,  hamlet 
(oppido-) ;  serru-la-,  N.  serru-la,  little  saw  (serra-)  ;  reg-ulu-s,  chieftain 
(reg-)  ;  voc-ula,  a  bit  of  a  voice  (v5c-) ;  calc-ulu-s,  pebble  (calci-) ;  nepSt- 
ulu-s,  a  grandson  dear  (nepot-)  ;  aetat-ula,  tender  age  (aetat-). 

43 


272-279-]  Words :    Formation. 


272.  Stems  in  -eo-f  -io-,  or  -vo-,  retain -o- before  -lo-;  stems  in 
-ea-,  -ia-,  or  -va-,  also  have  -o-  before  -la-. 

alveo-lo-,  N.  alveo-lu-s,  little  tray  (alveo-)  ;  gladio-lu-s,  little  sword 
(gladio-)  ;  servo-lu-s,  little  slave  (servo-) ;  nauseo-la-,  N.  nauseo-la,  a 
slight  squeamishness  (nausea-) ;  bestio-la,  little  animal  (bestia-)  >  filio-la, 
little  daughter  (filia-). 

273.  Stems  in  -lo-,  -ro-,  -no-,  and  -la-,  -ra-,  -na-,  commonly  drop  the  stem 
vowel  and  assimilate  -r-  or  -n-  to  -1-:  thus  :  -el-lo-,  -el-la-  (in;  b\  166,  6,  7). 

catel-lo-,  for  *catululo-,  N.  catel-lu-s,  puppy  (catulo-) ;  agel-lu-s,  little 
field  (agro-);  asel-lu-s,  donkey  (asino-);  fabel-la-,  N.  fabel-la,  short  story 
(fabula-);  umbel-la,  sunshade  (umbra-);  pagel-la,  shortage  (pagina-). 
A  few  words  are  not  thus  changed :  pueru-lo-,  N.  pueru-lu-S,/00r  boy  (puero-), 
as  well  as  puel-lu-s. 

274.  Another  vowel  than  e  (172,  3)  appears  in:   Hispal-lu-s  (Hispano-), 
Messal-la  (Messana-),  proper  names;  cor51-la,  chaplet  (corona-);  ul-lu-s, 
the  least  one,  any  at  all  (uno-) ;  Sul-la  (Sura-),  proper  name;  lapil-lu-S,  for 
*lapid-lu-s,  pebble  (lapid-).    Also  homul-lu-s,  son  of  the  dust  (homon-). 

(2.)     -cu-lo-  (N.,  M.  -cu-lu-s,  Ne.  -cu-lu-m),  -cu-la- 
(N.  -cu-la). 

275.  Stems  in  a  continuous  sound  (-1-,  -n-,  -r-,  or  -s-),  or 
in  -i-,  -u-,  or  -e-,  usually  take  -cu-lo-  or  -cu-la-. 

sermun-culo-,  N.  sermun-culu-s,  small-talk  (sermon-)  ;  virgun-cula-, 
N.  virgun-cula,  little  maid  (virgon-) ;  homun-culu-s,  son  of  earth  (homon-) ; 
arbus-cula,  tiny  tree  (arbos-) ;  cor-culu-m,  heart  of  hearts  (cord-,  170, 12) ; 
igni-culu-s,  spark  (igni-)  ;  ani-cula,  grandam  (anu-)  ;  die-cula,  brief 
day  (die-);  analogously,  volpe-cula  (vixen),  little  fox  (*volpe-).  Rarely 
with  I:  cani-cula,  little  dog  (can-).  . 

276.  -un-culo-,  N. -un-culu-s  :  av-unculo-,  N.  av-unculu-s,  nncle(avo-)\ 
ran-unculu-s,  tadpole  (rana-).    -un-cula-,  N.  -un-cula :   dom-uncula-,    N. 
dom-uncula,  little  house  (domo-). 

277.  Diminutives  are  sometimes  formed  from  other  diminutives :   cistel-lu-la, 
casket  (cistel-la,   cistu-la,  cista-). 

278.  A  few  other  suffixes  have  a  diminutive  meaning  :  as,  -cion-,  -leo-,  -astro-, 
-tta-  :  homun-cio,  manikin,  child  of  dust  (homon-) ;  acu-leu-s,  sting  (acu-) ; 
Antoni-aster,    regular    little    Antony;    pin-aster,    bastard  fine;    luli-tta, 
Juliet  (lulia-) ;    P511i-tta,  little  Polla  (Polla-). 

V.     PATRONYMICS. 

279.  Patronymics,  or  proper  names  which  denote  descent  from  a  father  or 
ancestor,. have  stems  in  -da-  (N.  -de-s),  F.  -d-  (N.  -s).  These  are  chiefly 
Greek  names  used  in  poetry. 

Priami-da-,  N.  Priami-de-s,  scion  of  Priam1  s  house ;  Tantali-d-,  N.  Tan- 
tali-s,  daughter  of  Tantalus,  Peli-de-s  (Peleu-s);  Aenea-de-s  (Aenea-); 
Thestia-d'e-s(Thestio-);  Laertia-de-s  (Laerta-) ;  Sclrjia-da-s  (Scipion-). 
F.  sometimes -me  or -one  :  NeptunTne  (Neptuno-) ;  Acrisione  (Acrisio-). 

44 


The  Adjective:    Active.         [280-287. 


II.     THE    ADJECTIVE. 
(A.)     PRIMITIVES. 

280.  Primitive  adjectives  may  usually  be  divided  into  active  and  pas- 
sive •  but  the  same  suffix  often  has  either  an  active  or  a  passive  meaning. 
Under  primitive  adjectives  belong  the  participles  ;  but  these  will  be  men- 
tioned  in  connection  with  the  verb. 

I.    WITH    AN    ACTIVE    MEANING. 

281.  The  suffixes  -o-,  -uo-,  -ci-,  -lo-,  and  -do,  are  used  to 

form  adjectives  with  an  Active  meaning:  as, 

STEM.                              NOMINATIVE.  FROM. 

vag-o-                        vagus,  wandering  V  v  a  g-,  wander 

contig-uo-                 contiguus,  touching  com-,  V  t  a  g-,  touch 

mina-ci-                    minax,  threatening  mina-ri,  threaten 

cali-do-                      calidus,  warm  Veal-,  warm 

(i.)     -O-  (N.  -u-s);  -uo-   (N.  -uu-s). 

282.  -o-  (N.  -u-s)  :  such  words  express  nature  or  capacity:  vag-o-,  N. 
vag-u-s,  roaming  (^vag-,  roam);  viv-u-s,  living  (^viv-,  live)  ;  many  are 
compounds:  as,  male-dic-u-s,  abusive  (male,  Vdic-,  say)  ;  pro-fug-u-s, 
flying  on  (pro-,  \jf  ug-,_/?j/).     Passive:  fid-u-s,  trustworthy  j^fid-,  trust], 

283.  -uo-,   N.   -uu-s  :    adsid-uo-,    N.    adsid-uu-s,   unremitting  (ad, 
Vsed-,  sit)  ;    contig-uu-s,  touching  (com-,  V*ag-,  totich}\   perpet-uu-s, 
uninterrupted  (per,  \/pet-,  go).     Some  words  are  passive:   as,  sal-vu-s, 
safe  (Vsal-,  save]  ;  vac-uu-s,  empty  (\/vac-,  empty)  ;  relic-uo-s,  left  behind 
(re-,  \fliqu-,  leave],  later  reliquos,  relicus,  reliquus  (157). 

(2.)     -ci-  (N.  -x)  ;  -lo-  (N.  -lu-s)  ;  -do-  (N.  -du-s). 

284.  -a-ci-,  N.  -a-x  (202),  denotes  capacity,  habit,  or  inclination,  often  im- 
plying censure  :  pugna-ci-,  N.  pugna-x,  full  of  fight  (pugna-re)  ;  mina-x, 
threatening  (mina-ri);  ter-ax.,  productive  ([i  er-,  bear}  ;  dic-ax,  full  of  'mother- 
wit^  quick  at  a  joke  (^dic-,  say)  ;  rap-ax,  apt  to  snatch  (^rap-,  snatch}. 


285.  -u-lo-,  N.  -u-lu-s  (202),  denotes  simple  action  :  as,  pat-ulo-,  N.  pat- 
Ulu-S,  spreading  (^pat-,  spread)  ;  or  inclination:  as,  bib-UlU-S,  aft  to  drink 
(^  b  i  b-,  drink). 

286.  The  suffixes  -undo-  (-endo-),  -bundo-,  and  -cundo-  form  a 
group  and  are  possibly  related  to  the  suffix  in  -do-. 

287.  -do-,  N.  -du-s  (202),  denotes  a  state,  and  usually  has  a  parallel 
verb  in  -ere  (368)  :  cali-do-,  N.  cali-du-s  warm  (cf.  cale-re)  ;  calli-du-s, 
knowing  (cf  .  calle-re)  ;  niti-du-s,  shining  (cf.  nite-re)  ;  rarely  in  -ere  :  cup- 
idu-s,  desirous  (cf.  cupe-re)  ;  flui-du-s,  liquid  (cf.  flue-re)  ;  rapi-du-s,  hur- 
ried (cf.  rape-re),     -i-do-  becomes  -i-di-  in  viri-di-s,  green  (cf.  vire-re). 
-do-  sometimes  occurs  in  denominatives  :  herbi-du-s,  grassy  (hertoa-). 

45 


288-296.]  Words:  Formation. 


288.  -undo-  (-endo-),  N.  -undu-s,  (-endu-s)  is  the  suffix  of  the  ger- 
undive, which  was  originally  neither  active  nor  passive  (2238).     In  a  few 
words  from  reflexives,  which  have  become  adjectives,  it  has  a  reflexive  or 
active  meaning:  lab-undo-,  N.  lab-undu-s,  gliding,  slipping  (labi);   ori- 
undu-s,  arising  (oriri) ;  sec-undu-s,/<?/Aw/>z£-  (sequi) ;  volv-endu-s,  roll- 
ing (volvi).     See  899. 

289.  -bundo-,  N.  -bundu-s  (202),  has  the  meaning  of  an  exaggerated 
present    participle  :    freme-bundo-,   N.    freme-bundu-s,   muttering  away 
(\ffrem-,  roar] ;  treme-bundu-s,  all  in  a  flutter  (\/trem-,  quiver};  fur- 
ibundu-s,  hot  with  rage  (\/f  ur-,  rave]  ;  c6nti6na-bundu-s,  speaking  a  speech 
(contiona-ri) ;  minita-bundu-s,  breathing  out  threatenings  (minita-ri) ;  vita- 
bundu-s,  forever  dodging  (vita-re). 

290.  -cundo-,  N.  -cundu-s,  denotes  permanent  quality :  fa-cundo-,  N.  fa- 
cundu-s,  eloquent  (\/f  a-,  speak) ;  ira-cundu-s,  choleric  (ira-sci) ;  iu-cundu-s, 
pleasant^  interesting  (y'iuv-,  help). 

II.     WITH    A    PASSIVE    MEANING. 

291.  The   suffixes    -li-,    -ti-li-,    -bill-,    -tivo-,    -no-,    and 
-mino-,  are  used  to  form  adjectives  with  a  Passive,  meaning:  as, 

STEM.  NOMINATIVE.  FROM. 

fac-ili-  facilis,  easy  to  do  \f  f  a  c-,  do 

duc-tili-  ductilis,  ductile  ^  d  u  c-,  draw 

ama-bili-  amabilis,  lovable  ama-re,  love 

mag-no-  magnus,  great  ^  m  a  g-,  increase 

(i.)     -li-  (N.  -li-s)  ;  -ti-li-,  -bili-  (N.  -ti-li-s,  -bili-s). 

292.  -i-li-,  N.  -i-li-s  (202),  denotes  passive  capability:  fac-ili-,  N.  fac- 
ili-s,  easy  to  do(<\ia.  c-,  do] ;  f rag-ili-s,  breakable,  frail  (\[ f  r  a  g-,  break] ;  hab- 
ili-s,  manageable,  handy  (\j  h  ab-,  hold)  \  nub-ili-s,  marriageable  (\/n  u  b-,  veil). 

293.  -ti-li-,  N.  -ti-li-s,  or  -si-li-,  N.  -si-li-s  (159),  denotes  capability  or 
quality  :  as,  duc-tili,  N.  duc-tili-s,  capable  of  being  drawn  out,  ductile  (^d  u  c-, 
draw)  ;  fis-sili-s,  cleavable  (>/f  id-,  split]  ;  ra-sili-s,  scraped  (\frad-,  scrape). 
Rarely  active:  as,  fer-tili-s, productive  (^fer-,  bear). 

294.  -bili-,  N.  -bili-s  (202),  denotes  passive  capability  like  -i-li-,  but  is  far 
more  common:  horr-ibili-s,  exciting  a  shudder  (cf.  horre-re) ;  ama-bili-s, 
lovable  (ama-re);  fle-bili-s,  lamentable  (>/fle-,  weep).     Rarely  active:  as, 
sta-bili-s,  that  can  stand  ( ^  s  t  a-,  stand) ;  penetra-bili-s,  piercing  (penetra- 
te),    -ti-bili-  (159),  passive,  rare  :  flexibili-s,J?<?^^/<?  ( Jf  le  c-,  bend,  960). 

295.  -tivo-,  N.  -tivu-s,  denotes  the  way  a  thing  originated:  as,  cap- 
tivu-s,  captive  (Vcap-,  take)  j  sta-tivu-s,  set  (\/sta-,  set). 

(2.)     -no-  (N.  -nu-s)  ;  -mino-  (N.  -minu-s). 

296.  -no-,  N.  -nu-s,  an  old  passive  participle  suffix,  denotes  result : 
mag-nu-s   (enlarged),  great  (\/  m  a  g-,  g reat)  ;    ple-nus,  full  (\ple-,  jftll). 
Neuter  as  substantive:   do-nu-m,  gift  (\/d6-,  give).     Sometimes  active: 
ege-nu-s,  needy  (ege-re,  192). 

46 


The  Adjective:  Appurtenance.     [297—304. 


297.  The  suffix  -mino-  (for  -meno-,  103,  a)  in  its  weakest  form 
(135,   2)   is  found   in  a  few  substantives:    as,   alu-mnu-s,   nursling 
(yfal-,  nurse}.     The  endings  -mini  (730)  and  -mino  (731)  are  appar- 
ently case  forms  of  the  same  suffix,     -mino  would  seem  to  be  an 
ablative  ;  -mini  may  be  a  nominative  plural. 

(B.)     DENOMINATIVES. 

298.  Denominative   adjectives   may  be   divided  into  such  as   denote : 
I.  Material  or  Resemblance.      II.  Appurtenance:  implying  sometimes  posses- 
sion, ottenjitness,  conformity,  character,  or  origin.     III.  Supply.     IV.  Diminu- 
tives.    V.  Comparatives  and  Superlatives  ;  a  few  of  these  are  primitive. 

I.     MATERIAL    OR    RESEMBLANCE. 

299.  The  suffixes  -eo-  and  -n-eo-  are  used  to  form  adjectives 
denoting  Material  or  Resemblance :  as, 

STEM.  NOMINATIVE.  FROM. 

aur-eo-  aureus,  golden  auro-,  N.  aurum,  gold 

ahe-neo-  aheneus,  bronze  (58)  aes-,  N.  aes,  bronze 

300.  -eo-,  N.  -eu-s :  aur-eo-,  N.  aur-eu-s,  golden,  all  gold,  as  good  as 
gold  (auro-)  ;  ferr-eu-s,  iron  (ferro-)  ;   pulver-eu-s,  all  dust  (pulver-)  ; 
virgin-eu-s,  girlish  (virgin-). 

301.  -n-eo-,   N.  -n-eu-s:    ahe-neu-s,  bronze  (ahe-,  58;   aes-);    quer- 
neu-s,   oaken    (quercu-).      -no-    is    usually  poetical :    as,    ebur-nu-s,   ivory 
(ebur-);  quer-nu-s,  oaken  (quercu-).     -a-neo-,  N.  -a-neu-s  :  miscell- 
aneu-s,  mixed  (miscello-). 

II.  APPURTENANCE. 

302.  The  suffixes  -o-,  -io-,  -vo- ;  -timo-,  -li-,  -no- ;  -bri-, 
-cri-,  -tri-  ;  -co-,  -ti-,  -si-,  are  used  to  form  adjectives  denoting 

Belonging  to :  as, 

STEM.  NOMINATIVE.  FROM. 

reg-io-  rcgius,  kingly  reg-,  N.  rex,  king 

mari-timo-         maritimus,  of  the  sea  mari-,  N.  mare,  sea 

reg-ali-  regalis,  of  a  king  reg-,  N.  rex,  king 

can-mo-  canmus,  of  a  dog  can-,  N.  canis,  dog 

mulie-bri-          muliebris,  womanly  mulier-,  N.  mulier,  woman 

civi-co-  civicus,  citizen's  civi-,  N.  civis,  citizen 

(i.)     -o-  (N.  -u-s),  -io-  (N.  -iu-s),  -vo-  (N.  -vu-s). 

303.  -o-,  N.  -u-s  :  decpr-o-,  N.  decor-u-s,  Becoming  (decor-);  canor-u-s, 
melodious  (canor-)  ;  pervius,  passable  (via-). 

304.  -io-  is  one  of  the  commonest  suffixes,  and  is  often  added  to 
other  suffixes  ;  thus  :  -c-io-,  -ic-io- ;  -tor-io-  (-sor-io-)  ;  -ar-io-. 

47 


305-3 T  5  •]  Words :    Formation. 


305.  -io-,  N.  -iu-s  :  reg-io-,  N.  reg-iu-s,  of  or  like  a  king  (reg-) ;  patr- 
iu-s,  of  a  father  (patr-).     Here  belong  many  gentile  names  :  as,  Seet-iu-s 
(Sexto-).    These  are  used  with  substantives  as  adjectives  :  as,  lex  Cornel-ia, 
lex   lul-ia.     Furthermore  patrial   adjectives :   as,  Corinth-iu-s,  Corinthian 
(Corintho-).     In  some,  consonant  -io-  is  used  :  plebe-iu-s,  of  the  commons 
(plebe-).     -io-  is  rare  in  primitives  :  exim-iu-s,  select  (ex,  V  e  m-,  take}. 

306.  -c-io-,  N.  -c-iu-s  (202) :  aedili-cio,  N.  aedili-ciu-s,  of  an  aedile 
(aedili-)  ;  patr-iciu-s,  of  the  fathers  (patr-)  ;  later-iciu-s,  of  brick  (later-). 

307.  -ic-io-,   N.    -ic-iu-s :    nov-icio-,   N.   nov-iciu-s,  new,   new-comer 
(novo-);  natal-iciu-s,  birthday's  (natali-)  ;    caement-Iciu-s,  rubble  (cae- 
mento-).     Usually  suffixed    to    perfect   participles   to   denote   the    quality 
derived   from   the   past   act:    conduct-iciu-s,   hired  (conducto-) ;    tralat- 
iciu-s,  transferred  (tralato-). 

308.  -tor-io-,  N.  -tor-iu-s,  or  -sor-io-,  N.  -sor-iu-s,  from  the  agent 
(205)  in  -tor-  (-sor-),  is  the  commonest  ending  with  -io-  :  impera-torio-, 
N.  impera-t5riu-s,  of  a  commander  (imperator-).    The  neuter,  as  substan- 
tive, denotes  the  place  where  (266):   audi-toriu-m,  lecture-room  (auditor-)  ; 
devor-soriu-m,  inn  (devorsor-). 

309.  -ar-io-,   N.   -ar-iu-s,  very  common,  is   chiefly  added  to  substan- 
tives:  as,   agr-ario-,   N.   agr-ariu-s,  of  land  (agro-).     Often   as  substan- 
tive :    not-ariu-s  (265),  stenographer  (nota-)  ;   aer-ariu-m    (266),  treasury 
(aer-)  ;  semin-ariu-m,  nursery  (semin-) ;  bell-aria,  plural,  goodies,  bonbons 
(bello-). 

310.  -i-vo-,  N.  -i-vu-s  (202)_:  tempest-ivu-s,  seasonable  (tempestat-, 
126) ;  aest-ivu-s,  summer's  (aestat-).    See  179. 

(2.)     -timo-  (N.  -timu-s);  -li-  (N.  -li-s)  ;  -no-  (N.  -nu-s). 

311.  -timo-,  N.  -timu-s  (202),  for  an  older  -tumo-  (28):  mari-timo-, 
N.   mari-timu-s,  of  the  sea  (mari-) ;    fini-timu-s,    of  the  border  (fini-) ; 
leg-itimu-s,  lawful  (leg-). 

312.  -li-  N.  -li-s:    humi-li-,  N.  humi-li-s,  lowly  (humo-)  ;  but 
almost  always  in  denominatives  -li-  is  preceded  by  a  long  vowel  (202), 
usually  -a-  or  -I-,  thus :  -a-li-  (-a-ri-),  -Mi ;  -e-li-,  -u-li-. 

313.  -a-li-,  N.  -a-li-s:  reg-ali-,  N.  reg-ali-s,  kingly  (reg-)  ;  decemvir- 
ali-s,  of  a  decemvir  (decemviro-) ;  fat-ali-s,/z&v/  (fato-) ;  t-ali-s,  such  (stem 
to-,  that] ;  qu-ali-s,  as  (quo-),     -a-ri-,  N.  -a-ri-s,  is  used  for  -ali-  if  an  1 
precedes  (173) :  as,  mol-ari-,  N.  mol-ari-s,  of  a  mill  (mola-) ;  milit-ari-s, 
of  a  soldier  (milit-).     Neuters  in  -ali-  and  -ari-  often  become  substantives 
(600):    foe-ale,    neckcloth    (fauci-);    anim-al,    breathing   thing   (anima-) ; 
calc-ar,  spur  (calci-). 

314.  -i-li-,  N.  -i-li-s :  civ-ili-,  N.  civ-ili-s,  of  a  citizen  (civi-) ;  puer- 
Ili-s,  boyish  (puero-).     The  neuter,  as  substantive,  sometimes  denotes  the 
place  where  (266)  :  ov-ile,  sheep/old  (ovi-). 

315.  -e-li,  N.  -e-li-s  :  fide-li-,  N.  fide-li-s,  faithful  (fide-) ;  crud-eli-s, 
cruel  (crudo-);  patru-eli-s,  coitsin  (patruo-V    -u-li-,  N.  -u-li-s:  tribu-li-, 
N.  tribu-li-s,  tribesman  (tribu-). 

48 


The  Adjective:   Appurtenance.     [316—327. 


316.  The  old  participle  suffix  -no-  (296)  is  sometimes  added  at 
once  to  noun  stems,  sometimes  to  other  suffixes  :  thus,  -a-no-,  -i-no- ; 
-ti-no-,  -ti-iio- ;    -er-no-,  -ur-no-. 

317.  -no-,  N.  -nu-s,  is  added  to  stems  formed  with  the  comparative 
suffix  -ero-  or  -tero-  (347),  denoting  place:    super-no-,  N.  super-nu-s, 
above;  inter-nu-s,  internal  (inter)  ;   exter-nu-s,  outside ;  so,  also,  alter- 
nu-s,  every  other  (altero-) ;  and  to  a  very  few  substantives  :  as,  pater-nu-s, 
fatherly  (patr-) ;  frater-nu-s,  brotherly  (fratr-) ;  ver-nu-s,  of  spring  (ver-j. 
Also  to  cardinals,  making  distributives  :  as,  bi-ni,  two  by  two  (for  *duim, 
duo-,  161). 

318.  -a-no-,  N.  -a-nu-s  (202):  area-no-,  N.  arc-anu-s,  secret  (area-) ; 
R6ma-nu-s,  of  Rome   (Roma-);    mont-anu-s,   of  a  mountain  (monti-j |j 
oppid-anu-s,  of  a  town  (oppido-).     -i-ano- :  Cicer5n-iano-,  N.  CicerSn- 
ianu-s,    Cicero's.      Rarely  -a-neo- :    mediterra-neu-s,   midland  (medio-, 
terra-). 

319.  -i-no-,  N.  -i-nu-s  (202):   mar-mo-,  N.  mar-mu-s,   of  the  sea; 
repent-inu-s,  sudden  (repenti-) ;  oftenest  added  to  names  of  living  beings: 
as,  can-inu-s,  of  a  dog  (can-)  ;  div-inu-s,  of  a  god  (divo-) ;  -e-no- :  lani- 
enu-s,  ali-enu-s.     Also  to  proper  names :  as,  Plaut-ino-,  N.  Plaut-inu-s, 
of  Plautns  (Plauto-);   Alp-Inu-s,  Alpine  (Alpi-). 

320.  -ti-no-,  N.  -ti-nu-s,  is  used  in  some  adjectives  of  time:  cras-tinu-s, 
to-morrow' s  (eras-) ;  diu-tinu-s,  lasting  (d^.) ;  pris-tinu-s,  of  aforetime  (pri-, 
prae). 

321.  -ti-no-,  N.  -ti-nu-s,  is  used  in  a  few  words  of  place  and  time:  intes-tino-, 
N.  intes-tinu-s,  inward  (intus) ;  vesper-tinu-s,  at  eventide  (vespero-). 

322.  From  words  like  frater-nus  (from  *fratr(i)-nus,  in,  b),  pater-nus, 
exter-nus,  inter-nus,  arose  a  new  suffix  -terno-:  as,  hes-ternus,  from  the 
stem  hes-  (cf.  her-i,  154),  and  -erno-  in  hodiernus.     From  the  adverb  *noctur 
(vvKTiap)  was  derived  noctur-nus,  by  analogy  to  which  diurnus  was  formed.     Else- 
where the  -ur  of  -urnus  and  the  -tur-  of  -turnus  belong  to  the  stem:  as,  ebur- 
nus ;  tacitur-nus,  from  the  agent  *taci-tor  (205). 

(3.)     -bri-,  -cri-,  -tri-  (N.  -ber  or  -bri-s,  &c.). 

323.  -bri-,  N.  -ber  or  -bri-s  :  salu-bri-,  N.  salu-ber,  healthy  (saliit-) ; 
mulie-bri-s,  womanly  (mulier-). 

324.  -cri-,    N.    -cer  or  -cri-s   (202) :   volu-cri-,   N.   volu-cer,  winged 
(*volo-,  flying) ;   medio-cri-s,  middling  (medio-). 

325.  -tri-,   N.    -ter   or   -tri-s :    eques-tri-,    N.  eques-ter,  of  horsemen 
(equit-,  152);  semes-tri-s,  of  six  months  (sex,  mens-).    -es-tri-  is  used  in  a 
few  words:  camp-ester,  of  fields  (campo-) ;  silv-estri-s,  of  woods  (silva-). 

(4.)     -co-  (N.  -cu-s) ;  -ti-,  -si-  (N.  -B,  -si-s). 

326.  -co-  is  often  suffixed  to   -ti-,   sometimes  to  -es-ti- ;    thus  : 
-ti-co-,  -es-ti-co-. 

327.  -co-,  N.  -cu-s:  civi-co-,  N.  civi-cu-s,  of  a  citizen  (civi-)  ;  belli- 
cu-s,  of  war  (bello-);    vili-cu-s,   bailiff  (villa-),     -a-co-,  -i-co-,  -u-co- 
(202):  mera-cu-s,  ami-cu-s,  anti-cu-s,  apri-cu-s,  posti-cu-s,  pudi-cu-s, 
cadu-cu-s.     -ti-co-,  N.  -ti-cu-s:  rus-tico-,  N.  rus-ticu-s,  of  the  country 
(rus-).      -es-ti-co-,    N.    -es-ti-cu-s:  dom-esticu-s,   of  a  house  (domo-, 
domu-). 

4  49 


3-8~3  3 6.]  Wcrds :  Formation. 


328.  -ti-  or  -si-   denotes   belonging  to  a  place  ;    usually  -a-ti-, 
-i-ti-,  -es-ti-,  -en-ti- ;  -en-si-,  or  -i-en-si-. 

329.  -ti-s  N.   -s:    Tibur-ti-,  N.  Tlbur-s,   Tiburtine  (Tibur-).     -a-ti-: 
quoi-ati-,  N.  quoi-a-s,  "what  countryman  ?  (quoio-)  ;  Anti-a-s,  of  Antium 
(Antio-);   optim-ates,  good  men  and  true  (optimo-).     -i-ti- :    Samn-iti-, 
N.  Samn-I-s,    Samnuin    (Samnio-).     -en-ti-:    Vei-enti-,    N.    Vei-en-s, 
0/~  K-/  ( Veio-).     -es-ti-,  N.  -es-ti-s:  agr-esti-,  N.  agr-esti-s,  of  the  fields 
(agro-);  cael-esti-s,  heavenly  (caelo-). 

330.  -en-si-,    N.  -en-si-s  (202),  from  appellatives  of  place  or  proper 
names  of  place:  castr-ensi-,  N.   castr-ensi-s,  of  a  camp  (castro-);  circ- 
ensi-s,   of  the    circus    (circo-) ;    Hispani-ensi-s    (temporarily]   of  Spain. 
-i-ensi-  :   Karthagin-i6nsi-s,  of  Carthage  (Karthagin-). 

III.     SUPPLY. 

331.  The  suffixes   -to-   or   -oso-   are  used   to   form   adjec- 
tives denoting  Supplied  or  Furnished  with :  as, 

STEM.  NOMINATIVE.  FROM. 

barba-to-  barbatus,  bearded  barba-,  N.  barba,  beard 

ann-oso-  annosus,  full  of  'years  anno-,  N.  annus,  year 

(i.)     -to-  (N.  -tu-s)  ;  -len-to-  (N.  -len-tu-s). 

332.  -to-,  the  perfect   participle  suffix,   is    sometimes   added   at 
once  to  a  noun  stem,  sometimes  to  other  suffixes,  thus  :  -ato-,  -ito-, 
-etc-,  -uto-,  -ento-,  -lento-. 

333.  -to-,  N.  -tu-s:   onus-to-,  N.  onus-tu-s,  loaded  (onus-);  vetus- 
tu-s,  full  of  years    (*vetus-,  year);    ius-tu-s,  just  (ius-);    hones-tu-s, 
honourable  (*hones-);  funes-tu-s,  deadly    (funes-).     -a-to- :    barba-tu-s, 
bearded  (barba-);    dent-atu-s,    toothed  (denti-) ;   -i-to- :    auri-tu-s,  long- 
eared  (auri-)  ;  -u-to-:  cornu-tu-s,  horned  (cornu-).    -en-to-,  N.  -en-tu-s : 
cru-ento-,    N.    cru-entu-s,   all  gore  (*cruenti-,   *cruere).      As    substan- 
tive,    arg-entu-m     (white     metal),    silver;      flu-enta,     plural,     streams 
(fluent!-). 

334.  The  neuter  of  stems  in  -to-,  as  a  substantive,  denotes  the  place 
where  something,  generally  a  plant,  is  found  (266) :  arbus-tu-m,  vineyard 
(arbos-);  commonly  preceded  by  -e-,  forming  -e-to-  (202),  usually  plural : 
dum-eta,  thorn-thickets  (dumo-);  murt-eta,  myrtle-groves  (murto-). 

335.  -len-to-,    N.    -len-tu-s    (202)  :     vino-lento-,    N.    vino-lentu-s, 
drunken  (vino-);   sanguin-olentu-s,  all  blood  (sanguin-) ;  lucu-lentu-s, 
bright^    (luci-,    28)  ;     pulver-ulentu-s,  dusty    (pulver-).     A   shorter   form 
-lenti-  is  rare  :  vi-olenti-,  N.  vi-olen-s,  violent  (vi-) ;  op-ulen-s,  rich  (op-). 

(2.)      -OSO,-   (N.   -osu-s). 

336.  -oso-    (sometimes    -onso-,    -osso-),    N.    -osu-s,  full  of,   is 
very  common  indeed,     -oso-  is  sometimes  attached  to  other  suffixes, 
thus  :  -c-oso-,  -ul-6so-,  -uc-ul-6so-. 

5° 


The  Adjective:    Comparison.     [337— 343- 


337.  -5so-,  N.  -6su-s  :  ann-oso-,  N.  ann-osu-s,  full  of  years ;  form- 
6nsu-s,  form-ossu-s  or  form-5su-s,  shapely  (forma-) ;  perlcul-6su-s,  -with 
danger  fraught  (periculo-) ;   mor-osu-s,  priggish,  cross  (mor-) ;  calamit- 
osu-s,  full  of  damage  (calamitat-,   179) ;    superstiti-;osu-s,    superstitions 
(superstitiSn-,    179);    fructu-osu-s,  fruitful   (fructu-,    116,   c) ;    mont- 
uosu-s,  full  of  mountains  (monti-,  202) ;  curi-6su-s,  full  of  care  (cura-) ; 
labor-iosu-s,  toilsome  (labor-,  202). 

338.  -c-oso-,     N.    -c-osu-s  :    belli-coso-,    N.    belli-cosu-s,    -warlike 
(bello-,  bellico-).     -ul-6so-,  N.  -ul-6su-s :   formid-uloso-,  N.   formid- 
ulosu-s,  terrible  (formidin-,  179).    -uc-ul-oso-,  N.  -uoul-6su-s  :  met- 
-u-culoso-,  N.  met-u-culosu-s,  skittish  (metu-). 

IV.     DIMINUTIVES. 

339.  Diminutives  are  formed  from  adjectives,  as  from  sub- 
stantives (267). 

-lo-,  N.  -lu-s :  aureo-lo-,  N.  aureo-lu-s,  all  gold,  of  predotis  gold,  of 
red  red  gold,  good  as  gold  (aureo-j  ;  ebrio-lu-s,  tipsy  (ebrio-)  ;  parvo-lu-s, 
or  parvu-lu-s,  smallish  (parvo-) ;  frigidu-lu-s,  chilly  (frigido-) ;  vet-ulus, 
little  old  (vet-);  tenellu-lu-s,  soft  and  sweet  (tenello-,  tenero-);  pulchel- 
lus,  s^veet  pretty  (pulchro-) ;  bel-lu-s,  bonny  (bono-) ;  novel-lu-s,  newborn 
(*novolo-,  novo-).  -culo-,  N.  -culu-s :  pauper-culo-,  N.  pauper-culu-s, 
poorish  (pauper-);  levi-culu-s,  somewhat  vain  (levi-). 

340.  A  peculiar  class  of  diminutives  is  formed  by  adding  -culo-  to  the  compara- 
tive stem  -lus-  (346):  as,  nitidius-culo-,  N.  nitidius-culu-S,  a  trifle  sleeker 
(nitidius-)  ;  longius-culu-s,  a  bit  longer  (longius-). 

341.  Adverbs  sometimes  have  a  diminutive  form  :  as,  belle,  charmingly;  paul- 
lulum,  a  little  bit ;  meliuscule,  a  bit  better  (340). 

V.  COMPARATIVES  AND  SUPERLATIVES. 

342.  Comparatives  and  superlatives  are  usually  formed  from  the  stem 
of  the  positive  :  as,  dignior,  -worthier,  dignissimus,  -worthiest,  from  digno-, 
stem  of  dignus.     A   few  are  formed  directly  from   roots  :  thus,   maior, 
greater,  and  maximus,  greatest,  are  formed  from  the  \fmag-,  and  not  from 
magno-,  stem  of  magnus. 

(l.)       COMPARATIVE   -ior,    SUPERLATIVE   -IssilTlUS. 

343.  The  nominative  of  comparative  adjectives  ends 
usually  in  -ior,  and  that  of  superlatives  in  -issimus : 
thus, 

COMPARATIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut.  Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

-ior  -ior  -ius  -issimus     -issima      -issimum 

POSITIVE.  COMPARATIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 

altus,  high,          altior,  higher,          altissimus,  highest. 
tristis,  sad,          tristior,  sadder,       tristissimus,  saddest. 

S1 


344~352-]  Words:   Formation. 


(2.)     SUPERLATIVE  -rimus. 

344.  Adjectives  with  the  nominative  in  -er  have  the  nominative 
of  the  superlative  like  the  nominative  of  the  positive  with  -rimus 
added  (350)  :  as, 

POSITIVE.  COMPARATIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 


pauper,  poor,  pauperior,  poorer,  pauperrmus, 

acer,  sharp,  acrior,  sharper,  acerrimus,  sharpest. 

maturrimus  occurs  once  (Tac.),  for  maturissimus,  positive  maturus,  ripe. 

(3.)      SUPERLATIVE   -HmUS. 

345.  humilis,  difficilis,  and  facilis, 
similis,  dissimilis,  and  gracilis, 

have  the  nominative  of  the  superlative  in  -limus,  following  1  of  the  stem  (350)  :  as, 

POSITIVE.  COMPARATIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 

humilis,  lowly,  humilior,  lowlier,  humillimus,  lowliest. 

|  THE   COMPARATIVE   SUFFIX. 

346.  The  comparative  suffix  is  -ios-,  which  becomes  in  the  singular, 
nominative  masculine  and  feminine,  -ior  (154;  132),  neuter  nomina- 
tive and  accusative,  -ius  (107,  c}  ;  in  all  other  cases  -ior-  (154). 

347.  Other  comparative  suffixes  are   -ro-  or  -ero-,  and   -tro-   or   -tero-, 
used  in  a  few  words,  principally  designating   place  :    as,    SUp-eri,  the  upper  ones, 
infer!,  the  nether  ones  ;  ex-ten,  outsiders,  poster!,  after-generations  ;  alter,  the 
other;  uter,  whether!  which  of  the  two!  (for  *quo-ter,    146)  ;    dexter,  right. 

348.  Some  words  designating  place  have  a  doubled  comparative  suffix,  -er-ior-, 
or    -ter-ior-  :    as,    sup-er-ior,   upper,    Inferior,  lower,      ci-ter-ior,  hither, 
deterior  (lower),  worse,  exterior,   outer,  interior,  inner,  posterior,  hinder, 
after,    ulterior,  further,   dexterior,   more  to  the  right,      -is-tro-  is  used  in 
two  words  which  have  become  substantives:    min-is-ter   (inferior),  servant,  and 
magister  (superior),  master. 

THE  SUPERLATIVE  SUFFIX. 

349.  The  common  superlative  suffix  is  -issimo-,  nominative  -issi- 
mus,  with  older  -issumo-,  nominative  -issumus  (28). 

350.  Stems  which  end  in  -ro-,  -ri-,  or  -li-  (344,  345)  take  the  suffix  -issimo- 
(cf.  -simo-,  351)  with  syncope  of  its  initial  i  (in)  and  assimilation  of  the  final  1 
or  r  (166,  8). 

351.  The  suffix  -timp-  is  further  used  in  a  few  root  superlatives:  ci-timus, 
dextimus,   extimus,   intimus,  optimus,  postumus,  and  ultimus  ;  and 
-simo-  in  maximus,  pessimus,  and  proximus. 

352.  The  suffix  -mo-  or  -imo-  is  used  in  sum-mo-,  N.  summus,  highest 
(sub);   rr.in-imo-,   N.  minimus,  least',   primus,  first,  septimus,  seventh, 
decimus,  tenth,    -mo-  or  -imo-  is  attached  to  -is-  (n5,  2)  in  plurimus  for 
*plo-is-imo-s  (fullest),  most  (99);  and  to  -re-  or  -tre-,  possibly  an  adverbial 
form  (705),  in  supremus,  extremus,  and  postremus. 

52 


The  Adjective:    Comparison.     [353-358. 


PECULIARITIES    OF    COMPARISON. 


353.  Some  positives  have  a  comparative   or  superlative,  or 
both,  from  a  different  form  of  the  stem :   such  are, 


frugi,  thrifty, 
nequam,  naughty, 
iuvenis,  young, 
senex,  old, 
magnus,  great, 
beneficus,  kindly, 
honorificus,  complimentary, 
magnificus,  grand, 


frugalissimus. 
nequissimus. 
(natu  minimus), 
(natu  maximus). 
maximus  (351). 
beneficentissimus. 
honorificentissimus. 
magnificentissimus. 


frugalior, 

nequior, 

iunior, 

senior, 

maior, 

beneficentior, 

honorificentior, 

magnificentior, 

354.  iuvenior,  younger,  is  late  (Sen.,    Plin.,    Tac.).    benevolens,  kindly, 
benevolentior,  benevolentissimus,  and  maledicens,  abusive,  maledicen- 
tior   (once  each,  Plaut.),  maledicentissimus,  have  usually  as  positive  benevo- 
lus  and  maledicus  respectively. 

355.  Some  positives  have  a  comparative  or  superlative,  or  both, 
from  a  wholly  different  stem :  such  are, 

bonus,  good,  melior,  optimus  (351). 

malus,  bad,  peior,  pessimus  (351). 

multus,  much,  plus  (sing.  Ne.  only),   plurimus  (352). 

parvus,  little,  minor,  minimus  (352). 

parvus  has  rarely  parvissimus. 

356.  Four  comparatives  in  -erior  or  -terior,  denoting  place  (348),  have 
two  forms  of  the   superlative ;   the  nominative  masculine  singular  of  the 
positive  is  not  in  common  use  : 

exterior,  extimus  (351),  or  extremus  (352),  outermost. 

inferior,  infimus,  or  imus,  lowest. 

posterior,  postumus  (351),  lastborn,  or  postremus  (352),  last. 

superior,  summus  (352),  or  supremus  (352),  highest. 

357.  Six,  denoting  place,  have  the  positive  only  as  an  adverb 
or  preposition  : 

cis,  this  side,  citerior  (348), 

de,  down,  deterior  (348), 

in,  in,  interior  (348), 

prae,  before,  prior, 

prope,  near,  propior, 

uls,  beyond,  ulterior  (348), 

ocior,  swifter,  ocissimus,  has  no  positive. 

358.  These  have  a  superlative,  but  no  comparative :    bellus,  pretty,   falsus, 
false,  inclutus,  famed,   invictus,  unconquered,  invitus,  unwilling,  meritus, 
deserving,  novus,  new ;  vetus,  veterrimus,  old,  sacer,  sacerrimus,  sacred, 
vafer,    vaferrimus,    sly,-    maleyolus,    malevolentissimus    (twice,    Cic.), 
spiteful;    maleficus,    maleficentissimus   (once,  Suet.),  wicked,   munificus, 
munificentissimus  (inscrr.  ;  Cic.  once),  generous,    mirificus,  mirificissimus 
(twice,  Ace.,   Ter. ),  strange.     Plautus  has  ipsissumus,  his  very  self. 

53 


citimus  (351),  hitherest. 
deterrimus,  lowest,  worst. 
intimus,  inmost. 
primus  (352),  first. 
proximus  (351),  nearest. 
ultimus  (351);  'furthest. 


359~3^5-]  Words:  Formation. 


35Q.  Most  primitives  in  -ilis  and  -bilis  (292,  29 {),  have  a  comparative,  but  no 
superlative  ;  but  these  have  a  superlative  :  facilis  and  difficilis  (345),  easy  and 
hard,  utilis,  useful;  also  fertilis,  productive,  amabilis,  lovable,  mobilis, 
movable,  nobilis,  well  known. 

360.  Many  adjectives  have  no  suffixes  of  comparison,  and  supply 
the  place  of  these  by  magis,  more,  and  maxime,  most:  as,  mirus, 
strange,  magis  mirus,  maxime  mirus.  Many  adjectives,  from  their 
meaning,  do  not  admit  of  comparison. 


COMPARATIVE   AND    SUPERLATIVE    ADVERBS. 

361.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  have  as  their  comparative 
the  accusative  singular  neuter  of  the  comparative  adjective ;  the  su- 
perlative is  formed  like  that  of  the  adjective,  but  ends  in  -e :  as, 

alte,  on  high,  altius,  altissime. 

acriter,  sharply,  acrius,  acerrime. 

facile,  easily,  facilius,  facillime. 

362.  An  older  superlative  ending,  ^ed  for  -e,  occurs  in  an  inscription  of  186  B.C.: 
FACILVMED,  i.e.  facillime.     A  few  adverbs  have  superlatives  in  -6  or  -um  :  as, 
meritissimo,  most  deservedly ;   primo,   at  first,    primum,  first ;  postremo, 
at  last,  postremum,/0r  the  last  time. 

363.  If   the  comparison  of   the  adjective   has  peculiarities,  they  are   retained  in 
the  adverb  likewise:  as,  bene,  -well,  melius,  optima ;  male,  /'//,  peius,  pes- 
sime;  multum,  much,  plus,  plurimum  ;  mature,  betimes,  maturius,  matu- 
rissime  (Cic.,  Plin.),  or  maturrime  (Cic.,  Caes.,   Sail.,   Tac.).     ocius,  swifter, 
no  positive,     ocissime.     minus,  less,  is  formed  by   the  nominal  suffix  -es-  (236), 
from  \fmin-  (minuS);  for  magis, .more,  see  135,  2.      In  poetry  magis  sometimes 
becomes  mage,  as  if  neuter  of  an  adjective  in  -i-, 

364.  A   few  adverbs  not  derived  from  adjectives  are  compared  :  as,  diu,  long, 
diutius,  diutissime;  saepe,  often,   saepius,    sa_epissime ;  nuper,  lately, 
no   comparative,    nuperrime ;    secus,    otherwise,    setius,   the  less;    temperi, 
betimes,  temperius,  earlier,  no  superlative. 


(B.)     FORMATION    OF    DENOMINATIVE   VERBS. 

365.  Denominative  verb  stems  have  present  infinitives  in 
-are,  -ere,  or  -ire  (-an,  -eri,  or  -iri),  and  are  formed  from 
noun  stems  of  all  endings  :  as, 


VERB.  FROM  NOUN. 

fuga-re,  rout  fuga-,  N.  fuga 

loca-re,  place  loco-,  N.  locus 
nomina-re,  name  nomin-,  N.nomen 

leva-re,  lighten  levi-,  N.  levis 

sinua-re,  bend  sinu-,  N.  sinus 

albe-re,  be  white  albo-,  N  albus 

miseri-ri,/*/?  misero-,  N.  miser 


VERB.  FROM  NOUN. 

flore-re,  blossom  flor-,  N.  flos 

sorde-re,  be  dirty  sordi-,  N.  sordes 

puni-re,  punish  poena-,  N.  poena 

cond!-re,  season  condo-,  N.condus 

custodi-re,  guard  custod-,  N.  custos 

vesti-re,  dress  vesti-,  N.  vestis 

gest!-re,_/?M/&v  gestu-,  N.  gestus 


54 


The  Verb:  Denominatives.      [366-37 


2. 


366.  These  present  verb  stems  are  formed  by  adding  the  suffix  -jo-,  -ie- 
to   the  noun    stem:   as  *fuga-io,   I  flee  ;  the  i  between   two   vowels   was 
dropped  (153,  2)  and  the  final  vowel  of  noun  stem  was  often  contracted  with 
the  ending  (118,  3).     The  noun  stem  ending  is  often  slightly  modified. 

367.  In  a  half  a  dozen  denominatives  from  stems  in  -u-  the  u  of  the  noun  stem 
remains  without  modification,  and  is  not  contracted  with  the  variable  vowel  (116,  c)  : 
these  are,  acuere,  sharpen   (acu-),  metuere,  fear,   statuere,  set,  tribuere, 
assign  ;   arguere,  make  clear,  batuere,  beat. 

368.  Verbs  in   -are  are  by  far  the  most  numerous  class  of  denomina- 
tives ;    they  are  usually  transitive  ;  but  deponents  often  express  condition, 
sometimes  occupation  :  as,  dominari,  lord  it,  play  the  lord  ;  aquari,  get  oneself 
water.     Most  verbs  in  -ire  also  are  transitive  ;  those  in  -ere  usually  denote 
a  state  :  as,  calere,  be  warm  ;  but  some  are  causative  :  as,  monere,  remind. 

369.  Many    denominative   verbs    in    -are    contain    a    noun    suffix 
which  is  not  actually  found  in  the  noun  itself;   such  suffixes  are: 
-co-,  -cin-,  -lo-,  -er-,  -ro-,  -to-,  &c.  :    as, 

-co-:  albi-care,  be  -white  (*albi-co-);  velli-care,  pluck  (*velli-co-, 
flucker).  -cin-  :  latro-cinari,  be  a  robber  (latron-)  ;  sermS-cinarl,  dis- 
course (sermon-),  -lo-  :_gratu-lari,  give  one  joy  (*gratu-lo-);  vi-olare, 
harm  (*vi-olo-);  heiu-lari,  cry  'heia'  (*heiu-lo-).  -er-  :  mod-erari, 
check  (*mod-es-,  236).  -ro-  :  tole-rare,  endure  (*tole-ro-);  flag-rare, 
blaz:  (*flag-ro-).  -to-:  debili-tare,  lame  (*debili-to-)  ;  dubi-tare,  doubt 
(*dubi-to-). 

370.  Many  denominatives  in  -are  are  indirect  compounds  (377), 
often  from  compound  noun  stems  which  are  not  actually  found.     So, 
particularly,  when  the  first  part  is  a  preposition,  or  the  second  is  from 
the  root  fac-,  make,  ag-,  drive,  do.,  or  cap-,  lake  :  as, 

opi-tul-an,  bear  help  (opitulo-;;  suf-foc-are,  suffocate  (*suf-foc-o-, 
fauci-);  aedi-fic-are  (housebuild),  build  (*aedific-  or  *aedifico-,  house- 
builder);  signi-fic-are,  give  token  (*significo-);  fum-ig-are,  make  smoke 
(*furnigo-,  smoker,  fumo-,  fa-;  nav-i-are  sail  and  rem-i-are  row 


clean  (puro-);  gnar-ig-are,  tell  (gnaro-,  narrare,  169,  2;  13-?,  i);  anti-cip- 
are,  take  beforehand  (*anticipo-,  ante,  ycap-);  oc-cup-are,  ^/0^(*occupo-); 
re-cup-er-are,  get  back  (*recupero-). 

371.  Many  verbs  in  -tare  (-sare),  or  -tari  (-sari),  express 
frequent,  intense,  or  sometimes   attempted  action.     These  are 
called  Frequentatives  or  Inten  sives  ;  they  are  formed  from  per- 
fect participle  stems  ;  but  stems  in  -a-to-  become  -i-to-  :   as, 

cant-are,  sing  (canto-);  cess-are,  loiter  (cesso-)  ;  amplex-ari,  em- 
brace (amplexo-);  habit-are,  live  (habUo-);  pollicit-ari,  make  overtures 
(pollicitp-)  ;  dormit-are,  be  sleepy  (dormito-);  neg-itare,  keep  denying  (for 
*nega-tare,  with  suffix  -i-tare,  910). 

372.  Some  frequentatives  in   -tare   are  formed  from  the  present  stem 
of  a  verb  in  -ere  ;  the  formative  vowel  before  -tare  becomes  i  :  as, 

agi-tare,  shake  (age-re);  flui-tare,  float  (flue-re);  nosci-tare,  recog- 
nize (nosce-re)  ;  quaeri-tare,  keep  socking  (quaere-re)  ;  sclsci-tari,  enquire 
(scisce-re);  vendi-tare,  try  to  sell  (vende-re). 

55 


373~3^°-]  Words:    Formation. 


373.  A  few  frequentatives  add  -ta-  to  the  perfect  participle  stem :  as, 
acti-tare,   act  often  (acto-) ;  facti-tare,  do  repeatedly  (facto-);  lecti- 

tare,  read  again  and  again  (lecto-):  uncti-tare,  anoint  often  (uncto-). 
From  a  frequentative  another  frequentative  is  sometimes  derived  :  as,  diet-are, 
dictate,  dicti-tare,  keep  asserting  (dicto-). 

374.  Some    verbs    are    found    only    as    frequentatives:     as,    gust-are,    taste 
(*gUSto-,    JgUS-,    taste);    put-are,   think   (puto-,    JpU-,    clean);    aegrot- 
are,  be  ill  (aegroto-). 

375.  A  few  verbs  in  -urio,  -urire,  express  desire;  such  are  called  Desidera- 
tives:  as,  ess-urire  or  es-urire,  want  to  cat  (edere,  esse).    A  few  in  -sso, 
-ssere,  express  earnest  action;  such  are  called  Meditatives:  as,  lace-sso,  lace- 
ssere,  provoke. 


COMPOSITION. 

376.  In  compounds,  the   fundamental  word   is   usually  the 
second,  which  has  its  meaning  qualified  by  the  first. 

377.  A  DIRECT  COMPOUND  is  one  formed  directly  from  two  parts:  as, 
con-iug-,    N.  coniunx,  yoke-fellow  (com-,   together,  V  i  u  g-,  yoke]  ;    con- 
iungere,  join  together  (com-,  iungere) ;  an  INDIRECT  COMPOUND  is  one 
formed  by  the  addition  of  a  suffix  to  a  direct  compound:  as,  iudic-io-,  N. 
iudicium,  trial  (iudic-)  :  iudica-re,/#a^  (iudic-). 

378.  A  REAL  COMPOUND  is  a  word  whose  stem  is  formed  from  two 
stems,    or   an   inseparable    prefix   and   a   stem,   fused   into   one   stem;    an 
APPARENT  COMPOUND  is  formed  by  the  juxtaposition  of  an  inflected  word 
with  another  inflected  word,  a  preposition,  or  an  adverb. 


I.    COMPOSITION    OF    NOUNS. 

(A.)      REAL  COMPOUNDS. 

FORM   OF   COMPOUNDS. 

379.  If  the  first  part  is  a  noun,  its  stem  is  taken :  as,  Aheno-barbus, 
Redbeard,  Barbarossa ;  usually  with  weakening  of  a  stem  vowel  (103-105): 
as,  aurif ex,  jeweller  (auro-).     On  other  changes  of  the  final  vowel  in  the 
first  member  of  compounds,  see  174.     Sometimes  with  disappearance  of  a 
syllable  (179) ;  as,  *veneni-ficus,  vene-ficus,  poisoner  (veneno-) ;  or  of 
a  vowel  (in):  as,  man-ceps,  contractor  (manu-)  ;   particularly  before   a 
vowel  (119) :  as,  magn-animus,  great-souled  (magno-).     Consonant  stems 
are  often  extended  by  i  before  a  consonant :  as,  mori-gerus,  complaisant 
(m5r-). 

380.  Stems  in  -S-,  including  those  in  -er-,  -or-  and  -or-  (236),  are  sometimes 
compounded  as  above  (379):    as,  nemori-vagus,   woodranger;   honon-ficus, 
complimentary ;  but  usually  they  drop  the  suffix  and  take  i  :  as,  opi-f ex,  work- 
man (oper-);    foedi-fragus,  truce-breaker  (feeder-);    volni-ficus,   -wound- 
ing (volner-);    muni-ficus,  generous  (muner-) ;    terri-ficus,   awe-inspiring 
(terr5r-);  horri-fer,  dreadful,  horri-sonus,  awful-sounding  (horror-). 

56 


Composition  :    The  Noun.        [381-387. 


381.  The  second  part,  which  often  has  weakening  of  the  vowel  (102), 
is  sometimes  a  bare  root  used  as  a  stem  (199),  oftener  a  root  with  a  forma- 
tive suffix  ;  or  a  noun  stem,  sometimes  with  its  stem  ending  modified  :  as, 
iu-dio,  N.  iudex,  juror  (\/dic-,  declare}-,  causi-dic-o-,  N.  causidicus, 
pleader  (209);  in-gen-io-,  N.  ingenium,  disposition  (Vgen-,  beget,  219); 
con-tag-ion-,  N.  contagio,  touching  together  (Vtag-,  touch,  227);  im- 
berb-i-,  N.  imberbis,  beardless  (barba-). 


MEANING  OF  COMPOUNDS. 

382.  DETERMINATIVES  arc  compounds  in  which  the  second  part 
keeps  its  original  meaning,  though  determined  or  modified  by  the 
first   part.      The   meaning  of    a  determinative   may   often    be   best 
expressed  by  two  words. 

383.  (i.)  The  first   part  of  a  determinative  may  be  an  adjective,  an 
adverb,   a  preposition,   or   an   inseparable   prefix ;    the    second   part   is   a 
noun  :  as, 

lati-fundium,  i.e.  lati  fundi,  broad  acres ;  privi-legium,  i.e.  priva  lex, 
special  act ;  alti-sonans,  i.e.  alte  sonans,  high-sounding;  con-discipulus, 
i.e.  cum  alter5  discipulus,  fellow-pupil ;  per-magnus,  i.e.  valde  magnus, 
very  great ;  in-dignus,  i.e.  non  dignus,  unworthy. 

384.  (2.)  The  first  part  of  a  determinative  may  represent  the  oblique 
case  of  a  noun,  generally  a  substantive  ;  the  second  part  is  a  noun  or  verb 
stem.     These  compounds  are  called  Objectives  :  as, 

Accusative  of  direct  object  (1132),  armi-ger,  i.e.  qui  arma  gerit,  armour- 
bearer  ;  dative  of  indirect  object  (1208),  man-tele,  i.e.  manibus  tela, 
handkerchief,  napkin;  genitive  (1227),  sol-stitium,  i.e.  solis  static,  solstice ; 
ablative  instrumental  (1300),  tubi-cen,  i.e.  qui  tuba  canit,  trumpeter ;  loca- 
tive (1331),  Troiu-gena,  i.e.  Troiae  natus,  Troy-born;  ablative  locative 
(1350),  nocti-vagus,  night-wandering ;  monti-vagus,  mountain-ranging. 

385.  POSSESSIVES  are  adjective  compounds  in  which   the  mean- 
ing cf  the  second  part  is  changed.     The  second  part  of  a  posses- 
sive is   always  formed  from   a  substantive,  qualified   by  the   noun, 
adverb,  or   inseparable   prefix  of  the   first  part,  and  the  whole  ex- 
presses an  attribute  which  something  has:   as, 

longi-manus,  longarms,  long- armed ;  miseri-cors,  tender-hearted ;  bi-lin- 
guis,  two-tongued;  magn-animus,  greatheart,  great-hearted;  im-berbis, 
beardless. 

(B.)      APPARENT   COMPOUNDS. 

386.  Apparent  Compounds  are  formed  : 

387.  (i.)  By  two  nouns  combined,  one  with  an  unchanging  case  ending, 
the  other  with  full  inflections:  as,  aquae-ductus,  aqueduct ;  senatus-con- 
sultum,  decree  of  the  senate  ;  pater-f  amilias,  father  of  a  family  ;  veri-similis, 
like  the  truth ;    in  these  words,  aquae,   senatus,  familias,   and   veri  are 
genitives,  and  remain  genitives,  while  the  other  part  pf  the  compound  is 
declinable. 

57 


388-396.]  Words :  Formation. 


388.  (2.)   By  a  substantive  with  an  adjective   habitually  agreeing  with 
it,  both  parts  being  declined  :  as,  res  publica.  the  common-weal ;  res  gestae, 
exploits ;  ius  iurandum,  oath;  pecuniae  repetundae,  money  claim. 

389.  (3.)  By  nouns,  chiefly  substantives,  in  the  same  case  placed  loosely 
side  by  side  and  making  one  idea.     The  two  words  may  be  used  :  (a.)  Copu- 
latively :  as,usus-fructus,  use  and enjoyment ;  pactum-conventum,  bargain 
and  covenant;  duo-decim,  two  and  ten,  twelve;  or  (^.)  Appositively  :  one 
word  explaining  the  other  (1045):  as.Iuppiter,  Jove  the  Father  (94;  133); 
Marspiter,  Mars  the  Father,  for  Mars  pater. 

390.  (4.)   From  an  original  combination  of  an  oblique  case  with  a  prepo- 
sition :  as,  pr5consul,  proconsul,  from  pr5  cSnsulc,/^  a  consul ;  egregius, 
select,  from  e  grege,  out  of  the  herd;  delirus,  astray,  mad,  from  de  lira, 
out  of  the  furrow. 

II.     COMPOSITION    OF    VERBS. 
(A.)       REAL   COMPOUNDS. 

391.  Real    Compounds    are    direct    compounds    of    a   verb 
with    a  preposition;  the  root  vowel  or  diphthong  of  the  verb 
is  often  weakened  (10 2)  :    as, 

per-agere,  put  through,  accomplish  ;  ab-igere,  drive  away  ;  ex-quirere, 
seek  out.  The  prefix,  which  was  originally  a  separate  adverb  modifying  the 
verb,  is  in  poetry  sometimes  separated  from  the  verb  by  another  word ; 
the  disyllabic  prepositions  in  particular  often  remain  as  juxtaposed 
adverbs  (396). 

392.  Some  prepositions  are  inseparable,  that  is,  used  only  in  composi- 
tion :  ambi-,  round,  an-,  up,  dis-,  in  ftvo,  apart,  por-,  towards,  red-,  re-, 
back,   sed-,   se-,   by  oneself,  away:   as,  amb-ire,  go  round  to  ;   an-helare, 
breathe  up;   dis-pellere,  drive  apart;  por-rigere,  stretch  forth  ;  red-dere, 
give  back;  se-iungere,  separate. 

(B.)      APPARENT   COMPOUNDS. 

393.  Apparent   Compounds   are   formed   by   the   juxtaposi- 
tion of : 

394.  (i.)  A  verb  with  a  verb:   facio  and    £15   are  added   to  present   stems, 
mostly  of  intransitive  verbs  in  -ere ;  the  -e-  of  the  first  verb  is  sometimes  long,  and 
sometimes  short  (130,   5):  as,  caie-facere,   make  -warm  (calere);  excandg- 
facere,  make  blaze  (candere) ;  made-facere,  make  -wet  (madere).     In  these 
apparent  compounds,  the  accent  of  facio  remains  the  same  as  in  the  simple  verb  :  as, 
calefacis. 

395.  (2.)  A  substantive  with  a  verb:  as,  anim-advertere,/^  heed  to,  ani- 
mum  advertere ;  venum-dare,  or  vendere,  sell,  venum  dare  ;  ven-ire, 
be  sold,  venum  ire  ;  lucri-facere,  make  gain,  lucri  facere  ;  manu-mittere, 
set  free. 

396.  (2)  An  adverb  with  a  verb :  as,  circum-dare,////1  round;  satis-facere, 
satis-dare,  give  satisfaction;  intro-ire,  go  inside;  malle,  prefer,  for  magis 
velle  (170,  2) ;  nolo,  be  unwilling,  for  ne  volo ;  ne-scire,  hau-scire,  not  know. 

58 


Inflection  :   The  Noun.  [397~4O3° 


C.     INFLECTION. 

397.  INFLECTION  is  the  change  which  nouns,  pronouns,  and 
verbs  undergo,  to  indicate  their  relation  in  a  sentence. 

The  inflection  of  a  noun  or  pronoun  is  often  called  Declension,  and  that 
of  a  verb,  Conjugation. 

(A.)     INFLECTION   OF   THE   NOUN. 

398.  The  noun  or  pronoun  is  inflected  by  attaching 
case  endings  to  the  stem. 

The  endings,  which  are  called  case  endings  for  brevity,  indicate  number 
as  well  as  case,  and  serve  also  to  distinguish  gender  words  from  neuters  in 
the  nominative  and  accusative  singular  of  some  stems,  and  of  all  plurals. 
These  endings  are  nearly  the  same  for  stems  of  all  kinds. 

THE   STEM. 

399.  The  stem  contains  the  meaning  of  the  noun.     Noun  stems 
are  arranged  in  the  following  order:   (i.)  stems  in  -a-,  in  -o-,  in  a 
consonant,  or  in  -i-;  these  are  substantive,  including  proper  names,  or 
adjective;  (2.)  stems  in  -u-  or  -e-;  these  are  substantive  only,  and 
include  no  proper  names. 

400.  In  some  instances,  a  final  stem  vowel  is  retained  before  a  case  ending  which 
begins  with  a  vowel :  as,  urbi-um,  acri-a,  cornu-a,  portu-i,  portu-um  ( 1 16,  c) ; 
in  others  the  stem  vowel  blends  inseparably  with  the  vowel  of  the  case  ending :  as, 
mensis,  dominis  (108,  a). 

401.  Some  nouns  have  more  than  one  form  of  the  stem  :  as, 

sedes  (476)  ;  femur,  iecur  (489) ;  vas,  mensis  (492) ;  virus,  volgus 

!493) ;  iter,  nix,  senex,  &c.  (500) ;  vis  (518) ;  caedes  (523) ;  fames,  plebes 
524) ;  domus  (594) ;  angiportus,  &c.  (595).  Many  nouns  have  a  consonant 
stem  in  the  singular,  and  an  -i-  stem  in  the  plural:  see  516;  most  substan- 
tives in  -ie-  or  -tie-  have  a  collateral  form  in  -ia-  or  -tia-  (604).  Some 
adjectives  have  two  different  stems :  as,  hilarus,  hilara,  hilarum,  and  hilaris, 
hilare ;  exanimus  and  exanimis. 


GENDER. 

402.  There  are  two  genders,  Masculine  and  Femi- 
nine.    Masculine  and  feminine  nouns  are  called  Gender 
nouns.     Nouns  without  gender  are  called  Neuter. 

403.  Gender  is,  properly  speaking,  the  distinction  of  sex.     In  Latin,  a 
great  many  things  without  life  have  gender  in  grammar,  and  are  masculine 
or  feminine. 

59 


404-412]  Words:  Inflection. 

404.  Some  classes  of  substantives  may  be  brought  under  general  heads  of  sig- 
nification, as  below,  like  the  names  of  rivers  and  winds  (405),  which  are  usually  of  the 
masculine  gender,  or  of  plants  (407),   which  are  usually  of   the  feminine.     When 
the  gender  cannot  be  determined  thus,  it  must  be  learned  from  the  special  rules  for 
the  several  stems  and  their  nominatives. 

GENDER  OF  SOME   CLASSES   OF   SUBSTANTIVES. 
MASCULINES. 

405.  Names    of    male    beings,    rivers,    winds,    and 
mountains,  are  masculine  :  as, 

Caesar,  Gaius,  Sulla,  men's  names;  pater,  father;  erus,  master; 
scriba,  scrivener;  Tiberis,  the  Tiber;  Aquilo,  a  Norther;  Lucretilis, 
Mt,  Lucretilis, 

406.  The  river  names :   Allia,  Duria,  Sagra,  Lethe,  and  Styx  are  femi- 
nine.    Also  the  mountain  names  Alpes,  plural,  the  Alps,  and  some  Greek  names 
of  mountains  in  -a  or  -e  :  as,  Aetna,  Mt.  Etna;  Rhodope,  a  Thracian  range. 
A  few  are  neuter,  as  Soracte. 

FEMININES. 

407.  Names  of  female  beings,  plants,  flowers,  shrubs, 

and  trees,  are  feminine :  as, 

Gaia,  Glycerium,  women's  names;  malus,  apple-tree;  quercus,  oak; 
ilex,  holm-oak;  abies,  fir. 

408.  Masculine  are:    boletus,   mushroom,   carduus,   thistle,  dumi,   plural, 
brambles,    intibus,   endive,    iuncus,   rush,    oleaster,    bastard    olive,    rubus, 
bramble,   rumex,  sorrel,   scirpus,  bulrush,  and  rarely   ficus,  fig.      Also  some 
of  Greek  origin  :  as,  acanthus,  amaracus,  asparagus,  and  crocus.     Neuter 
are:  apium,  parsley,  balsamum,  balsam-tree,  robur,  heart  of  oak,  and  some 
names  with  stems  in  -er-  (573). 

MOBILE,   COMMON,   AND  EPICENE  NOUNS. 

409.  MOBILE  NOUNS  have  different  forms  to  distinguish  sex  :  as,  lulius, 
a  man,  Julius,  lulia,  a  woman,  Julia;  cervus,  stag,  cerya,   hind;  socer, 
father-in-law,  socrus,  mother-in-law ;  victor,  conqueror,  victrix,  conqueress. 

Adjectives  'of  three  endings'  (611),  belong  to  this  class. 

410.  Some  nouns   have  one   ending,  but  are  applicable  to   either  sex. 
Such  are  said  to  be  of   Common  Gender:    as,  adulescens,  young  man  or 

young  woman ;  dux,  leader;  mfans,  baby,  child;  and  many  other  conso- 
nant stems  or  stems  in  -i-,  denoting  persons.  Adjectives  '  of  two  endings  ' 
or  'of  one  ending'  (611),  belong  to  this  class. 

411.  EPICENES  have  one  ending  and  one  grammatical  gender,  though  applicable 
to  animals  of  either  sex.     Thus,  aquila,  eagle,  is  feminine,  though  it  may  denote 
a  he-eagle  as  well  as  a  she-eagle :  anates,  ducks,  feminine,  includes  drakes. 

NEUTERS. 

412.  Infinitives,  words  and  expressions  quoted  or  explained, 
and  letters  of  the  alphabet,  are  neuter :  as, 

60 


The  Noun:    Case.  [413—419. 


vivere  ipsum,  mere  living;  istuc  '  taceo,'  your  '/  won't  mention;' 
longum  vale,  a  long  goodbye ;  o  Graecum,  Greek  O.  But  the  letters  have 
sometimes  a  feminine  adjective,  agreeing  with  littera  understood. 

VARIABLE   GENDER. 

413.  Some  substantives  have  different  genders  in  the  two  numbers ; 
the  different  gender  is  sometimes  indicated  by  a  difference  of  stem:  as, 
epulurn,  neuter,  epulae,  feminine,  feast.  See  balneum,  frenum,  jocus, 
locus,  margarita,  ostrea,  rastrum,  in  the  dictionary. 


NUMBER. 

414.  There  are  two  numbers,  the  Singular  used  of 
one,  the  Plural  of  more  than  one. 

415.  ambo,  both,  and  duo,  two,  nominative  and  accusative  masculine  and  neuter, 
are  the  only  remnants  of  an  old  Dual  number,  denoting  two. 

416.  Some  substantives,  from  their  meaning,  have  no  plural. 

Such  are:  proper  names:  as,  Cicero,  Cicero;  Roma,  Rome;  material  and 
abstract  substantives:  as,  oleum,  oil,  vinum,  -wine,  iustitia,  justice;  and 
gerunds  :  as,  regendi,  of  guiding.  For  the  occasional  use  of  the  plural,  1105-1110. 

417.  Some  substantives,  from  their  meaning,  have  no  singular. 

Such  are:  names  of  persons  of  a  class:  as,  maiores,  ancestors;  super!,  the 
beings  above ;  manes,  ghosts ;  of  feasts,  sacrifices,  days  :  as,  Saturnalia,  festival 
of  Saturn;  kalendae,  first  of  the  month  ;  of  things  made  of  parts  or  consisting 
of  a  series  of  acts:  as,  arm  a,  arms;  artus,  joints;  quadrigae,  four-in-hand; 
exsequiae,  funeral  rites;  of  some  places  :  as,  Falerii ;  Vei;  Pompei;  Athe- 
nae,  Athens;  Alpes,  the  Alps. 

418.  Some  substantives  have  different  meanings  in  the  two  numbers  :  as, 

aedis,  temple,  aedes,  hotise ;  auxilium,  aid,  auxilia,  auxiliaries;  career, 
Jail,  carceres,  race-barriers;  Castrum,  Castle,  castra,  camp;  comitium, 
meeting-place,  comitia,  election;  copia,  abundance,  copiae,  troops;  facultas, 
ability,  facultates,  wealth;  finis,  end,  fines,  boundaries;  gratia,  favour, 

gratiae,    thanks ;     impedlmentum,    hindrance,    impedimenta,    baggage; 
ttera    letter    (of  the    alphabet},    litterae,    epistle;    rSstrum,   bgak,    rSstra, 
speaker's  stand.     See  also  aqua,    bonum,    fortuna,    ludus,  opera,    pars, 
in  the  dictionary. 

CASE. 

419.  Nouns  have  five  cases,  the  Nominative,  Geni- 
tive, Dative,  Accusative,  and  Ablative. 

The  nominative  represents  a  noun  as  subject,  the  accusative  as  object ; 
the  genitive  denotes  the  relation  of  of,  the  dative  of  to  or  for,  and  the 
ablative  of  from,  with,  in,  or  by.  But  the  meanings  of  the  cases  are  best 
learnt  from  reading.  All  cases  but  the  nominative  and  vocative  (420)  are 
called  Oblique  Cases. 

61 


4 2 0-4 28-]  Words:  Inflection. 

420.  Town  names  and  a  few  appellatives  have  also  a  case  denoting  the 
place  where,  called  the  Locative.     Masculine  stems  in  -o-  and  some  Greek 
stems  with  other  endings  have  still  another  form  used  in  addressing  a  person 
or  thing,  called  the  Vocative. 

421.  The  stem  of  a  noun  is  best  seen  in  the  genitive;  in  the 
genitive  plural  it  is  preserved  without  change,  except  that  o  of  -o- 
stems  is  lengthened  (123).     In  dictionaries  the  stem  ending  js  indicated 
by  the  genitive  singular,  thus  :  -ae,  -I,    -is,  -us   (-Si),  indicate  respec- 
tively stems  in  -a-,  -o-,  a  consonant  or  -i-,  -u-,  and  -e-,  as  follows : 

GENITIVE  SINGULAR.     GENITIVE  PLURAL.  STEMS  IN. 

-ae,  mensae,  table  -arum,  mensa-rum  -a-,  mensa-,  N.  mensa 

-I,  domini,  master  -orum,  domino-rum  -o-,  domino-,  N.  dominus 

-is,  regis,  king  -cons,  um,  reg-um  -consonant,  reg-,  N.  rex 

-is,  civis,  citizen  -ium,  civi-um  -i-,  civi-,  N.  civis 

-us,  portus,  port  -uum,  portu-um  -u-,  portu-,  N.  portus 

(-€1,  r€I),  thing  (-erum,  re-rum)  -e,  re-,  N.  res 

422.  Gender   nominatives   usually   add    -s    to   the    stem :    as,   servo-3 
or  servu-s, slave,  r5x  (164,  i),  civi-s, portu-s,  re-s.     But  stems  in  -a-  or  in 
a   continuous  consonant   (-1-,   -n-,    -r-,    or   -s-)  have  no -s :   as,   mensa, 
consul,  consul,  flamen,  special  priest,  pater,  father,  flos,  flower. 

423.  Neuters  have  the  nominative  and  accusative  alike ;  in  the  singular 
the  stem  is  used:  as  nomcn,  name;  or  a  shortened  stem:  as,  exemplar, 
pattern;  but  stems  in  -o-  take  -m  :  as,  aevo-m  or  aevu-m,  age.     In  the 
plural  -a  is  always  used:  as,  regna,  kingdoms,  nomina,   cornua,  horns. 
For  -s  in  adjectivco  '  of  one  ending/  see  612. 

424.  Gender  accusatives  singular  add  -m  to  the  stem :  as,  mensa-m, 
servo-m  or  servu-m,  navi-m,  ship,   portu-m,    die-m.     The   consonant 
stems  have  the  ending  -em:  as,  reg-em  ;  most  substantive  stems  in  -i- 
and  all  adjectives  also  drop  -i-  and  take  -em :  as,  nav-em,  trist-em,  sad. 
In  the  plural,  gender  stems  add  -s  before  which  the  vowel  is  long:  as, 
mensa-s,  servo-s,  rege-s,  navi-s  or  nave-s,  portu-s,  re-s. 

425.  The  ablative  singular  usually  ends  in  the  long  vowel  of  the  stem : 
as,  mensa,  domino,  navi,  portu,  re.     The  ablative  of  consonant  stems 
usually  has  -e  (rarely  -i-,  see  502)  :  as,  patre,  father  ;  and  that  of  substan- 
tive -i-  stems  has  -e  more  commonly  than  -I:  as,  nave. 

426.  The  ablative  singular  of  -a-  and  -o-  stems  ended  anciently  in  -ad  and 
-6d  respectively:  as,  PRAIDAD,  PREIVATOD;  that  of  consonant  stems  in  -id:  as, 
AIKID,  COVENTIONID.     But  -d  is  almost  entirely  confined  to  inscriptions  and  dis- 
appeared early  (149). 

427.  The  genitive  plural  adds  -rum  to  -a-,  -o-,  and  -e-  stems :    as, 
mensa-rum,   domino-rum,   re-rum ;   and   -um   to  consonant  stems,   -i- 
stems,  and  -u-  stems :    as,  reg-um,  civi-um,  portu-um. 

428.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  are  always  alike  :  stems  in  -a-  and 
-o-  take  -is,  which  blends  with  the  stem  vowel  (400) :  as,  mensis,  domims; 
other  stems  have  -bus,  before  which  consonant  stems  are  extended  by  i? 
as,  regi-bus,  navi-bus,  portu-bus  or  porti-bt!s,  re-bus. 

62 


The  Noun  :    Stems  in  -a-.          [429—435. 


429.  Some  pronouns  and  a  few  adjectives   have   some   peculiar 
case  endings  ;  see  618-694. 

430.  Many  nouns  are  defective  in  case. 

Thus,  many  monosyllables  have  no  genitive  plural :  as,  aes,  coffer,  cor,  heart, 
COS,  whetstone,  dos,  do-wry,  OS,  face,  pax,  peace,  pix,  pitch,  ros,  dew,  sal, 
salt,  lux,  light ;  many  words  have  no  genitive,  dative,  or  ablative  plural :  as, 
hiemps,  winter ;  especially  neuters :  as,  far,  spelt,  fel,  gall,  mel,  honey,  pus, 
matter,  riis,  coimtry,  tus,  frankincense.  Many  words  in  -tu-  (-SU-)  have  only 
the  ablative  (235).  For  -e-  stems,  see  600.  Other  words  more  or  less  defective  are 
exlex,  exspes,  fas  and  nefas,  Inntias,  inquies,  instar,  lues,  nemo,  opis 
and  vicis  genitives,  pondo  and  sponte  ablatives,  secus,  vis.  Many  adjectives 
'of  one  ending  '  want  the  nominative  and  accusative  neuter  plural  and  genitive  plural. 

431.  Some  adjectives   are   altogether  indeclinable:    as,    frugl,   thrifty,  an   old 
dative;  nequam,  naughty,  an  old  accusative;  quot,  how  many;  tot,  so  many; 
and  most  numerals  (637).     These  adjectives  are  attached  to  any  case  of  a  substantive 
without  varying  their  own  forms. 


STEMS    IN    -a-. 

The  First  Declension. 
Genitive  singular  -ae,  genitive  plural  -a-rum. 

432.  Stems  in   -a-   include  substantives  and  adjec- 
tives ;    both  substantives  and  adjectives  are  feminine. 

433.  Names  of  males  are  masculine  (405):  as,  scriba,  writer;  also  Hadria, 

the  Adriatic,  and  rarely  damma,  deer,  and  talpa,  mole. 

434.  The  nominative  of  stems  in  -a-  ends  in  the  shortened  stem 
vowel  -a. 

435.  Stems  in  -a-  are  declined  as  follows  : 


T3                r/5 

Example 

mensa,  table, 

f  s& 

Stem 

mensa-,  F. 

B  fl  "8 
**.      S 

c/5        « 

Singular 

Nom. 

mensa 

table,  a  (or  the}  table 

-a 

Gen. 

mensae 

a  table's,  of  a  table 

-ae 

Dat. 

mensae 

to  or  for  a  table 

-ae 

Ace. 

mensam 

a  table 

-am 

Abl 

mensa 

from>  with,  or  by  a  table 

-a 

Plural 

Nom. 

mensae 

tables  (or  the}  tables 

-ae 

Gen. 

mensarum 

tables'1,  of  tables 

-arum 

Dat. 

mensis 

to  or  for  tables 

-is 

Ace. 

mensas 

tables 

-as 

AM. 

mensis 

from,  with,  or  by  tables 

-is 

436-444-]  Words:  Inflection. 


SINGULAR    CASES. 

436.  -a-  of  the  stem  was  shortened  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  singular  at 
an  early  period  (130,  132).     A  few  apparent  examples  of  the  nominative  in  -a,  found 
in  the  oldest  writers,  seem  due  to  metrical  causes  :  as,  aquila  (Enn.).     But  -a  occurs 
in   Greek  proper  names  (445).     A  couple  of  old  masculine  nominatives  in  -as  are 
quoted  (422) :  paricidas,  murderer,  and  hosticapas,  taker  of  enemies.     In  the 
accusative  singular  -am  occurs  once:  inimicitiam  (Enn.). 

437.  The  genitive  sometimes  ends  (i.)  in  -ai  in  poetry:  as,  aulai,  of  the 
hall ;  pictai,  embroidered ;  (2.)  in  -as  :  as,  molas,  of  a  mill.     This  genitive 
is  rare,  but  was  always  kept  up  in  the  word  familias  with  pater  or  mater, 
sometimes  with  filius  or  filia  :  pater  familias,  the goodman,  mater  familias, 
the  housewife.     But  pater  familiae,  or  in  the  plural  patres  familiarum,  is 
equally  common. 

438.  Town  names  and  a  few  appellatives  have  a  locative  case  in 
-ae :  as,  Romae,  at  Rome,  in  Rome;  militiae,  in  war,  in  the  field, 
in  the  army. 

PLURAL    CASES. 

439.  Compounds  ending  with  -cola,  inhabiting,  and  -gena,  born,  and 
patronymics,  sometimes   have    the   genitive   plural  in    -um  in  poetry:  as, 
caelicolfim,    of  occupants    of  heaven;    Graiugenum,  of  Greek-born  men; 
Aeneadum,  of  Aeneas 's  sous  ;_also  names  of   peoples:   as,  Lapithum,  of 
the  Lapithae.     With  these  last  -um  occurs  even  in  prose  :  as,  Crotoniatum, 
of  the  Crotona  peaple.     Others  in  -Gm    are   drachmum,  amphorum. 

440.  In  the  dative  and  ablative  plural,  -eis  sometimes  occurs  (443):  as,  tueis 
ingratieis,  against  your  -will  (Plant.).     Nouns  in  -ia  have  rarely  a  single  I :  as, 
pecunis,  by  moneys  (Cic.) ;  taenis,  -with  fillets  (Verg.) ;  nonis  lunis,  on  the. 
fifth  of  June  (Cic.).     See  24. 

441.  In  the  dative  and  ablative  plural,  words  in  -aia,  or  plural  -aiae,  have  -ais, 
and  those  in  -eia  have  -eis  (127,  7)  :  as  KAL.  MAIS,  on  the  calends  of  May  (inscr.) ; 
Bais,  at  Bajae  (Hor.);  plebeis,  plebeian. 

442.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  sometimes  end  in  -abus,  particularly  in 
deabus,  goddesses,  and  flliabus,  daughters,  to  distinguish  them  from  deis,^*/.?, 
and  filiis,  sons,     ambae,  both,  and  duae,  two,  regularly  have  ambabus  and 
duabus. 

443.  Other  case  forms  are  found  in  inscriptions,  as  follows: 

G.  -ai,  which  may  be  monosyllabic  or  disyllabic  in  pronunciation  :  PVLCHRAI  ; 
LAVHRNAI  ;  -aes,  after  80  B.C.,  chiefly  in  proper  names,  mostly  Greek:  HERAES  ; 
rarely  in  appellatives:  DOMINAES;  -es  :  MINERVES.;  -a,  VESTA;  COIRA,  i.e. 
Curae.  D. -ai,  in  all  periods  (96):  FILIAI;  -a:  FORTVNA;  -e  (96):  FORTVNE. 
Ac.  -a  (61):  TAVRASIA  ;  MAGNA  SAPIENTIA.  Ab.  -ad  ^426) :  PRAIDAD.  Loc. 
-ai :  ROMAI.  Plural:  N.  -ai  (96):  TABELAI  DATAI  :  -a,  rare:  MATRONA  ;  -e, 
rare  and  provincial  (96)  :  MVSTE,  i.e.  mystae.  D.  and  Ab.  -eis,  very  often  (98) : 
SCRIBEIS;  D.  -as,  once:  DEVAS  CORWISCAS,  i.e.  divis  Corniscis.  Ab.  -es  once 
(98) :  NVGES,  i.e.  nugis. 

GREEK   NOUNS. 

444.  Greek  appellatives  always  take  a  Latin  form  in  the  dative  singular  and  in 
the  plural,  and  usually  throughout:  thus,  poeta,   M.,  poet,  and  aula,  F.,  court, 
are  declined  like  mensa.     Masculines  have  sometimes  a  nominative  -es  and  accu- 
sative -en  :  as,  anagnostes,  reader,  anagnosten ;  rarely  an  ablative  -e  :  as, 
sophiste,  sophist.     Greek  feminines  in   -e   sometimes  have  Greek  forms  in  late 
writers:  as,  N.  grammatice,  philology,  G.  grammatices,  Ac.  grammaticen, 
Ab.  grammatice  (Quintil.). 

64 


The  Noun :    Stems  in  -O-.       [445-450. 


445.  Greek  proper  names  sometimes  have  the  following  forms.  Nominative 
masculine  -as,  -es :  as,  Prusias,  Atrides;  feminine  -a:  as,  Gela,  Phaedra; 
-e  :  as,  Circe.  Genitive  feminine  -es  :  as,  Circe's.  Accusative  masculine  -an, 
-den:  as,  Aenean,  Peliden;  feminine  -en:  as,  Circen.  Ablative  feminine 
-e  :  as,  TIsiphone.  Vocative  -a  or  -a  :  as,  Atrida,  Atrida,  Thyesta:  -te  : 
as,  Boote ;  -de  :  as,  Aeacide. 


STEMS    IN    -o-. 

The  Second  Declension. 
Genitive  singular  -I,  genitive  plural  -6-rum. 

446.  Stems  in  -o-   include  substantives  and  adjec- 
tives, masculine  or  neuter. 

447.  Most  names  of  plants  in   -us  are  feminine   (407);  also  the  following: 
alvos    or    alvus,    belly,    colus,    distaff,    domus,    house,    humus,    ground, 
vannus,  fan. 

448.  The   nominative   of  masculines    ends,   including   the   stem 
vowel,   in  -o-s,   or  usually  -u-s;    some  end   in  -r ;    neuters  end  in 
-o-m,  or  usually  -u-m. 

449.  (T.)   Stems  in  -o-  with  the  nominative  in  -us  or  -um 
are  declined  as  follows  : 


co 

Examples 

dominus,  master, 

regnum,  kingdom, 

§•§  s! 

Stems 

domino-,  M. 

regno-,  Ne. 

OT    rt    "  *§ 

V 

Singular 

M. 

Ne. 

Norn. 

dominus,  a  (or  the)  master 

regnum 

-us 

-um 

Gen. 

domini,  a  master's 

regni 

-1 

-i 

Dat. 

domino,  to  or  for  a  master 

regno 

-6 

-5 

Ace. 

dominum,  a  master  [master 

rSgnum 

-um 

-um 

Abl. 

domino,  from,  with,  or  by  a 

regno 

-0 

-5 

Voc. 

domine,  master 

-e 

Plural 

Nom. 

domini,  (the}  masters 

regna 

-I 

-a 

Gen. 

dominorum,  of  masters 

regnorum 

-orum 

-6rum 

Dat. 

dominis,  to  or  for  masters 

regnis 

-is 

-is 

Ace. 

domin5s,  masters  [masters 

regna 

-5s 

-a 

Abl. 

6.om.\r\\B,from,  with,  or  by 

rggnis 

-is 

-is 

450.  deus,  god,  is  declined  as  follows:  N.  deus,  G.  dei,  D.  and  Ab.  deo, 
Ac.  deum.  Plural:  N.  dei,  dn,  commonly  di,  G.  deorum  or  deum,  D.  and 
Ab.  dels,  dus,  commonly  dis,  Ac.  deos. 


45I-454-] 


Words.  Inflection. 


451.   (2.)  Stems  in  -o-  with  the  nominative  in  -r  or  in  -aiua,  -eius, 
or  -oius  are  declined  as  follov/s  : 


Examples 
Steins 

puer,       boy, 
puero-,  M. 

Qi^r,  field, 
agro-,  M. 

Pompeius,  Pompey, 
Pompeio-,  M. 

Singular 
Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 
Voc. 

puer,  a  (or  the]  boy 
pueri,  a  boy's,  of  a  boy 
puer5,  to  cr  for  a  boy 
puerum,  a  boy 
pueTO,fr0m,  with,  or  by  a  boy 

ager 
agri 
agro 
agrum 
agro 

Pompeius 
Pompei 
Pompeio 
Pompeium 
Pompeio 
Pompei,  Pompei 

Plural 
Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 
Abl. 

pueri,  (the]  boys 
puer5rum,  toys',  of  boys 
pueris,  to  or  for  boys 
pueros,  boys 
pueriSjfrom,  with,  or  by  boys 

agri 
agrorum 
agris 
agros 
agris 

Pompei 
Pompeiorum 
Pompeis 
Pompeios 
Pompeis 

SINGULAR    CASES. 

452.  -us  and  -um  were  originally  -os  and  -om.  But  -us  was  used  in  the 
earliest  times,  -um  somewhat  later,  and  both  became  prevalent  between  218  and  55 
B.C.  (107,  ^).  After  u  or  v,  however,  the  -os  and  -om  were  retained  till  toward  50 
A.D.  (107,  c);  also  after  qu  ;  but  -cus  and  -cum  often  displaced  -quos  and  -quom 
(157):  as,  equos,  equom,  or  ecus,  ecum,  horse;  antiques,  antiquom, 
or  anticus,  anticum,  ancient.  In  the  vocative  -e  was  always  used,  and  is 
retained  by  Plautus  in  puere,  thou  boy. 

453-  Words  in  -rus  with  a  long  penult,  as,  severus,  stern,  and  the  following 
substantives  with  a  short  penult  are  declined  like  dominus  (449) : 

erus,  master  umerus,  shoulder 

iuniperus,  juniper  uterus,  womb 

numerus,  number 

For  adjective  stems  in  -ro-  with  nominative  -rus,  see  615. 

454.  Masculine  stems  in  -ro-  preceded  by  a  short  vowel  or  a  mute, 
except  those  above  (453),  drop  -os  in  the  nominative,  and  have  no  vocative: 
as,  stem  puero-,  N.  puer,  boy  (m,£).  Most  masculines  in  -ro-  have  a 
vowel  before  r  only  in  the  nominative  -er  (m,£)  :  as  agro-,  N.  agcr.  But 
in  compounds  ending  in  -fer  and  -ger,  carrying,  having,  and  the  follow- 
ing, the  vowel  before  -r  is  a  part  of  the  stem,  and  is  found  in  all  the 
cases : 

adulter,  Liber,  paramour,  Liber  puer,  vir,  boy,  man 

gener,  socer,  son-in-law,  father-in-law    liberi,  vesper,  children,  evening 

For  Mulciber,  Hiber,  and  CeltibSr,  see  the  dictionary ;  for  adjective  stems 
in  -ro-  with  nominative  -r,  see  616.  Once  socerus  (PL). 

66 


The  Noun:    Stems  in  -O-.      [455-464. 


455.  nihilum,  nothing,  usually  drops  -um  in  the  nominative  and  accusative, 
becoming  nihil  or  nil,  and  similarly  non,  not,  may  be  for  noenum,  naught  (99) 
famul  is  used  for  famulus,  slave,  by  Ennius  and  Lucretius,  once  each  (in,  b). 

456.  Substantives  ending  in  -ius  or  -him  (but  never  adjectives), 
have  commonly  a  single  -I  in  the  genitive  singular :  as, 

Vergilius,  G.  Vergili  (87);  filius,  son,  G.  fill;  conubium,  marriage, 
G.  conubi. 

457-  Vergil  has  once  a  genitive  -ii,  fluvii,  river's.  Propertius  has  -ii  two  or 
three  times;  with  Ovid,  Seneca,  and  later  writers,  -ii  is  common:  as,  gladii,  of  a 
sword ;  even  in  proper  names,  which  were  the  last  to  take  -ii  :  as,  Tarquinii  ;  but 
family  names  almost  always  retain  a  single  -i.  Locatives  have  -il :  as,  Iconii  (Cic.). 

458.  Proper   names   ending  in  -aius,   -eius,   or  -oius   have   -ai, 
-ei,  or   -61   in   the   genitive  and   vocative   singular  and   nominative 
plural,   and  -ais,    -els,    or    -oia    in   the   dative   and  ablative   plural 
(127,  7):  as, 

Gaius,  G.,  V.,  and  N.  PI.  Gal,  D.  and  Ab.  PI.  Gals ;  Pompei,  Pom- 
pels  ;  Boi,  Bois.  In  verse  -ei  of  the  vocative  is  sometimes  made  one 
syllable (120):  as,  Pompei;  Voltei  (Hor.). 

459.  Latin  proper  names  in  -ius  have  the  vocative  in  -I  only  :  as, 
Vergilius,   V.   Vergili ;    Mercurius,   V.   Mercuri    (87).        So,   also, 

filius,    fill,  son;    genius,  geni,  good  angel;    volturius,   volturi,  vulture ; 
meus,  mi,  my. 

460.  Town  names  and  a  few  appellatives  have  a  locative  case  in 
-I :  as,  Ephesi,  in  Ephesusj  humi,  on  the  ground j  belli,  in  war. 


PLURAL  CASES. 

461.  In  the  nominative  plural  masculine,  -ei  sometimes  occurs  (465):  as,  natei 
geminei,  twins  born  (Plaut.) ;  -eis  or  -is  is  rare  (465) :  as,  Sardeis,  Sardians  ; 
oculis,  eyes;  not  infrequently  hisce,  these  here  (Plaut.);  masculine  stems  in  -io- 
have  rarely  a  single  -i  :  as,  fili,  sons.     For  -ai,  -ei,  or  -6i,  see  458,     The  nomina- 
tive and  accusative  plural  of  neuters  ended  anciently  in  -a  (130,  2).     But  -a  was 
shortened  at  an  early  period. 

462.  In  the   common  genitive  plural    -orum,   the  -o-  of  the  stem  is 
lengthened  (123).     A  genitive  plural  in  -um  (or,  after  v,  in  -8m)  is  common 
from  divos,  divus,  and  deus,  god;  from  denarius,  denar,  modius,  peck, 
nummus,  money,  sestertius,  sesterce,  and  talentum,  talent,  with  numerals ; 
and   from   cardinals   and  distributives  (641):   as,  div6m,   divum,    defim ; 
mille  sestertium  ;  ducentum  ;  bmum.     The  u  was  originally  long  (132); 
but  it  was  shortened  before  100  A.D. 

463.  Other  masculine  substantives  have  occasionally  this  genitive :  as,  liberfims 
of  children;  particulariy  inset  phrases  and  in  verse:  as,  centuria  fabrfini,_££»/#rj> 
of  mechanics ;   GraiGm,  of  Greeks.     With  neuter  substantives,  as  oppidtim,  for 
oppidorum,  of  towns,  and  with  adjectives  it  is  rare. 

464.  In  the  dative  and  ablative  plural,    -eis  is  rare  (98) :   as,  Epidamnieis 
(Plaut).     Stems  in   -io-   have  rarely  a  single  i  :    as,   filis,  for  sons.      For  -ais, 
-eis,  or  -ois,  see  458.     ambo,  both,  and  duo,  two,  have  ambobus  and  duobus 
(640). 

67 


4 6  5  ~4  70.]  Words :   Inflection. 


465.  Other  case  forms  are  found  in  inscriptions  as  follows : 
N.  -os,  -om,  with  o  retained  (107,  c):  FILIOS,  TRIBVNOS;  POCOLOM;  in  proper 
names  -o  (66) :  CORNELIO  ;  -u,  rare  :  LECTV  ;  -is,  or  -i,  for  -ius  (135,  2) :  CAECILIS  ; 
CLAVDI  ;  neuter  -o  (61) :  POCOLO.  G.  oldest  form  -I :  VRBANI  ;  -ei,  from  146  B.C. 
to  Augustus  :  POPVLEI;  CONLEGEI ;  -ii  from  stems  in  -io-  not  before  Tiberius: 
COLLEGII.  Ac.  -om  (107 1):  VOLCANOM  ;  -0(61):  OPTVMO  VIRO;  -u  :  GREMIV. 
Ab.  -od,  not  after  186  B.C.  (426):  POPLICOD,  PREIVATOD.  Plural:  N.  -ei,  always 
common  (98):  VIREI  ;  FILEI  ;  -es,  -eis, -Is  (461) :  ATILIES;  COQVES;  LEIBEREIS, 
i.e.  liberi;  MAGISTREIS;  MAGISTRIS  ;  -e,  rare:  PLOIRVME,  i.e.  plurumi.  G. 
-5m  or  -o  (61)  ROMANOM;  ROMANO;  -oro  (61):  DVONORO.  D.  and  Ab.  -eis, 
the  only  form  down  to  about  130  B.C.  (98)  :  ANTIQVEIS  ;  PROXSVMEIS;  -es,  twice: 

CAVATVRINES. 


GREEK   NOUNS. 

466.  Greek  stems  in  -o-  are  generally  declined  like  Latin  nouns,  but 
in  the  singular  sometimes  have  -os  in  the  nominative,  -on  in  the  nomi- 
native or  accusative  neuter,  rarely  -u  in  the  genitive,  or  -5  in  the  feminine 
ablative.  Plural,  nominative  sometimes  -oe,  masculine  or  feminine,  and 
genitive,  chiefly  in  book-titles,  -on :  as, 

Nominative  Ilios ;  flion  or  Ilium.  Genitive  Menandru,  of  Menander. 
Ablative  feminine  adjective  lectica  octophoro,  in  a  sedan  with  eight  bearers. 
Plural:  nominative  Adelphoe,  the  Brothers;  canephoroe,  basket-bearers,  femi- 
nine. Genitive  GeorgicSn  liber,  book  of  Husbandry.  For  Androgeos, 
Athos  and  Panthus,  see  the  dictionary. 


CONSONANT     STEMS. 

The  Third  Declension. 

Genitive  singular  -is,  genitive  plural  -um. 

467.  Consonant  stems  are  mostly  substantive,  and 
include  both  gender  words  and  neuters. 

Comparatives  and  a  few  other  words  are  adjective.  For  the 
gender  of  substantives,  see  570. 

468.  The  nominative  of  consonant  stems  ends  in   -a    (or   -x)  ; 
or  in  -n  (-6),  -1,  -r,  or  -a  of  the  stem,  rarely  in  -c  or  -t. 

469.  Most  consonant  stems  have  one  syllable  less  in  the 
nominative  than  in  the  genitive. 

Such  words  are  called  Imparisy liable  words  or  I mpar {syllables  : 
as,  nominative  rex,  king,  one  syllable  ;  genitive  regis,  of  a  king, 
two  syllables. 

470.  Many  consonant  stems  have  a  double  form :  one  form  used 
in  the  nominative  singular  (neuters  have  this  form  in  the  accusative 
also),  another  form  in  the  other  cases  :  as, 

68 


The  Noun:    Consonant  Stems.      [471,472. 


iudex, /»;w,  stem  of  nominative  iudeo  (136,  2),  of  other  cases  iudio; 
flamen  (103,  a),  special  priest,  flamin-  (103,  a) ;  virgS,  maid,  virgin-  (105,^) ; 
auceps  (107,^),  fowler,  aucup-  (104,  c) ;  ebur  (107,  c),  ivory,  ebor-  ;  genus, 
race, gener-  (145;  107, c] ;  tristius  (346), sadder, tristior-  (346) ;  corpus  (107, r), 
body,  corpor-  ( 105,  /') ;  pater  (135, 2),  father,  patr-.  In  such  instances  the  stem 
of  the  oblique  cases  is  taken  for  brevity  to  represent  both  forms  of  the  stem. 


I.      MUTE   STEMS. 


471.  (i.)  Stems  in  a  guttural  mute,  -g-  or  -c-,  are  declined 
as  follows  : 


Examples 

rex,  king) 

dux,  leader, 

iudex,  juror, 

C/} 

<U    bp 
v>    C 

Stems 

reg-,  M. 

due-,  M. 

iudio,  M.,F. 

c°>  '-3 

u  s 

Singular 

JVom. 

rex,  a  (or  the]  king 

dux 

iudex 

-S  (-X) 

Gen. 

regis,  a  king's,  of  a  king 

ducis 

iudicis 

-is 

Dat. 

regi,  to  or  for  a  king 

dud 

iudici 

-I 

Ace. 

regem,  a  king               [king 

ducem 

iudicem 

-em 

AbL 

Tege,from,  with,  or  by  a 

duce 

iudice 

-e 

Plural 

Nom. 

reges,  (the)  kings 

duces 

iudices 

-es 

Gen. 

regum,  kings',  of  kings 

ducum 

iudicum 

-um 

Dat. 

regibus,  to  or  for  kings 

ducibus 

iudicibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

reges,  kings                 [kings 

duces 

iudices 

-es 

Abl. 

regibus,  from,  with,  or  by 

ducibus 

iudicibus 

-ibus 

In  the  nominative  and  accusative,  neuters  have  no  case  ending  in  the 
singular,  and  -a  in  the  plural.  In  the  other  cases  they  have  the  same  case 
endings  as  gender  stems. 

472.  (a.)  Examples  of  stems  in  -g-,  with  nominative  -x,  genitive 
-gis,  are: 

-ex,  -egis    grex,    M.,    (F.),    herd;    aquilex,    M.,    spring-hunter,   hydraulic 
engineer. 

-ex,  -egis    rex,  M.,  king;  interrex,  regent;  lex,  F.,  law;  and  N.  and  Ac. 
exlex,  exlegem,  beyond  the  /aw,  adjective. 

-ex,  -igis     remex,  M.,  oarsman. 

-Ix,  -fgis      strfx,  F.,  screech-owl. 

-unx,  -ugis  coniunx  (122,  *)  or  coniux,  M.,  F.,  sfouse. 

-ux,  -ugis      frux,  F.,  fruit. 


474-] 


Words :  Infla  tion. 


473.  ( 
•cis,  are  : 
-ax,  -acis 
-ax,  -acis 
-ex,  -ecis 

-ex,  -ecis 
-ex    -icis 


.)  Examples  of  stems  in  -c-,  with  nominative  -x,  genitive 

fax,  F.,  torch,  no  G.  PI.  in  good  writers  (430). 

pax,  f.,  peace,  PI.  only  N.  and  Ac.  paces  ;  Umax,  F.,  snail. 

faenisex,  M.,  hay  'cutter  ;  nex,  F.,  murder;  preci,  D.,  F.,  prayer, 
no  N.,  usually  plural. 

vervex,  M.,  -wether  ;  allex,  F.,  fish-pickle,  also  allec,  Ne. 

Masculines  mostly  :  apex,  point  ;  carex,  F.,  rush  ;  caudex  or 
codex,  block,  book:  cimex,  bug;  cortex,  M.,  F.,  bark;  culex, 
gnat  ,  forfex,  M.,  F.,  shears;  frutex,  shriib  ;  ilex,  F.,  holm-oak; 
illex,  M.,  F.,  seducer  ;  imbrex,  tile  ;  latex,  fluid  ;  murex,/^r//^- 
shell;  obicc,  Ab.,  M.,  F.,  bar,  no  N.;  paelex,  F.,  concubine, 
pollex,  thumb  ;  pulex,y&?tf;  pumex,  pumice  -stone  ;  ramex,  blood- 
vessel; rumex,  sorrel;  silex,  M.,  F.,  flint;  sorex,  shrew-mouse; 
vortex  or  vertex,  whirl  ;  vitex,  F.,  a  shrub.  Also  some  com- 
pounds: as,  iudex,  juror;  artifex,  artisan  ;  auspex,  bird-viewer. 

Feminines  mostly:  appendix,  addition,  calix,  M.,  c^^p  ;  filix, 
fern;  fulix,  gull;  fornix,  M.,  arch^;  larix,  larch;  pix,  .pitch, 
no  G.  PI.  (430);  calix,  -willow;  varix,  swollen  vein;  vicis,  G., 
change,  no  N.,  D.,  or  G.  PI.  (430). 

Feminines:  cervix,  neck  ;  cicatrix,  scar;  comix,  crow  ;  c5turmx 
(62),  quail;  lodix,  blanket;  radix,  root;  struix,  heap.  Also 
coxendix,  hip,  later  coxendix,  coxendicis. 

vox,  F.,  voice. 

crux,  F.,  cross;  dux,  M.,  F.,  leader;  nux,  F.,  nut-tree,  nut; 
tradux,  M.,  vinelayer. 

474.   (2.)  Stems  in  a  dental  mute,  -d-  or  -t-,  are  declined  as 
follows  : 


-ix,  -icis 

-ix,  -icis 

-5x,  -ocis 
-ux,  -ucis 


Examples 
Stems 

custos,  keeper, 
custod-,  M. 

aetas,     age, 
aetat-,  F. 

virtus,  virtue, 
virtut-,  F. 

rc\\\ts,  soldier, 
milit-,  M. 

Singular 
Nom. 

custos 

aetas 

virtus 

miles 

Gen. 

custSdis 

aetatis 

virtutis 

militis 

Dat. 

custodi 

aetati 

virtuti 

militi 

Ace. 

custodem 

aetatem 

virtut  em 

militem 

Abl. 

custode 

aetate 

virtute 

milite 

Plural 

Nom. 

custodes 

aetates 

virtutes 

milites 

Gen. 

custodum 

aetatum 

virtutum 

militum 

Dat. 

custodihus 

aetatibus 

virtutibus 

militibus 

Ace. 

custodes 

aetates 

virtutes 

milites 

Abl. 

custodibus 

aetatibus 

virtutibus 

militibus 

70 


The  Noun:    Consonant  Stems.       [4 7 5 -4 7 7. 


475.  (a.)  Examples  of  stems  in  -d-,  with  nominative  -B,  genitive 
-dis,  are  : 

-as,  -adis     vas,  M.,  Y.,  personal  surety,  no  G.  PI.  (430). 
-aes,  -aedis  praes,  MM  bondsman. 

-es,  -idis     obses,  M.,  F., hostage ;  praeses,  M.,  F., overseer.  *deses,  slothful, 

adjective. 

-es,  -edis     pes,  M.,foot. 

-es,  -edis     heres,   M.,   F.,  heir;  exheres,  disinherited,  adjective;  mercSs, 
F.,  reward. 


-is,  -idis 


Feminines:    capis,    ctip ;    cassis,    helmet;    cuspis,    spear-point ; 
promulsis,  appetizer;  lapis,  M.,  stone. 


-os,  -odis     custos,  M.,  F., guard. 

-aus,  -audis  laus,  F.,  praise. 

-us,  -udis     pecus,  F.,  beast,  head  of  cattle. 

-US,  -udis     Feminines  :  incus,  anvil ;  palus,  swamp,  nominative  once  in  Horace 
palus,  as  from  an  -o-  stem ;  subscus,  dovetail. 

476.  sedes,  F.,  seat,  has  an  -s-  stem,  namely  -es  (236),  in  the  nominative,  and 
sed-  in  the  other  cases  (401);  G.  PI.  sedum,  once  sedium  (Yell.  Pat).  The 
only  example  of  a  neuter  stem  in  -d-,  with  nominative  -r,  genitive  -dis,  is  cor 
(171,2),  heart,  cordis,  no  G.  PI.  (430). 


477-  ( 
-tis,  are  : 

-as,  -atis 


-as,  -atis 
-es,  -etis 
-es,  -itis 


-es,  -etis 
-es,  -etis 

-os,  -otis 
-6s,  -otis 

-us,  -utis 


J.)  Examples  of  stems  in  -t-,  with  nominative  -B,  genitive 

anas,  F.,  duck;  G.  PI.  also  anitum  (Cic.),  and  Ac.  PI.  anites 

(Plaut.). 

aetas,  F.,  age  ;  also  numerous  other  feminines  in  -tas  (262). 
interpres,  M.,  F.,  go-between;  seges,  F.,  crop;  teges,  F.,  mat. 

Masculines  mostly:  ames,  net-pole;  antistes,  M.,  F.,  overseer; 
caespes,  sod;  comes,  M.,  F.,  companion;  eques,  horseman; 
fomes,  tinder;  gurges,  whirlpool;  hospes,  M..,  F.,  guest-friend; 
limes,  path;  merges,  F.,  sheaf;  miles,  M.,  F.,  soldier;  palmes, 
vine-sprout ;  pedes,  man  afoot,  infantry  ;  poples,  hough  ;  Stipes, 
trunk;  termes,  bough;  trames,  by-path,  dives,  rich;  sospes, 
safe ;  superstes,  surviving;  caelite,  Ab.,  occupant  of  heaven,  no 
N.,  adjectives. 

abies,  F.,Jlr;  aries,  M.,  ram;  paries,  M.,watl. 

Feminines :  quies  and  requies,  rest,  no  D.,  Ac.  often  requiem, 
Ab.  usually  requie  (603);  inquies,  unrest,  N.  only. 

compos,  master  of,  adjective. 

nepSs,  M.,  grandson,  profligate ;  sacerdos,  M.,  priest;  cos,  F., 
whetstone,  no  G.  PI.  (-130)  ;  d5s,  F.,  dowry,. no  G.  PI.  in  good  writers 
(430) ;  dotum  once  (Val.  Max.),  and  dotium  in  the  jurists. 

Feminines:  iuventus,  youth;  salus,  existence^;  senectus,  old 
age;  servitus,  slavery,  all  singular  only;  and  virtus,  virtue,  with 
a  plural. 

71 


478-481.] 


Words :   Inflection . 


478.  vates,  bard,  has  an  -s-  stem,  namely  -es  (236),  in  the  nominative,  and 
vat-  in  the  other  cases  (401);  G.  PI.  vatum,  but  thrice  vatium  (Cic.).  The  only 
example  of  a  neuter  stem  in  -t-,  with  nominative  -t,  genitive  -tis,  is  caput, 
head,  capitis,  and  its  compounds  occiput,  back  of  the  head  and  sinciput,  jole. 
lac,  Ne.,  milk,  lactis,  has  in  old  and  late  Latin  nominative  and  accusative  lacte, 
lact  once  in  Varro  (171,  2);  ace.  lactem  occurs  in  Petronius  once  and  later. 

479'  (3-)  Stems  in  a  labial  mute,  -b-  or  -p-,  are  declined  as  follows : 
municeps,  burgess,  stem  municip-,  M.,  F. 

Singular :  N.  municeps,  G.  municipis,  D.  municipi,  Ac.  municipem, 
Ab.  municipe.  Plural :  N.  municipes,  G.  municipum,  D.  municipibus, 
Ac.  municipes,  Ab.  municipibus. 

480.  Examples  of  stems  in  -b-  or  -p-,  with  nominative  -s,  genitive 
-bis  or  -pis,  are  : 

-ebs,  -ibis    caelebs,  unmarried,  adjective,  the  only  stem  in  -b-. 
,   -apis  dapis,  G.,  F.,  feast,  N.  and  D.  S.,  and  G.  PI.  not  used  (430). 

-eps,  -ipis  adeps  or  adips,  M.,  F.,/atf,  no  G.  PL;  forceps,  M.,  F.,  pincers; 
municeps,  burgher,  particeps,  sharing,  and  princeps,  first, 
adjectives. 

-eps,  -upis  auceps,  fowler  ;  manceps,  contractor,  mancupis  or  mancipis. 

,   -ipis   stipis,  G.,  F.,  small  change,  no  N. 

-ops,  -opis  Ops,  F.,  old  Opis  (Plaut.),  goddess  of  power  ;  opis,  G.,  F.,  help,  no 
N.,  D.  once  only,  PI.  opes,  means  (418). 


II.      STEMS   IN   A   CONTINUOUS   CONSONANT. 

481.  (i.)  Stems  in  -1-  and  -n-  are  declined  as  follows : 


Examples 

consul,  consul, 

leo,  lion, 

\mago,  likeness, 

nomen,name, 

Stems 

consul-,  M. 

Ie5n-,  M. 

imagin-,  F. 

nomin-,  Ne. 

Singular 

Nom. 

consul 

led 

imago 

nomen 

Gen. 

consulis 

leonis 

imaginis 

nominis 

Dat. 

consul! 

leoni 

imagini 

nSmini 

Ace. 

cdnsulem 

Ie5nem 

imaginem 

nomen 

Abl. 

consule 

ledne 

imagine 

nomine 

Plural 

Nom. 

consules 

leones 

imagines 

nomina 

Gen. 

consulum 

leonum 

imaginum 

nominum 

Dat. 

cSnsulibus 

leonibus 

imaginibus 

nominibus 

Ace. 

consules 

leones 

imagines 

nomina 

Abl. 

cdnsulibus 

leonibus 

imaginibus 

nominibus 

72 


The  Noun:    Consonant  Stems.       [482-487. 


482.  Examples  of  stems  in  -1-,  with  nominative  -1,  genitive  -lis,  are  : 
-al,  -alls       sal,  M.,  salt,  sometimes  Ne.  in  the  singular;  no  G.  PI.  (430). 

-el,  -ellis     fel  (171,  i),  Ne., gall ;  mel,  Ne.,  honey ;  plural  only  fella,  mella. 
-ll,    -ills        mugil,  W.., mullet;  pugil,  M.,  boxer;  vigil,  M.., -watchman. 
-61,  -olis       sol,  M.,  sun,  no  G.  PL  (430). 
-ul,  -ulis      consul,  consul;  praesul,  head  dancer ;  exsul,  exile. 

483.  (a.)  Examples  of  stems  in   -n-,  with  nominative   -en,  geni- 
tive -inis,  are: 

flamen,  M. , priest ;  pecten,  TA.,comb ;  tiblcen,  M., piper ;  tubicen,  M.,  trum- 
peter ;  sanguen,  Ne.,  blood.  Many  neuters  in  -men  (224) :  as,  certamen,  contest. 

484.  (£.)  Examples  of  stems  in   -n-,  with  nominative   -6,   geni- 
tive  -oiiis,  are  : 

Many  masculine  concretes:  as,  pugio,  dagger;  words  of  the  agent  (211):  as, 
praedo,  robber ;  and  family  names  :  as,  Cicero.  Feminine  abstracts  in  -io  (227), 
and  many  in  -tio  or  -sio  (228):  as,  opmio,  notion;  cogitatio,  thought. 

485.  (c.}  Examples  of  stems  in   -n-,  with  nominative   -5,  geni- 
tive -inis,  are : 

Masculines:  Apollo;  card5,  hinge;  ordo,  rank;  turbo,  -whirl-wind. 
homo,  M.,  F.,  human  being;  nem5,  nobody;  for  G.  and  Ab.,  nullfus  and 
nullo  are  generally  used;  margS,  M.,  F.,  brink.  Feminines  :  grando,  hail; 
harundo,  reed;  hirundo,  swallow;  hirudo,  leech;  testudo,  tortoise;  virgp, 
maiden.  Many  in  -do,  -dinis  (225),  -go,  -ginis  (226),  and  -tudo,  -tudinis 
(264):  as,  cupldo,  also  M.,  desire;  imagS,  likeness;  solitudo,  loneliness. 

486.  sangufs,  M.,  blood,  stem  sanguin-,  takes  -s  in  the  nominative  (171,4). 
canis,  M.,  F.,  dog,  stem  can-,  and  iuvenis,  M.,  F.,  young  person,  stem  iuven-, 
have  the  nominative  formed  like  that  ot  -i-  stems.     For  senex,  old  man,  see  500. 

487.  (2.)  Stems  in  -r-  and  -s-   are  declined  as  follows : 


Examples 

pater,  fat  for, 

dolor,  pain, 

flos,  flower, 

genus,    race, 

Stems 

patr-,  M. 

dolor-,  M. 

flor-,  M. 

gener-,  Ne. 

Singular 

Norn. 

pater 

dolor 

fids 

genus 

Gen. 

patris 

doloris 

floris 

generis 

Dat. 

patri 

dolSri 

flori 

generl 

Ace. 

patrem 

dolorem 

florem 

genus 

Abl. 

patre 

dolore 

flore 

genere 

Plural 

Nom. 

patres 

dolores 

flores 

genera 

Gen. 

patrum 

dolorum 

flSrum 

generum 

Dat. 

patribus 

doloribus 

floribus 

generibus 

Ace. 

patres 

dolores 

flores 

genera 

Abl. 

patribus 

doloribus 

floribus 

generibus 

73 


48  S-49 i  •]  Words :    Inflection. 


488.  Many  stems  in  -r-  ended  originally  in  -s-,  which  became  -r-  be- 
tween two  vowels,  and  in  some  words  in  the  nominative  also  (154) :  as,  flos, 
M.,  flower,  G.  *flosis,  floris;  honos,  M.,  honour,  G.  hon5ris,  N.  honor. 

489.  (a.)  Examples  of  stems  in  -r-,  with  nominative  -r,  genitive 
-ris,  are  : 

-ar,  -aris      baccar,  Ne.,  a  plant ;  iubar,  Ne.,  rarely  M.,  bright  sky,  no  PL 
-ar,  -aris     lar,  M.,  household  god ;  G.  PI.  larum  ;  two  or  three  times  larium. 
-ar,  -arris    far  (171,  i),  Ne.,  spelt;  PI.  only  N.  ?.nd  Ac.  farra. 

-er,  -eris  Masculines:  acipenser,  sturgeon;  agger,  mound;  anser,  rarely 
F.,  goose;  asser,  pole;  career,  jail;  later,  brick;  mulier, 
F.,  "woman;  passer,  sparrow;  vomer,  ploughshare.  Neuters: 
cadaver,  corpse;  tuber,  swelling;  iiber,  breast;  verberis,  G., 
lash,  no  N.,  generally  PL  ;  acer,  maple,  and  some  other  plant  names: 
see  573.  pauper,  poor,  adjective. 

-ter,  -tris  accipiter,  M.,  hawk;  frater,  M.,  brother;  mater,  F.,  mother; 
pater,  M.,  father. 

-gr,  -eris     ver,  Ne. ;  no  PI. 

-or,  -oris      aequor,  Ne.,  sea;  marmor,  Ne.,  marble;  arbor,  F.,  tree. 

-or,  -oris  olor,  M.,  swan;  soror,  F.,  sister;  uxor,  F.,  wife.  Many  mascu- 
lines in  -or  for  -6s  (237) :  as,  odor,  smell;  and  in  -tor,  -tpris 
(205):  as,  amator,  lover.  Also  gender  comparatives  ot  adjectives: 
as,  tristior  (346),  M.,  F.,  sadder. 

-ur,  -oris  Neuters  :  ebur,  ivory ;  PL  only  ebora ;  robur,  heart  of  oak ;  PI. 
robora  common,  roborum  and  roboribus  twice  each.  Also  femur 
thigh,  femoris  or  feminis,  and  iecur,  liver,  iecoris,  iecineris, 
or  iocineris. 

-Ur,  -uris  augur,  M.,  F.,  augur;  furfur,  M.,  bran;  turtur,  M.,  F.,  turtle- 
dove ;  voltur  or  vultur,  M.,  vulture.  Neuters:  fulgur,  lightning; 
guttur,  rarely  M.,  throat ;  murmur,  murmur ;  sulpur,  sulphur. 
cicur,  tame,  adjective. 

-ur,  -uris     fur,  M.,  thief. 

490.  volucris,   F.,  bird,  stem  volucr-,  has  its  nominative  formed  like  that 
of  -1-  stems. 

491.  (£.)  Examples  of  stems  in  -B-,  or  -r-  for  -a-,  with  nominative 
-B,  genitive  -ris,  are : 

-aes,  -aeris  aes,  Ne.,  copper,  bronze;  in  the  PL  only  aera  and  aerum  are  usual. 

-es,  -eris  Ceres,  pubes,  mangrown ;  impubes,  immature,  adjectives;  for 
the  last  more  commonly  impubis,  like  brevis  (630). 

-is,  -eris  cinis,  M.,  ashes;  cucumis,  M.,  cucumber,  also  with  -i-  stem; 
pulvis,  M.,  drist ;  vomis,  M.., ploughshare. 

-os,  -oris     arb5s,  F.,  tree. 

-OS,  -oris  Masculines:  flos,  flower ;  mos,  custom;  ros,  dew,  no  G.  PL  (430) ; 
lepos,  grace;  honos  or  honor,  honour,  and  some  old  Latin  words 
for  later  -or  :  as,  od5s  or  odor,  smell  (^).  os,  Ne.,  mouth,  face, 
no  G.  PI.  (430). 

74 


The  Noun  :    Consonant  Stems.     [492-496. 


-us, -eris  Neuters :_acus,  husk;  foedus,  treaty;  funus,  funeral;  genus, 
race ;  ^lOmus  (134),  £/<?«/,-  holtw,  «n£*  jftti^j  la.tr.Ss  side  ;  munus, 
gift;  onus,  burden;  opus,  -work;  pondus,  -weight;  raudus  or 
nidus,  piece  of  copper ;  scelus,  crime;  Sldus9  cancellation;  ulcus, 
sore;  vellus,/^^;  viscus,  bowel,  usually  plural;  volnus  or  vul- 
nus,  wound.  Also  Venus,  F.,  and  vetus,  old,  adjective. 

-US,  -oris  Neuters:  corpus,  body;  decus,  grace;  dedecus,  disgrace;  faci- 
nus,  deed;  faenus,  interest ;  frigus,  cold ;  litus,  shore;  nemus, 
grove;  pectus,  breast;  pecus,  flock;  penus,  store;  pignus, 
pledg? ;  stcrcus,  dung;  tempus,  time;  tergus,  back.  Also 
lepus,  M.,  hare. 

-US,  -oris     Neuter  comparatives  of  adjectives :  as,  tristius  (346),  sadder. 

-us,  -uris  Neuters:  crus,  leg;  ius,  right,  PL  iura,  G.  PL  twice  only  (Plaut. ; 
Cato),  no  D.  or  Ab.  PL;  ius,  broth,  pus,  fus,  rus,  country,  tus, 
frankincense,  PI.  only  N.  and  Ac.  iura,  &c.  tellus,  F.,  earth. 

492.  vas,  Ne.,  vessel,  utensil,  retains  the   S  between  two  vowels :    G.  vasis, 
D.  vasi,   Ab.  vase,  plural  N.  and  Ac.  vasa;    the  G.  vasorum,  and  D.  and 
Ab.  vasis,   are  formed  from  an   -o-   stem,  vaso-   (401).     mensis,    M.,  month, 
mensis,  has   its  nominative   formed   like  that  of   -i-   stems ;  G.  PL    mensum, 
sometimes   mensuum  or  mensium.     os  (171,  i)Nc.,  bone,  ossis,  has  no  G. 
PL  in  good  writers  (430) :    ossium  late. 

493.  The  two  neuters  virus,  gall,  poison,  and  vplgus  or  vulgus,  the  crowd, 
have  -o-  stems,  except  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  (401),  and  no  plural :  thus, 
N.  and  Ac.  volgus,  G.  volgi,  D.  and  Ab.  volg5.    A  masculine  accusative  volgum 
is  sometimes  found.     The  Greek  neuter  pelagus,  the  deep,  has  also  G.  pelagi,  D. 
and  Ab.  pelag5,  PL  N.  and  Ac.  pelage  (508). 

III.      STEMS   ITT   -U-   OR   -V-. 

494.  Four  substantives   with    stems   in    -u-  or  -v-,   grus,   F.,  crane, 
gruis  ;  sus,  M.,  F.,  sow,  swine,  suis  ;  bos,  M.,  F.,  ox,  cow,  bovis ;  and  nix, 
Y.,snow,  nivis,  follow  the  consonant  declension;  also  the  genitive  lovis, 
and  the  other  oblique  cases  of  luppiter  (500).     But  sus  has  in  the  plural 
dative  and  ablative  'juibus,  siibus,  or  subus;  bos  has  in  the  plural  genitive 
bourn  or  bovum,  rarely  bovom  (107,  c},  and  in  the  dative  and  ablative 
bobus,  or  oftener  bubus ;  nix  has  no  genitive  plural  in  good  writers  (430) : 
nivium  late,  once  nivum. 


SINGULAR   CASES. 

495.  (i.)  The  nominative  singular  of  gender  stems  in  a  mute 
is  formed  by  adding  -s  to  the  stem  (422)  :  as, 

reg-,  king,  N.  rex  (164,  i) ;  due-,  leader,  N.  dux  (135,  i);  custod-,  guard, 
N.  custos  (171,  5) ;  aetat-,  age,  N.  aetas  (171,  5) ;  caelib-,  unmarried,  N. 
caelebs  (54)  ;  municip-,  burgher,  N.  municeps.  hiem-,  winter,  the  only 
stem  in  -m-,  N.  hiemps  (167)  or  hicms,  also  takes  -s. 

496.  (2.)  Stems  in  a  continuous  consonant,  -1-,  -n-,  -r-,  or 
-S-,  and  neuters  have  no  nominative  suffix  (422,  423)  :  as, 

consul-,  consul,  N.  consul;  flarnin-,  special  priest,  N.  flamen;  agger-, 
mound,  N.  agger ;  iur-  for  ius-,  right,  N.  ius. 

For  cor,  heart,  see  476 ;  lacte,  lac,  milk,  478 ;  sangufs,  blood,  486 ;  -s 
in  neuter  adjectives,  612. 


497~5°7-]  Words:   Inflection. 


497.  (a.)  Stems  in  -on-  drop  -n-  in  the  nominative  ;  stems  in  -in- 
for  -on-  drop  -n-,  and  end  in  -6  :  as, 

Icon-,  lion,  N.  leo  ;  imagin-  for  imagon-,  likeness,  N.  imag5. 

498.  (b.)  Stems  of  one  syllable  in  -r-   for  -s-  usually  retain  -s  in  the 
nominative  :   as,  flor-  for  fl5s-,   M.,  flower,   N.  flos  ;    iur-  for   ius-,   Ne., 
right,  N.  ius.    'Some  of  more  than  one  syllable  also  retain  -s  :  see  491  ;  but 
in  others  -s  is  changed  to  -r,  and  in  masculines  a  preceding  5  is  shortened  : 
as,  odos,  smell,  odor,     lepos,  grace,  retains  -6s. 

499.  (^.)  Four  stems  in   -er-  for    -is-  have  the  nominative  singular  in   -is  : 
cinis,  ashes,  cineris  ;   cucumis,  cucumber,  cucumeris  or  cucumis  ;  pul- 
vls,  dust,  pulveris  ;   and  vomis,  oftener  vomer,  ploughshare,  vomeris. 

500.  The  following  have  the  nominative  singular  formed  from  a  differ- 
ent stem  from  that  of  the  other  cases  (401)  : 

\\.tt,  journey,  itineris,  stems  iter-,  itiner-;  luppiter  (389)  lovis  ;  supel- 
lex,  furniture,  supellectilis  (545)  ;  senex,  old  man,  man  of  forty  or  more, 
senis,  stems  senec-,  sen-.  For  sedes,  seat,  see  476;  vates,  bard,  478. 
canis,  dog,  N.  also  canes  (Plant.  Enn.,  Lucil.),  iuvenis,  young  or  middle-aged 
person  (486),  volucris,  bird  (490),  and  mensis,  month  (492),  have  their  nomina- 
tives formed  like  those  of  -i-  stems. 

501.  An  old  dative  in  -e  is  sometimes  retained  in  set  phrases  (507)  :  as,  acre, 
money  ;  iure,  right.     See  98. 

502.  Substantives  have  rarely  an  ablative  in  -i  or  -ei  like  -i-  stems  : 
as,   capiti   (Catull.),   head,  for  capite  ;    dotei   (Plaut),  dowry,   for   dote. 
Substantives  used  as  adjectives  have  sometimes  -i  :  as  artifici  manu,  with 
artist  hand  ;  but  often  -e  :  as.  alite  lapsu,  with  winged  glide.     For  -e  in  old 
Latin  there  is  no  certain  evidence. 

503.  Adjectives  in  the  comparative  degree  have  sometimes  an  ablative  in  -i  : 
as,   meliori,  better,  for   meliore.      Adjectives  'of  one  ending'  with  consonant 
stems  (624)  have  always  -e,  except  vetus,  old,  which  has  sometimes  veteri. 

504.  Town  names  and  a  few  appellatives  have  a  locative  case  in 
-i:  as,  Karthagini,  at  Carthage;  rurl,  a-field,  in  the  country. 

PLURAL   CASES. 

505.  The  nominative  and  accusative  plural  masculine  and  feminine  have  rarely 
-is,  like  stems  in  -i-  :    as  sacerdotis,  priests-,   melioris,  better.    For  -a  in 
neuters  in  old  Latin,  see  130,  2. 

506.  The  genitive  plural  of  stems  in  -tat-  (262)  is  sometimes  -ium,  like  that  of 
-i-  stems:   as,  civitatium,  communities;   yoluptatium,  pleasures  (Cic.);   but 
chiefly  in  or  after  the  Augustan  age,     mensis,  month,  has  mensum,  but  often 
mensuum,  sometimes  mensium.    ales,  fbird,  has  sometimes  alituum  in  hex- 
ameter verse.     For  the  dative  and  ablative  -bus,  see  2505. 

507.  Other  case  forms  are  found  in  inscriptions,  as  follows  : 

N.  MVNICIPES  ;  -5  for  -os  (66)  :  MAIO,  i.e.  mai5s  or  maior.  G.  -es,  as  early 
as  218  B.C.  :  SALVTES  ;  -us,  from  186  to  100  B.C.:  NOMINVS;  -u  (66)  :  CAESARV. 
D.  -ei  :  VIRTVTEI,  soon  after  290  B.C.  ;  HEREDEI,  45  B.C.;  -e,  disappeared  sooner 
than  -ei  except  in  set  phrases  (501),  but  is  equally  old:  IVNONE;  IOVRE.  Ac.  -e 
(61):  APICE.  Ab.  -id  (426):  CONVENTIONS,  i.e.  contione  ;  -ei  :  VIRTVTEI; 
-I:  HEREDI.  Plural:  N.  -is:  IOVDICIS.  G.  -om  :  POVMILIONOM  ;  -ium  : 

MVNICIPIVM.      D.  -CbUS  :    TEMPESTATEBVS.      Ac.  -IS  :    MVNICIPIS. 

76 


The  Noun:   Stems  in  -i-.       [508-515. 


GREEK    NOUNS. 

508.  Greek  appellatives  of  the  consonant  declension  occasionally  retain  Greek 
case  endings :  as,  lampas,  torch,    G.   lampados,   Ac.   lampada.     Plural  :   N. 
lampades,    Ac.    lampadas.      aer,  air,  has  usually  the  accusative  aera,  and 
aether,  upper  air,  always  has  aethera.     In  the  plural  nominative  and  accusative, 
cetus,  swimming-  monster,   melos,  strain  of -music,  and  pelagUS  (493),  the  deep, 
have  -e  :  as,  cete.    Genitive  -on,  rare:  as,  epigrammaton,  epigrams.     Dative 
and  ablative  -matis  from  words  in  -ma,  -matis:  as,  poematls,  Joems  (401). 

509.  Greek    proper   names   of    the    consonant   declension   are    usually 
declined  like  Latin  ones  in  old  Latin  and  prose.     From  Vergil  and  Proper- 
tius  on,  Greek  case  endings  grow  more  and  more  frequent,  especially  in 
poetry;    they  are  best  learned   for  every  name  from  the   dictionary;    the 
commonest  forms  are : 

Genitive  -os  :  as,  Pan,  Panos ;  -us,  with  nominative  -6:  as,  Manto, 
Mantus.  Dative  -i,  rare:  as,  Minoidi.  Accusative  -a,  common  with  names 
of  persons  in  poetry,  not  in  prose,  more  common  with  those  of  places,  and  even 
in  prose:  as,  Acheronta ;  always  Pana;  -5,  with  feminines  in  -6,  -us: 
as,  Did5.  Vocative :  Pallas,  Palla  ;  in  old  Latin  the  nominative  is  com- 
monly used  instead  of  the  vocative.  Plural:  Nominative  -es  :  as,  Arcades. 
Dative  -sin,  rare :  as,  Lemniasin.  Accusative  -as,  very  common  :  as,  Lele- 
gas  ;  in  prose,  Macedonas  ;  also  in  words  not  Greek :  as,  Allobrogas  (Caes.). 

510.  Names  in  -eus,  like  Orpheus,  are  usually  declined  like  -o-  stems  (449). 
They  have  less  frequently  Greek  forms :  as,  G.  Orpheos,  D.  Orphei  or  Orphi, 
Ac.  Orphea.    Accusative  rarely  -ea:  as,  flionea. 

511.  Some  names  in  -es  have  the  genitive  in  -is  or  -I  and  the  accusative  in  -em 
or  -en  (401) :  as,  Socrates,  G.  Socratis  or  S5crati,  Ac.  usually  Socratem, 
also   Socraten.     Achilles  and   Ulixes  have  in   the  genitive  -el,  -61,  or  -I. 
Names  in  -cles  have  rarely  the  accusative  -clea:   as,  Periclea. 

512.  Some  names  in  -is  have  forms  either  from  a  stem  in  -id-,  or  from  one  in 
-i-:  as,  Paris,  G.  Paridis,  D.  Paridi,  Ac.  Paridem,   Parim  or  Parin,  V. 
Pari. 


STEMS   IN   -i-   AND   MIXED   STEMS. 

The  Third  Declension. 
Genitive  singular  -is,  genitive  plural  -i-um. 

513.  Stems  in    -i-    include   both  substantives  and 
adjectives,  gender  words  and  neuters. 

For  the  gender  of  substantives,  see  570. 

514.  The  nominative  of  gender  stems  in  -i-  ends  usually  in  -a 
(or  -x),  sometimes  in  -1  or  -r ;   that  of  neuter  substantives  has  no 
suffix,  and  ends  usually  in  -e,  sometimes  in  -1  or  -r. 

515.  Most  stems  in  -i-  have  as  many  syllables  in  the  nomina- 
tive as  in  the  genitive. 

77 


5  16-520.] 


Words:  Inflection. 


Such  words  are  called  Parisy liable  words,  or  Parisyllables :  as, 
nominative  civis,  citizen,  two  syllables;  genitive  civis,  of  a  citizen, 
also  two  syllables. 

516.  Stems  in  -i-  are  declined  in  the  main  like  consonant  stems,  but 
have  -im  in  the  accusative  of  some  substantives,  and  -I  in  the  ablative  of 
adjectives,  of  some  gender  substantives,  and  of  neuters ;  in  the  plural  they 
have  -ium  in  the  genitive,  -is  often  in  the  accusative  of  gender  words,  and 
-ia  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  neuter. 


in 


I.       PARISYLLABLES. 

517.  (i.)  Parisyllabic  gender  stems  in  -i-  with  the  nominative 
-is  are  declined  as  follows : 


Examples 
Stems 

tussis,  cough, 
tussi-,  F. 

turris,  tower, 
turri-,  F. 

amnis,  river, 
amni-,  M. 

hostis,  enemy, 
hosti-,  M.,F. 

In! 

0) 

Singular 

Nom. 

tussis 

turris 

amnis 

hostis 

-is 

Gen. 

tussis 

turris 

amnis 

hostis 

-is 

Dit. 

tussi 

turn 

amni 

hosti 

-i 

Ace. 

tussim 

turrim,  -em 

amnem 

hostem 

-im,  -em 

Abl. 

tussi 

turn,  -e 

amne,  -i 

hoste 

-I,-e 

Plural 

Nom. 

tusses 

turres 

amnes 

hostes 

-es 

Gen. 

turrium 

amnium 

hostium 

-ium 

Dat. 

turribus 

amnibus 

hostibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

tussis,  -es 

turns,  -es 

amnis,  -es 

hostis,  -es 

-Is,  -es 

.Abl. 

turribus 

amnibus 

hostibus 

-ibus 

518.  (a.)  Like  the  singular  of  tussis  are  declined  parisyllabic  names  of  rivers 
and  places,  like   Tiberis,    Hispalis.      Also   cucumis,  M.,  cucumber  (but  see 
491),  and  the  defectives  sitis,   F.,  thirst,  Ac.  sitim,  Ab.  siti,  no  plural  ;  and  vis, 
F.,  power,  Ac.  vim,   AD.  vi.     Plural  (401):    N.  vires,  G.  yirium,  D.  and  Ab. 
viribus,  Ac.  viris  or  vires.     (The  D.  vi  is  only  found  twice;  a  N.  and  Ac.  PI. 
vis  is  very  rare.) 

519.  (b.)  The   following  feminines  are  declined  like  turris,  with   -im 
or  -em  in  the  accusative,  and  -I  or  -e  in  the  ablative  : 


clavis,  key 
f  ebris,  fever 


navis,  vessel 
puppis,  stern 


So  also  in  the  oblique  cases,  Lager,  the  Liger. 
accusative  -im,  in  the  ablative  -e  or  -I. 


sementis,  planting 
strigilis,  skin-scraper 

Arar,  the  Arar,  has  in  the 


520.  securis,  axe,  messis,  crop,  and  restis,  rope,  also  have  -im  or  -em 
in  the  accusative,  but  onlv  securi,  messe,  and  reste  in  the  ablative,  canalis, 
conduit^  has  only  -em  in  the  accusative,  and  only  -I  in  the  ablative. 

78 


The  Noun:   Stems  in  -i-.      [521~527- 


521.  (c.)  The   following  are   declined    like   amnis,   with    -em    in  the 
accusative,  and  -I  or  -e  in  the  ablative : 


avis,  bird 
bilis,  bile 


Civis,  citizen 
classis,/^ 


fustis,  club 


522.  (//)  Most  parisyllabic  stems  in  -i-,  with  the  nominative  in 
-is,  are  declined  like  hostis  :    as, 

ensis,  M.,  glaive;  piscis,  M.,  fish;  aedis,  F.,  temple,  PI.  house  (418); 
vltis,  F.,  vine ;  and  a  great  many  others.  Also  gender  forms  of  adjectives 
in  -i-  'of  two  endings '  (630),  except  the  ablative  singular,  which  ends  in  -i. 

523.  (2.)  Parisyllables    in    -i-  with   the    nominative    in    -es 
have  their  other  cases  like  those  of  hostis  :  such  are : 

caedes,  bloodshed;  cautes,  rock;  clades,  disaster ;  indoles,  native 
disposition,  no  PL;  labes,  fall ;  moles,  pile ;  nubes,  cloud;  proles,  off- 
spring, no  PL;  pubes,  young-  population,  no  PI.;  rupes,  crag;  saepes, 
hedge ;  strages,  slaughter ;  suboles,  offspring;  tabes,  wasting,  no  PI.,  lemi- 
nines;  and  some  others.  Masculine:  verres,  boar ;  volpes  or  vulpes, /<?•*• 

524.  fames,  hunger,  has  G.  twice  fami   (Cato,  Lucil.),  Ab.  always  fame 
(603),  no  PL;  plebes,  commons,  N.  also  plebs  or  pleps,  has  G.  plebei  (603), 
plebi  or  plebis,  no  PL 

525-  (3-)  A  few  stems  in  -bri-,  -cri-,  or  -tri-,  are  declined  as  follows: 
imber,  shower,  stem  imbri-,  M. 

Singular:  N.  imber,  G.  imbris,  D.  imbri,  Ac.  imbrem,  Ab.  imbri, 
oftener  imbre.  Plural :  N  imbres,  G.  imbrium,  D.  imbribus,  Ac.  imbris 
or  imbres,  Ab.  imbribus.  So  also  lunter  or  linter,  F.  (M.),  tub,  boat,  liter, 
M.,  leather  bag,  and  venter,  M.,  belly ^  but  with  only  -e  in  the  Ab. ;  and  the  mascu- 
line of  adjectives  in  -bri-,  -cri-,  -tri-,  N.  -er  (628);  these  last  have  in  the  Ab. 
always  -i. 

526.  (4.)  Parisyllabic  neuters  in  -i-  with  the  nominative  in  -e 
are  declined  as  follows : 


Examples 

sedile,    seat, 

mare,     sea, 

^  •>& 

Stems 

sedili-,  Ne. 

mari-,  Ne. 

2832 

w.  3  g-s 

0) 

Singular 

Plural 

Singular 

Plural 

s. 

PL 

Nom. 

sedile 

sedilia 

mare 

maria 

-e 

-ia 

Gen. 

sedilis 

sedilium 

marts 

-is 

-ium 

Dat. 

sedili 

sedilibus 

mari 

-i 

-ibus 

Ace. 

sedile 

sedilia 

mare 

mari  a 

-e 

-ia 

Abl. 

sedili 

sedilibus 

mari 

-i 

-ibus 

527.  mare  has  rarely  the  ablative  mare  in  verse  ;  in  the  plural  only  the 
nominative  and  accusative  are  usual;  but  a  genitive  marum  is  once  quoted  (Naev.), 
and  the  ablative  maribus  is  once  used  by  Caesar. 

79 


5  28-5  3 1  •] 


Words:    Inflection. 


528.  Examples  of  parisyllabic  neuters  in  -i-,  with  the  nominative 
in  -e,  genitive  -is,  are  : 

anclle,  sacred  shield;  aplustre,  ancient;  conclave,  suite  of  rooms ;  insigne, 
ensign;  praesaepe,  stall;  rete,  net,  Ab.  rete.  Also  the  neuter  of  adjectives  in 
-i-  '  of  two  endings  '  (630),  and  some  words  in  -lie,  -ale,  -are,  originally  adjectives 
(3X3>  3J4):  as,  bubile,  ox-stall;  focale,  neckcloth;  cocleare,  spoon. 


II.      IMPARISYLLABLES. 

529.  Sometimes  a  plural  stem  in  -i-  is  combined,  in  the  singular, 
with  a  stem  in  a  mute,  in  -1,  or  -r,  or  rarely  in  -B.     These  mixed  stems 
thus  become  imparisyllables.     Gender  stems  of  this  class  are  like 
consonant  stems  in  the  singular,  except  the  ablative  of  adjectives, 
which  has  usually  -I. 

530.  Imparisyllabic  stems  in  -i-  are  declined  as  follows : 


Examples 

arx,  citadel. 

pars,  part, 

urbs,  city, 

animal,  animal, 

Stems 

arci-,  F. 

parti-,  F. 

urbi-,  F. 

animali-,  Ne. 

Singular 

Nom. 

arx 

pars 

urbs 

animal 

Gen. 

arcis 

partis 

urbis 

animalis 

Dat. 

arci 

parti 

urbi 

animali 

Ace. 

arcem 

partem 

urbem 

animal 

Abl. 

arce 

parte 

urbe 

animali 

Plural 

Nom. 

arces 

partes 

urbes 

animalia 

Gen. 

arcium 

partium 

urbium 

animalium 

Dat. 

arcibus 

partibus 

urbibus 

animalibus 

Ace. 

arcis,  -es 

partis,  -es 

urbis,  -es 

animalia 

Abl. 

arcibus 

partibus 

urbibus 

animalibus 

531.  Examples   of  stems   in   -ci-,  with   nominative    -x,    genitive 
-cis,  are : 

-ax,  -acis     fornax,  F.,  furnace.     Many  adjectives  (284) :  as,  audax,  daring. 
-aex,  -aecis  faex,  F.,  dregs,  no  G.  PL  (430). 

-ex,  -icis  supplex,  suppliant,  Ab.  -i,  sometimes  -e,  G.  PI.  supplicum. 
Adjectives:  duplex,  twofold;  multiplex,  manifold;  quadruplex, 
fourfold;  septemplex,  se-venfold ;  simplex,  simple;  triplex, 
threefold.  The  foregoing  have  Ab.  -i :  as,  duplici ;  duplice  once 
(Hor.),  septemplice  twice  (Ov. ;  Stat.);  G.  PI.  -ium,  Ne.  PI. 
N.  and  Ac.  -ia. 

•IX.  -icis  felix,  happy;  pernix,  nimble,  adjectives.  Also  many  feminines  of 
the  agent  in  -trix  (205):  as,  victrix,  victorious;  these  sometimes 
have  a  Ne.  PI.  N.  and  Ac.:  as,  victricia  ;  in  the  G.  PI.  they  have 
-ium,  or,  as  substantives,  -um  :  as,  nutricum,  nurses. 


The  Noun:    Stems  in  -i-.      [532,  533. 


-lx,  -Icis  calx,  F.  (M.),  heel;  calx,  M.,  F.,  limestone,  no  G.  PI.  (430);  falx, 
F.,  sickle. 

-nx,  -ncis  lanx,  F.,  platter,  no  G.  PL  (430);  deunx,  M.,  eleven  twelfths; 
quincunx,  M.,  Jive  twelfths. 

-ox,  -ocis  praecox,  over-ripe,  older  stem  praecoqui-  :  as,  G.  praecoquis  ; 
rarely  with  -o-  stem  (401)  :  as,  praecoquam. 

-ox,  -ocis  celox,  F.,  clipper,  atrox,  savage;  ferox,  wild;  velSx,  swift, 
adjectives. 

-rx,  -rcis  arx,  F.,  citadel,  G.  PI.  rare  and  late;  merx,  F.,  ware,  N.  in  old 
Latin  sometimes  merces  or  mers. 

-ux,  -ucis  Adjectives:  trux,  savage,  Ab.  -i  or  -e,  G.  PI.  -ium  ;  redux, 
returning,  Ab.  -l  or  -e  (558);  no  G.  PI.  and  no  Ne.  N.  or  Ac.  (430). 

-aux,  -    -     fauce,  F.,  Ab.,  throat,  N.  faux  once  only  and  late,  generally  PI. 
-ux,  -ucis    lux,  F.  (581),  light,  Ab.  sometimes  -I,  no  G.  PI.  (430). 

532.  (a.)  Examples  of  stems  in   -di-,  with  nominative  -a,  geni- 
tive -dis,  are  : 

-es,  -edis  Compounds  of  pes,  foot:  compede,  F.,  Ab.,  fetter,  no  N.,  G.  PI. 
compedium  ;  adjectives  :  as,  alipes,  wing-footed,  bipes,  two- 
legged,  quadrupes,  four-footed,  &c.,  Ab.  -I,  PI.  G.  -um  only 
(563),  Ne.  N.  and  Ac.  -ia,  rare  and  late. 

-ns,  -ndis    Feminines:  frSns,  foliage;  glans,  acorn;  iuglans,  walnut. 

-rs,  -rdis  concors,  like-minded,  adjective,  and  other  compounds  of  cor,  Ab. 
-i  (559).  Ne-  PI  N.  and  Ac.  -ia,  G.  PI.  not  usual  :  discordium, 
at  variance,  and  vecordium,  frantic,  once  each. 

-aus,-audis  fraus,  F.,  deceit,  G.  PI.  fraudium,  later  fraudum. 

$33-  (£•)  Examples  of  stems  in   -ti-,    with  nominative   -B   (-x), 
genitive  -tis,  are: 

-as,  -atis  Arpinas,  of  Arpinum,  and  adjectives  from  other  town  names;  opti- 
mates,£waT  men  and  true,  G.  PI.  -ium,  less  often  -um  :  penates, 
gods  of  the  household  store. 

-es,  -etis  Adjectives:  hebes,  dull;  teres,  cylindrical,  Ab.  -I  (559),  no  G. 
PL,  Ne  PL  hebetia,  teretia,  late  and  rare;  perpes,  lasting 
through,  Ab.  perpeti,  late  only  ;  praepes,  swift-winged,  Ab,  -I  or 
-e,  G.  PL  -um,  no  Ne.  PL  N.  or  Ac. 

-es,  -etis  locuples,  rich,  adjective,  Ab.  usually  -e  of  a  person,  -i  often  of 
a  thing,  G.  PL  locupletium,  sometimes  locupletum,  Ne.  PI 
locupletia  once. 

-is,  -Itis  Us,  contention;  dis,  rich,  adjective,  Ab.  always  -i  (559),  PL  G. 
-mm,  once  -um  (Sen.),  Ne.  N.  and  Ac.  -ia.  Quiris,  Samms. 


-Is,  -Itis       puls,/<tfto^,  no  G.  PL  (430). 
6  81 


534~537-]  Words:    Inflection. 


-ns,  -ntis  Masculines:  dens,  tooth;  fons,  fountain;  pons,  bridge;  mons, 
mountain,  N.  once  mentis  (Enn.);  factors  of  twelve  :  sextans,  one 
sixth;  quadrans,  triens,  dodrans,  dextans.  Feminines:  frons, 
forehead;  gens,  clan;  mens,  mind.  Present  participles:  as,  re- 
gens,  guiding.  Many  adjectives :  as,  ingens,  gigantic,  Ab.  -I 
(559)>  Veiens,  of  Vci;  compounds  of  mens  :  as,  am  ens,  out  of 
one's  head ;  of  dens  :  as,  tridens,  Ab.  -i,  as  substantive  usually  -e. 

-eps, -ipitis  Adjective  compounds  of  caput,  head:  anceps  (543),  two-headed, 
once  older  ancipes  (Plant.);  biceps,  two-headed;  triceps,  three- 
headed;  praeceps,  head-first,  old  praecipes  (Plaut. ;  Enn.),  Ab. 
-1  (559),  no  G.  PI.,  Ne.  PI.  N.  and  Ac.  -ia. 

-IS,  -rtis  Feminines:  ars,  art;  cohors,  cohort;  fors,  chance;  mors,  death; 
paTS,/art;  sors,  lot,  N.  twice  sortis  (Plaut.;  Ten).  Adjectives: 
censors,  sharing,  exsors,  noi f sharing,  no  G.  PL;  expers,  -with- 
out part;  iners,  unskilled,  sellers,  all-skilled,  Ne.  PI.  N.  and 
Ac.  -ia. 

-X,  -ctis         nox,   F.,  night;  Ab.  also  noctu  (401);  an  old  adverb  form  is  nox, 


534.  (a.)  Stems  in  -bi-,  with  nominative  -bs  (149),  genitive  -bis, 
are  : 

trabs,  ¥.,beam,  older  N.  trabes  (Enn.);  plebs,  F.,  commons,  N.  sometimes 
pleps,  for  the  older  plebes  (603),  no  PI.  ;  urbs,  F.,  city. 

535.  (A)  Stems  in  -pi-,  with  nominative  -ps,  genitive  -pis,  are  : 
inops,  poor,  adjective,  Ab.  -I  (559),  G.  PI.  -um,  no  Ne.  PI.  N.  or  Ac.  (430); 

Stirps,  F.  (M.),  trunk. 

536.  Examples   of  stems    in    -li-,    with   nominative    -1,    genitive 
-lis,  are  : 

-al,  -alis  Neuters,  originally  adjective  (546):  animal,  animal;  bacchanal, 
shrine  or  feast  of  Bacchus  ;  cervical,  bolster;  puteal,  -well-curb; 
toral,  valance  ;  tribunal,  tribunal;  yectigal,  indirect  tax.  Only 
N.  or  Ac.:  cubital,  elbow-cushion;  minutal,  minced-fish;  capital, 
capitalia,  death,  capital  crime. 


•il,  -ills  vj&P»  ^de-awake,  adjective,  Ab.  -l,  as  substantive  -e  (561),  G.  PI. 
vigilum  (563),  no  Ne.  PI.  N.  or  Ac.  (430). 

537*  O2')  Examples  of  stems  in   -ri-,  with  nominative    -r,   geni- 
tive -ris,  are: 

-ar,  -aris  Neuters,  originally  adjective  (546):  calcar,  sptir  ;  columbar,  dove- 
cote; exemplar,  pattern;  lacunar,  panel-ceiling;  pulvlnar, 
couch;  subhgar,  tights;  torcular,  wine-press. 

-ar,  -aris  Adjectives  :  par,  equal;  dispar,  impar,  unequal,  for  Ab.,  see  561  ; 
G.  PI.  -ium,  Ne.  PI.  N.  and  Ac.  -ia;  compar,  co-mate,  as  sub- 
stantive has  G.  PI.  -um. 

-er,  -eris  Adjectives  :  degener,  degenerate,  Ab.  -i  (559),  no  Ne.  PI.  N.  or  Ac. 
(430)  ;  iiber,  jruitjul,  Ab.,  -I,  late  -e,  Ne.  PI.  ubera  once  only  (Ace.). 

82 


The  Noun  :  Stems  in  -i-.        [538—546. 

-or,  -oris  Adjectives:  memor,  remembering;  immemor,  forgetful,  Ab.  -I 
(559),  G.  PL  memorum  (636)  once  only  (Verg.),  no  Ne.  PI.  N. 
or  Ac.  (430). 

-or,  -5ris  Adjective  compounds  of  color  :  as,  concolor,  of  like  shade,  dis- 
color, of  different  shade,  both  with  Ab.  -I  only ;  versicolor,  pied, 
Ab.  -i,  rarely  -e,  Ne.  PI.  N.  and  Ac.  -ia;  the  G.  PI.  of  these  words 
is  not  usual,  but  versicolorum  once. 

538.  (b.)  Stems  in  -ri-,  with  nominative  -s  of  the  stem,  genitive  -ris,  are 
glis,  F.,  dormouse,  gliris ;  mas,  M.,  male,  maris ;  mus,  F.,  mouse,  muris. 

£39.  The  only  imparisyllabic  stem  in  -si-  is  as  (171,  i),  M.,  unit,  an  as,  G. 
assis,  with  its  compounds  bes,  two  thirds,  G.  bessis,  and  semis,  half  an  as, 
half,  G.  semissis. 

SINGULAR    CASES. 

540.  (i.)  The  nominative  singular  of  gender  stems  in  -i-  is 
usually  formed  by  adding  -s  to  the    stem   (422).      But  many 
gender  substantives  have  the  nominative  in  -es  (236,401)  :  as, 

amni-,  river,  N.  amnis ;  aedi-,  temple,  N.  aedis  ;  brevi-,  short,  N. 
brevis.  With  N.  -es :  nubi-,  cloud,  N.  nubes ;  for  other  examples,  see 
523- 

541.  Some  substantives  form  the  nominative  in  both  these  ways:    as,  valles 
and  vallis,  valley,   equally  common  ;    aedis,  temple,  later  aedes  ;  for  caedes, 
slaughter,  clades,  disaster,  and  moles,  pile,  caedis,  &c.,  occur  exceptionally. 

542.  A  few  stems  in  -bri-,  -cri-,  or  -tri-,  drop  -i-  in  the  nominative.     The 
endings  brs,  crs,  trs,   then  change  to  -ber,  -cer, -ter  (in,  b) :  as,  imbri-, 
shower,  N.  imber  (525). 

543.  Of  gender  imparisyllables,   some  have  lost  -i-  of  the 
stem  before  -s   in  the   nominative ;    others   have   originally   a 
consonant  stem  in  the  nominative  (529-535). 

Thus,  monti-,  mountain,  and  sorti-,  lot,  have  N.  mons  and  sors  for 
an  older  mentis  and  sortis  ;  but  dens,  tooth,  and  regens,  ruling,  have 
as  original  stems  dent-  and  regent-.  Adjectives  in  -cipiti-  have  N. 
-ceps  (533). 

544.  A  few  adjective  stems  in  -li-  or  -ri-  drop  -i-  in  the  nominative  without 
taking  -s  (536,  537):  as,  vigili-,  -wide-awake,  N.  vigil  ;    pari-,  equal,  N.  par; 
so  also  Arar  and  Liger.     Three  substantives  in  -ri-  for  -si-  likewise  drop  -i-, 
and  end  in  the  original  -s  (538):    gliri-  for  glisi-,  dormouse,  N.  glis;    mas, 
male;   mus,  mouse. 

545.  For  caro,  F.,  flesh,  carnis  (Ab.  -I,  usually  -e,  no  G.  PI.)  see  135,  2. 
supellex,  F.,  furniture,  supellectilis  (Ab.  -l  or-e,  no  PL),  has  the  nominative 
formed  from  a  different  stem  from  that  of  the  other  cases  (401). 

546.  (2)  Neuter  steins  in  -i-  have  no  nominative  suffix,  and  end 
in  -e  for  -i-  of  the  stem  (107,  b}  :  as, 

mari-,  sea,  N.  mare  ;  brevi-.  short,  N.  breve.  In  some  words,  origi- 
nally neuter  adjectives  in  -ale  and  -are,  the  -e  is  dropped  and  the  a  short- 
ened:  as,  animale,  living  thing,  animal  (536)  ;  exemplare  ( Lucr. ) ,  pattern, 
exemplar  (537).  Some  neuter  adjectives  end  in  -1  or  -r  (536,  537);  and 
gome  '  of  one  ending '  end  in  -s  (612). 

83 


547-558-]  Words:   Inflection. 


547'  The  accusative  singular  of  gender  substantives  usually  has 
-em,  like  consonant  stems  (424);  but  a  few  substantives  with  the 
nominative  in  -is  have  -im  only,  and  some  have  either  -im  or  -em. 

548.  (a.)  Accusatives  in  -im 

Are  sitim,  tussim,  vim,  thirst,  cough,  strength 

And  burim,  cucumim.  ploughtail,  cucumber 

549.  The  accusative  in  -im  is  found  in  many  adverbs  (700) :  as,  partim,  in 
part;  in  some  adverbial  expressions:  as,   adamussim,   examussim,  to  a   T, 
adfatim,  to  satiety,  ad  ravim,  to  hoarseness;  in  some  names  of  rivers  and  cities  : 
as,  Tiberim,  Hispalim  ;  and  in  some  Greek  words  (565). 

550.  (b.)  Six  have  the  accusative  commonly  in  -im,  sometimes  in  -em : 
febrim,  -em,  fever        puppim,  -em,  stern       securim,  -em,  axe 
pelvim,  -em,  basin        restim,   -em,  rope         turrim,   -em,  tower 

551.  Six   have  the  accusative  commonly  in   -em,   sometimes   in  -im: 
bipennem,  -im,  two-edged  axe  navem,  -im,  ship 

clavem,  -im,  key  sementfem,  -im,  planting 

messem,  -im,  crop  strigilem,  -im,  skin-scraper 

552.  In  the  ablative,  gender  substantives  have  usually  -e, 
and  neuters  and  adjectives  have  -I :  as, 

hoste,  enemy  ;  man,  sea  ;  acri,  sharp,  brevi,  short,  audaci,  daring. 

553-  (!•)  Of  gender  substantives  with  the  nominative  in  -is,  a  few 
have  only  -I  in  the  ablative,  and  many  have  either  -I  or  -e. 

554.  (a.)  These  ablatives  have  only  -I: 

securi,  siti,  tussi,  vi,  axe,  thirst,  cough,  strength 

canall,  cucumi.  conduit,  cucumber 

Some  names  of  rivers  and  cities  have  only  -I :  as,  Tiberi,  Hispali.  The 
locative  also  ends  in  -I :  as,  Neapoli,  at  Neapolis. 

555"  (£•)  These  ablatives  of  gender  substantives  with  the  nomina- 
tive in  -is  have  -i  or  -e  : 

amne,  -I,  river       clavi,  -e,  key  orbi,  -e,  circle 

ave,  -I,  bird  febri,  -e,  fever  puppi,  -e,  stern 

bile,  -i,  bile  fusti,  -e,  club  sementi,  -e,  planting 

civi,  -e,  citizen        igni,  -s,fire  strigili,  -e,  skin-scraper 

classe,  -I,  fleet        navi,  -e,  ship  turn,  -e,  tower 

556.  A  few  other  words  in  -is  have  occasionally  an  ablative  in  -i :  as,  anguis, 
snake,  collis,  hill,  finis,  end,  postis, /tf-tf,  unguis,  nail,  &c.    sors,  lot,  imber, 
shower,  and  lux,  light,  have  also  -e  or  -i ;  supellex,  furniture,  has  supellectili 
or  -e ;  Arar  has  -e  or  -i ;  Liger,  -i  or  -e. 

557.  Neuter  names  of  towns  with  the  nominative  in  -e  have  -e  in  the  ablative : 
as,  Praeneste.    rete,  net,  has  only  rete ;  mare,  sea,  has  rarely  mare  (527). 

558.  (2.)  Adjectives  '  of  two  endings'  with  stems  in  -i-  (630)  often  have 
-e  in  the  ablative  when  they  are  used  as  substantives,  and  sometimes  in 
verse,  when  a  short  vowel  is  needed  :  as, 


The  Noun:  Stems  in  -i-.       [559-565. 


adfini,  -e,  connection  by  marriage;  aedile,  -i,  aedile ;  familiar!,  -e,  friend. 
But  some,  even  as  substantives,  have  -I  :  as,  aequali,  of  the  same  age,  consular!, 
ex-consul,  gentill,  tribesman.  Adjectives  of  place  in  -Snsis  (330)  usually  have 
-i,  but  sometimes  -e :  as,  Tarquiniense.  Proper  names  have  usually  -  e :  as, 
luvenale. 

559.  Adjectives  'of  one  ending'  with  stems  in  -i-  (632),  have  commonly 
-I  in  the  ablative.     The  following  ablatives  have  only  -i : 

amenti,  frenzied,  ancipitl,  two-headed,  praecipiti,  head-first,  concolori, 
of  like  hue,  concord!,  harmonious,  discord!,  at  variance,  SOCOrdi,  imfercep- 
tive,  degenerl,  degenerate,  diti,  rich,  teretl,  rounded,  ingenti,  huge,  inopi, 
without  means,  memorl,  remembering,  immemori,  forgetful. 

560.  Present  participles,  when  used  as  adjectives,  have  -I  in  the 
ablative,  otherwise  -e  :    as, 

a  sapient!  vir5,  by  a  wise  man;  adulescente,  youth,  substantive; 
RSmulo  regnante,  in  the  reign  of  Romulus,  ablative  absolute  (1362). 

561.  Other  adjectives   'of    one  ending*    occasionally   have   -e   in   the 
ablative  when  used  as  substantives  or  as  epithets  of  persons,  or  in  verse 
when  a  short  syllable  is  needed :    as, 

consort!,  sharing,  pan,  equal,  vigil!,  -wide-awake,  fel!ci,  happy,  as  adjec- 
tives; but  consorte,  &c.,  as  substantives;  in  prose,  impari,  dispari,  unequal; 
in  verse,  impare,  dispare.  Proper  names  have  -e  :  as,  Felice. 

PLURAL  CASES. 

562.  In  the  plural,  gender  nominatives  have  -es,  rarely  -Is  or  -eis, 
and  gender  accusatives  have  -is  or  -is  indifferently,  sometimes  -eis ; 
after  about  50  A.D.,  -is  was  the  prevalent  ending  for  both  cases. 
Neuters  add  -a  to  the  stem,  making  -ia ;  for  -ia  in  old  Latin,  cf.  2505. 

563.  In  the  genitive  plural,  present  participles,  some  substantive  stems 
in  -nt(i)-,  and  some  adjectives   'of  two  endings'  (631)   have  occasionally 
-um  :  as, 

amantum,  lovers  ;  rudentum,  rigging;  agrestum,  country  folk;  caeles- 
turn,  heaven's  tenantry,  apis,  bee,  has  commonly  -um ;  caedes,  slaughter, 
and  fraus,  deceif,  have  rarely  -um.  For  -um  in  some  adjectives  '  of  one  ending,' 
see  636  ;  for  -bus  in  the  dative  and  ablative  in  old  Latin,  see  2505. 

564.  Other  case  forms  are  found  in  inscriptions,  as  follows : 

N.  without  -is:  VECTIGAL,  i.e.  vectigalis,  adjective;  -e  for  -is  (66,  41): 
MILITARE,  i.e.  mllitaris,  adjective ;  -es  (540):  AIDILES,  i.e.  aed!lis;  GIVES,  i.e. 
civis.  G.  -us,  from  186  to  100  B.C.  :  PARTVS,  i.e.  partis.  D.  -ei :  VRBEI. 
Ac.  -i  (61)  :  PARTI,  i.e.  partem ;  -e  :  AIDE,  i.e.  aedem.  Ab.  -ei :  FONTEI; 
-e  :  SERVILE,  i.e.  servili.  Plural:  N.  -es :  FINES;  -eis:  FINEIS;  -is:  FINIS. 


GREEK   NOUNS. 

565.  Greek  stems  in  -i-  are  usually  declined  like  Latin  ones,  with  the  accusa- 
tive in  -im,  and  ablative  in  -I.  But  the  accusative  sometimes  has  -n  :  as,  poesin, 
poetry,  Charybdin ;  similarly  Capyn ;  and  a  vocative  occurs  :  as,  Charybdi. 
The  plural  genitive  Metamorphoseon,  and  as  ablative  Metamorphosesin, 
occur  as  titles  of  books. 


566-576.]  Words:  Inflection. 


CHARACTERISTICS    OF   STEMS    IN    -1-. 

566.  Parisyllables  with  nominatives   in  -is,  -es,  or  -e,  and 
a  few  in  -er  ;  and  imparisyllables  with  nominatives  in  -al,  and 
in  -ar  for  -are,  have  steins  in  -i-. 

But  canis,  iuvenis  (486),  volucris  (490),  mensis  (492),  sedes  (476),  and 
vates  (478),  have  consonant  stems. 

567.  Under  -i-  stems  may  also  conveniently  be  grouped  the  fol- 
lowing classes,  which  have  usually  a  consonant  form  in  the  singular, 
and  an  -i-  form  in  the  plural : 

568.  (a.)  Imparisyllabic  adjectives  with  the  genitive  in  -is,  except  com- 
paratives and  the  dozen  with  consonant   stems  (624),  and    imparisyllables 
with  a  nominative  in   -s  or  -x  preceded  by  any  consonant  except  p.     But 
coniunx  (472)  and  caelebs  (480)  have  consonant  stems. 

569.  (b.)  The  following  monosyllables  :   as,  unit,  an  as,  faex,  dregs,  fraus, 
deceit,  gllS,  dormouse,  lis,  strife,  lux,  light,  mas,  male,  mus,  mouse,  nox,  night, 
Stirps,  trunk,  vis,  strength.      Also  fauce,  throat,  and   compede,  fetter,  both 
Ab.,  no  N.,  and  fornax,  furnace. 


GENDER   OF   CONSONANT   STEMS   AND   -i-   STEMS. 

570.  The  gender  of  many  of  these  substantives  is  determined  by  their 
meaning  (404-412)  ;    that  of  participles   used  as    substantives  follows  the 
gender  of  the  substantive  understood  ;  Greek  substantives  follow  the  Greek 
gender.     The  gender  of  other  words  may  be  conveniently  arranged  for  the 
memory  according  to  the  nominative  endings  as  follows. 

MASCULINE. 

571.  Imparisyllables  in  -es  or  -es  and  substantives 
in  -er,  -6,  -or,  and  -6s  are  masculine  :  as, 

caespes,  sod;  pes,  foot;  agger,  mound ;  sermo,  speech;  pallor,  pale- 
ness ;  flos,  flower. 

572.  These  imparisyllables  in  -es  or  -es  are  feminine:  merges,  sheaf,  seges, 
crop,  teges.  mat ;  requies  and  quies,  rest ;  compedes,  plural,  fetters ;  merces, 
reward,     aes,  copper,  bronze,  is  neuter. 

573.  These  substantives  in  -er  are  neuter :  cadaver,  corpse,  iter,  way,  tuber, 
swelling,  truffle,  iiber,  udder,  verberis,  lash,  genitive,  no  nominative;  also  names 
of  pfants  in  -er:  as,  acer,  maple,  cicer,  chickpea,  papaver,  poppy,  Plpeiy/g^r, 
siler,  osier,  siser,  skirret,  suber,  corktree,    linter,  tub,  boat,  is  feminine,  once 
masculine,     ver,  spring,  is  neuter. 

574.  Substantives  in  -o,  with  genitive  -inis  (485),  are  feminine;  as,  imago, 
imaginis,  likeness ;  also  caro,  carnis,  flesh,  and  words  of  action  in  -10  and  -tio 
(227,  228).     But  cardo,  hinge.  5rdo,  rank,  and  turbo,  -whirlwind,  are  masculine. 
margo,  brink,  and  cupido,  desire,  are  sometimes  masculine. 

575.  These  substantives  in  -or  are  neuter  :  ador,  spelt,  aequor,  sea,  marmor, 
marble,  cor,  heart,     arbor,  tree,  is  feminine. 

576.  These  substantives  in  -6s  are  feminine  :  cos,  whetstone,  arbos,  treet  dos, 
dowry.    OS,  oris,  mouth,  face,  is  neuter,  also  os,  ossis,  bone. 

86 


The  Noun:  Consonant  and  -i-  Stems.  [577-584. 


FEMININE. 

577.  Parisyllables  in  -es,  and  substantives  in  -as 
-aus,  -is,  -S  preceded  by  a  consonant,  and  -x,  are 
feminine :  as, 

nubes,  cloud ;  aetas,  age;  laus,  praise ;  navis,  ship ;  urbs,  city ;  pax, 

peace. 

578.  as,  assis,  penny,  is  masculine,     vas,  vessel,  utensil,  and  the  defectives 
fas,  right,  and  nefas,  wrong,  are  neuter. 

579.  Substantives  in  -nis  are   masculine ;   also  twenty-nine  others  in 
-is,  as  follows : 

axis,  callis,  caulis,  anguis,  axle,  path,  cabbage,  snake 

fascis,  fustis,  lapis,  sangufs,  bundle,  club,  stone,  blood 

piscis,  postis,  pulvfs,  ensis,  fish,  post,  dust,  glaive 

torquis,  torris,  unguis,  mensis,  t-wisted  collar,  firebrand,  nail,  month 

vectis,  vermis,  vomis,  collis,  lever,  -worm, ploughshare,  hill 

glis,  canalis,  also  follis,  dormouse,  conduit,  ball 

casses,  sentes,  vepres,  orbis,  nets,  brambles,  thorns,  plurals,  circle 

cucumis,  and  sometimes  corbis.  cucumber,  basket 

burim,  ploughtail,  accusative  only,  is  also  masculine.  A  few  of  the  above 
are  sometimes  feminine :  as,  amnis,  anguis,  callis,  canalis,  cinis,  finis, 
funis,  torquis,  vepres,  &r. 

580.  Four  in  -s  preceded  by  a  consonant  are  masculine :    dens,  tooth,  fons, 
fountain,    pons,    bridge,    m5ns,    mountain ;    also    factors   of   twelve :     sextans, 
one   sixth,    quadrans,    triens,    dodrans,    dextans ;    rudens,    rope,    once, 
adeps,  fat,   and   forceps,  pincers,  ar~  masculine  or   feminine,     stirps,  stock,  is 
sometimes  masculine. 

581.  calix,  cup,  fornix,  arch,  and  tradux,  vinelayer,  are  masculine;  also  sub- 
stantives in   -unx  and  -ex  ;  except  nex,  murder,  and  preci,  prayer,  dative,  no 
nominative,  which  are  feminine;   also  rarely   grex,  herd,     cortex,  bark,  forfex, 
scissors,  silex,  flint,  and  obice,  barrier,  ablative,  no  nominative,  are  either  mascu- 
line or  feminine,     calx,  heel,  and  calx,  lime,  are  sometimes  masculine,  also  lux, 
light)  in  the  ablative  in  old  Latin. 

NEUTER. 

582.  Substantives  in  -c,  -e,  -1,  -n,  -t,  in  -ar,  -ur, 
-us,  and  -us,  are  neuter:  as, 

lac,  milk;  mare,  sea;  animal,  animal;  carmen,  song;  caput,  head; 
calcar,  spur;  fulgur,  lightning;  corpus,  body ;  ius,  right. 

583.  sol,  sun,  pecten,  comb,  lien,  spleen,   renes,  kidneys,  plural,  and  fur- 
fur, bran,  are  masculine.     So  usually  sal,  salt,  but  sometimes  neuter  in  the  singular, 
far,  spelt,  is  neuter. 

584.  pecus,  beast,    is   feminine;   also   tellus,  earth,   and  the   substantives   in 
-us  which  have  -udis  (475)  or  -utis  (477)  in  the  genitive:   as,  palus,  marsh; 
iuventus,  youth. 


585-590.] 


Words :  Inflection. 


STEMS    IN    -u-. 

The  Fourth  Declension. 

Genitive  singular  -us,  genitive  plural  -u-um. 

585.  Stems  in  -u-  are  substantive  only,  and  mostly 
masculine. 

586.  There  are  only  three  neuters  in  common  use,  cornu,  horn,  germ,  knee, 

and  veru,   a  spit.     But  some  cases  of  other  neuters  are  used:  as,  ablative  pecu, 
flock;  plural  nominative  and  accusative  artua,  limbs  (Plaut.);  OSSVA,  bones  (inscr.). 

587.  The  nominative  of  stems   in  -u-  ends,  including  the  stem 
vowel,  in  -u-s  in  gender  words,  and  in  lengthened  -u  of  the  stem  in 
neuters. 

588.  Most  substantives  in  -u-  are  masculines  in  -tu-  or  -su-,  often  defective 
in  case  (235).     The  following  words  are  feminine :   acus,  fin,  needle,   domus, 

house,  manus,  hand,  portlCUS,  colonnade  ;  tribus,  tribe;  and  the  plurals  idus, 
ides,  and  quinquatrus, /<?«.$*  of  Minerva  ;  rarely  penus,  store,  and  specus,  cave. 

589.  Stems  in  -u-  are  declined  as  follows  : 


Examples 

fluctus,  wave, 

cornu,  horn, 

jj-g  |.|- 

Stems 

fluctu-,  M. 

cornu-,  Ne. 

Singular 

M. 

Ne. 

Nom. 

fluctus,  a  (or  the]  wave 

cornu 

-us 

-u 

Gen. 

fluctus,  a  wave's,  of  a  wave 

cornus 

-us 

-us 

Dat. 

fluctui,  -u,  to  or  for  a  wave 

cornQ 

-ui,  -fl 

-u 

Ace. 

fluctum,  a  wave 

cornu 

-um 

-u 

Abl. 

fiuctu,fr0tn,  with,  or  by  a  wave 

cornu 

-u 

-u 

Plural 

Nom. 

fluctus,  (the}  waves                . 

cornua 

-us 

-ua 

Gen, 

fluctuum,  waves',  of  waves 

cornuum 

-uum 

-uum 

Dat. 

fluctibus,  to  or  for  waves 

cornibus 

-ibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

fluctus,  waves                   [waves 

cornua 

-us 

-ua 

Abl. 

fluctibus,  from,  with,  or  by 

cornibus 

-ibus 

-ibus 

SINGULAR   CASES. 


590.  In  the  genitive,  the  uncontracted  form  -uis  sometimes  occurs :  as, 
anuis,  old  woman  (Ter.).  A  genitive  in  -ti  is  rather  common:  as,  adventi, 
arrival ;  ornati,  embellishment  (Ter.) ;  senati,  senate.  In  the  dative,  -u  is 
regularly  found  for  -ui  in  neuters  and  often  in  gender  words. 

SS 


The  Noun:  Stems  in  -e-.       [591-600. 


PLURAL    CASES. 

591.  In  the  genitive  plural,  a  shorter  form  in  -um  is  occasionally  found:  as, 
passum,  steps  (Plant.,   Mart.);   currum,  chariots  (Verg.) ;  EXERCITVM.    The 
quantity  of  the  u  and  the  origin  of  this  ending  are  uncertain. 

592.  In  the  dative  and  ablative  plural,   the  following  retain   -u-bus ' 
acus,  pin,  needle,  arcus,  bow,  partus,  birth,  tribus,  tribe.     The  following 
have    -u-bus   or   -i-bus   (28) :   artus,  plural,  joints,  lacus,  lake,  portus, 
haven,  specus,  cave,  genii,  knee,  veru,  a  spit.     All  other  words  have  -i-bus 
only. 

593.  Other  case  forms  are  found  in  inscriptions,  as  follows  : 

G.  -uos:  SENATVOS;  -u  (66)  SENATV  ;  -uus,  in  the  imperial  age  (29,  i): 
EXERCITVVS.  D.  -uei  (29,  2):  SENATVEI.  Ac. -u  (61) :  MANV.  Ab.  -uu  (29,  i): 
ARBITRATVV;  -uo,  once,  by  some  thought  to  be  for  -ud  (426);  MAGISTRATVO. 
Plural :  N.  -uus  (29,  i) :  MAGISTRATVVS. 

594.  domus,  house,   F.,  has  stems  of  two  forms,   domu-  and  domo-  (401); 
it  is  declined  as  follows:    N.  domus,   G.   domus,  rarely  dorm,   D.   domui  or 
domo,   Ac.   domum,    Ab.   domo  or  domu,   Locative  domi,   rarely  domui. 
Plural :    N.  domus,   G.  domuum,  later  domorum,   D.  and  Ab.  domibus, 
Ac.  domos,  less  commonly  domus. 

595.  Some  other  substantives  have  an  -u-  stem  in  some  of  their  cases,  and 
an    -o-    stem  in  others :    see   angiportus,    arcus,    caestus,    colus,   cornu, 
cornus,  cupressus,  ficus,  fretus,  gelus,  laurus,  murtus,  penus,  pinus, 
quercus,   rictus,  tonitrus,  in  the  dictionary. 


STEMS    IN    -e-. 

The  Fifth  Declension. 
Genitive  singular  -Si,  genitive  plural  -e-rum. 

596.  Stems   in  -e-  are  substantive  only,  and  femi- 
nine. 

597.  dies,  day,  is  always  masculine^  in  the  plural,  and  commonly  in  the  singular; 
but  the  feminine  is   common  when    dies    denotes  length  of    time  or  a  set  day. 
meridies,  midday,  is  masculine  and  singular  only. 

598.  The  nominative  of  stems  in  -e-   ends,  including  the  stem 
vowel,  in  -e-s. 

599.  Stems  in  -e-  are  of  two  classes  : 

600.  (i.)  Stems  of  the  first  class  have  one  or  two  syllables;  there 
are  four  of  them  :  res,  thing,  spes,  hope,  dies,  day,  and  fides,/?/'///. 

Of  this  class,  res  and   dies  have  a  plural  throughout;   spes  has  only 
the  nominative  and  accusative  plural,  and  fides  has  no  plural. 


601-607.] 


Words:    Inflection. 


601.  Stems  in  -e-  of  the  first  class  are  declined  as  follows 


Examples 

res,  thing, 

dies,  day, 

a-e  9,1 

Stems 

re-,  F. 

die-,  M. 

1  §  81 

D 

Singular 

Nom. 

res,  a  (or  the}  thing 

dies 

-es 

Gen. 

rfii,  rei,  a  thing's,  of  a  thing 

diei,  die! 

-61,  -el,  -el 

DaL 

re%  rei,  to  or  for  a  thing 

diei,  diei 

-61,  -ei,  -el 

Ace. 

rem,  a  thing 

diem 

-em 

Abl. 

tt,  from,  2uilh,  or  by  a  thing 

die 

-e 

Plural 

Norn. 

res  (the)  things 

dies 

-es 

Gen. 

rerum,  things',  of  things 

dierum 

-erum 

Dat. 

rebus,  to  or  for  things 

diebus 

-ebus 

Ace. 

res,  things 

dies 

-es 

Abl. 

rebus,  from,  -with,  or  by  things 

diebus 

-ebus 

602.  fides  is  declined  like  res  ;  it  has  once  a  genitive  fides  (Plaut.).    For  rei, 
rei,  or  rel,  and  fidei,  fidei,  or  fidei,  see  127,4.  .dies  has  rarely  a  genitive  dies 
(Enn.)  or  dil  (Verg.).     spes  has  only  the  genitive  and  dative  spei  in  verse.     A 
genitive  or  dative  in  -e  is  sometimes  found :  as,  re,  die,  fide. 

603.  A  few  cases  of  other  words  sometimes  follow  this  class  (401):  as,  plebes 
(524),  commons,  G.   plebel  or  plebi ;  fames   (524),  hunger,  Ab.  always   fame; 
requies    (477),   rest,    G.   requie  (Sail.),    Ac.    requiem,   Ab.    requie;  tabes 
(523),  waste,  Ab.  tabe,  *cor.tages,  contact,  Ab.  contage  (Lucr.),  &c. 

604.  (2.)  Stems  of  the  second  class  are  formed  by  the  suffix  -ie- 
or  -tie-,  and  have  three  or  more  syllables. 

This  class,  which  is  parallel  to  stems  in  -ia-,  has  usually  no  genitive, 
dative,  or  plural.  Many  stems,  especially  those  in  -tie-,  have  also  a  col- 
lateral form  in  -ia-,  and  the  genitive  and  dative,  when  used  at  all,  are 
commonly  from  a  stem  in  -ia-. 

605.  Stems  in  -e-  of  the  second  class  are  declined  as  follows  : 

luxuries,  extravagance,  stem  luxurie-,  F. 
Norn,  luxuries,  Ace.  luxuriem,  Abl.  luxurie. 

606.  A  few  examples  of  the  genitive  of  these  stems  are  found  :  as,  pernicii, 
pernicies,  or  pernicie,  ruin  (Cic.);  rabies,  fury  (Lucr.) ;  acie,  edge  of  battle 
(Sail.,   Caes.,  auct.  B.  Afr.),  facie,   make  (Plant.,  Lucil.),   specie,  looks  (Caes.); 
aciei  (auct.   B.  Afr.).      And  a  very   few  of    the  dative:  as,  aciei  twice  (Caes.); 
perniciei,  pernicii  (Nep.);  pernicie  (Liv.). 

607.  eluvies,  offscouring,  wash,  has  the  nominative  of    the    plural,  and 
glacies,  ice,  has  the  accusative  of  the  plural.     Five  words  only  have  the 
nominative  and  accusative  plural: 

series,  acies,  row,  edge,     species,  facies,  look,  make,     effigies,  likeness. 

90 


The  Noun  :    Adjectives.         [608-615. 


THE    ADJECTIVE. 

608.  Adjectives  are  declined  like  substantives,   and  it  has  been  shown 
already  how  their  cases  are  formed.     But  they  differ  from  substantives  in 
having  different  forms  in  some  of  their  cases  to  denote  different  genders  j 
it  is  convenient  therefore  to  put  their  complete  declension  together. 

609.  Adjective  stems  end  in  -o-  and  -a-,  in  a  con- 
sonant, or  in  -i-. 

610.  An  accusative  plural  of  a  stem  in  -u-,  angnimanus,  -with  a  serpent  for 
a  hand)  is  once  used  (Lucr.).     There  are  no  adjective  stems  in  -e-. 

611.  Adjectives  are  often  conveniently  said  to  be  '  of  three  end- 
ings? l  of  two  endings]  or  '  of  one  ending.'' 

By  the  '  ending '  is  meant  the  ending  of  the  nominative  singular :  thus,  bonus, 
bona,  bonum,  good,  and  acer,  acris,  acre,  sharp,  are  '  of  three  endings '  (409); 
brevis,  breve,  short,  is  'of  two  endings  '  (410);  and  audax,  bold,  is  'of  one  end- 
ing' (410).  . 

612.  Adjectives  'of  one  ending'  which  form  a  gender  nominative  in   -s,  retain 
the  -s  irrationally  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  neuter  singular  :  as,  N.  M.  and  F. 
audax,  N.  and  Ac.  Ne.  also  audax. 


STEMS   IN  -o-  AND   -a-. 

613.  Most   adjectives  with   stems   in   -o-   and   -a-   are  de- 
clined as  follows : 


Example 

M.  bonus,  F.  bona,  Ne. 

bonum,  good, 

Stems 

bono-,  bona-. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

bonus 

bona 

bonum 

boni 

bonae 

bona 

Gen. 

boni 

bonae 

boni 

bonorum    bonarum 

bonorum 

Dat. 

bono 

bonae 

bono 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

Ace. 

bonum 

bonam 

bonum 

bonos 

bonas 

bona 

Abl. 

bono 

bona 

bono 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

Voc. 

bone 

614.  Stems  in  -io-  and  -ia-  have  no  consonant  i  in  cases  ending  in  -i  or  -is 
(153,  3) :  as  plebeius,//^«tf«,  G.  S.  M.  and  No.,  and  N.  PI.  M.  plebei,  D.  and 
Ab.  PI.  plebiis. 

615.  Stems  in   -ro-  preceded  by  a  long  vowel  retain   -us  in  the  nominative 
singular  masculine  and  are  declined  like  bonus  (453):  as,  severus,  stern-,  also 

ferus,  merus,  wild,  unmixed  properus,  hasty 

morigerus,  complaisant  prosperus,  lucky 

praeposterus,  reversed  triquetrus,  three-cornered 

91 


6 1 6-6 1 8.] 


Words :  Inflection. 


616.  (i.)  Some  stems  in  -ro-  preceded  by  a  short  vowel  end  in  -r  in 
the  nominative  singular  masculine  and  have  no  vocative  (454) ;  they  are 
declined  as  follows : 


Example 
Stems 

M.  liber,  F.  libera,  Ne.  liberum,  /ra?, 
.     libero-,  libera-. 

Norn. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 
liber 
liberi 
libero 
liberum 
libero 

FEM. 
libera 
liberae 
liberae 
liberam 
libera 

NEUT. 
liberum 
liberi 
libero 
liberum 
libero 

MASC. 
liberi 
Hberorum 
liberls 
liberos 
liberls 

FEM. 
liberae 
Hberarum 
liberls 
Hberas 
liberls 

NEUT. 
libera 
Hberorum 
liberls 
libera 
liberls 

Such  are  :  compounds,  chiefly  poetical,  ending  in  -fer  and  -ger,  bearing, 
carrying,  having:  as,  caelifer,  heaven-upholding;  corniger,  horned ;  also 
the  following: 

(alter,  618),  asper,  other,  rough        satur,  semiier,^//,  half-beast 
lacer,  liber,  torn,  free  tener,  Trever,  tender,  Treveran 

gibber,  miser,  hump-backed,  for  lorn 

dexter,  right  ^  has  dextera,  dexterum,  or  dextra,  dextrum,  G.  dexteri, 
or  dextrl,  &c.  sinister,  left,  has  usually  sinistra,  &c.,  rarely  sinisteram  (Plaut., 
Ten),  asper  has  a  plural  accusative  aspros  (Stat.),  and  ablative  aspris  (Verg.). 

617.  (2.)  Other  stems  in  -ro-  have  a  vowel  before  r  only  in  the  nomina- 
tive singular  masculine  -er  (454) ;  they  are  declined  as  follows  : 


Example 
Stems 

M.  aeger,  F.  aegra,  Ne.  aegrum,  ///, 
aegro-,  aegra-. 

Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 
aeger 
aegri 
aegro 
aegrum 
aegro 

FEM. 
aegra 
aegrae 
aegrae 
aegram 
aegra 

NEUT. 
aegrum 
aegri 
aegro 
aegrum 
aegro 

MASC. 
aegri 
aegrorum 
aegrls 
aegros 
aegrls 

FEM. 
aegrae 
aegrarum 
aegrls 
aegras 
aegrls 

NEUT. 
aegra 
aegrorum 
aegrls 
aegra 
aegrls 

618.  Nine  adjectives  or  adjective  pronouns  have  the  pronoun 
form  -lus  in  the  genitive  singular  and  -i  in  the  dative  singular,  for 
masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter  alike;  they  are  the  following: 

alius,  another  unus,  one  alter,  the  other 

solus,  alone  ullus,  any  at  all  uter,  which  of  the  two 

totus,  whole  nullus,  no  neuter,  neither 

92 


The  Noun:    Adjectives.        [619-624. 


6ig.  Of  the  above  words,  those  with  the  nominative  in  -us  are  declined  like 
unus  (638).  But  alius  has  N.  and  Ac.  Ne.  aliud  (650);  for  the  G.,  altenus  is 
mostly  used,  except  in  the  combination  alius  modi,  of  another  sort ;  the  N.  M. 
is  rarely  alls,  Ne.  alid,  D.  rarely  all.  alter  is  declined  like  liber  (616),  except 
in  the  genitive  singular  alterfus  (127,  6)  and  dative  alterl.  For  uter  and  its 
derivatives,  see  693. 

620.  The  ordinary  genitive  and  dative  of  -o-  and  -a-  stems,  from  some  of 
the  above  words,  is  sometimes  found :  G.  and  D.  aliae,  solae,  alterae,  D.  alio, 
alterae,  &c. 


CONSONANT    STEMS. 
OF   TWO    ENDINGS. 


621.  The  only  consonant  stems  of  two  endings  are  comparatives 
(346)  ;  they  are  declined  as  follows  : 


Example 
Stems 

M.  and  F.  tristior,  Ne.  tristius,  sadder, 
tristiSr-,  tristius-. 

Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC.  AND  FEM.        NEUT. 
tristior                  tristius 
tristioris              tristioris 
tristiori                tristiori 
tristiorem            tristius 
tristiore                tristiore 

MASC.  AND  FEM.              NEUT. 
tristiores                 tristiora 
tristiorum'              tristiorum 
tristioribus             tristioribus 
tristiores                tristiora 
tristioribus             tristioribus 

622.  The  ablative  rarely  has  -I  for  -e  :  as,  meliori  (503);  the  accusative  plural 
masculine  and  feminine  rarely  have  -is  :  as,  melioris  (505). 

623.  plus,  more,  has  in  the  singular  only  Ne.  N.  and  Ac.  plus,  G.  pluris, 
and  Ab.  plure.     Plural:   N.   M.  and  F.  plures,  Ne.   plura,  G.  plurium,  D. 
and  Ab.  pluribus,  Ac.  M.  and  F.  plures  or  pluris,  Ne.  plura.    complures, 
a  good  many,   plural   only,  has   N.    M.   and   F.    complures,   Ne.    N.   and  Ac. 
compluria  or  complura,  G.  complurium,  D.  and  Ab.  compluribus,  Ac. 
M.  and  F.  complures  or  compluris. 


OF   ONE   ENDING. 

624.  A  dozen  adjectives  'of  one  ending,'  mostly  words  applying  to 
persons,  with  consonant  stems  throughout,  have  no  nominative  or  accusa- 
tive neuter  plural ;  they  are  : 

caelebs,    compos,  unmarried,      pubes,  impubes,  mangrown,  immature 
master  of  s5spes,  superstes,  safe,  surviving 

*deses,  dives,  lazy,  rich  pauper,  cicur,/<?0r,  tame 

particeps,  princeps,  sharing,first 

93 


625-629.] 


Words :   Inflection. 


625.  When  these  adjectives  have  a  neuter,  it  is  the  same  as  the  gender 
iorms,  except  in  the  accusative  singular  ;  they  are  declined  as  follows  : 

M.  F.  and  Ne.  dives,  rich,  stem  divit-. 

Singular:  N.  dives,  G.  divitis,  D.  diviti,  Ac.  M.  and  F.  divitem, 
Ne.  dives,  Ab.  divite.  Plural:  N.  and  Ac.  M.  and  F.  divites,  G.  divi- 
tum,  D.  and  Ab.  divitibus. 

626.  The  plural  caelites,  heavenly,  occupants  of  heaven,'^  also  declined  like  the 
plural  of  dives ;  the  singular  Ab.  caelite  occurs  a  couple  of  times,      vetus,  old, 
G.  veteris,  is  also  declined  like  dives,  but  has  a  Ne.  PL  N.  and  Ac.  vetera;  the 
Ab.  S.  is  regularly  vetere,  but  veteri  is  sometimes  used. 


STEMS    IN    -i-. 
OF    THREE    ENDINGS. 

627.  A  dozen  adjectives  with  stems   in  -bri-,   -cri-,   or   -tri-,  have  a 
distinctive  form  in  -er  for  the  masculine  nominative  singular;   they  are: 

celeber,  thronged  volucer,  winged  pedester,/^- 

saluber,  healthy  campester,  of  a  plain  puter,  rotten 

acer,  keen  equester,  cavalry-  Silvester,  -woody 

alacer,  lively  paluster,  of  a  swamp  terrester,  land- 

So  also  celer,  swift.  The  names  of  months,  September,  October, 
November,  Decembe'r,  are  also  adjectives  with  stems  in  -bri-,  but  are  not  used 
in  the  neuter.  Other  adjectives  with  stems  in  -bri-,  -cri-,  or  -tri-,  have  no 
distinctive  form  for  the  masculine  nominative  singular  :  as,  muliebris,  mediocris, 
inlustris. 

628.  These  adjectives  are  declined  as  follows : 


Example 

M. 

acer,  F.  acris,  Ne.  acre,  sharp, 

Stem 

acri-. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

acer 

acris 

acre 

acres 

acres 

acria 

Gen. 

acris 

acris 

acris 

acriura 

acrium 

acrium 

Dat. 

acri 

acri 

acri 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus 

Ace. 

acrem 

acrem 

acre 

acris,  -es 

acris,  -es 

acria 

Abl. 

acri 

acri 

acri 

acribus 

Scribus 

acribus 

629.  In  all  cases  but  the  masculine  nominative  singular  these  adjectives  are  just 
like  those  in  -i-  'of  two  endings '  (630).  But  the  ablative  always  has  -i,  never  -e, 
and  the  genitive  plural  always  has  -ium,  never  -um.  In  celer  the  second  e 
belongs  to  the  stem  :  M.  celer,  F.  celeris,  Ne.  celere  ;  the  genitive  plural,  which 
is  celerum,  is  found  only  as  a  substantive.  Most  of  these  adjectives  have  now 
and  then  a  masculine  in  -is,  like  adjectives  'of  two  endings'  (630),  and  in  old 
Latin  the  nominative  -er  is  rarely  feminine. 

94 


The  Noun:    Adjectives.          [630-633. 


OF    TWO    ENDINGS. 


630.   Adjectives    '  of   two   endings '    with    stems   in   -i-   are 
declined  as  follows : 


Example 
Stem 

M.  and  F.  brevis,  Ne.  breve,  short, 
brevi-. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

brevis 

breve 

breves 

brevia 

Gen. 

brevis 

brevis 

brevium 

brevium 

Dat. 

brevi 

brevi 

brevibus 

brevibus 

Ace. 

brevem 

breve 

brevis,  -es 

brevia 

Abl. 

brevi 

brevi 

brevibus 

brevibus 

631.  The  ablative  is  sometimes  -e  when  these  adjectives  are  used  substantively 
or  in  verse  (558).     The  genitive  plural  is  rarely  -um  for  -ium  (563). 


OF    ONE    ENDING. 

632.  Most  adjectives  '  of  one  ending'  have  a  consonant  form 
of  the  stem  in  the  singular,  except  usually  in  the  ablative  (633), 
and  an  -i-  stem  in  the  plural ;  they  are  declined  as  follows  : 


Examples 
Stems 

M.  F.  and  Ne.  audax,  bold, 
audac(i)-. 

M.  F.  and  Ne.  regens,  ruling, 
regent(i)-. 

Singular 
Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 
Abl. 

MASC.  &  FEM.            NEUT. 
audax                audax 
audacis              audacis 
audaci                audaci 
audacem            audax 
audaci               audaci 

MASC.  &  FEM.            NEUT. 
regens                regens 
regentis              regentis 
regenti                regenti 
regentem           regens 
regente,  -i         regente,  -i 

Plural 
Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

MASC.  &  FEM.            NEUT. 
audaces             audacia 
audacium         audacium 
audacibus         audacibus 
audacis,  -es     audacia 
audacibus         audacibus 

MASC.  &  FEM.           NEUT. 
regentes             regentia 
regentium          regentium 
regentibus         regentibus 
regentis,  -es     regentia 
regentibus         regentibus 

633.  Present  participles  have  -I  in  the  ablative,  when  they  are  used  as 
adjectives,  otherwise  -e  (560).  For  -i  or  -e  in  other  words,  see  559, 
561.  For  -ium  or  -um  in  the  genitive  plural,  563. 

95 


634-641.] 


Words:  Inflection. 


634.  Most  adjectives  '  of  one  ending '  in  -i-  are  declined  as  above  (632)  ; 
some  of  them  have  peculiarities  in  some  of  their  cases,  as  follows  : 

635.  (i.)  trux  (531),  savage,  has  Ab.  -I  or  -e,  G.  PI.  -ium,  no  Ne.  PI.  N. 
or  Ac.       redux  (531),  returning,  has  Ab.  -I  or  -e,  no    G.    PL    or  Ne.   PI.  N.  or 
Ac.       hebes,  dull,  teres,   cylindrical  (533),  and  compounds  of  caput,  head,  as 
anceps,  (533),  two-headed,  have  Ab.  -I,  no  G.  PI.;  a  Ne.  PI.  N.  or  Ac.  -ia  is 
rare.     For  locuples,  rich,  see  533. 

636.  (2.)  The  following  have  -I  in  the  ablative,  but  -um  of  consonant  stems 
in  the  genitive  plural,  and  no  nominative  or  accusative  neuter  plural:  inops  (535), 


and  Ac.  -ia. 


THE    NUMERAL    ADJECTIVE. 

637.  Of    the   cardinals,   unus,   duo,   tres,   and    the    hundreds    except 
centum  are  declined.     The  other  cardinals  are  not  declined. 

638.  unus,  one,  is  declined  as  follows : 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

unus 

una 

unum 

unl 

unae 

una 

Gen. 

unius 

unius 

unius 

unorum 

unarum 

unorum 

Dat. 

um 

unl 

unl 

unis 

unis 

unis 

Ace. 

unum 

unam 

unum 

unos 

unas 

una 

Abl. 

uno 

una 

un5 

unis 

unis 

unis 

Voc. 

une 

In  verse,  the  genitive  singular  is  often  unius. 

639.  duo,  two,  and  tres,  three,  are  declined  as  follows : 


MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC.  & 

i  FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

duo 

duae 

duo 

tres 

tria 

Gen. 

duorum 

duarum 

duorum 

trium 

trium 

Dat. 

duobus 

duabus 

duobus 

tribus 

tribus 

Ace. 

duo  or  duos 

duas 

duo 

tres  or  tris 

tria 

Abl. 

du5bus 

duabus 

duobus 

tribus 

tribus 

640.  In  dramatic  verse,duo,  &c.,  is  common.     In  the  genitive  plural,  duo  some- 
times has  duQm   (462).     ambo,  both,  is  declined  like   duo,  but  has   -o  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative,  and  only  amborum   and  ambarum  in  the  genitive 
plural.     For  the  forms  duo,  ambo,  866415;  duobus,  duabus,  464,  442. 

641.  Hundreds  are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus  (613]  :  as,  ducenti, 
ducentae,  ducenta,  two  hundred^  G.  ducentorum  or  ducentfim  (462),  &c. 


The  Noun  :  Pronouns.         [642-650. 


642.  The  adjective  mille,  thousand,  is  not  declined.     The  substantive 
has  in  the  singular  only  N.  Ac.  Ab.  mille,  or  Ab.  milli ;  plural :  N.  and  Ac. 
millia  (milia),  G.  millium  (milium),  D.  and  Ab.  millibus  (milibus). 

643.  Ordinals,  as  primus,  first,  and  distributives,  as  bini,  two  each,  are 
declined  like  bonus   (613).     But  distributives  seldom  have  a  singular,  and 
often  have  the  genitive  plural  -urn  (462) :  as,  binum. 


THE    PRONOUN. 
(A.)     THE    PERSONAL    AND    REFLEXIVE    PRONOUN. 

644.  The  pronoun  of  the  first  person,  ego,  /,  of  the  second 
person,  tu,  thou,  and  the  reflexive  pronoun,  sui,  se,  himself^ 
herself ,  itself ,  themselves,  are  declined  as  follows: 


ego,  / 

tu,  thou 

sui,  self 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing.  &  Plur. 

Nom. 

ego 

nos 

tu 

vos 

Gen. 

mei 

nostrSm,  -tri 

tui 

vestrum,  -tri 

sui 

Dot. 

mihf,  mi 

nobis 

tib! 

vobis 

sibl 

Ace. 

me 

nos 

le- 

vos 

sS 

AbL 

me 

nobis 

ts 

vobis 

se 

645.  The  nominatives  ego  and  tu,  and  the  accusatives  me,  te  and  se, 
have  no  case  ending.     The  last  vowel  of  ego  is  rarely  long  in  Plautus,  long 
or  short  in  Lucilius.     The  nominative  ego  has  a  different  stem  from  that  of 
its  other  cases,  and  the  plurals  of  ego  and  tu  have  a  different  stem  from 
that  of  the  singular. 

646.  mei,    tui,   and    sui,    which  are   often   monosyllables  in   old  verse,  were 
originally  the  genitive  of  the  neuter  possessives,  used  substantively.     An  old  genitive 
mis  is  quoted,  and  tis  occurs  rarely  in  Plautus. 

647.  The  relation  of  the  ending  -bis  in  vobis  to  -b!  in  tib!  may  be  due  to 
analogy  with  illis,  illi.    nobis  is  formed  after  vobis. 

648.  In  old  Latin,  the  ablative  is  med,  ted,  sed  (426),  which  forms  are  also 
used  irrationally  for  the  accusative.     But  by  Terence's  time  the  -d  was  no  longer 
used  (143). 

649.  Older  forms  for  vestrfim  and  vestri  are  vostrum  and  yostri.     The 
genitive  plural  was  originally  a  genitive  of  the  possessive  :  that  in  -i  being  the  neuter 
singular,  that  in  -urn  the  masculine  or  feminine  plural.     In  old  Latin,  nostrorum, 
nostrarum,  vostrorum,  vostrarum  also  occur. 

650.  Emphasis  is  given  (i.)  by  reduplication  (189) :  Ac.  and  Ab.  meme, 
tete,  rare;  sese,  very  common.     (2.)  by  -te  added  to  the  N.  of  tu  :  tute. 
(3.)  by  -met  added  to  any  case  but  the  genitive  plural:  as,  egomet ;  but 
tu 


has  only  tutemet  or  tutimet. 
4 


97 


651-660.]  Words:  Inflection. 

651.  In  inscriptions,  the  datives  MIHEI,  TIBEI,  and  SIBEI  occur,  so  written  in 
verse  sometimes  even  when  the  last  syllable  is  short ;  and  MIHE,  TIBE.  Plural : 
D.  and  Ab.  VOBEIS.  Ac.  ENDS  in  an  old  hymn ;  SEESE  (29,1 ). 


THE    PERSONAL   AND    REFLEXIVE    POSSESSIVE. 

652.  The  possessives  of  ego,  tu,  and  sui,  are  meus,  mine,  tuus, 
thine,  and  suus,  his,  her,  its,  their  (pivn},  declined  like  bonus  (613), 
except  that  meus  has  mi  in  the  vocative  singular  masculine  (459) ; 
those   of  n5s   and   vos   are  noster,  our,  and  voster,  later  vester, 
your,  declined  like  aeger  (617). 

653.  Old  forms  are  tuos,  tuom,  and  suos,  suom  (452).     In  old  verse  metis, 
mel,  &c.,   tu"bs,  tui,  &c.,   subs,   s£ft,  &c.,  often  occur.      sos  for  suos,  sas 
for  suas,  and  sis  for  suis,  are  old  and  rare. 

654.  Other  case  forms  are  found  in  inscriptions,  as  follows: 

MEEIS,  MIEIS,  monosyllable;  TOVAM;  SVEI,  SOVOM,  sovo,  svvo,  SOVEIS,  SVEIS, 

SVIEIS. 

655.  Emphasis  is  given  (i.)  by  -met  added  to  suo,  sua,  suos,  and  to 
mea  and  sua,  neuter  plural :  as,  suomet ;    (2.)  by  -pte,  which  is  oftenest 
found  with  the  ablative  :  as,  suopte. 


(B.)     OTHER    PRONOUNS. 

656.  'Some   pronouns    have  a   peculiar  genitive   singular  in 
-lus   and    dative  singular  in    -i,    for  masculine,   feminine,  and 
neuter  alike. 

These  are  :  iste,  ille,  ipse,  uter,  and  their  derivatives.  Some  other 
words  of  a  pronoun  character  also  have  this  form  of  the  genitive  and  dative: 
see  6 1 8. 

657.  In  verse,  the  -I-  of  the  genitive  is  often  shortened,  and  always  in 
utriusque  ;   but  neutrius  is  not  found  with  short   i.     In  dramatic  verse, 
the  genitive  singular  of  iste,  ille,  or  ipse,  is  often  two  syllables. 

658.  hie,   is,   qui   or  quis,   and    their    derivatives    have    the   genitive 
singular   in  -ius,  thus :  huius,   eius,  and  quoius   or   cuius ;   in   dramatic 
verse,  these  genitives  are  often  one  syllable.      Their  datives  are  huic  for 
hoice,  ei  or  €i,  and  quoi  or  cui. 

659.  Six  words  have  a  peculiar  neuter  nominative  and  accusative  singular  in  -d  : 
id,   illud,    istud,   quid,   quod,   aliud,  and   derivatives.      In  manuscripts,  -t 
sometimes  found  for  -d:   as,    it,  illut,  istut,  &c. ;  sometimes  also  in  inscriptions 
of    the  empire.      In  hoc  for  *hod-ce  and  in  istuc  and  illuc  for  *istud-ce, 
*illud-ce,  the  d  has  vanished  (166,  i ;  171,  i). 


THE    DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUN. 

660.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  are  hie,  this,  this  near  me\ 
iste,  istic,  that,  that  near  you ;  and  ille,  illic,  yonder,  that 

98     • 


The  Noun:   Pronouns.         [661-666. 


661.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  hie,  this,  this  near  me,  is  de- 
clined as  follows : 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Norn. 

hie 

haec 

hoc 

hi 

hae 

haec 

Gen. 

huius 

huius 

huius 

horurn 

harum 

horum 

Dat. 

huic 

huic 

huic 

his 

his 

his 

Ace. 

hunc 

hanc 

hoc 

hos 

has 

haec 

Abl.    ' 

hoc 

hac 

hoc 

his 

his 

his 

662.  The  stem  of  hie  is  ho-,  ha- ;  to  most  of  its  cases  a  demonstrative 
-c  for  -ce  is  attached.     The  masculine  and  feminine  nominative  singular  and 
nominative  and  accusative  neuter  plural  take  an  -i-:  hie  for*ho-i-ce  (108,  a); 
haec  for  ha-i-ce  (96).     hunc,  hanc,  are  for  *hom-ce,  *ham-ce.     For  the 
quantity  of  the  first  syllable  of  huius,  see  153,  2;  of  hoc,  171,  i. 

663.  Old  forms  with  the  full  ending  -ce  are  rare  except'after  -s  :  Plural  Ne.  Ace. 
haece  (Enn.);  G.  F.  harumce  (Cato) ;  also  G.  horunc,  harunc  (PL,  T.); 
hosce,  D.  and  Ab.  hisce  (PI.,  T.).     After  100  B.C.,  the  full  form  -ce  is  not 
found,  except  occasionally  after  -s  :  huiusce,  hosce,  hasce,  hisce.     Before  -ne 
interrogative  it  is  retained  in  the  weakened  form  -ci- :  as,  hicine.     B»t  hicne, 
hocne,  huicne,  &c.,  are  found,  though  rarely. 

664.  The  nominative  hie  or  hicine  found  in  the  dramatists  and  rarely  later  is 
probably  for  *ho-C,  *he-c  (103,  a).     A  nominative  plural  feminine  haec  is  found  in 
writers  of  all  ages.     Other  and  rare  forms  are:  PI.  N.  M.  hisce  (461),  D.  or  Ab. 
hibus. 

665.  Other  case  forms  of  hie  are  found  in  inscriptions,  as  follows  : 

N.  M.  HEC,  HIC.      G.   HOIVS,  HVIIVS  (23),  HVIVS,  HOIVSCE,  HOIVSQVE,  HVIVSQVE. 

D.  HOICE,  HOIC,  HOI,  HVIC,  Hvi.  Ac.  M.  HONG,  HOC;  F.  HANCE;  Ne.  HOCE, 
HVC.  Ab.  M.  and  Ne.  HOCE  ;  F.  HACE,  oftener  than  HAC  in  republican  inscriptions; 
HAACE  (29,  i).  Loc.  HEICE,  HEic.  Plural :  N.  M.  HEISCE,  HEIS,  or  HEI,  HISCE 
or  HIS;  HI,  not  before  Augustus;  Ne.  N.  and  Ac.  HAICE,  HAECE.  G.  HORVNC. 
D.  and  Ab.  HEISCE,  HIBVS.  Ac.  F.  HASCE. 

666.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  iste,  that,  that  near  you,  and 
ille, yonder,  are  declined  alike,  as  follows  : 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

ille 

ilia 

illud 

illi 

illae 

ilia 

Gen. 

illius 

illius 

illius 

illorum 

illarum 

illorum 

Dat. 

illi 

illi 

illi 

illis 

illis 

illis 

Ace. 

ilium 

illam 

illud 

illos 

Mas 

ilia 

Abl. 

1115 

ilia 

£115 

illis 

illis 

illis 

99 


667-672.] 


Words:  Inflection. 


667.  The  first  syllable  of  iste  and  ille  is  often  short  in  the  dramatists.     Old 
forms  of  iste  are :    N.  istus,  G.  isti,  in  istimpdl,  D.  F.  istae.    The  initial  i 
of  iste  and  of  istic  (669),  is  sometimes  not  written:  as,   sta    res   (Cic.),  stuc 
periculum  (Ter.).    Old  forms  of  ille  are:  N.  olus  (81);   ollus  or  olle,  &c.: 
as,  D.  S.  or  N.  PI.  olli,  D.  PL  pills.      G.  illi,  in  illimodi,  D.  F.  illae.     The 
dramatists  have   eccistam,   eccilla,  eccillud,  eccillum,  eccillam,  for  ecce 
istam,  &c.,  and  ellum,  ellarn,  for  em  ilium,  &c. 

668.  Other  case  forms  of  ille  are  found  in  inscriptions,  as  follows : 

D.  F.  ILLAE.     Plural:  N.  M.  ILLEI.     G.  OLORVM  (81).     D.  and  Ab.  OLLEIS, 
ILLEIS. 

669.  istic   and  illic,   compounded   of    iste,   ille,   and    -ce   or   -c,  are 
declined  alike,  as  follows  : 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

illic 
illunc 
illoc 

illaec 
illanc 
iliac 

illuc 
illuc 
illoc 

illic 
illosce 
illisce 

illaec 
illasce 
illisce 

illaec 
illaec 
illisce 

670.  Rare  forms  are:  N.  and  Ac.  Ne.  istoc,  illoc,  G.  illiusce,  D.  illic,  Ab. 
F.  istace,  illace.  Plural:  N.  M.  illisce  (461),  illic,  Ac.  i!15sce,  illasce. 
Before  -ne  interrogative,  -ce  becomes  -ci- :  N.  illicine.  istucine,  Ac.  illancine, 
Ab.  istocine,  istacine.  PI.  Ac.  istoscine. 


THE   DETERMINATIVE   PRONOUN. 


671.  The  determinative  pronoun  is,  that,  the  aforesaid,  the 
one,  is  declined  as  follows  : 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC.   FEM.    NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

is         ea        id 

ei,  ii,  or  i 

eae 

ea 

Gen. 

eius     eius     eius 

eSrum 

earum 

eorum 

Dat. 

e*i         €!         61 

eis,  iis,  or  is 

eis,  iis,  or  is 

eis,  iis,  or  is 

Ace. 

eum    earn    id 

e5s 

eas 

ea 

Abl. 

eo        ea         ed 

eis,  iis,  or  is 

eis,  iis,  or  is 

eis,  iis,  or  is 

672.  is  and  id  (659)  are  formed  from  a  stem  i-,  and  the  other  parts  from 
a  stem  eo-,  ea-.  The  genitive  is  sometimes  written  in  Cicero  and  Plautus 
eiius;  for  the  quantity  of  the  first  syllable  of  eius,  see  153,  2;  for  ei,  see 
127,  3,  and  127,  4. 


100 


The  Noun:  Pronouns.        '[673-680. 


673.  In  old  verse,  the  genitive  singular  rarely  has  the  first  syllable  short.    Old 
and  rare  forms  are:    D.  F.  eaCj^Ac.  M^  im^or^em^  PI.  D.  and  Ab.  fbus,  F. 
eabus_(442/).     In  dramatic  verse,  eum,  cam,  ei,  eb,  ea,  and  ei,  ebrum,  earum, 
eos,  eas,  eis,  are  often  found ;  also  eccum,  eccam,  eccSs,  eccas,  ecca,  for 
ecce  eum,  &c. 

674.  Other  case  forms  of  is  are  found  in  inscriptions,  as  follows : 

N.  EIS,  124  B.C.   G.  ElVS,  EIIVS,  ElIVS  or  EllVS  (23).   D.  EIEI,  123  B.C.  ;  EEI, 

IEI;  EI,  123  B.C.,  and  common  in  all  periods.     Plural:  N.  EEIS,  EIS,  IEIS,  till  about 
50  B.C.  ;  EEI,  EI,  IEI.     D.  and  Ab.  EEIS,  EIEIS,  IEIS,  is ;  after  the  republic,  us,  I  Is. 

675.  A  rare  and  old  pronoun  equivalent  to  is  is  sum,  Sam,  accusative  singular, 
SOS,  accusative  plural,  and  sis,  dative  plural. 


THE   PRONOUN   OF   IDENTITY. 

676.  The  pronoun  of  identity,   idem,  the  same,  is  declined  as 
follows  : 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Norn. 

Gen. 
Dot. 

Ace. 
AbL 

MASC.         FEM.          NEUT. 
idem        eadem     idem 

eiusdem  eiusdem  eiusdem 
eidem      eidem      eidem 

eundem  eandem    idem 
eodem      eadem      eodem 

MASC.           FEM.           NEUT. 

eidem       I  eaedem      eadem 
or  idem    f 
eorundem  earundem  eorundem 
eisdern      )  eisdem     j  eisdem     ) 
orisdem  }   orisdem  )    orisdem  ) 
eosdem       easdem       eadem 
eisdem      )  eisdem     )  eisdem     1 
orisdemj    orisdem  J    orisdem  j[ 

677.  In  manuscripts  and  editions,   the    plural    nominative    masculine  is  often 
written  iidem,  and  the  dative  and  ablative  iisdem.     The  singular  nominative  mas- 
culine   is  rarely  eisdem  or  isdem  (Plant.,  Enn.1,  eidern^  (Cic.,  Varr.),  neuter 
idem  (Plaut).    In  verse,  eundem,   eandem,  eidem,  eodem,  eadem,  and 
eidem,  eaedem,  ebrundem,  eosdem,  easdem,  are  often  found. 

678.  Other  case  forms  of  idem  are  found  in  inscriptions,  as  follows : 

N.  M.  EISDEM,  123  B.C.,  ISDEM,  59  B.C.,  both  common  till  Caesar's  time;  EIDEM  ; 
Ne.  EIDEM,  71  B.C.  D.  IDEM.  Plural :  N.  M.  EISDEM,  ISDEM,  EIDEM,  till  Caesar's 
time ;  IIDEM,  once  only.  D.  and  Ab.  ISDEM,  very  rarely  IISDEM. 


THE   INTENSIVE   PRONOUN. 

679.  The  intensive  pronoun  ipse,  himself,  stems  ipso-,  ipsa-,  is 
declined    like    ille    (666),   but  has  the   nominative  and  accusative 
neuter  singular  ipsum. 

680.  In  dramatic  verse,  ipse  has  rarely  the  first  syllable  short,  and  often  has 
the  older   form   ipsus.     Plautus   has  these  forms :  N.  F.  eapse,  Ac.  eumpse, 
eampse,  Ab.  eopse,  eapse,  equivalent  to  ipsa,  &c.    So  reapse  for  re  ipsa. 

101 


681-689.] 


Words:  Inflection. 


THE   RELATIVE,    INTERROGATIVE,   AND   INDEFINITE   PRONOUN. 

(i.)     qui  AND  quis. 

681.  The  stem  qui-,  or  quo-,  qua-,  is  used  in  three  ways  :     as  a 
relative,  who,  which;  as  an  interrogative,  who?  which?  what?  as 
an  indefinite,  any. 

682.  (a.)  The  relative  qui,  who,  which,  is  declined   as   fol- 
lows : 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

qui 

quae 

quod 

qui 

quae 

quae 

Gen. 

cuius 

cuius 

cuius 

quorum 

quarum 

quorum 

Dat. 

cui 

cui 

cui 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

Ace. 

quern 

quam 

quod 

quos 

quas 

quae 

Abl. 

quo 

qua 

quo 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

683.  (£.)  The   interrogative    adjective    qui,    quae,    quod, 
whicht  what?   is  declined  like  the  relative  qui  (682). 

684.  The  interrogative  substantive    has   in   the    nominative 
singular  quis,  quid,  who?  what?  the  rest  is  like  qui  (682). 

In  old  Latin,  quis  is  both  masculine  and  feminine,  but  a  separate  feminine  form 
quae  is  used  three  or  four  times. 

685.  quis  interrogative  is  sometimes  used  adjectively  with  appellatives : 
as,  quis  senator  ?  what  senator  ?     And  qui  is  sometimes  used  substantively  : 
as,  qui  primus  Ameriam    nuntiat  ?  who  is  the  first  to  bring  the  tidings 
to  Aineria  ? 

686.  (c.)  The  indefinite  quis  or  qui,  one,  any,  has   the  fol- 
lowing forms  : 

quis  and  quid  masculine  and  neuter  substantives,  qui  and  quod  adjec- 
tives ;  feminine  singular  nominative  and  neuter  plural  nominative  and 
accusative  commonly  qua,  also  quae.  The  rest  is  like  qui  (682). 

687.  quis,  quem,  quid,  and  quibus  come  from  the  stem  aui-;    the  other 
parts  come  from  quo-,  qua-,     quae  stands  for  an  older  quai  (690).     For  quid 
and  quod,  see  659. 

688.  Old  forms  of  the  genitive  singular  are  qupius,  and  of  the  dative  quqiei, 
quoii,  or  quoi,  also  in  derivatives  of  qui  or  quis.      A   genitive  plural   quoium 
is  old  and  rare.     The   dative   and   ablative   plural   is  sometimes  quis  from   quo-, 
qua-.     A  nominative  plural  interrogative  and  indefinite  ques  is  rare  (Pacuv.). 

689.  The  ablative  or  locative  is  sometimes  qui,  from  the  stem  qui-  :  as 
an  interrogative,   how  ?  as  a   relative,  wherewith,  whereby,  masculine,  femi- 
nine, or  neuter,  in  old  Latin  sometimes  with  a  plural  antecedent;  especially 
referring  to  an  indefinite  person,  and  with  cum  attached,  quicum ;  and  as  an 
indefinite,  somehow. 

102 


The  Noun  :  Pronouns.          [690-692. 

690.  Other  case  forms  of  qui  or  quis  and  their  derivatives  are  found 
in  inscriptions,  as  follows  : 

N.  QVEI,  prevalent  in  republican  inscriptions;  also  QVI  ;  once  QVE.  G.  QVOIVS 
regularly  in  republican  inscriptions;  cvnvs,  cvilvs,  cvllvs  (23),  once  QVIVS  (20)! 
D.  QVOIEI,  QVOI  ;  once  F.  QVAI.  Ab.  QVEI.  Plural:  N.  M.  QVEI,  but  after  120 
B.  C.,  occasionally  QVI;  QVES,  indefinite;  F.  and  Ne.  QVAI.  G.  QVOIVM. 

DERIVATIVES   OF   qUl   AND   quis. 

691.  The    derivatives    of    qui    and    quis    have    commonly 
quis  and  quid  as  substantives,  and  qui  and    quod  as  adjec- 
tives.    Forms  requiring  special  mention  are  named  below  : 

692.  quisquis,   whoever,  whatever,  everybody  who,   everything  which,  an 
indefinite  relative,  has  only  thet»e  forms  in  common  use:  N.  M.  quisquis, 
sometimes  F.  in   old    Latin,  Ne.   N.  and  Ac.  quicquid   or   quidquid,  Ab. 
M.  and  Ne.  as  adjective  quoquo. 

Rare  forms  are:  N.  M.  quiqui,  Ac.  quemquem,  once  Ab.  F.  quaqua, 
as  adverb  quiqui,  once  D.  quibusquibus.  A  short  form  of  the  genitive  occurs  in 
quoiquoimodi  or  cuicuimodi,  of -whatsoever  sort. 

aliquis  or  aliqui,  aliqua,  once  aliquae  (Lucr.),  aliquid  or  aliquod, 
some  one,  some;  Ab.  M.  sometimes,  Ne.  often,  aliqui  (689).  PI.  Ne.  N.  and 
Ac.  only  aliqua;  D.  and  Ab.  sometimes  aliquis  (6i8). 

ecquis  or  ecqui,  ecqua  or  ecquae,  ecquid  or  ecquod,  any?  Besides 
the  nominative  only  these  forms  are  found:  D.  eccui,  Ac.  ecquern,  ecquam, 
ecquid,  Ab.  M.  and  Ne.  ecquo.  PL  N.  ecqui,  Ac.  M.  ecquos,  F.  ecquas. 

quicumque,  quaecumque,  quodcumque,  whoei'er,  whichever,  everybody 
who,  everything  which.  The  cumque  is  sometimes  separated  from  qui 
by  an  intervening  word.  An  older  form  is  quiquomque,  &c. 

quidam,  quaedam,  quiddam  or  quoddam,  a,  a  certain,  some  one,  so 
and  so  ;  Ac.  quendam,  quandam.  PI.  G.  quorundam,  quarundam. 

quilibet,  quaelibet,  quidlibet  or  quodlibet,  a>ty  you  please. 

quisnam,    rarely    quinam,   quaenam,   quidnam   or    quodnam,    who 

ever?  who  in  the  world '?     Sometimes  nam  quis,  &c. 

quispiam,  quaepiam,  quippiam,  quidpiam  or  quodpiam,  any,  any 
one  ;  Ab.  also  quipiam  (689),  sometimes  as  adverb,  in  any  way. 

quisquam,  quicquam  or  quidquam,  anybody  at  all,  anything  at  all, 
generally  a  substantive,  less  frequently  an  adjective,  any  at  all.  There  is  no 
distinctive  feminine  form,  and  quisquam  and  quemquam  are  rarely,  and 
in  old  Latin,  used  as  a  feminine  adjective.  Ab.  also  quiquam  (689),  some- 
times as  adverb,  in  any  way  at  all.  No  plural. 

quisque,  quaeque,  quicque,  quidque  or  quodque,  each.  Sometimes 
unus  is  prefixed :  unusquisque  ;  both  parts  are  declined,  quisque  and 
quemque  are  sometimes  feminine.  Ab.  S.  quique  (689)  rare,  Ab.  PL  quis- 
que (688)  once  (Lucr.). 

quivis,  quaevis,  quidvis  or  quodvis,  which  you  will',  Ab.  also  quivis 
(689). 

103 


693-695-] 


Words :  Inflection. 


(2.)    uter. 

693.  uter,  utra,  utrum,    whether1}  which  of  the  two?  has 
the  genitive  singular  utrius,  and  the  dative  singular  utri. 

The  rest  is  like  aeger  (617).  uter  is  sometimes  relative,  whichsoever, 
or  indefinite,  either  of  the  two. 

DERIVATIVES   OF   Uter. 

694.  The  derivatives  of  uter  are  declined  like  uter;   they 
are: 

neuter,  neither  of  the  two,  genitive  neutrius,  always  with  I  (657).  When 
used  as  a  grammatical  term,  neuter,  the  genitive  is  always  neutri:  as, 
generis  neutri,  of  neither  gender.  • 

utercumque,  utracumque,  utrumcumque,  whichever  of  the  two,  either 
of  the  two. 

uterlibet,  whichever  you  please. 

uterque,  whichsoever,  both.     G.  always  utriusque  (657). 

utervis,  whichever  you  wish. 

alteruter,  F.  altera  utra,  Ne.  alterutrum  or  alterum  utrum,  one 
or  the  other,  G.  alterius  utrius,  once  late  alterutrius,  D.  alterutri,  Ac. 
M.  alterutrum  or  alterum  utrum,  F.  alterutram  once  (Plin.)  or  alteram 
utram,  Ab.  alterutro  or  altero  utro,  ¥.  altera  utra.  No  PL,  except  D. 
alterutrls  once  (Plin.). 


CORRELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

695.  Pronouns  often  correspond  with  each  other  in  meaning  and  form ; 
some  of  the  commonest  correlatives  are  the  following : 


Kind. 

Interrogative. 

Indefinite. 

Demonstrative, 
Determinative,  &c. 

Relative. 

Simple 

quis,  qui, 

who? 

quis,  qui, 
aliquis 

hie,  iste,  ille 
is,  quisque 

qui 

Alternative 

uter,  which  of 
the  two  ? 

uter, 
alteruter 

uterque 

uter,  qui 

Number 

quot,   how 

many?  (431) 

aliquot 

tot 

quot 

Quantity 

quantus,  how 
large?  (613) 

aliquantus, 
quantusvis 

tantus 

quantus 

Quality 

qualis,  of  what 
sort?  (630) 

qualislibet 

talis 

qualis 

104 


The  Noun  :    Adverbs.          [696-702. 

THE   ADVERB, 
THE  CONJUNCTION,   AND   THE   PREPOSITION. 


I.     NOUNS   AS    ADVERBS. 

696.  Adverbs,  conjunctions,  and  prepositions  are  chiefly  noun  or 
pronoun  cases  which  have  become  fixed  in  a  specific  form  and  with  a 
specific  meaning.     Many  of  these  words  were  still  felt  to  be  live  cases, 
even  in  the  developed  period  of  the  language  ;  with  others  the  con- 
sciousness of  their  noun  character  was  lost. 

697.  Three  cases  are  used  adverbially  :  the  accusa- 
tive, the  ablative,  and  the  locative. 

698  The  rather  indeterminate  meaning  of  the  accusative  and  the  ablative 
is  sometimes  more  exactly  defined  by  a  preposition.  The  preposition  may 
either  accompany  its  usual  case :  as,  adamussim,  admodum,  IlicS  ;  or  it 
may  be  loosely  prefixed,  with  more  of  the  nature  of  an  adverb  than  of  a 
preposition,  to  a  case  with  which  it  is  not  ordinarily  used :  as,  examussim, 
interea.  Sometimes  it  stands  after  the  noun :  as,  parumper,  a  little 
while.  Besides  the  three  cases  named  above,  other  forms  occur,  some  of 
which  are  undoubtedly  old  case  endings,  though  they  can  no  longer  be  recog- 
nized as  such:  see  710. 

(i.)  ACCUSATIVE. 
(a.)  ACCUSATIVE  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 

699.  domum,  homeivard,  home  ;  rus,  afield  ;  foras,  out  of  doors  (*fora-) ; 
vicem,  instead;  partim,  in  part ;  old  noenum  or  noenu,  common  non,  for 
ne-oenum,  i.e.  unum,  not  one,  naught,  not;  admodum,  to  a  degree,  very; 
adamussim,   examussim,  to  a  T;  adfatim,  to  satiety ;  invicem,  in  turn, 
each  other. 

700.  Many  adverbs  in  -tim  and  -sim  denote  manner  (549) :  as,  cautim, 
warily,   statim,   at  once,  sensim,  perceptibly,  gradually ;  ostiatim,  door  by 
door,  viritim,  man  by  man,  furtim,  stealthily. 

•  (b.)  ACCUSATIVE  OF  ADJECTIVES  AND  PRONOUNS. 

701.  Neuters  :  all  comparative  adverbs  in  -ius  (361)  :  as,  doctius,  more 
learnedly  ;  so  minus,  less,  magis,  more  (363).     primum, _/?;'.»•/,  secundum, 
secondly,  &c. ;  turn,  then  (to-,  that)  :  commodum, /«.$•/  in  time ;  minimum, 
at  least,  potissimum,  in  preference,  postremum,  at  last,  summum,  at  most ; 
versum,  toward,  rursum,  russum,   rusum,  back;  facile,  easily,  impune, 
scotfree,  recens,  lately,  semel,  once  (simili-),  simul,  together  (simili-).     Plu- 
ral :  cetera,  for  the  rest ;  quia,  because  (qui-) ;  in  old  Latin  frustra,  in  vain 
(fraud-). 

702.  Feminines:   bifariam,  twofold;  coram,  face  to  face  (com-  or  co, 
*6ra-) ;  tam,  so  (ta-,  that]  ;  quam,  as,  how.    Plural  :  alias,  on  other  occasions. 

4*  105 


703-7 IO-]  Words:  Inflection. 


(2.)   ABLATIVE. 
(a.)  ABLATIVE  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 

703.  domo,/r<7w  home,  Ture,/rom  the  country  ;  hodie,  to-day  (ho-,  die-), 
volgo,  publicly,  vespere,  by  twilight,  noctu,  by  nights,  nights,  luce,  by  light, 
tempore,  in  times,  betimes  ;  sponte,  voluntarily,  forte,  by  chance  ;  quotan- 
nis,  yearly ;  gratiis  or  gratis,  for  nothing,  ingratiis  or  ingratis,  against 
one's  will ;  ilico,  on  the  spot  (169,  4;  170,  2),  forls,  out  of  doors  (*fora-). 

(6.)  ABLATIVE  OF  ADJECTIVES  AND  PRONOUNS. 

704.  Many  adverbs  in  -5  are  formed  from  adjectives  of  time  :  as,  perpe- 
tuo,  to  the  end,  crebro,  frequently,  rar5,  seldom,  repentmo,  suddenly,  sero, 
Lite,  primS,  at  first.     Many  denote  manner :  as,   arcane,  privily,  serio,  in 
earnest.     Some  are  formed  from  participles :    as,   auspicate,  'with  auspices 
taken ;  composite,  by  agreement.     A  plural  is  rare  :  alternis,  alternately. 

705.  Instead  of  -6,  neuter  ablatives  commonly  have  -e  :  as,  longe,  far, 
docte,  wisely.     So  also  superlatives  :  facillime,  most  easily,  anciently  FACILV- 
MED  (362).     Consonant  stems  have  -e  :  as,  repente,  suddenly. 

706.  From  pronouns  some  end  in  -i  (689) :  as,  qui,  how  ?  indefinite,  qui, 
somehow  ;  atqui,  but  somehow  ;  qui-quam,  in  any  way  at  all. 

707.  Feminines :   many  in  -a:    una,   together;    circa,  around'  contra, 
against  (com-,   347)  ;   extra,  outside  (ex,  347)  ;  in  classica.1  Latin,  frustra, 
in  vain  (fraud-).     So,  especially,  adverbs  denoting  the  'route by  which  : '  hac, 
this  way ;  recta,  straightway. 

(3.)  LOCATIVE. 

708.  In  -I,  from  names  of  towns  and  a  few  other  words :  Karthagini, 
at  Carthage  ;  Romae,  for  Romai,  at  Rome  ;  domi,  at  home     illi,  commonly 
illi-c,  there  (illo-),  isti,  commonly  isti-c,  where  you  are,  hi-c,  here  (ho-) ;  old 
sei,  common  si,  at  that,  in  that  case,  so,  if;  sic,  so  (si,  -ce). 

709.  In  -bf,  from  some  pronouns:  ibf,  there  (i-);  ubf  (for  *quobf,  146), 
where  ;  alicub!,  somewhere  ;  si-cubi,  if  anywhere,  ne-cubi,  lest  anywhere. 

OTHER  ENDINGS. 

710.  Besides  the  above,  other  endings  are  also  found  in  words  of 
this  class  :  as, 

-s  in  abs,/ra»,  ex,  out  of;  similarly  us-que,/'«  every  case,  ever,  us-quam, 
anywhere  at  all.  -tus  has  the  meaning  of  an  ablative :  as,  intus,  from 
within,  within  ;  antiquitus,  from  old  times,  anciently  ;  funditus,  from  the 
bottom,  entirely.  -5  denotes  the  'place  to  which'  in  adverbs  from  pronoun 
stems  :  as,  e5,  thither  ;  quo,  whither ;  illo,  or  illiic,  for  illoi-ce,  thither, 
after  hue  ;  hoc,  commonly  hue,  perhaps  for  hoi-ce  (99)  hither,  -im  de- 
notes the  '  place  from  which  : '  as,  istim,  commonly  \&tULCtfi'0nt  where  you 
are;  iliim,  commonly  i\\\r\o,, from  yonder ;  hinc,  hence;  exim,  thereupon; 
also  -de  :  as,  unde,  whence  (quo-,  146),  sl-cunde,  if  from  any  place,  ne- 
cunde,  lest  from  anywhere,  -ter  :  as  comparative  (347):  praeter,  further, 
beyond,  inter,  between ;  denoting  manner :  acriter,  sharply ;  amanter, 
affectionately  ;  rarely  from  -o-  stems  :  as,  firmiter,  steadfastly. 

106 


The  Noun :   Adverbs.          [7 1 1 ,  712. 


CORRELATIVE   ADVERBS. 

711.  Adverbs  derived  from  pronoun  stems  often  correspond  with  each 
other  in  meaning  and  form  ;  some  of  the  commonest  correlatives  are  the 
following  : 


1 
Place 

Interrogative. 

Indefinite. 

Demonstrative, 
Determinative,  &c. 

Relative. 

ubl,  where  ? 

alicubl 
usquam 
uspiam 
ubivis 

hie,  istic,  illic 
ibf,  ibidem 

ubf 

qu5,  whither? 

quorsum, 

whitherward  ? 

aliquS 
quolibet 
quovis 
aliquovor- 
sum 

hue,  istuc,  illuc 
e5,  e5dem 

horsum,  istorsum 

quo 
quorsum 

unde,  whence  ? 

alicunde 
undelibet 

hinc,  istinc,  illinc 
inde,  indidem 

unde 

Time 

quando,vvhen? 

aliquando 
umquam 

nunc,  turn,  tune 

quom  or  cum 

quotiens,  how 
often  ? 

aliquotiens 

totiens 

quotiens 

Way 

qua,   by   what 
way  ? 

aliqua 
quavis 

hac,  istac,  iliac 
ea,  eadem 

qua 

Manner 

uti  or  ut,  how  ? 

aliqua 

ita,  sic 

uti  or  ut  (146) 

Degree 

quarn,  hoiv  ? 

aliquam 

tarn 

quam 

II.     SENTENCES  AS   ADVERBS. 

712.  Some  adverbs  are  condensed  sentences  :  as, 

ilicet,  you  may  go,  straightway  (ire  licet)  ;  scilicet,  you  may  kncnv,  ob- 
viously, of  course  (scire  licet)  ;  videlicet,  you  can  see,  plainly  (videre  licet) ; 
nudiustertius,  now  is  the  third  day,  day  before  yesterday  (num  dius,  i.e.  dies, 
tertius)  ;  forsitan,  maybe  (fors  sit  an)  ;  minim  quantum,  strange  hmv 
much,  astonishingly  ;  nescio  quo  pacto,  nescio  quomodo,  somehow  or  otherl 
unfortunately. 

107 


7I3~723-]  Words:  Inflection. 


(B.)     INFLECTION    OF    THE    VERB. 

713.  The    verb    is   inflected    by   attaching    person 
endings  to  the  several  stems. 


THE   STEM. 

714.  The  stem  contains  the  meaning  of  the  verb,  and  also  denotes 
the   mode    (mood)   and   the   time   (tense)   of  the   action   as   viewed 
by  the  speaker. 

715.  There  are  three  MOODS,  Indicative,  Subjunctive,  and  Im- 
perative. 

716.  There  are  six  TENSES  in  the  indicative,  three  of  the  present 
system,  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future ;    and  three  of  the  perfect 
system,  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect.      The  subjunctive 
lacks  the  futures  ;    the  imperative  has  only  the  present. 

717.  The  meanings  of  the  moods  and  tenses  are  best  learnt  from  reading. 
No  satisfactory  translation  can  be  given  in  the  paradigms,  especially  of  the 
subjunctive,  which  requires  a  variety  of  translations  for  its  various  uses. 

718.  The  verb   has   two   principal   stems:    I.  The    Present 
stem,  which  is  the  base  of  the  present  system ;  II.  The  Perfect 
stem,  which  is  the  base  of  the  perfect  active  system. 

719.  The  perfect  system  has  no  passive  ;  its  place  is  supplied  by  the  per- 
fect participle  with  a  form  of  sum,  am,  or  less  frequently  of  fui,  am  become. 

720.  Many  verbs  have  only  the  present  system:  as,  maereo,  mourn; 
some  have  only  the  perfect   system :  as,  memini,  remember.     Some  verbs 
have  a  present  and  perfect  system  made  up  of  two  separate  roots  or  stems :  as, 
present  indicative  fero,  carry,  perfect  indicative  tuli,  and  perfect  participle 
latus ;  present  possum,  can,  perfect  potui. 


THE   PERSON   ENDING. 

721.  The  person  ending  limits  the  meaning  of  the  stem  by  point- 
ing out  the  person  of  the  subject.     There  are  three  PERSONS,  the 
First,  used  of  the  speaker,  the  Second,  of  what  is  spoken  to,  and  the 
Third,  of  what  is  spoken  of.     The  person  ending  furthermore  indi- 
cates number  and  voice. 

722.  There  are  two  NUMBERS  :  the  Singular,  used  of  one,  and 
the  Plural,  used  of  more  than  one. 

723.  There  are  two  VOICES  :  the  Active,  indicating  that  the  sub- 
ject acts,  and  the  Passive,  indicating  that  the  subject  acts  on  himself, 
or  more  commonly  is  acted  on  by  another. 

108 


The   Verb:    Person  Endings.    [724—731. 


724.  Only  transitive  verbs  have  all  persons  of  the  passive.     Intransitive 
verbs   have   in  the   passive   only  the   third   person  singular,  used   imper- 
sonally ;  the  participle  in  this  construction  is  neuter. 

725.  Some  verbs   have  only  the  passive   person  endings,  but  with   a 
reflexive  or  an  active  meaning  ;  such  are  called  Deponents:  see  798. 

726.  The  person  endings  are  as  follows  : 


Voice. 

Active. 

Passive. 

Mood. 

IND.  &  SUB. 

IMPERATIVE. 

IND.  &  SUB. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Number. 

SING. 

PLUR. 

SING. 

PLUR. 

SING. 

PLUR. 

SING. 

PLUR. 

First 
person. 

-m 

-mus    not  used 

not  used 

-r 

-mur 

not  used 

not  used 

Second 
person. 

-s 

-tis       none,  -to 

-te,  -t5te 

-ris,  -re 

[-mini] 

-re,  -tor 

[-mini] 

Third 
Person. 

-t 

-nt 

-to 

-nto 

-tur 

-ntur 

-tor 

-ntor 

727.  In  the  perfect  indicative  active,  the  second  person  singular  ends 
in  -ti,  and  the  third  person  plural  in  -runt  for  an  older  -ront,  or  in  -re. 
-re  is  most  used  in  poetry  and  history,  and  by  Cato  and  Sallust ;  -runt  by 
Cicero,  and  almost  always  by  Caesar. 

728.  In  the  indicative  -m  is  not  used  in  the  present  (except  in  sum,  am, 
and  inquam,  quoth  /),  in  the  perfect  or  future  perfect,  or  in  the  future  in 
-bo.     -s  is  not  used  in  es  for  ess,  thou  art,  and  in  es,  eatest  (171,  i). 

729.  In  inscriptions,   -d  sometimes  stands  for  -t  (149,  2)  in  the  third  person 
singular,  and  sometimes  -t  is  not  used :  as,  FECID,  made,  for  fecit ;  DEDE,  gave, 
for  dedet  or  dedit.     And  other  forms  of  the  third  person  plural  of  the  indicative 
active  are  sometimes  used:  as,  Pisaurian  DEDROT,  DEDRO  (with  syncope,  in)  for 
dederunt,  gave;  EMERV,   bought,  for  emerunt;    once  DEDERI,   probably   for 
dedere  (856). 

730.  In  the  passive  second  person  singular,  Terence  has  always,  Plautus 
commonly  -re  ;  later  it  is  unusual  in  the  present  indicative,  except  in  depo- 
nents ;  but  in  other  tenses  -re  is  preferred,  especially  in  the  future  -here, 
by  Cicero,  -ris  by  Livy  and  Tacitus.     The  second  person  plural  passive  is 
wanting ;  its  place  is  supplied  by  a  single  participial  form  in  -mini,  which  is 
used  without  reference  to  gender,  for  gender  words  and  neuters  alike  (297). 

731.  Deponents  have  rarely  -mino,  in  the  imperative  singular :  as,  second  person, 
progredimino,  step  fonvard  thou  (Plaut.) ;  in  laws,  as  third  person  :  FRVIMINO,  let 
him  enjoy;  or  -to  and  -ntp  for  -tor and  -ntor:  as,  utito,  let  him  use;  utunto, 
let  them  use.     In  a  real  passive,  -nt5  is  rare  :  as,  CENSENTO,  let  them  be  rated. 

109 


732~737-]  Words:    Inflection. 


NOUNS   OF   THE   VERB. 

732.  The   verb  is  accompanied   by  some  nouns,  which  are 
conveniently,  though   not   quite  accurately,  reckoned   parts  of 
the  verb  ;  they  are : 

Three  Infinitives,  Present  Active  and  Passive,  and  Perfect  Active, 
sometimes  called  the  Infinitive  Mood.  For  the  future  active  and 
passive  and  the  perfect  passive,  compound  forms  are  used. 

The  Gerund  and  the  Gerundive. 

Two  Supines. 

Three  Participles,  Present  and  Future  Active,  and  Perfect  Passive. 

PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 

733.  The  several  verb  stems  can  readily  be  found,  when  once  the 
principal  parts  are  known  ;  these  are  given  in  the  dictionary. 

734.  The    PRINCIPAL    PARTS   of   a    verb   are    the 
Present  Indicative  Active,  Present  Infinitive  Active, 
Perfect  Indicative  Active,  and  Perfect  Participle :  as, 

PRES.  INDIC.  PRES.  INFIN.  PERF.  INDIC.  PERF.  PART. 

reg5,  rule  regere                   rexi                       rectus 

laudo,  praise  laudare                 laudavi                 laudatus 

moneo,  advise  monere                 monui                   monitus 

audio,  hear  audire                   audivi                    auditus 

735.  The    Principal    Parts   of    deponents    are    the   Present  Indicative, 
Present  Infinitive,  and  Perfect  Participle:  as, 

PRES.  INDIC.  PRES.  INFIN.  PERF.  PART. 

queror,  complain  queri                                        questus 

miror,  -wonder  mirari                                     miratus 

vereor,/<?ax  vereri                                     veritus 

partior,  share  partiri                                    partitus 

DESIGNATION    OF   THE   VERB. 

736.  A  verb  is   usually  named  by  the   present  indicative  active   first 
person  singular:  as,  rego;  laudo,  moneo,  audio;  or  by  the  present  infin- 
itive active  :  as,  regere  ;  laudare,  monere,  audire.     Deponents  are  named 
by  the  corresponding  passive  forms :  as,  queror ;  miror,  vereor,  partior ; 
or  queri;  mirari,  vereri,  partiri. 

737.  For  convenience,  verbs  with  -ere   in  the  present  infinitive  active 
are  called    Verbs  in   -ere ;  those  with   -are,  -ere,  or  -ire,   Verbs  in  -are, 
-ere,  or  -ire,  respectively.     In  like  manner  deponents  are  designated  as 
Verbs  in  -i;  or   Verbs  in  -an,  -€ri,  or  -in,  respectively. 

no 


The  Verb  :  Primitives.          [738-744 


THEME    OF    THE    VERB. 

738.  The  several  stems  of  the  verb  come  from  a  form  called 
the  Theme.     In  primitives,  the  theme  is  a  root ;  in  denominatives, 
the  theme  is  a  noun  stem. 

Thus,  r  e  g-  in  reg-o  is  a  root ;  while  vesti-  in  vesti-6,  dress,  is  a  noun 
stem.  The  noun  stem  is  sometimes  modified  in  form.  Oftentimes  the  noun 
stem  is  only  presumed :  as,  audi-  in  audi-5. 

739.  Some  verbs  have  a  denominative  theme  in  the  present  system,  and 
a  piimitive  theme  in  the  perfect  system,  others  have  the  reverse. 

740.  Most  verbs  with  an  infinitive  of  more  than  two  syllables  in 
-are,  -ere,  or  -ire,  or,  if  deponent,  in  -ari,  -eri,  or  -111,  are  denomina- 
tive ;    most  other  verbs  are  primitive. 

Thus,  laudare,  monere,  audire  ;  mirari,  vereri,  partiri,  are  denom- 
inative; while  esse,  dare,  (de)lere,  regere,  queri,  are  primitive.  A  few 
verbs,  however,  which  have  the  appearance  of  denominatives,  are  thought 
to  be  primitive  in  their  origin. 


ARRANGEMENT   OF   THE   VERB. 

741.  Verbs  are   divided   into  two  classes,  according 
to  the  form  of  the  present  system  :    I.  Root  verbs,  and 
verbs   in   -ere,  mostly  primitive  ;    II.  Verbs  in  -are, 
-ere,  or  -ire,  mostly  denominative. 

742.  Verbs  are  sometimes  arranged  without  regard  to  difference  of  kind,  in  the 
alphabetical  order  of  the  vowel  before  -S  of  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present 
indicative  active,  a,  e,  i,  I :   thus,   laudas,    mones,    regis,    audis,   sometimes 

called   the  first,  second,  third,  and  fourth  conjugation    respectively. 


I.     PRIMITIVE    VERBS. 

743.  A  few  of  the  oldest  and  commonest  verbs  of  everyday 
life  have  a  bare  root  as  stem  in  the  present  indicative  or  in  parts 
of  it ;  and  some  of  them  have  other  peculiarities  ;  such  are  called 
Root  Verbs,  or  by  some,  irregular  (744-781).     Most  primitives  are 
verbs  in  -ere,  like  rego  (782). 

(A.)     ROOT    VERBS. 

Irregular   Verbs, 
(a.)     WITH  A  PREVALENT  BARE  ROOT. 

744.  Primitives  with  the  bare  root  as  present  indicative  stem  in 
almost  all   their  forms   are  sum,  am,  do,  give,  put,  and  compounds  ; 
and  with  the  root  doubled,  bibo,  drink,  sero,  sow,  and  sisto,  set. 

in 


745-] 


Words:  Inflection. 


(l.)     sum,  am  (es-,  s-). 

745.  sum,  am,  is  used  only  in  the  present  system  (720).      The 
perfect  system  is  supplied  by  forms  of  fui  (fu-). 


PRES.  INDIC. 

sum 


PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 
PRES.  INFIN.         PERF.  INDIC.         PERF.  PART. 


esse 


(fui) 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 


Singular. 


sum,  I  am 
es,  thou  art 
est,  he  is 


eram,  Twos 
eras,  thou  wert 
erat,  he  was 


ero,  I  shall  be 
eris,  thou  wilt  be 
erit,  he  will  be 


Plural 


sumus,  we  are 
estis,  you  are 
sunt,  they  are 

IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

Ieramus,  we  wert 
eratis,  you  were 
erant,  they  wert 

FUTURE  TENSE. 

erimus,  we  shall  be 
eritis,  you  will  be 
erunt,  they  will  be 


fui,  I  have  been,  or  was 

f  uisti,  thou  hast  been,  or  wert 

fuit,  he  has  been,  or  was 


PERFECT  TENSE. 

fuimus,  we  have  been,  or  were 
fuistis,  you  have  been,  or  were 
fuerunt  or  -re,  they  have  been,  or 


were 


f u  e  ram ,  /  had  been 
fueras,  thou  hadst  been 
'fuerat,  he  had  been 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 

fueramus,  we  had  been 
fueratis.^w  had  been 
fuerant,  they  had  been 


FUTURE  PERFECT  TENSE. 


fuero,  I  shall  have  been 
fueris,  thou  wilt  have  been 
fuerit,  he  will  have  been 


fuerimus,  we  shall  have  been 
fueritis,  you  will  have  been 
fuerint,  they  will  have  been 


112 


The  Verb:  sum,  am.         [745,  746. 


Singular. 

sim,  may  I  be 

sis,  mayst  thou  be 

sit,  let  him  be,  may  he  be 


essem,  I  should  be 
esses,  thou  wouldst  be 
esset,  he  would  be 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 

Plural. 

simus,  let  us  be 

sitis,  be  you,  may  you  be 

sint,  let  them  be,  may  they  be 

IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


essemus,  we  should  be 
essetis,  you  would  be 
essent,  they  would  be 


PERFECT  TENSE. 


fuerim,  I  may  have  been 
fueris,  thou  mayst  have  been 
fuerit,  he  may  have  been 


fuerimus,  we  may  have  been 
fueritis,  you  may  have  been 
fuerint,  they  may  have  been 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


fuissem,  I  should  have  been 
fuisses,  thou  wouldst  have  been 
fuisset,  he  would  have  been 


fuissemus,  we  should  have  been 
fuissetis,  you  would  have  been 
fuissent,  they  would  have  been 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


es  or  esto,  be  thou,  thou  shalt  be 
est5,  he  shall  be 


este  or  est5te,  be  you, you  shall  be 
sunto,  they  shall  be 


NOUNS   OF   THE   VERB. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  esse,  to  be 

Perf.  fuisse,  to  have  been 

Put.    futurus  esse,  to  be  going  to  be 


PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.   See  749 

Perf.   

Put.     futurus,  going  to  be 


746.  For  the  first  person  sum,  Varro  mentions  esum  as  an  archaic  form.     This 
e  was  probably  prefixed  by  analogy  with  the  other  forms ;  for  the  -m,  and  for  es, 


see  728.     For  sim,  &c.,  and  siem,  &c.,  see  841 
the  future  ero,  &c.,  s  has  become  r  (154). 


In  the  imperfect  eram,  &c.,  and 


747-753]  Words:  Inflection. 

747.  The  indicative  and  imperative  es  is  for  older  ess  (171,  i),  and  is  regularly 
used  long  by  Plautus  and  Terence.     The  e  of  es  and  est  is  not  pronounced  after  a 
vowel  or  -m,  and  is  often  omitted  in  writing:   as   experrecta   es,  pronounced 
experrectas ;  epistula   est,   pronounced  epistulast ;    consilium   est,  pro- 
nounced consiliumst.     In  the  dramatists,  -s  preceded  by  a  vowel,  which  is  usually 
short,  unites  with  a  following  es  or  est :  thus,  tu  servos  es  becomes  tu  servos  ; 
similis  est,  similist ;  virtus  est,  virtust;  res  est,  rest. 

748.  Old  forms   are:    SONT   (inscr.   about    120  B.C.);    with  suffix  -SCO  (834), 
escit  (for  *esscit),  gets  to  be,  -will  be,  escunt ;  present  subjunctive,  siem,  sies, 
siet,  and  sient  (841),  common  in  inscriptions  down  to  100  B.C.,  and  in  old  verse; 
also  in  compounds  ;  imperative  estod  rare. 

749.  The  present  participle  is  used  only  as  an  adjective.     It  has  two  forms : 
sontem  (accusative,  no  nominative),  which  has  entirely  lost  its  original  meaning  of 
being,  actual,  the  real  man,  and  has  only  the  secondary  meaning  of  guilty,  and 
insons,  innocent ;  and  -sens  in  absens,  away,  praesens,  at  hand,  di  con- 
sentes,  gods  collective ;  also  once  INSENTIBVS.     sum  has  no  gerund  or  gerundive. 

750.  A  subjunctive  present  fuam,  fuas,  fuat,  and  fuant  occurs  in  old  Latin; 
and  an  imperfect  forem,  fores,  foret,  and  forent,  in  all  periods.     The  present 
infinitive  fore,  to  get  to  be,  become,  has  a  future  meaning.     Old  forms  in  the  perfect 
system  are  FVVEIT  (29,  i),  FVET;  fuit,  fuimus,  fuerim,  fuerit,  fuerint,  fuisset 
(Plaut.,  Enn.).     fui  has  no  perfect  participle  or  supine. 

751.  possum,  can. 


Principal  parts :  possum,  posse ;  (potui,  see  875.) 


Pres. 
Imp. 
Put. 


Pres. 
Imp. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Singular. 


possum,  potes,  potest 
poteram,  poteras,  poterat 
potero,  poteris,  poterit 


Plural. 


possumus,  potestis,  possunt 
poteramus,  poteratis,  poterant 
poterimus,  poteritis,  poterunt 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

possim,  possis,  possit        I    possimus,  possitis,  possint 
possem,  posses,  posset      |    possemus,  possetis,  possent 


INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 


Pres. 


posse 


752.  possum  is  formed  from  pote,  able,  and  sum,  juxtaposed  (166,  2;  396). 
The  separate  forms  potis  sum,  &c.,  or  pote  sum,  &c.,  are  also  used,  and  some- 
times even  potis  or  pote  alone  takes  the  place  of  a  verb;  in  either  case  potis  and 
pote  are  indeclinable,  and  are  applied  to  gender  words  and  neuters  both. 

753.  t  is  retained  before  a  vowel,  except  in  possem,  &c.,  for  potessem,  &c., 
and  in  posse  ;  t  before  s  changes  to  s  (166,  2).     Old  forms  are:  possiem,  &c., 
(748),  potessem,  potisset,  potesse.     Rare  forms  are  POTESTO  (inscr.  58  B.C.), 
and  passives,  as  potestur,  &c.,  with  a  passive  infinitive  (1484).     possum  has  no 
participles;  the  perfect  system,  potui,  &c.,  is  like  fui,  £c.  (745). 

114 


The   Verb :    do,  give,  put. 


[754- 


(2.)     do,  give,  put  (d  a-,  d  a-) . 

754.  There  are  two  verbs  do,  one  meaning  give,  and  one  meaning  put. 
The  do  meaning  put  is  oftenest  used  in  compounds  ;  the  simple  verb  has 
been  crowded  out  by  pono.  The  present  system  of  do  is  as  follows : 


Principal  parts  :  do,  dare,  dedi,  datus. 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Pres. 

do,  das,  dat 

damus,  datis,  dant 

Imp. 

dabam,  dabas,  dabat 

dabamus,  dabatis,  dabant 

Put. 

dabo,  dabis,  dabit 

dabimus,  dabitis,  dabunt 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Pres. 

dem,  des,  det 

demus,  detis,  dent 

Imp. 

darem,  dares,  daret 

daremus,  daretis,  darent 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

da  or  dato,  dato 

date  or  datdte,  danto 

INFINITIVE. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Pres. 

dare 

dans 

GERUND. 

Gen. 

dandi,  &c. 

PASSIVE    VOICE. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Pres. 

rlaric:  rtr      rp     rlatnr 

damur,  damini,  dantur 

Imp.      dabar,  dabare  or  -ris,  da- 

dabamur,  dabamini,  dabantur 

batur 

Put.    I  dabor,  dabere   or  -ris,  da- 

dabimur,  dabimini,  dabuntur 

bitur 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Pres. 

A"~              ^            «•«*•»          l~f 

•«  —              •          -          J                 A. 

Imp. 

darer,  darere  or  -ris,  dare- 

daremur,  darernini,  darentur 

tur 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

dare  or  dator,  dator 

damini,  dantor 

INFINITIVE. 

GERUNDIVE. 

Pres. 

dari 

dandus 

755~76i-]  Words:  Inflection. 


755-  I"  tne  present  system  a  is  short  throughout  in  the  first  syllable,  except  in 
das  and  da.  For  dedi,  datus,  and  supines  datum,  datu,  see  859  and  900. 

756  Old  forms:  danunt  of  uncertain  origin  (833)  for  dant.  From  another 
"orm  of  the  root  come  duis,  duit;  interduo,  concreduo,  perfect  concredul; 
subjunctive  duim,  duis  (duas),  duit  and  duint  (841),  and  compounds,  used 
especially  in  law  language,  and  in  praying  and  cursing;  creduam,  creduas  or 
creduis,  creduat  or  creduit. 

757.  Real  compounds  of  d5  have  a  present  system  like  rego  (782) ;  in 
the  perfect  and  the  perfect  participle,  e  and  a  become  i :    as,  abdo,  put 
away,  abdere,  abdidi,  abditus;  cred5,  put  trust  in.     perdo,  fordo,  destroy, 
and  vendo,  put  for  sale,  have  gerundives  perdendus,  vendundus,  and  perfect 
participles  perditus,  venditus ;  the  rest  of  the  passive  is  supplied  by  forms 
of  pereo  and  veneo.     reddo,  give  back,  has  future  reddibo  3  times  (Plaut.). 
In  the  apparent  compounds  with  circum,  pessum,  satis,  and  venum,  do 
remains  without  change,  as  in  754. 

(3.)    bibo,  sero,  and  sist5. 

758.  bibo,  drink,  sero,  sow  (for  *si-so,  154),  and  sist5,  set,  form  their 
present  stem  by  reduplication  of  the  root  ( 189).     The  vowel  before  the  per- 
son endings  is  the  root  vowel,  which  becomes  variable,  like  a  formative 
vowel  (824).    These  verbs  have  the  present  system  like  rego  (782). 


(b.)    WITH  THE  BARE  ROOT  IN  PARTS. 

inquam,  eo,  and  que5. 

759.  inquam,  eo,   and  queo  have  the  bare  root  as  present  stem,  in 
almost  all  their  parts ;  in  a  few  parts  only  the  root  is  extended  by  a  forma- 
tive vowel  (829). 

(i.)     inquam,  say  I,  quoth  7. 

760.  inquam,  say  /,  is  chiefly  used  in  quoting  a  person's  direct  words  ; 
and,  from  its  meaning,  is  naturally  very  defective.     The  only  parts  in  com- 
mon use  are  the  following  : 


Pres. 
Put. 

INDICATI 
Singular. 
inquam,  inquis,  inquit 
,  inquies,  inquiet 

^E  MOOD. 
Plural. 
•    inquiunt 

761.  Rare  forms  are:  subjunctive  inquiat  (Cornif.),  indicative  imperfect  in- 
quiebat  (Cic.),  used  twice  each;  indicative  present  inquimus  (Hor.),  perfect 
inquii  (Catull.),  inquisti  (Cic.),  once  each;  imperative  inque,  4  times  (Plaut.  2, 
Ter.  2),  inquito,  3  times  (Plaut.).  For  inquam,  see  728. 

S  116 


The  Verb:   eo,  go. 


[762-765. 


762. 


(2.)    eo,  go  (I-  for  ei-,  i-). 


Principal  parts  :  eo,  ire,  ii,  itum. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Pres. 

eo,  is,  it 

imus,  itis,  eunt 

Imp. 

ibam,  ibas,  Ibat 

ibamus,  ibatis,  Ibant 

Put. 

ibo,  Ibis,  ibit 

ibimus,  ibitis,  ibunt 

Perf. 

ii,  isti,  iit  or  it 

iimus,  Istis,  ierunt  or  -re 

Plup. 

ieram,  ieras,  ierat 

ieramus,  ieratis,  ierant 

F.  P. 

ier5,  ieris,  ierit 

ierimus,  ieritis,  ierint 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Pres. 

earn,  eas,  eat 

eamus,  eatis,  eant 

Imp. 

item,  ires,  iret 

iremus,  iretis,  irent 

Perf. 

ierim,  ieris,  ierit 

ierimus,  ieritis,  ierint 

Plup. 

issem,  Isses,  isset 

issemus,  issetis,  issent 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

I  or  it5,  ito 

ite  or  itote,  eunt5 

INFINITIVE. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Pres. 

ire 

iens,  Gen.  euntis 

Perf. 

isse 

itum 

Put. 

iturus  esse 

iturus 

GERUND. 

SUPINE. 

Gen. 

eund! 

Dat. 

eundS 

Ace. 

eundum 



Abl. 

eundo 

763.  The  passive  is  only  used  impersonally,  and  has  a  neuter  gerundive 
eundum  and  participle  itum ;  but  transitive  compounds,  as  adeo,  go  up  to, 
have  a  complete  passive  :  as,  adeor,  adiris,  &c.     ambio,  go  round,  canvass, 
follows  denominatives  in  -ire   (796),  but  has  once  or  twice  the  imperfect 
ambibat,  ambibant,  ambibatur  (Liv.,  Tac.,  Plin.  £"/.),  and  once  the  future 
ambibunt  (Plin.);  future  perfect   ambissit,   ambissint,   once  each   (prol. 
Plaut.). 

764.  The  i  is  "weakened   from    ei    (98) :    as,  eis,   eit,   eite,    abeis,   abei 

(Plaut.);    EITVR,  ABEI,  ADEITVR  (inSCr.  130  B.C.),  VENEIRE  (49  B.C.),  PRAETEREIS. 

Before  o,  u,  or  a,  the  root  becomes  e.     For  u  in  euntis,  see  902. 

765.  Old  forms  are:  iero  (Plaut.),  ii,  ierant  (Ter.),  once  each  (126);  in  an  in- 
scription Of   l86  B.C.,  ADIESET,  ADIESENT,  ADIESE,  and  of   146  B.C.,  RED1E1T  (29,  2J 

132);  INTERIEISTI.     A  future  in  -iet,  as  transiet  (Sen.),  is  late  and  rare. 


766-769.]  Words:  Inflection. 


766.  A  double  i  is  found  in  iisses  and  iisset  once  each  (Ciris,  Nepos), 
also  sometimes  in   compounds  of  these  forms:   as  rediisses,  interiisset. 
Compounds  sometimes  have  it  also  in  the  perfect  infinitive  and  in  the  second 
person   singular   of   the   perfect   indicative  :    as,  abiisse,   abiisti ;   also   in 
rediistis  once  (Stat.).     In  the  first  person  of  the  perfect  indicative  a  single 
long  i  is  found  rarely  in  late  writers  in  the  singular:  as,  adi  (Val.  FL). 

767.  A  few  examples  are  found  of  a  perfect  system  with  v,  as  Ivi,  &c. 
This  form  is  confined  almost  exclusively  to  poetry  and  late  prose. 

(a)  Examples  of  simple  forms  with  v  are:  ivisse  (Plaut.),  ivit  (Cato),  ivi 
(Varro),  Iverat  (Catull.).  (b)  Compound  forms:  exiyi  (Plant.),  obivit  (Verg.), 
subivit  (Stat.);  transivisse  (Claud,  ap.  Tac.),  inivimus,  transivl,  transivi- 
mus  (Curt.),  transivit,  transiverant  (Sen.),  exivit  (Gell.).  Apparent  com- 
pounds (396) :  Intro  ivit  (C.  Gracch.,  Piso,  Gell.). 

(3.)  que5,  can. 

768.  queo,  can,  and  nequeo,  can't,  have  the  perfect  quivi,  the  rest  like 
eo  (762)  ;  but  they  have  no  imperative,  gerundive,  or  future  participle,  and 
the  present  participle  is  rare,     queo  is  commonly  used  with  a  negative,  and 
some  parts  only  so.     Passive  forms  are  rare,  and  only  used  with  a  passive 
infinitive  (1484).  

edo;  volo  (nolo,  malo)  and  fero. 
(i.)  edo,  <?^(ed-,  ed-). 

769.  edo,  eat,  has  a  present  system  with  a  formative  vowel  like  rego 
throughout  (782) ;  but  in  some  parts  of  the  present,  and  of  the  imperfect  sub- 
junctive, parallel  root  forms  are  usually  found,  with  d  of  the  root  changed 
to  s,  and  the  vowel  lengthened  (135),  as  may  be  seen  in  the  following: 


Principal  parts :  edo,  ease,  edi,  esus. 


Pres. 


Pres. 


Imp. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Singular.  I  Plural, 

edo,  es  or  edis,  est  or  edit  I    edimus,  estis  or  editis,  edunt 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

edimus,  editis,  edint 
or  edamus,  edatis,  edant 
essemus,  —      — ,  essent 
or  ederemus,  ederetis,  ederent 


edim,  edis,  edit 
or  edam,  edas,  edat 
essem,  esses,  esset 
or  ederem,  ederes,  ederet 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

es  or  ede,  esto  or  edito         |    este  or  edite 


INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.     esse  I    edens 

118 


The  Verb:   volo,  will.         [770-774. 


770.  For  es,  see  728  ;  for  edim,  &c.,  841.     In  the  passive,  the  indicative  present 
estur  is  used,  and  imperfect  subjunctive  essetur.     The  perfect  participle  esus  is 
for  an  older  essus  (170,  7).     Supines  essum,  essu  (Plaut.). 

771.  comedo,  eat  up,  has  also  the  following  root  forms:    comes,  comest, 
comestis  ;  comesto ;  comesse  ;  comesses,  comesset,  comessemus.    The 
present  subjunctive  has  also  comedim,  comedis,  comedint.     The  participle  per- 
fect is  comessus,  comesus,  or  comestus,  future  comessurus.     exedS,  eat 
out,  has  exest  and  exesse  ;  subjunctive  exedint.    adedS,  eat  at,  has  adest. 

772.  volo  (nolo,  malo)  and  fero  have  the  bare  root  in  some  parts 
only  of  the  present  system ;    in  other  parts  the  root  extended  by  a 
formative  vowel,  like  rego  (782).    volo  (nolo,  malo)  lack  some  forms, 
as  will  be  seen  below. 


773-  (2-)  volo,  will,  wish,  want,  am  willing  (vo  1-,  ve  1-). 


Principal  parts  :  volo,  velle,  volui,  . 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Pres. 

vo!5,  vis,  volt  or  vult 

volumus,  voltis  or  vultis,  volunt 

Imp. 

volebam,  volebas,  volebat 

volebamus,  volebatis,  volebant 

Put. 

volam,  voles,  volet 

volemus,  voletis,  volent 

Perf. 

volui,  voluisti,  voluit 

voluimus,  voluistis,  voluerunt  or 

-re 

Plup. 

volueram,  volueras,  volu- 

volueramus,   volueratis,    volue- 

erat 

rant 

P.P. 

voluerS,  volueris,  volue- 

voluerimus,    volueritis,    volue- 

rit 

rint 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Pres. 

velim,  velis,  velit 

velimus.  velitis,  velint 

Imp. 

vellem,  velles,  vellet 

vellemus,  velletis,  vellent 

Perf. 

voluerim,  volueris,  volu- 

voluerimus,     volueritis,    volue- 

erit 

rint 

Plup. 

voluissem,  voluisses,  vo- 

voluissemus,  voluissetis,   volu- 

luisset 

issent 

INFINITIVE. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Pres. 

velle 

volens 

Perf. 

voluisse 

774.  volo  for  volo  is  rare  (2443).  volt  and  voltis  became  vult  and  vultis 
about  the  time  of  Augustus  (141).  For  volumus,  see  142 ;  velim,  &c.,  841 ;  vellem, 
&c.,  velle,  166,  8.  sis,  an  thou  wilt,  is  common  for  si  vis  (Plaut.  Ter.,  Cic.,  Liv.). 
sultis,  an  't  please  you,  is  used  by  Plautus  for  si  voltis. 

119 


775-779-] 


Words :    Inflection. 


775.  n51o,  -won't,  is  formed  from  ne-,  not,  and  vol5,  juxtaposed,  and 
maid,  like  belter,  abbreviated  from  mavolo  for  *magsvolo  (779 ,  170,  2). 


776. 


nolo,  won't,  don't  want,  object,  am  not  willing. 


Principal  parts  :  nolo,  nolle,  nolui, 


Pres. 

Imf. 
Put. 


Pres. 
Imp. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 
Singular. 

nolo,  non  vis,  non  volt  or 
vult 


n51ebam,  nolebas,  nolebat 
,  nSles,  nolet 


Plural. 

nolumus,  non  voltis  or  vultis,  no- 
lunt 


nolebamus,  nolebatis,  nolebant 
nolemus,  noletis,  nolent 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

nolim,  nolis,  nolit  I    nolimus,  nolitis,  nolint 

nollem,  nSlles,  nollet          I    nollemus,  nolletis,  nollent 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

noli  or  nolito,  n51Ito  |    nolite  or  nolitote,  nolunto 


INFINITIVE. 


Pres. 


nolle 


PARTICIPLE. 


777.  nevis  and  nevolt,  from  ne-,  not,  are  found  in  Plautus.    nolo  has  usually 
no  participles,  but  oblique  cases  of  nolens  are  used  a  few  times  by  post-Augustan 
writers  (Cels.,  Luc.,  Quintil.,  Ta.,  Juv.,  Mart.,  Plin.).     The  perfect  system,  nolui, 
&c.,  is  like  that  of  volo  (772). 

778.  malo,  like  better,  choose  rather. 


Principal  parts  :  malo,  malle,  malui, 


Pres. 
Imp. 
Put. 

Pres. 
Imp. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 
Singular. 
malo,    mavis,    mavolt  or 

mavult 

malebam,  malebas,  male- 
bat 
,  males,  malet 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

malim,  mails,  malit  I    malimus,  malitis,  malint 

mallem,  malles,  mallet       I    mallemus,  malletis,  mallent 


Plural. 

malumus,  mavoltis  or  mavultis, 
malunt 

malebamus,  malebatis,  male- 
bant 

malemus,  maletis,  malent 


INFINITIVE. 


Pres. 


malle 


PARTICIPLE. 


779.  Old  forms  are  mavolo,  mavolunt;  mavolet ;  mavelim,  mavelis, 
mavelit ;  mavellem.    The  perfect  system,  malui,  &c.,  is  like  that  of  volo  (772). 


I2O 


The   Verb:   fero,  carry.        [780,  781. 


(3.)     fero,  carry  (fer-). 

780.  fero,  carry,  is  used  only  in  the  present  system  (720).  The  other 
parts  are  supplied  by  forms  of  tollo,  lift  (tol-,  tla-).  The  present  system 
of  fero  is  as  follows  : 


Principal  parts  :  fero,  ferre  ;  (tuli,  latus). 

ACTIVE  VOICE. 

Pres. 
Imp. 
Put. 

INDICATl 
Singular. 
fero,  fers,  fert 
ferebam,  ferebas,  ferebat 
feram,  feres,  feret 

VE  MOOD. 

Plural, 
ferimus,  fertis,  ferunt 
ferebamus,  ferebatis,  ferebant 
feremus,  feretis,  ferent 

Pres. 
Imp. 

SUBJUNCT 

feram,  feras,  ferat 
ferrem,  ferres,  ferret 

IVE   MOOD. 

feramus,  feratis,  ferant 
ferremus,  ferretis,  ferrent 

IMPERATI 

fer  or  ferto,  ferto 

VE   MOOD. 

ferte  or  fertote,  ferunt5 

Pres. 

INFINITIVE. 

ferre 

PARTICIPLE. 

ferens 

Gen. 

GERUND. 

ferendi,  &c. 

PASSIVE  VOICE. 

Pres. 
Imp. 

Put. 

INDICATE 

Singular. 
feror,  ferris  or  -re,  fertur 
ferebar,  ferebare  or  -ris, 
ferebatur 
f  erar,  f  erere  or  -ris,  f  eretur 

^E   MOOD. 

Plural, 
ferimur,  ferimim,  feruntur 
ferebarnur,  ferebamini,  fereban- 
tur 
feremur,  feremini,  ferentur 

Pres. 
Imp. 

SUBJUNCTI 

ferar,  f  erare  or-ris,  f  eratur 
ferrer,  ferrere  or  -ris,  fer- 
retur 

IMPERATI1 

ferre  or  fertor,  fertor 

VE   MOOD. 

feramur,  feramim,  ferantur 
ferremur,  ferremini,  ferrentur 

/E   MOOD. 

ferimini,  feruntor 

Pres. 

INFINITIVE. 

ferri 

GERUNDIVE. 

ferendus 

781.  For  tuli,  see  860  ;  the  full  form  tetuli,  &c.,  is  found  in  old  Latin,  and  TOLI, 
&c.,  in  inscriptions;  the  compound  with  re-  is  rettuli  for  *retetuli  (861).  For  the 
participle  latus,  see  169,  i. 

121 


782.J 


Words:  Inflation. 


782. 


(B.)  VERBS    IN    -ere. 

The  Third  Conjugation. 
rego,  rule. 


PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 
PRES.  INDIC.  PRES.  INFIN.  PERF.  INDIC.  PERF.  PART. 

rego  regere  rexi  rectus 


ACTIVE    VOICE. 

INDICATIVE     MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 


Singular. 

rego,  /  rule,  or  am  ruling 
regis,  thou  rulest,  or  art  ruling 
re  git,  he  rules,  or  is  ruling 


Plural. 

regimus,  we  rule,  or  are  ruling 
regitis,  you  rule,  or  are  ruling 
regunt,  they  rule,  or  are  ruling 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


regebam,  I  was  ruling,  or  I  ruled 

regebas,  thou  wert  ruling,  or  thou 

ruledst 
regebat,  he  was  ruling,  or  he  ruled 


regebamus,  we  were  ruling,  or  we 

ruled 
regebatis,  you  were  ruling,  or  you 

ruled 
regebant,  they  were  ruling,  or  they 

ruled 


re  gam,  I  shall  rule 
reges,  thou  wilt  rule 
reget,  he  will  rule 


FUTURE  TENSE. 

regemus,  we  shall  rule 
regetis,  you  will  rule 
regent,  they  will  rule 

PERFECT  TENSE. 


rexi,  I  have  ruled,  or  I  ruled 
rexisti,  thou  hast  ruled,  or  thou  ruledst 
rexit,  he  has  ruled,  or  he  ruled 


rexeram,  I  had  ruled 
rexeras,  thou  hadst  ruled 
rexerat,  he  had  ruled 


reximus,  we  have  ruled,  or  we  ruled 
rexistis,  you  have  ruled,  or  you  ruled 
rexerunt  or  -re,  they  have  rulea,  or 
they  ruled 

PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 

rexeramus,  we  had  ruled 
rexeratis,  you  had  ruled 
rexerant,  they  had  ruled 


FUTURE  PERFECT  TENSE. 


rexero,  /  shall  have  ruled 
rexeris,  thou  wilt  have  ruled 
rexerit,  he  -( ill  have  ruled 


rexerimus,  we  shall  have  ruled 
rexeritis,  you  will  have  ruled 
rexerint,  thev  will  have  ruled 


122 


The   Verb :    Verbs  in  -ere. 


[782. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

re  gam,  may  I  rule 
re  gas,  mayst  thou  rule 
re  gat,  let  him  rule 

regamus,  let  us  rule 
regatis,  may  yoti  rule 
regant,  let  them  rule 

regerem,  I  should  rule 
regeres,  thou  wouldst  rule 
regeret,  he  would  rule 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

regeremus,  we  should  rule 
regeretis,  you  would  rule 
regerent,  they  would  rule 


rexerim,  I  may  have  ritled 
rexeris,  thou  mayst  have  ruled 
rexerit,  he  may  have  ruled 


PERFECT  TENSE. 

rexerimus,  we  may  have  ruled 
rexerit  is,  you  may  have  ruled 
rexerint,  they  may  have  ruled 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


rexissem,  I  should  have  ruled 
rexisses,  thou  wouldst  have  ruled 
rexisset,  he  would  have  ruled 


rexissemus,  we  should  have  ruled 
rexissetis,  you  would  have  ruled 
rexissent,  they  would  have  ruled 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


rege  or  regit5,  ruley  thou  shalt  rule 
regito,  he  shall  rule 


regite  or  regitote,  rule,you  shall  rule 
regunt5,  they  shall  rule 


NOUNS   OF   THE   VERB. 
INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 


regere,  to  rule 
Perf.     rexisse,  to  have  ruled 
Fut.      recturus  esse,  to  be  going  to 

rule 


GERUND. 
regendi,  of  ruling 


\cc,      regendum,  ruling 
\bl.      regendS,  by  ruling 


Pres.    regens,  ruling 

Put.      recturus,  going  to  rule 

SUPINE. 


Ace.    *rectum,  to  rule,  not  used 
AbL     *rectu,  in  ruling,  not  used 


123 


783-] 


Words:    Inflection. 


783. 


VERBS    IN    -ere. 

The  Third  Conjugation. 
regor,  am  ruled. 


PASSIVE    VOICE. 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 


PRESENT  TENSE. 


Singular. 

regor,  I  am  ruled 

regeris  or  -re,  thou  art  ruled 

regitur,  he  is  ruled 


Plural. 


regimur,  we  are  ruled 
TGgiminl,  you  are  ruled 
reguntur,  they  are  ruled 


regebar,  I  was  ruled 

regebare  or  -ris,  thou  wert  ruled 

regebatur,  he  was  ruled 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

regebamur,  we  were  ruled 


regebamini,  you  were  ruled 
regebantur,  they  were  ruled 


FUTURE  TENSE. 


regar,  I  shall  be  ruled 

regere  or  -ris,  thou  wilt  be  ruled 

regetur,  he  will  be  ruled 


regemur,  we  shall  be  ruled 
regemim,  you  will  be  ruled 
regentur,  they  will  be  ruled 


PERFECT  TENSE. 
rectus  sum,  I  have  been,  or  was  ruled 


rectus  es,  thou  hast  been,  or  wertrttled 
rectus  est,  he  has  been,  or  was  ruled 


recti  surnus,  we  have  been,  or  were 

ruled 

recti  estis,jj/0#  have  been,  or  were  ruled 
recti  sunt,  they  have  been,  or  were  ruled 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 
rectus  eram,  I  had  been  ruled          '    \  recti  eramus,  we  had  been  ruled 


rectus  eras,  thou  hadst  been  ruled 
rectus  erat,  he  had  been  ruled 


recti  eratis,jK0«  had  been  ruled 
recti  erant,  they  had  been  ruled 


rectus  ero,  I  shall  have  been  ruled 
rectus  eris,  thou  wilt  have  been  ruled 
rectus  erit,  he  will  have  been  ruled 


FUTURE  PERFECT  TENSE. 

recti  erimus,  we  shall  have  been  ruled 
recti  eritis,  you  will  have  been  ruled 
recti  erunt,  they  will  have  been  ruled 


124 


The   Verb :    Verbs  in  -ere. 


[783. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 


Singular. 

regar,  may  I  be  ruled 
regare  or  -ris,  niayst  thou  be  ruled 
regatur,  let  him  be  ruled 


Plural. 

regamur,  may  we  be  ruled 
regamini,  may  you  be  ruled 
regantur,  let  them  be  ruled 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


regerer,  T should  be  ruled 

regerere  or  -ris,  thou  wouldst  be  ruled 

regeretur,  he  would  be  ruled 


regeremur,  we  should  be  ruled 
regeremini,  you  would  be  ruled 
regerentur,  they  would  be  ruled 


PERFECT  TENSE. 


rectus  sim,  /  may  have  been  ruled 
rectus  sis,  thou  mayst  have  been  ruled 
rectus  sit.  he  may  have  been  ruled 


recti  simus,  we  may  have  been  ruled 
recti  sitis,  you  may  have  been  ruled 
recti  sint,  they  may  have  been  ruled 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


rectus    essem,  /  should  have  been 

ruled 
rectus  esses,  thou  wouldst  have  been 

ruled 
rectus  esset,  he  would  have  been  ruled 


recti  essemus,  we  should  have  been 

ruled 
recti  essetis,  you  would  have  been 

ruled 
recti  essent,^<?j/  would  have  been  ruled 


regere  or  regitor,  be  ruled,  thou  shall 

be  ruled 
regitor,  he  shall  be  ruled 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

regimini,  be  ruled 

reguntor,  they  shall  be  ruled 


NOUNS   OF   THE   VERB. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres.     regi,  to  be  ruled 
Perf.     rectus  esse,  to  have  been  rtiled 
Fut.     *rectum    iri,  to  be  going  to  be 
ruled,  not  used  (22,^) 


GERUNDIVE, 
regendus,  to  be  ruled 

PERFECT    PARTICIPLE, 
rectus,  ruled 


784.] 


Words:  Inflection. 


VERBS     IN    -io,  -ere. 

784.  Verbs  in  -io,  -ere,  as  capio,  capere,  take  (cap-),  drop  an  i 
in  some  forms  of  the  present  and  imperfect.  The  present  system  is 
as  follows : 


ACTIVE   VOICE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Pres. 

capio,  capis,  capit 

capimus,  capitis,  capiunt 

Imp. 

capiebam,   capiebas,  ca- 

capiebamus,  capiebatis,   capie- 

piebat 

bant 

Put. 

capiam,  capigs,  capiet 

capiemus,  capietis,  capient 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Pres. 

capiam,  capias,  capiat 

capiamus,  capiatis,  capiant 

Imp. 

caperem,caperes,  caperet 

caperemus,  caperetis,  caperent 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

cape  or  capito,  capito 

capite  or  capitote,  capiuntS 

INFINITIVE. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Pres. 

capere 

capiens 

GERUNDt 

Gen. 

capiendi,  &c. 

PASSIVE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Pres. 

capior,  caperis  or  -re,  ca- 

capimur,  capimini,  capiuntur 

pitur 

Imp. 

capiebar,     capiebare     or 
-ris,  capiebatur 

capiebamur,  capiebaminT,  capi- 
ebantur 

Put. 

capiar,  capiere  or  -ris,  ca- 

capiemur,  capiemini,  capientur 

pietur 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Pres. 

capiar,  capiSre  or  -ris,  ca- 

capiamur,  capiamini,  capiantur 

piatur 

Imp. 

caperer,  caperere  or  -ris, 

caperemur,    caperemim,    cape- 

caperetur 

rentur 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD 

capere  or  capitor,  capitor      capimini,  capiuntor 

INFINITIVE. 

GERUNDIVE. 

Pres. 

capi 

capiendus 

126 


The    Verb:    Verbs  in  -16,   -ere.      [785-791. 


785.  There  are  a  dozen  verbs  in  -16,  -ere,  like  capio,  and  three  deponents  in 
-ior,  -i,  all  formed  from  consonant  roots  with  a  short  vowel :  see  836.     aio,  say, 
and  fio,  grow,  become,  have  certain  peculiarities  arising  from  the  blending  of  the  root 
with  the  suffix. 

(i.)    ai5,  say,  say  ay,  avouch  (a  g-). 

786.  aio,  say,  is  defective,  and  has  only  these  parts  in  common  use : 


Ind.  Pres. 
Ind.  Imp. 
Subj.  Pres. 

Singular. 
aio,  ais,  ait 
aiebam,  aiebas,  aiebat 

Plural. 

aiebamus, 

aiebatis,  aiebant 

»            > 

787.  For  aio,  sometimes  written  aiio  (23),  see  153,  2.     Old  forms  are  represent 
ais,  ais,  ais,  or  with  -n  interrogative  ain,  ain  ;  ait,  ait,  or  ait ;  imperfect  aibam, 
albas,  aibat,  and  albant ;  imperative  once  only,  ai  (Naev.).    A  participle  aienti- 
bus,  affirmative,  occurs  once  (Cic.). 

(2.)     fio,  become,  am  made. 

788.  fio,  become,  and  factus  sum  supplement  each  other :  in  the  present 
system,  the  passive  of  faci5,  make,  except  the  gerundive,  faciendus,  is  not 
used,  fio,  &c.,  taking  its  place  ;  in  the  perfect  system,  only  factus  sum,  &c., 
is  used. 


Ind.  Pres. 
Ind.  Imp. 
Ind.  Put. 
Subj.  Pres. 
Subj.  Imp. 
Imper. 

Singular. 
fio,  fis,  fit 
fiebam,  fiebas,  fiebat 
fiam,  fies,  fiet 
fiam,  fias,  fiat 
fierem,  fieres,  fieret 
fi 

Plural, 
fiunt 

fiebamus,  fiebatis,  fiebant 
fiemus,  fietis,  fient 
fiamus,  fiatis,  fiant 
fieremus,  fieretis,  fierent 
fite 

Infin.  Pres. 

fieri 

Part.  Pres.     

789.  In  fio,  &c.,  i  represents  an  older  ei,  seen  in  FEIENT  (inscr.  45  B.C.).     The 
infinitive  fieri  for  fierei  owes  its  passive  ending  to  analogy;  the  active  form  fiere 
occurs  twice  (Enn.,  Laev.).     The  vowel  before  -er-  in  fierem,  &c.,  and  fieri,  is 
sometimes  long  in  the  dramatists,  where  a  cretic  (_  ^  _)  is  required,  but  otherwise 
always  short. 

790.  -fio  is  used  in  apparent  compounds  (394)  :  as,  patgfit.     Tn  real  compounds 
commonly  -ficior:  as,  conficior;  but  sometimes  -fio:  as,  confit,  confiunt, 
confiat,   confieret,   confierent,  confferi ;  defit,  defiet,  defiat,   defieri ; 
effit,  effiant,  ecfieri ;  infit;  interfiat,  interfieri ;  superfit,  superfiat. 

791.  Some  verbs  in  -io,  -ere  (or  -ior,  -i),  have  occasionally  the  form  of 
verbs  in  -ire  (or  -iri),  in  some  parts  of  the  present  system,  oftenest  before 
an  r,  and  particularly  in  the  passive  infinitive :  as, 

fodiri,  3  times  (Cato,  Col.  2),  circumfodiri  (Col.),  ecfodiri  (Plaut.);  adgre- 
diri  (adgredirier),  4  times  (Plaut.),  progrediri  (Plaut.);  moriri  6  times  (Plaut. 
4,  Pomp.,  Ov.),  emoriri  twice  (Plaut.,  Ter.);  oriri,  always;  parire,  twice  (Plaut., 
Enn.);  usuallv  potiri  (potirier).  Also  cupiret  (Lucr.);  adgredire,  adgredi- 
bor,  adgredimur  (Plaut.);  morimur  (Enn.);  oriris  (Varr.,  Sen.),  adcritur 
(Lucil.,  Lucr.).  oriretur  (Cic.,  Nep.,  Sail.,  Liv.).  adoriretur  (Liv.,  Suet.) ;  paribis 
(Pomp.),  PARIRET  (inscr.);  potiris  (Manil.),  potitur  (Lucil.,  Ov.),  &c.,  &c. 

127 


792.] 


Words:  Inflection. 


792, 


II.    DENOMINATIVE    VERBS. 
(i.)   VERBS    IN    -are. 

The  First  Conjugation. 
laudo,  praise. 


PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 
PRES.  INDIC.        PRES.  INFIN.         PERF.  INDIC.        PERF.  PART. 

laudo  laudare  laudavi        laudatus 


ACTIVE   VOICE. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 
Singular. 
Iaud5,  /  praise,  or  am  praising 


laudas,  thou praisest,  or  art  praising 
laudat,  he  praises,  or  is  praising 


Plural, 
laudamus,  we  praise,  or  are  praising 


laudatis,  you  praise,  or  are  praising 
laudant,  they  praise,  or  are  praising 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


laudabam,  /  was  praising,  or    7 

praised 
laudabas,  thou  wert  praising,  or  thou 

praisedsl 
laudabat,  he   was  praising,   or  he 

praised 


laudabo,  I  shall  praise 
laudabis,  thou  wilt  praise 
laudabit,  he  will  praise 


laudabamus,  we  were  praising,  or 

we  praised 
laudabatis,  you  were  praising,  or  you 

praised 
laudabant,  they  were  praising,  or 

they  praised 

FUTURE  TENSE. 

laudabimus,  we  shall  praise 
laudabitis,  you  will  praise 
laudabunt,  they  will  praise 

PERFECT  TENSE. 


laudavi,  I  have  praised,  or  I  praised 
laudavisti,  thou  hast  praised,  or  thou 


praisedst 
laudavit,  he  has  praised,®?  he  praised 


laudavimus,  we  have  praised,  or  we 

praised 
laudavistis,jj/^w  have  praised,  or  you 


praised 

laudaverunt    or     -re,     they    have 
praised,  or  they  praised 

PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


laudaveram,  I  had  praised 
laudaveras,  thou  hadst  praised 
laudaverat,  he  had  praised 


laudaveramus,  we  had  praised 
laudaveratis,  you  had  praised 
laudaverant,  they  had  praised 


FUTURE  PERFECT  TENSE. 


Iaudaver5,  I  shall  have  praised 
laudaveris,  thou  wilt  have  praised 
laudaverit,  he  will  have  praised 


laudaverimus,  we  shall  have  praised 
laudaveritis,  you  will  have  praised 
laudaverint,  they  will  have  praised 


128 


The   Verb:    Verbs  in  -are. 


[792, 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 


Singular. 

laudem,  may  I  praise 
laudes,  mayst  thou  praise 
laudet,  let  him  praise 


Plural. 


laudemus,  let  us  praise 
laudetis,  may  you  praise 
laudent,  let  them  praise 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


laudarem,  I  should  praise 
laudares,  thou  wouldst praise 
laudaret,  he  "would praise 


laudaremus,  -we  should  praise 
laudaretis,  you  would  praise 
laudarent,  they  would  praise 


PERFECT  TENSE. 


laudaverim,  I  may  have  praised 
laudaveris,  thou  mayst  have  praised 
laudaverit,  he  may  have  praised 


laudaverimus,  we  may  have  praised 
laudaveritis,  you  may  have  praised 
laudaverint,  they  may  have  praised 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


laudavissem,  I  should  have  praised 

laudavisses,      thou      wouldst     have 

praised 
laudavisset,  he  would  have  praised 


laudavissemus,     we     should     have 

praised 
laudavissetis,  you  would  have  praised 

laudavissent,  they  would  have  praised 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


lauda  or  Iaudat5,  praise,  thou  shalt 

praise 
laudato,  he  shall  praise 


laudate    or    laudatdte,  praise,  you 

shall  praise 
Iaudant5,  they  shall  praise 


NOUNS   OF   THE  VERB. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres.    laudare,  to  praise 
Perf.    laudavisse,  to  have  praised 
Put.     laudaturus  esse,  to  be  going 
to  praise 

GERUND. 

Gen.  laudandi,  of  praising 

Dat.  laudando,  for  praising 

Ace.  laudandum,  praising 

Abl  laudando,  by  praising 


PARTICIPLE. 
Pres.     laudans,  praising 

Put.      laudaturus,  going  to  praise 
SUPINE. 


Ace.       lau datum,  to  praise 

Abl.     *laudatu,  in  praising,  not  used 


129 


793-] 


Words:  Inflection. 


793- 


VERBS    IN    -are, 

The  First  Conjugation. 
laudor,  am  praised. 


PASSIVE    VOICE. 
INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 
Singular. 

laudor,  I  am  praised 
laudaris  or  -re,  thou  art  praised 
laudatur,  he  is  praised 

IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


Plural. 

laudamur,  we  are  praised 
laudamini,  you  are  praised 
laudantur,  they  are  praised 


laudabar,  I  was  praised 
laudabare  or  -ris,  thou  wert  praised 
laudabatur,  he  was  praised 


laudabamur,  we  were  praised 
laudabamini,  you  were  praised 
laudabantur,  they  were  praised 


FUTURE  TENSE. 


laudabor,  I  shall  be  praised 
laudabere  or  -ris,  thou  wilt  be  praised 
laudabitur,  he  will  be  praised 


laudabimur,  we  shall  be  praised 
laudabimini,  you  will  be  praised 
laudabuntur,  they  will  be  praised 


laudatus  sum,  I  have  been,  or  was 
praised 


PERFECT  TENSE. 

laudati  sumus,  we  have  been,  or  were 
praised 


laudatus  es,  thou  hast  been,  or  ivert 

praised 
laudatus   est,  he  has  been,  or   was 

praised 


laudati  estis,  you  have  been,  or  were 

praised 
laudati  sunt,  they  have  been,  or  were 

praised 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


laudatus  eram,  I  had  been  praised 

\  laudatus  eras,  thou  hadst  been  praised 

laudatus  erat,  he  had  been  praised 


laudati  eramus,  we  had  been  praised 
laudati  eratis,  you  had  been  praised 
laudati  erant,  they  had  been  praised 


laudatus    er5,    /   shall    have    been 

praised 
laudatus  eris,  thou  wilt  have  been 

praised 
laudatus  erit,  he  will  have  been 

praised 


FUTURE  PERFECT  TENSE. 

laudati  erimus,  we  shall  have  been 


praised 
laudati  eritis,  you  will  have  been 

praised 
laudati  erunt,  they  will  have  been 

praised 


130 


The   Verb:    Verbs  in  -are. 


[793. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

PRESEMT  TENSE. 


Singular. 

lauder,  may  I  be  praised 

laudere  or  -ris,  mayst  thou  be  praised 

laudetur,  let  him  be  praised 


Plural. 


laudemur,  may  we  be  praised 
laudemini,  may  you  be  praised 
laudentur,  let  them  be  praised 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


1  au  d  ar e  r,  /  should  be  praised 
laudarere    or   -ris,   thou  wouldst  be 

praised 
laudaretur,  he  would  be  praised 


laudaremur,  we  should  be  praised 
laudaremini,  you  would  be  praised 

laudarentur,  they  would  be  praised 


PERFECT  TENSE. 


laudatus  sim,  I  may  have  been  praised 

laudatus  sis,  thou  mayst  have  been 

praised 
laudatus  sit,  he  may  have  been  praised 


laudati   simus,   we  may  have   been 

praised 
laudati  sitis,  you  may  have  been 

praised 
laudati  sint,  they  may  have  been  praised 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


laudatus  essem,  /  should  have  been 

praised 
laudatus   esses,  thou  wouldst  have 

been  praised 
laudatus  esset,  he  would  have  been 

praised 


laudati  essemus,  we  should  have  been 

praised 
laudati  essetis,j0#  would  have  been 

praised 
laudati  essent,  they  would  have  been 

praised 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


laudare  or  laudator,  be  praised,  thou 

shaft  be  praised 
laudator,  he  shall  be  praised 


laudamini,  be  praised 
laudantor,  they  shall  be  praised 


NOUNS    OF    THE   VERB. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres.     laudari,  to  be  praised 

Perf.     laudatus  esse,  to  have   been 

praised 
Fut.    *laudatum  iri,  to  be  going  to 

be  praised,  pot  used  (2273) 


GERUNDIVE. 

laudandus,  to  be  praised 

PERFECT   PARTICIPLE, 
laudatus,  praised 


794-] 


Words:  Inflection. 


794- 


(2.)  VERBS    IN    -ere, 

The  Second  Conjugation, 
moneo,  advise. 


PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 

PRES.  INDIC.        PRES.  INFIN.         PERF.  INDIC.        PERF.  PART. 
moneo  monere  monui          monitus 


ACTIVE   VOICE. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 
Singular. 

moneo,  I  advise,  or  am  advising 
mones,  thou  advisest,  or  art  advising 
monet,  he  advises,  or  is  advising 


Plural. 

monemus,  -we  advise,  or  are  advising 
monetis,^/0#  advise,  or  are  advising 
monent,  they  advise,  or  are  advising 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


monebam,  I  was  advising*  or  /  ad- 
vised 

monebas,  thou  wert  advising,  or  thou 
advisedst 

monebat,  he  was  advising,  or  he  ad- 


vised 

moneb5,  I  shall  advise 
monebis,  thou  wilt  advise 
monebit,  he  will  advise 


monebamus,  we  were  advising,  or 

we  advised 
monebatis,  you  were  advising,  or  you 

advised 
monebant,  they  were  advising,  or  they 


advised 

FUTURE  TENSE. 

monebimus,  we  shall  advise 
monebitis,  you  will  advise 
monebunt,  they  will  advise 

PERFECT  TENSE. 


monui,  /  have  advised,  or  /  advised 

monuisti,  thou  hast  advised,  or  thou 

advisedst 
monuit,  he  has  advised,  or  he  advised 


monuimus,  we  have  advised,  or  we 

advised 
monuistis,  you  have  advised,  or  you 

advised 
monuerunt  or  -re,  they  have  advised, 


or  they  advised 
PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


monueram,  I  had  advised 
monueras,  thou  hadst  advised 
monuerat,  he  had  advised 


monueramus,  we  had  advised 
monueratis,  you  had  advised 
monuerant,  they  had  advised 


FUTURE  PERFECT  TENSE. 


monuer5,  /  shall  have  advised 
monueris,  thou  wilt  have  advised 
monuerit,  he  will  have  advised 


monuerimus,  we  shall  have  advised 
monueritis,  you  will  have  advised 
monuerint,  they  will  have  advised 


132 


Tkt    Verb:    Verbs  in  -ere. 


[794- 


Singular. 

moneam,  may  I  advise 
moneas,  mayst  thou  advise 
moneat,  let  him  advise 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 

Plural. 

moneamus,  let  us  advise 
moneatis,  may  you  advise 
moneant,  let  them  advise 


m  on  e  re  m ,  I  should  advise 
moneres,  thou  wouldst  advise 
m  one  ret,  he  would  advise 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

moneremus,  we  should  advise 
moneretis,  you  would  advise 
monerent,  they  would  advise 

PERFECT  TENSE. 


monuerim,  /  may  have  advised 
monueris,  thou  mayst  have  advised 
monuerit,  he  may  have  advised 


monuerimus,  we  may  have  advised 
monueritis,  you  may  have  advised 
monuerint,  they  may  have  advised 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


monuissem,    /  should  have  advised 
monuisses,  thou  wouldst  have  advised 
monuisset,  he  would  have  advised 


monuissemus,  we  shottld  have  advised 
monuissetis,  you  would  have  advised 
monuissent,  they  would  have  advised 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


mone  or  moneto,  advise,  thou  shall 

advise 
monetS,  he  shall  advise 


monete    or   monetote,   advise,  you 

shall  advise 
monento,  they  shall  ad-vise 


NOUNS   OF   THE  VERB. 
INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.    monens,  advising 

Fut.     moniturus,  going  to  advise 


Pres.    monere,  to  advise 
Perf.    monuisse,  to  have  advised 
Fut.      moniturus  esse,  to  be  going 
to  advise 


GERUND. 

Gen.  monendi,  of  advising 

Dat.  monend5,/0r  advising 

Ace  monendum,  advising 

Abl.  monendo,  by  advising 


SUPINE. 


Ace.  *monitum,  to  advise,  not  used 
Abl.     monitu,  in  advising 


133 


795-] 


Words :    Inflection. 


795- 


VERBS    IN    -ere, 

The  Second  Conjugation. 
moneor,  am  advised. 


PASSIVE    VOICE. 
INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 


Singular. 

moneor,  I  am  advised 
moneris  or  -re,  thou  art  advised 
monetur,  he  is  advised 


monebar,  /  was  advised 
monebare  or  -ris,  thou  wert  advised 
monebatur,  he  was  advised 


monebor,  /  shall  be  advised 
monebere  or  -ris,  thou  wilt  be  advised 
monebitur,  he  will  be  advised 


Plural. 

monemur,  we  are  advised 
monemini,  you  are  advised 
monentur,  they  are  advised 

IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

monebamur,  we  were  advised 
monebamini,  you  were  advised 
monebantur,  they  were  advised 

FUTURE  TENSE. 

monebimur,  w?  shall  be  advised 
monebimim,  you  will  be  advised 
monebuntur,  they  will  be  advised 


PERFECT  TENSE. 


monitus  sum,  /  have  been,  or  was  ad- 
vised 

monitus  es,  thou  hast  been,  or  wert 
advised 

monitus  est,  he  has  been,  or  was  ad- 
vised 


moniti  sumus,  we  have  been,  or  were 

advised 
moniti  estis,  you  have  been,  or  were 

advised 
moniti  sunt,  they  have  been,  or  were 

advised 


monitus  eram,  I  had  been  advised 
monitus  eras,  thou  hadst  been  advised 
monitus  erat,  he  had  been  advised 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 

moniti  eramus,  we  had  been  advised 
moniti  eratis,  you  had  been  advised 
moniti  erant,  they  had  been  advised 


FUTURE  PERFECT  TENSE. 


monitus  ero,  /  shall  have  been  ad- 
vised 

monitus  eris,  thou  wilt  have  been 
advised 

monitus  erit,  he  will  have  been  ad- 
vised 


moniti  erimus,  we  shall  have  been 

advised 
moniti  eritis,  you  will  have  been 

advised 
moniti  erunt,  they  will  have  been 

advised 


134 


The   Verb:    Verbs  in  -ere. 


[795- 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 


Singular. 

monear,  may  I  be  advised 

moneare  or  -ris,  maystthou  be  advised 

moneatur,  let  him  be  advised 


Plural. 

moneamur,  may  -we  be  advised 
moneamini,  may  you  be  advised 
moneantur,  let  them  be  advised 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


monerer,  I  should  be  advised 
monerere   or   -ris,  thou  -wouldst  be 

advised 
moneretur,  he  -would  be  advised 


moneremur,  we  should  be  advised 
moneremini,  you  would  be  advised 

monerentur,  they  would  be  advised 


PERFECT  TENSE. 


monitus  sim,  /  may  have  been  ad- 
vised 

monitus  sis,  thou  mayst  have  been 
advised 

monitus  sit,  he  may  have  been  advised 


monitl  simus,  we  may  have  been  ad- 
vised 

moniti  sitis,  you  may  have  been  ad- 
vised 

monitl  sint,  they  may  have  been  advised 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


monitus  essem,  /  should  have  been 

advised 
monitus   esses,  thou  wouldst  have 

been  advised 
monitus   esset,  he  would  have  been 


advised 


moniti  essemus,  we  should  have  been 

advised 
moniti  essetis,  you  would  have  been 

advised 
moniti  essent,  they  would  have  been 

advised 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


monere  or  monetor,  be  advised,  thou 

shalt  be  advised 
monetor,  he  shall  be  advised 


monemini,  be  advised 
monentor,  they  shall  be  advised 


NOUNS   OF   THE   VERB. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres.     moneri,  to  be  advised 

Perf.    monitus  esse,  to   have   been 

advised 
Fut.    *monitum    iri,  to  be  going  to 

be  advised,  not  used  (2273) 


GERUNDIVE, 
monendus,  to  be  advised 

PERFECT    PARTICIPLE, 
monitus,  advised 


796.] 


Words:  Inflection. 


796. 


(3.)    VERBS    IN    -Ire. 

The  Fourth  Conjugation. 
audio,  hear. 


PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 
PRES.  INDIC.          PRES.  INFIN.         PERF.  INDIC.  PERF.  PART. 

audio  audire  audivl  auditus 


ACTIVE    VOICE. 
INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 
Singular. 

audio,  /  hear,  or  am  hearing 
audis,  thou  hearest,  or  art  hearing 
audit,  he  hears,  or  is  hearing 


Plural. 

audimus,  we  hear,  or  are  hearing 
auditis,  you  hear,  or  are  hearing 
audiunt,  they  hear,  or  are  hearing 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


audiebam,  /  was  hearing,  or  I  heard 

audiebas,  thoii  wert  hearing,  or  thou 

heardst 
audiebat,  he  was  hearing,  or  he  heard 


audiebamus,  we  were  hearing,  or  we 

heard 
audiebatis,  you  were  hearing,  or  you 

heard 
audiebant,  they  were  hearing,  or  they 


audiam,  I  shall  hear 
audies,  thou  wilt  hear 
audiet,  he  will  hear 


heard 

FUTURE  TENSE. 

audiemus,  we  shall  hear 
audietis,  you  will  hear 
audient,  they  will  hear 

PERFECT  TENSE. 


audivl,  I  have  heard,  or  I  heard 
audivisti,  thou  hast  heard,  or  thou 


heardst 
audivit,  he  has  heard,  or  he  heard 


audiveram,  I  had  heard 
audiveras,  thou  hadst  heard 
audiverat,  he  had  heard 


audivimus,   we  have   heard,   or  we 

heard 
audivistis,  you  have  heard,  or  you 


heard 

audiverunt  or  -re,  they  have  heard, 
or  they  heard 

PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 

audiveramus,  we  had  heard 
audiveratis,  you  had  heard 
audiverant,  they  had  heard 


FUTURE  PERFECT  TENSE. 


audivero,  I  shall  have  heard 
audiveris,  thou  wilt  have  heard 
audiverit,  he  will  have  heard 


audlverimus,  we  shall  have  heard 
audiveritis,  yoi4  will  have  heard 
audiverint,  they  will  have  heard 


136 


The   Verb:    Verbs  in  -ire. 


[796. 


Singular. 

audiam,  may  I  hear 
audias,  mayst  thou  hear 
audiat,  let  him  hear 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 

Plural. 

audiamus,  let  us  hear 
audiatis,  may  you  hear 
audiant,  let  them  hear 

IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


audirem,  7  should  hear 
audires,  thou  wouldst  hear 
audiret,  he  would  hear 


audiremus,  we  should  hear 
audlretis,  you  would  hear 
audirent,  they  would  hear 


PERFECT  TENSE. 


audiverim,  I  may  have  heard 
audiveris,  thou  mayst  have  heard 
audiverit,  he  may  have  heard 


audiverimus,  we  may  have  heard 
audiveritis,  you  may  have  heard 
audiverint,  they  may  have  heard 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 

audivissem,  I  should  have  heard 
audivisses,  thou  wouldst  have  heard 
audivisset,  he  would  have  heard 


audivissemus,  we  should  have  heard 
audivissetis,  you  would  have  heard 
audivissent,  they  would  have  heard 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


audi  or  auditd,  hear,  thou  shalt  hear 
audito,  he  shall  hear 


audite  or  auditote,  hear,  you  shall 

hear 
audiuntd,  they  shall  hear 


NOUNS   OF   THE   VERB. 


INFINITIVE. 
Pres.    audire,  to  hear 
Perf.    audivisse,  to  have  heard 
Flit.      auditurus  esse,  to  be  going  to 

hear 

GERUND. 

Gen.  audiendi,  of  hearing 

Dat.  audiendo,  for  hearing 

Ace.  audiendum,  hearing 

Abl.  audiendo,  by  hearing 


PARTICIPLE. 
Pres.     audiens,  hearing 

Fut.     auditurus,  going  to  hear 
SUPINE. 


Ace.    auditum,  to  hear 
Abl.     auditu,  in  hearing 


797-] 


Words :    Inflection. 


797- 


VERBS    IN    -ire, 

The  Fourth  Conjugation, 
audior,  am  heard. 


Singular. 
audior,  I  am  heard 


PASSIVE    VOICE. 
INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 

Plural, 
audimur,  we  are  heard 


audiris  or  -re,  thou  art  heard 
auditur,  he  is  heard 


audiebar,  I  was  heard 

audiebare  or  -ris,  thou  wert  heard 

audiebatur,  he  was  heard 


audiar,  I  shall  be  heard 

audiere  or  -ris,  thou  wilt  be  heard 

audietur,  he  will  be  heard 


audimim,  you  are  heard 
audiuntur,  they  are  heard 

IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

audiebamur,  we  were  heard 
audiebamini,  you  were  heard 
audiebantur,  they  were  heard 

FUTURE  TENSE. 

audiemur,  we  shall  be  heard 
audiemini,  you  will  be  heard 
audientur,  they  will  be  heard 

PERFECT  TENSE. 


auditus  sum,   /  have  been,  or  was 

heard 
auditus  es,  thou  hast  been,  or  wert 

heard 
auditus  est,  he  has  been,  or  was 


heard 


heard 
PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


audit!  sumus,  we  have  been,  or  were 

heard 
auditi  est  is,  you  have  been,  or  were 

heard 
auditi  sunt,  they  have  been,  or  were 


auditus  eram,  I  had  been  heard 
auditus  eras,  thou  hadst  been  heard 
auditus  erat,  he  had  been  heard 


auditi  eramus,  we  had  been  heard 
auditi  eratis,  you  had  been  heard 
auditi  erant,  they  had  been  heard 

FUTURE  PERFECT  TENSE. 


auditus  ero,  I  shall  have  been  heard 

auditus   eris,    thou    wilt   have  been 

heard 
auditus  erit,  he  will  have  been  heard 


auditi  erimus,   we  shall  have  been 

heard 
auditi  eritis,  you  will  have  been 

heard 
auditi  erunt,  they  will  have  been 

heard 


The   Verb:    Verbs  in  -Ire. 


[797< 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
PRESENT  TENSE. 


Singular. 

audiar,  may  I  be  heard 
audiare  or  -ris,  mayst  thou  be  heard 
audiatur,  let  him  be  heard 


Plural. 

audiamur,  may  we  be  heard 
audiamini,  may  you  be  heard 
audiantur,  let  them  be  heard 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


audirer,  /  should  be  heard 

audirere  or  -ris,  thou  wouldst  be  heard 

audiretur,  he  would  be  heard 


audiremur,  we  should  be  heard 
audiremini,  you  would  be  heard 
audirentur,  they  would  be  heard 


PERFECT  TENSE. 


auditus  sim,  I  may  have  been  heard 
auditus    sis,   thou   mayst  have  been 

heard 
auditus  sit,  he  may  have  been  heard 


audit!  sim  us,  we  may  have  been  heard 
audit!  sitis,  you  may  have  been  heard 


auditi  sint,  they  may  have  been  heard 
PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 


auditus  essem,  /  should  have  been 

heard 
auditus  esses,  thou  wouldst  have  been 

heard 
auditus  esset,  he  would  have  been 


heard 


auditi  essemus,  we  should  have  been 

heard 
auditi  essetis,  you  would  have  been 

heard 
auditi  essent,  they  would  have  been 

heard 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


audire  or  auditor,  be  heard,  thou  shall 

be  heard 
auditor,  he  shall  be  heard 


audimini,  be  heard 
audiuntor,  they  shall  be  heard 


NOUNS   OF   THE  VERB. 


INFINITIVE. 
Pres.  audiri,  to  be  heard 
Perf,  auditus  esse,  to  have  been 

heard 
Fnt.      auditum  iri,  to  be  going  to  be 

heard  (2273) 


GERUNDIVE, 
audiendus,  to  be  heard 

PERFECT   PARTICIPLE, 
auditus,  heard 


798.] 


Words:  Inflection. 


THE    DEPONENT    VERB. 

798.  Deponents,  that  is,  verbs  with  passive  person  endings  and  a 
reflexive  or  an  active  meaning  (725),  have  these  active  noun  forms  : 
participles,  the  future  infinitive,  the  gerund,  and  the  supines.  The 
perfect  participle  is  usually  active,  but  sometimes  passive  ;  the  gerun- 
dive always  passive.  The  following  is  a  synopsis  of  deponents  : 


PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

queror,  complain,    queri,    questus       miror,  wonder,    mirari,      miratus 

vereor,/£0r,        vereri,      veritus 

partior,  share,     partiri,     partitus 

I.  -i            II.  (i.)  -Sri       (2.)  -eri           (3.)  -in 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Pres. 

queror 

miror 

vereor 

partior 

Imp. 

querebar 

mirabar 

verebar 

partiebar 

Put. 

querar 

mirabor 

verebor 

partiar 

Perf. 

questus  sum 

miratus  sum 

veritus  sum 

partitus  sum 

Plup. 

questus  eram 

miratus  eram 

veritus  eram      partitus  eram 

P.P. 

questus  ero 

miratus  ero 

veritus  ero          partitus  ero 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Pres. 

querar 

mirer 

verear 

partiar 

Imp. 

quererer 

mirarer 

vererer 

partirer 

Perf. 

questus  sim 

miratus  sim 

veritus  sim 

partitus  sim 

Plup. 

questus     es- 

miratus     es- 

veritus  essem 

partitus     es- 

sem 

sem 

sem 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

querere             |  mirare 

verere 

partire 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres. 

querens 

mirans 

verens 

partiens 

Perf. 

questus 

miratus 

veritus 

partitus 

Put. 

questurus 

miratiarus 

veriturus 

partiturus 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres. 

queri 

mirari 

vereri 

partiri 

Perf. 

questus  esse 

miratus  esse 

veritus  esse 

partitus  esse 

Put. 

questurus  es- 

miraturus es- 

veriturus esse 

partiturus  es- 

se 

se 

se 

GERUND   AND   GERUNDIVE. 

Gen. 

querendi,  &c. 

mirandi,  &c. 

verendi,  &c. 

partiendi,  &c. 

querendus 

mirandus 

verendus 

partiendus 

SUPINE. 

Ace. 

questum 

*miratum 

*veritum 

*partitum 

Abl. 

*questu 

mlratu 

*veritu 

*partitu 

140 


The  Verb:  Periphrastic  Forms.  [799-803. 


799.  Three  deponents  in  -ior,  -I,  gradior,  -walk,  morior,  die,  and  patior, 
suffer,  and  their  compounds,  have  a  present  system  like  the  passive  of  capio  (784). 
But  adgredior  and  progredior  and  morior  and  emorior  have  sometirms  the 
forms  of  verbs  in  -in ;  tor  these,  and  for  orior,  arise,  oriri,  ortus,  and  potior, 
become  master  of,  potiri,  potitus,  see  791.     By  far  the  largest  number  of  deponents 
are  verbs  in  -an,  like  miror,  mirari  (368). 

800.  Some  verbs  waver  between  active  and  passive  person  endings  :  as,  adsentio, 
agree,  adsentire,  and  adsentior,  adsentiri ;  populo,  ravage,  populate,  and 
populor,  popular!:  5661481. 

801.  A  few  verbs  are  deponent  in  the  present  system  only :  as,  devortor,  turn 
in,  perfect  devorti ;  revortor,  turn  back,  perfect  revorti,  but  with  active  perfect 
participle  revorsus.     Four  are  deponent  in  the  perfect  system  only :  fido,  trusf, 
fidere,  fisus,  and  the  compounds,  confido,  diffidS ;  and  audeo,  dare,  audere, 
ausus,  gaudeo,  feel  glad,  ga_udere,  gavisus,  and  soleo,  am  used,  solere, 
solitus.    Most  impersonals  in  -ere  have  both  an  active  and  a  deponent  form  in  the 
perfect  system :  see  815,  8 16. 


PERIPHRASTIC    FORMS. 

802.   (i.)    The  future  active  participle  with  a  form  of  sum  is 
used  to  denote  an  intended  or  future  action  :  as, 

recturus  sum,  I  am  going  to  rule,  intend  to  rule. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Pres. 

recturus  sum,  es,  est 

recturi  sumus,  estis,  sunt 

Imp. 

recturus  eram,  eras,  erat 

recturi  eramus,  eratis,  erant 

Put. 

recturus  ero,  eris,  erit 

recturi  erimus,  eritis,  erunt 

Perf. 

recturus  fui,  fuisti,  fuit 

recturi  fuimus,  fuistis,  fuerunt 

Plup. 

recturus  fueram,  fueras, 

recturi  fueramus,  fueratis,  fue- 

fuerat 

rant 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Pres. 

recturus  sim,  sis,  sit 

recturi  simus,  sitis,  sint 

Imp. 

recturus     essem,    esses, 

recturi  essemus,  essetis,  essent 

esset 

Perf. 

recturus    fuerim,  fueris, 

recturi  fuerimus,  fueritis,  fuerint 

fuerit 

Plup. 

recturus    fuissem,    fuis- 

recturi  fuissemus,  fuissetis,  fu- 

ses,  fuisset 

issent 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres. 

recturus  esse 

Perf. 

recturus  fuisse 

803.  A  future  perfect  is  hardly  ever  used :  as,  fuerit  victurus  (Sen.).  In  the 
imperfect  subjunctive,  forem,  fores,  foret,  and  forent  are  sometimes  used  (Nep., 
Sail,  Liv.,  Veil.)- 

141 


804- 


Words :    Inflection. 


804.  '(2-.)    The  gerundive  with  a  form  of  sum  is  used  to  de- 
note action  which  requires  to  be  done  :  as, 

regendus  sum,  I  am  to  be  ruled,  must  be  ruled. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Singular.                                                       Plural. 

Pres. 

Imp. 
Put. 
Perf. 
Plup. 

regendus  sum,  es,  est 
regendus  eram,  eras,  erat 
regendus  ero,  eris,  erit 
regendus  fui,  fuisti,  fuit 
regendus  fueram,  fueras, 
fuerat 

regendi  sumus,  estis,  sunt 
regendi  eramus,  eratis,  erant 
regendi  erimus,  eritis,  erunt 
regendi  fuimus,  fuistis,  fuerunt 
regendi  fueramus,  fueratis,  fue- 
rant 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD 

Pres. 

Imp. 

regendus  sim,  sis,  sit 
regendus    essem,    esses, 
esset 

regendi  simus,  sitis,  sint 
regendi  essemus,  essetis,  essent 

Perf. 

regendus  fuerim,  fueris, 
merit 

regendi  fuerimus,  fueritis,  fue- 
rint 

Plup. 

regendus  fuissem,  mis- 
ses, fuisset 

regendi  fuissemus,  fuissetis,  m- 
issent 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres. 
Perf. 

regendus  esse 
regendus  fuisse 

DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 

805.  (i.)    Some  verbs  have  only  a  few  forms  :  as, 

inquam,  quoth  I  (760) ;  aio,  avouch  (786).  See  also  apage,  avaunt, 
get  thee  behind  me,  cedo,  give,  tell,  fari,  to  lift  up  one's  voice,  have5  or  av6  and 
salve,  all  hail,  ovat,  triumphs,  and  quaeso,  prtthee,  in  the  dictionary. 

806.  (2.)    Many  verbs  have  only  the  present  system  ;  such  are  : 

807.  (a.)    sum,  am  (745) ;  fero,  carry  (780) ;  fio,  grow,  become  (788). 

808.  (b.)    Some  verbs  in  -ere:  ango,  throttle,  bito,  go,  clango,  sound, 
claudo  or  claude5,  hobble,  fatisco,  gape,  glisco,  wax,  glubo,  peel,  hisco, 
gape,  temno,  scorn,  vado,  go,  vergo,  slope.     Also  many  inceptives  (834) :  as, 
ditesco,  get  rich,  dulcescS,  get  sweet,  &c.,  &c. 

809.  (c.)    Some  verbs  in  -ere:  albeo,  am  while,  aveo,  long,  calveo,  am 
bald,  caneo,  am  gray,  clue5,  am  called,  hight,  flaveo,   am  yellow,  hebeo, 
am  blunt,  immineo,  threaten,  lacteo,  suck,  liveo,  look  dark,  maereo,  mourn, 
polled,  am  strong,  renideo,  am  radiant,  squaleo,  am  scaly,  umeo,  am  wet. 

810.  (d.}    Some  verbs  in  -ire:  balbutio,  sputter,  ferio,  strike,  gannio, 
yelp,  ineptio,  am  a  fool,  superbio,  am  stuck  up,  tussio,  cough.     Also  most 
desideratives  (375). 

142 


The    Verb:    Defective  Verbs.     [811-815. 


811.  Many  verbs  are  not  attended  by  a  perfect  participle,  and 
lack  in  consequence  the  perfect  passive  system,  or,  if  deponent, 
the  perfect  active  system. 

812.  (3.)    Some    verbs   have  only  the   perfect  system  :  so    particularly 
coepi,  have  begun,  began  (120) ;  and  with  a  present  meaning,  odi,  have  come  to 
hate,  hate  ;  and  memini,  have  called  to  mind)  remember.     The  following  is  a 
synopsis  of  these  three  verbs: 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Active.                  Passive.                     Active. 

Active. 

Perf. 

coepi                 coeptus  sum 

odi 

memini 

Pluf. 

coeperam         coeptus  eram 

oderam 

memineram 

P.P. 

coeperS             coeptus  er5 

odero 

meminerS 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Perf. 

coeperim          coeptus  sim 

oderim 

meminerim 

Pluf. 

coepissem       coeptus  essem 

odissem 

meminissem 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

Perf. 



^—  . 

memento,  me- 

mentote 

INFINITIVE. 

Perf. 

coepisse          coeptus  esse 

odisse 

meminisse 

PARTICIPLES. 

Perf. 

coeptus 

Put. 

coepturus                                        dsurus 

813.  A  few  forms  of  the  present  system  of  coepi  occur  in  old  writers:  as, 
coepio  (Plant.),  coepiam  (Caec.,  Cato),  coepiat  (Plant.),  coeperet  (Ter.),  and 
coepere  (Plaut.);  perfect  once  coepit  (Lucr.).    osus  sum  or  fui  (Plant.,  C. 
Gracch.,   Cell.),    exosus   sum   (Verg.,    Sen.,  Curt,  Cell.),  and  perosus   sum 
(Suet.,  Col.,  Quint.),  are  sometimes  used  as  deponents,     memini  is  the  only  verb 
which  has  a  perfect  imperative  active,     odi  and  memini  have  no  passive. 

814.  coepturus  is  rather  rare  and  late  (Liv.  2,  Plin.,  Suet.),  once  as  future 
infinitive  (Quint.);  and  osurus  is  very  rare  (Cic.,  Cell.),    exosus  and  perdsus,  as 
active  participles,  hating  bitterly,  are  not  uncommon  in  writers  of  the  empire ;  the 
simple  osus  is  not  used  as  a  participle. 

815.  (4.)    Impersonal  verbs  have  usually  only  the  third  person 
singular,  and  the  infinitive  present  and  perfect :  as, 

(a.)  pluit,  it  rains,  tonat,  it  thunders,  and  other  verbs  denoting  the 
operations  of  nature,  (b.)  Also  a  few  verbs  in  -ere  denoting  feeling:  as, 
miseret  (or  miseretur,  miserescit),  it  distresses,  miseritum  est ;  paenitet, 
//  repents,  paenituit ;  piget,  it  grieves,  piguit  or  pigitum  est ;  pudet,  /'/ 
shames,  puduit  or  puditum  est ;  taedet,  /'/  is  a  bore,  taesum  est. 


8 1 6-8  2  3.]  Words :    Inflection. 


816.  Some  other  verbs,  less  correctly  called  impersonal,  with  an 
infinitive  or  a  sentence  as  subject,  are  likewise  defective  :  as, 

lubet  or  libet,  /'/  suits,  lubitum  or  libitum  est,  lubuit  or  libuit ;  licet, 
//  is  allowed,  licuit  or  licitum  est ;  oportet,  it  is  proper,  oportuit  ;  re  fert 
or  refert,  it  concerns,  re  ferre  or  referre,  re  tulit  or  retulit.  For  the  imper- 
sonal use  of  the  third  person  singular  passive,  as  pugnatur,  there  is  fighting, 
pugnandum  est,  there  must  be  fighting,  see  724. 

817.  Of  the  impersonals  in  -ere,  some  have  other  forms  besides  the 
third  person  singular  and  the  infinitives  :  as, 

rksome  ; 
lubens  or 
be  it 

allowed  (inscrr.  133-111    B.C."),  licens,  unrestrained,  licitus,  allowable;  gerunds 
pudendum,  pudendo,  pigendum. 


REDUNDANT    VERBS. 

818.  (i.)    Some  verbs  have  more  than  one  form  of  the  present 
stem :  thus, 

819.  (a.)  Verbs  in  -ere  have  rarely  forms  of  verbs  in  -ere  in   the  present 
system:  a?,  abnue5,  nod  no,  abnuebunt  (Enn.),  for  abnuo,  abnuent;  con- 
gruere,  to  agree  (Ter.),  for  congruere.     For  verbs  in  -io,  -ere  (or  -ior,  -I),  with 
forms  of  verbs  in   -ire  (or  -iri),  see  791.    Once  pmsibant  (Enn.). 

820.  (b.)    Some  verbs  in  -are  have  occasionally  a  present  stem  like  verbs 
in  -ere :  as,  lavis,  washest,  lavit,  &c.,  for  lavas,  lavat,  &c.  ;  sonit,  sounds, 
sonunt,  for  sonat,   sonant.     Others  have  occasionally  a  present  stem  like 
verbs  in  -ere  :  as,  denseS,  thicken,  denser!,  for  dense,  densari. 

821.  (c.)   Some  verbs  in  -ere  have  occasionally  a  present  stem  like  verbs 
in  -ere :  as,  fervit,  boils  ^  fervent,  for  fervet,  fervent.     See  also  fulgeo, 
oleo,  scateo,  strideo,  tergeo,  tueor  in  the  dictionary,     cieo,  set  a  going, 
sometimes  has  a  present  stem  in  -ire,  particularly  in  compounds  :  as,  cimus, 
ciunt,  for  ciemus,  cient. 

822.  (d.)    Some  verbs  in  -ire  have  occasionally  a  present  etem  like  verbs 
in  -ere :  as,  evenunt,  turn  out,  for  eveniunt ;  evenat,  evenant,  for  eve- 
niat,  eveniant,  and  advenat,  pervenat,  for  adveniat,  perveniat  (Plaut.). 

823.  (2.)    Some  verbs  have  more  than  one  form  of  the  perfect 
stem  :  as, 

eo,  go,  old  11  (765),  common  ii,  rarely  ivi  (767);  pluit,  it  rains,  pluit, 
sometimes  pluvit.  See  also  pango,  parco,  clepS,  vollo  or  vello,  intellego, 
pono,  necto,  and  adnecto,  saliS  and  Insilio,  applied,  explico  and  implico, 
dimico  and  neco  in  the  dictionary.  Some  compound  verbs  have  a  form  of 
the  perfect  which  is  different  from  that  of  the  simple  verb :  as,  cano,  make 
music,  cecim,  concinui,  occinui ;  pungo,  punch,  pupugi,  compunxi,  ex- 
punxi ;  lego,  pick  up,  legi,  dilexi,  intellexi,  neglexi ;  emo,  take,  buyt  emi 
(ademi,  exemi),  c5mpsi,  dempsi,  prompsi,  sumpsi. 

144 


The  Verb:   Present  Stem.       [824-829. 


FORMATION    OF    STEMS. 


VARIABLE   VOWEL. 

824.  The  final  vowel  of  a  tense  stem  is  said  to  be  variable 
when  it  is  -o-  in  some  of  the  forms,  and  -u-,  -e-,  or  -i-  in 

others. 

825.  The  sign  for  the  variable  vowel  is  -o|e-:  thus,  rego|e-,  which  may 
be  read   'rego-   or   rege-,'   represents  rego-  or  regu-,  rege-  or   regi-, 
as  seen  in  rego-r  or  regu-nt,  rege-re  or  regi-t. 

826.  The  variable  vowel  occurs  in  the  present  of  verbs  in  -ere,  except 
in  the  subjunctive,  in  the  future  in  -bo  or  -bor,  and  in  the  future  perfect, 
as  may  be  seen  in  the  paradigms.     It  is  usually  short ;  but  in  the  active,  o 
is  long :  as,  reg5,  laudabo,  laudavero ;  and  poets  rarely  lengthen  i  in  the 
second  and  third  person  singular  of  the  present.     For  the  future   perfect, 
see  882. 

827.  In  old  Latin,  the  stem  vowel  of  the  third  person  plural  of  the  present  was 
o:  as,  COSENTIONT;  o  was  long  retained  after  v,  u,  or  qu  (107,  c):  as,  vlvont, 
ruont,  sequontur ;    or,  if  o  was  not  retained,  qu  became  C  :  as,  secuntur. 


I.    THE  PRESENT  SYSTEM. 
PRESENT    INDICATIVE    STEM. 

I.     PRIMITIVES. 
(A.)    ROOT   VERBS. 

828.  A  root  without  addition  is  used  as  the  present  stem,  in  the 
present  tense  or  parts  of  the  present  tense,  in  root  verbs  (744-781)  : 
as, 

es-t,  is;  da-t,  gives  ;  inqui-t,  quoth  he  ;  i-t,  goes  ;  nequi-t,  can't ;  es-t, 
eats',  vol-t,  will;  fer-t,  carries.  With  reduplicated  root  (189) :  bibi-t,  drinks', 
seri-t,  sows  ;  sisti-t,  sets. 

(B.)    VERBS   IN  -ere. 

829.  (i.)   The  present  stem  of  many  verbs  in  -ere  is  formed 
by  adding  a  variable  vowel  -°|e.,  which  appears  in  the  first  per- 
son singular  active  as  -6,  to  a  root  ending  in  a  consonant  or  in 
two  consonants :  as, 

PRESENT  STEM.  VERB.  FROM  THEME. 

rego|e_  reg5,  guide  reg- 

vertoje-  verto,  turn  vert- 

10  145 


830-835-]  Words:  Inflection. 


Other  examples  are:  tego,  cover,  peto,  make  for  ;  mergo,  dip,  serpo, 
creep  ;  pendo,  weigh  ;  dic5,  say,  fido,  trust,  scribo,  write,  with  long  I  for  ei 
(98) ;  duc5,  lead,  with  long  u  for  eu,  ou  (100)  ;  ludo,/>/6%  with  long  u  for  oi, 
oe  (99);  laedo,  hit,  claudo,  shut;  rado,  scrape,  cedo,  move  along,  figo,/>, 
Todo,gnaw,  glubo,  fleet.  *furo,  rave  ;  ago,  drive,  alo,  nurture,  gigno,  beget, 
(gen-,  gn-),  has  reduplication,  and  sido,  settle,  light  (sed-,  sd-),  is  also 
tlu  result  of  an  ancient  reduplication  (189). 

830.  In  some  present  stems  an  original  consonant  has  been  modified  : 
as,  ger5,  carry   (ges-),  uro,  burn  (154);  traho,  draw  (tragh-),  veho, 
cait  (152) ;  or  has  disappeared:  as,  fiuo,faw  (f  lugu-). 

831.  Some  roots  in  a  mute  have  a  nasal  before  the  mute  in  the  present 
stem:  as,  frango,  break  (frag-).     Other  examples  are:  iungo,  join,  lin- 
quo,  leave,  pango,  fix,  pingo,  paint;  findo,  cleave,  fund5,  pour  ;  -cumbo, 
lie,  lambo,  lick,  rumpS,  break  (164,  3).     The  nasal  sometimes  runs  over  into 
the  perfect  or  perfect  participle,  or  both. 

832.  (2.)    The  present  stem  of  many  verbs  in  -ere  is  formed 
by  adding  a  suffix  ending  in  a  variable  vowel  •0|e->  which  ap- 
pears in  the  first  person   singular  active  as  -6,  to  a  root :  thus, 
-no,  -sco,  -to,  -io:  as, 

PRESENT  STEM  VERB.  FROM  THEME. 

lino  |  e-  lino,  besmear  li- 

cresco|e-  cresco,  grow  cre- 

pectole-  pecto,  comb  pec- 

capio|e_  capid,  take  cap- 

833.  (a-}  -no  is  added  to  roots  in  a  vowel,  or  in  a  continuous  sound, 
-m-,  -r-,  or  -1-. 

So  regularly  lino,  besmear,  sino,  let;  temno,  scorn,  cerno,  sift,  sperno, 
spurn,  only.  The  third  persons  plural  danunt  (Naev.,  Plaut.)  for  dant,  prodi- 
nunt,  redinunt  (Enn.)  for  prodeunt,  redeunt  hardly  belong  here ;  their  formation 
is  obscure.  In  a  few  verbs,  -n  is  assimilated  (166,  6):  as,  tollo,  lift.  Sometimes 
the  doubled  1  runs  into  the  perfect  (855):  as,  velli,  fefelli.  rninuo,  lessen,  and 
sternuS,  sneeze,  have  a  longer  suffix  -nu°|e-. 

834.  (b.)  -sco,  usually  meaning  'begin  to'  forms  presents  called 
Inceptives  or  Inchoatives. 

-SCO  is  attached :  first,  to  roots :  as,  nascor,  am  born,  nosco,  learn,  pasco, 
feed,  SC1SCO,  resolve  ;  consonant  roots  have  1,  less  commonly  e.  before  the  suffix  :  as, 
tremlsco  or  tremesco,  fall  a-trembling,  nanciscor,  get  (831);  but  discS, 
learn  (170,  i),  and  posc5,  demand  (170,  io),  are  shortened  ;  see  168.  Secondly, 
to  a  form  of  the  present  stem  of  denominative  verbs,  especially  of  those  in  -ere  :  as, 
claresc5,  brighten ;  the  stem  is  often  assumed  only,  as  in  inveterascp,  grow 
old,  maturesbo,  get  ripe.  Manv  inceptives  are  used  only  in  composition:  as, 
extimescS,  get  scared,  obdormisco,  drop  asleep. 

835.  (c. )  -to   occurs   in   the   following   presents   from   guttural   roots :    flecto, 
turn,  necto,  string,  pectp   comb,  plector,  am  struck,  amplector,  hug,  com- 
plector,  clasp.     From  a  lingual  root  vid-,  comes  vis«3,  go  to  see,  call  on  (153). 
From  vowel  roots :  beto  or  bito,  go,  and  meto,  mow. 

146 


The  Verb:    Present  Stem.       [836-841. 


836.  (</.)  -16  is  usually  added  to  consonant  roots  with   a  short 
vowel  ;  the  following  have  presents  formed  by  this  suffix  : 

capio,  take,  cupio,  -want,  facio,  make,  fpdi5,  dig,  fugio,  run  atvay,  iacio, 
tkrorv,  parid,  bring  forth,  quatio,  shake,  rapio,  seize,  sapio,  have  sense,  and  their 
compounds ;  the  compounds  of  *lacio,  lure,  and  SpeciS  or  spicio,  spy,  and  the 
deponents  gradior,  step,  morior,  die,  and  patior,  suffer,  and  their  compounds.  For 
occasional  forms  like  those  of  verbs  in  -ire  (or  -iri),  see  791.  For  aio,  see  786;  for 
fio,  788. 

837.  A  few  present  stems  are  formed  by  adding  a  variable  vowel  -°le-> 
for  an  older  -i°  |e-,  to  a  vowel  root :  as, 

ruo,  tumble  down,  rui-s,  rui-t,  rui-mus,  rui-tis,  ruu-nt(ii4).  Vowel 
roots  in  -a-,  -e-,  or  -i-  have  a  present  stem  like  that  of  denominatives :  as,  sto, 
stand,  sta-s,  sta-t,  sta-mus,  sta-tis,  sta-nt ;  fle5,  -weep,  fle-s,  fle-t,  fle- 
mus,  fle-tis,  fle-nt ;  neo,  spin,  has  once  neu-nt  for  ne-nt  (Tib.)  ;  scio,  know, 
sci-s,  sci-t,  sci-mus,  sci-tis,  sciu-nt. 

838.  Most  present  stems  formed  by  adding  the  suffix  -io  to  a  root  end- 
ing in  -1-,  -r-,  or  -n-,  and  all  formed  by  adding  -io  to  a  long  syllable,  have 
the  form  of  denominatives  in  -ire  in  the  present  system:  as,  salio,  leap,  sa- 
Hre,  aperio,  open,  aperire,  venio,  come,  venire  ;  farcio,  cram,  farcire. 

II.     DENOMINATIVES. 

839.  The  present  stem  of  denominatives  is  formed  by  attach- 
ing a  variable  vowel  -°|e-,  for  an  older  -iolie-,  to  a  theme  consist- 
ing of  a  noun  stem :  as, 

UNCONTRACTED  PRESENT  STEM.  VERB.  FROM  THEME. 

cenao|e.  cen5,  dine  cena- 

floreo]e-  floreo,  blossom  flore- 

vestio|e-  vestio,  dress  vesti- 

acuo|e.  acu5,  point  acu- 

The  noun  stem  ending  is  often  slightly  modified  in  forming  the  theme :  thus, 
laud-  becomes  lauda-  in  laudS  for  *lauda-5,  and  flor-  becomes  flore-  in 
flore-6. 

840.  In  many  of  the  forms,  the  final  vowel  of  the  theme  is  con- 
tracted with  the  variable  vowel :  as, 

plants,  plantas  (118,  3)  for  *plantaio,  *plantaies  (153,  2);  mones  for 
*moneies  (118,  i),  audis  for  *audiies  (118,  3).  The  long  a,  e,  or  I,  is  regu- 
larly shortened  in  some  of  the  forms  :  as,  scit,  arat,  habet,  for  Plautine 
scit,  arat,  habet.  In  a  few  forms  no  contraction  occurs :  as,  moneo, 
audio,  audiu-nt,  audie-ntis,  &c.,  audie-ndus,  &c.  (114).  Denominatives 
from  stems  in  -u-,  as  acuo,  are  not  contracted,  and  so  have  the  forms  of 
verbs  in  -ere  (367). 

PRESENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

841.  The  suffix  of  the  present  subjunctive  of  sum,  am,  is  -1-,  which  becomes  -i- 
before  -m,  -t,  and  -nt :  si-m,  si-s,  si-t,  si-mus,  si-tis,  si-nt  (35,  2,  3).^    So 
also  in  the  singular  and  in  the  third  person  plural,  dui-m,  &c.  (756),  "and  edi-m, 
&c.  (769),  and  in  all  the  persons,  veli-m,  &c.  (noli-m,  &c.,  mali-m,  &c.).     An 
old  suffix  is  -ie-  (-ie-),  in  sie-m,  sie-s,  sie-t,  and  sie-nt. 

147 


842-849-]  Words:  Inflection. 


842.  (i.)    The  present  subjunctive  stem  of  verbs  in    -ere, 
-ere,  and  -ire,  ends  in  -a-,  which  becomes  -a-  in  some  of  the 
persons;    this  suffix  replaces  the  variable  vowel  of  the  indica- 
tive :  as, 

rega-m,  rega-s,  rega-t,  rega-mus,  rega-tis,  rega-nt  ;  capia-m, 
capia-s,  &c. ;  monea-m,  monea-s,  &c;  audia-m,  audia-s,  &c.  ea-m, 
quea-m,  fera-m,  and  the  old  fua-m  (750),  also  have  the  formative  sub- 
junctive vowel. 

843.  (2.)  The  present  subjunctive  stem  of  verbs  in  -are  ends 
in  -e-,  which  becomes  -e-  in  some  of  the  persons :  as, 

laude-m,  laude-s,  laude-t,  laude-mus,  laude-tis,  laude-nt.  do,  give, 
also  has  de-m,  de-s,  &c. 

IMPERATIVE. 

844.  Root  verbs  have  a  root  as  imperative  stem  (745-780) :  as,  es,  &c., 
f er,  &c.    But  the  imperative  of  nol5  has  a  stem  in  -i-,  like  verbs  in  -Ire :  thus, 
noli,  noli-to,  n51I-te,  noil-tote. 

845.  The  imperative  stem  of  verbs  in  -ere,  and  of  verbs  in 
-are,  -ere,  and  -ire,  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  indicative:  as, 

rege,  regi-to,  regu-nto,  rege-re  ;  cape,  capi-to,  capiu-nto;  fi;  lauda, 
&c. ;  mone,  &c. ;  audi,  &c. 

846.  The  second  person  singular  imperative  active  of  dico,  duco,   and 
facie,  is  usually  die,  due,  and  fac,  respectively,  though  the  full  forms,  dice, 
&c.,  are  also  used,  and  are  commoner  in  old  Latin.      Compounds  of  duco 
may  have  the  short  form  :  as,  educ.     ingero  has  once  inger  (Catull.).     sci5 
has  regularly  the  singular  sci-to,  plural  sci-tote,  rarely  sci-te. 

IMPERFECT    INDICATIVE. 

847.  The  imperfect  indicative  stem  ends  in  -ba-,  which  be- 
comes -ba-  in  some  of  the  persons :  as, ' 

daba-m,  daba-s,  daba-t,  daba-mus,  daba-tis,  daba-nt ;  iba-m ; 
quiba-m.  In  verbs  in  -ere  and  -ere,  the  suffix  is  preceded  by  a  form 
ending  in -e- :  as,  regeba-m ;  moneba-m;  so  also  voleba-m  (noleba-m, 
maleba-m),  and  fereba-rn  ;  in  verbs  in  -io,  -ere,  and  in  -io,  -ire,  by  a  form 
ending  in  -ie- :  as,  capieba-m  ;  audieba-m  ;  in  verbs  in  -are,  by  one  end- 
ing in  -a-  :  as,  laudaba-m.  Inverse,  verbs  in  -ire  sometimes  have  -i-  before 
the  suffix  (Plaut.,  Ter.,  Catull.,  Lucr.,  Verg.,  &c.) :  as,  audiba-t.  aio,  say, 
has  sometimes  aiba-m,  &c.  (787). 

848.  The  suffix  of  the  imperfect  indicative  of  sum,  am,  is  -a-,  which  becomes  -a- 
before  -m,  -t,  and  -nt  (35,  2,  3)  the  s  becomes  r  between  the  vowels  (154)  :  era-m, 
era-s,  era-t,  era-mus,  era-tis,  era-nt. 

IMPERFECT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

849.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  stem  ends  in  -re-,  which  be- 
comes -re-  in  some  of  the  persons  :  as, 

148 


The  Verb:  Perfect  Stem.        [850-856. 


dare-m,  dare-s,  dare-t,  dare-mus,  dare-tis,  dare-nt ;  ire-m,  fore-m, 
ferre-m.  In  verbs  in  -ere,  the  -re-  is  preceded  by  a  form  ending  in  -e- :  as, 
regere-m,  capere-m ;  in  verbs  in  -are,  -ere,  and  -ire,  by  one  ending  in  -a-, 
-e-,  or -I-,  respectively :  as,  laudare-m,  monere-m,  audire-m. 

850.  The  suffix  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of  sum,  am,  is  -se-,  which 
becomes  -se-  in  some  of  the  persons;  esse-m,  esse-s,  esse-t,  esse-mus, 
esse-tis,  esse-nt ;  so  also  esse-s,  &c.  (769).  volo,  wish,  nolo,  won't,  and 
malo,  prefer,  have  velle-m,  nolle-m,  and  malle-m  respectively  (166,  8.) 


FUTURE. 

851.  The  future  stem  of  sum,  am,  is  er°|e-:   ero,  eri-s,  eri-t,  eri-mus, 
eri-tis,  eru-nt.    do  has  dabo,  eo  has  ibo,  and  qued  has  quibo. 

852.  (i.)  The  future  stem  of  verbs  in  -ere  and  -ire  ends  in 
-a-  in  the  first  person  singular,  otherwise  in  -e-,  which  becomes 
-e-  in  some  of  the  persons  :  as, 

rega-m,  rege-s,  rege-t,  rege-mus,  rege-tis,  rege-nt;  capia-m, 
capie-s,  &c. ;  audia-m,  audie-s,  &c.  The  first  person  singular  is  not  a 
future  form,  but  the  subjunctive  present,  used  with  a  future  meaning  (842) ; 
forms  in  -em  occur  in  manuscripts  of  Plautus  :  as,  faciem,  sinem.  Verbs  in 
-ire  sometimes  have  -b°le-,  chiefly  in  the  dramatists :  as,  scibo,  opperibo-r 
(Plaut.,  Ter.),  lenibu-nt  (Prop.)  ;  rarely  verbs  in  -ere  (819)  :  as,  exsugebo 
(Plaut.).  For  reddibS,  instead  of  the  usual  reddam,  see  757. 

853.  (2.)  The  future  stem  of  verbs  in  -are  and  -ere  ends  in 
-b°|e-,  which  is  preceded  by  a  form  ending  in  long  -a-  or  -e- 
respectively  :  as, 

laudabo,  laudabi-s,  laudabi-t,  laudabi-mus,  laudabi-tis,  laudabu-nt. 
monebo,  monebi-s,  &c. 


II.    THE   PERFECT   SYSTEM. 
PERFECT     INDICATIVE    STEM. 

854.  There  are  two  kinds  of  perfect  stems :  (A.)  Some  verbs 
have  as  perfect  stem  a  root,  generally  with  some  modification, 
but  without  a  suffix  (858-866).     (B.)   Some  perfects  are  formed 
with  a  suffix,  -s-,  or  -v-  or  -u-  (867-875). 

855.  Some  perfects  of  primitives  are  formed  not  from  a  root,  but  from  the  present 
stem  without  the  formative  vowel,  treated  as  a  root :    as,  prehendl,  seized,  from 
prehend-  (866) ;  poposci,  asked,  fefelli,  deceived  (858) ;  iunxi,  joined  (867). 

856.  The  first  person  of  the  perfect  ends  in  -i,  sometimes  written  ei 
(29,  2).     -t,  -sti,  sometimes  written  -stei  (29,  2),  -stis,  and  -mus  are 
preceded  by  short  i ;  -re  is  always,  and  -runt  is  usually,  preceded  by 
long  e :  as, 

rexi,  rexi-sti,  rexi-t,  rexi-mus,  rexi-stis,  rexe-runt  (rexe-runt),  or 
rexe-re. 

149 


857-862]  Words:  Inflection. 


857.  Sometimes  -t  is  preceded  by  long  i :  as,  lit,  petiit,  REDIEIT  (29,  2). 
-runt  is  sometimes   preceded  by  short  e  (Plaut.,  Ter.,   Lucr.,    Hor.,    Ov., 
Verg.,  Phaedr.).     This  is  the  original  form;  -e-  is  by  analogy  to  -ere. 

(A.)   PERFECT   STEM    WITHOUT    A   SUFFIX. 

858.  (i.)  Some  verbs   in  -ere    form    their   perfect   stem    by 
prefixing  to  the   root   its   initial  consonant  with   the  following 
vowel,  which,  if  a,  is  usually  represented  by  e  ;  this  is  called 
the   Reduplicated  Perfect,  and    the   first  syllable    is   called    the 
Reduplication :  as, 

PERFECT  STEM.  VERB.  FROM  THEME. 

pu-pug-  pungo,  punch  p  u  g- 

pe-pig-  pango,/*  pag- 

Other  examples  are  :  cado,/^//,  cecidi  (c  a  d-,  104,  c]  ;  pario,  bring  forth, 
peperi  (par-,  104,  c)  ;  pello,  push,  pepuli  (pol-,  105,  h)  ;  posco,  demand, 
poposci  (855) ;  falls,  deceive,  fefelli  (855,  104,  c) ;  see  also  923-932.  caedo, 
cut,  has  cecidi  ( 108,  a) ;  and  a  few  old  forms  are  quoted  from  verbs  having 
an  o  or  an  u  in  the  root  with  e  in  the  reduplication :  as,  memordl,  pepugl. 

859.  Four  verbs  with  vowel  roots  also  have  a  reduplicated  perfect  stem  : 
do,  give,  put,  dare,  dedl ;  bibo,  drink,  bibere,  bibi ;  sto,  stand,  stare,  steti, 
and  sisto,  set,  sistere,  -stiti,  rarely  stiti.      Also  four  verbs  in  -ere  :  mordeo, 
bite,  momordi,  pendeS,  hang,  pependi,  spondeo,  promise,  spopondi,  ton- 
de5,  clip,  -totondi.     In  the  root  syllable  of  spopondi,  promised,  steti,  stood, 
stiti,  set,  and  the  old  scicidi,  clove,  an  s  is  dropped  (173,  2). 

860.  In  compounds  the  reduplication  is  commonly  dropped:  as, 

cecidi,  fell,  compound  concidi,  tumbled  down.  Compounds  of  cucurri,  ran, 
sometimes  retain  the  reduplication  :  as,  procucurri.  Compounds  of  bibi,  drank, 
didici,  learned,  poppsci,  asked,  stiti,  set,  steti,  stood,  and  dedi,  gave,  put,  retain 
it,  the  last  two  weakening  e  to  i  :  as,  restiti,  staid  back,  abscondidi,  hid  away, 
usually  becomes  abscondi  ;  in  apparent  compounds,  e  is  usually  retained :  as,  circum 
Steti,  stood  round,  venum  dedi,  put  for  sale.  The  reduplication  is  also  lost  in 
the  simple  verbs  tuli,  carried,  old  tetuli,  and  in  scindo,  split,  scidi,  which  last 
is  rare  as  a  simple  verb. 

861.  Some  compounds  with  re-  drop  only  the  vowel  of  the  reduplication  (in,  a) : 
as,  reccidi,  fell  back;  rettuli,  brought  back  (see  also  781) ;  repperi,  found ;  ret- 
tudi,  beat  back.     Some  perfects  occur  only  in  composition:  as,  percellp,  knock 
down,  perculi ;  contundo,  smash  to  pieces,  cpntudi ;  diffind5,  split  apart, 
diffidl ;  but  fidi  also  occurs  a  couple  of  times  as  a  simple  verb. 

862.  (2.)  Some  verbs  in  -ere  have  a  perfect  stem  consisting 
of  a  consonant  root  with  a  long  vowel  (135,  i)  :  as, 

PERFECT  STEM.  VERB.  FROM  THEME. 

ed-  edo,  eat  e  d- 

leg-  lego,  pick  up,  read  1  e  g- 

Other  examples  are  :  fodio,  dig^  fodi ;  fundo,  potir,  fudl ;  linquo,  leave, 
liqui;  see  936-946.  Three  verbs  in  -ere  also  have  this  form,  sedeo,  sit, 
sedi,  strided,  grate,  stridi,  videS,  see,  vidi ;  and  one  in  -ire,  venio,  come, 
veni. 


The  Verb:  Perfect  Stem.       [863-868. 

863.  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  with  a  in  the  present  stem,  have  long 
5  in  the  perfect  stem  (145): 

ago,  do,  eg!,  frango,  break,  fregi,  pango,  fix,  rarely  peg!,  but  always 
compegi,  impegl,  oppegi;  capio,  take,  cepi,  facio,  make,  fee!,  iacio, 
thro-w,  ieci.  So  also  the  old  co-epi,  began,  common  coepl. 

864.  Two  verbs  in  -are  and  some  in  -ere  have  a  perfect  stem  consisting  of  a  root 
which  ends  in  -v-  and  has  a  long  vowel :,   iuvo,  help,   iuvare,  iuvi,  lavo,  -wash, 
lavare  or  lavere,  lavi;  caveo,  look  out,  cavere,  cavi;  see  996. 

865.  Verbs  in  -uo,  -uere,  both  primitives  and  denominatives,  have  usually  a  per- 
fect stem  in  short  u  of  the  theme  (124):  as,  luo./a.y,  lui ;  acuo,  sharpen,  acui : 
see  947,  948.     Forms  with  long  u  are  old  and  rare  (126) :  as,  fui,  adnui,  constitiil, 
institui.    flu5,  flow,  and  struo,  pile,  have  fluxi  and  struxi  (830). 

866.  (3.)  Some  verbs  in  -ere  from  roots  ending  in  two  con- 
sonants have  a  perfect  stem  consisting  of  the  root :  as, 

PERFECT  STEM.  VERB.  FROM  THEME. 

mand-  mando,  chew  m  a  n  d- 

pand-  pando,  open  p  a  n  d- 

Other  examples  are:  vorto  or  verto,  tttrn,vorti  or  verti;  scando,  climb, 
-scendi;  prehendo,  seize,  prehendi  (855);  voll5  or  vello,  pluck,  volli  or 
velli;  see  949-951.  Similarly  ferveo,  boil,  fervere  or  fervere,  has  fervl 
or  ferbui  (823),  and  prandeo,  lunch,  prandere,  has  prandi. 


(B.)     PERFECT   STEM   IN   -S-,   OR  IN   -V-  OR   -U-. 
PERFECT   STEM    IN   -S-. 

867.  Many  verbs  in  -ere  form  their  perfect  stem  by  adding 
the  suffix  -s-  to  a  root,  which  generally  ends  in  a  mute  :   as, 

PERFECT  STEM  VERB.  .FROM  THEME. 

carp-s-  carpo,  pluck  carp- 

scalp-s  scalpS,  dig  scalp- 

ges-s-  gero,  bear  ges- 

dix-  dic5,  say  d  I  c- 

Other  examples  are:  duco,  lead,  dux!  (100) ;  fingo,  mould,  finxi  (855) ; 
ludo,  play,  lusi  (166,2);  scribo  write,  scrips!  (164,  i);  struo,  pile,  struxi 
(164,  i) ;  vivo,  live,  vixi  (98).  Some  verbs  with  a  short  vowel  in  the  present, 
have  a  long  vowel  in  the  perfect:  as,  rego,  guide,  rex!  (135);  intellegS, 
understand,  intellexi  (823) ;  tego,  cover,  texi;  iung5,/<w>*,  iunx!  (855).  And 
some  verbs  with  a  long  vowel  in  the  present,  have  a  short  vowel  in  the  per- 
fect:  as,  uro,  burn,  ussi  (830).  See  952-961. 

868.  Some  verbs  in  -ere  also  have  a  perfect  in  -s-  :  as  algeo,  am  cold, 
alsi  (170,  3);  haereo,  stick,  haesi  (166,  2):  see  999,  1000.     Also  some  in 
-ire:  as,  sarci5,/a/c/z,  sarsi  (170,3):   see  1014,  1015. 


869-876.]  Words:  Inflection. 


PERFECT   STEM    IN   -V-   OR  -U-. 

869.  (i.)  Some  verbs  in  -ere,  with  vowel  roots,  and  almost 
all  verbs  in  -are  or  -ire,  form  their  perfect  stem  by  adding  the 
suffix  -v-  to  a  theme  ending  in  a  long  vowel :  as, 

PERFECT  STEM.  VERB.  FROM  THEME. 

cre-v-  cresco,  grow                           c  r  e- 

lauda-v-  laudS,  praise                            lauda- 

audl-v-  audio,  hear                              audi- 

For  other  verbs  in  -ere  with  a  perfect  stem  in  -v-,  and  particularly  ter5, 
cerno,  sperno,  and  sternS,  see  962-970. 

'  870.  A  few  verbs  in  -ere  nave  a  perfect  stem  in  -v-  attached  to  a  presumed 
theme  in  long  i:  as,  cupiS,  -want,  cupivi;  peto,  aim  at,  petivi;  quaere, 
inquire,  quaesivi ;  arcesso,  fetch,  arcessivi ;  see  966-970. 

871.  A  few  verbs  in  -ere  also  have  a  perfect  stem  in  -v-  :  as,  fleo,  weep,  flere, 
flevi;  see  1001-1003.      And  three  verbs  in  -escere  have  a  perfect  stem  in  -v- 
attached  to  a  presumed  theme  in  long  e  :    -olesc5,  grow,  -olevi;   quiesco,  get 
quiet,  quievi  ;  suescS,  get  used,  suevi. 

872.  One  verb  in  -ascere  has  a  perfect  stem  in  -v-  attached  to  a  presumed  theme 
.in  long  a:  advesperascit,  it  gets  dusk,  advesperavit. 

873.  (2.)  Many  verbs   in  -ere  form  their  perfect  stem  by 
adding  the  suffix  -u-  to  a  consonant  root :  as, 

PERFECT  STEM.  VERB.  FROM  THEMB. 

al-u-  alo,  nurture  al- 

gen-u-  gigno,  beget  g  e  n- 

Other  examples  are  :  colo,  cultivate,  colui ;  consuls,  consult,  consulul ; 
-cumbo,  lie,  -cubui ;  fremo,  roar,  fremui;  elicio,  draw  out,  elicui;  mol5, 
grind,  molui ;  rapio,  snatch,  rapui ;  sero,  string,  -serul ;  sterto,  snore, 
-stertui ;  strep5,  make  a  racket,  strepui ;  texo,  weave,  texui  ;  volo,  will, 
volui ;  compesco,  check,  compescui  (855) ;  see  971-976. 

874.  Some  verbs  in  -are  also  have  a  perfect  stem  in  -u- :  as,  crepo, 
rattle,  crepare,  crepui  (993)  ;  and  many  in  -ere  :  as,  moneS,  warn,  monere, 
monui :  see  1004-1006 ;  also  four  in  -ire  :  as,  salio,  leap,  salire,  salui  ( 1019). 

875.  The  perfect  potu!  to  the  present  possum  (751)  is  from  a  lost  present 
*poteo,  *potere  (922).     ponere  (for  *po-sinere,  112;  170,2)  forms  an  old  per- 
fect posivi  (964),  later  posui,  as  if  pos-  were  the  stem. 


PERFECT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

876.  The  perfect  subjunctive  stem  ends  in  -eri-,  for  which 
-eri-  is  sometimes  used  (35,  2,  3)  :  as, 

rexeri-m,  rexeri-s,  rexeri-t,  rexeri-mus,  rexeri-tis,  rexeri-nt. 


The  Verb:    Perfect  Stem.        [877-886. 


877.  In  the  perfect  subjunctive,  long  I  is  found  before  the  person  endings 
-s,  -mus,  and  -tis,  some  25  times,  as  follows:  -is,  18  times  (Plaut.  3,  Pac., 
Enn.,    Ter.,    Hor.,  Tib.,    Sen.,   inscr.,    once   each,  Ov.  8),    -imus,  4  times 
(Plaut.  3,  Ter.  i),  -itis,  3  times  (Plaut.  2,  Enn.  i). 

878.  In  the  perfect  subjunctive,  short  i  is  found,  as  in  the  future  perfect,  some  9 
times,  thus:    -is,  8    times   (Plaut.  in  anapests  3,  Verg.  2,  Hor.  3),    -imus   once 
(Verg.).     But  before  -tis,  short  i  is  not  found. 

PERFECT    IMPERATIVE. 

879.  One  verb  only,   memini,  remember,  has  a  perfect    imperative ;     in   this 
imperative,  the  person  endings  are  not  preceded   by  a  vowel,  thus  :    memen-to, 
memen-tote. 

PLUPERFECT   INDICATIVE. 

880.  The  pluperfect  indicative  stem  ends  in  -era-,  which  be- 
comes -era-  in  some  of  the  persons  :  as, 

rexera-m,  rexera-s,  rexera-t,  rexera-mus,  rexera-tis,  rexera-nt. 
PLUPERFECT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

881.  The  pluperfect  subjunctive  stem  ends  in  -isse-,  which 
becomes  -isse-  in  some  of  the  persons:  as, 

rexisse-m,  rexisse-s,  rexisse-t,  rexisse-mus,  rexisse-tis,  rexisse-nt. 
FUTURE    PERFECT. 

882.  The  future  perfect  stem  ends  in  -ero-  and  -eri- :  as, 
rexer5,  rexeri-s,  rexeri-t,  rexeri-mus,  rexeri-tis,  rexeri-nt. 

883.  In  the  future  perfect,  short  i  is  found  before  the  person  endings 
-s,  -mus,  and  -tis,  some  40  times,  as  follows  :  -is,  29  times  (Plaut.  2,  Cic.  i, 
Catull.  i,  Verg.  7,  Hor.  12,  Ov.  4,  Germ,  i,  Juv.  i);  -imus,  3  times  (Plaut., 
Ter.,  Lucr.) ;  -itis,  8  times  (Enn.  i,  Plaut.  5,  Ov.  2). 

884.  In  the  future  perfect,  long  i  is  found,  as  in  the  perfect  subjunctive,  some 
•33  times,  thus  :  -is,  28  times  (Plaut.  3,  Hor.  5,  Ov.  15,  Prop.,  Stat.,  Mart.,  Priap., 
inscr.,  once  each),  -imus,  once  (Catull.),  -itis,  4  times  (Ov.  3,  Priap.  i). 


SHORT   OR   OLD   FORMS. 

885.  (i.)   Some  shorter  forms  in  the  perfect  system  are  prin- 
cipally found  in  old  Latin. 

886.  (#.)   Shorter  forms  in  the  perfect   indicative,   the   pluperfect   sub- 
junctive, and  the  infinitive,  most  of  them  from  perfects  in  -s-  (867),  occur 
chiefly  in  verse  :  thus, 

Perfect  indicative,  second  person  singular,  common:  as,  dixti  (Plaut.,  Ter.,  Cic.); 
plural,  rare:  as,  accestis  (Verg.).  Pluperfect  subjunctive  singular,  not  very  com- 
mon: as,  exstinxem  (Verg.),  mtellexes  (Plaut.),  vixet  (Verg.);  plural,  once 
only,  erepsemus  (Hor.).  Infinitive,  dixe  (Plaut.),  consumpse  (Lucr.). 


887-893-]  Words:  Inflection. 


887.  (b.)  A  perfect  subjunctive  stem  in  -si-  or  in  -ssi-,  and  a  future  per- 
fect  indicative  stem  in  -so|e-  or  in  -sso|e-,  occur  chiefly  in  old  laws  and 
prayers,  and  in  dramatic  verse  :  as, 

Perfect  subjunctive  :  faxim,  faxis,  FAXSEIS  (inscr.  145  B.C.),  faxit,  faximus, 
faxitis,  faxint;  ausim,  ausis,  ausit  ;  locassim,  amassis,  servassit, 
amassint,  prohibessis,  prohibessit,  cohibessit,  licessit. 

Future  perfect  indicative  :  fax5,  faxis,  faxit,  faxitis,  capsp,  recepso^usso, 
occisit,  capsimus  ;  leyasso,  invitassitis,  mulcassitis,  exoculassitis, 
prohibessis,  prohibessint.  Denominatives  in  -are  have  also,  in  old  Latin,  a 
future  perfect  infinitive  :  as,  impetrassere. 

888.  Passive    inflections,  as  future    perfect    faxitur,   turbassitur,  deponent 
MERCASSITVR   (inscr.  in  B.C.),  are   very   rare;  and,  indeed,  with  the   exception   of 
faxo  and  ausim,  even  the  active  forms  had  become  antiquated  by  150  B.C.     De- 
nominatives  in  -ire    never  have  the  above  formations.       But  ambio,  canvass,  is 
thought  to  have  a  future  perfect  ambissit  twice  (Plaut.  prol.). 

889.  (2.)   Shortened  forms  from  perfect  stems  formed  by  the 
suffix  -v-  (869)  are  very  common  in  all  periods. 

890.  (a.}  In  tenses  formed  from  perfect  stems  in  -av-,  -ev-,  and 
-ov-,  v  is  often  dropped  before  -is-,  -er-,  or  -er-,  and  the  vowels  thus 
brought  together  are  contracted  (153,1):  as, 

laudavisti,  laudasti  ;  laudavistis,  laudastis  ;  laudaverunt,  laudarunt 
(but  the  form  in  -re,  as  laudavere,  is  never  contracted)  ;  laudaverim, 
laudarim,  &c.  ;  laudaveram,  laudaram,  &c.  ;  laudavissem,  laudassem, 
&c.  ;  laudavero,  laudaro,  &c.  ;  laudavisse,  laudasse. 

-plevisti,  -plesti  ;  -p_levistis,  -plestis  ;  -pleverunt,  -plerunt  ;  pleve- 
rim,  -plerim,  &c.  ;  -pleveram,  -pleram,  &c.  ;  -plevissem,  -plessem, 
&c.  ;  -plevero,  -plero,  &c.  ;  -plevisse,  -plesse. 

novisti,  nosti;  novistis,  nostis;  noverunt,  norunt;  noverim,  no- 
rim,  &c.  ;  noveram,  noram,  &c.  ;  novissem,  nossem,  &c.  ;  novero 
always  retains  the  v,  but  cognoro,  &c.  ;  novisse,  nosse. 


891.  The  verbs  in  which  v  belongs  to  the  root  (864),  are  not  thus  shortened, 
except  moveo,  mostly  in  compounds.  From  iuv5,  iuerint  (Catull.),  adiuerS 
(Enn.),  once  each,  and  twice  adiuerit  (Plaut.,  Ter.)  are  unnecessary  emendations. 


892.  Contractions  in  the  perfect  before  -t  and  -mus  are  rare:   as,  inritat, 
disturbat  ;  suemus  or  suemus  (Lucr.),  nomus  (Enn.),  consuemus(Prop.). 

893.  (^.)  In  tenses  formed  from  perfect  stems  in  -iv-,  v  is  often 
dropped  before  -is-,  -er-,  or  -er-  ;  but  contraction  is  common  only 
in  the  forms  which  have  -is-  :  as, 

audivisti,  audisti  ;  audivistis,  audistis  ;  audiverunt,  audierunt  ; 
audiverim,  audierim,  &c.  ;  audiveram,  audieram,  &c.  ;  audivissem, 
audissem,  &c.  ;  audivero,  audierS,  &c.  ;  audivisse,  audlsse.  Sometimes 
audii,  audiit,  audit.  Intermediate  between  the  long  and  the  short  forms 
are  audieras  and  audierit,  once  each  (Ter.).  In  the  perfect  subjunctive, 
sino  has  siveris  (Plaut.,  Cato),  sins  (Plaut.,  Cato,  Liv.),  sireis  (Pac.),  or 
seiris  (Plaut.),  sirit  (Plaut.,  Liv.),  siritis  (Plaut.),  siverint  (Plaut.,  Curt.), 
sierint  (Cic.,  Curt.),  or  sirint  (Plaut.).  desino  is  thought  to  have  desimus 
in  the  perfect  indicative  a  couple  of  times  (Sen.,  Plin.  Ep.)- 

154 


The  Verb  :  Nouns  of 'the  Verb.  [894-901. 


NOUNS    OF    THE    VERB. 

INFINITIVE. 

894.  The  active  infinitive  has  the  ending  -re  in  the  present, 
and  -isse  in  the  perfect :  as, 

dare  ;  regere,  capere  ;  laudare,  monere,  audire.  rexisse ;  laudavisse 
or  laudasse,  monuisse,  audivisse  or  audisse. 

895.  For  -re -in  old  Latin,  see  134,  2.     The  infinitive  of  fio,  become,  ends  in  -ri, 
fieri,  with  a  passive  ending  (789)  ;  twice  fiere  (Enn.  Laev.).    An  older  form  for  -re 
is  -se,  found  in  esse,  to  be,  esse,  to  eat,  and  their  compounds.     For  velle,  to  -wish 
(malle,  nolle),  see  166,  8.     In  the  perfect,  eo,  go,  sometimes  has  -iisse  in  com- 
pounds (766),  and  in  poetry,  peto,  go  to,  has  rarely  petiisse. 

896.  The  present  infinitive  passive  of  verbs  in  -ere  has  the 
ending  -I ;  that  of  other  verbs  has  -ri :  as, 

regi,  capi ;  laudari,  moneri,  audiri.  fero,  carry,  has  ferri.  The  length 
of  the  I  is  sometimes  indicated  by  the  spelling  ei  (29,  2)  :  as,  DAREI. 

897.  A  longer  form  in  -ier  for  -I,  and  -rier  for  -ri,  is  common  in  old  laws 
and  dramatic  verse,  and  occurs  sometimes  in  other  poetry :  as,  FIGIER,  to  be  posted, 
GNOSCIER,  to  be  read  (inscr.  186  B.C.)  ;  dicier,  to  be  said,  curarier,  to  be  looked 
after  (Plaut.) ;   dominarier,  to  be  lord  paramount  (Verg.). 

898.  The  place  of  the  perfect  passive,  future  active,  and  future  passive  infinitive 
is  supplied  by  a  circumlocution,  as  seen  in  the  paradigms.     For  the  future  perfect 
-assere,  see  887. 

GERUNDIVE   AND   GERUND. 

899.  The  gerundive  stem  is  formed  by  adding  -ndo-,  nom- 
inative -ndus,  -nda,  -ndum,  to  the  present  stem  :  as, 

dandus,  stem  dando-  ;  regendus,  capiendus  ;  laudandus,  monendus, 
audiendus.  Verbs  in  -ere  and  -ire  often  have  -undus,  when  not  preceded 
by  u  or  v,  especially  in  formal  style :  as,  capiundus ;  e5,  go,  always  has 
eundum,  and  orior,  rise,  oriundus.  For  the  adjective  use,  see  288.  The 
gerund  is  ^ike  the  oblique  cases  of  the  neuter  singular.  For  -bundus,  see 
289 ;  -cundus,  290. 

SUPINE. 

900.  The  supine  stem  is  formed  by  the  suffix   -tu-,  which 
is  often  changed  to  -su-  (912). 

This  suffix  is  attached  to  a  root  or  to  a  form  of  the  present  stem  after 
the  manner  of  the  perfect  participle  (906) :  as,  nuntiatum,  to  report,  nun- 
tiatu,  in  reporting,  stem  nuntiatu-.  Many  of  the  commonest  verbs  have 
no  supine:  as,  sum,  eo,  fero;  rego,  emo,  tego;  amo,  deleo,  doceo, 

&c.,  &c. 

PRESENT   PARTICIPLE. 

901.  The  present  participle  stem  is  formed  by  adding  -nt- 
or  -nti-,  nominative  -ns,  to  the  present  stem  :  as, 

dans,  ^7v/;^  stems  dant-,  danti-  ;  regens,  capiens  ;  laudans,  monens, 
audiens. 


902-910.]  Words:  Inflection. 


QO2.  The  adjective  sontem  (accusative,  no  nominative),  which  was  originally  the 
participle  of  sum,  has  p  before  the  suffix,  and  absens  and  praesens  have  e ;  the 
participle  of  eo  has  e  in  the  nominative  singular,  otherwise  u,  iens,  euntis,  &c. 
n  rarely  drops  before  -s  (63):  as,  LIBES  (inscr.),  exsultas  (Enn.),  animas  (Lucr.). 

903.  Some  adjectives  which  were  originally  present  participles  have  no  verb :  as, 
clem  ens,  merciful,  elegans,  choice,  evidens,  clear,  frequens,  thick,  petulans, 
•wanton,  recens,/rc.r/*,  repens,  sudden,  &c.,  &c.    For  potens,/<?w<?r/«/,  see  922. 

FUTURE    PARTICIPLE. 

904.  The  future  participle  suffix  is  -turo-,  nominative  -turus, 
-tura,  -turum,  which  is  often  changed  to  -suro-,  nominative 
-surus,  -sura,  -surum  (912). 

This  suffix  is  added  to  a  theme  after  the  manner  of  the  perfect  participle 
(906)  :  as,  recturus,  going  to  guide  ;  laudaturus,  going  to  -praise. 

905.  Some  future  participles  have  a  different  formation  from  that  of  the  perfect 
participle :  as,   mortuus,  dead,  moriturus  ;    see  also  in  the  dictionary  arguo, 
fruor,  orior,  ruo,  seco.     And  some  verbs  have  two  forms  of  the  future  participle  : 
as,  agnosco,  ignosco,  haurip,  iuvo,  parip.     Some  verbs  which  have  no  per- 
fect participle  have  a  future  participle :    as,  acquiesce,  appareo,  ardeo,  caleo, 
cared,  doled,  esurio,  fugi5,  haereo,  incido,  iaceo,  -nuo,  parco,  raucio, 
recido,  sono,  sto,  valeo. 

PERFECT   PARTICIPLE. 

906.  The  perfect  participle  suffix  is  -to-,  nominative  -tus, 
-ta,  -turn,  which  is  often  changed  to  -so-,  nominative  -sus, 
-sa,  -sum  (912). 

907.  The  perfect  participle  was  originally  active  as  well  as  passive,  and 
some  participles  have  retained  the  active  meaning :  as, 

adultus,  grown  up;  emersus,  rising  out  from;  exosus,  perosus,  hating 
bitterly ;  placitus,  engaging ;  iuratus,  sworn,  coniuratus,  conspiring;  pran- 
8US,  having  lunched,  cenatus,  having  dined,  potus,  drunk,  &c.  The  perfect 
participles  of  deponents  are  usually  active,  but  sometimes  passive:  as,  meditat.us, 
having  studied,  or  studied.  Many  verbs  are  not  accompanied  by  a  perfect  participle 
(8n),  particularly  verbs  in  -ere,  with  a  parallel  adjective  in  -idus  (287).  Intran- 
sitive verbs  have  usually  only  the  neuter.  A  perfect  active  participle  meminens  is 
said  to  have  been  used  twice  (Plaut.,  Laev.). 

908.  The  perfect  participle  is  formed  in  one  of  two  separate 
ways: 

909.  (i.)  From  a  theme  consisting  of  a  root ;  in  this  way  the  par- 
ticiples of  most  verbs  in  -ere  and  -ere  are  formed  :  as, 

gestus,  carried,  aptus,  fit,  solutus,  loosed  (142),  iunctus,  joined  (831), 
sparsus,  sprinkled  (170,  3) ;  doctus,  taught. 

910.  In  some  consonant  root  participles  of  verbs  in  -ere,  -are,  or  -ere, 
which  have  the  suffix  -u-  in  the  perfect  stem  (873),  the  -to-  is  preceded  by 
a  short  i:  as,  genitus,  born  (971-976);   domitus,  tamed  (993);    monitus, 
warned  (1003,  1004,  1009).     In  old  Latin,  e  occurs:  as,  MEKETA  (41);  e  is 
retained  in  vegetus,  sprightly.     One  participle  has  -tuo-  :  mortuus,  dead. 


The  Verb:  Nouns  of  the  Verb.    [911-919. 


gii.  Some  verbs  in  -are  have  participles  from  consonant  roots:  as,  frictus, 
rubbed,  frico,  fricare ;  see  993.  Also  some  in  -ire  :  as,  fartus,  stuffed  (170,  3), 
farcio,  farcire  ;  fultus,/™//^,  fulcio,  fulcire  ;  see  1011-1015,  and  1017, 1019, 

1020. 

912.  Roots  in  -d-  and  -t-  change  -to-  to  -so-,  before  which  the  dentals 
change  to  s  (159).     After  long  vowels,  nasals,  and  liquids  the  double  ss 
is  simplified  to  s  :  as,  fossus,  dug,  but  divisus,  divided ;  vorsus  or  versus, 
turned.     The  suffix  -so-  is  also  found  with  some  roots  in  -1-,  -m-,  or  -r-  and 
a  few  others:  as,  pulsus  (159). 

913.  (2.)  From    a   theme   in   long  a  or  in  long  I;   in  this  way 
participles  are  regularly  formed  from  denominatives  in  -are  or  -ire 
respectively:  as, 

laudatus,  praised ;  auditus,  heard. 

914.  A  few  perfect  participles  of  verbs  in  -ere  are  formed  from  a  presumed  theme 
in  long  i,  or  long  e,  or  from  one  in  long  u  :  as,  petitus,  aimed  at ;  exoletus, 
grown  out ;  see  967-970  ;  tributus,  assigned ;  see  947,  948. 

915.  (i.)  Many  perfect  participles  formed  from  consonant  roots 
have  a  short  root  vowel  (135,  i)  :  as, 

adspectus,  beheld ;  captus,  taken  ;  coctus,  cooked ;  commentus,  devis- 
ing; cultus,  tilled;  dictus,  said,  verb  dico ;  ductus,  led,  duco;  factus, 
made;  fossus,  dug;  gestus,  carried;  inlectus,  allured;  questus,  complain- 
ing; raptus,  seized ;  tersus,  neat ;  textus,  woven  ;  vorsus,  turned. 

916.  (2.)  Some  perfect  participles  formed  from  consonant  roots 
have  a  long  root  vowel,  sometimes  even  when  the  vowel  of  the  parallel 
present  stem  is  short  (135,  I ;  I22,/)  :  as, 

iixus,  fastened,  verb  figo  ;  -flictus,  dashed,  -fligo ;  pastus,  fed,  pasco  ; 
polluctus,  offered  up,  polluceo ;  scriptus,  -written,  scrib5  ;  -casus,  fallen, 
cado.  Also  actus,  driven,  ago ;  visus,  seen,  video ;  fructus,  enjoying,  fruor ; 
lectus,  culled,  lego ;  pictus,  painted,  pingo ;  rectus,  ruled,  rego ;  esus, 
eaten,  edo ;  structus,  piled,  struo ;  tectus,  covered,  tego ;  unctus,  anointed, 
unguo ;  fractus,  broken,  frango ;  pactus,  fixed,  pango.  Furthermore, 
iunctus,  joined,  iung5  ;  sanctus,  hallowed,  sancio  (831);  also,  functus, 
having  performed,  fungor. 

917.  (i.)  Most  perfect  participles  formed  from  vowel  roots  have 
a  long  root  vowel :  as, 

latus,  borne  (169,  i) ;  natus,  born  ;  -pletus, ///<?</;  tritus,  worn;  notus, 
known  ;  status,  sewed.  So  also  an  isolated  rutus,  in  the  law  phrase  ruta 
caesa,  or  ruta  et  caesa,  diggings  and  cuttings,  i.e.  minerals  and  timber. 

918.  (2.)  Ten  perfect  participles  formed  from  vowel  roots  have 
a  short  root  vowel ;  they  are  : 

citus,  datus,  hurried,  given  -rutus,  satus,/z//<?#,  planted 

iturn,  ratus,  gone,  thinking  situs,  status,  lying,  set 

litus,  quitus,  besmeared,  been  able 

919.  As  citus,  so  always  percitus  and  incitus  (once  incitus,  doubtful) ;  usu- 
ally concitus,  rarely  concitus  ;  excitus  and  excitus  equally  common  ;  always 
accitus.     ambitus  always  has  long  i  (763).     agnitus,  recognized,  cognitus, 
known,  and  the  adjectives  inclutus  or  inclitus,  of  high  renown,  and  putUS,  clean, 
have  a  short  root  vowel.    For  defrutum,  defrutum,  see  134,  i. 

157 


£  2  o~9  22.]  IVords :  Inflection. 

LIST    OF    VERBS 

ARRANGED  ACCORDING   TO   THE   PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 

920.  I.  The  principal  parts  of  root  verbs  and  of  verbs  in  -ere 
are  formed  in  a  variety  of  ways  and  are  best  learned  separately 
for  every  verb  (922-986). 

921.  II.  The  principal  parts  of  verbs  in  -are,  -ere,  and  -ire, 
are  usually  formed  as  follows  : 

laudo,  praise  laudare  laudavi  laudatus 

moneo,  advise  monere  monui  monitus 

audio,  hear  audire  audivi  auditus 

For  other  formations,  see  989-1022. 


I.     PRIMITIVE   VERBS. 
(A.)  ROOT   VERBS. 
922.  Root  verbs  have  their  principal  parts  as  follows : 


sum,  am  esse 


-,  become,  get,  am       fore  fui 


For  fuam,  &c.,  forem,  &c.,  fore,  see  750.    fui,  &c.,  serves  as  the  perfect 
system  of  sum. 

pos-sum,  can  pos-se 
,  can  potui 

potui,  &c.,  serves  as  the  perfect  system  of  possum.     Of  the  present  system 
of  potui,  only  potens,  powerful,  is  used,  and  only  as  an  adjective. 
dio,  give,  put  dare  dedi  datus 

For  compounds,  see  757. 
bibo,  drink  bibere  bibi  potus 

So  the  compounds,  with  the  reduplication  preserved  in  the  perfect  system  (860). 
sero,  sow  serere  sevi  satus 

Compounds  have  i  for  a  in  the  perfect  participle  :  as,  con-situs, 
sisto,  set  sistere  -stiti,  rarely  stiti      status 

inquam,  quoth  I  inquii  once 


ire  ii,  very  rarely  ivi  itum,  -itus 

queo,  can                         quire  quivi  quitus 

ne-queo,  can't                ne-quire  ne-quivi  ne-quitus 

edo,  eat                            esse  edi  esus 

volo,  will,  wish,  want      velle  volui 

nolo,  won't  nolle  nolui 

malo,  like  better  malle  malui 

fero,  carry                       ferre  (tuli)  (latus) 

For  tuli,  old  tetuli,  and  latus,  see  780  :  for  the  perfect  of  re-fer5,  861. 

158 


The  Verb  :  List  of  Verbs.       [923-930, 


(B.)     VERBS    IN    -ere. 
(A.)    PERFECT  STEM   WITHOUT   A  SUFFIX. 

923.  (itf.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  a  reduplicated  perfect 
stem  (858),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus  : 

924.  (a.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -o|e.  (829). 

can5,  make  music  canere  cecini  (cantatus) 

For  con-cino,  oc-cino,  and  prae-cino,  see  971  and  823. 

tendo,  stretch  tendere  tetendi  tentus 

For  tennitur  (Ter.),  dis-tennite  (Plant.),  see  166,  4  ;  late  participle  tensus. 

Compounds  have  -tend!  (860)  and  -tentus.     But  sometimes  ex-tensus,  and  in 

late  writers,  de-tensus,  dis-tensus,  os-tensus,  and  re-tensus. 

925.  (b.)  With  the  present  stem  in  a  nasalized  root  followed  by  -o|e-  (831). 

*  pangere  pepigi,  agreed         pactus 


In  meaning,  the  perfect  pepipi  corresponds  to  paciscor  ;  panxit,  made,  set  in 
verse  (Enn.),  panxerit,  set  (Col.),  pegit  (Pac.),  pegerit  (Cic.),/*<?af,  once  each. 
For  com-pingo  and  im-pingo,  see  938. 

pung5,/u»f£  pungere  pupugi  punctus 

For  com-pungo  and  ex-pung5,  see  954  and  823. 
tango,  touch  tangere  tetigi  tactus 

In  old  Latin:  tago  (Turp.),  tagit,  tagam  (Pac.).  Compounds  have  i  for  a  in 
the  present  system  :  as,  con-tingo,  con-tingere,  con-tig!  (860),  con-tactus  ; 
in  old  Latin:  at-tigas  (Plaut.,  Ter.,  Ace.,  Pac.),  at-tigat  (Pac.),  at-tigatis 
(Plaut.,  Pac.). 

926.  (c.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -lo|e.  (833). 

\.o\\o,  take  off  tollere  (sus-tuli)  (sub-latus) 

As  the  perfect  and  perfect  participle  of  tollo  are  appropriated  by  f  er5,  tollo  takes 
those  of  sus-tolld.  The  original  perfect  is  tetull  (860). 

927.  (d.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -sco|e-  (834). 
disco,  learn  discere  didici 
posco,  demand                poscere                  poposci 

For  poposci,  see  855.     For  -didici  and  -poposci,  see  860. 

928.  (e.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -i°|e-  (836). 

pario,  bring  forth  parere  peperi  partus 

For  forms  in  -ire,  see  791.     corn-perio,  1012;  re-perio,  ion. 

929.  (i  b.}  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  a  reduplicated  perfect 
stem  (858),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  is  -sus  (912). 

930.  (a.)  With  the  present  stem  in  o-|e.  (829.) 

cado,/£//  cadere  cecidi  -casus 

Compounds  have  i  for  a  in  the  present  system:  as,  oc-cido,  oc-cidere, 
oc-cidi  (86o),oc-casus.  Rarely  e  in  the  present  and  perfect  systems  (Enn.  Lucr., 
Varr.)  :  as,  ac-cedere,  ac-cedisset(io9).  For  the  perfect  of  re-cido,  see  861. 

caedo,  /<?//,  cut  caedere  cecidi  caesus 

Compounds  have  i  for  ae  :  as,  ac-cido,  ac-cidere,  ac-cidi  (860),  ac-cisus. 

I59 


93 1 ~937-]  Words:  Inflection. 


parco,  spare  parcere  peperci 

peperci,  &c.  (regularly  in  Cic.,  Caes.,  Hor.,  Ov.,  Mart. ;  Nep.  once;  also  Plant, 
twice,  Ter.  once).  Old  parsi,  &c.  (Plaut.  8,  Cato,  Ter.,  Nov.,  Nep.,  once  each) ; 
once  parcuit  (Naev.).  Compounds:  com-perce  (Plant.),  con-parsit  (Ter.), 
in-perce,  im-percito,  re-percis  (Plaut.),  re-parcent  (Lucr.). 

pendo,  -weigh,  fay  pendere  pependi  pensus 

931.  (b.)  With  the  present  stem  in  a  nasalized  root  followed  by  -oje.  (831 ). 
tundo,  pound  tundere  tutudi  not  used         tunsus 

For  the  perfect  of  re-tundo,  see  861  ;  other  compounds  have  the  perfect  -tudi 
(861),  but  once  con-tudit  (Enn.).  Perfect  participle,  tusus  (Plin.,  Mart.);  com- 
pounds: con-tunsus  (Plin.),  con-tusus  (Cato,  Varr.,  Caes.,  Lucr.,  Sal.,  Ver'g., 
&c.);  ob-tunsus  (Plaut.,  Verg.,  Liv.,  Sen.),  op-tusus,  ob-tusus  (Lucr.,  Sen., 
Quintil.,  Tac.);  per-tussus  (Plaut.),  per-tusus  (Cato,  Lucr.,  Liv.,  Sen.,  &c.); 
re-tunsus  (Plant.,  Verg.),  re-tusus  (Cic.,  Lucr.,  Hor.);  sub-tflsus  (Tib.). 

932.  (c.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -ro|e-,  or  -lo|e.  (833). 
curro,  run  currere  cucurri  cursum 

For  perfect  of  compounds,  see  860. 
fallo,  cheat  fallere  fefelli  falsus 

Compound  re-fell5,  re-fellere,  re-felli  (860), . 

pello,  push  pellere  pepuli  pulsus 

For  the  perfect  of  re-pello,  see  861.     Other  compounds  have  -pull  (860). 

933.  (i  c.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  are  without  the  redupli- 
cation (86 1 ) : 

934.  (a.)  With  the  present  stem  in  a  nasalized  root  followed  by  -o|e.  (831 ). 
findo,  split  apart  findere  -fidi,  rarely  fidi          fissus 
scindS,  rend                   scindere  -scidi,  rarely  scidi    scissus 

935-  (*•)  With  the  present  stem  in  -lo|e-  (833). 
per-cellS,  knock  down    per-cellere  per-culi  per-culsus 

936.  (2  a.}  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  a  perfect  stem  con- 
sisting of  a  consonant  root  with  a  long  vowel  (862),  and  the  perfect 
participle,  when  used,  in  -tus  : 

937.  (a.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -o|e.  (829). 

agS,  drive  agere  egi  actus 

Real  compounds  have  i  for  a  in  the  present  system:  as,  ab-igo,  ab-igere, 
ab-egi,  ab-actus;  but  per-ago  retains  a.  cogS  and  dego  are  contracted: 

cogo,  cogere,  co-egi,  co-actus;  dego,  degere, , . 

emo,  take,  buy  emere  em!  emptus 

co-emS  retains  e  in  the  present  system,  and  usually  inter-emo  and  per-emo ; 
other  compounds  have  -imo.     For  cSmo,  demo,  prSmS,  and  sumo,  see  952. 
,  strike  id  ictus 

Forms  of  the  present  system  are  icit  (Plant,  Lucr.),  icitur  (Plin.),  Icimur 
(Lucr.). 
legS,  pick  up,  redd  legete  leg!  lectus 

Compounds  with  ad,  inter,  nee-,  per,  prae,  and  re-,  have  -lego  in  the 
present  system,  others  -ligo.  For  di-ligS,  intel-legS,  neg-lego,  see  952. 

160 


The  Verb:    List  of  Verbs.       [938-946. 


938.  (b.)  With  the  present  stem  in  a  nasalized  root  followed  by  -oje-  (831). 
com-pingo,  fix  together  com-pingere  com-pegi  com-pactus 

A  compound  of  pang5  (925,  823). 
frango,  smash  frangere  fregi  fractus 

Compounds  have  i  for  a  in  the  present  system  :  as,  con-fringo,  con-fringere, 
con-fregi,  con-fractus. 

im-pingo,  drive  in          im-pingere          im-pegi  im-pactus 

A  compound  of  pango  (925,  823).     So  also  op-pegi. 

linquo,  leave  linquere  liqui  -lictus 

rumpo,  burst  rumpere  rupi  ruptus 

So  the  compounds.    But  Plautus  has  con-rumptus  and  dir-rumptus. 

vinc5,  conquer      •  vincere  vici  victus 

939-  (c-}  With  the  present  stem  in  -sco|e-  (834). 

pavesco,  get  afraid         pavescere  ex-pavi  

940.  (d.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -io|e-  (836). 

capid,  take  capere  cepi  captus 

Compounds  have  i  for  a  In  the  present  system  and  e  in  the  perfect  participle  :  as, 
in-cipip,  in-cipere,  in-cepi,  in-ceptus.  In  the  present  system,  e  is  rare:  as, 
re-cepit  (Lucr.)  ;  u  is  frequent  in  old  Latin. 

coepio,  begin  rare  coepere  once         coepi  coeptus 

See  812-814. 
facio,  make  facere  feci  factus 

For  fac,  see  846 ;  for  passive,  788.  Compounds  have  i  for  a  in  the  present  sys- 
tem and  e  in  the  perfect  participle:  as,  ef-ficio,  ef-ficere,  ef-feci,  ef-fectus. 

fugio,  run  away  fugere  fugi  

iacio,  throw  iacere  ieci  iactus 

Compounds  have -icio( 1 04,  <r),  -icere,  -ieci,  -iectus  :  as,  e-icio,  e-icere, 
e-ieci,  e-iectus.  In  old  Latin  the  present  system  has  rarely  -ieciS;  -iecere. 
dis-sicio  is  sometimes  used  (Lucr.,  Verg.)  for  dis-icio. 

941.  (2<£.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  a  perfect  stem  con- 
sisting of  a  consonant  root  with  a  long  vowel  (862),  and  the  perfect 
participle,  when  used,  in  -BUS  (912). 

942.  (a.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -oje-  (829). 

cudo,  hammer  cudere  -cudi  -cusus 

943.  (b.)  With  reduplication  and  -o|e.  in  the  present  stem  (829). 
sido,  settle  sidere  sidi,  -sidi,  -sedi      -sessus 

944.  (c.)  With  the  present  stem  in  a  nasalized  root  followed  by  -o|e-  (831). 
fundo,  pour  fundere  fudi  fusus 

945.  (d.}  With  the  present  stem  in  -so|e-  for  -to]e.  (835). 
viso,  go  to  see  visere  visi  

946.  (e.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -io|e-  (836). 

fodio,  dig  fodere  fodi  fossus 

For  forms  in  -ire,  see  791. 

ii  ' 161 


947~95I»]  Words:  Inflection. 


947.  (2^.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  (367)    with  the  present 
stem  in  -°|e-  (837,  840),  have  the  perfect  stem  in  -u-  or  in  -v-  of  the 
theme  (865),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus : 

acuo,  sharpen  acuere  acui  acutus  adjective 

arguo,  make  clear  arguere  argui  argutus  rare 

con-gruo,  agree  con-gruere  con-grui 

ex-uo,  doff  ex-uere  ex-ui  ex-utus 

im-buo,  give  a  smack  of  im-buere  im-bui  im-butus 

ind-uo,  don  ind-uere  ind-ui  ind-utus 

in-gruo,  impend  in-gruere  in-grui 

luo,  pay,  atone  for  lucre  lui  -lutus,  -washed 

metuo,/«jr  metuere  metui  metutus  once 

-nuo,  nod  -nuere  -nui  . 

pluit,  it  rains  pluere  pluit,  pluvit        

ruo,  tumble  down  ruere  rui  -rutus 

so-lvo,  loose  so-lvere  so-lvi  so-lutus 

spuo,  spit  spuere  -spui 

statuo,  set  statuere  statui  statutus 

Compounds  have  i  for  a  throughout:  as,  con-stituo,  con-stituere,  &c. 
volvo,  roll  volvere  volvl  volutus 

suo,  sew  suere  -sui  sutus 

tribuo,  assign  tribuere  tribui  tributus 

948.  Two  verbs  in  -ere  with  the  present  stem  in  -nuoje_  (833),  have  the 
perfect  stem  in  -nu-  (865),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus: 
minuo,  lessen  minuere  minui  minutus 
sternuo,  sneeze                sternuere             sternui 

949.  (3.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  a  perfect  stem  con- 
sisting of  a   root  ending  in  two  consonants    (866),  and  the  perfect 
participle  in  -sus  (912)  : 

950.  (a.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -o|e-  (829) ;  most  have  a  nasal  (831). 
-cendo,  light  -cendere  -cendi  -census 
-fendo,  hit                       -fendere               -fendi                    -fensus 
mando,  chew                   mandere               mandi  once           mansus 
pando,  open                     pandere                pandi                     passus,  pansus 

For  dis-pennite   (Plant.),  see  166,4.    dis-pando,   dis-pendo,   has  perfect 
participle  dis-pessus  (Plaut.,  Lucr.),  dis-pansus  (Lucr.,  Plin.,  Suet.). 
pre-hend5,  seize  pre-hendere        pre-hendi  pre-hensus 

Rarely  prae-hendo  ;  but  very  often  prendo,  prendere,  prendi,  prensus. 
scando,  climb  scandere  -scendi  -scensus 

Compounds  have  e  for  a  throughout:  as,  de-scendo,  de-scendere,.&c. 
vorro,  verrS,  sweep        vorrere,verrere  -vorri,  -verri       versus,  versus 
vorto,  verto,  turn  vortere,vertere  vorti,verti  versus,  versus 

951.  (b.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -lo|e-  (833). 

vol!5,  vel!5,  tear  vollere,  vellere  volli,  veil!  volsus,  vulsus 

Late  perfect  vulsi  (Sen.,  Luc.)  ;  -vulsi  (Laber.,  Col.,  Sen.,  Luc.). 

162 


The  Verb  :  List  of  Verbs.        [952~953- 

(B.)    PERFECT   STEM   IN   -S-,  OR  IN   -v-   OR  -U-. 
PERFECT   STEM    IN    -S-. 

952.   (la.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  the  perfect  stem  in  -& 
(867),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus: 

953    («•)  With  the  present  stem  in  -o|e_  (829). 
carpo,  nibble, pluck          carpere  carpsi  carptus 

Compounds  have  e  for  a :  as,  de-cerpo,  de-cerpere,  de-cerpsi,  de-cerptus. 
com-buro,  burn  up        com-burere         com-bussl  com-bustus 

como,  put  up  comere  compsi  comptus 

Compound  of  com-  and  emo  (937,  823).    See  also  demo,  prom5,  sum5. 
coquo,  cook  coquere  coxi  coctus 

demo,  take  away  demere  dempsi  demptus 

die 6,  say  dicere  dixi  dictus 

For  die,  see  846. 
di-ligo,  esteem  di-ligere  di-lexi  di-lectus 

Compound  of  dis-  and  lego  (937,  823).    See  also  intel-lego  and  neg-lego. 
duc5,  lead  ducere  duxi  ductus 

For  due,  e-duc,  see  846. 
-fligo,  smash  -fligere  -flixi  -flictus 

Of  the  simple  verb,  fligit  occurs  (L.  Andr.),  fligebant  (Lucr.),  and  fligi  (L. 
Andr.,  Ace.). 

gero,  carry  gerere  gessi  gestus 

intel-lego,  ttnderstand  intel-legere         intel-lexi  intel-lectus 

neg-lego,  disregard       neg-legere  neg-lexi  neg-lectus 

In  the  perfect  system  very  rarely  intel-legi  and  neg-legi  (862,  823). 
nubo,veit,marry(aman)nubere  .     nupsi  nupta 

pr5mo,  take  out  promere  prompsi  promptus 

rego,  guide,  rule  regere  rexi  rectus 

In  the  present  system,  con-rigo  and  e-rigo  :  commonly  por-rigo,  sometimes 
porgo  ;  rarely  sur-rigo,  commonly  surgo ;  always  pergo. 

scalptus 
scriptus 
sculptus 
structus 
suctus 
sumptus 
tectus 
tractus 
ustus 
vectus 
vixi  

163 


r   po,  creep 

repere 

repsi 

scalpS,  dig 

scalpere 

scalpsi 

scribo,  -write 

scribere 

scripsi 

sculpo,  carve 

sculpere 

sculpsi 

struo,  build  up 

struere 

struxi 

sugo,  suck 

sugere 

suxi 

sum  5,  take  up 

sumere 

sumps! 

tego,  cover 

tegere 

texi 

traho,  drag 

trahere 

traxi 

uro,  burn 

urere 

ussi 

veho,  cart 

vehere 

vexi 

vivo,  live 

vive  re 

vixi 

954-958.] 


Words:  Inflection. 


954-  •  (^)  With  the  present  stem  in  a  nasalized  root  followed  by  -o[e-  (831) 

cingo,  gird                       cingere 

cinxi 

cinctus 

com-pungo,  prick  over  com-pungere 

com-punxi 

com-punctus 

A  compound  of  pungo  (925,  823). 

e-mungo,  clean  out         e-mungere 

e-munxi 

e-munctus 

ex-pungo,  prick  out       ex-pungere 

ex-punxi 

ex-punctus 

A  compound  of  pungo  (925,  823). 

fingo,  mould                   fingere 

finxi 

fictus 

iungo,/0m                       iungere 

iunxi 

iunctus 

pingo,  faint                    pingere 

pinxi 

pictus 

plango,  beat                     plangere 

planxi 

planctus 

stinguo,  poke,  poke  out    stinguere 

-stinxi 

-stinctus 

stringo,  peel,  graze          stringere 

strinxi 

strictus 

tingo,  wet                        tingere 

tinxi 

tinctus 

ungu5,  anoint                  unguere 

unxi 

unctus 

Sometimes  ung5,  ungere,  &c.,  in  the  present  system. 
955'  (c')  With  the  present  stem  in  -no]e-  (833). 
temno,  scorn  temnere  (con-tempsi)       (con-temptus) 

956.  (d.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -ioje-  (836). 
ad-licio,  lure  ad-licere  ad-lexi 

in-licio,  inveigle  in-licere  in-lexi  in-lectus 

pel-licio,  lead  astray      pel-licere  pel-lexi  pel-lectus 

-spicio,  spy  -spicere  -spexi  -spectus 

Forms  of  the  simple  verb  are  old  and  rare :  as,  specitur,  spicit,  spece  (Plaut.), 
specimus  (Varr.),  spiciunt  (Cato),  spexit  (Naev.,  Enn.). 

957.  (i  £.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  the  perfect  stem  in  -B- 
(867),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -BUS  (912): 

958.  (a.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -o|e.  (829). 

ced5,  move  along  cedere  cessi  cessus 

claudS,  shut  claudere  clausi 

Sometimes  cludo,  cludere,   clusi,   clusus. 
throughout. 

di-vido,  separate  di-videre 

figo,  fin  figere 

fluo,/ow  fluere 


clausus 
Compounds  have  u   for  au 


laedo,  hurt  laedere 

Compounds  have  I  for  ae  throughout : 
ludo,  play  liidere 

mitt5,  send  mittere 

merg5,  dif,  duck  .mergere 

plaudo,  clap  plaudere 

Also  ap-plaudo,  ap-plaudere,  &c. 


di-visi  dl-visus 

fix!  fixus,  twice  fictus 

fluxi  fluxus  adjective 

laesi  laesus 

as,  in-lido,  in-lidere,  &c. 
lusi  lusus 

misi  missus 

mersi  mersus 

plausi  plausus 

Other  compounds  have  usually  6  for  au 


throughout :  as,  ex-plodo,  &c. ;  but  ex-plaudo  (Lucr.). 
premS,  squeeze  premere  press!  pressus 

Compounds  have  i  for  e  in  the  present  system  :  as,  com-primo,  &c. 

164 


The  Verb  :   List  of  Verbs.       [959-964. 


rado,  scrape  radere  rasi  rasus 

rodo,gnazv  rodere  r5si  r5sus 

sparg5,  scatter  spargere  sparsi  sparsus 

Compounds  usually  have  e  for  a  throughout  :  as,  con-sperg5,  &c. 
trud5,  shove  trudere  trusi  trusus 

0  vadere  -vast  -vasus 


959.  (b.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -sco|e.  (834). 
algesco,  get  cold  algescere  alsi 

ardesco,  flame  out          ardescere  arsi  (ex-arsi)       - 

lucesco,  grow  light         lucescere  -luxl 

Sometimes  in  the  present  system  lucisco,  luciscere,  &c. 
frigesco,  grow  cold        frigescere  -frixi 

vivesc5,  get  alive  vivescere  (re-vlxi) 

In  composition,  also  re-vivisc5,  re-viviscere. 

960.  (c.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -to|e-  (835). 

flecto,  turn  flectere  flexi  flexus 

necto,  bind  together  nectere  nexi,  nexui          nexus 

Perfect  system  rare:  nexit  (Lucil.,  Ace.);  nexuit,  ad-nexuerant  (Sail.)- 

pecto,  comb  pectere  pexi  once  pexus 

961.  (d.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -io|e-  (836). 

quatio,  shake  quatere  -cussi  quassus 

Compounds  drop  the  a  (in,  a):  as,  in-cutio,  in-cutere,   in-cussi,  in- 
cussus. 

PERFECT   STEM    IN    -V-. 

962.  (2  a.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  the  perfect  stem  in  -v-, 
preceded  by  a  long  vowel  of  the  root  (869),  and  the  perfect  participle, 
when  used,  in  -tus  : 

963.  (a.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -o|e.  (829). 

tero,  rub  terete  trivi  trltus 

Perfect  infinitive  once  in  pentameter  verse  (823)  at-teruisse  (Tib.). 

964.  (b.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -no|e.  (833). 

cerno,  sift,  separate,  see    cernere  crevi,  decided        certus,  -cretUS 

lino,  besmear  linere  levi,  rarely  Hvi     litus 

In  the  present  system  some  forms  in  -ire  are  used  by  late  writers. 
sino,  leave,  let  sinere  sivi  situs 

Perfect  system  forms  of  sino  and  de-sino  in  -v-  are  :  sivi  (Plaut.,  Ter.,  Cic.); 
de-sivit  (Sen.),  sivistis  (Cic.),  once  each;  slveris  (Plaut.,  Cato),  de-siverit 
(Cato,  Cell.),  siverint  (Plant.,  Curt.),  sivisset  (Cic.,  Liv.).  Much  oftener  without 
-v-:  as,  de-sii  (Sen.),  sistl  (Plaut.,  Cic.);  de-sisti  often,  siit  once  (Ter.),  de- 
siit  (Varr.,  Sen.,  &c.),  de-sit  (Mart.,  &c.),  de-siimus  (Lent.),  de-slmus  (893). 
sistis;  d_e-sierunt  (Cic.,  Liv.);  de-sierat,  de-sierit  (Cic.);  de-sissem,  &c., 
sisset,  sissent,  de-sisse.  For  siris,  &c.,  see  893;  for  pon5,  972. 
sperno,  spurn  spernere  sprevi  spretus 

sterno,  strew  sternere  stravi  stratus 


965-97°-]  Words:  Inflection. 


965.  (c.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -sco|e.  (834). 

crescS,  grow  crescere  crevi  cretus 

nosco,  get  to  know  noscere  novl  notus  adjective 

Compounds:  I-gnosco,  i-gnovi,  I-gnotum  ;  a-gnosco,  a-gnovi,  a-gni- 
tus  ;  co-gn5sc5,  co-gnovi,  co-gnitus  ;  di-nosco,  di-novi,  rarely  ci- 
gnosco,  di-gnovi,  -  ;  inter-nosco,  inter-novi,  -  .  Old  passive 
infinitive  GNOSCIER  (inscr.  186  B.  c.). 

psisco,feect  pascere  pavi  pastus 

seised,  enact  sciscere  scivi  scitus 

966.  (2^.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  the  perfect  stem  in  -v-, 
preceded  by  the  long  vowel  of  a  presumed  denominative  stem  (870), 
and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus  : 

967.  (a.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -o|e.  (829). 

peto,  aim  at  petere  petivi  petitus 

In  the  perfect,  sometimes  petii  (Cic.,  Ov.,  Liv.,  Val.  Fl.,  Plin.  Ef.),  PETIEI 
(inscr.),  peti  late  (Sen.,  Stat.);  petiit  (Cic.,  Hor.,  Tac.,  Suet.),  petit  (Verg,  Ov., 
Phaedr.,  Sen.,  Luc.,  Suet),  petiisse  (Verg.,  Hor.,  Ov.,  Val.  Fl.,  Stat.). 

quaero,  inquire  quaerere  quaesivi  quaesitus 

Compounds  sometimes  retain  ae  in  old  Latin,  but  usually  have  i  for  ae  through- 
out :  as,  con-quiro,  con-qulrere,  &c. 

968.  (b.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -sco'e-  (834). 
ab-olesc5,  vanish  away  ab-olescere          ab-olevi 

ad-olesco,  grow  up         ad-olescere  ad-olevi  ad-ultus 

con-cupisc5,  hanker  for  con-cupiscere  con-cupivi  con-cupitus 

-dormisco,  fall  asleep     -dormlscere  -dormivi 

ex-olesc5,  grow  out        ex-olescere  ex-olevi  ex-oletus 

in-veterasco,  get  set       in-veterascere  in-veteravi 


,  get  worn  out  obs-olescere  obs-olevi  obs-oletus  adj. 

quiesco,  get  still  quiescere  quievi  quietus  adjective 

re-sipisco,  come  to          re-sipiscere  re-sipivi 

suesco,  get  used  suescere  suevi  suetus 

vesperascit,  gets  dusk    vesperascere  vesperavit 

969.  (c.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -io|e.  (836). 

cupio,  -want  cupere  cupivi  cupitus 

Once  with  a  form  in  -ire  (791),  cupiret  (Luar.). 
sapio,  have  a  smack         sapere  sapivi  - 

Compounds  have  i  for  a:  as,  re-sipio,  &c. 

970.  (d.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -sso|e-  (375). 

ar-cess5,  send  for  ar-cessere  ar-cessivi  ar-cessitus 

Sometimes  ac-cerso,  &c.  ;  infinitive  rarely  ar-cessiri  or  ac-cersiri. 
capesso,  imdertake         capessere  capessivi 

facesso,  do,  make  off       facessere  facessivi  facessitus 

Perfect  system  rare:  facessieris  or  facesseris  (Cic.),  facessisset  (Tac.). 
in-cesso,  attack  in-cessere  in-cessivi 

lacesso,  provoke  lacessere  lacessivi  lacessitus 

166 


The  Verb:   List  of  Verbs.       [971-975. 


PERFECT   STEM    IN    -U-. 

971.  (3.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  the  perfect  stem  in 
-u-  (873),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus ;    in   some 
participles  -tus  is  preceded  by  a  short  i,  thus,  -itus  (910)  : 

972.  (a  )  With  the  present  stem  in  -°ie-  (829). 

alo,  bring  up  alere  aim  altus,  rarely  alitus 

Colo, //'//,  stay  round, --ourtCOleTS  colui  CUltUS 

con-cin5,  chime  -with      con-cinere  con-cinui 

A  compound  of  can5  (924,  823).    See  also  oc-cino  and  prae-cino. 
con-sulo,  consult  con-sulere  con-sului  con-sultus 

depso,  knead  depsere  depsui  depstus 

fremo,  growl  fremere  fremui 

gemo,  groan  gemere  gemui 

molo,  grind  molere  molui  molitus 

oc-cino,  sing  ominously  oc-cinere  oc-cinui 

Once  with  reduplication,  oc-cecinerit  (Liv.). 

oc-cul5,  hide  oc-culere  oc-cului  oc-cultus 

plso,  pinsS,  bray          pisere,  pinsere  pinsul,  pisivi      pistus 

Once  (818,  847)  pinslbart  (Enn.).  Perfect  once  pmsui  (Pomp.),  once  (823,  893) 
pisierunt  (Varr.).  Perfect  participle  often  pinsitus  (Col.),  once  pinsus  (Vitr.). 

pon5,//^«  ponere  po-sui  po-situs 

A  compound  of  po-  and  sino  (964).  Perfect  in  old  Latin  po-sivl  (893) ; 
po-sui  is  first  used  by  Ennius  (875).  Perfect  participle  in  verse  sometimes,  po- 
stus,  -po-stus  ;  inf.  inposisse  (Plaut.). 

prae-cino, /A*?  before  prae-cinere         prae-cinui 

sero,  string  scrcre  -serui  sertus 

sterto, snore  stertere  (de-stertui)  

strepo,  make  a  racket  strepere  strepui  

texo,  weave  texere  texui  textus 

tremS,  quake  tremere  tremui  

vomo,  throw  up  vomere  vomui 

973.  (b.)  With  reduplication  and  -o|e-  in  the  present  stem  (829). 
gigno,  beget  gignere  genui  genitus 

Present  sometimes  also  without  reduplication,  genit,  &c.  (Varr.,  Lucr.). 

974.  (c.}  With  the  present  stem  in  a  nasalized  root  followed  by  -o|e-  (831). 
ac-cumbo,  lie  by  ac-cumbere         ac-cubul  ac-cubitus 

So  also  in-cumbo  ;  dis-cumbo  has  dis-cubul,  dis-cubitum.  Com- 
pounds with  de,  ob,  pr5,  re-,  and  sub,  have  -cubui, . 

975.  (d.}  With  the  present  stem  in  -io|e-  (836). 

5-licio,  coax  out  e-licere  e-licui  e-licitus 

rapio,  seize  rapere  rapui  raptus 

Compounds  have  i  for  a  in  the  present  and  perfect  systems,  and  e  in  the  perfect 
participle :  as,  e-ripio,  e-ripere,  e-ripui,  e-reptus.  Old  Latin  has  u  in  de- 
rupier  and  in  snb-rupio,  rub-rupere,  sub-rupui,  sub-ruptus ;  shortened 
forms  are:  surpuit,  surpuerit  (Plant.),  surp_it  (Plaut.  prol.),  surpere  (Lucr.), 
surpite,  curpuerat  (Hor.).  For  sub-repsit  (Plaut.),  see  887. 

i67 


976.] 


Words:  Inflection. 


976.  (e.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -sco|e-  (835) ;  for  com-pescui,  see  855 
acesco,  get  sour  acescere  -acui 

alescS,  grow  up  alescere  (co-alui)  (co-alitus) 

aresco,  dry  up  arescere  -arui 

calesco,  get  -warm  calescere  -calui 

candesco,  get  -white        candescere          -candui 

canesco,  get  grey  canescere  canui  

claresco,  get  bright         clarescere  clarui 

com-pesc5,  check  com-pescere       com-pescui         

con-ticesc5,  get  «//.#*// con-ticescere      con-ticui  

Also  in  the  present  system,  con-ticisco,  con-ticiscere,  &c. 


crebresco,  get  common 
crudesco,  -wax  bad 
-dolesco,  get  pained 
duresco,  get  hard 
e- vile sco,  get  cheap 
fervesco,  boil  up 
floresco,  blossom  out 
horresco,  bristle  up 
languesco,  get  -weak 
latesco,  hide  away 
liquesco,  melt 
madescS,  get  moist 
marcesc5,  pine  away 
maturesco,  ripen 
nigresco,  get  black- 
note  sco,  get  known 
ob-mutesc5,  get  still 
ob-surdesco,  get  deaf 
oc-callesc5,  get  hard 
pallesc5,  grow  pale 
putesco,  get  soaked 
rigesco,  stiffen  up 
rubescS,  redden 
sanesco,  get  well 
senesco,  grow  old 
stupesco,  get  dazsd 


crebrescere 

crudescere 

-dolescere 

durescere 

e-vilescere 

fervescere 

florescere 

horrescere 

languescere 

latescere 

liquescere 

madescere 

marcescere 

maturescere 

nigrescere 

nStescere 

ob-mutescere 

ob-surdescere 

oc-callescere 

pallescere 

putescere 

rigescere 

rubescere 

sanescere 

senescere 

stupescere 


-crebrui 

(re-crudui) 

-dolui 

durui 

e-vilui 

-ferbui,  -fervi 

-florui 

-horrui 

langui 

-litui 

(de-licui) 

madui 

(e-marcui) 

maturui 

nigrui 

notui 

ob-mutui 

ob-surdui 

oc-callui 

pallui 

putui 

rigui 

rubui 

-sanui 

-senui 

(ob-stupui) 


Also  op-stipesco  or  ob-stipesco,  op-stipui  or  ob-stipul. 


tabesco,  waste  away 
tepesc5,  get  lukewarm 
-timesco,  get  scared 
torpesco,  get  numb 
tremesco,  quake 


tabescere  tabui  

tepescere  tepui 

-timescere  -timui  

torpescere  torpui  

tremescere  (con-tremui)  

Also  in  the  present  system,  con-tremisco,  con-tremiscere,  &c. 

tumesco,  swell  up          tumescere  -tumui 

valesco,  get  strong          valescere  -valui 

vanesco,  wane  vanescere  (e-vanui)  

1 68 


The  Verb:   List  of  Verbs.      [977-986. 


DEPONENTS   IN   -1. 

977-  00  The  following  deponents  in  -I  have  the  perfect  participle 
in  -tus,  except  morior,  which  has  -tuus: 

978.  (a).  With  the  present  stem  in  -oje.  (829). 

fruor,  enjoy                                     frui  fructus 

loquor,  speak                                    loqui  locutus 

queror,  complain                             queri  questus 

sequor,/*//*w                                  sequi  secutus 

979.  (b.}  With  the  present  stem  in  a  nasalized  root  followed  by  -o|e-  (831). 
fungor,  get  quit                              fungi  functus 

980.  (c.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -sco|e-  (834). 
apiscor,  lay  hold  of                         apisci  aptus 

Compounds  have  i  and  e  for  a:  as,  ad-ipiscor,  ad-ipisci,  ad-eptus. 

com-miniscor,  devise                    com-mimsci  com-mentus 

ex-pergiscor,  stretch  myself, -wake  ex-pergisci  ex-per-rectus 

Perfect  participle  rarely  ex-pergitus  (Lucil.,  Lucr.). 

nanciscor,  get                               nancisci  nactus,  nanctus 

nascor,  am  born                               nasci  natus 

ob-liviscor,  forget                          ob-livisci  ob-litus 

paciscor,  bargain                            pacisci  pactus 

Compounds:  de-peciscor,  de-pecisci,  de-pectus;  com-pectus. 

pro-ficiscor,  start  on                     pro-ficisci  pro-fectus 

ulciscor,  avenge                               ulcisci  ultus 

981.  (d.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -io|e-  (836). 

morior,  die  mori  mortuus 

orior,  rise  oriri  ortus 

potior,  master  potiri  potitus 

For  forms  in  -iri  of  these  three  verbs,  see  791.  For  potiri,  twice  poti  (Enn.,  Pac.). 

982.  (2.)  The  following  deponents  in  -I  have  the  perfect  participle 
in  -sus  (912): 

983.  (a.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -o|e.  (829). 

labor,  tumble  down  labi  lapsus 

nitor,  rest  on  niti  nisus,  nixus 

utor.  use  uti  usus 

984.  (b.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -sco|e-  (834). 
de-fetlscor,  get  tired  out  de-fetisci  de-fessus 

985.  (c.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -to|e-  (835)0 

am-plector,  hug  round  am-plecti  am-plexus 

com-plector,  hug  up  com-plecti  corn-plexus 

986.  (d.)  With  the  present  stem  in  -io|e.  (836). 

gradior,  step  gradi  gressus 

patior,  suffer  pati  passus 

Compounds  of  these  two  verbs  have  e  for  a  :  as,  ad-gredior,  per-petior, 
per-pessus ;  for  forms  of  -gredior  in  -iri,  see  791. 

6*  i6q 


987-992-]  Words:  Inflection. 


II.    DENOMINATIVE  VERBS. 

987.  Most  verbs  in  -are,  -ere,  and  -ire  (or  in  -an,  -eri,  and 
-iri),  are  denominatives. 

988.  Some  primitives  from  vowel  roots  have  the  form  of  denomi- 
natives in  the  present  system,  or  throughout;    and  some  verbs  with 
a  denominative  present  system  have  the  perfect  and  perfect  participle 
formed  directly  from  a  root. 

(i.)     VERBS    IN    -are. 
(A.)    PERFECT   STEM   WITHOUT  A  SUFFIX. 

989.  (i.)  The  following  verb  in  -are  has  a  reduplicated  perfect 
stem  (859)  : 

sto,  stand  stare  steti 

For  -stiti,  see  860.  The  compound  prae-st5  has  rarely  the  perfect  participle 
prae- status  (Brut,  Plin.),  and  prae-stitus  (Liv.). 

990.  (2.)  The  following  verbs  in  -are  have  a  perfect  stem  consist- 
ing of  a  root  which  ends  in  -v-  and  has  a  long  vowel  (864),  and  the 
perfect  participle  in  -tus: 

iuvo,  help  iuvare  iuvi  iutus  once 

In  the  perfect  system,  iuverint,  adiuvero,  and  adiuverit  occur  once  each  in 
Catull.,  Enn..  Plaut.,  and  Ter  ;  see  891.     Perfect  participle  usual  only  in  the  com- 
pound ad-iutus. 
lavo,  bathe  lavare  lavi  lautus 

Forms  in  -ere  are  very  common  in  the  present  tense  (820) :  lavis  (Plaut.,  Hor.), 
lavit  (Plaut.,  Lucr.,  Catull.,  Verg.,  Hor.),  lavimus  (Hor.),  lavitur  (Val.  Fl.), 
layito  (Cato),  lavere  often,  lavi  (Pomp.).  Perfect  participle  often  lotus  in 
writers  of  the  empire ;  supine,  lautum,  lavatum. 

(B.)    PERFECT   STEM   IN   -v-   OR  -U-. 
PERFECT   STEM    IN    -V-. 

991.  (itf.)  Two  verbs  in  -are  have  the  perfect  stem  in  -v-  (869), 
and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus,  both  preceded  by  a  long 
-a-  of  the  root  • 

flo,  blow  flare  flavi  flatus 

no,  swim  nare  navi 

992.  (i£.)  Most  verbs  in  -are  have  the  perfect  stem  in  -v- 
(869),  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -tus,  both  preceded  by  a 
form, of  the  present  stem  in  long  -a-:   as, 

laudo,  praise  laudare  laudavi  laudatus 

Hbero,  free  liberare  liberavi  liberatus 

nomino,  name  nominare  nominavi  nominatus 

spero,  hope  sperare  speravl  speratus 

170 


993 ~994-]          The  Verb:  List  of  Verbs. 


PERFECT   STEM    IN    -U-. 

993-  (2-)  The  following  verbs  in  -are  have  the  perfect  stem  in  -u 
(874),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus  ;  in  some  parti- 
ciples, -tus  is  preceded  by  a  short  i,  thus,  -itus  (910) : 
crepo,  rattle  crepare  crepui  (in-crepitus) 

Forms  of  the  perfect. system  in  -v-  (823)  are:    in-crepavit   (Plant.),  dis- 
crepavit  (Van-.),  in-creparit  (Suet.). 
cubo,  lie  cubare  cubui 

Forms  of  the  perfect  system  in  -v-  (823)  are:  ex-cubaverant  (Caes.),  cu- 
baris  (Prop.),  in-cubavere  (Plin.),  cubasse  (Quintil.).  Compound  perfect 
participle  in-cubitus  (Plin.). 

domo,  tawe  domare  domui  domitus 

e-nec5,  murder  e-necare  e-necui  5-nectus 

The  simple  verb  has  necavi,  necatus ;  twice  necuit  (Enn.,  Phaedn).  e- 
nec5  sometimes  has  i  for  e  in  the  present  and  perfect  system  ;  once  (823)  e-nicavit, 
and  once  (887)  e-nicasso  (Plant.);  perfect  participle  also  e-necatus  (Plin). 

fried,  ntb  down  fricare  fricui  frictus 

Perfect  participle  also  fricatus(Vitr.),  con-fricatus  (Varr.,  Plin.),  de-fricatus 
(Catull.,  Col.,  Plin.),  m-fricatus  (Col.,  Plin.),  per-fricatus  (Vitr.,  Plin.). 
mico,  quiver  micare  micui 

So  the  compounds;  except  di-mico,  di-micavi,  di-micatum;  twice  in  pen- 
tameter verse  (823)  dl-micuisse  (Ov.). 

-plico,  fold  -plicare  -plicui  -plicitus 

A  few  forms  of  the  present  system  of  the  simple  verb  occur.  In  the  perfect  and 
perfect  participle  usually  -plicavi,  -plicatus  ;  but  sometimes  ap-plicui  (Cic.  once, 
Tib.,  Ov.,  Liv.,  Sen.,  &c.);  com-plicui  (Sen.),  ex-plicui  (Verg.,  Hor.,  Liv.,  Sen,, 
&c.),  im-plicui  (Verg.,  Tib.,  Ov.,  Sen.,  &c.);  ap-plicitus  (Col.,  Quintil.,  Plin. 
Ep.\  ex-plicitus  (Caes.,  Sen.,  Plin.  £/>.),  im-plicitus  (Plant.,  Cic.,  Liv.);  once 
re-plictus  (Stat.). 

sec5,  cut  secare  secui  sectus 

The  compound  with  ex  sometimes  has  i  for  e ;  once  (823)  exicaveris  (Cato). 
sono,  sound  sonare  sonui  

Also  (820)  sonit,  sonunt  (Enn.,  Ace.),  sonere  (Ace.,  Lucr.);  re-sonunt 
(Enn.).  Perfect  (823)  re-sonarint  (Hor.),  re-sonavit  (Man.),  sonaturus  (Hor.  \ 

tono,  thunder  tonare  tonui  (at-tonitus) 

Once  (820)  tonimus  (Varr.).  Perfect  participle  once  in-tonatus  (Hor.). 

vet5,  forbid  vetare  vetui  vetitus  ; 

In  old  Latin,  voto,  &c.  (143).  Perfect  once  (823)  vetavit  (Pers.)' 


DEPONENTS   IN   -Sri. 

994.  There  are  many  deponents  in  -ari,  with  the  perfect  participle 
in  -atus:  as, 
hortor,  exhort  hortar!  hortatus 

For  the  primitive  fari,  speak,  and  compounds,  see  the  dictionary. 

171 


995~999-]  Words:  Inflection. 


(2.)    VERBS   IN    -ere. 

(A.)     PERFECT  STEM   WITHOUT   A   SUFFIX. 

995-  (*•)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  a  reduplicated  perfect 
stem  (859),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -BUB  (912): 
mordeo,  bite  mordere  momordi  morsus 

The  compound  prae-mordeo  has  once  (823)  prae-morsisset  (Plaut.). 
pendeo,  am  hung  pendere  pependi 

The  compound  pro-pende5  has  the  perfect  participle  pr5-pensus. 
sponde5,  covenant          spondere  spopondi  spSnsus 

For  de-spondi  and  re-spondi,  see  860  ;  rarely  de-spopondi  (Plaut.). 
tondeo,  shear  tondere  -totondi,  -tondi  tonsus 

For  de-tondunt  (Varr.),  see  821.     Perfect  only  in  the  compounds  at-tondl  and 
de-tondi  (860);  once  de-totonderat  (Varr.),  and  perhaps  de-totondit  (Enn.). 

996.  (20.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  a  perfect  stem  con- 
sisting of  a  root  which  ends  in  -v-  and  has  a  long  vowel  (864),  and 
the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus  : 

caveo,  look  out  cavere  cavi  cautus 

faveo,  am  friendly  favere  favi 

foveo,  warm,  cherish       fovere  f5vi  fotus 

moveo,  move  movere  movi  motus 

For  short  forms  in  the  perfect  system,  particularly  in  compounds,  see  891. 
voveo,  vow  vovere  v5vi  votus 

997.  (2^.)  Three  verbs  in  -ere  have  a  perfect  stem  consisting  of  a 
consonant  root  with  a  long  vowel  (864),  and  the  perfect  participle  in 
-BUB  (912): 

sedeo,  sit  sedere  sedi  -sessus 

Real  compounds  have  i  for  e  in  the  present  system :  as,  ob-sideo,  &c.     Com- 
pounds with  dis-,  prae,  and  re-  have  no  perfect  participle. 
strideo,  grate  stridere  stridi 

Often  with  a  present  system  in  -ere  (821). 
video,  see  videre  vidi  visus 

998.  (3.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  a  perfect  stem  ending 
in  two  consonants   (866),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in 
-BUB  (912)  : 

ferveS,  boil  fervere  fervl,  ferbui       

Sometimes  with  forms  in  -ere  (821)  in  verse.     The  perfect  system  is  rare. 
prandeo,  lunch  prandere  prandi  pransus 

(B.)     PERFECT   STEM   IN    -S-,   OR   IN   -v-   OR   -U-. 
PERFECT   STEM    IN   -S-. 

999.  (irt.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  the  perfect  stem  in 
-a-  (868),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus : 

172 


The  Verb :  L  ist  of  Verbs,    [i  ooo- 1  oo  i . 


augeo,  increase 

augere 

auxi 

auctus 

in-dulgeo,  am  kind 

in-dulgere 

in-dulsi 



luceo,  beam 

lucere 

luxi 



lugeo,  mourn 

lugere 

luxi 

torqueo,  twist 

torquere 

torsi 

tortus 

IOOO.  (i£.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  the  perfect  stem  in 
-a-  (868),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -sus  (912)  : 
algeS,  feel  cold  algere  alsi 

ardeo,  blaze  ardere  arsi  - 

co-mxi,  c5-mvi  - 


The  perfects  co-nixl  (Turp.),  c5-nivi  (Crass.),  occur  once  each. 
fulgeo,  flash  fulgere  fulsi 

Forms  of  the  present  in  -ere  (821)  occur  in  verse:    fulgit  (Pomp.,  Lucil., 
Lucr.),  fulgere  (Pac.,  Ace.,  Lucil.,  Lucr.,  Verg.);  ef-fulgere  (Verg.,  Claud.). 

haereo,  stick  haerere  haesi 

iubeo,  order  iubere  iussi  iussus 

In  old  Latin,  IOVBEO,  after  lovsi  (ivsi);  later  iussi,  iussus,  after  iubeo. 
maneo,  stay  manere  mansi  mansum 

mulceS,  stroke  mulcere  mulsi  mulsus  adjective 

Perfect  participle  per-mulsus  rare  (Cornif.,  Varr.). 

mulgeo,  milk  mulgere  mulsi  mulsus  once 

rideS,  laugh  ridere  risi  .-risus 

suadeo,  ad-vise  suadere  suasi  suasus 

tergeo,  -wipe  tergere  tersi  tersus 

For  forms  in  -ere  in  the  present,  as  tergit,  &c.  (Varr.,  Prop.,  Stat.,  Col.), 
see  82  i. 

turgeo,  am  swelling       turgere  tursi  once  - 

Of  the  perfect  system,  turserat  (Enn.). 
urgeo,  push  urgere  ursi  -^~ 


PERFECT   STEM   IN   -v-   OR  -U-. 
PERFECT   STEM    IN   -V-. 

1001.  (i^.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  the  perfect  stem  in 
-v-  (869),  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -tus,  both  preceded  by  a  long 
-e-  of  the  root : 

de-leo,  -wife  out  de-lere  de-levi  de-letus 

fleo,  weep  flere  flevi  fletus 

neo,  spin  nere  nevi  

For  neunt  (Tib.),  see  837. 

-pleo,///  -plere  -plevi  -pletus 


i  OO2  - 1  oo 5 .]          Words  :  In/Lei  lion. 


1002.  (i£.)  The  following  verb  in  -ere  has  the  perfect  stem  in  -v- 
(869),  preceded  by  long  -I-,  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -tus,  preceded 
by  short  -i-  of  the  root : 

cieo,  set  a  going  ciere  civi  citus 

Somewhat  defective;  also  with  a  form  in  -ire  (821).     For  the  perfect  participle 
of  compounds,  see  919. 

1003.  (i<r.)  The  following  verb  in  -ere  has  the  perfect  stem  in  -v- 
(869),  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -itus  (910) : 

ab-ole5,  destroy  ab-olere  ab-olevi  ab-olitus 


PERFECT   STEM    IN   -U-. 

1004.  (2a.)  Most  verbs  in  -ere  have  the  perfect  stem  in  -u- 
(874),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus,  which  is 
usually  preceded  by  a  short  i  (910)  :  as, 

doceo,  teach  docere  docui  doctus 

habeo,  have  habere  habul  habitus 

So  also  post-habeo;  other  compounds  have  i  for  a  :  as,  pro-hibeo,  pro- 
'\ibere,  pro-hibul,  pro-hibitus;  twice  contracted,  probet,  probeat  (Lucr.). 
C  mpounds  with  de  and  prae  are  regularly  contracted,  debeo,  praebeo,  &c. :  but 
i'i  rMautus  once  de-hibuisti,  and  regularly  prae-hibed,  &c.,  throughout. 

mereo,  earn  merere  merui  meritus 

Often  deponent  (800) :  mereor,  merer!,  meritus. 
misceo,  mix  miscere  miscui  mixtus,  mistus 

The  present  stem  is  an  extension  of  the  suffix  -sc°|e-  (834) ;  -so  of  the  present 
runs  over  into  the  perfect. 

moneo,  ad-vise  monere  monui  monitus 

placeo,  am  pleasing         placere  placui  placitus 

So  the  compounds  com-placeo  and  per-placeo;  dis-pliceo  has  i  for  a 
throughout. 

tace5,  hold  my  tongue      tacere  tacui  tacitus  adjective 

The  compound  re-tice5  has  i  for  a  and  no  perfect  participle. 
teneo,  hold  tenere  tenui  -tentus 

Compounds  have  i  for  e  in  the  present  and  perfect:  as,  de-tineo,  de-tinui, 
de-tentus. 

terreo,  scare  terrere  terrui  territus 

torreo,  roast  torrere  torrui  tostus 

1005  (2^.)  The  following  verb  in  -ere  has  the  perfect  stem  in  -u- 
(874),  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -SUB  (912)  : 

cense5,  count,  rate          censere  censui  census 


The  Verb:  List  of  Verbs.     [1006-1008. 

1006.  (3.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ere  have  the  perfect  stem 
in  -u-  (874),  and  no  perfect  participle  (907)  : 

arceo,  check  arcere  arcui  

The  compounds  co-erceo  and  ex-erceo  have  e  for  a,  and  perfect  participles 
co-ercitus  and  ex-ercitus. 


caleS,  am  warm 

calere 

calm 

candeo,  glow  -white 

candere 

candui 

careo,  have  not 

carere 

carui 

doled,  ache 

dolere 

dolui 

egeo,  need 

egere 

egui 

The  compound  ind-igeo,  ind-igere,  i 

Virl      ir^ti" 

.11U.     Ig  ^*  J 

e-mineo,  stick  out 

e-minere 

e-minui 

floreo,  bloom 

florere 

florui 

horre5,  bristle  up 

horrere 

horrui 

iaceo,  lie 

iacere 

iacui 

lateo,  lie  hid 

latere 

latui 

liceS,  am  rated 

licere 

licui 

liqueo,  am  melted 

liquere 

licui 

madeo,  am  soaked 

madere 

rnadui 

niteo,  shine 

nitere 

nitui 

noceo,  am  hurt/id 

nocere 

nocui 

oleo,  smell 

olere 

olui 

has 


For  forms  in  -ere  in  the  present  system,  see  821. 

palleo,  look  pale  pallere  pallui  

p&rzo,waiton.amobedient'pa.rzTQ  parui  

pate5,  am  open  patere  patui 

rigeo,  am  stiff  rigere  rigui  

sileo,  am  silent  silere  silui  

sorbeo, suck  up  sorbere  sorbui 

The  perfect  system  of  the  simple  verb  is  rare:  sorbuit,  sorbuerint  (Plin.);  also 
(823)  sorpsit  (Val.  Max.) ;  ab-sorbe5  and  ex-sorbeo  have  -sorbui ;  but  ab- 
sorpsi  (Plin.,  Luc.,  Macr.),  ex-sorpsi  (Sen.). 

studeo,  am  eager  studere  studui  

stupeo,  am  dazed  stupere  StupUl  

timeo,/^r  timere  timui  

valeo,  am  strong  valere  valui  

vigeo,/^/  strong  vigere  vigui  

1007.  For  audeo,  gaudeo,  and  soleo,  see  801  ;  for  lubet  or  libet,  licet, 
miseret,  oportet,  paenitet,  piget,  pudet,  taedet,  see  815  and  816. 

DEPONENTS   IN    -eri. 

1008.  (\a.}  The  following  deponent  in  -eri  has  the  perfect  parti- 
ciple in  -tus : 

reor,  reckon,  think  reri  ratus 

'75 


1009-1014.]  Words:  Inflection. 


lOOQ.  (i£.)  The   following   deponents   in   -eri   have   the   perfect 
participle  in  -tus,  which  is  preceded  by  a  short  1(910): 
liceor,  bid  liceri  licitus 

miscicor,  pity  misereri  miseritus 

Perfect  participle  also  misertus  (Val.  Max.,  Sen.,  Curt.).  Active  forms  are: 
-.niserete,  misererent  (Enn.),  misereas  (Ter.),  miseret  (Lucr.),  miserent 
(Val.  Fl.).  Passive  forms  are  sometimes  used  impersonally  (724):  as,  miseretur,  &c 

tueor,  look  to,  protect  tueri  tuitus  late 

Forms  in  -i  also  occur  in  verse  (821).     As  perfect  participle,  generally  tutatus. 
vereor,  am  awed  at  vereri  veritus 

IOIO.  (2.)  One  deponent  in  -eri  has  the  perfect  participle  in  -sus 
(912): 
fateor,  confess  fateri  fassus 

Compounds  have  i  and  e  for  a  :  as,  con-fiteor,  con-fessus. 


(3.)     VERBS   IN   -Ire. 

(A.)    PERFECT   STEM   WITHOUT   A   SUFFIX. 

1011.  (ifl.)  The  following  verb  in  -ire  has  a  reduplicated  perfect 
stem  (861),  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -tus: 

re-peri5,  find  re-perire  re-pperi  re-pertus 

1012.  (i£.)  The  following  verb  in  -Ire  has  no  reduplication  in  the 
perfect  stem,  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -tus : 

com-periS,  find  out       com-perire         com-peri  com-pertus 

As  deponent:  com-periar  (Ter.),  com-perior  (Sail.,  Tac.). 

1013.  (2.)  The  following  verb  in  -ire  has   a  perfect  stem  con- 
sisting of  a  consonant  root  with  a  long  vowel  (862),  and  the  perfect 
participle  in  -tus : 

venio,  come  venire  veni  ventum,  -ventus 

For  e-venunt,  e-venat,  e-venant,  ad-venat,  per-venat,  see  822. 

(B.)    PERFECT  STEM    IN   -s-,   OR   IN   -v-  OR  -u-. 
PERFECT   STEM    IN    -S-. 

1014.  (i.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ire  have  the  perfect  stem  in  -&• 
(868),  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -tus: 

farcio,  stuff  farcire  farsi  fartus 

Compounds  have  usually  e  for  a  throughout. 

fulcio,  prop  fulcire  fulsl  fultus 

haurio,  drain  haurire  hausi  haustus 

A  perfect  subjunctive  haurierint  is  quoted  from  Varro  (823). 

176 


1015-1020.]     The  Verb:  List  of  Verbs. 


saepio,  hedge  in              saepire                 saepsi  saeptus 

sancio,  hallow                sancire                 sanxi  sanctus  adjective 
Perfect  participle  rarely  sancitus  (Lucr.,  Liv.).    A  pluperfect  sancierat  is 
quoted  from  Pomponius  Secundus  (823). 

sarcio,  patch                   sarcire                  sarsi  sartus 

vincio,  bind                    vincire                  vinxi  vinctus 

1015.  (2.)  The  following  verb  in  -ire  has  the  perfect  stem  in  -B- 
(868),  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -sus  (912) : 

sentio,  feel                      sentire                  sens!  sensus 

The  compound  with  ad  is  generally  deponent  (800). 


PERFECT   STEM    IN    -V-. 

1016.  (la.}  The  following  verb  in  -ire  has  the  perfect  stem  in  -v- 
(869),  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -tus,  both  preceded  by  a  long  I  of 
the  root : 

scio,  know  scire  scivi  scitus 

1017.  (i£.)  The  following  verb  in  -ire  has  the  perfect  stem  in  -v- 
(869),  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -tus  : 

sepelio,  bury  sepelire  sepelivi  sepultus 

1018.  (i^.)  Most  verbs  in  -ire  have  the  perfect  stem  in  -v- 
(869),  and  the  perfect  participle  in  -tus,  both  preceded  by  a 
form  of  the  present  stem  in  long  -i-  :   as, 

audi5,  hear  audire  audivi  auditus 

PERFECT   STEM    IN    -U-. 

IOIQ.  (2.)  The  following  verbs  in  -ire  have  the  perfect  stem  in 
-u-  (874),  and  the  perfect  participle,  when  used,  in  -tus : 
am-icio,  don  am-icire  am-icui  am-ictus 

Perfect  rare:   once  am-icui  (Brut.),  once  am-ixl  (Varr.). 
ap-erio,  open  ap-erire  ap-erui  ap-ertus 

op-erio,  cover  over          op-erire  op-erui  op-ertus 

salio,  leap  salire  salui 

Compounds  have  i  for  a  throughout :   as,  in-sili5.     A  perfect  system  in  -v- 
(823,  893),  as  ex-silivi,  occurs  in  late  writers  (Col.,  Sen.,  Plin.,  &c.). 

DEPONENTS    IN   -Iri. 

1020.  (la.}  The  following  deponents  in  -iri  have  the  perfect  par- 
ticiple in  -tus: 

ex-perior,  try  ex-periri  ex-pertus 

op-perior,  wait  for  op-perm  op-pertus 

Perfect  participle  once  op-peritus  (Plaut.). 

12  177 


T  o  2  I  - 1  o  2  2 . ]  Words :    Inflection. 


1021.  (\b.}  The  following  deponents  in  -Iri  have  the  perfect  par- 
ticiple in  -itus: 

blandior,  am  agreeable                 blandiri  blanditus 

largior,  sho-wcr                              largiri  largitus 

mentior,  tell  lies                            mentiri  mentitus 

mSlior,  -work  hard                         moliri  molitus 

partior,  share                                partiri  partitus 

bortior,  dra-w  lots                          sortiri  sortitus 

1022.  (2.)  The  following  deponents  in  -Iri  have  the  perfect  par- 
ticiple in  -sus  (912): 

metier,  measure                            metiri  mensus 

ordior,  begin                                ordiri  orsus 


PART  SECOND  *  SENTENCES 


THE  SIMPLE  SENTENCE  AND  ITS  PARTS. 

1023.  A  SENTENCE  is  a  thought    expressed  by  means  of  a 
verb.     The  SUBJECT  is  that  which  is  spoken  of.     The  PREDICATE 
is  that  which  is  said  of  the  subject. 

1024.  A    SIMPLE    SENTENCE    is    one    which    has 
only   one    subject    and    one    predicate. 

Thus,  Rhodanus  fluit,  the  Rhone  flows,  is  a  simple  sentence:  the  subject 
is  Rhodanus  and  the  predicate  is  fluit. 

1025.  The  sentence  may  be  declarative,  stating  a  fact,  exclamatory,  crying 
out  about  something,  interrogative,  asking  a  question,  or  imperative,  giving  a 
command. 

THE  SUBJECT. 

1026.  The  subject  is  a  substantive,  or  any  word  or  words 
having  the  value  of  a  substantive. 

1027.  The  subject  of  a  verb  is  in  the  nominative 
case. 

1028.  The  subject  may  be  expressed,  or  may  be  merely  indicated 
by  the  person  ending. 

1029.  (i.)  With  the  first  or  the  second  person,  the  subject  is  expressed 
by  a  personal  pronoun  (ego  tu,  n5s  v5s)  only  when  somewhat  emphatic,  or 
in  an  indignant  question.     Otherwise  the  verb  of  the  first  or  second  person 
is  not  attended  by  a  personal  pronoun:  as,  eram,  I  was,  eras,  thou  wert. 

1030.  The  subject  5s  regularly  omitted  when  it  is  general  and  indefinite,  in  the 
first  person  plural;  as,  intellegimus,  we  understand;  and  second  person  singular, 
as  :  putares,  you,  or  anybody  would  have  thought. 

1031.  The  subject  of  the  first  or  second  person  is  sometimes  a  substantive,  con- 
trary to  the  English  idiom  :  as,  Hannibal  peto  pacem,  I  Hannibal  am  suing  for 
peace,  pars  spectatorum  scis,  a  part  of  you  spectators  knows,  exoriare  ali- 
quis  nostris  ex  ossibus  ultor,/>w«  out  our  bones  mayst  some  avenger  spring. 
trecenti  coniuravimus,  three  hundred  of  us  have  sworn  an  oath  together. 

I79 


i  o  3  2  - 1 04 1 .]  Sen  fences. 


1032.  (2.)    With  the  third   person   the   subject   is   regularly   expressed, 
unless  the  general  'he  she  it,'  or  'they'  implied  in  the  person   ending  is 
definite  enough. 

1033.  The  third  person  plural  often  refers  to  people  in  general,  particularly  of 
verbs  meaning  say,  name  or  call,  think,  and,  with  volgS  added,  of  other  verbs  also : 
as,  ferunt,  they  say,  people  say,  or  the  "world  says.     The  singular  verb  inquit,  is 
rarely  used  in  the  sense  of  says  somebody ',  it  -will  be  said,  or  quotha. 

1034.  Some  verbs  have  no  subject  at  all  in  the  third  person  singular; 
these  are  called  Impersonal.     Such  are  :  a  few  verbs  expressing  '  operations 
of  nature,'   five  verbs  of  '  mental   distress,'    and  any  verb  used  to  denote 
merely  the  occurrence  of  action,  without  reference  to  any  doer :    as, 

(a.)  lucet,  it  is  light,  lucescit,  it  is  getting  light ;  pluit,  /'/  rains,  fulget, 
it  lightens,  tonat,  it  thunders,  (b.)  miseret,  /'/  moves  to  pity,  paenitet,  /'/  re- 
pents, piget,  /'/  grieves,  pudet,  it  puts  to  shame,  taedet,  it  bores,  (c.)  bene 
erat,  it  went  well ;  pugnatur,  there  is  fighting,  pugnatum  est,  there  was 
fighting.  See  also  816. 

THE  PREDICATE. 

1035.  The  predicate  is  either  a  verb  alone,  or  a  verb  of  indeter- 
minate meaning  with  a  predicate  nominative  added  to  complete  the 
sense. 

Verbs  of  indeterminate  meaning  are  such  as  mean  am  (something),  become, 
remain,  seem,  am  thought,  am  called  or  named,  am  chosen. 

1036.  The  verb  is  sometimes  omitted,  when  it  is  easily  understood.     So 
particularly  such  everyday  verbs  as  mean  am,  do,  say,  come,  and  go,  in  proverbs 
and  maxims,  in  short  questions,  and  in  emphatic  or  lively  assertion  or  de- 
scription :  as, 

quot  homines,  tot  sententiae,  sc.  sunt,  as  many  men,  so  many  minds. 
omnia  praeclara  rara,  sc.  sunt,  all  that's  very  fair  is  rare,  mortuus  Cu- 
mis,  sc.  est,  he  died  at  Cutnae.  bene  mihl,  sc.  sit,  be  it  well  with  me,  \.  e.  a 
health  to  me.  haec  hactenus,  sc.  dicarn,  thus  much  only,  or  no  more  of  this. 

ENLARGEMENT  OF  THE  SIMPLE  SENTENCE. 

1037.  The  parts  of  the  simple  sentence  may  be  enlarged  by  addi- 
tions.    The  commonest  enlargements  of  the  subject  and  of  the  predi- 
cate are  the  following. 

1038.  I.  The  subject  may  be  enlarged  by  the  addition  of 
attributes,  appositives,  or  objects. 

1039.  (i.)  An  ATTRIBUTE  is  an  essential  addition  to  a  substan- 
tive, uniting  with  it  as  one  idea.     The  attribute  may  be  : 

1040.  (a.)  Genitive  of  a  substantive  of  different  meaning,  denoting  the 
agent,  possessor,  or  the  like  :  as,  metus  hostium,  fear  of  the  enemy,  i.  e. 
which  they  feel,     hostium  castra,  camp  of  the  enemy 

1041.  (b.)  Genitive  or  ablative   of   a   substantive   with   an  adjective  in 
agreement :  as,  puer  sedecim  annorum,  a  boy  of  sixteen  years  ;  boves  mira 
specie,  kine  of  wondrous  beauty. 

180 


Parts  of  the  Sentence.     [1042-1052. 


1042.  (c. )  A  noun  in  the  same  case,  either  an  adjective  or  participle,  or 
else  a  substantive  used  adjectively :    as,  pugna    Cannensis,  the  battle  of 
Cannae ;    civitates   victae,    the  conquered  communities ;    victor  Romulus 
rex,  victorious  king  Romiilus. 

1043.  (d.}   A  substantive  in  the  accusative  or  ablative  with  a  preposition: 
as,  pugna  ad  Cannas,  the  battle  near  Cannae,     vir  sine  metu,  a  man  without 
fear  (1427). 

1044.  An  attribute  is  rarely  attached  immediately  to  a  proper  name :  as,  fortem 
Cyan,  Gyas  the  brave.     Q.  Lucanius,  eiusdem  ordinis,  Lucanius,  of  the  same 
rank.     It  is  much  oftener  attached  to  a  general   word  in  apposition  with  the  proper 
name:  as,  vir  clarissimus,  M.  Crassus,  the  illustrious  Crassus. 

1045.  (2-)  Ari  APPOSITIVE  is  a  separate  substantive  added  as  an 
explanation  to  another  substantive,  and  in  the  same  case,  but  not  like 
the  attribute  uniting  with  it  as  one  idea  :  as, 

avitum  malum,  regm  cupido,  the  ancestral  curse,  ambition  for  a  crown. 
Hamilcar,  Mars  alter,  Hamilcar,  a  second  Mars.  Cornelia,  mater  Grac- 
chorum,  Cornelia,  mother  of  the  Gracchi.  Teutomatus,  Olliviconis  films, 
rex  Nitiobrogum,  Teutomatus,  the  son  of  Ollivico,  the  king  of  the  Nitwbroges. 

1046.  (3.)  The   OBJECT  of  a  substantive  is  another  substantive 
of  different  meaning  in  the  genitive,  denoting  that  on  which  action  is 
exerted  :  as, 

metus  hostium,  fear  of  the  enemy,  i.  e.  which  is  felt  towards  them,  ven- 
ditio  bonorum,  sale  of  the  goods. 

1047.  A  substantive  in  any  case  may  be  modified  like  the  subject. 

1048.  II.  The  predicate  may  be  enlarged  by  the  addition  of 
accusatives,  datives,  predicate  nouns,  or  adverbial  adjuncts. 

1049.  C1-)  Tne  ACCUSATIVE  denotes  the  object  of  the  verb ;  also 
extent,  duration,  and  aim  of  motion.     See  1124. 

1050.  (2.)  The  DATIVE  denotes  that  for  or  to  whicn  something  is 
or  is  done.     See  1175. 

1051.  (3.)  A  predicate  noun,  either  substantive  or  adjective,  de- 
noting 'office,  time,  age,  order,  condition,'  or  the  like,  is  often  added  to 
other  verbs  besides  those  of  indeterminate  meaning  (1035)  :  as, 

lunius  aedem  dictator  dedicavit,  Junius  dedicated  a  temple  in  his  ca- 
pacity as  dictator,  not  Jtinius  the  dictator,  litteras  Graecas  senex  didici,  1 
learned  Greek  when  I  was  an  old  man.  princeps  in  proelium  ibat,  ultimus 
excedebat,  he  was  always  the  first  to  go  into  battle,  the  last  to  come  out.  For 
the  predicative  dative  of  the  substantive,  see  1219. 

1052.  In  like  manner  a  noun  may  be  added  as  a  predicate  in  agreement 
with  a  substantive  in  any  oblique  case  :  as, 

se  incolumes  recipiunt,  they  come  back  safe,  ante  me  consulem,  be- 
fore mv  consulship.  Dolabella  hoste  decreto,  Dolabella  having  been  voted  an 
enemy,  natura  duce,  with  nature  as  a  guide. 

181 


IO53~IO5^0  Sentences. 


1053.  (4.)  An  ADVERBIAL  ADJUNCT  is  either  an  oblique  case  of 
a  noun,  often  with  a  preposition,  or  an  adverb  denoting  *  place,  time, 
extent,  degree,  manner,  cause,'  or  'circumstances'  generally:  as, 

silentio  proficlscitur,  he  marches  in  silence,  in  e5  flumine  pons  erat, 
over  that  river  there  was  a  bridge. 

1054.  A  predicate  substantive  may  be  modified  like  the  subject.     An  adjective, 
either  of  the  subject  or  of  the  predicate,  may  be  modified  by  an  oblique  case  or  by  ar, 
adverb. 

COMBINATION  OF  SENTENCES. 

1055.  Simple    sentences    may    be    combined    in    two   differ- 
ent ways.      The   added    sentence    may    be    I.    Coordinate ;   or 
II.  Subordinate. 

Thus,  in  he  died  and  we  lived,  the  two  sentences  are  coordinate,  that  is, 
of  equal  rank.  But  in  he  died  that  we  might  live,  the  sentence  beginning  with 
that  is  subordinate.  In  either  combination  the  separate  sentences  are  often 
called  Clauses  or  Members,  in  contradistinction  to  the  more  comprehensive 
sentence  of  which  they  are  parts. 


I.     THE   COMPOUND    SENTENCE. 

1056.  A  COMPOUND  SENTENCE  is  one  which  con- 
sists of  two  or  more   coordinate  simple  sentences: 
as, 

tu  me  amas,  ego  te  amo,  PI.  Most.  305,  thou  art  in  love  with  me,  Pm 
in  love  with  thee.  nox  erat  et  caelo  fulgebat  luna  sereno  inter  minora 
sidera,  H.  Epod.  15,  I,  ''twas  night,  and  in  a  cloudless  sky,  bright  rode  the  moon 
amid  the  lesser  lights,  a  te  pet5,  me  defendas,  Fam.  15,  8,  /  ask  it  of  you, 
protect  me. 

1057.  A  compound  sentence  is  usually  abridged  when  the  members 
have  parts  in  common:  as, 

valebant  preces  et  lacrimae,  Mil.  34,  prayers  and  tears  had  weight, 
compound  subject,  for  valebant  preces  et  valebant  lacrimae.  rogat 
oratque  te,  RA.  144,  he  begs  and  entreats  you.  compound  predicate,  for 
rogat  te  Sratque  te.  arma  virumquc  cano,  V  i,  i,  arms  and  the  man 
I  sing,  compound  object,  for  arma  cano  virumque  cano.  diu  atque 
acriter  pugnatum  est,  i,  26,  i,  there  was  long  and  sharp  fighting,  for  diQ 
pugnatum  est  atque  acriter  pugnatum  est. 


II.     THE   COMPLEX   SENTENCE. 
1058.    A  COMPLEX  SENTENCE  is  one  which  con- 
sists of  a  main  and  a  subordinate  sentence :  as, 

182 


Agreement:    The  Verb.     [1059-1062. 


centuriSnes  praemittit  (main  sentence),  qul  locum  idoneum  castris 
deligant  (subordinate  sentence),  2,  17,  i,  he  sends  some  officers  ahead  to  select 
a  suitable  spot  for  the  camp,  nunc  scio  (main  sentence),  quid  sit  Amor 
(subordinate  sentence),  V.  E.  8,  43,  now,  now  /  know  what  Eros  is.  a  te 
peto  (main  sentence),  ut  me  defendas  (subordinate  sentence),  Fam.  15,  7, 
/  ask  it  of  you  that  you  protect  me. 

1059.  Several  sentences  are  often  subordinate  to  one  and  the  same 
main  sentence,  and  subordinate  sentences  may  in  their  turn  be  main 
sentences  to  other  subordinate  sentences. 

Thus,  in  the  following  sentence  b  is  subordinate  to  A,  and  c  to  Ab: 
(c.}  qualis  esset  natura  mentis,  (b.)  qui  cognoscerent,  (A.)  misit,  i, 
21,  I,  he  sent  some  people  to  see  what  the  character  of  the  hill  was. 

1060.  Subordinate  sentences  may  be  coordinated  with  each  other, 
as  well  as  main  sentences. 

Thus,  in  the  following  sentence,  £  and  b  are  both  subordinate  to  A,  but 
coordinate  with  each  other:  (A.)  his  rebus  fiebat,  (b.)  ut  et  minus  late 
vagarentur  (b.}  et  minus  facile  finitimis  bellum  mferre  possent,  i,  2,  4, 

so  it  came  to  pass  that,  in  the  first  place,  they  did  not  roam  round  much,  and 
secondly,  they  could  not  so  easily  make  aggressive  war  on  their  neighbours. 

1061.  A  subordinate  sentence  introductory  in  thought  to  the  main 
sentence,  though  not  necessarily   first  in  the  order  of  the  words,  is 
called  a  Protasis;  the  main  sentence  which  completes  the  thought  is 
called  an  Apodosis :  as, 

quom  videbis  (protasis),  turn  scies  (apodosis),  PI.  B.  145,  when  thou 
see 'st,  then  thou'lt  know,  ut  sementem  feceris  (protasis),  ita  metes  (apo- 
dosis), DO.  2,  261,  as  a  man  soweth,  so  shall  he  reap,  si  sunt  di  (protasis), 
benefici  in  homines  sunt  (apodosis),  Div.  2,  104,  if  there  are  gods,  they  are 
kind  to  men. 


AGREEMENT. 
(A.)    OF   THE  VERB. 

1062.  A  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  number 
and  person  :  as, 

praedia  mea  tu  possides,  ego  aliena  misericordia  vivo,  RA.  145,  you% 
sir,  hold  mv  estates,  it  is  by  the  compassion  of  other  people  that  I  am  supported. 
Rhodanus  fluit,  i,  6,  2,  the  Rhone  flows,  nos,  nos,  dico  aperte,  consules 
desumus,  C.  I,  3,  it  is  ourselves,  yes,  ourselves,  I  will  speak  without  reserve, 
the  consuls,  who  fail  in  our  duty,  vos  vobis  consulite,  7,  50,  4,  do  you  look 
out  for  yourselves,  diffugere  nives,  H.  4,  7,  \,  scattered  and  gone  are  snows. 

183 


1 06  3- 1 068.]  Sentences. 


1063.  With  a  compound  subject,  two  constructions  are  ad- 
missible, as  follows. 

1064.  (i.)  With  two  or  more  singular  subjects,  the  verb  is 
often  in  the  plural  :  as, 

(a.)  Without  connectives:  persons:  iisdem  fere  temporibus  fuerun* 
C.  Cotta,  P.  Sulpicius,  Q.  Varius,  Cn.  Pomp5nius,  Br.  182,  in  about  //,. 
same  times  lived  Cotta,  Sulpicius,  Varius,  and  Pomponius.  Things:  fide? 
Romana,  iustitia  imperatoris  in  foro  et  curia  celebrantur,  L.  5,  27,  n, 
the  chivalrotis  principle  of  Rome  and  the  square  dealing  of  her  captain  a  if 
trumpeted  in  market  place  and  council  hall,  (b.)  With  atque,  et,  or  -que  : 
persons  :  ex  his  Cotta  et  Sulpicius  facile  primas  tulerunt,  Br.  182,  of 
these  Cotta  and  Sulpicius  indisputably  bore  the  palm.  Things:  nox  et  amor 
vmumque  nihil  moderabile  suadent,  O.  Am.  i,  6,  59,  darkness  and  love 
and  wine  to  nothing  governable  tempt,  cum  senatus  populusque  Roma- 
nus  pacem  comprobaverint,  L.  37,  45,  14,  when  the  senate  and  the  people  of 
Rome  sanction  peace,  (c.)  With  et  .  .  .  et:  persons:  et  Q.  Maximus  et 
L.  Paullus  iis  temporibus  fuerunt,  Fam.  4,  6,  I,  both  Maximus  and  Paullus 
lived  in  such  times.  Things  :  utrosque  et  laudis  cupiditas  et  timor  igno- 
miniae  excitabant,  7,  80,  5,  both  of  these  eagerness  for  glory  in  the  first  place 
and  secondly  fear  of  disgrace  spurred  on. 

1065.  The  plural  is  sometimes  demarded  by  the  meaning  of  the  verb:  as,  ius  et 
iniuria  natura  diiudicantur,  Leg.  i,  44,  right  and  -wrong  are  naturally  dis- 
tinguished from  each  other. 

1066.  (2.)  Often,  however,  with  two  or  more  singular  sub 
jects,  the  verb  is  put  in  the  singular  :  as, 

(a.)  Without  connectives:  persons:  turn  Gorgias,  Thrasymachus, 
Prodicus,  Hippias  in  magno  honore  fuit,  Br.  30,  at  that  time  Gorgias, 
Thrasymachus,  Prodicus,  and  Hippias  were  in  high  renown.  Things :  per- 
suasit  nox,  amor,  vinum,  adulescentia,  T.  Ad.  470,  the  witchery  was  night, 
flirtation,  wine,  and  youth,  (b.)  With  atque,  et,  or  -que:  persons:  cur 
Lysias  et  Hyperides  amatur?  Br.  68,  why  is  a  Lysias  and  a  Hyperides 
idolized?  Things:  GallSs  a  Belgis  Matrona  et  Sequana  dividit,  i,  2,  i, 
the  Matrona  and  Sequana  cut  off  the  Gauls  from  the  Belgians,  senatus 
populusque  Romanus  voluit,  L.  21,  40,  ^senate  and  people  of  Rome  or 
dained.  (c.}  With  et  .  .  .  et :  persons:  illam  rationem  et  Pompeius  et 
Flaccus  seciitus  est,  Place.  32,  that  rule  both  Pompey  and  P^laccus  followed 
Things :  talis  senatorum  et  dignitas  et  multitude  fuit,  Ph.  13,  13,  both  tht 
position  and  number  of  the  senators  was  such. 

1067.  With  two  or  more  singular  subjects  denoting  things,  and  making 
a  compound  idea,  a  singular  verb  is,  very  common,  agreeing  either  with  the 
subjects  taken  as  a  unit,  or  with  the  nearest :  as, 

(a.)  cum  tempus  necessitasque  postulat,  decertandum  manu  est, 
Off.  i,  81,  when  the  emergency  requires,  we  must  fight  it  out  by  hand,  tanta 
laetitia  ac  gratulatio  fuit,  L.  10,  26,.  4,  so  great  was  the  demonstration  of  joy. 
(b.)  Cingetorigl  principatus  atque  imperium  est  traditum,  6,  8,  9,  the 
headship  and  command  was  assigned  to  Cingetorix. 

1068.  (3.)  With  mixed  subjects,  singular  and  plural,  the  verb  may  like- 
wise be  either  plural  or  singular:  as, 

184 


Agreement:   The  Verb.     [1069-1074. 


(a.)  vita  mors,  divitiae  paupertas  omnis  homines  permovent,  Off. 
2,  37,  life  and  death,  riches  and  poverty,  tell  imich  on  everybody.  (b.)  quanto 
in  periculo  et  castra  et  legiones  et  imperator  versaretur,  2,  26,  5,  in 
what  imminent  peril  camp  and  legions  and  commander  were  involved,  hoc 
mih!  et  Peripatetic!  et  Academia  concedit,  Ac.  2,  113,  this  faint  both  Peri- 
patetics and  Academy  grant  me. 

1069.  The  plural  is  sometimes  used  with  a  singular  subject  limited  by  an  ablative 
with  cum,  -with:   as,   Syrus  cum  illo  vostrd  consusurrant,  T.  Han.  477, 
Syr  us  and  yon  man  of  yours  are -whispering  together.     Bocchus  cum  peditibus 
postremam  JRomanorum  aciem  invadunt,  S.  /.  101,  5,  Bocchus  -with  the 
infantry  falls  on  the  rereward  line  of  the  Romans.     Cicero  commonly  uses  a  singular 
verb  in  this  combination,  Caesar  has  the  plural  once  only. 

1070.  (4.)   When  the  subjects  are   connected  by  nee  .  .  .  nee,  aut,  or 
aut  .  .  .  aut,  the  verb  is  likewise  either  plural  or  singular:  as, 

(a.)  neque  multitude  hostium  neque  telorum  vis  arcere  impetum 
eius  viri  potuerunt,  L.  26,  5,  17,  neither  the  numbers  of  the  enemy  nor  the 
shower  of  missiles  could  arrest  the  onslaught  of  that  intrepid  soul,  si  quid 
SScrates  aut  Aristippus  fecerint,  Off.  I,  148,  if  a  Socrates  or  an  Aristippus 
had  done  anything.  (b.)  neque  pes  neque  mens  satis  suom  officium 
facit,  T.  Eu.  729,  nor  foot  nor  mind  its  duty  doth  aright,  si  SScrates  aut 
Antisthenes  diceret,  TD.  5,  26,  if  a  Socrates  or  an  Antisthenes  should  say  it. 

1071.  Collectives  have  usually  a  singular  verb.     But  the  plural  is 
sometimes  used,  especially  when  the  subject  is  separated  from  its  verb, 
or  is  to  be  supplied  from  a  preceding  clause :  as, 

cum  tanta  multitude  lapides  conicerent,  2,  6,  3,  when  such  a  throng 
•were  throwing  stones,  is  civitati  persuasit,  ut  de  fmibus  suis  exirent, 
1,2,  I,  this  person  succeeded  in  inducing  the  community  to  leave  their  territory. 

1072.  The  verb  sometimes  agrees  with  an  appositive  explaining 
the  subject,  or  with  a  substantive  in  the  predicate  :  as, 

(a.)  flammae  late  fusae,  certioris  cladis  indicium,  progredi  longius 
prohibuit,  L.  10,  43,  n,  wide-spread  flames,  sign  of  a  surer  disaster,  prevented 
a  further  advance.  When  urbs,  oppidum,  civitas,  or  the  like,  is  added  to 
plural  names  of  places,  the  predicate  usually  agrees  with  the  appellative: 
as,  Corioli  oppidum  captum,  L.  2,  33,  9,  Corioli  town  was  taken,  (b.}  aman- 
tium  irae  amoris  integratiSst,  T.  Andr.  555,  lovers'  tiffs  are  love's  renewal. 
summa  omnium  fuerunt  ad  milia  CCCLXVIII,  i,  29,  3,  the  grand  total  was 
about  three  hundred  and  sixty-eight  thousand.  The  verb  regularly  agrees  with 
the  predicate  substantive  when  the  subject  is  an  infinitive  :  as,  contentum 
suis  rebus  esse  maximae  sunt  divitiae,  Par.  51,  for  a  man  to  be  content 
with  his  own  estate  is  the  greatest  possible  riches. 

1073.  The  verb  sometimes  agrees  with  a  substantive  introduced  by  such  words  as 
quam,  quantum,  nisi,  or  praeterquam:  as,  quis  ilium  c5nsulem  nisi 
latrones  putant  ?  Ph.  4,  9,  who  but  brigaiid^  think  that  man  a  consul?     So  also 
a  predicate  adjective  or  participle:    as,   mih!   n5n   tarn   copia  quam   modus 
quaerendus    est,  IP.    3,    /  must  aim  not  so  much    at   comprehensiveness  as  at 
moderation. 

1074.  A  speaker  in  referring  to  himself  sometimes  uses  the  first  person  plural,  as 
a  more  modest  form  of  expression:  as.  MolonI  dedimus  operam,  Br.  307,  -we  at- 
tended Molo^s  instruction,  i.e.  I.     Similarly  nos  in  all  its  cases  for  ego,  &c.,  and 
noster,  &c.,  for  meus,  &c. 

•85 


1075.  The  singular  imperative  age  is  sometimes  used  in  addressing  more  than 
one,  particularly  in  old  Latin  :  as,  age  licemini,  PI.  St.  221,  come,  people,  give  a  bid. 
age  igitur  intro  abite,  PI.  MG.  928,  come  then  go  in.    Similarly,  cave  dirum- 
patis,  PI.  Poen.  117,  mind  you  don't  break  it  off.     Similarly  ain. 

1076.  If  the  subjects  are  of  different  persons,  the  first  person  is 
preferred  to  the  second  or  the  third,  and  the  second  to  the  third  :  as, 

si  tu  et  Tullia,  lux  nostra,  valetis,  ego  et  suavissimus  Cicero  vale- 
mus,  Fani.  14,  5,  I,  if  you  and  Tullia,  our  sunbeam,  are  well,  darling  Cicero 
and  1  are  well.  But  sometimes  in  contrasts  the  verb  agrees  with  the  nearest 
person  :  as,  quid  indicat  aut  ipse  Cornelius  aut  vos  ?  Sull.  54,  -what  infor- 
mation does  Cornelius  himself  give,  or  you  people  ? 


(B.)    OF   THE    NOUN. 
(i.)    THE    SUBSTANTIVE. 

1077.  A  substantive  which  explains  another  substan- 
tive referring  to  the  same  thing  is  put  in  the  same  case. 

This  applies  to  the  substantive  used  as  attribute,  appositive,  or  predi- 
cate. The  two  substantives  often  differ  in  gender  or  number,  or  both. 
«i)  Attribute:  tirone  exercitu,  Fam.  7,  3,  2,  with  a  raw  army,  a  mlma 
uxore,  Ph.  2,  20,  from  an  actress-wife,  mendicos  homines,  PI.  St.  135, 
beggar-men,  oculi  hominis  histrionis,  DO.  2,  193,  the  eyes  of  an  actor  man. 
nemim  homim,  PI.  As.  466,  to  no  human  being,  servom  hominem,  T.  Ph. 
292,  a  servant  man.  homines  sicario^,  RA.  8,  professional  bravoes.  (b.)  Ap- 
positive :  quid  dicam  de  thesauro  rerum  omnium,  memoria  ?  DO  i,  18, 
what  shall  I  say  of  that  universal  storehouse,  the  memory  ?  duo  fulmina 
nostri  imperi,  Cn.  et  P.  ScipiSnes,  Balb  34,  the  two  thunderbolts  of  our 
realm,  the  Scipios,  Gnaetis  and  Publius.  (c.)  Predicate  :  Ira  furor  brevis  est, 
H  E.  i,  2,  62,  wrath  is  a  madness  brief.  Dolabella  hoste  decreto,  Fh.  1 1,  16, 
Dolabella  having  been  voted  a  public  enemy.  Some  apparent  exceptions  will 
be  noticed  from  time  to  time  hereafter. 

1078.  Mobile  substantives  take  also  the  gender  and  number  of 
the  masculines  or  feminines  they  explain  :  as, 

stilus  optimus  dicendi  magister,  DO.  i,  150,  pen  is  the  best  professor  of 
rhetoric,  vita  rustica  parsimoniae  jnagistra  est,  RA.  75,  country  life  is 
a  teacher  of  thrift,  fluviorum  rex  Eridanus,  V.  G.  \,  482.  Eridanus,  of 
rivers  king,  et  genus  et  formam  regina  pecunia  donat,  H.  E.  i,  6,  37, 
both  birth  and  shape  the  almighty  dollar  gives,  ut  omittam  illas  omnium 
doctrinarum  inventrices  Athenas,  DO.  i,  \T),  to  say  nothing  of  the  great  origi- 
nator of  all  intellectual  pursuits,  Athens. 

1079.  A  substantive  explaining  two  or  more  substantives,  is  put 
in  the  plural :  as, 

foedus  inter  Romam  Laviniumque  urbes  renovatum  est,  L.  i,  14,  3, 
the  treaty  between  the  cities  of  Rome  and  Lavinium  was  renewed.  Cn.  et  P. 
Scipiones,  Balb.  34,  the  Scipios^  Gnaeus  and  Publius. 

186 


Agreement :   The  Noun.     [  1 080- 1 084. 

1080.  A  plural  subject,  expressed  or  implied,  is  sometimes  defined 
by  a  singular  word,  which  is  generally  a  collective  or  distributive : 
as, 

ut  ambo  exercitus  suas  quisque  abirent  domos,  L.  2,  7,  i,  so  that  both 
armies  went  back  to  their  respective  homes,  uterque  eorum  ex  castris  exer- 
citum  educunt,  Caes.  C.  3,  30,  3,  they  bring  their  army  out  of  camp,  each  of 
the»i.  heus  foras  exite  hue  aliquis,  PI.  E.  398,  hallo,  you  boys,  come  out 
of  doors  here,  somebody,  alius  alium  percontamur,  PI.  St.  370,  we  ask  of  one 
another,  cum  accidisset  ut  alter  alterum  videremus,  Fin.  3,  8,  -when  it 
came  to  pass  that  we  each  saw  the  other.  The  verb  sometimes  agrees  with  the 
defining  singular :  as,  quando  duo  consules,  alter  morb5,  alter  ferro 
periisset,  L.  41,  18,  16,  since  the  two  consuls  had  died,  one  a  natural  death, 
the  other  by  the  sword. 

1081.  A  substantive  in  the  accusative  or  nominative  is  sometimes 
in  apposition  to  a  thought  or  clause  :  as, 

manus  intentantes,  causam  discordiae,  Ta.  i,  27,  shaking  their  fists,  a 
provocation  to  quarrel,  pars  ingenti  subiere  feretro,  triste  ministerium, 
V.  6,  222,  a  part  put  shoulder  to  the  mighty  bier,  a  service  sad.  nee  Homerum 
audiS,  qui  Ganymeden  ab  dis  raptum  ait  propter  formam ;  non  iusta 
causa  cur  Laomedonti  tanta  fieret  iniuria,  TD.  i,  65,  nor  will  I  lend  an 
tar  to  Homer,  who  asserts  that  Ganymede  was  carried  off  by  the  gods  for  his 
beauty  ;  no  just  reason  for  doing  Laomedon  such  injustice. 


(2.)    THE  ADJECTIVE. 

1082.  An  adjective,  adjective  pronoun,  or  participle, 
agrees  with  its  substantive  in  number,  gender,  and  case : 
as, 

vir  bonus,  H.  Ep.  i,  16,  40,  a  good  man,  bona  uxor,  PI.  MG.  684,  a  good 
wife,  oleum  bonum,  Cato,  RR.  3,  good  oil.  Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in 
partes  tres,  I,  I,  I,  Gaul,  including  everything  under  the  name,  is  divided  into 
three  parts,  et  variae  volucres  nemora  avia  pervolitantes  aera  per  tene- 
rum  liquidis  loca  vocibus  opplent,  Lucr.  2,  145,  and  motley  birds,  in  path- 
less luoods  that  flit  through  lither  sky,  fill  space  with  carols  clear. 

1083.  An  adjective  or  participle,  either  attributive  or  predicate,  some- 
times takes  the  number  and  gender  of  the  persons  or  things  implied  in  the 
substantive  :  as, 

(a.)  concursus  populi  mirantium  quid  r§i  esset,  L.  i,  41,  \,  a  gather- 
ing of  the  public,  wondering  what  was  the  matter,  (b. )  pars  subeuntium 
obruti,  pars  confixi,  Ta.  H.  2,  22,  a  part  of  those  who  came  up  were  cwshed, 
a  part  ^vere  run  through.  Sammtium  caesi  tria  milia  ducenti,  L.  10, 
34,  3,  of  the  Samnites  were  slain  three  thousand  two  hundred. 

1084.  (i.)  An  attributive  adjective  referring  to  several  substan- 
tives is  commonly  expressed  with  one  only,  generally  with  the  first  or 
the  last:  as, 

187 


1085-1092.]  Sen  tences. 


res  erat  multae  operae  et  Iab5ris,  5,  n,  5,  it  was  a  job  that  required 
much  work  and  trouble,  semper  amavi  ingenium,  studia,  mores  tuos, 
O.  33,  /  have  always  admired  your  ability,  your  scholarly  tastes,  and  your 
character.  In  lively  style,  the  adjective  is 'often  used  with  every  substantive. 

1085.  Two  or  more    attributive  adjectives  in  the  singular  connected  by  a 
conjunction  may  belong  to  a  plural  substantive  :  as, 

circa  portas  Collmam  Esquilinamque,  L.  26,  10,  2,  about  the  gates,  the 
CollineandtheEsquiline.  But  the  substantive  may  also  be  in  the  singular : 
as,  inter  Esquilmam  Collinamque  portam,  L.  26,  10,  I,  between  the  Esqui- 
line  and  the  Colline  gate. 

1086.  The  combined  idea  of   a  substantive  with  an  attributive  adjective 
may  be  qualified  by  one  or  more  adjectives :  as, 

navis  longas  triginta  veteres,  L.  27,  22,  12,  thirty  old  men-of-war. 
privata  navis  oneraria  maxima,  V.  5,  136,  a  very  large  private  freighting 
vessel,  ater  alienus  canis,  T.  Ph.  706,  a  strange  black  dog. 

1087.  (2.)  A  predicate  adjective  or  participle  referring  to  two  or 
more  substantives  is  usually  in  the  plural ;  its  gender  is  determined  as 
follows  : 

1088.  (a.)  If  the  substantives  denote  persons  of  the  same  gender,  that 
gender  is  used ;  if  they  denote  persons  of  different  gender,  the  masculine  is 
used  :  as, 

veneno  absumpti  Hannibal  et  Philopoemen,  L.  39,  52,  8,  it  was  by 
poison  that  Hannibal  and  Philopoemen  were  taken  off.  quam  pridem  pater 
mih!  et  mater  mortui  essent,  T.  Eu.  517,  how  long  my  father  and  my 
mother  had  been  dead. 

1089.  (b.)  If  the  substantives  denote  things,  and  are  of  different  genders, 
the  neuter  plural  is  used;  also  commonly  when  they  are  feminines  denoting 
things :   as, 

murus  et  porta  de  caelS  tacta  erant,  L.  32,  29,  i,  the  wall  and  town-gate 
had  been  struck  by  lightning,  ira  et  avaritia  imperio  potentiora  erant, 

L.  37,  32,  13,  hot  blood  and  greed  proved  stronger  than  authority. 

1090.  (c.)  If  the  substantives  denote  both  persons  and  things,  either  the 
gender  of  the  substantives  denoting  persons   is  used,  or  the  neuter.     The 
gender  of  the  substantives  denoting  things  is  very  rarely  used :  as, 

et  rex  regiaque  classis  una  profecti,  L.  21,  50,  n,  the  king  too  and  the 
king's  fleet  set  sail  in  his  company,  inimica  inter  se  liberam  civitatem  et 
regem,  L.  44,  24,  2,  that  a  free  state  and  a  monarch  were  irreconcilable  things. 
Dolopas  et  Athamaniam  €reptas  sibi  querens,  L.  38,  10,  3,  complaining 
that  the  Dolopians  and  Athamania  were  wrested  from  him. 

1091.  When  the  verb  is  arttached  to  the  nearest  only  of  two  or  more  subjects,  a 
predicate  participle  or  adjective  naturally  takes  the  gender  of  that  substantive :   as, 
ibl  Orgetorigis  filia   atque  unus  e  filiis  captus   est,   i,  26,  5,  there  the 
daughter  of  Orgetorix  and  one  of  the  sons  too  was  made  prisoner,     ut    brachia 
atque  umeri  liberi  esse  possent,  7,  56,  4,  so  that  their  arms  and  shoulders 
might  be  unhampered. 

1092.  The  ablative  singular  absente  is  used  once  each  by  Terence  and  Afranius 
with  a  plural  substantive  :  absente  n5bis,  T.  Eu.  649,  -while  we  -were  out. 

188 


Agreement:    The  Noun.     [1093-1098. 


1093.  A  neuter  adjective  or  pronoun  is  sometimes  used  as  a  substantive 
in  the  predicate  (noi):  as, 

triste  lupus  stabulls,  V.  E.  3,  80,  a  baleful  thing  the  wolf  for  folds. 
quod  ego  fui  ad  Trasumennum,  id  tu  hodie,  L.  30,  30,  12,  what  I  was 
myself  at  Trasumene,  that  you  are  today. 

1094.  A    demonstrative,  determinative,  or   relative  pronoun 
used  substantively  takes  the  number  and  gender  of  the  substan- 
tive it  represents ;  the  case  depends  on  the  construction  of  the 
clause  in  which  it  stands :  as, 

erant  pedites,  quos  delegerant;  cum  his  in  proeliis  versabantur ;  ad 
eos  se  recipiebant ;  hi  concurrebant,  i,  48,  5,  there  were  foot-soldiers  whom 
they  had  picked  out ;  with  these  men  they  kept  company  in  action  ;  upon  them 
they  would  fall  back;  these  people  would  always  rally.  Hippias  gloriatus 
est  anulum  quern  haberet,  pallium  quo  amictus,  soccos  quibus  indutus 
esset,  se  sua  manu  confecisse,  DO,  3,  127,  Hippias  bragged  he  had  made 
with  his  own  hand  the  ring  which  he  wore,  the  cloak  in  which  he  was  wrapped', 
and  the  slippers  which  he  had  on. 

1095.  Sometimes,  however,  the  number  and  gender  of  these  pronouns 
are  determined  by  the  sense,  and  not  by  the  form  of  the  substantive  repre- 
sented :  as, 

equitatum  ornnem  praemittit,  qui  videant,  I,  15,  i,  he  sends  all  the  horse 
ahead,  for  them  to  see.  hie  sunt  quinque  minae.  hoc  tibi  erus  me  iussit 
ferre,  PL  Ps.  1149,  here  are  Jive  minae ;  this  my  master  bade  me  bring  for  thee. 
Domitius  Massiliam  pervenit  atque  ab  iis  receptus  urbi  praeficitur, 
Caes.  C.  I,  36,  I,  Domitius  arrived  at  Massilia,  and  was  received  by  the  people 
and  put  in  charge  of  the  town.  ad  hirundininum  nidum  visast  simia 
adscensionem  ut  faceret  admolirier;  neque  eas  eripere  quibat  inde, 
PI.  R.  598,  up  to  a  swallow-nest  methought  an  ape  did  strive  to  climb ;  nor 
could  she  snatch  the  nestlings  thence;  the  eas  refers  to  hirundines,  implied 
in  hirundininum. 

1096.  A  pronoun  representing  two  or  more  substantives  sometimes  takes 
the  number  and  gender  of  the  nearest.     But  usually  it  is  plural,  and   its 
gender  is  determined  like  that  of  an  adjective  (1087). 

1097.  A  demonstrative,  determinative,  or  relative  pronoun  used  substan- 
tively is  generally  attracted  to  the  number  and  gender  of  a  predicate  sub- 
stantive in  its  own  clause  :  as, 

haec  est  nobilis  ad  Trasumennum  pugna,  L.  22,  7,  i,  such  is  the  far- 
famed  fight  at  Trasumene,  217  B.  c.  ista  quidem  vis  est,  Suet.  lul.  82,  now 
that  I  call  an  outrage,  Caesar's  dying  words,  44  B.C.  But  with  a  negative, 
sometimes  the  neuter  :  as,  nee  sopor  illud  erat,  V.  3, 1731  nor  was  that  sleep. 

1098.  A  demonstrative,  determinative,  or  relative  pronoun  in  agreement 
with  a  substantive  is  often  equivalent  to  a  genitive  limiting  the  substantive : 
as, 

hoc  metu  vagari  prohibebat,  5,  19,  2,  by  fear  of  this  he  stopped  the 
prowling  round,  is  pavor  perculit  Romanes,  L.  21.  46,  7,  the  panic  occa- 
sioned by  this  demoralized  the  Romans,  qua  spe  adducti,  4,  6,  4,  impelled  by 
the  hope  of  this. 

189 


1099-1104.]      Sentences:    The  Simple  Sentence. 
THE   SIMPLE   SENTENCE. 

(A.)    USE    OF   THE  NOUN. 


NUMBER   AND   GENDER. 

logg.  The  singular  of  a  word  denoting  a  person  is  sometimes 
used  in  a  collective  sense. 

This  singular  is  generally  a  military  designation :  as,  miles,  eques, 
pedes,  hostis,  Romanus,  Poenus.  But  other  substantives  and  adjectives 
are  occasionally  thus  used. 

1 100.  A  substantive  or  adjective  denoting  a  person  is  often  used  in  the 
singular  as  representative  of  a  class,  particularly  when  two  persons  are 
contrasted :  as, 

si  tabulam  de  naufragio  stultus  adripuerit,  extorquebitne  earn  sa- 
piens ?  Off.  3,  89,  if  a  fool  has  seized  a  plank  from  a  wreck,  will  the  sage 
twitch  it  away  ? 

HOI.  The  neuter  singular  of  certain  adjectives  is  used  as  an 
abstract  substantive. 

These  adjectives  have  commonly  stems  in  -o-,  and  are  often  used  in  the 
partitive  genitive  (1250).  The  nominative  is  rare,  also  the  accusative  and 
ablative,  except  in  prepositional  constructions.  Such  are  :  bonum,  malum  ; 
rectum,  pravum  ;  decorum,  indecorum ;  honestum  ;  verum,  falsum  ; 
iustum,  iniustum  ;  aequum  ;  ambiguum  ;  ridiculum.  utile,  inane, 
commune,  insigne,  simile,  &c. 

1 102.  Certain   adjectives,   which    originally   agreed  with  an  appellative 
denoting  a  thing,  have  dropped  the  appellative  and  become  substantives. 

Such  are:  Africus,  sc.  ventus ;  Africa,  sc.  terra;  calda,  sc.  aqua; 
cam,  sc.  capilli ;  circenses,  sc.  ludi ;  decuma,  sc.  pars ;  fera,  sc.  bestia ; 
hiberna,  sc.  castra ;  merum,  sc.  vinum  ;  natalis,  sc.  dies ;  patria,  sc. 
terra;  praetexta,  sc.  toga;  summa,  sc.  res;  triremis,  sc.  navis,  and 
many  others. 

1103.  Certain  adjectives  denoting  relationship,  friendship,  hostility, 
connection,  or  age,  may  be  used  in  both  numbers  as  substantives. 

Such  are  :  (a.)  adfinis,  cognatus,  consanguineus,  gentflis,  necessa- 
rius,  propinquus;  (b.}  adversarius,  amicus,  inimicus,  familiaris,  hostis, 
intimus,  invidus,  socius,  sodalis  ;  (c.)  contubernalis,  manipularis,  vici- 
nus ;  (d.)  adulescens,  aequalis,  iuvenis,  senex. 

1104.  The  masculine  plural  of  many  adjectives  is  used  substan- 
tively  to  denote  a  class. 

Such  are :  bom,  the  good,  the  well-disposed,  conservatives,  patriots,  our  party; 
improbi,  the  wicked,  the  dangerous  classes,  revolutionists,  anarchists,  the  opposite 
party  ;  docti,  indocti ;  pii,  impii,  and  the  like. 

190 


The  Noun :  Cass.          [i  105-1 1 1 2. 


1105.  Proper  names  of  men  are  used  in  the  plural  to  denote  different 
persons  of  the  same  name,  or  as  appellatives  to  express  character,  oftenest 
good  character:  as, 

duo  Metelll,  Celer  et  Nepos,  Br.  247,  the  two  Metelhises,  Celer  and 
Nepos.  quid  CrassSs,  quid  Pompeios  evertit  ?  J.  10,  108,  what  overthrew 
a  Crassus,  Pompey  zuhat ?  i.e.  men  like  Crassus  and  Pompey. 

1106.  The  neuter  plural  of  adjectives  of  all  degrees  of  comparison 
is  very  often  used  as  a  substantive. 

Such  adjectives  are  usually  in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  and  may 
have  a  pronoun,  a  numeral,  or  an  adjective,  agreeing  with  them.  In  English 
the  singular  is  often  preferred.  Such  are:  bona,  mala;  vera,  falsa; 
haec,  this  ;  omnia,  everything;  haec  omnia,  all  this,  &c.,  &c. 

1107.  Names  of  countries  are  sometimes  used  in  the  plural  when  the  country  con- 
sists of  several  parts  which  are  called  by  the  same  name  as  the  whole  country :  as, 
Galliae,  the  Gauls ;  Germaniae,  the  Germanics. 

1108.  Material  substantives  are  often  used  in  the  plural  to  denote 
different  sorts  of  the  substance   designated,  its  constituent  parts,  or 
objects  made  of  it :  as, 

aera,  lumps  of  bronze,  bronzes,  coppers,  aquae,  water  in  different  places,  me- 
dicinal springs,  cerae,  pieces  of  wax,  tablets,  wax  masks,  waxworks,  mar- 
mora,  kinds  of  marble,  blocks  of  marble,  works  of  marble,  nives,  snowflakcs, 
snowdrifts,  snowstorms,  repeated  snows.  spumae,  masses  of  foam.  SUlpura, 
lumps  of  sulphur.  Vina,  wines,  different  kinds  of  wine. 

I IOQ.  Abstract  substantives  are  often  used  in  the  plural  to  denote 
different  kinds  or  instances  of  the  abstract  idea,  or  an  abstract  idea 
pertaining  to  several  persons  or  things  :  as, 

sunt  domesticae  fortitudines  non  inferiores  militaribus,  Off.  I,  78, 
there  are  cases  of  heroism  in  civil  life  fully  equal  to  those  in  war.  te  consci- 
entiae  stimulant  maleficiorum  tuSrum,  Par.  18,  you  are  tormented  by 
pricks  of  conscience  for  your  sins,  propter  siccitates  paludum,  4,  38,  2,  be- 
cause  the  swamps  ^vere  dry  everyiuhere. 

I  HO.  The  plural  is  sometimes  used  in  generalizations,  and  in  poetry  to  magnify 
a  single  thing,  to  give  mystery  to  the  statement,  or  often  merely  for  metrical  conven- 
ience :  as,  adveriisse  familiares  dicito,  PL  Am.  353,  say  that  the  people  of  the 
house  are  come,  the  plural  familiares  denoting  one  person.  Priami  dum  regna 
manebant,  V.  2,  22,  while  Priam's  realms  still  stood,  externos  optate  ducer , 
V.  8,  503,  choose  captains  from  a  foreign  strand,  i.  e.  Aeneas. 


CASE. 

xi ix.  There  are  two  groups  of  cases,  the  principal  and  the 
secondary. 

1 1 12.  The  principal  cases  are  the  nominative  and  the  accusative. 
The  principal  cases,  which  have  more  complete  inflections  than  the 
secondary,  express  the  two  chief  relations  of  the  noun  in  the  sentence, 
those  of  the  subject  and  of  the  object.  The  secondary  cases  are  used 
to  express  subordinate  or  supplementary  relations. 

191 


1 1 1 3-1 1 18.]     Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


THE    NOMINATIVE. 

1113.  The  nominative  is  principally  used  as  the  subject  or  predi- 
cate noun  of  a  verb  or  of  an  infinitive.  Besides  this  use,  the  nomina- 
tive occurs  in  titles,  exclamations,  and  addresses  (1114-1123). 


THE  NOMINATIVE  OF  TITLE. 

1114.  The  nominative  is  used  in  inscriptions,  notices,  titles, 
or  headings:  as, 

L  •  CORNELIVS  •  CN  •  F  •  CN  •  N  •  SCIPIO,  CIL.  I,  34,  on  a  tomb,  Lucius  Corne- 
lius Scipio,  son  (films)  of  Gnaeus,  grandson  (nepSs)  of  Gnaeus.  LABYRIN- 
THVS  Hie  HABITAT  MiNOTAVRVS,  CIL.  IV,  2331,  on  a  plan  of  the  Labyrinth 
scratched  by  a  Pompei  schoolboy,  The  Maze.  Here  lives  Minotaur.  PRIVA- 
TVM  PRECARIO  ADEITVR,  CIL.  I,  1215,  Private  Grounds.  No  Admittance 
without  leave.  Themistocles,  Neocli  filius,  Atheniensis,  N.  2,  i,  Themis- 
tocles,  son  of  Neocles,  of  Athens. 

1115.  The  title  proper  of  a  book  is  often  put  in  the  genitive,  dependent  on  liber 
orlibri:  as,  Cornell  Taciti  Historiarum  Liber  Primus,  Tacitus'1  s  Histories, 
Book  First.     Or  prepositional  expressions  are  used:  as,  M.  Tulll  Ciceronis  de 
Fato  Liber,  Cicero,  Fate,  in  One  Book.    Cornell  Taciti  ab  Excessu  divl 
August!  Liber  Primus,   Tacitus's  Roman  History  from  the  Demise  of  the 
sainted  Augustus,  Book  First. 

XI 1 6.  Sometimes  the  nominative  of  a  title  or  exclamation  is  retained  in  a  sentence 
for  some  other  case:  as,  Gabini5  cognomen  '  Cauchius'  usurpare  conces- 
sit,  Suet.  CL  24,  he  allowed  Gabinius  to  take  the  surname*  Cauchius ;'  (compare 
Cato  quasi  cognomen  habebat  Sapientis,  L.  6,  Cato  had  the  virtttal  sur- 
nameofthe  Wise).  «  Marsya'  nomen  nabet,  O.  6,  400,  it  has  the  name  of '  Mar- 
ryas;'  (compare  nomen  Danuvium  habet,  S.  Fr.  3,  55,  it  has  the  name 
Danube),  resonent  mihi  '  Cynthia '  silvae,  Prop,  i,  18,  31,  let  -woods  reecho 
'  Cynthia '  for  me;  (compare  tu,  Tityre,  formosam  resonare  doces  Ama- 
ryllida  silvas,  V.  E.  i,  4,  thou,  Tityrus,  dost  teach  the  -woods  to  echo  Amaryllis 
Fair). 

THE  NOMINATIVE  OF  EXCLAMATION. 

1117.  The  nominative  is  sometimes  used  in  exclamations:  as, 
fortunae  filius,  omnes,  H.  S.  2,  6,  49,  ''the  child  of  Fortune ;'  all  exclaim. 

This  nominative  is  often  accompanied  by  an  interjection,  such  as  ecce,  en, 
heu,  5,  pro,  van:  as,  en  Priamus,  V.  i,  461,  lo,  Priam  here.  6  festus 
dies,  T.  Eu.  560,  oh  day  of  cheer.  For  eccilla,  see  667. 

THE  VOCATIVE  NOMINATIVE  AND  VOCATIVE  PROPER. 

1118.  The  vocative  nominative  is  used  when  a  per- 
son or  thing  is  addressed :  as, 

qu5  Usque  tandem  abutere,  Catilma,  patientia  nostra  ?  C.  i,  i,  in 
heaven's  name,  how  long,  Catiline,  wilt  trifle  with  our  patience?  valet e, 
desideria  mea,  valete,  Fam.  14,  2,  4,  good  bye,  my  absent  loves,  good  bye.  In- 
stead of  a  proper  name,  an  emphatic  tu  is  often  used :  as,  advorte  animum 
sis  tu,  PI.  Cap.  1 10,  just  pay  attention,  sirrah,  please. 

192 


The  Noun  :  Accusative.     [1119-1126. 


mg.  Masculine  stems  in  -o-  commonly  use  the  special  form 
for  the  second  person  singular  called  the  vocative  :  as, 

urbem,  urbem,  mi  Rufe,  cole,  Fam.  2,  12,  2,  stick  to  town,  dear  Rtifus, 
yes,  to  town.  But  the  vocative  nominative  is  sometimes  used  even  of  -o- 
stems:  as,  audi  tu,  populus  Albanus,  L.  I,  24,7,  hear  thou,  the  people  of 
Alba. 

1120.  Poets  use  the  vocative  nominative  or  vocative  proper  very  freely, 
sometimes  for  liveliness,  but  often  simply  in  place  of  other  cases  not  allowed 
by  the  metre :  as, 

ora  manusque  tua  lavimus,  Feronia,  lympha  H.  S.  I,  5,  24,  our  faces 
and  our  hands,  Feronia,  in  thy  stream  we  wash,  occiderat  Tatius,  populis- 
que  aequata  duobus,  R5mule,  iura  dabas,  O.  14,  805,  now  dead  was 
Tatius,  and  to  peoples  twain  thou  gavest,  Romulus,  impartial  laws,  longum 
tibi,  Daedale,  crimen,  O.  8,  240,  a  lasting  stigma,  Daedalus,  to  thee.  In 
these  three  examples,  Feroniae,  Romulus,  and  Daedalo  would  be  impos- 
sible. In  poetry,  the  vocative  is  particularly  common  in  questions. 

1121.  Nominative   forms   and  vocative   forms  are  often  combined:   as,   dulcis 
amice,   H.  E.   i,   7,  12,  s-weet  friend,     mi  vir,  PI.  Am.  Ji6,my  husband.     lane 
pater,  J.  6,  394,  thou  father  "Janus, 

1 122.  In  verse  the  vocative  is   occasionally  used  even  in  the  predicate:  as,  quo 
moriture  ruis  ?  V.  10,  811,  whither,  on  death  intent, fliest  thou  ?     quibus,  Hec- 
tor,  ab  oris  exspectate  venis  ?  V.  2,  282,  out  of  what  limboes,  Hector,  dost  thou 
gladly  welcomed  come  ? 

1123.  The  vocative  nominative  or  vocative  proper  is  sometimes  accompanied  by 
O,  but  only  in  impassioned  addresses :  as,  6  fortunate  adulescens,  Arch.  24,  oh 
thou  thrice  blest  youth;  also  by  pr5  in  addresses  to  gods,  by  eho  and  heus  in  calls 
on  men.    Rarely  by  au,  ehem,  hem,  Sheu,  eia  or  heia,  io. 


THE    ACCUSATIVE. 

1124.  The  accusative  is  used   primarily  with  verbs,  or  with 
expressions  equivalent  to  verbs.     The  relations  expressed   by 
the  accusative  are  all  of  one  general  kind  ;  but  they  vary  some- 
what, according  to  the  nature  of  the  verb. 

1125.  I.  With  most  verbs,  the  accusative  either  (a.)  denotes 
that  which  is  affected  or  apprehended,  or  is  produced  by  the 
action  of  the  verb  (1132);  or,  less  frequently  (b.)  it  repeats  the 
meaning  of  the  verb  in  the  form  of  a  substantive  (1140). 

Such  accusatives,  called  accusatives  of  the  Object,  are  never  attended  by 
a  preposition,  and  become  nominative  in  the  passive  construction. 

1126.  II.  With  some  verbs,  the  accusative  denotes  (a.)  ex- 
tent or   duration    (1151);   with  others  it  denotes   (b.)   aim  of 
motion  (1157). 

Both  these  accusatives  sometimes  have  their  places  taken  by  a  preposi- 
tional expression,  or  by  an  adverb;  in  the  passive  construction,  they  are  not 
convertible  into  a  nominative,  but  remain  accusative. 

'3  193 


1127—1135-]     Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1127.  Two  or  even  three  accusatives  are  sometimes  used  with  one  and  the  same 
verb :  see  1167-1174. 

1128.  The  accusative  is  sometimes  disengaged  from  the  verb,  with 
which  it  originally  stood,  and  used  with  a  noun  or  a  preposition. 

1129.  (i.)  With  substantives,  the  accusative  is  rare;  it  is  used  (a.)  in 
i  few  attributive   expressions,  chiefly  old  set  forms,  and  rarely  to  denote 
(b.)  aim  of  motion. 

Thus  (a.)  the  predicative  id  aetatis,  in  id  aetatis  iam  sumus,  we  are 
now  of  that  age,  becomes  attributive  in  homines  id  aetatis,  people  of  that 
age.  And  (b.)  as  domum,  home,  is  used  with  the  verb  redeo,  go  back,  so  also 
rarely  with  the  substantive  reditio,  a  return. 

1130.  With  adjectives,  the  accusative  is  commonly  that  of  extent :  so  with 
altus,  high,  latus,  wide,  and  longus.  long,  sometimes  with  crassus,  thick. 

Thus,  in  eos  surculos  facito  sint  longl  pedes  binos,  see  that  the  scions 
be  two  feet  long,  the  accusative  pedes,  which  belongs  with  the  predicate  sint 
longl,  may  be  used  with  the  attributive  adjective  longus  alone,  thus  :  surculi 
long!  pedes  binos,  scions  two  feet  long. 

1131.  (2.)  The  accusative  is  used  with  many  prepositions  :  see  1410. 


I.    THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  THE  OBJECT. 

1132.  The  object  of  a  verb  is  put  in  the  accusative  : 
as, 

(a.)  oppida  sua  omnia  incendunt,  I,  5,  3,  they  set  all  their  towns  afire. 
conspexit  adrasum  quendam,  H.  E.  I,  7,  49,  he  spied  a  man  all  shaven 
and  shorn,  (b.)  duas  fossas  perduxit,  7,  72,  3,  he  made  two  trenches.  This 
accusative,  is,  as  may  be  seen  above,  either  (a.)  receptive,  i.  e.  existing  inde- 
pendently of  the  action  of  the  verb,  and  only  affected  or  apprehended  by 
it;  or  (b.)  of  product,  i.  e.  produced  by  the  action  of  the  verb. 

1133.  Verbs  thus  used  with  au  object  are  said  to  be  used  transi- 
tively.    Such  verbs  may  also  be  used  intransitively,  that  is  without 
an  object,  when  stress  is  put  on  the  action  merely  :  thus, 

(a.)  Transitively:  tu  me  amas,  e?O  te  amo,  PI.  Most.  y>$,thou  lovest 
me,  and  I  love  thee.  nova  diruunt,  alia  aedificant,  S.  C.  20,  12,  they  pull 
down  new  structures,  and  build  up  others,  (b.)  Intransitively  :  amo,  PI.  B.  51 1, 
I'm  in  love,  difuit,  aedificat,  H.  E.  i,  1, 100,  it pulleth  down,  it  buildeth  up. 

1134.  Some  verbs,  in  addition  to  the  accusative,  often  take  an  infinitive  also:  thus, 

eum  vident  sedere,  V.  5,  107,  they  see  him  sit,  they  see  that  he  is  sitting.  Here 
the  accusative  eum,  originally  the  object,  they  see  him,  becomes  at  the  same  time  the 
subject  of  the  new  statement  appended,  sedere,  sit,  thus  giving  rise  to  the  construc- 
tion known  as  the  accusative  -with  the  infinitive. 

1135.  Instead  of  the  proper  accusative  of  the  object,  another  accusative 
is  sometimes  substituted,  denoting  the  ultimate  result :  as, 

rupere  viam,  L.  2,  59,  10,  they  broke  a  path,  i.e.  they  broke  through  the 
obstacles,  and  so  made  a  'path,  foedusque  feri,  E.  33,  and  strike  a  covenant^ 
i.e  strike  a  victim,  and  so  make  a  covenant. 

194 


The  Noun  :  Accusative,     [i  136-1 140. 


1136.  In  Plautus,  quid  tibf  with  a  substantive  of  action  in  -tio  and  est,  has  an 
accusative  like  a  verb  used  transitively :  as,  quid  tibf  hanc  curatiost  rem  ?  PI. 
Am.  519,  what  business  hast  thou  with  this  ? 

1137.  Many  verbs  ordinarily  used  intransitively,  particularly 
verbs  of  motion,  have  a  transitive  use  when  compounded  with  a 
preposition. 

Such  prepositions  are,  ad,  circum,  ex,  in,  ob,  per,  prae,  praeter,  trans, 
and  some  others :  as,  plures  paucSs  circumsistebant,  4,  26,  2,  a  good  many 
took  their  stand  round  a  few.  Caesar  omnem  agrum  PIcenum  percurrit, 
Caes.  C.  i,  15,  I,  Caesar  runs  over  the  whole  Picene  territory.  praeterire 
nemo  pristrinum  potest,  PI.  Cap.  808,  no  man  can  pass  the  mill,  flumen 
transierunt,  4,  4,  7,  they  crossed  the  river. 

1138.  A  few  verbs  with  a  transitive  use,  have,  when  compounded  with  circum 
and  trans,  besides  the  accusative  of  the  object,  a  second  accusative  of  the  thing  to 
which  the  preposition  refers :  as,  istum  circumduce  hasce  aedis,  PI.  Most.  843, 
take  that  man  round  this  house.     Caesar  funditores  pontem  traducit,  2, 10,  i, 
Caesar  takes  the  slingers  over  the  bridge,     transfer  limen  aureolos  pedes,  Cat. 
61,  1 66,  over  the  threshold  put  thy  little  golden  foot.     In  the  passive,  the  accusative 
connected  with  the  preposition  is  sometimes  retained:    as,  Apolloniam  praeter- 
vehuntur,  Caes.  C.  3,  26,  I,  they  sail  by  Afollonia. 

1139.  Verbs  of  weeping  and  wailing,  and  some  other  verbs 
of  feeling,  which  commonly  have  an  intransitive  use,  sometimes 
have  a  transitive  use  with  an  accusative  :  as, 

(a.)  luget  senatus,  maeret  equester  6rd5,  Mil.  20,  the  senate  is  in 
mourning,  the  equestrian  order  betrays  its  sadness,  (b.)  matronae  eum  luxe- 
runt,  L.  2,  7,  4,  the  married  women  wore  mourning  for  him.  maereo  casum 
eius  modi,  Fain.  14,  2,  2,  I  cannot  help  showing  my  grief  over  a  misfortune  oj 
suck  a  kind,  quid  mortem  congemis  ac  fles,  Lucr.  3,  934.  why  dost  thou 
death  bewail  and  weep  ?  Such  verbs  are  fle5,  weep,  gemo,  wail,  lamentor, 
queror,  beruail,  doled,  am  distressed,  lugeo,  mourn,  maereo,  betray  sadness. 
Similarly,  horreS,  shudder,  reformidS,  am  in  dread,  fastidid,  fed  disdain, 
rideo,  laugh,  &c.,  &c.  The  object  is  oftener  a  thing  than  a  person,  and  pas- 
sive constructions  are  rare,  and  mostly  confined  to  poetry. 

THE  EMPHASIZING  OR  DEFINING  ACCUSATIVE. 

1140.  The  meaning  of  a  verb,  even  of  one  ordinarily  intran- 
sitive, may  be  emphasized  or  more  exactly  defined  by  an  accusa- 
tive of  kindred  derivation  added. 

(a.)  Seldom  without  an  adjective:  as,  dum  vitam  vivas,  PI.  Per.  494, 
as  long  as  life  thou  liv'st,  i.  e.  as  long  as  you  ever  live  and  breathe,  quorum 
maiorum  nemo  servitutem  servivit,  T.  29,  of  whose  ancestors  not  one  has 
served  servitude,  i.  e.  been  a  regular  slave,  vide  ne  facinus  facias,  Fin.  2, 95, 
mind  you  don't  do  a  deed,  \.  e.  a  misdeed,  (b.)  Commonly  with  an  adjective  : 
as,  scelestam  servitutem  serviunt,  PL  Cu.  40,  a  wicked  servitude  they  serve. 
facinus  memorabile  fecistis,  L.  24,  22,  16,  you  have  done  a  deed  well  worth 
mentioning,  mirum  atque  inscltum  somniavi  somnium,  PI.  R.  597,  a 
ttrange  and  silly  dream  dreamed  I. 

'95 


1141-1147-]    Sen tences  :   The  Simp le  Sen tence. 


1141.  The  verb  sometimes  has  an  accusative  of  kindred  meaning, 
but  of  different  derivation:  as, 

ut  vivas  aetatcm  miser,  PI.  Am.  1023,  that  thou  mayst  live  thy  days  in 
woe.  non  pugnavi':  ingens  Idomeneus  Sthenelusve  solus  dicenda  Mu- 
sis proelia,  H.  4,  9,  19,  not  towering  Idomeneus  nor  Stheneius  alone  has  battles 
fought  for  Muses  to  rehearse. 

1142.  The  neuter  singular  accusative  of  a  descriptive  adjective  is  used, 
particularly  by  the  poets,  to  denote  manner :  as, 

magnum  clamat,  PI.  MG.  823,  he's  bellowing  big.  suave  locus  voci 
resonat  conclusus,  H.  S.  1,4,  76,  sweet  to  the  voice  the  pent-up  place  rings  back. 
suave  rubens  hyacinthus,  V.  E.  3,  63,  sweet-blushing  hyacinth,  cur  tam 
cernis  acutum  ?  H.  S.  i,  3,  26,  why  dost  thou  see  so  sharp?  The  plural  is 
not  so  common:  as,  asper,  acerba  tuens,  Lucr.  5,  33,  V.  9,  794,  rough, 
staring  savageness. 

1143.  Some  verbs  of  smell  and  of  taste  have  an  accusative  defining  what  the  smell 
or  thi  taste  is  :  as,  pastilles  Rufillus  olet,  Gargonius  hircum,  H.  S.  i,  2,  27, 
of  lozenges  Rufillus  smells,  Gargonius  of  the  goat,     doctrinam  redolet  pueri- 
lem,  DO.  2,  109,  it  smacks  of  AB  C  studies,    non  omnes  possunt  olere  un- 
guenta  exotica,   PI.  Most.  42,  not  every  man   can  of  imported  ointments  reek. 
meliora  unguenta  sunt  quae  terram  quam  quae  crocum  sapiunt,  Cic. 
in  Plin.  NH.  17,  5,  3,  38,  essences  that  smell  of  earth  are  better  than  those  that  smell 
of  saffron. 

1144.  Any  verb  or  verbal  expression  may  be  denned  in  a  genera) 
way  by  the  neuter  accusative  of  a  pronoun  or  of  an  enumerative  word, 
as, 

id  gaude5,  T.  Andr.  362,  I'm  glad  of  that,  id  maestast,  PI.  fi.  397, 
she's  mournful  over  this,  id  prodeo,  T.  Eu.  1005,  I'm  coming  out  for  this. 
cetera  adsentior  Crasso,  DO.  I,  35,  on  all  the  other  points  I  agree  with  Cras- 
sus.  So  also  quod,yfcr  which,  on  account  of  which,  aliquid,  quicquam,  nihil, 
&c.,  &c.,  and  particularly  quid,  why,  in  what  respect,  wherein,  what,  or  what 
.  .  .  for:  as,  quid  venisti,  PI.  Am.  377,  why  art  thou  come  ?  quid  tib!  obsto, 
RA.  145,  wherein  do  I  stand  in  yoiir  way  ? 

1145.  The  accusative  of  an  appellative  is  rarely  used  adverbially  :  as,  magnam 
partem  ex  iambis  nostra  constat  oratio,  O,  189,  our  own  speech  is  made 
up  a  great  deal  of  iambs,     maximam  partem  lacte  vivunt,  4,  i,  8,tAey  live 
on  milk  the  most  part,  i.  e.  chiefly.     Prepositional  expressions  are  commoner :  as, 
magna  ex  parte,  i,  16,  &,  principally.     For  vicem,  in  stead  of,  for,  or  like,  see  the 
dictionary. 

1146.  The  accusative  is  sometimes  disengaged  from  a  verb,  and  qualifies  a  sub- 
stantive as  an  attribute,  chiefly  in  a  few  set  expressions  (1129):  as,  orationes  aut 
aliquid  id  genus,  Att.  13,  12,  T,,  speeches  or  something  that  kind,     aucupium 
omne  genus,  Cat.  114,  3,  fowling  of  every  kind,    nugas  hoc  genus,  H.  S. 
2,  6,  43,  small  talk  —  this  kind,     hoc  genus  in  rebus,  Lucr.  6,  917,  in  matters 
of  this  kind,     cum  id  aetatis  filio,  Clu.  141,  with  a  son  of  that  age.    Similarly 
dies  qumdecim  supplicatio,  2,  35,  4,  a  fortnight  thanksgiving. 


THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  THE  PART  CONCERNED. 

1147.  Poets  use  the  accusative  to  express  the  part  concerned,  especially 
a  part  of  the  human  body:  as, 

10,6 


The  Noim  :  Accusative.     [  1 1 48— 1 1 5 1 . 


tremit  artus,  Lucr.  3,  489,  V.  G.  3,  84,  he  shivers  in  his  limbs,  tremis 
ossa  pavore,  H.  S.  2,  7,  57,  •  thou  tremblest  in  thy  bones  with  fear,  viridi 
membra  sub  arbutS  stratus,  H.  I,  I,  21,  stretching  —  his  limbs  —  beneath 
an  arbute  green.  6s  umerosque  deo  similis,  V.  I,  589,  in  face  and  shoulder* 
like  a  god. 

THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  THE  THING  PUT  ON. 

1148.  The  accusative  is  used  with  reflexive  verbs  in  poetry  to  denote  the 
thing  put  on  :  as, 

comantem  Androgei  galeam  induitur,  V.  2,  Tftl+Androgtuf  high-haired 
helm  he  dons,  exuvias  indutus  Achilli,  V.  2,  275,  clad  in  Achilles'  spoils. 
Harely  to  denote  the  thing  taken  off :  as,  priores  exuitur  vultus,  St.  Th. 
lo,  640,  she  doffs  her  former  looks. 

THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  EXCLAMATION. 

1149.  The    accusative  is  used   in    exclamations,   sometimes 
merely  to  call  attention  to  something,  but  generally  with  a  pred- 
icate to  express  a  judgment  with  emphasis. 

(a.}  In  calling  attention,  ecce  or  em  is  used  in  old  Latin  :  as,  ecce  me, 
PI.  MG.  663,  behold,  your  humble  servant,  em  Davom  tibT,  T.  Andr.  842, 
there,  Davos  sir.  For  ellum,  eccillum,  &c.,  see  667  and  673.  Also,  from 
Cicero  on,  en:  as,  en  quattuor  aras,  V.  E.  5,  65,  see,  altars  four,  (b.)  In 
emphatic  judgments  sometimes  the  accusative  alone  :  as,  fortunatum  Ni- 
cobulum,  PI.  B.  455,  lucky  man  that  Nicobulus.  testis  egregios,  Gael.  63, 
mighty  fine  witnesses ;  sometimes  with  an  interjection :  as,  6  imperatorem 
probum,  PI.  B.  759,  oh  what  a  good  commander ;  rarely  so  with  ecastor, 
edepol,  euge,  bravo,  heu,  ilicet,  airs  up,  eheu.  Interrogatively:  hancine 
impudentiam  ?  V.  5,  62,  possible,  shamelessness  like  this? 

1150.  The  accusative  is  used  in  excited  orders,  appeals,  and  questions,  without 
any  verb  expressed,  or  even  distinctly  felt :  as,  Tiberium  in  Tiberim,  Suet.  Tib. 
7i,  Tiberius  to  the  Tiber,     dl  vostram  fidem,  T.  Andr.  716,  ye  gods  your  help, 
pro   fidem,   Thebam  elves,    PI.  Am.  376,  oh  help,  or   murder,  ye  citizens  of 
Thebes.     So  with  unde,  qu5,  and  quando,  often  followed  by  mihf  or  tib!  :  as, 
quo  mihi  fortunam,  si  non  conceditur  uti?  H.  E.  i,  5, 12,  -why  wealth  for 
me,  if  wealth  I  may  not  use? 


II.   THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME,  AND  OF 
AIM  OF  MOTION. 

THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME. 

1151.  Extent  of  space  or  duration  of  time  is  denoted 
by  the  accusative  :  as, 

197 


1152-1157-]    Sentences  :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


(a.)  milia  passuum  xx  procedit,  5,47,  i,  he  pushes  on  twenty  miles. 
trldui  viam  pr5gressl,  4,  4,  4,  having  advanced  three  days  journey,  agge- 
rem  latum  pedes  cccxxx,  altum  pedes  LXXX  exstruxerunt,  7,  24,  i,  thiV 
built  up  a  mound  three  hundred  and  thirty  feet  wide,  and  eighty  feet  high 
(1130).  (b.)  matronae  annum  luxerunt,  L.  2,  7,  4,  the  married  women  -wore 
mourning  a  year,  undevlgintl  annSs  natus  erat,  Br.  229,  he  was  nineteen 
years  old.  seciitae  sunt  continues  complures  dies  tempestates,  4,  34.  4, 
there  followed  a  good  many  days  a  succession  of  storms,  triennium  vagati, 
4,  4,  2,  having  led  a  nomad  life  three  years,  unum  diem  supplicatio  habita 
est,  L.  10,  47,  7,  a  thanksgiving  was  held  one  day.  dies  quindecim  suppli- 
catio, 2,  35,4,  a  fortnight  thanksgiving  (1129).  Sometimes  per  is  added: 
as,  ludl  per  decem  dies  fact!  sunt,  C.  3,  20,  games  were  celebrated  ten  days 
long. 

1152.  The  idea  of  traversing  is  sometimes  not  expressed:  as,  milia  passuum 
tria  ab  eorum  castris  castra  ponit,  i,  22,  5,  he  pitches  camp  three  miles  away 
from  their  camp,     quadringentds  inde  passus  constituit  signa,  L.  34,  20, 
$,four  hundred  paces  from  there  he  set  up  the  standards.   See  1399. 

1153.  With  absum  and  disto,  the  ablative  of  amount  of  difference  is  sometimes 
used (1393) :  as,  certior  factus  est  Ariovisti  copias  anostris  milibus  pas- 
suum quattuor  et  xx  abesse,  i,  41,  5,  he  -was  informed  that  Ariovistics's  troops 
•were  four  and  twenty  miles  away  from  ours.     If  the  place  is  not  mentioned  from 
which  distance  is  reckoned,  ab  or  a  is  sometimes  used  before  the  expression  of  dis- 
tance: as,  positis  castris  a  milibus  passuum  xv,  6,  7,  3,  pitching  camp fifteen 
miles  away. 

1154.  The  accusative  is  used  with  abhinc,  ago:  as,  quaestor  fuistl  abhinc 
annos  quattuordecim,  V.  i,  34,  you  were  a  quaestor  fourteen  years  ago.     Rarely 
the  ablative  (13^3) :  as,  quo  tempore  ?  abhinc  annls  xv,  RC<  37,  when  ?  fifteen 
years  ago;  and  once  or  twice  with  abhinc,  meaning  before  (1393):  as,  comitils 
abhinc  diebus  trlginta  factis,  K.  2,  130,  the  election  having  been  held  thirty 
days  before. 

1155.  The  accusative  singular  is  used  with  ordinals,  to  show  the  number  of  days, 
months,  or  years  since  a  particular  event,  including  the  day,  month,  or  year  of  the 
event  itself:   as,  quod  annum  iam  tertium  et  vlcesimum  regnat,  IP.  7, 
the  circumstance  that  he  has  now  been  on  the  throne  two  and  twenty  years. 

1156.  The  accusative  in  some  pronominal  expressions  and  adverbs  passes  over 
from  4  time  through  which '  to  a  loose  '  time  at  which  ' :  as,  id  temporis,  RA.  97,  at 
that  time,     hoc  noctis,  PI.  Am.  i63b,  at  this  time  of  night,     turn,  then,  num, 
nunc,  now,  nunc  ipsum,  PI.  B.  940,  Att.  10,  4,  10,  this  -very  minute,  commo- 
dum,just  in  time.     For  the  locative  ablative  exceptionally  used  to  denote  duration, 
see  1355. 

THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  THE  AIM  OF  MOTION. 

1157.  (i.)  Proper  names  of  towns  and  of  little  isl- 
ands or  peninsulas  are  put  in  the  accusative  to  denote 
the  aim  with  expressions  of  motion  :  as, 

Labienus  Lutetiam  proficlscitur,  7,  57,  i,  Labienus  starts  for  Lutetia. 
Leucadem  venimus,  Rim.  16, 9,  i,  we  came  to  Lcnqts.  nocturnus  introitus 
Zmyrnam,  Ph.  1 1,  5,  the  entrance  into  Smyrna  by  night  ( \  129)  Plautus  uses 
Accheruns  a  few  times  like  a  town  name:  as,' vivom  me  accersunt  Ac- 
cheruntem  mortui,  Most.  509,  the  dead  are  taking  me  to  Acheron  alive. 

198 


The  Noun :  A ccusative.     [1158-1166. 


1158.  With  singular  names  of  towns  and  little  islands,  Plautus  has  the  accusative 
alone  twenty  times,  and  twenty  times  with  in  ;  Terence  has,  including  Lemnum, 
Ph.  ^67,  and  Cyprum,  Ad.  224,  230,  the  accusative  alone  six  times,  and  twice  with 
in,  in  Lemnum,  Ph.  66,  and  in  Cyprum,  Ad.  278.     Plural  town  names  never 
have  in. 

1159.  An  appellative  urbem  or  oppidum  accompanying  the  accusative  of  a 
town  name  is  usually  preceded  by  in  or  ad  :  as,  ad  urbem  Fidenas  tendunt, 
L.  4,  33,  10,  they  make  for  the  city  of  Fidenae.     lugurtha  Thalam  pervenit,  in 
oppidum  magnum,  S.  /.  75,  i,  Jugurtha  arrived  at  Thala,  a  large  town. 

1160.  When  merely  'motion  towards'  or  'nearness'  is  meant,  ad  is  used:  as, 
tres  viae  sunt  ad  Mutinam,  Ph.  12,  22,  there  are  three  roads  to  Mutina.     mi- 
les ad  Capuam  profectus  sum,  CM.  10,  I  -went  to  the  -war  as  a  private,  to  the 
region  round  about  Capua. 

1161.  Proper  names  of  countries  are  a_lso  sometimes  put  in  the  accusative  in  poe- 
try, to  denote  aim  of  motion:  as,  abiit  Alidem,  PI.  Cap.  573,  he  -went  away  to 
Elis.     So  in  prose  also,  Aegyptus  in  Cicero,  Caesar,  Nepos,  Livy,  and  Tacitus :  as, 
Germanicus  Aegyptum   proficiscitur,  Ta.  2,  ^59,  Germanicus  sets  out  for 
Egypt.     Rarely  and  in  poetry  names  of  peoples  :  as,  sitientis  ibimus  Afros,  V. 
E.  i,  64,  to  thirst-parched  Afrians  -we  shall  go.     In  general  the  accusative  of  country 
names  is  preceded  by  in  or  ad,  as  are  also  appellatives  regularly  in  prose ;  but  in  poetry, 
even  appellatives  without  a  preposition  are  common. 

1162.  (2.)  The  accusatives  domum,  rus,  and  foras,  are  used  like 
proper  names  of  towns :   as, 

(a.)  eo  domum,  PI.  Mer.  659,  /'///  going  home,  equites  domum  con- 
tenderunt,  2,  24,  4,  the  cavalry  hurried  home,  domum  reditionis  spe  sub- 
lata,  r,  5,  3,  the  hope  of  a  return  home  being  out  of  the  question  ( \  129).  (b.)  rus 
Ibo,  T.  Eu.  216,  I  shall  go  out  of  town,  (c.)  effugl  foras,  T.  Eu.  945, 1  ran 

out  of  doors. 

1163.  The  singular  domum  is  always  retained  by  Caesar,  even  when  two  or 
more  separate  persons  or  parties  are  spoken  of.     Plautus,  Sallust,  and  Nepos,  have 
the  plural  domes  once  each,  and  Cicero  and  Livy  use  it  occasionally. 

1164.  The  accusative  domum  or  domos  sometimes  has  an  attribute,  usually  a 
possessive  pronoun  :  as,  domum  suam  quemque  reverti,  2,  10,  4,  for  every  man 
to  go  back  to  his  home,     alius  alium  domos  suas  invitant,  S.  /.  66,  3,  they 
invite  each  other  to  their  homes,     aurum  domum  regiam  comportant,  S.  /. 
76,  6,  they  bring  all  the  gold  to  the  house  royal,    cum  domum  regis  devertis- 
SCS,  D.   17,  -when  you  went  to  sfay  at  the  king's  palace.     The  preposition  in  is 
sometimes  used  when  the  attribute  is  a  genitive  or  a  possessive  pronoun,  and  com- 
monly when  it  is  any  adjective  but  a  possessive  pronoun. 

1165.  (3.)   In  old  Latin,  exsequias  and  infitias  are  also  used  with  eo, 
and  sometimes  malam  crucem  and  malam  rem,  though  these  last  more 
commonly  have  in  :  as, 

exsequias  Chremeti  Ire,  T.  Ph.  1026,  to  go  to  Chremes's  funeral,  ut 
eas  malam  crucem,  PI.  Men.  328,  that  thou  mayst  get  thee  to  the  accursed 
cross.  Later  writers,  as  Nepos,  Livy,  and  Quintilian,  use  infitias  e5  again, 
and,  from  Sallust  on,  venum  eo  and  venum  do  sometimes  occur  for  vene5 
and  vendo. 

1166.  With  the  accusative  in  -turn  (or  -sum),  called  the  supine,  the  idea  of 
'aim'  passes  over  into  that  of  '  purpose  : '  as  militatum  abiit,  T.  Hau.  117,  he  's 
gone  away  a  soldiering  (2270). 

I99 


Sentences  :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


TWO   ACCUSATIVES   COMBINED. 

OBJECT  AND  PREDICATE. 

1167.  Many    verbs    may  take   two  accusatives,  an 
object  and  a  predicate. 

Such  are  verbs  signifying  make,  keep,  choose,  name  or  call,  have,  think^ 
recognize  or  find,  show  oneself,  &c.,  &c.  :  as,  longiorem  mensem  faciunt, 
V.  2,  129,  they  make  the  month  longer,  eum  certiorem  faciunt,  5,  37,  7,  they 
let  him  know.  Ancum  Marcium  regem  populus  creavit,  L.  i,  32,  I.  the 
people  made  Ancus  Marcius  king.  me  cepere  arbitrum,  T.  Hau.  500, 
they've  chosen  me  as  referee.  Duellium  '  Bellium  '  nominaverunt,  O.  153, 
Duellius  they  named  '  Bellius.'  vicinam  Capreis  Insulam  '  Apragopolim  ' 
appellabat,  Suet.  Aug.  98,  the  island  next  to  Capreae  he  called  '  the  Castle 
of  Indolence.'  conlegas  adiutores  habebat,  Sest.  87,  he  had  his  colleagues 
as  assistants,  te  sapientem  existimant,  L.  6,  they  consider  you  a  sage. 
quem  virum  P.  Crassum  vidimus,  CM.  61,  what  a  man  we  saw  in  Crassus. 
severum  me  praebe5,  C-  4,  12,  /  show  myself  stern.  In  the  passive  both 
the  object  and  the  predicate  become  nominatives  :  as,  Caesar  certior  factus 
est,  3,  19,  5,  Caesar  was  informed. 

1168.  In  the  sense  of  consider  as  equivalent  to,  duco  and  habeo,  less  fre- 
quently puto,  have  the  ablative  with  pro.     Other  constructions  with  these  and  the 
above  verbs  may  be  found  in  the  dictionary. 

PERSON  AND  THING. 

1169.  (i.)  Some  verbs  of  teaching  and  hiding,  de- 
manding and  questioning,  may  take  two  accusatives, 
one  of  a  person  and  one  of  a  thing. 

The  commonest  of  these  verbs  are  doceo  and  its  compounds,  and  celo  ; 
flagito,  oro,  posco,  and  rogo,  interrogS.  The  thing  is  usually  the  neuter 
of  a  pronoun  or  enumerative  word  (1144)  :  as,  (a.}  peior  magister  te  istaec 
docuit,  non  ego,  PI.  B.  163,  a  worse  instructor  taught  thee  that,  not  I.  quid 
te  litteras  doceam  ?  Pis.  73,  why  should  I  teach  you  yottr  A  B  C's  ?  (b.  }  non 
te  celavi  sermonem  T.  Ampii,  Fam.  2,  16,  3,  /  have  not  kept  you  in  the 
dark  about  the  talk  with  Ampius.  (c.)  interim  cotidie  Caesar  Aeduos 
frumentum  flagitare,  I,  16,  i,  meantime  Caesar  every  day  a  dunning  the 
Aeduans  for  the  grain.  MIlesi5s  navem  poposcit,  V.  I,  86,  he  called  on 
the  Miletus  people  for  a  vessel,  quid  me  istud  rogas  ?  Fin.  5,  83,  why  do  you 
ask  me  that?  Racilius  me  sententiam  rogavit,  QFr.  2,  i,  3,  Racilius  asked 
me  my  opinion. 

1170.  With  doceo,  meaning  inform,  celo,  rogo,  and  interrogo,  the  ablative 
of  the  thing  with  de  is  also  used.     And  with  flagito  and  posco,  sometimes  the  abla- 
tive of  the  person  with  ab,  with  celo  the  ablative  of  the  person  with  de. 

1171.  In  the  passive  the  person  becomes  the  subject,  and  the  accusative 
of  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective  is  retained  :  as, 

200 


The  Noun  :  Dative.        [1172—1176. 


nosne  hoc  celatSs  tarn  diu,  T.  Hec.  645,  for  us  not  to  be  told  of  this  so 
long;  rarely  with  reversed  construction  :  quor  haec  celata  me  stint  ?  PI. 
Ps,  490,  why  was  this  hid  from  me?  Accusatives  of  appellatives  are  rare: 
as,  omms  militiae  artis  edoctus  fuerat,  L.  25,  37,  3,  he  had  been  thoroughly 
taught  all  the  arts  of  war.  interrogatus  sententiam,  L.  36,  7,  I,  being  asked 
his  opinion.  Other  constructions  of  doctus,  and  of  the  passive  of  celo, 
flagito,  posco,  rogo  and  interrogo,  may  be  found  in  the  dictionary. 

1172.  (2.)  Verbs  of  wishing,  reminding,  inducing,  and  accusing, 
and  some  others,  also  sometimes  take  an  accusative  of  the  person  and 
one  of  the  thing. 

Such  are  volo,  moneo  and  its  compounds,  hortor  and  cogo  ;  accus5, 
argu5,  insimulo,  obiurgS.  The  thing  is  usually  the  neuter  of  a  pronoun 
or  enumerative  word  (1144) :  as,  quid  me"  voltis  ?  PI.  Mer.  868,  -what  do  you 
want  of  me?  illud  te  esse  admonitum  velim,  Gael.  8,  on  this  point  I  want 
you  to  be  reminded  (1171).  In  old  Latin,  accusatives  of  appellatives  also  are 
thus  used,  and  sometimes  also  with  dono  and  condon5. 

JI73'  (3«)  The  defining  accusative  is  sometimes  combined  with  an  accusative  of 
the  person  :  as,  tarn  te  basia  multa  basiare,  Cat.  7,  9,  thee  to  kiss  so  many  kisses 
(1140).  But  usually  with  an  accusative  of  the  person,  the  ablative  takes  the  place  of 
the  defining  accusative:  as,  odissem  te  odio  Vatlniano,  Cat.  14,  3,  /  should 
hate  thee  -with  a  Vatinian  hate. 

OBJECT  AND  EXTENT,  DURATION,  OR  AIM. 

1174.  The  accusative  of  extent  or  duration,  or  of  aim  of  motion  is 
often  combined  with  that  of  the  object :  as, 

(a.)  milia  passuum  decem  novem  murum  perducit,  I,  8,  i,  he  makes 
a  wall  nineteen  miles  (1151).  matrSnae  annum  eum  luxerunt,  L.  2,  7,  4,  the 
married  women  wore  mourning  for  him  a  year  (1151).  (b. )  Ancus  multi- 
tudinem  omnem  Romam  traduxit,  L.  i,  33.  i,  Ancus  moved  the  whole 
population  over  to  Rome  (1157).  eos  domum  remittit,  4,  21,  6,  he  sends 
them  home  again  (1162).  For  other  combinations,  see  1138,  ir98,  and  2270. 


THE    DATIVE. 

1175.  The  dative  denotes  that  for  or  to  which  a  thing  is  or 
is  done,  and  either  accompanies  single  words,  such   as  verbs, 
adjectives,  sometimes  adverbs,  rarely  substantives,  or  serves  to 
modify  the  entire  sentence.     It  has  two  principal  uses. 

1176.  T.  The  dative  is  used  as  a  complement.     Complements  may  be 
roughly  distinguished  as  essential  or  optional.     But  these  two  complements 
are  not  alwavs  separated  by  a  sharp  line,  and  the  same  dative  may  sometimes 
be  referred  indifferently  to  either  head. 

201 


1 1 77—  1 1 8 1 .]     Sentences :    The  Simple  Sentence. 


1177.  (i.)  The  ESSENTIAL  COMPLEMENT  is  a  dative  of  the 
person  or  thing  added  to  an  idea  which  is  felt  as  incomplete 
without  the  dative   (1180). 

Thus,  paret,  he  is  obedient,  is  a  statement  which  is  felt  as  incomplete 
without  a  dative  added  to  denote  what  it  is  he  is  obedient  to,  in  the  sentence 
paret  senatui,  he  is  obedient  to  the  senate.  But  when  stress  is  put  on  the 
action  merely,  without  reference  to  its  bearing,  such  a  verb  may  be  used 
without  a  dative  :  as,  paret,  he  is  obedient,  he  yields  obedience. 

1178.  (2.)  The  OPTIONAL  COMPLEMENT,  that  is,  the  dative 
of  interest,  advantage,  or  disadvantage,  adds  something  to  an 
idea  that  is  already  complete  in  itself  (1205). 

Thus,  carmina  canto,  I  chant  verses,  is  a  statement  entirely  complete  in 
itself;  it  may  be  modified  or  not,  at  option,  by  a  dative,  thus  :  carmina  vir- 
ginibus  puerisque  canto,  verses  for  maids  and  boys  I  chant. 

1179.  II.  The  dative  of  certain  substantives  is  used  predicatively  (1219). 


I.   THE  COMPLEMENTARY  DATIVE: 

(i.)   THE  ESSENTIAL  COMPLEMENT. 

THE  DATIVE  WITH  VERBS. 

1 1 80.  Many  verbs  require  a  dative  to  complete 
their  meaning. 

WITH  VERBS  OF  INTRANSITIVE  USE. 

Zl8i.  (i.)  Many  verbs  of  intransitive  use,  particularly  such 
as  denote  a  state,  disposition,  feeling,  or  quality,  take  the  da- 
tive :  as, 

quodne  vobis  placeat,  displiceat  mihi  ?  PI.  MG.  614,  shall  that  which 
pleases  you,  displeasing  be  to  me?  si  Asicio  causa  plus  profuit  quam  invi- 
dia  nocuit,  Gael.  23,  if  his  case  has  been  more  helpful  to  Asicius  than  the 
hostility  has  been  damaging,  imperat  aut  servit  collecta  pecunia  cuique, 
H.  E.  I,  10,  47,  for  every  man  his  garnered  hoard  or  master  is  or  slave,  nonne 
huic  legl  resistetis?  Agr.  2,  85,  will  you  not  stand  out  against  this  law? 
gymnasiis  indulgent  Graeculi,  Traj.  in  Plin.  Ep.  40  [49],  2,  our  Greek 
cousins  are  partial  to  gymnasiums,  ignoscas  velim  huic  festinatiom  meae, 
in  a  letter,  Fam.  5,  12,  i, please  excuse  haste,  huic  legion!  Caesar  confide- 
bat  maxime,  I,  40,  15,  Caesar  trusted  this  legion  most  of  all.  an  C.  Trebo- 
nio  ego  persuasl  ?  cui  ne  suadere  quidem  ausus  essem,  Ph.  2,  27,  or . 
was  it  I  that  brought  conviction  to  Trebonius  ?  a  man  to  whom  I  should  not  havt 
presumed  even  to  offer  advice.  In  the  passive,  such  verbs  are  used  impersonally, 
the  dative  remaining  (1034) ;  personal  constructions  are  rare  and  poetical. 

202 


The  Noun  .   Dative.        [1182-11 89. 


1182.  This  dative  is  used  with  such  verbs  or  verbal  expressions  as  mean 
am  pleasing  or  displeasing,  helpful  or  injurious,  command,  yield,    or  am  obedi- 
ent, am  friendly,  partial,  or  opposed ;  spare,  pardon,  threaten,  trust,  advise, 
persuade,  happen,  meet.      But  the  English  translation   is   not  a  safe  guide: 
many  of  the  verbs  used  with  a  dative  are  represented  transitively  in  English  ; 
and  some  verbs  of  the  meanings  above  are  used  transitively  in  Latin  :  as, 
delecto,  iuvo,  laedo,  &c.,  &c. 

1183.  The  dative  is  rarely  used  with  a  form  of  sum  and  a  predicate  noun  corre- 
sponding in  meaning  with  the  verbs  above  (1181)  :  as,  quid  mihi  scelesto  tib! 
erat  auscultatio?  PI.  R.  502,  i.e.  quid  tibl  auscultabam  ?  -why  did  I,  ill- 
starred  -wretch,  lend  ear  to  thee?     qui   studiosus  rei  null!  aliaest,  PI.  MG. 
802,  i.  e.  qui  studet,  who  lends  his  soul  to  nothing  else.     Or  immediately  with  a 
noun  :   as,  s_ervitu,s   opulento  homini,  PI.  Am.  166,  slavery  to  a  millionaire. 
optemperatio   legibus,  Leg.  \,  42,   obedience  to  the  laws,      aemula  labra 
fOSlS,  Mart.  4,  42,   10,  lifs  rivalling  the  rose. 

1184.  Some  verbs  have  a  variable  use  without  any  difference  of  meaning:  thus, 
euro,  decet,  and  vito,  have  sometimes  the  dative  in  old  Latin,  but  usually  the  accu- 
sative.    In  Cicero,  adulor  has  the  accusative;  from  Nepos  on,  the  dative  as  well. 
medeor,  medicor,  and  praestolor  take  either  the  accusative  or  the  dative. 

1185.  Some  verbs  have  an  accusative  with  one  meaning,  a  dative  of  the  complement, 
essential  or  optiona^  with  another  :  see  aemulor,  caveo,  comitor,  consulo,  con- 
venio,  cupio,  desperd,  maneo,  rnetup,  moderor,  prospicio,  tempero, 
timeo,  and  the  different  uses  of  invideo,  in  the  dictionary. 

1186.  In  poetry,  verbs  of  union,  of  contention,  and  of  difference,  often  take  a 
dative:  as,  (a.)  haeret  later!  letalis  harundo,  V.  4,  73,  sticks  to  her  side  the 
deadly  shaft.     So  with  coe'5,  concurro,  haereo,  and  similarly  with  iungo,  mis- 
ceo.     (b.)  quid  enim  contendat  hirundS  cycnis  ?  Lucr.  3,  6,  for  how  can 
swallow  cope  with  swans  '     So  with  bello,  certo,  contends,  pugno.     (c.)  m- 
fido   scurrae   distabit   amicus,  H.  E.  i,  18,  4,  a  friend  will  differ  from  a 
faithless  hanger-on.    So  with  differo,  discrepS,  dissentio,  disto. 

1187.  A  verb  often  takes  the  dative,  when  combined  with  adversum, 
obviam,  or  praesto,  also  with  bene,  male,  or  satis,  and  the  like :  as, 

fit  ob  viam  Cl5dio,  Mil.  29,  he  runs  across  Clodius.  cui  bene  dixit  um- 
quam  bon5  ?  Sest.  1 10,  for  what  patriot  had  he  ever  a  good  word  ?  nos,  viri 
fortes,  satis  facere  r£l  publicae  videmur,  C.  i,  2,  "we  doughty  champions 
flatter  ourselves  we  are  doing  our  whole  duty  by  the  state.  Similarly  with  verbs 
of  transitive  use. 

1188.  (2.)  Many  verbs  of  intransitive  use  compounded  with 
a  preposition  take  a  dative  connected  in  sense  with  the  preposi- 
tion :  as, 

manus  extrema  non  accessit  operibus  eius,  Br.  126,  the  last  touch 
was  not  put  tipon  his  works,  omnibus  adfuit  his  pugnis  Dolabella,  Ph  2, 
75,  Dolabella  was  on  hand  in  all  these  battles,  ponto  nox  incubat  atra.  V. 
I,  89,  over  the  deep,  night  brocdt,th  black,  cognitionibus  de  Christianis 
interfui  numquam,  Plin.  Ep.  ad  Trai.  96  [97],  I,  7  have  never  been  to  any 
of  the  trials  of  the  Christians. 

1189.  The  prepositions  are  chiefly  ad,  ante,  com-,  in,  inter,  ob,  prae, 
sub,  or  super.     In  many  compounds  of  these  prepositions,  however,  the  da- 
tive is  due  to  the  general  meaning  of  the  verb,  as  in  confidit  mih?,  he  puts 
all  trust  in  me  (1181),  as  contrasted  with  consentit  mihl,  he  feels  -with  me, 
nearly  equivalent  to  sentit  mecum  (1188). 

203 


1190-1196.]      Sentences:   The  Simple  Sentence. 


ngo.  Instead  of  the  dative,  such  verbs  often  have  a  prepositional  con- 
struction, particularly  when  place,  literal  or  figurative,  is  distinctly  to  be 
expressed:  as, 

accedere  in  funus,  Leg.  2,  66,  to  goto  a  funeral,  in  morbum  incidit, 
Chi.  175,  he  fell  ill. 

I IQI.  Some  verbs  of  intransitive  use  take,  when  compounded,  either  the  dative  or 
the  accusative.  See  adiaceo,  antecedo,  anteeo,  praecurro,  praesto,  incedo, 
inludp,  insultS,  invado,  in  the  dictionary.  And  some  compounds  acquire  a 
transitive  use  altogether,  as  obeo,  oppugno  :  see  1137. 

WITH  VERBS  OF  TRANSITIVE  USE. 

1192.  (i.)  Many  verbs  of  transitive  use  take  the  dative  :  as, 

€i  filiam  suam  in  matrimonium  dat,  I,  3,  5,  he  gives  this  person  his  cwn 
daughter  in  marriage  decima  legio  61  gratias  egit,  1,41,  I,  the  tenth  le- 
gion gave  him  thanks  huic  fert  subsidium  Pulio,  5,  44,  I3S  to  him  Pulio 
brings  aid.  multis  idem  minatur  Antonius,  Ph.  n,  2,  to  many  Antony 
threatens  the  same,  reliqui  sese  fugae  mandarunt,  r,  12,  3,  the  rest  betook 
themselves  to  flight.  commend5  vobis  meum  parvum  filium,  C.  4,  23,  unto 
your  keeping  do  I  commit  the  little  son  of  mine,  multi  se  alienissimis  credi- 
derunt,  6,  31,  4,  many  people  put  themselves  in  t)ic  hands  of  ittter  strangers 
equites  imperat  civitatibus,  6,  4,  6,  he  issues  orders  to  the  communities  for 
horse. 

1193.  This  dative  is  used  with  such  verbs  as  do,  trado,  tribuo,  divide, 
fero,  praebeo,  praesto,  polliceor,  promittS,  debeo,  nego,  monstro,  dico, 
narro,  mando,  praecipio,  &c.,  &c.     In  the  passive  construction,  the  accusa- 
tive becomes  nominative,  the  dative  remaining. 

1194.  (2.)  Many  verbs  of  transitive  use  compounded  with  a 
preposition  take  a  dative  connected  in  sense  with  the  preposi- 
tion :   as, 

nihil  novi  vobis  adferam,  RP.  i,  21,  I  shall  not  lay  any  novelty  before. 
you.  leges  omnium  salutem  singulorum  salutl  anteponunt,  Fin.  3,  64, 
the  law  always  puts  the  general  safety  before  the  safety  of  the  individual  timo- 
rem  bonis  iniecistis,  Agr.  I,  23,  you  have  struck  terror  into  the  hearts  of 
patriots,  noluerunt  feris  corpus  obicere,  RA.  71,  they  would  not  cast  his 
person  before  ravenous  beasts,  neminem  huic  praefero,  N.  8,  i,  i,  there  i? 
nobody  I  put  before  him.  hibernis  Labienum  praeposuit,  i,  54,  2,  he  put 
Labienus  over  the  winter-quarters,  anitum  r  va  gallinis  saepe  supponimus, 
DN.  2,  124,  we  often  put  ducks'1  eggs  under  hens. 

1195.  The  prepositions  are  circum,  de,  ex,  post,  or  those  named  in 
1189.     In  many  compounds  of  transitive  use,  however,  the  dative  is  due  to 
the  general  meaning  of  the  verb,  as  with  those  spoken  of  in  1189. 

1196.  With  these  verbs,  a  prepositional  construction  is  often  used,  as 
with  the  verbs  of  intransitive  use  (1190) :  as, 

iam  diu  nihil  novi  ad  nos  adferebatur,  Fam.  2,  14,  no  news  has  got  to 
us  this  long  time.  For  compounds  of  circum  and  trans  with  two  accusa- 
tives, see  1138. 

204 


The  Noun  :  Da  live.         [1197-12  04. 


1197.  Verbs  of  transitive  use  compounded  with  com-  have  oftener  the  ablative 
with  cum:  as,  conferte  hanc  p5cem  cum  illo  bello,  V.  4,  \\*),  just  compare 
this  peace  with  that  war.    See  also  in  the  dictionary,  coniungo  and  compono ; 
also  the  indirect  compounds  compare,  compare,  from  compar,  and  communico. 

1 198.  With  a  few  compounds  of  ad  or  in,  a  second  accusative  is  exceptionally 
used :  as,  arbitrum  ilium   adegit,  Off.  3,  66,  he  had  the  other  man  up  before 
a  daysman.     So  with  inmitto,   PI.   Cap.   548,  Insinuo,    Lucr.   i,   116,   &c.,  &c. 
Regularly  with  animum  adverto:   as,  animum  advert!  columellam,   TD. 
5,  65,  /  noticed  a  modest  shaft,    qua  re  animum  adversa,  Caes.  C.  i,  80,  4, 
this  fact  being  paid  heed  to:   compare  1138. 

1199.  A  few  compound  verbs  admit  either  the  dative  of  the  person  or  thing  and 
accusative  of  the  thing,  or  the  accusative  of  the  person  or  thing  and  ablative  of  the 
thing ;  such  are  adspergo  and  inspergo,  circumdo,  circumfundo,  exuo  and 
induo,  impertio,  intercludo;  also  the  uncompounded  dono  :  as,  praedam 
militibus  donat,  7,  11,  9,  he  presents  the  booty  to  the  soldiers,     scribam  tuum 
anulS  donasti,  V.  3,  185,  you  presented  your  clerk  with  a  ring.     For  the  differ- 
ent constructions  of  interdico,  see  the  dictionary. 


THE  DATIVE  WITH  ADJECTIVES. 

1200.  The  dative  with  many  adjectives  and  some 
adverbs  denotes  that  to  which  the  quality  is  directed. 

Such  have  the  meaning  of  useful,  necessary ',  fit,  easy,  agreeable,  known, 
near,  belonging,  friendly,  faithful,  like,  and  most  of  their  opposites ;  the 
adjective  is  often  predicative:  as,  ver  utile  silvis  (1036),  V.  G.  2,  323,  the 
spring  is  good  for  woods,  est  senator!  necessarium  nosse  rem  publicam, 
Leg.  3,  41,  for  a  senator  it  is  indispensable  to  be  conversant  with  government. 
orationis  genus  pompae  quam  pugnae  aptius,  O.  42,  a  style  better  suited 
to  the  parade  than  to  the  field,  convenienter  naturae  vivefe,  Off.  3,  13,  to 
live  in  touch  with  nature. 

1201.  Some  adjectives  of  this  class  have  the  dative  of  a  person,  the  accusative 
with  ad  of  a  thing :  so  accommodatus,  aptus,  idoneus,  necessarius,  and 

utilis ;  and  some  denoting  feeling  have  also  the  accusative  with  a  preposition  :  ae- 
quus,  iniquus,  fidelis  with  in,  benevolus  with  erga,  and  impius  with 
adversus.  propior  and  proximus  sometimes  accompany  an  accusative,  like 
prope,  propius,  and  proxime. 

1202.  The  adjectives  communis,  proprius  or  alienus,  sacer,  totus, 

often  accompany  the  construction  of  the  genitive  of  the  owner:  see  1238.  For 
alienus  with  the  ablative,  see  1306.  Sometimes  alienus  has  the  ablative  with  ab. 

1203.  Some  adjectives  denoting  relationship,  connection,  friendship  or 
hostility,  become  substantives,  and  as  such,  admit  the  genitive  also  (1103) : 
such  are  (a.)  adfinis,   cognatus  ;  (b.}  aequalis,  familiaris,  finitimus,  par 
and  dispar,  proplnquus,  vlcinus;  (c.)  adversarius,  amicus,  inimicus,  ne- 
cessarius. 

1204.  In  Plautus  and  Terence,  similis,  the  like,  the  counterpart,  and  its  com- 
pounds, regularly  take  the  genitive.     The  dative,  as  well  as  the  genitive,  is  also  used 

from  Ennius  on,  particularly  of  a  limited  or  approximate  likeness :  see  the  dictionary. 

205 


1205—1210.]    Sentences:   The  Simple  Sentence. 


(2.)    THE  OPTIONAL  COMPLEMENT. 

1205.  The  dative  of  a  person  or  thing  interested, 
benefited,  harmed,  may  be  added  at  option  to  almost 
any  verb  :  as, 

c5nservate  parent!  filium,  parentem  filio,  Gael.  80,  save  the  son  for  the 
father,  the  father  for  the  son.  mea  domus  tibl  patet,  mihi  clausa  est,  RA. 
145,  the  very  house  I  own  is  open  for  you,  is  shut  upon  me.  cui  flavam  religas 
comam,  simplex  munditiis  ?  H.  i,  5,  4,  for  whom  bind'st  thou  in  wreaths 
thy  golden  hair,^  plain  in  thy  neatness  ?  non  auderet  facere  haec  viduae 
mulieri,  quae  in  me  fecit,  T.  Hau.  953,  he  dttrst  not  to  an  unprotected  female 
do  what  he  hath  done  towards  me. 

1206.  The  place  of  a  verb  with  the  dative  of  interest  is  sometimes  filled  by  an 
interjection,  ecce,  ei,  em,  or  vae  :  as,  ei  mihi    qualis  erat,  E.  i,  7,  V.  2,  274, 
ah  me,  how  ghastly  he  did  look,      vae  victis,  PI.   Ps.   1317,   said  by  Brennus, 
390  B.  c.,  L.  5,  48,  9,  -woe  -worth  the  -worsted,    vae  capit!  atque  aetati  tuae, 
PI.  R.  375,  a  murrain  on  thy  head  and  life. 

1207.  The   dative    is  often  added  to  the  entire  sentence,  where 
either  a  genitive  or  a  possessive  pronoun  limiting  a  substantive  might 
be  used. 

In  such  cases  the  dative  expresses  interest,  advantage,  or  disadvantage, 
while  the  genitive  would  simply  indicate  the  owner  or  the  object :  as, 
transfigitur  scutum  PulionI,  5,  44,  7,  unfortunately  for  Pulio,  his  shield 
gets  pierced  through  and  through,  militant!  in  Hispania  pater  €1  moritur, 
L.  29,  29,  6,  while  serving  in  Spain  he  had  the  misfortune  to  lose  his  father. 
huic  ego  me  bello  ducem  profiteer,  C.2,  n,  I  here  proclaim  myself  captain 
for  this  war.  sese  Caesar!  ad  pedes  proiecerunt,  i,  31,  2,  they  cast  them- 
selves at  Caesar's  feet,  nostris  militibus  spem  minuit,  5,  33,  5,  it  dashed 
the  hopes  of  our  soldiers,  exterge  tibi  manus,  PI.  Most.  267,  wipe  off  thy 
hands,  vellunt  tibi  barbam  lascivi  pueri,  H.  S.  i,  3,  133,  the  wanton 
gamins  pull  thy  beard,  poor  soul. 

1208.  This  dative  is  sometimes  detached  from  the  verb,  and  used  immediately 
with  a  substantive,  instead  of  the  genitive:  as,  Philoc5masio  custos,  PI.  MG. 

271,  the  keeper  for  Philocomasium.  rector  iuveni,  Ta.  i,  24,  a  mentor  for_  the 
young  man.  So  particularly  with  a  gerundive  in  official  expressions:  as,  curator 
muris  reficiendls,  OG.  19,  commissioner  for  rebuilding  the  walls. 

1 209.  Verbs  of  warding  off  sometimes  take  a  dative,  especially  in  poetry,  also 
those  of  robbing  and  ridding :   as,  (a.)  hunc  quoque  arcebis  gravido  pecori, 

V.  G.  -?,  1^4,  him  also  wilt  thou  for  the  pregnant  herd  keep  far.  solstltmm 
pecori  defendite  V.  E.  7,  47,  the  summers  heat  keep  distant  for  the  flock, 
(b.)  torquem  detraxit  host!,  Fin.  i,  35,  he  Bulled  a  torque  away  from  his  enemy. 
eripies  mihi  hunc  errSrem,  Att.  10,  4,  6,  you  -will  rid  me  of  this  mistake. 

1210.  With  verbs  of  motion  the  dative  of  the  person  interested  denotes  in  poetry 
the  end  of  motion  also :  as,  multos  Danaum  demittimus  Oreo,  V.  2,  398,  we 

send  down  many  a  Danaan  for  the  nether  king.  So  also  the  dative  of  personified 
words  of  place :  as,  it  clamor  caelo,  V.  5,  451,  rip  goes  a  shout  for  heaven,  i.  e. 
heaven  hears  a  shout,  sedibus  hunc  refer  ante  suis,  V.  6,  152,  first  bear  him 
duly  to  his  place  of  rest ,  i.  e.  let  his  expectant  grave  receive  him. 

206 


The  Noun :  Dative.        [1211-1216. 


THE  EMOTIONAL  DATIVE. 

121 1.  The  dative  of  the  personal  pronoun  is  often  used  with 
expressions  of  emotion,  interest,  surprise,  or  derision  :  as, 

quid  mihi  Celsus  agit  ?  H.  E.  i,  3,  15,  how  fares  me  Celsus?  Tongi- 
lium  mihi  eduxit,  C.  2, 4,  he  took  out  Tongilius,  bless  my  soul,  at  tib!  repente, 
cum  minime  exspectarem,  venit  ad  me  Camnius  mane,  Fam.  9,  2,  i, 
but  bless  you,  sir,  when  I  least  dreamt  of  it,  who  should  drop  in  on  me  all  at 
once  but  Caninius,  bright  and  early. 

THE   DATIVE  OF  THE   POSSESSOR. 

1212.  The  dative   is  used  with  forms  of  sum  to 
denote  the  possessor :  as, 

est  homini  cum  de5  similitude,  Leg.  I,  25,  man  has  a  resemblance  to 
god.  an  nescis  longas  regibus  esse  manus  ?  O.  E.  16,  166,  dost  possibly 
not  know  kings  have  long  arms  ?  suos  quoique  mos,  T.  Ph.  454,  to  every  man 
his  own  pet  way.  So  also  with  the  compounds  absum,  desum,  supersum  : 
as,  hoc  unum  Caesarl  defuit,  4,  26,  5,  this  was  all  Caesar  lacked. 

1213.  (i.)  With  mihi  est  nomen,  the  name  is  put  either 
in  the  dative  or  in  the  nominative:    as, 

mih!  nomen  est  lulio,  or  mih!  nomen  est  lulius,  Cell.  15,  29,  i,  my 
name  is  Julius.  In  old  Latin  and  in  Sallust,  the  dative  :  as,  nomen  Mercu- 
riost  mihi,  PI.  Am. prol.  19,  my  name  is  Mercury  ;  later  the  nominative:  as, 
canibus  pigris  nomen  erit  Pardus,  Tigris,  Leo,  J.  8,  34,  the  craven  cur 
shall  sport  the  name  of '  Lion,  Tiger,  Pard?  Cicero  uses  the  nominative  or 
rarely  the  dative,  Livy  oftener  the  dative  than  the  nominative.  Tacitus 
puts  adjectives  in  the  dative,  substantives  in  the  nominative,  rarely  in  the 
genitive.  Caesar  does  not  use  the  construction. 

1214.  (2.)  With  the  actives  nomen  do,  indo,  pono,  tribuo,  &c.,  the  name 
may  be  in  the  dative  or  in  the  accusative ;  with  the  passive  of  these  expres- 
sions, the  name  may  be  in  the  dative  or  in  the  nominative :  as, 

qui  tibi  nSmen  Insano  posuere,  H.  S.  2,  3,  47,  who  've  fnit  on  thee  the 
nickname  Crank,  qui  filiis  Philippum  atque  Alexandrum  nomina  inpo- 
suerat,  L.  35,  47,  5,  who  had  given  his  sons  the  names  Philip  and  Alexander. 
A  genitive  dependent  on  nSmen  is  used  once  by  Tacitus  and  in  very  late 
Latin. 

1215.  With  a  gerundive,  the  dative  of  the  possessor  denotes  the  person  who  has 
the  action  to  do  :  see  2243.    For  the  ablative  with  ab,  or  for  habeo,  see  2243,  2245. 

1216.  This  dative  is  sometimes  use'!  with  the  perfect  participle,  and  the  tenses 
formed  with  it  :  as,  mihi  est  elab5ratum,  Cascil^o,  1  have  it  all  -worked  out. 
carmina  niilla  mihi  sunt  scripta,  O.  Tr.  5,  12,  35,  no  poetry  have  I  ready 

made.  Rarely  with  passives  of  the  present  svstem :  as,  nulla  placere  diu  nee 
vivere  carmina  possunt,  quae  scribuntur  aquae  potoribus,  H.  E.  i,  19, 
2,  no  verse  can  take  or  be  longlived  that  by  teetotallers  is  -writ. 

207 


1217-1222.]    Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


THE   DATIVE   OF    RELATION. 

1217.  The  dative  may  denote  the  person  viewing  or  judging:  as, 

eris  mihi  magnus  Apollo,  V.  E.  3,  104,  thon  shalt  to  me  the  gi  eat  Apollo 
be.  Quintia  formosa  est  multis,  mihi  Candida,  longa,  recta  est,  Cat. 
86,  I,  in  many  eves  is  Quintia  fair,  to  me  she  'j  bonny,  tall,  and  straight.  From 
Caesar  on,  participles  are  often  used  to  denote  the  person  viewing  or  judg- 
ing: as,  est  urbe  egressis  tumulus,  V.  2,  713,  there  is,  as  you  get  out  of  town, 
a  mound,  in  universum  aestimanti,  Ta.  G.  6,  looking  at  it  generally. 

1218.  In  imitation  of  a  Greek  idiom,  volens,  cupiens,  or  invitus,  is  used  by 
Sallust  and  Tacitus  in  agreement  with  a  dative  dependent  on  a  form  of  sum,  the 
combination  being  equivalent  to  a  subject  with  a  form  of  volo,  cupio,  or  invitus 
sum,  respectively :  as,  ceteris  remanere  volentibus  fuit,  Ta.  //.  3,  43,  i.  e. 
ceteri  remanere  voluerunt,  the  rest  -were  minded  to  bide  -where  they  -were. 
Once  in  Livy. 

II.     THE   PREDICATIVE  DATIVE. 

THE  DATIVE  OF  TENDENCY  OR  RESULT. 

I2IQ,  (i.)  Certain  datives  are  used  with  a  form  of 
sum  to  denote  what  a  thing  tends  to,  proves,  or  is, 
This  dative  is  generally  accompanied  by  a  dative  of  the 
person  interested :  as, 

auxilio  is  fuit,  PI.  Am.  prol.  92,  he  was  a  help  to  them,  odio  sum  Ro- 
manis,  L.  35,  19,  6,  /  am  an  abomination  in  the  eyes  of  Rome,  potestne 
bonum  cuiquam  malo  esse  ?  Par.  j,  can  good  prove  bad  for  any  human 
being?  L.  Cassius  identidem  quaerere  solebat,  cui  bono  fuisset,  RA. 
84,  Cassius  used  to  ask  for  ever  and  ever,  who  tJie  person  benefited  was,  or  who 
the  gainer  was.  nemini  meiis  adventus  labor!  aut  sumptui  fuit,  V.  i, 
1 6,  my  visit  did  not  prove  a  bother  or  an  expense  to  a  soul,  res  et  fortunae 
tuae  mihi  maximae  curae  sunt,  Fam.  6,  5,  i,  your  money-matters  are  an 
all-absorbing  interest  to  me. 

1220.  There  are  many  of  these  datives,  mostly  abstracts  and  all  singular  ,  some 
of  the  commonest  are  curae,  usui,  praesidio,  cordi,  odio,  auxilio,  impedi- 
ments, saluti,  voluptati.     The  adjectives  magnus,  maior,  maximus,  or 
tantus  and  quantus,  are  sometimes  used  in  agreement  with  them  ,  and  the  dative 
frugi  sometimes  has  bonae. 

1221.  Instead  of  the  dative  of  tendency,  a  predicative  nominative  or  accusative  is 
rarely  used :  thus,  possessionem  liberam  Dardaniae  solacio  fore,  L.  40, 
57,  9,  that  the  unrestricted  occupancy  of  Dardania  "would  prove   comforting ,  but, 
domestica  quies  solacium  fuit,  L.  6,  30,  9,  the  peace  that  prevailed  at  home 
-was  a  solid  comfort.     Prepositional  expressions  with  pro  and  in  also  occur, 

1222.  (2.)  The  dative  is  also  used  with  a  few  verbs  of  consider- 
ing or  accounting  to  denote  what  a  thing  is  accounted. 

208 


The  Noun  :  Genitive.       [1223-1227. 


So  with  such  verbs  as  do,  duc5,  habeo,  tribuo,  and  verto:  as,  vitic 
mihl  dant,  quod  mortem  hominis  necessarii  graviter  fero,  Matius  in 

Fam.  u,  28,  2,  the  world  scores  it  against  me  that  I  take  the  murder  of  a  near 
and  dear  friend  to  heart,  postquam  paupertas  probro  haberi  coepit, 
S.  C.  12,  I,  after  lack  of  wealth  began  to  count  as  a  stigma. 

THE  DATIVE  OF  PURPOSE  OR  INTENTION. 

1223.  A  few  datives  are  used  to  denote  what  a  thing  is  intended 
to  be.     This  dative  is  generally  accompanied  by  a  dative  of  the  person 
interested. 

So  (a.)  dono  and  muneri :  as,  emit  earn  d5no  mihl,  T.  Eu.  135,  he 
bought  her  as  a  gift  for  me.  centum  boves  militibus  dono  dedit,  L.  7,  37,  3, 
he  gave  the  soldiers  a  tnindred  oxen  as  a  present.  Also  (b.)  auxilio,  praesidio, 
and  subsidio,  used  of  military  operations,  chiefly  with  verbs  of  motioji :  as, 
ii,  qui  praesidiS  contra  castra  erant'  relicti,  subsidio  suis  ierunt,  7,  62,  8, 
the  men  that  had  been  left  as  a  protection  against  the  camp,  went  as  a  rein- 
forcement to  their  own  side. 

1224.  For  the  datives  dono  and  muneri,  a  predicative  nominative  or  accusative 
is  sometimes  used  :   as,  coronam  lovi  donum  in  capitolium  mittunt,  L.  2, 
22,  6,   they  send  a  crown  ti  the  capital  as  a  present  for  Jupiter.     Prepositional 
expressions  are  also  used  for  auxilio,  &c. :    as.  ad  praesidium,  L.  3,  5,  3,  in 
praesidium,  L.  31,  16,  7,  for  protection,  auxilii  causa,  L.  2,  24,  4,  to  help. 

1225.  The  dative  receptui  is  also  used  in  military  language  to  denote  purpose  : 
as,  Caesar  receptui  can!  iussit,  7,47,  i,  Caesar  ordered  the  retreat  sounded. 
Quinctius  receptui  canere  iussit,  L.  34,  39,  13.     This  dative  is  sometimes  at- 
tached immediately  to  a  substantive  :  as,  receptui  signum,  Ph.  13,  i^the  trumpet 
for  retreat. 


THE   GENITIVE. 

1226.  The  genitive  is  principally  used  with  nouns,  less  fre- 
quently with  verbs.  Sometimes  even  when  it  seems  to  be  de- 
pendent on  a  verb,  it  really  depends  on  a  substantive  understood, 
or  on  a  noun  virtually  contained  or  implied  in  the  verb.  Some 
verbs  require  an  accusative  also,  in  addition  to  the  genitive. 


I.    THE  GENITIVE   WITH   SUBSTANTIVES. 

1227.   A  substantive    is    often   limited  by  another 
substantive  in  the  genitive. 

The  things  denoted  by  the  two  words  are  usually  distinct :  as,  metus 
hostium,  the  fear  of  the  enemy,  i.e.  either  (tf.l  which  they  feel  (1231),  or 
(b.}  which  is  felt  towards  them  (1260)  ;  magni  ponderis  saxa,  stones  of 
great  weight  (1239).  Sometimes,  however,  they  are  more  or  less  the  same: 
as,  militum  pars,/«r/  of  the  soldiers  (1242);  magna  multitude  perdito- 
rum  hominum,  a  perfect  swarm  of  desperadoes  (1255). 
14  209 


1 2  2 8- 1 2  3 3.]  Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1228.  Two  or  even  three  genitive^  expressing  different  relations,  sometimes  limit 
one  substantive:  as,  superiorum  dierum  Sabini  cunctatio,  3, 18,  6,  Sabinus's 
dilatoriness  in  days  preceding,     e5rum  dierum  consuetudine  itineris  no- 
stri  exercitus  perspecta,  2,  17,  2,  studying  up  the  order  of  march  followed  by 
our  army  in  those  days. 

1229.  The  limited  substantive  is  often  omitted,  when  it  is  obvious  from  the  con- 
text:  as,  ventum  erat  ad  Vestae,  sc.  aedem,  H.  S.  i,  9,35,  to  Vesta's  -were 
ws  come,  \.  e.  to  her  temple,     aberam  bidui,  sc.  iter,  Att.  5,  17,  i,  I  -was  tivo  days 
distant.     Usually  so,   when  it  is  expressed  with  another  genitive,  which  generally 
precedes:   as,  quis  est,  qui  possit  conferre  vitam  Treboni    cum  Dola- 
bellae?   Ph.  n,  9,  who  is   there  that   can  compare  the   life   of   Trebonius  with 
Dolabella'sl 

1230.  Instead  of  the  genitive  depending  on  a  substantive,  an  equivalent 
adjective  or  a  prepositional  expression  is  often  used.     Such  substitutions 
will  be  mentioned  below  in  their  appropriate  places. 

1231.  The  relations  expressed  by  the  limiting  genitive  vary  very  much 
according  to  the  context.     These  relations  may  be  put  in  classes,  as  below 
(1232-1260).     But  it  must  be  remembered  that  as  the  genitive  connects  sub- 
stantives in  a  loose  way,  the  same  construction  may  sometimes  be  referred 
to  more  than  one  head. 

THE  GENITIVE  OF  THE  SUBJECT,  CAUSE,  ORIGIN,  OR 
OWNER. 

1232.  (i.)  The  genitive  is  used  to  denote  that  which  does 
the  action,  or  which  causes,  originates,  or  possesses  the  object 
designated  by  the  substantive  it  limits  :  as, 

metus  hostium,  Gell.  9,  12,  13,  the  fear  of  the  enemy,  \.  e.  which  they  feel. 
adventus  Caesaris,  6,  41,  4,  the  arrival  of  Caesar,  bellum  Venetorum,  3, 
1 6,  i,  the  war  with  the  Venetans.  illud  Solonis,  CM.  50,  Solon's  memorable 
words.  Canachi  signa,  Br.  70,  statues  by  Canachus.  Cupidinis  signum, 
V.  4,  135,  the  statue  representing  Cupid,  huius  signis,  V.  3,  9,  with  statues 
belonging  to  this  man.  pacem  Ariovisti,  i,  37,  2,  a  peaceful  policy  on  Ario- 
vislus's  part.  Cannarum  pugna,  L.  23,  43,  4,  the  battle  of  Cannae  (1427). 
abaci  vasa  omnia,  V.  4,  35,  all  the  vessels  on  the  sideboard,  pridie  eius  diei, 
1,47,  z,  the  day  before  that  day  (1^-5}.  Iabr5rum  tenus,  Lucr.  1,940,  thelength 
of  the  lips  (1420). 

1233.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  an  adjective  is  often  used  to  express 
such  relations  ;  less  frequently  a  prepositional  construction  :  as, 

(a.)  odium  paternum,  N.  23,  i,  3,  the  hatred  felt  by  his  father,  servili 
tumultu,  i,  40,  5,  in  the  slave  insurrection,  bello  Cassiano,  I,  13,  2,  in  the 
war  with  Cassius.  illud  Cassianum,  cui  bon5  fuerit,  Ph.  2,  35,  Cassius's 
test  question,  'who  the  gainer  was!  erilis  patria,  PL  B.  170,  my  master's 
birthplace,  intra  domesticos  parietes,  C.  2,  i,  within  the  walls  of  our  houses. 
So  usually  with  names  of  countries  and  of  towns  :  as,  anus  Corinthia,  T. 
Hau.  600,  an  old  woman  of  Corinth,  pugna  Cannensis,  L.  22,  50,  i,  the 
battle  of  Cannae.  Often  in  a  generalizing  sense :  as,  paternus  maternus- 
que  sangufs,  RA.  66,  the  blood  of  a  father  and  of  a  mother,  (b.)  ad  Cannas 
pugnam,  L.  22,  58,  i,  the  battle  of  Cannae. 

210 


The  Noun :  Genitive.         [  1 2  34- 1 2  39. 


1234.  The  possessive  pronoun  is  regularly  used  instead  of  the  possessive 
genitive  of  a  personal  or  reflexive  pronoun  (1230):  as, 

mea  domus,  KA.  145,  my  own  house,  in  tua  quadam  epistola,  Att.  9, 
10,  3,  in  a  letter  of  yours.  But  sometimes,  for  emphasis,  the  genitive  of  the 
personal  or  reflexive  is  used :  as,  magno  sui  cum  periculo,  4,  28,  2,  -with 
great  personal  risk;  commonly  so  with  omnium  or  utriusque:  as,  volun- 
tati  vestrum  omnium  parul,  DO  3,  208,  I  yielded  to  your  joint  ivish  ;  see 
however  1235. 

1235.  A  word  in  apposition  with  the  possessive  pronoun  is  put  in  the  genitive: 
as,  mea  unius  opera,  Pis.  6,  by  my  sole  instrumentality,    ad  vestram  om- 
nium caedem,  C.  4,  4,  for  the  murder  of  you  all  (1230).     So  particularly  ipse, 
omnis,  solus,  and  unus. 

1236.  The  genitive  is  often  used  predicatively  with  verbs  meaning 
am,  belong,  become,  make,  seem,  am  accounted,  &c.,  &c.  :  as, 

litterarii  ista  sunt  ludi,  Quint,  i,  4,  27,  such  questions  belong  to  the  infant 
school,  hie  versus  Plauti  n5n  est,  hie  est,  Fam.  9,  16,  4,  this  line  is  not 
Plautus's,  this  one  ts.  omnia,  quae  mulieris  fuerunt,  viri  fiunt,  Top.  23, 
ewrything  which  was  the  woman's  becomes  the  mans,  neque  se  iiidicare 
Galliam  potius  esse  Ariovisti  quam  populi  Romani,  i,  45,  i,  and  that 
he  did  not  think  Gaul  was  any  more  Ariovistus'  s  than  it  was  the  Romans '. 
hostiumst  potlta,  PI.  E.  562,  into  the  foemeris  hands  she  fell. 

1237.  The  possessive  genitive  of  a  person  or  of  an  abstract  is 
particularly  common  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  an  infinitive  or 
sentence  :  as, 

(a.)  scyphls  pugnare  Thracum  est,  H.  1,27,  i,  to  fight  with  bowls  is 
Vandal  work,  erat  amentis,  cum  aciem  videres,  pacem  cogitare,  Lig. 
28,  it  was  a  madman's  act,  dreaming  of  peace  when  you  saw  the  troops  in  battalia. 
tempori  cedere  semper  sapientis  est  habitum,  Fam.  4,  9,  2,  shaping  your 
course  to  circumstance  has  always  passed  as  the  sign  of  a  wise  man.  mentirl 
non  est  meum,  T.  Hau.  549,  telling  lies  is  not  my  style  (1234).  (b.)  non  est 
pudoris  mel,  me  propugnatSrem  P.  Scipionis  profiteri,  V.  4,  80,  /'/  is  not 
in  keeping  with  my  delicacy  to  set  up  as  the  champion  of  Scipio.  harum  rerum 
esse  defensorem  magni  animi  est,  Sest.  99,  to  be  the  defender  of  these  inter- 
ests takes  heroism,  hoc  sentire  prudentiae  est,  facere  fortitudinis,  Sest. 
86,  to  think  thus  shows  wisdom,  to  act  thus,  courage,  negavit  moris  esse 
GraecSrum,  ut  in  convivio  virorum  accumberent  mulieres,  V.  i,  66,  7z^ 
said  it  was  not  manners  among  the  Greeks  to  have  women  at  table  at  a  men's 
dinner-party. 

1238.  With  the  possessive  genitive,  the  limited  substantive  is  sometimes  defined  by 
communis,  proprius  or  alienus,  sacer,  or  totus  added:  as,  hoc  proprium 
virtutis  existimant,  6,  23,  2,  this  they  consider  a  special  characteristic  of  bravery. 
omnia  quae  nostra  erant  propria,  RA.  150,  everything  "which  "was  our  peculiar 
property  (1234).    ilia  insula  eorum  deorum  sacra  putatur,  V.  i,  $>,that 
island  is  considered  the  hallowed  property  of  those  gods,     iam  me  Pompei  totum 
esse  SC1S,  Fam.  2,  13,  2,  you  are  aware  that  I  am  become  Pompey's,  out  and  out. 

THE  GENITIVE  OF  QUALITY. 

1239.  (2.)  The  genitive  with  an  adjective  in  agreement  is 
used  to  denote  quality,  either  attributively  or  predicatively :  as, 

211 


1240-1243-]      Sentences:    The  Simple  Sentence. 


(a.)  Attributively  :  magni  ponderis  saxa,  2,  29,  3,  stones  of  great  weight. 
summae  speT  adulescentes,  7,  63,  9,  young  men  of  high  promise,  dierum 
viginti  supplicatio,  4,  38,  5,  a  twenty  day  thanksgiving,  belua  multorum 
es  capitum,  H.  E.  I,  I,  76,  a  many-headed  beast  art  thou.  eius  modi  consi- 
lium,  5,  29,  5,  such  a  plan,  demitto  auriculas  ut  iniquae  mentis  asellus, 
II.  S.  I,  9,  20,  I  drop  my  ears  like  Neddy  in  the  sulks  (269).  vallo  pedum  IX, 
=;,  42.  i,  with  a  nine  foot  palisade,  (b.)  Predicatively :  magnae  habitus  auc- 
toritatis,  7,  77,  3,  passing  for  a  man  of  great  influence,  fluminis  erat  alti- 
tude circiter  pedum  trium,  2,  18,  3,  the  depth  of  the  river  was  about  three  feet. 
The  genitive  of  quality  resembles  the  ablative  of  quality  (1375) ;  the  two  are 
sometimes  combined  :  as,  hominem  maximi  corporis  terribilique  facie, 
N.  15,  4,  I,  a  man  of  gigantic  frame  and  with  an  awe-inspiring  presence.  But 
the  genitive  is  common  in  designations  of  size  and  number. 

1240.  A  substantive  expressing  quality  with  aequus,  par,  similis,  or  dissi- 
milis  in  agreement,  is  put  not  in  the  genitive,  but  in  the  ablative,  by  Cicero,  Caesar, 
Nepos,  and  Livy. 

THE  PARTITIVE  GENITIVE. 

1241.  (3.)  The  partitive  genitive  denotes  a  whole  of  which 
the  limited  substantive  denotes  a  part.     There  are  two  kinds  of 
partitive  genitive,  the  numerical  and  the  quantitative  :  as, 

(a.)  militum  pars,  6,40,  8,  part  of  the  soldiers,  numerical  partitive  (1242). 
(b  )  multum  aestatis,  5,  22,  4,  much  of  the  summer,  quantitative  partitive 
(1247) 

1242.  (#.)  The   numerical  partitive   is  a  plural  or  a  collective, 
limiting  a  word  expressing  part  of  the  number:  as, 

militum  pars,  6,  40,  8,  part  of  the  soldiers,  pars  equitatus,  4,  16,  2,  part 
of  the  cavalry,  alter  consulum,  L.  6,  35,  5,  one  of  the  two  consuls,  uter  est 
insanior  horum  ?  H.  S.  2,  3,  102,  which  of  these  two  is  crazier  ?  e5rum 
neuter,  Pis.  62,  neither  of  the  two.  multae  istarum  arborum,  CM.  59, 
many  of  the  trees  you  see  there,  quis  omnium  mortalium  ?  V.  5,  i*jc),who 
among  all  the  sons  of  men  ?  nemo  nostrum,  RA.  55,  not  one  of  us.  nihil  ho- 
rum, RA.  138,  none  of  these  things.  Stertinius,  sapientum  octavos,  H.  S. 
2,  3.  296,  Stertinius,  of  sages  eighth,  o  maior  iuvenum,  H.  AP.  366,  O  elder 
of  the  youths,  horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  i,  i,  3,  of  all  these 
the  stoutest  fighters  are  the  Belgians.  Also  with  superlative  adverbs  :  as, 
deorum  maxime  Mercurium  colunt,  Ta.  G.  9,  of  the  gods,  they  revere 
Mercury  most,  minume  gentium,  PI.  Poen.  690,  T.  Eu.  625,  no,  never  in  the 
world. 

1243.  uterque,   each,  doth,  often  takes  the  genitive  plural  of  a  pronoun:  as, 
quorum  uterque,  uterque  eorum,  horum,  nostrum,  &c. ;  sometimes  of  a 
substantive  and  pronoun  combined  :  as,  utriusque  harum  rerum,   TD.  i,  65,  of 
each  of  these  things,     quarum  civitatum  utraque,  V.  5,  56,  each  of  these  com- 
munities.    With  a  substantive  alone,  it  is  oftener  attributive :  as,  uterque  dux, 
Marc.    24,    each   commander ;   and   sometimes   with   neuter   pronouns :    as,    quod 
utrumque,  Brut,  in  Fam.  n,  i,  i,  N.  25,  2,  4.     The  plural  utrlque  is  used  both 
ways:  as,  ab  utrisque   vestriim,   Fam.  n,  21,  5,  and  ab  utrisque  nSbis, 
Brut,   in    Fam.  11.   20,  3. 

212 


The  Noun  :  Genitive.         [i  244-1  250, 


1244.  The  plurals  tot,  totidem,  and  quot,  are  not  used  partitively,  and  om- 
nes  and  cuncti  only  so  by  poets  and  late  prose  writers,     plerique  is  used  either 
way,  in  agreement,  or  with  the  genitive. 

1245.  The  numerical  partitive  is  exceptionally  used  in  poetry  with  the  positive  ol 
a  descriptive  adjective  :  as,  sancte  deorum,V.  4,  576,  thou  holy  if  the  gods.     And 
in  late  prose,  particularly  with  words  denoting  a  class  of  persons :  as,  CUtu   delectis 
peditum,  L.  26,  5,  3,  with  the  pick  of  the  infantry,     levis  cohortiurn,  Ta.  3,  39. 
the  light-armed  of  the  cohorts. 

1246.  Instead  of  the  numerical  partitive,  a  prepositional  expression  with  ante, 
inter,  or  in,  or  with  ex  or  de,  is  sometimes  used :  as,  ante  alios  acceptissimus, 
L.  i,  15,  8,  most  welcome  before  others.     So  particularly  quidam  and  unus.  duo, 
tres,  with  ex  orde:  as,  quidam  ex  his,  2,  17,  2,  one  of 'these,    unus  de  multis, 
Fin.  2,  66,  one  of  the  common  herd.     But  unus  sometimes  has  the  genitive:  as, 
unus  multorum,  H.  S.  i,  9,  71.     And  usually  so  in  a  series,  when  unus  is  fol- 
lowed by  alter,  alius,  tertius,  &c. 

1247.  (£.)  The  quantitative  partitive  is  usually  a  singular,  limiting 
a  neuter  singular  word  denoting  amount.     The  limited  word  is  either 
a  nominative,  or  an  accusative  without  a  preposition.     This  genitive 
often  borders  very  closely  on  the  genitive  of  definition  (1255)  •  as, 

multum  aestatis,  5,  22,  4,  much  of  the  summer,  amplius  obsidum,  6. 
9,  7,  something  more  extensive  in  the  way  of  hostages,  minus  dubitationis, 
i,  14,  i,  less  of  hesitation,  quam  minimum  spatii,  3,  19,  i,  as  little  time  as 
possible,  id  aetatis,  DO.  i,  207,  at  that  time  of  life,  id  temporis,  Fin.  5,  i, 
at  that  time  of  day.  quid  causae  est  ?  Ac.  I,  10,  what  earthly  reason  is  th  >re  ? 
hoc  litterularum,  Att.  12,  i,  i,  this  apology  for  a  letter,  or  this  hasty  line. 
hoc  sib!  solaci  proponebant,  7,  15,  2,  they  laid  this  flattering  unction  to 
their  souls. 

1248.  Such  neuters  are  :    multum,  plerumque,   plurimum,   amplius, 
plus,    paulum,    minus,    minimum,    tantum,    quantum,  tantundem,  ni- 
mium  ;  in  poetry  and  late  prose,  also  many  other  adjectives  singular  and 
plural.      Furthermore,    id,    hoc,    illud,   quod,    quid,   &c.,  and   nihil;    also 
abunde,  adfatim,  largiter,  nimis,  partim,  parum,  and  satis. 

1249.  A  few  adjectives  of  place  and  time  indicating  a  particular  part  of 
an  object,  are  commonly  used  in  immediate  agreement  with  their  substan- 
tives :  as, 

summus  mons,  I,  22,  I,  the  highest  part  of  the  mountain,  or  the  mountain- 
top,  extrema  hieme,  media  aestate,  IP.  35,  at  the  end  of  the  ivititer,  tn 
midsummer.  Such  are  :  primus,  intimus,  medius,  extremus,  postremus, 
ultimus,  summus,  infimus,  imus,  reliquus.  But  the  neuter  is  sometimes 
used  partitively:  as,  aestatis  extremum  erat,  S.  7.  90,  i,  it  was  the  end  of 
summer,  summa  pectoris,  Fam.  i,  9,  15,  the  upper  parts  of  the  breast. 

1250.  The  limiting  genitive  is  often  the  neuter  singular  of  an  adjective 
used  substantively  :  as, 

aliquid  boni,  T.  Andr.  398,  something  good,  aliquid  mall,  T.  Eu.  999, 
something  bad.  numquid  tandem  novi  ?  Br.  10,  nothing  new,  pray  ?  This 
use  is  ordinarily  confined  to  stems  in  -o- ;  rarely  otherwise:  as,  plus  ina- 
nis,  Lucr.  I,  365,  more  of  the  void :  and  usually  only  when  joined  with  an  -o- 
stem:  as,  nihil  solid!,  nihil  eminentis,  DN.  i,  75,  no  solidity,  no  projection. 

213 


1251-1256.]      Sen tences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1251.  The  partitive  construction  sometimes  extends  to  the  predicate:  as,  id  erit 
Slgni  me  invitum  facere,  KA.  83,  this  -will  be  something  of  an  indication  that  1 
act  -with  reluctance;   sign!  is  here  in  the  predicate,  and  yet  made  dependent  on  id. 
quid  ergo  est  tui  consill   ?  Brut,  in  Fam.  u,  i,  3,  -what  then  is  your  advice'? 
quid  sui  consili    sit  ostendit,  i,  21,  2,  he  explains  ^vhat  his  plan  is.     quid  est 
enim  huic  reliqui  ?  Sull.  89,  for  what  is  there  left  for  my  client  ?     hi  milites 
nihil  reliqui  victis  fecere,  S.  C.  TJ,  7.  these  soldiers  left  nothing  over  to  the  con- 
quered,   nihil  ad  celeritatem  sib!  reliqui  fecerunt,  2,  26,  5,  as  for  speed, 
they  left  no  effort  unspared. 

1252.  The  accusative  with  a  preposition  also  sometimes  has  the  genitive,  as.  in 
id  redactus  sum  loci,  T.  Ph.  979,  /  am  reduced  to  such  a  strait,     ad  id  loci, 
S.   C.  45,   3,  to  that  spot,     ad   id   locorum,   S.  /.    63,  6,  up  to  that  time,     in 
multum  diei,  L.  9,  44,  n,  till  late  in  the  day.     In  Cicero,  also  the  ablatives  e5, 
eodem,  and  quo,  with  loci:  as.  e5  loci,  Sest.  68,  in  that  position.     And  in  later 
writers,  other  ablatives,  with  or  without  a  preposition,  also  have  a  genitive. 

1253.  Some  appellatives  of  place  are  put  in  the  genitive  with  adverbs  of  place:  as, 
ubinam   gentium?   PI.  Mcr.  434,  C.  i,  9,   w/ure  in  the  -world?      nusquam 
gentium,  T.  Ad.  540,  nowhere  in  the  -world.      Similarly,  loci  with  adverbs  of  time 
or  order,  as  with  interea  in  Plautus  and  Terence,  postidea  in  Plautus,  postea  in 
Sallust,  and  inde  in  Lucretius ;  also  locorum  with  adhuc  and  postid  in  Plautus. 

1254.  In  Sallust,   Livy,  and  Tacitus,   genitives  of  abstracts  are  used  with  the 
adverbs  eo,  quo,  and  hue  :   as,  e5  miseriarum,  S.  /.    14,  3,  to  that  pitch  0} 
distress.     Onc-i  with  ut :   ut  quisque  audentiae  habuisset,  adcurrerent, 
Ta.  15,  53,  they  should  run  «/,  with  a  speed  commensurate  in  every  case  to  their 
daring. 

THE  GENITIVE  OF  DEFINITION. 

1255.  (4.)   The  genitive  is  used  to  define  that  of  which  a 
thing  consists :  as, 

magna  multitude  perditorum  hominum,  3,  17,  4,  a  perfect  swarm  of 
desperadoes,  innumerabile  pondus  auri,  Sest.  93,  a  weight  of  gold  too  great 
to  count,  mille  numero  navium  classem,  V.  i,  48,  an  armada  a  thousand 
sail  strong. 

1256.  The  genitive  of  an  explicit  word  containing  the  leading  idea 
is  sometimes  used  to  define  a  more  general  word ;  as, 

praedae  pecudum  hominumque,  L.  24,  20,  5,  booty  consisting  of  cattle 
and  human  beings,  pignora  coniugum  ac  liberorum,  L.  2,  i,  5,  pledges  in 
the  shape  of  wives  and  children.  cSnfisus  munltione  fossae,  Caes.  C.  i,  42,  3, 
relying  on  the  defensive  works  in  the  shape  of  a  moat.  Rarely  in  poetry  and 
late  prose,  the  proper  name  of  a  place,  with  urbs,  promunturium,  &c. :  as, 
urbem  Patavi,  V.  I,  247,  the  city  of  Patavium  (1045).  Particularly  with  the 
wotds  vox,  nomen,  genus,  and  especially  causa:  as,  haec  vox  voluptatis, 
Fin.  2,  6,  this  word  ' pleasure.'  nomen  amicitiae,  Fin.  2,  78,  the  name 
'friendship.'  Compare  nomen  fraternum,  i,  36,  5,  the  name  of  brothers 
(1233).  haec  ignominiae  causa,  Clu.  120,  this  reason,  namely  the  censor's 
stigma,  parvulae  causae  vel  falsae  suspicionis  vel  terroris  repentini, 
Caes.  C.  3,  72,  4,  insignificant  causes,  as  for  instance  ungrounded  suspicion  or 
a  panic,  propter  earn  causam  sceleris  istius,  V.  4,  113,  for  this  reason, 
namely  the  crime  of  the  defendant. 

214 


The  Noun  :    Genitive.      [1257-1262. 


1257.  The  genitive  of  definition  is  very  common  with  causa,  less  common 
with  gratia,  to  define  what  the  motive  or  cause  is :  as, 

amicitiae  causa,  i,  39,  2,  from  motives  of  friendship.  Compare  vestra 
magis  hoc  causa  volebam,  quam  mea,  DO.  I,  164,  I  wished  this  more  for 
your  sake  than  for  my  own  (i  ^4).  honestatis  amplitudinisque  gratia, 
RA.  15,  in  compliment  to  their  respectability  and  high  social  standing  So  also 
sometimes  with  nomine,  and  in  old  or  official  Latin,  with  ergo. 

1258.  Conversely,  the  genitive  of  a  generic  word  denoting  a  person  is  sometimes 
added  to  a  leading  word  defining  the  kind  of  a  person :  as,  frustum  pueri,  PI.  Per. 
849,  thou  bit  of  a  boy.     monstrum  hominis,  T.  Eu.  696,  thou  Jiend  in  human 
shape,    quaedam  pestes  hominum,  Fam.  5,  8,  2,  some  regular  plagues  in  the 
shape  of  men. 

1259.  quidquid  est,  quantum  est,  quod  est,  or  quodcumque  est,  with 
a  genitive,  is  equivalent  to  an  emphatic  omnis  :  as,  quidquid  patrum  est,  L.  3, 
17,  5,  -whatever  there  is  in  the  shape  of  senators,  i.  e.  every  single  senator,     quod 
est  pecuniae,  tradit,  Caes.  C.  2,  20,  8,  -what  there  is  in  the  -way  of  money,  he 
hands  over.    Similarly  tantum  for  tot  :  as,  tantum  hominum,  PI.  Poen.  619, 
such  a  mass  of  men. 


THE  OBJECTIVE  GENITIVE. 

1260.  (5.)  The  objective  genitive  denotes  the  object  of  the 
action  expressed  in  the  limited  substantive  :  as, 

metus  hostium,  Cell.  9,  12,  13,  the  fear  of  the  enemy,  i.  e.  which  is  felt 
towards  them.  venditi5  bonorum,  RA.  no,  sale  of  the  goods,  luctu  fill, 
DO.  2,  193,  from  grief  for  his  son.  This  construction  is  freely  used,  even 
when  the  parallel  verb  has  a  dative,  an  ablative,  or  a  prepositional  expres- 
sion :  as,  fiducia  loci,  7,  19,  2,  from  confidence  in  the  position,  liberationem 
culpae,  Lig.  i,  acquittal  from  guilt,  militiae  vacationem,  6,  14,  I,  exemption 
from  military  service,  opinione  trium  legionum  delectus,  5,  48,  i,  disap- 
pointed in  his  hope  of  three  legions,  deorum  opmio,  TD.  I,  30,  a  conception 
of  the  gods,  miserrima  est  contentio  honorum,  Off.  I,  87,  a  scramble  for 
office  is  a  pitiful  thing. 

1261.  Instead  of  the  objective  genitive,  a  prepositional  expression  is 
sometimes  used  with  greater  precision:  as, 

metus  a  vi  atque  Ira  deorum,  DN.  i,  45,  fear  of  the  might  and  wrath 
of  the  gods.  So  especially  the  accusative,  usually  denoting  a  person,  with  in, 
erga,  or  adversus,  combined  with  substantives  denoting  feeling :  as,  odium 
in  hominum  universum  genus,  TD.  4,  25,  hatred  to  all  mankind,  vestra 
erga  me  voluntas,  C.  4,  i,  your  good-will  towards  me. 

1262.  A   possessive  pronoun   or   adjective  is   sometimes  used  for  the 
objective  genitive :  as, 

(a.)  odio  tuo,  T.  Ph.  1016,  from  hate  to  thee.  tua  fiducia,  V.  5,  176, 
from  his  reliance  on  you.  aspectuque  suo,  Lucr.  I,  91,  and  at  the  sight  of  her. 
(6.)  metus  hostilis,  S.  7.  41,  2,  fear  felt  of  the  enemy,  servilis  percontatio, 
DO.  2,327,  crossquestioning  of  the  servant-girls,  firmus  adversus  militarem 
largitionem,  Ta.  H.  2,  82,  dead-set  against  any  largess  to  the  military. 

21,5 


1263-1266.]     Sentences:   The  Simple  Sentence. 


II.    THE  GENITIVE  WITH  ADJECTIVES. 

1263.  (i.)  The  genitive  is  used  with  many  adjec- 
tives to  denote  the  object. 

Such  are  chiefly  adjectives  meaning  (a.)  desirous,  (b.}  knowing,  or  remem- 
bering, (c.)  participating,  controlling,  or  guilty,  (d.)  full,  and  most  of  their 
opposites:  as,  (a.)  auri  cupidus,  PI.  Poen.  179,  eager  for  gold,  sapientiae 
studiosos,  id  est  enim  philosophos,  TD.  5,  9,  devotees  of  wisdom,  for  that  is 
what  '•philosophers '  means.  So  also  aemulus,  avidus,  fastidiosus,  invidus. 
(b.)  gnarus  r€i  publicae,  Br.  2.2^,  familiar  zvith  government,  rfii  militaris 
peritissimus,  i,  21,  4,  a  master  of  the  art  military,  homines  adulescentu- 
los,  inperitos  rerum,  T.  Andr.  910,  mere  hobbledehoys,  not  up  in  the  world's 
wavs.  imperitus  morum,  RA.  143,  behind  the  times,  immemor  bene- 
ficiorum,  rnemor  patriae,  Ph.  2,  27,  forgetful  of  kindnesses,  never  forgetting 
his  country  So  also  conscius,  consultus,  Inscius,  msolens,  msolitus, 
insuetus,  ieiunus,  providus,  prudens,  rudis.  (c.)  praedae  participes, 
Caes.  C.  3,  82,  i,  sharing  in  the  booty,  manifestus  tanti  sceleris,  S.  7.  35, 
8,  caught  in  committing  this  atrocious  crime,  expers  gloriae,  IP.  57,  without 
a  share  in  the  glory  So  also  adflnis,  compos,  censors,  exheres,  potens, 
reus.  (d.)  negoti  plenus,  PI.  Ps.  Tfio,full  of  business,  fons  plenissimus 
piscium,  V.  4,  118,  a  fountain  swarming  with  fish,  referto  praedonum  marl, 
IP.  31,  when  the  sea  was  crammed  with  corsairs.  So  also  fertilis,  inops, 
liberalis,  nudus,  profusus. 

1264.  In  poetry  and  late  prose,  a  great  many  other  adjectives  of  these  meanings, 
besides  those  mentioned  above,  are  also  used  with  the  genitive.     Such  are  principally  : 
(a.)  avarus,   curiosus,  incuriosus,  securus.     (b.)  nescius,  praesagus, 
praescius,  scitus.    (c.)  exsors,  immunis,  impos,  impotens,  innocens, 
innoxius,  insons,  noxius,  suspectus.      (d.)  abundans,  dives,   egenus, 
inanis,  indigus,  largus,  parcus,  pauper,  prodigus,  sterilis,  vacuus. 

1265.  With  conscius  and  the  genitive  of  a  thing,  the  dative  of  a  person  is 
sometimes  added:  as,  tot  flagitiorum  exercitui  meo  conscius,  Ta.  1,43,  a 

participant  -with  my  army  in  so  many  outrages.  Sometimes  Conscius  has  the 
dative  of  a  thing:  as,  mens  conscia  factis,  Lucr.  3,  1018,  the  mind  of  guilt 
aware. 

1266.  (2.)  The  genitive  of  the  object  is  often  used  with  present 
participles  which  express  permanent  condition. 

These  participles  are  chiefly  from  verbs  which  have  a  transitive  use. 
Not  common  in  old  Latin  :  as,  amantem  uxoris,  PL  As.  857,  devoted  to  his 
wife,  fugitans  litium,  T.  Ph.  623,  inclined  to  dodge  a  suit  at  law.  Very  com- 
mon in  Cicero:  as,  semper  appetentes  gloriae  praeter  ceteras  gentis 
fuistis,  IP.  7,  you  have  always  been  more  hungry  for  glory  than  any  other 
nation.  Especially  in  set  expressions  :  as,  homo  amantissimus  patriae, 
Sull.  34,  vir  amantissimus  r6i  publicae,  C.  4,  13,  n>er  a  devoted  patriot. 
negoti  gerentes,  Sest.  97,  biismess  men.  alieni  appetens,  DO.  2,  135,  S. 
C.  5.  4,  alwavs  hankering -after  other  people's  things.  In  Caesar  seldom:  as, 
fugiens  laboris,  C.  I,  69,  3,  apt  to  shirk  exertion. 

2  16 


The  Noun  :  Genitive.       [1267-1271. 


1267.  The  genitive  is  hardly  ever  found  with  adjectives  in  -ax  (284)  :  as,  huius 
rei  mendacem,  PI.  As.  855,  untruthful  in  this  point.     But  in  poetry,  from  Vergil 
and  Horace  on.  and  in  late  prose,  a  few  genitives  occur  with  adjectives  whose  parallel 
verbs  have  a  transitive  use,  such  as  capax,  edax,  tenax,  &c. :  as,  tempus  edax 
rerum,  O.  15,  234,  thuu  all-devourer  —  time. 

1268.  Some  of  the  adjectives  which  usually  take  the  genitive  have  occa- 
sionally other  constructions. 

Thus,  with  adfinis  the  dative  also  occurs  (1200),  rarely  with  aemulus 
(1183)  ;  the  ablative  with  adjectives  of  fulness,  as  dives,  plenus,  and  refertus 
(1387);  iure  with  consultus  and  peritus  (1385).  For  vacuus,  &c.,  see 
1306.  Prepositional  constructions  also  occur  with  these  adjectives,  such  as 
the  accusative  with  ad  or  in,  or  the  ablative  with  ab,  de,  or  in  :  see  the 
dictionary. 

1269.  For  the  genitive,  with  words  denoting  relationship,  connection,  friendship, 
or  hostility,  see  1203;  with  similis,  1204.     With  dignus  and  indignus,  -wortliy 
and  tin-worthy,  the  ablative  is  regularly  used  (1392)  ;  rarely  the  genitive  :  as,  non  ego 
sum  dignus  salutis  ?  PI.  Tri.  1153,  don't  I  deserve  a  greeting  too  >     indignus 
avorum,  V.  12,  649,  unworthy  of  my  sires, 

1270.  (3.)  In  poetry  and  late  prose,  the  genitive  is  used  very  freely  with 
many  adjectives  of  various  meanings,  often  merely  to  indicate  what  they 
apply  to :  as, 

nemo  militaris  rli  callidior  habebatur,  Ta.  H.  2,  32,  at  soldiering 
nobody  was  thought  to  have  a  greater  knack,  vetus  operis  ac  laboris,  Ta. 
I,  20,  an  old  hand  at  the  toil-  and  moil  of  army  life,  aevi  maturus  Acestes, 
V.  5,  73,  Acestes,  ripe  in  years,  sen  studiorum,  H..S".  I,  10,  21,  "what  laggards 
at  your  books,  integer  vitae  scelerisque  purus,  H.  i,  22,  I,  the  man  un- 
spotted in  his  life  and  clean  of  sin.  fessi  rerum,  V.  I,  178,  in  travail  spent. 
satin  tu  sanu's  mentis  aut  animl  tul  ?  PI.  Tri.  454,  art  thou  quite  right  in 
thy  five  wits?  (1339). 


III.    THE   GENITIVE   WITH  VERBS. 

VERBS  OF  VALUING. 

1271.  A  few  neuter  adjectives  of  quantity  are  put  in  the  gen- 
itive with  verbs  of  valuing  to  denote  the  amount  of  estimation ; 
such  genitives  are  : 

magnl,  pluris,  plurimi ;  parvi,  minoris,  minimi;  tanti,  quanti. 

The  verbs  with  which  these  genitives  are  used  are  aestimo,  duco,  fa- 
cio,  habeo,  pendo,  puto,  and  sum;  rarely  existimS:  as,  magni  opera  ems 
aestimata  est,  N.  24,  i,  2,  his  services  were  rated  high.  n5n  magni  pendo, 
PI.  As.  460,  /  don't  care  much,  sua  parvi  pendere,  S.  C.  12,  2,  a  setting 
small  store  by  what  they  had  of  their  own.  Verresne  tibi  tanti  fuit  ?  V. 
I,  77,  was  Verres  so  important  in  your  eyes?  est  mih!  tanti.  C.  2,  15,  it  is 
well  worth  my  while,  quanti  is  a  civibus  suis  fieret  ignorabas  ?  V.  4,  19, 
did  not  you  know  how  the  man  was  prized  by  his  own  townsmen  ?  Rarely 
maximi :  as,  maximi  aestimare,  Clu.  159,  to  think  all  the  world  of . 

217 


1272-1278.]     Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 

1272.  In  expressions  of  worthlessness,  other  genitives  are  also  used  thus ;  such 
are  nihili,  or,  usually  with  a  negative,  assis,  flocci,  nauci,  pill,  terunci  :   as, 
non  assis  facis?  Cat.  43, 13,  car'st  not  a  doit?    So  also  huius  :  as,  huius  non 
faciam,  T.  Ad.  163, 1  shall  not  care  a  snap. 

1273.  With  aestimo,  the  ablatives  magnp  and  permagnS  are  sometimes 
used :  as,  quid  ?  tu  ista  permagno  aestimas  ?  V.  4,  13,  tell  me,  do  you  rate 
that  sort  of  thing  very  high  yourself?     Compare  1390. 

1274.  The  genitives  tanti  and  quanti,  pluris  and  minoris  are  also  used  with 
verbs  of  buying  and  selling,  hiring  and  letting,  and  costing.     But  other  words  are  put 
in  the  ablative  with  these  verbs :  see  1391.     For  magni,  &c.,  with  refert  and  inter- 
est, see  1279. 

1275.  A  similar  genitive  occurs  in  one  or  two  set  forms,  such  as  aequi  bonique 
dico,  or  facio,  aequi  facio,  and  boni  cSnsulo  :   as,  istuc,  Chremes,  aequi 
bonique   facio,  T.   Hau.   787,  /  count  that,  Chremes,  fair  and  good,      aequi 
istuc  facio,  PL  MG.  784,  that 's  all  the  same  to  me. 


THE  VERBS  refert  AND  interest. 

1276.  refert  and  interest,  it  concerns,  are  much  alike  in  meaning  and 
in  construction.     But  the  use  of  refert  is  characteristic  of  old  Latin  and 
poetry;  in  prose  from  Cicero  on  it  is  almost  supplanted  by  interest,  espe- 
cially where  persons  are  concerned. 

1277.  (i.)  With  refert  and  interest,  a  first  or  second  per- 
son concerned  is  denoted  by  the  possessive  pronoun  forms  mea, 
tua,  nostra,  vestra  ;  and,  from  Cicero  on,  the  third  person 
reflexive  by  sua  :  as, 

(a.)  quid  id  refert  mea?  PI.  Cur.  395,  what's  that  tome?  tua  istuc 
refert  maxume,  PI.  Tri.  319,  that  is  of  most  concern  to  thee.  non  sua 
referre,  Quinct.  19,  that  it  did  not  concern  him.  non  nostra  magis  quam 
vestra  refert  vos  non  rebellare,  L.  34,  17,  7,  it  is  not  more  for  our  interest 
than  for  your  own  that  you  should  not  make  war  again.  Without  the  verb  : 
as,  quid  istuc  nostra,  or  quid  id  nostra?  T.  Ph.  800, 940,  what's  that  to  us? 
(b.)  tua  et  mea  maxime  interest  te  valere,  Fam.  16,  4,  $,  your  health  is  a 
matter  of  the  highest  importance  to  you  and  to  me.  vestra  hoc  maxime  in- 
terest, Sull.  79,  this  is  of  vital  moment  to  you. 

1278.  (2.)  With  interest,  from  Cicero  on,  a  third  person  or 
thing  concerned  is  denoted  by  the  genitive.     Also  with  refert, 
a  few  times  from  Sallust  on  :  as, 

(a.)  quid  eius  intererat  ?  PA.  96,  what  concern  was  it  of  his  ?  interesse 
r€i  publicae  se  cum  Pompeio  colloqui,  Caes.  C.  I,  24,  5,  that  it  was  of 
importance  to  the  common  weal  that  he  should  have  a  parley  with  Pompey. 
(b.)  faciundum  aliquid,  quod  illorum  magis  quam  sua  retulisse  vide- 
retur,  S.  /.  ill,  I,  that  he  must  do  something  which  should  seem  more  for  the 
other  side's  good  than  his  c~cn.  For  the  accusative  with  ad  with  these  verbs, 
or  for  the  dative  with  refert,  see  the  dictionary. 

218 


The  Noun :  Genitive.       [1279-1284. 


1279.  The  matter  of  concern  is  expressed  by  a  sentence  or  infinitive,  or  by  a 
neuter  pronoun;   rarely   by  an  appellative:    as,  non  quo  mea   interesset  loci 
natura,  Att.  3,  19,  i,  not  that  the  character  of  the  place  concerned  me.     The  degree 
of  concern  is  expressed  by  an  adverb,  as  magnopere,  by  a  neuter  accusative,  as 
multum,  or  by  a  genitive  of  estimation,  magm,  permagm,  pluris,   parvi, 
tantl,  quanti  (1271). 

JUDICIAL  VERBS. 

1280.  Verbs  of  accusing,  convicting,  condemning, 
'and  acquitting,  take  a  genitive  of  the  charge  :   as, 

C.  Verrem  msimulat  avaritiae,  V.  i,  128,  he  charges  Verres  with  ava- 
rice, accusatus  est  proditidnis,  N.  I,  7  5,  he  was  charged  with  treason. 
capitis  arcessere,  D.  30,  accuse  on  a  capital  charge,  proditionis  damna- 
tus  est,  N.  2,  8,  2,  he  was  convicted  of  treason.  Pollis  pecuniae  publicae 
est  condemnatus,  Place.  43,  Pollis  ivas  condemned  for  embezzlement  of  gov- 
ernment money,  maiestatis  absoluti  sunt  permulti,  Clu.  116,  a  good  many 
were  acquitted  of  high  treason.  With  this  genitive,  an  ablative,  crimine, 
iudiciS,  nomine,  or  lege,  is  sometimes  expressed  (1377):  as,  ne  quern 
umquam  innocentem  iudicio  capitis  arcessas,  Off.  2,  51,  that  you  are  never 
to  accuse  any  innocent  man  on  a  charge  affecting  his  status  as  a  citizen. 

1281.  The   charge  is   sometimes  denoted  by  a  prepositional   construction:    as. 
sescenti  sunt,  qui  inter  sicarios  et  de  veneficiis  accusabant,  RA.  90, 
there  are  hundreds  and  hundreds  that  brought  charges  of  murder,  by  steel  and  by 
poison.    So  also  de  alea,  of  gambling^  in  Cicero  regularly  de  pecuniis  repetun- 
dls,  of  extortion,  and  necessarily  de  Vl,  of  an  act  of  violence,  as  vis  has  no  genitive. 
For  the  neuter  accusative,  see  1172. 

1282.  The  penalty  also  is  sometimes  denoted  by  the  genitive:  as,  cupio  OCtu- 
pll  damnari  Apronium,  V.  3,  28,  /  -want  to  have  Apronius  condemned  to  a  pay- 
ment of  eightfold,     damnatusque  long!  Sisyphus  Aeolides  labpris,  H.  2, 
14,  19,  and  Sisyphus  the  Aeolid,  amerced  with  penance  long.     Sometimes  by  the 
ablative:   as,  capite,  V.  5,  109.     So  usually  from  Livy  on,  when  the  penalty  is  a 
definite  sum  of  money  or  fractional  part  of  a  thing. 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS  OF  MENTAL  DISTRESS. 

1283.  A  genitive  of  the  thing,  commonly  with  an  accusative  of  the 
person,  is  used  with  five  impersonals  of  mental  distress: 

miseret,  paenitet,  piget,  pudet,  taedet :  as, 

tui  me  miseret,  mei  piget,  E.  in  Div.  i,  66,  I  pity  thee,  I  loathe  my- 
self, fratris  me  pudet  pigetque,  T.  Ad.  391,  my  brother  stirs  my  shame  and 
my  disgiist.  mi  pater,  me  tui  pudet,  T.  Ad.  681,  dear  father,  in  thy  presence 
f'm  abashed,  galeatum  sero  duelli  paenitet,  J.  i,  169,  too  late,  with  casque 
on  head,  a  combatant  repenteth  him  of  war.  So  also  miseretur,  and  in  old 
Latin  inceptively,  miserescit,  commiserescit. 

1284.  These  verbs  sometimes  have  a  sentence  or  a  neuter  pronoun  as  subject :  as, 
non  te  haec  pudent  ?  T.  Ad.  754,  does  not  this  make  thee  bhtsh  for  shame! 
Rarely  an  appellative:  as,  me  quidem  haec  condicio  non  paenitet,  PI.  St.  51, 
for  my  part,  with  my  ipedded  state  fm  well  content.     Or  a  person  :  as,  pudeo, 
PI.  Cas.  877, 1  feel  ashamed.     For  participles  and  gerundives,  see  817. 

219 


1285-1291.]     Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1285.  The  genitive  is  used  with  the  personals  misereor  or  misereo,  and 
in  poetry  with  miseresco  :  as, 

aliquando  misereminl  sociorum,  V.  i,  72,  do  take  pity  on  your  allies,  it 
is  high  time,  neminis  miserere  certumst,  quia  mei  miseret  neminem, 
PI.  Cap.  764,  I'm  boimd  to  care  for  nobody,  as  no  one  cares  for  me.  Arcadii 
miserescite  regis,  V.  8,  573,  take  pity  on  the  king  of  Arcady. 

1286.  Personal  verbs  of  desiring,  loathing,  admiring,  and  dreading,  sometimes  take 
the  genitive:  as,  pol,  quamquam  dorm  cupio,  opperiar,  PI.  Tri.  841,  although 
I  yearn  for  home,  I  vow  / '//  wait  (1263).     fastidit  mei,  PI.  Aul.  245,  he  views  me 
•with  disdain  (1263).    iustitiaene  prius  mirer,  belline  labprum  ?  V.  n,  126, 
thy  justice  first  shall  I  admire?  thy  toils  in  war?  ne  tui  quidem     testimom 
veritus,  Aft.  8,  4,  i,  not  having  any  awe  about  your  recommendation  either. 

VERBS  OF  MEMORY. 

1287.  The  genitive  is  used  with  verbs  of  remembering  and  for- 
getting when  they  denote  an  inherent  state  of  memory  or  of  forget- 
fulness  :  as, 

faciam  ut  mei  memineris  dum  vitam  vivas,  PI.  Per.  494,  /'//  make 
you  remember  me  as  long  as  you  live,  num  potui  magis  oblivisci  tem- 
porum  meorum,  meminisse  actionum  ?  Fam.  i,  9,  8,  could  I  have  been 
more  forgetful  of  my  present  interests,  more  mindful  of  my  past  career  ?  re- 
mimsceretur  incommodi  populi  Romani,  i,  13,  4,  he  had  better  bear  in 
mind  the  rebuff  dealt  out  to  Rome,  oblitusque  meorum  obliviscendus  et 
illis,  H.  E.  i,  II,  10,  of  friends  forgetful  and  by  friends  forgot.  See  1263. 

1288.  The  accusative  is  used  with  these  verbs  when  they  denote 
the  mere  intellectual  exercise  of  memory  or  a  failure  to  remember :  as, 

equid  meministi  tubm  parentum  nomina  ?  PL  Poen.  1062,  do  you 
remember  your  parents'  names?  Cinnam  memim  vidi  Sullam,  Ph.  5,  17, 
/  can  remember  Cinna,  I  have  seen  Sulla,  utinam  memet  possim  ob- 
Hscier!  Accius  ap.  Non.  500,  5,  oh  that  myself  I  could  forget!  subito 
tot  am  causam  oblltus  est,  Br.  217,  suddenly  he  forgot  the  whole  case. 

1289.  recorder  has  once  the  genitive  (Pis.  12),  but  from  its  meaning  bring  to 
heart  it  is  naturally  found  oftener  with  the  accusative.     With  it  and  with  memim, 
the  ablative  with  de  also  occurs.     The  rare  reminiscor  has  the  genitive  once  each  in 
Caesar  and  Nepos;  twice  later;  oftener  the  accusative.     Neuter  pronouns  are  in  the 
accusative  with  all  these  verbs. 

1290.  The  impersonal  venit  in  mentem  also  takes  the  genitive:  as,  venit 
mih!  Platonis  in  mentem,  Fin.  5,  2,  Plato  comes  into  my  head ;  very  excep- 
tionally the  ablative  with  de.     But  the  verb  in  this  combination  is  often  used  person- 
ally, with  the  thing  occurring  to  the  mind  as  the  subject,  and  regularly  in  Cicero, 
when  it  is  res  or  genus,  or  a  neuter  pronoun. 

1291.  Verbs  of  reminding  take  the  accusative  of  a  person  and  sometimes 
with  it  the  genitive  of  a  thing :  as, 

admonebat  alium  egestatis,  alium  cupiditatis  suae,  S.  C.  21,  4,  he 
reminded  one  man  of  his  beggary,  another  of  his  greed.  So  also  commoneo, 
commonSfacio,  and,  in  Tacitus  only,  mone5.  Oftener  however  the  thing 
is  in  the  ablative  with  de,  or,  if  it  is  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective,  in  the 
accusative  (1172).  Rarely  a  substantive  equivalent  to  a  neuter  pronoun  :  as, 
cam  rem  nos  locus  admonuit,  S.  /.  79,  i,  the  place  has  reminded  me  of  that. 

220 


The  Noun :  Ablative.      [ 1 292- 1 297. 


VERBS  OF  PARTICIPATION  AND  MASTERY. 

I2Q2.  Verbs  of  participation_and  mastery  sometimes  take  the  genitive  in  old  Latin 
and  in  poetry  :  as,  servom  sui  participat  consili,  PI.  Cist.  163,  she  makes  a 
slave  a  sharer  in  her  plot  (1263).  qua  DaunuS  agrestium  regnavit  populp- 
rum,  H.  3,  30,  n,  where  Daunits  was  the  lord  of  rural  folk  (1260).  So,  even  in 
prose,  potior,  which  usually  has  the  ablative  (1379):  as,  totius  Galliae  sese 
potiri  posse  sperant,  i,  3,  8,  they  hope  they  can  get  the  mastery  over  the  whole  of 
Ganl.  Especially  with  persons,  or  with  the  genitive  plural  rerum:  rerum  potior, 
get  to  be,  or  often,  am,  master  of  the  situation,  or  /  am  monarch  of^all  I  survey.  Simi- 
larly in  Tacitus  aplscor,  adipiscor  :  as,  arma,  quis  Servius  Galba  rerum 
adeptus  est,  Ta.  3,  55,  the  war  by  which  Galba  became  master  of  the  throne.  In 
Plautus  credo  sometimes  has  the  genitive  of  a  thing  and  dative  of  a  person. 

VERBS  OF  FULNESS  AND  WANT. 

1293.  The  genitive  is  sometimes  used  with  verbs  of  filling,  abounding; 
and  lacking,  as  it  is  with  the  corresponding  adjectives  (1263) :  as> 

conviviurn  viclnorum  cotidie  compleo,  CM.  46,  I  fill  out  a  dinner' 
party  every  day  with  neighbours,  haec  res  vitae  me,  soror,  saturant, 
PI.  St.  1 8,  these  things,  my  sister,  sicken  me  of  life,  terra  ferarum  nunc 
etiam  scatit,  Lucr.  5,  39,  still  teems  the  earth  with  ravin  beasts.  So  with 
egeo  sometimes  :  as,  egeo  consili,  Att.  7,  22,  2,  I  am  in  need  of  some  advice. 
And  usually  with  indigeo  :  as,  hoc  bellum  indiget  celeritatis,  Ph.  6,  7, 
this  war  requires  rapid  action.  But,  from  Livy  on,  the  ablative  is  commoner 
with  indigeo  :  see  1305. 

1294.  With  verbs  of  separating  and  abstaining,  the  ablative  is  regularly  used 
(1302).     But  the  genitive  is  sometimes  found  in  poetry :  as,  me  omnium  laborum 
levas,  PI.  R.  247,  thou  riddest  me  of  all  my  woes,    abstineto  irarum  calidae- 
que  rixae,  H.  3,  27,  69,  from  bursts  of  rage  keep  thou  and  hot  affray. 

IV.    THE   GENITIVE   OF  EXCLAMATION. 

1295.  In  poetry,  the  genitive  with  an  adjective  in  agreement  occurs  two  or  three 
times  in  exclamation :   as,  foederis  heu  taciti,  Prop.  5,  7,  21,  alas,  that  secret 
covenant.     Usually  the  nominative  (1117),  or  the  accusative  (1149). 


THE   ABLATIVE. 

1296.  The  ablative  is  used  principally  with  verbs  and  their 
participles,  or  with  adjectives,  and  consists  of  three  cases  that 
were  originally  distinct. 

1297.  I.  The    ABLATIVE    proper   denotes  that   from   which 
something  parts  or  proceeds  (1302). 

221 


1 2  98- 1302.]      Sentences :    The  Simple  Sentence. 

The  ablative  proper  is  often  accompanied  by  the  prepositions  ab,  de, 
ex,  prae,  pro,  sine,  or  tenus. 

1298.  With  the  ablative  proper  two  other  cases,  originally  distinct,  a 
locative  case  and  an  instrumental  case,  were  confounded,  and  merged  under 
the  common  name  of  the  ablative. 

1299.  II.  The  LOCATIVE  case  denotes  the  place  in,  at,  or  on 
which  action  occurs.     A  few  forms  of  the  locative  proper  are 
still  preserved  (1331)-     But  the  place  where  is  ordinarily  de- 
noted by  the  locative  ablative  (1342). 

The  locative  ablative  is  often  accompanied  by  the  prepositions  in  or 
sub. 

1300.  III.  The  INSTRUMENTAL  case  denotes  that  by  which  or 
with  which  a  main  person  or  thing  is  attended  (1356). 

The  instrumental  ablative  is  often  accompanied  by  the  prepositions  cum 
or  coram. 

1301.  The  ablative  or  locative  is  sometimes  attached  immediately 
to  a  substantive. 

Thus,  (a.)  sometimes  to  a  substantive  which  denotes  or  implies  action: 
as,  interitus  ferr5,  destruction  with  the  sword,  like  intereo  ferro  ;  see  1307, 
1331,  1342,  1376,  1377.  (b.)  In  constructions  in  which  the  ablative  is  due  to 
an  older  combination  with  a  verb:  as,  vir  singular!  virtute,  a  man  of  unex- 
ampled bravery.  See  1309  and  1375. 


I.    THE  ABLATIVE   PROPER. 

THE  ABLATIVE  OF  SEPARATION  AND  WANT,  AND  OF 
DEPARTURE. 

1302.  Verbs  of  separation  take  an  ablative  of  the 
thing  from  which  separation  takes  place  :  as, 

(a.)  caruit  foro  postea  Pompeius,  caruit  senatu,  caruit  publics,  Mil. 


us  fa       ^  ,,„.._ 

need  advice  (1305).  (b.}  Italia  prohibetur:  non  tu  eum  patria  privare, 
qua  caret,  sed  vita  vis,  Lig.  n,  he  is  kept  out  of  Italy  ;  you  want  to  deprive 
him  not  of  his  country,  from  which  he  is  debarred,  but  of  life.  Hberemus  cura 
populum  R5manum,  L.  39,  51,  9,  Hannibal's  words  when  he  took  poison, 
183  B,  C.,  let  me  relieve  Rome  of  anxiety. 

222 


The  Noun :  Ablative.       [  1 303- 1 309; 


1303.  This  ablative  is  used  (a.}  with  such  verbs  as  mean  abstain,  abs- 
tineS,  desisto,  superseded  ;  am  devoid  of,  careo,  vaco  ;  need,  egeo ;  and 
in  addition  to  the  accusative  of  the  object,  (b.)  with  verbs  used  transitively, 
such  as  mean  keep  off,  arced,  exclude  and   interclud5,  prohibeo ;  drive 
away,  remove,  pello,  moveo,  and  their  compounds ;  free,  expedio,  libero, 
levo,  solvo  and  exsolvo  ;  deprive,  orbo,  privo,  spolio,  nudo,  fraudo. 

1304.  A  preposition,  ab  or  ex,  is  often  used  with  these  verbs,  and  regu- 
larly when  the  ablative  denotes  a  person.     But  careS  and  egeo,  and  exsolvS 
and  Iev5,  never  have  a  preposition. 

1305.  With  egeo,  the  genitive  is  sometimes  used,  and  often  with  indigeo  :  see 
1293.     Also  in  poetry,  with  verbs  of  abstaining  and  separating  :  see  1294. 

1306.  The  ablative  of  separation  is  sometimes  used  with  such  adjectives  as  ali- 
enus,  expers,  liber,  nudus,  vacuus,  &c.  :   as,  negant  id  esse  alienum 
maiestate  deorurn,  Div.  2,  105,  they  maintain  that  this  is  not  at  variance  -with 
the  greatness  of  the  gods,     vacui  curls,  Fin.    2,   46,  devoid  of  cares,     arce  et 
urbe  orba  sum,   E.   Tr.  114,  of  tower  and  town  bereft  am  I.     But  sometimes 
the  genitive:  see   1263  and  1264;   sometimes  also  prepositional  constructions:    for 
these,  and  particularly  for  the  different  constructions  of  alienus,  see  the  dictionary. 

TOWN   AND   ISLAND   NAMES. 

1307.  (i.)  Proper  names  of  towns  and  of  little  islands 
are  put  in  the  ablative  with  verbs  of  motion,  to  denote 
the  place  from  which  motion  proceeds :  as, 

Damaratus  fugit  Tarquinios  Corintho,  TD.  5,  109,  Damaratus  ran 
away  from  Corinth  to  Tarquinii.  signum  Carthagine  captum,  V.  4,  82, 
the  statue  carried  off  from  Carthage.  Megaribus,  PI.  Per.  \yj,from  Megara. 
Lemno,  PL  Tru.  go,  from  Lemnos.  Roma  acceperam  litteras,  Att.  5,8,  2, 
I  had  got  a  letter  from  Rome.  Rarely  with  a  substantive  of  motion  (1301): 
as,  de  illius  Alexandria  discessu,  Att.  n,  18,  I,  about  his  departure  from 
Alexandrea.  Also  in  dating  letters :  as,  v  kal.  Sextil.,  Regio,  Fam.j,  19, 
Regiurn,  28  July;  less  often  the  locative:  as,  Idibus  luniis,  Thessalonlcae, 
QFr.  I,  3,  10,  Thessalonica,  13  June.  Like  a  town  name  :  Acherunte,  poet, 
in  TD.  i,  -yjifrom  Acheron.  With  an  attribute  :  ipsa  Samo,  V.  i,  51,  from 
Samos  itself.  TeanS  Sidicmo,  Att.  8,  II,  B,  2,  from  Sidicinian  Teanum. 

1308.  Singular  town  or  island  names  sometimes  have  ex  in  old  Latin :   thus, 
Carysto,  PI.  Ps.  730,  from  Carystus,  or,  ex  Carysto,  Ps.  737,  indifferently,     ex 
Andro,  T.  Andr.  "jo,from  Andros.     In  classical  Latin,  town  names  rarely  have  ab: 
as,  ab  Athenis  proficisci,  Serv.  in  Fam.  4,  12,  2,  to  start  from  Athens;  chiefly 
of  neighbourhood:  as,  ab  Gergovia,  7,  43,  5  :  7,  59,  \,from  camp  at  Gergovia ;  or 
direction  :  as,  a  Salonis  ad  Oricum,  Caes.  C.  3,  8,  4,  from  Salonae  to  Oricum  ; 
regularly  with  longe  :  as,  longe  a  Syracusis,  V.  4,  107,  far  from  Syracuse. 

1309.  The  ablative  of  a  town  or  country  name  is  rarely  attached  immediately  to  a 
substantive,  to  denote  origin  :  as,  Periphanes  Rhodo  mercator  dives,  PI.  As. 
.199,  Periphanes  from  Rhodes  a  chapman  rich,     video  ibl  hospitem  Zacyntho, 
PI.  Mer.  940,  /  see  the  friend  there  from  Zacynthus.     Rarely  in  Cicero  :  as,  Teano 
Apulo  laudatores,  Clu.  197,  ertlogists  from  Apulian   Teanum;  in  Caesar  twice. 
In  Livy  with  ab  only  :  as,  Turnus  ab  Aricia,  L..  i,  50,  3.  Turnus  from  Aricia. 
But  the  Roman  trib^  on^  belongs  to,  is  regularly  in  the  ablative :  as,  Q.  Verrem 
KSmilia,  sc.  tribu,  V.  a.  pr.  i,  23,  Verres  of  the  tribe  Rtmilia. 

223 


1310-1315-]    Sentences  :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1310.  With  a  verb,  country  names_  regularly  have  a  preposition,  and  always  in 
Cicero,  Sallust,  and  Livy  :  as,  e  Cilicia  decedens,  Br,  i,  going  away  from  Cilicta. 
The  ablative  alone  is  rare  :  as,  Aegypto  adveniS  domum,  PI.  Most.  440,  from 
Egypt  I  come  home.  Chiefly  in  Tacitus  :  as,  Aegypto  remeans,  2,  69,  coming  back 
from  Egypt.    In  Caesar,  by  attraction  :  cogebantur  Corcyra  atque  Acarnania 
pabulum  supportare,  C.  3,  58,  4,  they  were  forced  to  fetch  fodder  from  Corcyra 
and  even  Acarnania. 

1311.  (2.)  The  ablatives  domo  and  rure,   and   in  poetry 
humo,  are  used  like  proper  names  of  towns :  as, 

(a.)  domo  excesserant,  4,  14,5,  they  had  gone  away  from  home.  Also 
metaphorically  :  as,  domo  doctus,  PI.  Mer.  355,  by  home-experience  taught, 
(b.)  rure  rediit  uxor  mea,  PI.  Mer.  705,  mywfes  comeback  from  out  of  town. 
\c.}  hum5,  in  Vergil  first:  as,-vix  oculos  attollit  humo,  O.  2,  448,  scarce 
from  the  ground  her  eyes  she  lifts. 


THE  ABLATIVE  OF  SOURCE,  STUFF,  OR  MATERIAL. 

1312.  The  verb  nascor  and  participles  of  origin  take  an  ablative  to 
denote  parentage  or  rank  in  life. 

Such  participles  are  :  natus,  prognatus,  and  ortus  ;  in  poetry  and  late 
prose,  also  cretus,  editus,  generatus,  genitus,  satus,  and  oriundus :  as, 
(a.)  Romulus  deo  prognatus,  L.  i,  40,  3,  Romulus,  sprung  from  a  god.  dis 
genite,  V.  9,  642,  thou  sired  of  gods.  Of  a  parent,  ex  is  sometimes  used  :  as 
ex  me  hie  natus  n5n  est,  T.  Ad.  40,  he's  not  my  son  ;  and  of  remoter  ances- 
tors, ab.  (b.)  loco  natus  honesto,  5,  45,  2,  respectably  descended,  summo 
loco  natus,  5,  25,  i,  of  high  birth,  familia  antiquissima  natum,  7,  32,  4, 
a  member  of  an  old  family.  Rarely  with  de  :  as,  quo  de  genere  gnatust 
Philocrates  ?  PI.  Cap.  277,  what  is  the  parentage  of  Philocrates? 

1313.  The  ablative  with  an  attribute,  attached  to  a  substantive,  sometimes  denotes 
stuff  or  material:  as,   acre  cavo  clipeum,  V.  3,  286,  a  targe  of  hollow  bronze. 
perenni  fronde  coronam,  Lucr.   i,   nS,   a  crown  of  amaranthine  leaf,     so- 
lidpque   adamante   columnae,   V.  6,  552,  and  pillars  of  the  solid  adamant. 
This  construction  borders  closely  on  the  ablative  of  quality  (1375).     Rarely  without  an 
attribute:  as,  pictas  abiete  puppis,  V.  5,  663,  painted  sterns  of "fir. 

1314.  A  substantive  denoting  stuff  or  material  is  generally  put  in  the 
ablative  with  de  or  ex;  thus, 

(a.)  Directly  with  a  substantive  :  pocula  ex  auro,  V.  4,  62,  cups  of  gold, 
(b.)  Oftener  with  an  auxiliary  verb  or  participle  :  signum  erat  hoc  Cupidi- 
nis  e  marmore,  V.  4,  5,  this  statue  of  Cupid  was  made  of  marble,  scutis 
ex  cortice  factis,  2,  33,  2,  with  long  shields  made  out  of  bark,  ex  una 
gemma  pergrandi  truTla  excavata,  V.  4,  62,  a  ladle  scooped  out  of  a  single 
enormous  semi-precious  stone. 

1315.  The  ablative  with  forms  of  facio  and  sum  denotes  that  with  which  or 
to  which  something  is  done  :  as,  quid  hoc  homine  facias  ?  Sest.  29,  what  can 
you  do  with  such  a  fellow  1     quid  me  f!et?_T.  Andr.  709,  -what  will  become  of 
me?     But  often  the  dative  (120^):  as,  quid  tib!  faciam  ?  Aft.  7,  3,  2,  what  shall 
I  do  to  you?  Or  the  ablative  with  de  :  as,  de  fratre  quid  fiet?  T.  Ad.  996,  as  to 
my  brother,  -what  will  come  to  pass? 

224 


The  Noun  :  Ablative.         [131 6-1 3  20. 

THE   ABLATIVE   OF   CAUSE,   INFLUENCE,   OR   MOTIVE. 

1316.  The  ablative  is  used  to  denote  cause,  influ- 
ence, or  motive :   as, 

1  madeS  metu,  PI.  Most.  395,  I'm  drenched  with  dread,  tu  imprudentia 
laberis,  Mur.  78,  you,  sir,  slip  from  inadvertence,  maerore  et  lacrimis 
consenescebat,  Clu.  13,  she  just  pined  away  in  sorrcnu  and  tears,  ira  incen- 
dor,  PI.  Ps.  201,  I'm  getting  hot  with  wrath,  premor  luctu,  Att.  3,  22,  3, 
I  am  bowed  down  with  grief,  quod  ego  non  superbia  faciebam,  DO.  i,  99, 1 
did  not-  act  thus  from  superciliousness,  not  L  non  movetur  pecunia,  V.  4,  18, 
he  is  not  moved  by  money,  boat  caelum  fremitu  virum,  PI.  Am.  232,  the 
welkin  rings  with  roar  of  men.  delicto  dolere,  correctione  gaudere,  L. 
90,  be  pained  by  the  sin,  take  pleasure  in  the  reproof,  aetate  non  quis  optu- 
erier,  PI.  Most.  840,  owing  to  age  thou  canst  not  see.  lovis  iussu  venio,  PI. 
Am  prol  19,  at  Jove's  behest  I  come.  Seianus  nimia  fortuna  socors,  Ta. 
4,  39,  Sejanus  giddy  with  over-prosperity,  ferox  praeda  gloriaque  exercitus, 
Ta.  H.  i,  51,  the  army  flushed  with  booty  and  glory,  exercitus  nostri  interitus 
ferro,  Pis.  40,  the  annihilation  of  our  army  by  the  sword  (1301). 

1317.  Instead  of  the  ablative,  other  constructions  often  occur, 
especially  with  verbs  used  transitively;  such  are: 

(a.}  Prepositional  phrases  with  de  or  ex,  in  Varrq  and  Livy  with  ab  ; 
also  with  ob,  per,  or  propter:  as,  multi  in  oppidum  propter  timorem 
sese  recipiunt,  Caes.  C.  2,  35,  6,  a  good  many  retreated  to  the  town  from  fear. 
Sometimes  with  prae  :  as,  prae  amore  exclusti  hunc  foras,  T.  Eu.  98,  it 
was  for  love  you  turned  him  out  of  doors  :  in  classical  Latin,  usually  of  hin- 
drance: as,  solem  prae  iaculorum  multitudine  non  videbitis,  TD.  i,  101, 
you  won't  see  the  sun  for  the  cloud  of  javelins,  (b.)  Circumlocutions  with 
causa,  less  frequently  with  gratia  (1257).  (c.)  Ablatives  absolute,  or  parti- 
ciples, particularly  auxiliary  participles  with  an  ablative  to  express  cau^e, 
oftener  motive,  such  as  captus,  ductus,  excitatus  or  incitatus,  impulsus, 
incensus,  inflammatus,  motus,  perterritus  :  as,  nonnulli  pudore  adductl 
remanebant,  i,  39,  3,  some  stuck  by  from  shame. 

1318.  The  person  by  whom  the  action  of  a  passive  verb  is  done,  is  denoted  by  the 
ablative  with  ab  or  a.     Also  occasionally  with  verbs  equivalent  to  a  passive,  such  as 
cado,  intereS,  pereS,  veneo,  &c.,  &c.    Things  or  animals  are  sometimes  repre- 
sented as  persons  by  the  use  of  ab:  as,  animus  bene  informatus  a  natura, 
Off.  i,  i^,  a  soul  meetly  fashioned  by  dame  nature.     See  1476-1478. 

1319.  In  poetry,  an  ablative  denoting  a  person,  with  an  adjective  in  agreement,  is 
sometimes  equivalent  to  an  expression  with  an  abstract  substantive:  as,  et  adsiduo 
ruptae  lectSre  columnae,  J.  i,  13,  and  pillars  by  persistent  reader  riven,  i.  e. 
adsiduitate  lectoris,  or  adsidua  lectione.     curatus  inaequali  tonsore 
capillos,  H.  E.  i,  i,  94,  my  locks  by  unsymmetric  barber  trimmed. 

THE  ABLATIVE  OF  COMPARISON. 

1320.  (i.)    The  ablative  may  be  used  with  a  com- 
parative adjective,  when  the  first  of  two  things  compared 
is  in  the  nominative,  or  is  a  subject-accusative. 

tc  221; 


1321-1325.]     Sentences  :   The  Simple  Sen tence. 


Such  an  ablative  is  translated  by  than:  as,  (a.)  luce  sunt  clariora  nobis 
tua  consilia,  C.  r,  6,  your  schemes  are  plainer  to  us  than  day.  6  matre 
pulchra  filia  pulchrior,  H.  i,  16,  i,  O  daughter  fairer  than  a  mother  fair. 
Particularly  in  sentences  of  negative  import:  as,  quis  Karthaginiensium 
pluris  fuit  Hannibale  ?  Sest.  142,  of  all  the  sons  of  Carthage,  who  was  rated 
higher  than  Hannibal?  nee  mihl  est  te  iucundius  quicquam  nee  carius, 
Fam.  2,  10,  I,  and  there  is  nothing  in  the  world  nearer  and  dearer  to  me  than, 
you.  (b.)  illud  c5gnosces  profecto,  mih!  te  neque  cariorem  neque  iu- 
cundiorem  esse  quemquam,  Fam.  2,  3,  2,  one  thing  I  am  sure  you  will  see, 
that  there  is  nobody  nearer  and  dearer  to  me  than  you. 

1321.  (2.)  The    ablative    of    comparison    is    similarly    used 
when  the  first  member  of  comparison  is  an   accusative  of  the 
object:  as, 

exegi  monumentum  aere  perennius,  H.  3,  30,  i,  /  have  builded  up  a 
monument  more  durable  than  bronze.  Particularly  so  in  sentences  of  negative 
import :  as,  hoc  mih!  gratius  facere  nihil  potes,  Fam.  13,  44,  you  can  do 
nothing  for  me  more  welcome  than  this.  Also  with  predicate  adjectives  de- 
pendent on  a  verb  of  thinking  (1167):  as,  Herodotum  cur  veraciorem 
ducam  Ennio  ?  Div.  2,  1 16,  why  should  I  count  Herodotifs  any  more  truthful 
than  Ennius?  Regularly  when  the  second  member  of  comparison  is  a  rela- 
tive :  as,  qua  pecude  nihil  genuit  natura  fecundius,  DN.  2,  160,  nature 
has  created  nothing  more  prolific  than  this  animal,  i.  e.  the  sow. 

1322.  (^.)  In  poetry,  the  ablative  of  comparison  may  be  used  with  the  first  mem- 
ber of  comparison  in  any  case:  as,  Lucili  ritu,  nostrum  melioris  utroque, 
H.  S.  2,  i,  29,  after  Lucilius^s  way,  a  better  man  than  thou  or  /. 

1323.  (4.)  In  sentences  of  negative  import,  the  ablative  is  sometimes  used  with 
alter  and  alius,  as  with  a  comparative:  as,  neque  mest  alter  quisquam,  PL 
As.  492,  and  there's  no  other  man  than  I.     nee  quicquam  aliud  libertate 
communi  quaesisse,  Brut,  and  Cass.  in  Fam.  u,  2,  2,  and  to  have  aimed  at 
nothing  else  than  freedom  for  all.     But  in  prose,  quam  is  commonly  used. 

1324.  (i.)  The  second  member  of  comparison  is  often  introduced  by 
quam,  than,  or  in  poetry  by  atque  or  ac.     This  member,  whatever  the  case 
of  the  first  member,  is  sometimes  made  the  subject  of  a  form  of  sum  in  a 
new  sentence :  as, 

meliorem  quam  ego  sum  suppono  tibf,  PI.  Cur.  256,  I  give  you  as  a 
substitute  a  belter  than  2  am  myself,  verba  M.  Varronis,  hominis  quam 
fuit  Claudius  doctiSris,  Gell.  10,  I,  4,  the  words _of  Varro,  a  better  scholar 
than  Claudius  ever  was.  ut  tib!  maiori  quam  Africanus  fuit,  me  ad- 
iunctum  esse  patiare,  Fam.  5,  7,  3,  so  that  you  will  allow  me  to  be  associated 
with  yoit)  a  bigger  man  than  Africanus  ever  was. 

1325.  (2.)  When  the  first  member  is  in  the  nominative  or 
accusative,  quam  is  commonly  a  mere  coordinating  word,  with 
both  members  in  the  same  case  :  as, 

(a.)  pluris  est  oculatus  testis  unus  quam  auriti  decem,  PI.  Tru.  490, 
a  single  witness  with  an  eye  rates  higher  than  a  dozen  with  the  ear.  (/>.)  tu 
velim  existimes  neminem  cuiquam  neque  cariorem  neque  iucundiorem 
umquam  fuisse  quam  te  mihf,  Fam.  \,  9,  24, 1  hope  you  will  be  convinced 

that  nobody  was  ever  nearer  and  dearer  to  anybody  than  you  to  me. 

226 


The  Noun  :  A  blaiive.       [1326-1331. 


1326.  An  introductory  ablative  of  a  demonstrative  or  relative  pronoun  sometimes 
precedes  the  construction  with  quam :  as,  quid  hoc  est  ciarius,  quam  omnis 
Segestae  matronas  et  virgines  convenisse  ?   V.  4,  77,  what  fact  is  there 
better  known  than  this,  to  wit,  that  all  the  women  in  Segesta,  married  and  single, 
came  streaming  together  ? 

1327.  The  ablative  is  sometimes  used  with  comparative  adverbs 
also. 

So  particularly  in  sentences  of  negative  import  -.  as,  nihil  lacrima  citius 
arescit,  Corn.  2,  50,  nothing  dries  np  quicker  than  a  tear.  Less  frequently 
in  positive  sentences  in  prose  :  as,  fortuna,  quae  plus  consilis  humanis 
pollet,  contraxit  certamen,  L.  44,  40,  3,  fortune,  who  is  mightier  than  the 
devices  of  man,  precipitated  the  engagement.  Very  commonly,  however, 
quam  is  used  with  comparative  adverbs. 

1328.  Designations  of  number  or  extent  are  often  qualified   by 
amplius,  longius,  or  plus,  over,  or  by  minus,  under. 

The  word  thus  qualified  is  put  in  the  case  which  the  context  would  re- 
quire without  any  such  qualification :  as,  plus  septingenti  capti,  L.  41,  12,  8, 
over  seven  hundred  were  taken  prisoners,  tecum  plus  annum  vixit,  Q.  41,  he 
lived  with  you  over  a  year  (1151).  cum  equis  plus  qulngentls,  L.  40,  32,6, 
ivitk  over  five  hundred  horses.  Less  frequently  with  quam.  When  these 
words  are  felt  as  real  substantives  in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  the  abla- 
tive of  comparison  may  be  used  (1320) :  as,  plus  triduo,  RA.  74,  more  than 
three  days. 

1329.  In  expressions  of  age  with  natus,  the  adjectives  maior  and  minor  art 
used  as  well  as  amplius  and  minus,  and  with  the  same  construction  (7328):  as, 
annSs   natus  maior  quadraginta,  RA.  39,  over  forty  years  old.      For  other 
constructions,  see  the  dictionary.     Similarly  conlectus   aquae   digitum   non 
altior  unum,  Lucr.  4,  414,  a  pool  no  deeper  than  a  fingers  breadth  (1130).     But 
commonly  with   comparative  adjectives  of  extent,  quam   is  used,  or  the  ablative 
(1320):  as,  palus  non  latior  pedibus  quinquaginta,  7,  19,  i,  a  marsh  not 
wider  than  fifty  feet. 

1330.  With  a  comparative  adjective  or  adverb,  the  ablatives  opinione, 
exspectatione,  and  spe,  and  some  others,  chiefly  in  poetry,  take  the  place 
of  a  sentence  with  quam  :  as, 

opinione  melius,  PI.  Cas.  338,  better  than  you  thought,  minora  opini- 
one, Caes.  C.  2,  31,  5,  more  insignificant  than  is  thought,  latius  opinione 
disseminatum  est  hoc  malum,  C.  4,  6,  this  infection  is  more  sweeping  than 
anybody  dreams,  spe  omnium  serius,  L.  2,  3,  i,  later  than  was  generally 
expected. 


II.     THE   LOCATIVE  ABLATIVE. 
(A.)    THE    LOCATIVE    PROPER. 

1331.  (i.)  Singular  proper  names  of  towns  and  of 
little  islands  are  put  in  the  locative  to  denote  the  place 
in  or  at  which  action  occurs :  as, 

227 


I332^I337]     Sentences:    Tke  Simple  Sentence. 


quid  R5mae  faciam  ?  mentiri  nescio,  J.  3,  41,  -what  can  I  do  in  Rome? 
I  don't  know  how  to  lie.  Corinthi  et  Karthagini,  Agr.  2,  90,  at  Corinth 
and  at  Carthage.  Lacedaemoni,  ~N.fracf.  4,  in  Lacedaemon.  Tiburf,  Aft. 
1 6,  3,  i,  at  Tibur.  Rhodi,  Fam.  4,  7,  4,  at  Rhodes,  mansiones  diutinae 
Lemni,  T.  Ph.  1012,  protracted  stays  at  Lemnos  (1301).  Sometimes  in 
dates:  as,  data  Thessalonicae,  Att.  3,  20,  3, given  at  Thessalonica  (1307). 
The  locative  rarely  means  near:  as,  Antii,  L.  22,  I,  10,  round  about  Antiuin. 
In  Plautus  only  two  singular  town  names  with  consonant  stems  occur,  and 
these  regularly  in  the  locative,  Carthagim  and  Sicyom,  three  times  each; 
once  in  a  doubtful  example,  Sicyone,  Cist.  128.  Terence  has  no  examples 
of  these  stems.  From  Cicero  on,  the  locative  ablative  is  commoner  with 
them  (1343). 

1332.  With  an  adjective  attribute  also,  the  locative  is  used :  as,  Teani  Apuli, 
Cht.  27,  at   the   Apulian  Teanum.       Suessae    Auruncae,    L.   32,  9,  3,  at   the 
Auruncan  Suessa.     The  appellative  forum,  market  place,  used,  with  an  attribute, 
as  a  proper  name,  is  sometimes  put  in  the  accusative  with  ad  :  as,  Claternae,  ad 
Forum  Cornelium,  Fam.    12,    5,    2,    at   Claterna  and  at  Forum  Cornelium  ; 
sometimes  in  the  locative  ablative  :   For5  lull,  Plin.  Ep.  5,  19,  7. 

1333.  When  the  locative  is  further  explained  by  an  appellative  following,  the 
appellative  is  put  in  the  locative  ablative,  either  alone,  or  with  in  :  as,  Antiochiae, 
celebri  quondam  urbe,  Arch.  4,  at  Antioch,  once  a  bustling  town.     Neapoli, 
in  celeberrimo  oppid5,  RabP.  26,  at  Neapolis,  a  town  swarming  with  people. 
An  appellative  in  the  ablative  with  in  may  be  further  defined  by  a  proper  name  in  the 
locative:  as,  duabus  in  insulis,  Melitae  et  Sami,  V.  5, 184,  in  two  islands  —  at 
Melita  and  Samos.     in  oppido,  Antiochiae,  Att.  5,  18,  i,  within  town  walls  — 
at  Antioch.    in  secessu,  Apolloniae,  Suet.  Atig.  94,  out  of  town  — at  Apollonia. 
Or  in  the  ablative:   as,  in  oppido  Citio,  N.  5,  3,  4,  in  the  town  of  Citium.     in 
urbe  Roma,  L.  39,  14,  7,  in  the  city  of  Rome. 

1334.  In  Plautus,  singular  town  names  with  stems  in  -a-  or  -o-  are  put  in  the 
locative  ten  or  twelve  times,  in  the  ablative  with  in  some  fifteen  times.     Three  such 
have  only  in,  never  the  locative:  in  Anactoriq,  Poen.  896,  in  Seleucia,  Tri. 
ooi,  in  Sparta,  Poen.  663 ;  furthermore,   in  Epidamn5,  Men.  267,  380  twice,  in 
Epheso,  B.  309,  MG.  441,  778,  and  in   Epidauro,  Cur.  341,  429,  £.  540,  541, 
554,  but  also  Epidamni,  Men.  prol.   51,  Ephesi,  B,  336,  1047,  MG.  648,  and 
Epidauri,  E.  636.     Terence,  who  has  only  -o-  stems,  uses  the  locative  six  times, 
the  ablative  with  in  four  times:  only  with  in:  in  Andro,  Andr.  931,  in  Imbr5, 
Hec.  171.     Furthermore  in  Lemno,  Ph.  873,  1004,  but  also  Lemni,  Ph.  680,  942, 
1013.    Also  Mileti,  Ad.  654,  Rhodi,  Eu.  107,  Sunii,  Eu.  519. 

1335.  A  town  name  is  sometimes  put  in  the  ablative  with  in  by  assimilation  with 
a  parallel  in  :  as,  in  Illyric5,  in  ipsa  Alexandria,  Att.  n,  16,  i,  in  Illyricum, 
and  at  Alexandrea  itself.     Antiochum  in  Syria,  Ptolemaeum  in  Alexan- 
dria esse,  L.  42,  26,  7,  that  Antiochus  was  in  Syria,  Ptolemy  at  Alexandria,     in 
monte  Alban5  LaviniSque,  L.  5,  52,  8,  on  the  Alban  mount  and  at  Lavinhnn. 
Also  without  assimilation:  as,  navis  et  in  Caieta  est  parata  npbis  et  Brun- 
dusil,  Att.  8,   3,   6,   we   have   a    vessel  all  chartered,  one  in   Cajeta  and  one  at 
Brundusium.     in  Hispali,  Caes.  C.  2,  18,  i,  in  Hispalis. 

1336.  With  country  names,  the  locative  is  very  exceptional  :  as,  Chersonesi, 
N.  i,  2,  4,  at  the  Peninsula.     Aegypti,  Val.   M.  4,   i,  15,  in  Egypt.     Similarly 
Accherunti,  PI.  Cap..  689.  998,  Mer.  606,  Tru.  749,  in  Acheron ;  Accherunte 
however  cnce:  Accheruntest,  PI.  Poen.  431.     In  Sallust,  Romae  Numidiae- 
que,  /.  33,  4,  with  assimilation  of  Numidiae  to  Romae. 

1337.   (2.)  The  locatives  dorm,  run,  humi,  and  rarely  orbi, 
are  used  like  proper  names  of  towns :  as, 

228 


The  Noun  :  Ablative.       [1338-1342. 


(a.)  cenabo  domi,  PI.  67.  482,  I  shall  dine  at  home.  Metaphorically, 
domi  est,  nascitur,  or  habeS,  I  can  get  at  home,  I  need  not  go  abroad  for,  or 
I  have  in  plenty :  as,  id  quidern  domi  est,  Att.  10,  14,  2,  as  for  that,  I  have 
jt  myself.  With  a  possessive  pronoun  or  alienus  in  agreement,  either  the 
locative  is  used,  or  the  ablative  with  in  ;  for  domui,  as,  Off.  3,  99,  see  594; 
with  other  adjectives  the  ablative  with  in.  (b.)  run,  T.  Ph.  363,  up  in  the 
country ;  for  nire,  see  1344  and  1345.  (c.)  humi,  on  the  ground,  or  to  the 
ground,  in  Terence  first:  as,  hunc  ante  nostram  ianuam  appone  : :  obsecro, 
humine  ?  T.  Andr.  724,  set  down  this  baby  at  our  door  :  :  good  gracious  ;  on  the 
ground?  iacere  humi,  C.  i,  26,  sleeping-  on  bare  ground,  (d.)  orbi  with 
terrae  or  terrarum :  as,  amplissimum  orbi  terrarum  monumentum,  V. 
4,  82,  the  grandest  monument  in  the  -wide  wide  world. 

1338.  The  locatives  belli,  older  duelll,  and  militiae  are  sometimes  used  in 
contrast  with  dorm  :  as,  domi  duellique,  PI.  Cap.  prol.  68,  domi  belllque,  L. 
2,  50,  n,  domi  militiaeque,  TD.  5,  55,  militiae  et  domi,  T.  Ad.  495,  at  home 
and  in  the  field.     Rarely  without  domi :  as,  belli,  RP.  2,  56,  militiae,  S.  /.  84, 2. 

1339.  (3.)  Other  appellatives  rarely  have  the  locative :  as,  proxumae  viciniae, 
PI.  B.  205,  MG.  273,  in  the  next  neighbourhood,     terrae,  L.  5,  51,  9,  in  the  earth. 
With  verbs  of  suspense,  doubt,  and  distress,  and  with  many  adjectives,  animi,  in  soul, 
is  not  infrequent ;  and  animi  being  mistaken  for  a  genitive,  mentis  is  also  used:   as, 
desipiebam  mentis,  PI.  E.  138, 1  was  beside  myself.    Oftener  anim5  (1344). 

1340  Many  original  locatives  have  become  set  as  adverbs :  as,  peregri,  abroad. 
Particularly  of  pronouns  :  as,  illi,  PI.  Am.  249,  off  there,  oftener  ilhc ;  isti  or  istic, 
hie;  sometimes  further  denned  by  an  added  expression;  as,  hie  viciniae,  T.  Ph.  95, 
here  in  the  neighbourhood,  hie  proxumae  viciniae,  MG.  273,  here  in  the  house 
next  door,  hie  in  Veneris  fano  meae  viciniae,  PI.  R.  613,  here,  in  the  shrine 
of  Venus,  in  my  neighbourhood,  hie  Romae,  Arch.  5,  here  in  Rome. 

1341.  The  locative  proper  sometimes  denotes  time  when:  as,  luci,  by  light, 
temper!,  betimes,  herl  or  here,  yesterday,  vesperl,  at  evening,  her!  vesperi, 
DO.  2,  13,  last  evening.  In  Plautus,  die  septimi,  Men.  1156,  Per.  260,  on  the 
seventh  day,  mane  sane  septimi,  Men.  1157,  bright  and  early  on  the  seventh,&\£ 
crastini,  Most.  881,  tomorrow.  Often  with  an  adjective  juxtaposed :  as,  postrl- 
die,  the  day  after,  postridie  mane,  Fam.  n,  6,  i,  early  next  day,  cotidie,  each 
day,  daily,  pridie,  the  day  before. 


(B.)  THE  ABLATIVE  USED  AS  LOCATIVE. 

PLACE  IN,  ON,  OR  AT  WHICH. 

1342.  (i.)  Plural  proper  names  of  towns  and  of  little 
islands  are  put  in  the  locative  ablative  to  denote  the 
place  in  or  at  which  action  occurs :  as, 

mortuus  Cumis,  L.  2,  21,  5,  he  died  at  Cumae.  Athenis  tenue  caelum, 
crassum  Thebls,  Fat.  7,  in  Athens  the  air  is  thin,  at  Thebes  it  is  thick,  locus 
ostenditur  Capreis,  Suet.  Tib.  62,  the  place  is  pointed  out  at  Capreae.  Rarely 
with  substantives  of  action,  (1301) :  as,  mansio  Formils,  Att.  9,  5,  i,  the  slay 
at  Formiae.  With  an  attribute  :  Athenis  tuls,  Att.  16,  6,  2,  in  your  darling 
Athens.  Curibus  Sablnis,  L.  I,  18,  i,  at  the  Sabine  Cures. 

229 


1 34 3"1 34-8-]     Sentences:   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1343.  (2.)   Singular  proper  names  of  towns  with  consonant 
stems  are  oftener  put  in  the  locative  ablative  than  in  the  locative 
proper  :  as, 

adulescentium  greges  Lacedaemone  vidimus,  TD.  5,  77,  we  have 
seen  the  companies  of  young  men  in  Lacedaemon.  Karthagine,  Alt.  16,  4,  2, 
at  Carthage.  Tlbure,  H.  E.  I,  8,  12,  at  Tibur.  Narbone,  Ph.  2,  76,  «/ 
Narbo.  See  1331.  So  also  Acherunte,  Lucr.  3,984,  in  Acheron.  Calydone 
et  Naupacto,  Caes.  C.  3,  35,  I,  at  Calydon  and  Naiipactus,  with  Naupacto 
attracted  by  Calydone.  With  an  attribute:  Carthagine  Nova,  L.  28,  17, 
II,  at  New  Carthage.  Acherunte  profundS,  Lucr.  3,  978,  in  vasty  Acheron. 

1344.  (3-)  A  few  general  appellatives  are  used  in  the  locative  ablative 
without  an   attribute,  especially  in   set   expressions,  to  denote   the   place 
where:  as, 

terra  marique,  IP.  48,  by  land  and  sea  ;  less  commonly  marl  atque 
terra,  S.  C.  53,  2,  by  sea  and  land,  dextra  Piraeus,  sinistra  Corinthus, 
Gael,  in  Fam.  4,  5,  4,  Piraeus  on  the  right,  Corinth  on  the  left.  Rarely,  rure, 
PI.  Cas.  no,  H.  E.  I,  7,  I,  in  the  country,  for  run  (1337).  So  animo,  animis, 
with  verbs  of  feeling:  as,  angor  animo,  Br.  7,  /  am  distressed  in  soul,  or 
/  am  heart-broken.  Metaphorically:  loco,  (a.)  in  the  right  place,  also  suo 
loco,  or  in  Ioc5.  (b.}  loco,  instead ;  numero,  in  the  category,  both  with  ?. 
genitive.  principior  initiS,  in  the  beginning. 

1345.  Certain  appellatives,  with  an  attribute,  often  denote  the  place  where  by  the 
locative  ablative;  so  especially  loco,  locis,  rure,  libro,  libris,  parte,  partibus  . 
as,  remoto,  salubri,  amoeno  loco,  Fam.  7,  20,  2,  in  a  sequestered^  healthy,  and 
picturesque  nook,     idoneo  loco,  3,  17,  5,  in  an  advantageous  spot,     iniquo  Ioc5, 
5,  51,  i,  on  unsuitable  ground,      campestribus  ac  demissis  locis,  7,  72,  3,  in 
level  and  sunken  places,     rure   meo,    H.   E.   i,   15,   17,  at  my  own  coiintry  box. 
rure  paterno,  H.  E.  i,  iS,  60,  J.  6,  55,  on  the  ancestral  farm,    alio  libro,  Off. 
2,  31,  in  another  book. 

1346.  Substantives  are  often  used  in  the  locative  ablative  with  totus  in  agree- 
ment, less  often  with  cunctus,  omnis,  or  medius,  to  denote  the  place  where:  as, 
tota  Gallia,  5,  55,  3,  all  over  Gaul,     tdtis  trepidatur  castris,  6,  37,  6,  there 
is  a  panic  all  over  the  camp,     omnibus   oppidis,   V.  2,  136,  in  all  the  towns. 
omnibus  oppidis  maritimis,  Caes.  C.  3,  5,  i,  in^all  the  seaports,    media  urbe, 
L.  i,  33,  8,  in  the  heart  of  Rome.     But  sometimes  in  is  used,  or  the  accusative  with 
per. 

1347.  (4.)  With  country  names  and  most  appellatives,  the  place 
where  is  generally  expressed  by  the  ablative  with  in.     But  even  with- 
out an  attribute,  the  ablative  alone  is  sometimes  used,  especially  in 
poetry  :  as, 

Italia,  V.  i,  263,  in  Italy,  litore,  V.  i,  184,  upon  the  beach,  corde,  V.  i, 
209,  in  heart,  pectore,  V.  i,  657,  in  breast,  thalamo,  H.  i,  15,  16,  in  bower, 
umero,  V.  i,  501,  on  shoulder,  Esquiliis,  DN.  3,  63,  on  the  Esquiline. 
Once  in  Plautus  Alide,  Cap.  330,  in  Elis,  but  eight  times  in  Alide. 

1348.  The  locative  ablative  is  sometimes   used  with  such  verbs  as  teneo  ard 
recipiS:  as,  (a.)  Ariovistus  exercitum  castris  continuit,  1,48,4,  Ariovistus 
kept  his  infantry  in  camp.     oppidS  sese  continebant,  2,  30,  2,  they  kept  inside 
the  town,      (b.)  oppidis  recipere,  2,   3,  3,  to  receive  inside  thzir  towns.      rex 
ecquis  est,  qui  senatorem  tecto  ac  domo  non  invitet  ?  V.  4,  25,  is  there  a 
monarch  in  the  wide  world  that  would  not  welcome  a  senator  to  house  and  home  ? 

230 


The  Noun :  A  blative.       [1349-1353. 


1349.  The  locative  ablative  is  used  with  fido  and  confide,  glprior,  laetor, 
nitor,  sto,  and  with  fretus:  as,  barbarl  cpnfisi  loci  natura  in  acie  per- 
manserunt,  8,  15,  I,  the  natives,  trusting  in  tkc  nature  of  their  position,  kept 
their  s  and  in  battle  array,  superioribus  victoriis  freti,  3,  21,  i,  relying  on 
their  former  victories.  For  other  constructions  with  these  words,  see  the  dictionary. 


TIME  AT  WHICH  OR  TIME  WITHIN  WHICH. 

1350.  (i.)  The  locative  ablative  is  used  to  denote 
the  point  of  time  at  which  action  occurs. 

So  particularly  of  substantives  denoting  periods  or  points  of  time,  thus  : 
hieme,  5,  i,  i,  in  the  winter.  Kalendis,  H.  Epod.  2,  70,  upon  the  first,  i.  e. 
of  the  month.  Generally  with  an  attribute :  as,  primo  vere,  6,  3,  4,  in  the 
first  month  of  spring.  Martiis  Kalendis,  H.  3,  8,  i,  upon  the  first  of  March. 
With  a  parallel  locative  (1341)  :  vesperi  e5dem  die,  Att.  8,  5,  \,  the  evening 
of  the  same  day. 

I35I-  Words  not  in  themselves  denoting  periods  or  points  of  time, 
are  in  the  same  way  put  in  the  ablative  :  as, 

patrum  nostrorum  memoria,  i,  12,  5,  in  the  memory  of  our  fathers. 
non  modo  illls  Punicis  bellis,  sed  etiam  hac  praedonum  multitudine, 
V.  4,  103,  not  only  in  the  Punic  wars  of  yore,  but  also  in  the  present  swarm  of 
pirates,  proxumis  comitiis,  7,  67,  7,  at  the  last  election,  spectaculls,  Att. 
2,  19,  3,  at  the  shows.  Especially  substantives  of  action  in  -tus  or  -sus 
(235):  as,  solis  occasu,  1,50,  3,  at  sunset,  adventu  in  Galliam  Caesaris, 
5,  54,  2,  at  Caesar's  arrival  in  Gaul,  eorum  adventu,  7,  65,  5,  after  these 
people  came,  discessii  ceterorum,  C.  i,  7,  when  the  rest  went  away. 

1352.  (2.)  The  locative  ablative  is  used  to  denote  the  space 
of  time  within  which  action  occurs  :  as, 

paucis  diebus  opus  efficitur,  6,  9,  4,  the  job  is  finished  up  in  a  few  days. 
tribus  horis  Aduatucam  venire  potestis,  6,  35,  8,  in  three  hours  you  can 
get  to  Aduatuca.  quae  hie  monstra  fiunt,  anno  vix  possum  eloqui, 
PI.  Most.  505,  what  ghost-transactions  take  place  here  I  scarce  could  tell  you  in 
a  year,  cum  ad  oppidum  Senonum  Vellaunodunum  venisset,  id  biduS 
c.rcumvallavit,  /,  II,  I,  arriving  at  Vellaunodunum,  a  town  of  the  Scnons, 
in  two  days  time  he  invested  it.  quicquid  est,  biduo  sciemus,  Att.  9,  14,  2, 
whatever  it  may  be,  we  shall  know  in  a  couple  of  days. 

1353.  The  ablative  of  the  time  at  or  within  which  action   occurs  is  sometimes 
accompanied  by  in  :  as,  in  bello,   6,  i,  3,  in  the  war.     in  tempore,  T.  Hau.  364, 
in  the  nick  of  time,     in  adulescentia,  PI.  B.  410,  in  my  young  days,     in  tall 
tempore,  Lucr.  i,  93,  L.  22,  35,  7,  in  such  a  stress,  at  such  an  hour,     in  hoc 
triduo,  PI.  Ps.  316,  -within  the  next  three  days.     Especially  of  repeated  action,  in 
the  sense  of  a  or  every,  with  numerals:  as,  ter  in  anno,  PI.  B.  1127,  RA.  132, 
three  times  a  year,     in  hora  saepe  ducentos  versus  dictabat,  H.  S.  i,  4,9, 
two  hrmdred  verses  in  an  hortr  he  ' "d  often  dictate  off.     But  occasionally  without  in  : 
as,  me  deciens  die  uno  extrudit  aedibus,  PI.  Aul.  70,  ten  times  a  day  he 
thrusts  me  from  the  house,     septiens  die,  L.  28,  6,  10,  seven  times  a  day. 

23I 


1 3  5 4- 1 3  5  9.]    Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1354.  An  ablative  of  the  time  within  which  action  occurs  is  sometimes  followed 
by  a  relative  pronoun  sentence,  with  the  relative  pronoun  likewise  in  the  ablative  :  as, 
quadridud,  qu5  haec  gesta  sunt,  res  ad  Chrysogonum  defertur,  RA. 
20,  within  the  four  days  space  in  which  this  occurred,  the  incident  is  reported  to 
Chrysogonus,i.  e.  four  days  after  this  occurred,     diebus  decem,  quibus  materia 
coepta  erat  conportari,  omni  opere  effects,  4,  18,  t,  the  job  being  all  done 
ten  days  after  the  carting  of  the  stuff  had  begun. 

1355.  The  ablative  is  exceptionally  used  to  denote  duration  of  time  :  as, 
tota  nocte  continenter  ierunt,  i,  26,  5,  they  went  on  and  on  all  night 

without  interruption.     Regularly,  however,  the  accusative   (1151);  but  the 
ablative  is  common  in  inscriptions. 


III.    THE   INSTRUMENTAL  ABLATIVE. 

(A.)   THE  ABLATIVE  OF  ATTENDANCE. 
THE  ABLATIVE  OF  ACCOMPANIMENT. 

1356.  A  few  indefinite  designations  of  military  forces  denote  accompani- 
ment by  the  ablative  alone,  or  oftener  with  cum:  as, 

(a.)  ad  castra  Caesaris  omnibus  c5piis  contenderunt,  2,  7,  3,  they 
marched  upon  Caesar's  camp  with  all  their  forces,  omnibus  cdpiis  ad  Iler- 
dam  proficiscitur,  Caes.  C.  i,  41,  2,  he  marches  before  Ilerda,  horse,  foot,  and 
dragoons,  (b.}  is  civitati  persuasit,  ut  cum  omnibus  copiis  exirent,  i,  2,  i, 

welly  this  man  induced  the  community  to  emigrate  in  a  body,  bag  and  baggage. 

1357.  The  participles  iunctus  and  coniunctus  take  the  ablative  of  the  thing 
joined  with:  as,  defensione  iuncta  laudatio,  Br.  162,  a  eulogy  combined -with  a 
defence.     But  sometimes  the  ablative  with  cum  is  used,  or  the  dative  (1186). 

THE  ABLATIVE  OF  MANNER. 

1358.  (i.)  Certain  substantives  without  an  attribute  are  put  in  the 
ablative  alone  to  denote  manner ;  but  usually  substantives  without  an 
attribute  have  cum. 

(a.)  Such  adverbial  ablatives  are  iure  and  iniuria,  ratione  et  vi§,  si- 
lentio,  vitio,  ordine,  sponte,  consuetudine,  &c. :  as,  Aratus  iure  laudatur, 
Off.  2,  81,  Aratus  is  justly  admired,  iniuria  suspectum,  C.  i,  17,  wrongfully 
suspected,  in  omnibus,  quae  ratione  docentur  et  via,  O.  116,  in  everything 
that  is  taught  with  philosophic  method,  silentio  egressus,  7,  58,  2,  going 
out  in  silence,  censores  viti5  creati,  L.  6,  27,  5,  censors  irregularly  ap- 
pointed, ordine  cuncta  exposuit,  L.  3,  50,  4,  he  told  the  whole  story  from 
beginning  to  end,  i.  e.  with  all  the  particulars,  (b.)  With  cum :  face  rem 
hanc  cum  cura  geras,  PI.  Per.  198,  see  that  this  job  with  care  thou  dost. 
cum  virtute  vivere,  Fin.  3,  29,  to  live  virtuously. 

1359.  (2.)  The  ablative  of  a  substantive  with  an  attribute  is 
often  used  to  denote  manner,  sometimes  with  cum  :  as, 

232 


The  Noun  :  A  blative.      [13 60- 1365. 


*  (a.)  I  pede  fausto,  H.  E.  2,  2,  37,  go  with  a  blessing  on  thy  foot,  dat 
sonitu  magno  stragem,  Lucr.  i,  288,  /'/  deals  destruction  with  a  mighty  roar. 
ferarum  ritu  sternuntur,  L.  5,  44, 6,  they  throw  themselves  down  beast-fashion. 
apis  Matinae  m5re  modoque  operosa  carmina  fingo,  H.  4,  2,  27,  in  way 
and  wise  of  Matin  bee  laborious  lays  I  mould.  '  indoctus '  dicimus  brevi 
prima  littera,  'insanus '  producta,  'inhumanus'  brevi,  'infelix'  longa, 
O.  159,  we  pronounce  indoctus  with  the  first  letter  short,  insanus  with  it  long, 
inhumanus  with  it  short,  infelix  with  it  long  ( 167 ).  terno  consurgunt  ordine 
remi,  V.  5,  120,  with  triple  bank  each  time  in  concert  rise  the  oars,  (b.}  Allo- 
broges  magna  cum  cura  suos  fines  tuentur,  7,  65,  3,  the  Allobrogans 
guard  their  own  territory  with  great  care. 

1360.  With  a  substantive  meaning  way^  or  manner,  as  modo,  ritu,  &c.,  feeling 
or  intention,  as  hac  mente,  aequS  animo,  condition,  as  ea  condicione,  or  a 
part  of  the  body,  as  in  nudo  capite,  bareheaded,  cum  is  not  used. 

1361.  Other  expressions  denoting  manner,  particularly  prepositional  expressions 
with  per,  may  be  found  in  the  dictionary :  as,  per  dolum,  4,  13,  i,  by  deceit,  per 
iocum,  Agr.  2,  96,  in  fun,  per  litteras,  Att.  5,  21,  13,  by  letter,  in  -writing,  per 
vim,  RA.  32,  violently,  per  praestigias,  V.  4,  53,  by  some  hocus  focus  or  other •, 
&c.,  &c.     Sometimes  the  ablative  with  ex. 

THE  ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 

1362.  (i.)  The  ablative  of  a  substantive,  with  a 
predicate  participle  in  agreement,  is  used  to  denote 
an  attendant  circumstance  of  an  action. 

In  this  construction,  which  is  called  the  Ablative  Absolute,  (a.)  the  present 
participle  is  sometimes  used :  as,  nullo  hoste  prohibente  incolumem  le- 
gionem  in  Nantuatis  perduxit,  3,  6,  5,  wfth  no  enemy  hindering,  he  con- 
ducted the  legion  in  safety  to  the  Nantuates.  Much  oftener,  however,  (b.)  the 
perfect  participle:  as,  hoc  response  dato  discessit,  i,  14,  7,  this  answer 
given  he  went  away,  (c.)  The  future  participle  is  also  used  in  the  ablative 
absolute  from  Livy  on:  as,  hospite  venture,  cessabit  nemo  tuorum,  J. 
14,  59,  a  visitor  to  come,  your  slaves  will  bustle  each  and  all. 

1363.  A  predicate  ablative  with  a  participle  meaning  made,  kept,  chosen,  or  the 
like,  occurs  in  Cicero,  Caesar,  Nepos,  and  Livy,  but  is  rare  (1167)  :  as,  Dolabella 
hoste  decreto,  Ph.  n,  16,  Dolabella  having  been  voted  an  enemy  of  the  state. 

1364.  The  perfect  participles  of  deponents  used  actively  in  the  ablative  absolute, 
are  chiefly  those  of  intransitive  use,  such  as  natus,  mortuus,  ortus,  prpfectus. 
From  Sallust  on,  other  perfect  deponent  participles  also  are  used  actively  with  an  ac- 
cusative.    Cicero  and   Caesar   use  a  few  deponent  participles,   such   as   emeritus, 
pactus,  partitus,  depopulatus,  as  passives,  and  later  authors  use  many  other 
participles  so. 

1365.  (2.)  The  ablative  of  a  substantive,  with  a  predicate 
noun  in  agreement,  is  often  used  to  denote  an  attendant  cir- 
cumstance of  an  action  :  as, 

233 


1 366- 1372.]    Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


brevitatem  secutus  sum  te  magistro,  Fam.  n,  25,  i,  I  aimed  at  brevity 
with  you  as  a  teacher,  natus  dis  inimicis,  PI.  Most.  563,  born  under  -wrath  oj 
gods.  M.  Messala  et  M.  Pisone  consulibus,  I,  2,  i,  in  the  consulship  of 
Messala  and  Piso.  isto  praetore  venit  Syracusas,  V.  4,  6r,  in  the  defen- 
dant's praetorship  he  came  to  Syracuse. 

1366.  The  nominative  quisque,  plerlque,  or  ipse,  sometimes  accompanies 
the  ablative  absolute:  as,  causa  ipse  pro  se  dicta,  damnatur,  L.  4,  44,  10,  he 
is  condemned  after  pleading  his  case  in  person. 

1367.  The  ablative  absolute  may  denote  in  a  loose  way  various  re- 
lations which  might  be  more  distinctly  expressed  by  subordinate  sen- 
tences. 

So  particularly :  (a.)  Time:  as,  tertia  inita  vigilia  exercitum  educit, 
Caes.  C.  3,  54,  2,  at  the  beginning  of  the  third  watch  he  leads  the  army  out. 
(/>.)  Cause  or  means:  as,  C.  Flaminium  Caelius  religione  neglecta  ceci- 
disse  apud  Trasumenum  scribit,  DN.  2,  8,  Caelius  writes  that  Flaminius 
fell  at  Trasumene  in  consequence  of  his  neglect  of  religious  observances, 
(r.)  Concession:  as,  id  paucis  defendentibus  expugnare  non  potuit,  2, 
i  2,  2,  though  the  defenders  were  few,  he  could  not  take  it  by  storm,  (d.)  Hy- 
pothesis :  as,  quae  potest  esse  vitae  iucunditas  sublatis  amlcitiis  ?  PI. 
80,  what  pleasure  can  there  be  in  life,  if  you  take  friendships  away  ?  (e.)  De- 
scription :  as,  domum  venit  capite  obvoluto,  Ph.  2,  77,  he  came  home  with 
his  head  all  muffled  up. 

1368.  It  maybe  seen  from  the  examples  above  that  a  change  of  construction  is 
often  desirable  in  translating  the  ablative  absolute.     Particularly  so  in  many  set  idio- 
matic expressions:  as,  nulla  interposita  mora,  Caes.  C.  3,  75,  i,  -without  a  mo- 
ment's delay,  instantly,     equo  admisso,  i,  22,  2,  equ5  citato,  Caes.  C.  3,  96,  3, 
full  gallop,    clamore  sublato,  7, 12,  5,  with  a  round  of  cheers,    bene  re  gesta 
salvos  redeo,  PI.  Tri.  1182,  crowned  with  success  I  come  back  safe  and  sound. 

1369.  The  substantive  of  the  ablative  absolute  usually  denotes  a  different 
person  or  thing  from  any  in  the  main  sentence.     But  exceptions  to  this  usage 
sometimes  occur  :  as, 

quibus  auditis,  eos  domum  remittit,  4,  21,  6,  after  listening  to  these  men, 
he  sends  them  home  again,  si  ego  me  sciente  paterer,  PI.  MG.  559,  if  1 
should  wittingly  myself  allow,  more  emphatic  than  sciens.  se  iudice  nemo 
nocens  absolvitur,  J.  13,  2,  himself  the  judge,  no  criminal  gets  free. 

1370.  Two  ablatives  absolute  often  occur  together,  of  which  the  first  indicates  the 
time,  circumstances,  or  cause  of  the  second:  as,  exaudltS  clamore  perturbatis 
ordinibus,  2,  n,  5,  the  ranks  being  demoralized  from  hearing  the  shouts,     con- 
sumptis  omnibus  tells  gladiis  destrictis,  Caes.  C.  1,46,  i,  drawing  their 
swords  after  expending  all  their  missiles. 

1371.  The  substantive  is  sometimes  omitted  in  the  ablative  absolute,  particularly 
when  it  is  a  general  word  for  a  person  or  a  thing  which  is  explained  by  a  relative :  as, 
praemissis,  qui  repurgarent  iter,  L.  44,  4,  n,  sending  sabers  and  miners 
ahead  to  clear  a  -way.    relatis  ordine,  quae  vidisserit,  L.  42,  25,  2,  telling 
circumstantially  all  they  had  seen. 

1372.  The  ablative  neuter  of  some  perfect  participles  is  used  impersonally  (10^4). 
This  use  is  rare  in  old  Latin,  in  classical  Latin  commonest  in  Cicero,  and  afterwards 
in  Livy:  as,  auspicate,  DN.  2,  \\,-with  auspices  taken,     sortito,  K  2,  126,  lots 
being  drawn,  or  by  lot.     Such  ablatives  readily  become  adverbs  (704).     Substantives 
are  also   sometimes  used  alone:  as,   austr5,  Div.  2,  58,  when  the  wind  is  south. 
tranquillitate,  Plin.  Ep.  8,  20,  6,  when  it  is  calm,     sereno,  L.  37,  3,  3,  tlte  da) 
being  clear. 

234 


The  Noun :  A blative.       [i373-i377- 


1373.  The  ablative  neuter  of  some  perfect  participles  is  occasionally  used  in  agree- 
ment with  a  sentence  or  an  infinitive:  as,  cognitS  vivere  Ptolomaeum,  L.  33, 
41,5,  it  being  known  that  Ptolomy  -was  alive.     This  construction  is  not  used  in  old 
Latin,  and  is  rare  in  classical  Latin,  but  common  in  Livy  and  Tacitus.     So  adjectives 
also :  as,  incerto  quid  vitarent,  L.  28, 36,  12,  it  not  being  obvious  -what  they  -were 
to  steer  clear  of. 

1374.  The  ablative  absolute  is  sometimes  attended,  especially  in  Livy  and  Tacitus, 
by  an   explanatory  word,  such  as   etsi,  tamen,  nisi,  quasi,  quamquam,  or 
quamvis  :  as,  etsi  aliquo  accepts  detriments,  tamen  summa  exercitus 
salva,  Caes.  C.  i,  67,  5,  though  -with  some  loss,  yet  with  the  safety  of  the  army  as  a 
-whole. 

THE  ABLATIVE  OF  QUALITY. 

I375-  The  ablative  with  an  adjective  in  agreement  or  with  a 
limiting  genitive  is  used  to  denote  quality,  either  predicatively 
or  attributively :  as, 

(a.)  Predicatively:  capillo  sunt  promisso,  5,  14,  3,  they  have  longhair, 
or  let  their  hair  grow  long,  singular!  fuit  industria,  N.  24,  3,  I,  he  had  un- 
paralleled activity .  animo  bonS  's,  PI.  Aul.  732,  be  of  good  cheer,  ad  flumen 
Genusum,  quod  ripis  erat  impeditls,  Caes.  C  3,  75,  4,  to  the  river  Genusus, 
•which  had  impracticable  banks,  (b.}  Attributively:  difficili  transitu  flumen 
riplsque  praeruptis,  6,  7,  5,  a  river  hard  to  cross  and  with  steep  banks,  inter- 
fectus  est  C.  Gracchus,  clarissimo  patre,  avo,  maiSribus,  C.  i,  4,  Grac- 
chus was  done  to  death,  a  man  with  an  illustrious  father,  grandfather,  and 
ancestors  in  general  (1044).  bSs  cervi  figura,  6,  26,  I,  an  ox  with  the  shape 
of  a  stag.  Compare  the  genitive  of  quality  (1239). 

THE  ABLATIVE  OF  THE  ROUTE  TAKEN. 

1376.  The  instrumental  ablative  is  used  with  verbs  of  motion  to 
denote  the  route  taken  :  as. 

Aurelia  via  profectus  est,  C  2,  6,  he  has  gone  off  by  the  Aurelia  Road. 
omnibus  viis  semitlsque  essedariSs  ex  silvis  emittebat,  5,  19,  2,  he  kept 
sending  his  chariot  men  out  by  all  possible  highways  and  byways,  his  pontibus 
pabulatum  mittebat,  Caes.  C.  i,  40,  i,  by  these  bridges  he  sent  foraging. 
frumentum  Tiber!  venit,  L.  2,  34,  5,  some  grain  came  by  the  Tiber,  lupus 
Esquilma  porta  ingressus  per  portam  Capenam  prope  intactus  evase- 
rat,  L.  33,  26,  9,  a  wolf  that  came  in  town  by  the  Esquiline  gate  had  got  out 
through  the  Capene  gate,  almost  unscathed.  This  construction  gives  rise  to 
some  adverbs  :  see  707.  The  ablative  of  the  route  is  sometimes  used  with  a 
substantive  of  action  ( 1301 ):  as,  navigatio  InferS,  Att.  9,  5,  i,  the  cruise  by  the 
lower  sea.  eodem  flumine  invectiS,  Fin.  5,  70,  entrance  by  the  same  river. 

(B.)     THE   INSTRUMENTAL   PROPER. 

THE   ABLATIVE   OF   INSTRUMENT   OR   MEANS. 

1377.  The  ablative  is  used  to  denote  the  instru- 
ment or  means  *   as, 

235 


1378-1383-]     Sentences:   The  Simple  Sentence. 


pugnabant  armis,  H.  S.  I,  3,  103,  they  fought  with  arms,  dare  oculis 
video,  sum  pernix  pedibus,  manibus  mobilis,  PI.  MG.  630,  I  can  see  dis- 
tinctly with  my  eyes,  I'm  nimble  with  my  legs,  and  active  with  my  arms. 
iuvabo  aut  re  te  aut  opera  aut  consilio  bono,  PL  Ps.  19,  I'll  help  thee 
either  with  my  purse  or  hand  or  good  advice,  lacte  et  carne  vivunt,  pelli- 
busque  sunt  vestiti,  5,  14,  2,  they  live  on  milk  and  meat,  and  they  are  clad  in 
skins,  contentus  paucis  lectoribus,  H.  S.  I,  10,  74,  content  with  readers 
few.  centenaque  arbore  fluctum  verberat,  V.  10,  207,  and  with  an  hundred 
beams  at  every  stroke  the  wave  he  smites.  Rarely  with  substantives  denoting 
action  (1301)  :  as,  gestores  linguis,  auditores  auribus,  PI.  Ps.  429,  repor- 
ters with  their  tongues  and  listeners  with  their  ears,  teneris  labellis  molles 
morsiunculae,  PI.  Ps.  67  a,  caressing  bites  with  velvet  lips. 

1378.  When  the  instrument  is  a  person,  the  accusative  with  per  is  used:  as, 
haec  quoque  per  exploratores  ad  hostes  deferuntur,  6,  7,  9,  this  too  is  re- 
ported to  the  enemy  through  the  medium   of  scouts.     Or  a  circumlocution,  such  as 
virtiite,  beneficio,  benignitate,  or    especially  opera,  with  a  genitive  or  posses- 
sive; as,  deum  virtute  multa  bona    bene  parta  habemus,  PI.   Tri.  346, 
thanks  to  the  gods,  -we  ''•ve  many  a  pretty  penny  prettily  put  by.     mea  opera  Ta- 
rentum  recepisti,  CM.  u,  it  -was  through  me  you  got  Tarentum  back.     Rarely 
the  ablative  of  a  person,  the  person  being  then  regarded  as  a  thing:  as,  iacent  suis 
testibus,  Mil.  47,  they  are  cast  by  their  own  witnesses. 

1379.  The  instrumental  ablative  is  used  with  the  five  deponents  fruor, 
fungor,  potior,  utor,  vescor,  and  several  of  their  compounds,  and  with 
usus  est  and  opus  est :  as, 

pace  numquam  fruemur,  Ph.  7,  19,  we  never  shall  enjoy  ourselves  with 
peace,  \.  e.  we  never  shall  enjoy  peace,  fungar  vice  cotis,  H.  AP.  304,  /'// 
play  the  whetstone's  part,  castris  nostri  potiti  sunt,  I,  26,  4,  our  people  made 
themselves  masters  of  the  camp,  vestra  opera  utar,  L.  3,  46,  8,  /  will  avail 
myself  of  your  services,  carne  vescor,  TD.  5,  90,  I  live  on  meat,  opust 
chlamyde,  PI.  Ps.  734,  there  is  a  job  with  a  cloak,  i.  e.  we  need  a  cloak. 

1380.  Instead  of  the  instrumental  ablative,  some  of  the  above  verbs  take  the  ac- 
cusative occasionally  in  old  and  post-Augustan  Latin :  thus,  in  Plautus,  Terence,  Cato, 
always  abutor,  also  fungor,  except  once  in  Terence ;  fruor  in  Cato  and  Terence, 
and  perfungor  in  Lucretius,  once  each;  potior  twice  in  Plautus  and  three  times  in 
Terence,  often  also  the  genitive  (1292).     The  gerundive  of  these  verbs  is  commonly 
used  personally  in  the  passive,  as  if  the  verbs  were  regularly  used  transitively  (2244). 

1381.  utor  often  has  a  second  predicative  ablative :  as,  administris  druidibus 
utuntur,  6,  16,  2,  they  use  the  druids  as  assistants,     facill  me  utetur  patre,  T. 
Ha  u.  217,  an  easy-going  father  he  will  find  in  me. 

1382.  usus  est  and  opus  est  sometimes  take  a  neuter  participle,  especially  in 
old  Latin:  as,  Vis5  opust  cautost   opus,  PI.  Cap.  225,  there 's  need  of  sight, 
there's  need  of  care.     Sometimes  the  ablative  with  a  predicate  participle  :  as,  celeri- 
ter  mi  eo  homine  conventost  opus,  PI.  Cur.  302,  /  needs  must  see  that  man 
at  once. 

1383.  With  opus  est,  the  thing  wanted  is  often  made  the  subject  nominative 
or  subject  accusative,  with  opus  in  the  predicate:  as,  dux  nobis  et  auctor  opus 
est,  Fam.  2,  6,  4,  -we  need  a  leader  and  adviser.     Usually  so  when  the  thing  needed 
is  a  neuter  adjective  or  neuter  pronoun:  as,  multa  sib!  opus  esse,  V.  i,  126,  that 
he  needed  much.     A  genitive  dependent  on  opus  is  found  once  or  twice  in  late  Latin 
(1227). 

236 


The  Noun:  Ablative.       [1384-1388. 


1384.  usus  est  is  employed  chiefly  in  comedy,  but  also  once  or  twice  in  Cicero, 
Lucretius,  Vergil,  and  Livy.     Once  with  the  accusative :  usust  hominem  astu- 
tum,  PI.  Ps.  385,  there's  need  of  a  sharp  man. 

THE  ABLATIVE  OF  SPECIFICATION. 

1385.  The  instrumental  ablative  is  used  to  denote  that  in 
respect  of  which  an  assertion  or  a  term  is  to  be  taken  :  as, 

temporibus  errasti,  Ph.  2,  23,  you  have  slipped  up  in  your  chronology. 
excellebat  actione,  Br.  215,  his ^ forte  lay  in  delivery.  Helvetii  reliquos 
Gallos  virtute  praecedunt,  I,  i,  4,  the  Helvetians  outdo  the  rest  of  the  Kelts 
in  bravery,  hi  omnes  lingua,  mstitutis,  legibus  inter  se  differunt,  I,  I,  2, 
these  people  all  differ  from  each  other  in  language,  usages,  and  laws.  sunt 
quidam  homines  non  re  sed  nomins,  Off.  i,  105,  some  people  are  human 
beings  not  in  reality  but  in  name,  una  Sueba  natione,  altera  NSrica,  i,  53, 
4,  one  woman  a  Suebe  by  birth,  the  other  Noric.  vicistis  cochleam  tarditu- 
dine,  PI.  Poen.  532,  you  've  beaten  snail  in  slowness,  demens  iudicio  volgi, 
H.  S.  i,  6,97,  mad  in  the  jiidgement  of  the  world,  sapiunt  mea  sententia,  T. 
Ph.  335,  in  my. opinion  they  are  wise,  mea  quidem  sententia,  CM.  56,  in 
my  humble  opinion,  quis  iiire  peritior  commemorari  potest  ?  Clu.  107, 
who  can  be  named  that  is  better  versed  in  the  law  ? 

THE  ABLATIVE  OF  FULNESS. 

1386.  The  instrumental  ablative  is  used  with  verbs  of  abound- 
ing, rilling,  and  furnishing:  as, 

villa  abundat  porc5,  haedo,  agn5,  CM.  56,  the  country  place  is  running 
over  with  swine,  kid,  and  lamb,  totum  montem  hominibus  compleri  ius- 
sit,  i,  24,  3,  he  gave  orders  for  the  whole  mountain  to  be  covered  over  with  men. 
Magonem  poena  adfecerunt,  N.  23,  8,  2,  they  visited  Mago  with  punish- 
ment, legiones  nimis  pulcris  armis  praeditas,  PL  Am.  218,  brigades  in 
goodliest  arms  arrayed,  consular!  imperio  praeditus,  Pis.  55,  vested  with  the 
authority  of  consul.  For  the  genitive  with  compleo  and  impleo,  see  1293. 

1387.  The  ablative  is  sometimes  used  with  adjectives  of  fulness,  instead  of  the 
regular  genitive  (1263).     Thus,  in  later  Latin,  rarely  with  plenus  :  as,  maxima 
quaeque  domus  servis  est  plena  superbis,  T-  5,  66,  a  grand  establishment 
>.s  always  full  of  stuck-up  slaves,    et  ille  quidem  plenus  annis  abut,  plenus 
hondribus,  Plin.  Ep.  2,  i,  7,  -well,  as  for  him,  he  has  passed  away,  full  of  years 
and  full  of  honours.     So  in  Cicero  and  Caesar,  once  each.     Also  with  dives  in  poe- 
try, and,  from  Livy  on,  in  prose.     With  refertus,  the  ablative  of  things  is  common, 
while  persons  are  usually  in  the  genitive  (1263).     With  onustus,  the  ablative  is  gen- 
erally used,  rarely  the  genitive. 

THE  ABLATIVE  OF  MEASURE,  EXCHANGE,  AND  PRICE. 

1388.  The  instrumental  ablative  is  used  with  verbs  of  meas- 
uring and  of  exchanging,  and  in  expressions  of  value  and  price : 
as, 

237 


1389-1393-]    Sentences:   T lie  Simple  Sentence. 


(a.)  quod  magnos  homines  virtute  metimur,  N.  18,  i,  i,  because  we 
gauge  great  men  by  their  merit.  (l>.)  nem5  nisi  victor  pace  bellum  muta- 
vit,  S.  C.  58,  15,  nobody 'except  a  conqueror  has  ever  exchanged 'war for  peace, 
(c.)  haec  signa  sestertiumsex  millibus  quingentis  esse  vendita,  V.  4,  12, 
t/iat  these  statues  were  sold  for  sixty-five  hundred  sesterces,  aestimavit  dena- 
riis  in,  V.  3,  214,  he  valued  it  at  three  denars.  triginta  millibus  dixistis  eum 
habitare,  Gael.  17,  yon  have  said  he  pays  thirty  thousand  rent,  -quod  non 
opus  est,  asse  carum  est,  Cato  in  Sen.  Ep.  94,  28,  what  you  don't  need,  a? 
a  penny  is  dear,  hem,  istuc  verbum,  mea  voluptas,  vilest  viginti  minis, 
I'l.  Most.  297,  bless  me,  that  compliment,  my  charmer,  were  at  twenty  mi/; as 


1389.  With  mut5  and  commute,  the  ablative  usually  denotes  the  thing  re- 
ceived.    But  sometimes  in  Plautus,  and  especially  in  Horace,  Livy,  ^md  late  prose,  it 
denotes  the  thing  parted  with  :  as,  cur  valle  permutem  Sabina  divitias  ope- 
rosiores  ?  H.  3,  i,  47,  -why  change  my  Sabine  dale  for  -wealth  that  brings  more 
care  ?    Similarly  with  cum  in  the  prose  of  Cicero's  age  :  as,  mortem  cum  vita 
commutare,  Sulp.  in  Fdm.  4,  5,  3,  to  exchange  life  for  death. 

1390.  The  ablative  of  price  or  value  is  thus  used  chiefly  with  verbs  or 
verbal  expressions  of  bargaining,  buying  or  selling,  hiring  or  letting,  costing, 
being  cheap  or  dear.     Also  with  aestimo,  of  a  definite  price,  and  sometimes 
magno,  permagno  (1273). 

1391.  The  ablatives  thus  used,  are  (a.)  those  of  general  substantives  of 
value   and  price,  such   as  pretium,   (£.)  numerical  designations  of  money, 
or  (c.)  neuter  adjectives  of  quantity,  magno,  permagno,  quam  plurimS, 
parvo,  minim5,  nihilo,  nonnihilo  :  as,  magno  decumas  vendidi,  V.  3,  40, 
I  sold  the  tithes  at  a  high  figure.     For  tanti  and  quanti,  pluris  and  minoris, 
see  1274. 

1392.  The  ablative  is  also  used  with  dignus  and  indignus :  as, 

digm  maiorum  loco,  A«r.  2,  I,  well  worthy  of  the  high  standing  of  their 
ancestors,  nulla  vox  est  audita  populi  Roman!  maiestate  indigna,  7,  17, 
3,  not  a  word  was  heard  out  of  keeping  with  the  grandeur  of  Rome.  See  also 
dignor  in  the  dictionary.  Similarly  in  Plautus  with  condigne,  decorus, 
decet,  aeque,  aequos.  For  the  genitive  with  dignus,  see  1269;  for  the 
accusative  with  dignus  and  a  form  of  sum,  U44- 

THE  ABLATIVE  OF  THE  AMOUNT  OF  DIFFERENCE. 

1393.  The  instrumental  ablative  is  used  to   denote 
the  amount  of  difference. 

This  ablative  is  used  with  any  words  whatever  of  comparative  or  of  super- 
lative meaning:  as.uno  die  longiorem  mensem  faciunt  aut  biduo,  V. .2, 
129  thev  make  the  month  longer  by  a  day,  or  even  by  two  days,  ubi  adb] 
plus  paulo,  T.  Hau.  220,  when  he  has  drunk  a  drop  too  much,  nummo 
divitior,  PI.  Ps.  1323,  a  penny  richer,  biduo  post,  i,  47,  I,  two  days  after. 
multis  ante  diebus.  7,  9,  4,  many  days  before,  paucis  ante  diebus,  C.  3,  3, 
a  few  days  ago.,  nimio  praestat,  PI.  B.  396.  ''«  ever  so  much  better  multo 
malim,  Br.  184,  /  would  much  rather,  multo  maxima  pars,  C.  4,  17, 
the  largest  part  by  far. 

238 


The  Noun :  A blalive.         [  1 394- 1 400. 


1394.  In  expressions  of  time,  the  accusative  is  sometimes  used  with  post,  less 
frequently  with  ante,  as  prepositions,  instead  of  the  ablative  of  difference  :  as,  post 
paucos  dies,  L.  21,  51,  2,  post  dies  pauc5s,  L.  37,  13,  6,  paucos  post  dies, 
L.  33,  39,  2,  after  a  few  days,  paucos  ante  dies,  L.  39,  28,  4,  dies  ante 
paucos,  L.  31,  24,  5,  a  few  days  before.  With  this  prepositional  construction, 
ordinals  are  common  :  as,  post  diem  tertium,  4,  9,  i,  after  the  third  day,  accord- 
ing to  the  Roman  way  of  reckoning,  i.  e.  the  next  day  but  one. 

I395-  (J-)  When  the  time  before  or  after  which  anything  occurs  is  de- 
noted by  a  substantive,  the  substantive  is  put  in  the  accusative  with  ante  or 
post :  as, 

paulo  ante  tertiam  vigiliam,  7,  24,  2,  a  little  before  the  third  watch. 
biduo  ante  victoriam,  Fam.  10,  14,  i,  the  day  but  one  before  the  -victory. 
paucis  diebus  post  mortem  African!,  L.  3,  a  few  days  after  the  death  of 
Africanus. 

1396.  Sometimes  in  late  writers,  as  Tacitus,  Pliny  the  younger,  and  Suetonius,  a 
genitive  is  loosely  used:  as,  sextum  post  cladis  annum,  Ta.  i,  62,  i.e.  sexto 
post  cladem   ann5,  six  years  after  the  humiliating  defeat,     post  decimum 
mortis  annum,  Plin.  Ep.  6,  10,  3,  ten  years  after  his  death.     Similarly  intra 
sextum  adoptionis  diem,  Suet.  Galb.  17,  not  longer  than  six  days  after  the 
adoption-day. 

1397.  (2.)  When  the  time  before  or  after  which  anything  occurs  is  de- 
noted by  a  sentence,  the  sentence  may  be  introduced  : 

(a.)  Byquam:  as,  post  diem  tertium  gesta  res  est  quam  dixerat, 
Mil.  44,  it  took  place  two  days  after  he  said  it.  With  quam,  post  is  sometimes 
omitted.  Or  (b.)  less  frequently  by  cum:  as,  quern  triduo,  cum  has  da- 
bam  litteras,  exspectabam,  Plane,  in  Fam.  10,  23,  3,  lam  looking  for  him 
three,  days  after  this  writing  (1601).  For  a  relative  pronoun  sentence,  see 
1354- 

1398.  Verbs  of  surpassing  sometimes  have  an  accusative  of  extent  (1151):  as, 
miramur  hunc  hominem  tantum  excellere  ceterls  ?  IP.  39,  are  -we  sur- 
prised that  this  man  so  far  outshines  everybody   else  ?      With    comparatives,   the 
accusative  is  rare  :  as,  aliquantum  iniquior,  T.  Han.  201,  somewhat  too  hard. 
Similarly  permultum  ante,  Fam.  3,  n,  i,  long  long  before. 

1399.  In  numerical  designations  of  distance,  the  wo_rds  intervallum  and  spa- 
tium  are  regularly  put  in  the  ablative :  as,  rex  vi  milium  passuum   intervallo 
a  Saburra1   consederat,  Caes.  C.  2,  38,  3,  the  king  had  pitched  six  miles  away 
from  Saburra.     So  sometimes  mille :  as,  milibus  passuum  vi  a  Caesaris 

castris  sub   monte  consedit,  i,  48,  i.     See  1152. 


TWO   OR  MORE   ABLATIVES    COMBINED. 

1400.  Two  or  more  ablatives  denoting  different  relations  are 
often  combined  in  the  same  sentence :  as, 

Menippus,  meo  iudicio  (1385)  tota  Asia  (1346)  illis  temporibus  (1350) 
disertissimus,  Br.  315,  Menippns,  in  my  opinion  the  most  gifted  speaker  of 
that  day  in  all  Asia,  hac  habita  oratiSne  (1362)  militibus  studi5  (1316) 
pugnae  ardentibus  (1370)  tuba  (1377)  signum  dedit,  Caes.  C.  3,  90,  4, 
seeing  that  his  soldiers  were  hot  for  battle  after  this  speech,  he  gave  the  signal 
by  trumpet. 

239  . 


1 40 1  - 1 4 1  o.]     Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


USE  OF  CASES   WITH   PREPOSITIONS. 

1401.  Two  cases,  the  accusative  and  the  ablative, 
are  used  with  prepositions. 

1402.  Prepositions  were  originally  adverbs  which  served  to 
define  more  exactly  the  meaning  of  a  verb. 

Thus,  endo,  in,  on,  the  older  form  of  in,  is  an  adverb,  in  an  injunction 
occurring  in  a  law  of  the  Twelve  Tables,  451  B.C.,  manum  endo  iacito, 
let  him  lay  hand  on.  Similarly,  trans,  over,  in  transque  dato,  and  he  must 
hand  over,  i.  e.  traditoque. 

1403.  In  the  course  of  time  such  adverbs  became  verbal  prefixes ;  the  verbs  com- 
pounded with  them  may  take  the  case,  accusative  or  ablative,  required  by  the  meaning 
of  the  compound.     Thus,  amicSs  adeo,  I  go  to  my  friends  (1137) ;  urbe  exe5, 

1  go  out  of  town  (1302). 

1404.  For  distinctness  or  emphasis,  the  prefix  of  the  verb  may  be  repeated  before 
the  case :  as,  ad  amicds  adeo ;  ex  urbe  exe5.     And  when  it  is  thus  separately 
expressed  before  the  case,  it  may  be  dropped  from  the  verb :  as,  ad  amicds  eo ;  ex 
urbe  e5. 

1405.  The  preposition  thus  detached  from  the  verb  becomes  an 
attendant  on  a  substantive,  and  serves  to  show  the  relation  of  the 
substantive  in  a  sentence  more  distinctly  than  the  case  alone  could. 

1406.  A  great  many  adverbs  which  are  never  used  in  composition  with 
a  verb  likewise  become  prepositions :  as,  apud,  circiter,  infra,  iuxta,  pone, 
propter,  &c.,  &c.     The  inflected  forms  of  substantives,  pridie,  postridie 
(1413),  tenus  (1420),  and  fini  (1419),  are  also  sometimes  used  as  preposi- 
tions.    And  vicem  (1145),  causa,  gratia,  nomine,  ergo  (1257),  resemble 
prepositions  closely  in  meaning. 

1407.  A  trace  of  the  original  adverbial  use  of  prepositions  is  sometimes  retained, 
chiefly  in  poetry,  when  the  prefix  is  separated  from  its  word  by  what  is  called  Tmesis: 
as,  ire  inque  gredi,  i.  e.  ingredique,  Lucr.  4,  887,  to  -walk  and  to  step  off.    per 
mini  mirum  visum  est,  DO.  i,  214,  passing  stra nge  it  seemed  to  me. 

1408.  Even  such  words  as  are  used  almost  exclusively  as  prepositions  sometimes 
retain  their  original  adverbial  meaning  also  :  as,  adque  adque,  E.  in  Gell.  10,  29,  2 

and  uf  and  up,  and  on  and  on,  or  and  nearer  still  and  still  more  near,  occisis  ad 
hommum  milibus  quattuor,  2,  33,  5,  about  four  thousand  men  being  killed. 
susque  deque,  Att.  14,  6,  i,  up  and  down,  topsy  turvy,  no  matter  how. 

1409.  On  the  other  hand,  some  verbal  prefixes  are  never  used  as  separate  preposi- 
tions with  a  substantive.     These  are  called  Inseparable  Prepositions;   they  are: 
amb-,  round,  an-,  «/,  dis-,  in  two,  por-,  towards,  red-,  back.    Usually  also 
sed-,  apart  (1417). 


PREPOSITIONS  USED  WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

1410.    The    accusative    is    accompanied    by    the    following 
prepositions : 

240 


The  Noun :  Preposition.     [1411-1417. 


ad,  to,  adversus  or  adversum,  towards,  against,  ante,  in  composition 
also  antid-,  before,  apud,  near,  at,  circa,  circum,  circiter,  round,  about,  cis, 
citra,  this  side  of,  contra,  opposite  to,  erga,  towards,  extra,  outside,  infra, 
below,  inter,  between,  intra,  within,  iuxta,  near,  ob,  against,  penes,  in  the 
possession  of,  per,  through,  pone,  post,  in  Plautus  postid,  poste,  pos,  behind, 
praeter,  past,  prope  (propius,  proxime),  propter,  near,  secundum,  after, 
subter,  under,  supra,  above,  trans,  across,  uls,  ultra,  beyond.  For  the 
various  shades  of  meaning  and  applications  of  these  prepositions,  see  the 
dictionary. 

1411.  Prepositions  which  accompany  the  accusative  may  be 
easily  remembered  in  this  order: 

ante,  apud,  ad,  adversum, 
circum,  cis,  ob,  trans,  secundum, 
penes,  pone,  prope,  per, 
post,  and  all  in  -a  and  -ter. 

1412.  Of  the  above  named  words  some  are  not  used  as  prepositions  till 
a  relatively  late  period. 

Thus,  infra  is  first  used  as  a  preposition  by  Terence  and  once  only ;  circa 
somewhat  before  and  citra  about  Cicero's  time ;  ultra  first  by  Cato ;  iuxta 
by  Varro.  In  Cicero  iuxta  is  still  used  only  as  an  adverb,  in  Caesar  and 
Nepos  as  a  preposition. 

1413.  The  substantive  forms  pridie,  the  day  before,^  and  postridie,  the  day 
after,  are  sometimes  used  with  an  accusative  like  prepositions,  mostly  in  Cicero,  to 
denote  dates:  as,  pridie  nqnas  Maias,  Att:  2,  n,  2,  the  day  before  the  nones  of 
May,  i.  e.  6  May.     postridie  ludos  Appllinaris,  Att.  16,  4,  i,  the  day  after  the 
games  of  Af  olio,  i.  e.  6  July.     For  the  genitive  with  these  words,  see  1232. 

1414.  The  adverb  versus  or  versus,  wards,  occurs  as  a  post  positive  (1434) 
preposition  rarely:  once  in  Sallust,  Aegyptum  versus,  J.  19,  3,  Egypt-wards,  in 
Cicero  a  few  times,  twice  in  Pliny  the  elder,     usque,  even  to,  occurs  with  names  of 
towns  in  Terence  (once),  Cicero,  and  later ;  with  appellatives  in  Cato  (once)  and  late 
writers. 

1415.  clam,  secretly,  is  ordinarily  an  adverb.     But  in  old  Latin  it  is  used  often 
as  a  preposition,  unknown  to,  with  an  accusative  of  a  person.     Terence  has  once  the 
diminutive  form  clanculum,  Ad.  52.     With  the  ablative  only  in  the  MSS.  of  Caesar, 
once,  clam  vobis,  C.  2,  32,  8,  -without  your  knowledge,  and  in  Bell.  Afr.  n,  4, 

1416.  subter,  under,  is  used  in  poetry,  once  by  Catullus  and  once  by  Vergil, 
with  the  locative  ablative :   as,  Rhoeteo  subter  litore,  Cat.  65,  7,  beneath  Rhoe- 
teunfs  strand. 

PREPOSITIONS  USED  WITH  THE  ABLATIVE. 

1417.  The  ablative  is  accompanied  by  the  following  preposi- 
tions : 

abs,  ab,  or  a,  from,  c5ram,  face  to  face,  de,  down  from,  from,  of,  ex  or 
5,  out  of,  prae,  at  the  fore,  in  front  of,  pro,  before,  quom  or- cum,  with,  sine, 
without.  In  official  or  legal  language,  also  sed  or  se,  without.  For  the  dif- 
ferent classes  of  ablatives  with  these  prepositions,  see  1297-1300;  for  the 
various  shades  of  meanings  and  applications,  see  the  dictionary. 

16  241 


1418-1424.]     Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 

1418.  Prepositions  which  accompany  the  ablative  may  be 
easily  remembered  in  this  order : 

abs  (ab,  a),  cum,  coram,  de, 
prae,  pro,  sine,  ex  (or  e). 

1419. The  ablative  fini,  as  far  as,  is  used  in  old  Latin  as  a  preposition  with  the 
ablative :  as,  osse  fini,  PI.  Men.  859,  down  to  the  bone,  operito  terra  radi- 
cibus  fini,  Cato,  RR.  28,  2,  cover  with  loam  Me  length  of  the  roots.  Also,  as  a 
real  substantive,  with  a  genitive  (1255):  as,  ansarum  Infimarum  fini,  Cato,  RR. 
113,  2,  up  to  the  bottom  of  the  handles.  Rarely  fine,  and  before  the  genitive:  as, 
fine  genus,  O.  10,  537,  as  far  as  the  knee. 

1420.  tenus,  the  length,  was  originally  a  substantive  accusative  (1151).     From 
Cicero  on,  it  is  used  as  a  preposition  with  the  ablative,  and  standing  after  its  case :  as, 
Tauro  tenus,  D.  36,  not  further  than  Taurus,  pectoribus  tenus,  L.  21,  54,  9, 
quite  up  to  the  breast,     hactenus,   thus  far,  only  thus  far.     Also,  as  a  real  sub- 
stantive, with  a  genitive,  usually  a  plural,  mostly  in  verse  (1232):   as,  labrorum 
tenus,  Lucr.  i,  940,  the  length   of  the  lips,  up  to  the  lips.     Cumarum  tenus, 
Gael,  in  Fam.  8,  i,  2,  as  far  as  Cumae. 

1421.  The  adverbs  palam,  in  presence  of,  procul,  apart  from,  either  near  or 
far,  simul,  with,  are  rarely  used  in  poetry  and  late  prose  as  prepositions  with  the 

ablative,  coram  occurs  but  once  as  a  preposition  (inscriptional)  before  Cicero's  time. 
absque  with  the  ablative  occurs  once  each  in  Cicero  and  Quintilian  ;  in  Plautus  and 
Terence  only  in  a  coordinate  protasis  (1701;  2110). 

PREPOSITIONS  USED  WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE  OR 
THE  ABLATIVE. 

1422.  Two  cases,  the  accusative  and  the  ablative,  are  accompanied  by 
the  prepositions  in,  older  endo,  indu,  into,  in,  sub,  under,  and  super,  over, 
on. 

1423.  (i.)  in  and  sub  accompany  the  accusative  of  the  end 
of  motion,  the  locative  ablative  of  rest :  as, 

(a.)  in  curiam  venimus,  V.  4,  138,  we  went  to  the  senate-house,  in 
vincla  coniectus  est,  V.  5,  17,  he  was  put  in  irons,  hie  pagus  eius  exer- 
citum  sub  iugum  mlserat,  1,12,  5,  this  canton  had  sent  his  army  under 
the  yoke,  (b.)  erimus  in  castris,  Ph.  12,  28,  we  shall  be  in  camp,  viridi 
membra  sub  arbuto  stratus,  H.  i,  i,  21,  stretched  out — his  limbs  —  all  under 
an  arbute  green. 

1424.  Verbs  of  rest  sometimes  have  in  with  the  accusative,  because  of 
an  implied  idea  of  motion.     And,  conversely,  verbs  of  motion  sometimes 
have  in  with  the  ablative,  because  of  an  implied  idea  of  rest:   as, 

(a.)  mihi  in  mentem  fuit,  PI.  Am.  180,  it  popped  into  my  head,\.z. 
came  in  and  is  in  (compare  venit  hoc  mi  in  mentem,  PI.  Aul.  226.  in  eius 
potestatem  venire  nolebant,  V.  i,  150.  in  eorum  potestatem  portum  fu- 
turum  intelle^ebant,  V.  5,  98,  they  knew  full  well  the  haven  would  get  under 
the  control  of  these  people},  (b.)  Caesar  exercitum  in  hibernis  conlocavit, 
3,  29,  3,  Caesar  put  the  army  away  in  winter  quarters,  i.  e.  put  them  into  and 
left  them  in.  earn  in  lecto  conlocarunt,  T.  Eu.  593,  they  laid  the  lady  on 
her  couch.  So  commonlv  with  loco,  conloco,  statuo,  constituo,  p5no,  and 
its  compounds.  For  expono  and  impono,  see  the  dictionary. 

242 


The  Noun :  Preposition.     [1425-1430. 


1425.  (2.)  super  accompanies  the  ablative  when  it  has  colloquially  the  sense  of 
de,  about,  in  reference  to:  as,  hac  super  re  scribam  ad  te  Regie,  Att.  16,6,  i, 
/'//  -write  you  about  this  from  Regiutn.     In  other  senses,  the  accusative,  but  some- 
times in   poetry  the  ablative,  chiefly  in  the  sense  of  on:  as,  ligna  super   foco 
large_repdnens,  H.  i,  9,  5,  piling  on  hearth  the  faggots  high,    nocte  super 
media,  V.  9,  61,  at  dead  of  night,    paulum  silvae  super  his,  H.  S.  2,  o,  3, 
a  bit  of  wood  to  crown  the  whole. 

COMBINATION  OF  SUBSTANTIVES  BY  A  PREPOSITION. 

1426.  (i.)  Two  substantives  are  sometimes  connected  by  a  preposition, 
to  indicate  certain  attributive  relations  (1043)  j  such  are  particularly: 

(a.)  Place  :  as,  illam  pugnam  navalem  ad  Tenedum,  Mur.  33,  the  sea- 
fight  off  Tenedus.  excessum  e  vita,  Fin,  3,  60,  the  departure  from  life, 
(b.)  Source,  origin,  material:  as,  ex  Aethiopia  ancillulam,  T.  Eu.  165,  a 
lady's  maid  from  Aethiopia.  pocula  ex  aur5,  V.  4,  62,  bowls  of  gold  (1314). 
(c.)  Direction  of  action,  connection,  separation  :  as,  amor  in  patriam,  Fi.  103, 
love  of  country.  vestra  erga  me  voluntas,  C.  4,  \,  your  good  will  towaras 
me.  proelium  cum  Tuscis  ad  laniculum,  L  2,  52,  7,  the  battle  with  the 
Tuscans  at  Janiculum.  vir  sine  metu,  TD.  5,  48,  a  man  devoid  of  fear  (1043). 

1427.  (2.)  Very  commonly,  however,  other  constructions  are  used,  even 
to  indicate  the  relations  above  :  as, 

bellum  Venetorum,  3,  16,  i,  war  with  the  Venetans  (1231).  bellS  Cas- 
siano,  i,  13,  2,  in  the  war  with  Cassius  (1233).  in  aureis  pSculis,  V.  4,  54, 
in  golden  boiuls  (1233).  scutis  ex  cortice  factis,  2,  33,  2,  with  long  shields 
made  out  of  bark  (1314).  post  victoriam  eius  belli,  quod  cum  Persis  fuit, 
Off,  3,  49,  after  the  victory  in  the  war  with  the  Persians. 

1428.  Prepositional   expressions   are   sometimes   used   predicatively  :    as,   sunt 
pmnes  sine  macula,  PL  6,  14,  they  are  all  without  spot  or  blemish.     And  some- 
times they  are  equivalent  to  adjectives  :  as,  contra  naturam,  TD.  4.  n,  unnatural, 
supra  hominem,  DN.  2,  34,  superhuman.    Or  to  substantives  :  as,  sine  pondere, 
O.  i,  20,  things  without  weight.     Or  to  adverbs  :  as,  sine  labore,  PI.  R.  461,  easily. 

REPETITION  OR  OMISSION  OF  A  PREPOSITION  WITH 
SEVERAL  SUBSTANTIVES. 

1429.  (i  )  A  preposition  is  often  repeated  with  emphasis  before  two  or 
more  substantives :  as, 

in  labore  atque  in  dolore,  PI.  Ps.  685,  in  toil  and  in  trouble.  Particu- 
larly so  with  et  .  .  .  et,  aut  .  .  .  aut,  non  solum  .  .  .  sed  etiam,  non  minus 
.  .  .  quam,  &c.,  &c  :  as,  et  ex  urbe  et  ex  agris,  C,  2,  21,  from  Rome  ana 
from  the  coiintry  too. 

1430.  (2.)  A  preposition  is  often  used  with  the  first  only  of  two  or  more  substan- 
tives :  as,  in  labore  ac  dolore,    TD.  5,  41,  in  toil  and  trouble,     incidit  in 
eandem  invidiam  quam  pater  suus,  N.  5,  3,  i,  he  fell  under  the  selfsamc_  ban 
as  his  father.     Particularly  when  the  second  is    in  apposition  :  as,  cum   duobus 
ducibus,  Pyrrbo  et  Hannibale,  L.  28,  with  two  commanders,  Pyrrhus  and 
Hannibal. 

243 


I43I~I43^-]    Sentences:   7 7ie  Simple  Sentence. 


Two  PREPOSITIONS  WITH  ONE  SUBSTANTIVE. 

1431.  (i.)  When  two  prepositions  belong  to  one  and  the  same  substan- 
tive, the  substantive   is   expressed  with  the   first.      With  the  second,  the 
substantive  is  repeated,  or  its  place  is  taken  by  a  pronoun  :  as, 

contra  legem  proque  lege,  L.  34,  8,  I,  against  the  law  and  for  the  law. 
partim  contra  Avitum,  partim  pro  hoc,  Clu.  88,  partly  against  Avitus, 
partly  for  him.  If,  however,  the  two  prepositions  accompany  the  same  case, 
the  substantive  need  not  be  repeated:  as,  intra  extraque  munitiones, 
Caes.  C.  3,  72,  2,  inside  and  outside  the  works. 

1432.  (2.)  The  second  preposition  is  often  used  adverbially,  without  any  substan- 
tive: as,  et  in  corpora  et  extra,  Fin.  2,  68,  both  in  the  body  and  outside. 

POSITION  OF  PREPOSITIONS. 

1433.  In  general  a  preposition  precedes  its  case :  see  178. 

1434.  Disyllabic  prepositions  sometimes  follow  their  substantives.    Thus, 
in  Cicero,  contra,  ultra,  and  sine,  sometimes  stand  after  a  relative ;  so 
likewise  inter  in  Cicero,  Caesar,  and  Sallust ;  occasionally  also  penes  and 
propter.     For  versus,  see  1414;  for  fini,  1419;  for  tenus,  1420. 

1435.  Of  monosyllables,  ad  and  de  often  follow  a  relative.     Also  cum 
often  in  Cicero  and  Sallust,   and  regularly  in  Caesar.     With  a  personal 
or  a  reflexive   pronoun,  cum    regularly  follows,   as   mecum,    nobiscum. 
secum. 

1436.  In  poetry  and  late  prose,  prepositions  are  freely  put  after  their  cases.     . 

1437.  In  oaths  and  adjurations,  per  is  often  separated  from  its  proper  accusative 
by  the  accusative  of  the  object :  as,  per  te  deos  5r5,  T.  Andr.  538,  /  begthee  by  the 
gods,  in  the  gods'  name. 


USE   OF   ADVERBS. 
1438.  Adverbs  qualify  verbs,  adjectives,  or  adverbs. 

(a.)  With  verbs,  all  sorts  of  adverbs  are  used :  as,  of  Place :  quis  istic 
habet  ?  PI.  B.  114,  who  lives  in  there?  Time  :  turn  dentes  mihi  cadebant 
primulum,  PI.  Men.  in  6,  my  teeth  were  just  beginning  then  to  go.  Number  : 
bis  consul  fuerat  P.  Africanus,  Mur.  58,  Africanus  had  twice  been  consul. 
Degree,  Amount:  Ubii  magnopere  orabant,  4,  16,  5,  the  Ubians  earnestly 
entreated.  Dumnorix  plurimum  poterat,  1, 9,  3,  Dumnorixwas  all-powerful. 
Manner:  bene  quievit,  libenter  cibum  sumpsit,  Plin.  Ep.  3,  16,  4,  he  has 
slept  beautifully,  he  has  relished  his  food,  (b.)  With  adjectives  and  adverbs, 
oftenest  adverbs  of  degree  or  amount  only,  or  their  equivalents,  such  as  bene, 
egregie,  &c. :  as,  valde  diligens,  Ac.  2,  98,  very  particular,  egregie  fortis, 
DO.  2,  268,  exceptionally  brave.  Adverbs  of  manner,  however,  are  also  used, 
especially  in  poetry :  as,  turpiter  hirtum,  H.  E.  I,  3,  22,  disreputably  rough, 
i.  e.  disreputable  and  rough. 

244 


The  Noun :  Adverb.         [  1 4 39- 1 44 5. 


1439.  An  adverb  is  sometimes  used  with  the  meaning  of  an  ad- 
jective :  as, 

reliquis  deinceps  diebus,  3,  29,  I,  the  remaining  successive  days,  de 
suis  privatim  rebus,  5,  3,  5,  in  relation  to  their  personal  interests,  undique 
silvae,  Plin.  Ep.  i,  6,  2,  the  surrounding  woods.  Particularly  when  the  sub- 
stantive expresses  character,  like  an  adjective:  as,  vere  Metellus,  Sest.  130, 
a  trueblooded  Metellus.  rusticanus  vir,  sed  plane  vir,  TD.  2,  53,  a  country 
man,  but  every  inch  a  man. 

1440.  Perfect  participles  used  as  substantives  are  commonly  qualified  by  an  ad- 
verb, and  not  by  an   adjective.     Particularly  so   dictum,  factum,  inventum, 
responsum,  with  bene  and  male,  and  their  synonymes :  as,   recte  ac  turpiter 
factum,  7,  80,  5.  heroism  and  cowardice,     bene  facta  male  locata  male 
facta  arbitror,  E.  in  Off.  2,  62,  good  deeds  ill  put,  bad  deeds  I  count.     Jn  superla- 
tive qualifications,  however,  the  adjective  is  preferred. 

1441.  Other  substantives  also  may  be  qualified  by  an  adverb,  when  a  verb  construc- 
tion or  a  participle  is  implied:  as,  C.  Flaminius  consul  iterum,  Div.  1,77, 
Flaminius  in  his  second  consulship.     6  totiens  servos,  H.  S.  2,  7,  70,  time  and 
again  a  slave,     ictu  COmminus,  Caecin.  43,  by  a  hand-to-hand  blow,     publice 
testem,   V.  2,  156,  a  government  witness,  ^populum  late  regem,  V.  i,  21,  a 
nation  regnant  wide,     late  tyrannus,  H.  3,  17,  9,  lord  paramount  far  and  near. 

1442.  An  adverb  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  a  substantive :  as,  cum  amici 

"  it  me,  partim  etiam  prodiderint,  QFr.  i,  3,  5,  since  my 
them  abandoned  me,  and  others  again  have  actually  betrayed 


partim  deseruerint  me,  partim  etiam  prodiderint,  QFr.  i,  3,  5,  since  my 
friends  have  some  of  them  abandoned  me,  and  others  again  have  actually  betrayed 
me,  i.  e.  alii  .  .  .  alii,  postquam  satis  tuta  circa  videbantur,  L.  i,  58,  2, 


finding  every  thing  round  about  looked  pretty  safe,  i.e.  quae  circa  erant.  pa- 
lam  laudares,  secreta  male  audiebant,  Ta.  H.  i,  10.  his  outward  walk  you 
would  have  admired  ;  his  private  life  was  in  dad  odour •,  i.  e.  quae  palam  fie  bant. 

NEGATIVE  ADVERBS. 

1443.  (i.)  The  negative  oftenest  used  in  declaration  or  inter- 
rogation is  non,  not :  as, 

non  metuo  mihi,  PI.  B.  225, 1  fear  not  for  myself,  non  semper  imbres 
nubibus  hispidos  manant  in  agros,  H.  2,  9,  i,  not  always  from  the  clouds 
do  showers  on  stubbly  fields  come  dripping  dropping  down,  non  dices  hodie  ? 
H.  S.  2,  7,  21,  will  you  not  say  without  delay  ? 

1444.  non  is  a  modification  of  noenum  or  noenu,  compounded  of  ne,  no, 
and  the  accusative  oinom  or  oenum,  the  older  form  of  unum,  one  thing,   noenum 
occurs  in  Plautus  twice,  in  Ennius,  Lucilius,  Afranius,  and  Varro,  once  each,  and 
noenu  occurs  twice  in  Lucretius  (99). 

1445.  Negation  is  often  expressed  by  other  compounds  of  ne.     In  such 
cases  the  Latin  idiom  frequently  differs  from  the  English,  and  a  transfer  of 
the  negative  is  required  in  translation. 

Such  compounds  are  :  (a.)  Verbs,  such  as  nego,  nequeS,  nesci5,  no!5: 
as,  negat  verum  esse,  Mur.  74,  he  maintains  it  is  not  true,  (b.)  Noun-;, 
such  as  nemo,  neuter,  nullus,  nihil :  as,  nemini  meus  adventus  labori 
fuit,  V.  i,  1 6,  my  visit  did  not  trouble  anybody,  (c.)  Adverbs,  such  as  num- 
quam,  nusquam.  (d  )  Similarly,  the  conjunction  neque  is  used  for  and 
not,  but  not,  unless  a  single  word  is  to  be  emphasized  or  contrasted:  as,  nee 
frustra,  8,  5,  3,  and  not  in  vain. 


1 446-1 454.]    Sentences:   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1446.  A  form  nec  is  used  rarely  in  old  Latin  in  the  sense  of  n5n  :  as,  tu  dis 
nee  recte  dicis,  PI.  B.  119,  thou  dost  abuse  the  gods,  i.  e.  non  recte  or  male 
dicis.     After  Plautus's  time,  nec  for  non  occurs  in  a  few  set  combinations,  such  as 
nec  opinans,  not  expecting,  and,  from  Livy  on,  necdum,  not  yet,  i.  e.  nondum. 

1447.  The  form  ne  usually  introduces  an  imperative  \>r  a  subjunctive,  as  will  be 
explained  further  on.     But  ne  is  also  used  in  the  combination  ne  .  .  .  quidem,  not 
even,  not  .  .  .  either,  with  the  emphatic  word  between  ne  and  quidem:  as,  ne  turn 
quidem,  i,  50,  2,  not  even  then,    ne  Vorenus  quidem  sese  vallo  continet, 
5,  44,  6,  Vorenus  did  not  keep  inside  the  palisade  either. 

1448.  The  adjective  nullus  is  sometimes  used,  chiefly  in  colloquial  language,  for 
non  or  ne  (1051):  as,  Philotimus  nullus  venit,  Att.  IT,  24,  4,  no  Philotimus 
has  shown  himself,     nullus  creduas,  PI.  Tri.  606,  you  needn't  believe  it  at  all. 

1449.  (2.)  The  negative  haut  or  baud,  not,  is  used  principally 
with  adjectives  and  adverbs,  less  frequently  with  verbs  :  as, 

(a.)  baud  mediocris  vir,  RP.  2,  55,  no  ordinary  man.  rem  baud  sane 
difficilem,  CM.  4,  a  thing  not  particularly  hard,  baud  procul,  CM.  15,  not 
far.  In  all  periods  of  the  language  often  combined  with  quisquam,  ullus, 
umquam,  usquam.  (b.)  In  old  Latin  baud  is  freely  used  with  all  sorts  of 
verbs,  especially  with  possum.  In  Cicero,  it  occurs  here  and  there  with  a 
few  verbs,  such  as  adsentior,  erro,  ignoro,  nitor,  amo,  but  is  principally 
confined  to  sci5,  in  the  combination  baud  scio  an,  Idont  know  but  (1782). 
Caesar  uses  baud  once  only,  and  then  in  this  combination. 

1450.  A  shorter  form,  hau,  occurs  often  in  old  Latin,  and  a  few  times  in  the 
classical  period:   as,  heic  est  sepulcrum  hau  pulcrum  pulcrai  feminae, 
CIL.  I,  1007,  2,  on  the  burial  site  of  a  woman,  here  is  the  site  not  sightly  of  a  sightly 
dame.     In  Plautus  it  is  juxtaposed  with  scio,  making  hauscio,  i.  e.  nescio. 

1451.  (3.)  Negation  may  also  be  intimated  by  such  words  as  vix,  hardly,  pa- 
rum,  not . . .  enough,  not  quite,  minus,  less,  not,  minime,  least  of  all,  male,  &c. 

1452.  Two  negatives.in  the  same  sentence  are  usually  equivalent 
to  an  affirmative. 

Thus,  with  non  first,  an  indefinite  affirmative  :  as,  non  nemo,  somebody, 
a  certain  gentleman,  one  or  another,  non  nullus,  some,  non  nihil,  something, 
somewhat,  non  numquam,  sometimes.  With  non  second,  a  universal  affir- 
mative :  as,  nem5  non,  everybody,  every  human  being,  nullus  non,  every. 
nihil  non,  every  thing,  numquam  non,  always,  non  possum  non  confiteri, 
Fam.  9,  14,  I,  I  must  confess,  nemo  ignorat,  V.  2,  nr,  everybody  knorvs. 

1453.  Sometimes,  however,  in   old   Latin,   a  second  negation  is  used  merely  to 
emphasize  the  negative  idea:  as,  lapideo  sunt  corde  multi,  quos  non  miseret 
neminis,  E.  in  Fest.  p.  162,  there  'j  many  a  man  -with  heart  of  stone,  that  feels  for 
nobody.     For  doubled  negatives  in  compound  sentences,  see  1660. 


USE   OF   DEGREES    OF   COMPARISON. 
THE  POSITIVE. 

1454.  The  positive  sometimes  expresses  an  idea  of  disproportion :  as, 
pro  multitudine  hominum  angustos  se  finis  habere  arbitrabantur, 

I,  2,  5,  in  view  of  their  large  numbers  they  thought  they  had  a  cramped place  to 
live  in.     Generally,  however,  disproportion  is  expressed  as  in  1460  or  1461. 

246 


The  Noun :   Comparison.     [1455-1461. 


THE  COMPARATIVE. 

1455.  When  two  things  only  are  compared,  the  comparative 
is  used :  as, 

uter  igitur  melior  ?  Div.  2,  133,  which  of  the  two  then  is  the  better?  uter 
est  insanior  horum  ?  H.  S.  2,  3,  102,  which  of  these  two  is  crazier?  uter 
eratis,  tun  an  ille,  maior  ?  PI.  Men.  1119,  you  were  —  which  of  the  two  the 
bigger •,  thou  or  he  ? 

1456.  The  superlative  is  sometimes  loosely  used  when  only  two  things  are  meant : 
as,  Numitori,  qui  stirpis  maximus  erat,  regnum  legat,  L.  i,  3,  10,  to  Nu- 
mitor,  -who  -was  the  eldest  of  the  family,  he  bequeaths  the  crown,  of  two  brothers,  Nu- 
mitor  and  Amulius.     id  me!  minume  refert,  qui  sum  natu  maxumus,  T. 
Ad.  881,  that  is  of  small  concern  to  ms,  -who  am  the  eldest  son,  says  Demea,  who  has 
only  one  brother. 

1457.  From  Cicero  on,  an  adjective  or  adverb  is  sometimes  compared 
with  another  adjective  or  adverb.     In  such  comparisons  quam  is  always 
used. 

In  this  case:  (a.)  Both  members  may  have  the  positive  form,  the  first 
with  magis :  as,  Celer  disertus  magis  est  quam  sapiens,  Aft.  10,  I,  4, 
Celer  is  more  eloquent  than  wise,  magis  audacter  quam  parate,  Br.  241, 
with  more  assurance  than  preparation.  Or  (b.)  Both  members  may  have  the 
comparative  suffix :  as,  lubentius  quam  verius,  Mil.  78,  with  greater  satisfac- 
tion than  truth,  pestilentia  minacior  quam  perniciosior,  L.  4,  52,  3,  a 
plague  more  alarming  than  destructive. 

1458.  But  sometimes  the  second  member  is  put  in  the  positive,  even  when  the 
first  has  the  comparative  suffix:  as,  acrius  quam  considerate,  Ta. H.  i,  83,  with 
more  spirit  than  deliberation.    And  sometimes  both  members  :  as,  Claris  maioribus 
quam  vetustis,  Ta.  4,  61,  of  a  hoiise  famous  rather  than  ancient. 

1459.  The  comparative  may  be  modified  by  ablatives  of  difference,  such 
as  multo,  far,  aliquanto,  considerably,  paullo  or  paulo,  a  little,  nimio,  too 
much,  ever  so  much  (1393).     Also  by  etiam,  even,  still,  and  in  Catullus,  Sal- 
lust,  Vergil,  and  later  Latin  by  longe,//r,  adhuc,  still. 

1460.  The    comparative    of   an    adjective    or   adverb   often 
denotes  that  which  is  more  than  usual  or  more  than  is  right : 
as, 

solere  aiunt  reges  Persarum  plures  uxores  habere,  V.  3,  76,  they  say 
the  Persian  kings  generally  have  several  wives,  senectus  est  natura  loqua- 
cior,  CM.  55,  age  is  naturally  rather  garrulous,  stomachabatur  senex,  si 
quid  asperius  dixeram,  DN.  I,  93,  the  old  gentleman  always  got  provoked  if 
I  said  anything  a  bit  rough. 

1461.  The  comparative  of  disproportion  is  often  defined  by  some  added 
expression  :  as, 

privatis  maiora  focis,  J.  4.  66,  something  too  great  for  private  hearths 
(1321).  flagrantior  aequo  non  debet  dolor  esse  viri,  J.  13,  II,  the  indig- 
nation of  a  man  must  not  be  ot>er  hot  (1330).  In  Livy  and  Tacitus  by  quam 
pro  with  the  ablative  :  see  the  dictionary.  Sometimes  a  new  sentence  is 
added:  as,  sum  avidior,  quam  satis  est,  gloriae,  Fam.  9,  14,  2, 1  am  over 
greedy  of  glory.  For  quam  ut  or  quam  qui,  see  1896. 

247 


1462-1468.]     Sentences:   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1462.  The  comparative  with  a  sentence  of  negative  import  is  often  pre- 
ferred to  the  superlative  with  a  positive  sentence  :  as, 

elephanto  beluarum  nulla  prudentior,  DN.  i,  97,  of  the  larger  beasts  not 
one  is  more  sagacious  than  the  elephant,  or  the  elephant  is  the  most  sagacious  of 
beasts,  sequamur  Polybium,  qu5  nemo  fuit  diligentior,  RP.  2,  27,  let  us 
follow  Polybius,  the  most  scrupulous  of  men.  For  nemo  or  quis,  the  more 
emphatic  nihil  or  quid  is  often  used :  as,  Phaedro  nihil  elegantius,  nihil 
humanius,  DN.  1, 93,  Phaedrus  was  the  most  refined  and  sympathetic  of  men. 

1463.  In  colloquial  language,  a  comparative  suffix  is  sometimes  emphasized  by  the 
addition  of  magis  :  as,   mollior  magis,   PL  Aul.  422,  more  tenderer.    And 
sometimes  by  a  mixture  of  construction,  the  comparative  is  modified  by  aeque,  like 
the  positive :  as,  homo  me  miserior  nullus  est  aeque,  PI.  Mer.  335,  there  'j 
not  a  man  so  -woebegone  as  I,  for  miserior  alone,  or  aeque  miser. 

1464.  The  comparative  with  the  ablative  is  particularly  common,  when  a  thing  is 
illustrated  by  some  striking  typical  object,  usually  an  object  of  nature.    In  such  illustra- 
tions, the  positive  with  as  is  commonly  used  in  English  :  as,  luce  clarius,  V.  2,  186, 
plain  as  day.    6  fons  Bandusiae,  splendidior  vitro,  H.  3,  13,  i,  ye  -waters  of 
Bandusia,  as  glittering^as  glass,    melle  dulcior  oratio,  E.  in  CM. 31,  -words sweet 
as  honey,    ventis  ocior,  V.  5,  319,  quick  as  the -winds,    vacca  candidior  ni- 
vibus,  O.  Am.  3,  5,  10,  a  cow  as  -white  as  driven  snow,     caelum  pice  nigrius, 
O.  H.  17,  7,  a  sky  as  black  as  fitch,    durior  ferro  et  saxo,  O.  14,  712,  as  hard 
as  steel  and  stone. 

THE  SUPERLATIVE. 

1465.  When  more  than  two  things  are  compared,  the  super- 
lative is  used  to  represent  a  quality  as  belonging  in  the  highest 
degree  to  an  individual  or  to  a  number  of  a  class :  as, 

proximi  sunt  Germanis,  i,  i,  3,  they  live  the  nearest  to  the  Germans. 
horum  omnium  fortissimi,  i,  i,  3,  the  bravest  of  these  all. 

1466.  The  superlative  may  be  strengthened  by  the  addition  of  such  words 
as  unus,  preeminently,  usually  with  a  genitive,  maxime,  quam,  with  or 
without  a  form  of  possum,  as  possible,  &c.,  &c.  (1892).     In  old  Latin  by 
multo;  from  Cicero  on,  by  longe,y«r,  and  w\,  perhaps,  even:  as, 

confirmaverim  rem  unam  esse  omnium  dimcillimam,  Br.  25,  I  am 
not  afraid  to  avouch  it  is  the  one  hardest  thing  in  the  world,  longe  nobilis- 
simus,  i,  2,  i,  the  man  of  highest  birth  by  far.  quam  maximis  potest 
itineribus  in  Galliam  contendit,  i,  7,  i,  he  pushes  into  Gaul  by  the  quickest 
marches  he  can.  quam  maturrime,  i,  33,  4,  as  early  as  possible. 

1467.  The  superlative   is  also  used  to  denote  a  very   high 
degree  of  the  quality. 

This  superlative,  called  the  Absolute  Superlative,  or  the  Superlative  of 
Eminence,  may  be  translated  by  the  positive  with  some  such  word  as  most, 
very:  as,  homo  turpissimus,  V.  4,  16,  an  utterly  unprincipled  man.  Often 
best  by  the  positive  alone:  as,  vir  fortissimus,  Pis5  Aqultanus,  4,  12,  4, 
the  heroic  Piso  of  Aquitain  (1044). 

1468.  In  exaggerated  stvle,  the  superlative  of  eminence  may  be  capped  by  a  com- 
parative: as,  Stultior  Stultissumo,  PI.  Am.  907,  a  greater  than  the  greatest  fool. 
ego  miserior  sum  quam  tu,  quae  es  miserrima,  Fam.  14,  3,  i,  I  am  myself 
more  unhappy  than  you,  who  are  a  most  unhappy  woman. 

248 


The  Verb:   Voice.         [1469-1475 


(B.)     USE  OF  THE  VERB. 

VOICE. 
THE  ACTIVE  VOICE. 

1469.  In  the  active  voice,  the  subject  is  represented 
as  performing  the  action  of  the  verb. 

1470.  By  action  is  meant  the  operation  of  any  verb,  whether  active  or 
passive,  and  whether  used  intransitively  or  transitively. 

1471.  The  active  of  one  verb  sometimes  serves  as  the  passive  of  another :  thus, 
pereo,  go  to  destruction,  die,  serves  as  the  passive  of  perdo,  destroy,  and  veneo, 

go  to  sale,  am  sold,  as  the  passive  of  vendo,  put  for  sale,  sell.     Similarly  fio,  become, 
get  to  be,  am  made,  is  used  in  the  present  system  as  the  passive  of  facio,  make  (788). 

THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

1472.  In  the  passive  voice,  the  subject  is  represented 
as  acted  upon. 

1473.  The  object  accusative  of  the  active  voice  becomes  the 
subject  of  the  passive  voice  (1125);  and  the  predicate  accusa- 
tive of  the  active  voice  becomes  a  predicate  nominative  with  the 
passive  voice  (1167). 

Thus  (a.)  in  the  active  construction:  ilium  laud  abunt  bom,  hunc  etiam 
ipsi  culpabunt  mall,  PI.  B.  397,  the  one  the  good  will  praise,  the  other  e'en 
the  bad  themselves  will  blame.  In  the  passive :  laudatur  ab  his,  culpatur 
ab  illis,  H.  S.  \,  2,  n,  he's  praised  by  some,  by  others  blamed.  Active  :  elves 
RSmanos  interficiunt,  7,  3,  I,  they  slay  some  citizens  of  Rome.  Passive: 
Indutiomarus  interficitur,  5,  58,  6,  Indutiomarus  is  slain.  (b.)  Active : 
milites  certiores  facit,  3,  5,  3,  he  informs  the  soldiers.  Passive :  certior 
factus  est,  2,  34,  he  was  informed. 

1474.  Verbs  which  have  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  person  and  one  of  the  thing 

in  the  active  voice,  generally  have  the  person  as  subject  in  the  passive,  less  frequently 
the  thing:  see  1171. 

1475.  An  emphasizing  or  defining  accusative,  or  an  accusative  of  extent 
or  duration,  is  occasionally  made  the  subject  of  a  passive  :  as, 

haec  illic  est  pugnata  pugna,  PI.  Am.  253,  this  fight  was  fought  off 
there  (1140).  tota  mihi  dormitur  hiems,  Mart.  13,  59,  I,  all  winter  long  by 
me  is  slept,  i.  e.  totam  dormio  hiemem  (1151). 

249 


1476-1483*]    Sentences:   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1476.  The  person  by  whom  the  action  is  done  is  put  in  the  abla- 
tive with  ab  or  a  (1318)  ;  the  thing  by  which  it  is  done  is  put  in  the 
instrumental  ablative  (1377)  ;  as, 

(a.)  non  numquam  latro  a  viatore  occiditur,  Mil.  55,  once  in  a  while 
the  robber  gets  killed  by  the  "wayfarer,  respondit,  a  cive  se  spoliari  malle 
quam  ab  hoste  venire,  Quintil.  12,  I,  43,  he  said  in  reply  that  he  would 
rather  be  plundered  by  a  Roman  than  sold  by  an  enemy  (1471).  (b.)  unius 
viri  prudentia  Graecia  liber  ata  est,  N.  2,  5,  3,  Greece  was  saved  from  sla- 
very by  the  sagacity  of  a  single  man,  i.  e.  Themistocles.  Very  often,  however, 
the  person  or  thing  is  not  expressed,  particularly  with  impersonals. 

1477.  When  the  person  is  represented  as  a  mere  instrument,  the  ablative 
is  used  without  ab  (1378)  ;  and  when  collectives,  animals,  or  things  without 
life  are  personified,  the  ablative  takes  ab  (1318) :  as, 

(a.)   neque  vero  minus  Plata  delectatus  est  Dione,  N.  10,  2,  3,  and 

Plato  on  his  part  was  just  as  much  bewitched  with  Dion,  (b.)  eius  oratio  a 
multitudine  et  a  foro  devorabatur,  Br.  283,  his  oratory  was  swallowed  whole 
by  the  untutored  many  and  by  the  bar. 

1478.  Sometimes  the  person  by  whom  the  action  is  done  is  indicated  by  the  dative 
of  the  possessor:  see  1216.     And  regularly  with  the  gerund  and  gerundive  construc- 
tion (2243). 

1479.  Only  verbs  of  transitive  use  have  ordinarily  a  complete  pas- 
sive.    Verbs  of  intransitive  use  have  only  the  impersonal  forms  of  the 
passive  (1034) :   as, 

diu  atque  acriter  pugnatum  est,  i,  26,  I,  there  was  long  and  sharp 
fighting,  totis  trepidatur  castris,  6,  37,  6,  all  through  the  camp  there  was 
tumult  and  affright,  mih!  quidem  persuader!  numquam  potuit,  animos 
emori,  CM.  So,  for  my  part,  I  never  could  be  convinced  that  the  soul  becomes 
extinct  at  death  (1181).  Similarly  verbs  which  have  a  transitive  use  may  also 
be  used  impersonally:  as,  di?s  noctisque  estur,  bibitur,  PI.  Most.  235,  there 
is  eating  and  drinking  all  day  and  all  night  (i  133). 

1480.  The  complementary  dative  of  a  verb  in  the  active  voice  is  in  poetry  very 
rarely  made  the  subject  of  a  passive  verb :  as,  invideor,  H.  AP.  56,  /  am  envied. 
imperor,  H.  E.  i,  5,  21, 1  charge  myself. 

1481.  The  passive  had  originally  a  reflexive  meaning,  which  is  still  to 
be  seen  in  the  passive  of  many  verbs  :  as, 

exercebatur  plurimum  currendo  et  luctando,  N.  15,  2, 4,  he  took  a  great 
deal  of  exercise  in  running  and  wrestling,  densos  fertur  in  hostis,  V.  2,  51 1, 
he  tries  to  charge  ttpon  the  serried  foes,  quod  semper  movetur,  aeternum 
est,  TD.  I,  53,  anything  that  is  always  moving,  is  eternal. 

1482.  The  present  participle  of  reflexives  is  sometimes  used  in  a  reflexive  sense: 
as.    exercens,   exercising  oneself,    exercising,    ferens,    tearing  along,  vehens, 
riding,  and  invehens,  mounted  on,  pascens,  browsing,  versans,  playing,  being, 
volvens,  rolling.     Also  the  gerund  :  as,  ius  vehendl',  the  privilege  of  riding. 

1483.  Passive  forms  of  coepi  and  desino  are  commonly  used   in   the 
perfect  system,  when  a  dependent  infinitive  is  passive  :  as, 

250 


The  Verb:    Voice.  [1484-1492 


litteris  Sratio  est  coepta  mandari,  Br.  26,  oratory  began  to  be  put  in 
black  and  ivhite.  veteres  orationes  leg!  sunt  desitae,  Br.  123,  the  old 
speeches  ceased  to  be  read.  But  the  active  forms  are  sometimes  used  by  Cor- 
nificius,  Sallust,  and  Livy,  and  regularly  by  Tacitus.  The  active  forms  are 
used  with  fieri  also,  which  is  not  passive  (789)  ;  but  even  with  fieri,  Livy 
uses  the  passive  forms. 

1484.  Similar  attractions  with  a  passive  infinitive  occur  in  potestur,  &c.,  qui- 
tur  and  quitus  sum,  nequitur,  &c.,  rarely,  and  mostly  in  old  Latin  :  as,  forma 
in  tenebris  nSsci  non  quitast,  T.  Hec.  572,  her  shape  could  hardly  be  distin- 
guished in  the  dark. 

1485.  Some  perfect  participles  have  an  active  meaning:  as,  adultus,  grown  i<p. 
See  907,  and  also  in  the  dictionary  cautus,  consultus,  concretus,  deflagratus, 
inconsideratus,  occasus,  nupta. 

DEPONENTS. 

1486.  Many  verbs  have  only  passive  inflections,  but 
with  the  meaning  of  active  inflections.     Such  verbs  are 
called  Deponents. 

1487.  In  many  deponents,  a  reflexive,  passive,  or  reciprocal  action  is  still 
clearly  to  be  seen  :  as, 

nascor,  am  born ;  moror,  delay  myself,  get  delayed ;  utor,  avail  myself ; 
amplectimur,  hug  each  other ;  fabulamur,  talk  together ;  partimur,  share 
with  one  another. 

1488.  Some  verbs  have  both  active  and  deponent  inflections :  as,  adsen- 
ti5,  agree,  more  commonly  adsentior.    mereS,  earn,  and  mereor,  deserve. 
See  also  in  the  dictionary  altercor,  auguror,  comitor,  conflictor,  fabricor, 
faeneror,  muneror,  oscitor,  palpor,  populor,  revertor.    The  following  have 
active  inflections  in  the  present  system  and  deponent  inflections  in  the  perfect 
system  :  auded,  confidS  and  diffido,  gaudeo,  soled :  see  also  801. 

1489.  In  old  Latin  especially,  many  verbs  which  afterwards  became  fixed  as 
deponents  occur  with  active  inflections  also :  as,  adulo,  arbitro,  aucupo,  auspico, 
Iiict5,  ludifico,  moro,  partio,  venero,  &c.,  &c. 

1490.  Verbs  which  are  usually  deponent  are  rarely  found  with  a  passive  meaning  : 
as,  Sullanas  res  defendere  criminor,   LAgr.  3,  13,  /  am  charged  -with  de- 
fending Sulla's  policy. 

1491.  When  it  is  desirable  to  express  the  passive  of  a  deponent,  a  synonyme  is 
sometimes  used :  thus,  the  passive  of  miror,  admire,  may  sometimes  be  represented 
by  laudor,  am  praised.     Or  some  circumlocution :   as,   habet  venerationem 
quidquid  excellit,  DN.  i,  45,  anything  best  in  its  kind  is  looked  on  -with  respect, 
as  passive  of  veneror.    familia  in  suspici5nem   est  vocata,  V.  5,  10,  the 
household  -was  suspected,  as  passive  of  suspicor. 

1492.  The  perfect  participle  of  deponents  is  sometimes  used  with  a  pas- 
sive meaning.     Some  of  the  commonest  of  these  participles  are  :  adeptus, 
commentus,  complexus,   confessus,  ementitus,    expertus,    meditatuss 
opmatus,  pactus,  partitus,  testatus,  &c.,  &c. 

25 1 


1493~1497-']    Sentences:   The  Simple  Sentence. 


MOOD. 

THE    INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

DECLARATIONS. 

1493.  The  indicative  mood  is  used  in  simple,  abso- 
lute declarations  :  as, 

arma  virumque  cano,  V.  i,  i,  arms  and  the  man  I  sing,  leve  fit  quod 
bene  fertur  onus,  O.  A.  4,  2,  10,  light  gets  the  load  that's  bravely  borne. 

1494.  The  negative  used  with  the  indicative  is  commonly  n5n,  not  (1443). 
For  other  negative  expressions,  see  1445-1451. 

1495.  Certain  verbs  and  verbal  expressions  denoting  ability,  duty, 
propriety,  necessity,  and  the  like,  mostly  with  an  infinitive,  are  regu- 
larly put  in  the  indicative,  even  when  the  action  of  the  infinitive  is  not 
performed. 

This  applies  to  declarations,  questions,  or  exclamations  :  as,  (a.)  possum 
de  ichneumonum  utilitate  dicere,  sed  nolo  esse  longus,  DN.  i,  101,  2 
might  expatiate  on  the  usefulness  of  the  ichneumon,  but  I  do  not  care  to  be  long- 
winded,  inter  feras  satius  est  aetatem  degere  quam  in  hac  tanta  irn- 
manitate  versari,  RA.  150,  it  would  be  better  to  pass  your  days  in  the  midst 
of  howling  beasts  than  to  live  and  move  among  such  brutish  men.  (b.)  stulti 
erat  sperare,  Ph.  2.  23,  it  would  have  been  folly  to  hope,  quid  enim  facere 
poteramus  ?  Pis.  \^  for  what  else  could  we  have  done?  (c.)  licuit  uxorem 
genere  summo  ducere,  PL  MG.  680,  /  might  have  married  a  wife  of  high 
degree.  n5n  potuit  pictor  rectius  describere  eius  formam,  PI.  As.  402, 
no  painter  could  have  hit  his  likeness  more  exactly,  (d.)  quanto  melius  fue- 
rat  promissum  patris  non  esse  servatum,  Off.  3,  94,  how  much  better  it 
would  have  been,  for  the  father's  word  not  to  have  been  kept. 

1496.  The  principal  verbs  and  verbal  expressions  thus  used  are:  (a.)  possum, 
licet,  debe5,  oportet,  convenit,  decet.     (£.)  aequum,  aequius,  iustum, 
fas,  necesse  est ;  consentaneum^  satis,  satius,  optabile,  optabilius  est ; 
utilius,  melius,  optimum,  par,  rectum  est ;  facile,  difficile,  grave,  infi- 
nitum,  longum,  magnum  est ;  est  with  the  predicative  genitive,  or  a  possessive 

pronoun  (1237).     (c.)  Similarly,  but  without   an  infinitive,  forms   of    sum  with  a 
gerund,  a  gerundive,  or  a  future  participle. 

1497.  The  imperfect  of  most  of  the  above  verbs  and  verbal  expressions 
often  relates  to  action  not  performed  at  the  present  time :  as, 

his  alias  poteram  subnectere  causas  ;  sed  eundum  est,  J.  3,  315,  to 
these  I  might  add  other  grounds  ;  but  I  must  go.  The  context  must  determine 
whether  the  imperfect  relates  (a.)  to  action  not  performed  either  in  the  present 
as  here,  or  in  the  past  as  in  1495,  or  (b.)  to  action  performed  in  the  past:  as, 
sollicitare  poterat,  audebat,  C.  3,  16,  he  had  at  once  the  assurance  and  the 
ability  to  play  the  tempter's  part. 

252 


The  Verb:  Mood.          [1498-1504. 


1498.  Forms  of  possum  are  sometimes  put  in  the  subjunctive  (1554).     Thus, 
possim,  &c.,  often  (1556),  also  possem,  &c.,  usually  of  present  time  (1560),  less 
frequently  of  past  time  (1559),  potuissem,  &c.,  particularly  in  sentences  of  negative 
import  (1561),  rarely  potuerim,  &c.  (1558).     Sometimes  also  deberem,  &c.,  of 
present  time  (1560),  debuissem,  &c.,  chiefly  in  apodosis. 

QUESTIONS. 

1499.  The  indicative  is  the  mood  ordinarily  used  in 
enquiries  and  in  exclamations  :  as, 

(a.)  huic  ego  'studes  ?  '  inquam.  respondit  '  etiam.'  *ub!?'  '  Me- 
diolamV  '  cur  non  hie  ?'  '  quia  nullos  hie  praeceptores  habemus/  Plin. 
Ep.  4,  13,  3,  said  I  to  the  boy,  ( do  you  go  to  school?*  'yes,  sir,'  said  he ; 
'  where  ?'  '  at  Mediolanum  ; '  '  why  not  here  ?'  'oh  because  we  have  n't  any 
teachers  here'  (b,}  ut  ego  tuum  amorern  et  dol5rem  desidero,  Aft.  3,  n, 
12,  how  I  always  feel  the  absence  of  your  affectionate  sympathy. 

1500.  Questions  and  exclamations  are  used  much  more  freely  in  Latin 
than  in  English.     Particularly  common  are  two  questions,  of  which  the  first 
is  short  and  general,  leading  up  to  the  real  question  :  as, 

sed  quid  ais  ?  ubi  nunc  adulescens  habet  ?  PI.  Tri.  156,  but  tell  me, 
where  is  the  youngster  living  now  ?  estne  ?  vici  ?  et  tib!  saepe  litteras  do  ? 
Gael,  in  Fain.  8,  3,  I,  is  it  true  ?  have  I  beaten  ?  and  do  I  write  to  you  often  ? 
The  real  question  is  often  preceded  by  quid  est,  quid  dicis,  or  by  quid, 
quid  vero,  quid  turn,  quid  postea,  quid  igitur,  quid  ergo,  &c.,  &c.  :  as, 
quid  ?  canis  nonne  similis  lupo  ?  DN.  I,  97,  why,  is  not  the  dog  like  the  wolf? 

1501.  There  are  two  kinds  of  questions:  (i.)  Such  questions  as  call  for 
the  answer  yes  or  no  in  English :  as,  is  he  gone  ?    These  may  conveniently  be 
called  Yes  or  No  Questions.     (2.)  Questions  introduced  by  an  interrogative 
pronoun,  or  by  a  word  derived  from  an  interrogative  pronoun :  as,  who  is 
gone  ?  where  is  he?    These  are  called  Pwnoun  Questions. 

YES  OR  No  QUESTIONS. 

1502.  (i.)  Yes  or  No  questions  are  sometimes  put  without  any  interrog- 
ative particle :  as, 

Thraex  est  Gallina  SyrO  par?  H.  S.  2,  5,  44,  of  two  gladiators,  is 
Thracian  Bantam  for  the  Syrian  a  match  ?  Often  intimating  censure :  as, 
rogas  ?  PI.  AuL  634,  dost  ask  ?  or  what  an  absurd  question,  prompsisti 
tu  illi  vinum  ?  : :  non  prompsi,  PI.  MG.  830,  thou  hast  been  broaching 
wine  for  him  ?  : :  not  I.  Especially  with  non  :  as,  patere  tua  consilia  non 
sentis  ?  C.  i,  i,  you  don't  see  that  your  schemes  are  out?  It  is  often  doubtful 
whether  such  sentences  are  questions,  exclamations,  or  declarations. 

1503.  (2.)  Yes  or  No  questions  are  usually  introduced  by  one 
of  the  interrogative  particles  -ne  or  -n,  nonne,  num,  an,  anne. 

1504.  A  question  with  -ne  or  -n  may  enquire  simply,  without  any  impli- 
cation as  to  the  character  of  the  answer,  or  it  may  either  expect  an  affirmative 
answer  like  nonne,  or  less  frequently  a  negative  answer  like  num  :  as, 

253 


1 5 05-1509.]    Sentences:   The  Simple  Sentence. 


(a.)  valen?  PI.  Tri.  50,  art  -well?  habetin  aurum?  PI.  B.  269,  haft 
you  got  the  gold  ?  (b.)  iussin  in  splendorem  dari  bullas  has  foribus  ?  PL 
As.  426,  didn't  I  give  orders  to  polish  up  the  bosses  of  the  door  ?  facitne  ut 
dixi ?  PI.  Am.  526,  isn't  he  acting  as  2  said?  (c  )  isto  immense  spatio 
quaero,  Balbe,  cur  Pronoea  vestra  cessaverit.  laboremne  fugiebat  ? 
DN.  I,  22,  /  want  to  know,  Balbus,  why  your  people's  Providence  lay  idle  all 
that  immeasurable  time  ;  it  was  work  she  was  shirking,  was  it?  quid,  mun- 
dum  praeter  hunc  umquamne  vidisti  ?  negabis,  DN.  I,  96,  tell  me,  did  you 
ever  see  any  universe  except  this  one  ?  you  will  say  no- 

1505.  Sometimes  the  -ne  of  an  interrogative  sentence  is  transferred  to  a  following 
relative,  chiefly  in  Plautus  and  Terence :  as,  rogas  ?   quine  arrabonem  a  me 
accepistl  Ob  mulierem  ?  PI.  R.  860,  how  can  you  ask,  when  yo^^  have  got  the 
hansel  for  the  girl  from  me?    Similarly,  5  sen  studiorum,  quine  putetis  dif- 
ficile, H.  5.  i,  10,  21,  -what  laggards^  at  your  books,  to  think  it  hard,  i.  e.  nonne 
estis  seri  studiorum,  qui  putetis  difficile  ?    Compare  1569. 

1506.  To  a  question  with  nonne,  a  positive  answer  is  usually  expected, 
seldom  a  negative :  as, 

(a.)  nonne  meministi  ?  : :  memini  vero,  TD.  2,  10,  don't  you  remember? 
: :  oh  yes.  Sometimes  a  second  or  third  question  also  has  nonne,  but  oftener 
non :  as,  nonne  ad  te  Lo  Lentulus,  non  Q.  Sanga,  non  L.  Torquatus 
venit  ?  Pis.  77,  did  not  Lentulus  and  Sanga  and  Torqnatus  come  to  see  you? 
(l>.)  nonne  cogitas  ?  RA.  80,  do  you  bear  in  mind?  nonne  is  rare  in  Plautus, 
comparatively  so  in  Terence,  but  very  common  in  classical  Latin. 

1507.  To  a  question  with  num  a  negative  answer  is  generally  expected. 
Less  frequently  either  a  positive  or  a  negative  answer  indifferently  :  as, 

(a.)  num  negare  audes  ?  C.  I,  8,  do  you  undertake  to  deny  it?  num, 
tibi  cum  fauces  urit  sitis,  aurea  quaeris  pocula  ?  H  S.  I,  2,  114,  when 
thirst  thy  throat  consumes,  dost  call  for  cups  of  gold?  Rarely  numne :  as, 
quid,  deum  ipsum  numne  vidisti  ?  DN  i,  88,  tell  me,  did yo u  ever  see  god 
in  person?  (b.}  sed  quid  ais  ?  num  obdormivisti  dudum  ?  PI.  Am.  620, 
but  harkee,  wert  asleep  a  while  ago?  num  quid  vis?  PI.  Tri.  192,  hast  any 
further  wish  ? 

1508.  A   question   with   an,  less   often   anne,  or  if  negative,  with   an 
non,  usually  challenges  or  comments  emphatically  on  something  previously 
expressed  or  implied:  as, 

an  habent  quas  gallinae  manus  ?  PI.  Ps.  29,  what,  what,  do  hens^  have 
hands?  an  is  also  particularly  common  in  argumentative  language,  in  an- 
ticipating, criticising,  or  refuting  an  opponent:  as,  quid  dicis  ?  an  bello 
Siciliam  virtute  tua  Hberatam  ?  K  I,  5,  what  do  you  say?  possibly  that  it. 
was  by  your  prowess  that  Sicily  was  rid  of  the  war?  at  vero  Cn.  Pompei 
voluntatem  a  me  alienabat  oratio  mea.  an  ille  quemquam  plus  dilexit  ? 
Ph.  2,  38,  but  it  may  be  urged  that  my  way  of  speaking  estranged  Pompey  from 
me.  why,  was  there  anybody  the  man  loved  more  ?  In  old  Latin,  an  is  oftener 
used  in  a  single  than  in  an  alternative  question,  while  in  classical  Latin  it  is 
rather  the  reverse. 

1509.  (3.)  Yes  or  No  questions  are  sometimes  introduced   by  ecquis, 
ecqu5,  ecquando,  or  en  umquam:  as, 

heus,  ecquis  hie  est  ?  PI.  Am.  420,  hollo,  is  e'er  a  person  here?  ecquid 
animadvertis  horum  silentium  ?  C.  \ ,  20,  do  you  possibly  observe  the  silenct 
of  this  audience?  ( 1 144).  6  pater,  en  umquam  aspiciam  te  ?  PI.  Tri.  588. 
O  father,  shall  I  ever  set  mine  eyes  on  tJiee  ? 

254 


The  Verb:  Mood.          [1510-1518. 


1510.  (4.)  In  Plautus,  satin  or  satin  ut,  really,  actually,  sometimes  becomes  a 
mere  interrogative  or  exclamatory  particle:  as,  satin  abilt  ille  ?  PL  MG.  481,  has 
that  man  really  gone  his  way  ? 

POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE  ANSWERS. 

1511.  There  are  no  two  current  Latin  words  corresponding  exactly  with 
yes  and  no  in  answers. 

1512.  (i.)    A  positive   answer  is   expressed   by  some  emphatic 
word  of  the  question,  repeated  with  such  change  as  the  context  may 
require  :  as, 

an  non  dixi  esse  hoc  futurum  ?  : :  dixti,  T.  Andr.  621,  didn't  I  say  that 
this  would  be  ?  : :  you  did.  hue  abilt  Clltipho  : :  solus  ?  : :  solus,  T.  ffau. 
904,  here  Clitipho  repaired  ::  alone  ?::  alone.  The  repeated  word  may  be 
emphasized  by  sane,  ver5  :  as,  dasne  manere  animos  post  mortem  ?  : :  do 
vero,  TD.  I,  25,  do  you  grant  that  the  soul  lives  on  after  death  ?  : :  oh  yes.  Of- 
ten, however,  adverbs  are  used,  without  the  repetition,  such  as  certe,  certo, 
etiam,  factum,  ita,  ita  enimvero,  ita  ver5,  sane,  sane  quidem,  scilicet, 
oh  of  course,  vero,  rarely  verum. 

1513.  (2.)  A  negative  answer  is  expressed  by  a  similar  repetition, 
with  non  or  some  other  negative  added  :  as, 

estne  frater  intus  ?  : :  non  est,  T.  Ad.  569,  is  brother  in  ?  : :  he's  not.  Or, 
without  repetition,  by  such  words  as  non,  non  ita,  non  quidem,  n5n  hercle 
vero,  minime,  minime  quidem,  minime  ver5,  nihil  minus. 

1514.  immo  introduces  a  sentence  rectifying  a  mistake,  implied  doubt,  or  under- 
statement in  a  question  :  as,  nullane  habes  vitia?  : :  immo  alia,  et  fortasse 
minora,   H.  .S.  i,  3,  20,  have  you  no  faults?  : :  I  beg  your  pardon,  other  faults, 
and  per  adventure  lesser  ones,     causa  igitur  non  bona  est?  immo  optima, 
Att.  9,  7,  4,  is  n't  the  cause  a  good  one  then  ?  good  f  yes}  more  than  good,  very  good. 

ALTERNATIVE  QUESTIONS. 

1515.  The  alternative  question  belongs  properly  under  the  head  of  the 
compound  sentence.    But  as  the  interrogative  particles  employed  in  the  single 
question  are  also  used  in  the  alternative  question,  the  alternative  question  is 
most  conveniently  considered  here. 

1516.  In  old  English,  the  first  of  two  alternative  questions  is  often  introduced  by 
the  interrogative  particle  whether,  and  the  second  by  or:  as,  whether  is  it  easier  10 
say,  Thy  sins  be  forgiven  thee,  or  to  say  Arise?     In  modern  English,  whether  is  not 
used  thus. 

1517-  The  history  of  the  Latin  alternative  question  is  just  the  reverse  of 
the  English.  In  old  Latin,  the  first  question  is  very  often  put  without  any 
interrogative  particle.  Later,  in  the  classical  period,  the  use  of  -ne,  or 
oftener  of  utrum,  etymologically  the  same  as  whether,  is  overwhelmingly 
predominant. 

1518.  In  the  simplest  form  of  the  alternative  sentence,  neither  question 
is  introduced  by  an  interrogative  particle  :  as, 

quid  ago  ?  adeo,  maneS  ?  T.  Ph.  736,  what  shall  I  do?  go  up  and  speakt 
or  wait?  (1531). 

255 


1 5 1 9" 1 5  2 6»]     Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1519.  Of  two  alternative  questions,  the  first  either  has  no 
interrogative  particle  at  all,  or  is  more  commonly  introduced  by 
utrum,  -ne,  or  -n.     The  second  is  introduced  by  an,  rarely  by 
anne,  or  if  it  is  negative,  by  an  non :  as, 

(a.)  album  an  atrum  vinum  p5tas  ?  PL  Men.  915,  do  you  take  light  wine  or 
dark  ?  Tacitus  es  an  Plinius  ?  Plin.  Ep.  9,  23,  3,  are  you  Tacitus  or  Pliny  ? 
sortietur  an  non?  PC.  37,  will  he  draw  lots  or  not?  (b.)  iam  id  porro 
utrum  libentes  an  inviti  dabant  ?  V.  3,  118,  then  furthermore  did  they  offer 
it  voluntarily  or  did  they  consent  to  give  it  under  stress  ?  utrum  cetera  no- 
mina  in  codicem  accept!  et  expensi  digesta  habes  an  n5n  ?  RC.  9,  have 
you  all  other  items  methodically  posted  in  your  ledger  or  not  ?  (c.)  servosne 
es  an  liber?  PI.  Am.  343,  art  bond  or  free  ?  esne  tu  an  non  es  ab  illo 
militi  Macedonio  ?  PI.  Ps.  616,  art  thou  or  art  thou  not  the  Macedonian  cap- 
tain's man  ?  videon  Cliniam  an  non  ?  T.  Hau.qz^,  do  I  see  Clinia  or  not  ? 

1520.  necne  for  an  non  is  rare  :  as,  semina  praeterea  linquontur  necne 
animai  corpore  in  exanimS?  Lucr.  3,  713,  are  seeds  moreover  left  or  not  of 
soul  -within  the  lifeless  frame?    Twice  in  Cicero:   as,  sunt   haec  tua  verba 
necne  ?  TD.  3, 41,  are  these  your  -words  or  not  ?     But  necne  is  common  in  indirect 
questions. 

1521.  Instead  of  a  single  second  question  with  an,  several  questions  may  be  used 
if  the  thought  requires  it,  each  introduced  by  an. 

1522.  Sometimes  an  introductory  utrum  precedes  two  alternative  questions  with 
-ne  and  an  :  as,  utrum  tu  masne  an  femina's?  PL  R.  104,  -which  is  it,  art 
thou  man  or  maid?     This  construction  has  its  origin  in  questions  in  which  utrum 
is  used  as  a  live  pronoun :  as,  utrum  mavis  ?  statimne  n5s  vela  facere  an 
paululum  remigare  ?  TD.  4,  9,  which  would  you  rather  do,  have  us  make  sail  at 
once,  or  ro-w just  a  little  bit?     In  Horace  and  late  prose,  utrumne  .  .  .  an  is  found 
a  few  times. 

1523.  Sometimes  a  second  alternative  question  is  not  put  at  all :  as,  utrum  hoc 
bellum  non  est  ?  Ph.  8,  7,  in  old  English,  whether  is  not  this  war  ? 

1524.  Two  or  more  separate  questions  asked  with  -ne  .  .  .  -ne,  or  with  num 
.  .  .  num,  must  not  be  mistaken  for  alternative  questions:  as,  num  Homerum, 
num  Hesiodum  coegit  obmutescere  senectus?  CM.  23,  did  length  of  days 
compel  either  Homer  or  Hesiod  to  hush  his  voice  ?    (1692). 

1525.  An  alternative  question  is  answered  by  repeating  one  member  or 
some  part  of  it,  with  such  changes  as  the  context  may  require. 

PRONOUN  QUESTIONS. 

1526.  Pronoun  questions  or  exclamations  are  introduced 
by  interrogative  pronouns,  or  words  of  pronoun  origin. 

Such  words  are  :  (a.)  quis  qui,  quoius,  uter,  qualis,  quantus,  quotus  : 
as,  quid  rides?  H.  S.  2,  5,  3,  why  dost  thou  laugh  ?  (1144).  uter  est  in- 
sanior  horum  ?  H.  S.  2,  3,  102,  which  of  these  is  the  greater  crank?  hora 
quota  est?  H.  S.  2,6,  ^,  what's  o'clock?  (b.)  Or  unde,  ubl,  quo,  quor 
or  cur,  qui  ablative,  how,  quin,  why  not,  quam,  how,  quando,  quotiens  :  as, 
unde  venis  et  quo  tendis  ?  II.  S.  I,  9,  62,  whence  dost  thou  come,  and  whithes 
art  thou  bound  ?  deus  falli  qui  potuit  ?  DN.  3,  76,  hmv  could  a  god  have 
been  taken  in?  (1495).  quam  bellum  erat  confiteri  nescire,  DN.  I,  84, 
how  pretty  it  would  have  been  to  own  up  that  you  did  not  know  (1495). 

256 


The  Verb  :  Mood.          [  1 5  2  7- 1 5  3  2. 


1527.  Sometimes  quin  loses  its  interrogative  force,  and  introduces  an 
impatient  imperative,  particularly  in  Plautus  and  Terence,  or  an  indicative 
of  sudden  declaration  of  something  obvious  or  startling:  as, 

(a  )  quin  me  aspice,  PI.  Most.  172,  why  look  me  over,  won't  you?  i.e. 
me  aspice,  quin  aspicis?  So  twice  in  Cicero's  orations,  (b.)  quin  discu- 
pio  dicere,  PI.  7V/.  93-,  why  I  ant  bursting  with  desire  to  tell. 

1528.  In  Plautus,  Terence,  Horace,  and  Livy,  ut,  how,  also  is  used  in  questions: 
as,  ut  vales  ?  PI.  R.  1304,  how  do  you  do?    ut  sese  in  Samnip  res  habent  ? 
L.  10,  18,  ii,  how  is  every  thing  in  Samnium  ?  Very  commonly,  and  in  Cicero  only  so, 
in  exclamations  also :  as,  ut  fortunati  sunt  fabri  ferrarii,  qui  apud  carbo- 
nes  adsident ;  semper  calent,  PI.  R.  531,  what  lucky  dogs  the  blacksmiths  be, 
that  sit  by  redhot  coals  ;  they  're  always  warm. 

1529.  In  poetry,  quis,  uter,  and  quantus  are  found  a  few  times  with  -ne  at- 
tached ;   as,  uterne  ad  casus  dubids  fidet  sibi  certius?   H.  S.  2,  2,107, 

which  of  the  two  in  doubtful  straits  will  better  in  himself  confide? 

1530.  Two  or  more  questions  or  exclamations  are  sometimes  united  with 
one  and  the  same  verb :  as, 

unde  qu5  veni  ?  H.  3,  27,  37,  whence  whither  am  I  come  ?  quot  dies 
quam  fngidis  rebus  absumpsi,  -Plin.  Ep.  1,9,  3,  how  many  days  have  2 
frittered  away  in  utter  vapidities,  quantae  quotiens  occasiones  quam 
praeclarae  fuerunt,  Mil.  38,  what  great  chances  there  were,  time  and  again, 
splendid  ones  too. 

SOME  APPLICATIONS  OF  QUESTIONS. 

1531.  A  question  in  the  indicative  present  or  future  may  be  used 
to  intimate  command  or  exhortation,  deliberation,  or  appeal :  as, 

(a.)  abin  hinc  ?  T.  Eu.  861,  will  you  get  out  of  this  ?  abin  an  n5n  ?  : : 
abeo,  PI.  Aul.  660,  will  you  begone  or  not?  ::  I'll  go.  quin  abis  ?  PI.  MG. 
1087,  why  won't  you  begone?  or  get  you  gone,  begone,  non  taces  ?  T.  Fh.  987, 
won't you  just  hold  your  tongiie  ?  ecquis  currit  pollinctorem  arcessere ? 
PI.  As.  910,  won't  some  one  run  to  fetch  the  imdertaker  man?  quin  con- 
scendimus  equos  ?  L.  I,  57,  7,  why  not  mount?  or  to  horse,  to  horse, 
(b.)  quid  est,  Crasse,  imusne  sessum  ?  DO.  3,  17,  what  say  you,  Crassus, 
shall  we  go  and  take  a  seat  ?  quoi  dono  lepidum  novum  libellum  ?  Cat.  I,  I, 
unto  whom  shall  I  give  the  neat  new  booklet?  quid  ago  ?  adeo,  maneo  ? 
T.  Ph.  736,  what  shall  I  do  ?  go  up  and  speak,  or  wait?  (c.}  eon  ?  voco  hue 
hominem  ?  : :  I,  voca,  PI.  Most.  774,  shall  I  go,  and  shall  I  call  him  here? 
::  go  call  him.  See  also  1623.  Such  indicative  questions  occur  particularly 
in  old  Latin,  in  Catullus,  in  Cicero's  early  works  and  letters,  and  in  Vergil. 

1532.  Some  set  forms  occur  repeatedly,  especially  in  questions  of  curios- 
ity, surprise,  incredulity,  wrath,  or  captiousness :  as, 

sed  quid  ais  ?  T.  Andr.  575,  but  apropos,  or  but  by  the  way  (1500).  quid 
istic  ?  T.  Andr.  572,  well,  well,  have  it  your  way :  compare  quid  istic  verba 
facimus  ?  PI.  E.  141.  ain  tu  ?  Br.  152,  no,  not  seriously?  itane?  T.  Eu. 
1058,  not  really  ?  Frequently  egone :  as,  quid  nunc  facere  cogitas  ?  : : 
egone  ?  T.  Hau.  608,  what  do  you  think  of  doing  nmv?  ::  what,  I?  In 
Plautus,  threats  are  sometimes  introduced  by  scin  quo  modo?  do  you  know 
how  ?  i.  e.  at  your  peril. 

17  257 


1 5  33~ 1 5  3^0     Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


J533'  A  question  is  sometimes  united  with  a  participle,  or  an  ablative 
absolute,  or  thrown  into  a  subordinate  sentence  :  as, 

quern  fructum  petentes  scire  cupimus  ilia  quo  modo  moveantur? 
Fin.  3,  37,  with  what  practical  end  in  view  do  we  seek  to  know  how  yon  bodies 
in  the  sky  keep  in  motion  ?  qua  frequentia  prSsequente  creditis  nos 
illinc  profectos  ?  L.  7,  30,  21,  by  what  multitudes  do  you  think  we  were  seen 


off  when  we  left  that  town  ?    '  homines  '  inquit  '  emisti.'   quid  uti  faceret  ? 
Sest.  84,  'you  bought  up  men 


men  '  says  he  ;  with  what  purpose  ? 


THE  INFINITIVE   OF   INTIMATION. 

1534.  The  infinitive  is  principally  used  in  subordination,  and  will  be 
spoken  of  under   that   head.     One  use,  however,  of  the  present  infinitive 
in  main  sentences,  as  a  kind  of  substitute  for  a  past  indicative,  requires 
mention  here. 

1535.  In  animated  narration,  the  present  infinitive 
with  a  subject  in  the  nominative  sometimes  takes  the 
place  of  the  imperfect  or  perfect  indicative  :  as, 

interim  cotidie  Caesar  Aeduos  frumentum  flagitare,  i,  16,  i,  there 
was  Caesar  meantime  every  day  dunning  and  dunning  the  Aeduans  for  the 
grain.  Diodorus  sordidatus  circum  hospites  cursare,  rem  omnibus 
narrare,  V.  4,  41,  Diodorus  kept  running  round  in  sackcloth  and  ashes  from 
friend  to  friend,  telling  his  tale  to  everybody,  interea  Catilma  in  prima  acie 
versari,  laborantibus  succurrere,  S.  C.  60,  4,  Catiline  meantime  bustling 
round  in  the  forefront  of  battle,  helping  them  that  were  sore  bestead,  turn  ver5 
ingenti  sono  caelum  strepere,  et  micare  ignes,  metu  omnes  torpere, 
L.  21,  58.  5,  at  this  crisis  the  welkin  ringing  with  a  dreadful  roar,  fires  flash- 
ing, everybody  paralyzed  with  fear.  This  infinitive  occurs  in  almost  all  writers, 
for  instance,  Plautus,  Terence,  Cicero,  Horace,  and  particularly  Sallust,  Livy, 
and  Tacitus.  Less  commonly  in  Caesar.  Usually  two  or  more  infinitives  are 
combined,  and  infinitives  are  freely  mixed  with  indicatives.  The  subject  is 
never  in  the  second  person. 

1536.  This  infinitive  is  used  to  sketch  or  outline  persistent,  striking,  or  porten- 
tous action,  where  description  fails ;  and  as  it  merely  intimates  the  action,  without 
distinct  declaration,  and  without  notation  of  time,  number,  or  person,  it  is  called  the 
Infinitive  of  Intimation.     It  cannot  be  adequately  represented  in  English. 

1537.  The  infinitive  of  intimation  is  sometimes  used  without  a  subject, 
when  emphasis  centres  in  the  action  alone ;  as, 

ub!  turrim  procul  constitui  viderunt,  inridere  ex  muro,  2,  30,  3,  when 
they  saw  the  tower  planted  some  way  off,  jeer  after  jeer  from  the  wall,  turn 
spectaculum  horribile  in  campis  patentibus :  sequi  f ugere,  occidi  capi, 
S.  /.  IOI,  II,  then  a  heartrending  spectacle  in  the  open  fields:  chasing  and  rac- 
ing, killing  and  catching. 

1538.  Terence  and  Petro_nius have  it  in  questions:  as,  rex  te  ergo  in  oculis  : : 
scilicet  :  :  gestare  ?  :  :  vero,  T.  Eu.  401,  your  king  then  always  bearing  you  :  : 
of  course,  of  course  : :  in  eye  ?  : :  oh  yes.     qui  mori  timore  nisi  ego  ?  Petr.  62. 

258 


The  Verb:  Mood.         [I539~I542- 


1539.  It  may  be  mentioned  here,  that  the  infinitive  of  intimation  is  some- 
times used  from  Sallust  on  in  relative  clauses  and  with  cum,  when.  Also 
by  Tacitus  in  a  temporal  protasis  with  ubl,  ut,  donee,  or  postquam,  co- 
ordinated with  a  present  or  imperfect  indicative  protasis  :  as, 

(a.)  cingebatur  interim  milite  domus,  cum  Libo  vocare  percusso- 
rem,  Ta.  2,  31,  the  house  meantime  was  encompassed  with  soldiers,  when  Libo 
called  for  somebody  to  kill  him  (1869).  (b.)  ub!  crudescere  seditio  et  a  con- 
viciis  ad  tela  transibant,  inici  catenas  Flavians  iubet,  Ta.  H.  3, 10,  when 
the  riot  was  waxing  hot,  and  they  were  proceeding  from  invectives  to  open  vio- 
lence, he  orders  Flavian  to  be  dapped  in  irons  (1933). 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

DECLARATIONS. 


I.    THE  SUBJUNCTIVE   OF  DESIRE. 

(A.)    WISH. 

1540.  The  subjunctive  may  be   used  to  express  a 
wish. 

Wishes  are  often  introduced  by  utinam,  in  old  and  poetical  Latin  also  by 
uti,  ut,  and  curses  in  old  Latin  by  qui ;  these  words  were  originally  inter- 
rogative, how.  Sometimes  the  wish  is  limited  by  modo,  only.  In  negative 
wishes  ne  is  used,  either  alone,  or  preceded  by  utinam  or  modo ;  rarely 
non,  or  the  old-fashioned  nee,  not  (1446). 

1541.  (i.)  The  present  and  perfect  represent  a  wish  as  prac- 
ticable ;  although  a  hopeless  wish  may,  of  course,  if  the  speaker 
chooses,  be  represented  as  practicable  :  as, 

(a.)  te  spectem,  suprema  mihi  cum  venerit  hora,  Tib.  I,  i,  59,  on 
thee  I'd  gaze,  when  my  last  hour  shall  come,  utinam  ilium  diem  videam, 
Att.  3,  3,  I  hope  I  may  see  the  day.  (b.)  utinam  conere,  Ph.  2,  101,  I  hope 
you  may  make  the  effort,  (c.)  dl  vortant  bene  quod  agas,  T.  Hec.  196,  may 
gods  speed  well  whatever  yoti  undertake,  qui  ilium  di  omnes  perduint,  T. 
Ph.  123,  him  may  all  gods  fordo.  5  utinam  hibernae  duplicentur  tempora 
brumae,  Prop,  i,  8,  9,  oh  that  the  winter's  time  may  doubled  be.  utinam 
reviviscat  frater,  Cell.  10,  6,  2,  /  hope  my  brother  may  rise  from  his  grave. 
ne  istiic  luppiter  sirit,  L.  28,  28,  IT,  now  Jupiter  for ef end.  The  perfect  is 
found  principally  in  old  Latin. 

1542.  The  present  is  very  common  in  asseveration  :  as, 

peream,  nisi  sollicitus  sum,  Fam.  15,  19,  4,  may  I  die,  if  I  am  not  "wor- 
ried, sollicitat,  ita  vivam,  me  tua  valetudo,  Fam.  16,  20,  your  state  of 
health  worries  me,  as  I  hope  to  live,  ita  vivam,  ut  maximos  sumptus  facio, 
•^#-  5>  !5>  2>  as  I  hope  to  be  saved,  I  am  making  great  outlays.  See  also  1622. 

239 


1 5 4 3- 1 5 48 . J    Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1543.  The  perfect  subjunctive  sometimes  refers  to  past  action  now  completed . 
as,  utinam  abierit  malam  crucem,  PI.  Poen.  799,  /  hope  he^s  got  him  to  the 
bitter  cross  (1165).     utinam  spem  impleverim,  Plin.  Ep.  j,  10,  3,  I  hope  I  may 
have  fulfilled  the  expectations. 

1544.  (2.)  The  imperfect  represents  a  wish  as  hopeless  in 
the  present  or  immediate  future,  the  pluperfect  represents  it  as 
unfulfilled  in  the  past :  as, 

(a.)  tecum  ludere  sicut  ipsa  possem,  Cat.  2,  9,  could  I  with  thee  but 
play,  e'en  as  thy  mistress'  self,  to  Lesbia's  sparrow,  utinam  ego  tertius  vo- 
bis  amicus  adscriberer,  TD.  5,  63,  would  that  I  could  be  enrolled  with  you 
myself,  as  the  third  friend,  says  tyrant  Dionysius  to  Damon  and  Phintias. 
(b.)  utinam  me  mortuum  prius  vidisses,  QFr.  i,  3,  i,  J  wish  you  had  seen 
me  dead  first,  (c.)  utinam  ne  in  nemore  Pelio  securibus  caesa  acce- 
disset  abiegna  ad  terram  trabes,  E.  in  Cornif.  2,  34,  had  but,  in  Peliorfs 
grove,  by  axes  felled,  ne'er  fallen  to  the  earth  the  beam  of  fir,  i.  e.  for  the  Argo. 
utinam  ille  omnis  secum  copias  eduxisset,  C.  2,  4,  /  only  wish  the  man 
had  marched  out  all  his  train-bands  with  him. 

1545.  In  old  or  poetical  Latin,  the  imperfect  sometimes  denotes  unfulfilled  past 
action,  like  the  usual  pluperfect;  as,  utinam  in  Sicilia  perbiteres,  PL  R.  494, 
would  thou  hadst  died  in  Sicily,    utinam  te  di  prius  perderent,  PI.  Cap.  537, 
/  wish  the  gods  had  cut  thee  off  before.    See  2075. 

1546.  In  poetry,  a  wish  is  sometimes  thrown  into  the  form  of  a  conditional  protasis 
with  'si  or  5  si :  as,  6  si  urnam  argent!  fors  quae  mihi  mSnstret,  H.  S.  2, 
6,  10,  oh  if  some  chance  a  pot  of  money  may  to  me  reveal. 


(B.)  EXHORTATION,  DIRECTION,  STATEMENT  OF  PROPRIETY. 

1547.  The  subjunctive  may  be  used  to  express  an 
exhortation,  a  direction,  or  a  statement  of  propriety. 

The  subjunctive  of  exhortation  is  sometimes  preceded  in  old  Latin  by 
uti  or  ut,  originally  interrogative.  In  negative  exhortations  or  directions, 
ne,  nemo,  nihil,  or  numquam,  &c.,  is  used,  rarely  non. 

1548.  (i.)  The  present  expresses  what  is  to  be  done  or  is  not 
to  be  done  in  the  future  :  as, 

(a.}  hoc  quod  coepi  primum  enarrem,  T.  Hau.  273,  first  let  me  tell  the 
story  I've  begun,  taceam  nunc  iam,  PI.  B.  1058,  let  me  noiv  hold  my  tongue. 
consldamus  hie  in  umbra,  Leg.  2,  7,  let  us  sit  down  here  in  the  shade,  ne 
difncilia  optemus,  V.  4,  15,  let  us  not  hanker  after  impossibilities,  (b.)  HAICK 
•  VTF.l  •  IN  •  COVF.NTIONID  •  EXDETCATIS,  CIL.  f,  196,  23,  this  you  are  to  proclaim 
in  public  assembly,  (c.)  nomina  declinare  et  verba  in  primis  pueri  sciant, 
Quintil.  i,  4,  22,  first  and  foremost  boys  are  tf>  know  how  to  infiect  nouns  and 
verbs,  uti  adserventur  magna  diligentia,  PI.  Cap.  115,  let  them  be  watched 
with  all  due  care,  ne  quis  tamquam  parva  fastidiat  grammatices  ele- 
menta,  Quintil  r,  4,  6,  let  no  man  look  down  on  th-.  rudiments  of  grammar 
fancying  them  insignificant. 

260 


The  Verb:  Mood.          [1549-1554. 


1549.  (2.)  The  perfect  subjunctive  is  rare:  as,  idem  dictum  sit,  Quintil.  i,  i, 
8,  the  same  be  said,  once  for  all.     Mostly  in  prohibitions  :  as,  moratus  sit  nemo 
qu5  minus  abeant,  L.  9,  n,  13,  let  no  man  hinder  them  from  going  away. 

1550.  In  positive  commands,  the  second  person  singular  often  has  a  defi- 
nite subject  in  old  or  epistolary  Latin,  and  particularly  sis,  for  the  imperative 
es  or  esto.     Usually  however  an  indefinite  subject  ( 1030) :  as, 

(a.)  eas,  PI.  -/?.  519,  be  off.  hie  apud  nos  hodie  cenes,  PL  Most.  1129, 
dine  here  with  us  today,  cautus  sis,  mi  Tir5,  Fam.  16,  9,  4,  you  must  be  care- 
ful, dear  Tiro,  (b.}  isto  bono  utare,  dum  adsit,  CM.  33,  enjoy  this  blessing 
while  you  have  it  with  you. 

1551.  When  a  prohibition  is  expressed  in  the  subjunctive,  the  second  person  of 
the  present  is  often  used  in  old  Latin,  sometimes  the  pertect.     Later,  however,  the  per- 
fect is  generally  prevalent.     In  the  classical  period,  the  present  is  almost  confined  to 
poetry.     For  the  imperative  in  prohibitions,  see  1581-1586. 

(a.)  ne  ilium  verberes,  P\.B.  74.7,  you  mustn't  thrash  the  man.  Once  in 
Horace :  ne  sis  patruos  mini,  S.  2,  3,  88,  don't  play  stern  governor  to  me. 
(b.)  ne  transieris  Iberum,  L.  21,  44,  6,  do  not  cross  the  Iberus.  quod  dubi- 
tas  ne  feceris,  Plin.  Ep.  i,  18,  5,  what  you  have  doubt  about,  never  do. 

1552.  (3.)  The  imperfect  or  (but  not  in  old  Latin)  pluperfect  subjunctive 
is  sometimes  used  to  express  past  obligation  or  necessity :  as, 

(a.)  Imperfect:  quae  hie  erant  curares,  T.  Hec.  230,  thou  should st have 
looked  to  matters  here,  pateretur,  T.  Hau.  202,  he  should  have  stood  it.  quod 
si  meis  incommodis  laetabantur,  urbis  tamen  periculo  commoverentur, 
Sest.  54,  well,  if  they  did  gloat  over  my  mishaps,  still  they  ought  to  have  been 
touched  by  the  danger  to  Rome,  eras  ires  potius,  PI.  Per.  710,  you  'd  better 
have  gone  tomorrow,  i.  e.  have  resolved  to  go  tomorrow,  poenas  penderes, 
PI.  B.  427,  thou  hadst  to  pay  a  penalty,  (b.)  Pluperfect:  restitisses,  repug- 
nasses,  mortem  pugnans  oppetisses,  Poet,  in  Sest.  45,  thou  shouldst  have 
made  a  stand,  fought  back,  and  fighting  met  thy  fate,  quid  facere  debuisti? 
frumentum  ne  emisses,  V.  3,  195,  what  ought  you  to  have  done?  you  should 
not  have  bought  any  wheat.  Usually,  however,  past  obligation  or  necessity  is 
expressed  by  the  gerundive  construction,  or  by  some  separate  verb  meaning 
ought  (1496). 

(C.)    WILLINGNESS,  ASSUMPTION,  CONCESSION. 

1553.  The  subjunctive  of  desire  may  be  used  to  denote  will- 
ingness, assumption,  or  concession  :  as, 

oderint  dum  metuant,  Poet,  in  Suet.  Cal.  30,  they  are  welcome  to  hate,  as 
long  as  they  fear,  ne  sit  sane  summum  malum  dolor,  malum  certe  est, 
TD.  2,  14,  grant  for  aught  I  care  that  pain  is  not  the  worst  evil,  an  evil  it 
certainly  is.  nil  fecerit,  esto,  J.  6,  222,  he  may  be  guiltless,  be  it  so. 


II.     THE  SUBJUNCTIVE   OF   ACTION   CONCEIVABLE. 

1554.  The  subjunctive  is  often  used  to  represent  ac- 
tion as  conceivable,  without  asserting  that  it  actually 
takes  place. 


261 


1 5  5  5- 1 5 '5 8.]      Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


In  some  of  its  applications,  this  subjunctive  is  often  more  exactly  defined 
by  an  expression  of  doubt  or  of  assurance :  as,  fors  fuat  an  in  Plautus, 
forsitan  from  Terence  on  (rarely  forsan,  fors),  fortasse,  may  be,  perhaps ; 
opinor,  baud  sci5  an,  I  fancy  ;  facile,  easily,  sine  ulla  dubitatiSne,  imhes- 
itatingly,  &c.,  &c.  The  negative  used  with  this  subjunctive  is  non. 

1555.  This  subjunctive  is  particularly  common   in   guarded  or  diffident   state- 
ments :  thus,  yelim,  7  could  wish,  nolim,  /  should  not  be  willing,  malim,  /  would 
rather,  dixerim,  /  should  say,  are  often  preferred  to  a  blunter  volo,  /  insist,  nolo, 
/  -won't,  malo,  I  prefer,  or  dico,  /  say. 

1556.  The  present  denotes  action  in  an  indefinite  future  :  as, 

(a.)  ego  forsitan  in  grege  adnumerer,  RA.  89,  as  for  me,  I  might  per- 
haps be  counted  in  the  common  herd,  rnutuom  argentum  rogem,  PI.  Tri.  758, 
money  I  might  borrow,  baud  sci5  an  recte  dicamus,  Sest.  58, 1  rather  think 
we  may  say  with  propriety,  (b.)  The  second  person  singular  generally  has  an 
imaginary  subject  (1030) :  as,  dicas  hie  forsitan,  J.  I,  150,  here peradventure 
thou  mayst  say,  i.  e.  anybody  may  say.  roges  me  quid  sit  deus,  auctore 
utar  Simonide,  DN.  I,  60,  you  may  ask  me  what  god  is;  I  should  follow  the 
lead  of  Simonide s.  migrantis  cernas,  V.  4,  401,  thou  canst  descry  them  on  the 
move  (1635).  Often  with  some  generalizing  word,  such  as  saepe,  numquam, 
plures :  as,  saepe  vide  as,  H.  S.  1,4,  86,  thou  oft  canst  see.  Fortunam 
citius  reperias  quam  retineas,  Publil.  Syr.  168,  dame  Fortune  thou  mayst 
sooner  find  than  bind,  (c.)  nunc  aliquis  dicat  mihi,  H.  S.  I,  3,  19,  now 
somebody  may  say  to  me  (more  commonly  dicet  aliquis,  dices,  1620).  for- 
sitan aliquis  dicat,  L.  5,  52,  5,  perhaps  somebody  may  say.  hoc  vobis 
incredibile  videatur,  V.  3,  109,  this  may  seem  incredible  to  you. 

1557.  (i.)  The  perfect  seldom  occurs  in  old  Latin.    Later,  it  is  rarely  used 
of  past  time.     In  this  use  it  resembles  the  perfect  of  concession  (1553)  :  as, 

(a.)  forsitan  temere  fecerim,  RA.  31,  peradventure  I  may  have  acted 
rashly,  erraverim  fortasse,  PI  in.  Ep.  I,  23,  2,  /  may  have  been  mistaken 
perhaps,  (b.)  concede;  forsitan  aliquis  aliquando  eius  modi  quippiam 
fecerit,  V.  2,  78,  I  grant  it;  perhaps  somebody,  at  some  time  or  other,  may 
have  done  something  of  the  sort,  haec  ipsa  forsitan  fuerint  non  necessaria, 
Br.  52,  even  this  may  perhaps  have  been  superfluous* 

1558.  (2.)  The  perfect  is  oftenest  used  with  a  future  meaning,  and 
particularly  the  first  person  singular  active  of  verbs  meaning  think  or 
say:  as, 

(a.)  non  facile  dixerim,  TD.  5,  121,  I  coiild  not  readily  say.  hoc  sine 
ulla  dubitatione  confirmaverim,  Br.  25,  this  I  can  assert  without  any  hesita- 
tion, pace  tua  dixerim,  TD.  5,  12,  by  your  leave  I  would  say.  The  first 
person  plural  occurs  first  in  Cornificius,  and  is  rare :  as,  hunc  deum  rite 
beatum  dixerimus,  DN.  i,  52,  such  a  god  we  should  be  right  in  pronouncing 
happy,  (b.)  plane  perfectum  Demosthenem  facile  dixerls,  Br.  35, you 
would  readily  pronounce  Demosthenes  absolutely  perfect  (1030).  tu  vero  eum 
nee  nimis  valde  umquam  nee  nimis  saepe  laudaveris,  Leg.  3,  I,  oh  no, 
rest  assured  you  never  can  praise  him  too  emphatically  nor  too  often,  conlu- 
viem  istam  non  nisi  metu  coercueris,  Ta.  14,  44,  such  a  motley  rabble 
you  can  only  keep  under  by  terrorism,  (c.)  forsitan  quispiam  dixerit,  Off. 
5,  29,  perhaps  somebody  may  say. 

262 


The  Verb:  Mood.          [I559~I563. 


1559.  (i.)   The  imperfect  properly  denotes  action  which  might 
have  taken  place  in  the  past :  as, 

(a.)  non  ego  hoc  ferrem  calidus  iuventa  cSnsule  Planco,  H.  3,  14, 
27,  this  J  should  not  have  brooked  in  my  hot  youth,  in  Plancus'  consulate, 
(a.)  The  second  person  singular,  particularly  of  verbs  meaning  see,  make  out, 
think,  say,  generally  has  an  imaginary  subject  (1030) :  as,  videres,  H.  -5".  2, 
8,  77,  thou  migktst  have  seen,  cerneres,  L.  22,  7,  i2,~you  might  have  descried. 
nescires,  L.  3,  35,  3,  you  could  not  have  told,  te  columen  rfii  publicae 
diceres  intueri,  Sest.  19,  you  would  have  sworn  you  were  gazing  on  a  pillar 
of  the  state,  (c.)  qui  videret,  urbem  captam  diceret,  V.  4,  52,  anybody  who 
sazv  it,  would  have  said  it  was  a  captured  city,  did  hoc  in  te  non  potest, 
posset  in  Tarquinio,  cum  regno  esset  expulsus,  TD.  i,  88,  this  cannot  be 
said  in  your  case ;  it  might  have  been  said  in  Tarquin's,  when  he  was  driven 
from  the  throne,  numquam  faceret,  T.  Ph.  121,  he  never  would  have  done  it. 

1560.  (2.)  The  imperfect  often  denotes  action  not  performed  at 
the  present  time  ;  so  especially  vellem  (nollem,  mallem)  :  as, 

(a.)  nimis  vellem  habere  perticam,  PI.  As.  589,  I  wish  so  much  I  had 
a  stick,  vellem  adesse  posset  Panaetius ;  quaererem  ex  eo,  TD.  i,  81, 
/  only  wish  Panaetius  could  be  with  us :  I  should  ask  him  ( Panaetius  was 
dead),  cuperem  voltum  videre  tuum,  Att.  4,  16,  7,  I  should  like  to  see  the 
expression  of  your  face,  mallem  Cerberum  metueres,  TD.  i,-i2,  I  would 
rather  you  stood  in  dread  vf  Cerberus,  possem  idem  facere,  TD.  i,  84, 
I  could  do  the  same,  (b.)  melius  sequerere  cupidine  captam,  O.  14,  28, 
better  for  thee  it  were  a  loving  bride  to  woo.  (c.)  in  hac  fortuna  perutilis 
eius  opera  esset,  Att.  9,  17,  2,  in  the  present  pinch  his  services  would  be 
extremely  valuable. 

1561.  The  pluperfect  represents  action  which  did  not  take  place 
in  the  past:  as, 

(a.)  vellem  quidem  liceret:  hoc  dixissem,  RA.  138,  I  only  wish  it 
were  allowed;  I  should  have  said  so  and  so.  (b.)  dedisses  huic  animo  par 
corpus,  fecisset  quod  optabat,  Plin.  Ep.  i,  12,  8,  you  might  have  given  this 
spirit  a  body  to  match  ;  he  would  have  done  what  he  craved  to  do.  (c.)  urbes 
et  regna  celeriter  tanta  nequitia  devorare  potuisset,  Ph.  2,  67,  such  colos- 
sal prodigality  might  have  been  capable  of  swallowing  down  cities  and  kingdoms 
speedily,  vicissent  inprobos  boni ;  quid  deinde  ?  Sest.  43,  the  good  might 
have  overpowered  the  bad  ;  what  next  ? 

1562.  It  may  be  mentioned  here,  that  the  subjunctive  of  action  conceiv- 
able often  extends  to  subordinate  sentences  :  see  1731. 

QUESTIONS. 

1563.  I.  The  subjunctive  is  often  used  to  ask  what  action 
or  whether  any  action  is  desired,  commanded,  proper,  or  neces- 
sary. 

In  many  instances  a  negative  answer  or  no  answer  at  all  is  expected 
The  negative  is  ne,  sometimes  non. 

263 


1564-1567-]     Sentences:   The  Simple  Sentence. 


(a.)  qu5  me  vertam  ?  Scatter.  19,  which  way  shall  I  turn  ?  quid  faciam, 
praescribe  : :  quiescas  : :  ne  faciam,  inquis,  omnino  versus  ?  H.  S.  2,  i, 
5,  lay  down  the  law,  what  I'm  to  do  : :  keep  still : :  wilt  have  me  write,  sayst 
thou,  no  verse  at  all  ?  quid  igitur  faciam  ?  non  earn  ?  T.  Eu.  46,  what  then 
am  I  to  do?  not  go?  quid  ni  meminerim  ?  DO.  2,  273,  why  should  not  Ire- 
member?  or  of  course  I  remember,  huic  cedamus  ?  huius  condiciones 
audiamus?  Ph.  13,  16,  shall  we  bow  the  knee  to  him  ?  shall  we  listen  to  his 
terms?  (b.}  quid  tandem  me  facere  decuit?  quiescerem  et  paterer  ?  L. 
42,  41,  12,  what  in  the  world  ought  I  to  have  done  ?  keep  inactive  and  stand  it? 

1564.  Such  questions  sometimes  have  the  alternative  form  :  as,  Corinthiis  bel- 
lum  indicamus,  an  non  ?  In-v.  i,  17,  are  -we  to  declare  war  against  Corinth,  or 
not!    utrum  indicare  me  ei  thensaurum  aequom  fuit,  an  ego  alium  do- 
minum  paterer  fieri  hisce  aedibus  ?  PL  Tri.  175,  should  I  have  poimed  out 
the  hoard  to  him,  or  should  I  have  allowed  another  to  become  the  owner  of  this 
house!  here  paterer  is  equivalent  to  aequom  fuit  pati  (1495). 

1565.  II.  The  subjunctive  is  often  used  to  ask  whether  action 
is  conceivable :  as, 

(a.)  quis  putet  celeritatem  ingeni  L.  Bruto  defuisse  ?  Br.  53,  who 
can  suppose  that  Brutus  lacked  ready  wit  ?  i.  e.  nem5  putet  ( 1 556),  putabit 
(1620),  or  putare  potest.  si  enim  Zenoni  licuit,  cur  non  liceat  Catoni  ? 
Fin  3,  1 5,  for  if  it  was  allowed  Zeno,  why  should  not  it  be  allowed  Cato  ? 
(b.\  hoc  tantum  bellum  quis  umquam  arbitraretur  ab  un5  imperatore 
confici  posse  ?  IP.  31,  who  would  ever  have  dreamed  that  this  stupendous 
war  could  be  brought  to  a  close  by  a  single  commander?  The  imperfect 
sometimes  denotes  action  not  performed  at  the  present  time  (1560): 
quis  enim  clvis  regi  non  faveret  ?  D.  6,  for  what  Roman  would  not  feel 
for  the  king?  (c.)  ego  te  videre  noluerim  ?  QFr.  1,3,  i,  I  have  objected  to 
seeing  you  ? 

1566.  The  subjunctive  is  often  used  in  interrogative  outbursts  of 
surprise,  disapprobation,  indignation,  or  captious  rejoinder.     In  such 
questions  a  pronoun,  ego,  tu  (ille),  is  usually  expressed.     The  nega- 
tive is  non. 

This  subjunctive  occurs  in  Plautus  and  Terence,  in  Cicero,  oftenest  the 
letters,  in  Horace,  Vergil,  and  Livy.  Not  in  Caesar  nor  Sallust. 

1567.  (t.)  The  question  may  have  no  interrogative  word,  or  may  have 
-ne,  especially  in  comedy  :  as, 

(a.)  non  taces  ?  : :  taceam  ?  T.  Ph.  987,  vou  hold  vour  tongue  : :  I  hold 
my  tongue?  ne  fle  : :  egone  ilium  non  fleam?  PI.  Cap.  139,  weep  not:: 
what,  I  not  weep  for  him  ?  tu  pulses  omne  quod  obstat  ?  H.  S.  2,  6,  30, 
what,  you,  sir,  punch  whatever  's  in  your  way  ?  faveas  tu  host!  ?  ille  litteras 
ad  te  mittat  ?  Ph.  7,  5,  you,  sir,  sympathize  with  the  enemv  ?  he  correspond  with 
you?  sapiensne  non  timeat?  Ac.  2,  135,  a  sage  not  be  afraid?  (b.}  ego 
mih!  umquam  bonorum  praesidium  defuturum  putarem  ?  Mil.  94,  could 
I  have  dreamed  that  I  shcmld  ever  lack  the  protection  of  the  patriotic  ?  (c.)  l  apud 
exercitum  mih!  fueris  '  inquit  '  tot  annos  ? '  Mur.  21, '  to  think  of  your  hav- 
ing been  with  thearmy,  bless  my  soul,''  says  he,  '  so  manv  years'  (d.}  mih!  cuius- 
quam  salus  tanti  fuisset,  ut  meam  neglegerem  ?  Still.  45,  could  anybody' 3 
safety  have  been  so  important  in  my  eyes  as  to  make  me  disregard  my  own  ? 

264 


The  Verb:  Mood.          [i 568-1 5 71. 


1568.  (2.)  The  question  may  have  utl  or  ut:  as, 

te  ut  ulla  res  frangat  ?  tu  ut  umquam  te  corrigas  ?  C.  I,  22,  any  thing 
break  you  down  ?  you  ever  reform  ?  pater  ut  obesse  filio  debeat  ?  Plane. 
31,  a  father  morally  bound  to  work  against  his  son  ? 

1569-  (3.)  The  question  with  utl  or  ut  is  sometimes  attended  by  a  remnant 
of  another  question  with  -ne  or  -n.  In  this  combination,  -ne  either  pre- 
cedes, joined  to  an  emphatic  word,  or  it  is  attached  directly  to  utl  or  ut :  as, 

(a.)  egone  ut  te  interpellem  ?  TD.  2,  42,  what  I  ?  interrupt  you  ?  illlne 
ut  impune  concitent  finitima  bella  ?  L.  4,  2,  12,  what,  they  be  allowed  to  stir 
up  border  warfare  with  impunity  ?  virgo  haec  liberast  : :  meane  ancilla 
Hbera  ut  sit,  quam  ego  numquam  emlsi  manu  ?  PI.  Cur.  615,  this  girl  is 
free  : :  my  servant-girl?  she  to  be  free,  when  I  have  never  set  her  free  ?  (b.)  utne 
tegam  spurco  Damae  latus  ?  H.  S.  2,  5,  18,  what,  I'm  to  shield  a  nasty 
Damans  side  ?  somnium.  utine  haec  ignoraret  subm  patrem  ?  T.  Ph. 
874,  oh  bosh,  not  to  have  known  the  father  that  begat  her  ?  See  1505  and  1532. 

1570.  It  may  be  mentioned  here,  that  the  interrogative  subjunctive  is 
often  used  in  subordinate  sentences  :  see  1731. 


THE    IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

COMMAND. 

1571.  The  second  person  of  the  imperative  mood  is 
used  in  commands,  either  particular  or  general. 

Commands  are  very  often  attended  by  a  vocative  or  vocative  nominative, 
or  by  tu,  sir,  sirrah,  or  vos,  gentlemen,  yon  people  ( 1 1 18).  They  are  of  various 
kinds,  as  follows  :  (a.)  Order,  often  to  an  inferior :  thus,  to  an  official :  Hctor, 
conliga  manus,  Kab.  13,  L.  i,  26,  7,  Cell.  12,  3,  2,  lictor,  tie  up  his  wrists. 
To  soldiers :  as,  desilite  milites,  4,  25,  3,  overboard,  my  men.  signifer, 
statue  signum,  L.  5,  55,  i,  standardbearer,  plant  your  standard,  infer  miles 
signum,  L.  6,  8,  i,  advance  yotir  standard,  man,  or  charge.  To  sailors:  as, 
hue  dirigite  naves,  L.  29,  27,  13,  head  your  galleys  this  way.  To  slaves  :  as, 
convorrite  aedes  scopis,  agite  strenue,  PI.  B.  10,  sweep  up  the  house  with 
brooms,  be  brisk.  Also  to  an  equal :  as,  aperite  aliquis,  PI  Mer.  130,  open  the 
door  there  somebody  (1080).  Or  to  a  superior  :  as,  heus,  exi,  Phaedrome, 
PI.  Cur.  276,  ho  Phaedromus,  come  out.  (b.}  Exhortation,  entreaty,  summons, 
request,  prayer,  imprecation,  wish,  concession,  &c. :  as,  vos  vobis  consulite, 
7,  50,  5,  every  man  of  you  for  himself,  es,  bibe,  animo  obsequere,  PI.  MG. 
677.  eat,  drink,  and  be  merry,  sperne  voluptates,  H.  E.  \,  2,  55,  scorn  thou 
delights,  qum  tu  i  intro,  PI.  Most.  815,  go  in,  go  in,  won't  you  go  in  ?  (1527). 
patent  portae,  proficiscere,  educ  tecum  etiam  omms  tuos,  C.  i,  10,  the 
gates  are  open,  march  forth  ;  take  out  all  your  myrmidons  with  you  too.  audi, 
luppiter,  L.  i,  32,  6,  bow  down  thine  ear,  Jupiter,  i  in  crucem,  PI.  As.  940, 
get  you  gone  to  the  cross,  vive  valeque,  H.  S.  2,  5,  109,  long  live  and  thrive, 
or  farewell,  tibl  habe,  PI.  Men.  690,  you  keep  it  yourself. 


1 5 72-1 5 79.]      Sentences  :   T/ie  Simple  Sentence. 


1572.  The  imperative  is  often  softened  by  the  addition  of  amabo,  obse- 
cro,  quaes5,/r/74ff,  I  beg,  or  sis,  sultis,  sodes,//m^  (97).       It  is  sharp- 
ened by  age,  agedum  or  agidum,  age  sis,  mark  me,  or  i,  go,  come  on,  or  by 
modo,  only.     The  concessive  imperative  sometimes  has  sane,  for  all  me. 

1573.  In  Plautus  and  Terence,  the  enclitic  dum,  a  while,  a  minute,  just,  is  often 
attached  to  the  imperative:  as,  manedum,  PL  As.  585,  -wait  a  minute.     In  classi- 
cal Latin,  dum  is  retained  with  age  and  agite  :   as,  agedum  conferte   cum 
illius  vita  P.  Sullae,  Suit.  72,  come  now,  compare  Sulla's  life  with  that  man's 
U°75)« 

1574.  It  may  be  mentioned  here,  that  the  imperative"  is  often  used  in  the 
protasis  of  a  conditional  sentence  :  as, 

tolle  hanc  opinionem,  luctum  sustuleris,  TD.  i,  30,  do  away  with 
this  notion,  and  you  will  do  away  with  mourning  for  the  dead.  Once  only  in 
old  Latin,  but  often  in  late  Latin,  with  a  copulative  :  as,  perge,  ac  facile 
ecfeceris,  PL  B.  695,  start  on,  and  you  will  do  it  easily. 

1575.  (i.)  The  third  person,  and  the  longer  forms  of  the  sec- 
ond person,  are  used  particularly  in  laws,  legal  documents,  and 
treaties,  and  also  in  impressive  general  rules  and  maxims :  as, 

(a.)  regio  imperio  duo  sunto,  Leg.  3,  8,  there  shall  be  two  men  vested  with 
the  power  of  kings,  amicitia  regi  Antiocho  cum  populo  RomanS  his  le- 
gibus  est5,  L.  38,  38,  I,  there  shall  be  amity  between  king  Antiochus  and  Rome 
on  the  following  terms,  (b.)  vicinis  bonus  esto,  Cato,  RR.  4,  always  be  good 
to  your  neighbours,  moribus  vivito  antiquis,  PL  Tri.  295,  live  thou  in  old- 
time  ways.  The  longer  forms  are  often  called  the  Future  Imperative. 

1576.  (2.)  The  longer  forms  of  the  second  person  are  also  sometimes  used  in  the 
ordinary  speech  of  everyday  life :  as,  cave  to,  QFr.  i,  3,  8,  beware.     In  old  Latin, 
often  es,  be  thou,  but  in  classical  Latin,  oftener  esto  (or  sis).     Usually  habeto, 
meaning  keep,  or  consider,  regularly  SCltO,  scitote,  you  must  know  (846).     In  verse, 
the  long  forms  may  sometimes  be  due  to  the  metre  :  as,  hie  hodie  cenatp,  PL  R. 
1417,  take  dinner  here  today,     par  pr5  par!  referto,  T.  Eu.  445,  pay  tit  for  tat. 
But  also  without  such  necessity :  as,  auferto  intro,  PI.  Tru.  914,  take  it  within. 
quietus  esto,  inquam,  T.  Ph.  713,  be  not  concerned,  I  say. 

1577.  (3.)  It  may  be  mentioned  here,  that  the  longer  forms  are 
very  often  used  in  the  apodosis  of  a  complex  sentence,  particularly 
with  a  future  or  a  future  perfect  protasis :  as, 

si  iste  ibit,  ito,  PL  Ps.  863,  if  he  shall  go,  go  thou.  medico  mercedis 
quantum  poscet,  promitti  iubetS,  Fam.  16,  14,  i,you  must  order  your  med- 
ical man  to  be  promised  all  he  shall  charge  in  the  way  of  a  fee.  ub?  nihil  erit 
quod  scribas,  id  ipsum  scribito,  Aft.  4,  8  b,  4,  when  you  don't  have  anything 
to  write,  then  write  just  that,  cum  ego  P.  Granium  testem  produxero, 
refellito,  si  poteris,  V.  5,  154,  when  I  put  Granius  on  the  witness  stand, 
refute  him  if  you  can. 

1578.  In  such  combinations,  however,  the  shorter  forms  are  sometimes  found  : 
as,  ubi  voles,  accerse,  T.  Andr.  848,  fetch  me  when  you  will.  ^  And  conversely 
the  longer  forms  are  also  found  with  a  present  protasis:  as,  unum  illud  videto,  si 
me  amas,  Fam.  16,  i,  2,  attend  to  this  one  thing,  an  thou  lowest  me. 

1579.  A  command  is  sometimes  expressed  by  the  subjunctive,  accompany- 
ing fac,  facito,  fac  ut,  facito  ut,  cura  ut,  curato  ut,  vide,  vide  ut,  void, 
or  particularly  velim  :  as, 

266 


The  Verb:  Mood.          [1580-1586. 


magnum  fac  animum  habeas  et  spem  bonam,  QFr.  i,  2,  16,  see  that 
you  keep  ^lp  an  heroic  soul  and  ^^nabated  hope  (1712).  fac  cogites,  Fatn.  II, 
3,  4,  see  that  you  bear  in  mind,  cura  ut  valeas,  Fam.  12,  29,  3,  take  good  care 
of  yourself  .  velim  exlstimes,  Fam.  12,  29,  2,  /  should  like  to  have  you 
consider.  For  commands  in  the  subjunctive  alone,  see  1547;  in  the  future 
indicative,  1624;  in  the  form  of  a  question,  1531. 

1580.  A  periphrastic  perfect  passive  form  is  rare:  as,  iure  caesus  esto,  Twelve 
Tables  in  Macrob.  Sat.  i,  4,  19,  he  shall  be  regarded  as  killed  with  justifying  cir- 
cumstances,    probe  factum  esto,  L.  22,  10,  6,  let  it  be  considered  justified,     at 
vos  admoniti  nostris  quoque  casibus  este,  O.  Tr.  4, 8,  51,  but  be  ye  warned 
by  our  misfortunes  too. 

PROHIBITION. 

1581.  (i.)  In  prohibitions  with  the  second  person,  the  imperative  with 
ne  is  used  in  old  Latin,  and  with  neve  as  a  connective,  rarely  neque  :  as, 

ne  fle,  PI.  Cap.  139,  weep  not.  ne  saevi  tanto  opere,  T.  Andr.  868,  be 
not  thus  wroth.  vSometimes  in  classical  poetry  also,  in  imitation  of  old  style : 
as,  ne  saevi,  magna  sacerdSs,  V.  6,  544,  rave  not,  thou  priestess  grand. 
Once  in  Livy  :  ne  timete,  3,  2,  9,  be  not  afraid. 

1582.  From  Ovid  on,  non  is  used  a  few  times  for  ne  :  as,  non  caris  aures 
onerate  lapillis,  O.  A  A.  3,  129,  load  not  -with  precious  stones  your  ears. 

1583.  (2.)  Prohibitions  in  the  second  person  are  usually  ex- 
pressed by  noli  or  nolite  with   the  infinitive,  particularly  in 
classical  prose  :  as, 

obiurgare  noli,  Att.  3,  n,  2,  don't  scold,  nolite  id  velle  quod  fieri  non 
potest,  Ph.  7,  25,  don't  yearn  after  the  unattainable. 

1584.  In  poetry,  equivalents  for  noli  are  sometimes  used  with  the  infinitive,  such 
as  fuge,  parce  or  comperce,  conpesce,  mitte  or  omitte,  absiste  :  as,  quid 
sit  futurum  eras,  fuge  quaerere,  H.  i,  9,  13,  -what  fate  the  morrow  brings, 
forbear  to  ask.    Livy  has  once  parce,  34,  32,  20. 

1585.  (3.)  A  prohibition  in  the  second  person  is  often  expressed  by  the 
subjunctive  accompanying  cave,   fac  ne,  vide   ne,  videto   ne,   cura  ne, 
curato  ne,  or  nolim,  and  in  old  Latin  cave*  ne :  as, 

cave  festines,  Fam.  16,  12,  6,  don't  be  in  a  hurry,  caveto  ne  suscen- 
seas,  PI.  As.  372,  see  that  thou  beest  not  wroth,  hoc  nolim  me  iocari  putes, 
Fam.  9,  15,  4,  7  should  hate  to  have  you  think  I  am  saying  this  in  fun.  For 
prohibitions  in  the  second  person  with  ne  and  the  present  or  perfect  sub- 
junctive, see  1551.  For  the  subjunctive  coordinated  with  cave",  see  1711. 

1586.  In  law  language,  prohibitions  are  expressed  by  the  third  person  of 
the  imperative  with  ne,  and  with  neve  as  a  connective :  as, 

hominem  mortuom  in  urbe  ne  sepelito  neve  urito,  Twelve  Tables  in 
Leg.  2,  58,  he  shall  not  bury  n^r  yet  shall  he  burn  a  dead  man  in  town,  mulie- 
res  genas  ne  radunto  neve  lessum  funeris  ergo  habentS,  Twelve  Tables 
in  Leg.  2,  59,  women  shall  not  tear  their  cheeks  nor  shall  they  keen  in  lamentation 
for  the  dead  (1257).  Likewise  with  nemo:  as,  nemini  parents,  Twelve 
Tables  in  Leg.  3,  8,  they  shall  not  be  subject  to  anybody.  See  also  1548. 

267 


1 5 8 7- 1 5 90.]     Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


TENSE. 

THE  TENSES   OF  THE   INDICATIVE. 

THE  PRESENT  TENSE. 

1587.  The    present   indicative  represents   action   as 
going  on  at  the  time  of  speaking  or  writing :    as, 

scribo,  /  write,  or  /  am  writing,  nunc  primum  audio,  T.  Andr.  936, 
for  the  first  time  I  hear,  notat  ad  caedem  unum  quemque  nostrum, 
C.  I,  2,  he  is  marking  us  out  for  death,  each  and  all.  domus  aedificatur, 
Att.  4,  2,  7,  the  house  is  building. 

1588.  The  present  is  used  to  denote   action  customary  or 
repeated  at  any  time,  or  a  general  truth  :    as, 

agri  culturae  non  student,  6,  22,  i,  they  do  not  apply  themselves  to  farm- 
ing, virl.in  uxores  vitae  necisque  habent  potestatem,  6,  19,  3,  the  mar- 
ried men  have  power  of  life  and  death  over  their  wives,  probitas  laudatur  et 
alget,  J.  I,  74,  uprightness  gets  extolled,  and  left  out  in  the  cold,  dum  vitant 
stulti  vitia,  in  contraria  currunt,  H.  S.  I,  2,  24,  while  fools  essay  a  vice  to 
shun,  into  its  opposite  they  run.  mors  sola  fatetur  quantula  sint  hominum 
corpuscula,  J.  IO,  172,  death  is  the  only  thing  that  tells  what  pygmy  things 
men's  bodies  be.  stultSrum  plena  sunt  omnia,  Fam.  9,  22,  4,  the  world  is 
full  of  fools,  risu  inepto  res  ineptior  nullast,  Cat.  39,  16,  there's  nothing 
sillier  than  a  silly  laugh. 

1589.  The  present,  when  accompanied  by  some   expression   of 
duration  of  time,  is  often  used  to  denote  action  which  has  been  going 
on  some  time  and  is  still  going  on. 

This  present  is  translated  by  the  English  perfect :  as,  Lilybaei  multos 
iam  annos  habitat,  V.  4,  38,  he  has  lived  at  Lilybaeum  this  many  a  year. 
iam  dudum  auscultS,  H.  S.2,7,  I,  I  have  been  listening  for  an  age.  satis 
diu  hoc  iam  saxum  vorso,  T.  Eu.  1085,  I've  trundled  at  this  boulder  long 
enough  as  'tis,  nimium  diu  te  castra  desiderant,  C.  i,  10,  the  camp  has 
felt  your  absence  altogether  too  long,  iam  diu  Ign5ro  quid  agas,  Fam.  7,  9,  i, 
/  have  not  known  this  long  time  how  you  are  getting  on.  This  use  extends  to 
the  subjunctive  and  to  nouns  of  the  verb  also.  But  if  the  action  is  conceived 
as  completed,  the  perfect  is  used :  as,  sero  resistimus  61,  quem  per  annos 
decem  aluimus,  Att.  7,  5,  5,  it  is  too  late  to  oppose  a  man  whom  we  have  been 
supporting  ten  long  years. 

1590.  The  present  is  often  used  to  represent  past  action  as 
going  on  now.    This  is  called  the  Present  of  Vivid  Narration  :  as, 

transfigitur  scutum  Pulioni  et  verutum  in  balteo  defigitur.  avertit 
hie  casus  vaginam,  inpeditumque  hostes  dircumsistunt,  5,  44,  7,  Pulio 
has  his  shield  run  through,  and  a  javelin  sticks  fast  in  his  sword  belt.  This 
mischance  puts  his  scabbard  out  of  reach,  and  the  enemy  encompass  him  in 
this  hampered  condition.  This  present  often  stands  side  by  side  with  a  past 
tense.  It  is  common  in  subordinate  sentences  also. 

268 


The  Verb:   Tense. 


1591.  The   present  is  sometimes  used  in  brief  historical   or   personal 
memoranda,  to  note  incidents  day  by  day  or  year  by  year  as  they  occur. 
This  is  called  the  Annalistic  Present:  as, 

Proca  dcinde  regnat.  is  Numitorem  procreat.  Numitori  regnum 
vetustum  Silviae  gentis  legat,  L.  I,  3,  9,  after  this  Proca  is  king ;  this  man 
begets  Numitor  ;  to  Numitor  he  bequeaths  the  ancient  throne  of  the  Silvian 
race,  duplicatur  civium  numerus.  Caelius  additur  urbi  mons,  L.  i, 
30,  i,  number  of  citizens  doubled  ;  Aft.  Caelius  added  to  city,  in  Mamurrarum 
lassi  deinde  urbe  manemus,  H.  S.  i,  5,  37,  in  the  Mamurras'  city  then 
forspent -we  sleep.  Particularly  common  with  dates:  as,  A.  Verginius  inde 
et  T.  Vetusius  consulatum  ineunt,  L.  2,  28,  i,  then  Verginius  and  Vetusius 
enter  on  the  consulship.  M.  Silano  L.  Norbano  consulibus  Germanicus 
Aegyptum  proficiscitur,  Ta.  2,  59,  in  the  consulship  of  Silanus  and  Norbanus, 
Germanicus  leaves  for  Egypt. 

1592.  Verbs  of  hearing,  seeing,  and  saying  are  often  put  in  the  present, 
even  when  they  refer  to  action  really  past :  aSj, 

audio  Valerium  Martialem  decessisse,  Plin.  Ep.  3,  21,  I,  /  hear  that 
Martial  is  dead,  i.  e.  the  epigrammatist,  102  A.  D.  Particularly  of  things  men- 
tioned in  books,  or  in  quoting  what  an  author  says:  as,  Hercyniam  silvam, 
quam  Eratostheni  notam  esse  video,  6,  24,  2,  the  Hercynian  forest,  which 
I  see  was  known  to  Eratosthenes.  Plato  '  escam  malorum  '  appellat  vo- 
luptatem,  CM.  44,  Plato  calls  pleasure  the  '  bait  of  sin? 

1593.  The  present  is  sometimes  loosely  used  of  future  action  :  as, 

eras  est  mih!  indicium,  T.  Eti.  338,  tomorrow  I've  a  case  in  court. 
ego  sycophantam  iarn  conduce  de  foro,  PI.  Tri.  8i$,for  me,  a  sharper 
from  the  market  place  I'll  straight  engage,  quam  mox  inruimus  ?  T.  Eu. 
788,  how  soon  do  we  pitch  in  ?  This  present  is  also  used  in  subordinate  sen- 
tences with  antequam  and  priusquam  (1912,  1915),  with  dum,  until  (2006), 
and  sometimes  with  si. 

THE  IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

1594.  The  imperfect  indicative  represents  action  as 
going  on  in  past  time  :  as, 

scribebam,  /  was  writing,  or  7  wrote,  ei  mini  qualis  erat,  V.  2,  274, 
woe's  me,  how  ghastly  he  appeared,  multosque  per  annos  errabant  act! 
fatis,  V.  I,  31,  and  they  for  many  a  year  were  roaming  round,  by  fates  pursued. 

1595.  The  imperfect  often  denotes  past  action  lasting  while 
something  else  occurred  :  as, 

an  turn  eras  consul,  cum  mea  domus  ardebat?  Pis.  26,  were  you  per- 
haps consul  at  the  time  my  house  was  burning  down  ?  neque  veto  turn 
ignorabat  se  ad  exquisita  supplicia  proficisci,  Off.  3,  100,  and  all  the 
time  he  knew  perfectly  well  that  he  was  starting  off  to  suffer  studied  torments. 

1596.  The  imperfect  is  used  to  denote  repeated  or  customary 
past  action  or  condition  :  as, 

commentabar  declamitans  cotidie,  Br.  310,  I  always  practised  speaking 
my  compositions  every  day.  noctu  ambulabat  in  publics  Themistocles, 
TD.  4,  44,  Themistocles  used  to  promenade  the  streets  nights. 

269 


1 5 9  7~ 1 603.]     Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1597.  The  imperfect,  when  accompanied  by  some  expression  of 
duration  of  time,  is  used  to  denote  action  which  had  been  going  on  for 
some  time,  and  was  still  going  on. 

This  imperfect,  which  is  translated  by  the  English  pluperfect,  is  analo- 
gous to  the  present  in  1589:  as,  pater  grandis  natu  iam  diu  lecto  teneba- 
tur,  V.  5,  16,  his  aged  father  had  long  been  bedridden,  horam  amplius  iam 
permulti  homines  moliebantur,  V.  4,  95,  something  over  an  hour  a  good 
many  men  had  been  prizing  away.  But  if  the  action  is  conceived  as  completed 
at  a  past  time,  the  pluperfect  is  used  :  as,  diem  iam  quintum  cib5  caruerat, 
6,  38,  i,  four  whole  days  he  had  gone  without  eating. 

1598.  In  a  few  examples,  the  imperfect  is  used  to  denote  action  suddenly  recog- 
nized, though  going  on  before :  as,  ehem,  Parmeno,  tun  hie  eras  ?  T.  Hec.  340, 
•why  bless  me,  Parmeno,  were  you  here  all  this  time  ? 

1599.  In  descriptions  of  place  or  in  general  truths,  where  the  present  might  be 
expected,  the  imperfect  is  sometimes  used,  by  assimilation  to  past  action  in  the  con- 
text :  as,  ipsum  erat  oppidum  Alesia  in  colle  summo,  7,  69,  i,  Alesia proper 
•was  situated  on  the  top  of  a  hilL     Often  also  in  subordinate  sentences. 

1600.  For  the  imperfect  indicative  of  certain  verbs  relating  to  action  not  per- 
formed at  the  present  time,  see  1497  ;  for  the  conative  use,  see  2302. 

1601.  In  letters,  the  imperfect  may  denote  action  at  the  time  of  writipg, 
the  writer  transferring  himself  to  the  time  of  the  reader :  as, 

haec  tibi  dictabam  post  fanurn  putre  Vacunae,  H.  E.  i,  10,  49,  I  dic- 
tate this  for  thee  behind  Vacuna's  crumbling  shrine,  nihil  habebam  quod 
scriberem,  Att.  9,  10,  I,  /  have  nothing  to  write.  Similarly  in  the  delivery 
of  messages :  as,  scribae  orabant,  H.  S.  2,  6,  36,  the  clerks  request.^  The 
present,  however,  is  very  often  used  where  the  imperfect  would  be  applicable. 
Compare  1616. 

THE  PERFECT  TENSE. 

1602.  The  Latin  perfect  indicative  represents  two  English  tenses :  thus, 
the  preterite,  /  wrote,  and  the  perfect,  I  have  written,  are  both  expressed  by 
the  perfect  scrips!.     In  the  first  sense,  this  perfect  is  called  the  Historical 
Perfect ;  in  the  second  sense,  it  is  called  the  Perfect  Definite. 

THE  HISTORICAL  PERFECT. 

1603.  The  historical  perfect  simply  expresses  action 
as  having  occurred  at  an  indefinite  past  time,  without 
implying  anything  as  to  the  duration  of  the  action :  as, 

scrips!,  I  wrote,  veni,  vldi,  vie!,  Caesar  in  Suet.  lul.  37,  came,  saw,  over- 
came, apud  Helvetica  longe  nobilissimus  fuit  Orgetorix,  i,  2,  i,  among 
the  Helvetians,  the  man  of  highest  birth  by  all  odds  was  Orgetorix.  Diodorus 
prope  triennium  domo  caruit,  V.  4,  41,  for  nearly  three  years  Diodorus  had 
to  keep  away  from  home,  in  Graecia  music!  floruerunt,  discebantque  id 
omnes,  TD,  I,  4,  in  Greece  musicians  stood  high,  and  everybody  studied  the 
art  (1596), 


The  Verb:  Tense.          [1604-1610. 


1604.  It  may  be  mentioned  here,  that  in  subordinate  sentences  the  historical  per- 
fect is  sometimes  loosely  used  from  the  writer's  point  of  view,  instead  of  the  more 
exact  pluperfect  demanded  by  the  context  :  as,  aliquantum  spatii  ex  eo  loco, 
ub!  pugnatum  est,  aufugerat,  L.  i,  25,8,^  had  run  off  some  distance  from 
the  spot  -where  the  fighting  had  occurred.  See  1925, 


THE  PERFECT  DEFINITE. 

1605.  The  perfect  definite  expresses  action  which  is 
already  completed  at  the  present  time,  and  the  effects 
of  which  are  regarded  as  continuing  :  as, 

scripsi,  I  have  -written,  dixerunt,  Clu.  73,  dixere,  Quintil.  I,  5,  43,  they 
have  finished  speaking,  spectatores,  fabula  haec  est  acta,  PI.  Most.  1181, 
ladies  and  gentlemen,  this  play  is  done. 

1606.  In  old  Latin,  habeo  with  the  perfect  participle  is  sometimes  equivalent  to 
a  periphrastic  perfect:  as,  ilia  omnia  missa  habeo,  PI.  Ps.  602,  I've  dropped 
all  that,  i.  e.  misi.     But  in  classical  Latin,  the  participle  and  a  tense  of  habeo  are 
more  or  less  distinct  in  their  force  :  as,  Caesar  aciem  instructam  habuit,  i, 
48,3,  Caesar  kept  his  line  drawn  up,  not  had  drawn  up.     Compare  2297. 

1607.  With  verbs  of  inceptive  meaning  the  perfect  definite  is  equivalent 
to  the  English  present :  as, 

consists,  take  my  stand,  constiti,  stand,  consuesco,  get  used,  consuevi, 
am  used,  nosco,  learn,  novi,  know.  Similarly  mernini,  remember,  and  odi, 
hate.  The  pluperfect  of  such  verbs  is  represented  by  the  English  imperfect, 
and  the  future  perfect  by  the  English  future. 

1608.  The  perfect  often  denotes  a  present  resulting  state:   as,  vicine,  peril, 
interii,  PI.  Most.  1031,  my  neighbour,  I  am  dead  and  gone.     Particularly  in  the 
passive  voice :  as,  Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres,  i,  i,  i,  Gaul,  includ- 
ing everything  under  the  name,  is  divided  into  three  parts.     Compare  1615. 

1609.  In  the  perfect  passive,  forms  of  ful,  &c.,  are  sometimes  used  to  represent 
a  state  no  longer  existing :  as,  monuments  statua  superimposita  fuit,  quam 
deiectam  nuper  vidimus  ipsi,  L.  38,  56,  3,  on  the  monument  there  once  stood 

a  statue  which  I  saw  not  long  ago  with  my  own  eyes,  lying  flat  on  the  ground.  Sim- 
ilarly, in  the  pluperfect,  fueram,  &c. :  as,  arma  quae  fixa  in  parietibus  fue- 
rant,  ea  sunt  hum!  inventa,  Div.  i,  74,  the  arms  which  had  once  been  fastened 
on  the  walls  were  found  on  the  floor.  Sometimes,  however,  forms  of  fui,  &c., 
fueram,  &c.,  and  fuero,  &c.,  are  used  by  Plautus,  Cicero,  especially  in  his  letters, 
Nepos,  Sallust,  and  particularly  Livy,  in  passives  and  deponents,  quite  in  the  sense  of 
sum,  &c. 

1610.  The  perfect   of  some  verbs   may  imply  a  negative  idea  emphatically  by 
understatement,  as : 

fuit  Ilium,  V.  2,  325,  Ilium  has  been,  i.e.  Ilium  is  no  more,  viximus, 
floruimus,  Fam.  14,  4.  5,  we  have  lived  our  life,  we  have  had  our  day.  filium 
unicum  adulescentulum  habeS.  ah,  quid  dixi?  habere  me  ?  immo  ha- 
bui,  T.  Hau.  93,  /  have  one  only  son,  a  growing  boy.  Ah  me,  what  did  I  say, 
I  have  ?  Oh  no,  have  had. 

27i 


1 6 1 1  - 1 6 1 6.]     Sentences :   The  Simple  Sentence. 


1611.  The  perfect  may  denote  an  action  often  done,  or  never  done  :  as, 
iam  saepe  homines  patriam  carosque  parentes  prodiderunt,  Lucr. 

3,  85,  time  and  again  have  men  their  land  betrayed  and  parents  dear,  non 
aeris  acervus  et  auri  deduxit  corpore  febris,  H.  E.  i,  2,  47,  no  pile  of 
brass  and  gold  hath  fevers  from  the  body  drawn,  multi,  cum  obesse  vellent, 
prSfuerunt  et,  cum  prodesse,  obfuerunt,  DN.  3,  70,  many  a  man  has  done 
good,  when  he  meant  to  do  harm,  and  when  he  meant  to  do  good,  has  done  harm. 
Common  from  Cicero,  Sallust,  and  Catullus  on,  especially  in  poetry. 

1612.  The  perfect  is  sometimes  used  as  a  lively  future  perfect  to  express 
completed  future  action  :  as, 

quam  mox  coctumst  prandium  ?  PI.  7^.342,  how  soon  is  lunch  all  cooked? 
cui  si  esse  in  urbe  licebit,  vicimus,  Att.  14,  20,  3,  if  he  shall  be  allowed  to 
stay  in  town,  the  day  is  ours,  peril,  si  me  aspexerit,  PI.  Am.  320,  I'm  gone, 
if  he  lays  eyes  on  me. 

1613.  It  may  be  mentioned  here,  that  the  perfect  is  regularly  used  in  a 
subordinate  sentence  denoting  time  anterior  to  a  present  of  repeated  action 
(1588).     In  such  sentences  the  present  is  preferred  in  English  :  as, 

reliqui,  qui  domi  manserunt,  se  atque  illos  alunt,  4,  i,  5,  the  others, 
that  stay  at  home,  always  support  themselves  and  the  above-mentioned  also  si 
qui  aut  privatus  aut  populus  eorum  decreto  non  stetit,  sacrifices  in- 
terdicunt,  6,  13,  6,  if  any  man  or  any  community  does  not  abide  by  their  decree, 
they  always  debar  them  from  sacrifices.  So  also  with  quom  or  cum,  quo- 
tiens,  simul  atque,  ubf.  Compare  1618. 

THE  PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 

1614.  The  pluperfect  indicative   expresses  past  ac- 
tion, completed  before  another  past  action  expressed  or 
understood  :  as, 

scripseram,  I  had  written.  Pyrrhi  temporibus  iam  Apoll5  versus 
facere  desierat,  Div.  2,  116,  in  Pyrrhus's  day  Apollo  had  quite  given  up 
making  poetry,  mortuus  erat  Agis  rex.  filium  reliquerat  Leotychidem, 
N.  17,  I,  4,  Agis  the  king  had  died ;  he  had  left  a  son  Leotychides. 

1615.  The  pluperfect  often  expresses  a  past  resulting  state  :  as, 

castra  oportunis  locis  erant  posita,  7,  69,  7,  the  camp  was  pitched  on 
favourable  ground,  ita  uno  tempore  et  longas  naves  aestus  compleverat, 
et  onerarias  tempestas  adflictabat,  4,  29,  2,  thus  at  one  and  the  same  ttvu 
the  tide  had  filled  the  men-of-war,  and  the  gale  of  wind  kept  knocking  the  trans- 
ports about.  This  use  is  analogous  to  that  of  the  perfect  in  1608. 

1616.  In  letters,  the  pluperfect  is  sometimes  used  to  denote  action  occur- 
ring previous  to  the  time  of  writing,  the  writer  transferring  himself  to  the 
time  of  the  reader:  as, 

unam  adhuc  a  te  epistolam  accgperam,  Att.  7,  12,  i,  I  have  only  had 
one  letter  from  yoii  thus  far.  This  use  is  analogous  to  that  of  the  imperfect 
in  1601,  and  very  often,  where  this  pluperfect  would  be  applicable,  the  perfect 
is  used. 

272 


The  Verb  :    Tense.          [1617—1622. 


1617.  The  pluperfect  is  sometimes  used  where  the  perfect  would  be  expected. 
Particularly  so  when  it  anticipates  a  past  tense  to  follow  in  a  new  sentence :  as,  quod 
factum  primo  popularis  coniurationis  concusserat.  neque  tamen 
Catilinae  furor  mmuebatur,  S.  C.  24,  i ,  this  terrified  tke  conspirators  atjirst  ; 
and  yet  Catiline's  frenzy  -was  not  getting  abated.  Verbs  of  saying  are  also  often  put 
in  the  pluperfect  in  subordinate  sentences  referring  to  a  preceding  statement  :  as, 
Epidamniensis  ille,  quem  dudum  dixeram,  adoptat  ilium  puerum  sur- 
rupticium,  PI.  Men.  prol.  57,  said  man  of  Epidamnus  that  I  named  erewhile 
adopts  said  kidnapped  boy. 

1618.  It  may  be  mentioned  here,  that  the  pluperfect  is  used  in  a  subordi- 
nate sentence  denoting  time  anterior  to  a  past  tense  of  repeated  action.  In 
such  sentences  the  preterite  is  preferred  in  English  :  as, 

hostes  ub!  aliquSs  singulares  conspexerant,  incitatis  equis  adorie- 
bantur,  4,  26,  2,  every  time  the  enemy  caught  sight  of  detached  parties,  they  would 
always  charge  full  gallop.  Compare  the  analogous  perfect  in  1613. 

THE  FUTURE  TENSE. 

1619.  The  future  indicative  expresses  future  action, 
either  momentary  or  continuous:  as, 

scribam,  I  shall  write,  I  shall  be  writing,  or  I  will  write,  I  will  be  writing. 
The  future  commonly  expresses  either  prediction,  or  will,  determination, 
promise,  threat :  as,  (a.)  tuas  litteras  exspectabo,  Att.  5,  7,  I  shall  be  on  the 
lookout  for  letters  from  you.  (b  )  vivum  te  non  relinquam  ;  moriere  virgis, 
V.  4,  85,  I  will  not  leave  you  alive  ;  you  shall  die  under  the  rod.  But  separate 
forms  to  mark  the  sharp  distinction  which  exists  between  shall  and  will  in 
the  English  future  and  future  perfect  are  utterly  unknown  in  Latin :  thus,  in 
occidar  equidem,  sed  victus  non  peribo,  Cornif.  4,  65, 1  shall  be  murdered, 
to  be  sure,  but  I  will  not  die  a  vanquished  man,  the  difference  between  the 
prediction  contained  in  I  shall,  and  the  determination  contained  in  I  will, 
cannot  be  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  future  indicative. 

1620.  The  future  is  often  used  in  diffident  assertion,  to  express  an  as- 
sumption, a  belief,  conviction,  or  concession,  of  the  speaker  himself,  without 
implying  its  universal  acceptance  :  as,  C — • 

dices,  TD.  2,  60,  you  will  say.  dlcet  aliquis,  TD.  3,  46,  somebody  will 
say  (1556).  dabit  hoc  ZenSm  Polemo,  Fin.  4,  51,  Polemo  will  concede  this 
point  to  Zeno.  excudent  alii  spirantia  mollius  aera,  credo  equidem,  V.  6, 
847,  with  greater  grace,  I  well  believe,  shall  others  shape  the  bronze  that  breathes. 
Particularly  in  conclusions :  as,  sequetur  igitur  vel  ad  supplicium  beata 
vita  virtutem,  TD.  5,  87,  happiness  then  will  walk  with  goodness  even  to  the 
scaffold.  Or  in  general  truths :  as,  cantabit  vacuus  coram  latrone  viator, 
J.  10,  22,  the  poure  man  whan  he  goth  by  the  weye,  bifore  the  theves  he  may 
synge  and  pleye. 

1621.  The  future  sometimes  predicts  that  a  thing  not  yet  known  to  be  true  will 
prove  to  be  true :  as,  haec  erit  bono  genere  nata,  PI.  Per.  645,  this  maid,  you '// 
find,  is  come  of  honest  stock,  i.  e.   esse  reperietur.     Compare  the  imperfect  in 
1598. 

1622.  In  Plautus  and  Terence,  the  future  is  sometimes  used  in  protestations, 

wishes,  or  thanks:  as,  ita  me  di  amabunt,  T.  Hau.  749,  so  hcip  me  heaven,  di 
te  amabunt,  PI.  Men.  278,  the  gods  shall  bless  thee.  Usually,  however,  the  sub- 
junctive:  see  1542  and  1541. 

18  273 


1623-1629.]      Sentences :    The  Simple  Sentence. 


1623.  The  future  is  sometimes  used  in  questions  of  deliberation  or  appeal :  as, 
dedemus  ergo  Hannibalem  ?  L.  21, 10,  1 1,  are  we  then  to  surrender  Hannibal! 
hancine  ego  ad  rem  natam  memorabp?  PI.  R.  188,  am  I  to  say  that  I  was 
born  for  such  a  fate?     Oftener  the  present  subjunctive  (1563),  or  sometimes  the  pres- 
ent indicative  (1531). 

1624.  The  future  is  sometimes  used,  particularly  in  the  second  person, 
to  express  an  exhortation,  a  direction,  a  request,  a  command,  or  with  non 
a  prohibition :  as, 

eras  ferramenta  Teanum  tolletis,  H.  E.  i,  i,  86,  tomorrow  to  Teanum 
you  will  take  your  tools,  bona  venia  me  audies,  DN.  i,  59,  you  -will  listen 
to  me  with  kind  indulgence,  tu  interea  non  cessabis,  Fam.  5,  12,  10,  mean- 
time you  will  not  be  inactive,  haec  igitur  tib!  erunt  curae,  Fam.  3,  9,  4, 
vou  will  attend  to  this  then,  i.  e.  haec  curabis. 

1625.  It  may  be  mentioned  here,  that  the  future  is  used  in  sentences  sub- 
ordinate to  a  future,  an  imperative,  or  a  subjunctive  implying  a  future  :  as, 

profecto  nihil  accipiam  iniuriae,  si  tu  aderis,  Att.  5,  18,  3,  I  am  sure 
f  shall  suffer  no  harm,  if  you  are  with  me.  ut  rned  esse  voles,  ita  ero,  PI. 
Ps.  239,  as  you  will  have  me  be,  so  will  I  be.  ut  is  qui  audiet,  cogitet  plura, 
quam  videat,  DO.  2,  242,  so  that  the  hearer  may  imagine  more  than  he  sees. 
But  sometimes  a  present  is  used  (1593). 

THE  FUTURE  PERFECT  TENSE. 

1626.  The  future  perfect  indicative  expresses  com- 
pleted future  action :  as, 

scripsero,  I  shall  have  written,  or  I  will  have  written.  The  future  perfect 
is  very  common  in  Latin,  particularly  in  protasis  with  a  relative,  with  cum, 
ubf,  &c.,  with  antequam  or  priusquam,  with  ut  (.  .  .  ita),  as  (...  .  so),  or 
with  si,  to  express  action  anterior  in  time  to  a  future ;  in  English,  this  future 
perfect  is  usually  represented  by  a  loose  present  or  perfect :  as,  quicquid 
feceris,  adprobabo,  Fam.  3,  3,  2,  whatever  you  do,  I  shall  think  right. 
Examples  will  be  given  further  on,  in  speaking  of  the  complex  sentence. 

1627.  It  may  be  mentioned  here  that  the  future  perfect  in  protasis  and 
apodosis  both   denotes  two  actions  occurring  at  one  and  the  same  time ; 
these  actions  are  usually  identical :  as, 

qui  Antonium  oppresserit,  is  hoc  bellum  taeterrimum  confecerit, 
Fam.  10,  19,  2,  the  man  that  ptits  down  Antony  will  put  an  end  to  this  cruel 
war,  i.  e.  putting  down  Antony  will  be  ending  the  war.  respiraro,  si  te 
videro,  Att.  2,  24,  5, 1  shall  take  breath  again,  if  I  set  eyes  on  you. 

1628.  The  future  perfect  sometimes  denotes  a  future  resulting  state  :  as, 
molestus  certe  ei  fuero,  T.  Andr.  641,  at  all  events  I  shall  have  proved  a 

bane  to  him.     meum  rfii  publicae  atque  imperatori  officium  praestitero, 
4,  25,  3,  I  will  have  my  duty  all  done  to  country  and  commander  toe, 

1629.  The  future  perfect  is  sometimes  used  to  express  rapidity  of  future 
action,  often  with  the  implication  of  assurance,  promise,  or  threat:  as, 

abiero,  PI.  Mo"i.  590,  /'//  instantly  be  gone,  iam  hue  reverero,  PI.  MG. 
863,  B.  1066,  /'//  be  back  he' c  again  forthwith,  primus  impetus  castra 
ceperit,  L.  25,  38,  i/,  the  firoi  rush  will  see  the  cam-to  carried. 

274 


The  Verb:   Tense.          [1630-1635. 


1630.  The  future  perfect  often  denotes  action  postponed  to  a  more  con- 
venient season,  or  thrown  upon  another  person. 

Often  thus  with  post,  alias,  and  particularly  mox:  as,  vobis  post  nar- 
ravero,  PI.  Ps.  721,  /'//  tell  you  by  and  by,  i.  e.  I  won't  tell  you  now.  ad 
fratrem  mox  lero,  PI.  Cap.  194,  /'//  to  my  brother's  by  and  by,  i.  e.  not  yet 
fuerit  ista  eius  deliberatio,  L.  i,  23,  8,  that  is  a  question  for  him  to  settle, 
i.e.  not  me.  Especially  videro :  as,  quae  fuerit  causa,  mox  videro,  Fin. 
i,  35,  what  the  reason  was,  I  won't  consider  now.  recte  secusne  alias  vide- 
rimus,  Ac.  2,  135,  whether  right  or  not,  we  will  consider  some  other  time,  i.  e. 
never,  vos  videritis,  L.  i,  58,  10,  that  is  a  question  for  you,  i.e.  not  me. 

1631.  The  future  perfect  sometimes  denotes  action  which  will  have  oc- 
curred while  something  else  takes  place  :  as, 

non  er5  vobis  morae  :  tibicen  vos  interea  hie  delectaverit,  PI.  Ps. 
573%  f  will  ft°t  keep  you  long  ;  meantime  the  piper  will  have  entertained  you 
here,  tu  invlta  mulieres,  ego  accivero  pueros,  Att.  5,  i,  3,  do  you,  sir,  in- 
vite the  ladies,  and  I  will  meantime  have  fetched  the  children. 

1632.  The  future  perfect  is  often  not  perceptibly  different  from  the  future, 
especially  in  the  first  person  singular  in  old  Latin  :  as, 

ego  mini  prSvidero,  PL  Most.  526,  /'//  look  out  for  myself.  er5s  in 
obsidione  linquet,  inimicum  animos  auxerit,  PI.  As.  280,  he'll  leave  his 
owners  in  a  state  of  siege,  he  '//  swell  the  courage  of  the  enemy.  Similarly  Cicero, 
in  the  protases  si  potuero,  si  voluero,  si  licuerit,  si  placuerit. 


THE  FUTURE  ACTIVE  PARTICIPLE  WITH  sum. 

1633.  The  future  active  participle  combined  with  the  tenses  of 
sum  expresses  action  impending,  resolved  on,  or  destined,  at  the  time 
indicated  by  the  tense  of  the  verb:  as, 

cum  hoc  equite  pugnaturi  estis,  L.  21,40,  10,  with  this  kind  of  cavalry 
are  you  going  to  fight,  bellum  scripturus  sum,  quod  populus  Romanus 
cum  lugurtha  gessit,  Sail.  /  5,  i,  I  purpose  to  write  the  history  of  the  war 
that  the  people  of  Rome  carried  on  with  Jugurtha.  fiet  illud,  quod  futurum 
est,  Div.  2,  21,  whatever  is  destined  to  be,  will  be.  Delphos  petiit,  ubl  co- 
lumnas,  quibus  imposituri  statuas  regis  Persei  fuerant,  suis  statuis 
destinavit,  L.  45,  27,  6,  he  went  to  Delphi,  where  he  appropriated  for  his  own 
statues  the  pillars  on  which  they  had  intended  to  put  statues  of  king  Perses. 


THE  TENSES   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1634.  In  simple  sentences,  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  correspond  in 
general  to  the  same  tenses  of  the  indicative.     But  the  present  has  a  future 
meaning  ;  the  imperfect  sometimes  expresses  past,  sometimes  present  action; 
and  the  perfect  sometimes  expresses  past  action,  and  sometimes  future  action. 

1635.  The  present  subjunctive  is  sometimes  used  in  reference  to  past  action,  like 
the  indicative  present  of  vivid  narration  (1590)  ••  as,  migrantis  cernas,  V.  4,  401, 
you  can  descry  them  swarming  out  (1556).     comprehend!  iussit ;  quis  non 
pertimescat  ?   V.  5,  14,  he  ordered  them  to  be  arrested ;  -who  "would  not  be  thor- 
oughly scared?  (1565).    See  also  2075. 

275 


1636—1641.]   Sentences:   The  Coordinate  Sentence. 


THE  COMPOUND   SENTENCE,  OR  COORDINATION. 

1636.  Two  or  more   independent  simple  sentences 
may  be  coordinated  to  form  a  compound  sentence  in 
one  of  two  ways :  either  without  a  connective,  or  with 
a  connective. 

What  applies  to  the  coordination  of  sentences,  also  applies  to  the 
coordination  of  the  parts  of  sentences  in  abridged  sentences  (1057). 

(A.)     WITHOUT  A  CONNECTIVE. 

1637.  When  simple  sentences  or  parts  of  sentences  are  co- 
ordinated without  any  connective,  this  mode  of  arrangement  is 
called  Asyndetic  Coordination  or  Asyndeton. 

Asyndeton,  whether  in  unabridged  or  in  abridged  sentences,  is  more  usual 
with  three  or  more  members  than  with  two.  It  occurs  particularly  often  in 
Plautus,  Terence,  Ennius,  and  Cato,  also  in  Cicero,  especially  in  his  early 
works  and  letters. 

1638.  The  sentences  in  which  asyndeton  occurs  are  commonly  such  as 
might  be  connected  by  words  meaning  and  or  but ;  less  often  by  words 
meaning  as, for,  &c.     Asyndeton  is  especially  common: 

1639.  («.)  In  animated  narration  of  events  happening  at  the  same 
moment,  in  description,  and  in  climaxes.     Also  in  mention  of  col- 
leagues in  office,  and  in  many  set  phrases  and  formulas  :  as, 

veni,  vidi,  vici,  Caesar  in  Suet.  lul.  37,  came,  saw,  overcame,  nostri  ce- 
leriter  ad  arma  concurrunt,  vallum  conscendunt,  5,  39,  3,  our  men  rusk 
speedily  to  arms,  clamber  up  the  palisade,  huic  s.  c.  intercessit  C,  Caelius, 
C.  Pansa,  tribuni  pi.,  Fam.  8,  8,  7,  this  decree  of  the  senate  was  objected  to  by 
Caelius  and  Pansa,  tribunes  of  the  commons,  hi  ferre  agere  plebem,  L.  3, 
37,  7,  there  -were  these  people  worrying  and  harrying  the  commons  (1535). 

1640.  (£.)  In  contrasts  or  antitheses  :  as, 

opinionis  commenta  delet  dies,  naturae  iudicia  confirmat,  DN.  2, 

5,  the  fictions  of  speculation  are  swept  away  by  time,  but  the  judgements  of  nature 
are  confirmed.  Particularly  when  either  member  is  positive,  the  other  nega- 
tive :  vincere  scis,  Hannibal,  vict5ria  uti  nescis,  L.  22,  51,  A,,  you  know 
how  to  conquer,  Hannibal,  but  not  how  to  use  victory,  says  Maharbal  after 
Cannae,  216  B.  c. 

1641.  Asyndeton  is  very  common  with  two  or  more  imperatives:  as,  egredere 
ex  urbe,  Catilina,  libera  rem  publicam  metu,  in  exsilium  proficiscere, 

C.  i,  20,  go  forth  from  Rome,  Catiline,  relieve  the  commonwealth  from  its  fear,  depart 
into  exile.  Particularly  when  the  first  is  age,  come  on,  mark  me,  or  i,  go  (1572). 
Rut  from  Horace  on,  i  nunc,  go  to  now,  is  followed  by  et  with  a  second  imperative 
in  derisive  orders.  In  old  Latin,  the  imperatives  may  be  joined  by  et  or  even  atqUe. 

276 


Copulative  Coordination.     [1642-1647. 


1642.  Asyndeton  is  also  common  with  parentheses.     These  often  take  the  place 
of  a  modern  foot-note:  as,  legatus  capita  velato  filo  (lanae  velamen  est) 
'  audi,   luppiter,'   inquit,  L.  i,  32,  6,  the  envoy  with  his  head  covered  with  a 
ijiinin  '  (that  is  to  say  a  wrap  of  wool)  says  '•bow  down  thine  ear,  Jupiter.'1     Paren- 
theses however  are  often  introduced,  from  Terence  on  by  nam,  and  from  Sallust  and 
Cicero  on,  by  et,  neque,  autem,  enim,  &c. 

(B.)     WITH  A  CONNECTIVE. 

(i.)    CONJUNCTIONS   AS   CONNECTIVES. 

1643.  Simple  sentences  or  parts  of  sentences  may  be  con- 
nected by  copulative,  disjunctive,  or  adversative  conjunctions. 

(a.)     COPULATIVE  CONJUNCTIONS. 

1644.  Copulative    conjunctions   denote   union,   and  connect 
both  the   sentences    and    their    meaning.     They  are  et,  -que, 
atque  or  ac,  and,  and  neque  or  nee,  neither. 

1645.  (i.)  et,  and,  is  the  commonest  copulative,  and  connects  ei- 
ther likes  or  unlikes  ;  with  two  members  only,  it  is  either  used  between 
them,  or  is  prefixed  for  emphasis  to  both  :  as, 

Dumnorix  apud  SequanSs  plurimum  poterat  et  Helvetiis  erat  ami- 
CUS,  I,  9,  3,  Dumnorix  was  very  influential  among  the  Sequani  and  a  friend 
to  tlic  Helvetians.  Democritus  alba  discernere  et  atra  non  poterat,  TD. 
5,  114,  Democritus  could  not  tell  white  and  black  apart,  et  discipulus  et 
magister  perhibebantur  inprobi,  PI.  B.  425,  both  pupil  and  master  were 
rated  as  knaves. 

1646.  With  three  or.more  members,  et  is  either  usad  between  the  mem- 
bers   or,    frequently,   prefixed   for    emphasis   to  all.     Often,  however,  it  is 
omitted  throughout  (1637),  or  a  third  member  is  appended  by  -que  (1651): 
as, 

persuadent  Rauricis  et  Tulingis  et  Latovicis  uti  una  cum  his  profi- 
ciscantur,  i,  5,  4,  they  induce  the  Rauricans,  Tulingatis,  and  Latovicans  to 
join  them  in  their  march,  is  et  in  custodiam  elves  Romanes  dedit  et 
supplicationem  mih!  decrevit  et  indices  maximis  praemiis  adfecit,  C. 
4,  10,  this  person  voted  in  the  first  place  to  put  Roman  citizens  in  ward,  then 
to  decree  a  thanksgiving  in  my  honour,  and  lastly  to  reward  the  informers  with 
liberal  gifts. 

1647.  Two  members  belonging  closely  together  as  a  pair,  and  connected 
by  et,  atque,  or  -que,  are  sometimes  put  asyndetically  with  another  member 
or  members  :  as, 

Aedui  ferunt  se  deiectos  principatu ;  queruntur  fortunae  commu- 
tationem  et  Caesaris  indulgentiam  in  se  requirunt,  7,  63,  8,  the  Aeduans 
set  forth  that  they  were  cast  down  from  the  chief  place ;  they  complain  of  the 
change  of  fortune,  and  say  they  miss  Caesar 's  former  kindness  to  them,  nun- 
tiatum  est  equites  Ariovisti  propius  tumulum  accedere  et  ad  nostros 
adequitare  ;  lapides  in  nostros  conicere,  r,  46,  I,  //  was  reported  that  Aria- 
visttts's  cavalry  were  moving  nearer  the  hillock  and  galloping  up  to  the  Romans  ; 
that  they  were  throwing  stones  at  our  men. 

277 


1648-1654-]   Sentences:   The  Coordinate  Sentence. 


1648.  et  has  sometimes  the  meaning  of  also  or  of  and  also,  particularly  when  there 
is  a  change  of  speakers,  or  before  a  pronoun  :  as,  et  hoc  scio,  Plin.  Ep.  i,  12,  11,  / 
know  that  too.  Sometimes  also  after  verum,  narn,  and  simul,  especially  when  a 
pronoun  follows.  Not  in  Caesar. 

1649*  (2<)  "(lue»  and,  combines  members  which  belong  together 
and  make  a  whole,  though  they  may  be  different  or  opposed  to  each 
other;  the  second  member  is  often  a  mere  appendage  :  as, 

rogat  oratque  te,  RA.  144,  he  begs  and  entreats  you,  or  he  earnestly  entreats 
you.  liberti  servolique  ndbilium,  RA.  141,  the  freedmen  and  slaves  of 
the  great,  or  retainers,  bond  and  free,  omnes  ea,  quae  bona  videntur, 
sequuntur  fugiuntque  contraria,  TD.  4,  12,  everybody  runs  after  what  seems 
good  and  avoids  the  opposite,  -que  is  usually  put  after  the  first  word  of  the 
new  member.  It  is  particularly  common  in  old  or  legal  style. 

1650.  The  combination  -que  .  .  .  -que,  both  .  .  .  and,  is  very  common  in  poetry  : 
as,  noctesque  diesque,  E.  in  CM.  i,  both  night  and  day.     In  prose,  it  is  used 
by  Sallust  when  the  first  word  is  a  pronoun  :  as,  meque  regnumque  meum, 
/.  10,  2,  both  myself  and  my  throne  :  and  by  Livy  to  connect  two  relative  sentences: 
as.  omnes  quique  Romae  quique  in  exercitu  erant,  22,  26,  5,  everybody, 
both  people  in  Rome  and  people  in  the  army. 

1651.  After  two  members  without  a  connective,  a  third  member  is  some- 
times appended  by  -que  :  as, 

satis  habebat  hostem  rapinis,  pabulationibus,  populationibusque 
prohibere,  I,  15,  4,  he  was  satisfied  with  keeping  the  enemy  from  plundering, 
foraging,  and  ravaging. 

1652.  (3.)  atque,  or  before  any  consonant  except  h  often  ac,  and, 
and  besides,  adds  something  belonging  essentially  to  what  goes  before, 
but  more  important  as  a  supplement  or  extension  ;  as, 

se  ex  navi  proiecit  atque  in  hostes  aquilam  ferre  coepit,  4,  25,  4,  he 
sprang  overboard  and  furthermore  proceeded  to  bear  the  eagle  upon  the  enemy. 
magna  dis  immortalibus  habenda  est  atque  huic  lovi  Statori  gratia, 
C.  i,  II,  we  owe  a  great  debt  of  gratitude  to  the  gods  immortal  in  general,  and  to 
yon  Jove  the  Stayer  in  particular,  atque  .  .  .  atque  occurs  for  et  .  .  .  et 
once  in  Vergil,  and  once  in  Silius  Italicus. 

1653.  atque  is  used  in  comparisons,  after  words  of  likeness  and  unlike- 
ness:  as, 

pari  spatio  transmissus,  atque  ex  Gallia  est  in  Britanniam,  5,  13,  2, 
the  journey  across  is  just  as  long  as  it  is  from  Gaul  to  Britain,  idemque  ius- 
serunt  simulacrum  lovis  facere  maius  et  contra,  atque  antea  fuerat, 
ad  orientem  convertere,  C.  3,  20,  and  they  furthermore  gave  orders  to  make 
a  statue  of  yupiter,  a  bigger  one,  and  to  turn  it  round  to  the  east,  the  opposite  of 
the  way  it  originally  faced.  Sometimes  et  is  thus  used  after  alius,  aliter, 
aeque,  pariter,  &c.  :  see  the  dictionary. 

1654.  With  adjectives  and  adverbs  in  the  comparative  degree,  atque  sometimes 
takes  the  place  of  quam   than,  when  the  first  member  of  comparison  is  negative 
(1895)  :  as,   amicior  mini  nullus  vivit  atque  is  est,  PI.  Mer.  897,  1  have  no 


greater  friend  alive  than  that  man  is.     So  in  Plautus,  Terence,  Lucretius,  Catullus, 
Vergil,  rarely  in  Cic 


Cicero,  and  in  Horace  even  when  the  first  member  is  positive. 


Copulative  Coordination.     [1655—1661. 


1655.  A  sentence  is  often  introduced  by  et,  -que,  or  atque,  where  but 
would  be  used  in  English,  particularly  so  when  a  positive  sentence  follows 
a  negative  one  :  as, 

SScrates  nee  patronum  quaesivit  nee  iudicibus  supplex  fuit  adhi- 
buitque  liberam  contumaciam,  TD.  I,  71,  Socrates  did  not  try  to  find  an 
advocate  nor  bow  tke  knee  to  his  judges,  but  he  was  plain-spoken  and  defiant 
nostrSrum  militum  impetum  hostes  ferre  non  potuerunt  ac  terga  ver- 
terunt,  4,  35,  2,  the  enemy  could  not  stand  the  dash  of  our  people,  but  turned 
their  backs,  hominis  ne  Graeci  quidem  ac  Mysi  potius,  QFr.  i,  I,  19, 
a  creature  who  is  not  even  a  Greek,  but  more  of  a  Mysian. 

1656.  Two  sentences,  one  of  which  would  ordinarily  be  introduced  by  a  subordinat- 
ing temporal  conjunction,  are  sometimes,  mostly  in  poetry,  coordinated  by  et  or  -que: 
as,  dixit  et  in  silvam  pennis  ablata  refugit,  V.  3,  258,  she  spake,  and  on  her 
pinions  sweeping,  vanished  to  the  wood,  i.  e.  simul  atque  dixit,  refugit. 

1657.  (4.)  neque  or  nee,  neither,  nor,  and .  .  .  not,  but .  .  .  not,  is 
used  as  a  negative  copulative,  sometimes  as  a  negative  adversative : 
as, 

opinionibus  volgl  rapimur  in  errorem  nee  vera  cernimus,  Leg.  2,  43, 
we  are  swept  into  error  by  the  delusions  of  the  world  and  cannot  make  out  the 
truth,  non  enim  temere  nee  fortulto  creati  sumus,  TD.  I,  118,  for  we 
were  not  created  at  adventiire  nor  by  accident,  subsidio  suis  ierunt  col- 
lemque  ceperunt,  neque  nostrorum  militum  impetum  sustinere  potu- 
erunt, 7,  62,  8,  they  went  to  aid  their  people  and  carried  the  hill,  but  they  could 
not  stand  the  fiery  onset  of  our  soldiers,  neque  or  nee  is  often  repeated:  as, 
nee  meliores  nee  beatiores  esse  possumus,  RP.  I,  32,  we  can  neither  be 
better  nor  wiser. 

1658.  nee  is  rarely  used  in  the  sense  of  ne  .  .  .  quidem,  not  even,  not .  .  .  ei- 
ther: as,  nee  nunc,  H.  S.  2,  3,  262,  not  even  now,  a  free  quotation  of  ne  nunc 
quidem,  T.  Eu.  46.     nee  .  . ".  quidem,  and  not  even,  is  used  once  or  twice  for 
the  common  ac  ne  .  .  .  quidem  or  et  ne  .  .  .  quidem. 

1659.  Instead  of  neque  or  nee,  and  not,  the  copulatives  et,  atque,  rarely 
-que,  followed  by  a  negative,  non,  nem5,  nihil,  &c.,  are  sometimes  used  in  Cicero 
and  Livy,  less  often  in  old  Latin,  and  rarely  in  Caesar  and  Sallust :    as,  quid  tu 
fecisses,  si  te  Tarentum  et  non  Samarobrivam  misissem  ?  Fam.  7,  12, 
i,  what  would  you  have  done,  if  I  had  sent  you  to   Tarentum,  and  not  to  Samaro- 
briva  ?     Particularly  thus  et  non,  or  oftener  ac  non,  in  corrections.     But  ordinarily 
neque  or  nee  is  preferred  to  et  non,  and  nee  quisquam,  &c.,  to  et  nemo, 
&c.  (1445). 

1660.  When  neque  is  followed  by  another  negative,  the  assertion  is 
positive  (1452) :  as, 

nee  hoc  ille  non  vidit,  Fin.  4,  60,  and  the  man  did  not  fail  to  see  this. 
This  positive  use  begins  with  Varro.  In  old  Latin  two  negatives,  and  partic- 
ularly neque  .  .  .  baud,  are  often  used,  as  in  old  English,  to  strengthen  the 
negation  (1453). 

1661.  After  a  general  negative,  a  word  may  be  emphasized  by  ne  .  .  . 
quidem  or  n5n  modo,  or  the  parts  of  a  compound  sentence  may  be  distrib- 
uted by  neque  .  .     neque,  without  destroying  the  negation:  as, 

279 


1 662-1 668.]  Sentences:   The  Coordinate  Sentence. 


nihil  in  locis  communibus,  ne  in  fanis  quidem,  nihil  istum  neque 
privati  neque  public!  tota  in  Sicilia  reliquisse,  V.  4,  2,  that  the  defendant 
has  left  nothing  untouched  in  public  places,  no,  not  even  in  the  temples,  nothing 
either  in  the  way  of  private  or  of  public  property ,  in  all  Sicily.  Similarly  when 
a  coordinate  member  is  appended  with  neque :  as,  nequeo  satis  mirari 
neque  conicere,  T.  Eu.  547, 1  can't  quite  puzzle  out  or  guess. 


COMBINATION  OF  DIFFERENT  COPULATIVES. 

1662.  Different  copulatives  are  sometimes  combined,  as  follows. 

1663.  (i.)  The  affirmative  copulatives  et  and  -que  are  sometimes  com- 
bined, particularly  in  abridged  sentences  :  as, 

et  Epammondas  praeclare  cecinisse  dicitur,  Themistoclesque  est 
habitus  indoctior,  TD,  i,  4,  Epaminondas  in  the  first  place  is  said  to  have 
played  beautifully,  and  Themistocles  was  not  considered  exactly  an  educated 

man.     This  combination  is  used  by  Cicero  rarely,  by  Horace  in  the  satires, 

and  rarely  by  late  writers. 

1664.  The  sequence  -que  .  .  .  et  is  rare  in  old  Latin,  and  not  used  by  Caesar, 
Vergil,  or  Horace,     -que  .  .  .  atque  is  first  used  by  Lucretius,  then  by  Vergil,  Ovid, 
Livy,  and  Tacitus. 

1665.  (2.)  Affirmative  and  negative  copulatives  are  sometimes  combined. 
Thus  neque  or  nee  combined  with  et,  in  the  sequences  neque  .  .  .  et  and 
et  .  .  .  neque,  which  is  rare  in  old  Latin,  is  common  in  Cicero:  as, 

nee  miror  et  gaudeo,  Fam.  10,  i,  4,  in  the  first  place  I  am  not  surprised, 
and  in  the  second  place  I  feel  glad  ;  neque  .  .  .  et  non,  however,  is  rare,  pa- 
tebat  via  et  certa  neque  longa,  Ph.  11,  4,  there  lay  a  road  open  at  once 
plain  and  not  long,  neque  .  .  .  -que  begins  with  Cicero,  but  is  rare  (1655), 
neque  .  .  .  ac  begins  with  Tacitus. 

1666.  Of  all  the  Latin  writers,  Tacitus  aims  most  at  variety  by  combination  of 
asyndeton  and  by  the  use  of  different  copulatives  :  as,  regem  Rhamsen  Libya 
Aethiopia.  Medisque  et  Persis  et  Bactriano  ac  Scytha  potitum,  2,  60, 
that  king  Rhamses  got  control  of  Libya  and  Aethiopia  and  the  Medes  and  Persians, 
and  the  Bactrian  and  Scythian. 

(b.)     DISJUNCTIVE  CONJUNCTIONS. 

1667.  Disjunctive  conjunctions  connect  the  sentences,  but 
disconnect   the   meaning.      They   are  aut,   vel,  sive  or  seu, 
-ve,  and  an,  or.     Of  these  conjunctions,  aut,  vel,  and  sive. 
are  often  placed  before  two  or  more  members  of  a  sentence  in 
the  sense  of  either . . .  or.     And  in  poetry,  -ve  .  .  .  -ve  sometimes 
occurs. 

1668.  (i.)  aut,  or,  sometimes  or  even,  or  at  least,  is  used  between 
two  members  which  are  to  be  represented  as  essentially  different  in 
meaning,  and  of  which  one  excludes  the  other:  as, 

280 


Disjunctive  Coordination.     [1669-1673. 


hie  vincendum  aut  moriendum,  milites,  est,  L.  21,  43,  5,  here  you 
must  conquer,  my  men,  or  die.  horae  moments  cita  mors  venit  aut 
victoria  laeta,  11.  S.  i,  I,  7,  within  an  hour's  brief  turn  comes  speedy  death  or 
victory  glad,  aut  vivam  aut  moriar,  T.  Ph.  483,  /  shall  either  live  or  die. 
slderibus  dubiis  aut  illo  tempore  quo  se  frigida  circumagunt  pigri 
serraca  Bootae,  J.  5,  22,  when  stars  blink  faint,  or  even  at  the  time  when 
round  rolls  slow  Bootes1  frigid  wain,  qua  re  vi  aut  clam  agendum  est, 
Att.  10,  12,  5  [10,  12  b,  2],  so  we  must  use  force,  or  at  any  rate  secrecy.  Some- 
times aut  connects  kindred  ideas :  as,  equl  icti  aut  vulnerati  consterna\ 
bantur,  L.  21,  33,  6,  the  horses  kept  getting  frantic  from  being  hit  or  wounded. 

1669.  aut,  in  the  sense  of  otherwise,  or  else,  sometimes  intro-. 
duces  a  statement  of  what  necessarily  follows,  if  something  else  is  not 
done:  as, 

audendum  est  aliquid  universis,  aut  omnia  singulis  patienda,  L. 

6,  18,  7,  you  must  make  some  bold  dash  collectively,  or  else  you  must  suffer  every 
thing  individually,     vel  is  also  occasionally  used  in  this  sense. 

1670.  (2.)  vel,  or,  introduces  an  alternative  as  a  matter  of  choice 
or  preference,  and  often  relates  merely  to  the  selection  of  an  expres^ 
sion  :   as, 

eius  modi  coniunctionem  tectorum  oppidum  vel  urbem  appellave-. 
runt,  RP.  i,  41,  such  a  collection  of  dwelling-houses  they  called,  well,  a  town  or 
a  city,  whichever  yoti  please,  vel  imperatore  vel  milite  me  utimini,  S.  C. 
20,  1 6,  use  me  as  your  generalissimo  or  as  a  private,  whichever  you  will.  Catili- 
nam  ex  urbe  vel  eiecimus  vel  emisimus  vel  ipsum  egredientem  verbis 
prSsecuti  sumus,  C.  2,  i,  we  have  —  what  shall  I  say  ?  —  driven  Catiline  out 
of  town,  or  allcnved  him  to  go  out,  or,  when  he  was  going  out  of  his  own  accord, 
wished  him  a  pleasant  journey,  vel  is  often  followed  by  etiam,  potius,  or 
dicam.  From  Tacitus  on,  vel  is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  aut :  as, 
vincendum  vel  cadendum  esse,  Ta.  14,  35,  they  must  do  or  die  (1668). 

1671.  vel  is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  if  you  will,  even,  or  perhaps, 
especially  before  superlatives,  or  in  the  sense  oifor  instance :  as, 

huius  domus  est  vel  optima  Messanae,  notissima  quidem  certe, 
V.  4,  3,  this  gentleman's  house  is  perhaps  the  finest  in  all  Messana,  at  any  rate 
the  best  known,  amant  ted  omnes  mulieres,  neque  iniuria :  vel  illae,  quae 
here  pallio  me  reprehenderunt,  PI.  MG.  58,  the  girls  all  idolize  you,  well 
they  may  ;  for  instance  those  that  buttonholed  me  yesterday. 

1672.  (3.)  sive  or  seu,  or,  used  as  a  disjunctive  conjunction,  de- 
notes a  distinction  which  is  not  essential,  or  the  speaker's  uncertainty 
as  to  some  matter  of  detail;  when  used  once  only,  it  is  chiefly  in 
corrections,  often  with  potius,  rather,  added  ;  as, 

is  Ascanius  urbem  matri  seu  novercae  reliquit,  L.  1,3,3,  said  A  sea- 
nius  left  the  city  to  his  mother,  or  his  stepmother,  if  you  prefer,  dixit  Pom- 
peius,  sive  voluit,  QFr.  2,  3,  2,  Pompey  made  a  speech,  or  rather  attempted  to 
make  one. 

1673.  sive  is  often  repeated  in  the  sense  of  either,  or  no  matter 
whether  .  .  .  or :  as, 

281 


i674-I6So.]   Sentences:   The  Coordinate  Sentence. 


ita  sive  casu  sive  consili5  deorum,  quae  pars  calamitatem  populo 
Romano  intulerat,  ea  princeps  poenas  persolvit,  i,  12,  6,  thus,  no  matter 
whether  from  chance  or  through  special  providence,  the  part  which  had  done 
damage  to  Rome  was  the  first  to  pay  penalty  in  full. 

1674.  (4.)  -ve  rarely  connects  main  sentences,  usually  only  the  less  impor- 
tant parts  of  the  sentence,  or,  oftener  still,  subordinate  sentences :  as, 

cur  timeam  dubitemve  locum  defendere  ?  J.  i,  103,  why  should  I  fear 
or  hesitate  to  stand  my  ground?  Appius  ad  me  bis  terve  litteras  miserat, 
Att.  6,  1,2,  Appius  had  written  me  two  or  three  times.  With  ne  it  forms  neve 
or  neu,  which  is  used  as  a  continuation  of  ne  or  ut :  see  1581 ;  1586;  1947. 

1675.  (5.)  The  interrogative  particle  an  sometimes  becomes  a  disjunctive  conjunc- 
tion, or,  or  possibly,  or  perhaps :  as,   Simonides    an    quis   alius,  Fin.  2,  104, 
Simonides  or  possibly  somebody  else.     Common  in  Cicero,   though  not  so   in  his 
speeches,  and  in  Livy,  commonest  in  Tacitus. 

(c.)     ADVERSATIVE  CONJUNCTIONS. 

1676.  Adversative   conjunctions  connect  the  sentences,  but 
contrast  the   meaning.     They   are   autem,   on   the  other  hand, 
sed,  verum,  ceterum,  but,  vero,  but,  indeed,  at,  but,  tamen, 
nihilo  minus,  nevertheless. 

Of  these  conjunctions,  autem  and  vero  are  put  after  one  word,  or  some- 
times after  two  closely  connected  words  ;  tamen  is  put  either  at  the  begin- 
ning, or  after  an  emphatic  word. 

1677.  (i.)  autem,  again,  on   the  other  hand,   however,   simply 
continues  the  discourse  by  a  statement  appended  to  the  preceding, 
without  setting  it  aside:  as, 

horum  principibus  pecunias,  civitati  autem  imperium  totius  pro- 
vinciae  pollicetur.  7.  64,  8,  to  the  chieftains  of  this  nation  on  the  one  hand  he 
promises  moneys,  and  to  the  community  on  the  other  hand  the  hegemony  of  the 
whole  province.  The  opposition  in  a  sentence  introduced  by  autem,  again, 
is  often  so  weak  that  a  copulative,  and,  might  be  used  :  as,  ille  qui  Dfo- 
genem  adulescens,  post  autem  Panaetium  audierat,  Fin.  2,  24,  the  man 
who  in  his  early  youth  h.id  sat  at  the  feet  of  Diogenes,  and  afterwards  of 
Panaetius.  autem  is  oftenest  used  in  philosophical  or  didactic  discourse, 
less  frequently  in  history,  oratory,  or  poetry. 

1678.  autem  is  often  used  in  questions:   as,  metuo  credere  ::  credere 
autem  ?  PI.  Ps.  304,  /  am  afraid  to  trust : :  trust,  do  you  say  ? 

1679.  (2.)  sed  or  set,  and  verum,  but,  are  used  either  in  restric- 
tion, or,  after  a  negative,  in  direct  opposition  :  as, 

vera  dico,  sed  nequiquam,  quoniam  non  vis  credere,  PL  Am.  835,  1 
tell  the  truth,  but  all  in  vain,  since  you  are  bent  not  to  believe,  non  ego  erus 
tibi,  sed  servos  sum,  PL  Cap.  241,  I  am  not  your  master,  but  your  slave. 

1680.  non  modo,  or  n5n  solum,  not  only,  not  alone,  is  followed 
by  sed  etiam  or  verum  etiam,  but  also,  by  sed  .  .  .  quoque,  but .  .  . 
as  well,  or  sometimes  by  sed  or  verum  alone  :  as, 

282 


Adversative  Coordination.     [1681-1686. 


qui  non  solum  interfuit  his  rebus,  sed  etiam  praefuit,  Fam.  i,  8,  i, 

who  has  not  had  a  hand  only  in  these  matters,  but  complete  charge,  qui  omni- 
bus negotiis  non  interfuit  solum,  sed  praefuit,  Fam.  i,  6,  i.  non  tantum 
is  sometimes  used  by  Livy,  anfl  once  or  twice  by  Cicero,  but  not  by  Caesar 
or  Sallust,  for  non  modo.  Livy  and  Tacitus  sometimes  omit  sed  or  verum. 

1681.  non  modo  has  sometimes  the  meaning  of  non  dicam  :  as,  non  modo 
ad  certam  mortem,  sed  in  magnum  vitae  discrimen,  Best.  45,  I  -won't  say 
to  certain  death,  but  to  great  risk  of  life. 

1682.  non  modo  or  non  solum,  when  attended  by  another  negative, 
may  also  be  followed  by  sed  ne  .  .  .  quidem,  but  not  even,  or  sed  vix,  but 
hardly:  as, 

non  modo  tib!  non  irascor,  sed  ne  reprehendo  quidem  factum  tuum, 

Sull.  50,  so  far  from  being  angry  with  you  I  do  not  even  criticise  your  action. 
When  both  members  have  the  same  predicate,  usually  placed  last,  the  nega- 
tion in  ne  .  .  .  quidem  or  vix  usually  applies  to  the  first  member  also  :  as, 
talis  vir  non  modo  facere,  sed  ne  cogitare  quidem  quicquam  audebit, 
quod  n5n  audeat  praedicare,  Off.  3,  77,  a  man  of  this  kind  will  not  only  not 
venture  to  do,  but  not  even  to  conceive  anything  which  he  would  not  venture  to 
trumpet  to  the  world,  or  will  not  venture  to  conceive,  much  less  do. 

1683.  (3.)  ceterum  is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  sed,  in  Terence,  Sallust, 
and  Livy.     Sometimes  also  in  the  sense  of  sed  re  vera,  in  Sallust  and  Tacitus, 
to  contrast  reality  with  pretence. 

1684.  (4.)  vero,  but,  indeed,  introduces  an  emphatic  contrast  or  a 
climax:  as, 

sed  sunt  haec  leviora,  ilia  vero  gravia  atque  magna,  PL  86,  however, 

all  (his  is  less  important,  but  the  following  is  weighty  and  great,  scimus  mu- 
sicen  nostris  moribus  abesse  a  principis  persona,  saltare  vero  etiam 
in  vitiis  pom,  N.  15,  1,2,  we  know  that,  according  to  our  Roman  code  of  ethics, 
music  is  not  in  keeping  with  the  character  of  an  eminent  man,  and  as  to  dancing, 
why  that  is  classed  among  vices.  In  Plautus,  vero  is  only  used  as  an  adverb ; 
its  use  as  an  adversative  conjunction  begins  with  Terence.  In  the  historians, 
ver5  is  often  equivalent  to  autem. 

1685.  (5.)  at,  but,  denotes  emphatic  lively  opposition,  an  objec- 
tion, or  a  contrast :  as, 

brevis  a  natura  nobis  vita  data  est ;  at  memoria  bene  redditae  vitae 
sempiterna,  Ph.  14,  32,  a  short  life  hath  been  given  by  nature  unto  man  ;  but 
the  memory  of  a  life  laid  down  in  a  good  cause  endtireth  for  ever,  at  is  often 
used  before  a  word  indicating  a  person  or  a  place,  to  shift  the  scene,  espe- 
cially in  history.  In  law  language,  ast  sometimes  occurs,  and  ast  is  also 
sometimes  used,  generally  for  the  metre,  in  Vergil,  Horace,  and  late  poetry. 

1686.  (6.)  tamen,  nihilo  minus,  nevertheless. 

accusatus  capitis  absolvitur,  multatur  tamen  pecunia,  N.  4,  2,  6,  he 
is  accused  on  a  capital  charge  and  acquitted,  but  is  nevertheless  fined  in  a  sum 
of  money,  minus  dolendum  fuit  re  n5n  perfecta,  sed  poeniendum  certe 
nihrlo  minus,  Mil.  19,  there  was  less  occasion  for  sorrow  because  the  thing  was 
not  done,  but  certainly  none  the  less  for  punishment^ 

283 


1687-1692.]   Sentences:   The  Coordinate  Sentence. 


(2.)    OTHER   WORDS   AS  CONNECTIVES. 

1687.  Instead  of  a  conjunction,  other  words  are  often  used  as 
connectives :    as,  pars  .  .  .  pars,  alii  .  .  .    alii ;    adverbs  of  order  or 
time :  as,  primum,y£r.r/,  or  primo,  at  first .  .  .  deinde  .  .  .  turn,  &c  ; 
and  particularly  adverbs  in  pairs  :  as,  modo  .  .  .  modo,  turn  .  .  .  turn 
less  frequently  qua  .  .  .  qua,  simul  .  .  .  simul :  as, 

multitude  pars  procurrit  in  vias,  pars  in  vestibulis  stat,  pars  ex 
tectis  prSspectant,  L.  24,  21,  8,  part  of  the  throng  runs  out  into  the  streets, 
others  stand  in  the  fore-courts,  others  gaze  from  the  house-tops,  proferebant 
alii  purpuram,  tus  alii,  gemmas  alii,  V.  5,  146,  they  produced  some  of  them 
purple,  others  frankincense,  others  precious  stones,  prirno  pecuniae,  deinde 
imperi  cupido  crevit,  S.  C.  10,  3,  at  first  a  love  of  money  waxed  strong,  then 
of  power,  turn  hoc  mihl  probabilius,  turn  illud  videtur,  Ac.  2,  134,  one 
minute  this  seems  to  me  more  likely,  and  another  minute  that. 

1688.  Simple  sentences  may  also  be  coordinated  by  words  denoting  infer- 
ence or  cause,  such  as  ergo,  igitur,  itaque,  therefore  ;  nam,  namque,  enim, 
for,  ttenvm,  for  you  see :  as, 

adfectus  animi  in  bono  viro  laudabilis,  et  vita  igitur  laudabilis  boni 
viri,  et  honesta  ergo,  quoniam  laudabilis,  TD.  5,  47,  the  disposition  in  a 
good  man  is  praiseworthy,  and  the  life  therefore  of  a  good  man  is  praiseworthy, 
and  virtuous  accordingly,  seeing  it  is  praiseworthy.  Of  these  words,  nam, 
namque,  and  itaque  are  usually  put  first  in  the  sentence;  enim  and  igitur. 
usually  after  one  word,  rarely  after  two.  But  in  Plautus  regularly,  and  gener- 
ally in  Terence,  enim  has  the  meaning  of  indeed,  verily,  truly,  depend  upon  it, 
and  may  stand  at  the  beginning. 

1689.  In  Plautus,  the  combination  ergo  igitur  occurs,  and  in  Terence  and  Livy, 
itaque  erg5  :  as,  itaque  ergo  consulibus  dies  dicta  est,  L.  3,31,  5,  accord- 
ingly then  a  day  was  set  for  the  trial  of  the  consuls. 

1690.  The  interrogative  quippe,  why?  losing  its  interrogative  meaning,  is  also 
used  as  a  coordinating  word,  -why,  or  for:  as,  hoc  genus  omne  maestum  ac 
sollicitum  est  cantoris  morte  Tigelli  :  quippe  benignus  erat,  H.  S.  i,  2, 
2,  such  -worthies  all  are  sad,  are  -woebegone  over  Tigellius  the  minstrel's  death  ;  why 
he  was  generosity  itself, 

1691.  Simple  sentences  may  also  be  coordinated  by  pronominal  words, 
such  as  nine,  inde,  hence,  eo,  ideo,  idcirco,  propterea,  so,  on  that  account, 
&c. :  as, 

nocte  perveniebant ;  eo  custodias  hostium  fallebant,  L.  23,  19,  10, 
they  got  there  in  the  night ;  in  that  way  they  eluded  the  enemy's  pickets.  But 
eo  and  ideo  are  not  used  thus  by  Cicero,  Caesar,  or  Sallust,  or  idcirco  and 
propterea  by  Cicero  or  Caesar. 

1692.  In  animated  rhetorical  discourse  any  word  repeated  with  emphasis 
may  serve  as  a  copulative  ;  this  is  called  Anaphora  :  as, 

miles  in  forum,  miles  in  curiam  comitabatur,  Ta.  I,  7 ',  soldiers  went 
with  him  to  the  forum,  soldiers  to  the  senate  chamber,  erepti  estis  ex  interitu, 
erepti  sine  sanguine,  sine  exercitu,  sine  dimicatione,  C.  3,  23,  you  are 
rescued  from  death,  rescued  without  bloodshed,  without  an  army,  without  a 
struggle. 

284 


The  Intermediate  Coordinate  Sentence.   [1693-1698-. 


THE  INTERMEDIATE  COORDINATE  SENTENCE. 

1693.  A  sentence  coordinate  in  form  with  another  sentence 
is  often  equivalent  in  meaning  to  a  subordinate  sentence.     Such 
sentences  are  called  Intermediate  Coordinate  Sentences. 

The  most  varied  relations  of  a  subordinate  sentence  may  be  thus  ex- 
pressed by  a  coordinate  sentence,  and  the  combination  of  the  two  coordinate 
sentences  is  in  sense  equivalent  to  a  complex  sentence. 

1694.  Such  coordinated  sentences  are  a  survival  of  a  more  primitive  state 
of  the  language.     They  occur  oftenest  in  Plautus  and  Teience,  in  Cicero's 
philosophical  works  and  letters,  in  Horace's  satires  and  epistles,  and  in 
Juvenal.     In  general  they  have  been  superseded  by  complex  sentences,  even 
in  the  oldest  specimens  of  the  language. 


1695.  !•  The  relation  of  the  two  members  may  not  be  indi- 
cated by  the  mood,  but  left  to  be  determined  from  the  context. 

Thus,  in  the  combination  amat,  sapit,  PI.  Am.  995,  he  is  in  love,  he  shows 
his  sense,  the  two  members  amat  and  sapit  are  alike  in  form.  But  in  sense, 
sapit  is  the  main  member  and  amat  is  the  subordinate  member.  Just  what 
the  relation  of  the  amat  is,  whether  it  is  si  amat,  if  he  is  in  love,  cum  amat, 

love, 


when  he  is  in  love,  quod  amat,  because  he  is  in  love,  or  etsi  amat, 

he  is  in  love,  &c.,  &c.,  is  left  to  the  reader  to  make  out.     The  following  are 

some  of  the  commonest  combinations  of  this  class : 

1696.  (i.)  The  coordinated  member  may  stand  instead  of  the  commoner 
accusative  and  infinitive  with  a  verb  of  perceiving,  thinking,  knowing,  or 
saying  (2175).     Such  are  credo,  fateor,  opinor,  puto,  certum  est,  &c. :  as, 

ludos  me  facitis,  intellegS,  PI.  Per.  802,  you  are  making  game  of  me,  I 
am  aware,  narro  tibl:  plane  relegatus  mihl  videor,  Att.  2,  11,  I,  I  tell 
you  what,  I  seem  to  myself  regularly  banished,  spero,  servabit  fidem,  PI.  E. 
124,  I  hope  he  'II  keep  his  word  (2235). 

1697.  (2-)  The  coordinated  member  may  be  a  direct  question  or  an  ex- 
clamation. • 

Thus  (a.)  in  enquiries  calling  for  an  answer:  as,  sign!  die  quid  est,  PI. 
Am.  421,  tell  me,  what  is  there  in  the  shape  of  seal?  (1251).  Or  (b.)  in  ejacu- 
lation :  as,  viden  ut  astat  furcifer  ?  PI.  Most.  \ij2,seest  how  the  knave  is 
posing  there  ?  videte  quaeso,  quid  potest  pecunia,  PI.  St.  410,  see  pray  how 
all-commanding  money  is.  This  construction  occurs  oftenest  in  comedy,  and 
with  an  imperative  meaning  say,  tell,  or  look.  The  subordinate  construction 
is  the  rule  :  see  1773. 

1698.  (3.)  The  coordinated  member  rarely  represents  a  relative  sentence 
(1816):  as, 

urbs  antiqua  fuit,  Tyrii  tenuere  coloni,  V.  i,  12,  there  was  an  ancient 
wwn,  which  Tyrian  settlers  held,  est  locus,  Hesperiam  Grai  cognomine 
dicunt,  V.  i,  530,  there  is  a  place,  the  Greeks  by  name  Hesperia  call,  imitated 
from  est  locus  Hesperiam  quam  mortales  perhibebant,  E.  in  Macrob. 
Sat.  6,  I,  there  is  a  place  which  sons  of  men  Hesperia  called. 


Sentences:   The  Coordinate  Sentence* 


1699.  (4.)  The  coordinated  member  may  represent  a  subordinate  tempo- 
ral member :  as, 

venit  hiemps,  teritur  Sicuonia  baca  trapetis,  V.  G.  2,  519,  has  winter 
come,  in  mills  is  Sicyon's  olive  ground  (1860).  vix  proram  attigerat,  rumpit 
Saturnia  funem,  V.  12,  650,  scarce  had  he  touched  1  he  prow,  Saturnia  snaps 
the  rope,  i.  e.  cum  rumpit  (1869).  lucebat  iam  fere,  procedit  in  medium, 
V.  5,  94,  it  was  just  about  light,  when  he  presents  himself  before  them,  fuit 
5rnandus  in  Manilia  lege  Pompeius ;  temperata  oratione  ornandi 
copiam  persecuti  sumus,  O.  102,  when  I  had  to  glorify  Pompey  in  the  mat- 
ter of  the  Manilius  law,  I  went  through  the  ample  material  for  glorification  in 
moderate  language. 

1700.  (5.)  The  coordinated  member  may  .be  equivalent  to  a  member 
with  ut,  expressing  result  (1965) :  as, 

iam  faxo  scies,  T.  Eu.  663,  /'//  let  you  know  at  once,  i.  e.  scias  (1712)  or 
ut  scias  (1965).  iam  fax5  hie  erunt,  PI.  B.  715,  /'//  warrant  they  shall 
soon  be  here,  adeo  res  rediit,  adulescentulus  victus  est,  T.  Hau.  113, 
things  came  to  such  a  pass  the  youngster  was  put  down,  cetera  de  genere 
hoc,  ade5  sunt  multa,  loquacem  delassare  valent  Fabium,  H.  S.  i,  i,  n, 
the  other  cases  of  the  kind,  so  plentiful  are  they,  might  tire  the  gabbling  Fabius 
out.  ita  haec  umore  tigna  putent,  non  videor  mihi  sarcire  posse  aedis 
meas,  PI.  Most.  146,  so  sopping  rotten  are  these  joists,  I  don't  think  I  can  patch 
my  house,  ita  avido  ingeniS  fuit,  numquam  indicare  id  filio  voluit  suo, 
PI.  Aul.  prol.  9,  so  niggardly  was  he,  he  d  never  point  it  out  to  his  own  son. 
tanta  incepta  res  est,  baud  somniculose  hoc  agundumst,  PI.  Cap.  227, 
so  big  a  job  have  we  begun,  not  drowsily  must  this  be  done. 

1701.  (6.)  The  coordinated  member  may  be  equivalent  to  a  conditional 
protasis :  as, 

(a.)  filiam  quis  habet,  pecunia  opus  est,  Par.  44,  a  man  has  a  daugh- 
ter, he  needs  money,  tristis  es,  indignor,  O.  Tr.  4,  3,  33,  if  you  are  sad,  / 
feel  provoked,  (b.)  si  iste  ibit,  Ito;  stabit,  astat5  simul,  PI.  Ps.  863,  if  he 
shall  moz>e,  move  thou;  but  shall  he  stand,  stand  by  his  side.  in  caelum, 
iusseris,  ibit,  J.  3,  78,  say  but  the  word,  he'll  mount  the  sky.  (c.)  subdue 
cibum  unum  diem  athletae,  lovem  Olympium  inp!5rabit,  TD.  2,  40, 
cut  off  an  athlete  from  his  food  just  a  day,  he  will  pray  to  Jupiter  aloft  in 
Olympus  (1574).  (d.}  Zenonem  roges,  respondeat  totidem  verbis,  Fin. 
4,  69,  you  may  ask  Zeno,  he  would  answer  in  just  as  many  words  (  1556). 
(e.)  tu  quoque  magnam  partem  opere  in  tanto,  sirieret  dolor,  Icare, 
haberes,  V.  6,  31,  thou  too  a  goodly  space  in  work  so  vast,  had  grief  allowed, 

0  Icarus,  hadst  filled  (1559).     at  dares  hanc  vim  M.  Crasso,  in  foro  sal- 
taret,  Off.  3,  75,  but  had  you  given  this  chance  to  Crassus,  he  would  have 
capered  in  the  market  place  (1559).      nam  absque  te  esset,  hodie  num- 
quam ad  solem  occasum  viverem,  PI.  Men.  1022,  for  were  it  not  for  you, 

1  ne'er  shotdd  live  this  blessed  day  till  set  of  sun  (1560,  2110).     (/)  una  fuis- 
semus,  consilium  certe  non  defuisset,  Att.  9,  6,  6,  had  we  been  together, 
we  certainly  should  not  have  lacked  a  programme  (1561). 

1702.  (7.)  The  coordinated  member  may  be  equivalent  to  a  concession  : 
as, 

id  fortasse  non  perfecimus,  conati  quidem  sumus,  O.  210 ;  though 
we  have  perhaps  not  attained  unto  this,  yet  we  have  attempted  it.  ergo  ill! 
intellegunt  quid  Epicurus  dicat,  ego  non  intellego  ?  Fin.  2,  13,  do  those 
gentlemen  then  understand  what  Epicurus  means,  and  I  not  ? 

286 


The  Intermediate  Coordinate  Sentence.  [1/03—1707. 


1703.  (8.)  The  coordinated  member  may  denote  efficient  cause  or  rea- 
son :  as, 

peregrinus  ego  sum,  Sauream  non  novl,  PI.  As.  464,  I  am  a  stranger, 
and  I  don't  know  Saurea.  mulier  es,  audacter  iuras,  PI.  Am.  836,  because 
you  are  a  woman,  you  are  bold  to  swear,  tacent,  satis  laudant,  T.  Eu.  476, 
their  silence  is  sufficient  praise. 

1704.  (9.)  The  coordinated  member  may  represent  the  protasis  of  a  com- 
parative sentence  with  ut  (1937) :  as, 

ita  me  di  ament,  honestust,  T.  Eu.  474,  so  help  me  heaven,  he  is  a 
Proper  man.  sollicitat,  ita  vivam,  me  tua,  mi  Tiro,  valetudo,  Fam.  16,20, 
your  health,  dear  Tiro,  keeps  me  fidgety,  as  I  hope  to  live. 


1705.  II.  The  subordinate  idea  is  often  indicated  by  the 
subjunctive  of  desire  coordinated  with  another  verb,  usually 
with  one  which  has  a  different  subject. 

Thus,  the  combination  ames:  oportet,  jy#«  should  love  ;  it  is  right  (1547), 
in  which  the  two  verbs  are  used  separately,  blends  into  one  whole,  ames 
oportet,  Fin.  2,  35,  it  is  right  you  should  love.  The  verb  with  which  the  sub- 
junctive is  coordinated  specifies  more  exactly  the  general  idea  of  desire  con- 
tained in  the  subjunctive  itself.  The  tense  of  the  coordinate  subjunctive  is 
regulated  by  that  of  the  other  verb. 

1706.  The  negative  employed  with  coordinated  subjunctives  is  the 
adverb  ne,  not. 

Thus,  the  combination  vide:  ne  me  ludas,  see  to  it;  don V  you  fool  me 
(1547),  in  which  the  two  verbs  are  used  separately,  blends  into  one  whole, 
vide  ne  me  ludas,  PI.  Cur.  325,  see  to  it  you  don't  fool  me.  Similarly,  metuo : 
ne  peccet,  /  am  afraid;  let  her  not  slip  up  (1548),  becomes  metuo  ne 
peccet,  PI.  Per.  624,  I  am  afraid  she  may  slip  up.  From  its  frequent  use  in 
sentences  of  subordinate  meaning,  ne  came  at  an  early  period  to  be  regarded 
as  a  subordinating  conjunction  also,  lest,  that  .  .  .  not,  as  well  as  an  adverb, 
and  took  the  place  of  the  less  usual  ut  ne.  Hence  members  with  ne  are 
more  conveniently  treated  under  the  head  of  subordination  (1947). 

1707.  (i.)  The  subjunctive  is  often  coordinated  with  verbs  of  wishing. 
Such  are  volo,  nolo,  rarely  malo,  opto,  placet,  &c. :  as, 

animum  advortas  volo,  PI.  Cap.  388,  I  wish  you  would  pay  heed  (1548). 
quid  vis  faciam  ?  T.  Hau.  846,  what  wilt  thou  I  should  do?  (1563).  vin 
conmutemus?  tuam  ego  ducam  et  tu  meam  ?  PI.  Tri.  59,  would  you 
like  to  swap?  I  take  your  wife,  and  you  take  mine  ?  (1563).  malo  te  sapiens 
hostis  metuat,  quam  stulti  cives  laudent,  L.  22,  39,  20,  /  would  rather 
a  wise  enemy  should  fear  you,  than  stupid  fellow-citizens  admire  you  (1548). 
Coordination  is  the  rule  with  velim,  vellem,  &c.,  used  in  the  sense  of 
utinam  (1540)  :  as,  de  Menedemo  vellem  verum  fuisset,  de  regina  velirn 
verum  sit,  Aft.  15,  4,  4,  about  Menedemus  I  could  wish  it  had  been  true,  about 
the  queen  I  hope  it  may  be  true,  tellus  optem  prius  ima  dehiscat,  V.  4,  24, 
/  would  the  earth  to  deepest  depths  might  sooner  yawn.  L.  Domitius  dixit 
placere  sib!  sententias  de  singulis  ferrent,  Caes.  C.  3,  83,  3,  Domitius  said 
his  view  was  they  should  vote  on  the  men  separately. 

287 


1 708-1 710.]    Sentences  :   The  Coordinate  Sentence. 


1708.  (2.)  The  subjunctive  is  often  coordinated  with  verbs  of  request, 
entreaty,   encouragement,  exhortation,  charge,  direction,    command.      Such 
are  precor,  rogo,  oro,  pet5,  hortor,  postulo,  moneS,  censeo ;    mando, 
impero,  praecipi5,  decerno ;  and  chiefly  in  old  Latin,  iubeo  :  as, 

(a.)  reddas  incolumem  precor,  H.  I,  3,  7,  deliver  him  up  safe  I  pray, 
rogat  finem  orandi  facial,  I,  20,  5,  he  requests  him  to  make  an  end  of 
entreaty,  a  te  id  quod  suesti  peto,  me  absentem  defendas,  Fam.  15,  8,  / 
ask  you  to  do  as  you  always  do,  stand  up  for  me  "when  J  am  away,  non  hortor 
solum  sed  etiam  rogo  atque  6r5,  te  colligas  virumque  praebeas,  Fam. 
5,  18,  I,  /  not  only  exhort  you,  but  more  than  that  I  beg  and  entreat  you,  pull 
yourself  together  and  quit  you  like  a  man.  postulo  etiam  atque  etiam  con- 
sideres  quo  progrediare,  L.  3,  45,  10,  /  charge  you  think  again  and  again 
whatyoit  are  coming  to.  te  moneo  videas,  quid  agas.  magno  opere  censed, 
desistas,  V.  5,  174,  I  advise  you  to  consider  what  you  are  doing.  J  earnestly 
recommend  you  to  stop,  hunc  admonet  iter  caute  facial,  5,  49,  3,  he  warns 
him  he  must  pursue  his  march  with  care,  (b.)  huic  mandat  Remos  adeat, 
3, 1 1,  2,  he  directs  him  to  go  to  the  Remans,  praecipit  unum  omnes  peterent 
Indutiomarum,  5,  58,  5,  he  says  they  must  all  concentrate  their  attack  on  In- 
dutiomarus.  huic  imperat  quas  possit  adeat  civitates,  4,  21,  8,  he  orders 
him  to  visit  such  communities  as  he  can.  senatus  decrevit  darent  operam 
consules  ne  quid  res  publica  detriment!  caperet,  S.  C.  29,  2,  the  senate 
decreed  the  consuls  must  see  to  it  that  the  commonwealth  received  no  harm. 
iube  maneat,  TV  Hau.  737,  tell  her  she  must  stay,  milites  certiores  facit, 
paulisper  intermitterent  proelium,  3,  5,  3,  he  tells  the  soldiers  they  must  stop 
fighting  a  little  while,  abi,  nuntia  patribus  urbem  Romanam  muniant, 
L.  22,  49,  lOjgo  tell  the  fathers  they  must  fortify  Rome  town,  dixi  equidem 
in  carcerem  ires,  PI.  St.  624,  I'm  sure  I  told  you  you  must  go  to  jail,  scribit 
Labieno  cum  legione  veniat,  5,  46,  3,  he  writes  to  Labienus  he  imist  come 
with  a  legion,  legationem  mittunt  si  velit  suos  recipere,  obsides  sib! 
remittat,  3,  8,  5,  they  send  an  embassy,  if  he  wishes  to  get  his  ovvn  men  back, 
he  must  send  back  the  hostages  to  them. 

1709.  (3.)  The  subjunctive  is  often  coordinated  with  expressions  of  pro- 
priety or  necessity.     Such  are  oportet,  optumum   est,  opus  est,  decet, 
necesse  est. 

me  ipsum  ames  oportet,  non  mea,  Fin.  2,  85,  it  is  myself  you  should 
love,  not  my  possessions,  quoniam  habes  istum  equom,  aut  emeris  opor- 
tet, aut  hereditate  possideas,  aut  surripueris  necesse  est,  Inv.  i,  84, 
since  you  are  in  possession  of  that  horse,  you  must  either  have  bought  him  or 
inherited  him,  or  else  you  must  necessarily  have  stolen  him.  sed  taceam 
optumumst,  PI.  E.  60,  but  I'd  best  hold  my  tongue,  nihil  opust  resciscat, 
PL  Mer.  1004,  she  needn't  find  it  out  at  all.  condemnetur  necesse  est, 
RA.  in,  be  condemned  he  needs  musf. 

1710.  (4.)  The  subjunctive  is  sometimes  coordinated  with  verbs  of  permis- 
sion or  concession.     Such  are  permitto  in  Sallust  and  Livy,  concede,  also 
sino,  mostly  in  the  imperative,  chiefly  in  old  Latin  and  poetry,  and  the  im- 
personal licet  (used  thus  often  in  Cicero,  rarely  before  or  after)  :  as, 

supplementum  scriberent  consules,  permissum,  L.  27,  22,  n,  leave 
was  given  that  the  consuls  might  fill  lip  the  army,  sine  sciam,  L.  2,  40,  5, 
let  me  know,  sine  modo  adveniat  senex,  PI.  Most,  n,  let  but  the  old  man 
come,  fremant  omnes  licet,  dicam  quod  sentio,  DO.  i,  195,  though 
everybody  may  growl,  I  will  say  what  I  think.  See  1904. 

288 


Subordina  tion.  [1711—1715. 


1711.  (5.)  The   subjunctive   is   often   coordinated  with  the   imperative 
cave,  caveto,  cavete,  beware,  used  in  the  sense  of  ne  (1585):  as,    v 

cave  facias,  Att.  13,  33,  4,  don't  do  it.  cave  dirumpatis,  PI.  Poen.prol. 
117,  doiit  break  it  off  (1075). 

1712.  (6.)  The  subjunctive  is  often  coordinated  with  verbs  of  giving, 
persuading,  accomplishing,  taking  care.    In  this  case  the  subjunctive  has  the 
meaning  of  purpose  or  result.     Such  are  the  imperative  cedo,  and  do,  per- 
suadeo,  impetro,  euro,  also  facio,  particularly  fac  and  facito :  as, 

cedo  bibam,  PI.  Most.  373,  give  me  to  drink,  date  bibat  tibicini,  PI.  St. 
757.  give  the  piper  to  drink,  huic  Sp.  Albinus  persuadet  regnum  Numi- 
diae  a  senatu  petat,  S.  /.  35,  2,  Albinus  induces  him  to  ask  of  the  senate  the 
throne  of ' Numidia.  tandem  inpetravi  abiret,  PI.  Tri.  591,  at  last  f've  coaxed 
him  to  clear  out.  fac  sciam,  Fam.  7,  16,  3,  let  me  know.  fax5  scias,  PI.  Men. 
644,  /'//  let  you  know,  much  oftener  scies  or  scibis  (1700).  fac  bellus 
revertare,  Fam.  16,  18,  I,  mind  you  come  back  a  beauty  (1579)- 

1713.  A  subjunctive  is  now  and  then  loosely  coordinated  with 
verbs  in  general,  to  indicate  the  purpose  of  the  action  :  as, 

evocate  hue  Sosiam,  Blepharonem  arcessat,  PI.  Am.  949,  call  Sosia 
here,  let  him  fetch  Blepharo.  clare  advorsum  fabulabor,  hie  auscultet 
quae  loquar,  PI.  Am.  300,  /  '//  speak  distinctly  face  to  face,  that  he  may  hear 
what  I  shall  say.  operam  hanc  subrupui  tibl,  ex  me  scires,  PI.  Am.  523, 
I  did  this  secretly  for  you,  that  you  might  learn  from  me.  manibus  date  lilia 
plenis,  purpure5s  spargam  flores,  V.  6,  883,  lilies  in  handfuls  give,  I  fain 
would  scatter  purple  flowers,  that  is,  that  I  may  scatter. 


THE  COMPLEX  SENTENCE,  OR  SUBORDINATION. 

1714.  In  a  complex  sentence,  that  is  one  consisting 
of  a  main  and  a  subordinate  sentence,  the  subordinate 
member  is  introduced   by  some  subordinating  word: 
such  are, 

I.  Interrogative  words,  in  indirect  questions;  II.  Relative  pro- 
nouns; III.  Relative  conjunctive  particles,  or  conjunctive  particles 
not  of  relative  origin. 

1715.  Subordinate  sentences  may  have  the  value  of  a  substantive, 
usually  as  subject  or  as  object ;  of  an  attributive ;  or  of  an  adverb  or 
adverbial  adjunct :  as, 

(a.)  eadem  nocte  accidit  ut  esset  luna  plena,  4,  29,  I,  it  came  to  pass 
the  same  mght  that  there  was  a  full  moon,  video  quid  agas,  Fam.  1 6,  17, 
I  see  what  you  are  driving  at.  (fi.)  fundus  qui  est  in  agro,  qui  Sabmus 
vocatur,  eum  meum  esse  ai5,  Mur.  26,  the  estate  which  is  in  the  territory 
which  is  called  Sabine,  that  I  maintain  is  mine,  lawyers'  wordiness  for  fundus 
Sabmus.  (c.\  cum  advesperasceret,  ad  pontem  Mulvium  pervenerunt, 
C-  3»  5'  when  it  was  getting  dark,  they  reached  the  Mulvius  bridge,  i.  e.  VCS< 
peri,  or  primo  vespere. 

19  289 


1716-1722.]  Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


1716.  Subordinate  sentences  which  express  time  or  place,  are  called  Tem- 
poral or  Local  sentences;  comparison  or  manner,  Comparative  or  Modal  sen- 
tences ;    condition,  cause,  or  concession,   Conditional,   Causal,  or  Concessive 
sentences ;  purpose,  Final  sentences ;  result,  Consecutive  sentences. 

1717.  In  a  main  sentence,  the  indicative  present,  future,  and 
future  perfect,  and  the  imperative,  are  called  Primary  Tenses  ; 
the  indicative  imperfect,  historical  perfect,  and  pluperfect,  and 
the  infinitive  of  intimation,  are  called  Secondary  Tenses.     The 
perfect  definite  and  the  present  of  vivid  narration  are  sometimes 
regarded  as  primary  tenses,  oftener  as  secondary  tenses. 

1718.  Verbs  which  have  an  implication  of  futurity,  such  as  those  meaning  can, 
ought,  must,  &c.,  with  an  infinitive,  also  subjunctives  of  wish  (1540)  or  of  exhorta- 
tion (1547),  may  be  called  Virtual  Futures. 

1719.  Sometimes  the  subjunctive  serves  as  a  main  sentence  :  see  1762 ; 
sometimes  a  noun  of  the  verb  :  see  1766. 


MOOD   OF  THE   SUBORDINATE   SENTENCE. 

1720.  The  indicative  and  the  subjunctive  are  both  used  in  subor- 
dinate sentences,  as  will  be  shown  in  the  treatment  of  the  several 
words  of  subordination.  Some  general  uses  may  be  mentioned  col- 
lectively here. 


THE  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

1721.  The  indicative  is  ordinarily  used  in  sentences  intro- 
duced by  a  relative  pronoun,  or  by  a  causal  conjunctive  word 
other  than  cum. 

pontem,  qui  erat  ad  Genavam,  iubet  rescind!,  i,  7,  2,  he  orders  the 
bridge  which  -was  near  Geneva  torn  up.  concede,  quia  necesse  est,  RA. 
145,  /  give  up,  because  I  have  to.  In  sentences  of  this  class,  however,  the 
subjunctive  is  often  required,  particularly  in  indirect  discourse  (1722),  or  in 
cases  of  attraction  (1728). 

THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE  AND  OF 
ATTRACTION. 

1722.  The  subjunctive   is   used   in  relative,   causal, 
temporal,  and  conditional  sentences  in  indirect  discourse, 
and  in  cases  of  attraction. 

290 


Mood  of  tke  Subordinate  Sentence.    [1723-1728, 


1723.  A  direct  quotation  or  question  gives  the  words  of  the  original 
speaker  without  alteration.     When  the  original   words  of  a  quotation  or 
question  are  changed  to  conform  to  the  construction  of  the  sentence  in 
which  they  are  quoted,  it  is  called  Indirect  Discourse. 

1724.  In  the  complete  form  of  indirect  discourse,  the  sub- 
junctive is  subordinate  to  an  infinitive  or  an  accusative  with  the 
infinitive,  dependent  on  a  verb  of  saying  or  thinking  (2175) :  as, 

negat  Epicurus  iucunde  posse  vivi,  nisi  cum  virtute  vivatur,  TD. 

3,  49,  Epicurus  avers  there  is  no  living  happily,  without  living  virtuously  ; 
directly,  iucunde  vivi  non  potest,  nisi  cum  virtute  vivitur.      Socrates 
dicere  solebat,  omnes  in  eo  quod  scirent,  satis  esse  eloquentes,  DO. 
1 ,  63,  Socrates  used  to  maintain  that  all  men  were  eloquent  enough  in  a  matter 
they  knew  ;  directly,  omnes  in  eo  quod  sciunt  satis  sunt  eloquentes. 

1725.  The  idea  of  saying  or  thinking  is  often  i  not  formally  ex- 
pressed in  the  main  sentence,  and  the  indirect  discourse  is  intimated 
by  the  subordinate  subjunctive  only:  as, 

noctu  ambulabat  in  publico  Themistocles,  quod  somnum  capere 
non  posset,  TD.  4,  44,  Themistocles  used  to  walk  the  streets  nights,  '  because  he 
could  not  sleep'  given  as  Themistocles's  reason  ;  the  writer's  would  be  pote- 
rat.  Paetus  omnes  libros,  quos  frater  suus  reliquisset,  mihl  donavit, 
Att.  2,  I,  12,  Paetus  made  me  a  present  of  all  the  books  'that  his  brother  had 
left'  dum  reliquae  naves  eo  convenient,  in  ancoris  expectavit,  4,  23, 

4,  he  waited  at  anchor  till  the  rest  of  the  vessels  should  gather  there  (2005). 
pervenit  priusquam  Pompeius  sentire  posset,  Caes.  C.  3,  67,  4,  he  got 
there  before  Pompey  should  be  able  to  learn  of  his  coming  (1919).     Xerxes 
praemium  proposuit,  qui   invenisset  novam   voluptatem,    TD.  5,  20, 
Xerxes  offered  a  reward  to  anybody  who  should  devise  a  new  form  of  entertain- 
ment (2110). 

1726.  A  speaker  or  writer  may  quote  his  own  thoughts  in  the  indirect  form,  like 
another  person's :  as,  haec  tibi  dictabam  post  fanum  putre  Vacunae,  ex- 
cepto  quod  non  simul  esses,  cetera  laetus,  H.  E.  i,  10,  49,  / 'write  thee  this 
behind  V'acuna's  mouldering  pile,  in  all  else  -well,  except  that  thou  'rt  not  here  the 
•while  (1601). 

1727.  Instead  of  an  intimation  of  indirect  discourse  by  a  mere  subjunctive,  a  verb 
of  thinking  or  saying  is  sometimes  introduced  by  qui,  or  especially  quod,  sometimes 
by  cum,  and  put  illogically  itself  in  the  subjunctive :  as,  litteras,  quas  me  sib! 
misisse  diceret,  recitavit,  Ph.  2,  7,  he  read  off  a  letter,  -which  he^said  I  sent 
him,'\.Q.  quas  misissem.    impetrare  non  potui,  quod  religiSne  se  im- 
pediri  dicerent,  Sulpicius  in  Pant.  4, 12,  3,  /  could  not  get  leave,  because  they  said 


they  -were  hampered  by  religious  scruple,  i.  e.  quod  impedlrentur.     cum  dice- 

13,  saying  as  he  did.     This  coi 
so  in  Caesar,  rare  in  Sallust. 


ret,  DN.  3,  83,  saying  as  he  did.     This  construction  is  common  in  Cicero,  somewhat 


1728.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  sentences  expressing  an  essential 
part  of  the  thought,  which  are  subordinate  to  another  subjunctive,  or 
to  an  infinitive.  This  is  called  the  Subjunctive  of  Attraction,  or  oj 
Assimilation;  as, 

291 


1 7 2 9- 1 7 3 1 .]   Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


vereor  ne,  dum  minuere  velim  laborem,  augeam,  Leg.  i,  12, 
afraid  I  miy  make  the  work  harder,  while  I  am  aiming  to  make  it  less,  si 
solos  e5s  diceres  miserSs,  quibus  moriendum  esset,  neminem  ecrum, 
qui  viverent  exciperes,  TD.  I,  9,  if  you  should  pronounce  only  such  people 
unhafipy  as  had  to  die,  you  would  not  except  one  of  those  who  were  living. 
mos  est  Syracusis,  ut  si  qua  de  re  ad  senatum  referatur,  dicat  senten- 
tiam  qui  velit,  V.  4,  142,  //  is  the  custom  at  Syracuse,  that  if  any  question  is 
discussed  in  the  senate,  anybody  who  pleases  may  express  his  opinion,  sapiens 
n5n  dubitat,  si  ita  melius  sit,  migrare  de  vita,  Fin.  I,  62,  the  sage  does  not 
hesitate,  if  this  be  the  better  course,  to  withdraw  from  life,  mos  est  Athenis 
laudari  in  contione  eos,  qui  sint  in  proeliis  interfecti,  O  151,  it  is  the 
custom  in  Athens  to  eulogize  in  public  assembly  such  as  have  fallen  in  action. 

1729.  The  indicative  is  kept  in  subordinate  statements  added  or  vouched 
for  by  the  person  reporting,  and  also  in  circumlocutions  equivalent  to  a 
substantive :  as, 

nuntiatum  est  Ariovistum  ad  occupandum  Vesontionem,  quod  est 
oppidum  maximu'm  Sequanorum,  contendere,  i,  38,  i,  it  was  reported  that 
Ariovistus  was  pressing  on  to  seize  Vesontio,  which  is  the  most  considerable  town 
of  the  Sequans.  prudentissima  civitas  Atheniensium,  dum  ea  rerum 
potita  est,  fuisse  traditur,  RA.  70,  Athens  is  said  to  have  been  passing  wise, 
as  long  as  she  held  the  hegemony,  vis,  quae  restant,  me  loqui  ?  T.  Andr. 
195,  wilt  have  me  tell  the  rest?  i.  e.  relicua.  fieri  potest,  ut  id  quod  sentit 
polite  eloqui  non  possit,  TD.  i,  6,  it  may  be  that  he  cannot  express  his 
thought  in  polished  style,  i.  e.  sententiam  suam. 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  REPEATED  ACTION. 

1730.  The  subjunctive  is  sometimes  used  in  relative,  tem- 
poral, or  conditional  sentences,  to  express  action  repeated  or 
occurring  at  no  particular  time  :  as, 

(a.)  neque  aliter  si  facial,  ullam  inter  suos  habet  auctoritatem,  6,  n, 

4,  and  if  he  does  not  do  this,  he  never  has  any  ascendancy  at  all  over  his  people. 
With  the  present  and  perfect,  however,  this  subjunctive  is  confined  princi- 
pally to  the  indefinite  second  person  singular  (1030) :  as,  bonus  segnior  fit, 
ubf  neglegas,  S.  /.  31,  28,  the  good  man  always  gets  slacker,  when  you  are 
neglectful,  siquoi  mutuom  quid  dederis,  fit  pro  proprio  perditum,  PI  Tri. 
1050,  if  you  've  lent  anything  to  any  man,  'tis  not  your  own,  but  lost,  (b.)  The 
imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  begin  with  Catullus  and  Caesar,  and 
get  to  be  common  with  Livy  and  Tacitus :  as,  si  quis  prehenderetur, 
consensu  militum  eripiebatur,  Caes.  C.  3,  no,  4,  every  time  a  man  was 
taken  up,  he  was  rescued  by  the  joint  action  of  the  rank  and  file,  quemcum- 
que  lictor  prendisset,  tribunus  mitti  iubebat,  L.  3,  n,  2,  every  man  the 
lictor  arrested,  a  tribune  would  order  released. 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  AS  IN  THE  SIMPLE  SENTENCE. 

1731.  The  subjunctive  of  wish,  of  action  conceivable,  or  of  inter- 
rogation, is  sometimes  used  in  a  subordinate  sentence  exactly  as  in 
main  sentences  :  as, 

292 


Tense  of  the  Su  b  or  din  a  te  Sen  tence.   [1732-1735 


haec  die  natal!  meo  scrips!,  qu5  utinam  susceptus  non  essem,  Att. 
TI>  9>  3>  th's  I  have  written  on  my  birthday,  on  which  day  I  wish  I  had  never 
been  Itfted  from  the  ground  (1544).  ut  videas,  Lucr.  3,  348,  so  that  you  can 
see  (1556).  neque  id  facio,  ut  forsitan  quibusdam  videar,  simufatione 
Fain.  1,8,  2,  nor  do  I  do  it,  as  perhaps  I  may  seem  to  some  to  do,  from  hypoc- 
risy (1556).  etiamst  paucis  vos  quod  monitos  voluerim,  PI.  Cap.  53, 
there  'j  one  point  more,  on  which  I'd  have  you  briefly  warned  (1558).  erant 
eiusmodi  situs  oppidorum,  ut  neque  pedibus  aditum  haberent  neque 
navibus,  quod  minuente  aestu  naves  in  vadis  adflictarentur,  3,  52,  i, 
the  towns  were  so  situated  that  there  was  no  access  to  them  by  land,  nor  by  boat 
either,  because  at  ebb  tide  vessels  would  found  on  the  shoals  (1559).  vix  erat 
hoc  imperatum,  cum  ilium  spoliatum  videres,  V.  4,  86,  hardly  w.is  the 
order  from  his  lips,  when  you  might  have  seen  the  man  slript  (1559).  quo  me 
vertam  nescid,  Clu.  4,  I  don't  know  which  way  to  turn  (1563). 


TENSE   OF  THE   SUBORDINATE   SENTENCE. 

THE  TENSES   OF  THE   INDICATIVE. 

1732.  I.  The  tense  of  a  subordinate  indicative  often  indicates 
a  close  relation  of  time  with  the  tense  of  the  leading  verb,  par- 
ticularly in  cases  of  repeated  contemporaneous  or  antecedent 
action.  The  subordinate  sentence  in  such  combinations  is  said 
to  have  Relative  time. 

J733-  C1-)  The  subordinate  indicative  tense  may  express  ac- 
tion concurrent  with  the  main  action.  Two  concurrent  sentences 
are  usually  put  in  the  same  tense. 

Concurrent  action  is  said  to  be  (a.)  congruent,  when  two  actions  merely 
cover  the  same  time:  as,  dum  Ieg5,  adsentior,  TD.  i,  24,  as  long  as  I  am 
reading,  I  assent,  dum  necesse  erat,  unus  omnia  poterat,  RA,  139,  so 
long  as  it  had  to  be,  one  man  controlled  the  world,  dum  Latmae  loquentur 
litterae,  quercus  huic  Ioc5  non  deerit,  Leg.  i,  2,  as  long  as  Latin  literature 
has  the  gift  of  speech,  this  spot  will  not  lack  its  oak.  vixit,  dum  vixit,  bene, 
T.  Hec.  461,  he  lived  well  all  the  time  he  lived,  quoad  potuit,  fortissimo 
restitit,  4,  12,  5,  as  long  as  he  could,  he  made  a  manful  stand.  Or  (b.)  coinci- 
dent, when  one  action  is  virtually  the  same  as  the  other :  as,  cum  tacent, 
clamant,  C.  I,  21,  while  they  are  dumb,  they  cry  otit,  i.  e.  their  silence  is  as 
telling  as  a  shout,  fecisti  mih!  pergratum,  quod  Serapionis  librum 
misisti,  Att.  2,  4,  i,  you  have  obliged  me  very  much  by  sending  Serapio's  book. 

1734.  (2.)  The    subordinate   indicative    tense    may   express 
action  contemporaneous,  antecedent,  or  subsequent,  in  relation 
to  the  main  action. 

1735.  (a.)  Action  contemporaneous  with  a  main  present  is   ex- 
pressed by  a  present,  with  a  main  future  or  virtual  future,  by  a  future, 
with  a  main  secondary  tense  by  an  imperfect:  as, 

293 


1736-1739-]  Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


quod  est,  eo  decet  uti,  CM.  27,  what  you  have,  that  you  should  avail 
yourself  of.  horologium  mittam,  si  erit  sudum,  Fam.  16,  18,  3,  /  will 
send  the  clock,  if  it  is  pleasant  (1625).  paulatim  dabis,  si  sapies,  T.  ffau. 
870,  you  '//  give  in  driblets,  if  you  are  wise,  cum  relaxare  animos  volent, 
caveant  intemperantiam,  Off.  I,  122,  when  they  want  to  unbend,  let  them 
beware  of  excess  (1625  ;  1718).  omnia  deerant,  quae  ad  reficiendas  naves 
erant  usui,  4,  29,  4,  they  were  out  of  everything  that  was  serviceable  for  re- 
pairing their  vessels. 

1736.  (£.)  Action  antecedent  to  a  main  present  is  expressed  by  a 
perfect,  to  a  main  future  or  virtual  future  by  a  future  perfect,  to  a  main 
secondary  tense  by  a  pluperfect:  as, 

qu5cumque  aspexisti  tuae  tib!  occurrunt  iniuriae,  Par.  18,  wherever 
you  turn  your  gaze,  you  are  confronted  by  your  own  abominable  acts,  cum 
posui  librum,  adsensiS  omnis  elabitur,  TD.  I,  24,  when  I  drop  the  book, 
all  assent  melts  away  (1860).  quicquid  feceris,  adprobabo,  Fam.  3,  3,  2, 
no  matter  what  you  do,  I  shall  think  it  well  (1626).  ut  quisque  istius  ani- 
mum  offenderat,  in  lautumias  statim  coniciebatur,  V.  5,  143,  any  man  that 
wounded  his  sensibilities  was  always  Jlung  into  the  quarries  without  any  ado. 

1737.  (<:.)  Action  subsequent  to  a  main  present  is  expressed  by 
the  future  participle  with  a  present  form  of  sum,  to  a  main  future  or 
virtual  future  by  the  future  participle  with  a  future  form  of  sum,  and 
to  a  main  secondary  tense  by  the  future  participle  with  an  imperfect 
form  of  sum  :  as, 

decem  dies  sunt  ante  ludos,  quos  Cn.  Pompeius  facturus  est,  V. 
a.  pr.  31,  there  are  ten  days  before  the  shows  which  Pompey  is  to  manage. 
attentos  faciemus,  si  demonstrabimus  ea,  quae  dicturi  erimus,  magna 
esse,  Inv.  I,  23,  we  shall  make  people  attentive  if  we  show  that  what  u-e  are 
going  to  say  is  important,  rex,  quia  non  interfuturus  navali  certamim 
erat,  Magnesiam  concessit,  L.  36,  43,  9,  as  the  king  was  not  to  have  a  hand 
in  the  action  at  sea,  he  moved  off  to  Magnesia. 

1738.  II.  A  subordinate  indicative  tense  is  said  to  be  Inde- 
pendent when  it  simply  expresses  time  of  its  own,  without  any 
close  relation  to  the  time  of  the  main  action. 

Such  independent  tenses  may  denote  general  present  action  :  as,  ibam 
forte  via  sacra,  sicut  meus  est  mos,  H.  S.  i,  9,  i,  in  Sacred  Street,  as  is 
my  wont,  I  happened  to  be  promenading  (relatively,  erat  mos,  1735).  non 
me  appellabis,  si  sapis,  PI.  Most.  515,  you  won't  address  me,  if  you  have 
sense  (relatively,  si  sapies,  1735).  Or  past  action,  either  continuous,  com- 
pleted, or  indefinite :  as,  ut  mos  fuit  BIthyniae  regibus,  lectica  fereba- 
tur,  V.  5,  27,  he  regularly  rode  in  a  litter,  as  was  the  practice  of  the  despots  oj 
Bithynia  ;  here  fuit  denotes  action  simply  as  past,  without  further  definition 
of  time  (1603),  whereas  erat,  relative  to  the  time  of  ferebatur,  would  imply 
which  was  then  the  practice  (1595)- 

1739-  With  dum,  in  the  time  while,  an  independent  present  is  used:  see 
1995.  With  postquam,  &c.,  after,  an  independent  perfect  is  used  of  a  single 
action;  see  1925. 

294 


Tense  of  the  Subordinate  Sentence.  [1740—1746. 


THE  TENSES   OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1740.  Subordinate   subjunctive   sentences  were   originally   independent 
coordinate  sentences,  in  the  tense  required  to  express  the  thought.       By 
degrees  the  subordinate  sentence  blended  closely  with  the  main  sentence, 
and  the  combination  of  the  two  was  regarded  as  one  whole. 

1741.  I.    The  time  of  the  subordinate  subjunctive  is  usually 
Relative,  that  is  either  contemporaneous,  antecedent,  or  subse- 
quent, in  relation  to  that  of  the  main  action. 

1742.  Action  contemporaneous  with  the  main  action  is  expressed 
by  a  present  or  imperfect  subjunctive.    Action  antecedent  is  expressed 
by  a  perfect  or  a  pluperfect  subjunctive.     Action  subsequent  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  future  participle  with  a  form  of  sim  or  of  essem. 

1743.  Subordinate  sentences  with  verbs  of  will  or  aim,  with  verbs  of  fear,  also  final 
sentences  and  many  consecutive  sentences  are  expressed  in  Latin  as  contemporaneous 
with  the  main  action,  not  as  subsequent  to  it. 

1744*  II-  The  main  and  subordinate  sentences  may  express 
wholly  different  spheres  of  time  by  tenses  not  commonly  used  to- 
gether, when  the  thought  requires  it.  In  such  cases  the  tense  of  the 
subordinate  member  is  called •  Independent,  like  the  analogous  tenses 
of  the  indicative  (1738). 

1745.  The  use  of  subordinate  subjunctive  tenses  relatively  to  the  main 
tense,  or  what  is  commonly  called  the  Sequence  of  Tenses,  is  as  follows  : 

TENSE  SUBORDINATE  TO  AN  INDICATIVE. 

1746.  (i.)  The  present,   or  perfect   subjunctive,  or 
the   future  participle  with  a  form  of  sim,  is  used  in 
sentences  subordinate  to  a  primary  tense  (1717):  as, 

(a.)  te  hortor,  ut  Romam  pergas,  QFr.  I,  3,  4,  /  urge  you  to  repair  to 
Rome,  cura,  ut  quam  prlmum  venias,  Fam.  4,  10,  I,  mind  that  you  come 
as  soon  as  you  can.  ego  quid  acceperim  sci5,  RA.  58,  I  know  what  I  have 
received,  quam  sum  sollicitus  quidnam  futurum  sit,  Att.  8,  6,  3,  how 
anxious  I  am  to  know  what  in  the  world  is  to  come.  (/;.)  in  eum  locum  res 
deducta  est  ut  salvi  esse  nequeamus,  Fam.  16,  12,  i,  to  such  a  pass  has  it 
come  that  we  cannot  be  saved,  an  oblitus  es  quid  initio  dixerim  ?  DAT. 
2,  2,  have  you  possibly  forgotten  what  I  said  at  the  start?  quoniam  in  earn 
rationem  vitae  n5s  fortuna  deduxit,  ut  sempiternus  sermo  de  nSbis 
futurus  sit,  caveamus,  QFr.  i,  i,  38,  since  fortune  has  set  us  in  such  a 
walk  of  life  that  we  are  to  be  eternally  talked  about,  let  us  be  on  our  guard. 
(,-. )  efficiam,  ut  intellegatis,  Clu.  7,  I  will  see  that  you  understand,  dicent 
quid  statuerint,  V.  2,  175,  they  will  tell  what  they  decided  on.  quae  fuerit 
causa,  mox  videro,  Fin.  I,  35,  what  the  reason  was  I  won't  consider  till  by 
and  by  (1630).  te  disertum  putabo,  si  ostenderis  quo  modo  sis  eos  inter 
sicarios  defensurus,  Ph.  2,  8,  I  shall  think  you  a  most  effective  speaker,  if  you 
show  how  you  are  going  to  defend  them  on  the  charge  of  murder. 

295 


1 747-1 75 1 .]  Sentences  :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 

1747.  (2.)  The  imperfect,  or  pluperfect  subjunctive, 
or  the  future  participle  with  a  form  of  essem,  is  used 
in  sentences  subordinate  to  a  secondary  tense  (1717)  : 
as, 

(a.)  his  rebus  fiebat,  ut  minus  late  vagarentur,  i,  2,  4,  so  it  came  to  pass 
that  they  did  not  roam  round  much,  docebat,  ut  totius  Galliae  principa- 
tum  Aedui  tenuissent,  i,  43,  6,  he  showed  how  the  Aeduans  had  had  the 
mastery  over  all  Gaul.  Flaccus  quid  alii  postea  faoturi  essent  scire  non 
poterat,  Fl.  33,  Flaccus  could  not  tell  what  other  people  would  do  in  the  future, 
\b.}  is  civitati  persuasit.  ut  de  finibus  suis  cum  omnibus  copiis  exirent, 
I,  2,  I,  this  man  prevailed  on  his  community  to  emigrate  from  their  place  of 
abode,  bag  and  baggage,  quas  res  in  Hispania  gessisset,  disseruit,  L.  28, 
38,  2,  he  discoursed  on  his  military  career  in  Spain,  an  Lacedaemonii 
quaesiverunt  num  se  esset  mori  prohibiturus?  TD.  5,  42,  did  the  Spar- 
tans ask  whether  he  was  going  to  prevent  them  Jrom  dying?  (c.)  Ariovistus 
tantos  sib!  spiritus  sumpserat,  ut  ferendus  non  videretur,  i,  33,  5,  Ario- 
vistus had  put  on  such  high  and  mighty  airs  thai  he  seemed  intolerable,  hie 
pagus,  cum  domo  exisset  patrum  nostrorum  memoria,  L.  Cassium 
consulem  interfecerat,  i,  12,  ^,this  canton,  sallying  out  from  home  in  our 
fathers'  recollection,  had  put  Cassius,  the  consul,  to  death,  illud  quod  mih! 
extremumproposueram,  cum  essem  de  belli  genere  dicturus,  IP.  17,  the 
point  I  had  reserved  till  the  end,  when  I  was  going  to  discourse  on  the  character 
of  the  war. 

1748.  With  any  kind  of  a  secondary  main  sentence,  a  subordinate  general 
truth  usually  stands  in  the  past,  contrary  to  the  English  idiom:  as, 

hie  cognosci  licuit,  quantum  esset  hominibus  praesidi  in  animi 
firmitudine,  Caes.  C.  3,  28,  4,  here  there  was  a  chance  to  learn  what  a  bulwark 
man  has  in  courage.  In  the  direct  form  est  (1588). 

1749.  A  subsequent  relation  is  sometimes  loosely  suggested  by  a  simple  subjunc- 
tive; necessarily  so  with  verbs  which  lack  the  future  participle,  or  which  are  in  the 
passive:  as,  sum  sollicitus  quidnam  de  provinciis  decernatur,  Fam.  2,  11, 

i,  7  am  anxious  to  see  -what  in  the  world  may  be  decided  on  about  the  provinces. 

1750.  In  a  single  example,  a  future  perfect  of  resulting  state  is  represented  in 
subordination  as  follows  :  nee  dubito  quin  confecta  iam  res  futiira  sit. ,Fam. 

6,  12,  3,  and  I  have  no  doubt  the  job  -will  soon  be  completely  finished  up,  directly, 
sine  dubio  confecta  iam  res  erit. 

1751.  (i.)  An  imperfect  subjunctive  expressing  a  particular  past  result, 
cause,  reason,  &c.,  is  sometimes  connected  with  a  main  general  present  tense 
(1744):  as, 

cuius  praecepti  tanta  vis  est,  ut  ea  Delphico  deo  tribueretur.  Leg. 

1,  58,  the  power  of  this  rule  is  so  mighty  that  it  was  ascribed  to  the  Delphic  god. 
cuius  r€i  tanta  est  vis,  ut  Ithacam  illam  sapientissimus  vir  immortali- 
tati  antep5neret,  DO.  i,  196,  so  irresistible  is  the  power  of  this  sentiment  that 
the  shrewdest  of  men  loved  his  little  Ithaca  better  than  life  eternal ;  of  Ulixes. 
laudantur  oratores  veteres  quod  crimina  diluere  dilucide  solerent,  V. 

2,  191,  the  orators  of  old  are  admired '  becatise  they  were  always  clear  in  ex- 
plaining accusations  away'     The  secondary  sequence  is  also  sometimes  ex- 
ceptionally used  with  ordinary  presents. 

296 


Tense  of  the  Subordinate  Sentence.  [1752-1756. 


1752.  (2.)  The  present  of  vivid  narration  is  commonly  regarded 
as  a  secondary  tense,  especially  when  the  subordinate  sentence  pre- 
cedes, and  regularly  with  narrative  cum.  Sometimes  however  as  a 
primary  tense  :  as, 

(a.)  servis  suis  Rubrius,  ut  ianuam  clauderent,  imperat,  V.  i,  66, 
Rubrius  orders  his  slaves  to  shut  the  front  door.  Aedui,  cum  se  defendere 
non  possent,  legates  ad  Caesarem  mittunt,  i,  u,  2,  the  A  eduans,  finding 
they  could  not  defend  themselves,  send  some  envoys  to  Caesar,  (b.)  hortatur, 
ut  arma  capiant,  7,  4,  4,  he  urges  them  to  fly  to  arms.  Sometimes  the  two 
sequences  stand  side  by  side,  or  a  subjunctive  of  primary  sequence  has  itself 
a  second  subordinate  subjunctive  of  secondary  sequence.  Either  sequence 
is  used  with  the  present  of  quotation  also  (1592). 

I753-  (3-)  Subordinate  sentences  of  past  action  conceivable,  of  action 
non-occurrent,  or  dubitative  questions  of  the  past,  retain  their  past  unchanged 
with  a  main  primary  tense  :  as, 

(a.)  veri  simile  non  est,  ut  ille  monumentis  maiorum  pecuniam 
anteponeret,  V.  4,  n,  it  is  not  conceivable  that  the  man  -would  have  thought 
more  of  money  than  of  his  heirlooms,  i.  e.  non  anteponeret  (1559).  (b.)  om- 
nia  sic  erunt  inlustria,  ut  ad  ea  probanda  totam  Siciliam  testem  ad- 
hibere  possem,  V.  5,  139,  everything  will t  be  so  self-evident,  that  I  could  use 
all  Sicily  as  a  witness  to  prove  it  (1560).  taceo,  ne  haec  quidem  conligS, 
quae  fortasse  valerent  apud  iudicem,  Lig.  30,  I'll  hold  my  tongue,  I  won't 
even  gather  together  the  following  arguments,  which  might  perhaps  be  telling 
with  a  juryman  (1560).  (c.)  quaero  a  te  cur  C.  Cornelium  non  defen- 
dere m,  Vat.  5,  I  put  the  question  to  you,  why  I  was  not  to  defend  Cornelius 
(1563)- 

1754.  A  final  subjunctive  subordinate  to  a  perfect  definite  some- 
times has  the  primary  sequence,  but  more  commonly  the  secondary  : 
as, 

(a.)  etiamne  ad  subsellia  cum  ferro  venistis,  ut  hie  iuguletis  Sex. 
Roscium  ?  RA.  32,  have  you  actually  come  to  the  court-room  knife  in  hand, 
to  cut  Roscius's  throat  on  the  spot?  (b.)  ne  ignoraretis  esse  aliquas  pacis 
v5bls  condiciones,  ad  vos  veni,  L.  21,  13,  2,  /  have  come  to  you  to  let  you 
know  that  you  have  some  chances  of  peace,  adduxi  hominem  in  quo  satis 
facere  exteris  nationibus  possetis,  V.  a.  pr.  2,  I  have  brought  up  a  man  in 
whose  person  you  can  give  satisfaction  to  foreign  nations. 

1755.  An  independent  present  or  perfect  subjunctive  may  be  put 
with  a  main  secondary  tense  (1744)  : 

1756.  (i.)  In  relative,  causal,  or  concessive  sentences  :  as, 

cum  in  ceteris  coloniis  duumviri  appellentur,  hi  se  praetSres  appel- 
lari  volebant,  Agr.  2,  93,  though  they  are  styled  in  all  other  colonies  The  'fivo, 
these  men  wanted  to  be  styled  praetors,  qui  adulescens  nihil  umquam  nisi 
severissime  et  gravissime  fecerit,  is  ea  aetate  saltavit?  D.  27,  did  the 
man  who  in  his  growing  years  invariably  behaved  with  austere  propriety,  dance 
and  caper  round  in  his  old  age  ?  hoc  tot5  proelio  cum  ab  h5ra  septima  ad 
vesperum  pugnatum  sit,  aversum  hostem  videre  nem5  potuit,  i,  26,  2, 
during  the  whole  of  this  engagement,  though  the  fighting  went  on  from  an  houf 
past  noon  till  evening,  nobody  could  catch  a  glimpse  of  an  enemy's  back. 

297 


1 75 7"1 7^2.]   Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


I757'  C2-)  Often  in  consecutive  sentences :  as, 

(a.)  in  provincia  Sicilia,  quam  iste  per  triennium  ita  vexavit,  ut  ea 
restitui  in  antiquum  statum  nullo  modo  possit,  V.  a.  pr.  12,  in  the  prov- 
ince of  Sicily,  which  the  defendant  so  effectually  tormented  three  years  running 
that  it  cannot  be  restored  at  all  to  its  original  estate,  priores  ita  regnarunt, 
ut  omnes  conditores  partium  certe  urbis  numerentur,  L.  2,  i,  2,  such 
was  the  administration  of  the  monarchs  preceding,  that  they  are  all  accounted 
founders  of  parts  at  least  of  Rome,  (b.)  The  perfect  subjunctive  sometimes 
represents  the  time  of  the  perfect  definite  :  as,  tantum  in  aerarium  pecu- 
niae  invexit,  ut  unius  imperatoris  praeda  finem  attulerit  tributorum, 
Off.  2,  76,  he  conveyed  such  quantities  of  money  into  the  treasury,  that  the  plun- 
der turned  in  by  a  single  commander  has  put  an  end  to  tribute  for  good  and  all. 
eo  usque  se  praebebat  patientem  atque  impigrum,  ut  eum  nemo  um- 
quam  in  equo  sedentem  viderit,  V.  5,  27,  he  showed  himself  so  indefatigably 
active  that  no  human  being  has  ever  seen  him  astride  a  horse.  Sometimes  the 
time  of  the  historical  perfect :  as,  temporis  tanta  fuit  exiguitas,  ut  ad 
galeas  induendas  tempus  defuerit,  2,  21,  5,  so  scant  was  the  time  that  they 
had  not  time  to  put  their  helmets  on.  hie  ita  quievit,  ut  eo  tempore  omni 
Neapoli  fuerit,  Still.  17,  this  man  held  so  quiet  that  he  staid  all  that  time 
at  Neapolis.  In  Cicero  a  negative  subordinate  perfect  is  not  uncommon ;  an 
affirmative  one  is  very  rare.  This,  construction  is  more  common  in  Nepos, 
Livy,  and  Tacitus,  and  is  the  prevalent  one  in  Suetonius. 

1758.  The  imperfect  only  is  used  in  complementary  sentences  with  past  verbs  of 
happening,  such  as  accidit,  contigit,  &c.  (1966). 

1759.  When  two  consecutive  subjunctives  are  coordinated,  they  usually  have  the 
•same  tense.     Sometimes  however  the  first  is  perfect  and  the  second  imperfect,  or  the 
reverse. 

1760.  (3.)  An  indirect   question   in  the   present  or   perfect  sometimes 
retains  its  original  tense  with  a  main  secondary  tense  (1744)  :  as, 

hie  quantum  in  bello  fortuna  possit,  cognosci  potuit,  6,  35,  2,  here 
there  was  a  chance  to  see  how  potent  dame  Fortune  is  in  war.  Here  possit 
represents  potest  of  a  general  truth  (1588) ;  but  usually  general  truths  have 
the  regular  sequence  (1748).  cur  abstinuerit  spectaculo  ipse,  varie  trahe- 
bant,  Ta.  I,  76,  why  the  emperor  did  not  go  to  the  show,  they  accounted  for  in 
this  way  and  that ,  representing  cur  abstinuit  ?  quo  consilio  redierim 
initio  audistis,  post  est^is  expert!,  Ph.  10,  8,  what  my  idea  was  in  coming 
back,  you  learned  first  by*  hearsay,  afterwards  by  personal  observation,  repre- 
senting quo  consilio  redii? 

1761.  The  subordinate  subjunctive  has  sometimes  the  sequence  of  the  nearest 
verb,  instead  of  that  of  its  proper  verb:  as,  curavit,  quod  semper  in  re  publica 
tenendum  est,  ne  plurimum  valeant  plurimi,  RP.  2,  39,  he  arranged  it  so. 
a  point  -which  is  always  to  be  held  fast  in  government,  that  the  greatest  number  may 
not  have  the  greatest  power. 

TENSE  SUBORDINATE  TO  A  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1762.  When  the  leading  verb  is  a  subjunctive,  the  present  is  re- 
garded as  primary,  and  the  .imperfect  and  pluperfect  as  secondary  : 
as, 

298 


Tense  of  the  Subordinate  Sentence.   [1763-1766. 


(a.)  exspecto  eius  modi  litteras  ex  quibus  n5n  quid  fiat,  sed  quid 
futurum  sit  sciam,  Aft.  5,  12,  2,  /  am  expecting  a  letter  of  a  kind  to  let  me 
know  not  -what  is  going  on,  but  what  will  be  going  on.  quid  prof  ecerim  facias 
me  velim  certiorem,  Faun.  7,  10,  3,  how  far  I  have  succeeded  I  wish  you 
would  let  me  know,  (b.)  qualis  esset  natura  mentis  qui  cognoscerent 
misit,  i,  21,  I,  he  sent  some  scouts  to  find  oitt  what  the  character  of  the  moun- 
tain was.  quid  me  prohiberet  Epicureum  esse,  si  probarem  quae  dice- 
ret,  Fin.  i,  27,  what  would  prevent  me  from  being  an  Epicurean,  if  I  accepted 
what  he  said?  quae  si  bis  bina  quot  essent  didicisset  Epicurus,  certe 
non  diceret,  DN.  2,  49,  Epicurus  would  certainly  not  say  this,  if  he  had  ever 
been  taught  how  much  twice  two  is  (1748). 

1763.  An  imperfect  subjunctive  of  action  non-occurrent  at  the  present  time  has 
occasionally  the  present  sequence :  as,  mlrareris,  si  interesses,  qua  patientia 
valetudinem  toleret,  Plin.  Ep.  i,  22,  7,  you  would  be  amazed  to  find ',  if  you 
were  with  him,  -with  what  dogged  endurance  he  bears  up  under  his  illness.    But  the 
secondary  sequence  is  far  more  common. 

1764.  (i.)  The  perfect  subjunctive  in  independent  main  sentences  of  pro- 
hibition   (1551)  or  of  action  conceivable   (1558)   is  regarded  as  a  primary 
tense  :  as, 

ne  dubitaris  quin  id  mih!  futurum  sit  antiquius,  Att.  7,  3,  2,  don't 
entertain  any  doubt  that  this  course  will  be  preferable  in  my  eyes,  quid  non 
sit  citius  quam  quid  sit  dixerim,  DN.  i,  60, 1  could  sooner  tell  what  is  not, 
than  what  is. 

1765.  (2.)  In  subordinate  sentences,  the  perfect  subjunctive  has  the  main 
sequence  when  it  represents  the  indicative  perfect  definite,  and  the  secondary 
when  it  represents  the  indicative  historical  perfect  or  the  imperfect :  as, 

(a.)  nemo  fere  vestrum  est,  quin,  quern  ad  modum  captae  sint  Sy- 
racusae  saepe  audierit,  V.  4,  115,  there  is  hardly  a  man  of  your  number  but 
has  heard  over  and  over  again  how  Syracuse  was  taken,  (b.)  qua  re  accident 
ut  id  suspicarere  quod  scribis  nesci5,  Fam.  2,  16,  i,  how  it  came  to  pass 
that  you  suspected  what  you  write,  I  can't  imagine. 

TENSE  SUBORDINATE  TO  A  NOUN  OF  THE  VERB. 

1766.  (i.)  A  subjunctive  subordinate  to  one  of  the  nouns  of  the 
verb,  except  the  perfect  infinitive  or  the  perfect  participle,  follows  the 
sequence  of  the  verb  :  as, 

desino  quaerere  cur  emeris,  V.  4,  10,  /  cease  to  ask  why  you  bought. 
neminem  tam  amentem  fore  putaverunt,  ut  emeret  argentum,  V.  4,  9, 
they  did  not  dream  anybody  would  be  crazy  enough  to  buy  plate,  securi  per- 
cussi,  adeo  torpentibus  metu  qui  aderant,  ut  ne  gemitus  quidem  exau- 
diretur,  L.  28,  29,  u,  they  were  beheaded,  everybody  there  being  so  completely 
paralyzed  with  fear  that  not  even  a  groan  could  be  heard.  Q.  F'abius  Pictor 
Delphos  missus  est  sciscitatum,  quibus  precibus  deos  possent  placare, 
L.  22,  57,  5,  Fabius  Pictor  was  sent  to  Delphi  to  find  out  by  what  sort  of  prayers 
they  could  get  the  ear  of  the  gods,  cupido  incessit  animos  iuvenum  scisci- 
tandi  ad  quem  eorum  regnum  esset  venturum,  L.  i,  56,  10,  the  youths 
were  possessed  with  a  desire  to  find  out  to  which  one  of  their  number  the  throne 
was  to  fall. 

299 


— ll 72-]   Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


1767.  (2.)  With  a  perfect  infinitive  or  perfect  participle,  the  subordinate 
subjunctive  may  be  in  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect,  even  with  a  primary 
leading  verb :  as, 

satis  rnih!  multa  verba  fecisse  videor,  qua  re  esset  hoc  bellum 
necessarium,  IP.  27,  I  fancy  I  have  said  enough  to  show  why  this  war 
is  unavoidable,  hunc  isti  aiunt,  cum  taurum  immolavisset,  mortuum 
concidisse,  Br.  43,  your  gentlemen  say  that  this  man,  after  sacrificing  a  bull, 
tumbled  down  dead,  viator  bene  vestitus  causa  grassatori  fuisse  dicetur 
cur  ab  eo  spoliaretur,  Fat.  34,  a  well-dressed  traveller  will  be  said  to  have  been 
a  temptation  for  a  footpad  to  rob  him.  versabor  in  re  saepe  quaesita,  suffra- 
gia  clam  an  palam  ferre  melius  esset,  Leg.  3,  33,  /  shall  be  working  on  a 
question  that  has  often  been  put,  whether  it  was  better  to  vote  secretly  or  openly. 

1768.  The  sequence  with  a  perfect  infinitive  is,  however,  often  primary :  as,  hie 
si  finem  faciam  dicendi,   satis  iudici  fecisse  videar  cur  secundum 
R5scium  iudicari  debeat,  RC.  14,  if  I  should  stof  sneaking  here,  I  should  feel 
I  had  made  it  plain  enough  to  the  court  why  a  judgement  should  be  rendered  for 
Roscius. 

1769.  The  secondary  sequence  is  used  with  memim,  remember,  even  when  it 
has  the  present  infinitive   (2220):   as,   L.  Metellum  memini  ita  boms  esse 
viribus  extreme  tempore  aetatis,  ut  adulescentiam  non  requireret, 

CM.  30,  /  can  remember  Metellus's  being  so  good  and  strong  in  the  very  last  part  of 
his  life  that  he  did  not  feel  the  want  of  youth. 


1770.  Sentences  with  a  subjunctive  due  to  another  subjunc- 
tive or  to  an  infinitive  are  put  as  follows : 

1771.  (i.)  Sentences  of  relative  time  express  contemporaneous, 
antecedent,  and  subsequent  action  like  corresponding  indicative  sen- 
tences, with  the  appropriate  sequence :  as, 

vereor,  ne,  dum  minuere  velim  laborem,  augeam,  Leg.  \,  12,  I  am 
afraid  that  while  I  wish  to  make  the  work  less,  I  may  make  it  more,  crocodi- 
les dicunt,  cum  in  terra  partum  ediderint,  obruere  ova,  DN.  2,  129,  they 
say  that  the  crocodile,  after  laying  on  land,  buries  her  eggs,  dicebam  quoad 
metueres,  omnia  te  promissurum  :  simul  ac  timere  desisses,  similem 
te  futurum  tui,  Ph.  2,  89,  /  said  that  as  long  as  you  were  afraid,  you  would 
promise  everything ;  the  moment  you  ceased  to  fear,  you  would  be  just  like  your- 
self, constituerunt  ea,  quae  ad  proficiscendum  pertinerent,  comparare, 
I,  3,  I,  they  resolved  to  get  such  things  ready  as  were  necessary  for  the  march. 
erat  scriptum :  nisi  domum  reverteretur,  se  capitis  eum  damnaturos, 
N.  4,  3,  4,  it  stood  written  that,  if  he  did  not  come  back  home,  they  would  con- 
demn 'him  to  death  (direct  form  nisi  reverteris,  damnabimus).  legati  vene- 
runt,  qui  se  ea,  quae  imperasset,  facturos  pollicerentur,  4,  22,  i,  some 
envoys  came,  to  engage  to  do  what  he  ordered  (direct  form  quae  imperaris, 
faciemus).  Veneti  confldebant  Romanes  neque  ullam  facultatem 
habere  navium,  neque  eorum  locorum  ubl  bellum  gesturi  essent  por- 
tus  novisse,  3,  19,  6,  the  Venetans  felt  asstired  that  the  Romans  had  not  any- 
proper  supply  of  ships,  and  were  not  acquainted  with  the  ports  in  the  places 
where  they  were  to  fight. 

1772.  (2.)   Sentences  with  independent  time  retain  the  independent  time 
in  the  subjunctive  in  primary  sequence  (1744);  in  secondary  sequence  the 
present  becomes  imperfect,  and  the  perfect  becomes  pluperfect:  as, 

300 


The  Indirect  Question. 


(a.)  quamquam  opinio  est,  eum  qui  multis  annis  ante  hos  fuerit, 
Pisistratum,  multum  valuisse  dicendo,  Br.  27,  though  there  is  an  impres- 
sion that  the  man  who  lived  years  and  years  before  these  people,  Pisistratus,  was 
a  very  telling  orator  (direct  form,  qui  fuit,  1738).  dicitur,  postea  quam 
venerit,  paucis  diebus  esse  mortuus,  Clu.  175,  he  is  said  to  have  died  a 
few  days  after  he  came  (1739).  (b.)  cognovit  Suebos,  postea  quam  pon 
tern  fieri  comperissent,  nuntios  in  omnes  partes  dimisisse,  4,  19,  2,  he 
ascertained  that  after  the  Suebani  had  learned  of  the  building  of  the  bridge,  tht.y 
had  sent  out  messengers  in  every  direction. 


THE    INDIRECT   QUESTION. 

1773.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  indirect  questions 
or  exclamations. 

Thus,  when  the  direct  question,  qui  scis,  how  do  you  know  ?  is  subor- 
dinated to  a  main  sentence,  such  as  quaero,  I  ask,  the  scis  becomes  scias  : 
quaerS  qui  scias,  RA,  59,  I  ask  how  you  know.  Questions  or  exclamations 
thus  subordinated  are  called  Indirect  (1723).  In  English,  indirect  questions 
are  usually  characterized  simply  by  the  position  of  the  words,  the  subject 
standing  before  the  verb. 

1774.  The  indirect  question  is  one  of  the  commonest  of  constructions. 
It  depends  on  verbs  or  expressions  meaning  not  only  ask,  but  also  tell,  inform, 
ascertain,  see,  hear,  know,  consider,  deliberate,  doubt,  wonder,  fear,  &c.,  &c. 

YES  OR  No  QUESTIONS. 

I775*  Indirect  Yes  or  No  questions  are  introduced  by  the  same 
interrogative  particles  that  are  used  in  direct  questions  (1503).  But 
in  indirect  questions,  num  and  -ne  are  used  without  any  essential 
difference,  in  the  sense  of  whether,  if.  nonne  is  used  thus  only  by 
Cicero,  and  by  him  only  with  quaero  :  as, 

quaeris  num  disertus  sit  ?  Plane.  62,  do  you  ask  whether  he  is  a  good 
speaker  ?  quaesivi  cognosceretne  signum,  C.  3,  10,  I  asked  if  he  recognized 
the  seal,  quaero  nonne  tibl  faciendum  idem  sit,  Fin.  3,  13,  I  ask  whether 
you  ought  not  to  do  the  same,  videte  num  dubitandum  vobis  sit,  IP.  ig. 
consider  whether  you  ought  to  have  any  hesitation. 

1776.  The  combinations  -ne  .  .  .  -ne,  and  an  ...  an,  introducing  two  sepa- 
rate  questions,  are   rare;    -ne  .  .  .  -ne   is   mostly  confined   to  poetry.     In  a  few 
instances  such  questions  can  hardly  be  distinguished  from  alternatives. 

1777.  A  conditional  protasis  with  Si,  if,  to  see  if,  or  si  forte,  if  perchance,  some- 
times takes  the  place  of  an  indirect  question  in  expressions  or  implications  of  trial, 
hope,  or  expectation:  as,  ibo,  visatn  si  domist,  T.  Han.  170,  I'll  go  and  see  i) 
he  V  at  home.    Usually  with  the  subjunctive:  as,  exspectabam,  si  quid  scribe- 
res,  Att.  16,  2.  4,  I  was  -waiting  to  see  whether  you  -would  -write  anything,      cir- 
cumfunduntur  hostes,  si  'quern  aditum  reperire  possent,  6,  37,  4,  tht 
enemy  came  stream'' re;  round,  to  see  if  they  con  la  find  any  -way  of  getting  in. 

3OI 


1778-1785-]   Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


ALTERNATIVE  QUESTIONS. 

1778.  Indirect  alternative  questions    are   introduced   like   direct 
questions  (1519).     But  when  the  second  member  is  negative,  it  has 
oftener  necne  than  an  non  :  as, 

hoc  quaeramus,  verum  sit  an  falsum,  Clu.  124,  let  us  ask  this  question, 
whether  it  is  true  or  false,  quaesivi  a  Catilma  in  conventu  fuisset,  necne, 
C.  2,  13,  I  asked  Catiline  whether  he  had  been  at  the  meeting  or  not.  permul- 
tum  interest  utrum  perturbatione  animi,  an  consults  fiat  iniur.a,  Off  i, 
27,  it  makes  a  vast  difference  whether  wrong  be  done  in  heat  of  passion,  or 
with  deliberate  intent.  quaerS,  eum  Brutine  similem  mails  an  Antonii, 
Ph.  10,  5,  /  ask  whether  yon  would  rather  have  him  like  Briitus  or  like 
Antony. 

1779.  An  introductory  utrum  preceding  an  alternative  question  with  -ne  and 
an  occurs  a  few  times  in  Plautus  and  Cicero ;  utrumne  ...  an  occurs   once   in 
Cicero,  and  twice  in  Horace  and  Tacitus  each  ;  compare  1522.     After  utrum,  a  sec- 
ond alternative  is  sometimes  suppressed,  as  in  the  direct  question  (1523). 

1780.  -ne  in  the  second  member  only  of  an  alternative  question  is  rare,  and  not 
used  by  Caesar  or  Sallust :  as,  sine  sciam  captiva  materne  sim,  L.  2,  40,  5, 
let  me  know  -whether  I  am  a  captive  or  a  mother. 

1781.  (i.)  A  few  times  in   Plautus  and  Terence,  the  second  member  only  of  an 
alternative  question  is  expressed  with  qui  scio  an  ?  or  qui  scis  an  ?  equivalent  to 
perhaps:  as,  qui  SCIS  an  quae  iubeam  faciat  ?  T.  Eu.  790,  perhaps  she '//  do 
as  I  direct.     Horace  has  once  qui  scis  an,  AP.  462,  in  the  sense  of  perhaps,  and 
once  quis  scit  an,  4,  7,  17,  in  the  sense  of  perhaps  not. 

1782.  (2.)  The  second  member  only  of  an  alternative  question  is  often 
expressed  after  haud  scio  an,  I  don't  know  but,  possibly,  perhaps,  with  non, 
nem5,  nullus,  &c.,  if  the  sentence  is  negative  :  as, 

haud  scio  an  fieri  possit,  V.  3,  162,  I  don't  know  but  it  is  possible.  Simi- 
larlv,  though  not  often,  with  nescio  an,  haud  sciam  an,  dubito  an,  du- 
bitarim  an,  dubium  an,  incertum  an,  &c. :  as,  eloquentia  nescio  an 
habuisset  parem  neminem,  Br.  126,  in  oratory  I  fancy  he  would  have  had 
no  peer.  This  use,  in  which  haud  scio  an  becomes  adverbial,  and  the 
subjunctive  approaches  closely  that  of  modest  assertion,  is  principally  con- 
fined to  Cicero.  In  later  Latin,  haud  scio  an,  &c.,  sometimes  has  a  negative 
sense,  /  don't  know  whether,  with  ullus,  &c. 

1783.  From  Curtius  on,  an  is  used  quite  like  num  or  -ne,  in  a  single  indirect 
question,  without  implication  of  alternatives. 

1784.  Two  alternatives  are  rarely  used  without  any  interrogative  particles  at  all : 
as,  velit  nolit  scire  difficile  est,  QFr.  3,  8,  4,  -will  he  nill  he,  it  is  hard  to  know, 
i.  e.  whether  he  will  or  not.     Compare  1518. 

PRONOUN  QUESTIONS. 

1785.  Indirect  pronoun  questions  are  introduced  by  the  same  pro- 
nominal words  that  are  used  in  direct  pronoun  questions  (1526) :  as, 

cognoscit,  quae  gerantur,  5,  48,  2,  he  ascertains  what  is  going  on.  vide- 
tis  ut  omnes  despiciat,  RA.  135,  you  can  see  how  he  looks  down  on  everybody. 
quid  agas  et  ut  te  oblectes  scire  cupio,  QFr.  2,  3,  7,  I  am  eager  to  know 
how  you  do  and  how  you  are  amusing  yourself . 

102 


The  Indirect  Question.      [1786-1791. 


ORIGINAL  SUBJUNCTIVES. 

1786.  Questions  already  in  the  subjunctive  may  also  become  indi- 
rect. , 

Thus,  quo  me  vertam  ?  V.  5,  2,  which  way  shall  I  turn?  (1563)  be- 
comes indirect  in  qu5  me  vertam  nescio,  Clu.  4,  /  don't  know  which  way  1 
am  to  turn,  quid  faciam  ?  H.  S.  2,  i,  24,  what  shall  I  do?  (1563)  becomes 
indirect  in  quid  faciam,  praescribe,  H.  S.  2,  i,  5,  lay  down  the  law,  what 
I'm  to  do.  neque  satis  constabat  quid  agerent,  3,  14,  3,  and  it  was  not  at 
all  clear  what  they  had  best  do.  dubitavi  hosce  homines  emerem  an  non 
emerem,  PI.  Cap.  455,  /  had  my  doubts,  whether  to  biiy  these  men  or  not  to 
^(1564). 

INDICATIVE  QUESTIONS  APPARENTLY  INDIRECT. 

1787.   In  old    Latin,   the    indicative    occurs   often    in    connections 
where  the  subjunctive  would  be  used  in  classical  Latin  :  as, 

die,  quis  est,  PI.  B.  558,  say,  who  is  it?  whereas  die  quis  sit  would 
mean  say  who  it  is.  In  such  cases  the  question  is  not  subordinate,  but  co- 
ordinate, usually  with  an  imperative  (1697),  or  with  some  such  expression 
as  te  rog5,  volo  scire,  scln,  or  the  like.  Such  coordination  occurs  excep- 
tionally in  the  classical  period :  as,  et  vide,  quam  conversa  res  est,  Att. 
8,  13,  2,  and  observe,  how  everything  is  changed,  adspice,  ut  ingreditur,  V. 
6,  856,  see,  how  he  marches  off. 

1788.  The  indicative  is  used  with  nescio  followed  by  a  pronominal 
interrogative,  when  this  combination  is  equivalent  to   an   indefinite 
pronoun  or  adverb  :   as, 

prodit  nescio  quis,  T.  Ad.  635,  there's  some  one  coming  out.  This  is 
a  condensed  form  for  prodit  nescio  quis  sit,  there 's  coming  out  I  don't  know 
who  it  is,  the  real  question,  sit,  being  suppressed,  and  nescio  quis  acquiring 
the  meaning  of  aliquis,  somebody.  Similarly  nescio  with  unde,  ubf,  quando, 
quot,  &c.,  in  writers  of  all  ages.  Plautus  uses  scio  quid,  scio  ut,  &c., 
somewhat  in  this  way  once  or  twice  with  the  indicative  :  as,  scio  quid  ago, 
B.  78,  /'///  doing  I  know  what. 

1789.  This  combination  often  expresses  admiration,  contempt,  or  regret :  as,  con- 
tendo  turn  illud  nescio  quid  praeclarum  solere  existere,   Arch.   15,  / 
maintain  that  in  such  a  combination  the  beau  ideal  of  perfection  always  bursts  into 
being,      paulum  nescio  quid,  RA.  n^,  an  unconsidered  trifle,     divisa   est 
sententia,  postulante  nescio  quo,  Mil.  14,  the  question  was  divided,  on  mo- 
tion of -what 's  his  name,     nescio  quo  pacto,  C.  31,  unfortunately. 

1790.  The  indicative  is  used  in  like  manner  with  many  expressions,  originally 
exclamatory,  which  have  become  adverbs  :  such  are  immane   quantum,  prodi- 
giously, mirum  quantum,  wonderfully,  sane  quam,  immensely,  &c.,  &c.    See 
712  and  the  dictionary. 

1791.  Relative  constructions  often  have  the  appearance  of  indirect  questions,  and 
care  must  be  taken  not  to  confound  the  two.     Thus,  ut  is  a  relative  in  hanc  rem, 
Ut  factast,  eloquar,  PI.  Am.  1129,  / '//  tell  this  thing  as  it  occurred,  5.  e.  not  how 
it  occurred,     nostl  quae  sequontur,  TD.  4,  77,  you  know  the  things  that  follow, 
i.  e.  not  what  follows. 

3°3 


1 792-1798.']  Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


THE    RELATIVE    SENTENCE. 

1792.  Relative  sentences  are  introduced  by  relative  words,  the 
most  important  of  which  is  the  pronoun  qui,  who,  which,  or  that.     The 
relative  pronoun  may  be  in  any  case  required  by  the  context,  and  may 
represent  any  of  the  three  persons. 

1793.  The  relative  adverbs,  ubf,  quo,  unde,  often  take  the  place  of  a  relative 
pronoun  with  a  preposition,  chiefly  in  designations  of  place,  and  regularly  with  town 
and  island  names.     Less  frequently  of  persons,  though  unde  is  not  uncommonly  thus 
used. 

1794.  In  a  wider  sense,  sentences  introduced  by  any  relative  conjunctive  particle, 
such  as  ubf,  when,  are  sometimes  called  relative  sentences.     Such  sentences,  however, 
are  more  conveniently  treated  separately,  under  the  head  of  the  several  conjunctive 
particles. 

J795-  (!•)  The  relative  pronoun,  like  the  English  relative  who,  -which, 
was  developed  from  the  interrogative.  Originally,  the  relative  sentence  pre- 
cedes, and  the  main  sentence  follows,  just  as  in  question  and  answer. 

Thus,  quae  mutat,  ea  corrumpit,  Fin.  i,  21,  what  he  changes,  that  he 
spoils,  is  a  modification  of  the  older  question  and  answer:  quae  mutat  ?  ea 
corrumpit,  what  does  he  change  ?  that  he  spoils.  With  adjective  relatives,  the 
substantive  is  expressed  in  both  members,  in  old  or  formal  Latin :  as,  quae 
res  apud  nostr5s  non  erant,  earum  rerum  nomina  non  poterant  esse 
usitata,  Cornif.  4,  10,  what  things  did  not  exist  among  our  countrymen,  of 
those  things  the  names  could  not  have  been  in  common  use. 

1796.  (2.)  The  relative  sentence  may  also  come  last.     As  early  as  Plau- 
tus,  this  had  become  the  prevalent  arrangement,  and  the  substantive  of  the 
main  sentence  is  called  the  Antecedent:  as, 

ultra  eum  locum,  qu5  in  loco  German!  consederant,  castris  ido- 
neum  locum  delegit,  I,  49,  i,  beyond  the  place  in  rvhich  place  the  Germans  had 
established  themselves,  he  selected  a  suitable  spot  for  his  camp.  The  three  words 
dies,  locus,  and  res,  are  very  commonly  expressed  thus  both  in  the  antece- 
dent and  the  relative  sentence.  This  repetition  is  rare  in  Livy,  and  disap- 
pears after  his  time. 

1797.  In  old  Latin,  rarely  in  classical  poetry,  a  sentence  sometimes  begins  with  an 
emphasized  antecedent  put  before  the  relative,  and  in  the  case  of  the  relative :  as, 
urbem  quam  statuo  vostra  est,  V.  i,  573,  the  city  -which  I  found  is  yours;  for 
quam  urbem  statuS,  ea  vostra  est.    In  the  main  sentence,  is,  hie,  iste,  or 
ille,  is  often  used  ;  less  frequently,  as  in  this  example,  an  appellative. 

1798.  The  main  sentence  often  has  the  determinative  or  demonstrative, 
or  the  substantive,  or  both  omitted :  as, 

(a.)  ubf  intellexit  diem  Instare,  quo  die  frumentum  militibus  metiri 
oporteret,  I,  16,  5,  when  he  saw  the  day  was  drawing  ni^h,  on  which  day  the 
grain  was  to  be  measured  out  to  his  men,  (b.}  quos  amisimus  civis,  eos 
Mart  is  vis  perculit,  Marc.  17,  what  fellow-citizens  we  have  lost,  those  the  fury 
of  the  War-god  smote  down,  (c.)  Sabinus  qu5s  tribunes  rmlitum  circum 
se  habebat,  se  sequi  iubet,  5,  37,  i,  Sabinus  ordered  what  tribunes  of  the 
soldiers  he  had  about  him,  to  follow  him. 


The  Relative  Sentence.       [1799-1804. 


1799.  The  antecedent  is  often  omitted  when  it  is  indefinite,  or  is  obvious 
from  the  context :  as, 

sunt  qui  mirentur,  V.  i,  6,  there  be  who  wonder,  delegisti  quos 
Romae  relinqueres,  C.  i,  9,  you  picked  out  people  to  leave  in  Rome,  quod 
periit,  periit,  PI.  Cist.  703,  gone  is  gone.  Caesar  cognovit  Considium, 
quod  non  vidisset,  pro  vlso  sib!  renuntiavisse,  i,  22,  4,  Caesar  ascertained 
that  Considius  had  reported  to  him  as  seen  what  he  had  not  seen. 

1800.  An  ablative  or  nominative  abstract  in  the  relative  sentence  sometimes  repre- 
sents an  ablative  of  manner  or  quality  omitted  from  the  main  sentence  :  as,  qua  pru- 
dentia es,  nihil  te  fugiet,  Fam.  n,  13,  i,  -with  what  sense  you  have,  nothing 
•will  dude  you,  i.  e.  ea^ua  es  prudentia,  nihil  te  fugiet.  spero,  quae  tua 
prudentia  est,  te  valere,  Att.  6,  9,  \,  I  hope  that,  with  your  characteristic  caution, 
you  are  well,  at  Aiax,  quo  animo  traditur,  millies  oppetere  mortem 
quam  ilia  perpeti  maluisset,  Off.  i,  113,  A/ax,  on  the  contrary,  with  his 
traditional  vehemence,  would  have  chosen  rather  to  die  a  thousand  deaths  than  to 
submit  to  such  indignities.  This  ellipsis  begins  with  Cicero,  and  is  found  a  few  times 
only  in  later  writers. 

AGREEMENT  OF  THE  RELATIVE. 

1801.  The  agreement  of  the  relative  has  already  been  spoken  of  in  a 
general  way  (1082-1098).     For  convenience,  however,  it  may  be  set  forth 
here  more  explicitly. 

1802.  A  relative  pronoun  agrees  with  its   antecedent 
in  gender  and  number,  but  its  case  depends  on  the  con- 
struction of  the  sentence  in  which  it  stands  :  as, 

Hippias  gloriatus  est  anulum  quem  haberet,  pallium  quo  amictus, 
soccos  quibus  indutus  esset,  se  sua  manu  confecisse,  DO.  3,  127, 

Hippias  prided  himself  that  he  had  made  with  his  own  hand  the  ring  that  he 
wore,  the  cloak  in  which  he  was  wrapped,  and  the  slippers  that  he  had  on. 
This  holds  of  all  relatives  with  inflected  form,  such  as  quicumque,  qualis, 
quantus,  &c.,  &c. 

1803.  When  the  relative  refers  to  two  or  more  antecedents  of  different 
gender,  its  gender  is  determined  like  that  of  a  predicate  adjective  (1087) :  as, 

matres  et  Hberi,  quorum  aetas  misericordiam  vestram  requirebat, 
y.  5,  129,  mothers  and  babies,  whose  years  would  appeal  to  your  sympathy  (1088). 
otium  atque  divitiae,  quae  prima  mortales  putant,  S.  C.  36,  4,  peace  and 
prosperity,  which  the  sons  of  men  count  chiefest  of  blessings  (1089).  fortuna, 
quam  nemo  ab  incSnstantia  et  temeritate  seiunget,  quae  digna  non 
sunt  deo,  DN.  3,  61,  fortune,  which  nohody  will  distinguish  from  caprice  ana 
hazard,  qualities  which  are  not  befitting  god  (1089).  Sometimes  the  relative 
agrees  with  the  nearest  substantive  :  as,  eas  fruges  atque  fructus,  quos 
terra  gignit,  DN.  2,  37,  the  crops,  and  the  fruits  of  the  trees  that  earth 
produces. 

1804.  The  relative  is  sometimes  regulated  by  the  sense,  and  not  by  the 
form  of  the  antecedent :  as, 

20  3°5 


1 805-1 8 1 1  ]     Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


equitatum  praemittit  qui  videant,  i,  15,  i,  he  sends  the  cavalry  ahead, 
for  them  to  see  (1095).  unus  ex  eo  numero,  qui  ad  caedem  parati 
erant,  S.  /.  35,  6,  one  of  the  number  that  were  ready  to  do  murder  (1095).  duo 
prodigia,  quos  improbitas  tribune  constrictos  addixerat,  Sest.  38,  a  pair 
of  monstrosities,  whom  their  depravity  had  delivered  over  in  irons  to  the  tribune. 
scriba  pontificis,  quos  nunc  minores  pontifices  appellant,  L.  22,  57,  3,  a 
clerk  of  the  pontiff,  which  clerks  they  call  nowadays  lesser  pontiffs,  i.  e.  quos 
scribas.  Veiens  bellum  exortum,  quibus  Sabini  arma  coniunxerant, 
L.  2,  53,  r,  a  Vejan  war  broke  out,  with  whom  the  Sabines  had  allied  them- 
selves, i.  e.  bellum  cum  Veientibus. 

1805.  A  relative  referring  to  a  proper  name  and  explanatory  appellative  com- 
bined, may  take  the  gender  of  either:  as,  flumine  Rheno,  qui  agrum  Helve- 
tium  a  Germanis   dividit,  i,  2,  3,   by  the  jiver  Rhine,  -which   is  the  boundary 
between   Helvetians  and   Germans.      ad   flurnen    Scaldem  quod   influit    in 
Mosam,  6,  33,  3,  to  the  river  Scheldt,  that  empties  itself  into  the  Maas. 

1806.  With  verbs  of  indeterminate  meaning  (10-55),  the  relative  pronoun  some- 
times agrees  with  the  predicate  substantive:  as,  Thebae  ipsae,  quod  Boeotiae 
caput  est,  L.  42,  44,  3,   Thebes  itself,  -which  is  the  capital  of  Boeotia.     Often,  how- 
ever, with  the  antecedent:  as,  flumen  quod  appellatur  Tamesis,  5,  u,  8,  the 
river  which  is  called  the  Thames. 

1807.  When  the  relative  is  subject,  its  verb  agrees  with  the  person  of 
the  antecedent :  as, 

haec  omnia  is  fed,  qui  sodalis  Dolabellae  eram,  Fam.  12,  14,  7,  all 
this  I  did,  I  that  was  Dolabella's  bosom  friend,  iniquos  es,  qui  me  tacere 
postules,  T.  Hau.  ion,  thou  art  unfair,  expecting  me  to  hold  my  tongue. 
So  also  when  the  antecedent  is  implied  in  a  possessive  :  as,  cum  tu  nostra, 
qui  remansissemus,  caede  te  contentum  esse  dicebas,  C.  i,  7,  when  you 
said  you  were  satisfied  with  murdering  us,  who  had  staid  behind. 

1808.  For  an  accusative  of  the  relative  with  an  ablative  antecedent  the  ablative  is 
rarely  used:  as,  notante  iudice  quo  nosti  populo,  H.  S.  i,  6,  15,  the  judge 
condemning  —  thou  know'' st  who  —  the  world.     This  represents  the  older  interroga- 
tive conception  :  notante  iudice  —  qu5  ?  —  nosti,  populo  (1795). 

1809.  A  new  substantive  added  in  explanation  of  an  antecedent  is  put  after  the 
relative,  and   in  the  same  case:  as,  ad  Amanum  contend!,  qui  mons  erat 
hostium  plenus,  Aft.  5,  20,  3,  /  pushed  on  to  Amanus,  a  mountain  that  was 
packed  -with  the  enemy.     This  use  begins  with  Cicero ;   but  from  Livy  on,  the  ex- 
planatory word  is  also  put  as  an  appositive,  with  the  relative  following:  as,  Decius 
Magius,  vir  cui  nihil  defuit,  L.  23,  7,  4,  Magius,  a  man  that  lacked  nothing. 

1810.  An  adjective,  especially  a  comparative,  superlative,  or  numeral, 
explanatory  of  a  substantive  in  the  main  sentence,  is  often  put  in  the  relative 
sentence:  as, 

palus  quae  perpetua  intercedebat  Romanes  ad  insequendum  tar- 
dabat,  7,  26,  2,  a  morass,  that  lay  iinbroken  between,  hindered  the  Romans  from 
pursuit. 

1811.  When  reference  is  made  to  the  substance  of  a  sentence,  the 
neuter  quod  is  used,  or  more  commonly  id  quod,  either  usually  in 
parenthesis :  as, 

306 


The  Relative  Sen tence.        [1812-1816. 


intellegitur,  id  quod  iam  ante  dixi,  imprudente  L.  Sulla  scelera 
haec  fieri,  RA.  25,  it  is  plain,  as  I  have  said  once  before,  that  these  crimes  are 
committed  without  the  cognizance  of  Sulla.  In  continuations,  quae  res  :  as, 
naves  remover!  iussit,  quae  res  magn5  usui  nostris  fuit,  4,  25,  i,  he 

ordered  the  vessels  to  be  withdrawn^  a  course  which  proved  very  advantageous 
for  our  people. 

MOODS   IN   THE  RELATIVE   SENTENCE. 

1812.  The  relative  is  sometimes   equivalent  to  a  conditional  protasis. 
When  thus  used,  it  may  have  either  the  indicative  or  the  subjunctive,  as  the 
sense  requires :  as, 

(a.)  quod  beatum  est,  nee  habet  nee  exhibet  cuiquam  negotium, 

DN.  i,  85,  whatsoever  is  blessed,  has  no  trouble  and  makes  none  to  anybody, 
quisquis  hue  venerit,  pugnos  edet,  PL  Am.  309,  whoever  comes  this  way, 
shall  have  a  taste  of  fists  (1796).  omnia  mala  ingerebat  quemquem  ad- 
spexerat,  PI.  Men.  717,  she  showered  all  possible  bad  names  on  every  man  she 
saw  (1795).  (*•)  haec  <lui  videat,  nonne  cogatur  confiteri  decs  esse, 
DN.  2,  12,  whoso  should  see  this  would  be  forced,  would  tit  he?  to  admit  the 
existence  of  gods,  qui  videret,  equom  Troianum  introductum  diceret, 
V.  4,  52,  whoever  saw  it  would  have  sworn  it  was  the  Trojan  horse  brought  in 
(1559). 

THE  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

1813.  The  indicative  is  used  in  simple  declarations 
or  descriptions  introduced  by  a  relative  :  as, 

quem  di  dlligunt,  adulescens  moritur,  PL  B.  816,  whom  the  gods  love, 
dies  young,  reliqui,  qui  domi  manserunt,  se  alunt,  4,  i,  5,  the  others,  that 
stay  at  home,  support  themselves  (1736).  quos  laborantes  conspexerat,  his 
subsidia  submittebat,  4,  26,  4,  to  such  as  he  saw  in  stress,  he  kept  sending 
reinforcements  (1736).  tu  quod  voles  facies,  QFr.  3,  4,  5,  do  what  you  like 
(1735)- 

1814.  The  indicative  is  also  used  with  indefinite  relative  pronouns  and  adverbs: 
as,  quidquid  volt,  valde  volt,  Att.  14,  i,  2,  whatever  he  -wants,  he^  -wants  might- 
ily,   quisquis  est,  TD.  4.  37,  -whoever  he  may  be.    quacumque  iter  fecit,  V. 
i,  44,  -wherever  he  made  his  -way.      In  later  writers  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  is 
often  in  the  subjunctive  :  see  1730. 

1815.  An  original   indicative   often   becomes  subjunctive,  partic- 
ularly in  indirect  discourse   (1722)  ;  or  by  attraction   (1728)  ;  or  to 
indicate  repeated  action  (1730).     See  also  1727  and  1731. 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

1816.  Relative  pronoun  sentences  take  the  subjunc- 
tive to  denote   (i.)  a  purpose,   (2.)  a  characteristic  or 
result,  (3.)  a  cause,  reason,  proof,  or  a  concession. 

307 


1817-1823.]    Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


SENTENCES  OF  PURPOSE. 

1817.  (i.)  Relative  sentences  of  purpose  are  equivalent  to  sub- 
junctive sentences  introduced  by  ut,  in  order  that,  to  (1947)  :  as, 

ea  qui  conficeret,  C.  Trebonium  relinquit,  7,  n,  3,  he  left  Trebonius  to 
manage  this,  quails  esset  natura  mentis,  qui  cognoscerent,  misit,  i,  21,  i, 
he  sent  some  scouts  to  ascertain  what  the  character  of  the  mountain  was.  haec 
habui  de  amicitia  quae  dicerem,  L.  104,  this  was  what  I  had  to  say  of 
friendship.  Sentences  of  purpose  are  an  extension  of  the  subjunctive  of 
desire  (1540). 

SENTENCES  OF  CHARACTERISTIC  OR  RESULT. 

1818.  (2.)  Relative  sentences  of  characteristic  or  result  are  equiva- 
lent to  subjunctive  sentences  introduced  by  ut,  so  as  to,  so  that  (1947). 

The  main  sentence  sometimes  has  a  word  denoting  character,  such  as  is, 
eius  modi,  rarely  talis :  as,  neque  is  sum,  qui  mortis  periculo  terrear,  5, 
30,  2,  but  I  am  not  the  man  to  be  scared  by  danger  of  death,  no  not  I:  Often, 
however,  character  is  intimated  by  the  mood  alone  :  as,  secutae  sunt  tem- 
pestates  quae  nostros  in  castris  continerent,  4,  34,  4,  there  followed  a 
succession  of  storms  to  keep  our  people  in  camp,  quod  miserandum  sit  labo- 
ratis,  DN.  3,  62,  you  struggle  away  to  a  pitiable  degree.  Sentences  of  result 
are  an  extension  of  the  subjunctive  of  action  conceivable  (1554). 

1819.  The  subjunctive  with   qui  is  often  used  with  dignus,  indignus,  or 
idoneus,  usually  with  a  form  of  sum:  as,  Livianae  fabulae  non  satis  dignae 
quae  iterum  legantur,  Br.  71,  Livy's  plays  are  not  -worth  reading  twice,     non 
erit  id5neus   qui  ad  bellum  mittatur,  IP.  66,  he  -will  not  be  a^fit  person  to  be 
sent  to  the  -war.     Twice  thus,  aptus,  once  in  Cicero,  once  in  Ovid.     In  poetry  and 
late  prose  these  adjectives  sometimes  have  the  infinitive,     dignus  and  indignus 
have  also  ut  in  Plautus,  Livy,  and  Quintilian. 

1820.  Relative  subjunctive  sentences  are  sometimes  coordinated  by  et  or  sed, 
with  a  substantive,  adjective,  or  participle :  as,  audax  et  coetus  possit  quae  ferre 
virorum,  J.  6,  399,  a  brazen  minx,  and  one  quite  capable  effacing  crowds  of  men. 

1821.  Relative  sentences  after  assertions  or  questions  of  existence 
or  non-existence,  usually  take  the  subjunctive :  as, 

sunt  qui  putent,  TD.  i,  18,  there  be  people  to  think,  there  be  who  think,  or 
some  people  think,  nemo  est  qui  nesciat,  Fam.  i,  4,  2,  there  is  nobody  that 
doesrft  know,  sapientia  est  una  quae  maestitiam  pellat  ex  animis,  Fin. 
I,  43,  wisdom  is  the  only  thing  to  drive  sadness  from  the  soul. 

1822.  Such  expressions   are:    est   (exsistit,   exortus   est),  qui;   sunt 
(reperiuntur,  non  desunt),  qui ;  nemo  est,  qui ;  quis  est,  qui ;  solus  or 
Gnus  est,  qui ;  est,  nihil  est,  quod  ;  quid  est,  quod  ?  habeo,  n5n  habeo, 
nihil  habeo,  quod,  &c.,  &c.     Indefinite  subjects  are  sometimes  used  with 
these  verbs  :  as,  multi,  quidam,  nonnulli,  alii,  pauci ;  sometimes  appella- 
tives :  as,  homines,  philosophi. 

1823.  The  indicative,  however,  is  not  infrequently  found  in  affirmative  sentences, 
particularly  in  old  Latin  and  in   poetry:  as,  sunt  quos  scio  esse  amicos.  PI. 
Tri.  91,  some  men  there  are  I  kno-w  to  be  my  friends,    interdum  volgus  rectum 
videt,  est  ubi  peccat,  H.  E.  2,  i,  63,  sometimes  the  -world  sees  right,  there  be 
times  -when  it  errs,     sunt  item,  quae  appellantur  alces,  6,  27,  i,  then  again 
there  are  what  they  call  elks. 

308 


The  Relative  Sentence.       [1824-1829. 


SENTENCES  OF  CAUSE  OR  CONCESSION. 

1824.  (3.)  Relative  sentences  of  cause,  reason,  proof,  or  of  con- 
cession, are  equivalent  to  subjunctive  sentences  introduced  by  cum, 

since,  though  (1877):  as, 

(a.)  hospes,  qui  nihil  suspicaretur,  hominem  retinere  coepit,  V.  i,  64, 

the  friend,  suspecting  nothing,  undertook  to  hold  on  to  the  man.  Often  justify- 
ing the  use  of  a  single  word :  as,  6  fortunate  adulescens,  qui  tuae  virtutis 
Homerum  praeconem  inveneris,  Arch.  24,  oh  youth  thrice-blest,  with  Homer 
trumpeter  of  thy  prowess,  ad  me  venit  Heraclius,  homo  nobilis,  qui  sacer- 
dos  lovis  fuisset,  V.  4,  137,  I  had  a  call  from  Heraclius,  a  man  of  high  stand- 
ing, as  is  proved  by  his  having  been  a  priest  of  Jupiter,  (b.)  Cicero,  qui  mili- 
tes  in  castris  continuisset,  qumque  cohortes  frumentatum  mittit,  6, 36, 1, 
though  Cicero  had  kept  his  men  in  camp,  he  sends  five  cohorts  foraging. 

1825.  With  qui  tamen,  however,  the  indicative  is  usual :  as,  alter,  qui  tamen 
se  continuerat,  n5n  tenuit  eum  locum,  Best.  114,  the  other,  though  he  had 
observed  a  quiet  policy,  did  not  hold  the  place. 

1826.  Oftentimes,  where  a  causal  relation  might  be  expected,  a  simple 
declaratory  indicative  is  used :  as, 

habeo  senectuti  magnam  gratiam,  quae  mih!  sermonis  aviditatem 
auxit,  CM.  46,  I  feel  greatly  indebted  to  age,  which  has  increased  my  eagerness 
for  conversation.  Particularly  thus  in  old  Latin  :  as,  sed  sumne  ego  stultus, 
qui  rem  euro  publicam  ?  PI.  Per.  75,  but  am  I  not  a  fool,  who  bother  with  the 
common  weal  ?  Compared  with  :  sed  ego  sum  insipientior,  qui  rebus 
curem  puplicis,  PL  Tri.  1057,  but  Pm  a  very  fool,  to  bother  with  the  common 
iveal.  Often  of  coincident  action  (1733):  as,  stulte  fed,  qui  hunc  amisi, 
PI.  MG.  1376,  /  've  acted  like  a  fool,  in  letting  this  man  off. 

1827.  The  causal  relative  is  often  introduced  by  quippe,  less  frequently 
by  ut,  or  ut  pote,  naturally :  as, 

'  convlvia  cum  patre  non  inibat ; '  quippe  qui  ne  in  oppidum  quidem 
nisi  perraro  veniret,  RA.  52,  '  he  never  went  to  dinner-parties  with  his  fa- 
ther ;  '  why,  of  course  not,  since  he  never  went  to  a  simple  country  town  even, 
except  very  rarely,  dictator  tamen,  ut  qui  magis  animis  quam  viribus 
fretus  ad  certamen  descenderet,  omnia  circumspicere  coepit,  L.  7,  14, 
6,  but  the  dictator,  naturally,  since  he  went  into  the  struggle  trusting  to  mind 
rather  than  muscle,  now  began  to  be  all  on  the  alert.  With  quippe  qui,  the 
indicative  only  is  used  by  Sallust,  and  is  preferred  by  Plautus  and  Terence. 
Cicero  has,  with  one  exception,  the  subjunctive,  Tacitus  and  Nepos  have  it 
always.  Livy  has  either  mood.  Not  in  Caesar,  ut  qui  has  the  subjunctive. 
It  occurs  a  few  times  in  Plautus,  Cicero,  once  in  Caesar,  oftenest  in  Livy. 
With  the  indicative  once  in  Cicero,  and  once  in  Tacitus,  ut  pote  qui  has 
the  subjunctive.  It  is  used  by  Plautus,  by  Cicero,  once  with  the  indicative, 
by  Sallust,  and  Catullus. 

1828.  The  indefinite  ablative  qui,  somehow,  surely,  sometimes  follows  quippe 
or  ut  in  old  Latin,  in  which  case  it  must  not  be  confounded  with  the  relative :  as, 
quippe   qui   ex   te   audivi,  PI.  Am.  745,  -why,  sure  I've  heard  from  you;  it 
cannot  be  the  relative  here,  as  the  speaker  is  a  woman. 

1829.  The   subjunctive  is   used   in   parenthetical   sentences  of  restric- 
tion: as, 

3°9 


1830-1834-]    Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


quod  sciam,  PI.  Men.  500 ;  T.  Ad.  641 ;  RA.  17,  to  the  best  of  my  knowl- 
edge and  belief .  quod  sine  molestia  tua  fiat,  Fain.  13,  23,  2,  as  far  as  may 
be  without  trouble  to  yourself .  qui  is  often  followed  by  quidem  :  as,  omnium 
oratorum,  quos  quidem  ego  cSgnoverim,  acutissimum  iudico  Q.  Serto- 
rium,  Br.  180,  of  all  orators,  at  least  of  all  that  I  have  made  the  acquaintance 
of  myself,  I  count  Sertorius  the  sharpest. 

1830.  The  indicative,  however,  is  used  in  quod  attinet  ad,  as  Jo,  and  usually 
with  quantum,  and  with  forms  of  sum  and  possum:  as,  quod  sine  molestia 
tua  facere  poteris,  Att.  i,  5,  7,  as  far  as  you  can  -without  troubling  yourself . 

CORRELATIVE   SENTENCES. 

1831.  Sentences  are  said  to  be  correlative,  when  a  relative  pro- 
noun or  adverb  has  a  corresponding  determinative  or  demonstrative 
pronoun  or  adverb  in  the  main  sentence. 

Thus,  the  ordinary  correlative  of  qui  is  is,  less  frequently  hie,  ille,  Idem. 
Similarly  tot  .  .  .  quot  are  used  as  correlatives ;  also  quo  .  .  .  eo,  quanto 
.  .  .  tanto;  quantum  .  .  .  tantum  ;  tarn  .  .  .  quam;  totiens  .  .  .  quo- 
tiens ;  talis  .  .  .  qualis ;  ub!  .  .  .  ib! ;  ut  .  .  .  ita,  sic,  or  item  ;  cum  .  .  . 
turn. 

RELATIVE   SENTENCES   COMBINED. 

(A.)  COORDINATION  OF  A  RELATIVE. 

1832.  (i.)    When  two  coordinate  relative    sentences  would   have   the 
second  relative  in  the  same  case  as  the  first,  the  second  relative  is  usually 
omitted  :  as, 

Dumnorigi  qui  principatum  optinebat,  ac  maxime  plebl  acceptus 
erat,  persuadet,  i,  3,  5,  he  prevails  with  Dumnorix,  who  held  the  headship,  and 
was  popular  with  the  commons. 

1833.  (2.)  When  two  coordinate  relative  sentences  require  two  different 
cases  of  the  relative,  the  relative  is  usually  expressed  with  both,  or  else  the 
second  relative,  which  is  usually  nominative  or  accusative,  is  omitted,  or  is, 
hie,  ille,  or  Idem,  is  substituted  for  it :  as, 

(a.)  cur  loquimur  de  eo  hoste,  qui  iam  fatetur  se  esse  hostem,  et 
quern  non  timeo  ?  C.  2,  17,  why  am  I  talking  about  an  enemy  who  admits 
himself  he  is  an  enemy ,  and  whom  I  do  not  fear  ?  (b.}  Bocchus  cum  pedi- 
tibus,  quos  Volux  adduxerat,  neque  in  priore  pugna  adfuerant,  S.  /. 
101,  5,  Bocchus  with  the  infantry  whom  Volux  had  brought  lip,  and  who  had 
not  been  engaged  in  the  first  skirmish,  (c.}  Viriathus,  quern  C.  Laelius 
fregit,  ferocitatemque  eius  repressit,  Off".  2,  40,  Viriathus,  whom  Laelius 
crushed,  and  curbed  his  fiery  soul.  This  last  use  is  chiefly  limited  to  old 
Latin,  Cicero,  and  Lucretius. 

(B.)     SUBORDINATION  OF  A  RELATIVE. 

1834.  A  sentence  consisting  of  a  main  and  a  relative  member,  may  be 
further  modified  by  a  more  specific  relative  sentence :  as, 

310 


Conju nctional  Sen tences.    [1835-1839. 


proximi  sunt  Germanis  qui  trans  Rhenum  incolunt  (general),  qui- 
buscum  continenter  bellum  gerunt  (specific),  i,  1,3,  they  are  nearest  to 
the  Germans  that  live  beyond  the  Rhine,  with  whom  they  cany  on  uninterrupted 
hostilities,  idem  artifex  Cupidinem  fecit  ilium  qui  est  Thespiis  (gen- 
eral), propter  quern  Thespiae  visuntur  (specific),  V.  4,  4,  the  selfsame 
artist  made  the  world-renowned  Cupid  at  Thespiae ',  which  is  the  attraction  for 
tourists  in  Thespiae. 


THE   RELATIVE   INTRODUCING   A  MAIN   SENTENCE. 

1835.  Besides  the  ordinary  use  of  the  relative,  to  introduce  a 
subordinate  sentence,  it  is  often  used  like  hie,  or  is,  or  like  et 
is,  is  autem,  is  enim,  or  is  igitur,  to  append  a  fresh  main 
sentence  or  period  to  the  foregoing :  as, 

consilio  convocato  sententias  exquirere  coepit,  quo  in  consili5  non- 
nullae  huius  modi  sententiae  dicebantur,  3,  3,  i,  calling  a  council  of  war, 
he  proceeded  to  ask  their  opinion,  and  in  this  council  some  opinions  of  the  follow- 
ing import  were  set  forth,  centuriones  hostes  vocare  coeperunt ;  quorum 
progredi  ausus  est  nemo,  5,  43,  6,  the  officers  proceeded  to  call  the  enemy  ; 
but  not  a  man  of  them  ventured  to  step  forward,  perutiles  Xenophontis 
libri  sunt ;  quos  legite  studiose,  CM.  59.  Xenophon's  works  are  extremely 

{rofitable  reading ;  so  do  read  them  attentively.     In  Plautus  this  use  is  rare; 
ut  it  becomes  more  and  more  prevalent,  and  in  the  time  of  Cicero  the  rel- 
ative is  one  of  the  commonest  connectives. 

1836.  From  this  use  of  the  relative  come  many  introductory  formulas,  such  as 
quo  facto,  qua  re  cognita,  quae  cum  ita  sint,  &c.,  &c. 

1837.  A  connective  quod  is  often  used  before  si,  nisi,  or  etsi, 
less  frequently  before  quia,  quoniam,  utinam,  qui,  &c. 

This  quod  may  be  translated  so,  but,  now,  whereas,  as  to  that,  &c.,  or  it  is 
often  best  omitted  in  translation.  See  2132. 


THE   CONJUNCTIVE    PARTICLE    SENTENCE. 

quod. 

1838.  The  conjunctive  particle  quod,  originally  the  neuter  of  the 
relative  pronoun,  has  both  a  declarative  sense,  that,  and  a  causal  sense, 
becarise.     In  both  senses  it  regularly  introduces  the  indicative  (i72[). 
For  special  reasons,  however,  the  subjunctive  is  often  used,  and  par- 
ticularly in  indirect  discourse  (1722). 

1839.  In  some  of  its  applications,  particularly  in  old  Latin,  the  conjunc- 
tive particle  quod  can  hardly  be  distinguished  from  the  pronoun  quod,  as 
follows : 

3" 


1840-1845-]    Sentences:    The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


1840.  (i  )  In  old  Latin,  quod,  why,  for  what,  is  sometimes  used  with  venio 
and  mitto.     Thus,  as  in  id  venimus,  PL  MG.  1158,  that 's  why  we  've  come,  id  is 
used  to  define  the  purpose  of  the  motion  (1144),  so  also  quod,  in  quod  veni,  elo- 
quar,  T.  Hau.  proL  3,  what  I've  come  for,  I 'II  set  forth.     Instead  of  quod,  more 
explicitly  quam  ob  rem  :  as,  quam  ob  rem  hue  sum  missa,  PL  R.  430,  what 
I  am  sent  here  for. 

1841.  (2.)  quod,  why,  for  what,  is  used  in  such  expansions  as  quid  est 
quod  ?  quid  habes  quod  ?  or  nihil  est  quod  :  as, 

quid  est  quod  me  excivisti?  PI.  E.  570,  why  is  it  that  you've  called  me 
out?  (1144).  Usually  with  the  subjunctive  (1563)  :  as,  quid  est  quod  plura 
dicamus  ?  Chi.  59,  what  reason  is  there  for  saying  more  ?  For  quod,  some- 
times qua  re,  quam  ob  rem,  cur,  &c.  _The  question  itself  is  also  sometimes 
varied  :  as,  quid  fuit  causae,  cur  in  Africam  Caesarem  non  sequerere  ? 
Ph.  2,  71,  what  earthly  reason  was  there,  why  you  should  not  have  followed 
Caesar  to  Africa  ? 

1842.  (3.)  quod,  as  to  what,  or  that,  is  used,  especially  at  the  beginning 
of  a  sentence,  to  introduce  a  fact  on  which  something  is  to  be  said,  often  by 
way  of  protest  or  refutation  :  as, 

verum  quod  tu  dicis,  non  te  mi  irasci  decet,  PL  Am.  522,  but  as  to 
what  you  say,  it  is  n't  right  that  you  should  get  provoked  with  me.  quod  mul- 
titudinem  Germanorum  in  Galliam  traducat,  id  se  sui  muniendi  causa 
facere,  i,  44,  6,  as  to  his  moving  a  great  many  Germans  over  to  Gaul,  that  he 
did  for  self-protection  (1722).  This  construction  is  particularly  common  in 
Caesar,  and  in  Cicero's  letters. 

1843.  When  quod,  in  case,  suppose,  although,  introduces  a  mere  conjecture  or  a 
concession,  the  subjunctive  is  used  (1554) :  as,  quod  quispiam  ignem  quaerat, 
extingui  volo,  PL  Aul.  91,  in  case  a  man  may  come  for  fire,  I  want  the  fire  put 
out.     This  use  is  principally  found  in  old  Latin,  but  once  or  twice  also  in  Cicero. 

1844.  quod,  that,  the  fact  that,  is  often  used  in 
subordinate  sentences  which  serve  to  complete  the  sense 

of  the  main  sentence. 

1845.  The  sentence  with  quod  may  represent  a  subject,  as  with  accedit ; 
an  object,  as  with  praetereo,  &c. ;  or  any  case  of  a  substantive  ;  frequently 
it  is  in  apposition  with  a  demonstrative  or  an  appellative  :  as, 

(a.)  accedebat,  quod  suos  ab  se  HberSs  abstractos  dolebant,  3,  2,  5, 
there  was  added  this  fact,  that  they  lamented  that  their  own  children  were  torn 
from  them  ;  or  less  clumsily,  then  too  they  lamented.  praetereS,  quod  earn 
sib!  domum  sedemque  dalegit,  in  qua  cotidie  viri  mortis  indicia  videret, 
Clu.  1 88,  I  pass  over  the  fact  that  she  picked  out  a  house  to  live  in,  in  which 
she  would  see,  day  in  day  out,  things  to  remind  her  of  her  husbands  death. 
illud  minus  euro,  quod  congessisti  operands  omnes,  Br.  297,  I  am  not 
particularly  interested  in  the  fact  that  you  have  lumped  together  all  sorts  of  cob- 
blers and  tinkers,  (b.}  Caesar  senatus  in  eum  beneficia  commemoravit, 
quod  rex  appellatus  esset  a  senatu,  i,  43,  4,  Caesar  told  off  the  kindnesses 
of  the  senate  to  the  man,  the  fact  that '  he  had  been  styled  king  by  the  seriate  ' 
(1722).  qu5  facto  duas  res  consecutus  est,  quod  animSs  centurionum 

312 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  quod.     [  1 846— 1852. 


devinxit  et  militum  voluntates  redemit,  Caes.  C.  i,  39,  4,  thus  he  killed 
two  birds  with  one  stone  :  he  won  the  hearts  of  the  officers,  and  he  bought  golden 
opinions  of  the  rank  and  file,  hoc  uno  praestamus  vel  maxime  fens,  quod 
conloquimur  inter  nos,  DO.  I,  32,  in  this  one  circumstance  do  we  perhaps 
most  of  all  surpass  brutes,  that  we  can  talk  with  each  other,  labore  et  indu- 
stria  et  quod  adhibebat  gratiam,  in  principibus  patronis  fuit,  Br.  233, 
thanks  to  his  untiring  industry,  and  to  his  bringing  his  winning  manners  to 
bear,  he  figured  among  the  leaders  of  the  bar. 

1846.  accedit,  as  the  passive  of  addo,  often  has  the  subjunctive  with  ut  :  see 
1965.     addo  quod,  especially  in  the  imperative  form  adde  quod,  occurs  in  Accius, 
Terence,  Lucretius,  Horace,  and  Ovid.     adiciS  quod  begins  with  Livy. 

1847.  The  sentence  with  quod  is  often  introduced  by  a  prepositional  expression, 
such  as  eo  with  de,  ex,  in,  pro,  rarely  with  cum  ;  or  id  with  ad  in  Livy,  super 
in  Tacitus. 

1848.  nisi  quod,  or  in  Plautus  and  Terence  nisi  quia,  but  for  the  fact  that, 
except,  only  that,  and  praeter  quam  quod,  besides  the  fact  that,  are  used  in  limi- 
tations :  as,  nihil  peccat,  nisi  quod  nihil  peccat,  Plin.  Ep.  9,  26,  i,  he  erreth 
naught,  save  that  he  naught  doth  err.     Livy  has  also  super  quam  quod,     tan- 
tum  quod  in  the  sense  of  nisi  quod  is  rare;  more  commonly  of  time,/**?,  hardly. 


1849.  quid  quod  ?  for  quid  de  ep  dicam  quod  ?  -what  of  the  fact  that, 
or  nay  more,  marks  an  important   transition  :  as,  quid  quod  salus  sociorum 
in  periculum   vocatur  ?  IP.  12,  nay  more,  the  very  existence  of  our  allies  is 
endangered. 

1850.  With  verbs  of  doing  or  happening,  accompanied  by  some  word  of 
manner,  quod  introduces  a  verb  of  coincident  action  (1733)  :  as, 

bene  facis  quod  me  adiuvas,  Fin.  3,  16,  you  are  very  kind  in  helping  me. 
videor  mih!  gratum  fecisse  Siculis,  quod  eorum  iniurias  sum  persecu- 
tus,  V.  2,  1  6,  J  flatter  myself  that  I  have  won  the  gratitude  of  the  Sicilians  in 
acting  as  avenger  of  their  wrongs.  In  this  sense  qui  (1826)  or  cum  (1874) 
is  often  used,  or  in  Plautus  and  once  in  Horace  quia. 

1851.  quod,  that,  because,  is  used  to  denote  cause  with  verbs  of  emotion. 

Thus,  as  with  id  in  id  gaudeo,  T.  Andr.  362,  I'm  glad  of  that  (1144).  so 
with  an  object  sentence,  as  gaudeo  quod  te  interpellavi,  Leg.  3,  i,  I'm  glad 
that  I  interritpted  you.  Such  verbs  are  :  gaudeo,  laetor  ;  tniror  ;  doleo, 
maereo,  angor,  indignor,  suscense5,  irascor,  &c.  Tn  old  Latin,  Cicero's 
letters,  Livy,  and  rarely  in  Tacitus  such  verbs  may  have  quia,  sometimes 
quom  (1875).  For  tne  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  see  2187. 

1852.  Verbs  of  praising,  blaming,  accusing,  and  condemning,  often  take 
quod:  as, 

quod  bene  cogitasti  aliquando,  Iaud5,  Ph.  2,  34,  that  you  have  ever  had 
good  intentions,  I  commend,  laudat  Africanum  Panaetius,  quod  fuerit 
abstinens,  Off.  2,  76,  Panaetius  eulogizes  Africanus,  'for  being  so  abstinent1 
(1725).  ut  cum  Socrates  accusatus  est  quod  corrumperet  iuventutem, 
Quintil.  4,  4,  5,  as  when  Socrates  was  charged  with  '  demoralizing  the  rising 
generation'  (1725).  gratulor,  congratulate,  and  gratias  ago,  thank,  have 
regularly  quod  or  cum  (1875).  Verbs  of  accusing  sometimes  have  cur. 


1 8  5  3- 1 8  5  8 .]    Sen tences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 

1853.  Causal  quod,  owing  to  the  fact  that,  becaiise, 
introduces  an  efficient  cause,  or  a  reason  or  motive  :  as, 

(a.)  in  hislocis,  quod  omnis  Gallia  ad  septentriones  vergit,  maturae 
sunt  hiemes,  4,  20,  I,  in  these  parts  the  winter  sets  in  early,  owing  to  the  fact 
that  Gaul  in  general  lies  to  the  north,  Helvetii  reliquos  Gallos  virtute 
praecedunt,  quod  fere  cotidianis  proeliis  cum  Germams  contendunt, 
I,  I,  4,  the  Helvetians  outshine  the  rest  of  the  Gauls  in  bravery,  because  they  do 
brittle  with  the  Germans  almost  every  day.  horum  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae, 
propterea  quod  a  cultu  provinciae  longissime  absunt,  I,  i,  3,  of  these  the 
stoutest  fighting-men  are  the  Belgians,  for  the  reason  that  they  live  furthest  away 
from  the  comforts  of  the  province,  (b.)  T.  Manlius  Torquatus  f  ilium  suum, 
quod  is  contra  imperium  in  hostem  pugnaverat,  necari  iussit,  S.  C.  52, 
30,  Torquatus  ordered  his  own  son  to  be  put  to  death,  because  the  young  man  had 
fought  with  the  enemy  contrary  to  orders,  exoravit  tyrannum  ut  abire  lice- 
ret,  quod  iam  beatus  nollet  esse,  TD.  5,  62,  he  induced  the  monarch  to  let 
him  go,  '  because  he  didn't  care  to  be  Fortune's  pet  any  longer '  (1725).  Bello- 
vaci  suum  numerum  non  contulerunt,  quod  se  suo  arbitrio  bellum  esse 
gestur5s  dicerent,  7,  75,  5,  the  Bellovacans  would  not  put  in  their  proper 
quota,  saying  they  meant  to  make  war  on  their  own  responsibility  (1727). 

1854.  quod  often  has  a  correlative  in  the  main  sentence,  such  as  eo, 
ideo,  idcirco,  propterea.     In  Sallust,  ea  gratia.     In  Plautus,  causal  quod 
is  very  rare  compared  to  causal  quia. 

1855.  An  untenable  reason  is  introduced  in  Plautus  by  non  eo  quia,  in 
Terence  by  non  eo  quo;  in  Cicero  very  rarely  by  neque  or  non  eo  quo, 
usually  by  non  quod  or  n5n  quo ;  by  non  quia  rarely  in  classical  Latin, 
but  commonly  from  Livy  on.     The  valid  reason  follows,  with  sed  quod, 
sed  quia,  or  with  sed  and  a  fresh  main  sentence. 

The  mood  is  usually  subjunctive  (1725) :  as,  pugiles  ingemiscunt,  non 
quod  doleant,  sed  quia  profundenda  voce  omne  corpus  intenditur, 
TD.  2,  56,  boxers  grunt  and  groan,  not  because  they  feel  pain,  but  because  by 
explosion  of  voice  the  whole  system  gets  braced  up.  Sometimes,  but  very  rarely 
in  classical  prose,  the  indicative.  Correlatives,  such  as  idcirco,  ideo,  &c., 
are  not  uncommon.  Reversed  constructions  occur,  with  magis  followed  by 
quam,  as  :  magis  quod,  quo,  or  quia,  followed  by  quam  quo,  quod,  or 
quia.  The  negative  not  that  .  .  .  not,  is  expressed  by  non  quod  non,  non 
quo  non,  or  non  quin. 

quia. 

1856.  quia,  a  neuter  accusative  plural  of  the  relative  stem  (701) 
is  used  in  both  a  declarative  and  a  causal  sense,  like  quod  (1838).     It 
is,  however,  more  prevalent  in  Plautus,  less  so  from  Terence  on. 

1857.  For  the  uses  of  declarative  quia,  see  under  1848,  1850,  1851. 

1858.  Causal  quia,  with  or  without  a  correlative,  such   as  ideo,  eo, 
propterea,  &c.,  is  common  in  old  Latin  (1854)  and  poetry,  unusual  in  prose 
(once  in  Caesar)  before  Tacitus.     For  non  quia,  &c,  see  1855. 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  cum.     [1859-1862 


quom  or  cum. 

J859.  quom  or  cum  (157,  711),  used  as  a  relative  conjunctive 
particle  (1794),  has  a  temporal  meaning,  when,  which  readily  passes 
over  to  an  explanatory  or  causal  meaning,  in  thai,  since  or  although. 
In  both  meanings  it  introduces  the  indicative  in  old  Latin.  In  classi- 
cal Latin,  temporal  cum  in  certain  connections,  and  causal  cum  regu- 
larly, introduces  the  subjunctive.  The  subjunctive  is  also  used  with 
cum  for  special  reasons,  as  in  the  indefinite  second  person  (1731), 
by  attraction  (1728),  and  commonly  by  late  writers  to  express  repeated 
past  action  (1730).  cum,  when,  is  often  used  as  a  synonym  of  si, 
if,  and  may  then  introduce  any  form  of  a  conditional  protasis  (2016, 
2110). 

(A.)    TEMPORAL  cum. 

WITH  THE  INDICATIVE. 

1860.  cum,  when,  whenever,  if,  of  indefinite  time,  may  introduce 
any  tense  of  the  indicative  required  by  the  context :  as, 

facile  omnes,  quom  valemus,  recta  consilia  aegrotis  damus,  T. 
Andr.  309,  we  all,  when  well,  give  good  advice  to  sick  folk  easily.  Romae 
videor  esse,  cum  tuas  litteras  lego,  Aft.  2,  15,  I,  I  always  fancy  myself  in 
Rome,  zvjien  1  am  reading  a  letter  from  you.  cum  posui  librum,  adsensi5 
pmnis  elabitur,  TD.  I,  24,  when  I  drop  the  book,  all  assent  melts  away  (1613). 
incenderis  cupiditate  libertatis,  cum  potestatem  gustandi  feceris,  RP. 
2,  50,  you  will  inspire  them  with  a  passion  for  freedom,  when  you  give  them  a 
chance  to  taste  it  (1627).  his  cum  funes  comprehensi  adductique  erant, 
praerumpebantur,  3,  14,  6,  every  time  the  lines  were  caught  by  these  and 
hauled  taut,  they  would  part  (1618).  The  subjunctive  is  used,  chiefly  by 
late  writers,  rarely  by  Cicero  and  Caesar,  to  express  repeated  past  action 
(1730)  :  as,  cum  in  convivium  venisset,  si  quicquam  caelati  adspexe- 
rat,  manus  abstinere  non  poterat,  V.  4,  48,  when  he  went  to  a  dinner 
party,  if  he  ever  caught  sight  of  a  bit  of  chased  work,  he  never  could  keep  his 
hands  0^(2050). 

1861.  cum,  when,  of  definite  time,  regularly  introduces  the  indicative  in 
old   Latin,    even  where    the    subjunctive  is  required    in   classical    Latin 

(1872):  as, 

nam  ilia,  quom  te  ad  se  vocabat,  memet  esse  credidit,  PL  Men.  1145, 
for  when  that  lady  asked  you  in,  she  thought  'twas  I.  posticulum  hoc 
recepit,  quom  aedis  vendidit,  PI.  Tri.  194,  this  back  part  he  excepted,  when 
he  sold  the  house. 

1862.  cum,  when,  of  definite  time,  regularly  introduces  the  indica- 
tive of  any  action,  not  of  past  time :  as, 

sed  de  his  etiam  rebus,  otiosi  cum  erimus,  loquemur,  Fam.  9, 4,  but 
we  will  talk  of  this  when  we  have  time,  cum  ego  P.  Granium  testem 
produxero,  refellito,  si  poteris,  V.  5,  154,  when  I  put  Granius  <m  thi 
witness  stand,  refute  him  if  you  can. 

31'JJ 


1863—1868.]   Sentences:    The  Subordinate  Sentence. 

1863.  With  cum,  when,  the  indicative  is  used  of 
definite  past  time  to  date  the  action  of  the  main  clause, 
as  follows : 

1864.  (i.)  The  indicative  imperfect  is  regularly  used  with  cum, 
when,  to  denote  a  continued  action  parallel  and  coincident  in  duration 
with  another  continued  action,  also  in  the  imperfect :  as, 

quom  pugnabant  maxume,  ego  turn  fugiebam  maxume,  PI.  Am. 
199,  while  they  -were  fighting  hardest,  then  I  was  running  hardest,  turn  cx.m 
rem  habebas,  quaesticulus  te  faciebat  attentiorem,  Fam.  9,  16,  7,  as 
long  as  you  were  a  man  of  substance,  the  fun  of  making  money  made  you  a 
little  close. 

1865.  (2.)  The  indicative  imperfect  is  often  used  with  cum,  when,  denot- 
ing a  continued  action,  to  date  an  apodosis  in  the  perfect :  as, 

legiones  quom  pugnabant  maxume,  quid  in  tabernaclo  fecisti  ? 
PI.  Am.  427,  what  did'st  tkou  in  the  tent  what  time  the  legions  fought  their 
mightiest?  his  libris  adnumerandi  sunt  sex  de  re  publica,  quos  turn 
scripsimus  cum  gubernacula  rfii  publicae  tenebamus,  Div.  2,  3,  to  these 
books  are  to  be  added  the  six  On  the  State,  which  I  wrote  at  the  time  I  was 
holding  the  helm  of  state.  But  when  the  object  of  the  clause  is  not  distinctly 
to  date  the  apodosis,  its  verb  is  in  the  subjunctive  (1872). 

1866.  (3.)  The  indicative  perfect  or  present  of  vivid  narration  is 
used  with  cum,  when,  to  date  an  apodosis  in  the  perfect  or  present  of 
vivid  narration :  as, 

'  per  tuas   statuas  '  ver5  cum  dixit,  vehementius   risimus,  DO.  2, 

242,  but  when  he  uttered  the  words  '  by  your  statues'  we  burst  into  a  louder  laugh. 
cum  occiditur  Sex.  Roscius,  ibidem  fuerunt,  KA.  120,  when  Roscius  was 
murdered,  they  were  on  the  spot,  cum  dies  venit,  causa  ipse  pro  se  dicta, 
damnatur,  L.  4,  44,  10,  when  the  day  of  the  trial  came,  he  spoke  in  his  own 
defence  and  was  condemned.  The  present  is  particularly  common  in  old  col- 
loquial Latin :  as,  vivom,  quom  abimus,  liquimus,  PI.  Cap.  282,  we  left 
him  alive  when  we  came  away.  For  cum  primum  in  narration,  see  1925 ;  for 
cum  extempl5,  1926. 

1867.  (4.)  The  indicative  perfect  or  present  of  vivid  narration 
is  regularly  used  with   cum,  when,  to  denote  a  momentary  action 
when  the  apodosis  denotes  continued  action:  as, 

cum  Caesar  in  Galliam  venit,  alterius  factionis  principes  erant 
Aedui,  alterius  Sequani,  6,  12,  \,when  Caesar  came  to  Gaul,  the  leaders  of 
one  party  were  the  Aeduans,  cf  the  other  the  Sequanians.  eo  cum  veniS, 
praetor  quiescebat,  V.  4,  32,  when  I  got  there,  the  praetor  was  taking  a  nap. 

1868.  An  emphatic    indicative   clause   with   cum,   while,   often 
follows  the  main  action. 

The  clause  with  cum  is  usually  inconsistent  with  the  main  action,  and 
cum  is  often  attended  by  interea,  interim,  all  the  time,  etiam  turn,  still, 
nondum,  hauddum,  not  yet,  no  longer,  quidem,  by  the  way,  or  tamen,  nihi- 
Idminus,  nevertheless:  as, 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  cum.     [  1 869- 1871. 


caedebatur  virgis  in  medio  foro  Messanae  civis  Romanus,  cum 
interea  nullus  gemitus  audiebatur,  V.  5,  162,  there  was  flogged  with  rods  in 
open  market  place  at  Messana  a  citizen  of  Rome,  while  all  the  time  not  a  groan 
was  to  be  heard,  evolarat  iam  e  conspectu  quadriremis,  cum  etiam 
turn  ceterae  naves  un5  in  loco  moliebantur,  V.  5,  88,  she  had  already  sped 
out  of  sight,  the  four-banker,  while  the  rest  of  the  vessels  -were  still  struggling 
round  in  one  and  the  same  spot.  This  use  is  very  rare  in  old  Latin.  Not 
in  Caesar.  With  the  infinitive  of  intimation,  see  1539. 

1869.  An  indicative  clause  with  cum,  usually  expressing  sudden 
or  unexpected  action,  sometimes  contains  the  main  idea,  and  is  put 
last. 

In  this  case  cum  is  often  attended  by  subito  or  repente,  suddenly^  and 
the  first  clause  contains  iam,  already,  by  this  time,  vix,  aegre,  hardly,  viz- 
dum,  hardly  yet,  or  nondum,  not  yet.  The  first  verb  is  commonly  in  the 
imperfect  or  pluperfect,  and  the  second  in  the  perfect  or  present  of  vivid 
narration :  as, 

dixerat  hoc  ille,  cum  puer  nuntiavit  venire  Laelium,  RP.  I,  18, 
scarcely  had  he  said  this,  when  a  slave  announced  that  Laelius  was  com- 
ing, vix  ea  fatus  eram,  gemitu  cum  talia  reddit,  V.  2,  323,  scarce  had 
I  spoke  the  words,  when  with  a  groan  he  answers  thus.  Hannibal  iam 
subibat  muros,  cum  repente  in  eum  patefacta  porta  erumpunt  Roman!, 
L.  29,  7,  8,  Hannibal  was  already  moving  up  to  the  walls,  when  all  of  a  sud- 
den the  gate  flies  open  and  the  Romans  come  pouring  out  upon  him.  iamque 
hoc  facere  apparabant,  cum  matres  familiae  repente  procurrerunt,  7, 
26,  3,  they  were  already  preparing  to  do  it,  when  suddenly  the  married  women 
rushed  forward.  This  use  is  very  rare  in  old  Latin.  From  Sallust  on, 
it  is  found  occasionally  with  the  infinitive  of  intimation  (1539). 

1870.  A  clause  with  cum  is  often  used  attributively  with  words  denoting 
time,  or  with  est,  fuit,  or  erit. 

The  mood  is  the  same  as  with  a  relative  pronoun,  sometimes  the  indica- 
tive, and  regularly  in  old  Latin,  but  usually  the  subjunctive:  as,  fuit  quod- 
dam  tempus  cum  in  agris  homines  vagabantur,  Inv.  i,  2,  there  was  an 
age  of  the  world  when  men  roved  round  in  the  fields  (1813,  1823).  fuit 
tempus  cum  rura  colerent  homines,  Varro,  RR.  3,  i,  i,  there  was  a  time 
when  men  dwelt  in  the  fields  (1818,  1821).  est  cum  exornati5  praetermit- 
tenda  est,  Cornif.  2,  30,  sometimes  ornamentation  should  be  avoided,  fuit 
an  tea  tempus,  cum  Germanos  Galli  virtute  superarent,  6,  24,  i,  there 
was  a  time  when  the  Gauls  outdid  the  Germans  in  valour.  The  subjunctive 
is  also  used  with  audio  cum  (1722),  but  with  memini  cum  the  indicative  : 
as,  saepe  ex  socer5  me5  audivi,  cum  is  diceret,  DO.  2,  22,  I  have  often 
heard  my  father-in-law  saying,  memini  cum  mihi  desipere  videbare, 
Fam.  7,  28,  I,  I  remember  when  I  thought  you  showed  bad  taste. 

1871.  The  indicative  present  or  perfect  with  cum  is  used  in  expressions  equiva- 
lent to  an  emphasized  accusative  or  ablative  of  time,  the  main  verb  being  est  or  sunt : 
as,  anni  prope  quadringenti  sunt,  cum  hoc  probatur,  O.  171,  it  is  nearly 
four  hundred  years  that  this  has  been  liked,     nondum  centum  et  decem  anni 
sunt,  cum  lata  lex  est,  Off.  2}  75,  if  is  not  a  hundred  and  ten  years  yet  since 
the  law  was  passed.     In  old  Latin,  the  clause  with  cum  is  made  the  subject  of  est, 
and  the  substantive  of  time  is  put  in  the  accusative  :  as,  hanc  domum  iam  mult5s 
annos  est  quom  possideo,  Pl.Aul.  3,  'tis  many  years  now  I  have  occupied  thi^ 
house. 

3*7 


1872-1873-]    Sentences :    The  Subordinate  Sentence. 

WITH    THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1872.  With  cum,  when,  the  imperfect  or  pluper- 
fect subjunctive  is  used  to  describe  the  circumstances 
under    which    the    action    of   the    main   clause    took 
place  :  as, 

cum  rex  Pyrrhus  populo  R6man5  bellum  intulisset  cumque  de 
imperiS  certamen  esset  cum  rege  potenti,  perfuga  ab  eo  venit  in 
castra  Fabricii,  Off.  3,  86,  king  Pyrrhus  having  made  war  on  the  Roman 
nation,  and  there  being  a  struggle  for  sovereignty  with  a  powerful  king,  a  de- 
serter from  him  came  into  Fabricius^s  camp,  eodem  tempore  Attalus  rex 
moritur  altero  et  septuagesimo  anno,  cum  quattuor  et  quadraginta  an- 
n5s  regnasset,  L.  33,  21,  I,  the  same  year  Attalus  the  king  dies,  in  his  seventy- 
second  year,  having  reigned  forty-four  years,  hie  pagus,  cum  domo  exisset 
patrum  nostrorum  memoria,  L.  Cassium  consulem  interfecerat,  i,  12, 
5,  this  canton,  sallying  out  from  home  in  our  fathers'1  recollection,  had  put 
Cassius,  the  consul,  to  death,  nam  cum  inambularem  in  xysto,  M.  ad  me 
Brutus  venerat,  Br.  io,for  as  I  was  pacing  up  and  down  my  portico,  Brutus 
had  come  to  see  me.  Antigonus  in  proeli5,  cum  adversus  Seleucum  et 
Lysimachum  dimicaret,  occisus  est,  N.  21,  3,  2,  Antigonus  was  killed  in 
battle  fighting  against  Seleucus  and  Lysimachus.  haec  cum  Crassus  dixisset, 
silentiiim  est  consecutum,  DO.  I,  160,  a  deep  silence  ensued  after  Crassus 
h.id  finished  speaking,  cum  annos  iam  compluris  societas  esset,  moritur 
in  Gallia  Quinctius,  cum  adesset  Naevius,  Quinct.  14,  the  partnership 
having  lasted  several  years,  Quinctius  died  in  Gaul,  Naevius  being  there  at  the 
time, 

In  this  use,  as  the  examples  show,  cum  with  the  subjunctive  is  often 
equivalent  to  a  participle  or  an  ablative  absolute.  The  use  is  not  found  in 
Plautus  (1861).  Ennius  and  Terence  have  possibly  each  an  instance  (dis- 
puted) of  it,  but  it  was  certainly  rare  until  the  classical  period,  when  it 
became  one  of  the  commonest  of  constructions.  It  must  not  be  confounded 
with  the  special  uses  of  the  subjunctive  mentioned  in  1859. 

1873.  The  difference  in  meaning  between  cum  with  the  indicative  and 
cum  with  the  subjunctive  may  be  illustrated  by  the  following  examples: 

Gall5  narravi,  cum  proxime  Romae  fui,  quid  aud!ssem,^tf.  13,49,  2,  7 
told  Gallus,  when  I  was  last  in  Rome,  what  I  had  heard  (1866).  a.  d.  Ill  kal. 
Maias  cum  essem  in  Cumano,  accepi  tuas  litteras,  Fam.  4,  2,  i,  7  re- 
ceived your  letter  on  the  twenty-eighth  of  April,  being  in  my  villa  at  Cumae 
(1872).  cum  varices  secabantur  C.  Mario,  dole"bat,  TD.  2,  35,  while 
Marius  was  having  his  varicose  veins  lanced,  he  was  in  pain  (1864).  C. 
Marius,  cum  secaretur,  ut  supra  dm,  vetuit  se  adligari,  TD.  2,  53, 
Marius  being  under  the  surgeon's  knife,  as  above  mentioned,  refused  to  be  bound 
(1872).  num  P.  Decius,  cum  se  devoveret  et  in  mediam  aciem  inrue- 
bat,  aliquid  de  voluptatibus  suis  cogitabat  ?  Fin.  2,  61,  did  Decius,  offering 
himself  up,  and  while  he  was  dashing  straight  into  the  host,  have  any  thought 
of  pleasures  of  his  iwn  ?  (1872,  1864). 

318 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  cum.     [1874—1877. 


(B.)     EXPLANATORY  AND  CAUSAL  cum. 

1874.  The  indicative  is  often  used  with  explanatory  cum  when 
the  action  of  the  protasis   is   coincident  with  that  of  the  apodosis 
(1733). 

In  this  use  cum  passes  from  the  meaning  of  when  to  that,  in  that,  or  in 
or  by  with  a  verbal  in  -ing:  as,  hoc  verbum  quom  illi  quoidam  dico,  prae- 
mostrS  tibf,  PI.  Tri.  342,  in  laying  down  this  lesson  for  your  unknown  friend 
I'm  "warning  you.  cum  quiescunt,  probant,  C.  I,  21,  their  inaction  is 
approval.  Denoting  the  means : .  as,  tute  tibi  prodes  plurumum,  quom 
servitutem  ita  fers  ut  ferri  decet,  PL  Cap.  371,  you  do  yourself  most  good 
by  bearing  slavery  as  if  should  be  borne.  For  similar  uses  of  quod,  quia,  and 
qui,  see  1850. 

1875.  Explanatory  cum  is  also  used  with  verbs  of  emotion ;  likewise 
with  gratulor  and  gratias  ago :  as,  quom   tu  's  liber,  gaudeo,  PL  Men. 
1148,  that  you  are  free,  I'm  glad,     gratulor  tibl,  cum  tantum  vales  apud 
Dolabellam,  Fam.  9,  14,  3,  /  give  you  joy  that  you  stand  so  well  with  Dola- 
bella.     tibl  maximas  gratias  ago,  cum  tantum  litterae  meae  potuerunt, 
Fam.  13,  24,  2,  /  thank  you  most  heartily  in  that  my  letter  had  such  influence. 
For  similar  uses  of  quod  and  quia,  see  1851,  1852. 

1876.  Explanatory  cum  is  also  used  in  the  sense  of  since,  although, 
or  even  though.     In  these  meanings  it  introduces  the  indicative  in  old 
Latin  (1878) :  as, 

Denoting  cause  :  isto  tu  pauper  es,  quom  nimis  sancte  piu  's,  PI. 
R.  1234,  that's  why  you  are  poor  yourself ",  since  you  are  over-scrupulously  good. 
quom  hoc  non  possum,  illud  minus  possem,  T.  Ph.  208,  since  this  J 
can't,  that  even  less  could  I.  Adversative  cause :  insanire  me  aiunt, 
quom  ipsi  msaniunt,  PL  Men.  831,  they  say  I'm  mad,  whereas  they  are  mad 
themselves.  Concession :  sat  sic  suspectus  sum,  quom  careo  noxia,  PL 
B.  1005,  I  am  enough  distrusted  as  it  is,  even  though  I'm  void  of  wrong. 

1877.  cum,  since,  although,  even  though,  usually 
introduces  the  subjunctive  :  as, 

Denoting  cause :  cum  in  communibus  suggestis  consistere  non 
auderet,  contionari  ex  turn  alta  solebat,  TD.  5,  59,  since  he  did  not  dare 
to  stand  tip  on  an  ordinary  platform,  he  always  did  his  speaking  from  a  lofty 
tower,  of  Dionysius,  tyrant  of  Syracuse.  Aedul  cum  se  defendere  non 
possent,  legates  ad  Caesarem  mittunt,  I,  n,  2,  since  the  Aeduans  could 
not  defend  themselves,  they  sent  ambassadors  to  Caesar.  Adversative  cause  : 
fuit  perpetuo  pauper,  cum  divitissimus  esse  posset,  N.  19,  i,  2.  he  was 
always  poor,  whereas  he  might  have  been  very  rich,  of  Phocion.  Pylades 
cum  sis,  dices  te  esse  Oresten  ?  Fin.  2,  79,  whereas  you  are  Pylades,  will 
you  declare  yourself  Orestes  ?  Concession  :  ipse  Cicero,  cum  tenuissima 
valetudine  esset,  ne  nocturnum  quidem  sib!  tempus  ad  quietem  relin- 
quebat,  5,  40,  7,  Cicero  himself,  though  he  was  in  extremely  delicate  health, 
did  not  allow  himself  even  the  night-time  for  rest,  ille  Cato,  cum  esset 
Tusculi  natus,  in  populi  Romani  civitatem  susceptus  est,  Leg.  2,  5, 
the  great  Cato,  though  born  at  Tusculum,  was  received  into  the  citizenship  of 
the  Roman  nation. 


1878-1882.]    Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 

1878.  This  use  of  the  subjunctive  is  not  found  in  Plautus.      It  is  thought 
to  have  begun  in  the  time  of  Terence,  who  may  have  a  couple  of  instances 
(disputed).     Thereafter,  it  grew  common  and  was  the  regular  mood  used 
with  explanatory  and_causal  cum  in  the  classical  period. 

1879.  Explanatory   cum  is   sometimes   introduced   by  quippe,  rarely   by  Ut 
pote,  naturally:  as, 

turn  ver5  gravior  cura  patribus  incessit,  quippe  cum  prodl 
causam  ab  suis  cernerent,  L.  4,  57,  10,  then  the  senators  -were  still  more 
seriously  concerned,  and  naturally  enough,  since  they  beheld  their  cause  betrayed 
by  their  own  people,  valetudo,  e  qua  iam  emerseram,  ut  pote  cum  sine 
febri  laborassem,  Att.  5,  8,  i,  an  illness  from  which  I  had  already  recovered, 
naturally,  since  it  -was  unaccompanied  by  fever,  quippe  cum  occurs  in  Cicero, 
Nepos,  and  Livy ;  ut  pote  cum  is  used  once  in  Cicero's  letters,  once  by  Pollio  to 
Cicero,  and  in  late  writers.  For  quippe  and  ut  pote  with  a  causal  relative,  see  1827. 

1880.  The  adversative  idea  is  often  emphasized  by  the  use  of  tamen  in 
the  main  clause:  as,  cum  primi   ordines  hostium 'concidissent,  tamen 
acerrime  reliqui  resistebant,  7,  62,  4,  though  the  front  ranks  of  the  enemy 
had  fallen,  yet  the  rest  made  a  most  spirited  resistance. 

(C.)     cum  .  .  .  turn. 

1 88 1.  A  protasis  with  cum  is  often  followed  by  an  emphatic  apo- 
dosis  introduced  by  turn. 

The  protasis  denotes  what  is  general  or  common  or  old ;  the  apodosis 
what  is  special  or  strang_e  or  new.  In  classical  Latin  turn  is  often  empha- 
sized by  maxime,  in  primis,  vero,  &c. 

In  this  use  the  mood  is  more  commonly  the  indicative  and  the  time  of 
the  two  verbs  is  apt  to  be  identical :  as,  quom  mihi  paveo,  turn  Antiphd 
me  excruciat  animi,  T.  Ph.  187,  -whilst  for  myself  I  tremble,  Antipho  puts  me 
in  a  perfect  agony  of  soul.  But  cum  antea  distinebar  maximis  occupa- 
tionibus,  turn  hoc  tempore  multo  distineor  vehementius,  Fam.  12,  30, 
2,  /  was  distracted  by  most  important  engagements  before,  but  now  I  am  very 
much  more  distracted.  Less  frequently  the  subjunctive,  to  denote  cause  or 
concession  (1877) :  as,  cum  te  a  pueritia  tua  dilexerim,  turn  hoc  multo 
acrius  diligo,  Fam.  15,  9,  I,  whereas  I  have  always  loved  you  from  your  boy- 
hood, for  this  1 1  we  you  with  a  far  intenser  love.  By  abridgement  of  the  sen- 
tence (1057),  cum  .  .  .  turn  come  to  be  copulative  conjunctions  (1687) :  as, 
movit  patres  c5nscriptos  cum  causa  turn  auctor,  L.  9,  10,  i,  both  the 
cause  and  its  supporter  touched  the  conscript  fathers. 


quoniam. 

1882.  quoniam,  compounded  of  quom  and  iam,  when  now,  refers 
primarily  to  time,  but  is  seldom  so  used  and  only  by  early  writers. 
The  temporal  meaning  passed  early  into  an  exclusively  causal  mean- 
ing, since.  In  both  meanings  it  regularly  introduces  the  indicative 
(1721).  For  special  reasons,  however,  the  subjunctive  is  used,  as  in 
indirect  discourse  (1725),  or  by  attraction  (1728). 

320 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  quotiens.    [1883-1887. 


1883.  (i.)  quoniam,  when  now,  used  of  time  in  early  Latin,  has  some- 
times as  a  correlative  continue,  subito,  or  extemplo  ;   it  usually  introduces 
the  present  indicative  (1590):  as, 

is  quoniam  moritur,  numquam  indicate  id  filio  voluit  suo,  PI.  Aul.  9, 
when  he  was  on  his  dying  bed,  he  ne'er  would  point  it  out  to  his  own  son,  of  a 
hidden  treasure,  quoniam  sentio  quae  res  gereretur,  navem  extemplo 
statuimus,  PI.  B.  290,  when  now  I  saw  what  was  doing,  we  stopped  the  ship 
at  once. 

1884.  (2.)  quoniam,  since,  seeing  that,  now  that,  with  the  indica- 
tive, introduces  a  reason,  usually  one  known  to  the  person  addressed, 
or  one  generally  known  :  as, 

vera  dico,  sed  nequiquam,  quoniam  non  vis  credere,  PL  Am.  835, 
the  truth  I  speak,  but  all  in  vain,  since  thou  wilt  not  believe,  vos,  Quirites, 
quoniam  iam  nox  est,  in  vestra  tecta  discedite,  C.  3,  29,  do  you,  citizens, 
since  it  is  now  grown  dark,  depart  and  go  to  your  own  several  homes,  quoniam 
in  earn  rationem  vitae  nos  fortuna  deduxit,  ut  sempiternus  sermo  de 
nobis  futurus  sit,  caveamus,  QFr.  i,  i,  38,  since  fortune  has  set  us  in  such  a 
walk  of  life  that  we  are  to  be  eternally  talked  about,  let  us  be  on  our  guard. 
Often  in  transition :  as,  quoniam  de  genere  belli  dixi,  nunc  de  magnitu- 
dine  pauca  dicam,  IP.  20,  since  I  have  finished  speaking  about  the  character 
of  the  war,  I  will  now  speak  briefly  about  its  extent.  With  the  subjunctive  in 
indirect  discourse  (1725) :  as,  crebris  Pompei  litteris  castigabantur,  quo- 
niam primo  venientem  Caesarem  non  prohibuissent,  Caes.  C.  3,  25,  3, 
they  were  rebuked  in  numerous  letters  of  Pompey, '  because  they  had  not  kept 
Caesar  off  as  soon  as  he  came? 


quotiens,  quotienscumque. 

1885.  The  relative  particle  quotiens  (711),  or  quotienscumque, 

every  time  that,  whenever,  introduces  the  indicative :    as, 

quotiens  quaeque  cohors  procurrerat,  magnus  numerus  hostium 
cadebat,  5,  34,  2,  as  the  cohorts  successively  charged,  a  great  number  of  the 
enemy  fell  every  time.  quoius  quotiens  sepulcrum  vides,  sacruficas, 
PI.  E.  175,  every  time  you  see  her  tomb,  you  offer  sacrifice,  nee  quotiens- 
cumque me  viderit,  ingemiscet,  Sest.  146,  neither  shall  he  fall  a-groaning 
whenever  he  sees  me  (1736).  quotiensque  is  late  and  rare. 

1886.  quotiens  has  sometimes  as  a  correlative  totiens,  or  a  combination 
with  tot  which  is  equivalent  to  totiens  :  as,  quotiens  dicimus,  totiens  de 
nobis  iudicatur,  DO.  i,  125,  every  time  we  make  a  speech,  the  world  sits  in 
Judgement  on  us.     si  tot  consulibus  meruisset,  quotiens  ipse  consul  fuit, 
Balb.  47,  if  he  had  been  in  the  army  as  many  years  as  he  was  consul. 

1887.  The  subjunctive  imperfect  and  pluperfect  are  common  in  the  later  writers 
to  indicate  repeated  action  (1730):   as,  quotiens  super  tali  negStiS  c5nsul- 
taret,  edita  domus  parte  ac  liberti  unius  conscientia  utebatur,   Ta. 
6,  27,  -whenever  he  had  recourse  to  astrologers,  it  -was  in  the  upper  part  of  his  house 
and  -with  the  cognizance  of  only  a  single  freedman. 


21 


321 


1 888- 1892.]    Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


quam. 

1888.  quam,  as  or  than,  introduces   an  indicative  protasis  in 
periods  of  comparison.     For  special  reasons,  however,  the  subjunctive 
is  used,  as  by  attraction  (1728),  or  of  action  conceivable  (1731)  ;  see 
also  1896,  1897. 

But  usually  periods  of  comparison  are  abridged  (1057)  by  the  omission 
of  the  verb  or  of  other  parts  in  the  protasis  (1325). 

WITH  THE  INDICATIVE. 

1889.  (i.)  quam,  as,  is  used   in   the   protasis   of  a  comparative 
period  of  equality,  generally   with  tarn   as   correlative   in   the   apo- 
dosis  :  as, 

tarn  facile  vinces  quam  pirum  volpes  comest,  PI.  Most.  559, you'll 
beat  as  easily  as  Reynard  eats  a  pear,  tarn  excoctam  reddam  atque  atram 
quam  carbost,  T.  Ad.  849,  /'//  have  her  stewed  all  out  and  black  as  is  a  coal. 
From  Cicero  on,  the  apodosis  is  in  general  negative  or  interrogative :  as, 
quorum  neutrum  tarn  facile  quam  tu  arbitraris  conceditur,  Div.  i,  10, 
neither  of  these  points  is  as  readily  granted  as  you  suppose,  quid  est  oratori 
tarn  necessarium  quam  vox?  DO.  i,  251,  what  is  so  indispensable  to  the 
speaker  as  voice  ?  Otherwise  n5n  minus  .  .  .  quam,  no  less  than,  just  as 
much,  or  non  magis  .  .  .  quam,  just  as  little  or  just  as  much,  is  often  pre- 
ferred to  tarn  .  .  .  quam  :  as,  accepi  non  minus  interdum  oratorium 
esse  tacere  quam  dicere,  Plin.  Ep.  7,  6,  7, 1  have  observed  that  silence  is  some- 
times quite  as  eloquent  as  speech.  n5n  magis  mini  deerit  inimicus  quam 
Verri  defuit,  V.  3,  162,  /  shall  lack  an  enemy  as  little  as  Verres  did.  domus 
erat  non  domino  magis  5rnamento  quam  clvitati,  V.  4,  5,  the  house  was 
as  mitch  a  pride  to  the  state  as  to  its  owner. 

1890.  Instead  of  tam,  another  correlative  is  sometimes  used  in  the  apodosis. 
Thus,  aeque  .  .  .  quam  occurs  in  Plautus  and  in  Livy  and  later  writers,  generally 
after  a  negative  expression  ;  perinde  .  .  .  quam  in  Tacitus  and  Suetonius  ;  iuxta 
.  .  .  quam  once  in  Livy.     Sometimes  the  apodosis  contains  no  correlative. 

1891.  tam  .  .  .  quam  become  by  abridgement  coordinating  words :  as, 
tam  vera  quam  falsa  cernimus,  Ac.  2,  in,  we  make  ottt  things  both  true 

and  false. 

1892.  The  highest  possible  degree  is  expressed  by  tam  .  .  .  quam  qui 
and  a  superlative  without  a  verb;  or  by  quam  and  a  superlative  with  or 
without  a  form  of  possum  (1466) ;  sometimes  by  quantus  or  ut :  as, 

(a.)  tam  sum  misericors  quam  v5s ;  tam  mitis  quam  qui  lenissi- 
mus,  Sull.  87,  I  am  as  tender-hearted  as  you  ;  as  mild  as  the  gentlest  man 
living,  tam  sum  amicus  re5!  publicae  quam  qui  maxime,  Fam.  5,  2,  6,  / 
am  as  devoted  a  patriot  as  anybody  can  be.  (b.}  quam  maximis  potest  itine- 
ribus  in  Galliam  contendit,  i,  7,  i,  he  piishes  into  Gaul  by  as  rapid  marches 
as  he  can.  constituerunt  iumentorum  quam  maximum  numerum  coe- 
mere,  I,  3,  i,  they  determined  to  buy  up  the  greatest  possible  number  of  beasts 
of  burden,  (c.)  tanta  est  inter  eos,  quanta  maxima  potest  esse,  morum 
distantia,  L.  74,  there  is  the  greatest  possible  difference  of  character  between  them. 
Or  without  any  superlative  :  fuge  domum  "quantum  potest,  PI.  Men.  850, 
run  home  as  quick  as  e'er  you  can.  ut  potui  accuratissime  te  tutatus  sum, 
Fam.  5,  17,  2, 1  defended  you  as  carefully  as  I  could. 

322 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  quam.    [ 1 893— 1 896. 


1893.  quam  .  .  .  tarn,  with  two  comparatives  or  superlatives,  is  equiva*- 
lent  to  the  more  common  quo  .  .  .  eo  with  two  comparatives  (1973) :  as, 

(a.)  magis  quam  id  repute,  tarn  magis  uror,  PL  B.  1091,  the  more  I  think 
it  over,  the  sorer  do  I  feel.  This  use  is  found  in  Plautus,  Lucretius,  and 
Vergil,  (b.)  quam  quisque  pessume  fecit,  tarn  maxume  tutus  est,  S.  /.  31, 
14,  the  -worse  a  man  has  acted,  the  safer  he  always  is.  This  use  is  found  in 
Plautus,  Terence,  Cato,  Varro,  and  Sallust. 

1894.  (2.)  quam,  than,  is  used   in  the  protasis  of  a  com- 
parative period  of  inequality,  with  a  comparative  in  the  apodo- 
sis  :  as, 

meliorem  quam  ego  sum  suppono  tibf,  PL  Cu.  256,  /  give  you  in  my 
place  a  better  man  than  I  am.  plura  dixi  quam  volui,  V.  <;,  79,  /  have  said 
more  than  I  intended.  Antonio  quam  est,  volo  peius  esse,  Att.  15,  3,  2, 
I  hope  Antony  may  be  worse  off  than  he  is.  doctrina  paulo  durior  quam 
natura  patitur,  Mur.  60,  principles  somewhat  sterner  than  nature  doth 
support,  potius  sero  quam  numquam,  L.  4,  2,  II,  better  late  than  never. 
corpus  patiens  algoris  supra  quam  cuiquam  credibile  est,  S.  C.  5,  3,  a 
constitution  capable  of  end^^r^ng  cold  beyond  what  anybody  could  believe,  su- 
pra quam  is  found  in  Cicero,  Sallust,  and  often  in  late  writers ;  infra  and 
ultra  quam  in  Cicero,  Livy,  and  late  writers  (infra  quam  also  in  Varro)  ; 
extra  quam  in  Ennius,  Cato,  and  in  legal  and  official  language  in  Cicero 
and  Livy. 

1895.  quam  is  also  used  with  some  virtual  comparatives:  thus,  nihil 
aliud,  non  aliud  quam,  no  other  than,  often  as  adverb,  only ;  secus  quam 
with  a  negative,  not  otherwise   than;  bis  tantd  quam,  twice  as  much  as; 
and  prae  quam  in  old  Latin,  in  comparison  with  how ;  and  similar  phrases : 
as, 

(a.)  per  biduum  nihil  aliud  quam  steterunt  parati  ad  pugnandum, 
L.  34,  46,  7,  for  two  days  they  merely  stood  in  battle  array.  This  use  occurs 
first  in  Sallust,  then  in  Nepos,  Livy,  and  later  writers,  (b.)  mih!  erit  curae 
ne  quid  fiat  secus  quam  volumus,  Att.  6,  2,  2,  I  will  see  to  it  that  nothing 
be  done  save  as  we  wish.  This  use  occurs  in  Plautus,  Terence,  Sallust,  Cicero, 
Livy,  and  later  writers.  With  both  aliud  and  secus  the  clause  is  rarely  pos- 
itive, with  aliud  not  before  Livy.  For  atque  (ac)  instead  of  quam  when 
the  first  clause  is  negative,  see  1654.  (c.)  bis  tanto  vale5  quam  valui 
prius,  PL  Merc.  297,  I  am  twice  as  capable  as  I  was  before:  (d.}  ml  hoc 
quidem  est  triginta  minae,  prae  quam  alios  sumptus  facit,  PL  Most.  981, 
oh,  this  is  nothing,  thirtv  minae,  when  you  think  what  other  sums  he  spends. 
prae  quam  is  found  only  in  Plautus  rarely.  Similar  phrases  are  :  contra 
quam,  in  Cicero,  Livy,  and  later  writers ;  praeter  quam,  in  Plautus,  Nae- 
vius,  and  frequently  in  other  writers  when  followed  by  quod  (1848);  super 
quam  quod  (1848)  and  insuper  quam  in  Livy;  pro  quam  in  Lucretius; 
advorsum  quam,  once  in  Plautus.  prae  quam  is  sometimes  followed  by 
a  relative  clause  :  as,  prae  quam  quod  molestumst,  PL  Am.  634,  compared 
•urith  what  is  painful.  For  ante  (or  prius)  and  post  quam,  see  1911,  1923. 

WITH  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1896.  The  subjunctive  is  used  with  quam  or  quam  ut  after  compara- 
tives denoting  disproportion  (1461) :  as, 

323 


-      Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


quicquid  erat  oneris  Segestanis  imponebat,  aliquanto  amplius  quam 
ferre  possent,  V.  4,  76,  he  would  impose  every  possible  burden  on  the  Segestans^ 
far  too  much  for  them  to  bear,  quis  non  intellegit  Canachi  signa  rigidi- 
ora  esse,  quam  ut  imitentur  veritatem  ?  Br.  70,  who  does  not  feel  that  the 
statues  of  Canachus  are  too  stiff  to  be  true  to  nature?  clarior  res  erat  quam 
ut  dissimulari  posset,  L.  26,  51,  n,  the  thing  was  too  notorious  to  be  hushed 
up.  Instead  of  ut,  qui  is  also  used  by  Livy  and  later  writers :  as,  maior  sum 
quam  cui  possit  Fortuna  nocere,  O.  6,  195,  too  strong  am  I  for  Fortune  to 
break  down,  says  infatuated  Niobe.  All  these  sentences  are  extensions  of 
the  subjunctive  of  action  conceivable  (1554,  1818). 

1897.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  clauses  introduced  by  potius  quam, 
rather  than,  to  denote  action  merely  assumed,     citius,  ante,  or  prius,  sooner, 
is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  or  potius  :  as, 

potius  quam  te  inimicum  habeam,  faciam  ut  iusseris,  T.  Eu.  174, 
rather  than  make  you  my  enemy,  I  will  do  as  you  tell  me,  depugna  potius 
quam  servias,  Att.  7,  7,  7,  fight  it  out  rather  than  be  a  slave,  potius  vitu- 
perationem  inconstantiae  suscipiam,  quam  in  te  sim  crudelis,  V.  5,  105, 
/  will  submit  to  the  charge  of  inconsistency  rather  than  be  cruel  towards  you. 
animam  omittunt  prius  quam  loco  demigrent,  PI.  Am.  240,  they  lose  their 
lives  sooner  than  yield  their  ground.  Livy  has  also  potius  quam  ut.  All 
these  sentences  a~e  extensions  of  the  subjunctive  of  desire  (1540, 1817). 

WITH  THE  INFINITIVE. 

1898.  When  the  main  clause  is  an  infinitive,  quam  is  often  followed  by 
an  infinitive :  as, 

malim  moriri  meos  quam  mendTcarier,  PL  Vid.  96,  better  my  bairns 
be  dead  than  begging  bread.  vSces  audiebantur  prius  se  cortice  ex  arbo- 
ribus  victurSs,  quam  Pompeium  e  manibus  dimissuros,  Caes.  C.  3,  49, 
i,  shouts  were  heard  that  they  would  live  on  the  bark  of  trees  sooner  than  let 
Pompey  slip  through  their  fingers. 


quamquam. 

1899.  ( i )  quamquam  is  used  in  old  Latin  as  an  indefinite  adverb,  ever 
so  much,  however  much  :  as, 

quamquam  negotiumst,  si  quid  veis,  Demipho,  non  sum  occupatus 
umquam  amico  operam  dare,  PL  Mer.  287,  however  busy  I  may  be  (1814), 
if  anything  you  wish,  dear  Demipho,  I'm  not  too  busy  ever  to  a  friend  mine 
aid  to  lend.  id  quoque  possum  ferre,  quamquam  iniuriumst,  T.  Ad. 
205,  that  also  I  can  bear,  however  so  unfair.  From  an  adverb,  quamquam 
became  a  conjunction,  although. 

1900.  (2.)  quamquam,  althoitgh,  introduces  the  indicative  in  the 
concession  of  a  definite  fact.     In  the  later  writers  it  is  also  sometimes 
used  with  the  subjunctive,  sometimes  with  a  participle  or  an  adjec- 
tive. 

324 


Conjunctional  Sentences :    quamvis.       [ 1 90 1 — 1 904. 


(a. )  quamquam  premuntur  acre  alieno,  dominationem  tamen  ex- 
spectant,  C.  2,  19,  though  they  are  staggering  under  debt,  they  yet  look  forward 
to  being  lords  and  masters,  quamquam  non  venit  ad  finem  tarn  audax 
inceptum,  tamen  baud  omnino  vanum  fuit,  L.  10,  32,  5,  though  the  bold 
attempt  did  not  attain  its  purpose,  yet  it  was  not  altogether  fruitless.  This  is 
the  classical  use;  but  see  1901.  (b.)  nam  et  tribums  plebis  senatus 
habendl  ius  erat,  quamquam  senatSres  non  essent,  Varro  in  Gell.  14,  8, 
2,  for  even  the  tribunes  of  the  people,  though  they  -were  not  senators,  had  the  right 
to  hold  a  meeting  of  the  senate,  baud  cunctatus  est  Germanicus,  quam- 
quam fingl  ea  intellegeret,  Ta.  2,  26,  Germanicus  did  not  delay,  though  he 
•was  aware  this  was  all  made  ^tp.  This  use  is  fpund  first  in  Varro,  often  in 
the  Augustan  poets,  sometimes  in  Livy,  always  in  Juvenal.  It  does  not  be- 
come common  before  Tacitus  and  the  younger  Pliny,  (c.)  sequente,  quam- 
quam non  probante,  Amynandro,  L.  31,  41,  7,  Amynander  accompanying 
though  not  approving  (1374).  ne  Aquitania  quidem,  quamquam  in  verba 
Oth5nis  obstricta,  diu  mansit,Ta.  H.  i,  76,  Aquitania,  though  bound  by  the 
oath  of  allegiance  to  Otho,  did  not  hold  out  long  either.  This  use  is  found 
once  each  in  Cicero  and  Sallust,  half  a  dozen  times  in  Livy,  oftener  in 
Tacitus. 

1901.  The  subjunctive  is  also  used  often  with  quamquam  for  special 
reasons,  as  by  attraction  (1728),  in  indirect  discourse  (1725),  and  of  action 
conceivable  (1731). 

1902.  For  quamquam  appending  a  fresh  main  sentence,  see  2153;  for 
its  use  with  the  infinitive,  2317. 


quam  vis  or  quamvis. 

1903.  quam  vis  or  quamvis  is  used  as  an  indefinite  adverb  (712),  as 
much  as  you  please,  and  is  often  joined  with  an  adjective  or  other  adverb  to 
take  the  place  of  a  superlative:  as, 

quam  vis  ridiculus  est,  ub!  uxor  non  adest,  PI.  Men.  318,  he's  as  droll 
as  you  please  when  his  wife  isn't  by.  quamveis  msipiens  poterat  persen- 
tiscere,  PI.  Merc.  687,  the  veriest  dullard  could  detect,  quamvis  pauci  adire 
audent,  4,  2,  5,  the  merest  handful  dares  attack,  quamvis  callide,  V.  2,  134, 
ever  so  craftily,  quamvis  is  also  sometimes  used  to  strengthen  a  superlative 
(1466),  though  not  in  classical  prose. 

1904.  (i.)  The  indefinite  adverb  quam  vis,  as  much  as  you  please. 
is  often  used  in  subjunctive  clauses  of  concession  or  permission  ;  such 
subjunctives  are  sometimes  coordinated  with  licet :  as, 

quod  turpe  est,  id  quam  vis  occultetur,  tamen  honestum  fieri  nullo 
modo  potest,  Off.  3,  78,  if  a  thing  is  base,  let  it  be  hidden  as  much  as  you  will, 
yet  it  £annot  be  made  respectable  (1553).  locus  hie  apud  nos,  quam  vis 
subito  venias,  semper  liber  est,  PI.  B.  82,  our  house  is  always  open,  come 
as  sudden  as  you  may  (1553).  praeter  eos  quam  vis  enumeres  multos 
licet,  nonnullos  reperies  perniciosos  tribunes,  Leg.  3,  24,  besides  these  you 
may  tell  off  as  many  as  you  please,  you  will  still  find  some  dangerous  tribunes 
(1710).  The  combination  with  licet  occurs  first  in  Lucretius,  then  in  Cicero. 

325 


1 905- 1 908.]    Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


Instead  of  vis,  other  forms  are  sometimes  used:  as,  volumus,  volent, 
velit,  &c. :  thus,  quam  volent  facet!  sint,  Gael.  67,  they  may  be  as  -witty  as 
they  please  (1735).  quam  volet  Epicurus  iocetur  et  dicat  se  non  posse 
intellegere,  numquam  me  movebit,  DN.  2,  46,  Epicurus  may  joke  and  say 
he  can 't  understand  it  as  much  as  he  likes,  he  will  never  shake  me.  From  an 
adverb,  quam  vis  became  a  conjunction,  however  much,  even  if. 

1905.  (2.)  The  subjunctive   with   the  conjunction  quamvis,  how- 
ever much,  even  if,  though,  denotes  action  merely  assumed ;  when  the 
action   is  to   be  denoted  as  real,  ut  or  sicut  or  the  like,  with  the 
indicative,  usually  follows  in  the  best  prose  (1943)  :   as, 

(a.)  quamvis  sint  homines  qui  Cn.  Carbonem  oderint,  tamen  hi 
debent  quid  metuendum  sit  cogitare,  V.  i,  39,  though  there  may  be  men 
who  hate  Carbo,  still  these  men  ought  to  consider  what  they  have  to  fear,  non 
enim  possis,  quamvis  excellas,  L.  T$,you  may  not  have  the  power,  however 
eminent  you  may  be.  This  use  begins  with  Cicero  and  Varro,  and  gets  com- 
mon in  late  writers.  Not  in  Livy.  (b.)  ilia  quamvis  ridicula  essent, 
sicut  erant,  mint  tamen  risum  non  moverunt,  Fam.  7,  32,  3,  droll  as  this 
really  was,  it  nevertheless  did  not  make  me  laugh,  quamvis  enim  multis  locis 
dicat  Epicurus,  sicuti  dicit,  satis  fortiter  de  dolore,  tamen  non  id  spec- 
tandum  est  quid  dicat,  Of.  3,  117,  even  though  Epicurus  really  does  speak  in 
many  places  pretty  heroically  about  pain,  still  we  must  not  have  an  eye  to  what 
he  says.  In  the  Augustan  poets  rarely,  and  often  in  Tacitus,  the  younger 
Pliny,  and  late  writers,  the  subjunctive,  without  a  parenthetical  phrase  intro- 
duced by  ut  or  the  like,  is  used  of  an  action  denoted  as  real :  as,  expalluit 
notabiliter,  quamvis  palleat  semper,  Plin.  Ep.  i,  5,  13,  he  grew  pale  per- 
ceptibly, though  he  is  always  a  pale  man.  maestus  erat,  quamvis  laetitiam 
simularet,  Ta.  15,  54,  sad  he  was,  though  he  pretended  to  be  gay. 

1906.  quamvis,  even  if,  though,  is  also  sometimes  used  with  the  indica- 
tive (1900) :  as, 

erat  dignitate  regia,  quamvis  carebat  nomine,  N.  i,  2,  3,  he  had  the 
authority  of  a  king,  though  not  the  title,  quamvis  tacet  Hermogenes,  can- 
tor est,  H.  S.  I,  3,  129,  though  he  open  not  his  mouth,  Hermogenes  remains  a 
singer  still.  This  use  occurs  twice  in  Lucretius,  once  in  Cicero,  Nepos,  and 
Livy  each,  in  Varro,  in  the  Augustan  poets,  and  sometimes  in  late  writers. 
Not  in  Tacitus,  Pliny  the  younger,  Juvenal,  Martial,  or  Suetonius. 

1907.  It  may  be  mentioned  here   that  the  indefinite  adverb   quamlibet,  how- 
ever you  please,  is  used  in  subjunctive  clauses  of  concession  or  permission  (1904)  once 
or  twice  by  Lucretius,  Ovid,  and  Quintilian.     Velleius  has  it  with  the  participle,  a 
construction  sometimes  found  with  quamvis  in  late  writers. 


tamquam. 

1908.    tamquam,  just  as,  introduces  an  indicative  protasis  in 
periods  of  comparison. 

The  tarn  properly  belongs  to  the  apodosis  and  is  attracted  to  the  prota- 
sis,   tamquam  has  sometimes  as  correlative  sic  or  ita. 

326 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  antequam.    [_  1 909- 1912. 


t5  hortor  ut  tamquam  poetae  bom  sclent,  sic  tu  in  extrema  parte 
muneris  tuidiligentissimus  sis,  QFr.  i,  I,  46, 1  urge  you  to  be  very  particu- 
lar at  the  end  of  your  task,  just  as  good  poets  always  are.  tamquam  philoso- 
phorum  habent  disciphnae  ex  ipsis  vocabula,  parasiti  ita  ut  Gnathonici 
vocentur,  T.  Eu.  263,  t/iat  so  parasites  may  be  called  Gnatho nites  even  as  schools 
of  philosophy  are  named  from  the  masters.  Usually,  however,  ut  (1944)  or 
quemadmodum  is  used  in  this  sense  ;  and  tamquam  occurs  oftenest  in 
abridged  sentences  (1057),  particularly  to  show  that  an  illustration  is  untrue 
or  figurative :  as,  Odyssia  Latina  est  sic  tamquam  opus  aliquod  Daedali, 
Br.  71,  the  Odyssey  in  Latin  is,  you  may  say,  a  regular  work  of  Daedalus. 
oculi  tamquam  speculatSres  altissimum  locum  obtinent,  DN.  2,  140, 
the  eyes  occupy  the  highest  part,  as  a  sort  of  watchmen. 

1909.  In  late  writers,  especially  in  Tacitus,  tamquam  is  often  used  to 
introduce  a  reason  or  motive,  or  a  thought  indirectly  expressed :  as, 

invisus  tamquam  plus  quam  civilia  agitaret,  Ta.  I,  12,  hated  on  the 
ground  that  his  designs  were  too  lofty  for  a  private  citizen  (1725)-  legates 
increpuit,  tamquam  non  omnes  reos  peregissent,  Plin.  Ep.  3,  9,  36,  he 
reproved  the  embassy  'for  not  having  completed  the  prosecution  of  all  the  defend- 
ants'  (1852,  1725).  suspectus  tamquam  ipse  suas  incenderit  aedis,  J.  3, 
222,  suspected  of  having  set  his  own  house  afire. 

1910.  For  tamquam  instead  of  tamquam  si,  see  2118;  with  a  participle, 
2121. 


antequam,  priusquam. 

igil.  antequam  and  priusquam  accompany  both  the  indicative 
and  the  subjunctive. 

ante  and  prius  properly  belong  to  the  apodosis,  and  regularly  stand 
with  it  if  it  is  negative ;  but  otherwise  they  are  usually  attracted  to  the 
protasis. 

antequam  is  very  seldom  found  in  old  Latin,  and  it  is  in  general  much 
rarer  than  priusquam,  except  in  Tacitus. 

IN   GENERAL   STATEMENTS. 

1912.  In  general  present  statements,  antequam  and  prius- 
quam regularly  introduce  the  perfect  indicative  or  the  present 
subjunctive :  as, 

membris  utimur  priusquam  didicimus  cuius  ea  causa  utilitatis  ha- 
beamus,  Fin.  3,  66,  we  always  use  our  limbs  before  we  learn  for  what  purposes 
of  utility  we  have  them  (1613).  priusquam  lucet,  adsunt,  PI.  MG.  709, 
before  'tis  light  they ''re  always  here ;  here  lucet  is  equivalent  to  inluxit. 
ante  videmus  fulgorem  quam  sonum  audiamus,  Sen.  QN.  2,  12,  6,  we 
always  see  the  flash  before  we  hear  the  sound,  priusquam  semen  maturum 
siet,  secatS,  Cato,  RR.  53,  always  cut  before  the  seed  is  ripe  (1575).  With 
the  perfect  subjunctive  in  the  indefinite  second  person  (1030)  °  as,  hoc  ma- 
lum  opprimit  antequam  prospicere  potueris,  V.  I,  39,  this  calamity 
always  overwhelms  you  before  you  can  anticipate  it  (1731,  1558).  For  prius 
quam,  sooner  than,  see  1897. 

327 


1 9 1 3"1 9 1 7-]  Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


1913.  The  future  indicative  is  used  a  few  times  in  general  statements  by  old  and 
late  writers,  and  the  perfect  subjunctive  after  a  negative  clause  rarely  by  Tacitus  :  as, 
boves  priusquam  in  viam  ages,  pice  cornua  infima  unguito,  Cato,  KR. 
72,  always  smear  the  hoofs  if  your  oxen  -with  pitch  before  you  drive  tliem  on  the  road 
(1625,1577).     deum  honor  principi  non  ante  habetur  quam  agere  inter 
homines  desierit,  Ta.  15,  74,  divine  honours  are  not  paid  to  an  emperor  before  he 
has  ceased  to  live  among  men.     Cicero  has  the  perfect  subjunctive  in  a  definition: 
thus,  providentia,  per  quam  futurum  aliquid  videtur  antequam  factum 
sit,  Inv.  2,  1 60,  foresight  is  the  faculty  through  -which  a  futttre  event  is  seen  before 
it  has  taken  place.     He  also  has  the  present  indicative  once  :  Div.  i,  120. 

1914.  In  general  past  statements  antequam  and  priusquam  introduce  the 
subjunctive  imperfect  or  pluperfect ;  but  this  use  is  very  rare:  as,  dormlre  prius- 
quam somni  cupldp  esset,  S.  C.  13,  3,  a-sleeping  always  before  they  felt  sleepy . 
ita  saepe  magna  indoles  virtutis,  priusquam  re"!  publicae  prodesse 
potuisset,    extincta    est,  Ph.  5,  47,  thus   character  of  unusual  promise  -was 
oftentimes  cut  off,  before  it  could  do  the  government  any  good. 

IN   PARTICULAR   STATEMENTS. 

1915.  In  particular  present  or  future  statements,  antequam 
and  priusquam  introduce  a  present,  either  indicative  or  sub- 
junctive; in  future  statements  the  future  perfect  is  also  used, 
and  regularly  when  the  main  verb  is  future  perfect :  as, 

antequam  ad  sententiam  redeo,  de  me  pauca  dicam,  C.  4,  20,  before  I 
come  back  to  the  motion,  I  "will  say  a  little  about  myself  (1593).  est  etiam 
prius  quam  abis  quod  volo  loqui,  PI.  As.  232,  there's  something  else  I  -want 
to  say  before  you  go.  antequam  veniat  in  Pontum,  litteras  ad  Cn.  Pom- 
peium  mittet,  Agr.  2,  53,  before  he  reaches  Pontus,  he  will  send  a  letter  to 
Pompey.  prius  quam  ad  portam  venias,  est  pistrilla,  T.  Ad.  583,  there  'j 
a  little  bakery  just  before  you  get  to  the  gate,  nihil  contra  disputabo  prius- 
quam dixerit,  Fl.  51,  /  will  not  argue  to  the  contrary  before  he  has  spoken 
(1626).  neque  prius,  quam  debellavero,  absistam,  L.  49, 39, 9,  and  I  will 
not  leave  off  before  I  have  brought  the  war  to  an  end.  si  quid  mihl  acciderit 
priusquam  hoc  tantum  mall  vldero,  Mil.  99,  if  anything  shall  befall  me  be- 
fore I  see  this  great  calamity,  neque  promitto  quicquam  neque  re- 
spondeo  prius  quam  gnatum  vldero,  T.  Ph.  1044,  I'm  not  promising 
anything  nor  making  anv  answer  before  I  see  my  son  (1593).  Tacitus  uses 
neither  the  present  indicative  nor  the  future  perfect. 

1916.  In  old  Latin  the  future  and  the  perfect  subjunctive  also  occur  :  as, 
prius  quam  quoiquam  convivae  dabis,  gustato  tute  prius,  PI.  Ps.  885, 

before  you  help  a  single  guest,  taste  first  yourself ;  but  Terence  does  not  use 
ihe  future,  and  it  is  found  only  once  or  twice  later,  nullo  pacto  potest 
prius  haec  in  aedis  recipi,  quam  illam  amlserim,  PI.  MG.  1095.  on  no 
terms  can  I  take  my  new  love  to  the  house,  before  I've  let  the  old  love  drop  ;  but 
usually  the  perfect  subjunctive  is  due  to  indirect  discourse. 

1917.  In  particular  past  statements  antequam  and  prius- 
quam   introduce   the   perfect   indicative,   especially   when    the 
apodosis  is  negative.     The  imperfect  subjunctive  rarely  occurs, 
chiefly  in  late  writers. 

328 


Conjunctional  Sentences  :  antequam.   [1918-1922. 


(a.)  omnia  ista  ante  facta  sunt  quam  iste  Italiam  attigit,  V.  2,  161, 

all  these  incidents  occurred  before  the  defendant  set  foot  in  Italy,  neque  prius 
fugere  destiterunt  quam  ad  Rhenum  pervenerunt,  i,  53,  i,  and  they  did 
not  stay  their  flight  before  they  fairly  arrived  at  the  Rhine,  prius  quam  hinc 
abiit  quindecim  miles  minas  dederat,  PI.  Ps.  53,  the  captain  had  paid 
down  fifteen  minae  before  he  left  here,  (b.)  nee  prius  sunt  visi  quam 
castris  adpropinquarent,  6,  37,  2,  they  -were  not  seen  before  they  drew  near 
to  the  camp.  This  use  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  not  to  be  confounded 
with  that  mentioned  in  1919,  is  not  found  in  old  Latin  or  in  Cicero.  It  is 
found  in  Nepos  and  Livy. 

1918.  The  present  indicative  also  occurs  in  particular  past   statements  in   old 
Latin:  as,  is  priusquam  moritur  mini  dedit,  PL  Cu.  637,  before  he  died  he 
gave  it  me.     The  indicative  imperfect  occurs  four  times  in  Livy  and  once  in  late 
Latin,  the  pluperfect  once  in  old  Latin  and  once  in  Cicero. 

1919.  When  the  action  of  the  protasis  was  forestalled,  or  when  action 
conceivable  or  purpose  is  expressed,  antequam  and  priusquam  regularly 
introduce  the  imperfect  subjunctive  in  particular  past  statements:  as, 

plerique  interfecti  sunt,  priusquam  occultum  hostem  viderent,  L.  35, 
29,  3,  most  of  them  were  slain  before  they  could  see  the  hidden  enemy,  ante- 
quam verbum  facerem,  de  sella  surrexit,  V.  4,  147,  before  I  could  utter  a 
word  he  arose  from  his  seat,  pervenit  priusquam  Pompeius  sentire  pos- 
set, Caes.  C.  3,  67,  4,  he  arrived  before  Pompev  shoiild  be  able  to  learn  of  hts 
coming  (1725).  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  occur  rarely,  generally 
when  the  main  clause  contains  a  present  of  vivid  narration  (1590).  The 
imperfect  is  not  found  in  old  Latin. 

1920.  The  perfect  indicative  or  imperfect  subjunctive  with  antequam  is 
often  used  attributively  with  nouns  denoting  time  :  as, 

fabulam  docuit,  anno  ipso  ante  quam  natus  est  Ennius,  Br.  72,  he 
exhibited  a  play  just  a  year  before  Ennius  was  born,  ducentis  annis  ante 
quam  Romam  caperent,  in  Italiam  Galli  transcenderunt,  L.  5,  33,  5,  two 
hundred  years  before  they  took  Rome,  the  Gauls  crossed  over  to  Italy.  The  plu- 
perfect also  occurs,  when  the  main  verb  is  pluperfect :  as,  Staienus  biennio 
antequam  causam  recepisset,  sescentis  millibus  nummum  se  iudicium 
conrupturum  dixerat,  Clu.  68,  Stajenus  had  said  two  years  before  he  under- 
took the  case,  that  he  would  bribe  the  court  for  six  hundred  thousand  sesterces. 

1921.  The  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  rarely  introduced  by  antequam  or 
priusquam  except  in  indirect  discourse  :  as, 

antequam  de  meo  adventu  audire  potuissent,  in  Macedonian!  per- 
rexi,  PL  98,  before  they  should  be  able  to  hear  of  my  arrival,  I  proceeded  to 
Macedonia  (1725).  avertit  equos  in  castra  priusquam  pabula  gustassent 
Troiae  Xanthumque  bibissent,  V.  I,  472,  he  drave  the  horses  off  to  camp,  or 
ever  they  should  taste  of  Troja's  grass  and  Xanthus  drink  (1725). 

1922.  It  may  be  mentioned  here  that  postridie  quam  and  pridie  quam 
occur  a  few  times  in  Plautus  and  Cicero  with  the  indicative;  postridie  quam  with 
the  indicative  in  Suetonius  ;  and  pridie  quam  with  the  subjunctive  in  Livy,  Valerius 
Maximus,  and  Suetonius. 


329 


1 92 3-1 926.]  Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 
postea  quam  or  postquam. 

ub!,  ut,  cum  primum,  simul  atque. 

1923.  With  postea  quam,  postquam  (posquam),  after,  the  following 
words  may  conveniently  be  treated  :  ub!,  ut,  when ;  ubi  primum,  ut  pri- 
mum, cum  primum,  -when  first,  and  in  Plautus  quom  extemplo ;  simul 
atque  (or  ac,  less  frequently  et  or  ut,  or  simul  alone ),  at  the  same  time  with, 
as  soon  as. 

postquam,  ubi,  ut,  cum  primum,  simul  atque,  accom- 
pany the  indicative. 

For  examples  of  the  use  of  tenses,  see  1924-1934. 

1924.  In  clauses  introduced  by  postea  quam  or  postquam,  the  imperfect  or 
pluperfect  subjunctive,  found  a  dozen  times  in  the  manuscripts  of  Cicero's  works  and 
elsewhere,  is  generally  corrected  in  modern  editions  or  usually  the  conjunctive  particle 
is  emended  to  postea  quom  (cum).     But  the  subjunctive  may  of  course  be  used 
with  this  and  the  other  particles  mentioned  in  1923  for  special  reasons,  as  with  the 
indefinite  second  person  (1731),  by  attraction  (1728),  and  in  indirect  discourse  (1725). 
For  the  subjunctive  of  repeated  past  action  with  ubi  and  ut,  see  1932.     The  infini- 
tive of  intimation  occurs  in  Tacitus  (1539):  as,  postquam  exui  aequalitas,  pro- 
venere  dominationes,  Ta.  3,  26,  after  equality  bet-ween  man  and  man  -was 
dropped,  there  came  a  crop  of  tyrants. 

1925.  In  narration  the  perfect  indicative  is  regularly  used 
in  clauses  introduced  by  postquam,  ubi,  ut,  cum  primum, 
simul  atque  (1739)  :  as, 

postquam  tuas  litteras  legi,  Postumia  tua  me  convenit,  Fam.  4,  2,  i, 
after  I  read  your  letter,  your  Postumia  called  on  me.  postquam  aurum 
abstulimus,  in  navem  conscendimus,  PI.  B.  277,  after  ive  got  away  the 
money,  we  took  ship,  ubi  ad  ipsum  veni  devorticulum,  constiti,  T.  Eu. 
635,  when  I  came  exactly  to  the  side  street,  I  pulled  lip.  ubi  se  diutius  duel 
intellexit,  graviter  eos  accusat,  I,  16,  5,  when  he  came  to  see  that  he  was  put 
off  a  good  while,  he  takes  them  roundly  to  task,  qui  ut  peroravit,  surrexit 
Clodius,  QFr.  2,  3,  2,  when  he  had  finished  speaking,  up  jumped  Clodius.  ut 
abii  abs  te,  fit  forte  obviam  mihi  Phormio,  T.  Ph.  617,  when  I  left  you, 
Phormio  happened  to  fall  in  my  way.  crimen  eius  modi  est,  ut,  cum  pri- 
mum ad  me  delatum  est,  usurum  me  ills  non  putarem,  V.  5,  158,  the 
charge  is  of  such  a  sort  that,  when  first  it  was  reported  to  me,  I  thought  I  should 
not  use  it.  cum  primum  Cretae  litus  attigit,  nuntios  misit,  L,  37,  60,  4. 
as  soon  as  he  touched  the  shore  of  Crete,  he  sent  messengers,  ut  primum  loqui 
posse  coepi,  inquam,  RP.  6,  15,  as  soon  as  I  began  to  be  able  to  speak,  I  said. 
quern  simul  atque  oppidani  conspexerunt,  murum  complete  coeperunt, 
7,  12,  5,  as  soon  as  the  garrison  espied  him,  they  began  to  man  the  wall,  at 
hostes,  ubi  primum  nostros  equites  conspexerunt,  impetu  facto  cele- 
riter  nostros  perturbaverunt,  4,  12,  I,  but  as  soon  as  the  enemy  caught  sight 
of  our  cavalry,  they  attacked  and  threw  our  men  into  disorder.  The  conjunc- 
tion simul  atque  is  very  rarely  found  in  old  Latin. 

1926.  The  present  indicative  of  vivid  narration  (1590)  sometimes 
occurs:  as, 

33° 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  postquam.   [ 1 92  7- 1 930. 


postquam  iam  pueri  septuennes  sunt,  pater  oneravit  navim  mag- 
nam,  PI.  Men.  prol.  24,  after  the  boys  were  seven  year  olds,  their  father  freighted 
a  big  ship,  quid  ait,  ubi  me_n5minas,  T.  Hau.  303,  what  sayeth  she  when 
you  name  me  '(  ubi  neutri  transeundi  initium  faciunt,  Caesar  suos  in 
castra  reduxit,  2,  9,  2,  neither  party  taking  the  initiative  in  crossing,  Caesar 
marched  his  men  back  to  camp.  Verbs  of  perceiving,  especially  video,  occur 
ottenest  in  this  use,  which  is  common  in  Plautus  and  Terence :  as,  postquam 
videt  nuptias  adparari,  missast  ancilla  ilico,  T.  Andr.  513,  after  she  sees 
a  marriage  on  foot,  her  maid  is  sent  forthwith,  abed  ab  illis,  postquam 
video  me  ludificarier,  PI.  Cap.  487,  seeing  myself  made  game  of ,1  leave  them. 
quem  postea  quam  videt  non  adesse,  ardere  atque  furere  coepit,  K  2, 
92,  seeing  that  the  man  does  not  appear,  he  began  to  rage  and  fume,  ubf  hoc 
videt,  init  consilium  importum  tyranni,  V.  5,  103,  seeing  this,  he  adopted 
the  policy  of  a  savage  tyrant.  Plautus  uses  also  quom  extemplo.  Such 
protases  often  take  on  a  causal  sense  (see  also  1930). 

1927.  The  present  or  perfect  with  postquam  or  ut  is  sometimes  used  in  ex- 
pressions equivalent  to  an  emphasized  accusative  or  ablative  of  time,  the  main  verb 
being  est  or  sunt :  as,  septingenti  sunt  anni  postquam  inclita  condita 
Roma  est,  E.  in  Varro,  KR.  3,  1,2,  'tis  seven  hundred  years  since  glorious  Rome 
was  founded,    domo  ut  abierunt  hie  tertius  annus,  PI.  St.  29,  this  is  the 
third  year  since  they  left  home,     annus  est  octavus  ut  imperium  obtines, 
Ta.  14,  53,  it  is  the  eighth  year  since  you  acquired  empire,    tor  a  similar  use  of 
cum,  see  1871. 

1928.  The  pluperfect  with  postquam,  denoting  resulting  state  (1615), 
occurs  less  frequently  :  as, 

turn  cum  P.  Africanus,  postea  quam  bis  consul  fuerat,  L.  Cottam  in 
iudicium  vocabat,  Caecil.  69,  at  the  time  when  Africanus,  after  he  had  twice 
been  consul,  was  bringing  Cotta  to  judgement,  postquam  omnium  oculos 
occupaverat  certamen,  turn  aversam  adoriuntur  Romanam  aciem,  L. 
22,  48,  4,  when  every  eye  was  fairly  riveted  on  the  engagement,  that  instant  they 
fell  upon  the  Romans  in  the  rear.  Not  in  Plautus,  once  in  Terence,  and 
rare  in  classical  writers. 

1929.  The  pluperfect,  less  frequently  the  perfect,  with  postquam  is  used 
attributively  with  nouns  denoting  time. 

In  this  use  post  is  often  separated  from  quam,  and  two  constructions 
are  possible:  (a.)  Ablative:  anno  post  quam  vota  erat  aedes  Monetae 
dedicatur,  L.  7,  28,  6,  the  temple  of  Moneta  is  dedicated  a  year  after  it  was 
vowed.  Without  post :  quadringentesimo  anno  quam  urbs  Romana  con- 
dita erat,  patricii  consules  magistratum  iniere,  L.  7,  18,  i,  four  hundred 
years  after  Rome  town  was  founded,  patrician  consuls  entered  into  office, 
(b.)  Accusative,  with  an  ordinal,  and  post  as  a  preposition,  or,  sometimes, 
intra :  post  diem  tertium  gesta  res  est  quam  dixerat,  Mil.  44,  the  deed 
was  done  the  next  day  but  one  after  he  said  it.  See  2419. 

1930.  The  imperfect  with  postquam  expresses  action  continuing 
into  the  time  of  the  main  action.     Such  a  protasis,  especially  when 
negative,  usually  denotes  the  cause  of  the  main  action :  as, 

Appius,  postquam  nemo  adibat,  domum  se  recepit,  L.  3,  46,  9, 
Appius,  finding  that  nobody  presented  himself ,  went  back  home,  postea  quam 
5  scaena  explodebatur,  confugit  in  huius  domum,  RC.  30,  after  being 
repeatedly  hissed  off  the  stage,  he  took  refuge  in  my  clienfs  house. 


1 9 3 1  - 1 9 3 3 .]  Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


In  old  Latin  this  use  is  found  only  once,  in  Plautus ;  it  is  most  common 
in  Livy,  but  occurs  frequently  in  Tacitus.  So  occasionally  the  present, 
generally  when  the  main  action  is  present  (see  also  1926) :  as,  postquam 
nee  ab  Romanis  vobis  ulla  est  spes,  nee  vos  moenia  defendunt,  pacern 
adfero  ad  vos,  L.  21,  13,  4,  now  that  it  has  become  plain  that  you  have  no  hope 
from  the  Romans,  and  that  your  walls  are  no  protection  to  you,  I  bring  peace 
unto  you.  postquam  Kberast,  ub!  habitet  dicere  admodum  incertg  scio, 
PI.  E.  505,  now  that  she's  free,  I'm  quite  too  ill  informed  to  say  where  she 
lives,  quae  omnia  intellegit  nihil  prodesse,  postea  quam  testibus  con 
vincitur,  V.  5,  103,  he  knows  that  all  this  is  fruitless,  now  that  he  is  being  re- 
futed by  witnesses.  The  perfect  with  postquam  or  ut  occurs  occasionally 
in  this  use  with  the  present  in  the  main  clause  :  as,  animus  in  tuto  locost, 
postquam  iste  hinc  abiit,  PL  Ps.  1052,  my  mind  is  easy,  now  that  fellow's 
gone,  nam  ut  in  navi  vecta's,  credo  timida's,  PI.  B.  106,  for  after  your 
voyage,  of  course  you  're  nervous. 

1931.  postquam  and  ut  have  sometimes  the  meaning  of  ever  since  or  as 
long  as :  as, 

postquam  natus  sum,  satur  numquam  ful,  PI.  St.  156,  since  I  was  born 
I've  never  had  enough  to  eat.  tibl  umquam  quicquam,  postquam  tuos 
sum,  verb5rum  dedi  ?  PI.  Most.  925,  have  I  once  ever  cheated  you  as  long  as 
I  have  been  your  slave  ?  neque  meum  pedem  intuli  in  aedis,  ut  cum  exer- 
citu  hinc  profectus  sum,  PL  Am.  733, 1  have  n't  set  foot  in  the  house  ever  since 

los 


I  marched  out  with  the  army,     ut  illos  de  re  publica  Iibr5s  edidisti,  nihil 

ate 

lishec 


a  te  postea  accepimus,  Br.  19,  we  have  had  nothing  from  you  since  you  pub- 
'ished  the  work  On  the  State. 


ubi,  ut,  simul  atque. 

1932.  ubi,  ut,  or  simul  atque  (ac)  often  introduces  a  clause  de- 
noting indefinite  or  repeated  action  :  as, 

adeo  obcaecat  animos  fortuna,  ub!  vim  suam  refringi  non  vult,  L. 
5,  37,  I,  so  completely  does  fortune  blind  the  mind  when  she  will  not  have  her 
power  thwarted,  ub!  salutatio  defluxit,  litteris  me  involve,  Fam.  9,  20.  3. 
when  my  callers  go,  I  always  plunge  into  my  book  (1613).  omnes  profecto 
mulieres  te  amant,  ut  quaeque  aspexit,  PL  MG.  1264,  all  the  ladies  lore 
you,  every  time  one  spies  you.  simul  atque  se  inflexit  hie  rex  in  domina- 
tum  iniustiorem,  fit  continue  tyrannus,  RP.  2,  48,  for  the  moment  our 
king  turns  to  a  severer  kind  of  mastery,  he  becomes  a  tyrant  on  the  spot.  Mes- 
sanam  ut  quisque  nostrum  venerat,  haec  visere  solebat,  V.  4,  5,  any 
Roman,  who  visited  Messana^  invariably  went  to  see  these  statues  (1618). 
hostes,  ub!  aliquos  singulares  conspexerant,  adoriebantur,  4,  26,  2, 
every  time  tke  enemy  saw  some  detached  parties,  they  would  charge.  The  im- 
perfect in  this  use  is  not  common  in  classical  writers,  and  occurs  but  once, 
-with  ub!,  in  old  Latin ;  the  pluperfect  is  rare  before  the  silver  age.  Clauses 
with  ut  generally  contain  some  form  of  quisque  (2396).  Plautus  uses  quom 
extemplo  with  the  present  and  perfect.  The  subjunctive  is  found  with 
ub!  and  ut  quisque  in  cases  of  repeated  past  action  (1730). 

1933.  ub!,  ut,  or  simul  atque  rarely  introduces  an  imperfect  or  pluper- 
fect of  definite  time  :  as, 

332 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  ut.      [  1 934— 1937. 


quid  ubi  reddebas  aurum,  dixisti  patri,  PI.  B.  685,  what  did  you  tell  your 
fat/if  i  -when  you  were  retu  ruing  the  money?  ubl  lux  adventabat,  tubicinSs 
signa  canere,  S.  /.  99,  I,  when  daylight  was  drawing  on,  the  trumpeters 
sounded  the  call.  ubl  nSmo  obvius  ibat,  pleno  gradu  ad  hostium  ca- 
Stra  tendunt,  L.  9,  45,  14,  Jinking  nobody  came  to  meet  them,  they  advanced 
double  quick  upon  the  enemy's  camp  ( 1930).  The  use  of  these  tenses  referring 
to  definite  time  is  very  rare  in  old  Latin,  and  found  only  with  ut  in  Cicero. 

1934.  ub!  or  simul  atque,  referring  to  definite  time,  introduces  the  future 
or  future  perfect,  when  the  apodosis  is  also  future:  as, 

simul  et  quid  erit  certi,  scribam  ad  tS,  Att.  2,  20,  2,  as  soon  as  there  is 
anything  positive,  I  will  write  to  you.  ego  ad  t5  statim  habgbo  quod  scri- 
bam, simul  ut  videro  Curionem,  Att.  10,  4,  12,  /  shall  have  something  to 
write  you,  as  soon  <is  ever  I  see  Curio,  nam  ub!  m5  aspiciet,  ad  carnuficem 
rapiet  continue  senex,  PI.  B.  688,  when  the  old  man  sees  me,  he  'II  hurry  me 
off  to  Jack  Ketch  without  any  ado.  ubi  primum  poterit,  s5  illinc  sub- 
ducet,  T.  Ku.  628,  she'll  steal  away  as  soon  as  she  can.  Plautus  has  also 
quom  extemplo  in  this  use,  and  Pliny  the  Younger  ut  primum. 


uti  or  ut. 

1935.  The  relative  adverb  uti  or  ut  (711)  is  found  in  the  oldest 
Latin  in  the  form  utei,  but  ut  was  the  prevalent  form  even  in  the  time 
of  Plautus.     As  a  conjunctive  particle,  it  accompanies  both  the  indica- 
tive and  the  subjunctive.    For  ut  in  wishes,  see  1 540 ;  in  questions,  1 568. 

WITH  THE   INDICATIVE. 
(A.)  ut,  where. 

1936.  uti  or  ut  in  the  rare  signification  of  where,  accompanies  the  indicative :  as, 
atque  in  eopse  adstas  lapide,  ut  praec5  praedicat,  PI.  B.  815,  and  there 
you  stand  right  on  the  auction  block,  just  where  the  crier  always  cries,     sive  in  ex- 
tremos  pe'netrabit  Indos,  Htus  ut  longg  resonante  E55  tunditur  unda, 
Cat.  ii,  2,  or  shall  he  pierce  to  farthest  Ind,  where  by  the  long-resounding  eastern 
wave  the  strand  is  lashed.     In  classical  Latin,  ut  in  this  sense  is  used  only  by  the 
poets,  as  here  and  there  in  Lucilius,  Catullus,  Cicero's  Aratea,  and  Vergil.     ubT  is 
the  word  regularly  used.     For  Ut,  when,  see  1923. 

(B.)  ut,  as. 

1937.  The  indicative  is  used  in  the  protasis  of  a  comparative 
period  introduced  by  uti  or  ut,  as. 

ut  often  has  as  a  correlative  ita,  item,  itidem,  sic,  perinde,  or  simili- 
ter,  and  sometimes  in  old  Latin  and  poetry  aequg,  adaequS,  pariter,  n5n 
aliter,  non  secus,  idem,  sic  is  sometimes  drawn  to  the  protasis,  making 
sicuti,  sicut ;  uti  is  sometimes  strengthened  by  vel,  making  veluti,  velut, 
even  as,  just  as.  quemadmodum  often,  and  quOmodo  sometimes,  stands 
for  ut.  For  the  use  of  ut  in  old  Latin  in  sentences  in  which  classical  Latin 

tion,  see  i 
sentences  without  ut,  see  1704. 


would  employ  the  indirect  question,  see  1791.     For  coordinated  comparative 
ces  without  ut,  see  1704. 


333 


I93^~I94I<]    Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


perge  ut  mstituisti,  RP.  2,  22,  go  on  as  you  have  begun,  ut  voles  med 
esse,  ita  ero,  PI.  Ps.  240,  as  you  will  have  me  be,  so  will  I  be  (1625)*.  ut 
sementem  feceris,  ita  metes,  DO.  2,  261,  as  you  sow,  y'are  like  to  reap 
(1626).  ut  non  omnem  frugem  in  omm  agro  reperire  possis,  sic  non 
omne  facinus  in  omni  vita  nascitur,  RA.  75,  every  crime  does  not  start  into 
being  in  every  life,  any  more  than  you  can  find  every  fruit  in  every  field  (1731). 
Also  in  asseverations  :  ita  me  dl  amabunt,  ut  ego  hunc  ausculto  lubens, 
PI.  Aul.  496,  so  help  me  heaven,  as  I  am  glad  to  hear  this  man  (1622). 

1938.  ut  .  .  .  ita  or  sic,  as  .  .  .  so,  often  stand  where  concessive  and 
adversative  conjunctions  might  be  used ;  while  . .  .  nevertheless,  although  .  .  . 
yet,  certainly  .  .  .  but :  as, 

ut  nihil  bom  est  in  morte,  sic  certe  nihil  mail,  L.  14,  while  there  is 
nothing  good  after  death,  yet  certainly  there  is  nothing  bad.  quo  facto  sicut 
gloriam  auxit,  ita  gratiam  minuit,  Suet.  Oth.  i,  by  this  action  he  increased 
his  reputation,  but  lessened  his  popularity,  nee  ut  iniustus  in  pace  rex,  ita 
dux  belli  pravus  fuit,  L.  I,  53,  i,  but  while  he  was  an  unjust  king  in  peace,  he 
was  not  a  bad  leader  in  war.  This  adversative  correlation  is  found  some- 
times in  Cicero,  but  is  far  more  common  in  late  writers. 

1939.  ut  quisque,  commonly  with  a  superlative  expression,  is  used  in 
the  protasis  of  a  comparative  period  of  equality,  with  ita  or  sic  and  commonly 
another  superlative  expression  in  the  apodosis  :  as, 

ut  quaeque  res  est  turpissima,  sic  maxime  vindicanda  est,  Caec.  7, 
the  more  disgraceful  a  thing  is,  the  more  emphatically  does  it  call  for  punishment. 
ut  quisque  optime  Graece  sciret,  ita  esse  nequissimum,  DO.  2,  265, 
that  the  better  Greek  scholar  a  man  was,  the  greater  rascal  he  always  was  (1722). 
This  construction  is  often  abridged  :  as,  sapientissimus  quisque  aequis- 
simo  animo  moritur,  CM.  83,  the  sage  always  dies  with  perfect  resignation. 
optimus  quisque  praeceptor  frequentia  gaudet,  Quint,  i,  2,  9,  the  best 
teachers  always  revel  in  large  classes.  See  2397. 

1940.  ut  often  introduces  a  parenthetical  idea,  particularly  a  gen- 
eral truth  or  a  habit  which  accounts  for  the  special  fact  expressed  in 
the  main  sentence :  as, 

nemo,  ut  opinor,  in  culpa  est,  Clu.  143,  nobody,  as  I  fancy,  is  to  blame. 
excitabat  fluctus  in  simpulo,  ut  dicitur,  Gratidius,  Leg.  3,  36,  Gratidius 
was  raising  a  tempest  in  a  teapot,  as  the  saying  is.  paulisper,  dum  se  uxor,  ut 
fit,  comparat,  commoratus  est,  Mil.  28,  he  had  to  wait  a  bit,  as  is  always  the 
case,  while  his  wife  was  putting  on  her  things,  horum  auctoritate  adducti, 
ut  sunt  Gallorum  subita  consilia,  Trebium  retinent,  3,  8,  3,  influenced 
by  these  people  they  detain  Trebius,  as  might  have  been  expected,  sudden  resolu- 
tions being  always  characteristic  of  the  Gauls,  seditione  nuntiata,  ut  erat 
laena  amictus,  ita  venit  in  contionem,  Br.  56,  an  outbreak  was  reported, 
and  he  came  to  the  meeting  all  accoutred  as  he  was,  with  his  sacrificial  robe  on. 
Often  elliptically :  as,  acuti  hominis,  ut  Siculi,  TD.  I,  15,  a  bright  man,  of 
course,  being  a  Sicilian.  Aequorum  exercitus,  ut  qui  permultSs  ann5s 
imbelles  cgissent,  trepidare,  L.  9,  45,  10,  the  army  of  the  Aequians  alarmed 
and  irresolute,  and  naturally,  since  they  had  passed  a  great  many  years  without 
fighting  (1824,  1827). 

1941.  ut,  as  for  example,  is  used  in  illustrations,  particularly  in 
abridged  sentences  (1057);  as, 

334 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  ut.     [  1 942— 1 946. 


genus  est  quod  plures  partes  amplectitur,  ut  '  animal.'  pars  est, 
quae  subest  generi,  ut  '  equos,'  Inv.  i,  32,  a  class  is  "what  embraces  a  num- 
ber of  parts,  as  '  living  thing ' ;  a  part  is  what  is  included  in  a  class,  as  '  horse.' 
sunt  bestiae  in  quibus  inest  aliquid  simile  virtutis,  ut  in  leonibus,  ut  in 
canibus,  Fin.  5, 38,  there  are  brutes  in  which  there  is  a  something  like  the  moral 
quality  of  man,  as  for  instance  the  lion  and  the  dog. 

1942.  The  parenthetical  clause  with  ut  or  prout  sometimes  makes  an 
allowance  for  the  meaning  of  a  word,  usually  an  adjective,  in  the  main  sen- 
tence :  as, 

civitas  ampla  atque  florins,  ut  est  captus  Germanorum,  4,  3,  3, 
a  grand  and  prosperous  community,  that  is  according  to  German  conceptions. 
ut  captus  est  servorum,  non  jnalus,  T.  Ad.  480,  not  a  bad  fellow,  as  slaves 
go.  Sthenius  ab  adulescentia  haec  compararat,  supellectilem  ex  acre 
elegantiorem,  tabulas  pictas,  etiam  argenti  bene  fact!  prout  Thermi- 
tani  hominis  facultates  ferebant,  satis,  V.  2,  83,  Sthenius  had  been  a  collec- 
tor from  early  years  of  such  things  as  artistic  bronzes,  pictures  ;  aho  of  curiously 
wrought  silver  a  goodly  amount,  that  is  as  the  means  of  a  Thermae  man  went. 
Often  in  abridged  sentences  :  as,  scriptor  fuit,  ut  temporibus  illls,  lucu- 
lentus,  Br.  102,  he  was  a  brilliant  historian  for  the  times,  multae  etiam,  ut 
in  homine  Romano,  litterae,  CM.  12,  furthermore,  extensive  reading,  that  is 
for  a  Roman,  ut  illis  temporibus,  praedives,  L.  4,  13,  I,  a  millionaire,  for 
those  times. 

1943.  ut,  as  indeed,  as  in  fact,  with  the  indicative,  is  used  to  represent 
that  an  action  supposed,  conceded,  or  commanded,  really  occurs :  as, 

sit  Ennius  sane,  ut  est  certe,  perfectior,  Br.  76,  grant,  for  aught  1 
care,  that  Ennius  is  a  more  finished  poet,  as  indeed  he  is.  uti  erat  res,  Me- 
tellum  esse  rail,  S.  /.  69,  I,  supposing  that  it  was  Metellus,  as  in  fact  it  was. 
This  use  begins  in  the  classical  period.  It  is  found  particularly  with 
quamvis,  1905 ;  with  si,  see  2017. 

1944.  ut,  as,  like,  sometimes  shows  that  a  noun  used  predicatively  is  not 
literally  applicable,  but  expresses  an  imputed  quality  or  character  :  as, 

Cicero  ea  quae  nunc  usu  veniunt  cecinit  ut  vates,  N.  25,  16,  4,  Cicero 
foretold  what  is  now  acttially  occurring,  like  a  bard  inspired,  canem  et 
faelem  ut  deos  colunt,  Leg.  I,  32,  they  bow  the  knee  to  dog  and  cat  as  gods. 
quod  me  sicut  alterum  parentem  dfligit,  Fam.  5,  8,  4,  because  he  loves  me 
like  a  second  father,  regiae  virgines,  ut  tonstriculae,  tondebant  barbam 
patris,  TD.  5,  58,  the  princesses  used  to  shave  their  father,  just  like  common 
barber-girls.  In  an  untrue  or  a  merely  figurative  comparison  tamquam 
(1908)  or  quasi  is  used. 

1945.  I"  °ld  Latin,  prae  is  combined  with  ut:  praeut,  compared -with  how:  as, 
parum  etiam,  praeut  futurumst,  praedicas,  PL  Am.  374,  you  say  too  little 
still  compared  -with  how  'twill  be.     praeut    is    sometimes   followed   by  a   relative 
clause:  as,  ludum  iocumque  dicet  fuisse  ilium  alterum,  praeut  huius 
rabies  quae  dabit,  T.  Eu.  700,  he'll  say  the  other  -was  but  sport  and  play ',  com- 
pared -with  -what  this  youth  will  in  his  frenzy  do. 

1946.  In  Plautus  sicut,  with  the  indicative,  has  once  or  twice  the  meaning  of 
since:  as,  quin  tu  illam  iube  abs  te  abire  qu5  lubet  :  sicut  soror  eius 
hue  gemina  venit  Ephesum,  MG.  974,  why,  bid  her  go  away  from  you  wher- 
ever she  may  choose,  since  her  twin  sister  here  to  Ephesus  is  come. 

335 


1 94 7—  1 95 1 .]    Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 

WITH  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE, 
uti  or  ut. 

NEGATIVE  Ut  DC,  116,  or  Ut  HOn. 

1947.  The  subjunctive  with  ut  is:  (A.)  That  of  action  desired  (1540),  in 
clauses  of  purpose;  in  these  the  negative  is  ne,  or  sometimes  ut  ne,  and  and 
that  not,  neve   or  neu,  rarely  neque  or  nee.      ut  ne,  though  used  at  all 
periods  (not  by  Caesar,  Sallust,  or  Livy),  is  chiefly  found  in  older  Latin; 
afterwards  ne  alone  took  its  place  (1706).     ut  non  is  used  when  the  nega- 
tive belongs  to  a  single  word.     (B.)  That  of  action  conceivable  (1554),  in 
clauses  of  result ;  in  these  the  negative  is  ut  non,  ut  nemo,  ut  nullus,  &c. ; 
or  with  emphasis  on  the  negative,  nem5  ut,  nullus  ut,  nihil  ut ;  also  vix  ut, 
paene  ut,  prope  ut. 

1948.  Final  and  consecutive  clauses  with  ut  are  of  two  classes  :   I.  Com- 
plementary clauses,  that  is,  such  as  are  an  essential  complement  of  certain 
specific  verbs  or  expressions  ;  such  clauses  have  the  value  of  a  substantive, 
and  may  represent  a  subject,  an  object,  or  any  oblique  case.     II.  Pure  final 
or  consecutive  clauses,  in  which  the  purpose  or  result  of  any  action  may  be 
expressed,  and  which  are  not  essential  to  complete  the  sense  of  a  verb. 

(A.)    PURPOSE. 
I.    COMPLEMENTARY  FINAL  CLAUSES. 

1949.  (i.)   The  subjunctive  with  ut  or  ne  is  used 
in  clauses  which  serve  to  complete  the  sense  of  verbs 
of  will  or  aim.   ' 

1950.  (a.)  Verbs  of  will   include  those  of  desire,  request, 
advice,  resolution,  stipulation,  command,  or  permission. 

Will  may  be  suggested  by  a  general  verb  or  expression :  as,  dice,  respond  eo, 
nuntio,  &c.;  or  denoted  by  specific  ones,  of  which  some  of  the  commonest  arc  :  'V. 
sire  :  vole  (male),  concupisco,  opto.  request :  peto,  postulS,  flagito,  oro, 
rogo,  precor,  obsecro,  implore,  insto,  urge,  invito.  advice:  suadco, 
persuaded,  persuade,  moneo,  bid,  admoneo,  hortor,  censeo,  frof>os^,  TO  c. 
resolution,  stipulation:  decerno,  statuo,  decree,  constituo,  placet,  sanc;6, 
paciscor,  pepigi.  command:  impero,  praecipio,  praescribo,  mandS, 
negotium  do,  edicS,  fero,  caveo,  interdico.  permission :  concede,  allow, 
permitto,  committo,  potestatem  facio,  veniarn  do,  sino,  non  patior. 

1951.  (b.)  Verbs  of   aim  include  those  of   striving,   accom- 
plishing, or  inducing  ;  such  are  : 

striving:  ago  or  id  ago,  animum  induce,  temptp,  operam  do,  laboro, 
nitor,  enitor,  molior,  video,  prospicio,  euro,  nihil  antiquius  habeo 
quam,  contends,  studeo,  pugno.  accomplishing:  facio  (efficio,  perficio), 
praesto;  mereo;  impetro,  adsequor,  consequor,  adipiscor.  inducing: 
moved,  excito,  incite,  impello,  perpello,  cogo. 

336 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  ut.      [1952—1956. 


(a.)  optavit  ut  in  currum  patris  tolleretur,  Off.  3,  94,  he  asked  to  be 
lifted  into  his  father's  chariot.  optS  ne  se  ilia  gens  moveat,  Fam.  12,  19,  2, 
/  hope  and  pray  that  that  nation  may  not  stir.  Ubil  Srabant,  ut  sib!  auxi- 
lium  ferret,  4,  16,  5,  the  Ubians  begged  that  he  -would  help  them.  Pausanias 
orare  coepit  ne  enuntiaret,  N.  4,  4,  6,  Pausanias  began  to  beg  that  he  would 
not  tell,  hortatus  est  uti  in  officiS  maneret,  5,  4,  2,  he  urged  him  to  remain 
steadfast  in  duty,  hortatur  eSs  ne  animS  deficiant,  Caes.  C.  1, 19, 1,  he  urges 
them  not  to  get  disheartened  (1752).  suis,  ut  idem  faciant,  imperat,  5,  37,  I, 
he  orders  his  men  to  do  the  same,  suis  imperavit  ne  quod  omninS  telum 
reicerent,  i,  46,  2,  he  ordered  his  men  not  to  throw  any  weapon  at  all  back. 
huic  permlsit,  uti  in  his  locis  legionem  conlocaret,  3,  I,  3,  he  allowed  this 
man  to  quarter  his  legion  in  these  parts,  neque  suam  neque  populi  Ro- 
mani  cSnsuetudinem  pati,  uti  socios  desereret,  1,45,  i,  that  his  practice 
and  that  of  the  Roman  nation  would  not  allow  him  to  desert  his  allies. 

(b.}  neque  id  agere  ut  exercitum  teneat  ipse,  sed  ne  ill!  habeant 
qu5  contra  se  uti  possint,  Caes.  C.  i,  85,  n,  and  that  his  object  was  not  to 
hold  the  army  himself,  but  to  prevent  the  of  her  side  from  having  an  army  which 
they  could  iise  against  him.  xi i  navibus  amissis,  reliquis  ut  navigari 
commode  posset  ef fecit,  4,  31,  3,  a  dozen  vessels  were  lost,  but  he  managed 
to  sail  comfortably  with  the  rest,  eius  belli  fama  effecit  ne  se  pugnae 
committerent  Sappinates,  L.  5,  32,  4,  the  story  of  this  war  prevented  the 
Sappinatians  from  hazarding  an  engagement,  si  a  ChrysogonS  non  impe- 
tramus  ut  pecunia  nostra  contentus  sit,  vitam  ne  petat,  KA.  150,  if  we 
do  not  succeed  in  making  Chrysogonus  satisfied  with  our  money  without  his 
aim  ing  at  our  life.  Aulum  spe  pactionis  perpulit,  uti  in  abditas  regiones 
sese  insequeretur,  S.  7.  38,  2,  Aulus  he  induced  by  the  hope  of  a  pecuniary 
settlement  to  follow  him  to  distant  regions.  Antonium  pactione  prSvinciae 
perpulerat,  ne  contra  rem  publicam  sentiret,  S.  C.  26,  4,  by  agreeing  to 
let  Antony  have  a  province,  he  had  induced  him  not  to  be  disaffected  toward  the 
government. 

1952.  Many  of  these  verbs  often  have  a  coordinated  subjunctive  (1705- 
I7I3)»  or>  according  to  the  meaning,  admit  other  constructions,  which  must 
in  general  be  learned  by  reading,  or  from  the  dictionary.  The  following 
points  may  be  noticed  : 

1953.  (a.)  The  verbs  of  resolving,  statuo,  c5nstituo,  and  decerno,  and  of 
striving,  nitor,  and  temptd,  have  usually  the  complementary  infinitive  (2169),  un- 
less a  new  subject  is  introduced.     For  volo  (malo),  and  cupio,  see  also  2189;  for 
iubeo,  vet5,  sino,  and  patior,  2198.     postulS,  expect,  often  has  the  same  con- 
struction as  volo,  especially  in  old  Latin  (2194).     For  impero,  see  2202. 

1954.  (£.)  Some   of   the   above  verbs,  with   the  meaning  think  or  say,  have  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive  (^175,  2195):  as,  volo,  contends,  maintain,  con- 
cedo,  admit,  statuo,  assume,  decernS,  Judge,  moneo,  remind,  persuaded, 
convince. 

1955-  (c-)  Verbs  of  accomplishing  sometimes  express  result  rather  than  purpose, 
and  when  the  result  is  negative,  are  completed  by  a  clause  with  ut  nSn  (1965).  For 
the  infinitive  with  such  verbs,  see  2196. 

1956.  est  with  a  predicate  noun  is  sometimes  equivalent  to  a  verb  of 
will  or  aim,  and  has  the  same  construction. 

22  337 


1 95  7~ 1 959-]    Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


So  with  words  like  ius,  lex,  munus,  &c. :  as,  ius  esse  belli  ut  qui 
vicissent  his  quos  vicissent  imperarent,  i,  36,  I,  that  rules  of  war  entitled 
conquerors  to  lord  it  over  conquered,  quis  nescit  primam  esse  historiae 
legem,  ne  quid  falsi  dicere  audeat  ?  DO.  2,  62,  who  does  not  know  that  the 
first  rule  of  history  is  that  it  shall  not  venture  to  say  anything  false  ?  iusti- 
tiae  primum  munus  est  ut  ne  cui  quis  noceat,  Off.  i,  20,  the  first  duty  of 
j.istice  is  that  a  man  harm  nobody,  nam  id  arbitror  adprime  in  vita  esse 
utile,  '  ut  ne  quid  nimis,'  T.  Andr.  60,  for  this  I  hold  to  be  a  rule  in  life  that 's 
passing  useful, '  naught  in  overplus! 

1957.  (2.)  The  subjunctive  with  ut  or  nei  is  used  in  clauses 
which  complete  expressions  of  fear,  anxiety,  or  danger. 

Ut,  that  not,  may  not,  and  ne,  lest,  may,  were  originally  signs  of  a  wish  (1540) : 
thus,  vereor,  Ut  fiat,  I  am  afraid ;  may  it  come  to  pass,  acquires  the  meaning  of 
I  am  afraid  it  may  not  come  to  pass  (1706);  and  vereor,  ne  fiat,  /  am  afraid ; 
may  it  not  come  to  pass,  of  /  am  afraid  it  may  come  to  pass,  metuo  ut  is  common 
in  old  Latin,  and  is  used  by  Horace,  but  not  by  Caesar  or  Sallust,  once  by  Cicero  in  the 
orations,  timeo  ut  is  rare,  and  first  used  by  Cicero,  vereor  ut  is  not  uncommon. 

at  vereor  ut  placari  possit,  T.  Ph.  965,  but  I'm  afraid  she  can  V  be  recon- 
ciled, ne  uxor  resciscat  metuit,  PI.  As.  743,  he  is  afraid  his  wife  may  find 
it  out.  5  puer,  ut  sis  vitalis  metu5,  et  maiorum  ne  quis  amicus  frigore 
te  feriat,  H.  S.  2,  i,  60,  my  boy,  you  7/  not  see  length  of  days  I  fear,  and  that 
some  grander  friend  may  with  his  coldness  cut  you  dead,  nequid  summa 
deperdat  metuens  aut  ampliet  ut  rem,  H.  S.  i,  4,  31,  in  dread  lest  from 
his  store  he  something  lose  or  may  not  add  to  his  estate,  metuo  ne  nos  nos- 
met  perdiderimus  uspiam,  PI.  M.G.  428,  /  'm  afraid  we  've  lost  ourselves 
somewhere,  sollicitus  ne  turba  peregerit  orbem,  J.  5,  20,  apprehensive  that 
the  throng  may  have  finished  its  round,  ne  non  is  often,  though  rarely  in  old 
Latin,  used  for  ut,  and  regularly  when  the  expression  of  fear  is  negative  : 
as,  non  vereor  ne  hoc  officium  meum  P.  Servilio  non  probem,  V.  4,  82, 
/  have  no  fear  but  I  may  make  my  services  acceptable  in  the  eyes  of  Servilius. 
For  non  metu5  quin,  see  1986. 

1958.  vereor  ne  is  often  equivalent  to  I  rather  think,  and  vereor  ut  to 
hardly,    vide  (videamus,  videndum  est)  ne,  and  similar  expressions,  are 
sometimes  used  for  vereor  ne,  to  introduce  something  conjectured  rather 
than  proved:  as, 

vereor  ne  barbarorum  rex  fuerit,  RP.  i,  58,  7  rather  think  he  was  king 
ever  savages,  vide  ne  mea  coniectura  multo  sit  verier,  Clu.  97,  7  rather 
think  my  conjecture  is  in  better  keeping  with  the  facts. 

1959.  Other  constructions  with  expressions  of  fear  are  :    (a.)  Indirect 
question,     (b.)  Accusative  with  infinitive,     (c.)  Complementary   infinitive : 
as, 

(a.)  eri  semper  lenitas  verebar  quorsum  evaderet,  T.  Andr.  175, 1  was 
afraid  how  master's  always  gentleness  would  end.  timeo  quid  sit,  T.  Hau. 
620,  I  have  my  fears  what  it  may  be.  timeo  quid  rerum  gesserim,  PI.  MG. 
397,  I am  concerned  to  think  what  capers  I  have  cut.  metuo  quid  agam,  T. 
Hau.  720,  7V/  scared  and  know  not  what  to  do  (1731).  (b.)  ego  me  cupidi- 
tatis  regni  crimen  subiturum  timerem  ?  L.  2,  7,  9,  was  f  to  fear  being 
charged  with  aspiring  to  a  throne?  (c.)  vereor  coram  in  6s  te  laudare,  T 
Ad.  269,  I  am  afraid  to  disgrace  you  with  praise  to  the  face  (2168). 

338 


Conju nctional  Sen tences :  ut .     [1960—1961. 


1960.  (3.)  The  subjunctive  with  ne  is  used  in  clauses  which 
serve  to  complete  the  sense  of  verbs  of  avoiding,  hindering,  and 

resisting. 

Such  are :  avoiding :  cave5,  me  eripio,  vito.  hindering:  intercede,  inter- 
dico,  recus5,  repugno,  tempero ;  also  the  following  which  often  have  quo- 
minus  (1977) :  deterreo,  impedip,  obsisto,  obsto,  officio,  prohibeo,  teneo. 
resisting:  resisto,  repugno,  recuso;  with  these  last  often  quominus.  _  Some  of 
the  above  verbs  when  preceded  by  a  negative  also  take  quin  (1986) ;  prohibeo  and 
impediS  have  also  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  (2203).  For  the  subjunctive  co- 
ordinated with  cave",  see  1711. 

ne  quid  els  noceatur  neu  quis  invitus  sacramentum  dicere  cogatur 
a  Caesare  cavetur,  Caes.  C.  i,  86,  4,  all  precaution  is  taken  by  Caesar  that  no 
harm  be  done  them,  and  that  nobody  be  compelled  to  take  the  oath  against  his 
•will,  per  eos,  ne  causam  diceret,  se  eripuit,  i,  4,  2,  thanks  to  this  display 
of  retainers  he  succeeded  in  avoiding  trial,  plura  ne  scrlbam,  dolore  im- 
pedior,  Att.  n,  13,  5,  grief  prevents  me  from  -writing  more,  ne  qua  sibl 
statua  poneretur  restitit,  N.  25,  3,  2,  he  objected  to  having  a  statue  erected 
in  his  honour. 

II.    PURE  FINAL  CLAUSES. 

1961.  The  subjunctive  with  ut  or  ne  is  used  to  de- 
note the  purpose  of  the  main  action. 

The  purpose  is  often  indicated  in  the  main  sentence  by  an  expression 
like  ideo,  idcirco,  propterea,  ea  mente,  &c. 

vigilas  de  nocte,  ut  tuis  consultoribus  respondeas,  Mur.  22,  you  have 
to  get  ttp  early  in  the  morning  to  give  advice  to  your  clients,  maiores  nostri 
ab  aratro  adduxerunt  Cincinnatum,  ut  dictator,  esset,  Fin.  2,  12,  our 
fathers  brought  Cincinnatus  from  his  plough,  to  be  dictator,  dicam  auctiSnis 
causam,  ut  damno  gaudeant,  PL  St.  207,  7 '//  tell  the  reason  for  the  sale, 
that  o'er  my  losses  they  may  gloat,  quin  etiam  ne  tonsori  collum  commit- 
teret,  tondere  filias  suas  docuit,  TD.  5,  58,  why,  he  actually  taught  his  own 
daughters  to  shave,  so  as  not  to  trust  his  throat  to  a  barber.  Caesar,  ne  gra- 
viori  bello  occurreret,  ad  exercitum  proficiscitur,  4,  6,  i,  to  avoid  facing 
•war  on  a  more  formidable  scale,  Caesar  goes  to  the  army,  te  ulciscar,  ut  ne 
inpune  in  nos  inluseris,  T.  Eu.  941,  7V/  be  revenged  on  you,  so  that  you 
shan't  play  tricks  on  me  for  nothing  (1947).  ne  ignoraretis  esse  aliquas  pads 
vobis  condiciones,  ad  vos  vem,  L.  21,  13,  2,  7  have  come  to  you  to  let  you 
know  that  you  have  some  chances  of  peace  (1754).  ita  me  gessl  ne  tib! 
pudori  essem,  L.  40,  15,  6,  I  comported  myself  in  such  a  way  that  I  might  not 
be  a  mortification  to  you.  Marionem  ad  t'e  eo  misi,  ut  tecum  ad  me  vem- 
ret,  Fam.  16,  I,  I,  7  sent  Mario  to  you  with  the  intention  of  having  him  come 
with  you  to  me.  idcirco  nemo  superiorum  attigit,  ut  hie  tolleret  ?  ideo 
C.  Claudius  rettulit,  ut  C.  Verres  posset  auferre  ?  V.  4,  7,  was  that  the 
reason  why  no  former  officials  laid  a  finger  on  it,  that  this  man  might  swoop  it 
away  ?  was  that  why  Claudius  returned  it,  that  a  Verres  might  carry  it  off? 
danda  opera  est,  ut  etiam  singulis  consulatur,  sed  ita,  ut  ea  res  aut 
prosit  aut  certe  ne  obsit  r§!  publicae,  Off.  2,  72,  we  must  be  particular  in 
regarding  the  interests  of  individuals  as  well,  but  with  this  restriction,  that  out 
action  may  benefit,  or  at  any  rate  may  not  damage  the  country. 

339 


1962—1965.]  Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


1962.  The  subjunctive  with  ut  or  ne  is  often  used  not  to  express  the 
purpose  of  the  main  action,  but  in  a  parenthetical  clause,  as  though  depend- 
ant upon  some  verb  unexpressed  :  as, 

ut  in  pauca  conferam,  testaments  facto  mulier  moritur,  Caec.  17,  to 
cut  a  long  story  short,  the  woman  makes  her  will  and  die's,  sed  ut  hie  ne 
ignoret,  quae  res  agatur:  de  natura  agebamus  de5rum,  DN.i,ij,but 
that  our  friend  here  may  know  what  is  tip  :  we  were  just  on  the  nature  of  the 
gjds.  The  tense  is  present,  in  late  writers  the  perfect,  as  ut  sic  dixerim, 
Quint,  i,  6,  i.  Here  may  also  be  mentioned  the  use  of  nedum  (rarely  ne 
or,  from  Livy  on,  nedum  ut)  with  the  present  subjunctive  (rarely  the  im- 
perfect) :  as,  satrapa  numquam  sufferre  eius  sumptus  queat :  nedum 
tu  possis,  T.  Han.  452,  a  prince  could  n't  stand  her  extravagance,  much  less 
could  you.  This  is  found  in  Terence  and  Lucretius  once  each,  in  Cicero,  and 
later;  not  in  Caesar.  The  preceding  clause  is  negative  or  involves  a  nega- 
tive idea.  From  Livy  on,  the  verb  may  be  omitted :  as,  vix  clamorem 
eorum,  nedum  impetum  tulere,  L.  34,  20,  7,  they  hardly  stood  their  war 
cry,  much  less  their  charge. 

1963.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  an  assumption  or  concession  with  ut 
or  ne,  or  if  the  negation  belongs  to  a  single  word,  with  ut  ndn,  nemo,  &c.: 
as, 

ut  taceam,  quoivis  facile  scitu  est  quam  fuerim  miser,  T.  Hec.  296, 
even  stipposing  /  say  nothing,  anybody  can  understand  how  unhappy  /  was. 
sed  ut  haec  concedantur,  reliqua  qui  concedi  possunt  ?  DN.  3,  41,  but 
even  supposing  this  be  admitted,  how  can  the  rest  be  admitted?  ne  sit  sum- 
mum  malum  dolor,  malum  certe  est,  TD.  2,  14,  grant  that  suffering  is 
not  the  chiefest  evil,  an  evil  it  assuredly  is  (1553).  verum  ut  hoc  non  sit, 
tamen  praeclarum  spectaculum  mih!  propono,  Att.  2,  15,  2,  but  suppose 
this  be  not  the  case,  still  /  anticipate  a  gorgeous  show,  ac  iam  ut  omnia  con- 
tra opinionem  acciderent,  tamen  sepiurimum  navibus  posse  perspicie- 
bant,  3,  9,  6,  and  even  supposing  everything  turned  out  contrary  to  expectation, 
still  they  saw  clearly  that  they  had  the  advantage  by  sea.  ut  enim  neminem 
alium  nisi  T.  Patinam  rogasset,  scire  potuit  prodi  flaminem  necesse 
esse,  Mil.  46,  for  even  supposing  he  had  asked  nobody  but  Patina,  he  might 
have  known  that  a  priest  must  be  appointed.  This  use  is  common  in  Cicero , 
not  found  in  Plautus  or  Sallust. 

1964.  The  subjunctive  with  ut  or  ne,  generally  with  ita  as  a  correla- 
tive, sometimes  has  the  force  of  a  proviso  :  as, 

ita  probanda  est  dementia,  ut  adhibeatur  severitas.  Off.  i,  88, 
mercy  is  to  be  commended,  provided  that  strictness  is  employed,  satis  memoriae 
meae  tribuent,  ut  maioribus  meis  dignum  cre'dant,  Ta.  4,  38,  they  will 
pay  respect  enough  to  my  memory,  provided  they  consider  me  worthy  of  my 
ancestors. 

(B.)     RESULT. 
I.    COMPLEMENTARY  CONSECUTIVE  CLAUSES. 

1965.  The  subjunctive  with  ut  or  ut  non  is  used  in  clauses 
which  serve  to  complete  the  sense  of  certain  verbs  and  expres- 
sions, chiefly  of  bringing  to  pass,  happening,  and  following. 

.34.0 


Conjunctional  Sentences  :  ut.      [ 1 966- 1 968- 


Such  are:  (a.)  faciS,  effici5  (unless  they  imply  purpose,  1951);  fit,  accidit, 
contingit,  evenit,  est,  it 'is  the  case ;  similarly  mos  est,  consuetude  est,  &c. 
(b.)  proximum  est,  reliquum  est,  extremum  est,  relinquitur,  restat, 
accedit.  Or,  of  logical  sequence,  sequitur,  efficitur. 

(a.)  fecerunt  ut  consimilis  fugae  profectio  videretur,  2,  n,  i,  they 
made  their  march  look  exactly  like  a  stampede,  splendor  vester  facit  ut  pec- 
care  sine  summo  periculo  non  possitis,  V.  i,  22,  your  conspicuous  position 
makes  it  impossible  for  you  to  do  wrong  without  great  peril,  his  rebus  fiebat, 
ut  minus  late  vagarentur,  i,  2,  4,  so  it  came  to  pass  that  they  did  not  rotie 
round  much,  fit  ut  natura  ipsa  ad  ornatius  dicendi  genus  excitemur, 
DO.  2.  338,  it  is  sometimes  the  case  that  we  are  roused  to  a  loftier  style  in  ora- 
tory by  sheer  circumstance,  potest  fieri  ut  fallar,  Fam.  13,  73,  2,  it  is  possible 
that  lam  mistaken,  fieri  non  potest  ut  eum  tu  non  cognoveris,  V.  2,  190, 
it  must  be  the  case  that  you  have  made  his  acquaintance  yourself,  eadem 
nocte  accidit,  ut  esset  luna  plena,  4,  29,  i,  it  came  to  pass  on  the  same  night 
that  there  was  a  full  moon  (1758).  negavit  moris  esse  Graecorum  ut  in 
convivio  virorum  accumberent  mulieres,  V.  i,  66,  he  said  it  -was  not 
etiquette  among  the  Greeks  for  women  to  go  to  men's  dinner  parties,  est  hoc 
commune  vitium  in  liberis  civitatibus,  ut  invidia  gloriae  comes  sit,  N. 
12,  3,  3,  this  is  a  common  trouble  in  free  communities,  that  envy  is  the  attendant 
of  a  great  name. 

(b.}  proximum  est,  ut  doceam,  DN.  2,  73,  my  next  task  is  to  prove. 
relinquebatur  ut  neque  longius  ab  agmine  legionum  disced!  Caesar  pa- 
teretur,  5,  19,  3,  the  consequence  was  that  Caesar  could  not  allow  anv  very  dis- 
tant excursion  from  the  main  line  of  march,  restat  ut  doceam  omnia  homi- 
num  causa  facta  esse,  DN.  2,  154,  lastly,  I  must  prove  that  everything  is 
made  for  man.  accedebat  ut  tempestatem  ferrent,  3,  13,  9,  then,  too,  they 
could  stand  the  gale,  accedit  ut  is  not  found  in  old  Latin ;  for  accedit  quod, 
see  1845.  ita  efficitur  ut  omne  corpus  mortale  sit,  DN.  3,  30,  thus  it 
follows  that  every  bodily  siibstance  is  mortal,  sequitur  and  efficitur,  it  follows, 
often  have  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  (2207).  For  the  subjunctive 
with  quam  ut  after  a  comparative  of  disproportion,  see  1896.  For  fore  and 
futurum  esse  ut  as  the  periphrasis  for  the  future  infinitive,  see  2233. 

1966.  Verbs  of  happening  may  often  be  rendered  best  by  compacter  ex- 
pressions :  thus,  his  rebus  fiebat  ut,  consequently  ;  fit  ut,  once  in  a  while, 
sometimes,  often  ;  fieri  potest  ut,  possibly;  accidit  ut,  accidentally,  unfortu- 
nately. 

1967.  facio  ut,  or  with  a  negative,  commonly  committo  ut,  is  used  in 
circumlocutions  for  emphasis  :  as, 

faciundum  mih!  putavi,  ut  tuis  litteris  brevi  responderem,/Yzw.  3,  8, 
I,  I  thought  I  oiight  to  take  hold  and  write  a  few  lines  in  answer  to  your  letter. 
ego  vero  non  committam,  ut  tib!  causam  recusandi  dem,  DO.  2,233,  no, 
no,  sir,  I  will  not  be  guiltv,  not  I,  of  giving  you  an  excuse  to  back  out.  So  par- 
ticularly with  invitus,  libenter,  prope :  as,  invitus  feci  ut  L.  Flamininum 
e  senatu  eicerem,  CM.  42,  it  was  with  great  reluctance  that  I  expelled  Flami- 
ninus  from  the  senate. 

1968.  A  subjunctive  clause  with  ut  is  often  used  to  define  a  pre- 
ceding idea  indicated  in  a  general  way  by  a  neuter  pronoun  :  as, 

341 


1 969- 1 9 70.]    Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


post  eius  mortem  nihilo  minus  Helvetii  id,  quod  constituerant, 
facere  conantur,  ut  e  finibus  suis  exeant,  i,  5,  i,  after  his  death  the  Hel- 
vetians attempted  just  the  same  to  carry  out  their  resolution  of  moving  out  of  their 
abodes  (1752).  omnibus  Gallis  idem  esse  faciendum,  quod  Helvetii  fece- 
rint,  ut  domo  emigrent,  i,  31,  14,  that  all  the  Gauls  must  do  just  as  the  Hel- 
vetians had  done  and  move  away  from  home.  Helvetii,  cum  id,  quod  ipsi 
diebus  xx  aegerrime  c5nfecerant,  ut  flumen  transirent,  ilium  uno  die 
fecisse  intellegerent,  legatos  mittunt,  i,  13,2,  when  the  Helvetians  learned 
that  the  Roman  commander  had  done  in  a  single  day  "what  they  had  found  it 
hard  themselves  to  do  in  twenty,  namely  cross  the  river,  they  sent  dtf2it.es  (1752). 
id  aliquot  de  causis  acciderat,  ut  subito  Galli  belli  renovandi  consilium 
caperent,  3,  2,  2,  /'/  was  due  to  a  variety  of  reasons  that  the  Cauls  suddenly 
conceived  the  idea  of  making  war  again  (1758).  hocine  bom  esse  officium 
servi  existumas,  ut  eri  sui  corrumpat  et  rem  et  filium  ?  PL  Most.  27,  is 
this  what  you  think  the  duty  of  a  good  slave,  to  waste  his  own  master's  property 
and  corrupt  hts  son  ? 

1969.  tantum  abest,  so  far  from,  is  sometimes  followed  by  a  double  ut, 
the  first  introducing  an  unreal,  and  the  second  a  real  action :  as, 

tantum  abest  ut  haec  bestiarum  causa  parata  sint,  ut  ipsas  bestias 
hominum  gratia  generates  esse  videamus,  DN.  2,  158,  so  far  from  these 
things  being  made  for  brutes,  we  see  that  brutes  themselves  were  created  for  man. 
This  use,  very  rarely  personal,  begins  with  Cicero,  and  is  common  in  his 
writings  and  in  Livy.  Not  in  Caesar,  Sallust,  or  Tacitus.  Sometimes  in- 
stead of  ut  the  second  sentence  is  coordinated  (1700):  tantum  abfuit  ut 
inflammares  nostros  animos,  somnum  vix  tenebamus,  Br.  278,  so  far 
from  your  firing  our  heart,  we  could  hardly  keep  awake.  Or,  the  idea  is 
expressed  by  ita  non  .  .  .  ut :  as,  erat  ita  non  timidus  ad  mortem,  ut 
in  acie  sit  ob  rem  publicam  interfectus,  Fin.  2,  63,  so  far  from  being  afraid 
of  death,  he  fell  in  battle  for  his  country. 

II.   PURE  CONSECUTIVE  CLAUSES. 

1970.  The  subjunctive  is  used  with  ut  or  ut  non  to 
denote  result. 

The  result  may  be  the  result  of  an  action  or  of  a  thing  named  in  the 
main  sentence.  The  main  sentence  often  has  a  correlative  to  ut,  expressing 
(a.)  degree:  as,  tantus,  so  great,  tarn,  so  (with  adjectives  or  adverbs). 
adeo,  tantopere.  (b.)  quality:  as,  is  (hie,  ille,  iste),  such,  talis,  ita,  sic. 

mons  altissimus  impendebat,  ut  facile  perpauci  prohibere  possent, 
I,  6, 1,  an  exceeding  high  mountain  hung  over,  so  that  a  very  few  could  block  the 
way.  dictitabant  se  domo  expulsos,  omnibus  necessarils  egere  rebus, 
ut  honesta  praescriptione  rem  turpissimam  tegerent,  Caes.  C.  3,  32,  4, 
they  stoutly  declared  that  they  were  driven  out  of  house  and  home,  and  lacked 
the  necessaries  of  life,  thus  veiling  dishonour  under  the  name  of  respectability. 

(a.)  Ariovistus  tantos  sib!  spiritus  sumpserat,  ut  ferendus  'non 
videretur,  i,  33,  5,  Ariovistus  had  put  on  such  high  and  mighty  airs  as  to  seem 
intolerable,  adeo  angusto  marl  conflixit,  ut  eius  multitude  navium  ex- 
plicari  non  potuerit,  N.  2,  4,  5,  he  went  into  action  in  such  cramped  sea-room, 
that  his  armada  could  not  deploy,  of  Xerxes  (1757). 

342 


Conjunctional  Sentences :  quo. 


(6.)  eos  deduxi  testes  ut  de  istms  facts  dubium  esse  nemini  possit, 

V.  4,  91,  I  have  brought  such  witnesses  that  nobody  can  entertain  a  doubt  of  the 
defendant 's  guilt,  ita  se  recipiebat  ut  nihil  nisi  de  pernicie  populi  Ro- 
man! cogitaret,  Ph.  4,  4,  he  retreated,  it  is  true,  but  retreated  with  his  mind 
running  on  nothing  but  how  to  ruin  the  country,  ilia,  ex  turibulis  quae 
evellerat,  ita  sclte  in  aureis  poculis  inligabat,  ut  ea  ad  illam  rem  nata 
esse  diceres,  V.  4,  54,  what  he  had  torn  from  the  censers  he  attached  to  golden 
cups  so  cunningly  that  you  would  have  said  it  was  just  made  for  that  very  pur- 
pose (1731,  1559). 

For  the  imperfect  subjunctive  connected  with  a  main  general  present,  see 
1751 ;  for  the  independent  present  or  perfect  subjunctive  with  a  main  secon- 
dary tense,  see  1757. 


ubl. 

1971.  ubf,  in  the  sense  of  where  (700),  has  the  ordinary  construc- 
tion of  a  relative  (1812-1831).  For  ubi,  when,  see  1923-1926  and 
1932-1934;  as  a  synonym  of  si,  if,  see  2110. 


quo  or  qui. 

1972*  quo,  whereby ',  wherewith,  or  in  old  Latin  sometimes  qui 
(689),  is  the  instrumental  ablative  from  the  relative  and  interrogative 
stem  qui-.  Combined  with  minus,  the  less,  not,  quo  gives  quominus. 

WITH   THE   INDICATIVE. 

1973.  The  indicative  is  used  with  quo  and  a  comparative  in  the  protasis 
of  a  comparative  period,  with  eo  or  hoc  and  a  comparative  as  correlative 
(1393) :  as, 

quo  delictum  rnaius  est,  eo  poena  est  tardior,  Caec.  7,  the  greater  the 
sin  is,  the  slower  is  the  punishment.  The  eo  or  hoc  is  sometimes  omitted  :  as, 
quo  plures  sumus,  pluribus  rebus  egebimus,  L.  34,  34,  6,  the  more  numer- 
ous we  are,  the  more  things  we  shall  need.  In  late  writers,  the  comparative  is 
sometimes  omitted  in  the  main  clause,  very  rarely  in  the  subordinate  clause, 
quanto  .  .  .  tanto  are  also  used  like  quo  .  .  .  eo :  as,  quanto  diutius 
considers,  tanto  mihf  res  videtur  obscurior,  DN.  I,  60,  the  longer  I  puzzle 
over  it,  the  more  incomprehensible  the  question  seems  to  me.  quanto  magis 
extergeo,  tenuius  fit,  PI.  R.  \Tp\,the  more  I  polish,^  the  slimmer  it  gets.  This 
form  is  sometimes  used  with  quisque  or  quis  of  indefinite  persons,  instead 
of  the  commoner  ut  .  .  .  ita  or  sic  (1939)  :  as,  quo  quisque  est  sollertior, 
hoc  docet  laboriosius,  RC.  31,  the  brighter  a  man  is,  the  more  wearisome  hi 
finds  teaching,  quo  quisque  est  rnaior,  magis  est  placabilis  irae,  O.  Tr> 
3>  5>  3J»  the  greater  be  the  man,  the  easier  'tis  his  anger  to  appease. 


I974~I977']  Sentences:    The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


WITH   THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1974.  The  subjunctive  is  used  with  quo  to  express  purpose. 

quo  differs  but  little  in  meaning  from  ut  of  purpose.  It  is  used  (a.)  par- 
ticularly  in  clauses  containing  a  comparative  expression,  or  (b )  in  solemn 
law  language. 

(a.)  equites  omnibus  in  locls  pugnant,  quo  se  legionariis  militibus 
praeferrent,  2,  27,  2,  the  troopers  fought  on  every  kind  of  ground,  hoping  to  out- 
.  nine  the  regular  infantry  thereby.  medicS  puto  aliquid  dandum  esse,  qu5 
sit  studiosior,  Fam.  16,  4, 2,  I  think  it  would  be  -well  to  fee  your  medical  man,  to 
make  him  more  attentive,  id  amabo  adiuta  me  quo  id  fiat  facilius,  T.  Eu. 
1 50,  help  me  in  that,  I  pray,  that  it  may  be  the  easier  done,  sublata  erat  cele- 
britas  virorum  ac  mulierum,  quo  lamentatio  minueretur,  Leg.  2,  65,  the 
large  attendance  of  both  sexet  "was  done  away  with,  to  make  the  weeping  and 
wailing  less  harrowing,  (b.}  hominl  mortuo  ne  ossa  legito,  qu5  pos  funus 
facial,  Twelve  Tables  in  Leg.  2,  60,  he  shall  not  gather  up  the  bones  of  a  dead 
man,  with  intent  to  celebrate  the  funeral  a  second  time  ( 1 586).  qui  eorum  coiit, 
coierit,  quo  quis  iudicid  publico  condemnaretur,  law  in  Clu.  \A$, whosoever 
of  that  number  conspired  or  shall  have  conspired  to  have  anybody  condemned  in  a 
criminal  court.  Otherwise  rarely  used  without  a  comparative  expression, 
yet  occasionally  found  thus  in  Plautus,  Terence,  Sallust,  and  Ovid :  as,  hanc 
simulant  parere  quo  Chremetem  absterreant,  T.  Andr.  472,  they're  pre- 
tending that  she  's  lying  in,  to  frighten  Chr  ernes  off.  So  often  in  Tacitus. 

1975.  qu5  ne,  in  a  negative  clause  of  purpose,  is  found  in  a  disputed  passage 
in  Horace,  but  not  a;4ain  until  late  Latin.     For  non  quo,  non  e5  quo,  introducing 
an  untenable  reason,  see  1855. 

1976.  In  old  Latin  qui,  whereby,  wherewith,  withal,  is  partly  felt  as  a  live  rela- 
tive pronoun  in  the  ablative,  and  partly  as  a  mere  conjunction  of  purpose ;  as  a  pro- 
noun it  may  even  take  a  preposition  ;  as  a  conjunction,  it  may  refer  to  a  plural  ante- 
cedent (689) :   as,   quasi  patriciis  pueris  aut  monerulae  aut  anites   aut 
coturmces  dantur,  quicum  lusitent :  itidem  mi  haec  upupa,  qui  me  de- 
lectem  datast,  PI.  Cap.  1002,  as  to  the  sons  of  gentlemen  or  daws  or  ducks  or  quails 
are  given,  wherewith  to  play  ;  just  so  to  me  this  crow^  is  given,  to  entertain  myself 
withal,     enim  mihi  quidem  aequomst  dari  vehicla  qui  vehar,  PI.  Aul.  500, 
in  sooth  V  were  fair  that  carriages  be  given  me.  to  ride  withal.     The  indicative  occurs 
where  the  subjunctive  would  be  used  in  classical  Latin  :   as,  multa  concurrunt 
simul,  qui  coniecturam  hanc  facio,  T.  Andr.  511,  a  thousand  things  combine 
whereby  I  come  to  this  conjecture. 


quominus. 

1977.  The  subjunctive  with  quominus  (1972)  is  used  to  complete 
the  sense  of  verbs  of  hindering  or  resisting. 

Such  verbs  are:  impedio,  teneo,  hinder,  intercludo,  deterreo,  obsto, 
obsisto,  resisto,  repugno,  non  recuso  ;  these  verbs  often  have  a  subjunctive 
with  ne  (1960).  Cicero  rarely  and  Caesar  never  uses  quominus  with  impedio  or 
prohibeo.  For  the  accusative  and  infinitive  with  these  verbs,  see  2203.  quominus 
is  also  used  with  moveor,  am  influenced,  fit,  it  is  owing  to.  stat  per  aliquem, 
somebody  is  responsible,  or  indeed  any  expression  implying  hindrance.  When  the 
verb  of  hindering  has  a  negative  with  it,  quin  is  often  used  ;  see  1986. 

344 


Conjunctional  Sentences:  quin.   [1978—1983. 


non  deterret  sapientem  mors,  quominus  r€i  pQblicae  suisque  con- 
sulat,  TD.  I,  91,  death  does  not  hinder  the  wise  man  from  working  for  country 
and  friends,  quid  obstat,  quominus  sit  beatus  ?  DN.  i,  95,  what  is  to  /un- 
der his  being  happy  ?  neque  recusavit  quominus  legis  poenam  sublret, 
N.  15,  8,  2,  and  he_did  not  decline  to  siibmit  to  the  penalty  of  the  law,  Caesar, 
ub!  cognovit  per  Afranium  stare  quominus  proelio  dimicaretur,  castra 
facere  constituit,  Caes.  C.  I,  41,  3,  when  Caesar  learned  that  owing  to  AJra- 
nius  there  was  no  battle,  he  resolved  to  build  a  camp,  si  te  dolor  corporis 
tenuit,  quSminus  ad  ludos  venires,  fortunae  magis  tribuS  quam 
sapientiae  tuae,  Fam.  7,  I,  I,  if  it  was  bodily  suffering  that  kept  you  from 
coming  to  the  performances,  I  think  more  highly  of  your  luck  than  of  your  sense. 
Terence  first  uses  quominus  thus,  but  only  rarely.  He  also  sometimes  uses 
the  parts  separately  so  that  the  true  relative  and  negative  forces  appear :  as, 
si  sensero  quicquam  in  his  te  nuptiis  fallaciae  conari,  quo  fiant  minus, 
T.  Andr.  196,  if  I  catch  you  trying  on  any  trick  in  the  matter  of  this  marriage 
through  which  it  may  not  come  off  ( 1451 ). 

1978.  In  Tacitus,  quominus  is  sometimes  found  where  quin  would  be  used  in 
classical  Latin  (1986):  as,  nee  dubitatum  quominus  pacem  concederent, 
Ta.  H.  2,  45,  there  -was  no  hesitation  in  granting  peace. 

1979.  It  may  be  mentioned  here  that  quo  setius  with  the  subjunctive,  instead 
of  quSminus,  is  found  twice  in  Cicero's  earliest  extant  prose,  and  twice  in  older 
Latin. 


quin. 

1980.  quin  is  composed  of  qui,  the  ablative  or  locative  of  the  in- 
terrogative and  relative  stem  qui-  (689),  and-ne,  not.    It  is  used  in 
simple  sentences  and  as  a  conjunctive  particle. 

1981.  For  the  use  of  quin,  why  not,  in  questions  with  the  indicative,  see 
1526.     Such  questions  have  the  sense  of  an  affirmative  command  or  exhor- 
tation (1531) :  as,  quin  abls,  PL  MG.  ic&j,why  won 't  you  begone?  or  get  you 
gone,     quin  conscendimus  equos,  L.  I,  57,  7,  why  not  mount,  or  to  horse,  to 
horse.     For  the  use  of  quin  without  interrogative  force,  see  1527. 

1982.  quin  is  found  occasionally  with  the  subjunctive  in  a  direct  ques- 
tion  in  Plautus,  Terence,  Lucilius,  Lucretius,  Cicero,  and  Tacitus :   thus, 
quin  ego  hoc  rogem  ?     PL  MG.  426,  why  should 'n't  I  ask  this  ?  (1563). 

1983.  The  subjunctive  with  the  conjunctive  particle  quin  is  used,  particu- 
larly in  old  Latin,  in  connection  with  the  common  formula  nulla  causa  est 
or  its  equivalents. 

Such  a  subjunctive  may  be  regarded  as  original  (1786)  or  as  due  to  the 
indirect  form  of  question  (1773). 

nulla  causast  quin  me  condones  cruci,  PI.  R.  1070,  there's  no  reason 
why  you  should  n't  deliver  me  up  to  execution,  quin  decedam,  nulla  causa 
est,  Fam.  2,  17,  I,  there  is  no  reason  why  I  should  not  retire,  quid  causaest 
quin  in  pistrinum  recta  proficiscar  via?  T.  Andr.  600,  what's  the  reason 
I  don't  march  straight  into  the  mill  ?  baud  causificor  quin  earn  habeam, 
PI.  Aul.  755,  I  don't  quibble  against  keeping  her. 

345 


1 984- 1 988.]  Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


1984.  mirum  quin  with  the  subjunctive  is  used  by  Plautus  in  sarcastic  expres. 
sions  where  mirum  is  ironical :  as,  mirum  quin  tii  illo  tecum  divitias  feras, 
PI.    Tri.  495,  strange  enough,  how  you  can't  take  your  money  there  with  you,  that  is 
to  Hades. 

1985.  The  subjunctive  with  quin  (or  ut  non)  is  used  after  non  possum, 
or  non  possum  with  an  infinitive,  usually  facere,  and  with  fieri  non  potest : 
as, 

non  enim  possum  quin  exclamem,  euge,  euge,  Lysiteles,  ird\tv,  PI. 

Tri.  705,  upon  my  -word  I  must  cry  bravo,  bravo,  Lysiteles  ;  encore!  facere 
non  potui  quin  tibl  sententiam  declararem,  Fam.  6,  13,  i,  /  could  not  help 
giving  you  my  views,  fieri  nullo  modo  poterat,  quin  Cleomeni  parceretur, 

V.  5,  104,  //  was  impossible  not  to  spare  Cleomenes.  eheu,  nequeo  quin 
fleam,  quom  abs  te  abeam,  PI.  MG.  1342,  O  well-a-day,  I  needs  must  weep, 
for  that  from  thee  I  part,  non  potuisti  ullo  mod5  facere,  ut  mihl  illam 
epistulam  non  mitteres,  Att.  n,  21,  \,you  could  not  get  along  at  all  without 
writing  me  that  letter  (1965). 

1986.  The  subjunctive  with  quin  is  used  in  clauses  which  com- 
plete the  sense  of  verbs  of  restraining,  abstaining,  delaying,  or  doubt- 
ing, when  such  verbs  have  a  negative,  expressed  or  implied. 

Such  verbs  are  (a.)  restraining  :  tempero  mihf,  teneo,  restrain,  retineo, 
contineS,  deterreo,  reprimo.  abstaining:  praetermitto,  intermitto.  de- 
laying: cunctor,  differo,  exspectp,  recuso;  non  multum,  nihil,  paulum 
abest.  (b.)  doubting  :  dubito,  dubium  est ;  a  doubt  may  also  be  implied  in  other 
words,  or  forms  of  words  :  as,  non  metuo,  non  abest  suspicio,  &c. 

(a.)  neque  sibi  homines  barbaros  temperatures  existimabat,  quin 
in  pr5vinciam  exirent,  i,  33,  4,  and  he  thought,  as  they  were  savages,  they 
would  not  restrain  themselves,  but  would  sally  out  into  the  province,  vix  me 
contineS  quin  involem  monstro  in  capillum,  T.  Eu.  859,  /  scarce  can 
keep  from  flying  at  the  caitiff's  hair,  nihil  praetermisi,  quin  Pompeium  a 
Caesaris  coniunctione  avocarem,  Ph.  2,  23,  I  left  no  stone  imturned  to  pre- 
vent Pompey  from  joining  Caesar,  abstinere  quin  attingas  non  queas,  PI. 
B.  f)\^,you  can't  keep  from  touching  it.  (b.)  non  dubitat,  quin  te  ducturum 
neges,  T.  Andr.  405,  he  does  n't  doubt  that  you  '//  refuse  to  marry,  quis  du- 
bitet,  quin  in  virtute  divitiae  sint  ?  Par.  48,  who  can  doubt  that  there  is 
money  in  virtue  ?  neque  abest  suspicio  quin  ipse  sibl  mortem  consci- 
verit,  i,  4,  4,  and  ground  is  not  wanting  for  the  belief  that  he  made  away  with 
himself. 

1987.  non    dubito    has    other    constructions :    (a.}    Indirect    question. 
(b.}  Accusative  with  the  infinitive   (in   some  authors  :  chiefly   Nepos   and 
Livy  and  later  writers),   (c.)  Meaning  not  hesitate,  the  infinitive  alone  (2169). 
quin  seldom  follows  this  meaning. 

(a.)  non  dubito,  quid  nobis  agendum  putes,  Att.  10,  i,  2,  7  have  no 
doubt  about  what  you  think  is  our  duty 'to  do.  (b.)  neque  enim  dubitabant 
hostem  venturum,  L.  22,  515,  2,  for  they  firmly  believed  the  enemy  would  come, 
(c.}  quid  dubitamus  pultare  ?  PI.  B.  1117,  why  do  we  hesitate  to  knock? 
nolite  dubitare  quin  huic  credatis  omnia,  IP.  68,  do  not  hesitate  to  trust  all 
to  him. 

1988.  The   subjunctive   with   quin   is   often   used   after  general 
negative  assertions,  or  questions  implying  a  negative :  as, 

346 


Conjunctional  Sentences  :  dum.     [1989-1994. 


nemo  fuit  omnmo  militum  qum  vulneraretur,  Caes.  C.  3,  53,  3,  there 
ivas  absolutely  not  a  single  soldier  but  was  wounded,  nullust  Kphesi  quin 
sciat,  PL  B.  336,  there's  not  a  soul  at  Ephesus  but  knows,  quis  in  circum 
venit,  quin  is'unoquoque  gradu  de  avaritia  tua  commoneretur  ?  V.  i, 
1 54,  who  came  to  the  circus  without  being  reminded  of  your  avarice  at  each  and 
every  step  ?  nulla  fuit  civitas  quin  pattern  senatus  Cordubam  mitteret, 
non  civis  Romanus  qum  conveniret,  Caes.  C.  2, 19,  2,  there  was  not  a  com- 
munity but  sent  a  part  of  its  local  senate  to  Corduba,  not  a  Roman  citizen,  but 
went  to  the  meeting.  For  qui  non  after  such  expressions,  see  1821.  The 
main  sentence  often  has  tam,  ita,  sic,  or  tantus :  as,  nemo  est  tarn  fortis, 
quin  r6i  novitate  perturbetur,  6,  39,  3,  there  was  nobody  so  brave  but  was 
demoralized  by  the  strangeness  of  the  situation,  nil  tam  difficile st  quin 
quaerendo  investigari  possiet,  T.  Hau.  675,  there 's  naught  so  hard  but  may 
by  searching  be  tracked  out.  Instead  of  quin,  ut  non  or  qui  non  is  often 
used  in  such  combinations  (1821). 

1989.  The  subjunctive  in  an  untenable  reason,  negatively  put,  is  sometimes  intro- 
duced by  non  quin  instead  of  non  quod  non  or  non  quo  non  (1855) :  as,  non 
quin  par!  virtute  alii  fuerint,  Ph.  7,  6,  not  that  others  may  not  have  been  his 
peers  in  virtue. 

1990.  qum  is  used  very  rarely  instead  of  quominus  to  introduce  clauses  com- 
pleting the  sense  of  verbs  which  have  no  negative  expressed  or  implied :  as,  once  each 
in  the  Bellum  Alexandrinum,  in  Tacitus,  and  in  Seneca's  prose. 


dum,  donee,  quoad,  quamdiu. 

1991.  With  the  temporal  particles  dum,  while,  until,  and  donee,  until  (in 
old  Latin  donicum  and  in  Lucretius  donique),  may  be  conveniently  treated 
the  relative  quaad  or  quoad  (that  is  qua  or  quo  combined  with  ad),  while, 
until,  and  the  comparative  quamdiu,  as  long  as. 

1992.  dum,  -while,  means  originally  a  -while  (\\^\} :  as,  circumspice  dum,  PI. 
Tri.  146,  look  rottnd  you  a  -while,  a  minute,  just  look  round  (1^7-$).  dum  servi  mei 
perplacet  mihi  consilium,  dum  baud  placet,  PI.  Merc.  348,  one  while  my 
slave'1  s  plan  suits  me  completely,  another  -while  it  doesn't  suit,     dum  .  .  .  dum, 
Accius  in  DN.  2,  89,  one  -while  .  .  .  another. 

1993.  As  a  pure  conjunctive  particle,  dum,  while,  means  either  (A.)  in 
the  time  while,  or  (B.)  all  the  time  while  ;  in   the  latter  sense  quoad  and 
quamdiu  are  also  used.     From  all  the  time  while,  dum  comes  t    mean  (C.) 
as  long  as,  provided ;  and  (D.)  until ;  in  this  sense  quoad  and  dSnec  are 
also  used. 

1994.  The  indicative  is  used  in  a  protasis  intro- 
duced by  dum,  quoad,  or  quamdiu,  while ;  and  the 
subjunctive  in  a  protasis  introduced   by  dum,  pro- 
vided, or  until. 

The  subjunctive  is  also  used  for  special  reasons,  as  in  indirect  discourse 
(1725),  by  attraction  (1728),  of  action  conceivable  (1731),  or  by  late  writers 
to  express  repeated  past  action  (1730).  See  also  1997  and  2009,  end. 

347 


I995~I99^-]    Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


(A.)  dum,  in  the  time  while. 

1995.  The  present  indicative  is  regularly  used  with  dum.  in 
the  time  while  (1739). 

dum  sometimes  has  as  correlative  subito,  repente  ;  iam,  interea,  &c. 

The  main  verb  may  be  present,  future,  or  past ;  as,  dum  haec  dicit, 
abiit  h5ra,  T.  Eu.  341,  while  he  thus  prated,  sped  an  hour  away.  infici  debet 
iis  artibus  quas  si,  dum  est  tener,  combiberit,  ad  maiora  veniet  para- 
tior,  fin.  3,  9,  he  should  be  imbued  with  such  arts  as  will,  if  absorbed  while 
he  is  young,  render  him  the  better  equipped  to  deal  with  weightier  business. 
nunc  rem  ipsam,  ut  gesta  sit,  dum  breviter  vSbis  demonstro,  attendite, 
Tul.  1 3,  now  give  your  attention  to  the  case  itself,  while  I  set  forth  to  you  briefly 
how  it  occurred,  dum  in  his  locis  Caesar  moratur,  ad  eum  legati  vene- 
runt,  4,  22,  I,  while  Caesar  tarried  in  these  regions,  some  envoys  came  to  him. 
dum  haec  aguntur,  voce  clara  exclamat,  PI.  Am.  1120,  while  this  was 
going  on,  with  clarion  voice  he  cries  aloud,  haec  dum  aguntur,  interea 
Cleomenes  iam  ad  Helori  litus  pervenerat,  V.  5,  91,  while  this  was 
going  on,  Cleomenes  meantime  had  already  arrived  at  the  shore  of  Helorum. 
The  phrase  dum  haec  geruntur,  meanwhile,  is  often  used  by  the  historians 
to  shift  the  scene :  as,  dum  haec  in  Venetis  geruntur,  Q.  Titurius  Sabi- 
nus  in  fines  Venellorum  pervenit,  3,  17,  I,  while  this  was  going  on  arnoi^ 
the  Veneti,  Sabinus  arrived  in  the  territory  of  the  Venelli.  The  present  in- 
dicative is  sometimes  retained  in  indirect  discourse,  chiefly  in  poetry  or 
late  prose :  as,  die,  hospes,  Spartae  nos  te  hie  vidisse  iacentis,  dum 
sanctis  patriae  legibus  obsequimur,  TD.  I,  ioi,tell  it  at  Sparta,  friend, 
that  thou  hast  seen  us  lying  here,  obedient  to  our  country's  holy  laws,  dicit 
sese  illi  anulum,  dum  luctat,  detraxisse,  T.  Hec.  829,  he  says  that,  in  the 
struggle,  he  pulled  off  her  ring. 

1996.  The  future  is  rare  and  chiefly  confined  to  old  Latin :  as, 
animum  advortite,  dum  huius  argumentum  eloquar  comoediae,  PI. 

prol.  Am.  95>  attention  lend,  while  I  set  forth  the  subject  of  this  comedy,  dum 
pauca  dicam,  breviter  attendite,  V.  3,  163,  while  I  speak  briefly,  give  me 
your  attention  a  few  moments. 

1997.  The  imperfect  indicative  is  rare;    the  imperfect  subjunctive  is 
sometimes  used,  chiefly  by  the  poets  and  historians :  as, 

(a.)  dum  haec  Veis  agebantur,  interim  capitolium  in  ingentf  peri- 
culo  fuit,  L.  5»47>  *»  "while  this  was  going  on  at  Vei,  the  capitol  meanwhile  ?(•'  s 
in  terrible  peril.  The  pluperfect  of  resulting  state  is  rarer  :  as,  dum  in  unam 
partem  oculos  hostium  certamen  averterat,  pluribus  locis  capitur  mu- 
nis, L.  32,  24,  5'  wbife  the  eyes  of  the  enemy  were  turned  away  in  one  direc- 
tion toward  the  fight,  the  wall  is  carried  in  several  places  (1615).  (b.)  dum  se 
rex  averteret,  alter  elatam  securim  in  caput  deiecit,  L.  i,  40,  7,  while  the 
king  was  looking  another  way,  the  second  man  raised  his  axe  and  brought  it 
down  on  his  head. 

1998.  The  clause  with  dum  often  denotes  the  cause  of  the  main 
action,  particularly  when  the  subjects  of  both  verbs  are  the  same  and 
the  action  of  the  protasis  is  coincident  with  that  of  the   apodosis 
0733)- 

348 


Conjunctional  Sentences  :  dum.     [1999-2001. 


dum  decent,  discunt,  Sen.  E.  7,  8,  ivhile  they  are  teaching,  they  are  learn- 
ing, or,  by  teaching  they  learn,  nimirum  didici  etiam,  dum  in  istum  inquirS, 
artificum  nomina,  F".  4,  4,  preposterous  as  it  may  seem,  in  hunting  up  evidence 
against  the  defendant,  I  have  actually  learned  artists'  names.  The  main  action 
is  often  one  not  anticipated  or  desired:  as,  ita  dum  pauca  mancipia  reti- 
nere  volt,  fortunas  omnis  libertatemque  suam  perdidit,  Caecil.  56,  so  in 
her  attempt  to  keep  a  few  hitman  chattels,  she  sacrificed  all  her  possessions  and 
her  own  liberty,  dum  vitant  stulti  vitia,  in  contraria  currunt,  H.  S.  i,  2, 
24,  while  fools  essay  a  vice  to  shun,  into  its  opposite  they  run.  Sometimes  with 
the  perfect :  as,  dum  Alexandri  similis  esse  voluit,  L.  Crassi  inventus 
est  dissimillimus,  Br.  282,  from  his  desire  to  be  like  Alexander,  he  came  out 
just  the  opposite  of  Crassus. 

(B.)  dum,  quoad,  quamdiu  (donee),  all  the  time  while. 

iggg.  dum,  quoad,  or  quamdiu,  all  the  time  while,  often  has  as  correlative 
tamdiu,  tantum,  tantummodo,  tantisper,  usque,  or  ita.  When  tamdiu 
is  used,  quam  often  stands  for  quamdiu. 

2OOO  (i.)  When  the  main  verb  is  present  or  future,  the  protasis 
with  dum,  quoad,  or  quamdiu,  all  the  time  while,  is  usually  in  the 
same  tense  as  the  main  verb  :  as, 

mane  dum  scribit,  PI.  B.  737,  wait  while  he  writes.  aegrot5  dum 
anima  est,  spes  esse  dicitur,  Att.  9,  10,  3,  as  long  as  a  sick  man  has  breath  he 
is  said  to  have  hope,  vidua  vivitS  vel  usque  dum  regnum  optinebit 
luppiter,  PI.  Men.  727,  may'st  widowed  live  e'en  long  as  Jupiter  shall  reign. 
ego  te  meum  esse  dici  tantisper  volo,  dum  quod  te  dignumst  faci'es, 
T.  Hau.  1 06,  /'//  have  thee  called  my  son  but  just  so  long  as  thou  shall  act 
as  doth  become  thee.  dum  Latinae  loquentur  litterae,  quercus  huic  loco 
non  deerit,  Leg.  I,  2,  as  long  as  Latin  literature  Jias  the  gift  of  speech,  this 
spot  will  not  lack  its  oak  (1733).  quamdiu  quisquam  erit  qui  te  defendere 
audeat,  vlves,  C.  I,  6,  as  long  as  there  shall  be  a  soul  who  will  -venture  to  de- 
fend you,  you  shall  live  on.  disces  quamdiu  voles,  tamdiu  autem  velle 
debebis  quoad  te  quantum  proficias  non  paenitebit,  Off.  i,  2,  you  shall 
study  as  long  as  you  want  to,  and  it  will  be  proper  for  you  to  want  to,  as  long  as 
you  are  satisfied  with  your  progress,  dandum  hordeum  et  furfures  usque 
quaad  erunt  lactantes,  Varro  R.R.  2,  7,  12,  give  them  barley  and  bran  as 
long  as  they  are  sucklings,  quoad,  as  long  as,  is  not  found  in  Terence. 

2OOI.  (2.)  With  quamdiu  the  perfect  is  used  when  the  main  verb 
is  perfect ;  with  dum  or  quoad  the  perfect  or  imperfect  is  used  when 
the  main  verb  is  perfect  or  pluperfect,  and  the  imperfect  usually  when 
the  main  verb  is  imperfect :  as, 

(a.)  quorum  quamdiu  mansit  imitatio,  tamdiu  genus  illud  dicendl 
vixit,  DO.  2,  94,  as  long  as  the  imitation  of  these  men  lasted,  so  long  was  that 
style  in  vogue,  tenuit  locum  tamdiu  quam  ferre  potuit  laborem,  Br.  236, 
he  held  the  position  as  long  as  he  could  stand  the  work.  In  this  use  quamdiu 
is  found  first  in  Cicero. 

(b.)  vixit,  dum  vixit,  bene,  T.  Hec.  461,  he  lived  well  all  the  time  he  lived 
(T733)-  avus  noster  quoad  vixit,  restitit  M.  GratidiS,  Leg.  3,  36,  our 
grandfather  as  long  as  he  lived,  opposed  Gratidius. 

349 


2OO2-2OO4-]   Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


(c.)  Massilienses  quoad  licebat,  circumvenire  nostros  contendebant, 
Caes.  C.  I,  58,  I,  as  long  as  the  Massilia  people  had  a  chance,  they  kept  trying 
to  surround  our  men.  dum  necesse  erat,  resque  ipsa  cogebat,  unus 
omnia  poterat,  RA.  139,  as  long  as  it  had  to  be,  and  circumstances  demanded, 
one  man  controlled  the  world  ( 1733).  From  Sallust  on,  the  present  of  vivid 
narration  (1590)  is  occasionally  found  with  dum  in  this  sense. 

2002.  In  poetry  and  in  late  prose  writers,  beginning  with  Lucretius  and  Livy, 
donee  is  used  in  the  sense  of  all  the  time^vhile,  usually  with  the  indicative,  but  some- 
times with  the  subjunctive  of  repeated  past  action :  as,  donee  gratus  eram  tibi, 
Persarum  vigui  rege  beatior,  H.  3,  9,  i,  as  long  as  I  -was  loved  ofthee,  I  nour- 
ished happier  than  the  Persians'  king,    donee  armati  confertique  abibant, 
peditum  labor  in  persequendo  f  uit,  L.  6,  13, 4,  as  long  as  they  -were  moving  off 
under  arms  and  in  close  array,  the  task  of  pursuit  fell  to  the  infantry,     vulgus 
trucidatum  est  donee  Ira  et  dies  permansit,  Ta.  i,  68,  thejank  and  Jile 
•were  butchered  as  long  as  -wrath  and  daylight  held  out.     nihil  trepidabant,  donee 
continent!  velut  ponte  agerentur,  L.  21,  28,  10,  the  elephants  -were  not  a  bit 
skittish  as  long  as  they  -were  driven  along  -what  seemed  a  continuous  bridge  (1730). 
The  future  is  rare :  as,  natus  enim  debet  quicumque  est  velle  manere  in 
vita,  donee  retinebit  blanda  voluptas,  Lucr.  5,  177,  whoe'er  is  born  must  -wish 
in  life  to  abide,  so  long  as  him  fond  pleasure  shall  detain,     donee  eris  felix,  mul- 
tos  numerabis  amicos,  O.   Tr.  i,  9,  5,  as  long  as  fortune  smiles,  thou  troops 
shalt  count  of  friends. 

(C.)  dum,  as  long  as,  provided,  so. 

2003.  The  present  and  imperfect  subjunctive  are  used  in  provisos 
introduced  by  dum,  as  long  as,  provided,  so. 

dum  is  sometimes  accompanied  by  modo,  only,  or  quidem,  that  is  ;  or 
(from  Terence  on)  modo  is  used  without  dum.  The  negative  is  ne  (from 
Ovid  on,  sometimes  non) ;  ne  sometimes  has  as  correlative  ita. 

pderint  dum  metuant,  Poet,  in  Suet.  Cat.  30,  let  them  hate,  so  they  fear. 
absit,  dum  modo  laude  parta  domum  recipiat  se,  PL  Am.  644,  let  him  go, 
so  only  he  come  home  with  glory  won.  postulabant  pro  homine  miserrimo, 
qui  vel  ipse  sese  in  cruciatum  dari  cuperet,  dum  de  patris  morte  quae- 
reretur,  RA.  119,  they  made  the  request  in  behalf  of  a  pitiable  wretch,  who  would 
be  only  too  glad  to  be  put  to  the  rack  himself,  so  his  father's  death  might  be  inves- 
tigated, itaque  dum  locus  comminus  pugnandi  daretur,  aequS  animo 
singulas  binis  navibus  obiciebant,  Caes.  C.  i,  58,  4,  therefore,  so  a  chance 
was  given  to  fight  hand  to  hand,_they  did  not  mind  pitting  one  of  their  vessels 
against  two  of  the  enemy's,  si  gi  permissum  esset,  ita  id  sacrum  faceret, 
dum  ne  plus  quinque  sacrifici5  interessent,  L.  39, 18,9,  if  he  were  allowed, 
he  might  perform  the  sacrifice  far  better,  provided  that  not  more  than  five  people 
should  have  a  part  in  the  ceremonial,  dum  quidem  nequid  perconteris 
quod  non  lubeat  proloqui,  PI.  Aul.  211,  provided  at  least  you  ask  nothing  that 
I  may  not  like  to  disclose,  volet,  civis  modo  haec  sit,  T.  Eu.  889,  he  '//  con- 
sent, only  let  her  be  a  free  born  maid,  magno  me  metu  liberabis,  dum 
modo  inter  me  atque  te  murus  intersit,  C.  \,  10,  you  will  relieve  me  of 
great  fear y  provided  only  there  be  a  wall  interposed  between  you  and  myself. 

(D.)  dum,  quoad,  donee,  until. 

2004.  dum,  quoad  or  donee,  until,  often  has  as  correlative   usque, 
Usque  eo,  usque  ad  eum  finem  or  tamdiu. 

35° 


Conjunctional  Sentences:  dum.     [2005-2007. 


dum,  until. 

2005.  The  subjunctive  present  is  used  in  a  protasis  intro- 
duced by  dum,  until t  when  the  main  verb  denotes  either  indefi- 
nite or  present  time,  and  the  subjunctive  imperfect  when  the 
main  verb  is  past. 

The  subjunctive  is  an  extension  of  the  subjunctive  of  desire  (1540) ;  the 
clause  denotes  something  expected  or  proposed. 

is  dum  veniat  sedens  ibi  opperibere,  PL  B.  48,  you  shall  sit  there 
-waiting  till  he  comes,  orandi  sunt,  ut  si  quam  habent  ulciscendi  vim, 
differant  in  tempus  aliud,  dum  defervescat  Ira,  'I'D.  4,  78,  we  must 
always  ask  such  people,  if  they  have  any  chance  to  take  vengeance,  to  ptit  it  off 
to  some  other  time,  till  their  rage  cool  down,  censeo  latendum  tantisper 
ibidem,  dum  effervescit  haec  gratulatio  et  simul  dum  audiamus, 
quemadmodum  negdtium  confectum  sit,  Fam.  9,  2,  4,  7  advise  lying  law 
where  you  are,  while  the  present  congratulation  excitement  is  cooling  off,  and  at 
the  same  time  till  we  may  hear  how  the  job  was  done,  dum  reliquae  naves  eo 
convenient,  in  ancoris  exspectavit,  4,  23, 4,  he  waited  at  anchor  till  the  rest 
of  the  vessels  should  gather  there  (1725).  Verginius  dum  collegam  c5nsu- 
leret  moratus,  dictatorem  dixit,  L.  4,  21,  10,  Verginius,  after  waiting  till  he 
should  consult  his  colleague,  appointed  a  dictator,  observavit  dum  dormita- 
ret  canes,  PL  Tri.  170,  he  watched  till  the  dog  should  be  napping. 

2006.  The  present  indicative  with  dum,  while,  is  sometimes  used  where 
the  subjunctive  might  be  expected  with  dum,  ttntil  (1593).     Other  indicative 
tenses  are  rarely  thus  used  :  as, 

(a.)  expectabo,  dum  venit,  T.  Eu.  206,  I  will  wait  while  he  comes,  ego 
hie  tantisper,  dum  exis,  te  opperiar,  PL  Most.  683,  I'll  wait  for  you  here  a 
while  till  you  come  out.  ego  in  Arcano  opperior,  dum  ista  cognosce,  At\ 
10,  3,/0r  myself  I  am  waiting  at  the  Arcae  place,  till  I  ascertain  this,  (b.)  mihf 
quidem  usque  curae  erit,  quid  agas,  dum  quidegeris,  sciero,  Fam.  12, 19, 
T>,for  me  I  shall  be  anxious  all  the  time  to  know  what  you  are  doing,  till  I  know 
what  you  have  done,  mansit  in  condicione  usque  ad  eum  finem  dum 
iudices  reiecti  sunt,  V.  a.  pr.  16,  he  stuck  to  his  bargain  till  the  jurors  were 
challenged. 

quoad,  donee,  until. 

2007.  quoad  or  donee,  until ^  introduces  a  protasis  in  the  present 
subjunctive  when   the  main  verb  is  present  or  future ;    and   in   the 
perfect  indicative  when  the  main  verb  is  past  or  a  general  present. 

quoad  is  found  once  in  Plautus  with  the  imperfect  subjunctive  (2008) ;  in  other 
authors  here  and  there  with  both  moods  ;  not  in  Tacitus.  With  donee  the  pres- 
ent subjunctive  is  fc  und  once  in  Plautus,  rarely  in  late  Latin  and  in  poetry;  the  per- 
fect indicative  is  found  at  all  periods;  the  present  indicative  (1590),  found  once  in 
Plautus,  is  poetic  and  late.  But  donee  is  rarely  used  by  Cicero,  and  never  by  Caesar 
or  Sallust.  donicum  is  found  in  old  Latin  (not  in  Terence)  with  the  indicative 
(2009),  and  once  in  Nepos  with  the  subjunctive  of  indirect  discourse-  donique  is 
found  four  times  in  Lucretius  with  the  indicative,  always  before  vowels  (2009). 
doneque  and  doneque  cum  seem  to  occur  a  few  times  in  Vitruvius. 

35 1 


2008-2009.]   Sentences :    The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


(a.)  ego  hie  cogito  commorari,  quoad  me  reficiam,  Fam.  7,  26,  2, 1  am 
thinking  of  staying  here  till  I  feel  better,  ea  continebis,  quoad  ipse  te 
videam,  Att.  13,  21,  4,  you  will  keep  this  back  till  I  see  you  myself,  experge- 
factique  secuntur  inania  saepe  cervorum  simulacra,  donee  discussis  re- 
deant  erroribus  ad  se,  Lucr.  4,  995,  and  when  awakened,  often  they  still  keep 
hunting  the  shadowy  forms  of  stags,  until  the  dehision  is  shaken  off  and  they  come 
to  themselves,  magnus  mirandusque  cliens  sedet  ad  praetoria  regis, 
donee  BithynS  libeat  vigilare  tyranno,  J.  10, 160,  a  vassal  great  and  strange 
he  sits  in  the  king's  gate,  till  it  may  suit  his  oriental  majesty  to  wake,  inter 
eadem  pecora  degunt,  ddnec  aetas  separet  ingenues,  Ta.  G.  20,  they 
always  live  among  the  same  flocks  and  herds,  till  maturity  puts  the  free-born  by 
themselves. 

(b.)  nostri  reppulerunt  neque  finem  sequendi  fecerunt,  quoad  equi- 
tes  praecipites  hostes  egerunt,  5,  17,  3,  our  people  routed  them  and  did  not 
give  up  the  pursuit  till  the  cavalry  drove  the  enemy  headlong.  Milo  cum  in 
senatu  fuisset  e5  die  quoad  senatus  est  dimissus,  domum  venit,  Alii.  28, 
after  staying  in  the  senate  that  day  till  the  senate  adjourned,  Milo  went  home. 
numquam  destitit  orare  usque  adeo  dSnec  perpulit,T.^^/r.  66o,//<?  never 
ceased  to  tease  until  he  gained  his  point,  usque  eo  timul,  donee  ad  reiciun- 
dds  iudices  venimus,  V.  I,  17,  /  was  afraid  all  the  time  till  we  came  to 
challenging  jurors.  The  present  indicative  of  vivid  narration  (1590)  is  found 
in  Vergil  and  Livy :  as,  socii  consurgere  tonsis,  donee  r5stra  tenent  sic- 
cum  et  sedere  carinae  omnes  innocuae,  V.  10,  299,  with  one  accord  the 
shipmates  rose  to  oars,  until  the  beaks  dry  land  attain,  and  keels  all  sat  unscathed. 

2008.  An  imperfect  subjunctive  is  rarely  found  with  quoad,  until  (1725) :  as, 
haec  dies  praestitutast,  quoad  referret,  PI.  Ps.  623,  this  day  was  set  by 
•which  he  was  to  pay.  exercebatur  currendo  et  Iuctand5  ad  eum  finem, 
quoad  stans  complecti  posset,  N.  15,  2,  5,  he  used  to  practise  running  and 
•wrestling,  till  he  could  give  a  grip  standing.  For  dSnec,  see  2009  at  the  end. 

2009.  Other  constructions  occur,  chiefly  in  old  Latin  or  poetry,  with  donee,  or 
donicum,  until,  (a.)  The  future  perfect :  as,  baud  desinam,  donee  perfecero 
hoc,  T. Ph. 419, 1  shall  not  stop  till  I  have  finished  this,  delicta  maiorum  lues, 
donee  templa  refeceris,  H.  3,6,  \,  for  sins  of  sires  thou  shalt  atone,  till  thou  hast 
shrines  repaired,  (b.)  The  future:  coquito  usque  donee  conmadebit  bene, 
Cato,  JRR.  156,  5,  boil  until  it  is  very  soft,  ter  centum  regnabitur  annos, 
donee  geminam  partu  dabit  Ilia  prolem,  V.  i,  272,  for  thrice  a  hundred 
years  there  -will  be  kings,  till  Ilia  gives  birth  to  twins,  (c.)  The  perfect  indicative, 
less  frequently  the  present,  introductory  to  a  general  present:  impedit  piscis 
usque  adeo,  d5nicum  eduxit  foras,  PL  Tru.  38,  he  always  draws  his  net 
about  the  fish,  until  tie's  brought  them  out  (1613).  usque  mantant  neque  id 
faciunt,  dSnicum  parietes  ruont,  PI.  Most.  116,  they  keep  waiting and  don 7  do 
it  until  the  walls  are  falling,  (d.)  The  pluperfect  indicative  :  horrif  eris  acclbant 
vpcibus  Orcum,  donique  eos  vita  privarant  vermina  saeva,  Lucr.  5,  996, 
•with  horrid  cries  on  Death  they  'd  c all  till  gripings  sore  had  set  them  free  from  life. 
The  imperfect  indicative  is  found  once  in  Tacitus,  who  also  has  the  infinitive  of  inti- 
mation (1539)  once  or  twice.  An  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive  sometimes 
occurs  where  purpose  is  intimated,  and  in  Livy  and  late  Latin  to  express  repeated  past 
action  :  as,  d5nec  egregius  properaret  exsul,  H.  3,  5,  45,  till  he  could  hasten 
forth  a  peerless  exile,  trepidationis  aliquantum  gdebant,  donee  quietem 
ipse  timor  fecisset,  L.  21,28,  n,  the  elephants  always  displayed  some  nervous- 
ness,  till  terror  itself  restored  quiet  (1730).  But  the  habit  of  using  the  imperfect 
subjunctive  is  very  common  in  Tacitus  where  neither  purpose  nor  repetition  is  inti- 
mated :  as  neque  proelium  omisit  donee  caderet,  Ta.  3,  20,  he  ceased  not 
fighting  till  he  fell. 

352 


Conjunctional  Sentences  :  quando.     [2010-2013. 


quando. 

2010.  quando,  originally  a  temporal  particle,  has   the  meaning 
when,  which  readily  passes  over  to  a  causal  meaning,  since,  because. 
In  both  meanings  it  introduces  the  indicative.     For  special  reasons, 
however,  the  subjunctive  is  used,  as  in  indirect  discourse  (1725)  or  of 
action  conceivable  (1731).     quando  is  also  used  to  introduce  a  con- 
ditional protasis  (2110). 

In  simple  sentences,  temporal  quando  is  used  in  pronoun  questions 
(1526).  As  an  indefinite  adverb  it  has  the  meaning  ever. 

(A.)  TEMPORAL  quando. 

2011.  quando,  when,  introduces  a  temporal  clause  with  the  in- 
dicative. 

The  time  is  often  indefinite  or  iterative  ;  so  usually  in  old  Latin,  quan- 
d5  often  has  turn  as  correlative. 

£15  luppiter  quandS  lubet,  PI.  Am.  864,  I  turn  into  Jupiter  at  my  sweet 
will.  laudatS  quando  illud  quod  cupis  effecero,  PI.  Cu.  364,  c ry  your  bravo 
when  I've  done  what  you  desire,  quando  occasio  illaec  periit,  post  sero 
cupit.  PI.  / :il.  249,  when  that  chance  is  lost,  he  wants  it  all  too  late  (1613). 
quando  omnes  creati  sunt,  turn  ad  eos  deus  fatur,  Tim.  40,  when  all  were 
created,  then  to  them  spake  the  god.  quando  pars  maior  in  eandem  senten- 
tiam  ibat,  bellurn  erat  consensum,  L.  i,  32,  12,  when  the  majority  voted  for 
the  same  motion,  war  was  always  agreed  upon.  Temporal  quando  is  found 
sporadically  at  all  periods;  not  in  Terence  or  Caesar. 

2012.  quandoque,  whenever,  is  found  once  in  the  Twelve  Tables,  a  few 
times  in  Cicero  (chiefly  in  legal  formulae),  three  times  in  Horace,  and  here 
and  there  in  later  authors.     Not  in  Caesar. 

(B.)    CAUSAL   quando. 

2013.  quando,  since,  seeing  that,  introduces  a  causal  clause  with 
the  indicative. 

The  reason  is  usually  one  known  to  the  person  addressed  or  one  gener- 
ally known  (1884).  quando  is  often  strengthened  by  quidem. 

quandS  hie  servio,  haec  patriast  mea,  PI.  Per.  641,  now  that  I  am  a 
slave  here,  this  is  my  country,  quin  ergo  abeis,  quandS  responsumst  ? 
PI.  MG.  1085,  why  dorft  you  go  then,  since  vou're  had  your  answer?  melius 
est,  quandSquidem  ho'c  numquam  ml  ipse  voluit  dicere,  T.  Ad.  639,  bet- 
ter so,  since  he  would  n't  ever  tell  me  about  it  of  his  own  accord,  quando  me  in 
hunc  locum  deduxit  oratio,  docebo.  DIV  3,  43,  seeing  that  my  discourse  has 
brought  me  to  this  point,  I  will  shmv.  haec  detur  cura  censoribus,  quando- 
quidem eos  in  re  publica  semper  volumus  esse,  Leg.  3,  47,  let  this  be  the 
charge  of  the  censors,  seeing  that  we  want  such  officers _  always  in  our  state. 
prQ  urbe  ac  penatibus  dimicandum  esse,  quando  Italiam  tueri  nequis- 
sent,  L.  22,  8,  7,  that  they  must  fight  for  home  and  country,  now  that  they  had 
fai'ed  to  preserve  Italy  (1724).  Causal  quando  is  found  at  all  periods,  though 
not  in  Caesar,  and  in  Cicero's  orations  only  with  quidem. 

23  353 


2014-2019.]  Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


2014.  quandoque,  inasmuch  as,  is  used  a  few  times  in  a  formal  or  legal 
sense  in  Cicero  and  Livy :  as,  quandoque  hisce  homines  iniussu  populi 
Romani  Quiritium  foedus  ictum  In  spoponderunt,  L.  9, 10, 9,  inasmuch  as 
these  persons  have  promised  that  a  covenant  should  be  made,  without  t/ie  order  of 
the  Roman  nation  of  Quirites. 


si. 

2015.  BI,  in  early  Latin  sei,  is  originally  a  locative,  meaning  under 
those  circumstances,  so.  With  the  enclitic  -ce,  it  forms  sice  or  sic, 
so.  The  two  are  sometimes  found  as  correlatives  in  colloquial  style  : 
as,  sic  scribes  aliquid,  si  vacabis,  Att.  12,  38,  2,  so  you  shall  have 
time,  so  you  will  write  something.  See  708. 


CONDITIONAL  PERIODS. 

2016.  A  protasis  introduced  by  si,  so,  if,  or  nisi,  unless,  if 
not,  states  a  condition ;  the  apodosis  states  action  occurring 
under  that  condition.  The  conditional  protasis  and  apodosis 
combined  make  a  Conditional  Period. 


Thus,  si  dies  est,  if  it  is  day,  is  a  conditional  protasis ;  combined  with  an 
apodosis,  lucet,  it  is  light,  it  mz " 
Inv.  I,  86,  if  it  is  day,  it  is  light. 


)odosis,  lucet,  it  is  light,  it  makes  a  conditional  period  :  si  dies  est,  lucet, 


2017.  A  parenthesis  with  ut  (1943)  is  added  when  the  speaker  asserts  that  the 
action  of  the  protasis  is  not  only  assumed,  but  actually  occurs  :  as,  si  virtus  digna 
est  gloriatione,ut  est,  beatus  esse  poterit  virtute  una  praeditus,  Fin.  4, 
51,  if  virtue  is  entitled  to  glorification,  as  it  really  is,  he  "will  find  it  possible  to  be 
happy  in  the  possession  of  virtue  alone,    si  nox  opportuna  est  eruptioni,  sicut 
est,  haec  profecto  noctis  aptissima  hpra  est,  L.  7,35,  10,  if  night  is  always 
favourable  for  a  sortie,  and  it  always  is,  this  particular  hour  of  the  night  is  surely 
the  very  best  time. 

2018.  The  apodosis  is  usually  declarative.     Often,  however,  it  is  interro- 
gative,  exclamatory,  or  imperative,  or  it  may  take  any  other  form  which  the 
thought  or  the  context  may  require.    The  apodosis  has  rarely  a  correlative  to 
si :  as,  igitur,  it  follows  that,  idcirco,  for  all  that,  turn,  then,  ita,  sic,  only,  ea 
condicione,  on  condition;  at,  but,  tamen,  nevertheless,  certe,  saltern,  at  any 
rate,  turn  denique,  turn  demurn,  then  and  not  till  then. 

2019.  si  is  sometimes  followed  by  quidem  or,  from  Cicero  on,  by  modo  : 
si  quidem,  that  is  if,  since,  even  if,  si  modo,  if  only,     si  tamen,  at  least  if, 
is  found  in  Lucretius,  Sallust,  the  Augustan  poets  and  in  late  writers,     sive 
.  .  .  sive   (seu  .  .  .  seu)  or,  in  old  Latin,   si  ...  sive,  whether  .  .  .  or, 
with  the  indicative  or  the  subjunctive  of  the  indefinite  second  person  (1556), 
leaves  a  choice  between  two  cases  possible.     By  abbreviation  of  the  protasis 
Sjv«?  becomes  a  coordinating  particle  :  see  1672. 

354 


Conditional  Periods.       [2020—2025. 


2020.  The  negative  of  si  is  si  non,  if  not  (si  nemo,  si  nullus, 
&c.),  or  nisi,  unless,  if  not,  used  especially  of  an  exception  or  alter  a 
negative,     nisi  si,  chiefly  in  old,  colloquial,  or  late  Latin,  or,  particu- 
larly in  solemn  language  or  poetry,  ni  is  sometimes  used  for  nisi.     A 
restriction,  usually  an  ironical  afterthought,  may  be  introduced  by 
nisi  forte  (rare  before  Cicero)  or  nisi  vero  (in  Cicero  and  Pliny  the 
Younger)  with  the  indicative. 

nisi  is  sometimes  found  in  an  adversative  sense  in  old  and  colloquial 
Latin,  especially  after  nescio ;  from  Cicero  on,  it  may  be  strengthened  by 
tamen.  For  nisi  quod,  see  1848. 

2021.  When  a  second  conditional  period  is  opposed  to  a  first,  it  is  some- 
times introduced  by  si  (or  si  autem),  but  usually  by  sin  (or  sin  autem).     If 
the  second  period  is  negative,  and  its  verb  is  not  expressed,  minus  or  aliter 
is  preferred  to  non. 

CLASSES   OF  CONDITIONAL  PROTASES. 

2022.  Conditional  protases  may  be  divided  into  two  classes : 

2023.  I.  INDETERMINATE  protases,  that  is  such  as  merely  sup- 
pose an  action,  without  implying  either  its  occurrence  or  its  non- 
occurrence  ;  these  may  take  : 

(A.)  Any  tense  of  the  indicative  required  by  the  sense  ;  or  (B.)  the  pres- 
ent subjunctive,  less  frequently  the  perfect  subjunctive,  to  express  a  condition 
in  the  future. 

2024.  II.  Protases  of  ACTION  NON-OCCURRENT,  that  is  such 
as  suppose  action  not  taking  place.     These  take  the  imperfect 
or  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

Thus,  in  the  period  si  dies  est,  lucet,  Inv.  i,  86,  if  it  is  day,  it  is  light,  the 
protasis  if  it  is  day  is  indeterminate,  neither  implying  that  it  is,  or  is  not  day. 
But  in  si  viveret,  verba  eius  audiretis,  if  he  were  alive,  you  would  hear  his 
evidence,  RC.  42,  the  protasis  denotes  action  non-occurrent,  if  he  were  alive, 
implying  but  he  is  not.  The  whole  period,  like  the  protasis,  is  either  an  Inde- 
terminate Period  or  a  Period  of  Action  non-occurrent. 


I.     INDETERMINATE   PROTASES. 
(A.)    INDICATIVE   USE. 

2025.  The  indicative  in  a  conditional  protasis  may 
state  present,  past,  or  future  time. 

The  mood  and  tense  of  the  apodosis  are  determined  by  the  sense. 
The  following  combinations  occur : 

355 


2026—2028.]  Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 

(i.)  PROTASIS  IN  THE  PRESENT. 

2026.  (a.)  Apodosis  in  the  Present. 

si  sunt  di,  beneficl  in  homines  sunt,  Div.  2,  104,  */  there  are  gods, 
they  are  kind  to  men.  si  nescis,  tib!  igncsco,  Fam.  10,  26,  3,  if  you  do  not 
know,  I  pardon  you.  deus  sum,  si  hoc  itast,  T.  Hec.  843,  I  am  a  god,  if  this 
is  so.  erus  si  tuos  domist,  quin  provocas  ?  PI.  Ps.  638,  in  case  your  mas- 
ter is  at  home,  why  don't  you  call  him  out  ?  hoc  mortuo,  aut  si  qui  ex  reli- 
quis  excellit  dignitate,  succedit,  aut,  si  sunt  plures  pares,  de  principatu 
contendunt,  6,  13,  9,  when  this  man  dies,  if  there  is  any  one  of  the  rest  superior 
in  position,  he  always  takes  his  place  ;  or  if  there  are  several  with  equal  claim s, 
they  have  a  contest  about  the  supremacy,  si  vis,  potes,  H.  S.  2,  6,  39,  you  can, 
if  you  will,  in  corpore  si  quid  eius  modi  est  quod  reliquo  corpori  no- 
ceat,  id  uri  secarique  patimur,  Ph.  8,  \^,in  the  human  body  if  there  is  any- 
thing likely  to  damage  the  rest  of  the  body,  we  always  allow  it  to  be  cauterized  and 
cut.  si  cui  venae  sic  moventur,  is  habet  febrim,  Fat.  15,  if  a  mans 
pulse  beats  thus  and  so,  he  always  has  fever.  The  present  is  sometimes  loosely 
used  of  future  time  (1593) :  as,  si  ilium  relinquo,  ems  vitae  timeo,  T.  Andr. 
210,  if  I  desert  him,  I  tremble  for  his  life,  assequor  omnia,  si  propero;  si 
cunctor,  amittS,  Att.  10,  8,  5,  /  shall  compass  all  my  ends,  if  2  hurry  ;  if  I 
delay,  I  shall  lose  everything,  castra  nunc  vSbis  hostium  praedae  do,  si 
mihl  pollicemini  vos  fortiter  operam  navaturos,  L.  7,  16,  4,  I  give  you  the 
camp  of  the  enemy  as  booty  now,  if  you  promise  me  you  will  quit  you  like  men. 

2027.  (b.)  Apodosis  in  the  Perfect. 

si  homines  rationem  a  dis  datam  in  fraudem  convertunt,  non  dari 
illam  quam  dari  humane  generi  melius  fuit,  DN.  3,  78,  if  men  apply  rea- 
son, the  gift  of  the  gods,  to  purposes  of  mischief ,  it  would  have  been  better  it  "should 
not  be  given  to  the  human  race  than  given  (1495).  The  perfect  of  the  apodosis 
is  ordinarily  used  of  future  time  (1612):  as,  occidi,  si  tu  vera  memoras, 
PI.  Most.  369,  I'm  a  dead  man,  if  what  you  say  is  true,  nunc  si  indicium 
facio,  interii;  si  taceo,  interii  tamen,  PI.  MG.  306,  now  if  I  tell,  I'm  dead 
and  gone  ;  if  I  keep  dark,  I'm  dead  and  gone  the  same,  ni  illos  homines  ex- 
pello,  ego  occidi  planissume,  PI.  St.  401,  if  I  don't  drive  those  people  off,  all's 
up  with  me.  nam  si  argentum  prius  adfert,  continue  nos  amb5  exclusi 
sumus,  PI.  As.  360,  for  if  he  brings  the  money  first,  theti  we  're  at  once  left  out 
in  the  cold. 

2028.  (c.}  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect. 

sed  si  domist,  Demaenetum  volebam,  PI.  As.  452,  but  if  he  is  at  home, 
Demaenetus  I  wanted,  iam  turn  erat  senex,  senectus  si  verecundos  facit, 
T.  Ph.  1023,  he  was  already  old,  if  age  is  what  makes  shamefastness.  si  sin- 
gula  vos  forte  n5n  movent,  universa  certe  tamen  movere  debebant,  DN 

2,  163,  if  these  points  taken  severally  do  not  affect  you,  yet  collectively  they  surely 
thould  have  done  so  (1495)- 

356 


Conditional  Periods.       [2029—2032, 


2029.  (</.)  Apodosis  in  the  Pluperfect. 

cesseram,  si  alienam  a  me  plebem  fuisse  voltis,  quae  non  fuit,  in- 
vidiae,  Sest.  64,  /  had  yielded,  if  you  will  have  it  that  the  commons  were  opposed 
to  me,  though  they  were  not,  to  hatred,  hoc  mi  unum  relicuom  fuerat  ma- 
lum,  si  puerum  ut  tollam  cogit,  T.  Hec.  570,  this  was  the  only  evil  left  in 
store  for  me,  if  he  compels  me  to  adopt  the  child. 


2030.  (e.)  Apodosis  in  the  Future. 

si  interpellas,  ego  tacebo,  PI.  Men.  1121,  if  you  persist  in  breaking  in, 
I'll  hold  my  tongue,  hie  tii  si  laesum  te  esse  dicis,  patiar  et  concedam ; 
si  iniuriam  tibi  factam  quereris,  defendam  et  negabo,  Caecil.  58,  if  you 
assert  that  you  are  hurt  in  this  matter,  I  am  perfectly  willing  to  admit  it ;  but  if 
you  complain  that  it  is  a  "violation  of  your  rights,  I  shall  stoutly  maintain  the 
contrary.  Often  in  this  combination  the  present  is  loosely  used  of  future 
time  (1593):  as,  nunc  si  ille  hue  salvos  revenit,  reddam  suom  sib!;  si 
quid  eo  fuerit,  habeo  dotem  unde  dem,  PI.  Tri.  156,  now  if  our  absent 
friend  (omes  safely  back,  I'll  give  him  back  his  own  again  ;  if  anything  befalls 
him,  I've  wherewith  a  dower  to  give,  nisi  id  c5nfestim  facis,  ego  te  tra- 
dam  magistratui,  N.  15,  4,  3,  if  you  do  not  do  it  at  once,  I  will  hand  you  over 
to  a  magistrate,  si  pace  frui  volumus,  bellum  gerendum  est ;  si  bellum 
omittimus,  pace  numquam  fruemur,  Ph.  7,  19,  if  we  wish  to  enjoy  peace, 
we  shall  have  to  make  war  ;  if  we  give  up  war,  we  never  shall  enjoy  peace. 
convincam,  si  negas,  C.  I,  8, 1  will  bring  it  home  to  you,  if  you  deny  it.  tibi 
divitias  dab5,  si  impetras,  PI.  MG.  1213,  /'//  make  you  rich,  if  you  succeed. 


2031.  (/)  Apodosis  in  the  Future  Perfect. 

si  nequeo  facere  ut  abeas,  egomet  abiero,  PI.  Poen.  442,  if  I  can't 
make  you  go,  I'll  instantly  begone  myself  (1629).  si  id  non  facis,  ego  quod 
me  in  te  sit  facere  dignum  invenero,  T.  Hau.  107,  if  you  don't  do  it,  I  will 
have  a  proper  course  devised  to  use  with  you. 


2032.  (£-.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperative. 

da  mih!  hoc,  mel  meum,  si  me  amas,  PI.  Tri.  244,  give  me  this,  honey 
mine,  an  thou  lov'st  me.  redargue  me,  si  mentior,  Clu.  62,  refute  me,  if  I  am 
not  speaking  the  truth,  desilite,  milites,  nisi  vultis  aquilam  hostibus  pro- 
dere,  4,  25,  3,  jump  overboard,  men,  unless  you  choose  to  abandon  your  eagle  to 
the  enemy,  ni  iudicatum  facit,  secum  ducito,  vincito  compedibus,  Twelve 
Tables  in  Cell.  20,  I,  45,  unless  he  satisfies  the  judgement,  the  complainant  shall 
take  him  with  him,  and  put  him  in  gyves  (1593,  1575).  qua  re,  si  haec  ita 
sunt,  sic  me  colitote  ut  deum,  CM.  81,  therefore,  if  this  is  so,  you  are  to  hon- 
our  me  as  a  god. 

357 


2O33-2O35-]    Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


2O33-  (^0  Apodosis  in  the  Present  Subjunctive. 

si  quid  habes  certius,  velim  scire,  Att.  4,  10,  i,  */  you  have  any- 
thing more  definite,  I  should  like  to  know  (1554).  sin  aliter  animatus  es, 
bene,  quod  agas,  eveniat  tibl,  PL  Tri.  715,  but  if  you're  minded  otherwise, 
may  all  you  do  betide  you  well  (1540).  quod  si  non  possumus  facere,  mori- 
amur,  Ph.  7,  14,  if  we  cannot  do  it,  let  us  die  (  1547).  si  mih!  filius  genitur, 
isque  prius  moritur,  et  cetera,  turn  mih!  ille  sit  heres,  DO.  2,  141,  if  a 
son  is  born  to  me,  and  the  boy  dies  before  &*c.,  &*c.,  then  so  and  so  is  to  be  my 
heir  (1593,  1548).  si  est  spes  nostri  reditus,  earn  confirmes,  Fam.  14,  4, 
3,  if  there  is  a  hope  of  my  coming  back,  strengthen  that  hope  (1550).  eum  si 
reddis  mihi,  praeterea  unum  nummum  ne  duis,  PI.  Cap.  331,  if  'you  restore 
my  boy  to  me,  you  need  n't  give  one  fenny  more  (i55i)«  si  hie  pernocto, 
causae  quid  dicam?  T.  Ad.  531,  if  I  sleep  here,  what  reason  can  I  give 


(2.)  PROTASIS  IN  THE  PERFECT. 

2034.  (a.)  Apodosis  in  the  Present. 

si  quid  venale  habuit  Heius,  si  id  quanti  aestimabat,  tanti  vendidit, 
desino  quaerere  cur  emeris,  V.  4,  10,  if  Hejus  had  anything  for  sale,  if  he 
sold  it  at  his  own  valuation,  I  stop  enquiring  why  you  bought,  si  vere  est  a 
nobis  philosophia  laudata,  eius  tractatio  optimo  quoque  dignissima  est, 
Ac.  2,  6,  if  philosophy  has  been  extolled  by  me  with  justice,  its  study  is  eminently 
worthy  of  the  good,  si  honoris  causa  statuam  dederunt,  inimlci  non  sunt, 
V.  2,  150,  if  they  contributed  a  statue  as  a  compliment,  they  are  not  enemies. 
postes  quoiusmodi  ?  .  .  .  etiamnunc  satis  bom  sunt,  si  sunt  induct!  pice, 
PI.  Most.  8  1  8,  what  think  you  of  the  posts  ?  .  .  .  they  're  pretty  good  even  now,  if 
they  are  only  smeared  with  pitch.  This  combination  is  common  in  general  con- 
ditional periods  (1613)  :  as,  homines  aegri  si  aquam  gelidam  biberunt, 
primo  relevari  videntur,  C.  I,  31,  if  sick  people  drink  cold  water,  at  first  they 
always  seem  refreshed,  si  quod  est  admissum  facinus,  idem  decernunt, 
6>  13.  5i  if  &  crime  has  been  committed,  they  also  act  as  judges,  abiurant,  si 
quid  creditumst,  PI.  Cur.  496,  they  always  swear  they  haven't  it,  if  anything 
is  trusted  them,  si  puer  parvus  occidit,  aequo  animS  ferendum  putant, 
TD.  i,  93,  if  a  baby  dies,  they  always  think  the  affliction  should  be  borne  with 
resignation. 

2035.  (£.)  Apodosis  in  the  Perfect. 

si  peccavi,  insciens  fed,  T.  Hau.  631,  if  I've  done  wrong,  it  was  in  igno- 
rance. haec  bona  in  tabulas  publicas  si  redierunt,  tabulae  publicae 
conruptae  sunt,  RA.  128,  if  this  property  has  been  entered  on  the  state  books, 
then  the  state  books  have  been  tampered  with,  quo  in  bello  si  fuit  error, 
communis  6i  fuit  cum  senatu,  Ph.  n,  34,  if  there  was  a  mistake  in  this  war, 
it  was  common  to  him  and  the  senate,  interii,  si  abiit,  PI.  Ps.  910,  /  "m  lost, 
if  he  has  gone  (1608).  Also  in  general  periods  (1613)  :  as,  animi  si  quando 
vera  viderunt,  usi  sunt  fortuna  atque  casu,  Div.  2,  108,  if  the  mind  has 
ever  seen  the  truth,  it  has  used  in  every  case  luck  and  chance,  studiose  equi- 
dem  utor  nostris  poetis,  sed  sicubi  illi  defecerunt,  verti  multa  de 
Graecis,  TD.  2,  26,  /  use  our  own  poets  carefully,  it  is  true  ;  but  whenever 
they  have  failed  me,  I  have  always  translated  a  great  deal  from  Greek. 

358 


Conditional  Periods.       [2036-2041. 


2036.  (c.)  Apodosis  in  the  Pluperfect. 

si  illud  iure  rogatum  dlcere  ausi  sunt,oblitine  erant  ?  PC.  4$,  if  they 
ventured  to  say  that  that  measure  was  brought  forward  in  due  form,  had  not 
they  forgotten  ? 

2037.  (d.)  Apodosis  in  the  Future. 

si  quis  oriente  canicula  natus  est,is  in  marl  non  morietur,  if  anybody 
is  born  when  the  dogstar  is  rising,  he  will  never  die  at  sea  (general) :  si  Fabius 
oriente  canicula  natus  est,  Fabius  in  man  non  morietur,  Fat.  12,  if 
Fabius  was  born  when  the  dogstar  was  rising,  Fabius  will  not  die  at  sea  (par- 
ticular), si  parum  intellexti,  dicam  denuo,  PI.  R.  1103,  tf  V°u  don't 
understand,  I  'II  say  again.  n5n  utar  ea  consuetudine,  si  quid  est  factum 
clementer,  ut  dissolute  factum  criminer,  V.  5,  19,  /  will  not  avail  myself 
of  the  common  practice,  and  if  a  thing  has  been  done  in  a  spirit  of  mercy,  charge 
that  it  ivas  done  in  a  lax  way.  nisi  iam  factum  aliquid  est  per  Flaccum, 
fiet  a  me,  Fam.  3,  n,  3,  unless  something  or  other  has  been  done  already 
through  Flaccust  it  will  be  done  by  me. 

2038.  (e.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperative. 

si  plus  minusve  secuerunt,  se  fraude  est5,  Twelve  Tables  in  Cell.  20, 
I,  49,  if  they  cut  too  much  or  too  little,  it  shall  be  without  penalty  (1613).  si 
vidistis,  dicite,  PL  R.  323,  if  ye  have  seen,  declare,  si  quid  est  peccatum  a 
nobis,  prefer,  T.  Hec.  253,  declare  it,  if  we've  erred  at  all.  si  numquam 
avare  pretium  statui  art!  meae,  exemplum  statuite  in  me,  T.  Hau.  48, 
if  never  like  a  miser  I  have  set  a  price  upon  my  art,  a  pattern  set  in  me.  si 
quos  propinquus  sanguls  patronos  dedit,  iuvate  periclitantem,  Ta.  3, 
1 2,  if  relationship  has  made  any  of  you  his  advocates,  help  him  in  his  straits. 

2039.  (/)  Apodosis  in  the  Present  Subjunctive. 

si  nulla  coloris  principiis  est  reddita  natura,  extempl5  rationem  red- 
dere  possis,  Lucr.  2,  757,  if  atoms  have  no  colour,  you  might  explain  at  once 
(1556).  merits  maledicas  mi,  si  non  id  ita  factumst,  PL  Am.  572, you 
might  with  perfect  right  abuse  me,  if  it  is  not  so  (1556). 

2040.  (g.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

si  nemo  hac  praeteriit,  postquam  intro  abii,  cistella  hie  iaceret,  PI. 
Cist.  683,  if  nobody  has  passed  along  this  way,  since  I  went  in,  a  casket  must 
have  been  lying  here  (1560).  nam  cur  tarn  variae  res  possent  esse  require, 
ex  un5  si'sunt  igni  puroque  creatae  ?  Lucr.  i,  645,  for  how  could  things 
so  motley  be,  I  ask,  if  they  are  made  of  pure  and  simple  Jire  (15^5)  ^ 

2041.  (h.}  Apodosis  in  the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

si  Antonio  Crassus  eloquens  visus  non  est,  tib!  numquam  Cotta 
visus  esset,  O.  106,  >'f  Antony  did  not  hold  Crassus  eloquent, you  would  never 
have  held  Cotta  so  (1561). 

359 


2042-2047-]  Sentences:    The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


(3.)  PROTASIS  IN  THE  IMPERFECT. 

2042.  (a.)  Apodosis  in  the  Present. 

si  turn  non  pertimescebas,  ne  nunc  quidem  perhorrescis  ?  V.  4,  78, 
if  you  were  not  getting  a/raid  then,  are  you  not  getting  scared  even  no^v  ?  si  qui 
senes  ac  defSrmes  erant,  eos  in  hostium  numero  ducit,  V.  5,  64,  if  any 
-were  old  and  homely,  he  considers  them  in  the  light  of  enemies  (1590).  si  ad 
ilium  hereditas  veniebat,  veri  simile  est  ab  illo  necatum,  Inv.  1,89,  if  the 
inheritance  was  coming  to  so  an  of  so,  it  is  likely  that  the  murder  was  committed 
by  that  man.  adulescenti  nihil  est  quod  suscenseam,  si  ilium  minus 
norat,  T.  Ph.  361,  /  have  no  cause  for  anger  with  the  youth,  if  he  was  not 
acquainted  with  the  man. 

2043.  (b.)  Apodosis  in  the  Perfect. 

sed  si  properabas  magis,  pridie  nos  te  hue  duxisse  oportuit,  PI. 
Poen.  525,  but  if  you  were  in  greater  haste ,  you  should  have  brought  us  here  the 
day  before. 

2044.  (c.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect. 

This  combination  is  used  chiefly  of  contemporaneous  action  (1732),  in 
general  conditional  periods:  as,  si  quod  erat  grande  vas,  laeti  adferebant, 
V.  4,  47,  if  any  good- sized  vase  was  ever  found,  they  would  always  bring  it  to 
htm  in  high  glee,  atque  ea  si  erant,  magnam  habebas  dis  gratiam,  PI. 
As.  143,  and  if  them  you  ever  had,  you  were  monstrous  grateful  to  the  gods,  si 
quae  res  erat  maior,  populus  commovebatur,  Sest.  105,  if  a  thing  of  more 
than  ordinary  importance  occurred,  the  populace  was  always  aroused,  hi,  si 
quid  erat  durius,  concurrebant,  I,  48,  6,  whenever  there  was  any  pretty 
sharp  work,  these  men  would  always  fall  to.  For  the  subjunctive  in  such  pro- 
tases, see  2071. 

2045.  (d.)  Apodosis  in  the  Future. 

flebunt  Germanicum  etiam  ignoti:  vindicabitis  v5s,  si  me  potius 
quam  fortunam  meam  fovebatis,  Ta.  2,  71,  as  for  weeping  for  Germanicns, 
that  will  be  done  by  strangers  too  ;  vengeance  will  be  yours,  if  you  honoured  in 
me  more  the  man  than  the  position.  See  Att.  14,  I,  I. 

2046.  (e.)  Apodosis  in  the  Present  Subjunctive. 

fac  animo  magno  sis,  et  si  turbidissima  sapienter  ferebas,  tranquil- 
liora  laete  feras,  Fam.  6,  14,  3,  be  of  great  heart,  and  if  you  bore  anarchy  like 
a  stoic i  bear  a  more  orderly  condition  of  things  with  good  cheer  (1550). 

2047.  (f.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

si  am  abas,  invenires  mutuom,  PL  Ps.  286,  you  should  have  borrowed,  if 
you  were  in  love  (1559).  quod  si  meis  incommodis  laetabantur,  urbis 
tamen  periculo  commoverentur,  Sest.  54,  if  they  did  exult  over  my  mishaps, 
still  they  ought  to  have  been  touched  by  the  danger  to  Rome  (1559). 

360 


Conditional  Periods.       [2048-2052. 

(4.)  PROTASIS  IN  THE  PLUPERFECT. 

2048.  (a.)  Apodosis  in  the  Present. 

si  hoc  ita  fato  datum  erat,  ut  ad  pacem  petendam  venirem,  laetor 
te  mihl  sorte  potissimum  datum,  a  quo  peterem,  L.  30,  30,  3,  if  it  was  so 
ordained  by  fate  that  I  should  come  to  sue  for  peace,  I  am  glad  that  you  are 
allotted  met  of  all  men  in  the  -world,  to  sue  from. 

2049.  (6.)  Apodosis  in  the  Perfect. 

turn  id,  si  falsum  fuerat,  filius  quor  non  refellit  ?     T.  Ph.  400,  if  that 

had  been  untrue,  why  did  not  at  the  time  your  son  disprove  it  ?  vel  officio,  si 
quid  debuerat,  vel  errori,  si  quid  nescierat,  satis  factum  esse  duxit,  D. 
13,  he  thought  he  had  done  enough  for  duty,  if  he  had  been  under  any  obligation* 
enough  for  delusion,  if  he  had  been  acting  under  mistaken  ignorance. 

2050.  (c.}  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect. 

sed  in  aedibus  quid  tibi  meis  nam  erat  negoti  me  absente,  nisi  ego 
iusseram  ?  PI.  Aul.  427,  but  what  business  had  you  in  my  house  in  my  ab- 
sence, unless  I  had  ordered?  si  nihil  in  ista  pugna  Roscii  fecerant,  quam 
ob  causam  tantis  praemiis  donabantur?  RA.  108,  if  the  Rosciuses  had 
not  done  service  in  that  fight,  why  were  they  presented  "with  such  rewards  ? 
Often  of  antecedent  action,  in  general  conditional  periods:  as,  si  quicquam 
caelati  adspexerat,  manus  abstinere,  iudices,  non  poterat,  V.  4,  48,  if  he 
ever  caught  sight  of  a  bit  of  chased  work,  why,  gentlemen,  he  never  could  keep 
his  hands  off,  stomachabatur  senex,  si  quid  asperius  dixeram,  DN.  I, 
93,  the  old  gentleman  was  always  nettled,  if  I  said  anything  harsh,  ac  seu 
longum  post  tempus  venerat  hospes,  sive  conviva  per  imbrem  vicinus, 
bene  erat  non  piscibus  urbe  petitis,  H.6".  2,  2,  118,  and  if  a  friend  dropped 
in,  after  an  absence  long,  or  neighbottr,  come  to  take  pot-luck  upon  a  rainy  day, 
we  feasted  not  on  fish  brought  out  from  town.  For  the  subjunctive  in  such 
protases,  see  2071. 

2051.  (d.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

ante  solem  exorientem  nisi  in  palaestram  veneras,  haud  medio- 
cris  poenas  penderes,  PI.  B.  426,  ere  sunrise  so  you  came  not  to  the  wrest- 
ling school,  amercement  strong  you  had  to  pay  (1552). 


(5.)  PROTASIS  IN  THE  FUTURE. 
2052.  (a.)  Apodosis  in  the  Present. 

cam  sei  curabeis,  perbonast,  PI.  Merc.  526,  if  you'll  take  care  of  her,  ski 
is  first-rate,  quod  si  perferre  non  potero,  opprimi  me  maid,  RA.  10,  if  I 
cannot  succeed  in  bearing  it,  I  would  rather  be  crushed. 


-     Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


2053.  (6.)  Apodosis  in  the  Perfect. 

quam  nisi  defendes,  Romulus  non  bene  vidit  aves,  Prop.  4  (5),  6,  43, 

unless  thou  savest  her,  'twas  ill  that  Romulus  espied  his  birds,  actumst,  si 
quidem  tu  me  hie  ludificabere,  T.  Eu.  717,  airs  up,  that  is  in  case  you  fool 
me  here  (1612).  cui  si  esse  in  urbe  licebit,  vicimus,  Att.  14,  20,  3,  if  he 
shall  be  allowed  to  stay  in  town,  the  day  is  ours  (1612). 

2054.  (c.)  Apodosis  in  the  Future. 

si  erum  insimulabis  malitiae,  male  audies,  T.  Ph.  359,  you  7/  hear  what 
you  won't  like,  if  you  insinuate  anything  wrong  against  master,  vicinis  bonus 
esto  :  si  te  libenter  vicinitas  videbit,  facilius  tua  vendes  ;  si  aedificabis, 
operis,  iumentis,  materie  adiuvabunt,  Cato,  RR.  4,  be  obliging  to  your 
neighbours  :  if  the  neighbourhood  looks  on  you  with  favour,  you  will  find  a  readier 
sale  for  your  produce  ;  if  you  fall  to  building,  they  will  help  you  with  labour, 
draught  animals,  and  building  material,  si  id  audebis  dicere,  causam  in- 
imici  tui  sublevabis,  Caecil.  12,  if  you  venture  to  say  that,  you  will  promote  the 
cause  of  your  enemy,  si  fortuna  volet,  fies  de  rhetore  consul ;  si  volet 
haec  eadem,  fies  de  consule  rhetor,  J.  7, 197 ', if  'fortune  shall  ordain,  a  mag- 
nate from  a  teacher  thou  shalt  be  ;  again  shall  she  ordain,  a  teacher  from  a 
magnate  shalt  thou  be.  non  modo  non  laedetur  causa  nobilitatis,  si  istis 
hominibus  resistetis,  verum  etiam  ornabitur,  RA.  138,  the  interests  of  the 
nobility  will  not  be  damaged,  if  you  resist  those  creatures ;  oh  no,  on  the  contrary, 
they  will  be  promoted.  The  clause  with  si  is  apt  to  take  the  future  perfect 
(2061).  The  future  in  the  apodosis  often  denotes  action  holding  good  at  all 
times :  as,  defencor  p rimum,  ci  poterit,  debebit  vitam  eius,  qui  insimu- 
labitur,  quam  honest  I -simam  dem5nstrare,  Inv.  2,  35,  the  advocate  ought 
in  the  first  place,  if  he  can,  to  prove  that  the  life  of  the  accused  is  eminently  re- 
spectable, quod  adsequemur,  si  cavebimus  ne  in  perturbationes  incida- 
mus,  Off.  i,  131,  we  shall  attain  this  end  if  we  take  care  not  to  be  subject  to  fits 
of  passion.  Sometimes  in  exemplifications  :  si  patriam  prodere  c5nabitur 
pater,  silebitne  filius  ?  Off.  3,  90,  if  a  father  shall  try  to  betray  his  country, 
•will  the  son  keep  siUnt  ?  But  see  2090. 

2055.  (</.)  Apodosis  in  the  Future  Perfect. 

oculum  ego  ecfodiam  tibl: :  dicam  tamen;  nam  si  sic  non  licebit, 
luscus  dixero,  PL  Tri.  463,  7V/  dig  your  eye  out:  :  but  I'll  speak,  nathless  ;  for 
if  I  may  not  as  I  am,  I'll  say  my  say  as  one-eyed  man.  sed  si  te  aequo  ani- 
fno  ferre  accipiet,  neclegentem  feceris,  T.  Andr.  397,  but  if  he  sees  you  take 
it  placidly,  you'll  have  him  off  his  guard.  The  more  usual  combination  is  as 
in  2062. 

2056.  (e.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperative. 

vir  tuos  si  veniet,  iube  domi  opperirier,  PL  Cist.  592,  in  case  your  hus* 
band  comes,  tell  him  to  wait  at  home.  Almost  always  the  second  imperative  is 
used  (1577)  :  as,  si  volet,  suo  vivito,  Twelve  Tables  in  Cell.  20,  i,  45,  if  the 
prisoner  wish,  he  may  subsist  on  his  own  food,  si  veniet  nuntius,  facit5 
ut  sciam,  PL  St.  148,  if  a  messenger  shall  come,  be  sure  you  let  me  know. 
si  de  me  ipso  plura  dicere  videbor,  ignoscitote,  Sest.  31,  if  I  seem  to  harp 
*«o  much  on  myself,  you  must  excuse  me. 

362 


Conditional  Periods.       [2057-2061. 


2057.  (/)  Apodosis  in  the  Present  Subjunctive. 

si  quid  erit,  quod  scribendum  putes,  velim  facias,  Att.  II,  13,  5,  if 
there  shall  be  anything  which  you  think  worth  writing,  I  wish  you  would  write 
(1555).  nam  si  altera  illaec  magis  instabit,  forsitan  nos  reiciat,  T.  Ph. 
717,  for  if  the  other  lady  presses  more,  perhaps  he'll  throw  us  out  (1554).  pe- 
ream,  si  te  ferre  poterunt,  Brut,  in  Fam.  n,  23,  2,  may  I  die,  if  they  shall 
find  it  possible  to  endure  you  (1541 ).  si  quando  ilia  dicet  '  Phaedriam  intro 
mittimus/  Pamphilam  cantatum  provocemus,  T.  Eu.  441,  if  ever  she 
shall  say  '  let  zts  have  Phaedria  in,'  then  let  us  call  out  Pamphila  to  sing 
(1548).  habeat,  si  argentum  dabit,  PI.  R.  727,  she's  welcome  to  them,  if 
she  pays  the  cash  ( 1 548). 


(g.)  Apodosis  in  the  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

si  me  audietis,  adulescentes,  solem  alterum  ne  metueritis,  RP.  i,  32, 
if  vou  will  hearken  to  me,  my  young  friends,  never  fear  a  double  sun  (I551)- 
siri  erit  ille  gemitus  elamentabilis,  vix  eum  virum  dixerim,  TD.  2, 
57,  but  if  his  groan  be  a  long-drawn  wail,  I  could  scarcely  call  him  a  man  (1558). 

(6.)  PROTASIS  IN  THE  FUTURE  PERFECT. 

2059.  (a.)  Apodosis  in  the  Present. 

salvae  aunt,  si  istos  fluctus  devitaverint,  PI.  R.  168,  they  are  saved, 
if  they  escape  those  waves  (1593).  rex  sum,  si  ego  ilium  hominem 
adlexero,  PI.  Poen.  671,  I'm  a  millionaire,  if  I  allure  the  man  (1593). 
crimen  probare  te  censes  posse,  si  ne  causam  quidem  malefic!  pro- 
tuleris  ?  RA.  72,  do  you  think  you  can  prove  your  charge,  if  you  do  not 
even  bring  forward  a  motive  for  the  crime?  quod  si  meam  spem  vis 
improborum  fefellerit,  commendo  vobis  meum  parvum  filium,  (7.4,  23, 
but  if  the  might  of  the  wicked  disappoints  my  hope,  unto  your  keeping  do  I  com- 
mend the  little  son  of  mine. 

2060.  (b.)  Apodosis  in  the  Perfect. 

victus  sum,  si  dixeris,  PI.  Am.  428,  lam  beaten  if  you  tell  (1612).  si 
senserit,  peril,  T.  Andr.  213,  if  he  scents  it,  I'm  done  for  (1612).  si  con- 
servatus  erit,  vicimus,  Fam.  12,  6,  2,  if  he  is  saved,  our  success  is  assured 
(1612).  turn,  hercule,  illo  die  quo  ego  consul  sum  creatus,  male  gesta 
res  publica  est,  si^uleritis,  L.  3,  19,  n,  in  that  case  it  was  indeed  a  bad  day 
for  the  country  when  I  was  made  consul,  if  you  make  the  proposition  (1608). 

2061.  (c.)  Apodosis  in  the  Future. 

peribS,  si  non  fecero,  si  f  axo  vapulabo,  PL  in  Gell.  3,  3, 8,  /  shall  be  done 
for  if  I  don't  do  it,  if  I  do,  I  shall  be  done  up  too  (1626).  oculum  ego  ecfo- 
diam  tibf,  si  verburn  addideris,  PI.  Tri.  463,  I'll  gouge  your  eyf  out  for  you, 
if  you  say  another  word,  si  te  interfici  iussero,  residebit  in  re  publica 
reliqua  coniuratorum  manus,  C.  I,  12,  if  2  order  you  to  be  dispatched,  the 
rest  of  the  gang  of  conspirators  will  be  left  in  the  state. 

363 


2062-2065.]   Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


2062.  (</.)  Apodosis  in  the  Future  Perfect. 

si  dlxerS  mendacium,  solens  me~b  more  fecerS,  PI.  Am.  198,  if  fiction 
I  relate,  I  shall  have  done  but  in  my  usual -way.  si  tii  argentum  attuleris, 
cum  1115  perdidero  fidem,  PI.  Ps.  376,  if  you,  sir,  bring  the  cash,  I '//  break 
my  word  to  him.  respiraro,  si  te  videro,  Att.  2, 24,  5,  /  shall  be  myself  again, 
if  I  see  you.  pergratum  mih!  feceris,  si  de  amicitia  disputaris,  L.  i6,you 
will  do  me  a  very  great  favour,  if  you  will  discourse  on  friendship. 

2063.  (e.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperative. 

Generally  the  longer  forms  of  the  imperative  are  used  (1577) :  patronus 
si  client!  fraudem  fecerit,  sacer  estS,  Twelve  Tables  in  Serv.  to  V.  6,  609, 
if  a  patron  shall  cheat  his  client,  let  him  be  doomed,  servitum  tibi  me  abdu- 
citS,  ni  fecerS,  PI.  Ps.  520,  if  I  don't  do  it,  take  me  off  to  be  your  slave,  hoc 
si  ef  feceris,  quodvis  dSnum  a  me  optato,  T.  Eu.  1056,  if  you  do  this,  ask 
any  gift  you  please  of  me.  si  me  adsequi  potueris,  ut  tib!  videbitur, 
sepelito,  TD.  I,  103,  if  you  can  ever  find  me,  then  bury  me  as  you  think  best. 
Rarely  the  shorter  forms  :  inpinge  pugnum,  si  muttiverit,  PI.  B.  800,  drive 
your  fist  into  him  if  he  says  booh,  si  tumidos  accedere  fastus  senseris, 
incept5  parce  referque  pedem,  O.  AA.  I,  715,  ifthou  shalt  see  disdain  come 
swelling  high,  give  o'er  and  beat  retreat. 

2064.  (/)  Apodosis  in  the  Present  Subjunctive. 

sibl  habeat,  si  non  extemplS  ab  eo  abduxerS,  PI.  Per.  164,  he  may 
keep  her,  if  I  don't  carry  her  off  that  minute  (1548).  caecum  me  ferri  con- 
fitear,  si  te  potuisse  superari  dixero,  Plane.  6,  if  I  say  that  you  can  be  sur- 
passed, I  should  own  myself  swept  along  like  a  blind  man  ( 1 556).  turn 
magis  adsentiare,  si  ad  maiora  pervenero,  RP.  \,  62,  you  would  agree  all 
the  more  if  I  come  at  once  to  weightier  points  (1556). 

SOME  SPECIAL  USES. 

2065.  An  indicative  protasis  with  si  is  often  used  to  assume  a  general 
truth  as  a  proof  either  for  another  general  truth,  or  for  a  particular  fact. 

(a.)  si  voluptatis  sensum  capit,  dolores  etiam  capit,  DN.  3,  32,  if  it  is 
msceptible  of  pleasure,  it  is  also  susceptible  of  pain,  si  omnes,  qui  rfii  pub- 
licae  consulunt,  cari  nobis  esse  debent,  certe  in  primis  imperatores.  si 
ferae  partus  suos  diligunt,  qua  nos  in  liberos  nostrojs  indulgentia  esse 
debemus,  DO.  2,  168,  if  all  people  who  are  devoted  to  the  public  service  are  dear 
to  us,  then  assuredly  our  military  men  ought  always  to  be  particularly  dear.  If 
wild  beasts  always  love  their  young,  how  kind  ought  we  always  to  be  to  our  own 
children.  (£.)  si  pietati  summa  tribuenda  laus  est,  debetis  moveri,  cum 
Q.  Metellum  tarn  pie  lugere  videatis,  DO.  2, 167,  if  filial  affection  is  always 
to  be  held  in  high  honour,  you  ou^ht  to  be  touched  in  this  instance,  seeing  such 
affectionate  grief  in  Metellus.  si  nox  opportuna  est  eruptiSni,  sicut  est, 
haec  profecto  noctis  aptissima  hora  est,  L.  7,  35,  10,  if  night  is  always 
favourable  for  a  sortie,  and  it  always  is,  this  particular  hour  of  the  night  is  the 
very  best  time. 

364 


Conditional  Periods.       [2066-2068. 


2066.  An  indicative  protasis  with  si  often  assumes  a  fact,  past  or  present, 
as  an  argument  for  another  fact,  or  for  a  general  truth. 

In  this  case  the  apodosis,  which  is  usually  a  question,  often  takes  the  sub- 
junctive (1565). 

si  Sulla  potuit  efficere,  ut  dictator  diceretur,  cur  hie  non  possit  ? 
Att.  9,  15,  2,  if  Sulla  could  succeed  in  being  appointed  dictator,  -why  cannot  this 
man  ?  si  Zenoni  licuit  inauditum  rei  nomen  imponere,  cur  non  liceat 
Catoni  ?  Fin.  3,  15,  if  Zeno  was  allowed  to  give  a  new  name  to  a  thing,  why 
should  not  Cato  be  allowed?  quod  si  Graeci  leguntur  a  Graecis,  quid  est 
cur  nostri  a  nostris  non  legantur  ?  Fin.  i,  6,  but  if  Greeks  are  read  by 
Greeks,  why  should  not  Romans  be  read  by  Romans  ? 

2067.  An  indicative  protasis  with  si  often  assumes  a  fact  which  is  de- 
clared in  the  apodosis  to  be  no  reason  for  another  fact. 

In  this  case  the  negative  usually  begins  the  period,  si,  for  which  quia 
or  etsi  is  sometimes  substituted,  sometimes  has  idcirco,  Ilic5,  or  continu5, 
rarely  propterea  or  ideo,  as  correlative  in  the  apodosis. 

non,  si  tib!  antea  profuit,  semper  proderit,  Ph.  8, 12,  even  if  it  has  done 
you  good  in  the  past,  that  is  no  reason  why  it  always  will  in  the  future,  non  si 
Opimium  defendisti,  idcirc5  te  isti  bonum  civem  putabunt,  DO.  2,  170, 
suppose  you  did  defend  Opimitis,  that  is  no  reason  why  your  friends  will  think 
you  a  patriot,  nee  si  omne  enuntiatum  aut  verum  aut  falsum  est, 
sequitur  flic5,  esse  causas  immutabilis,  quae  prohibeant  secus  cadere 
atque  casurum  sit,  Fat.  28,  and  even  if  every  aeclaration  is  either  true  or  false, 
it  does  not  follow  without  any  further  ado  that  there  are  unchangeable  caiises  to 
prevent  a  thing  falling  out  different  from  the  way  it  promises  to  fall  out.  non 
continue,  si  me  in  gregem  sicariorum  contuli,  sum  sicarius,  RA.  94,  it 
does  not  forthwith  follow  that  if  I  have  joined  a  band  of  bravoes,  I  am  a  bravo. 

miror,  mirum  si. 

2068.  mire*  or  mirum  est  (mira  sunt)  may  introduce  a  conditional  pro- 
tasis, instead  of  a  clause  with  quod  (1851)  or  the  accusative  with  the  infini- 
tive (2188). 

Generally  the  main  clause  is  actually  or  virtually  negatived:  as,  minus 
mirandumst,  illaec  aetas  si  quid  illorum  facit,  PL  B.  409,  'tis  not  to  be  won- 
dered at,  if  youth  does  things  like  that,  idne  tu  mirare,  si  patrissat  filius  ? 
PI.  Ps.  442,  can  you,  sir,  wonder  at  it  if  the  son  plays  the  father  ?  nee  mirum 
si  utebatur  consilio,  Quinct.  18,  and  it  is  no  wonder  if  he  followed  the  advice. 
mirer,  si  vana  vestra  auctoritas  est  ?  L.  3,  21,  4,  can  I  think  it  strange  if 
your  influence  is  of  no  account  (1565)  ?  Rarely  the  main  clause  is  positive  : 
as,  mirabar  hoc  si  sic  abiret,  T.Andr.  \y  $,  I  wondered  if  it  was  going  to  end 
so  (1773).  miror  si  quemquam  amicum  habere  potuit,  L.  54,  I  wonder 
if  he  could  have  had  a  friend  in  the  world.  In  old  colloquial  style  mirum  ni 
is  found  :  as,  mirum  ni  hie  me  exossare  cogitat,  PI.  Am.  319,  strange  that 
he  does  n't  think  of  boning  me.  ubi  nunc  ipsus  ?  :  :  mirum  ni  domist,  T. 
Andr.  598,  "where  is  he  now?  : :  at  home  of  course.  So  once  in  Livy  :  mirum 
esse  ni  castra  hostium  oppugnentur,  L.  3,  28,  5,  that  he  shouldn't  be 
surprised  if  the  enemy's  camp  were  being  stormed  (1724).  gaudeo  si  is  found 
once  in  Cicero,  and  terreo,  metus  est  si,  or  the  like  occurs  a  few  times  in 
Tacitus.  For  si  -in  expressions  of  trial,  hope,  expectation,  &c.,  see  1777. 

365 


2069-2071.]    Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  FOR  THE  INDICATIVE. 

2069.  The  indicative  in  the  protasis  is  occasionally  replaced 
by  the  subjunctive,  as  follows  : 

2070.  (i.)  The  present  or  perfect  subjunctive  is  sometimes  used  in 
general  present  suppositions,  regularly  in  the  indefinite  second  person 
singular,  rarely  with  other  persons  (1730)  :  as, 

(a.)  nam  doll  non  doll  sunt  nisi  astu  colas,  sed  malum  maxumum,  si 
id  palam  provenit,  PI.  Cap,  221,  for  tricks  are  never  tricks,  unless  you  handle 
them  with  craft,  but  damage  dire,  in  case  the  thing  gets  out ;  here  the  indicative 
provenit  shows  that  colas  is  due  to  the  person,  nee  calidae  citius  dece- 
dunt  corpore  febres,  textilibus  si  in  picturis  ostroque  rubentl  iacteris, 
quarn  si  in  plebeia  veste  cubandum  est,  Lucr.  2,  34,  nor  sooner  will  hot 
fevers  leave  the  limbs,  if  on  gay  tapestries  and  bhishing  piirple  you  should  toss, 
than  if  perforce  your  bed  you  make  on  pallet  rude,  quod  est  difficile,  nisi 
speciem  prae  te  bom  viri  feras,  Off.  2,  39,  and  this  is  a  hard  thing,  unless 
you  have  the  exterior  of  a  good  man.  nee  habere  virtutem  satis  est  nisi 
utare,  RP.  I,  2,  and  to  have  virtue  is  not  enough,  unless  one  use  it.  siquoi 
mutuom  quid  dederis,  fit  pro  propriS  perditum,  PI.  Tri.  1051,  if  aught 
you  've  lent  to  anyone,  't  is  not  your  own,  but  lost,  nam  nullae  magis  res 
duae  plus  negoti  habent,  si  occeperis  exornare,  PI.  Poen.  212,  for  no  two 
things  give  more  trouble  if  you  once  begin  to  fit  them  out.  nulla  est  excusatio 
peccati,  si  amici  causa  peccaveris,  L.  37,  it  is  no  excuse  for  a  sin  if  you 
have  sinned  from  friendship. 

(b.)  suos  quisque  opprimi  non  patitur,  neque,  aliter  si  facial,  ullam 
inter  suos  habet  auctoritatem,  6,  11,4,  nobody  suffers  his  vassals  to  be  put 
down,  and  if  he  ever  act  otherwise,  he  has  no  influence  among  his  people. 
laeduntur  arteriae,  si  acri  clam5re  compleantur,  Cornif.  3,  21,  it  always 
hurts  the  windpipe,  if  it  be  filled  out  with  a  sharp  scream,  turpis  excusatio 
est,  si  quis  contra  rem  publicam  se  amici  causa  fecisse  fateatur,  L.  40, 
it  is  always  a  discreditable  apology,  if  a  man  confess  that  he  has  been  unpatriotic 
from  motives  of  friendship.  Britanni  iniuncta  imperil  munera  impigre 
obeunt,  si  iniuriae  absint,  Ta.  Agr.  13,  the  Britons  are  always  perfectly  ready 
to  perform  the  duties  enjoined  on  them  by  the  Roman  government,  if  they  be  not 
maltreated. 

2071.  (2.)  The  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  sometimes 
used  in  general  past  suppositions  (1730). 

This  use  begins  with  Catullus  and  Caesar,  the  indicative  being  the  regu- 
lar classical  construction  (2044,  2050). 

chommoda  dicebat,  si  quando  commoda  vellet  dicere  Arrius,  Cat. 
84,  I,  hadvantages  said  Arrius,  if  advantages  he  ever  meant  to  say.  si  quis 
prehenderetur,  consensu  militum  eripiebatur,  Caes.  C.  3,  no,  4,  every  time 
a  man  was  taken  up,  he  was  rescued  by  the  joint  action  of  the  rank  and  file,  sin 
autem  locum  tenere  vellent,  nee  virtuti  locus  relinquebatur,  neque 
coniecta  tela  vitare  poterant,  5,  35,  4,  but  if  on  the  other  hand  they  imder- 
took  to  hold  their  position,  there  was  never  any  opening  for  bravery,  nor  could 
they  ever  dodge  the  shower  of  missiles,  sin  Numidae  propius  accessissent, 
ibf  virtutem  ostendere,  S.  /.  58,  3,  they  showed  forth  their  valour  every  time 
Vie  Ntimidians  drew  near  (1535). 

366 


Conditional  Periods.        [2072-2076. 


(B.)    SUBJUNCTIVE   USE. 

2072.  The  present  or  perfect  subjunctive  may  be 
used  in  a  conditional  protasis  of  future  time. 

2073.  The  apodosis  is  usually  in  the  present  subjunctive,  less  fre- 
quently in   the  perfect   subjunctive.     The   imperfect  and  pluperfect 
subjunctive  are  rare  (2089). 

2074.  The  indicative  is  sometimes  used  in  the  apodosis,  especially 
in  expressions  of  ability,  duty,  &c.  (1495)  ;  non  possum  is  regularly 
in  the  indicative  when  the  protasis  is  also  negative.     For  the  future 
indicative  the  periphrastic  form  is  sometimes  used. 

2075.  In  the  early  period,  before  the  imperfect  subjunctive  had  been 
shifted  to  denote  present  time  in  conditional  sentences  (2091),  the  present 
subjunctive  was  used  to  express  action  non-occurrent  in  present  time. 
Examples  of  this  use  are  found  in  Plautus :  as,  si  honeste  censeam  te 
facere  posse,  suadeam ;  verum  non  potest ;  cave  faxis,  PI.  MG.  1371, 
if  I  thought  that  you  could  do  the  thing  with  credit  to  yourself,  I  should  advise 
you  to;  but  'tis  impossible ;  so  don't  you  do  it.  vocern  te  ad  cenam,  nisi 
egomet  cenem  foris,  PL  St.  190, 1  should  ask  you  home  to  dine,  if  I  were  not 
dining  out  myself.  Such  sentences  must  not  be  confused  with  those  in 
which  an  action  from  the  nature  of  things  impossible  is  represented  as  of 
possible  occurrence. 


(i.)  PROTASIS  IN  THE  PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 
2076.  (a.)  Apodosis  in  the  Present  Subjunctive. 

at  pigeat  postea  nostrum  erum,  si  vos  eximat  vinculis,  PI.  Cap.  203, 
but  it  may  rue  our  master  by  and  bv,  if  he  should  take  you  out  of  bonds,  quid  si 
eveniat  desubito  prandium,  ubl  ego  turn  accumbam  ?  PI.  B.  79,  suppose  a 
lunch  should  suddenly  come  off,  where  is  your  humble  servant  then  to  lie  (1563)  ? 
hanc  viam  si  asperam  esse  negem,  mentiar,  Sest.  100,  if  I  say  that  this 
path  is  not  rough,  I  should  not  tell  the  truth,  si  deus  te  interroget,  quid  re- 
spondeas  ?  Ac.  2,  80,  if  a  god  ask  you,  what  would  you  answer  9  haec  si 
tecum  patria  loquatur,  nonne  impetrare  debeat?  C.  I,  19,  if  thy  country 
plead  with  thee  thus,  ought  she  not  to  carry  her  point  ?  si  existat  hodie  ab 
inferis  Lycurgus,  se  Spartam  antiquam  agnoscere  dicat,  L.  39,  37,  3,  // 
Lycurgus  rise  this  day  from  the  dead,  he  would  say  that  he  recognized  the  Sparta 
of  yore,  eos  non  curare  opmor,  quid  agat  humanum  genus ;  nam  si 
curent,  bene  boms  sit,  male  mails,  quod  nunc  abest,  E.  in  Div.  2,  104, 
DN.  3,  79,  but  little  care  the  gods,  I  trow,  how  fares  the  race  of  man  ;  for  should 
they  care,  the  good  were  blest,  the  wicked  curst ;  a  thing  that  really  cometh  not  to 
pass, 

367 


2O77-2°8o.]     Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


2077.  (b.)  Apodosis  in  the  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

si  aequom  siet  me  plus  sapere  quam  v5s,  dederim  vobis  consilium 

catum,  PI.  K.  257,  if  it  becoming  be  for  me  to  have  more  wit  than  ye,  sage  coun- 
sel might  I  give  (1558).  aufugerim  potius  quam  redeam,  si  eo  mihi  re- 
deundum  sciam,  T.  Hec.  424,  I'd  run  away  sooner  than  go  back,  if  I  should 
Juar  I  had  to  (1558).  nee  satis  sci5,  nee  si  sciam,  dlcere  ausim,  L,.praef.  i, 
in  the  first  place  I  do  not  know  very  well,  and  secondly  if  2  should  knovu,  I 
should  not  venture  to  say  (1555).  iniussu  tuo  extra  ordinem  numquam 
pugnaverim,  non  si  certam  victoriam  videam,  L.  7,  10,  2,  without  orders 
from  you  I  never  should  fight  out  of  ranks,  no,  not  if  I  saw  victory  was  certain 
(1558).  turn  veto  nequiquam  hac  dextra  capitolium  servaverim,  si 
civem  commilitonemque  meum  in  vincula  duel  videam,  L.  6,  14,4,  upon 
my  word,  in  that  case  I  should  prove  to  have  saved  the  capital  in  vain,  if  I  saw  a 
townsman  and  brother-in-arms  of  mine  haled  to  jail,  multos  circa  unam  rem 
ambitus  fecerim,  si  quae  variant  auctores  omnia  exequi  velim,  L.  27, 
27,  12,  /  shoitld  make  a  long  story  about  one  subject,  if  I  should  undertake  to  go 
through  all  the  different  versions  of  the  authorities. 

2078.  (c.)  Apodosis  in  the  Present  Indicative. 

qui  si  decem  habeas  linguas,  mutum  esse  addecet,  PI.  B.  128,  if  you 
should  have  a  dozen  tongues,  'tis  fit  you  should  be  diimb  (2074).  si  pro  peccatis 
centum  ducat  uxSres,  parumst,  PI.  Tri.  1186,  if  he  should  wed  a  hundred 
wives  in  payment  for  his  sins,  'tis  not  enough,  intrare,  si  possim,  castra  hos- 
tium  volo,  L.  2,  12,  5,  I  propose  to  enter  the  camp  of  the  enemy,  if  I  be  able,  te 
neque  debent  adiuvare,  si  possint,  neque  possunt,  si  velint,  V.  4,  20,  they 
ought  not  to  help  you,  if  they  could,  and  cannot,  if  they  would,  si  vocem 
rerum  natura  repente  mittat,  quid  respondemus  ?  Lucr.  3,  931,  if  Nature 
of  a  sudden  lift  her  voice,  what  answer  shall  we  make  ?  si  quaeratur, 
idemne  sit  pertinacia  et  perseverantia,  definitionibus  iudicandum  est, 
T.  87,  if  it  be  asked  whether  obstinacy  and  perseverance  are  the  same,  it  must  be 
settled  by  definitions  (2074). 

2079.  (d.}  Apodosis  in  the  Future. 

quadrigas  si  inscendas  lovis  atque  hinc  fugias,  ita  vix  poteris 
effugere  infortunium,  PI.  Am.  450,  Jove 's  four-in-hand  if  you  should  mount, 
and  try  to  fiee  from  here,  even  so  you  'II  scarce  escape  a  dreadful  doom,  siqui- 
dem  summum  lovem  te  dlcas  detinuisse,  malam  rem  effugies  num- 
quam, PL  As.  414,  e'en  shouldst  thou  say  imperial  Jove  detained  thee,  chastise- 
ment thou  'If  ne'er  avoid,  si  fractus  inlabatur  orbis,  inpavidum  ferient 
ruinae,  H.  3,  3, 7,  should  heaven's  vattlt  crumbling  fall,  him  all  undaunted  will 
its  ruin  strike,  neque  tu  hoc  dicere  audebis,  nee  si  cupias,  licebit,  V.  2, 
167,  you  will  not  dare  to  say  this,  sir,  nor  if  you  wish,  will  you  be  allowed. 

2080.  (f.)  Apodosis  in  the  Future  Perfect. 

n5n  tantum,  si  proelio  vincas,  gloriae  adieceris,  quantum  ademeris, 
Si  quid  adversi  eveniat,  L.  30,  30,  21,  you  will  not  acquire  as  much  glory,  if 
you  succeed  in  battle,  as  you  will  lose,  if  any  reverse  occur. 

368 


Conditional  Periods.        [2081-2086. 


2081.  (/)  Apodosis  in  the  Periphrastic  Future. 

non  laturus  sum,  si  iubeas  maxume,  PI.  B.  1004,  I  don't  intend  to  be 
the  bearer,  skould you  urge  me  e'er  so  much,  quid,  si  hostes  ad  urbem  ve- 
niant,  facturi  estis?  L.  3,  52,  7,  suppose  the  enemy  march  on  the  town,  what 
do  you  intend  to  do  ? 

2082.  (g.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

cantus  et  Lunam  deducere  temptat  et  faceret,  si  non  aera  repulsa 
sonent,  Tib.  I,8»2I(OTd£f&  essays  to  draw  Luna  down  and  would  succeed  if 
clashing  brass  should  not  resound  (1560).  ne  si  navigate  quidem  velim,  ita 
gubernarem,  ut  somniaverim  ;  praesens  enim  poena  sit,  Div.  2,  122, 
again,  siippose  I  undertake  to  go  sailing,  I  should  not  lay  my  course  as  I  may  have 
dreamed  ;  for  the  penalty  ivould  be  swift  (1560).  si  hodie  bella  sint,  quale 
Etruscum  fuit,  quale  Gallicum  ;  possetisne  ferre  Sextium  consulem 
esse  ?  L.  6,  40, 17,  suppose  there  be  wars  to-day  like  the  Etruscan  and  the  Gal- 
lic wars  :  could  you  bear  to  see  Sextius  consul  (1565)  ? 

2083.  (h.)  Apodosis  in  the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

carmina  ni  sint,  ex  umero  Pelopis  non  nituisset  ebur,  Tib.  i,  4,  63, 
suppose  there  be  no  verse,  from  Pelops*  shoulder  ne'er  had  ivory  gleamed  (i  561 ). 


(2.)  PROTASIS  IN  THE  PERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE, 

2084.  (a.)  Apodosis  in  the  Present  Subjunctive. 

debeam,  credo,  isti  quicquam  furcifero,  si  id  fecerim,  T.  Eu.  861,  7 
should  be, forsooth,  responsible  to  the  rogue,  if 1 'should  do  it  ( 1 556).  si  de  caelo 
villa  tacta  siet,  de  ea  re  verba  uti  fiant,  Cato,  RR.  14,  3,  if  the  villa  be 
struck  by  lightning,  let  there  be  utterances  about  the  case  (1547).  si  a  coronS 
relictus  sim,  non  queam  dicere,  Br.  192,  ///  should  ever  be  abandoned  bv 
my  audience,  I  should  not  be  able  to  speak,  id  si  accident,  simus  armati,  TD. 
T>  78,  if  this  have  happened,  let  us  be  on  our  guard  (1548).  cur  ego  simulem 
me,  si  quid  in  his  studiis  operae  posuerim,  perdidisse  ?  Par.  33,  why 
should  I  have  the  affectation  to  say  that  if  I  have  spent  any  time  in  these  pur- 
suits, I  have  thrown  it  away  (1563)  ?  See  also  2090. 

2085.  (b.)  Apodosis  in  the  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

si  paululum  modo  quid  te  fugerit,  ego  perierim,  T.  Hau.  316,  should 
you  have  missed  the  smallest  point,  a  dead  man  I  should  be.  See  also  2090. 

2086.  (c.)  Apodosis  in  the  Future  Indicative. 

si  forte  liber  fieri  occeperim,  mittam  nuntium  ad  te,  PI.  MG.  1362,  // 
haply  I  should  be  by  way  of  getting  free,  I'll  send  you  word,  si  forte  morbus 
amplior  factus  siet,  servom  intro  iisse  dicent  Sostratae,  T.  Hec.  330,  if 
her  illness  should  get  worse,  they  'II  say  a  slave  of  Sostrata's  went  in  there. 

24  369 


2087-2090.]    Sentences  :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


2087.  (d.)  Apodosis  in  the  Periphrastic  Future. 

si  Veis  incendium  oriurq  sit,  Fldenas  inde  quaesituri  sumus  ?  L 
5>  54»  l»  if  a  fire  break  out  at  Vei,  are  we  going  to  move  from  there  to  Fidenae  ? 

2088.  (e.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

siquis  hoc  gnato  tuo  tuos  servos  faxit,  qualem  haberes  gratiam  ? 
PI.  Cap.  711,  suppose  a  slave  of  yours  has  done  this  for  a  son  of  yours,  how  grate- 
ful should  you  have  been  ? 

CONVERSION   TO   PAST  TIME. 

2089.  An  indeterminate  subjunctive  protasis  is  rarely  thrown  into  the 
past,  the  present  and  perfect  becoming  respectively  imperfect  and  pluper- 
fect.    In  this  case  the  form  is  the  same  as  that  of  a  protasis  of  action  non- 
occurrent  (2091),  and  the  conversion  occurs  only  when  it  is  evident  from  the 
context  that  past  action  is  supposed,  which  may  or  may  not  have  occurred  : 
as, 

cur  igitur  et  Camillus  doleret,  si  haec  post  trecentos  et  quinqua- 
ginta  fere  annos  eventura  putaret,  et  ego  doleam,  si  ad  decem  milia 
annorum  gentem  aliquam  urbe  nostra  potituram  putem  ?  TD.  I,  90, 

why  then  would  Camillus  have  fretted,  if  he  thought  this  would  occur  after  a 
lapse  of  some  three  hundred  and  fifty  years,  and  why  should  I  fret,  if  2  think 
that  some  nation  may  seize  Rome  some  ten  thousand  years  hence  ?  erat  sola  ilia 
navis  c5nstrata ;  quae  si  in  praedonum  pugna  versaretur,  urbis  instar 
habere  inter  illos  piraticos  myoparones  videretur,  V.  5,  89,  this  was  the 
only  vessel  with  a  deck  ;  and  supposing  she  figured  in  the  engagement  with  the 
corsairs,  she  would  have  loomed  ^tp  like  a  town,  surrounded  by  those  pirate  cock- 
boats. Sardus  habebat  ille  Tigellius  hoc;  Caesar  si  peteret  non  quic- 
quam  proficeret,  H.  S.  I,  3,  4,  Tigellius  the  Sardian  had  this  way ;  suppos- 
ing Caesar  asked  him,  naught  had  he  availed. 

PERIODS  OF   EXEMPLIFICATION. 

2090.  The  present  subjunctive  is  particularly  common   in  exemplifica- 
tion.    The  perfect  is  sometimes  used  in  the  protasis,  rarely  in  the  apodo- 
sis  :  as, 

si  pater  fana  expilet,  indicetne  id  magistratibus  films  ?  Off.  3,  90,  // 
a  father  should  plunder  temples,  would  the  son  report  it  to  the  magistrates  ?  si 
quis  pater  familias  supplicium  non  sumpserit,  utrum  is  clemens  an 
crudelissimus  esse  videatur  ?  C.  4, 12,  assume  for  the  sake  of  argument  that 
a  householder  have  not  inflicted  punishment,  would  he  seem  merciful,  or  a  mon- 
ster of  cruelty?  si  scieris  aspidem  occulte  latere  uspiam,  et  velle  ali- 
quem  imprudentem  super  earn  adsidere,  improbe  feceris,  nisi 
monueris  ne  adsidat,  Fin.  2,  59,  suppose  a  man  should  know,  e.g.  that  there 
was  a  snake  hiding  somewhere,  and  that  somebody  was  going  to  sit  down  on  the 
snake  unawares  ;  he  would  do  wrong,  if  he  did  not  tell  him  he  must  not  sit  down 
there.  In  such  periods  the  future  is  also  used,  but  less  frequently  :  see  2054 

370 


Conditional  Periods.       [2091—2094. 


II.    PROTASES   OF   ACTION    NON-OCCURRENT. 

2091.  A  conditional  period  in  which  the  non-occur- 
rence of  the  action  is  implied  takes  the  imperfect  or 
pluperfect  subjunctive  both  in  the  protasis  and  in  the 
apodosis.     The    imperfect  usually  denotes  present  or 
indefinite  time,  and  the  pluperfect  denotes  past  time. 

For  the  present  subjunctive  in  such  conditions,  see  2075. 

2092.  The  imperfect  sometimes  denotes  past  time  (1559).     When  future 
time  is  referred  to,  the  protasis  is  usually  in  the  imperfect  of  the  periphrastic 
future,  commonly  the  subjunctive,  but  sometimes  the  indicative  (2108). 

2093.  The   apodosis   is  very  rarely  in  the   present  subjunctive   (2098). 
The  periphrastic  future  is  sometimes   used,  commonly  in  the   indicative 
(2097,  2100). 

(r.)  PROTASIS  IN  THE  IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

2094.  (<*•)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

(a.)  Protasis  and  apodosis  both  denoting  present  action;  this  is  the 
usual  application:  si  intus  esset,  evocarem,  PI.  Ps.  640,  I  should  call  him 
cut,  if  he  were  in.  is  iarn  pridem  est  mortuus.  si  viveret,  verba  eius 
audiretis,  RC.  42,  that  person  has  long  been  dead;  if  he  were  alive,  you  would 
hear  his  evidence,  adnuere  te  video  ;  proferrem  libros,  si  negates,  DN. 
i,  113,  /  see  you  nod  assent ;  I  should  bring  out  the  books,  if  you  maintained 
the  opposite,  si  L.  Mummius  aliquem  istorum  videret  Corinthium 
cupidissime  tractantem,  utrum  ilium  civem  excellentem,  an  atrien- 
sem  diligentem  putaret  ?  Par.  38,  if  Mummius  should  see  one  of  your  con- 
noisseurs nursing  a  piece  of  Corinthian,  and  going  into  perfect  ecstasies  over 
it,  what  would  he  think  ?  that  the  man  was  a  model  citizen  or  a  thoroughly 
competent  indoor-man  ?  quod  si  semper  optima  tenere  possemus,  baud 
sane  consilio  multum  egeremus,  OP.  89,  now  if  we  could  always  be  in 
possession  of  what  is  best,  we  should  not  ever  stand  in  any  special  need  of 
reasoning. 

(b.)  Protasis  and  apodosis  both  denoting  past  action:  haec  si  neque 
ego  neque  tu  fecimus,  non  siit  egestas  facere  nos  ;  nam  si  esset  unde 
id  fieret,  faceremus  ;  et  tu  ilium  tuom,  si  esses  homo,  sineres  nunc 
facere,  T.  Ad.  103,  if  neither  yoti  nor  I  have  acted  thus,  'twas  poverty  that 
stinted  us  ;  for  if  we'd  had  the  means,  we  should  have  done  so  too;  and  you 
would  let  that  boy  of  yours,  if  you  were  human,  do  it  now.  Here  esset  refers 
to  past  time,  esses  to  present,  num  igitur  eum,  si  turn  esses,  temera- 
rium  civem  putares  ?  Ph.  8,  14,  would  you  therefore  have  thought  him,  if  you 
had  lived  then,  a  hotheaded  citizen  ?  si  universa  pr5vincia  loqui  posset, 
hac  voce  uteretur  ;  quoniam  id  non  poterat,  harum  rerum  actorem  ipsa 
delegit,  Caecil.  19,  if  the  collective  province  could  have  spoken,  she  would  have 
used  these  words ;  but  since  she  could  not,  she  chose  a  manager  for  the  case 
herself. 

371 


2O95~2C9^0    Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


2095.         (b.)  Apodosis  in  the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

invenissemus  iam  diu,  sei  viveret,  PI.  Men.  241,  were  he  alive,  we 
should  have  found  him  long  ago.  si  mihi  secundae  res  de  amore  meo  es- 
sent,  iam  dudum  scio  venissent,  T.  Hau.  230,  if  everything  were  well  about 
my  love,  I  know  they  would  have  been  here  long  ago.  quae  nisi  essent  in 
senibus,non  summum  c5nsilium  maiores  nostri  appellassent  senatum, 
CM.  19,  unless  the  elderly  were  in  general  characterized  by  these  qualities,  our 
ancestors  would  not  have  called  the  highest  deliberative  body  the  body  of  elders. 


2096.  (c.)  Periphrastic  Apodosis. 

quibus,  si  Romae  esset,  facile  contentus  futurus  erat,  Aft.  12,  32,  2, 
with  which,  if  he  were  in  Rome,  he  would  readily  be  satisfied (2093).  quos  ego, 
si  tribum  me  triumphare  prohiberent,  testes  citaturus  fui  rerum  a  me 
gestarum,  L.  38,  47,  4,  the  very  men  whom  I  was  to  call  to  bear  witness  to  my 
deeds,  if  the  tribunes  should  refuse  me  a  triumph. 


(2.)  PROTASIS  IN  THE  PLUPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

2097.  (a.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

(a.)  Protasis  denoting  past,  apodosis  present  action :  si  ante  voluisses, 
esses  ;  nunc  sero  cupis,  PL  Tri.  568,  if  you  had  wished  it  before,  you  might 
be  ;  as  it  is,  you  long  too  late,  si  non  mecum  act  at  em  egisset,,  hodie  stulta 
viveret,  PI.  MG.  1320,  if  she  hadn't  spent  her  life  with  me,  she  *d  be  a  fool  to- 
day, si  turn  illi  respondere  voluissem,  nunc  r6I  publicae  consulere  non 
possem,  Ph.  3,  33,  if  I  had  chosen  to  answer  the  man  then,  I  should  not  be 
able  to  promote  the  public  interest  now.  quo  quidem  tempore  si  meum 
consilium  valuisset,  tu  hodie  egeres,  n5s  liberi  essemus,  Ph.  2,  37,  if  by 
the  way  at  that  time  my  counsel  had  been  regarded,  you,  sir,  would  be  a  beggar 
to-day  and  we  should  be  free. 

(b.)  Protasis  and  apodosis  both  referring  to  past :  Slim  si  advenissem, 
magis  tu  turn  istuc  diceres,  PL  Cap.  871,  if  I  had  come  before,  you'd  have 
said  so  then  all  the  more,  num  igitur,  si  ad  centesimum  annum  vixis- 
set,  senectutis  eum  suae  paeniteret?  CM.  19,  suppose  therefore  he  had 
lived  to  be  a  hundred,  would  he  have  regretted  his  years  ?  Indos  aliasque  si 
adiunxisset  gentes,  impedimentum  maius  quam  auxilium  traheret,  L. 
9»  J9'  5'  if  hg  hftd  added  the  Indians  and  other  nations,  he  would  have  found 
them  a  hindrance  rather  than  a  help  in  his  train. 

2098.  (b.)  Apodosis  in  the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

si  appellasses,  respondisset  nomini,  PL  Tri.  927,  if  you  had  called  him, 
he'd  have  answered  to  his  name,  nisi  fugissem,  medium  praemorsisset, 
PL  in  Cell.  6,  9,  7,  if  I  hadn't  run  away,  he'd  have  bitten  me  in  two.  si  ve- 
nisses  ad  exercitum,  a  tribunis  visus  esses  ;  non  es  autem  ab  his  visus ; 

372 


Conditional  Periods.       [2099-2102. 


non  es  igitur  ad  exercitum  profectus,  Inv.  i,  87,  if  you  had  come  to  the 
army,  you  would  have  been  seen  by  the  tribunes  ;  but  you  have  not  been  seen  by 
them  ;  therefore  you  have  not  been  to  the  army,  si  beatus  umquarn  fuisset, 
beatam  vitam  usque  ad  rogum  pertulisset,  Fin.  3,  76,  if  he  had  ever  been 
a  child  of  fortune,  he  would  have  continued  the  life  of  bliss  to  the  funeral  pyre. 
nisi  mllites  essent  defessi,  omnes  hostium  copiae  deleri  potuissent,  7, 
88,  6,  unless  the  soldiers  had  been  utterly  exhausted,  the  entire  force  of  the  enemy 
might  have  been  exterminated  (2101).  quod  si  Catilma  in  urbe  remansisset, 
dimicandum  nobis  cum  illo  fuisset,  C.  3,  17,  but  if  Catiline  had  staid  in 
tswnt  we  should  have  had  to  fight  with  the  villain  (2101). 

2099.  (c.)  Apodosis  in  the  Present  Subjunctive. 

vocem  ego  te  ad  me  ad  cenam,  frater  tuos  nisi  dixisset  mih!  te 
apud  se  cenaturum  esse  hodie,  PI.  St.  510,  /  should  like  to  invite  you 
home  to  dinner,  if  my  brother  hadn't  told  me  that  you  were  to  dine  with  him 
to-day. 

2100.  (c.)  Periphrastic  Apodosis. 

(a.)  si  tacuisset,  ego  eram  dicturus,  PI.  Cist.  152,  if  she  had  held  her 
peace,  I  was  going  to  tell  (2093).  si  P.  Sestius  occisus  esset,  fuistisne  ad 
arma  ituri?  Sest.  81,  if  Sestius  had  been  slain,  were  you  disposed  to  rush  to 
arms  ?  conclave  illud,  ubl  erat  mansurus,  si  Ire  perrexisset,  conruit, 
Div.  I,  26,  the  suite  of  rooms  where  he  was  going  to  spend  the  night,  if  he  had 
pushed  on,  tiimbled  down.  Teucras  fuerat  mersura  carinas,  m  prius  in 
scopulum  transformata  foret,  O.  14,  72,  she  had  gone  on  to  sink  the  Trojan 
barks  unless  she  had  been  changed  into  a  rock,  (b.)  quern  si  vicisset,  habi- 
turus  esset  impunitatem  sempiternam,  Mil.  84,  and  if  he  overcame  him, 
he  would  be  likely  to  have  exemption  from  punishment  forever  and  ever  (2093). 
aut  non  fat5  interiit  exercitus,  aut  si  fato,  etiam  si  obtemperasset  au- 
spiciis,  idem  eventurum  fuisset,  Div.  2,  21,  the  destruction  of  his  army  -was 
either  not  due  to  fate,  or  if  to  fate,  it  would  have  happened  all  the  same,  even  if  he 
had  conformed  to  the  auspices. 

INDICATIVE  APODOSIS. 

2101.  (i.)  The  apodosis  of  verbs   of  ability,  duty,  &c.  (1495- 
1497),  including  the  gerundive  with  sum,  is  often  in  the  indicative,  the 
imperfect  taking  the  place  of  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive, 
and  the  perfect  that  of  the  pluperfect  subjunctive.     But  the  subjunc- 
tive is  also  found,  especially  possem  rather  than  poteram. 

2102.  (a.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect  Indicative. 

(a.)  Of  present  action :  quod  si  Romae  Cn.  Pompeius  privatus 
esset,  tamen  ad  tantum  bellum  is  erat  mittendus,  IP.  50,  now  if  Pompey 
were  at  Rome,  in  private  station,  still  he  would  be  the  man  to  send  to  this  impor- 
tant war.  quern  patris  loco,  si  ulla  in  te  pietas  esset,  colere  debebas, 
Ph.  2,  99,  whom  you  ought  to  honour  as  a  father,  if  you  had  any  such  thing  as 
affection  in  you. 

373 


2103-2106.]  Sentences:   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


(b.)  Of  past  action :  quid  enim  poterat  Heius  respondere,  si  esset 
improbus  ?  V.  4,  i6,for  what  answer  could  Hcjus  have  given,  if  he  were  an 
unprincipled  man  ?  si  sordidam  vestem  habuissent,  lugentium  Persei 
c§sum  praebere  speciem  poterant,  L.  45,  20,  5,  //  they  had  worn  dark 
clothing,  they  might  have  presented  the  mien  of  mourners  for  the  fall  of  Perseus. 

2103.  (b.)  Apodosis  in  the  Perfect  Indicative. 

non  potuit  reperire,  si  ipsi  soli  quaerendas  dares,  Iepidi5res  duas, 
PL  MG.  803,  if  you  assigned  the  search  to  Sol  himself,  he  couldn't  have  found 
two  jollier  girls,  quo  modo  pultare  potui  si  non  tangerem  ?  PL  Most. 
462,  how  could  /  have  knocked,  if  /  hadn't  touched  the  door?  licitumst,  si 
velles,  PL  Tri.  $66,you  might  have  been,  if  you  'd  wished,  si  meum  impenum 
exsequi  voluisses,  interemptam  oportuit,  T.  Hau.  634,  if  you  had  been 
willing  to  follow  my  commands,  she  should  have  been  dispatched,  consul  esse 
qui  potui,  nisi  eum  vitae  cursum  tenuissem  a  pueritia?  RP.  i,  10,  how 
could  /  have  been  consul  unless  from  boyhood  /  had  taken  that  line  in  life  ?  si 
eum  captivitas  in  urbem  pertraxisset,  Caesarem  ipsum  audire  potuit, 
Ta.  Z).  17,  if  captivity  had  carried  him  to  the  city,  he  could  have  heard  Caesar 
himself.  Antoni  gladios  potuit  contemnere,  si  sic  omnia  dixisset,  J. 
10,  123,  Antonius'  swords  he  might  have  scorned,  if  all  things  he  had  worded  so. 
si  unum  diem  morati  essetis,  moriendum  omnibus  fuit,  L.2,  38,  5,  if  you 
had  staid  one  day,  you  must  all  have  died. 

2104.  (2.)  Other  verbs  also   sometimes   have   a  past  indicative 
apodosis,  usually  an  imperfect  or  pluperfect,  to  denote  an  action  very 
near  to  actual  performance,  which  is  interrupted  by  the  action  of  the 
protasis. 

Naturally  such  a  protasis  generally  contains  an  actual  or  a  virtual  nega- 
tive ;  but  positive  protases  are  found  here  and  there,  chiefly  in  late  writers. 

2105.  (a.)  Apodosis  in  the  Perfect  Indicative. 

paene  in  foveam  decidi,  ni  hie  adesses,  PL  Per.  594,  7  had  almost 
fallen  into  a  snare,  unless  you  were  here,  nee  veni,  nisi  fata  locum  sedemque 
dedissent,  V.  II,  112,  nor  had  /  come,  unless  the  fates  a  place  and  seat  had 
given,  pons  sublicius  iter  paene  hostibus  dedit,  ni  unus  vir  fuisset 
Horatius  Codes,  L.  2,  10,  2,  the  pile-bridge  all  but  gave  a  path  to  the  enemy, 
had  it  not  been  for  one  heroic  soul,  Horatius  Codes. 

2106.  (b.)  Apodosis  in  the  Imperfect  Indicative. 

quin  labebar  longius,  nisi  me  retinuissem,  Leg.  i,  52,  why,  I  was  going 
to  drift  on  still  further,  if  I  had  not  checked  myself,  si  per  L.  Metellum  lici- 
tum  esset,  mattes  illorum  veniebant,  V.  5,  129,  //  Metellus  had  not  pre- 
vented, the  mothers  of  those  people  were  just  coming ;  here  the  protasis  may  be 
held  to  contain  a  virtual  negative  ;  so  in  the  last  example  on  this  page. 
castra  excindere  parabant,  ni  Mucianus  sextam  Iegi5nem  opposuisset, 
Ta.  H.  3, 46,  they  were  preparing  to  destroy  the  camp,  had  not  Mucianus  checked 
them  with  the  sixth  legion,  si  destinata  provenissent,  regno  imminebat, 
Ta.  H.  4,  18,  had  his  schemes  succeeded,  he  was  close  upon  the  throne. 

374 


Conditional  Periods.       [210 7-2 1 1  o. 


2107.  (f.)  Apodosis  in  the  Pluperfect  Indicative. 

quingentos  simul,  m  hebes  machaera  foret,  un5  ictu  occideras,  PL 

MG.  52,  Jive  hundred,  had  your  glaive  not  blunted  been,  at  one  fell  swoop  you  'd 
slam,  praeclare  viceramus,  nisi  Lepidus  recepisset  Antonium,  Fam. 
12,  10,  3,  we  had  gained  a  splendid  victory,  if  Lepidus  had  not  taken  Antony 
under  his  protection,  quod  ipsum  fortuna  eripuerat,  nisi  unius  amici 
opes  subvenissent,  RabP.  48,  even  this  boon  Jortune  had  wrenched  from 
him,  unless  he  had  been  assisted  by  a  single  friend,  si  gladium  non  strlnxis- 
sem,  tamen  triumphum  merueram,  L.  38,  49,  12,  if  I  had  not  drawn  my 
sword,  1  had  still  earned  my  triumph,  perierat  imperium,  si  Fabius  tan- 
turn  ausus  esset  quantum  ira  suadebat,  Sen.  de  Ira,  i,  u,  5,  the  empire 
had  been  lost,  if  Fabius  had  ventured  as  far  as  passion  urged, 

2108.  (3.)  PERIPHRASTIC  PROTASIS. 

(a.)  ac  si  tibl  nemo  respSnsurus  esset,  tamen  causam  demonstrate 
n5n  posses,  Caecil.  43,  and  even  supposing  that  nobody  were  going  to  answer 
yon,  still  you  would  not  be  able  to  make  the  case  good  (2092).  pluribus  vos, 
milites,  hortarer,  si  cum  armatis  dimicatio  futura  esset,  L.  24,  38,  9,  / 
should  exhort  you  at  greater  length,  my  men,  if  there  was  to  be  a  tug  with  armed 
men  (2092).  (b.}  si  domum  tuam  expugnaturus  eram,  non  tempe- 
rassem  vino  in  unum  diem  ?  L.  40,  14,  4,  if  I  intended  to  capture  your 
house,  should  I  not  have  abstained  from  wine  for  a  day  ( 2092)  ? 


VARIATION  OF  THE  PROTASIS. 

2IOQ.  Instead  of  a  conditional  protasis  with  si  or  nisi,  equivalents 
are  often  used. 

2110.  Thus,  the  protasis  may  be  coordinated  (1701),  or  be  introduced  by 
a  relative  pronoun  (1812),  by  quod  (1843),  cum  (l859»  1860),  ub!  (1932),  ut 
or  ne  (1963),  dum,  dum  modo,  modo  (2003),  or  quando  (2011).  Or  the 
protasis  may  be  intimated  by  sine,  without,  cum,  with,  by  a  participle  or  abla- 
tive absolute,  by  a  wish,  or  otherwise  :  as, 

(a.)  nemo  umquam  sine  magna  spe  immortalitatis  se  pro  patria 
of  ferret  ad  mortem,  TD.  \,  32,  nobody  would  ever  expose  himself  to  death  for 
his  country  without  a  well-grounded  conviction  of  immortality,  cum  hac  dote 
poteris  vel  mendico  nubere,  PI.  Per.  396,  with  such  a  dowry  you  can 
e'en  a  beggar  wed.  Sulla,  credo,  hunc  petentem  repudiasset,  Arch.  25, 
Sulla,  I  suppose,  would  have  turned  my  client  away,  if  he  petitioned  him.  quae 
legentem  fefellissent,  transferentem  fugere  non  possunt,  Plin.  Ep.  7,  9, 
2,  what  wmdd  have  escaped  a  reader  can't  escape  a  translator,  vivere  ego 
Britannico  potiente  rerum  poteram?  Ta.  13,  21,  as  for  me,  could  I  live,  if 
Britannicus  were  on  the  throne  (2102)  ?  nisi  te  salvo  salvi  esse  non  possu- 
mus,  Marc.  32,  without  you  safe,  safe  we  cannot  be.  aspiceres  utinam, 
Saturnia:  mitior  esses,  O.  2,  435,  would  thou  couldst  see,  Saturnia:  thou 
wouldst  gentler  be. 


2  i  1 1-2 1 1 3.]    Sentences :    The  Subordinate  Sentence. 


(b.)  habet  Srationem  talem  consul,  qualem  numquam  Catilma 
victor  habuisset,  Sest.  28,  he  makes  a  speech  — yes,  and  he  a  consul  —  such  as 
a  Catiline  would  never  have  made,  if  flushed  "with  success,  reverearis  occur- 
sum,  non  reformides,  Plin.  Ep.  I,  10,  7,  you  might  "well  be  abashed  in  his 
presence,  but  you  would  not  be  afraid,  di  immortales  mentem  illi  perdito 
ac  furiosS  dederunt  ut  huic  faceret  insidias  ;  aliter  perire  pestis  ilia 
n5n  potuit,  Mil.  88,  the  immortal  gods  inspired  that  mad  miscreant  to  waylay 
my  client ;  otherwise,  that  monster  could  not  have  been  destroyed.  For  the  use 
of  absque  in  a  coordinate  protasis  in  Plautus  and  Terence,  see  1701,  1421. 

2x  1 1.  The  verb  of  the  protasis  is  sometimes  omitted  :  as  in  abridged  sen- 
tences (1057),  or  when  it  may  be  easily  supplied  (1036). 

aut  enim  nemo,  aut  si  quisquam,  ille  sapiens  fuit,  L.  9,  for  either  no- 
body or,  if  anybody,  that  was  a  wise  man.  si  eveniet,  gaudebimus  :  sin  secus, 
patiemur,  PI.  Cas.  377,  if  it  shall  come  to  pass,  glad  shall  we  be  ;  if  else,  we  shall 
endure,  me  voluisse,  si  haec  civitas  est,  civem  esse  me  ;  si  n6n,  exsu- 
lem  esse,  Fam.  7,  3,  5,  that  I  wished,  if  this  is  a  commonwealth,  to  be  a  citizen 
of  it;  if  it  is  not,  to  be  an  exile,  sumeret  alicunde  ...  si  nullo  alio  pacto, 
faenore,  T.  Ph.  299,  he  could  have  got  it  from  somebody  or  other  .  .  .  if  in  no 
other  way,  on  usury  (2113). 

VARIATION  OF  THE  APODOSIS. 

21 12.  The  apodosis  is  sometimes  represented  by  the  accusative  of  ex- 
clamation (1149),  or  the  vocative  :  as, 

mortalem  graphicum,  si  servat  fidem,  PI.  Ps.  519,  O  what  a  pattern 
creature,  if  he  keeps  his  word.  5  miserum  te,  si  intellegis,  miseriorem,  si 
non  intellegis,  hoc  litteris  mandari,  Ph.  2,  54,  wretched  man  if  you  are 
aware,  more  wretched  if  you  are  not  aware,  that  all  this  is  put  down  in  black 
and  white,  inimice  lamnae,  Crispe  Sallusti,  nisi  temperato  splendeat 
usu,  H.  2,  2,  2,  thou  foe  to  bullion,  Crispus  Sallustius,  so  it  shine  not  with  tem- 
pered use.  Also  the  future  participle  in  poetry  and  in  prose  from  Livy  on. 

2113.  The  verb  of  the  apodosis,  or  the  entire  apodosis,  is  often 
omitted.     In  the  latter  case  an  appended  verb  might  easily  be  mis- 
taken for  the  apodosis. 

quid  si  caelum  ruat  ?  T.  Han.  719,  what  if  the  sky  should  fall?  qu5 
mihi  fortunam,  si  non  conceditur  uti  ?  H.  E.  i,  5,  12,  why  wealth  for  me, 
if  wealth  I  may  not  use?  nisi  restituissent  statuas,  vehementer  minatur, 
V.  2,  162,  he  threatens  vengeance  dire,  if  they  did  not  put  the  statues  back  in  their 
place,  quae  supplicatio  si  cum  ceteris  conferatur,  hoc  interest,  C.  3,  15, 
if  this  thanksgiving  be  compared  with  all  others,  there  would  be  found  the  follow- 
ing difference,  non  edepol  ubi  terrarum  sim  scio,  si  quis  roget,  PI.  Am. 
336,  upon  my  word  I  don't  know  where  on  earth  I  am,  if  anyone  should  ask. 
si  Valeric  qui  credat,  quadraginta  milia  hostium  sunt  caesa,  L.  33,  10, 
8,  if  anybody  believe  such  a  man  as  Valerius,  there  were  forty  thousand  of  the 
enemy  slain.  A  clause  with  si  or  nisi  is  often  used  parenthetically :  as,  si 
placet,  si  videtur,  sis,  sultis,  if  you  please,  si  quaeris,  if  you  must  know,  in 
fact,  si  dis  placet,  please  heaven,  nisi  me  fallit,  //  /  am  not  mistaken,  &C., 
&c.  For  wishes  introduced  by  6  si,  without  an  apodosis,  see  1546. 

376 


Conditional  Periods.       [211 4-2 1 1 6 . 


2114.  The  apodosis  is  sometimes  expanded  by  inserted  expressions.     So 
particularly  by  vereor  ne,  equivalent  to  fortasse  ( 1958),  non  dubito  quin, 
to  prefects  (1986),  or  a  form  of  sum  with  a  relative  pronoun :  as, 

quae  conetur  si  velim  commemorare,  vereor  ne  quis  existimet 
me  causam  nobilitatis  voluisse  laedere,  RA.  135,  if  /  should  undertake  to 
set  forth  his  high  and  mighty  schemes,  possibly  it  might  be  thought  that  I  wished 
to  damage  the  cause  of  the  conservatives,  si  turn  P.  Sestius  animam  edidis- 
set,  non  dubito  quin  aliquando  statua  huic  statueretur,  Sest.  83,  if  Sestius 
had  given  up  the  ghost  then,  a  statue  would  doubtless  at  some _day  have  been  set 
up  in  his  honour,  quod  ille  si  repudiasset,  dubitatis  quin  6i  vis  esset  ad- 
lata  ?  Sest.  62,  if  he  had  rejected  this,  have  you  any  doubt  that  violent  hands 
•would  have  been  laid  on  him  ?  sescenta  sunt  quae  memorem,  si  sit  otium, 
PI.  Aul.  320,  there  are  a  thousand  things  that  I  could  tell,  if  I  had  time. 

2115.  For  expressions  of  trial,  hope,  or  expectation,  followed  by  a  conditional 
protasis  with  si,  see  1777. 


CONCESSIVE  PROTASES. 
etsi,  tametsi  (tamenetsi),  etiamsi. 

21 16.  etsi,  tametsi,  though,  etiamsi,  even  if,  or  sometimes  sim- 
ple si,  if,  is  used  to  introduce  a  concessive  protasis.  The  verb  of  the 
protasis  is  either  indicative  or  subjunctive ;  but  the  indicative  is  the 
prevailing  construction,  especially  with  etsi.  The  apodosis  often  has 
tamen  as  an  adversative  correlative,  even  with  tametsi. 

etsi  is  rare  in  poetry ;  not  in  Sallust.  Sometimes  it  is  used  like  quam- 
quam  to  append  a  fresh  main  sentence  (2153).  tametsi  belongs  chiefly  to 
colloquial  style,  though  Sallust  often  uses  it;  not  in  the  Augustan  poets  or 
Tacitus,  etiamsi  is  not  found  in  Plautus  or  Caesar. 

(a.}  non  vidi  earn,  etsi  vidi,  PL  MG.  407,  I  saw  her  not,  although  I  saw 
her.  quo  me  habeam  pacto,  tametsi  non  quaeris,  doceb5,  Lucilius  in 
Gell.  18,  8,  2,  /'//  tell  you  how  I  am,  though  you  do  not  inquire,  etiamsi 
multi  mecum  contendent.  tamen  omnis  superabo,  Fam.  5,  8,  4,  though  1 
shall  have  many  rivals,  yet  I  will  outdo  them  all.  tametsi  causa  postulat, 
tamen  praeteribo,  Quinct.  13,  though  the  case  calls  for  it,  still  I  will  let  it  pass. 
Caesar,  etsi  in  his  locis  maturae  sunt  hiemes,  tamen  in  Britanniam 
proficisci  contendit,  4,  20,  I,  though  the  winter  always  sets  in  early  in  these 
parts,  nevertheless  Caesar  made  haste  to  proceed  to  Britain.  Caesar,  etsi  intel- 
legebat,  qua  de  causa  ea  dicerentur,  Indutiomarum  ad  se  venire  iussit, 
5,  4,  I,  though  Caesar  was  aware  of  his  motives  in  saying  so,  he  directed  In- 
dutiomarus  to  come  to  him. 

(6.)  etsi  taceas,  palam  id  quidem  est,  PI.  Aul.  418,  though  you  should 
hold  your  tongue,  still  that  at  least  is  plain,  etsi  nihil  aliud  Sullae  nisi  con- 
sulatum  abstulissetis,  tamen  eo  contentos  v5s  esse  oportebat,  Suil.  90, 
even  though  you  had  robbed  Sulla  of  nothing  but  the  consulship,  still  you  ought 
to  be  satisfied  with  that,  equidem,  etiamsi  oppetenda  mors  esset,  in 
patria  mallem  quam  in  externis  locis,  Fam.  4,  7, 4,  for  my  part,  even  though 
death  were  to  be  faced,  I  should  prefer  it  in  my  native  land  rather  than  abroad. 

377 


2ii  7-2 12i.]  Sentences :   The  Subordinate  Sentence. 

CONDITIONAL  COMPARISONS. 
quasi  (quam  si),  tamquam  si,  ut  or  velut  si. 

2117.  si  following  a  word  meaning  than  or  as  is  used  with  the 
subjunctive  in  conditional  comparisons. 

In  this  use,  quasi  (quam  si  twice  in  Tacitus)  and  tamquam  si  are  found 
at  all  periods,  ut  si  is  found  in  Terence  once,  in  Cicero  (not  in  the  ora- 
tions), once  in  Livy,  sometimes  in  later  writers,  velut  si  begins  with  Caesar ; 
not  in  Cicero,  ac  si  is  found  once  in  the  Bell.  Hisp.  and  in  late  Latin. 

2118.  si  is  often  omitted  after  tamquam,  and  (from  Livy  on)  sometimes 
after  velut.     After  quasi  it  is  sometimes  inserted  in  Plautus,  Lucretius,  and 
late  Latin,     ceu  is  sometimes  used,  chiefly  in  poetry,  for  tamquam  si.     The 
main  clause  often  has  as  correlative  ita,  sic,  perinde,  proinde,  similiter,  or 
non  secus. 

2IIQ.  The  tense  of  the  subjunctive  is  usually  regulated  by  the  se- 
quence of  tenses,  in  Cicero  nearly  always  with  quasi  and  tarn  quam  si. 

quid  me  sic  salutas  quasi  dudum  non  videris  ?  PI.  Am.  682,  -why 
dost  thou  greet  me  thus  as  if  but  now  thou  hadst  not  looked  on  me  ?  quid  ego 
his  testibus  iitor,  quasi  res  dubia  sit?  Caecil.  14,  -why  do  I  employ  these 
witnesses,  as  if  it  were  a  case  involving  doubt?  tamquam  si  claudus  sim, 
cum  fustist  ambulandum,  PI.  As.  427,  I  have  to  take  my  -walks  with  a  stick, 
as  if  I  were  a  lame  man.  tamquam  extruderetur,  ita  cucurrit.  Ph.  10,  10, 
he  rushed  away  as  if  he  had  been  kicked  out.  quod  absentis  Ariovisti  cru- 
delitatem,  velut  si  cdram  adesset,  horrerent,  i,  32,  4,  because  they  trembled 
at  Ariovistus's  barbarity,  absent  as  he  was,  just  as  if  he  stood  before  their  eyes. 
me  quoque  iuvat,  velut  ipse  in  parte  laboris  ac  periculi  fuerim,  ad 
finem  belli  Punici  pervenisse,  L.  31, 1, 1, 1  feel  glad  myself  at  having  finally 
reached  the  end  of  the  Punic  war,  as  if  I  had  had  a  direct  'hand  in  the  work  and 
the  danger. 

2120.  The~imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  sometimes  used,  even 
when  the  leading  verb  is  in  a  primary  tense,  to  mark  action  more  distinctly 
as  non-occurrent  (2091) :  as, 

eius  neg5tium  sic  velim  suscipias,  ut  si  esset  res  mea,  Fam.  2,  14,  / 
wish  you  would  undertake  his  business,  just  as  if  it  were  my  own  affair,  mg 
audias,  precor,  tamquam  si  mih!  quiritanti  intervenisses,L.4O,  9,  7,  listen 
to  me,  I  pray  you,  as  if  you  had  come  at  a  cry  from  me  for  help,  ius  iuran- 
dum  perinde  aestimandum  quam  si  lovem  fefellisset,  Ta.  i,  73,  as  for 
the  oath,  it  must  be  counted  exactly  as  if  he  had  broken  one  sworn  on  the  name  of 
Jupiter.  This  is  the  more  usual  way  in  Cicero  with  ut  si. 

2121.  quasi,  ut,  or,  from  Livy  on,  tamquam  or  velut,  as  if,  is  sometimes 
used  with  participle  constructions,  nouns,  and  abridged  expressions  :  as, 

quasi  temere  de  re  publica  locutus  in  carcerem  coniectus  est,  DN. 
2,  6,  on  the  ground  that  he  had  been  speaking  without  good  authority  about  a 
state  matter,  he  was  clapped  in  jail,  restitere  Romani  tamquam  caelesti 
voce  iussi,  L.  i,  12,  7,  the  Romans  halted  as  if  bidden  by  a  voice  from  heaven. 
laeti,  ut  explorata  victoria,  ad  castra  pergunt,  3,  18,  8,  in  high  spirits,  as  if 
victory  were  assured,  they  proceeded  to  the  camp. 

378 


Connection  of  Sentences     [2122-2127. 


2122.  In  old  Latin,  quasi  is  found  a  few  times  for  the  original  quam  Si  after 
a  comparative:  as,  me  nem5  magis  respiciet,  quasi  abhinc  ducentos  an- 
nos  fuerim  mortUOS,  PI.  Tru.  340,  nobody  -will  pay  any  more  attention  to  me  than 
if  I  had  been  dead  two  centuries.  It  is  also  used  (once  in  classical  Latin,  CM.  71)  in 
periods  of  actual  comparison,  like  tamquam  (1908),  with  the  indicative:  as,  senex 
ille  ill!  dlxit,  quasi  ego  nunc  tibi  dico,  PI.  St.  545,  that  old  man  said  to  him, 
as  I  now  say  to  you.  For  its  use  in  figurative  comparisons,  see  1908,  1944.  l'<>r 
tamquam  introducing  a  reason  &c.,  see  1909,  a  late  usage  found  rarely  with  quasi 
and  ut. 


CONNECTION    OF   SEPARATE   SENTENCES 
OR   PERIODS. 

2123.  Separate   sentences   or   periods  have   a   connective    more 
commonly  in  Latin  than  in  English.     Sometimes,  however,  like  the 
members  of  single  periods,  they  are  for  special  reasons  put  asyndeti- 
cally  (1637). 

(A.)  WITHOUT  A   CONNECTIVE. 

2124.  Asyndeton   is   common   with   two   or    more   separate 
sentences  or  periods : 

2125.  (Vz.)  To  represent  a  series  of  actions  as  occurring  at  the 

same  moment :  as, 

hie  diffisus  suae  saluti  ex  tabernaculo  prodit;  videt  imminere 
hostes  ;  capit  arma  atque  in  porta  consistit ;  consequuntur  hunc  cen- 
turiones ;  relinquit  animus  Sextium  gravibus  acceptis  vulneribus,  6,  38, 

2,  despairing  of  his  life,  he  comes  out  of  the  ttnt  ;  sees  the  enemy  dose  at  hand ; 
seizes  arms  and  takes  his  stand  at  the  gate  ;  the  centurions  rally  round  him  ; 
Sextius  becomes  unconscious,  receiving  severe  "wounds. 

2126.  (<£.)  When  an  occurrence  is  represented  as  consisting  of 
many  successive  actions  :  the  Enumerati've  Asyndeton :  as, 

peroravit  aliquando,  adsedit.  surrexi  ego.  respirare  visus  est, 
quod  non  alius  potius  diceret.  coepi  dicere.  usque  eo  animadvert!, 
iudices,  eum  alias  res  agere,  antequam  Chrysogonum  nominavi;  quem 
simul  atque  attigi,  statim  homo  se  erexit,  mirari  visus  est.  intellexi 
quid  eum  pupugisset,  J?A.6o,  after  a  while  he  wound  up,  took  his  seat ;  up 
rose  your  humble  servant.  He  seemed  to  take  courage  from  the  fact  it  was  no- 
body else.  I  began  to  speak.  I  noticed,  gentlemen,  that  he  was  inattentive  all 
along  till  I  named  Chrysogonus  ;  but  the  moment  I  touched  on  him,  the  creature 
perked  up  at  once,  seemed  to  be  surprised.  I  knew  what  the  rub  was. 

2127.  (V.)  When  the  last  sentence  sums  up  the  result  of  the  pre- 
ceding with  emphasis  :  the  Asyndeton  of  Summary  :  as, 

379 


2128-2130.]    Sentences:  Connection  of  Sentences. 

hi  de  sua  salute  desperantes,  aut  suam  mortem  miserabantur,  aut 
parentes  suos  commendabant.  plena  erant  omnia  timoris  et  luctus, 
Caes.  C.  2,  41,  8,  despairing  of  their  lives,  they  either  bewailed  their  O2vn  death, 
or  strove  to  interest  people  in  their  parents.  In  short,  it  was  one  scene  of  terror 
and  lamentation. 


(B.)  WITH  A   CONNECTIVE. 

2128.  Separate  sentences  or  periods  may  be  connected : 
(i.)  by  pronominal  words:  (a.)  demonstrative  or  determina- 
tive ;  (£.)  relative  ;  (2.)  by  conjunctions  and  adverbs. 


(l.)     PRONOMINAL    WORDS. 

(dr.)   DEMONSTRATIVE  AND    DETERMINATIVE  WORDS 
AS   CONNECTIVES. 

2I2Q.  hie  and  is  serve  as  connectives  at  the  beginning  of  a 
new  period.  In  English  the  equivalent  word  is  usually  placed  not 
at  the  beginning  as  a  connective,  but  after  some  words. 

Gallia  est  divisa  in  partes  tres,  quarum  unam  incolunt  Belgae, 
aliam  Aquitam,  tertiam  Celtae.  hi  omnes  lingua,  institutis,  legibus 
inter  se  differunt,  I,  I,  I,  Gaztl  is  divided  into  three  parts •,  one  of  which  is  occu- 
pied by  Belgians,  another  by  Aquitanians,  and  the  third  by  Kelts.  In  language, 
customs,  and  laws  these  are  all  different  from  each  other,  apud  Helvetios 
nobilissimus  fuit  Orgetorix.  is  M.  Messala  et  M.  Pisone  consulibus 
coniurationem  nobilitatis  fecit,  I,  2,  i,  among  the  Helvetians  the  man  of 
highest  rank  was  Orgetorix.  In  the  consulship  of  Messala  and  Pi  so  he  got  up  a 
conspiracy  among  the  nobles.  angustSs  se  finis  habere  arbitrabantur. 
his  rebus  adducti  constituerunt  ea  quae  ad  proficiscendum  pertinerent 
comparare.  ad  eas  res  conficiendas  biennium  sib!  satis  esse  duxerunt. 
ad  eas  res  conficiendas  Orgetorix  deligitur.  is  siW  legatiSnem  sus- 
cepit,  I,  2,  5,  they  thought  they  had  a  narrow  territory  ;  so  they  resolved  in 
consequence  to  make  such  preparations  as  were  necessary  for  a  move.  They 
considered  two  years  ample  to  do  this.  Orgetorix  is  chosen  to  do  this.  He  took 
upon  himself  the  office  of  envoy. 

2130.  Particularly  common  are  demonstrative  words  at  the 
beginning  of  a  new  period,  to  show  that  the  first  action  necessarily 
took  place  or  was  natural. 

Dionysius  tyrannus  SyracCsis  expulsus  Corinth!  pueros  docebat ; 
usque  e5  imperio  carere  non  poterat,  TD.  3,  27,  after  his  expulsion  from 
Syrac^ise,  the  tyrant  Dionysius  kept  school  at  Corinth  ;  so  incapable  was  he  of 
getting  along  without  governing. 

380 


Copulative  and  Disjunctive.   [2131-2135. 


(b.)   RELATIVES  AS  CONNECTIVES. 

2131.  qui  serves  to  connect  a  new  period  when  it  may  be  trans- 
lated by  a  demonstrative,  or  when  it  is  equivalent  to  et  is,  is  autem, 
is  enim,  is  igitur:  as, 

perpetraret  Anicetus  promissa.  qui  nihil  cunctatus  poscit  sum- 
mam  sceleris,  Ta.  14,  7,  Anicetus  must  carry  out  his  agreement.  Without  any 
ado  he  asks  to  have  the  entire  management  of  the  crime.  For  other  examples, 
see  1835. 

2132.  The   neuter  accusative    quod,   as  to  that,  as  to    which, 
whereas,  now,  so,  is  used  to  connect  a  new  period,  especially  before 
si,  nisi,  etsi,  utinam  (1837)  :  as, 

quod  si  tu  valeres,  iam  mini  quaedam  explorata  essent,  Att.  7,  2, 6, 
whereas  if  you  were  well  yourself  ,  some  points  would  have  been  clear  to  me  before 
this,  quod  si  diutius  alatur  controversia,  fore  uti  pars  cum  parte 
civitatis  confligat,  7,  32,  5,  now  if  the  dispute  V  kept  up  any  longer,  one  half 
of  the  community  would  quarrel  with  the  other,  quod  nisi  mllites  essent 
defessi,  omnes  hostium  copiae  deleri  potuissent,  7,  88,  6,  so  if  the 
soldiers  had  not  been  utterly  spent,  all  the  forces  of  the  enemy  might  have  been 
exterminated. 


(2.)    CONJUNCTIONS    AND    ADVERBS. 

2133.  The  conjunctions  and  adverbs  used  to  coordinate  sentences 
are:  (a.)  copulative  and  disjunctive ;  (£.)  concessive  and  adversative ; 
(c.)  causal  and  illative. 


(a.)   COPULATIVE  AND  DISJUNCTIVE. 

et,  neque  or  nee,  -que,  atque  or  ac,  aut. 

et. 

2134.  et,  and,  simply  adds,  as  in  English  (1645).  But  it  is 
often  used  in  such  a  connection  that  a  modification  of  the  trans- 
lation is  required  to  bring  out  the  sense. 

^2135.  et  may  continue  the  discourse  with  a  concessive  sentence, 
which  is  to  be  followed  by  an  adversative.  In  such  cases  quidem 
often  stands  in  the  concessive  sentence:  as, 

primores  civitatis  eadem  orant.  et  ceterl  quidem  movebant  minus ; 
postquam  Sp.  Lucretius  agere  coepit,  consul  abdicavit  se  consulatu, 

L.  2,  2,  8,  the  head  men  of  the  state  make  the  same  request.  Now  the  others  did 
not  influence  him  much.  But  when  Lucretius  began  to  take  steps  the  consul  re- 
signed his  consulship. 


2136-2142.]   Sentences:  Connection  of  Sentences. 


2136.  et,  and  strange  to  say,  and  if  you  W  believe  it,  introduces 
something  unexpected :  as, 

iamque  tres  laureatae  in  urbe  statuae,  et  adhuc  raptabat  Africam 
Tacfarinas,  Ta.  4,  23,  there  were  already  three  triumphal  statues  in  Rome, and, 
strange  to  say,  Tacfarinas  was  still  harrying  Africa. 

2137.  et,  and  really,  and  in  fact,  and  to  be  sure;  in  this  sense  it 
is  usually  followed  immediately  by  the  verb:  as, 

multa  quae  non  volt  videt.     et  multa  fortasse  quae  volt !     CM.  25, 

one  sees  muck  that  one  would  not.     Aye,  and  much  perhaps  that  one  would i 

2138.  et   introducing   a   sentence   explaining  in  detail  a  general 
idea  before  given  may  be  translated  namely  :  as, 

consules  religio  tenebat,  quod  prodigiis  aliquot  nuntiatis,  non  facile 
litabant.  et  ex  Campania  nuntiata  erant  Capuae  sepulchra  aliquot  de 
caelo  tacta,  L.  27,  23,  I,  the  consuls  were  detained  by  scruple,  because  several 
prodigies  were  reported,  and  they  could  not  readily  obtain  good  omens  ;  namely 
from  Campania  it  was  reported  that  at  Capua  several  tombs  were  struck  by 
lightning. 

2139.  et,  and  also,  and  besides :  as, 

Punicae  quoque  victoriae  signum  octo  ducti  elephanti.  et  non 
minimum  fuere  spectaculum  praecedentes  Sosis  et  Moericus,  L.  26, 

21,  9,  as  an  emblem  of  the  Punic  -victory  also,  elephants  to  the  number  of  eight 
marched  in  parade.  A  nd  furthermore  not  the  least  attractive  part  of  the  pageant 
were  Sosis  and  Moericus,  moving  at  the  head  of  the  line. 

2140.  et,  and  yet,  introduces  a  contrast  or  opposition:  as, 

canorum  illud  in  voce  splendescit  etiam  in  senectute,  quod  equi- 
dem  adhuc  non  amis! ;  et  videtis  annos,  CM.  28,  the  musical  element  in 
the  voice  actually  improves  in  old  age,  and  this  I  have  not  yet  lost.  And  yet  you 
see  my  years. 

neque  or  nee. 

2141.  nee,  and  really  .  .  .  not,  and  in  fact  .  .  .  not:  as, 

magno  cum  periculo  suo,  qui  forte  patrum  in  foro  erant,  in  earn 
turbam  inciderunt.  nee  temperatum  manibus  foret,  ni  propere  con- 
sules intervenissent,  L.  2,  23,  9,  it  was  with  great  personal  risk  to  such  of  the 
fathers  as  happened  to  be  in  the  market  plfue,  that  they  got  into  the  crowd.  And 
in  fact  acts  of  violence  would  have  occurred,  unless  the  consuls  had  made  haste  to 
interfere. 

2142.  nee,  and  to  be  sure  .  .  .  not:  as, 

centum  viginti  lictores  cum  fascibus  secures  inligatas  praefere- 
bant.  nee  attinuisse  demi  securem,  cum  sine  provocatione  creati  es- 
sent,  interpretabantur,  L.  3,  36,  4,  a  hundred  and  twenty  lictors  with  rods 
displayed  axes  bound  in  them.  And  to  be  sure  they  explained  the  matter  thus, 
that  there  would  have  been  no  propriety  in  having  the  axe  taken  out,  since  the 
officers  were  appointed  without  any  appeal. 

382 


Concessive  and  Adversative.    [2143—2150. 


2143.  nee,  not  .  .  .  either,  nor  either,  neither:  as, 

eo  anno  vis  morbi  levata.  neque  a  penuria  frumenti  periculum 
fuit,  L.  4,  25,  6,  that  year  the  violence  of  the  plague  grew  less.  Nor  was  there 
any  danger  from  lack  of  grain  either. 

2144.  nec,  but  .  .  .  not:  as, 

missi  tamen  fetiales.  nec  eorum  verba  sunt  audita,  L.  4,  30, 14,  how- 
ever thefetials  were  sent.  But  they  were  not  listened  to. 

-que. 

2145.  -que,  and  likewise  :  as, 

huic  duos  flamines  adiecit.     virginesque  Vestae  legit,  L.  i,  20,  2,  to 

this  god  he  assigned  two  special  priests.     And  he  likewise  chose  maids  for  Vesta. 

2146.  -que,  and  in  fact,  and  so,  and  in  general :  as, 

turn  quoque  male  pugnatum  est.  obsessaque  urbs  foret,  nl  Hora- 
tius  esset  revocatus,  L.  2,  51,  2,  then  also  there  was  an  unsuccessful  engage- 
ment. And  in  fact  Rome  would  have  been  besieged,  unless  Horatius  had  been 
recalled. 

atque  or  ac. 

2147.  atque,  and  besides,  and  more  than  that,  and  actually  :  as, 
ex  quo  efficitur  animantem  esse  mundum.     atque  ex  hoc  quoque 

intellegi  poterit  in  eo  inesse  intellegentiam,  quod  certe  est  mundus 
melior  quam  villa  natura,  DN.  2,  y.,from  which  it  follows  that  the  universe 
is  alive.  And  more  than  that,  we  can  see  that  it  has  sense  from  the  following 
circumstance,  that  the  universe  is  certainly  superior  to  any  element  of  the 
universe. 

2148.  atque,  and  so,  and  consequently  :  as, 

impedior  religione  quominus  exponam  quam  multa  P.  Sestius 
senserit.  atque  nihil  dico  praeter  unum,  Sest.  8,  /  am  prevented  by 
scruples  from  setting  forth  how  much  Sestius  was  aware  of.  And  so  I  will  only 
say  one  thing. 

aut 

2149.  aut  is  used  to  add  a  new  sentence  in  the  sense  of  alioqui,  or  else, 
otherwise,  or  as  if  nisi,  unless,  preceded :  as, 

omnia  bene  sunt  Si  dicenda,  aut  eloquentiae  nomen  relinquendum 
est,  DO.  2,  5,  he  must  be  able  to  speak  well  on  all  subjects,  or  else  he  must  waive 
the  name  of  an  eloquent  man. 


(3.)   CONCESSIVE  AND  ADVERSATIVE. 

2150.  A  new  concessive  period  is  introduced  by  sane,  quidem,  omninS, 

to  be  sure,  or  fortasse,  perhaps :  as, 

383 


— 2154.]    Sentences:  Connection  of  Sentences. 


Plinius  et  Cluvius  nihil  dubitatum  de  fide  praefecti  referunt. 
sane  Fabius  inclinat  ad  laudes  Senecae,  Ta.  13,  20,  Pliny  and  Cluvius 
say  that  there  was  no  doubt  about  the  loyalty  of  the  prefect.  Fabius,  it  must  be 
admitted,  is  always  inclined  to  eulogize  Seneca,  id  fortasse  non  perfecimus ; 
conatl  quidem  saepissime  sumus,  O.  210,  perhaps  we  have  not  attained  to 
it ;  still  we  have  very  often  made  the  attempt. 

2151.  A  new  adversative  sentence  is  introduced  by  autem,  again, 
sed,  verum,  but,  vero,  but,  indeed,  at,  but,  or  tanieii,  nihilo  minus, 

nevertheless. 

These  words  when  used  to  connect  sentences  have  the  same  meaning 
as  when  used  to  connect  the  parts  of  a  sentence  (1676).  , 

2152.  atqui,  rarely  atquin,  and  yet,  but,  is  used  chiefly  in  dialogue.     It 
introduces  a  strong  objection,  sometimes  in  the  form  of  a  conditional  protasis. 
From  Cicero  on,  it  is  sometimes  found  after  a  question,  to  introduce  an  ear- 
nest denial. 

non  sum  apud  me :  :  atqui  opus  est  nunc  quom  maxume  ut  sis,  T.  Ph. 
204,  I'm  all  abroad :  :  but  that 's  just  exactly  where  you  nmst  n't  be  now.  non 
vereor  condiscipulorum  ne  quis  exaudiat :  :  atqui  cavendum  est,  Leg.  i, 
21,  /  ';«  not  afraid  of  being  overheard  by  any  of  my  fellow-students :  :  and  yet 
you  must  be  on  your  gttard.  sine  venial,  atqui  si  illam  digito  attigerit 
uno,  oculi  ilico  ecfodientur,  T.  Eu.  739,  let  him  come  on.  But  if  he  lays  a 
finger  on  the  maid,  we  'II  scratch  his  eyes  out  on  the  spot,  quid  vero  ?  modum 
statuarum  haberi  nullum  placet?  atqui  habeatur  necesse  est,  V.  2,  144, 
what  ?  is  there,  think  you,  to  be  no  end  to  your  statues  ?  Yet  there  must  be. 

2153.  quamquam,  etsi,  tametsi,  though,  and  nisi,  but,  are  sometimes 
used  to  coordinate  a  new  period,  correcting  the  preceding:  as, 

carere  sentientis  est,  nee  sensus  in  mortuo,  ne  carere  quidem 
igitur  in  mortu5  est.  quamquam  quid  opus  est  in  hoc  philosophan  ? 
TD.  I,  %&>,  foregoing  requires  a  sentient  being,  and  there  is  no  sensation  in  a  dead 
man  ;  therefore  there  is  no  foregoing  either  in  a  dead  man.  And  yet  what  is 
the  use  of  philosophizing  over  this  ?  utram  malls  vide  ;  etsi  consilium  quod 
cepi  rectum  esse  scio,  T.  Hau.  326,  of  these  two  states  choose  which  you  will ; 
though  I  am  sure  my  plan's  the  right  one.  cur  ego  non  adsum  ?  tametsi 
hoc  minime  tib!  deest,  Fam.  2,  7,  2,  why  am  I  not  with  you  ?  though  this  is 
the  very  last  thing  you  need,  sperabam  defervisse  adulescentiam  :  ecce 
autem  de  integro !  nisi  quidquid  est,  volo  hominem  convenire,  T.  Ad. 
1 52,  /  hoped  his  yotithful passion  had  cooled  down  ;  yet  here  it  is  afresh  !  But 
be  it  what  it  may,  I  want  to  see  thejfellow. 

(>.)   CAUSAL  AND   ILLATIVE. 

2154.  nam,  enim,  for,  or  namque,  etenim ,  for  yott  see,  intro- 
duces a  new  period  which  gives  the  reason  of  the  foregoing  :  as, 

qua  quidem  ex  re  hominum  multitude  cognosci  potuit :  nam  minus 
horis  tribus  mumtionem  perfecerunt,  5,  42,  4,  and  from  this  by  the  way 
their  numbers  could  be  gauged ;  for  they  made  a  breastwork  in  less  than  three 
hours,  quern  meminisse  potestis  :  anno  enim  undevicesimo  post  eius 
mortem  hi  consules  facti  sunt,  CM.  14,  you  can  remember  him  :  for  tht 
present  consuls  were  created  only  nineteen  years  after  his  death. 

3S4 


Affirmative  Coordination.    [2155-2159. 


2155.  The  originally  asseverative  meaning  of  nam  appears,  even  in  the  classical 
period,  in  colloquial  language:  as,  tib!  a  me  nulla  ortast  iniuria  :  :   nam 
hercle  etiam  hoc  restat,  T.  Ad.  189,  I've  ne'er  done  you  a  -wanton  -wrong:  : 
aye  verily  that 's  still  to  come.     In  old  Latin,  it  sometimes  introduces  a  question  :  as, 
nam   quae  haec   anus  est  ?  T.  Ph.  732,  -why,  -who  's  this  old  -woman  ?     Fre- 
quently it  introduces  an  explanation  or  illustration,  and,  from  Cicero  on,  a  remark  or 
question   made   in   passing:  as,   sic    enim   sese    res   habet:  nam    Odyssia 
Latina  est  sic  tamquam  opus    Daedali,  Br.  71,  the  case  stands  thus:  the 
OJyssey  in  Latin  is,  you  may  say,  a  regular  -work  of  Daedalus  (1908).     vivo  Ca- 
tone  multi  oratores  floruerunt:   nam  A.  Albinus,  Br.  81,  many  orators 
flourished   in    Catd's  lifetime:   for   example,    Albimis.     nam    quid    de    aedile 
loquar  ?  Sest.  ^,for  -why  speak  of  the  aedile?     enim  does  not  differ  essentially 
in  use  from  nam;  for  its  meaning  in  old  Latin,  see  1688.     namque  is  rare  until 
Livy,  and  usually  (always  in  old  Latin)  stands  before  a  vowel,     etenim  is  common 
only  in  classical  Latin. 

2156.  For  quippe,  -why,  often  used  as  a  coordinating  word,  see  1690. 

2157.  proinde  or  proin,  therefore,  so,  introduces  a  command  or  direction 
based  upon  the  foregoing  :  as, 

orationem  sperat  invenisse  se,  qui  differat  te :  proin  tu  fac  apud  te 
ut  sies,  T.  Andr.  407,  he  trusts  he  ''s  found  some  phrase  wherewith  he  may  con- 
found you  :  so  see  you  have  your  wits  about  you.  friistra  meae  vitae  sub- 
venire  conamini.  proinde  abite,  dum  est  facultas,  7,  50,  6,  in  vain  ye  try 
to  save  my  life.  So  away,  while  ye  have  the  power,  iam  undique  silvae  et 
solitudo  magna  c5gitationis  incitamenta  sunt.  proinde  cum  venabere, 
licebit  pugillares  feras,  Plin.  Ep.  1,6,  2,  then  again  the  surrounding  woods 
and  the  loneliness  are  powerful  stimulants  to  meditation.  So  when  you  go 
hunting,  you  can  take  a  note  book  with  you. 

2158.  A  conclusion  is  denoted  by  ergo,  itaque  or  igitur,  there- 
fore, so,  introducing  a  new  period :  as, 

nihil  est  praestantius  deo ;  ab  eo  igitur  mundum  necesse  est  regi. 
null!  igitur  est  naturae  subiectus  deus.  omnem  erg5  regit  ipse  natu- 
ram,  DN.  2,  77,  nothing  is  more  excellent  than  god.  Therefore  the  universe 
must  be  governed  by  him.  Therefore  god  is  in  no  respect  subject  to  nature. 
Consequently  he  rules  all  nature  himself.  For  the  position  of  these  words  in 
their  clauses,  see  1688  ;  for  ergo  igitur  and  itaque  ergo,  1689.  For  hinc, 
inde,  e5,  ide5,  idcirco,  propterea,  as  coordinating  words,  see  1691. 

AFFIRMATIVE   COORDINATION. 

2159.  A   new  sentence  affirmative  of  a  foregoing  is  often  intro- 
duced by  an  emphatic  sic  or  ita. 

These  words  often  introduce  a  general  truth  which  is  deduced  from  the 
first  statement. 

visne  igitur  te  mspiciamus  a  puero  ?  sic  opmor  ;  a  principle  ordia- 
mur,  Ph.  2,  44,  would  you  like  to  have  us  look  into  your  record  from  boyhood? 

Yes,  I  think  it  would  be  well ;  let  us  begin  at  the  beginning,  qui  diligebant 
hunc,  illi  favebant.  sic  est  volgus :  ex  veritate  pauca,  ex  opinione 
multa  aestimat,  RC.  29,  everybody  who  loved  him,  smiled  on  the  other  man. 

Yes,  that  is  always  the  way  of  the  world :  it  seldom  judges  by  truth,  often  by 
hearsay. 

25  385 


2160—2165.]  Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 

NOUNS  OF  THE  VERB. 
THE   INFINITIVE. 

2160.  The  infinitive  is  in  its  origin  a  verbal  substantive. 

2161.  The  present  infinitive  active  is  an  ancient  dative,  closely  resembling 
in  meaning  and  use  the  English  infinitive  with  to.    It  originally  marked  action 
merely  in  a  general  way,  without  indication  of  voice  or  tense.     In  virtue  of 
this  original  timeless  character,  the  present  often  represents  action  which  is 
really  past  or  future ;  in  such  cases  the  time  must  be  inferred  from  the  context. 

2162.  The  present  infinitive  active  gradually  approached  the  character 
of  a  verb,  and  the  original  substantive  nature  being  forgotten,  it  was  supple- 
mented by  a  passive,  and  by  forms  for  completed  and  for  future  action,  active 
and  passive. 

2163.  The  infinitive  has  furthermore  two  other  properties  of  the 
verb  :   (0.)  it  is  modified  by  an  adverb,  not  by  an  adjective ;  and  (£.)  it 
is  followed  by  the  construction  of  its  verb. 


OLD  AND  POETICAL  USE  OF  THE  INFINITIVE. 

THE  INFINITIVE  OF  PURPOSE. 

2164.  The  infinitive  denotes  purpose  :  (a.)  when  loosely  added  to  a  sub- 
stantive in  old  Latin,  (b.)  with  verbs  of  motion,  e5,  venio,  curro,  mitto,  in 
old  or  poetical  Latin,  and  (c.)  in  the  combination  d5  bibere,  give  to  drink, 
in  old,  colloquial,  or  poetical  Latin :  as, 

(a.)  occasiS  benefacta  cumulate,  PI.  Cap.  423,  a  chance  to  pile  up  kind- 
nesses. Parallel  with  a  gerund:  summa  eludendi  occasiost  mihi  nunc 
senes  et  Phaedriae  curarn  adimere  argentariam,  T.  Ph.  885,  I've  now  a 
splendid  chance  the  greybeards  of  eluding  and  Phaedria  to  rescue  from  his 
money  cares,  (b.)  recurre  petere  re  recent!,  PI.  Tri.  1015,  run  back  to  get 
it  ere  it  is  too  late,  voltisne  eamus  visere  ?  T.  Ph.  102,  do  you  think  we'd 
better  go  to  call?  parasitum  misi  nudiusquartus  Cariam  petere  argen- 
tum,  PI.  Cur.  206,  my  parasite  I  sent  four  days  ago  to  Can'a,  to  fetch  the  cash. 
nee  dulces  occurrent  oscula  nati  praeripere,  Lucr.  3,  895,  nor  shall  thy 
children  dear  come  running  kiss  on  kiss  to  snatch,  non  nos  ferro  Libycos 
populare  penatis  venimus,  V.  i,  527,  -we  are  not  come  with  steel  to  harry 
Libya's  hearths,  (c.)  bibere  da  usque  plems  cantharis,  PI.  Per.  821,  keep 
giving  on  to  drink  with  brimming  bowls,  bibere  is  thus  used  by  Plautus, 
Terence,  Cato,  and  Livy,  and  by  Cicero  once  with  ministro.  In  classical 
prose,  purpose  is  expressed  by  the  subjunctive  with  ut  or  a  relative  pronoun, 
or  by  a  gerund  or  gerundive  with  ad  or  causa. 

2165.  In  poetry,  the  infinitive  of  purpose  is  used  with  synonymes  of  do 
also,  and  with  verbs  of  leaving,  taking  away,  taking  up,  &c. 

386 


The  Infinitive.  [2166-2168. 


huic  loricam  d5nat  habere,  V.  5,  259,  on  him  a  corselet  he  bestows  to 
•wear,  tristitiam  et  metus  tradam  protervis  in  mare  Creticum  portare 
ventis,  H.  I,  26,  I,  sadness  and  fears  I  II  to  the  wanton  winds  consign,  to  sweep 
into  the  Cretic  sea.  quis  sibi  res  gestas  August!  scrlbere  sumit  ?  H.  E. 
!>  3.  7»  who  takes  it  on  himself  Augustus1  deeds  to  pen?  quern  virum  aut 
heroa  lyra  vel  acri  tibia  sumis  celebrate  ?  H.  i,  12,  I,  what  hero  or 
what  demigod  dost  thou  take  up,  to  ring  his  praises  on  the  rebec  or  the  pierc- 
ing pipe  ? 

THE   INFINITIVE   WITH   ADJECTIVES. 

2166.  The  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  with  adjectives,  chiefly  by  poets 
of  the  Augustan  age,  and  late  prose  writers,  often  in  imitation  of  a  Greek 
idiom :  as, 

indoctum  iuga  ferre  nostra,  H.  2,  6,  2,  not  taught  our  yoke  to  bear. 
avidi  committere  pugnam,  O.  5,  75,  hot  to  engage  in  fight,  soli  cantare 
periti  Arcades,  V.  E.  10, 32,  Arcadians  alone  in  minstrelsy  are  skilled,  vitulus 
niveus  videri,  H.  4,  2,  59,  a  bullock  snow-white  to  behold,  i.  e.  visu  (2274). 
These  infinitives  are  of  different  kinds,  some  of  them  resembling  a  comple- 
mentary infinitive,  others  a  gerund  or  gerundive  construction,  the  supine  in 
-tu  (-su),  &c.,  &c. 

THE  ORDINARY  USE  OF  THE  INFINITIVE. 

2167.  The  infinitive  is  ordinarily  used  either  as  object  or  as  subject  of  a 
verb. 

(A.)  THE   INFINITIVE  AS   OBJECT. 

THE  COMPLEMENTARY   INFINITIVE. 

2168.  The  present  infinitive  is  often  used  to  com- 
plete the  meaning  of  certain  kinds  of  verbs  which  imply 
another  action  of  the  same  subject :  as, 

pro  Pompeio  emori  possum,  Fam.  2,  15,  3,  /  could  die  the  death  for 
Pompey  ( 1495).  <luid  habes  dicere  ?  Balb.  33,  what  have  you  to  say  ?  scire 
volebat,  V.  I,  131,  he  wanted  to  kn<nv.  hoc  facere  debes,  RabP.  7,  you 
ought  to  do  this.  Caesar  Rhenum  transire  decreverat,  4,  17,  i,  Caesar  had 
resolved  to  cross  the  Rhine,  fuga  salutem  petere  contenderunt,  3,  15,  2, 
they  tried  to  save  themselves  by  flight,  num  negare  audes  ?  C.  i,  8,  do  you 
dare  deny  it  ?  vereor  dicere,  T.  Andr.  323,  /  am  afraid  to  tell,  num  du- 
bitas  id  facere  ?  C.  I,  13,  do  you  hesitate  to  do  that?  maturat  ab  urbe  pro- 
ficisci,  i,  7,  i,  he  makes  haste  to  leave  Rome.  Diviciacus  Caesarem  obsecrare 
coepit,  I,  20,  i,  Diviciacus  began  to  entreat  Caesar.  Dolabella  iniuriam 
facere  perseverat,  Quint.  31,  Dolabella  persists  in  doing  wrong,  ill!  pecu- 
niam  polliceri  non  desistunt,  6,  2,  i,  these  people  did  not  stop  offering  money. 
diem  edict!  obire  neglexit,  Ph.  3,  20,  he  failed  to  keep  the  day  named  in  the 
tdict.  irasci  amicis  non  temere  soleo,  Ph.  8,  16,  /  am  not  apt  to  get  pro- 
voked with  friends  without  just  cause,  ill!  regibus  parere  didicerant.  Ph. 
3,  9,  the  men  of  old  were  trained  to  bow  the  knee  to  kings  (1615).  dextram 
cohibere  mementQ;  J.  5,  71,  remember  that  you  keep  hands  off. 

387 


2  69-2174-]    Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


2169.  The  verbs  or  verbal  expressions  which  are  supplemented  by  an 
infinitive  are  chiefly  such  as  mean  can,  will  or  wish,  ought,  resolve,  endeavour, 
dare,  fear,  hesitate,  hasten,  begin,  continue,  cease,  neglect,  am  wont,  learn,  know 
how,  remember,  forget,  seem.     The  infinitive  in  this  combination  contains  the 
leading  idea.     For  the  occasional  use  of  the  perfect  infinitive  with  some  of 
these  verbs,  see  2223. 

Some  of  the  commonest  of  these  verbs  are  possum,  queo,  nequeo;  volo, 
nolo,  malo,  cupio,  stude5;  debeo;  cogito,  meditor,  statuo.  constitu5, 
decernS,  paro;  conor,  nitor,  contends;  audeo;  vereor;  cunctor, 
dubito,  festinS,  mature,  Instituo,  coepi,  incipio,  pergo,  persevere, 
desino,  desistq,  omitto,  superseded,  neglego,  non  euro;  soleo,  adsue- 
sco,  consuesco ;  disco,  scio,  nesciS,  recorder,  memini,  obliviscor; 
videor. 

2170.  The  infinitive  is  also  used  with  many  verbal  expressions  equivalent  to  the 
above  verbs,  such  as  habeo  in  animo,  consilium  est,  certum  est,  paratus 
sum,  &c.,  &c.,  or  with  paratus  alone,  adsuefactus,  &c.,  &c.     Furthermore,  in 
poetry  and  late  prose,  the  place  of  many  of  the  above  verbs  is  often  taken  by  livelier  or 
fresher  synonymes,  such  as  valeo  for  possum,  from  Lucretius  on,  ardeo,  burn, 
for  vo!5,  cupi5,  or  absiste,  fuge,  parce,  &c.,  for  noli  (1584),  &c.,  &c. 

2171.  A  predicate  noun  used  in  the  construction  of  the  comple- 
mentary infinitive,  is  put  in  the  nominative :  as, 

Aelius  StSicus  esse  voluit,  Br.  206,  Aelius  wanted  to  be  a  Stoic,  esse 
quam  videri  bonus  malebat,  S.  C.  54,  6,  he  chose  to  be  good  rather  than  seem 
good. 

THE  ACCUSATIVE  WITH   THE  INFINITIVE. 

2172.  A  very  common  form  of  a  dependent  sentence  is  that  known 
as  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive. 

Thus,  of  the  two  coordinate  sentences  scio :  iocaris  tu  nunc,  PI.  Most. 
1081,  7  know:  you  are  jesting  now,  the  second  may  be  put  in  a  dependent 
form,  the  two  sentences  blending  into  one :  scio  iocari  te  nunc,  I  know  you 
to  be  jesting  now. 

2173.  The   subject  of  an    infinitive   is  put    in    the 
accusative. 

Thus,  in  eum  vident,  they  see  him,  eum  is  the  object  of  vident  (1134). 
Tf  sedere  is  added,  eum  vident  sedere,  V.  5,  107,  they  see  him  sit,  or  they  see 
that  he  is  sitting,  eum  is  at  the  same  time  the  object  of  vident  and  the  sub- 
ject of  sedere.  But  the  accusative  by  degrees  becoming  detached  from  the 
main  verb,  and  closely  interlocked  with  the  infinitive,  the  combination  is  ex- 
tended to  cases  where  the  main  verb  is  intransitive  or  passive. 

2174.  A  predicate  noun  referring  to  a  subject  accusative  is  itself 
put  in  the  accusative  :  as, 

te"  esse  arbitror  puerum  probum,  PI  Most.  949,  I  think  you  are  a  good 
boy.  neminem  vivum  cap!  patiuntur,  8,  35,  5,  they  do  not  allow  anybody  to 
be  made  prisoner  alive  (2198). 

388 


The  Infinitive.  [2I75~2I79- 


VERBS  OF  PERCEIVING,  KNOWING,  THINKING,  AND 
SAYING. 

2175.  The  accusative  with  the    infinitive    is   used 
with  active  verbs  or  verbal  expressions  of  perceiving, 
knowing,  thinking,  and  saying :  as, 

patere  tua  consilia  non  sentis  ?  C.  i,  i,you  don't  feel  that  your  plots  are 
all  out?  huic  filium  scis  esse  ?  T.  Hau.  181,  you  are  aware  that  this  man 
has  a  son  ?  PompeiSs  consedisse  terrae  motu  audivimus,  Sen.  NQ.  6,  i, 
i,  we  have  heard  that  Pompei  has  been  swallowed  tip  by  an  earthquake,  63  A.  n., 
17  years  before  its  utter  destruction,  saepe  audivi  inter  6s  atque  offam 
multa  intervenire  posse,  Cato  in  Gell.  13,  18  (17),  i,  I  have  often  heard 
'  'twixt  cttp  and  lip  there  V  many  a  slip'  dicit  montem  ab  hostibus  teneri, 

1,  22,  2,  he  says  the  hill  is  held  by  the  enemy,     dixtin  dudum  illam  dixisse, 
se  expectare  filium  ?  T.  Hec.  451,  didn't  you  say  a  while  ago  the  woman  said 
that  she  was  looking  for  her  son  ? 

Some  of  the  commonest  of  these  verbs  are:  (a.)  audio,  animadverts, 
sentio,  video.  (£.)  accipio,  intellegS,  scio,  nescio.  (c.)  arbitror,  cen- 
seo,  cSgito,  credo,  existimo,  memim,  oplnor,  puts,  recorder,  suspicor. 
(d.)  adfirmo,  aio,  demonstrS,  dico,  dispute,  doceo,  fateor,  narro,  nego, 
nuntio,  ostendo,  promitt5,  scribo,  significo,  spero,  trado.  (e.)  rumor 
est,  non  me  fugit,  certus  sum,  non  nescius  sum,  &c.,  &c.  Also  occasion- 
ally verbs  used  in  the  sense  of  think  or  say,  as  mitto,  send  word,  and  substantives 
or  pronouns  expressing  a  thought  or  judgement. 

2176.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  sometimes  introduced  by  a  neuter  pro- 
noun, or  by  sic  or  ita:  as,  illud  negabis,  te  de  re  iudicata  iudicavisse  ?  V. 

2,  81,  -will  you  deny  this,  that  you  sate  in  judgement  on  a  matter  that  was  already 
decided  ?    sic  accepimus,  nullum  bellum  fuisse,  V.  5,  5,  -we  have  been  told 
this,  that  there  was  not  any  war.     Sometimes  by  an  ablative  with  de  :  as,  de  hoc 
Verri  dicitur,  habere  eum  perbona  toreumata,   V.  4,  38,  about  this  man 
report  is  made  to  Verres  that  he  had  some  choice  bits  of  embossed  "work. 

2177.  (i.)  Passive  verbs  of  this  class  are  commonly  used  personally  in 
the  third  person  of  the  present  system,  with  the  subject,  and  the  predicate 
noun,  if  used,  in  the  nominative:  as, 

hi  centum  pagos  habere  dicuntur,  4,  i,  4,  these  people  are  said  to  have 
a  hundred  cantons,  nulla  iam  existimantur  esse  iudicia,  V.  a.pr.^, 
there  are  thought  to  be  no  courts  of  law  any  longer.  p5ns  prope  effectus 
nuntiabatur,  Caes.  C.  i,  62,  3,  the  bridge  was  reported  to  be  well-nigh  done. 

2178.  Such  personal  passives  are  much  more  common  in  the  writers  of  Cicero's 
day  than  in  old  Latin.     Particularly  so  arguo,  audio,  c5gn5sco,  comperio, 
concede,  defends,  demSnstrS,  dico,  doceo,  excuso,  existimo,  invenio, 
iudico,  HberS,  memoro,  negS,  nuntio,  ostendS,  postulo,  puts,  reperio, 
trado. 

2179.  (2.)  With  the  first  or  second  person  the  personal  construction  is  rare  :  as, 
quod  nSs  bene  emisse  iudicati  sumus,  Att.  i,  13,  6,  that  -we  are  thought  to 
ha-ve  made  a  good  bargain,     cum  inveniare  imprbbissima  ratiSne  esse 

praedatus,  V.  4,  3,  when  you  prove  to  have  been  robbing  most  abominably.  But 
with  videor,  seem,  the  personal  construction  is  the  rule  in  all  three  persons,  and  in 
the  perfect  system  as  well  as  the  present. 

389 


2 1 80— 2 1 86.]   Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


2180.  (3.)  In  the  perfect  system,  and  also  usually  in  the  gerundive  con- 
struction (2246),  verbs  of  this  class  are  commonly  impersonal :  as, 

traditum  est  Homerum  caecum  fuisse,  TD.  5,  114,  the  tradition  ic 
that  Homer  "was  blind,  ub!  tyrannus  est,  ibl  dicendum  est  nullam  esse 
rem  publicam,  RP.  3,  43,  -wherever  there  is  an  absolute  ruler,  there  we  must 
maintain  there  is  no  commonwealth. 

2181.  (4.)  With  some  verbs  of  this  class,  the  impersonal  construction  is  preferred 
even  in  the  present  system.      Thus,  commonly  intellegitur,  it  is  understood,  as 
impersonal ;  regularly  in  classical  Latin  creditur  ;  with  a  dative  in  Cicero  and  Caesar 
dicitur,  nuntiatur.    The  impersonals  cernitur,  fertur,  memoratur,  prodi- 
tur,  videtur,  are  rare. 

2182.  The  personal  construction  is  sometimes  extended  to  other  verbs  or  verbal 
expressions,  especially  in  poetry:  as,  colligor,  O.  A.  2,  6,  61,  /  am  inferred,  for 
colligitur.    nonnullis  magistrates  veniebant  in  suspicionem  nos  de- 
morati  esse,  Lentulus  in  Fam.  12,  15,  5,  the  magistrates  were  suspected  by  some 
of  having  delayed  us  (1491). 

2183.  With  verbs  of  thinking  and  saying  the  subject  accusative  is  some- 
times omitted. 

(a.)  Oftenestthus  me  nos,  te  vos,  or  se:  as,  stulte  fecisse  fateor,  i.  e. 
me,  PI.  B.  1013,  /  own  I've  acted  like  a  fool,  confitere  venisse,  i.  e.  te,  RA. 
61,  confess  you  came,  quae  imperarentur  facere  dixerunt,  i.e.  se,  2,  32,  3, 
they  said  they  would  do  as  ordered  (2221).  Often  the  future  without  esse: 
as,  refracturos  carcerem  minabantur,  i.e.  se,  L.  6,  17,  6,  they  threatened  to 
break  the  jail  open,  (b.)  Less  frequently  an  accusative  of  is:  as,  oblitum 
credidi,  i.  e.  eum,  Fam.g,  2,  i,  I  imagined  he  had  forgotten.  Such  omissions 
are  common  in  old  Latin,  Cicero,  Caesar,  Livy,  and  in  poetry. 

2184.  When  the  accusative  is  not  expressed,  a  predicate  noun  is  sometimes 
put  in  the  nominative,  chiefly  in  poetry,  in  imitation  of  a  Greek  idiom :  as, 

phaselus  ille  quern  videtis,  hospites,  ait  fuisse  navium  celerrimus, 
Cat.  4,  i,  the  clipper  you  see  yonder,  friends,  says  she  was  once  the  fleetest  of 
the  fleet,  uxor  invicti  lovis  esse  nescis,  H.  3,  27,  73,  thou  knowest  not  thou 
art  the  bride  of  the  unconquerable  Jove.  Similarly  with  verbs  of  emotion 
(2187)  :  as,  gaudent  esse  rogatae,  O.  A  A.  i,  345,  they  are  glad  to  have  been 
asked,  gaudent  perfusi  sanguine  fratrum,  V.  G.  2,  510,  they  're  glad  to 
have  been  imbued  with  brothers'  blood. 

VERBS   OF   ACCUSING. 

2185.  The  verbs  of  accusing,  arguo  and  insimulo,  take  the  accusative 
with  the  infinitive  like  verbs  of  saying :  as, 

civis  Romanes  necatos  esse  arguo,  V.  5,  140,  my  accusation  is  that  Ro- 
mans have  been  slain,  occldisse  patrem  Sex.  Roscius  arguitur,  RA.  37, 
Roscius  is  charged  with  the  murder  of  his  father,  insimulare  coeperunt 
Epicratem  litteras  publicas  corrupisse,  V.  2,  60,  they  began  to  accuse  Eft- 
crates  of  having  falsified  records  of  state. 

VERBS  OF  HOPING,  PROMISING,  AND  THREATENING. 

2186.  The  accusative  with  the  future  infinitive  is  used  with  verbs  of 
hoping,  promising,  and  threatening :  as, 

39° 


The  Infinitive.  [2187-2194. 


id  sese  effecturos_  sperabant,  7,  26,  2,  they  hoped  to  carry  it  out.    pol« 
tttur  sese  el  dedituros,  5,  20,  2,  they  volunteer  to  surrender  to  him.     But 
sometimes  the  present  infinitive  alone  :  see  2236. 

VERBS  OF  EMOTION. 

2187.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  with 
verbs  of  joy,  grief,  surprise,  or  wonder :  as, 

venire  tu  me  gaudes,  PI.  B.  184,  thou  art  glad  I'm  come,  dolui  pacem 
repudiari,  Marc.  14, 1  felt  sorry  peace  was  rejected.  These  verbs  often  have 
the  construction  with  quod,  or  in  old  Latin  with  quia  (1851). 

2188.  Some  of  the  commonest  of  these  verbs  are  doleo,  gaudeo,  laetor, 
miror,  &c.,  &c.;  and  from  Cicero  on,  angor,  indignor,  Iuge5,  sollicito. 

VERBS  OF  DESIRE. 

2189.  (i.)  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive. is  commonly  used 
with  volo  (malo,  nolo),  and  cupio,  when  the  subject  of  the  infinitive 
is  not  the  same  as  that  of  the  verb  :  as, 

Catilmam  perire  volui,  Ph.  8,  15,  I  wished  Catiline  to  die.  maluit  ho- 
mines peccare  quam  decs,  V.  2,  22,  he  wanted  men  to  sin  rather  than  gods. 
te  tua  frui  virtute  cupimus,  Br.  331,  we  wish  you  to  reap  the  benefit  of  your 
high  character. 

2190.  (2.)  Even  when  the  subjects  denote  the  same  person,  the  accusa- 
tive is  sometimes  used  with  the  infinitive  :  as, 

emcri  me  malim,  PI.  As.  810,  mori  me  malim,  T.  Eu.  66,  I'd  rather 
die.  magnufice  volo  me  viros  summos  accipere,  PL  Ps.  167,  I  'm  going 
to  entertain  some  highborn  gentlemen  in  style.  Oftenest  when  the  infinitive 
is  esse,  videri,  putari,  or  dici:  as,  cupio  me  esse  clementem,  cupio  me 
non  dissolutum  videri,  C.  I,  4,  I  wish  to  play  the  man  of  mercy,  and  yet  I 
do  not  wish  to  seem  over  lax.  Rarely  thus  with  desidero,  n5l5,  opto,  and 
studeo,  and  in  Sallust  with  proper5. 

2191.  For  the  perfect  active  with  these  verbs,  see  2228  ;  for  the  perfect  passive, 
2229. 

2192.  volo,  malo,  and  cupio  are  often  coordinated  with  the  subjunctive  of 
desire  (1707).     volo  and  malo  often  have  the  subjunctive  with  ut,  particularly  in 
old  Latin  (1950). 

2193.  Verbs  of  resolving  sometimes  take  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive :  as, 
certum  offirmare  est  viam  me,  T.  Hec.  454,  /  am  resolved  to  hold  the  way . 
So,  from  Cicero  on,  sometimes  censeo,  decerno,  and  sentio,  in  the  exceptional 
sense  of  vo!5  or  iubeo,  think  it  best:  as,  velle  et  censere  eos  ab  armis  dis- 
cedere,  S.  /.  21,  4,  that  they  -wished  and  thought  it  best  for  those  people  to  give  up 
fighting. 

2194.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  with  verbs  of  demand- 
ing :  as,  hau  postulo  equidem  med  in  lecto  ^ccumbere,  PI.  St.  488,  / 
can't  expect,  not  /,  to  sprawl  upon  a  couch,     hie  postulat  se  absolvi  ?   V.  3,  138, 
does  this  man   as':  to  be  acquitted?     Similarly  with  6ro  and  praecipid  in  late 
writers. 


2i95~22OI<]    Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


2195.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  sometimes  found  with  suadeS  and 
persuadeo  in  Terence,  Lucretius,  and  Vergil,  and  with  precor  in  Ovid  and  late 
prose. 

VERBS   OF   ACCOMPLISHING. 

2196.  Verbs  of  accomplishing  rarely  have  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive :  as, 
tails  oratores  videri  facit,  quails  ipsi  se  videri  volunt,  Br.  142,  of  deliv- 
ery, it  makes  orators  appear  just  as  they  -wish  to  appear  themselves.     Oftenest  in 
poetry.     In  prose  usually  the  subjunctive  with  ut  (1951). 

VERBS   OF   TEACHING  AND  TRAINING. 

2197.  The  verbs  of  teaching  and  training,  doceo  and  adsuefacio,  may 
take  an  accusative  of  a  substantive  and  an  infinitive  expressing  the  thing 
taught :  as, 

quin  etiam  tondere  filias  suas  docuit,  TD.  5,  58,  why  more  than  that,  he 
actiially  ta^^ght  his  own  daughters  to  shave,  of  Dionysius,  tyrant  of  Syracuse. 
equos  eodem  remanere  vestigio  adsuefecerunt,  4,  2,  3,  they  have  their 
horses  trained  to  stand  stock-still  (1608).  Compare  1 169. 

VERBS  OF  BIDDING  AND  FORBIDDING  AND  OF 
ALLOWING. 

2198.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  used  with  iubeo  and 
veto,  sino  and  patior :  as, 

'  milites  ex  oppido  exire  iussit,  2,  33,  \,  he  ordered  the  soldiers  to  go  out 
of  the  town,  pontem  iubet  rescind!,  i,  7,  2,  he  orders  the  bridge  torn  up. 
lex  peregrmum  vetat  in  murum  ascendere,  DO.  2,  100,  //  is  against  the 
law  for  a  foreigner  to  get  up  on  the  wall,  castra  vallo  mumrl  vetuit,  Caes. 
C.  I,  41,  4,  he  gave  orders  that  the  camp  should  not  be  fortified  with  a  palisade. 
vmum  ad  se  inportari  non  sinunt,  4,  2,  6,  wine  they  will  not  allow  to  bt 
brought  into  their  country.  Cicero  is  the  first  to  use  vet5  thus.  Other  con- 
structions also  occur  with  these  words  :  see  1708,  1950,  1953,  &c. 

2199.  The  person  ordered  or  forbidden  is  often  omitted,  when  stress  is  laid  on 
the  action   merely,   or  when  the  person  is   obvious   from  the  context :  as,  castra 
munire  iubet,  i.  e.  milites,  2,  5,  6.  he  gives  orders  to  construct  a  camp,     ius- 
serunt  pronuntiare,  i.e.  tribunes  et  centuriones,  5,  3^,  3,  they  gave  orders 
to  proclaim,    idemque  iusserunt  simulacrum   lovis  facere  maius,  i.  e. 
consules,  C.  3,  20,  and  they  furthermore  gave  directions  to  make  a  st-atue  of  Jupiter, 
a  bigger  one. 

2200.  iubeo  is  sometimes  coordinated  with  the  subjunctive,  especially  in  old 
Latin  (1708).    Sometimes  it  has  the  subjunctive  with  ut,  especially  in  resolves  of  the 
people. 

2201.  In  the  passive,  iubeo,  veto,  and  sin5  are  used  personally,  the  accusative 
of  the  person  ordered  or  forbidden  becoming  nominative:  as,  iubentur  scribere 
exercitum,  L.  3,  30,  3,  they  are  ordered  to  raise  an  army.     Nolani  muros 
adire  vetiti,  L.  23.  16,  9,  the  men  of  Nola  were  not  allowed  to  go  to  the  walls,     hie 
accusare  eum  n5n  est  situs,  Sest.  95,  this  man  -was  not  allowed  to  accuse  him. 

392 


The  Infinitive.  [2202—2207. 


2202.  impero  often  has  the  accusative  with  a  passive  or  deponent  infinitive,  or 
with  fieri :  as,  praesentem  pecuniam  solvl  imperavi,  Att.  2,  4,  i,  /  have 
given  orders  for  ready  money  to  be  paid.     Rarely  with  an  active  infinitive  parallel 
with  a  passive:  as,  e5  pattern  navium  con  venire  commeatumque  com- 
portari  imperat,  Caes.  C,  3,  42,  2,  he  orders  part  of  the  vessels  to  rendezvous  there, 
and  grain  to  be  brought.     In  the  passive,  a  personal  imperor  occurs,  like  iubeor 
(2201):  as,  in  lautumias  deduci  imperantur,  V.  5,  68,  orders  are  given  for 
them  to  be  taken  to  the  quarries.     See  also  1950.      permitto  has  sometimes  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive  from  Tacitus  on,   usually  the  subjunctive  with  ut  (1950). 

2203.  The  verbs  of  hindering,  prohibeo  and  impedio,  sometimes  have  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive:  as,  barbari  nostros  navibus  egredi  prchibe- 
bant,  4,  24,   i,  the  savages  undertook  to  prevent  our  people  from  disembarking . 
The  infinitive  used  with  prohibeo  is  usually  passive  or  deponent,     quid  est  igitur 
quod  me  impediat  ea  quae  probabilia  mihl  videantur  sequi  ?     Off.  2,  8, 
•what  is  there  then  to  hinder  me  from  following  what  seems  to  me  to  be  probable?    See 
also  1960  and  1977. 

THE   INFINITIVE  AS   A   SUBSTANTIVE  ACCUSATIVE. 

2204.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  or  the  infinitive  alone, 
regarded  as  a  neuter  substantive,  may  be  used  as  the  object  of  a  verb, 
or  in  apposition  with  the  object :  as, 

(a.)  leporem  gustare  fas  non  putant,  5,  12,  6,  tasting  hare  they  count  a 
sin.  errare  malum  ducimus,  Off.  I,  18,  going  astray  we  hold  a  bad  thing. 
(^.)  ad  id  quod  instituisti,  6rat5rum  genera  distinguere  aetatibus,  istam 
diligentiam  esse  accommodatam  puto,  Br.  74,  I  think  your  accurate  schol- 
arship is  just  the  thing  for  your  projected  task  —  classifying  public  speakers 
ch  r  analogically. 

2205.  The  infinitive  as  a  substantive  is  rarely  preceded  by  the  preposition  inter 
in  late  prose:  as,  multum  interest  inter  dare  et  accipere,  Sen.  Ben.  5,  10,  2, 
there  is  a  vast  difference  bet-ween  'give'  and  '•take.'1     Cicero  has  it  thus  once  in  a 
translation  (Fin.  2,  43).     In  poetry  praeter  is  thus  used  rarely. 

2206.  In  poetry,  the  infinitive  is  used  as  a  substantive  object  with  such  verbs  as 
do,  reddo,  adimo,  perdo  :  as,  hie  vereri  perdidit,  PI.  B.  158,  this  youth  has 
lost  his  sense  of  shame. 

(B.)   THE  INFINITIVE  AS  SUBJECT. 

2207.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  or  the  in- 
finitive alone,  present  or  perfect,  may  be  used  as  the 
subject  of  a  verb,  in  apposition  with  the  subject,  or  as 
a  predicate  nominative  :  as, 

(a.)  mendacem  memorem  esse  oportere,  Qurntil.  4,  2,  91,  that  a  liar 
should  have  a  good  memory,  (b.)  sequitur  illud,  caedem  senatum  iudicasse 
contra  rem  publicam  esse  factam,  Mil.  12,  next  comes  this  point,  that  the 
senate  adjudged  the  homicide  an  offence  against  the  state,  (c.}  exitus  fuit  ora- 
tionis,  sib!  nullam  cum  his  amicitiam  esse  posse,  4,  8,  x,  the  end  of  the 
speech  was  that  he  could  not  have  any  friendship  with  these  people. 

393 


2208-2214.]  Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


2208.  The  infinitive  is  used  as  the  subject  (a.)  with  impersonal 
verbs,  (£.)  with  est,  putatur,  habetur,  &c.,  and  an  abstract  substan- 
tive, a  genitive,  or  a  neuter  adjective  in  the  predicate. 

2209.  (a.)  Some  of  the  commonest  impersonal  verbs  are  apparet,  decet, 
expedit,  licet,  lubet,  oportet,  praestat,  pudet,  refert.    Also  in  classical 
Latin,  attinet,  conducit,  constat,  dedecet,  exsistit,  fallit,  interest,  iuvat, 
liquet,  obest,  paenitet,  patet,  pertinet,  placet,  displicet,  prodest,  which 
are  used  as  live  verbs  by  Lucretius  and  Sallust  also.    Similarly  in  Plautus  and  Terence 
fortasse. 

2210.  The  infinitive  is  occasionally  used  as  a  subject  with  verbs  other  than  the 
above  (2209):  as,  npn  cadit  invidere  in  sapientem,  TD.  3,  21^  envy  does  not 
square  -with  our  ideas  of  a  sage,    carere   noc   significat,  egere    eo  quod 
habere  veils,  TD.  i,  88,  careo  means  not  having  -what  you  -would  like  to  have. 

2211.  (b.)  Some  of  the  commonest  abstracts  used  thus  with  est  are  fama,  fas 
and  nef as,  fides,  ius,  laus,  opus,  mos,  tempus.     From  Cicero  on,  opinio  and 
pr5verbium.    In  Plautus,  audacia,  confidentia,  miseria,  negotium,  sce- 
lus,  &c.     For  genitives,  see  1237.     Neuter  adjectives  are  such  as  aequum,  ini- 
quum,  consentaneum,  credibile,  incredibile,  manifestum,  necesse, 
par,  rectum,  &c.,  &c. 

2212.  The  accusative  is  not  expressed  when  it  is  indefinite,  you,  a  man, 
a  person,  anybody,  frequently  also  when  it  is  implied  in  some  other  case  in 
the  sentence :  as,    • 

non  tarn  praeclarum  est  scire  Latine  quam  turpe  nescire,  Br.  140, 
it  is  not  so  creditable  to  be  a  Latin  scholar  as  it  is  disreputable  not  to  be.  mini 
inter  viftutes  grammatici  habebitur  aliqua  nescire,  Quintil.  i,  8,  21,  in 
my  eyes  it  will  be  one  merit  in  a  classical  scholar  not  to  be  omniscient,  tempori 
cedere  semper  sapientis  est  habitum,  Fam.  4,  9,  2,  bowing  to  the  inevitable 
has  always  passed  as  a  mark  of  wisdom,  peccare  licet  nemim,  Par.  20,  no 
man  is  at  liberty  to  sin.  An  indefinite  hominem,  aliquem,  or  te,  is  rare  :  as, 
ilia  laus  est,  liberos  hominem  educare,  PI.  MG.  703,  it  is  a  crown  of  glory 
for  a  man  a  family  to  rear. 

2213.  (i.)  A  predicate  noun  referring  to  the  unexpressed  indefinite  sub- 
ject of  the  infinitive  is  put  in  the  accusative :  as, 

non  esse  cupidum  pecunia  est,  non  esse  emacem  vectigal  est,  con- 
tentum  vero  suis  rebus  esse  maximae  sunt  divitiae,  Par.  $\,for  a  man 
not  to  have  desires,  is  money  down,  not  to  be  eager  to  buy  is  an  income;  but  to  be 
satisfied  with  what  you  have  is  the  greatest  possible  wealth.  A  plural  predicate 
is  rare :  as,  esset  egregium  domesticis  esse  contentos,  O.  22,  it  would  be 
a  grand  thing  for  people  to  be  satisfied  with  home  examples. 

2214.  (2.)  When  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  implied  in  a  dative,  a 
predicate  noun  may  also  be  in  the  dative .  as, 

mih!  neglegenti  esse  non  licet,  Att.  I,  17,  6,  it  will  not  do  for  me  to  be 
careless.  With  a  dative  and  licet,  however,  the  predicate  is  sometimes  in  the 
accusative :  as,  quod  si  civi  Romano  licet  esse  Gaditanum,  Balb.  29,  now 
if  a  Roman  is  allowed  to  be  a  Gaditanian.  Regularly  so,  when  the  subject  is 
indefinite  and  not  expressed  (2212) :  as,  haec  praescripta  servantem  licet 
magnifice  vivere,  Off.  i,  92,  a  man  who  holds  to  these  rules  may  live  a  noblt 
lift. 

394 


The  Infinitive.  [2215-2219. 


2215.  The  infinitive,  used  as  a  substantive  in  the  nominative  or  accusative 
sometimes  has  a  neuter  attribute. 

Chiefly  thus  ipsum,  hoc  ipsum,  t5tum  hoc  :  as,  ipsurn  Latine  loqul 
est  in  magna  laude  ponendum,  Br.  \&p,just  the  mere  ability  of  talking  good 
Latin  is  to  be  accounted  highly  creditable.  Rarely  a  possessive,  meum,  tuum  : 
as,  ita  tuom  conferto  am'are  ne  tibi  sit  probro,  PL  Cur.  28,  so  shape  thy 
wooing  that  it  be  to  thee  no  shame. 


THE  INFINITIVE   OF  EXCLAMATION. 

22l6.  The  infinitive  alone,  or  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  is 
sometimes  used  in  exclamations  of  surprise,  incredulity,  disapproval, 
or  lamentation :  as, 

non  pudere,  T.  Ph.  233,  not  be  ashamed,  sedere  totos  dies  in  villa, 
Att.  12,  44,  2,  sitting  round  whole  days  and  days  at  the  country  place,  at  ti 
Romae  non  fore,  Att.  5,  20,  7,  only  to  think  you  won't  be  in  Rome,  hoc 
posteris  memoriae  traditum  in,  L.  3,  67,  I,  to  think  this  will  be  passed  down 
to  generations  yet  imborn.  Often  with  a  -ne,  transferred  from  the  unex- 
pressed verb  on  which  the  infinitive  depends  (1503):  as,  tene  hoc,  Acci, 
dicere,  tali  prudentia  praeditum,  Clu.  84,  what?  you  to  say  this,  Accius,  with 
your  sound  sense.  The  exclamatory  infinitive  is  chiefly  confined  to  Plautus, 
Terence,  and  Cicero. 


THE  INFINITIVE  OF  INTIMATION. 
2217.  This  infinitive  has  already  been  spoken  of;  see  1535-1539. 


THE  TENSES   OF   THE   INFINITIVE. 

2218.  The  present  infinitive  represents  action  as  go- 
ing on,  the  perfect  as  completed,  and  the  future  as  not 
yet  begun,  at  the  time  of  the  action  of  the  verb  to 
which  the  infinitive  is  attached. 

The  forms  of  the  infinitive  are  commonly  and  conveniently  called  tenses, 
though  this  designation  is  not  strictly  applicable. 

THE  PRESENT  TENSE. 

2219.  In   itself,  the   present  infinitive   denotes  action  merely  as 
going  on,  without  any  reference  to  time.     With  some  verbs,  however, 
which  look  to  the  future,  the  present  relates  to  action  in  the  immediate 
future.     With  verbs  of  perceiving,  knowing,  thinking,  and  saying,  it 
denotes  action  as  going  on  at  the  time  of  the  verb  :  as, 

395 


2220—2223.]  Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


(a.)  facinus  est  vincire  civem  Romanum,  V.  5,  170,  it  is  a  crime  to 
put  a  Roman  in  irons,  (b.)  audire  cupio,  Caec.  33,  /  am  eager  to  hear. 
Antium  me  recipere  cogito  a.  d.  v  Non.  Mai.,  Att.  2,  9,  4,  /  am  meditat- 
ing going  back  to  Antium  the  third  of  May.  (c.)  errare  eos  dicunt,  5,  41,  5, 
they  say  those  people  are  mistaken,  tempus  dixi  esse,  T.  Hec.  687,  I  said  it 
was  time,  dices  tibl  Siculos  esse  amicos  ?  V.  2,  155,  will  you  say  the  Sicil- 
ians are  friends  of  yours  ? 

2220.  The  present  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  with  memini,  recorder, 
memoria  teneo,  and  with  some  analogous  expressions,  such  as  accepimus, 
fertur,  &c.,  to  represent  merely  the  occurrence  of  action  really  completed, 
without  indicating  its  completion  :  as, 

memini  ad  me  te  scribere,  D.  38,  I  remember  your  writing  to  me.  me- 
ministis  fieri  senatus  consultum,  Mur.  ^i,  you  remember  a  decree  of  the 
senate  being  passed,  sed  ego  Idem  recorder  longe  omnibus  anteferre 
Demosthenem,  O.  23,  and  yet  I  remember  putting  Demosthenes  far  above 
everybody  else,  hanc  accepimus  agros  et  nemora  peragrare,  HR.  24,  we 
have  heard  of  this  goddess's  scouring  fields  and  groves.  Q.  Maximum  acce- 
pimus facile  celare,  tacere,  Off.  i,  108,  we  have  heard  of  Fabius's  ready 
cleverness  in  keeping  dark  and  holding  his  tongue.  But  the  perfect  is  used 
when  the  action  is  to  be  distinctly  marked  as  completed:  as,  meministis*  me 
ita  distribuisse  causam,  RA.  122,  you  remember  that  I  arranged  the  case 
thus.  Sometimes  present  and  perfect  are  united :  as,  Helene  capere  arma 
fertur,  nee  fratres  erubuisse  decs,  Prop.  3,  14,  19  (4,  13,  19),  Helen  is  said 
to  fly  to  arms,  and  not  to  have  blushed  in  presence  of  her  brother  gods.  Here 
capere  relates  to  the  same  completed  action  as  the  more  exact  erubuisse. 

2221.  With  verbs  of  saying,  used  in  the  narrower  sense  of  promising,  the 
present  infinitive  sometimes  stands  for  the  future  (2236) :  as, 

eras  mane  argentum  mih!  miles  dare  se  dixit,  T.  Ph.  531,  the  soldier 
spoke  of  paying  me  the  money  early  in  the  morning,  me  aibat  accersere, 
PI.  Ps.  1118,  he  said  he ''d  fetch  me  (2186).  quae  imperarentur  facere 
dixerunt,  2,  32,  3,  they  agreed  to  do  what  was  commanded. 

2222.  The  present  infinitive  dependent  on  a  past  tense  of  debeo,  oportet, 
possum,  often  requires  the  English  perfect  infinitive  in  translation  :  as,  quid  enim 
facere  poteramus  ?  Pis.  13,  for  -what  else  could  we  have  done?    See,  however, 
1495.    For  the  infinitive  perfect,  see  2230. 


THE  PERFECT  TENSE. 

2223.  (i.)  The  perfect  active  infinitive  sometimes  serves  as  a  comple- 
ment of  debeo,  volo,  possum,  &c.  (2168) :  as, 

tametsi  statim  vicisse  debeo,  tamen  de  meo  iure  decedam,  RA.  73, 

though  I  am  entitled  to  come  off  victorious  at  once,  yet  I  will  waive  my  right ; 
compare  vici,  I  am  victorious,  1608.  nil  vetitum  fecisse  volet,  J.  14,  185, 
nothing  forbidden  will  he  wish  to  have  done  ;  compare  feci,  /  am  guilty,  unde 
ilia  potuit  didicisse  ?  Div.  2,  51,  from  what  source  could  he  have  all  that 
information  acquired?  bellum  quod  possumus  ante  hiemem  perfecisse, 
L.  37,  19,  5,  the  war  which  we  can  have  ended  up  before  winter. 

396 


The  Infinitive.  [2224-2229. 


2224.  (2.)  In  prohibitions,  the  perfect  active  infinitive  often  serves  as  a 
complement  of  nolo  or  volo  (2168). 

Thus,  in  old  Latin,  nolito  devellisse,  PI.  Poen.  872,  do  not  have  had  it 
plucked.  Particularly  so  when  dependent  on  ne  velit  or  ne  vellet,  in  legal 
style:  as,  ne  quis  convenisse  sacrorum  causa  velit,  L.  39,  14,  8,  that  no- 
body may  presume  to  have  banded  with  others  for  the  observance  of  the  mysteries. 
BACAS  •  VIR  •  NEQVIS  •  ADIESE  •  VELET,  CIL.  I,  196,  7,  inscription  of  186 
B.  C.,  that  110  male  should  presume  to  have  had  resort  to  the  Bacchants  (765;  48). 
ne  quid  emisse  velit  insciente  dominS,  Cato,  RR.  5, 4,  he  must  not  venture  to 
have  bought  anything  without  his  master's  knowledge,  of  a  head  farm-steward. 

2225.  In  poetry  of  the  Augustan  age,  the  complementary  perfect  infinitive  active 
is  sometimes  dependent  on  a  verb  of  will  or  effort,  such  as  cur5,  laboro,  tendd  :  as, 
tendentes  opaco  Pelion  inposuisse  Olympo,  H.  3,  4,  51,  on  shadowy  Olym- 
fus  striving  Pelion  to  have  piled. 

2226.  Any  past  tense  of  the  indicative,  when  made  dependent  on 
a  verb  of  perceiving,  knowing,  thinking,  or  saying,  is  represented  by 
the  perfect  infinitive. 

Thus,  in  Theophrastus  scribit  Cimonem  hospitalem  fuisse  :  ita  enim 
vllicis  imperavisse,  ut  omnia  praeberentur,  Off.  2,  64,  Theophrastus  says 
in  his  book  that  Cimon  was  the  soul  of  hospitality :  he  had  directed  his  stewards 
to  furnish  everything  required;  the  fuisse  represents  erat  or  fuit,  and  the 
imperavisse  may  represent  imperabat,  imperavit,  or  perhaps  imperave- 
rat,  of  direct  discourse,  praeco  dixisse  pronuntiat,  V.  2,  75,  the  crier 
proclaims  ' speaking finished'  (1605). 

2227.  The  perfect  infinitive  passive  with  fuisse  denotes  a  past  resulting 
state:  as, 

dico  Mithridati  copias  omnibus  rebus  ornatas  atque  instructas 
fuisse,  urbemque  obsessam  esse,  IP.  20,  I  must  tell  you  that  Mithridates's 
'troops  were  completely  armed  and  equipped,  and  that  the  town  was  under  siege. 
Here  ornatas  fuisse  represents  ornatae  erant  (1615),  and  obsessam  esse 
represents  obsidebatur  (1595). 

2228.  (i.)  The  perfect  active  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  with  no!5  01 
volo,  especially  in  poetry,  when  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  not  the  same 
as  that  of  the  verb  (2189) :  as, 

hanc  te  ad  ceteras  virtutes  adiecisse  velim,  L.  30,  14,  6, 1  only  -wish 
you  had  this  good  quality  added  to  the  rest. 

2229.  (2.)  volo  often  has  an  emphatic  perfect  passive  infinitive,  usually 
without  esse  (2230)  ;  less  frequently  cupio  and  rarely  no!5 :  as, 

factum  volo,  PI.  B.  495,  As.  685,  I  want  it  done,  \.  e.  I  will,  illos  moni- 
tos  etiam  atque  etiam  vo!5,  C.  2,  27,  I  want  those  people  cautioned  over  and 
over.  Particularly  common  in  Cicero,  not  in  Caesar  or  Sallust.  Also  with 
impersonal  infinitives  (1479)  :  as»  obliviscere  ilium  adversario  tuo  voluisse 
consultum,  Att.  16,  i6c,  \o,you  must  forget  that  the  man  wanted  your  enemy 
provided  for. 

397 


2230-2236.]    Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


2230.  The  perfect  infinitive  passive  or  deponent,  commonly  without  esse,  is 
often  used  in  Flautus,  Terence,  and  Cicero,  by  assimilation  with  past  tenses  of  verbs 
of  propriety,  such  as  aequum  est,  convenit,  decet,  and  oportet  :  as,  non 
oportuit  relictas,  T.  Hau.  247,  they  should  n't  have  been  left,     te  lovi  com- 
precatam  oportuit,  PI.  Am.  739,  you  should  have  said  your  prayers  to  Jove. 
The  perfect  active  is  less  common  :  as,  cavisse  oportuit,  PI.  Am.  944,  you  should 
have  been  upon  your  guard.     For  volo,  cupio,  ndlo,  see  2229. 

2231.  The  perfect  infinitive  of  completed  action  is  very  common  with  such  expres- 
sions as  satis  est,  satis  habeo,  iuvat,  melius  est,  paenitet,  &c.,  also  with 
verbs  of  emotion,  such  as  gaudeo,  &c. :  as,  me  quoque  iuvat  ad  finem  belli 
Punici  pervenisse,  L.  31,  i ,  i,  /  am  delighted  myself  to  have  reached  the  end  of 
the  Punic  -war.    Oftentimes,  however,  in  verse,  the  use  of  the  perfect  is  partly  due  to 
the  metre. 


THE  FUTURE  TENSE. 

2232.  The  future  infinitive  is  only  used  as  a  representative  of  the  indica- 
tive, and  not  as  a  substantive. 

p 

fore  or  futurum  esse  with  ut  and  the  subjunctive  present  or  imperfect  is 
often  used.  This  construction  is  necessary  when  the  verb  has  no  future 
participle  or  supine  :  as, 

spero  fore  ut  contingat  id  nobis,  TD.  i,  82,  I  hope  we  may  be  so  fortu- 
nate, clamabant  fore  ut  ipsi  se  di  ulclscerentur,  V.  4,  87,  they  cried 
eut  that  the  gods  would  avenge  themselves. 

2234.  fore  with  the  perfect  participle  of  a  passive  or  deponent,  represents  the 
future  perfect  of  direct  discourse :  as,  debellatum  mox  fore  rebantur,  L.  23, 
13,  6,  they  thought  the  war  -would  soon  be  over. 

2235-  (!•)  Tne  future  infinitive  is  commonly  used  with  iuro,  minor, 
polliceor,  promitto,  and  spero,  especially  when  the  leading  verb  and  the 
infinitive  have  the  same  subject :  as, 

iuravit  se  nisi  victorem  in  castra  non  reversurum,  Caes.  C.  3,  87,  5, 
he  swore  he  would  not  come  back  to  camp  except  as  a  victor,  quod  se  facturos 
minabantur,  Caes.  C.  2,  13,  4,  which  they  threatened  they  would  do.  obsides 
daturos  polliciti  sunt,  4,  27,  i,  they  volunteered  to  give  hostages. 

2236.  (2.)  A  looser  present  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  with  the  above  verbs,  es- 
pecially in  old  Latin,  generally  without  a  subject  accusative.  Thus  with  iur5  by  Cato 
and  Plautus,  and  with  minor,  proclaim  with  threats,  by  Lucretius.  Similarly  dare 
pollicentur,  6, 9,  7,  they  offer  to  give.  reliqu5s  deterrerl  sperans,  Caes.  C.  3,  8, 
^hoping  that  the  rest  -were  scared,  spero  nostram  amicitiam  non  egere  tes- 
tibus,  Fam.  2,  2,  I  trust  our  friendship  needs  no  -witnesses.  As  possum  has  no 
future  infinitive,  the  present  of  this  verb  is  necessarily  used  :  as,  totius  Galliae  sese 
potiri  posse  sperant,  I,  3,  8,  they  hope  to  be  able  to  get  the  control  of  the  "whoU 
of  Gaul. 


398 


The  Gerundive  and  Gerund.   [2237-2241. 


THE  GERUNDIVE  AND  GERUND. 

2237.  The  gerundive  is  a  verbal  adjective  (899).     The  ger- 
und is  a  neuter  verbal  substantive,  used   only  in  the  oblique 
cases  of  the  singular.     Both  gerundives  and  gerunds  express,  in 
a  noun  form,  the  uncompleted  action  of  the  verb. 

2238.  Gerundives   and  gerunds,  like  the  English  verbal  in  -ing, 
were  originally  neither  active  nor  passive  (288),  but  might  stand  for 
either  an  active  or  a  passive.     In  time  a  prevailing  passive  meaning 
grew  up  in  the  gerundive,  and  a  prevailing  active  meaning  in  the 
gerund. 

A  gerund  may  be  followed  by  the  same  case  as  its  verb;  but  for  the 
gerund  of  verbs  of  transitive  use,  see  2242,  2255,  2259,  2265. 

2239.  Both  gerundives  and  gerunds  are  modified  like  verbs,  by  adverbs, 
not  by  adjectives. 

(i.)  THE  GERUNDIVE  CONSTRUCTION. 

2240.  The   gerundive    expresses,    in   an    adjective 
form,  the  uncompleted  action  of  a   verb  of  transitive 
use  exerted  on  a  substantive  object,  the  substantive 
standing  in  the  case  required  by  the  context,  and  the 
gerundive  agreeing  with  it. 

In  this  construction,  which  is  called  the  gerundive  construction, 
the  substantive  and  gerundive  blend  together  in  sense  like  the  parts  of 
a  compound. 

male  gerendo  negotio  in  aere  alieno  vacillant,  C.  2,  21,  owing  to  bad 
business-managing  they  are  staggering  under  debts,  studium  agri  colendl, 
CM.  59,  the  occupation  of  land-tilling,  vir  regendae  r6i  publicae  scientis- 
simus,  DO.  i,  214,  a  man  of  great  experience  in  state-managing. 

(2.)   THE  GERUND. 

2241.  The  gerund  expresses,  in  a  substantive  form, 
the  uncompleted  action  of  a  verb  which  has  no  direct 
object. 

ars  Vivendi,  Fin.  i,  42,  the  art  of  living,  non  est  locus  ad  tergiver- 
sandum,  Att.  7,  i,  4,  'tis  no  time  for  shill-I-shall-I-ing.  sum  defessus  quae- 
ritando,  PI.  Am.  1014,  /  '/»  all  worn  oiit  with  hunting,  se  experienda 
didicisse,  Ta.  I,  n,  he  had  learned  by  experience. 

399 


2242-2244-]    Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


2242.  Gerunds  of  verbs  of  transitive  use  are  exceptionally  found 
with   a   substantive   object   (2255,    2259,    2265),   and   regularly  with 
neuter   pronouns   and   neuter  plural   adjectives   to   avoid   ambiguity 
(1106).     See  also  2247. 

agendi  aliquid  discendique  causa,  Fin.  5,  54,  for  the  sake  of  doing  or 
learning  something,  faciendi  aliquid  vel  non  faciendi  vera  ratio,  Plin.  Ep. 
6,  27,  4,  the  true  ground  for  doing  or  not  doing  a  thing,  artem  se  tradere 
vera  ac  falsa  diiudicandi,  DO.  2,  157,  that  he  passed  along  the  art  of  dis- 
tinguishing between  the  trtte  and  the  false,  regendi  cuncta  onus,  Ta.  i,  II, 
the  burden  of  governing  the  world. 

CASES  OF  GERUNDS  AND  GERUNDIVES. 
NOMINATIVE. 

2243.  The  nominative  of  the  gerundive  construc- 
tion, as  the  subject  of  sum,  denotes  action  which  is  to 
be  done. 

The  combination  acquires  the  meaning  of  obligation  or  propriety,  and 
this  meaning  also  passes  over  to  the  accusative  with  esse.  The  person  who 
has  the  action  to  do  is  put  in  the  dative  of  the  possessor  (1215).  Instead 
of  the  dative,  the  ablative  with  ab  is  sometimes  used,  particularly  where  the 
dative  would  be  ambiguous. 

lib!  haec  cura  suscipienda  est,  V.  4,  69,  the  undertaking  of  this  care  ex- 
ists for  you,  \.z.you  must  undertake  this  charge.  Caesari  omnia  un5  tern- 
pore  erant  agenda :  vexillum  proponendum,  signum  tuba  dandum,  ab 
opere  revocandi  milites,  acies  mstruenda,  milites  cohortandi,  signum 
dandum,  2,  20,  i,for  Caesar  there  was  everything  to  be  done  at  the  same  mo- 
ment :  the  standard  to  be  raised,  bugle  call  given,  soldiers  summoned  in  from 
t/ieir  work,  line  of  battle  to  be  formed,  soldiers  harangued,  signal  given  for  en- 
gagement, quaerenda  pecunia  primum  est ;  virtus  post  nummos,  H.  E. 
I,  i,  53,  there  is  money-making  to  be  the  first  aim:  character  second  to  dollars. 
adeundus  mihl  illic  est  hom5,  PI.  R.  1298,  /  must  draw  near  this  fellow. 
Caesar  statuit  sib!  Rhenum  esse  transeundum,  4,  16,  i,  Caesar  made  itf> 
his  mind  that  he  must  cross  the  Rhine,  ego  istum  iuvenem  dorm  tenen- 
dum  censeo,  L.  21,  3,  6,  for  my  part,  I  think  that  young  man  ought  to  be  kept 
at  home.  61  ego  a  me  referendam  gratiam  non  putem  ?  Plane.  78,  should 
I  not  think  that  I  ought  to  show  my  gratitude  to  him  ?  quid  a  me  amplius 
dicendum  putatis  ?  V.  3,  60,  what  more  do  you  think  that  I  need  say  ? 

2244.  fruendus,  fungendus,  potiundus,  utendus,  vescendus,  are  also 
used  in  this  construction,  chiefly  in  the  oblique  cases;    in   the' nominative 
the  impersonal  construction  (2246)  is  usual.     These  verbs  sometimes  have  a 
transitive  use  in  old  Latin  (1380). 

n5n  paranda  nobis  solum  ea,  sed  fruenda  etiam  est,  Fin.  i,  3,  that 
is  a  thing  which  we  must  not  only  obtain,  but  enjoy  as  well,  of  wisdom,  nee 
tamen  est  potiunda  tibi,  O.  9,  754,  she  is  not  to  be  won  by  thee.  Examples 
of  the  oblique  cases  in  this  use  are  cited  below. 

400 


The  Gerundive  and  Gerund.    [2245-2249. 


2245.  habeo  with  the  gerundive,  as  an  equivalent  of  est  mihl,  est  tibt, 
&c.  (2243),  is  sometimes  found,  chiefly  in  late  writers  and   particularly  in 
Tacitus:  as, 

multi  habent  in  praediis,  quibus  frumentum  aut  vinum  aliudve 
quid  desit,  inportandum,  Varro,  RR.  i,  16,  2,  many  on  whose  estates  corn  or 
wine  or  something  else  is  lacking,  have  to  bring  it  in.  multum  interest 
utrumne  de  furto  dicendum  habeas  an  de  civibus  trucidatis,  Ta.  D.  37, 
//  makes  a  great  difference  whether  you  have  to  speak  about  a  theft  or  about  the 
murder  of  Romans,  si  nunc  primum  statuendum  haberemus,  Ta.  14,  44, 
if  we  had  to  decide  the  point  to-day  for  the  first  time. 

2246.  The  neuter  of  verbs  of  intransitive  use  takes  the  imper- 
sonal construction    with   est.     Verbs  ordinarily   transitive  also  take 
the  impersonal  construction  when  used  without  an  object. 

nunc  est  bibendum,  H.  i,  37, 1,  now  drinking  exists,  i.e.  noiuwe  mtist  drink. 
inambulandumst,  PI.  As.  682,  I  must  be  moving  on.  ego  amplius  delibe- 
randum  censeo,  T.  Ph.  457,  I  opine  there  must  be  more  pondering,  linguae 
moderandumst  mihl,  PI.  Cu.  486,  /  must  check  my  tongue,  omne  animal 
confitendum  est  esse  mortale,  DN.  3,  32,  //  must  be  admitted  that  every 
living  thing  is  destined  to  die.  nemo  umquam  sapiens  prSditori  creden- 
dum  putavit,  V.  i,  38,  no  wise  man  ever  held  that  a  traitor  was  to  be  trusted. 

2247.  The  impersonal  construction  with  an  object  in  the  accusative,  is 
old-fashioned  and  rare. 

canes  paucos  habendum,  Varro,  RR.  i,  21,  one  should  keep  but  few  dogs. 
aeternas  quoniam  poenas  in  morte  timendumst,  Lucr.  i,  in ,  since  pun- 
ishment eterne  they  have  in  death  to  fear.  This  construction  occurs  oftenest 
in  Lucretius  and  Varro;  once  in  Plautus,  a  few  times  in  Cicero  for  special 
reasons,  and  here  and  there  in  later  writers.  Not  in  Caesar  or  Horace. 

2248.  The  gerundive  sometimes  acquires,  in  itself,  the  meaning  of 
obligation  or  propriety,  which   it  properly  has  only  when  combined 
with  sum,  and  becomes  a  mere  adjective,  used  in  any  case. 

forma  expetenda  liberalem  virginem,  PI.  Per.  521,  afreeborn  maid  of 
shape  delectable.  L.  Bruto,  principe  huius  maxime  conservandi  generis 
et  nominis,  Ph.  3.  1 1,  Brutus,  the  Jirst  of  this  most  highly  cherished  house  and 
name,  huic  timendo  host!  obvius  ful,  L.  21,  41,  4,  I  met  this  dreadful  foe. 
Athenas,  multa  visenda  habentis,  L.  45,  27, 1 1,  Athens,  which  contains  many 
sights  worth  a  visit.  For  volvendus  &c.,  see  288. 

2249.  The   attributive   gerundive   (2248),  particularly   with    a   negative, 
in-  privative,  or  vix,  may  denote  possibility,  like  the  verbal  in  -bills :  as, 

labores  non  fugiendos,  Fin.  2,  1 18,  inevitable  labours.  Polybius,  haud- 
quaquam  spernendus  auctor,  L.  30,  45,  5,  Polybius,  an  authority  by  no 
means  despicable,  infandum,  regina,  iubes  renovare  dolorem,  V.  2,  3,  thou 
bidst  me,  qtteen,  rehearse  that  woe  unspeakable,  vix  erat  credendum,  5,  28,  I, 
it  was  hardly  credible,  praedicabile  aliquid  et  gloriandum  ac  prae  se 
ferendum,  TD.  5,  49,  something  laudable  and  vauntable  and  displayable  as 
well. 

401 


2250-2252.]  Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


ACCUSATIVE. 

2250.  (i.)  The  accusative   of   the  gerundive  construction  is 
used   with   loco   and   conduce,  with   suscipio,  habeo,  and 
euro,  and  with  verbs  of  giving  or  assigning. 

With  the  verbs  of  giving  or  assigning  (such  as  do,  trado,  committo,  at- 
tribuo,  divid5,  relinquo,  permitto,  denote),  the  emphasis  often  gravitates 
towards  the  substantive,  and  the  gerundive,  as  an  explanatory  appendage, 
acquLes  the  meaning  of  purpose.  So  in  Plautus  with  the  verbs  of  asking 
(rog5  and  peto) ;  in  Cicero  with  posco. 

(a.)  caedundum  conduxi  ego  ilium  : :  turn  optumumst  loces  efferen- 
dum,  PI.  Aul.  567,  I  engaged  htm  for  killing:  :  then  you  'd  better  contract  for 
his  funeral  (1709).  signum  conlocandum  consules  locaverunt,  Cat.  3,  20, 
the  consuls  let  out  the  erecting  of  the  statue,  redemptor  qui  columnam  illarn 
conduxerat  faciendam,  Div.  2,  47,  the  contractor  who  had  undertaken  the  mak- 
ing of  that  pillar,  vellem  suscepisses  iuvenem  regendum,  Att.  10,  6,  2, 1 
wish  you  had  undertaken  training  the  young  man.  aedem  habuit  tuendam, 
V.  1, 130,  he  had  the  looking  after  the  temple,  agrum  de  nostro  patre  colen- 
dum  habebat,  T.  Ph.  364,  he  had  the  tilling  oj  a  farm  from  my  father. 

(b.)  COIRAVIT  •  BASILICAM  •  CALECANDAM,  CIL.  I,  n66,  he  superintended 
the  town  hall  plastering,  pontem  faciendum  curat,  I,  13,  i,  he  attends  to  a 
bridge's  being  made,  i.  e.  has  it  made,  consulibus  senatus  rem  publicam 
defendendam  dedit,  Ph.  8,  15,  the  senate  entrusted  the  defence  of  the  state  to 
the  consuls,  agros  plebi  colendos  dedit,  RP.  3,  16,  he  gave  lands  to  the 
common  people  to  till.  Antigonus  Eumenem  propinquis  sepeliendurn 
tradidit,  N.  1 8,  13,  4,  Antigonus  delivered  Eumenes  to  his  kinsfolk  to  be  buried 
attribuit  nos  trucidandos,  C.  4,  13,  us  he  handed  over  to  be  slaughtered. 
saucios  milites  curandos  dividit  patribus,  L.  2,  47,  12,  he  apportioned  the 
wounded  soldiers  among  the  senators  to  crire.  haec  porcis  comedenda 
relinques,  H.  E.  1,7,  19,  you  '//  leave  them  to  the  pigs  to  eat.  civis  Romanes 
trucidandos  denotavit,  IP.  7,  he  specified  Romans  for  slaughter. 

(c.)  quae  utenda  vasa  semper  vicini  rogant,  PL  Aul.  96,  traps  that 
the  neighbours  are  always  asking  the  use  of.  artoptam  ex  proxumo  uten- 
dam  peto,  PI.  Aul.  400,  /  'm  going  for  the  use  of  a  breadpanfrom  next  door. 

2251.  When  such  a  verb  is  passive,  the  accusative  becomes  nominative. 
simulScrum  Dlanae  tollendum   locatur,    V.  4,  76,  the  moving  of  the 

statue  of  Diana  is  let  out.  dilaceranda  fens  dabor  alitibusque  praeda, 
Cat.  64,  1 52,  /  shall  be  given  a  prey  for  beasts  and  birds  to  tear,  traditique 
fetialibus  Caudium  ducendi,  L.g,  10,  2,  and  they  were  delivered  to  the  fetials 
to  be  taken  to  Caudium. 

2252.  (2.)  The  accusative  of  the  gerundive  construction  or 
gerund  is  used  with  a  preposition,  usually  ad.     If  the  verb  is 
of  transitive  use,  the  gerundive  is  proper,  not  the  gerund  (2240). 

This  construction  is  used  with  verbs  (including  verbs  of  hindering),  with 
substantives  generally  to  denote  purpose,  and  with  adjectives  which  have  the 
meaning  of  capable,  fit,  easy,  useful,  &c.,  &c 

402 


The  Gerundive  and  Gerund.    [2253-2255. 


(a.)  hie  in  noxiast,  ille  ad  dicendam  causam  adest,  T.  Ph.  266,  when 
A  's  in  trouble,  B  turns  up  to  make  excuses  for  him.  ad  pacem  petendam  ad 
Hannibalem  venit,  L.  21,  13,  i,  he  is  come  to  Hannibal  to  sue  for  peace,  ad 
eas  res  conficiendas  Orgetorix  deligitur,  I,  3,  3,  Orgetorix  is  chosen  to  do 
this,  dant  se  ad  ludendum,  Fin.  5,  42,  they  devote  themselves  to  playing. 
palus  Romands  ad  insequendum  tardabat,  7, 26,  2,  a  morass  hindered  ttu 
Romans  from  pursuit,  ut  pedites  ad  transeundum  impedirentur,  Caes.  C. 
I,  62,  2,  so  that  the  infantry  were  Jiampered  in  crossing.  (6.)  causa  ad  obiur- 
gandum,  T.  Andr.  150,  a  reason  for  finding  fault,  spatium  sumamus  ad 
cogitandum,  Fin.  4,  i,  let  us  take  time  for  thought,  alter  occasionem  sib! 
ad  occupandam  Asiam  oblatam  esse  arbitrator,  IP.  4,  the  other  thinks  a 
chance  is  given  him  for  seizing  all  Asia,  (c.)  homo  non  aptissimus  ad 
iocandum,  DN.  2,  46,  a  man  not  very  well  fitted  to  be  a  joker,  nirnis 
doctus  illest  ad  male  faciendum,  PI.  E.  378,  too  well  the  fellow 's  trained  at 
playing  tricks,  utebatur  eo  cib5  qui  esset  facillimus  ad  concoquendum, 
Fin.  2,  64,  he  made  use  of  the  sort  of  food  which  was  easiest  to  digest. 

2253.  Other  prepositions  are  sometimes  used :  as,  inter,  in  old  Latin, 
Vergil,  Livy,  and  later  writers ;  ob,  once  in  Ennius,  rarely  in  Cicero  and 
Sallust;    in  very  rarely,  but  even  in  Cicero;   ante   (Vergil,  Livy),  circa 
(post- Augustan),  propter  (Varro,  Val.  Max.),  all  rare. 

mores  se  inter  ludendum  detegunt,  Quintil.  i,  3,  12,  character  discovers 
itself  during  play,  ob  rem  iudicandam  pecuniam  accipere,  V.  2,  78,  to 
take  money  for  passing  judgement  on  a  case. 

DATIVE. 

2254.  The    dative   of    the    gerundive    construction    is   used 
with    adjectives,  verbs,  and  phrases  of   ability,   attention,  and 
adaptation,  with  titles  of  office,  and  with  comitia,  election. 

This  construction  is  not  very  common  in  classical  Latin,  where  few  verbs 
and  substantives  take  it  instead  of  the  usual  ad  and  the  accusative  (2252). 
Tn  old  Latin,  it  is  also  joined  to  adjectives  and  participles ;  in  Cicero  it  is 
thus  used  only  with  accommodatus.  From  Livy  on,  the  construction 
becomes  a  very  favourite  one.  Caesar  has  it  only  as  below  and  3,  4,  I. 

tails  iactandis  tuae  sunt  consuetae  manus,  PI.  Vid.  z^yottr  hands  ore 
used  to  throwing  dice,  optumum  operi  faciundS,  PL  R.  757,  most  suitable  for 
carrying  on  his  trade,  praeesse  agro  colendo,  RA.  50,  to  superintend  farm 
managing,  cum  dies  venisset  rogation!  ferendae,  Att.  i,  14,  5,  when  the 
day  came  for  proposing  the  bill,  hiberms  oppugnandis  hunc  esse  dictum 
diem,  5,  27,  5,  that  this  was  the  (fay  set  for  attacking  the  winter  quarters 
consul  placandis  dis  habendoque  dilectu  dat  operam,  L.  22,  2,  i,  the  ccn- 
sul  devotes  himself  to  propitiating  the  gods  and  raising  troops.  Demosthenes 
curator  muris  reficiendis  fuit,  OG.  19,  Demosthenes  was  commissioner  for 
repairing  the  walls.  niviri  r6i  publicae  constituendae,  L.  Epit.  120,  a 
commission  of  three  for  reorganizing  the  state,  comitia  collegae  subrogandS 
habuit,  L.  2,  8,  3,  he  held  an  election  for  appointing  a  colleague. 

2255.  In  the  dative,  a  transitive  gerund  with  an  object  in  the  accusative  is  found 
four  times  in  Plautus;  in  Ovid,  Livy,  and  Vitruvius  once  each. 

403 


2256-2259-]   Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


2256.  Late  writers  sometimes  use  the  dative  of  the  gerundive  con 
tion  instead  of  a  final  clause  (1961) :  as, 

subdQcit  ex  acie  legionem  faciendis  castris,  Ta.  2,  21,  he  withdraws  a 
i'gion  from  the  field  to  build  a  <  ani/<.     nidum  mollibus  plumis  consternunt 
tepifaciendis  Ovis,  simul  nC  dOrus  sit  infantibus  pullis,  I'lin.  A///, 
t  'n-y  line  the  nest  wit/i  soft  feathers  to  warm  the  eggs,  and  also  to  prevent  it  J >  ntn 

li,-iii',r  un<tiinf<»-ta/>lt  l»  thru  ymtn:'  l>nn>i/. 

3257.  The  dative  of  the  gerund  is  used  chiefly  by  old  and  late  \vi 
and  is  confined  in  the  best  prose  to  a  few  special  phrases. 

Osculando  meliust  pausam  fieri,  IM.  /'.  1205,  V/'r  Inter  th<it  a  stop  b<-  //// 
to  kissing.   tQ  nee  solvendO  er3s,  /'h.  2,  4,  you  were  neither  sol-vent. 
i.  e.  scribendO  arfuZrunt,  C  I  L.  I ,  i</>,  2,  there  were  present  when  the  document 
was  put  in  writing,     quod   scribendc*  adfuisti,  /'am.  1 5,  6,  2,  because  you 
were  present  at  the  writing. 


GENITIVE. 

2258.  (i.)  The   genitive   of  the  gerundive  construction    or 
gerund  is  used  with  substantives  or  adjectives. 

(<*.)  tacendi  tempus  est,  PI.  'Poen.  741,  it  's  time  to  be  still.  sp5s 
potiundi  oppidl,  2,  7,  2,  the  hope  of  overpowering  the  town  (2244).  sum  ma 
difficultas  nivigandl,  3,  12,  5,  the  greatest  difficulty  in  sailing,  proelii  com- 
mittendl  signum  dedit,  2,  21,  3,  he  gave  the  signal  for  beginning  the  tmttlr. 
exemplO  eorum  cl5d6s  fuit  ut  Mars!  mitterent  SrStorEs  pacis  petenclae, 
L,  9,  45,  1 8,  their  downfall  was  a  warning  to  the  Marsians  to  send  envoys  to 
sue  for  peace,  slve  navis  deiciendl  opens  essent  missae,  4,  17,  10,  or  if 
vessels  for  breaking  down  the  works  had  been  sent.  Particularly  with  causa, 
gratia^  or  rarely  ergO  (1257),  to  denote  purpose:  as,  frQmentandi  causa, 
4,  12,  i,  for  foraging,  vitandae  suspicionis  causa,  C.  i,  19,  to  avoid  n  - 
picion.  mOneris  fungendi  gratia,  RP.  i,  27,  for  the  sake  of  doing  one's  duty. 
illiusce  sacri  coercendi  ergo,  Cato,  KK.  139,  because  of  thinning  out  yon 
hallowed  grove, 

(b.)  quam  cupida  cram  hue  redeundl,  T.  /fee.  91,  hoiv  eager  I  was  to 
return  here,  homine  perito  d€flniendl,  Off.  3,  60,  a  man  accomplished  m 
drawing  distinctions,  perpessus  est  omnia  potius  quam  c5nsci5s 
dilendae  tyrannidis  indicaret,  TD.  2,  52,  he  stood  out  against  the  worst 
sooner  than  betray  his  confederates  in  the  overthrmu  of  the  tyranny,  insuitus 
navigandi,  5,  6,  3,  unused  to  sailing,  studiosus  audiendi,  N.  i$,  3,  2,  an 
eager  listener.  nescia  tolerandi,  Ta.  3,  I,  ignorant  what  patience  was. 
nandi  pavidus,  Ta.  //.  c,  14,  afraid  to  swim.  With  adjectives,  the  gerun- 
dive construction  is  not  found  in  1'lautus  and  Terence,  and  the  gerund  not  in 
Plautus.  Terence  has  the  perund  with  cupidus,  Cato  with  studiosus.  Thf: 
construction  is  of  slow  growth  before  Tacitus,  who  greatly  developed  it. 

2259.  Tn  the  genitive,  a  transitive  gerund  with  an  object  in  the  ac<  n    < 

tivc  is  MIC  »-xi  cpt  in   I'hinlus  ;   ordinaiily  tin-  jM;niii(li  vc  is  uscrl 

404 


The  Gerundive  and  Gerund.   [2260-2264. 


t8  dCfrudandl  causa,  PI.  Men.  <,';•/,  /or  (he  purpose  of  cheating  you.  cupi- 
dus  t5  audiendi,  Do.  2,  JO,  /-</;;,/•  t<>  li«u  you.  summa  eludcndi  occSsidst 
mihi  nunc  scne;,,  'I  /'//  gg&  /  '•  •  '""•'  "  vpfaidtd  ehanci  tht  gray  beard  i 

a/  ,'ttntin:>.  n6  sui  libcrandi  (22(>o)  atque  ulcisccndi  R5man5s  occ5- 
sioncm  dimittant,  5,  .p,  2,  ihnt  liny  -Jinnl,/  not  /,•(  .///>  //„•  ,hnn,e  of  freeing 
t/i.  in  </vr;  ,i/i,i  taking  ••"•II  "in"  <ni  iiir  J\'<»ii<ui;.  signum  colligendi  "visa 
dedit,  L.  2.},  i<i,  \\,  he  gave  the  signal  t<>  JH,I.-  th.'ii  ////// 


2260    nostri,  vostri  (or  vcstrl),  and  sul,  being  singular  in  form  (649) 

have  of!-  n  ;t    liogulftl   gCl  nu'liv*:. 

n5n  tam  sui  cdnservandi  quam  tuOrum  cOnsiliOrum  reprimendOrum 
causa  profQgfirunt,  6*.  r,  7,  they  Jli'U,  nut  w  mu,  /i  to  protect  themselvts  as  to 
,  i  a  h  v«u>  /.l<ins.  vCnissc  tempus  ulciscendl  sul,  Sest.  28,  //////  ////•  time  wm 
,„„!,  fa  Hi,  ,n  („  revenge  themselves,  vcstri  adhortandi  causa,  L.  21,  41,  i, 

/v   llu-  /.urj-n-n    nj  :•  you. 

2261.  Sometimes  another  genitive  appears  beside  the  genitive  of  the 

ii  perhaps  dependent  on  the  main  word.    This  use  U  found  in 
old  Latin,  Lucretius,  Varro,  and  here  and  there  in  Cicero,  as  well  as  in  late 

Latin. 

nOminandi  istOrum  tib!  erit  cOpia,  PI.  Cap.  852,  you  will  have  a  chance 

t,,  name  tli.m.    poenirum  solvendl  tempus,  Lucr.  5,  1225,  the  time  of  fiuy- 

in  '  f-r>i<iliii's.     exemplOrum  Sligend!  potestas,  fnv.  2,  5,  u  chance  of  picking 

:m/-les.    IQcis  tuendl  cOpiam,  PI.  Cap.  1008,  a  c  fiance  to  look  upon  the 

UKht. 

2262.  (2.)  The  genitive  of  the  gerundive  construction  is  used 
prcdicatively  with  sum. 

rCgium  imperium,  auod  initiS  cOnservandae  HbertStis  fuerat,  S.  C. 
f>,  7,  (he  authority  of  the  King,  which  hml  originally  served  to  uphold,  freedom. 
cCtera  in  xn  minuendl  sQmptQs  sunt  I5mentati5nisque  fQnebris,  Leg.  2, 
^<),  tin-  reii  of  the  contents  of  the  Twelve  Tables  are  conducive  to  the  abating  of 
extrtwtifwnrf  nnd  keening  at  funerals,  concordiam  Ordinum,  quam  dis- 
solvendae  tribQnlciae  potestatis  rentur  esse,  L.  5,  3,  5,  the  union  of  the 
•nihiih  ihi-y  li,  IHTV  serves  to  break  down  the  power  of  the  tribunes.  This 
use  is  not  common.  It  is  found  rarely  in  Sallust  and  Cicero;  chiefly  in 
Livy. 


2263.  Th(j  K'-mtive  <>f  the  gerundive  construction,  without  a  substantive 
or  .-ifljcr  tiv<r  (2^5-Sj  or  the  verb  sum  (2262),  is  occasionally  used  to  denote 
purpose  :  as, 

quae  ille  cCpit  ICgum  ac   Hbertatis  subvortundae,  S.  /<>-.  7V//7.  10, 


which  If  Ix-'.'un  in  order  to  overthrow  freedom  and  the  laws,  of  civil  war. 
Qnum  vinciri  iubet,  magis  Qsurpandi  iQrisquam  quiaQnlus  culpa  foret, 
'J  ;t  //.  4,  25,  he  ordered  one  into  irons,  more  to  vindicate  his  authority  than  be- 
cause an  individual  was  to  blame.  This  use  occurs  very  rarely  in  Sallust, 
chiefly  in  Tacitus  and  late  Latin.  Once  in  Terence  with  the  gerund. 

2264.  Tacitus  hat  the  genitive  of  the  gerundive  construction  two  or  three  times 
with  a  judicial  verb  (1280)  to  denote  the  charge:  as,  occupandae  rgl  pOblicae 
argul  nOn  poterant,  Ta.  6,  10,  they  could  not  be  charged  with  an  attempt  on  tkt 

' 

405 


2265—2267.]    Sentences :  Noims  of  the  Verb. 


ABLATIVE. 

2265.  In  the  ablative  a  transitive  gerund  with  a  substantive  object  is  not 
uncommon. 

fratrem  laudando,  Leg.  i,  i,  in  qiwting  your  brother,  large  partiendo 
praedam,  L.  21,  5,  5,  by  a  lavish  distribution  of  the  spoil.  This  use  is  par- 
ticularly common  in  Livy.  Not  in  Caesar. 

2266.  (i.)  The    ablative    of   the   gerundive    construction    or 
gerund  denotes  means,  less  often  cause,  rarely  manner  and  cir- 
cumstances, or  time,  or  respect. 

Means  :  Caesar  dando  sublevando  Ign5scundo,  Cato  nihil  largiundo 
gloriam  adeptus  est,  S.  C.  54,  3,  Caesar  gained  reputation  by  giving,  helping, 
and  pardoning,  Cato  by  lavishing  no  gifts,  opprimi  sustentando  ac  prolk- 
tando  nullo  pacto  potest,  C.  4,  6,  it  cannot  be  criished  by  patience  and  procras- 
tination. Livy  has  this  ablative  with  the  adjective  contentus  (1377):  nee 
iam  possidendis  publicis  agris  contentos  esse,  6,  14,  \\.,that  they  were 
no  longer  satisfied  with  the  occupation  of  the  public  lands.  Cause  :  aggerunda 
curvom  aqua,  PI.  Cas.  124,  bowed  with  water  carrying,  flendo  turgiduli 
rubent  ocelli,  Cat.  3,  18,  with  weeping  red  and  swollen  are  her  eyne.  Manner 
and  circumstances:  rare  in  old  Latin  and  Cicero :  not  in  Caesar  :  bellum 
ambulandS  confecerunt,  Caelius  in  Fam.  8,  15,  i,  they  strolled  through  the 
war.  senex  vincendo  factus,  L.  30,  28,  5,  maturing  in  victories.  Time : 
cum  plausum  me5  nomine  recitando  dedissent,  Att.  4,  i,  6,  when  they  had 
applauded  on  the  reading  of  my  name,  partibus  dividendis  ipsi  regio  evenit, 
L.  25,  30,  6,  at  the  distribution,  the  district  fell  to  him.  Respect :  Latine 
loquendo  cuivis  erat  par,  £r.i2$,  in  his  use  of  Latin  he  was  a  match  for 
anybody. 

2267.  (2.)  The    ablative    of   the   gerundive   construction    or 
gerund  is  also  accompanied  by  a  preposition,  ab,  de,  in,  or 
ex  ;  rarely  by  pro. 

nullum  tempus  ill!  umquam  vacabat  aut  a  scribendo  aut  a  cogi- 
tandd,  Br.  272,  he  never  had  any  time  free  from  writing  or  from  thinking. 
quod  verbum  ductum  est  a  nimis  intuendo  fortunam  alterius,  TD.  3, 
20,  a  word  which  is  derived  from  '  looking  too  closely  at '  another's  prosperity,  of 
the  word  invidia.  consilium  illud  de  occliidendis  aedibus,  T.  Eu.  784, 
that  idea  about  barring  up  the  house,  nibil  de  causa  discenda  praecipiunt, 
DO.  2,  100,  they  give  no  instruction  about  studying  up  a  case,  vostra  oratio  in 
re  incipiunda,  T.  Ph.  224,  your  remarks  when  we  started  in  with  this  affair. 
African!  in  re  gerunda  celeritatem,  V.  5,  25,  Africanus's  swiftness  in  exe- 
cution, vix  ex  gratulando  eminebam,  PI.  Cap.  504,  /  barely  got  my  head 
above  their  congratulations,  quae  virtus  ex  providendS  est  appellata 
prudentia,  Leg.  i,  60,  a  virtue  which  from  'foreseeing'  is  called  foresight. 
pro  liberanda  arnica,  PL  Per.  426,  for  setting  free  a  leman.  pro  ope  fe- 
renda,  L.  23,  28,  \\ ,  instead  of  going  to  the  rescue.  In  this  use  ab  is  not  found 
in  Plautus  or  Terence,  nor  pr5  in  Terence,  cum  is  found  in  Quintilian, 
super  once  in  Horace,  then  in  Tacitus,  sine  once  in  Varro. 

406 


The  Supine.  [2268-2272. 


2268.  With  a  comparative  expression,  the  ablative  of  the  gerundive  is  found 
once:  nullum  officium  referenda  gratia  magis  necessariurn  est,  Off,  i, 
47,  no  obligation  is  more  binding  than  the  returning  of  a  favour.  The  gerundive 
construction  in  the  ablative  of  separation  (1302)  is  lound  rarely^in  Livy  and  PJiny 
the  younger;  Livy  has  also  the  gerund:  as,  Verminam  absistere  sequendd 
coegit,  L.  29,  33,  8,  he  forced  Vermina  to  abandon  his  pursuit. 


THE    SUPINE. 

2269.  The  supine  is  a  verbal  substantive.     The  form  in  -um  is  an 
accusative.     The  form  in  -u  is  used  sometimes  as  a  dative,  sometimes 
as  an  ablative. 

THE  SUPINE  IN  -um. 

2270.  The   supine   in  -um   denotes  purpose  with  verbs  of 
motion  (1166)  :  as, 

abilt  piscatum,  PI.  R.  898,  he  's  gone  a  fishing,  neu  noctu  item  obam- 
bulatum,  PI.  Tri.  315,  not  to  go  a  prowling  by  night,  legione  una  frumen- 
tatum  missa,  4,  32,  i,  one  legion  being  sent  a  foraging,  sessum  it  praetor, 
DN.  3,  74,  the  praetor  is  going  to  take  his  seat,  spectatum  veniunt,  veniunt 
spectentur  ut  ipsae,  6.  A  A.  i,  99,  they  come  to  see  and  eke  for  to  be  seen. 
This  use  is  very  common  in  Plautus  and  Terence,  less  common  in  Cicero  and 
Caesar.  It  is  found  not  infrequently  in  Sallust  and  particularly  in  Livy ; 
sporadically  in  the  Augustan  poets.  In  late  prose  it  is  almost  confined  to 
archaistic  writing.  In  classical  Latin,  purpose  is  more  commonly  expressed 
by  the  subjunctive  with  ut  or  a  relative  pronoun,  or  by  a  gerundive  or  gerund 
with  ad  or  causa.  See  also  2164. 

2271.  The  most  common  supines  in  -um  are  cubitum,  dormitum,  erep- 
tum,  frumentatum,  gratulatum,  nuntiatum,  oppugnatum,  oratum,  pas- 
tum,  perditum,  petitum,   salutatum,  sessum,  supplicatum.     They  are 
found  chiefly  with  eo  and  venio.     nuptum  is  also  common  with  do,  colloco, 
&c.,  and  supines  are  occasionally  found  with  other  verbs  implying  motion. 

2272.  The  supine  in  -um  may  be  followed  by  the  same  construction  as  its 
verb :  as, 

(a.)  Accusative :  decs  salutatum  atque  uxorem  modo  intro  devortor 
domum,  PI.  St.  534>  I'll  just  turn  in  home  to  greet  my  gods  and  my  wife. 
legatSs  ad  Caesarem  mittunt  rogatum  auxilium,  i,  n,  2,  they  send  envoys 
to  Caesar  to  beg  aid.  oppugnatum  patriam  nostram  veniunt,  L.  21,  41,  13, 
they  come  to  assail  our  country.  Classical  writers  generally  avoid  this  use  of 
the  accusative,  (b.)  Dative  :  servitum  tibi  me  abducito,  PI.  Ps.  520,  take 
me  away  to  slave  for  you.  non  ego  Grals  servitum  matribus  ibo,  V.  2,  786, 
not  I  sfiall  go  to  be  the  serf  of  Grecian  dames,  (c.)  Subordinate  clause  :  legati 
veniebant :  Aedui  questum  quod  Harudes  fines  eorum  popularentur, 
i,  37,  i,  envoys  came :  the  Aedtians  to  complain  '  because  the  Harudians  were 
laying  their  country  waste '  (1853).  legates  ad  Caesarem  miserunt  oratum 
ne  se  in  hostium  numero  duceret,  6,  32,  i,  they  sent  envoys  to  Caesar  to  beg 
that  he  would  not  regard  them  in  the  light  of  enemies. 

407 


2 273~227 7-]    Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


2273.  The  supine  in  -um  followed  by  in  forms  the  future  passive  infini- 
tive :  as, 

eum  exceptum  In  puts,  Att.  7,  22,  i,  I  think  that  there  is  a  going  to  cap- 
ture him,  i.  e.  that  he  is  going  to  be  captured.  Here  In  is  used  impersonally 
and  eum  is  the  object  of  exceptum.  This  infinitive  is  found  half  a  dozen 
times  in  old  Latin,  often  in  Cicero,  rarely  in  other  writers;  not  in  the 
Augustan  poets.  For  the  common  periphrasis,  see  2233. 


THE  SUPINE  IN  -u. 

2274.  The  supine  in  -u  is  used  with  fas,  nefas,  and  adjec- 
tives, chiefly  of  such  meaning  as  easy,  good,  pleasant,  strange,  or 
their  opposites. 

Only  a  few  supines  in  -u  are  found ;  the  commonest  are  auditu, 
cognitu,  dictu,  factu,  inventu,  memoratu,  natu,  visu. 

si  hoc  fas  est  dictu,  TD.  5,  38,  if  heaven  alltnvs  us  to  say  so.  difficile 
dictu  est  de  singulls,  Fam.  I,  7,  2,  it  is  hard  to  say  in  the  case  of  individuals. 
quaerunt  quod  optimum  factu  sit,  V.  i,  68,  they  ask  what  the  best  thing  is 
to  do.  quid  est  tam  iocundum  cognitu  atque  auditu  ?  DO.  i,  31,  what 
pleasure  is  greater  to  mind  and  ear  ?  palpebrae  mollissimae  tactu,  DN.  2, 
142,  the  eyelids  are  very  soft  to  the  touch.  With  such  adjectives  the  dative  is 
commonly  used  (1200)  ;  or,  particularly  with  facilis  or  dimcilis,  the  gerun- 
dive construction  with  ad  (2252) ;  for  the  infinitive,  see  2166.  The  supine  in 
-u  is  found  chiefly  in  Cicero  and  Livy.  Very  rare  in  old  Latin,  Sallust, 
Caesar  (who  has  only  factu  and  natu),  and  the  poets.  From  the  elder  Pliny 
and  Tacitus  on,  it  gets  commoner. 

2275.  The  supine  in  -u  sometimes  introduces  a  subordinate  sentence, 
but  it  is  never  used  with  an  object  in  the  accusative. 

quoivis  facile  scitu  est  quam  fuerim  miser,  T.  Hec.  296,  anybody  can 
easily  understand  how  unhappy  I  was.  incredibile  memoratu  est  quam 
facile  coaluerint,  S.  C.  6,  2,  it  is  an  incredible  tale  how  readily  they  grew  into 
one.  videtis  nefas  esse  dictu  miseram  fuisse  talem  senectutem,  CM.  13, 
you  see  that  it  were  a  sin  to  say  that  an  old  age  like  his  was  unhappy. 

2276.  The  supine  in  -u  is  found  rarely  with  opus  est  (1379),  dignus  and 
indlgnus  (1392) :  as, 

ita  dictu  opus  est,  T.  Hau.  941,  thus  thou  must  needs  say.  nihil  dignum 
dictu  actum  his  c5nsulibus,  L.  4,  30,  4,  nothing  worth  mentioning  was 
done  this  year.  For  dignus  with  qui  and  the  subjunctive,  see  1819;  for 
opus  est  with  the  infinitive,  2211. 

2277.  In  Plautus  and  Cato,  the  supine  in  -u  is  very  rarely  used  like  an  ablative  of 
separation  (1302):  as,  nunc  opsonatu  redeo,  PI.  Men.  288,  I'm  only  just  back 
from  catering,    primus  cubitu  surgat,  postremus  cubi:um  eat,  Cato,  RR.  5, 
5,  let  him  be  first  to  get  up  from  bed  and  last  to  go  to  bed.     Statius  imitates  this  use  in 
Ac/i.  i,  119. 


4o8 


The  Participle.  [2278-2281. 


THE   PARTICIPLE. 

2278.  The  participle  is  a  verbal  adjective.     Like  the  adjec- 
tive, it  is  inflected  to  agree  with  its  substantive.     Like  the  verb, 
it  may  be  modified  by  an  adverb,  it  is  active  or  passive,  and  it 
expresses  action  as  continuing,  completed,  or  future.     It  may 
also  be  followed  by  the  same  case  as  its  verb. 

TIME  OF  THE  PARTICIPLE. 

2279.  (i.)  The  time  to  which  the  participle  refers  is  indicated  by 
the  verb  of  the  sentence. 

aer  effluens  hue  et  illuc  ventos  efficit,  DN.  2,  \o\,theair  by  streaming 
to  and  fro  produces  winds,  conveni  hodie  adveniens  quendam,  T.  En.  234, 
I  met  a  man  as  I  was  coming  to-day,  manus  tendentes  vitam  orabant,  L. 
44,  42,  4,  with  hands  outstretched  they  begged  their  lives.  Croesus  Halyn 
penetrans  magnam  pervertet  opum  vim,  oracle  in  Div.  2,  115,  Croesus, 
when  Halys  he  shall  cross,  will  overthrow  a  mighty  realm,  benignitatem 
tuam  mini  experto  praedicas,  PI.  Merc.  289,  thou  vauntest  to  me  who  \>e 
proved  thy  courtesy.  cSnsecutus  id  quod  animo  proposuerat,  receptui 
can!  iussit,  7,  47,  I,  having  accomplished  what  he  had  designed,  he  gave  orders 
to  sound  the  retreat.  Dionysius  Syracusis  expulsus  Corinth!  pueros 
docebat,  TD.  3,  27,  after  his  expulsion  from  Syracuse,  Dionysius  kept  school 
at  Corinth,  legati  dixerunt  se  re  deliberata  ad  Caesarem  reversuros, 
4,  9,  i,  the  envoys  said  that  they  would  come  back  to  Caesar  after  they  had 
thought  the  matter  over. 

2280.  (2.)  The  perfect  participle  of  deponents  is  sometimes  used  with 
past  tenses   or   their   equivalents   to   denote   incomplete   contemporaneous 
action.     So  occasionally  a  perfect  passive. 

(a.)  Metellum  esse  rati  portas  clausere,  S.  7.  69,  i,  supposing  that  it 
was  Metellus,  they  closed  their  gates,  gavisus  illos  retineri  iussit,  4,  13,  6, 
with  pleasure  he  gave  orders  for  their  detention,  persuadent  Rauracis  uti 
eodem  usi  consilio  proficiscantur,  i,  5,  4,  they  coaxed  the  Rauraci  to  adopt 
the  same  plan  and  go.  solatus  iussit  sapientem  pascere  barbam,  H.  S.  2, 
3>  35'  consoling  me  he  bade  me  grow  a  philosophic  beard.  This  use  is  found  in 
old  Latin  and  in  Cicero  very  rarely.  Sallust  and  Caesar  use  a  few  verbs 
thus.  It  is  not  uncommon  in  the  Augustan  poets  and  Livy.  In  late  writers, 
especially  Tacitus,  it  is  frequent,  (b.)  servum  sub  furca  caesum  medio 
egerat  circ5,  L.  2,  36,  I,  he  had  driven  a  slave  round,  flogged  tinder  the  fork, 
right  in  the  circus.  With  this  compare  servus  per  circum,  cum  virgis 
caederetur,  furcam  ferens  ductus  est,  Div.  i,  55,  a  slave  with  the  fork  on 
his  neck  was  driven  through  the  circus,  flogged  with  rods  the  while  (1872).  But 
the  perfect  passive  has  its  ordinary  force  (2279)  in  verberibus  caesum  te 
in  pistrinum  dedam,  T.  Andr.  199,  /  'II  give  you  a  flogging  and  then  put  you 
in  the  mill. 

2281.  For  the  perfect  participle  with  forms  of  sum  and  fui,  see  1608, 
1609 ;  for  the  conative  present  participle,  2301 ;  reflexive,  1482. 

409 


2282—2285.]  Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


THE  ATTRIBUTIVE  PARTICIPLE. 

2282.  The  present  or  perfect  participle  is  often  used  as  an 
adjective  to  express  a  permanent  condition  :  as, 

acrem  oratorem,  incensum  et  agentem  et  canorum  for!  strepitus 
desiderat,  Br,  317,  the  noisy  forttm  requires  an  impetuous  speaker,  inspired  and 
dramatic  and  sonorous.  L.  Abuccius,  homo  adprime  doctus,  Varro,  RR. 
3,  2,  17,  Abuccius,  an  eminently  learned  man.  alii  facet!,  florentes  etiam  et 
ornati,  O.  20,  others  are  brilliant,  even  bright  and  elegant,  id  tibl  renuntio 
futurum  ut  sis  sciens,  T.  Andr.  508, 1  give  you  notice  this  will  happen,  that 
you  may  be  prepared. 

2283.  The  future  participle  is  found  as  an  adjective  in  the  Augustan 
poets  and  in  late  writers.     Cicero,  however,  has  futurus  in  this  use  with 
res  and  a  few  other  words,  and  has  venturus  once. 

da  mansuram  urbem,  V.  3,  85,  grant  a  city  that  shall  abide,  firmus 
paries  et  duraturus,  Ta.  D.  22,  a  strong  and  durable  -wall,  signa  osten- 
duntur  a  dis  rerum  futurarum,  DN.  2, 12,  signs  of  future  events  are  disclosed 
by  the  gods.  For  the  future  participle  with  forms  of  sum,  see  1633. 

2284.  Many  participles  have  become  complete  adjectives,  and  as 
such  are  capable  of  composition  or  comparison,  or  take  the  case  re- 
quired by  an  adjective. 

(a.)  nomen  invictl  imperatoris,  V.  4,  82,  the  invincible  general's  name. 
purus  et  insons  si  viv5,  H.  S.  \,  6,  69.  pure  and  guiltless  if  I  live  (749). 
(6.)  solutus  veneficae  scientiSris  carmine,  H.  Epod.  5,  ji,  freed  by  some 
craftier  witch's  charm,  homo  eruditissimus,  Verres,  V.  4,  126,  Verres, 
most  accomplished  of  men.  (c.)  tibi  sum  oboediens,  PI.  MG.  806,  /  ''m  your 
obedient  (1200).  te  confido  ea  facturum  quae  mihl  intelleges  maxime 
esse  accommodata,  Fam.  3,  3,  2,  I  feel  confident  that  you  will  do  what  you 
shall  feel  most  appropriate  to  my  interests  (1201).  For  the  genitive  with  such 
participles,  see  1266. 

2285.  A  perfect  participle  in  agreement  with  a  substantive  often 
contains  the  leading  idea,  and  may  be  translated  like  an  abstract  sub- 
stantive with  a  genitive  dependent.     The  nominative  is  rarely  thus 
used.     The  present  participle  in  this  use  is  rare,  the  future  late. 

This  construction  expresses  the  completed  action  of  the  verb  in  pre- 
cisely the  same  way  that  the  gerundive  construction  (2240)  expresses  uncom- 
pleted action. 

(a.)  Joined  with  substantives :  iniuriae  retentorum  equitum  Roma- 
norum,  3, 10,  2,  the  outrages  of  Roman  knights  detained,  i.  e.  in  the  detention  of 
Roman  knights,  servati  c5nsulis  decus,  L.  21,  46,  10,  the  credit  of  saving 
the  consul,  male  administratae  pr5vinciae  urgebatur,  Ta.  6,  29,  he  was 
charged  with  maladministration  of  his  province.  6  quid  solutis  est  beatius 
curls  ?  Cat.  31,  7,  oh  what  is  sweeter  than  the  putting  off  of  care  ? 

(b.)  Joined  with  prepositions :  ab  condita  urbe  ad  liberatam,  L.  i,  60, 
3,  front  the  foundation  of  the  city  to  the  liberation  thereof,  post  natos  ho- 
mines improbissimus,  Br.  224,  the  greatest  reprobate  since  the  creation  of  man. 
ante  civitatem  datam,  Arch.  9,  before  the  gift  of  the  citizenship. 

410 


The  Participle.  [2286-2290. 


(c.)  In  the  nominative :  very  rare  before  Livy :  depressa  hostium 
classis,  Arch.  21,  the  sinking  of  the  enemy's  fleet,  angebant  ingentis  spiri- 
tus  virum  Sicilia  Sardiniaque  amissae,  L.  21,  i,  5,  what  tortured  the  high- 
souled  hero  was  the  loss  of  Sicily  and  Sardinia,  cuius  turbavit  nitidos 
exstinctus  passer  ocellos,  J.  6,  7,  whose  sparkling  eyne  the  sparrow's  death 
be  dimmed. 

2286.  This  use  of  the  participle,  though  old,  is  not  common  before  Livy, 
who,  like  Tacitus,  has  it  frequently,  both  with  substantives  and  with  prepo- 
sitions.    Very  rare  in  Caesar,  rare  in  Cicero,  who,  however,  uses  it  both  with 
substantives  and  with  a  few  prepositions.     In  old  Latin  (not  in  Terence),  it 
is  found  with  the  substantives  opus  and  usus,  in  Cato  with  post,  in  Varro 
with  propter  :  as,  mi  homine  conventost  opus, » PL  Cur.  302,  /  needs  must 
see  the  man.    propter  mare  congelatum,  Varro,  RR.  I,  2,  4,  by  reason  of 
the  freezing  of  the  sea  water.    For  the  participle  alone  with  usus  est  and 
opus  est,  see  1382. 

THE  SUBSTANTIVE  PARTICIPLE. 

2287.  Participles  sometimes  become  substantives,  especially  the 
perfect  participle :  as, 

vivit  gnata,  T.  Ph.  749,  your  daughter 's  alive,  de  demenso  suo,  T.  Ph. 
43,  out  of  his  allowance,  mstitutum  tenebimus,  TD.  4, 7,  we  will  hold  to  our 
fundamental  idea.  Adverbs,  not  adjectives,  are  commonly  used  to  qualify 
perfect  participles  used  as  substantives ;  for  examples,  see  1440.  The 
masculine  singular  is  rarely  used  as  a  substantive ;  the  neuter,  both  singular 
and  plural,  is  common,  particularly  with  prepositions. 

2288.  The  masculine  plural  of  the  perfect  participle,  when  used  as  a 
substantive,  generally  denotes  a  definite  class  of  persons  :  as, 

ut  damnati  in  integrum  restituantur,  vincti  solvantur,  V.  5,  12,  that 
the  condemned  go  scot-free,  the  imprisoned  are  set  at  liberty.  Catilina  cum 
expeditis  in  prima  acie  vorsari,  S.  C.  60,  4,  Catiline  bustling  round  in  the 
van  with  the  light  infantry,  evocatis  equos  sumit,  7,  65,  5,  he  took  away  the 
veterans'  horses.  Rarely  not  denoting  a  definite  class  :  as,  missi  intercipi- 
untur,  5,  40,  I,  the  men  who  had  been  sent  (i.e.  on  a  particular  occasion)  are 
cutoff. 

2289.  The  perfect  participle  alone  sometimes  serves  as  the  subject  of  a 
sentence  instead  of  an  abstract  substantive  (2285)  :  as, 

notum  furens  quid  femina  possit,  V.  5, 6.  the  knowledge  of  what  a  woman 
in  her  wrath  can  do.  pronuntiatum  repente  ne  quis  violaretur,  multitu- 
dinem  exuit  armis,  L.  4,  59,  7,  the  sudden  proclamation  that  nobody  was  to 
be  harmed^  deprived  the  people  of  their  weapons.  This  use  is  found  chiefly 
in  Livy,  once  or  twice  in  Cicero;  not  in  Caesar  or  Sallust.  See  1382. 

2290.  The  present  participle  is  rarely  a  substantive  in  the  nominative  and 
ablative  singular,  but  often  in  the  other  cases. 

in  constituentibus  rem  publicam,  Br.  45,  among  the  founders  of  a  state. 
multae  msectantes  depellunt,  DN.  2,  127,  many  drive  off  their  pursuers. 
nee  praeterita  nee  praesentia  abs  te,  sed  futura  exspecto,  Fam.  2,  S, 
I,  I  do  not  expect  from  you  the  past  or  the  present,  but  the  future. 

411 


2291-2295-]   Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


2291.  The  genitive  plural  of  the  present  participle  is  often  best  trans- 
lated by  an  English  abstract :  as, 

cachinnos  inridentium  commovebat,  Br.  216,  he  provoked  guffaws  of 
derision,  mixtos  terrentium  paventiumque  clamores,  L.  22,  5,  4,  mingled 
cries  of  exultation  and  terror,  primo  gaudentium  impetu,  Ta.  H.  i,  4,  in 
the  first  outburst  of  joy. 

2292.  The  future  participle  is  very  rarely  used  as  a  substantive. 

auditurum  dicturi  cura  delectat,  Quintil.  n,  3,  157,  deliberation  on  the 
part  <?/"  one  who  is  on  the  point  of  speaking  attracts  his  prospective  hearer. 
havl,  imperator,  morituri  te  salutant,  Suet.  Claud.  21,  emperor,  all  hail! 
the  doomed  give  thee  greeting.  This  use  is  found  in  late  writers,  as  in  Tacitus 
and  Curtius  once  each,  and  half  a  dozen  times  in  Pliny  the  younger.  Cicero 
and  Sallust  have  futurus  thus  (2283)  :  as,  abs  te  futura  exspect5,  Fam.  2, 
8,  i,  from  you  I  expect  the  future,  supplicia  in  post  futures  composuit, 
S.  Fr.  Lep.  6,  he  invented  penalties  for  men  unborn. 


THE  APPOSITIVE  PARTICIPLE. 

2293.  The  appositive  participle  is   a  loose  substitute   for  a 
subordinate  sentence  introduced  by  a  relative  or  by  a  conjunc- 
tive particle. 

2294.  (i.)  The  appositive  participle  may  represent  a  relative  sen- 
tence :  as, 

novi  ego  Epicureos  omnia  sigilla  venerantes,  DN.  i,  85,  why,  I  know 
Epicureans  who  bow  the  knee  to  all  sorts  of  graven  images.  Conon  muros 
dirutos  a  Lysandro  reficiendos  curat,  N.  9,  4,  5,  Conon  superintended  the 
rebuilding  of  the  walls  which  had  been  destroyed  by  Lysander.  The  future 
participle  is  poetic  and  late  (2283) :  as,  serves  iturum  Caesarem  in  Britan- 
nos,  H.  i,  35,  29, guard  Caesar  who  against  the  Britons  is  to  march. 

2295.  (2.)  The    appositive    participle,    representing    other   sen- 
tences, may  express   various  relations :  as,   (a.)  time,   (£.)  cause  or 
means,  (£.)  purpose,    (^/.)  concession,    (<?.)  hypothesis,    {/.)  descrip- 
tion or  the  manner  of  an  action,  like  an  adverb. 

For  the  ablative  absolute  in  such  relations,  see  1362-1374,  particularly 
1367. 

(a.)  Time :  vehemens  sum  exoriens,  quom  occido  vehementior,  PI. 
2?.  71,  furious  am  I  at  my  rising,  when  I  set  more  furious  still,  occisus  est 
a  cena  rediens,  RA.  97,  he  was  murdered  on  his  way  home  from  a  dinner- 
party, unam  noctem  solarn  praedones  commorati,  accedere  incipiunt 
Syracusas,  V.  5,  95,  the  freebooters,  after  tarrying  but  one  night,  began  to  draw 
near  Syracuse.  The  future  is  late  (2283)  :  as,  primum  omnium  virorum 
fortium  ituri  in  proelia  canunt,  Ta.  G.  3,  as  the  chief  of  all  brave  heroes^ 
they  sing  of  him  when  they  are  on  the  point  of  going  to  battle,  of  Hercules. 

412 


The  Participle.  [2295- 


(£.)  Cause  or  means :  motum  exspectans  dilectum  habere  Instituit, 
6,  I,  I,  since  he  anticipated  a  rising,  he  determined  on  recruiting  troops,  mo- 
veor  tali  amico  orbatus,  L.  10,  /  am  certainly  affected  at  being  bereaved  of  such 
a  friend,  dextra  data  fidem  futurae  'amicitiae  sanxisse,  L.  i,  i,  8,  by 
giving  his  right  hand  he  gave  a  pledge  of  future  friendship,  quae  contuens 
animus  accedit  ad  cognitionem  deorum,  DN.  2,  153,  through  the  contem- 
plation of  these,  the  mind  arrives  at  a  knowledge  of  the  gods.  The  future  par- 
ticiple is  late:  as,  neque  illis  iudicium  aut  veritas,  quippe  eodem  die 
diversa  parl  certamine  postulaturis,  Ta.  H.  i,  32,  they  had  neither  sound 
judgement  nor  sincerity,  since  on  the  same  day  they  were  to  make  conflicting  de- 
mands with  equal  vehemence. 

(c.)  Purpose:  the  future  participle,  commonly  with  a  verb  of  motion  : 
ad  Clusium  venerunt,  legionem  Romanam  castraque  oppugnaturi,  L. 
10,  26,  7,  they  came  to  the  neighbourhood  of  Clusium,  to  assail  the  Roman  legion 
and  camp,  ascendit  ipse,  laturus  auxilium,  Plin.  Ep.  6, 16,  9,  he  went  aboard 
in  person  to  go  to  the  rescue.  laetS  complerant  litora  coetu  visuri  Aenea- 
das,  V.  5>  107,  in  happy  company  they*  d  filled  the  strand  to  see  Aeneas'  men. 
rediere  omnes  Bononiam,  rursus  cSnsiliaturi,  Ta.  H.  2,  53,  they  all  went 
back  to  Bologna  for  a  second  consultation.  This  use  appears  first  in  C. 
Gracchus  as  cited  by  Gellius,  then  once  in  Cicero  and  Sallust  each,  and  a 
few  times  in  the  poets.  From  Livy  on,  it  grows  commoner.  In  the  poets, 
Livy,  and  Tacitus,  it  is  sometimes  joined  with  a  conditional  idea  or  protasis  : 
as,  egreditur  castris  Romanus,  vallum  invasurus  m  copia  pugnae 
fieret,  L.  3,  60,  8,  the  Roman  marches  out  of  camp,  proposing  to  assault  the 
stockade  unless  battle  were  offered. 

(d.)  Concession :  qui  mortalis  natus  condicionem  postules  immor- 
tal ium,  TD.  3,  36,  thou  who,  though  born  to  die,  layest  claim  to  the  state  of  the 
deathless,  bestiis,  quibus  ipsa  terra  fundit  pastus  abundantis  nihil 
laborantibus,  Fin.  2,  in,  the  beasts,  on  which,  though  they  toil  not,  earth  lav- 
ishes sustenance  in  profusion.  Often  with  tamen  or  the  like  accompanying 
the  verb:  as,  ibl  vehementissime  perturbatus  Lentulus  tamen  et  sig- 
num  et  manum  suam  cognovit,  C.  3,  12,  thereupon  Lentulus,  though  thrown 
into  the  most  extreme  confusion,  did  yet  recognize  his  own  hand  and  seal.  For 
quamquam  and  quamvis,  see  1900,  1907.  Ovid  and  Propertius  sometimes 
have  licet  (1710) :  as,  isque,  licet  caeli  regi5ne  remStos,  mente  decs 
adiit,  O.  15,  62,  he  in  the  spirit  to  the  gods  drew  nigh,  thoitgh  they  are  far 
away  in  heaven's  domain.  The  future  participle  is  rare  and  late. 

(e.)  Hypothesis:  quid  igitur  mih!  ferarum  laniatus  oberit  nihil  sen- 
tient! ?  TD.  i,  104,  what  hurt  will  the  clawing  of  wild  beasts  do  me  if  I  have 
no  feeling?  apparebat  non  admissos  protinus  Carthaginem  ituros,  L. 
21,  9,  4,  it  grew  obvious  that,  if  not  given  audience,  they  would  go  to  Carthage 
forthwith.  For  other  examples,  see  2110.  For  the  participle  with  quasi  or 
ut,  and  in  late  writers  with  tamquam  or  velut,  see  2121.  The  future  parti- 
ciple is  rare  and  late. 

(f.)  Description  or  manner :  haec  properantes  scripsimus,  Att.  4,  4*, 
I  have  written  this  hastily,  i.  e.  in  haste  yours  truly,  dictator  et  magister 
equitum  triumphantes  in  urbem  rediere,  L.  2,  20,  13,  the  dictator  and  his 
master  of  the  horse  returned  to  the  city  in  triumph,  incendebat  haec  fletu 
et  pectus  verberans,  Ta.  i,  23,  he  lent  passion  to  his  words  with  tears  and 
beating  of  his  breast.  vinct5s  aspiciunt  catenis  liberos  su5s,  V.  5,  108, 
they  behold  their  own  children  held  in  bondage. 

413 


2296-2299-]   Sentences:  Nouns  of  the  Verb. 


2296.  The  participle  with  a  negative  may  be  translated  by  -without:  as, 
id  ilia  univorsum  abripiet  baud  existumans  quanto  labore  partum, 

T.  Ph.  45,  my  lady  '//  grab  it  all  without  a  tliought  of  all  the  toil  it  cost  to  get. 

non  rogatos  ultro  offerre  auxilium,  L.  34,  23,  3,  that  without  being  asked^ 

they  offer  assistance  of  their  own  accord. 

THE  PREDICATIVE   PARTICIPLE. 

22Q7*  habeo  is  sometimes  used  with  certain  perfect  participles  to 
express  an  action  continuing  in  its  consequences,  facio,  do,  and  in 
old  Latin  reddo  and  euro,  with  a  perfect  participle,  are  emphatic  sub- 
stitutes for  the  verb  to  which  the  participle  belongs. 

(a.)  quae  nos  nostramque  adulescentiam  habent  despicatam  et 
quae  nos  semper  omnibus  cruciant  modis,  T.  Eu.  383,  who  hold  us  and 
our  youth  in  scorn  and  torment  ics  in  every  way.  in  ea  provincia  pecunias 
magnas  collocatas  habent,  IP.  18,  they  have  invested  large  funds  in  that 
province.  Clodii  animum  perspectum  habeS,  cognitum,  iudicatum,  ad 
Br.  I,  I,  I,  Clodius's  mind  I  have  looked  into  thoroughly,  probed,  formed  a 
judgement  on.  clausum  lacu  ac  montibus  et  circumfusum  suis  copiis 
habuit  hostem,  L.  22,  4,  5,  his  enemy  he  had  shut  in  by  lake  and  mountains 
and  surrounded  by  his  troops.  See  also  1606. 

(£.)  missa  haec  face,  T.  Ad.  906,  let  this  pass,  verum  haec  missa  facio, 
RA.  76,  but  I  let  this  pass.  Manlium  missum  fecit,  Off.  3,  112,  he  let  Man- 
lius  go.  factum  et  curatum  dabo,  PI.  Cas.  439,  / '//  have  it  done  and  seen 
to.  stratas  legiones  Latmorum  dabo,  L.  8,  6,  6,  /  will  lay  the  Latin  legions 
low.  ego  iam  te  commotum  reddam,  T.  Andr.  864,  /  Y/  soon  have  you 
worked  tip.  inventum  tibi  curabS  tiibrn  Pamphilum,  T.  Andr.  684,  /  'II 
have  your  Pamphilus  looked  up  for  you.  In  classical  writers,  facio  only  is 
found  in  this  use  and  only  with  the  participle  of  mittS  ;  do  occurs  in  late 
writers ;  reddo  and  euro  only  in  old  Latin.  All  these  verbs  are  usually  in 
the  future  tense  or  its  equivalent.  For  volo,  cupio,  and  nol5  with  the  infin- 
itive passive  without  esse,  see  2229. 

2298.  The   present  participle   is   used   predicatively   with   verbs 
signifying  represent,  and  with  verbs  denoting  the  exercise  of  the  senses 
or  mind :  as, 

facit  Socratem  disputantem,  DN.  I,  31,  he  represents  Socrates  dis- 
cussing, quasi  ipsos  induxl  loquentes,  L.  3,  I  have  brought  on  the  men 
themselves  as  speaking,  non  ilium  miserum,  ignarum  casus  sui,  redeun- 
tem  a  cena  videtis  ?  RA.  98,  do  you  not  see  the  poor  man,  little  dreaming  of 
his  fate,  returning  from  the  dinner?  non  audivit  draconem  loquentem, 
Div.  2, 141,  he  did  not  hear  the  serpent  speaking.  This  use  is  found  in  Plautus, 
Terence,  Cicero,  Sallust,  Horace,  Nepos,  Vitruvius,  and  Livy.  Once  in 
Piso  (consul  133  B.C.),  as  cited  by  Gellius,  7,  9,  6.  Verbs  denoting  the 
exercise  of  the  senses  or  mind  take  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  to 
denote  the  fact  or  action;  see  2175.  For  audio  with  cum,  see  1870.  For 
the  infinitive  without  esse  with  verbs  of  emotion,  see  2184. 

2299.  A  passive  with  a  verb  meaning  represent  is  expressed,  for  lack  of  a 
present  passive  participle,  by  the  infinitive  (2175).    The  infinitive  active  is  rare. 

414 


The  Participle.  [2299. 


(a.)  construi  5  de5  atque  aedificari  mundum  facit,  DN.  I,  19,  he  rep- 
resents the  world  being  put  together  and  built  by  the  gods,  (b.)  poetae  impen- 
dere  saxum  Tantalo  faciunt,  TD.  4,  35,  the  poets  represent  a  rock  hanging 
ov^r  Tantalus.  Rarely  the  participle  (2298)  and  the  infinitive  are  united  :  as, 
Polyphemum  Homerus  cum  ariete  conloquentem  facit  eiusque  lau- 
dare  fortunas,  TD.  5,  115,  Homer  represents  Polyphetmis  chatting  with  the 
ram  and  his  envy  of  the  ram's  estate.  But  the  perfect  infinitive  active  must 
be  used  when  the  action  is  to  be  distinctly  marked  as  completed,  for  lack  of 
a  perfect  active  participle :  as,  fecit  Dolabella  Verrem  accepisse,  V.  i,  100, 
Dolabella  represented  Verres  as  having  received. 


415 


APPENDIX. 


(A.)    SOME    OCCASIONAL    PECULIARITIES   OF 

VERBS. 

2300.  In  many  cases  where  in  English  a  verb  like  wish  or  try  to  have  a 
thing  done,  can,  must,  or  am  allowed  to,  is  used,  the  equivalent  Latin  verb  is 
omitted.     As  this  use  generally  extends  through  the  entire  system  of  the 
verb,  examples  of  the  nouns  of  the  verb  and  of  subordinate  sentences  thus 
used,  are  conveniently  included  here. 

THE  CONATIVE  USE. 

2301.  A  verb  is  sometimes  used  to  denote  action  proposed, 
attempted,  or  begun,  but  not  necessarily  carried  out.     This  is 
called  the  Conative  Use  of  the  verb  :  as, 

ancillas  dedo,  T.  Hec.  773,  I  try  to  give,  or  I  offer  up  the  servant  girls. 
sine  ulla  dubitatione  condemnant,  Clu.  75,  without  a  moment's  hesitation 
they  vote  to  condemn,  dum  id  inpetrant,  PI.  Cap.  233,  as  long  as  they  're 
trying  to  get  it.  si  places  inlacrimabilem  Plutona,  H  2,  14,  5,  shouldst 
thou  the  stonyhearted  Pluto  strive  to  melt,  si  discedas,  J.  7,  50,  should,  you 
attempt  to  leave,  in  curiam  abiecit,  quam  vivus  everterat,  Mil.  90,  he 
shoved  the  corpse  into  the  senate  house,  which  the  man  in  his  lifetime  had  done 
his  best  to  overthrow,  adsurgentem  regem  umbone  resupinat,  L.  4,  19,  5, 
with  the  boss  of  his  shield  he  put  the  king  flat  on  his  back,  when  he  tried  to 
get  up. 

2302.  This  use  is  particularly  common  in  the  imperfect  indicative  :  as, 

nostros  ingredi  prohibebant,  5,  9,  6,  they  tried  to  stop  our  people  from 
getting  in.  Apelles  faciebat,  Plin.  NH.  praef.  26,  Apelles  undertook  to  do 
this,  or  an  attempt  of  Apelles's.  sedabant  tumultus,  sedando  interdum 
movebant,  L.  3,  15,  7,  they  tried  to  quell  the  riotings,  but  by  trying  they  started 
them  once  in  a  while  afresh,  num  dubitas  id  me  imperante  facere,  quod 
iam  tua  sponte  faciebas  ?  C.  I,  13,  do  you  possibly  hesitate  to  do  at  my  com- 
mand what  you  wanted  to  do,  as  it  was,  yourself  ?  The  conative  use  is  not 
very  common  in  old  Latin,  but  more  frequent  from  Cicero  and  Caesar  on. 

2303.  When  the  conative  use  is  to  be  expressed  more  distinctly,  a  form  of  volo 
or  Conor  is  used,  or  a  frequentative,  like  vendito,  try  to  sell,  advento,  strive  tt 
come. 

27  417 


2304-2306.]  Appendix  (A.) 


THE  CAUSATIVE  USE. 

2304.  A  verb  is  sometimes  used  to  denote  not  what  the  subject  actually 
does  himself,  but  what  he  has  another  do.  This  is  called  the  Causative  Use 
of  the  verb :  as, 

animi  causa  mihi  navem  faciam,  PI.  R.  932,  just  for  diversion  I'll  build 
me  a  yacht,  cum  vellet  sib!  anulurn  facere,  aurificem  iussit  vocari,  V» 
4,  56,  wanting  to  make  him  a  ring^  he  ordered  a  goldsmith  to  be  called,  corn- 
plures  pauperes  mortuos  suo  sumptu  extulit,  N.  5,  4,  3,  he  buried  a  good 
many  poor  dead  people  at  his  own  expense,  i.  e.  had  them  buried.  Also  in  the 
passive:  as,  tondemur,  Quintil.  I,  6,  44,  we  get  shaved.  When  greater  ex- 
actness is  required,  having  a  thing  done  may  be  expressed  more  distinctly  by 
facia  (1965),  by  euro  (2250),  or  by  iubeo. 


THE  POTENTIAL  USE. 

2305.  A  verb  is  sometimes  used  to  indicate  action  that  can  be 
done,  and  especially  action  that  can  be  done  at  any  time.  This  is 
called  the  Potential  Use  of  the  verb  :  as, 

dare  oculis  video,  PI.  MG.  630, 1  can  see  distinctly,  propterea  quod  inter 
fines  Helvetiorum  et  Allobrogum  Rhodanus  fluit  isque  nonnullis  locis 
vado  transitur,  I,  6,  2,  because  the  Rhone  runs  between  the  district  of  the  Hel- 
vetians and  Allobrogans,  and  the  river  in  some  places  can  be  forded,  or  is  ford- 
able.  Particularly  with  a  negative  :  as,  aperte  adulantem  nemo  non  videt, 
L.  99,  an  open  flatterer  anybody  can  see  through,  non  facile  diiudicatur 
amor  verus  et  nctus,  Fam.  9,  16,  2,  real  love  and  pretended  love  cannot  easily 
be  told  apart,  ub!  Crassus  animadvertit,  suas  copias  non  facile  diduci, 
non  cunctandum  existimavit,  3,  23,  7,  when  Crassus  saw  that  his  forces 
could  not  easily  be  divided,  he  thought  he  ought  to  lose  no  time,  quoniam 
propositum  n5n  tenuerat,  Caes.  C.  3,  6c;,  4,  seeing  that  he  had  not  succeeded 
in  carrying  out  his  plan.  Sometimes  this  idea  is  expressed  by  the  subjunc- 
tive (1554). 


THE  OBLIGATORY  USE. 

2306.  A  verb  is  sometimes  used  to  denote  obligatory  action.  This  is 
called  the  Obligatory  Use  of  the  verb :  as, 

paulisper  commoratus  est,  Mil.  28,  he  had  to  wait,  aegra  trahebant 
corpora,  V.  3,  140,  they  had  to  drag  their  sickly  frames  along,  carui  patria, 
Sest.  145,  I  had  to  keep  away  from  the  country  of  my  birth,  senator  popull 
Roman!  pernoctavit  in  publico,  V.  4,  25,  a  senator  of  Rome  was  fain  to  sleep 
in  the  streets,  seremus  aliquid  in  derelicto  solo,  Br.  \6,ive  shall  hare  to 
sow  something  in  an  abandoned  field,  erat  summa  inopia  pabuli,  adeo  ut 
foliis  equos  alerent,  Caes.  C.  3,  58,  3,  there  was  an  utter  lack  offodder^so  thai 
they  were  fain  to  feed  their  horses  on  leaves. 

418 


Indirect  Discourse.  [2307-2312. 


THE  PERMISSIVE  USE. 

2307.  A  verb  is  sometimes  used  to  denote  permitted  action.    This  is 

called  the  Permissive  Use  of  the  verb:  as, 

Verresne  habebit  domi  suae  candelabrum  lovis  ?  V.  4, 71, shall  Verres 
be  allowed  to  have  at  his  house  a  candelabra  of  Jupiter?  petit  ut  ipse  de  eo 
statuat,_i,  19,  5,  he  asks  to  be  allowed  to  sit  in  judgement  himself  on  the  man. 
PIso  oravit  ut  maneret,  Ta.  2, 81,  Piso  asked  to  be  allowed  to  stay. 


(B.)  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE. 

(Oratio  Obliqua.) 

2308.  The  speech  or  thought  of  another,  quoted  in  his  own  words, 
is  called  Direct  Discourse  (1723). 

2309.  The  speech  or  thought  of  another,  dependent  on  a 
verb  of  saying  or  thinking,  is  called  Indirect  Discourse  (1723). 

One  may,  of  course,  quote  his  own  words  or  thoughts  indirectly,  as  well 
as  those  of  another  (1726). 

2310.  The  verb  of  thinking  or  saying  is   often  not  distinctly 
expressed,  but  only  implied  in  the  context  (1725). 

2311.  The  principles  which  govern  the  change  of  direct  discourse  into 
indirect  discourse  have  been  already  set  forth  in  the  foregoing  pages ;  but, 
for  the  convenience  of  the  learner,  they  are  here  put  together. 


MOOD. 
(A.)   MAIN  SENTENCES. 

2312.  Declarative  sentences  of  direct  discourse  are 
put  in  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  and  interroga- 
tive and  imperative  sentences  of  direct  discourse  are 
put  in  the  subjunctive,  in  indirect  discourse. 

(a.)  For  examples  of  declarative  sentences,  see  2175-2184. 

419 


23I3~23I5-]  Appendix  (B.) 


(t>.)  Interrogative  (1773):  quid  vellet  ?  cur  in  suas  possessiones 
veniret  ?  I,  44,  7,  what  did  he  mean  ?  why  this  movement  into  his  property  ? 
from  Ariovistus's  reply  to  Caesar,  dictator  litteras  ad  senatum  misit : 
deum  benignitata  Veios  iam  fore  in  potestate  popull  Roman!;  quid  de 
praeda  faciendum  censerent  ?  L.  5,  20,  i,  the  dictator  sent  this  letter  to  the 
senate :  through  the  bounty  of  the  gods  Vei  would  soon  belong  to  the  Roman 
nation  ;  what  did  they  think  should  be  done  about  the  booty  ? 

(c.)  Imperative  (1547) :  Cicero  respondit :  si  ab  armis  discedere  ve- 
Hnt,  se  adiutore  utantur  legatosque  ad  Caesarem  mittant,  5,  41,  7, 
Cicero  replied :  if  they  wished  lo  lay  down  their  arms,  let  them  take  his  advice 
and  send  envoys  to  Caesar,  nuntius  61  domo  venit :  bellum  Athenienses 
et  BoeotSs  indlxisse  Lacedaemoniis;  quare  venire  ne  dubitaret,  N.  17, 
4,  I,  a  message  reached  him  from  home:  the  Athenians  and  Boeotians  had 
declared  war  on  the  Lacedaemonians  ;  so  he  was  to  come  without  delay.  See 
also  1707,  1708. 

2313.  Rhetorical  questions  (that  is,  declarations  made  for  effect  in 
the  form  of  questions)  in  the  first  or  third  person  in  the  direct  dis- 
course are  put  in  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  in  indirect  dis- 
course :  as, 

si  veteris  contumeliae  oblivisci  vellet,  num  etiam  recentium  iniuri- 
arum  memoriam  deponere  posse  ?  I,  14,  3,  if  he  were  inclined  to  disregard 
the  old  affront,  could  he  also  forget  their  fresh  insults  ?  from  Caesar's  reply  to 
the  Helvetians,  baud  mirum  esse  Superbo  6i  inditum  Romae  cogno- 
men :  an  quicquam  superbius  esse  quam  ludificari  sic  omne  nomen 
Latinum  ?  cui  non  apparere  adfectare  eum  imperium  in  Latinos  ?  L. 
I,  50,  3,  no  wonder  Rome  dubbed  him  '  the  Proud1 :  could  there  be  a  greater 
sign  of  pride  than  this  mockery  of  the  whole  Latin  nation  ?  who  did  not  see  that 
he  aspired  to  dominion  over  the  Latins  ?  This  use  is  not  found  in  old  Latin. 
It  occurs  once  or  twice  in  Cicero's  letters  and  a  few  times  in  Caesar.  In 
Livy  and  late  writers,  it  is  not  uncommon.  Such  questions  in  the  second 
person  require  the  subjunctive  (2312). 

2314.  Questions  which  are  in  the  subjunctive  in  direct  discourse  retain 
the  subjunctive  in  indirect  discourse  :  as, 

quod  vero  ad  amicitiam  populi  Roman!  attulissent,  id  iis  eripi  quis 
pat!  posset  ?  I,  43,  8,  who  could  allow  them  to  be  stripped  of  what  they  had 
possessed  when  they  became  the  friends  of  the  Roman  nation  ?  (1565). 


(B.)  SUBORDINATE  SENTENCES. 

2315.  The  verb  of  a  subordinate  sentence,  intro- 
duced by  a  relative  word  or  a  conjunctive  particle, 
stands  in  the  subjunctive  in  indirect  discourse  (1722). 

For  the  indicative  with  dum,  in  the  time  while,  retained  in  indirect 
discourse,  see  1995 

4.2(7 


Indirect  Discourse.         [2316-2319. 


sapientissimum  esse  dicunt  eum,  cui  quod  opus  sit  ipsi  veniat  in 
mentem ;  proxime"  accedere  ilium  qul  alterius  bene  inventis  obtem- 
peret,  Clu.  84,  they  say  he  is  the  wisest  man  who  thinks  out  of  himself  what  is 
expedient ;  and  that  the  man  who  avails  himself  of  the  wise  devices  of  another 
comes  next,  ad  haec  Ariovistus  respondit :  ius  esse  belli,  ut  qui  vicis- 
sent  iis  quos  vicissent,  quemadmodum  vellent  imperarent,  I,  36,  I,  to 
tJiis  Ariovistus  answered:  that  it  was  the  right  of  war  for  the  conquerors  to 
dictate  to  the  conquered  such  terms  as  they  pleased. 

2316.  Relative  sentences  equivalent  to  main  sentences  (1835)  ma7  be  Put 
in  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  :  as, 

unum  medium  diem  fuisse,  quern  totum  Galbam  in  consideranda 
causa  componendaque  posuisse,  Br.  87,  that  a  single  day  intervened  and 
that  this  whole  day  Galba  employed  in  studying  up  and  arranging  the  case. 
This  use  is  found  in  Cicero,  rarely  in  Caesar,  in  Livy,  and  a  few  times  in 
other  authors.  Not  in  old  Latin. 

2317.  So  also  sentences  introduced  by  certain  conjunctive  particles  are 
occasionally  put  in  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  :  as, 

id  quod  saepe  dictum  est:  ut  mare  ventorum  vi  agitari  atque  tur- 
bari,  sic  populum  RSmanum  hominum  seditiosorum  vocibus  concitari, 
Clu.  138,  the  oft-repeated  saying :  as  the  sea  is  ruffled  and  tossed  by  the  mighty 
winds,  so  the  people  of  Rome  are  stirred  up  bv  the  talk  of  agitators,  honorifi- 
cum  id  militibus  fore,  quorum  favorem  ut  largitione  et  ambitu  male 
adquiri,  ita  per  bonas  artes  baud  spernendum,  Ta.  H.  i,  17,  that  would  be 
a  mark  of  respect  to  the  troops,  and  their  good  will,  though  usually  won  by 
bribery  and  corruption^  was  certainly  no  small  gain  if  honourably  come  by. 
fugere  senatum  testes  tabulas  publicas  census  cuiusque,  cum  interim 
obaeratam  plebem  obiectari  aliis  atque  aliis  hostibus,  L.  6,  27,  6,  that 
the  senate  sought  to  avoid  evidence  of  each  man's  property  through  making  pub- 
lic retztrns,  while  at  the  same  time  the  commons  lav  bankrupt  and  at  the  mercy 
of  one  enemy  after  another,  ut  and  quemadmodum  are  found  with  this  in- 
finitive in  Cicero,  Livy,  and  Tacitus;  cum  interim  and  si  non  in  Livy; 
quia  in  Livy  and  Seneca ;  quamquam  in  Livy  and  Tacitus ;  nisi  forte  in 
Tacitus.  For  quam  with  the  infinitive,  see  1898. 

2318.  Relative  sentences  which  are  not  a  part  of  the  quotation, 
but  an  addition  of  the  writer's,  or  which  are  a  circumlocution  equiva- 
lent to  a  substantive,  are  marked  by  the  indicative  (1729) :  as, 

Condrusos,  Eburones,  Caeroesos,  Paemanos,  qui  uno  nomine 
GermanI  appellantur,  arbitrari  ad  XL  tmlia,  2,  4,  10,  that  they  reckoned  the 
Condrusians,  Eburonians,  Caeroesians  and  Paemanians  (who  are  all  called  by 
one  name  Germans']  at  forty  thousand.  For  other  examples  of  such  sentences, 
see  1729. 

2319.  Sentences  containing   the  thought  of  another,   intro- 
duced by  a  relative  pronoun  or  by  causal,  temporal,  or  other 
conjunctive    particles,    take    the    subjunctive,    though    not   ap- 
pended to  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  (1725)  :  as, 

421 


2320-2323.]  Appendix 


numquis,  quod  bonus  vir  esset,  gratias  dis  egit  umquam  ?    DN.  3, 

87,  did  anybody  ever  thank  the  gods  'because  he  was  a  good  man'  ?  (1853). 
mih!  loquitur  nee  recte  quia  tibl  aurum  reddidi  et  quia  non  te  defrau- 
daverim,  PI.  B.  735,  he's  always  pitching  into  me  because  I  returned  you  the 
money  and*  because  I  did  n't  do  you  out  of  it  '(1856,  1853).  aedem  Diiovi  vo- 
vit,  si  e5  die  hostes  fudisset,  L.  31,  21,  12,  he  vowed  a  temple  to  infernal 
Jove,  '  if  he  should  rout  the  enemy  on  that  day'  For  other  examples,  see  172  c, 
1852,  1853,  1884,  &c. 

2320.  Sometimes  a  verb  of  saying  or  thinking  is  added,  and  is  itself 
irrationally  put  in  the  subjunctive.     For  examples,  see  1727. 


(2.)   TENSE. 
(A.)   OF  THE  INFINITIVE. 

2321.  The  tenses   of  the   infinitive   follow   their   usual  law 
(2218),  representing  the  action  as  present,  past,  or  future,  from 
the  speaker's  point  of  view. 

nuntiatum  est  Ariovistum  ad  occupandum  Vesontionem  conten- 
dere  triduique  viam  a  suis  finibus  profecisse,  I,  38,  I,  it  was  reported  that 
Ariovistus  was  pressing  on  (2219)  to  seize  Vesontio,  and  that  he  had  done  a  three 
days1  journey  from  his  own  borders  (2226).  fama  est  ararn  esse  in  vesti- 
bu!5  templi,  L.  24,  3,  7,  rumour  has  it  that  there  is  an  altar  in  the  vestibule  of 
the  temple  (2219).  legati  haec  se  ad  suos  relaturos  dixerunt,  4,  9,  i,  the 
envoys  said  they  wmild  report  this  to  their  countrymen  (2232).  For  other  ex- 
amples, see  2175-2203;  for  the  infinitive  equivalent  of  the  indicative  imper- 
fect and  pluperfect,  see  2226,  2227. 

(B.)    OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

2322.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  follow  the  law  of  the 
sequence  of  tenses  ;  see  1745. 

The  tenses  are  usually  imperfect  or  pluperfect,  as  the  verb 
introducing  a  quotation  is  usually  past. 

Socrates  dicere  solebat,  omnes  in  eo  quod  scirent,  satis  esse  elo- 
quentes,  DO.  I,  63,  Socrates  used  to  maintain  that  all  men  were  eloquent 
enough  in  a  matter  which  they  understood  (1766).  dicebam  quoad  metueres, 
omnia  te  promissurum,  Ph.  2, 89, 1  said  that  as  long-  as  you  were  afraid,  you 
would promise  everything  (1771).  cognovit  Suebos  postea  quam  pontem 
fieri  comperissent,  nuntios  in  omnes  partes  dimlsisse,  4,  19,  2,  he  ascer- 
tained that  after  the  Suebans  had  learned  of  the  building  of  the  bridge,  they  had 
sent  out  messengers  in  every  direction  (1772).  For  other  examples,  see  1746- 
1772. 

2323.  But  the  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  often  used,  especially 
when  the  main  verb  is  present,  or  for  vividness  after  a  secondary  tense. 

422 


Indirect  Discourse.          [2324-2327. 


Alexandrum  Philippus  accusat  quod  largitione  benevolentiam 
Macedonum  consectetur,  Off.  2,  53,  Philip  accuses  Alexander  of  courting  the 
favour  of  the  Macedonians  by  the  use  of  money  (1746,  1853).  initium  quod 
huic  cum  matre  fuerit  simultatis  audistis,  Clu.  17,  you  have  heard  the 
origin  of  the  enmity  which  was  between  the  defendant  and  his  mother  (1746). 
Ariovistus  respondit :  stipendium  capere  iure  belli  quod  victores 
victis  imponere  consuerint,  i,  44,  i,  Ariovistus  answered  that  if  was  by  the 
laws  of  war  that  he  took  the  tribute  which  victors  %vere  wont  to  lay  upon  the 
vanquished  (1755)-  For  other  examples,  see  1746-1772. 

2324.  The  future  of  direct  discourse  is  represented  in  indirect 
discourse  by  the  imperfect,  and  the  future  perfect  by  the  pluperfect 
subjunctive. 

se  quod  e  re  publica  esset  facturum,  L.  28,  45,  3,  that  he  would  do  what 
should  be  for  the  interests  of  the  state  (1766).  se  non  ante  coepturum  quam 
ignem  in  regiis  castris  conspexisset,  L.  30,  5,  5,  that  he  would  not  begin 
before  he  saw  fire  in  the  royal  camp  (1766,  1921).  The  present  or  perfect  sub- 
junctive also  is  found  when  the  main  verb  requires.  For  other  examples, 
see  1746-1772. 

(3.)    PRONOUN. 

2325«  eg°  anc*  nos,  of  direct  discourse,  are  represented  by 
se  in  indirect  discourse,  and  meus  and  noster  by  suus.  tu 
and  vos,  of  direct  discourse,  are  represented  in  indirect  dis- 
course by  ille,  or,  when  less  emphatic,  by  is. 

For  the  use  of  the  reflexive  pronoun,  see  2338-2342. 

se  prius  in  Galliam  venisse  quam  populum  Romanum,  i,  44,  7,  that 
he  came  into  Gaul  before  the  Roman  nation,  said  Ariovistus  of  himself,  se  a 
patribus  maioribusque  suis  didicisse,  r,  13,  6,  that  they  had  learned  from 
their  fathers  and  ancestors,  said  the  Helvetians  of  themselves,  transisse 
Rhenum  sese  non  sua  sponte,  i,  44,  i,  that  he  had  crossed  the  Rhine  not  of 
his  own  accord,  was  the  assertion  of  Ariovistus.  qui  nisi  decedat,  sese 
ilium  non  pr5  amico  sed  hoste  habiturum.  quod  si  eum  interfecerit, 
multls  sese  principibus  populi  Roman!  gratum  esse  facturum,  i,  44,  n, 
that  unless  he  withdrew,  he  should  consider  him  not  a  friend  but  a  foe.  Why, 
if  he  killed  him,  he  should  do  a  favour  to  numerous  leading  men  in  the  Roman 
nation.  Here  Ariovistus  is  reported  as  speaking  to  Caesar. 


CONDITIONAL   PERIODS   IN    INDIRECT  DISCOURSE. 
(A.)    PROTASIS. 

2326.  The  protasis  of  every  kind  (2023,  2024)  has  the  verb 
in  the  subjunctive  in  indirect  discourse  (2315). 

2327.  The   tense   of  the   protasis   is  generally  imperfect  or 
pluperfect  (2322)  :  as, 

423 


2328-2331.]  Appendix  (B.) 


Ariovistus  respondit :  si  ipse  populo  Romano  non  praescriberet, 
non  oportere  sese  a  populo  Romano  impediri,  i,  36,  i,  Ariovistus  an- 
swered: if  he  did  not  dictate  to  the  Roman  nation,  no  more  ou^ht  the  Roman 
tuition  to  interfere  with  him  (2026).  quae  si  fecisset,  Pompeium  in  His- 
panias  iturum,  Caes.  C.  1, 10,3,  if  he  did  that,  Pompey  -would  go  to  the  Spains 
(2061). 

2328.  But  indeterminate  protases  (2023)  are  sometimes  put  in  the 
present   or   perfect   subjunctive    in   indirect   discourse,    even   with    a 
main  secondary  tense  :  as, 

Ariovistus  respondit:  si  iterum  experiri  velint,  se  paratum  esse 
decertare,  I,  44,  I,  Ariovistus  answered  that  if  the  Romans  wanted  to  try  again, 
he  was  ready  to  fight  it  out  (2026).  qui  nisi  decedat,  sese  ilium  pro  hoste 
habiturum,  I,  44,  1 1,  that  unless  he  -withdrew,  he  should  consider  him  an  enemy 
(2054). 

2329.  Protases  of  action  non-occurrent  (2024)  remain  in  the 
imperfect  or  pluperfect,  even  with  a  main  primary  tense. 

licet  VarrS  Miisas,  Aeli  StilSnis  sententia,  Plautino  dicat  serm5ne 
locuturas  fuisse  si  Latine  loqui  vellent,  Quintil.  10,  i,  99,  though  Varro, 
following  Stilo^s  dictum,  may  say  that  the  Muses  would  have  spoken  in  the  style 
of  Plautus,  if  they  had  wanted  to  speak  Latin  (2095).  quaeret  ab  accusa- 
toribus  quid  facturi  essent,  si  in  eo  loco  fuissent,  Cornif.  2,  22,  he  will  ask 
the  accusers  what  they  would  have  done  if  they  had  been  in  that  predicament 
(2099). 

(B.)    APODOSIS. 

2330.  In  indeterminate  conditional  periods  (2023),  the  apodosis 
simply  follows  the  general  rule  (2312)  :  as, 

lovem  sic  aiunt  philosophi,  si  Graece  loquatur,  loqui,  Br.  121,  the 
philosophers  say  that  this  is  Jor'e's  style  of  speaking,  if  Jove  speaks  Greek  (2026). 
sm  bello  persequi  perseveraret,  reminiscereturpristinae  virtutis  Helve- 
ti5rum,  I,  13,  4,  if  he  persisted  in  following  them  up  with  war,  let  him  call  to 
mind  the  old  time  valour  of  the  Helvetians  (2056).  in  provinciis  intellege- 
bant  si  is  qui  esset  cum  imperio  emere  vellet,  fore  uti  quod  quisque 
vellet  quanti  vellet  auferret,  V.  4,  10,  in  the  provinces  they  saw  that  if  a 
man  clothed  in  authority  should  wish  to  be  a  buyer,  he  would  carry  off  every  time 
whatever  he  wished  at  what  he  wished  (2233  ;  2054  or  2076).  futiirum  esse, 
nisi  provisum  esset,  ut  Roma  caperetur,  Div.  i,  101,  that  unless  precaution 
was  taken,  Rome  would  be  captured  (2233,  2061).  For  other  examples,  see 
2327,  2328. 

2331.  In  conditional  periods  of  action  non-occurrent  (2024), 
the  future   participle   with  fuisse,  is  used  in  apodoses  of  the 
active  voice :  as, 

an  Cn.  Pompeium  censes  maximarum  rerum  g!5ria  laetaturum 
fuisse,  si  sciret  se  in  solitudine  Aegyptiorum  trucidatum  iri,  Div.  2,  22, 
do  you  suppose  that  Pompey  would  have  taken  any  pleasure  in  the  fame  which 
his  peerless  exploits  brought  him  if  he  had  known  that  he  was  going  to  be  butch- 
ered in  the  wilds  of  Egypt? 

424 


Pronouns.  [2332~2335- 


In  one  instance,  found  in  Caesar,  the  future  participle  with  esse  occurs, 
representing  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of  present  time  (2091)  : 

Caesarem  arbitrari  profectum  in  Italiam ;  neque  aliter  Carnutes 
interficiundi  Tasgetii  consilium  fuisse  captures,  neque  Eburones,  si 
ille  adesset,  ad  castra  ventures  esse,  5,  29,  2,  that  he  thought  Caesar  was 
i^ime  info  Italy  ;  otherwise t  the  Carnutes  "would  not  have  formed  their  design  of 
killing  Tasgetius,  and  the  Eburones,  if  he  "were  at  hand,  would  not  be  assaulting 
the  camp.  Here  the  context  shows  that  ventures  esse  represents  the  imper- 
fect subjunctive.  But  ordinarily  it  might  seem  to  represent  the  future 
indicative.  Hence,  to  avoid  ambiguity,  the  Romans  generally  did  not  try  to 
express  present  time  in  apodoses  of  this  class  in  indirect  discourse. 

2332.  The  perfect  infinitive  is  exceptionally  used ;  this  is  based  upon  the 
indicative  in  apodosis  (2104). 

memoria  teneS  solitum  ipsum  narrate  se  studium  philosophiae 
acrius  hausisse,  m  prudentia  matris  incensum  animum  coercuisset, 

Ta.  Agr.  4,  I  remember  that  he  used  to  say  that  he  had  drunk  in  the  study  of 
philosophy  with  too  great  eagerness ',  had  not  his  discreet  mother  checked  his  ardent 
soul  (2105  or  2107). 

2333.  possum,  in  the  apodosis  of  a  conditional  period  of  action 
non-occurrent  (2101),  is  regularly  put  in  the  perfect  infinitive  in  in- 
direct discourse :  as, 

PlatSnem  existimo,  si  genus  forense  dicendi  tractate  voluisset, 
gravissime  potuisse  dicere,  Off.  I,  4,  I  think  that  if  Plato  had  only  chosen 
to  cultivate  forensic  eloquence,  he  might  have  been  a  most  impressive  speaker 
(2103).  cum  dicerent  se  potuisse  in  amplissimum  locum  pervenire,  si 
sua  studia  ad  honores  petendos  conferre  voluissent,  Clu.  1 53,  saying  they 
might  have  risen  to  the  proudest  position,  if  they  had  only  chosen  to  apply  their 
energies  to  a  political  career  (2103). 

2334.  futurum  fuisse  ut  with  the  imperfect  subjunctive  is  rarely 
used  in  apodoses  of  the  passive  voice  (2331)  :  as, 

Theophrastus  accusasse  naturam  dicitur  quod  hominibus  tarn  exi- 
guam  vitam  dedisset :  quSrum  si  aetas  potuisset  esse  longinquior, 
futurum  fuisse  ut  omni  doctrina  hominum  vita  erudiretur,  7Z>.  3,  69,  /'/ 

is  said  that  Theoph  rastus  took  nature  to  task  'for  giving  man  such  a  short  life  ; 
if  the  period  cotild  have  been  longer  man's  life  would  have  been  informed  with 
knowledge  of  every  sort'  (2099).  See  also  Caes.  C.  3,  101,  2. 


(C.)    PRONOUNS. 
THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN. 

2335  For  the  use  of  the_nominatives  ego  tu,  nos  vos,  see  1029. 
The  genitive  plurals  nostrum  and  vestrum  are  used  as  partitive, 
nostri  and  vestri  as  objective  genitives  :  as, 

425 


2336-2340.]  Appendix  (C.) 


nemo  nostrum,  RA.  55,  not  one  cf  us  (1242).  ab  utrisque  vestrum, 
Fam.  ii,  21,  5,  by  each  of  you  (1243).  grata  mihl  vehementer  est  memoria 
nostri  tua,  Fam.  12,  17,  l,your  remembrance  of  me  is  exceedingly  agreeable  to 
me  (1260).  nostri  nosmet  paenitet,  T.  Ph.  172,  we  're  discontented  with  our 
lot  (1283).  For  the  adjective  instead  of  the  possessive  or  objective  genitive, 
see  1234,  1262. 

THE  REFLEXIVE  se  AND  suus. 

2336.  The  reflexive  regularly  refers  to  the  subject 
of  the  verb :  as, 

fugae  sese  mandabant,  2,  24,  2,  they  betook  themselves  to  flight,  animo 
servit,  non  sibi,  PI.  Tri.  308,  he  serves  his  passions,  not  his  better  self,  est 
amans  sui  virtus,  L.  98,  virtue  is  fond of itself '.  ducit  secum  una  virginem, 
T.  Eu.  229,  he  is  leading  a  girl  along  with  him.  Caesar  copias  suas 
divisit,  Caes.  C.  3,  97,  3,  Caesar  divided  his  forces.  For  se  ipse,  see  2376; 
for  se  or  suus  quisque,  2397. 

2337.  The  reflexive  sometimes  refers  to  a  word  not  the  subject, 
when  that  word  is  specially  emphasized  or  easily  made  out  from  the 
context.     This  holds  chiefly  of  suus,  which  is  used  with  great  free- 
dom :  as, 

Alexandrum  uxor  sua  occidit,  Inv.  2,  144,  Alexander  was  murdered  by 
his  own  wife,  desinant  insidiari  domi  suae  consul!,  C.  I,  32,  let  them  cease 
to  waylay  the  consul  in  his  own  house  and  home,  suas  res  Syracusams  re- 
Stituit,  L.  29,  I,  17,  he  restored  their  property  to  the  Syracuse  people. 

2338.  In  the  construction  of  the  accusative  with  the  infini- 
tive (2175),  the  reflexive  is  regularly  used  when  the  subject  of 
the  infinitive  refers  to  the  subject  of  the  verb :  as, 

Varus  imperium  se  habere  dixit,  Lig.  22,  Varus  said  that  he  had 
authority,  id  sese  effecturos  sperabant,  7,  26,  2,  they  hoped  to  accomplish  it 
(2235)- 

2339.  The  reflexive,  in  this  construction,  sometimes  refers  to  an  empha- 
sized word  not  the  formal  subject  of  the  verb  :  as, 

canum  custodia  quid  significat  aliud  nisi  se  ad  hominum  commodi- 
tates  esse  generates  ?  DN.  2,  1 58,  the  watchfulness  of  the  dog —  does  not  it 
show  that  he  was  created  for  the  convenience  of  man  ? 

2340.  When  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  different  from  that  of 
the  verb,  the  reflexive  sometimes  refers  to  the  subject  of  the  verb, 
sometimes  to  that  of  the  infinitive  :  as, 

Ariovistus  respondit  omnes  Galliae  civitates  ad  se  oppugnandum 
venisse,  I,  44,  I,  Ariovistus  ans^vered  that  all  the  states  of  Gaul  had  come  to 
attack  him,  i.e.  Ariovistus.  neminem  secum  sine  sua  pernicie  con- 
tendisse,  I,  36,  6,  that  no  man  had  contended  with  him  without  his  own  un- 
doing; secum  refers  to  Ariovistus,  the  subject  of  the  main  verb  respondit, 
sua  to  neminem. 

426 


Pronouns.  [2341-2346 


2341.  In  subordinate  subjunctive  clauses  of  purpose,  indirect 
discourse,  or  indirect  question,  the  reflexive  refers  to  the  subject 
of  the  main  sentence  :  as, 

huic  mandat,  ut  ad  se  quam  primum  revertatur,  4,  21,  2,  he  instructs 
him  to  come  back  to  himself  as  soon  as  possible,  excruciabit  me  erus,  quia 
sibi  non  dixerim,  PI.  MG,  859,  my  master 'II  torture  me  ''because  I  have  not 
toltt  him!  Paetus  omnis  libros,  quos  frater  suus  reliquisset,  mih!  d5- 
navit,  Att.  2,  I,  12,  Paetus  made  me  a  present  of  all  the  books  '  that  his  brother 
left!  For  the  use  of  is  for  se,  see  2370. 

2342.  The  reflexive,  in  such  subordinate  clauses,  sometimes  refers  to  an 
emphatic  word  not  the  main  subject :  as, 

identidem  felicem  Priamum  vocabat,  quod  superstes  omnium 
suorum  exstitisset,  Suet.  Tib.  62,  he  -was  for  ever  calling  Priam  '  Fortune's 
darling,  because  he  outlived  all  his  kith  and  kin? 

2343.  The  reflexive  referring  to  the  main  subject  is  sometimes  irregu- 
larly used  in  subordinate  indicative  clauses. 

Epamlnondas  II,  qui  sibl  successerat,  exercitum  non  tradidit,  Inv.  i, 
55,  Epaminondas  did  not  deliver  the  army  to  his  successor,  centum  boves 
militibus  dono  dedit,  qui  secum  fuerant,  L.  7,  37,  3,  he  gave  a  hundred 
oxen  to  the  soldiers  who  had  been  with  him. 

EQUIVALENTS  FOR  A  RECIPROCAL  PRONOUN. 

2344.  The  place  of  a  reciprocal  pronoun,  each  other,  is  supplied 
by  inter  nos,  inter  vos,  inter  se,  or  by  alter  or  alius  followed  by 
another  case  of  the  same  word  :  as, 

inter  nos  natura  coniuncti  sumus,  Fin.  3,  66,  we  are  united  with  each 
other  by  nature.  Cicerones  pueri  amant  inter  se,  Att.  6,  i,  \2,the  Cicero 
boys  are  fond  of  each  other,  cum  alius  alii  subsidium  ferret,  2,  26,  2,  when 
they  were  helping  each  other.  For  uterque,  see  2400.  The  reciprocal  idea  is 
sometimes  expressed  by  the  form  of  the  verb:  as,  fulva  luctantur  harena, 
V.  6,  643,  they  wrestle  with  each  other  on  the  yellow  sand  (1487). 

2345.  From  Livy  on,  invicem  inter  se,  invicem  se,  or  invicem  alone,  is 
often  used  in  the  expression  of  reciprocal  relations  :  as, 

invicem  inter  se  gratantes,  L.  9,  43,  17,  mutually  congratulating  each 
other,  invicem  se  anteponendo,  Ta.  Agr.  6,  mutually  preferring  one  an- 
other, ut  invicem  ardentius  diligamus,  Plin.  Ep.  7,  20,  7,  that  we  may  love 
each  other  more  ardently. 

THE  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUN. 

2346.  The  possessive  of  the  personal  and  reflexive  pronoun  is  regularly 
omitted,  unless  it  is  required  for  emphasis  or  contrast:  as, 

ora  manusque  tua  lavimus,  Feronia,  lympha,  H.  S.  i,  5,  24,  our  hands 
and  faces  in  thy  rill,  Feronia,  we  bathe.  The  possessive  sometimes  has  the 
meaning  of  proper,  appropriate,  favourable  ;  as,  su5  Ioc5  dicam,  Quintil.  I,  I, 
36,  I  shall  tell  in  the  proper  place.  For  the  possessive  pronoun  nsed  instead 
of  the  possessive  or  objective  genitive,  see  1234,  1262. 

427 


2347-235 1 •]  Appendix  (C) 


THE  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUN. 

hie. 

2347.  hie  pdints  out  what  is  near  the  speaker  in  place,  time, 
or  thought :  as, 

hi  domum  me  ad  se  auferent,  PI.  Men.  847,  these  fellows  "will  hale  me 
off  to  their  house,  non  me  existimavi  in  hoc  sermone  usque  ad  hanc  ae- 
tatem  esse  venturum,  Br.  232, 1  did  not  think  that  in  this  discourse  I  should 
get  down  to  the  present  generation,  reliquum  omne  tempus  huius  anni,  V. 
I,  30,  all  the  rest  of  this  year. 

2348.  hie  sometimes  points  out  the  speaker  with  pathos,  or  with 
emphasis,  particularly  in  comedy. 

haec  arma  et  hunc  militem  propitio  flumine  accipias,  L.  2,  10,  n, 
receive  these  arms  and  this  soldier  in  thy  gracious  stream,  the  prayer  of  Hora- 
tius  Codes  to  Father  Tiber,  tibl  erunt  parata  verba,  huic  homini  ver- 
bera,  T.  Hau.  356,  you ' II get  a  chiding,  this  child  a  hiding,  fecisset  ni  haec 
praesensisset  canes,  PI.  Tri.  172,  and  he'd  have  done  it,  unless  this  dog  had 
got  scent  of  it  in  time,  where  the  speaker  means  himself. 

2349.  The  neuter  plural  haec  sometimes  means  the  realm,  our  country, 
our  state,  the  [Roman]  world :  as, 

haec,  quae  iam  pridem  vastare  studes,  C.  I,  21,  the  realm  which  you 
have  long  soiight  to  lay  in  ruins,  qui  haec  delere  conati  sunt,  C.  4,  7,  who 
have  tried  to  destroy  the  state,  servus  est  nemo  qui  non  haec  stare  cupiat, 
C.  4,  1 6,  there  lives  no  slave  that  wills  not  our  country  should  abide. 

2350.  hie,  as  expressing  a  familiar,  every-day  thing,  occasionally  has  a 
shade  of  contempt,  either  alone,  or  with  volgaris,  cottidianus  or  the  like : 
as, 

mittit  homini  munera  satis  large,  haec  ad  usum  domesticum,  V.  4, 
62,  he  sent  him  some  presents — pretty  liberal  ones,  commonish  things  for  house- 
hold use.  mitto  hasce  artis  volgaris,  coquos,  pistores,  RA.  134,  I'll 
skip  your  everyday  common  occupations — such  as  cooks,  bakers,  &c.,  &c. 
taedet  cottidianarum  harum  formarum,  T.  Eu.  297, 7  'm  sick  of  your  every- 
day beauties. 

2351.  When  hie  relates  to  the  words  of  a  sentence,  it  points  out 
what  has  preceded  or  is  to  follow,  or  emphasizes  a  word  referred  to 
by  a  preceding  relative. 

For  hie  used  to  introduce  a  new  sentence,  see  2129. 

haec  habul  de  senectute  quae  dicerem,  CM.8$,  this  was  what  I  had  to 
say  on  Old  Age.  sed  haec  hactenus;  nunc  ad  ostenta  veniamus,  Div.  2, 
53,  so  much  for  this ;  let  us  now  go  on  to  portents,  fecit  pacem  his  con- 
dicionibus,  N.  8,  3,  I,  he  made  peace  on  the  following  terms,  dicitur  locutus 
in  hanc  fere  sententiam  esse,  L.  6,  40, 2,  it  is  said  that  he  spoke  to  somewhat 
the  following  effect,  quaesierat  ex  me  Scipio  quidnam  sentirem  de  hoc 
quod  duo  soles  visos  esse  constaret,  RP.  I,  19,  Scipio  had  asked  me  what 
I  thought  about  this,  that  it  was  generally  agreed  that  two  suns  had  been  seen. 

428 


Pronouns.  [2352-2356. 


2352.  hie  and  ille  are  often  opposed,  particularly  in  contrasts  o/ 
classes:  as, 

laudatur  ab  his,  culpatur  ab  illis,  H.  S.  i,  2,  n,  one  side  praises  him,  tht 
other  condemns,  illud  est  album,  hoc  dulce,  canorum  illud,  hoc  bene 
olens,  hoc  asperum,  Ac.  2,  21,  that  is  white,  this  is  sweet,  that  sonorous,  this 
fragrant,  this  rough,  orator,  non  ille  volgaris  sed  hie  excellens,  O.  45, 
an  orator,  not  of  the  common  sort,  but  the  superior  one  of  whom  we  are  speaking. 

2353.  In  transitions,  ille  introduces  a  new  thing,  hie  denotes  the 
aforementioned :  as, 

sed  haec  vetera ;  illud  vero  recens,  Caesarem  meo  c5nsili5  inter- 
fectum,  Ph.  2,  25,  but  this  is  all  ancient  history  ;  here,  however^  is  something 
new,  that  Caesar  was  killed  at  my  suggestion. 

2354.  When  hie  and  ille  refer  to  two  different  persons  or  things 
named  in  the  sentence,  hie  commonly  refers  to  the  nearer  word,  ille 
to  the  remoter  word;  or  Me  sometimes  refers  to  what  is  nearer  the 
mind  of  the  speaker,  even  though  it  be  remoter  in  the  sentence. 

(a.)  Caesar  beneficiis  ac  munificentia  magnus  habebatur,  integritate 
vitae  Cato.  Ille  *mansuetudine  et  misericordia  clarus  factus,  huic 
severitas  dignitatem  addiderat,  S.  C.  54,  2,  Caesar  was  esteemed  great  for 
his  liberality  and  generosity,  Cato  for  his  unsiillied  life.  The  former  became 
famous  through  his  humanity  and  mercy,  the  hitter's  dignity  was  heightened  by 
his  austerity,  (b.}  cave  Cat5ni  anteponas  ne  istum  quidem  ipsiim  quern 
Apollo,  ut  ais,  sapientissimum  iudicavit :  huius  enim  facta,  illius  dicta 
laudantur,  L.  10,  suffer  not  Cato  to  find  a  rival  even  in  your  man  himself,  whom, 
as  you  say,  Apollo  declared  wisest  of  mankind;  for  our  Cato  is  renowned  for 
deeds,  the  other  for  doctrines. 

2355.  hie  and  ille  are  used  together,  chiefly  in  poetry,  to  explain  some- 

thing  past  by  a  present  thing  :  as, 

hunc  ilium  poscere  fata  reor,  V.  7,  272,  this  I  think  is  he  whom  the 
fates  require,  hunc  ilium  fatis  externa  ab  sede  profectum  portendi 
generum,  V.  7,  255,  this  was  the  man  whom  destiny  foretold  should  fare  from 
foreign  home  to  be  his  son-in-law. 

iste. 

2356.  iste  points  out  something  near  to,  belonging  to,  or  imputed 

to  the  person  addressed  :  as, 

cum  ista  sis  auctoritate,  non  debes  adripere  maledictum  ex  trivio, 

Mur.  13,  carrying  the  influence  that  you  do,  you  ought  not  to  take  to  street-corner 
abuse,  multae  istarum  arborum  mea  manu  sunt  satae,  CM.  $g,many  of 
the  trees  you  see  there  were  planted  by  my  own  hand,  salem  istum  quo  caret 
vestra  natio,  inridendis  nSbis  nolitote  consumere,  ND.  2,  74,  do  no* 
waste  in  ridiculing  us  that  wit  which  your  fraternity  sadly  needs.  Often  with 
tuus  or  vester  :  as,  isdem  hie  sapiens  de  quo  loquor  oculis  quibus  iste 
vester  intuebitur,  Ac.  2,  105,  the  sage  of  whom  I  speak  will  look  with  the  same 
eyes  as  the  sage  you  boast  of. 

429 


2357~23^2-J  Appendix  (C) 


2357.  From  its  use  in  addressing  opponents  or  in  talking  at  them,  iste 
is  common  in  contemptuous  phrases :  as, 

tu  istis   faucibus,   istis   lateribus,  ista   gladiatoria  totius  corporis 

firmitate,  Ph.  2,  63,  you  with  that  gullet  of  yours,  those  swollen  flanks,  that 
prizefighter's  bulky  make-up,  non  erit  ista  amicitia,  sed  mercatura  quae- 
dam,  ND.  I,  122,  such  a  thing  will  not  be  a  friendship,  but  a  sort  of  traffic. 

ille. 

2358.  ille  points  to  what  is  remote  in  place,  time,  or  thought  :  as, 

ergo  illi  intellegunt  quid  Epicurus  dicat,  ego  non  intellego  ?  Fin.  2, 
13,  do  those  gentlemen  then  understand  what  Epicurus  means  and  I  not  ?  po- 
pulus  Romanus  nihil  aeque  atque  illam  veterem  iudiciorum  vim  gravi- 
tatemque  requirit,  CaeciL  8,  the  Roman  people  miss  nothing  so  much  as  the 
ancient  vigour  and  firmness  attaching  to  public  trials,  his  autem  de  rebus 
sol  me  ille  admonuit  ut  brevior  essem,  DO.  3,  209,  but  on  these  topics  yon- 
der sun  has  -warned  me  to  be  pretty  brief.  For  other  examples,  see  2352- 
2355- 

2359.  ille  is  used  to  point  out  a  celebrity,  often  one  of  the  past. 
So,  particularly  without  a  proper  name,  in  allusive  style,  referring  to 
what  is  famed  in  story. 

(a.)  hie  est  ille  Demosthenes,  TD.  5,  103,  this  is  the  famous  Demo- 
sthenes. Atheniensis  ille  Themistocles,  DO.  2,  299,  Themistocles  the  great, 
of  Athens,  illud  Solonis,  CM.^o,  Solon's  memorable  words.  Medea  ilia, 
IP.  22,  Medea  famed  in  story,  (b.}  viribus  ille  confisus  periit,J.  10,  10,  the 
man  in  the  story  lost  his  life  through  confidence  in  his  strength,  illae  regiae 
lacrimae,  Plin.  Ep.  3,  7,  13,  the  monarch's  historic  tears,  of  Xerxes. 

2360.  Indicating  change  of  subject,  ille  is  this  other  man.     In  such  cases 
it  is  often  best  expressed  in  English  by  a  proper  name  or  a  descriptive  word. 

ad  se  adulescentem  iussit  venire,  at  ille,  ut  ingressus  est,  confes- 
tim  gladium  destrinxit,  Off.  3,  112,  he  gave  orders  to  admit  the  young  man. 
But  this  other,  the  moment  he  entered,  drew  his  sword,  rusticus  expectat 
dum  defluat  amnis  :  at  ille  labitur  et  labetur,  H.  E.  \,  2,  42,  he  is  a  peasant 
waiting  for  the  river  to  go  down  :  but  the  river  fiows  and  will  flow  on. 

2361.  In  concessions,  ille  often  precedes  quidem ;  in  translation  no  pro- 
noun is  required. 

libri  script!  inconsiderate  ab  optimis  illis  quidem  viris,  sed  non 
satis  eruditis,  TD.  I,  6,  books  rashly  written  by  men  respectable  enough  but  of 
insufficient  education,  est  tarda  ilia  medicina,  sed  tamen  magna,  TD.  3, 
35,  it  is  a  powerful  remedy,  though  slow  in  its  working,  hie,  is,  and  iste 
are  used  rarely  in  this  way. 

2362.  In  poetry  ille  may  serve:  (i.)  To  repeat  a  thing  with  emphasis : 
as, 

arma  virumque  cano  Troiae  qui  primus  ab  oris  Italiam  venit,  mul- 
tum  ille  et  terris  iactatus  et  alto,  V.  I,  I,  arms  and  the  man  I  sing,  from 
Trojans  shore  the  first  to  come  to  Italy,  much  tossed  that  man  by  land  and  sea. 

•         430 


Pronouns.  [2363-2368. 


2363.  (2.)  To  emphasize  the  second  of  two  ideas  :  as, 

nunc  dextra  ingeminans  ictus,  nunc  ille  sinistra,  V.  5,  457,  now  with 
his  right  redoubling  blows,  now  mighty  with  his  left,  non  tamen  Euryali, 
non  ille  oblitus  amorum,  V.  5,  334,  still  not  Euryalus  forgetting,  no,  not  he 
his  love  ! 

2364.  (3.)  As  a  provisional  subject,  to  anticipate  the  real  subject,  and 
keep  the  attention  in  suspense  till  the  real  subject  comes  with  emphasis :  as, 

ac  velut  ille  canum  morsu  de  montibus  altis  actus  aper  substitit,  V. 
10,  707,  and  e'en  as  he ,  goaded  by  bite  of  hounds  from  mountains  high,  the  boar 
hath  paused. 


THE  DETERMINATIVE  PRONOUN. 

is. 

2365.  is  refers  to  something  named  in  the  context.     When  some 
feeling  is  to  be  expressed,  such  as  admiration,  or  oftener  contempt, 
homo  is  often  put  for  is. 

(a.)  petit  a  rege  et  eum  pluribus  verbis  rogat  ut  id  ad  se  mittat,  V. 
4,  64,  he  solicits  the  king  and  begs  him  at  considerable  length  to  send  it  to  him. 
nondum  maturus  imperio  Ascanius  erat,  tamen  id  imperium  61  ad  pu- 
berem  aetatem  incolume  mansit,  L.  1,3,  i,  Ascanius  was  not  yet  old  enough 
for  the  throne,  but  that  throne  was  kept  safe  for  him  till  he  came  of  age.  (b.)  ego 
hominem  callidiorem  vidi  neminem  quam  Phormionem.  venio  ad 
hominem,  ut  dicerem  argentum  opus  esse,  T.  Ph.  591,  a  shrewder  man 
than  Phormio  I  never  saw,  not  I!  I  went  to  him  to  tell  him  that  I  needed 
money,  nequam  esse  hominem  et  levem  sciebam,  Sest.  22,  /  knew  the 
fellow  was  worthless  and  frivolous. 

2366.  (i.)  is  refers  to  something  named  before  or  after :  as, 

eius  omnis  oratio  versata  est  in  eo,  ut  scriptum  plurimum  valere 
oportere  defenderet,  DO.  i,  244,  his  whole  speech  turned  on  the  contention 
that  the  written  word  should  be  paramount.  Melitensis  Diodorus  est;  is 
Lilybaei  multos  iam  annos  habitat,  V.  4,  38,  Diodorits  is  from  Melita  ;  he 
has  lived  many  years  at  Lilybaeum.  For  other  examples  of  is  used  to  con- 
nect sentences,  see  2129. 

2367.  With  a  connective,  is  denotes  an  important  addition :  as, 

vincula  et  ea  sempiterna,  C.  4,  7,  imprisonment  and  that  too  perpetual. 
annum  iam  audientem  Cratippum  idque  Athenis,  Off.  i,  i,  after  a  year's 
study  under  Cratippus,  and  that  too  in  Athens,  erant  in  e5  plurimae  litterae 
nee  eae  volgares,  Br.  265,  he  was  a  man  of  very  deep  reading  and  that  of  no 
common  sort  either. 

2368.  (2.)  is   indicates  something  explained   or  restricted   by  a 
relative  or  indefinite,  qui,  quicumque,  si  quis  :  as, 

43 r 


2369-2373-]  Appendix  (C.) 


haec  omnia  is  fed,  qui  sodalis  Dolabellae  eram,  Fam.  12,  14,7,  all 
this  J  did,  I  that  was  Dolabella's  bosom  friend  (1807).  unus  ex  eo  numero 
qui  ad  caedem  parati  erant,  S.  /.  35, 6,  one  of  the  number  that  were  ready  to 
do  murder  (1804).  neque  is  sum  qui  mortis  periculo  terrear,  5,  30,  2,  but 
I  am  not  the  man  to  be  scared  by  danger  of  death,  no,  not  /  ( 1818).  quicum- 

?ue  is  est,  61  me  profiteer  inimicum,  Fam.  10,  31,  3,  whoever  he  may  be, 
proclaim  myself  his  enemy  (1814).     cum  ipse  Alienus  ex  ea  facultate,  si 
quam  habet,  aliquantum  detracturus  sit,  Caecil.  49,  seeing  that  even  Alienus 
is  to  suppress  some  part  of  that  eloquence,  if  any  he  may  have.     See  also  1795, 
1798.     For  id  quod,  see  1811. 

2369.  For  the  use  of  is  instead  of  a  relative  repeated  in  a  different  case, 
see  1833. 

2370.  is  sometimes  is  loosely  used  for  the  reflexive  se  (2341);  here  the 
point  of  view  of  the  writer  shows  itself. 

Milesios  navem  poposcit,  quae  eum  Myndum  prosequeretur,  V.  \, 
86,  he  asked  the  Milesians  for  a  ship  to  escort  him  to  Myndus.  suos  omnes 
castris  continuit  ignesque  fieri  prohibuit,  quo  occultior  esset  eius  ad- 
ventus,  Caes.  C.  3,  30,  5,  he  confined  his  troops  to  camp  and  forbade  the  kind- 
ling ofjires,  in  order  to  keep  his  coming  a  greater  secret. 


THE  PRONOUN  OF  IDENTITY. 

idem. 

2371.  idem,  the  same,  often  connects  two  different  predicates  to 
the  same  person  or  thing.     In  this  case,  it  may  be  variously  rendered 
by  likewise ',  also,  all  the  same,  on  the  other  hand,  at  once,  very,  never- 
theless. 

utebatur  e5  cibo  qui  et  suavissimus  esset  et  idem  facillimus  ad 
concoquendum,  Fin.  2,  64,  he  made  use  of  such  food  as  was  both  very  dainty 
and  likewise  very  easy  to  digest,  ita  fiet  ut  non  omnes  qui  Attice,  eidem 
bene  dicant,  Br.  291,  so  it  will  be  found  that  not  all  who  speak  Attic  are  also 
good  speakers,  multi  qui  ut  ius  suum  et  libertatem  tenerent  volnera  ex- 
ceperunt  fortiter  et  tulerunt,  idem  omissa  contentione  dolSrem  morbi 
ferre  non  possunt,  TD.  2,  65,  many  who  have  met  heroically  and  endured 
wounds,  to  preserve  their  rights  and  their  freedom,  are  nevertheless,  when  no 
contest  is  involved,  unable  to  bear  the  pain  of  a  disease. 

2372.  idem  is  often  used  with  other  pronouns,  hie,  iste,  istuc,  ille  :  as, 

haec  eadem  centurionibus  mandabant,  7,  17,  8,  they  confided  these 
same  sentiments  to  their  centurions,  multae  aliae  idem  ictuc  cupiunt,  PI. 
MG.  1040,  many  other  ladies  want  just  what  you  want. 

2373.  The  same  as  is  expressed  by  idem  followed  by  qui,  atque  or  ac, 
Ut,  quasi,  cum,  sometimes  in  poetry  by  the  dative. 

432 


Pronouns.  [2374-2377. 


idem  sum  qui  semper  ful,  PI.  Am.  447,  /  V;z  the  same  man  I've  always 
been,  pomarium  seminarium  ad  eundem  modum  atque  oleagineum 
facito,  Cato,  RR.  48,  make  your  fruit-tree  nursery  in  the  same  way  as  your 
nursery  for  olive-trees  (1653).  eisdem  fere  verbis  ut  disputatum  est,  TD. 
2,  g,  in  pretty  much  the  same  words  as  were  used  in  the  actual  argument  (1937). 
ut  eodem  loco  res  sit  quasi  ea  pecunia  legata  non  esset,  Leg.  2,  53,  so 
t/iat  the  position  is  the  same  as  if  the  money  had  not  been  bequeathed  (2120). 
tibl  mecum  in  eodem  est  pistrino  vivendum,  DO.  2,  \\\,you  must  live  in 
the  same  mill  as  I.  Homerus  eadem  aliis  sopitu'  quietest,  Lucr.  3,  1037, 
Homer  sleeps  the  same  sleep  as  others. 


THE  INTENSIVE  PRONOUN. 

ipse. 

2374.  ipse,  self,  is  used  in  contrasts. 

2375.  ipse  may  contrast  the  chief  person  with  subordinates,  or  a 
person  with  any  thing  belonging  to  him. 

Catilina  ipse  pertimuit,  profugit ;  hi  quid  exspectant  ?  C.  2,  6,  Cati- 
line, their  head,  has  Jled  in  abject  terror  ;  his  minions  here,  what  wait  they 
for?  ei_ munition!,  quam  fecerat,  T.  Labienum  legatum  praefecit ; 
ipse  in  Italiam  magnis  itineribus  contendit,  i,  10,  3,  he  put  Labienus,  his 
lieutenant^  in  charge  of  the  fortification  he  had  made  ;  he  hurried,  himself,  to 
Italy  with  forced  marches,  temetl  nih.il  adlatum  intellegS:  :  at  iam  ad- 
feretur,  si  a  foro  ipsus  redierit,  PL  Aul.  355,  /  see  there  's  no  wine  brought : : 
but  it  soon  will  be,  if  the  governor  comes  back  from  down  town.  '  ipse  dixit ; ' 
"ipse"  autem  erat  Pythagoras,  DN.  i,  10,  'the  old  man  said  so ;'  now 
"  the  old  man  "  was  Pythagoras,  navis  tantum  iactura  facta,  incolumes 
ipsi  evaserunt,  L.  30,  25,  8,  the  vessel  only  was  lost,  and  the  sailors  escaped  in 
safety. 

2376.  ipse  is  often  used  with  personals  and  reflexives  agreeing 
with  the  emphatic  word.     But  the  nominative  is  usually  preferred, 
especially  when  ipse  stands  before  the  other  pronoun,  or  when  it 
stands  after  per  me,  per  se.     After  memet,  noblsmet,  nosmet,  &c., 
it  agrees  with  these  words. 

(a.}  neque  enim  potest  exercitum  is  continere  imperator,  qui  se  ip- 
sum  n5n  continet,  IP.  38,  for  no  commander  can  keep  his  army  under  con- 
trol who  does  not  keep  his  mvn  self  under  control,  miles  fratrem  suum,  dein 
se  ipsum  interfecit,  Ta.  H.  3,  51,  a  soldier  slew  his  own  brother,  then  himself. 
(b.}  ipse  se  quisque  diligit,  L.  80,  every  man  loves  himself,  bellum  per  se 
ipse,  iniussu  populi  ac  senatus,  fecit,  L.  i,  49,  7,  he  made  war  on  his  own 
responsibility,  without  orders  from  the  people  and  senate.  lunius  necem  sibf 
ipse  conscivit,  DN.  2,  7,  junius  killed  himself,  non  egeo  medicina,  me 
ipse  consolor,  L.  10,  /  need  no  medicine,  I  am  my  own  comforter.  (<:.)  ut 
nobismet  ipsis  imperemus,  TD.  2,  47,  that  we  should  govern  ourselves. 

2377.  ipse  alone  sometimes  stands  for  an  emphatic  se  or  suus :  as, 
28  433 


2378-2384.]  Appendix  (Q 


pertimuerunt  ne  ab  ipsis  descisceret  et  cum  suis  in  gratiam  rediret, 

N.  7,  5>  i>  they  were  much  afraid  that  he  would  abandon  them  and  come  into 
favour  with  his  compatriots  again,  ea  molestissime  ferre  homines  de- 
bent,  quae  ipsorum  culpa  contracta  sunt,  QFr.  i,  i,  2,  people  should  be 
most  vexed  at  things  wliich  are  brought  about  through  fault  of  their  own. 

2378.  ipse  is  used  in  many  combinations  where  self  is  an  inadequate 
translation.     It  may  sometimes  be  translated  by: 

2379.  (i.)  Actual,  positive,  even. 

habet  certos  sui  studi5s5s,  quos  valetudo  modo  bona  sit,  tenuitas 
ipsa  delect  at,  Br.  64,  he  has  a  clique  of  admirers,  who  are  charmed  by  positive 
scragginess,  provided  the  health  be  good,  hoc  ipsum  elegantius  pom  me- 
liusque  potuit,  Fin.  2,  100,  even  this  might  have  been  put  more  logically  and 
better. 

2380.  (2.)  Regular,  proper,  real. 

flagrantem  invidia  propter  interitum  C.  Gracchi  ipse  populus  Ro- 
manus  periculo  liberavit,  Sest.  140,  though  greatly  detested  iu  consequence  of 
the  death  of  Gracchus,  he  was  acquitted  by  the  Roman  people  proper,  cives 
Roman!  permulti  in  ill5  oppido  coniunctissimS  animo  cum  ipsis 
Agrigentmis  vivunt,  V.  4,  93,  a  great  many  Romans  live  in  that  town  in 
most  friendly  relations  with  the  natives  of  Agrigentum. 

2381.  (3.)  As  well,  likewise,  too,  for  which,  from  Livy  on,  et  ipse  is  used. 

hoc  Ripheus,  hoc  ipse  Dymas,  omnisque  iuventus  laeta  facit,  V.  2, 
394,  this  Ripheus  doth,  this  Dymas  too,  and  all  the  youth  alert,  cogitatio 
Locros  urbem  recipiendi,  quae  sub  defectionem  Italiae  desciverat  et 
ipsa  ad  Poenos,  L.  29,  6,  i,  a  project  for  recovering  the  city  of  Locri,  which, 
on  the  revolt  of  Italy,  had  likewise  gone  over  to  the  Carthaginians. 

2382.  (4.)  Alone,  mere. 

non  solum  adventus  mali,  sed  etiam  metus  ipse  adfert  calamita- 
tem,  IP.  15?  not  only  the  coming  of  misfortune,  but  even  the  mere  dread  of  it 
brings  disaster. 

2383.  (5.)  Exactly,  just,  with  numerals  and  dates,  or  right,  of  place. 

annis  LXXXVI  ipsis  ante  me  consulem,  Br.  61,  exactly  86  years  before 
my  consulship.  Kalendis  ipsis  Novembribus,  C.  \,  8,  on  the  \st  of  Novem- 
ber precisely,  in  ipso  vado  deprehensus  Indutiomarus  interficitur,  5,  58, 
6,  right  at  the  ford  Induttomarus  is  caught  and  killed,  supra  ipsum  balneum 
habito,  Sen.  Ep.  56,  i,  I  live  right  over  a  bath. 

2384.  (6.)  Of  oneself ,  voluntarily,  of  one's  cnvn  motion. 

valvae  subito  se  ipsae  aperuerunt,  Div.  i,  74,  the  temple-door  suddenly 
opened  of  itself.  Catilinam  vel  eiecimus  vel  emisimus  vel  ipsum 
egredientem  verbis  prosecuti  sumus,  C.  2,  i,  we  have  driven  Catiline  out, 
or  let  him  out,  or,  when  he  was  going  out  of  his  own  motion,  wished  him  god- 
Speed. 

434 


Pronouns.  [2385-2388. 


THE  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUN. 

uter  and  quis. 

2385.  uter,  whether?  which?  is  used  in  questions  about  two 
things ;  quis  and  qui,  who  ?  what  ?  in  questions  about  more  than  two, 
though  sometimes  loosely  of  two  things. 

uter  est  insanior  horum  ?  H.  S.  2,  3,  102,  -which  of  these  is  the  greater 
crank?  praeclare  apud  eundem  est  Platonem,  similiter  facere  eos  qui 
inter  se  contenderent  uter  potius  rem  publicam  administraret,  ut  si 
nautae  certarent  quis  e5rum  potissimum  gubernaret,  Off.  i,  87,  in  the 
same  Plato  is  the  excellent  saying  that  for  people  to  fall  out  with  one  another 
about  which  of  two  men  should  manage  a  state,  were  just  as  if  the  crew  of  a 
ship  should  quarrel  about  which  of  them  should  be  pilot,  ut  quern  veils,  ne- 
scias,  Att.  16,  14,  i,  so  that  you  don't  know  which  to  choose,  as  between 
Octavian  and  Antony. 

2386.  quis  and  quid  ask  to  have  a  thing  named ;  qui  and  quod 

to  have  it  described.     But  see  685. 

quis  Dionem  Syracosium  doctrims  omnibus  expolivit  ?    non  Plato  ? 

DO.  3,  139,  who  refined  Syracusan  Dio  with  learning  of  every  sort  ?  was  it  not 
Plato?  quid  rides,  H.  S.  2,  5,  3,  why  dost  thou  laugh  ?  (1144).  quis  fuit 
igitur  ?  :  :  iste  Chaerea.  :  :  qui  Chaerea  ?  T.  Eu.  823,  who  was  he  then  ?  : : 
your  precious  Chaerea.  :  :  what  Chaerea  ?  quern  fructum  petentes  scire 
cupimus  ilia  quo  modo  moveantur  ?  Fin.  3,  37,  with  what  practical  end 
in  view  do  we  seek  to  know  how  yon  bodies  in  the  sky  keep  in  motion  ? 

THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUN. 

2387.  The  relative  pronoun  has  already  been  treated  ;  see  1792- 
1837- 

THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUN. 

quis  or  qui ;  quispiam. 

2388.  quis  or  qui,  a,  some,  somebody,  always  stands  after  one  or 
more  words  of  the  sentence,     quis  or  qui  is  used  after  si  (nisi,  sive), 
ne,  num,  utrum,  an,  quo,  or  quando,  in  preference  to  aliquis,  unless 
emphasis  is  intended. 

dixerit  quis,  Off.  3,  76,  somebody  may  say.  malum  quod  tibi  di  dabunt, 
PI.  Am.  563,  some  curse  the  gods  will  bring  upon  thee.  hi,  si  quid  erat 
durius,  concurrebant ;  si  qui  equo  deciderat,  circumsistebant,  i,  48,  6, 
if  there  was  ever  any  sharpish  work,  these  men  would  rally  ;  if  a  man  fell 
from  his  horse,  they  would  close  round  him.  praecipit  atque  interdicit 
unum  omnes  peterent  Indutiomarum,  neu  quis  quem  vulneret,  5,  58,  4, 
he  charges  them  and  forbids  them  ;  they  were  all  to  assail  Indutiomarus  alone  ; 
and  nobody  was  to  wound  anybody  (2402). 

435 


2389~2392-]  Appendix  (C.) 


2389.  quispiam,  a,  some,  one  or  another. 

forsitan  quispiam  dixerit,  Off.  3,  29,  peradventure  somebody  may  say. 
quispiam  dicet,  K.  3,  in,  somebody  will  say.  cum  quaepiam  cohors  im- 
petum  fecerat,  hostes  velocissime  refugiebant,  5,  35,  I,  every  time  one  or 
another  cohort  charged ',  the  enemy  fled  back  quick  speed  (2394). 

aliquis. 

2390.  aliquis  or  aliqui  some  one,  some  one  or  other,  has  always 
some  affirmative  emphasis,  and  is  opposed  to  the  idea  of  all,  much, 
none  /as, 

non    enim   declamatorem   aliquem   de    Iud5,   sed    perfectissimum 

quaerimus,  O.  4.7,  for  it  is  not  some  spouter  from  school  that  we  aim  to  find, 
but  the  ideal  orator,  omnes  ut  aliquam  perniciosam  bestiam  fugiebant, 
Clu.  41,  everybody  avoided  him,  like  some  dangerous  wild  animal  or  other. 
aude  aliquid  Gyaris  dignum  si  vis  esse  aliquid,  J.  i,  73,  venture  some 
deed  that  deserves  transportation,  if  you  care  to  be  something  grand.  n5n  sine 
aliqua  spe,  D.  7,  not  without  some  hope,  quaere  sitne  aliqua  actio  an 
nulla,  Caec.  33,  /  ask  whether  there  is  some  ground  for  an  action  or  none. 
num  igitur  aliquis  dolor  post  mortem  est  ?  TD.  i,  82,  is  there,  then,  some 
sense  of  pain  after  death  ?  With  emphasis  after  si  (2388)  :  si  aliquid  de 
summa  gravitate  Pompeius,  multum  de  cupiditate  Caesar  remisisset, 
aliquam  rem  publicam  nobis  habere  licuisset,  Ph.  13,  2,  if  Pompey  had 
sacrificed  really  something  of  his  importance,  and  Caesar  a  good  deal  of  his 
ambition,  we  might  have  had  what  would  have  been  to  some  degree  a  common- 
wealth. 

2391.  aliquis  is  sometimes  equivalent  to  aliquis  alius  :  as, 

cum  M.  Pisone  et  cum  Q.  Pompeio  aut  cum  aliquo,  Br.  310,  with 
Piso  or  Pompey  or  some  other  man.  ea  mini  cottidie  aut  ture  aut  vin5  aut 
aliqui  semper  supplicat,  PI.  Aul.  prol.  23,  she  always  offers  me  incense  or 
wine  or  something  else  every  day. 

quidam. 

2392.  quidam,  a,  a  certain,  denotes   a  thing  which  we  cannot 
describe  or  do  not  care  to. 

non  inrldicule  quidam  ex  militibus  decimae  legionis  dixit :  plus 
quam  pollicitus  esset,  Caesarem  facere,  i,  42,  6,  one  of  the  privates  of 
the  Tenth  said  a  very  dry  thing:  that '  Caesar  was  doing  more  than  he  engaged 
to.'  accurrit  quidam  notus  mihi  nomine  tantum,  H.  S.  i,  9,  3,  up  trots  a 
man- J  knew  by  name  alone,  assimilis  quidam  mugitui  sonus,  Suet.  Galb. 
18,  a  mysterious  sound  like  the  lowing  of  a  ccnv.  videmus  naturam  suo  quo- 
dam  itinere  ad  ultimum  pervenire,  DN.  2,  35,  nature  reaches  perfection  by 
a  kind  of  road  of  her  own.  Often  in  translations  from  Greek  :  as,  aliis 
libris  rationem  quandam  per  omnem  naturam  rerum  pertinentem  vi 
divina  esse  adfectam  putat,  DN.  I,  36,  in  other  works  he  supposes  '  a  kind 
of  Reason  pervading  all  nature  and  endowed  with  divine  power,  of  Zeno's 
doctrine. 

436 


Pronouns.  [2393~2397- 


2393.  quidam  is  often  used  to  soften  an  exaggeration  or  a  meta- 
phor,"sometimes  to  denote  contempt. 

eloquentissimos  homines  innumerabills  quosdam  nominabat,  DO. 
I,  <)\,  great  speakers  he  named,  absolutely  without  number,  ad  omnis  enim 
meos  impetus  quasi  murus  quidam  bom  nomen  imperatoris  opponitur, 
//'.  5,  2,  for  against  all  assaults  of  mine  the  name  of  a  good  commander  is  set 
up,  like  a  regular  -wall,  sed  aliud  quoddam  filum  orationis  tuae,  L.  25, 
nit  there  is  quite  a  different  fibre  to  your  speech,  non  est  eSrum  urbanitate 
quadam  quasi  colorata  Sratio,  Br.  170,  their  language  lacks  the  tinge  of  an 
indefinable  metropolitan  element.  Theomnastus  quidam,  homo  ridicule 
insanus,  V.  4,  148,  a  person  of  the  name  of  Theomnastus,  an  absurd,  crack- 
brained  creature. 

quisque. 

2394.  quisque,  each,  each  in  particular,  each  by  himself,  applies 
what  is  stated  of  all  to  each  several  case,  out  of  a  number  more  than 
two. 

laudati  pro  contione  omnes  sunt,  donatique  pro  merits  quisque, 
L.  38,  23,  II,  they  -were  collectively  commended  in  assembly  convened,  and  re- 
ceived presents,  each  in  proportion  to  his  deserts,  quotiens  quaeque  cohors 
procurrerat,  magnus  numerus  hostium  cadebat,  5, 34,  2,  as  the  cohorts  suc- 
c.ssively  charged,  a  great  number  of  the  enemy  fell  every  time  (2389).  mens 
cuiusque,  is  est  quisque,  non  ea  figura  quae  digito  demonstrari  potest, 
RP.  6,  26,  the  mind  of  a  man  is  always  the  man,  and  not  that  shape  which  can 
be  pointed  out  by  the  finger. 

2395.  quisque  is  sometimes  used  in  a  relative  and  demonstrative  sen- 
tence both. 

quod  cuique  obtigit,  id  quisque  teneat,  Off.  1,21,  let  every  man  keep 
what  he  has  got.  id  enim  est  cuiusque  proprium,  quo  quisque  fruitur 
atque  utitur,  Fam.  7,  30,  2,  for  that  is  always  a  man's  property  which  he  has 
the  enjoyment  and  use  of. 

2396.  In  a  complex  sentence,  consisting  of  a  main  and  a  relative 
sentence,  quisque  is  usually  expressed  but  once,  and  then  in  the  un- 
emphatic  relative  sentence.     In  English,  the  equivalent  of  quisque 
goes  with  the  main  sentence. 

nemo  fuit  qui  non  surrexerit,  telumque  quod  cuique  fors  offerebat, 
adripuerit,  V.  4,  95,  not  a  man  but  sprang  from  his  bed,  and  seized  in  every 
instance  such  a  weapon  as  chance  threw  in  his  -way.  theatrum  cum  com- 
mune sit,  recte  tamen  dici  potest,  eius  esse  eum  locum,  quern  quisque 
occupant,  Fin.  3,  67,  though  the  theatre  is  open  to  all,  still  it  may  be  said  with 
perfect  propriety,  that  each  spectator  is  entitled  to  the  seat  he  has  taken.  Mes- 
sanam  ut  quisque  nostrum  venerat,  haec  visere  solebat,  V.  4,  5,  any 
Roman,  who  went  to  Messana,  invariably  went  to  see  these  statues  (1939). 
eorum  ut  quisque  primus  venerat,  sub  mur5  consistebat,  7,48,  2, as  they 
successively  arrived,  each  man  of  them  took  his  stand  under  the  wall. 

2397.  quisque  is  often  used  with  si  or  stius.  superlatives,  and  or- 
dinals, holding  an  unemphatic  place  after  these  words :  as, 

437 


2398-2401.]  Appendix  (C.) 


ipse  se  quisque  diligit,  L.  80,  a  man  always  loves  his  own  self,  suos 
quoique  mos,  T.  Ph.  454,  every  man  his  own  way.  huic  pro  se  quisque 
nostrum  mederi  velle  debemus,  L.  Agr.  i,  26,  this  evil  we  ought  to  wis/i 
to  remedy,  according  to  our  several  abilities,  optimum  quidque  rarissimum 
est,  Fin.  2,  81,  ever  the  fairest  is  the  rarest,  nam  in  foro  vix  decumus 
quisquest,  qui  ipsus  sese  noverit,  PI.  Ps.  973,  for  in  the  marketplace  there  's 
scarce  one  man  in  every  ten  that  knows  himself,  quinto  quoque  anno  Sicilia 
tota  censetur,  V.  2,  139,  at  the  end  of  every  four  years  all  Sicily  is  assessed. 
quamquam  primum  quidque  explicemus,  Fain.  12,  i,  i,  but  stay  — let  me 
explain  things  successively  ;  or,  one  thing  after  another,  litteras  misit,  ut  is 
anulus  ad  se  primo  quoque  tempore  adferretur,  V.  4,  58,  he  sent  a  letter 
directing  said  ring  to  be  sent  to  him  without  delay. 

2398.  In  old  Latin  quisque  is  sometimes  equivalent  to  quicumque  or 
quisquis,  whoever :  as,  quisque  obviam  huic  occesserit  irato,  vapulabit, 
PL  As.  404,  whoever  meets  him  in  his  wrath  will  catch  it.     In  cuiusque  ge- 
neris and  cuiusque  modi,  it  means  any  and  every :  as,  tot  homines  cuius- 
que modi,  V.  4, 7,  so  many  people  of  every  sort,  i.  e.  cuicuimodi.     The  neuter 
quidquid  for  quidque  is  not  uncommon :  as,  cum  processit  paulum  et 
quatenus  quicquid  se  attingat  perspicere  coepit,  Fin.  5,  24,  when  it  has 
progressed  a  little  and  has  begun  to  discover  how  far  each  thing  affects  it.     Mas- 
culine quisquis  for  quisque  is  doubtful  (see  Fam.  6,  i,  i). 

uterque. 

2399.  uterque,  each,  is  used  of  two  individuals,  and  utrique  of 
two  sets  or  parties.     But  sometimes  utrique  is  used  of  two  individuals. 

(a.)  ut  ilia  natura  caelestis  et  terra  vacat  et  umore,  sic  utriusque 
harum  rerum  humanus  animus  est  expers,  TD.  i,  65,  even  as  the  heavenly 
nature  is  free  from  the  earthy  and  the  humid,  so  the  soul  of  man  has  no  part  in 
either  of  these  qualities  (1243).  nutu  tremefactus  uterque  est  polus,  O.  F. 
2,  489,  at  his  nod  trembled  each  pole  (1243).  Aetoliorum  utraeque  manias 
Heracleam  sese  incluserunt,  L.  36,  16,  5,  both  bands  of  the  Aetolians  shut 
themselves  up  in  Heraclea.  (b.)  sex  filii  nobis,  duae  filiae  sunt,  utraeque 
iam  nuptae,  L.  42,  34,  4,  we  have  six  sons  and  two  daughters,  both  already 
married. 

2400.  Reciprocal  relations  (2344)  are  sometimes  expressed  by  uterque 
followed  by  a  different  case  of  alter;  rarely  by  uterque  and  a  different  case 
of  the  same  word. 

(a.)  quorum  uterque  contempsit  alterum,  Off.  i,  4,  each  of  whom 
lightly  esteemed  the  other,  (b.)  abduci  non  potest :  :  qui  non  potest  ?  :  : 
quia  uterque  utriquest  cordi,  T.  Ph.  799.  she 's  not  to  be  taken  from  him  :  : 
why  is  n't  she  ?  :  :  because  they  ''re  heart  to  heart.  This  doubling  of  uterque 
is  found  only  half  a  dozen  times  ;  not  in  Cicero. 

quivis  and  quilibet ;   utervis  and  uterlibet. 

2401.  quivis  and   quilibet,  any  you  please,  are   used  either  in 
affirmative  or  negative  sentences.     When  two  are  spoken  of,  utervis 
or  uterlibet  is  used. 

438 


Numerals.  [2402-2404. 


(a.)  ut  quivis  intellegere  posset,  V.  5,  17,  so  that  any  fool  might  know. 
faciat  quidlubet,  T.  Hau.  464,  let  him  do  anything  he  likes,  (b.)  qui 
utramvis  recte  novit,  ambas  n5verit,  T.  Andr.  proL  10,  who  knows  either 
well,  knows  both,  utrumlibet  elige,  Quinct.  81,  choose  either  you  like. 

quisquam  and  ullus. 

2402.  quisquam  (692),  a  single  one,  any  one  at  all,  and  ullus, 
any,  are  used  chiefly  in  negative  sentences  or  in  interrogative,  condi- 
tional, and  comparative  sentences  implying  negation,  or  with  sine. 

vem  Athenas,  neque  me  quisquam  ibl  adgnovit,  TD.  5,  104, 1  came  to 
Athens  and  not  a  person  there  knew  me  (1659).  interdicit  omnibus,  ne 
quemquam  interficiant,  7,  40,  4,  he  warns  them  collectively  against  killing 
any  man  at  all  (2388).  hunc  sua  quisquam  sententia  ex  hac  urbe  expel- 
let  ?  Mil.  104,  will  anybody  at  all,  by  his  vote,  banish  this  man  from  Rome? 
quis  hoc  fecit  ulla  in  Scythia  tyrannus  ?  Pis.  18,  what  tyrant  ever  did  this 
in  any  Scythia  ?  si  quisquam  est  timidus,  is  ego  sum,  Fam.  6,  14,  I,  if 
anybody  is  timid,  2  am  the  man.  qui  saepius  cum  hoste  conflixit  quam 
quisquam  cum  inimico  concertavit,  JP.  28,  who  has  measured  swords 
oftener  with  the  enemy  than  anybody  mer  wrangled  with  an  opponent  in  private 
life,  sine  ullo  metu  in  ipsum  portum  penetrare  coeperunt,  V.  t;,  96, 
without  a  bit  of  fear  thev  began  to  make  their  way  right  into  the  harboiir. 
nemo  quisquam  and  nihil  quicquam  are  old  and  late  :  as,  lepidiorem  ux5- 
rem  nemo  quisquam  habet,  PI.  Cas.  1008,  nobody  has  a  jollier  wife,  nos- 
ter  mall  nil  quicquam  primo,  T.  Ph.  80,  our  young  master  did  n't  make  any 
trouble  at  first. 

2403.  nemo  is  generally  used  for  non  quisquam,  nemo  umquam 
for  numquam  quisquam,  nihil  for  non  quicquam,  and  nullus  for 
non  ullus.     If  only  two  are  spoken  of,  neuter  is  used.     The  plural 
neutri  is  used  of  two  parties. 

nemSst  miserior  me,  T.  Hau.  263,  no  man  'j  unhappier  than  I.  nemo 
igitur  vir  magnus  cine  aliquS  adflatu  divino  umquam  fuit,  "DN.  2,  167, 
nobody  who  is  a  great  man  was  ever  without  some  divine  inspiration,  ab 
nullo  ille  liberalius  quam  a  Cluentio  tractatus  est,  Clu.  \6i,byno  man 
has  he  been  treated  more  generously  than  by  Cluentius.  neutrum  eorum 
contra  alterum  iuvare,  Caes.  C.  i,  35,  5,  to  help  neither  of  them  against  the 
other,  neutri  alteros  primo  cernebant,  L.  21,  46,  4,  neither  party  saw  the 
others  at  first. 


(D.)     NUMERALS. 

2404.  Numerals  are  divided  into  Adjectives :  Cardinal,  unus, 
one,  duo,  two,  &c. ;  Ordinal,  primus,  first,  secundus,  second,  &c. ; 
Distributive,  singuli,  one  each,  bmi,  two  each,  &c. ;  and  Numeral 
Adverbs  :  semel,  once,  bis,  twice,  &c. 

For  the  inflection  of  numerals,  see  637-643. 

439 


2405-] 


Appendix  (Z>.) 


ARABIC. 

CARDINALS. 

ORDINALS. 

1 

unus,  one  (638) 

primus,  first  (643) 

2 

duo,  two  (639) 

secundus,  second 

3 

tres,  three    (639) 

tertius,  third 

4 

quattuor,  four 

quartus,  fourth 

5 

qumque,  five 

quintus,  fifth 

6 

sex,  six 

sextus,  sixth 

7 

septem,  seven 

Septimus,  seventh 

8 

octo,  eight 

octavus,  eighth 

9 

novem,  nine 

nonus,  ninth 

10 

decem,  ten 

decimus,  tenth 

ii 

undecim,  eleven 

undecimus,  eleventh 

12 

duodecim 

duodecimus 

'3 

tredecim 

tertius  decimus 

14 

quattuordecim 

quartus  decimus 

qulndecim 

quintus  decimus 

Iu 

sedecim 

sextus  decimus 

17 

septendecim 

septimus  decimus 

18 

duodevlginti 

duodevicesimus 

J9 

undevlginti 

undevlcesimus 

20 

viginti,  twenty 

vlcesimus,  twentieth 

21 

viginti  unus  or  unus  et 

vlcesimus  primus  or  unus 

viginti 

et  vlcesimus 

22 

viginti  duo  or   duo  et 

vlcesimus  alter  or  alter  et 

28 

viginti 
duodetriginta 

vicesimus 
duodetrlcesimus 

29 

undetriginta 

undetrlcesimus 

3° 

triginta 

tricesimus 

40 

quadraginta 

quadragesimus 

£ 

quinquaginta 
sexaginta 

qulnquagesimus 
sexagesimus 

70 

septuaginta 

septuagesimus 

80 

octoginta 

octogesimus 

90 

nonaginta 

nonagesimus 

99 

undecentum 

undecentesimus 

100 

centum,  one  hundred 

centesimus,  one  hundredth 

101 

centum  unus  or  centum 

centesimus  primus  or  cen- 

et unus 

tesimus  et  primus 

200 

ducenti  (641) 

ducentesimus 

300 

trecenti 

trecentesimus 

400 

quadringentl 

quadringentesimus 

500 

quingenti 

quingentesimus 

600 

sescenti 

sescentesimus 

700 

septingentl 

septingentesimus 

800 

octingenti 

octingentesimus 

900 
1,000 

nongenti 
mille,  thousand  (642) 

nongentesimus 
millesimus,  thousandth 

2,000 

duo  millia 

bis  millesimus 

5,000 

qulnque  millia 

qulnquiens  millesimus 

10,000 

decem  millia 

deciens  millesimus 

50,000 

quinquaginta  millia 

qumquagiens  millesimus 

100,000 

centum  millia 

centiens  millesimus 

1  ,000,000 

deciens  centena  millia 

deciens  centiens  millesimus 

440 


List  of   Numerals. 


[2405, 


DISTRIBUTIVES. 

NUMERAL  ADVERBS. 

ROMAN. 

singuli,  one  each  (643) 

semel,  once 

1 

bini,  two  each 

bis,  twice 

II 

term,  trim,  three  each 

ter,  thrice 

III 

quaterni,  four  each 

quater,  four  times 

III!  or  IV 

quini,  five  each 

quinquiens,  five  times 

V 

seni,  six  each 

sexiens,  six  times 

VI 

septeni,  seven  each 

septiens,  seven  times 

VII 

octoni,  eight  each 

octiens,  eight  times 

VIII 

noveni,  nine  each 

noviens,  nine  times 

Vllll  or  IX 

deni,  ten  each 

deciens,  ten  times 

X 

undeni,  eleven  each 

undeciens,  eleven  times 

XI 

duodeni 

duodeciens 

XII 

terni  deni 

terdeciens 

XIII 

quaterni  deni 

quater  deciens 

Xllll  orXIV 

quini  deni 

qulndeciens 

XV 

sen!  deni 

sedeciens 

XVI 

septeni  deni 

septiens  deciens 

XVII 

duodevlceni 

octiens  deciens 

XVIII 

undeviceni 

noviens  deciens 

XVI  III  or  XIX 

viceni,  twenty  each 

viciens,  twenty  times 

XX 

viceni  singuli  or  singuli 

viciens  semel  or  semel  et 

XXI 

et  viceni 

viciens 

viceni    bin!    or    bin!   et 

viciens  bis  or  bis  et  viciens 

XXII 

viceni 

duodetriceni 

duodetriciens 

XXVIII 

undetriceni 

^undetriciens 

XXVIIIIorXXIX 

triceni 

trlciens 

XXX 

quadragem 

quadragiens 

XXXX  or  XJL 

quinquageni 

quinquagiens 

_L 

sexagenl 

sexagiens 

-LX 

septuagem 

septuagiens 

J-XX 

oct5geni 

octogiens 

JL'XXX 

nonageni 

nohagiens 

-LXXXXorXC 

undecenteni 

*undecentiens 

-LXXXXVIIIIor 

XCIX 

centeni,  a  hundred  each 

centiens,  a  hundred  times 

C 

centenl  singuli 

centiens  semel  or  centiens 

Cl 

et  semel 

duceni 

ducentiens 

CC 

treceni 

trecentiens 

CCC 

quadringem 

quadringentiens 

CCCC 

qulngeni 

quingentiens 

D 

sesceni 

sescentiens 

DC 

septingem 

septingentiens 

DCC 

octingeni 

octingentiens 

DCCC 

nongem 
singula  milli3.,a  thousand 

nongentiens 
milliens,  a  thousand  times 

DCCCC 
CO 

bina  millia                 \each 

bis  milliens 

COCO 

qulna  millia 

quinquiens  milliens 

& 

dena  millia 

deciens  milliens 

© 

quinquagena  millia 

quinquagiens  milliens 

9 

centena  millia 

centiens  milliens 

O 

deciens  centena  millia 

deciens  centiens  milliens 

m 

441 


2406-24 1 4.]  Appendix  (D.} 


NOTATION. 

2406.  Numbers  are   noted  by  combinations  of  the  characters 
|  =  I ;   v  =  5  ;  X  =  10 ;   >L,  later  U,,  ±,  or  L  —  50 ;  C  =  100 ;  D  =  500; 
<D  or  00,  post- Augustan  M  =  1000. 

2407.  Of  these  signs,  V  seems  to  be  the  half  of  X,  which  may  be  Etrus- 
can in  origin.     The  original  sigrs  for    50   and    1000  were   taken  from  the 
Chalcidian  Greek  alphabet  (18,   19),  in  which  they  represented  sounds  un- 
known to  early  Latin.     Thus,  ^,  in  the  Chalcidian  alphabet  representing 
ch  (49),  was  used  by  the  early  Romans  for  50,  and  became  successively  *Jb, 
J-,  and  L.    The  form  J^,  is  found  very  rarely,  vb  oftener,  in  the  Augustan 
period ;  J.  is  common  during  the  last  century  of  the  republic  and  in  the 
early  empire  ;  L,  due  to  assimilation  with  the  Roman  letter,  appears  in  the 
last  century  of  the  republic.     The  sign  for  1000  was  originally  CD  (Chalcidian 
ph);  it  became  00  (the  common  classical  form),  co,  or  X  ;  the  form  M  as 
a  numeral  appears  in  the  second  century   A.  D.,  although  M  is  found  much 
earlier  as  an  abbreviation  for  millia  in   M  •  P,   that   is  millia  passuum. 
For  100,  the  sign  Q  (Chalcidian  th)  may  have  been  used  originally ;  but  C 
(the  abbreviation  for  centum)  came  into  use  at  an  early  period.     The  sign 
D,  =  500,  is  the  half  of  CD. 

2408.  To  denote  10,000  the  sign  for  1000  was  doubled  :  thus,  (§)),  written 
also  (J),  ^.  ^.     Another  circle  was  added  to  denote  100,000 :  thus,  @, 
written  also  G),  ^,  /5T\     The  halves  of  these  signs  were  used  for  5000  and 
50,000 :  thus,  [))  and  d ;  variations  of  these  last  two  signs  are  found,  cor- 
responding to  the  variations  of  the  signs  of  which  they  are  the  halves. 

2409.  From  the  last  century  of  the  republic  on,  thousands  are  sometimes 
indicated  by  a  line  drawn  above  a  numeral,  and  hundreds  of  thousands  by 
three  lines  enclosing  a  numeral:  as,  V  =  5ooo;  fx]  =  1,000,000. 

2410.  To  distinguish  numerals  from   ordinary  letters,  a  line  is  often 
drawn  above  them  :    as,  VI  =  6.     This  practice  is  common  in  the  Augustan 
period ;   earlier,  a  line  is  sometimes  drawn  across  the  numeral,  as,  H  =2 ; 
B  =  500. 

2411.  Of  the  two  methods  of  writing  the  symbols  for  4,  9,  14,  19,  &c.,  the 
method  by  subtraction  (IV,  IX,  XIV,  XIX,  &c.)  is  rarer,  and  is  characteristic 
of  private,  not  public  inscriptions. 

SOME  FORMS  OF  NUMERALS. 

2412.  quinctus,  the  older  form  of  quintus  (170,  4)  is  sometimes  found 
in  old  and  even  in  classical  writers.    Instead  of  Septimus  and  decimus,  the 
older  septumus  and  decumus  are  not  uncommon  (28). 

2413.  In  the  ordinals  from  twentieth  upwards,  the  older  forms  vicensu- 
mus  or  vicensimus,  tricensumus  or  tricensimus,  &c.,  &c.,  are  not  infre- 
quently found  instead  of  vicesimus,  tricesimus,  &c.,  &c.  (63;  28). 

2414.  In  the  numeral  adverbs  from  quinquiens  upwards,  later  forms  in 
-I€s  (63)  are  often  found  :  as,  quinquies,  decies,  &c.,  &c. 

442 


Numerals.  [24 1 5-2420. 


2415.  In  cardinals  and  ordinals  from  thirteen  to  seventeen  inclusive,  the 
larger  number  sometimes  comes  first,  and  in  cardinals  et  is  sometimes  used, 
though  rarely  in  Cicero. 

decem  tres,  L.  37,  30,  7,  thirteen,  fundos  decem  et  tres  reliquit,  KA. 
20,  he  left  thirteen  farms.  Rarely  the  smaller  number  comes  first  with  et : 
as,  de  tribus  et  decem  fundis,  RA.  99,  of  the  thirteen  farms. 

2416.  Numbers  from  1 8  to  99  inclusive  which  end  in  8  or  9  are  usually  expressed 
by  subtraction,  as  in  the  list  (2405);  less  frequently  (not  in  Cicero,  rarely  in  classical 
writers)  by  addition  :  as,  decem  et  octo,  4,  19,  4 ;  decem  novem,  Ta.  H.  2,  58. 

2417.  In   compound  numbers  from  twenty-one  to  ninety-seven  inclusive, 
except  those  which  end  in  eight  or  nine  (2416),  the  smaller  number  with  et 
usually  comes  first  or  the  larger  number  without  et,  as  in  the  list.     But  rarely 
the  larger  number  comes  first  with  et :  as,  viginti  et  septem,  V.  4,  123, 
twenty  and  seven. 

2418.  In  numbers  from  a  hundred  and  one  upwards,  the  larger  number 
comes  first,  either  with  or  without  et ;  but  with  distributives  et  is  not  used. 
With  cardinals  and  ordinals  the  smaller  number  sometimes  comes  first  with 
et ;  as,  iis  regiis  quadraginta  annis  et  ducentis  praeteritis,  RP.  2,  52, 
after  these  two  hundred  and  forty  years  of  monarchy  were  ended. 


SOME   USES  OF  NUMERALS. 
CARDINALS  AND  ORDINALS. 

2419.  Dates  are  expressed  either  by  cardinals  with  a  plural  sub- 
stantive or  by  ordinals  with  a  singular  substantive  :  as, 

dictator  factus  est  annis  post  Romam  conditam  ccccxv,  Fam.  9,  21, 

2,  he  was  made  dictator  415  U.  C.  (1393).  ann5  trecentesimo  quinqua- 
gesimo  post  Romam  conditam,  Nonis  lunis,  RP.  I,  25,  on  the  $th  of  June, 
350  U.  C.  (1350).  The  ordinal  is  also  used  with  a  substantive  not  used  in 
the  singular  :  as,  mancipia  venibant  Saturnalibus  tertiis,  Att.  5,  2o,  5,  the 
slaves  were  sold  on  the  third  day  of  the  Saturnalia.  As  the  Romans,  however, 
had  no  fixed  official  era,  they  had  no  dates  in  the  modern  sense,  and  marked 
the  year  by  the  names  of  the  consuls. 

DISTRIBUTIVES. 

2420.  Distributives  are  used  to  denote  an  equal  division  among 
several  persons  or  things,  and  in  expressions  of  multiplication :  as, 

bin!  senatores  singulis  cohortibus  praepositi,  L.  3,  69,  8,  two  senators 
were  put  over  every  cohort:  sometimes  when  singuli  is  added,  the  cardinal  is 
used,  thus:  singulis  cens5ribus  denarii  trecenti  imperati  sunt,  V.  2, 
137,  every  censor  was  assessed  300  denars.  bis  bina,  DN.  2,  49,  twice  two. 
Poets  use  multiplication  freely,  partly  for  variety,  but  mainly  from  metrical 
necessity. 

443 


2421-2428.]  Appendix  (/?.) 


2421.  Distributives  are  also  used  with  substantives  which  have  no  singu- 
lar, or  which  have  a  different  meaning  in  the  singular  ;  but  in  this  use  one  is 
always  uni,  not  singuli,  and  three  is  often  trim,  not  term :    as, 

ut  una  castra  inm  facta  ex  binis  viderentur,  Caes.  C.  i,  74,  4,  so  that 
one  camp  seemed  now  to  have  been  formed  out  of  two.  trims  catenis  vinctus, 
1,53,  5,  in  triple  irons.  Similarly  with  things  in  pairs,  as:  boves  trim,  PL 
Pers.  317,  a  yoke  of  oxen. 

2422.  Poets  sometimes  use  the  singular  of  distributives :  as,  centenaque  ar- 
bore  fluctum  verberat,  V.  10,  207,  an. I  with  a  hundred  beams  at  every  stroke 
the  wave  he  smites,    duplicl  natura  et  corpore  bino,  Lucr.  5,  879,  twynatured 
and  of  body  twain.     The  plural  is  sometimes  used  in  verse  for  the  cardinal :  cen- 
tum bracchia  .  .  .  centenasque  manus,  V.  10,  565,  a  hundred  arms  .  .  . 
and  hundred  hands. 

OTHER  NUMERALS. 

2423.  Other  numerical  adjectives  are  multipllcatives,  ending  in  -plex  ;  they  are  : 
simplex,  onefold,  simple,  sescuplex,  one  and  a  half  fold,  duplex,  triplex, 
quadruplex,  quincuplex,  septemplex,  decemplex,  centuplex;  and  pro- 
portionals, used  mostly  in  the  neuter  as  substantives  :   duplus,   twice  as  great, 
triplus,  three  times  as  great,  quadruplus,   septuplus,  octuplus.     Besides 
these  there  are  other  adjectives  derived  from  numerals:  as,  primanus,  soldier  of 
the  first:  primarius,  first  rate:  bimus,  twinter,  two-year-old;  &c.,  &c. 

EXPRESSION  OF  FRACTIONS. 

2424.  One  half  may  be  expressed  by  dimidium  or  dimidia  pars ; 
other  fractions  with   i   as  a  numerator  by  ordinals,  with  or  without 
pars  :  as,  tertia  pars  or  tertia,  £. 

2425.  If  the  numerator  is  greater  than  i  it  is  usually  expressed  by 
the  cardinal  feminine,  with  the  ordinal  feminine  for  the  denominator : 
as,  duae  septimae,  f.     But  besides  these  forms  there  are  others, 
namely : 

2426.  (i.)  Fractions  with  a  numerator  less  by  I  than  the  denominator, 
except  2>  maY  be  expressed  by  cardinals  with  partes,  as,  duae  partes,  f ; 
trSs  partes,  f ;  quattuor  partes,  f . 

2427.  (2.)  Fractions  with  12  or  its  multiples  as  a  denominator  are  ex- 
pressed in  business  language  by  the  parts  of  an  as :  thus, 

Y1^,  uncia  £,   triens  ^,  septunx         f,  dextans 

£,    sextans          &,  quincunx         f ,    bes  ft,  deunx 

\,   quadrans        \,    semis  f ,  dodrans        H ,  5s 

ex  asse  heres,  Quintil.  7,  i,  20,  heir  to  the  whole  ;  reliquit  heredes  ex 
besse  nepotem,  ex  tertia  parte  neptem,  Plin.  Ep.  7,  24,  2,  she  left  her  grand 
son  heir  to  f,  her  granddaughter  to  \.  heredem  ex  dodrante,  N.  25,  5,  2,  heir 
to\. 

2428.  Sometimes  fractions  are  expressed  by  addition:  as,  dimidia  et  quarta, 
| ;  pars  tertia  et  septima,  \\ ;  sometimes  by  division  of  the  denominator :   as, 
dimidia  quinta,  TV 

444 


Rules  of  Quantity.         [2429-2434. 

(E.)     PROSODY. 

I.     RULES  OF   QUANTITY. 
(A.)    IN  CLASSICAL  LATIN. 

2429.  The  length  of  the  vowel  in  some  classes  of  syllables,  as 
used  in  the  classical  period,  may  be  conveniently  fixed  in  the  memory 
by  the  following  rules.     For  the  usage  of  older  writers,  see  126,  129, 
132  and  2464-2472.     For  the  general  principles  of  length  of  vowels 
and  syllables,  see  33-41  ;  121-134;  177-178. 

MONOSYLLABLES. 

2430.  Monosyllables  ending  in  a  vowel  or  a  single 
consonant  have  the  vowel  long :  as, 

dos,  s51;  a  for  ab ;  e  for  ex  or  ec-,  pes  for  *peds ;  ablative  qua,  mil; 
quin  for  *quine  ;  locative  sei,  commonly  si ;  sic  (708) ;  dative  and  ablative  plural 
quis  (688). 

Exceptions. 

2431.  The  vowel  is  short  in: 

2432.  (a.)  Monosyllables  ending  in  b,  d,  m,  and  t :  as,  ab,  ad,  dum,  dat. 

2433.  (b.)  The  indefinite  qua,  N.  and  Ac.;  the  enclitics -que  (rarely -que), 
-ne,  -ve,  -ce  ;  and  in  the  words  cor,  fel,  mel ;  os,  bone ;  ac,  vir,  is,  pol,  quis 
(N.) ;  fac,  fer,  per,  ter ;  an,  bis,  in,  cis ;  nee,  vel.    N.  hie  is  rarely  short 
(664).     For  the  quantity  of  es,  see  747. 

POLYSYLLABLES. 
PENULTS. 

2434.  Disyllabic  perfects  and  perfect  participles  have 
the  vowel  of  the  penult  long  when  it  stands  before  a 
single  consonant :  as, 

veni,  vidi,  vici  (862) ;  fovi  (864),  fotus  (917), 

445 


2435~244°- j    Appendix  (E.) :  Prosody. 


Exceptions. 

2435.  (*•)  Nine  perfects  have  the  penult  short  (859-861)  : 
bibi,  -fidi      dedi,  scidi      steti,  stiti     tuli,  -tudi,  per-culi. 

2436.  (£.)  Ten  perfect  participles  have  the  penult  short  (918  ;  see 
also  919)  : 

citus,  datus     itum,  ratus    -rutus,  satus     situs,  status     litus,  quitus. 

FINAL  SYLLABLES. 
(i.)    ENDING  IN  A  VOWEL. 

2437.  In  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  final  a 
and  e  are  short ;  final  o,  u,  and  i,  are  long :  as, 

(a.)  N.  aquila;  PI.  N.  and  Ac.  oppida,  cetera,  omnia. 

(b.)  N.  ille;  N.  and  Ac.  rete ;  impune  (701);  V.  bone;  Ab.  tempore ; 
Inf.  promere;  Imperat.  rege  (826);  Pres.  Ind.  and  Imperat.  querere  ;  Perf. 
rexere. 

(c.)  N.  serm5;  D.  and  Ab.  verb5 ;  ver5  (704).  io.  reg5,  ero,  amabo, 
rexero  (826) ;  est5. 

(d.)  N.  and  Ac.  cornu  (587) ;  D.  and  Ab.  metu  (590,  425,  593) ;  diu. 

(e.)  G.  frumenti ;  V.  Vergili  (459) ;  G.  domi  (594) ;  D.  nulli,  orbi ;  Ab. 
siti  (554).  Imperat.  vesti  (845).  Inf.  queri,  locari;  Ind.  Perf.  rexi  (856), 
rexisti. 

Exceptions  in  a. 

2438.  (#.)  Final  a  is  long  in  the  ablative,  in  indeclinable  words, 
and  in  the  imperative :  as, 

(a.)  Ab.  mensa  (426). 

(b.)  quadraginta ;  many  indeclinable  words  are  ablatives :  as,  contra,  iuxta, 
(707).  'fhe  indeclinable  heia,  ita,  and  quia  (701),  have  short  a. 

(c.)  Imperat.  loca  (845).     But  puta,/0r  instance,  has  short  a.  (130,4). 

2439-  (^  )  Final  a  is  long  in  some  Greek  nominatives  and  vocatives  :  as,  N. 
Electra;  V.  Aenea,  Palla. 

Exceptions  in  e. 

2440.  (tf.)  Final  e  is  long  in  cases  of  nouns  with  stems  in  -e- 
(596),  in  adverbs  from  stems  in  -o-,  and  in  the  imperative  singular 
active  of  verbs  in  -ere:  as, 

(a.)  die  (G.,  D.,  or  Ab.),  hodie,  pridie  ;  see  also  603. 

(b.)  alte  (705);  also  fere,  ferme  and  one  or  ohe  ;  but  e  is  always  short  in 
bene  and  male  ;  inferne  and  superne. 

(c.)  doce  (845) ;  for  cave,  see  130,  4. 

446 


Rules  of  Quantity.         [2441-2450. 


2441.  (b.)  Final  e  is  long  in  the  endings  of  some  Greek  nouns  :  as,  N.  crambe, 
Circe  ;  V.  Alcide ;  Ne.  PI.  N.  and  Ac.  cete,  mele,  pelage,  tempe. 

Exceptions  in  o. 

2442.  (a.)  Ffnal  o  is  short  in  the  nominatives  ego,  duo.     It  is   sometimes 
shortened  in  homo  (130,  3)  and  in  the  nominative  of  other  stems  in  -n-  (484,  485)  : 
as,  mentio,  Naso,  virgo.    o  is  regularly  short  in  endo,  in  the  ablatives  cito  and 
modo,  used  as  adverbs,  and  in  many  other  words  in  late  poetry:  as,  llico,  immo, 
ergo,  quando,  octo,  &c.  ;  very  rarely  in  the  ablative  of  the  gerund. 

2443.  (b.)  Before  Ovid,  o  of  the  present  indicative  is  regularly  long.     It  is 
shortened  only  in  the  following  words  (130,  3) :  in 

volo,  six  times  (Cat.,  4  times  ;  Hor.,  Prop.). 

scio,  twice  (Verg.). 

nescio,  six  times  (Verg.,  twice  ;  Hor.,  twice  ;  Tib.,  Prop.) ; 

and  once  each  in  eo  and  veto  (Hor.),  desino  (Tib.),  and  findo  (Prop.).     From 
Ovid  on,  short  o  is  not  uncommon. 

Short  o  in  other  forms  of  the  verb  is  rare  :  as,  dixero  (Hor.) ;  esto,  ero,  dabo 
(Ov.)  ;  but  o  is  always  short  in  the  imperative  cedo,  givet  tell. 

Exceptions  in  u. 

2444.  Final  U  is  short  in  indu  and  noenu. 

Exceptions  in  i. 

2445.  (a.)  Final  i  is  short  in  nisi,  quasi,  and  sicuti;  also  in  the  endings  of 
some  Greek  nouns :  as  N.  and  Ac.  sinapi  :   V.  Pari,  Amarylli ;   D.  Paridi, 
Minoidi;  PI.  D.  Troasi. 

2446.  (b.)  Final  i  is  common  in  mihf,  tibf,  sib! ;   ibf,  ub!  (129,  2). 

(2.)    ENDING  IN  A  SINGLE  CONSONANT  NOT  B. 

2447.  A  final  syllable  ending  in  a  single  consonant 
not  s  has  its  vowel  short :  as, 

d5nec.  illud.  animal  (536)  ;  semel.  agmen.  calcar(537);  soror, 
stultior  (132).  moror,  loquar,  fatebor  (132);  regitur,  regimur,  regun- 
tur.  regit  (826) ;  amat,  sciat,  p5nebat ;  tinnit,  possit ;  iacet,  neget, 
esset  (132). 

Exceptions. 

2448.  (a.)  The  last  vowel  is  long  in  allec,  and  in  compounds  of  par ;  in  thr 
contracted  genitive  plural  of  stems  in  -u- :  as  currum  ;  in  all  cases  of  illic  and 
istic  except  the  nominative  masculine,  in  the  adverbs  illuc  and  istuc,  and  some- 
times in  nihfl.     Also  in  the  endings  of  some  Greek  nouns :  as,  N.  aer,  aether, 
siren;  Ac.  Aenean. 

2449.  (6.)  In  the  short  form  of  the  genitive  plural  of  stems  in  -o-  and  -a-,  the 
vowel  was  originally  long,  but  afterwards  short :  as,  div6m   (462),   caelicoldm 
(439)- 

2450.  (c.)  The  last  vowel  is  long  in  iit  and  petilt  and  their  compounds. 

447 


2451-245?-]    Appendix  (E.) :  Prosody. 


(30     ENDING  IN  s. 

2451.  Final  syllables  in  is  and  us  have  the  vowel 
short ;  those  in  as,  es,  and  OS,  have  the  vowel  long :  as, 

(a.)  N.  lapis,  finis;  G.  lapidis,  finis;  magis.  Indie.  Pres.  regis  (826); 
Fut.  eris  (851,  826),  eritis,  locabis  (853,  826),  locabitis. 

(b.)  N.  dominus  ;  currus  ;  .N.  and  Ac.  tempus  ;  prius ;  regibus ;  imus ; 
regimus. 

(c.)  aetas :  PI.  Ac.  mensas  (424).  Indie.  Pres.  locas  (840) ;  Imp.  eras 
(848);  regebas  (847);  Plup.  rexeras  (880);  Subj.  Pres.  regas,  vestias, 
doceas  (842). 

(d.)  N.  heres;  sedes;  nubes;  Ceres;  fides;  PI.  N.  and  Ac.  regSs 
(424);  Indie.  Pres.doces  (840) ;  Fut.  reges  (852);  Subj.  Pres.  sies  (841) ;  loces 
(843);  Imp.  esses  (850) ;  regeres  (849);  Plup.  rexisses  (SSi). 

(e.)  N.  custos  ;  arbos  ;  PI.  Ac.  vent5s  (424). 

Exceptions  in  is. 

2452.  (tf.)  Final  is  has  I  in  all  plural  cases :  as, 

N.  and  Ac.  omnis  ;  D.  and  Ab.  viis,  locis  (108,  a),  yobis.  Also  in  the 
nominatives  singular  Quiris  and  Samnis,  usually  in  sanguls  (486),  and  twice  in 
pulvls. 

2453.  (^-)  Final  is  has  I  in  the  second  person  singular  ox  verbs  in  -ire, 
in  mavis,  in  compounds  of  sis,  and  in  ajl  present  subjunctives  singular  :  as, 
duis,  edis,  velis,  malls,  noils.     For  -rls  of  the  perfect  subjunctive  and  the 
future  perfect,  see  877,  878,  883,  884. 

Exceptions  in  us. 

2454.  u  is  long  in  the  nominative  singular  of  consonant  stems  with  u 
before  the  final  stem  consonant :  as,  tellus,  stem  tellur- ;  palus,  once  palus 
(Hor.),  stem  palud- ;  in  the  genitive  singular  and  nominative  and  accusative 
plural  of  nouns  with  stems  in  -u- :  as,  fructus ;  and  in  the  ending  of  some 
Greek  names  :  as,  N.  Panthus  ;  G.  Sapphus. 

Exceptions  in  as. 

2455.  Final  as  has  short  a  in  anas  and  in  the  ending  of  some  Greek  nouns  :  as, 
N.  Ilias ;  PI.  Ac.  crateras. 

Exceptions  in  es. 

2456.  Final  es  has  short  e  in  the  nominative  singular  of  stems  in  -d-  and  -t- 
which  have  the  genitive  in  -idis,  -itis,  and  -etis  (475,  476) :  as,  praeses,  teges, 
comes  (but  e  in  abies,  aries,  and  paries),  also,  in  penes,  in  compounds  of  es, 
thou  art,  and  in  the  endings  of  some  Greek  nouns :  as,  N.  Cynosarges ;  PI.  N. 
Arcades,  crateres. 

Exceptions  in  os. 

2457.  Final  os  has  short  o  in  the  nominative  of  stems  in  -o-:   as,  servos, 
suos,  Delos;  also  in  compos,  impos,  and  exos ;  and  in  the  endings  of  some 
Greek  nouns:  as,  N.  and  Ac.  epos  ;  G.  chlamydos,  Erinyos. 


Rules  of  Quantity.         [2458-2467. 


POSITION. 

2458.  For  the  general  rule  of  position,  see  177,  178;  but,  except 
in  the  thesis  of  a  foot,  a  final  syllable  ending  with  a  short  vowel  gener- 
ally remains  short  before  a  word  beginning  with  two  consonants  or  a 
double  consonant :  as,  mollia  strata,  nemorosa  Zacynthos,  luce 
smaragdi. 

In  Horace  such  a  final  syllable  is  never  lengthened  before  a  word  beginning  with 
two  consonants. 


HIDDEN  QUANTITY. 

2459.  A  vowel  which  stands  before  two  consonants,  or  a 
double   consonant,  belonging   to    the    same   word,   so   that   its 
natural  quantity  cannot  be  determined  from  the  scansion  of  the 
word,  is  said  to  possess  Hidden  Quantity. 

2460.  The  natural  quantity  of  such  a  vowel   may  sometimes  be  ascer- 
tained :  (a.)  from  the  statements  of  ancient  writers;  (b.)  from  the  way  in 
which  the  vowel  is  written  in  Latin  inscriptions  (see  24,  29)  ;  (c.)  from  the 
transliteration  of  the  word  into  other  languages,  especially  Greek ;  (d.)  from 
the  etymology  of  the  word,  or  from  a  comparison  of  it  with  kindred  words  in 
other  Indo-European  languages  ;  (<?.)  from  comparison  with  derived  words 
in  the  Romance  languages.     But  all  these  kinds  of  evidence  must  be  used 
with  great  caution. 

2461.  For  the  length  of  a  vowel  before  ns,  nf,  and  certain  other  groups 
of  consonants,  see  122. 

2462.  In  inceptive  verbs  (834)  the  ending  -sco  is  thought  to  be  always 
preceded  by  a  long  vowel :  as,  cresco,  nascor,  proficiscor. 

2463.  In  the  perfect   indicative   active,  perfect   participle   passive  and 
kindred  formations  of  verbs  in  -go  preceded  by  a  short  vowel,  as  ago,  reg5, 
the  theme  syllable  shows  a  long  vowel :  as,  lexi,  rexl,  texi ;  actus,  lectus; 
rector;  actito. 

(B.)    SOME  PECULIARITIES  OF  QUANTITY  IN  OLD  LATIN. 

2464.  For  the  preservation  of  a  long  vowel  in  certain  specific  endings  in 
old  Latin,  see  132. 

2465.  Final  -al  is  sometimes  preserved  long  in  the  nominative  singular : 
as,  bacchanal  (Plaut.) ;  also  the  syllable  -es  in  the  nominative  singular  of 
stems  in  -t-  which  have  the  genitive  in  -itis  (477) :  as  miles  (Plaut.)  171,  I. 

2466.  Hie,  illic  and  istic,  when  adverbs,  have  a  long  final  syllable ;  but 
when  nominative  singular  masculine,  have  the  final  syllable  regularly  short. 

2467.  In  Plautus  frustra  always  where  determinable  (seven  times)  has  the 
final  syllable  short,     contra  sometimes  has  a  short  final  syllable  in  old  Latin. 

29  449 


2468-2476.]    Appendix  (E.) :  Prosody. 


2468.  In  Latin  poetry  down  to  the  time  of  Cicero,  final  s  often  does  not 
"  make  position "  before  a   following   consonant   (66)  ;  as,  tempus   fert 
(Plaut.)  ;  magls  stetisse  (Ter.). 

2469.  The  first  syllable  of  ille,  illic  (the  pronoun),  quippe,  immo,  inde, 
unde,  nempe,  omnis,  and  perhaps  iste,  is  sometimes  shortened. 

In  ille,  illic,  quippe,  and  immo  the  shortening  is,  some  hold,  due  to  the  fact 
that  in  common  speech  one  of  the  double  consonants  was  often  pronounced  faintly  or 
not  at  all;  while  in  inde,  unde,  nempe,  and  omnis  the  nasal  was  very  faintly 
sounded  before  the  following  consonant.  But  some  authorities  hold  that  always  in 
nempe,  and  sometimes  in  ille,  quippe,  inde,  unde,  and  perhaps  iste,  before 
an  initial  consonant  final  e  disappears,  and  the  word  becomes  a  monosyllable. 

LAW  OF  IAMBIC  SHORTENING. 

2470.  A  long  syllable,  preceded  by  a  short  monosyllable  or  by  a  short 
initial  syllable,  and  immediately  preceded  or  followed  by  the^verse-ictus,  may 
be  shortened:  as,  e"t  hiinc,  d6m6  me,  ad  iixorem,  volQntate. 

The  short  monosyllable  may  be  a  word  which  has  become  monosyllabic  by  elision  : 
as,  6g(o)  hanc. 

2471.  If  the  syllable  to  be  shortened  is  the  first  of  a  word  of  more  than 
one  syllable,  or  the  second  of  a  polysyllable,  it  must  be  one  which  is  long  by 
position,  not  by  nature.     There  are  some  possible  exceptions  to  this  rule, 
such  as  verSbSmini  (T.  Ph.  902) ;  but  these  are  few  and  doubtful. 

2472.  Iambic  shortening  took  place  not  only  in  verse,  but  also  to  a  con- 
siderable extent  in  common  speech,  particularly  in  iambic  words  (see  130),  in 
which  the  accent  cooperated  with  the  verse-ictus  to  produce  the  shortening. 


II.     FIGURES   OF   PROSODY. 
HIATUS. 

2473.  For  hiatus  within  a  word,  and  the  means  by  which  it  is  avoided, 
see  114-120. 

2474.  Hiatus  between  two  words  is  much  more  common  in  old 
Latin  than  in  writers  of  tbe  classical  period.     The  precise  extent  to 
which  it  is  allowed  by  the  early  dramatists  is  matter  of  dispute.     The 
following  cases  may  be  mentioned  in  which  the  Latin  poets  admit 
hiatus : 

2475.  (i.)  After  interjections:  as,  hahahae  homo,  T.  Ph.  411;   5  et 
praesidium,  H.  i,  i,  2. 

2476.  (2.)  After  proper  names,  and  words  of  Greek  origin  :  as,  ancillam 
ferre  Veneri  aut  Cupidini,  PI.  As.  804 ;   Threicio  Aquilone,  H.  Epod. 
13.  3- 

45° 


Figures  of  Prosody.        [2477-2492. 


2477.  (3.)  In  the  principal  caesura  of  a  verse.     So  especially  in  Plautus 
and  Terence  after  the  fourth  foot  of  the  iambic  septenarius,  and  in  Plautus 
in  the  principal  break  in  the  iambic  octonarius,  trochaic  septenarius  and 
trochaic  octonarius. 

2478.  (4.)  Often  in  the  dramatists  where  there  is  a  change  of  speakers; 
as,  qui  potuit  videre  ?  :  :  oculis  :  :  quo  pacto  ?  :  :  hiantibus,  PI.  Merc.  182. 

2479.  (5.)  Probably  sometimes  in  cases  of  repetition,  enumeration,  or 
sharp  antithesis,  and  where  there  is  an  important  pause  in  the  sense :  as, 
earn  volt  meretricem  facere  :   ea    me  deperit,  PI.  Cur.  46;   si  pereo, 
hominum  manibus  periisse  iuvabit,  V.  3,  606. 

2480.  Vergil  sometimes  admits  hiatus  when  the  final  syllable  ending  in  a  vowel  is 
preceded  or  followed  (or  both)  by  two  short  syllables:  as,  lamentis   eremituque 
et  femlngo  ululatu,  V.  4,  667. 


ELISION. 

v      2481.  For  elision  within  a  word,  see  119. 

2482.  In  verse  a  final  vowel  is   generally   elided   before   a 
vowel  or  h  :  as, 

quidve  motor,  s(i)  omnis  un(o)  ordin(e)  habetis  Achivos,  V.  2,  102. 
Such  a  vowel  was  probably  faintly  sounded,  not  dropped  altogether. 

2483.  Elision  is  frequent  in  most  of  the  early  poets ;  but  writers  of  the  Augus- 
tan and  succeeding  ages  regarded  it  with  increasing  disfavour.     The  elision  of  a  long 
vowel  before  a  short  was  in  general  avoided ;  but  there  are  numerous  exceptions. 

2484.  Monosyllabic  interjections  do  not  suffer  elision. 

2485.  Monosyllables  ending  in  a  diphthong  seldom  suffer  elision  before  a  short 
vowel. 

2486.  Dipnthongs  arising  from  Synizesis  (2499)  are  sometimes  elided  in  early 
Latin  verse,  but  not  in  verse  of  the  classical  period. 

2487.  The  monosyllables  qui  (plural),  do,  st5,  re,  spe,  are  thought  never  to 
suffer  elision  before  a  short  vowel. 

2488.  The  dactylic  poets  very  rarely  elide  the  final  syllable  of  an  iambic  (w  _) 
or  Cretic  ( w  )  word  before  a  short  vowel. 

2489.  Elision  seldom  occurs  if  the  syllable  to  be  elided  is  immediately  preceded 
by  a  vowel :  as  in  de(am)  et. 

2490.  The  final  syllable  of  a  Greek  word  is  rarely  elided. 

2491.  Elision  is  more  common  toward  the  beginning  of  a  verse  than  toward  the 
end. 

2492.  Elision  rarely  occurs  in  the  first  syllable  or  last  syllable  of  a  verse  ;  but  see 
under  Synapheia  (2510),  and  for  the  elision  of  the  enclitic  -que  or  -ve  at  the  end 
of  a  dactylic  hexameter,  see  2568. 

451 


2493-2501-]     Appendix  (£.) :  Prosody. 


2493.  ECTHLIPSIS  (Gr.  €K0A.i^is,  a  squeezing  out).     Final  m 
and  a  preceding  short  vowel  are  usually  elided  before  a  vowel  or 
h:  as, 

monstr(um)  horrend(um)  mform(e)  ingens,  cui  lumen  ademptum, 

V.3,658. 

In  such  cases  the  ending  was  probably  not  cut  off  altogether,  but  was 
given  a  faint  nasal  sound. 

2494.  Sometimes  a  monosyllable  ending  in  a  short  vowel  and  m  is  not 
elided  before  a  vowel  :  as  quam  ego  (Ter.)  ;  siint  cum  odore  (Lucr.). 

Such  unelided  monosyllables  are  most  frequent  in  the  early  dramatists,  and  in 
them  usually  fall  under  the  verse-ictus.  See  61. 

2495.  The  monosyllables  dem,  stem,  rem,  spem,  sim,  are  thought  never  to 
be  elided  before  a  short  vowel. 

2496.  After  a  word  ending  with  a  vowel,  -m,  or  -us,  the  verb  est  often 
loses  its  e  :  as,  bonast,  bonumst,  bonust,  visust.     So,  too,  es  sometimes 
lo^es  its  vowel  :  as  homo's,  adeptus'.     This  usage  reflects  the  actual  pro- 
nunciation of  common  speech. 

2497.  SEMI-HIATUS  OR  SEMI-ELISION.      A  long  final  vowel  is 
sometimes  shortened  before  a  vowel.     This  may  occur  either  in  the 
arsis  (2520),  or  in  a  resolved  thesis  :  as,  an  qul  amant  (Verg.)  ;  lec- 
tu!6  erudltuli  (Cat.)  ;  nam  qul  aget  (Ter.). 

This  kind  of  shortening  is  not  frequent  except  in  the  early  dramatists,  who  often 
shorten  under  the  verse-ictus  a  monosyllable  ending  in  a  long  vowel  and  followed  by 
an  initial  vowel  (as  in  the  third  example  above). 


2498.  SYNALOEPHA  (Greek  o-vraAot^i},  a  smearing  together}  is  a  general  term 
used  to  denote  the  means  of  avoiding  hiatus.  It  includes  elision  and  synizesis,  though 
some  grammarians  use  it  in  the  same  sense  as  synizesis. 


2499.  Synizesis  (Greek  oWfoo-w,  a  settling  together}.     Two 
vowels  (or  a  vowel  and  a  diphthong)  which  belong  to  different 
syllables  sometimes  coalesce  so  as  to  form  one  syllable.     This 
is  called  Synizesis,  and  is  especially  common  in  the^early  drama- 
tists.    Examples  are:  meo,  eadem,  cuius,  aurei.      See  117. 

Some  grammarians  would  include  under  Synizesis  only  cases  in  which  a  short 
vowel  is  subordinated  to  a  following  long  ;  as  tu"b. 

2500.  The  term  Synaeresis  (Greek  trvvcupetris,  a  taking  together)  is  sometimes 
used  as  a  synonym  for  Synizesis.     The  ancient  grammarians,  however,  used  it  in  the 
sense  of  Contraction  (118). 

2501.  DIALYSIS  (Greek  StaA.™™?,  a  breaking  up}.     Conversely, 
two  vowels  which  usually  form  a  diphthong  are  sometimes  sepa- 
rated so  as  to  form  two  syllables  :  as  coepi  (Lucr.)  for  coepi. 

This,  however,  is  really  the  survival  of  the  original  forms  (120). 

45  2 


Figures  of  Prosody.        [2502-2509. 

2502.  The  name  DIAERESIS  (Greek  Sicu'peo-i?,  a  separating)  is  sometimes  used  as 
a  synonym  for  Dialysis  ;  but  it  is  better  to  restrict  it  to  the  meaning  denned  in  2542. 

2503.  HARDENING.     A  vocalic  i  or  u^is  sometimes   made 
consonantal  before  another_yowel  :   as,  abiete,  ariete  (Verg.)  ; 
consilium  (Hor.)  ;  omnia  (Lucr.).     See  117  and  83. 

This  usage  is  sometimes  included  under  Synizesis(2499),  while  some  grammarians 
term  it  Synaeresis  (2500). 

2504.  SOFTENING.     Conversely,  a  consonantal  i  or  u  some- 
times becomes  vocalized  before  a  vowel,  thus  giving  an  addi- 
tional syllable  :    as,  siliiae  for  silvae  (Hor.)  ;   evolliisse  for 
evolvisse  (Ov.).     See  52. 

This  usage  is  sometimes  included  under  the  name  Dialysis  (2501). 


2505.  DIASTOL£  (-Greek  Smo-roA^j,  a  drawing  asunder}.     A  syllable  which 
in  verse  of  the  classical  period  is'generally  short  is  sometimes  used  as  long 
for  metrical  convenience.     The  syllable  so  employed  generally  falls  under 
the  verse-ictus,  and  in  most  cases  is  immediately  followed  by  the  principal 
caesura,  or  by  a  pause  in  the  sense.    Examples  are  : 

terga  fatigamus  hasta,  nee  tarda  senectus,  V.  9,  610. 
turn  sic  Mercurium  adloquitur  ac  talia  mandat,  V.  4,  222. 
caeca  timet  aliunde  fata,  H.  2,  13,  16. 

In  many  such  cases  this  lengthening  is  not  arbitrary,  but  the  "  lengthened  "  syllable 
is  one  that  was  originally  long  (see  132). 

2506.  The  enclitic  -que  is  sometimes  lengthened  under  the  ictus  when  another 
-que  precedes  or  follows  in  the  arsis  :  as,  calSnes  famulique  metallique"  ca- 
culaeque  (Accius). 

2507.  SYSTOL£   (Greek    <ry<rro\^,  a  drawing  together).    Conversely  a 
syllable  which  in  verse  is  regularly  long  is  sometimes  shortened  for  metrical 
convenience:    as,   dedSrunt    (Hor.),   nulllus   (Hor.),   imperat.   commoda 
(Cat). 

In  most  cases  this  shortening  is  not  arbitrary,  but  represents  a  pronunciation 
which  was  in  actual  use,  especially  among  the  common  people. 


2508.  SYNCOP£  (Greek  o-iry/eoir^,  a  cutting^  short).     A  short  vowel  is  often 
dropped  between  two  consonants:   as,  surpite  for  surripite  (Hor.),  repos- 
tum  for  repositum  (Verg.). 

This  usage  doubtless  reflects  the  common  pronunciation;  see  no,  in. 

2509.  TMESIS  (Greek  T/UJ/O-I?,  a  cutting)  is  the  separation  of  the 
parts  of  a  word  :   as,  septem  subiecta  trioni  =  septenitriom  sub- 
iecta  (Verg.). 

This  usually  occurs  only  in  compounds  ;  but  early  poets  sometimes 
divided  other  words  :  as,  saxo  cere  comminuit  brum  for  saxd  cerebrum 
comminuit  (Ennius). 

453 


2510-2514-]     Appendix  (E.) :  Prosody. 


2510.  SYNAPHEIA  (Greek  trwctyeta,  a  joining  together}  is  the  linking 
together  of  two  verses  belonging  to  the  same  system.  Here  elision  or  wore 
division  may  occur  at  the  end  of  the  first  verse :  as, 

love  non  probante  u- 

xorius  amnis,  H.  i,  2,  19. 

lam  licet  venias  marit(e), 

uxor  in  thalamo  tib!  est,  Cat.  61,  191. 


III.   VERSIFICATION. 
BY  HERMAN  W.  HAYLEY,  PH.D. 


2511.  RHYTHM  (Gr.  pvOpos,  from  pelv,  to  flow)  is 
the  effect  of  regularity  produced  by  the  discrimina- 
tion of  a  movement  or  sound  into  uniform  intervals 
of  time.     It  is  often  marked  by  a  stress  or  ictus  re- 
curring at  fixed  intervals. 

Rhythm  is  by  no  means  confined  to  verse.  Music,  dancing,  and  even  the  regular 
beat  of  a  trip-hammer,  have  rhythm.  Particular  kinds  of  movement  are  often  called 
rhythms,  as  anapaestic  rhythms,  dactylic  rhythms,  &c. 

2512.  METRE  (Gr.  perpov,  a  measure)  is  the  defi- 
nite measurement  of  verse  by  feet,  lines,  strophes, 
systems,  &c. 

2513.  Latin  verse  is  quantitative,  the  rhythm  depending  upon  the  quan- 
tity of  the  syllables  (but  see  2548).     The  ictus  naturally  falls  upon  a  kmg 
syllable  (or  its  equivalent).     English  verse,  on  the  other  hand,  is  accen- 
tual, its  rhythm  depending  upon  the  accent  of  words. 

QUANTITY. 

2514.  SIGNS  OF  QUANTITY.     A  long  syllable  is  indicated  by 
_,  a  short  one  by  w.     A  syllable  which  varies  in  quantity,  being 
sometimes  long,  sometimes  short,  is  indicated  by  ^  or  w. 

In  the  following  metrical  schemes,  ^L  indicates  that  the  long  is  more  usual  or 
more  strictly  in  accordance  with  the  rhythm  than  the  short.  The  reverse  is  indicated 
by  w. 

454 


Versification.  [2  5 1 5-2  521. 


21515.  The  UNIT  OF  MEASURE  is  the  duration  of  a  short  syllable 
and  is  called  a  Time*  Tempus,  or  Mora.  The  mora  did  not  have  an 
absolute  length,  but  varied  with  the  nature  of  the  rhythm.  For  greater 
convenience,  however,  it  is  assumed  that  its  length  was  uniform,  and 
equalled  that  of  an  eighth  note  ^  A  long  syllable,  being  equal  to 
two  shorts,  has  a  length  of  two  morae,  which  is  assumed  to  be  the 
same  as  that  of  our  quarter-note  J  Hence  in  notation  \j  =  J^  and 

2516.  PROTRACTION.    A  long  syllable  may  be  prolonged  (Pro- 
traction}  so  as  to  have  a  length  of  three  morae,  in  which  case  it  is 
called  a  triseme  (marked  i_),  or  of  four  morae,  when  it  is  termed  a 
tetraseme  (marked  L_J).     See  2537  and  2541. 

2517.  CORREPTION.     A  long  or  short  syllable  may  be  shortened  so  as  to 
occupy  less  than  its  normal  time.     This  is  called  Correction  (Lat.  correptio, 
a  shortening).     See  2523  and  2524. 

2518.  RESOLUTION  AND  CONTRACTION.     In  some  kinds  of  verse 
a  long  syllable  may  be,  as  it  were,  broken  up  (Resolution)  into  the 
equivalent  two  shorts ;  and  conversely  two  short  syllables  may  in  some 
cases  be  united  (Contraction)  into  the  equivalent  long. 


FEET. 

2519.  FEET.     Latin  verse  (like  English)  is  measured  by  groups 
of  syllables  called  Feet.     Each  of  these  groups  has  a  definite  length 
of  so  many  morae  (2515). 

It  is  theoretically  more  accurate  to  make  the  foot  purely  a  time-division,  as  some 
authorities  do  ;  but  the  definition  given  above  is  sanctioned  by  established  usage. 

2520.  ARSIS  and  THESIS.     Every  complete  foot  consists  of  two 
parts,  an  accented  and  an  unaccented.     The  part  on  which  the  rhyth- 
mical accent  or  ictus  falls  is  called  the   Thesis  (Gr.  tfeViy,  a  setting 
down).     The  unaccented  part  of  the  foot  is  termed  the  Arsis  (Gr. 

s,  a  raising). 


The  name  Thesis  originally  referred  to  the  setting  down  of  the  foot  in  beating 
time  or  marching,  or  to  the  movement  of  the  leader's  hand  in  making  the  downward 
beat;  and  Arsis  in  like  manner  meant  the  raising  of  the  foot  or  hand.  But  the 
Roman  grammarians  misunderstood  the  Greek  terms,  supposing  them  to  refer  to  the 
Cowering  and  raising  of  the  voice,  and  so  interchanged  them.  Hence  many  modern 
writers  prefer  to  use  Arsis  to  denote  the  accented,  and  Thesis  the  unaccented,  part  of 
the  foot. 


KINDS  OF  FEET. 

2521.  The  feet  in  common  use  are  the  following :  — 

455 


2522.] 


Appendix  (E.):  Prosody. 


FEET  OF  THREE  MORAE. 

Name. 

Sign. 

Musically. 

Example. 

Trochee 
Iambus 
Tribrach 

—  -  W 

\J  __ 
w  \J  w 

J/ 
/J 

^/^ 

ducit 
legunt 
hominis 

FEET  OF  FOUR  MORAE. 

Dactyl 

Anapaest 
Spondee 
Proceleusmatic 

—  \J  \J 

W  \J  _ 

w  w  w  \j 

J    // 
//J 

»*} 

ducimus 
regerent 
feci 
hominibus 

FEET  OF  FIVE  MORAE. 

Cretic 
First  Paeon 
Fourth  Paeon 
Bacchms 

—  w  —  . 

WWW 
W  W  \J  __ 

w  

J/J 

J/// 
-V/J 
/VJ 

fecerint 
legeritis 
celeritas 
regebant 

FEET  OF  Six  MORAE. 

Chori  ambus 
Ionic  d  mdiore 
Ionic  d  minore 

—  \J  \J  

W   W 
W  W  

J//J 
JJ// 
//JJ 

horribiles 
deducimus 
relegebant 

2522.  Other  feet  mentioned  by  the  ancient  grammarians  are :  — 


Name. 

Sign. 

Name. 

Sign. 

Pyrrhic     .     .    . 
Amphibrach 
Antibacchlus  or  ) 
Palimbacchius    } 
Molossus  .    .     . 
Dispondee    .    . 
Ditrochee     .    . 
Diiambus      .    . 

W 

Antispast      .     . 
Second  Paeon  . 
Third  Paeon     . 
First  Epitrite    . 
Second  Epitrite 
Third  Epitrite  . 
Fourth  Epitrite 

V^/       \J      TU«      \J 

456 


Versification.  [2523-2528. 


But  these  are  of  little  practical  importance,  as  most  of  them  never  are  employed 
in  Latin  poetry,  and  the  few  which  do  occur  are  used  only  as  substitutes  for  other  feet. 

CYCLIC  FEET. 

2523.  A  dactyl  occurring  in  f  time  did  not  have  the  value  of  2  morae 
+  i  +  i,  but  was  given  instead  that  of  i£  +  £  +  £ ;  in  other  words  both 
arsis  and  thesis  suffered  correption  (2517),  but  the  ratio  between  them  re- 
mained unchanged.  Such  a  dactyl  is  called  cyclict  and  is  marked  —  v^w, 
or  musically  J}  JJ  J*  There  is  also  a  cyclic  anapaest,  marked  \^j  —  or  J*  JJ  J} 

Some  scholars,  however,  hold  that  the  cyclic  dactyl  had  approximately  the  value 
*i  +  4  4-  i»  or  J75  f,  and  mark  it  — w  w.  In  like  manner  they  mark  the  cyclic 
anapaest  \^  vy— •  The  true  nature  of  these  cyclic  feet  is  very  uncertain. 


IRRATIONAL  SYLLABLES  AND  FEET. 

2524.  A  long  syllable  sometimes  stands  in  place  of  a  short.     A 
syllable  thus  used  is  called  irrational  (marked  >)  because  it  destroys 
the  normal  ratio  between  arsis  and  thesis.     The  foot  which  contains 
such  a  syllable  is  itself  called  irrational.     The  most  common  irra- 
tional  foot  is   the   irrational  spondee  ( —  >   when   it  stands  for  a 
trochee ;  >  —  when  it  replaces  an  iambus),  which  is  found  in  iambic, 
trochaic,  and  logaoedic  rhythms. 

Probably  the  irrational  long  suffered  a  slight  correption  (2517),  so  that  its  dura- 
tion was  between  that  of  the  ordinary  long  and  that  of  a  short  syllable. 

RHYTHMS. 

2525.  The    different    rhythms    or   metres    are   named  trochaic, 
iambic,  &c.,  according  to  their  fundamental  feet. 

2526.  Much  of  the  Latin  poetry  (though  not  by  any  means  all)  was 
written  to  be  sung.     The  Greeks  and  Romans  employed  in  their  music  not 
only  common  (or  f )  time  and  triple  (f,  f )  time,  but  also  f  time,  which  last 
is  very  rarely  used  in  modern  music. 

2527.  The  Greek  and  Roman  metricians  divided  the  rhythms  into  three  classes, 
according  to  the  ratio   between  arsis   and  thesis  in  their  fundamental   feet.     These 
classes  were  :  —  (a.)  the  Equal  Class  (yeVos  l<roi>,  genus  par)  in  which  thesis  and  arsis 
are  equal  in  duration,  as  in  dactylics,  anapaestics,  &c. ;    (b.}  the  Double  Class  (yeVo? 
6i7rAa<nov,  genus  duplex}  in  which  the  thesis  has  twice  the  duration  of  the  arsis,  as  in 
trochaics,  iambics,  &c. ;  (c.)  the  Hemiolic  Class  (yeVos  ^/ouoAtoi/,  genus  sescuplex)  in 
which  the  thesis  has  one  and  a  half  times  the  duration  of  the  arsis,  as  in  bacchiacs, 
cretics,  etc. 

2528.  ASCENDING  AND  DESCENDING   RHYTHMS.     Rhythms  in 
which  the  thesis  follows  the  arsis  (as  in  iambics)  are  called  ascending; 
those  in  which  it  precedes  the  arsis  (as  in  trochaics)  are  termed  ae- 
scending. 

457 


2529-2533-]     Appendix  (£>):  Prosody. 


ANACRUSIS. 

2529.  The  ancients  recognized  both  ascending  and  descending 
rhythms  (2528),  and  regarded  the  former  class  as  at  least  equal  in  im- 
portance to  the  latter;  but  many  modern  scholars  since  the  time  of 
Bentley  have  preferred  to  treat  all  rhythms  as  descending,  regarding 
the  first  arsis  of  an  ascending  rhythm  as  merely  answering  to  a  pre- 
liminary upward  beat  in  music.     Such  an  initial  arsis  was  named  by 
Gottfried  Hermann  Anacrusis  (Gr»  dvatpovcris,  a  striking  up}. 

Scholars  have  been  influenced  to  adopt  the  anacrustic  theory  in  its 
widest  extent  largely  by  the  fact  that  in  most  modern  music  a  measure  must 
commence  with  a  downward  beat,  a  rule  which  did  not  hold  in  ancient  music. 
By  this  theory  an  iambic  verse  becomes  trochaic  with  anacrusis,  an  anapae- 
stic verse  dactylic  with  anacrusis,  &c.  But  in  many  cases  those  kinds  of 
verse  which  begin  with  an  arsis  were  subject  to  different  rules  of  construc- 
tion from  those  which  begin  with  a  thesis.  Hence  it  seems  best  to  restrict 
anacrusis  to  logaoedic  verse,  in  which  it  undoubtedly  occurs. 

2530.  The  anacrusis  may  be  a  long  syllable,  a  short  syllable,  or 
two  shorts  (but  not  two  longs).     It  is  often  irrational  (2524).     In 
metrical  schemes  it  is  often  set  off  from  the  rest  of  the  verse  by  a  ver- 
tical row  of  dots :  thus,  • 

GROUPS  OF  FEET. 

2531.  A  group  of  two  feet  is  called  a  dipody,  one  of  three  a  tri- 
pody,  one  of  four  a  tetrapody,  one  of  five  zpentapody,  and  one  of  six  a 
hexapody.    The  dipody  is  the  measure  of  trochaic,  iambic,  and  ana- 
paestic verse.     Other  kinds  of  verse  are  measured  by  the  single  foot. 

A  single  foot  is  sometimes  called  a  tnonofody.  A  group  of  three  half  feet,  i.  e. 
a  foot  and  a  half,  is  sometimes  called  a  trithemimeris,  one  of  two  and  a  half  feet  a 
penthemimeris,  one  of  three  and  a  half  a  hephthemimeris^  &c. 

2532.  A  Rhythmical  Series,  Rhythmical  Sentence,  or  Colon  is  a 
group  of  two  or  more  feet  (but  not  more  than  six)  which  are  united 
into  a  rhythmic  whole  by  strengthening  one  of  the  ictuses,  so  that 
it  becomes  the  principal  or  dominant  ictus  of  the  whole  group. 

2533.  THE  VERSE.     A  rhythmical  series,  or  group  of  two  (or 
even  three)  series,  which  forms  a  distinct  and  separate  whole 
is  called  a  Verse.     The  final  syllable  of   a  verse  must  terminate 
a  word  (except  in  cases  of  synapheia,  see  2510),  and  may  be 
either  long  or  short  (whence  it  is  termed  syllaba  dnceps)  without 
regard  to  the  rhythm.     Hiatus  (2474)  is  freely  allowed  at  the 
end  of  a  verse  (though   in  rare  cases  elision   occurs  before  a 
rowel  at  the  beginning  of  the  following  verse ;  see  2492  and 
2568). 

A  verse  is  generally  (but  not  always)  written  as  one  line.  Hence,  the  words 
"verse"  and  "line"  are  often  used  as  synonyms. 

458 


Versification.  [2534~254°- 


SYLLABA  ANCEPS. 

2534.  In   the  present  work,  the  final  syllable  of  each  verse  is 
marked  long  or  short  as  the  rhythm  may  require,  without  reference  to 
its  quantity  in  a  given  example;  and  in  the  general  schemes  it  is  to  be 
understood  that  the  final  syllable  is  syllaba  anceps  (2533)  unless  the 
contrary  is  expressly  stated. 

2535.  DICOLIC  AND  ASYNARTETIC  VERSES.    A  verse  which  consists  of  two 
rhythmical  series  (or  cola)  is  called  dicolic.     If  the  series  of  which  the  verse  is  made  up 
are  quasi-independent  of  each  other,  so  that  hiatus  or  syllaba  anceps  occurs  in  the 
caesura,  the  verse  is  styled  asynartetic  (Gr.  aavj'dpTTjTo?,  not  joined  together). 


2536.  NAMES  OF  VERSES.     Verses  are  called  trochaic,  iambic, 
dactylic,  &c.,  according  to  their  fundamental  (or  characteristic)  feet. 
A  verse  which  contains  one  foot  (or  one  dipody  if  iambic,  trochaic,  or 
anapaestic;  see  2531)  is  called  a  monometer,  one  of  two  a  dimeter, 
one  of  three  a  trijneter,  one  of  four  a  tetrameter,  one  of  five  a  pentam- 
eter, and  one  of  six  a  hexameter. 

Trochaic,  iambic,  and  anapaestic  verses  are  often  named  by  Latin  adjec- 
tives in  -drius  (used  as  nouns)  denoting  the  number  of  feet.  Thus,  such  a 
verse  of  eight  feet  is  called  an  octondrius,  one  of  seven  a  septendrius,  one  of 
six  a  sendrius,  &c.  A  short  verse  which  is  employed  to  close  a  system 
(2547),  or  to  mark  a  metrical  or  musical  transition  between  longer  verses,  is 
called  a  clausula. 

CATALEXIS,  PAUSE,  SYNCOPE. 

2537.  CATALEXIS.    A  verse,  the  last  foot  of  which  is  incomplete, 
is  said  to  suffer  Catalexis  (Gr.  KaraXj^iy,  a  stopping  short)  or  to  be 
catalectic  j  one  of  which  the  last  foot  is  complete  is  called  acatalectic. 

It  is  usually  the  last  part  of  the  foot  that  is  omitted  ;  but  (according  to 
the  theory  now  generally  accepted)  in  catalectic  iambic  verses  it  is  the  last 
arsis  that  is  omitted,  the  preceding  thesis  being  protracted  (2516)  to  compen- 
sate for  the  loss,  thus  :  \j  ^L  _L 

2538.  A  verse  in  which  both  the  last  arsis  and  the  next  to  the  last 
are  suppressed,  so  that  a  whole  foot  appears  to   be   wanting,  is  called 
brachy  catalectic. 

2539.  A  verse  is  said  to  be  catalectic  in  syllabam^  in  disyllabum,  or  in 
trisyllabum,  according  to  the  number  of  syllables  remaining  in  the  last  foot. 
Thus,  the  dactylic  tetrameter  _  \j\j\  _  ww|_ww|  _  is  catalectic  in 
syllabam,  but  _  \_/w|  _  \j  w  |  _  ww|  _  w  is  catalectic  in  disyllabum. 

2540.  PAUSES.     Theoretically  all  the  feet  (or  dipodies  ;  see  2531) 
into  which  a  verse  is  divided  must  be  equal  in  duration.     Hence, 
when  a  final  syllable  (or  two  final  syllables)  is  lost  by  catalexis,  com- 
pensation is  made  for  the  loss  by  a  pause  at  the  end  of  the  verse. 
Such  a  pause,  which  serves  to  fill  out  the  last  measure,  answers  to  a 
rest  in  music. 

A  pause_ol  one  mora  is  often  indicated  by  the  sign  A,  and  one  of  two 
morae  by  J\. 

459 


254I~254?]-     Appendix  (E. ) ;  Prosody. 


2541.  SYNCOPE  is  the  omission  of  one  or  more  arses  in  the  body 
of  a  verse.  Compensation  is  made  for  the  suppression  of  an  arsis  b*T 
protracting  (2516)  the  preceding  thesis. 


CAESURA. 

2542.  CAESURA  AND  DIAERESIS.    A  Caesura  (literally  a  cutting, 
from  caedo,  I  cut}  is  the  break  in  a  verse  produced  by  the  ending  of 
a  word  within  a  foot.     When  the  end  of  a  word  coincides  with  the 
end  of  a  foot,  the  break  is  called  a  Diaeresis  (Gr.  6Wpeo-iy,  a  separat- 
ing).    A  caesura  is  marked  ||,  a  diaeresis  fl. 

The  word  caesura  is  often  loosely  used  to  include  both  caesura  propel 
and  diaeresis. 

2543.  Strictly  speaking,  there  is  a  caesura  (or  diaeresis,  as  the  case  may 
be)  wherever  a  word  ends  within  a  verse  ;  but  the  main  incision  in  the  verse 
is  so  much  more  important  than  the  rest  that  it  is  often  called  the  principal 
caesura,  or  simply  the  caesura. 

2544.  Caesuras  are  named  according  to  their  position  in  the  verse  ;  thus 
a  caesura  after  the  third  half-foot  (i.e.  in  the  second  foot)  is  called  trithe- 
mimeral  (from  Gr.  rpiQ^^^ep-r]^,  containing  three  halves},  one  after  the  fifth 
half-foot  (i.e.  in  the  third  foot)  penthemimeral  (Gr.  Tre^/w^e/sijs,  consisting  of 
five  halves],  one  after  the  seventh  half-foot  (i.e.  in  the  fourth  foot)  hephthe- 
mimeral  (Gr.  e^^^/xt/iep^j),  &c. 

The  Latin  names  caesura  semiternaria  (—  the  trithemimeral  caesura),  semigut- 
naria  (=  the  penthemimeral),  semiseftenaria  (=  the  hepthemimeral),  &c.,  are  some- 
times used.  For  the  masculine  and  feminine  caesuras,  see  2557. 


STROPHE.     SYSTEM. 

2545.  THE  STROPHE.    A  fixed  number  of  verses  recurring  in  a  regular 
order  is  called  a  Strophe.     A  strophe  commonly  contains  verses  of  different 
kinds,  but  some  strophes  are  composed  of  verses  which  are  all  alike.     The 
most  common  strophes  in  Latin  poetry  are  either  distichs  (i.e.  groups  of  two 
lines  each),  tristichs  (of  three  lines  each),  or  tetrastichs  (of  four). 

Strophes  and  verses  are  frequently  named  after  some  poet  who  made  use  of  them. 
So  the  Alcaic  strophe  (named  after  Alcaeus),  the  Sapphic  strophe  (named  after 
Sappho),  the  Glyconic  verse  (named  after  Glycon),  the  Asclepiadean  (after  Ascle- 
piades),  the  Phalaecean  (after  Phalaecus),  the  Pherecratean  (after  Pherecrates),  &c. 

2546.  A  Stichic  Series  is  a  series  of  verses  of  the  same  kind  not  combined 
into  strophes. 

2547.  THE  SYSTEM.    A  group  of  rhythmical  series  (see  2532)  which  is 
of  greater  extent  than  a  verse  is  called  a  System.     Long  systems,  such  as  are 
common  in  Greek  poetry,  are  comparatively  rare  in  Latin  verse. 

Few  verses  have  more  than  two  rhythmical  series ;  none  more  than  three, 

460 


Versification .  [2548-2551. 


2548.  Although  in  all  probability  the  Latin  accent  was  mainly  one 
of  stress  rather  than  of  pitch,  it  seems  to  have  been  comparatively 
weak.     Hence,  when  it  conflicted  with  the  metrical  ictus,  it  could  be 
the  more  easily  disregarded.     But  accentual  or  semi-accentual  poetry 
seems  to  have  existed  among  the  common  people  even  in  the  Augus- 
tan age,  and  even  in  classical  Latin  verse  in  certain  cases  (as  in  the 
last  part  of  the  dactylic  hexameter)  conflict  between  ictus  and  accent 
was  carefully  avoided.      After  the  third  century   A.  D.   the   accent 
exerted  a  stronger  and  stronger  influence  upon  versification,  until  in 
the  Middle  Ages  the  quantitative  Latin  verse  was  quite  supplanted 
by  the  accentual. 

NUMERI   ITALICI. 

2549.  Some  of  the  earliest  remains  of  Latin  literature  are  believed 
to  show  a  rhythmical  structure.     These  are  chiefly  prayers,  impreca- 
tions, sacred  songs  and  the  like,  couched  in  a  set  form  of  words.     Of 
the  rules  according  to  which  these  carmina  were  composed,  almost 
nothing  is  known.     According  to  one  theory,  they  are  wholly  accen- 
tual, and  are  composed  of  rhythmical  series,  each  series  containing 
four  theses.     Frequently  an  arsis  is  suppressed,  and  compensation 
for  the  omission  is  made  by  dwelling  longer  upon  the  thesis.     As  an 
example  is  given  the  prayer  in  Cato,  De  Re  Riistica,  141  : 

Mars  pater  tl  pr6cor  \  quae"s5que  uti  sies  \  v61ens  prdpitius 
mini  domo  \  familia6que  ndstrae",  &c. 

THE   SATURNIAN. 

2550.  THE  SATURNIAN  is  the  best  known  and  most  important 
of  the  old  Italian  rhythms  ;  but  its  nature  long  has  been,  and  still 
is,  matter  of  high  dispute.     There  are  two  principal  theories  as  to  its 
character,  the  quantitative  and  the  accentual,  each  of  which  is  advo- 
cated by  many  distinguished  scholars. 

2551.  (i.)  THE  QUANTITATIVE  THEORY.     According  to  this  theory,  the 
Saturnian  is  a  verse  of  six  feet,  with  an  anacrusis  (2529).     There  is  a  break 
after  the  fourth  arsis,  or  more  rarely  after  the  third  thesis.     Each  thesis  may 
be  either  a  long  syllable  or  two  shorts ;    each  arsis  may  be  a  short  syllable,  a 
long,  or  two  shorts,  but  an  arsis  is  not  resolved  before  the  principal  break  or 
at  the  end  of  the  verse.     Hiatus  is  common,  especially  at  the  principal  break 
in  the  verse.     A  short  final  syllable  may  be  lengthened  by  the  influence  of 
the  verse-ictus.    An  arsis  is  frequently  suppressed,  especially  the  penultimate 
arsis.    Two  arses  are  never  suppressed  in  the  same  half-verse,  and  rarely 
two  in  the  same  verse.     Examples  of  the  Saturnian,  measured  quantitatively, 
are: 

Dabtint  malum  Met611i  fl:  Na6vi5  poetae. 

Nov6m  lovis  concdrdes  fl:  fflia6  sorores. 

(Naevius.) 
461 


2552-2555-]     Appendix  (E.):  Prosody. 

Virtfm  mini,  CamSna,  ft  insece  versutum. 

(Livius  Andronicus.) 

Ebrdm  sectam  sequdntur  ft  mtflti  mdrtales. 

(Naevius.) 

Compare  in  English :  "The  que£n  was  fn  the  pdrlour,  dating  bread  and  hdney." 

2552.  Most  of  the  Roman  grammarians  who  discussed  the  nature  of  the  Saturnian 
seem  to  have  regarded  it  as  quantitative.  In  modern  times  the  quantitative  theory 
has  been  advocated  by  Ritschl,  Buecheler,  Havet,  Christ,  Lucian  Mueller,  W.  Meyer, 
Reichardt  and  many  others. 


2553.  (2.)  THE  ACCENTUAL  THEORY.  According  to  this  theory,  the  Satur- 
is  an  accentual  verse,  constructed  without  regard  to  quantity.     It  is 


nian 

divided  by  the  principal  break  into  two  halves,  the  first  of  which  has  three 
theses.  The  second  half  usually  has  three,  but  may  have  only  two,  in  which 
case  it  is  usually  preceded  by  an  anacrusis  (2529).  Two  accented  syllables 
are  regularly  separated  by  an  unaccented  syllable,  but  in  strictly  constructed 
Saturnians  the  second  and  third  unaccented  syllables  are  regularly  separated 
by  two  unaccented  ones.  Hiatus  was  at  first  freely  admitted,  but  in  the 
Saturnians  of  the  second  century  B.  c.  occurs  only  at  the  principal  break. 
Examples  of  the  Saturnian,  measured  according  to  this  theory,  are : 

Dabunt  malum  Mete"lli  ft  Na6vio  poetae. 

N6vem  I6vis  conc6rdes  ft  filial  sorores. 

(Naevius.) 

Virum  mihi,  CamSna,  ft  insece  versutum. 

(Livius  Andronicus.) 

Eorum  sectam  sequdntur  ft  multi  mortales. 

(Naevius.) 

2554.  The  accentual  theory  was  held  by  the  scholiast  on  V.  G.  2,  385,  and  in 
modern  times  has  been  upheld  (in  one  form  or  another)  by  O.  Keller,  Thurneysen, 
Westphal,  Gleditsch,  Lindsay  and  others.  The  brief  statement  given  above  agrees 
essentially  with  that  of  O.  Keller.  Gleditsch  holds  that  each  half-verse  has  four 
accents,  as  :  Dabunt  malum  Me~telli  ||  Nae"vio  poetae" ;  Lindsay  that  the  first 
hemistich  has  three  accents  and  the  second  two,  as:  Ddbunt  malum  Metelli  || 
Na6vi5  poetae.  The  whole  question  is  still  far  from  its  final  settlement. 


DACTYLIC   RHYTHMS. 

2555.   These  are  descending  rhythms   belonging  to  the  Equal 
Class  (see  2527).     In  them  the  fundamental  foot  is  the  dactyl  (±_  w  w), 

for  which  its  metrical  equivalent,  the  spondee  (J ),  is  frequently 

substituted. 

462 


Versification.  [2556-2559. 


THE  DACTYLIC  HEXAMETER. 

2556.  The  DACTYLIC  HEXAMETER  is  the  verse  regularly  em- 
ployed in  epic,  didactic,  and  bucolic  poetry,  and  is  used  by  the 
Latin  writers  oftener  than  any  other  measure.  It  consists  of 
six  feet,  the  last  of  which  is  a  spondee  (but  with  the  privilege  of 
syllaba  anceps  ;  see  2534).  The  fifth  foot  is  usually  a  dactyl; 
but  sometimes  a  spondee  is  employed,  in  which  case  the  verse 
is  called  spondaic.  In  each  of  the  other  four  feet  either  a  dactyl 
or  a  spondee  may  be  used.  The  scheme  is  therefore  : 


i 


2557.  A  caesura  which  comes  immediately  after  the  thesis  of  a  foot  is 
called  masculine  ;  one  which  falls  in  the  middle  of  the  arsis  (i.  e.  after  the 
first  short  of  a  dactyl)   is  termed  feminine.     The  Roman  writers  show  a 
strong   preference  for  masculine  principal  caesuras,  and  in  general   their 
treatment  of  the  caesura  is  more  strict  than  that  of  the  Greek  poets. 

2558.  The  principal  caesura  in  the  Latin  hexameter  is  most  frequently 
the  penthemimeral  (2544)  :  as  in  : 

Arma  virumque  can5  ||  Troiae  qui  primus  ab  oris 

(V.i,  I). 

Next  in  order  of  frequency  stands  the  hephthemimeral,  which  is  usually 
accompanied  by  a  secondary  trithemimeral,  and  in  many  cases  also  by  a 
feminine  caesura  in  the  third  foot  :  as  in  the  verse, 

Insignem  ||  pietate  ||  virum  ||  tot  adire  labores 

(V.  i,  10;. 

If  the  secondary  trithemimeral  caesura  is  lacking,  the  penthemimeral  is 
usually  accompanied  by  a  feminine  caesura  in  the  second  foot.  Sometimes, 
though  more  rarely,  the  principal  break  in  the  line  is  the  feminine  caesura 
in  the  third  foot  (often  called  the  "  caesura  after  the  third  trochee  "),  as  in 
the  verse 

Spargens  umida  mella  ||  soporiferumque  papaver 

(V.  4,  486). 

2559.  The  diaeresis  (see  2542)  after  the  fourth  foot  (often  called  "bucolic 
diaeresis"  from  its  use  by  pastoral  writers)  sometimes  occurs,  but  is  much 
less  common  in  Latin  hexameters  than  in  Greek.     An  example  is 

Die  mihi,  Damoeta,  ||  cuium  pecus  ?  J  An  Meliboei  ? 

(V.  E.  3,  i). 

This  diaeresis,  though  common  in  Juvenal,  is  rare  in  most  of  the  Latin  poets 
(even  the  bucolic),  and  when  it  does  occur,  it  is  usually  accompanied  by  a  penthe- 
mimeral caesura.  Lucian  Mueller  and  others  deny  that  the  bucolic  diaeresis  ever  forms 
the  principal  break  in  a  line. 

463 


2  5  6o-2  5  63.]     Appendix  (E.) :  Prosody. 


2560.  When  a  line  has  several  caesuras,  it  is  often  hard  to  determine 
which  is  the  principal  one.     In  general,  masculine  caesuras  out-rank  femi- 
nine;  the  penthemimeral  takes  precedence  over  the  hephthemimeral,  and 
the   latter  over  all   other   caesuras.     But  if  the  hephthemimeral,  or  even 
one  of  the  minor  caesuras,  coincides  with  an  important  pause  in  the  sen- 
tence, it  may  out-rank  the  penthemimeral.     Thus  in  the  verse 

Paulat(im)  adnabam  ||  terrae ;  ||  iam  tuta  tenebam 

(V.  6,  358), 

the  principal  caesura  is  after  terrae,  not  adnabam. 
Lines  without  a  principal  caesura  are  rare.    An  instance  is 

Non  quivis  videt  inmodulata  poemata  iudex 

(H.  AP.  263). 

2561.  The  great  flexibility  of  the  hexameter  makes  it  an  admirable  ve- 
hicle of  poetic  expression.    Accumulated  spondees  give  the  verse  a  slow  and 
ponderous  movement :  as  in  the  line 

Ill(i)  in|ter  seise  II  ma|gna  vi  |  bracchia  |  tollunt 

(V.  G.  4,  174). 

The  multiplication  of  dactyls  imparts  to  the  verse  a  comparatively  rapid  and 
impetuous  motion,  as  in  the  famous  verse 

Ouadrupeldante  pu|trem  II  soni|tu  quatit  |  ungula  I  campum 

(V.8,  596). 

But  even  when  dactyls  are  numerous,  the  Latin  hexameter,  "the  stateliest 
measure  ever  moulded  by  the  lips  of  man,"  should  not  be  read  with  the  jerky  y&  move- 
ment which  is  characteristic  of  the  English  hexameter. 

2562.  The  following  passage  may  serve  to  illustrate  the  movement  of  the 
hexameter,  and  to  show  how  the  use  of  the  different  caesuras  imparts  variety 
to  the  measure : 

O  socifi  ||  — nequ(e)  e|n(im)  igna|ri  ||  sumus  |  ante  ma|16rum  — 

6  paslsi  gravi|6ra,  ||  dalbit  deus  |  his  quoque  I  finem. 

Vos  et  |  Scyllaelam  ||  rabi|em  ||  peniltusque  solnantes 

accelstis  scopullos,  ||  vos  |  et  Cylclopea  I  saxa 

experlti;  ||  revojcat(e)  anilmos,  ||  maelstumque  tilmorem 

mittite  :  I  forsan  et  I  haec  II  o|lim  ||  memi|nisse  iulvabit. 

(V.  i,  198). 

Compare  in  English : 

Rolls  and  rages  amain  the  restless,  billowy  ocean, 

While  with  a  roar  that  soundeth  afar  the  white-man ed  breakers 

Leap  up  against  the  cliffs,  like  foemen  madly  rejoicing. 

NOTES  ON  THE  HEXAMETER. 

2563.  (i.)  In  all  probability,  the  hexameter  was  originally  a  composite  verse, 
made  up  of  two  tripodies,  or  of  a  tetrapody  and  a  dipody.     Hence  hiatus  in  the  prin- 
cipal caesura  is  not  very  rare,  even  in  the  Augustan  poets.     The  stress  upon  the  first 
and  fourth  theses  was  probably  stronger  than  that  upon  the  other  four. 

464 


Versification.  [2564-2572. 


2564.  (2.)  In  the  second  half  of  the  hexameter,  particularly  in  the  fifth  and  sixth 
<eet,  verse-ictus  and  word-accent  show  a  strong  tendency  to  coincide. 

2565.  (3.)  A  monosyllable  rarely  stands  before  the  principal  caesura  or  at  the  end 
of  the  verse.     When  the  verse  ends  in  a  monosyllable,  the  thesis  of  the  last  foot  is 
generally  a  monosyllable  also,  as  in  the  line 

Crispinus  minimo  me  prdvocat  ;  accipe,  si  vis 

(H.S.  1,4,  14). 

Exceptions  to  this  rule  sometimes  occur  when  the  poet  wishes  to  produce  a  particu- 
lar effect,  as  in 

Parturient  monies,  nascetur  ridiculus  mus 

(H.  AP.  139). 

2566.  (4.)  A  hexameter  generally  ends  in  a  word  of  two  or  three  syllables, 
almost  never  in  one  of  four,  rarely  in  one  of  five.     But  spondaic  verses  (2556)  gener- 
ally end  with  a  word  of  four  syllables,  more  rarely  with  one  of  three,  almost  never  with 
one  of  two. 

2567.  (5.)  Spondaic  verses  are  comparatively  rare  in  Ennius  and  Lucretius,  but 
become  more  frequent  in  Catullus.     They  are  not  common  in  Vergil,  Horace,  Proper- 
tius  and  Ovid,  and  do  not  occur  at  all  in  Tibullus.     Persius  has  one  spondaic  verse, 
yalerius  Flaccus  one,  Claudian  five,  Silius  Italicus  six,  Statius  seven.     Ennius  has 
lines  composed  entirely  of  spondees,  and  so  in  one  instance  (116,  3)  Catullus.     Ennius 
also  resolves  the  thesis  of  a  dactyl  in  a  few  cases. 

2568.  (6.)  A  verse  which  is  connected  with  the  following  one  by  elision  (2492)  is 
called  hypermetrical.    Such  verses  are  rare,  and  usually  end  with  the  enclitics  -que 
or  -ve. 

2569.  (7.)  The   dactylic  hexameter   was    introduced    into    Latin  literature    by 
Ennius,  and  was  further  perfected  by  Lucilius,  Lucretius,  and  Cicero,  who  took  him  as 
their  model.     Catullus  and  the  group   to   which  he  belonged   followed  Alexandrian 
models  more  closely,  while  the  great  poets  of  the  Augustan  age  carried  the  technique 
of  the  hexameter  to  its  highest  perfection.     Horace  in  his  lyric  poetry  treats  the 
hexameter  with  great  strictness  ;  but  in  the  Satires  and  Epistles  he  handles  it  with 
much  freedom,  imparting  to  the  measure  a  more  colloquial  character  by  the  frequent 
use  of  spondees  and  by  less  rigorous  treatment  of  the  caesura. 

THE  DACTYLIC  PENTAMETER. 

2570.  The  DACTYLIC  PENTAMETER  is  a  verse   consisting  of 
two  catalectic  dactylic  tripodies,  separated  by  a  fixed  diaeresis. 
Spondees  are  admitted  in  the  first  tripody,  but  not  in  the  second. 
The  final  thesis  of  the  first  tripody  is  protracted  to  a  tetraseme 
(2516)  to  compensate  for  the  omission  of  the  arsis.     The  scheme 
is  therefore 


2571.  (i.)  The  verse  is  not  asynartetic  (2535),  neither  syllaba  anceps  nor  hiatus 
being  allowed  at  the  end  of  the  first  tripody. 

2572.  (2.)  This  verse  is  known  as  the  pentameter  because  the  ancient  gram- 
marians measured  it 

__  w  w  I  —  v>>  <j  |  --  |  \j  \j  —  I  w  w  — 

30  465 


2573~2577-]     Appendix  (E.):  Prosody. 

2573.  The  pentameter  is  rarely  used  except  in  combination 
with  the  hexameter,  with  which  it  forms  the  so-called  Elegiac 
Distich: 


2574.  The  Elegiac  Distich  is  used  chiefly  in  elegiac  poetry  (whence  the 
name),  in  amatory  verse  and  in  epigrams.     The  end  of  the  pentameter  gen- 
erally coincides  with  a  pause  in  the  sense.    As  examples  of  the  Elegiac 
Distich,  the  following  may  serve  : 

Quam  legis  |  ex  il|la  ||  tibi  |  venit  elpistola  |  terra 
latus  u]b(!)  aequore|is  "$.  additur  |  Hister  ajquis. 

Si  tibi  I  contige|rit  ||  cum  |  dulci  I  vita  sal  lute, 
Candida  |  fortu|nae  $:  pars  manet  j  una  me|ae. 

O.  Tr.  5,  7,  i. 

Compare  in  English  (but  see  2561  ad  fin.} : 

"  These  lame  hexameters  the  strong-winged  music  of  Homer  I 
No  —  but  a  most  burlesque,  barbarous  experiment  .  .  . 
Hexameters  no  worse  than  daring  Germany  gave  us, 
Barbarous  experiment,  barbarous  hexameters." 

(TENNYSON). 

2575.  The  Elegiac  Distich  was  introduced  into  Roman  poetry  by  Ennius,  who  used 
it  in  epigrams.    Varro  employed  it  in  his  Saturac,  and  Catullus  seems  to  have  been 
the  first  of  the  Latins  who  used  it  in  Elegiac  poetry.     The  elegiac  and  amatory  poets 
of  the  Augustan  age,  especially  Ovid,  perfected  it,  and  wielded  it  with  unequalled 
grace  and  ease. 

2576.  Ovid  nearly  always  closes  the  pentameter  with  a  disyllabic  word  ;  but  ear- 
lier poets,  especially  Catullus,  are  less  careful  in  this  regard.    Elision  is  less  frequent 
in  the  pentameter  than  in  the  hexameter.    It  sometimes  occurs  in  the  main  diaeresis 
of  the  pentameter,  though  rarely. 

THE  DACTYLIC  TETRAMETER  ACATALECTIC  (or 

Alcmaniari). 

2577.  This  verse  is  chiefly  used  in  composition  with  a  trochaic  tripody 
to  form  the  Greater  Archilochian  verse  (2677) ;  but  it  occurs  alone  once  in 
Terence  (Andria  625),  and  is  employed  in  stichic  series  (2546)  by  Seneca. 
The  scheme  is : 

JL  vTO  I  —  vTw  I  —  <J\j  I  ~  v/  \j 

An  example  is : 

hocine  |  credibill(e)  aut  memoirabile 

( 

This  verse  is  often  called  Alcmanian  because  it  was  used  by  the  Greek  poet 
Alcman. 

466 


Versification.  [2578-2582. 


THE  DACTYLIC  TETRAMETER  CATALECTIC  (or 

Archilochian!) 

2578.  This  verse  consists  of  four  dactylic  feet,  the  last  one  being  incom 
plete.    The  scheme  is  : 


An  example  is  : 

Cdrmine  |  p6rpetu|6  cele|br§r(e)  et 

(H.i,7,6). 

This  verse  differs  from  the  preceding  in  that  the  last  foot  is  always  a  trochee  01 
spondee,  never  a  dactyl.    It  is  used  only  in  the  Alcmanian  strophe  (2724). 


THE  DACTYLIC  TRIMETER  CATALECTIC  (or  Lesser 
Arckilockian). 

2579.  This  verse  has  the  scheme : 

An  example  is : 

Arbori  I  busque  co  I  mae* 

(H.4,7,2). 

It  is  used  chiefly  in  the  First  Archilochian  Strophe  (see  2725).    Inform  it  is 
the  same  as  the  second  half  of  the  pentameter  (2570). 

2580.  These  verses  (2578,  2579)  are  often  called  Archilochian,  because  they  were 
first  used  by  the  Greek  poet  Archilochus. 


IAMBIC   RHYTHMS. 

2581.  These  are  ascending  rhythms  (2528)in  f  time.     The  fun- 
damental foot  is  the  Iambus  (w  _L),  for  which  its  metrical  equivalent 
the  tribrach  w  ^  w,  the  irrational  spondee  >  J_,  the  irrational  dactyl 
>  <Z/  v'  tne  cvc^c  anapaest  ww  J_,  or  the  proceleusmatic  w  £  w  is 
sometimes  substituted. 

2582.  The  Greek  poets  excluded  all  feet  except  the  iambus  and  tribrach, 
and  in  comedy  the  anapaest,  from  the  even  places  in  iambic  verse.     The 
Latin  poets  were  not  so  strict :  but  when  one  of  the  even  feet  was  formed  by 
a  word  or  a  word-ending,  they  did  not  usually  allow  the  foot  to  be  a  spondee 
or  an  anapaest,  but  required  it  to  be  an  iambus. 

467 


2583-2585-j     Appendix  (E.) :  Prosody. 


THE  IAMBIC  TRIMETER  OR  SENARIUS. 

2583.  The  IAMBIC  TRIMETER  is  the  verse  most  frequently 
used  by  the  Roman  dramatists.  It  consists  of  six  iambic  feet, 
or  three  iambic  dipodies.  The  ictus  on  the  second  thesis  of 
each  dipody  was  probably  weaker  than  that  upon  the  first  thesis. 
Some  ancient  authorities,  however,  held  that  the  ictus  on  the 
second  thesis  was  the  stronger.  The  last  foot  is  always  an  iam- 
bus. The  normal  scheme  is  therefore  : 

\J   J.    I   W  ^_   |    W   J.    |    W  -£-  I    W  _L  I    W  _i_ 

Some  prefer  (see  2529)  to  regard  this  verse  as  a  trochaic  trimeter  cata- 
lectic  with  anacrusis.  The  normal  scheme  will  then  be  : 


2584.  The  Latin  poets  differ  widely  in  their  treatment  of  the  Senarius, 
some  (especially  Plautus,  Terence,  and  the  other  early  dramatists)  handling 
it  with  great  freedom,  while  others  (especially  Phaedrus  and  Publilius  Syrus) 
conform  more  closely  to  Greek  models.  We  may  therefore  distinguish  two 
periods  : 


(A.)    Early  Period. 

2585.  Any  one  of  the  substitutions  enumerated  in  2581  is  admit- 
ted in  any  foot  except  the  last.     The  scheme  is  therefore : 


&  JL 

£  -i.     1 

£  j_ 

d  -±- 

I     e  J. 

w  w  w 

WWW      | 

V-'    N^    W 

WWW 

1      w  w  w 

^^  vy  vy 

^  W  W      1 

>    ^ 

!>  w  w 

1    l>   w  wl 

WW_L 

ww  _L-     1 

wJ_^ 

WW  _1_ 

I       ww_L 

WW  W    W 

ww  w  w  | 

1 

ww  w  w 

I  [ww  w  w] 

The  main  caesura  is  usually  penthemimeral  (2544) ;  but  it  is  sometimes 
hephthemimeral,  in  which  case  there  is  generally  a  secondary  caesura  in,  or 
diaeresis  after,  the  second  foot. 

The  following  passage  may  serve  to  show  the  rhythm : 

Ubi  ve"n|t(um)  ad  aejdis  II  e~st  |  Dromo  |  pultat  |  fores  ; 
anfis  qua£|dam  pro|dit ;  II  ha^c  |  ub(i)  ape|rit  6s|tium, 
continu(5)  |  hie  se  |  conig|cit  ||  in|tr(6),  ego  c6n)sequor; 
aniis  f6ri|bus  obldit  ||  p^s|sul(um),  ad  |  lanam  |  redit. 
Hie  sc!|ri  potu|it  ||  autj  nusqu(am)  ali|bl,  Clilnia, 
qu5  studi|6  viltam  ||  suam  I  t(e)  absen|t(e)  exelgerit, 
ubid(e)  in  |provi|s6st  ||  in|terven|tum  muli|eri,  &c. 

T.  Hau.  275. 

468 


Versification.                [2586-2592. 

wwZ     |    >Z 
ww^wXy  1     ^  ~I 

WW   _L        1      >_!_ 

l>l!  -L 

>II~L 
w  II  L 

vy  11    * 

W  _^- 

>•  w  w 

W    -i. 
WW_L 

>z 

w  _:_ 

W  -1. 

W  _i_ 

w  _i_ 

W  .JL. 
W  _I_ 

w  — 

2586.  (i.)  In  the  early  dramatists,   substitutions  are  very  numerous,  and  lines 
which  follow  the  normal  scheme  are  rare.     Substitutions  are  most  frequent  in  the  first 
foot. 

2587.  (2.)  Four  shorts  rarely  stand  in  succession  unless  they  belong  to  the  same 
foot.     Hence  a  dactyl  or  tribrach  is  seldom  followed  by  an  anapaest. 


2588.  (3.)  The  dactyl  and  proceleusmatic  are  rare  in  the  fifth  foot, 
celeusmatic  occurs  chiefly  in  the  first  foot. 


The  pro- 


2589.  (4.)  The  fifth  foot  is  very  often  a  spondee.     It  must  not  be  a  pure  iambus 
except  (a.)  when  the  line  ends  with  a  polysyllable  of  four  or  more  syllables  ;  (b.)  when 
it  ends  with  a  word  which  forms  a  Cretic  (2521)  ;  (<:.)  when  it  ends  with  an  iambic  word 
preceded  by  one  which  forms  a  Fourth  Paeon  (2521),  or  by  an  anapaestic  word  which 
is  itself  preceded  by  a  final  short  syllable  ;  (d.)  when  there  is  a  change  of  speakers 
before  the  last  foot;  {e.)  when  elision  occurs  in  the  fifth  or  sixth  foot. 

2590.  (5.)  The  main  caesura  is  rarely  preceded  by  a  monosyllable. 

2591.  (6.)  In  the  Senarius,  and  in  the  other  iambic  and  trochaic  verses  of  the 
early  dramatists,  a  resolved  arsis  or  thesis  is  usually  placed  so  that  its  first  syllable 
begins  a  word,  or  so  that  the  two  shorts  of  the  resolved  arsis  or  thesis  are  enclosed  by 
other  syllables  belonging  to  the  same  word.     Hence  a  dactylic  word  with  the  ictus  on 
the  penult  or  ultima  (e.  g.  tempdre)  rarely  occurs.     But  there  are  occasional  ex- 
ceptions to  the  rule,  especially  in  the  case  of  words  that  are  closely  connected  (e.  g.  a 
preposition  with  its  case). 

(B.)    Later  Period. 

2592.  Later  writers   conform  more  closely  to   Greek  usage,  but  differ 
from  one  another  in  the  degree  of  strictness  with  which  they  follow  it.     The 
general  scheme  is : 

w±        |w_^l^ll_L|w^_|dJ_    |  w_t. 
www      lwww|wllwwlwww|w'/w 


The  main  caesura  is  usually  the  penthemimeral  (2544).  The  hephthe- 
mimeral  sometimes  occurs,  but  usually  in  connection  with  the  penthemimeral, 
or  with  a  diaeresis  after  the  second  foot.  If  the  hephthemimeral  is  used 
without  either  of  these,  the  second  and  third  trochees  of  the  line  must 
form  one  word,  as  in 

ut  gaujdet  m|siti|va  ||  de|cerpins  |  pira. 

(H.  Epod.  2,  19.) 

469 


2593~26°°-]     Appendix  (E.) :  Prosody. 


2593.  (i.)  The  anapaest  is  rare  in  nearly  all  classical  writers;  Catullus  does  not 
admit  it  at  all,  and  Horace  only  five  times  in  all.     The  proceleusmatic  is  admitted  in 
the  first  foot  by  Seneca,  the  author  of  the  Octavia,  Phaedrus,  Publilius  Syrus  and 
Terentianus  Maurus;  other  writers  exclude  it  altogether.     Catullus  keeps  the  fifth 
foot  pure,  and  Horace  does  not  admit  the  tribrach  in  the  fifth  foot. 

2594.  (2.)  Catullus  (4  and  29),  Horace  (Epod.  16),  Vergil  (Cat.  3,  4,  8),  and  the 
authors  of  the  Priapla  sometimes  use  ihefure  iambic  trimeter,  without  resolutions  or 
substitutions. 

2595.  (3.)  Phaedrus  follows  in  part  the  earlier  usage,  admitting  the  spondee, 
dactyl,  and  anapaest,  in  every  foot  except  the  last.     The  dactyl  he  employs  chiefly  in 
the  first,  third,  and  fifth  feet,  the  anapaest  in  the  first  and  fifth.    The  proceleusmatic 
he  admits  only  in  the  first. 

2596.  The  rhythm  of  the  Senarius  may  be  illustrated  by  the  following 
lines: 

But  one  amid  the  throng  of  eager  listeners, 

A  sable  form  with  scornful  eye  and  look  averse, 

Out-stretched  a  lean  fore-finger  and  bespake  Haroun. 


THE  CHOLIAMBUS  (or  Season). 

2597.  The  CHOLIAMBUS  is  an  iambic  trimeter  in  which  a  trochee  has 
oeen  substituted  for  the  final  iambus.  The  penultimate  syllable  is  therefore 
long  instead  of  short.  The  caesura  is  generally  the  penthemimeral  (2544). 
If  it  is  hephthemimeral,  there  is  regularly  a  diaeresis  after  the  second  foot. 
The  scheme  is : 


>6  w      I  I   >v^  w  I  I 

f  I 

An  example  is : 

Fulse'|re  quonldam  ||  can|didi|  tibi  |  sSles. 

(Cat.  8,  3.) 

2598.  (i).  The  anacrustic  scheme  (see  2529)  of  the  choliambus  is  : 

^^  :    '  I  vv~    w  I  w~~w  w  I  v-Tw  w  I 

i.  e.  trochaic  trimeter  with  anacrusis  (2529),  syncope' (2541),  and  protraction  (2516). 

2599.  (2.)  Resolutions  and  substitutions  are  less  common  in  the  choliambus  than 
in  the  ordinary  trimeter.    No  monosyllable  except  est  is  admitted  at  the  end  of  the  line. 
The  tribrach  in  the  first  foot  is  rare,  and  the  fifth  foot  is  regularly  an  iambus. 

2600.  (3).  The  verse  is  named  Choliambus  (i.  e.  "lame"  or  "limping  iambus") 
or  Scazon  ("hobbler  ")  from  its  odd,  limping  movement.     It  is  sometimes  called  Hip- 
ponactean  from  its  inventor  Hipponax,  and  is  chiefly  used  to  produce  a  satiric  or 
ludicrous  effect.     It  was  introduced  into  Roman  poetry  by  Cn.  Mattius,  and  was  em- 
pWorj  by  Varro,  Catullus,  Persius,  Petronius,  Martial,  and  others. 

470 


Versification.  [2601-2605. 


THE  IAMBIC  TRIMETER  CATALECTIC. 

2601.  The  IAMBIC  TRIMETER  CATALECTIC  occurs  in  Horace  (1,4  and 
2,  18).  The  caesura  is  regularly  penthemimeral  (2544).  Resolutions  are 
not  admitted,  except  in  one  doubtful  case,  regumque  pueris  (2,  18,  34), 
where  pueris  may  be  read  (with  synizesis  ;  see  2499).  The  scheme  is  : 

e  j.  i  w_^  i  e  H  .1  1  w  -s-  1  w  IL  j. 


Examples  are  : 

MeS  I  renijdet  II  in  |  domo  |  lacd]nar. 

(H.  2,  18,  2.) 

v  JU  v/  .&.  I  v/  1  2:  i  v/.&.  I  w  it  .£. 

Seu  p6|scit  ajgna  sl|ve  ma  (lit  hae|do. 

>_Llw-2-l>lljLlw-l-lwLl_L. 

(H.  1,4,12.) 
(i.)  The  anacrustic  scheme  is  : 


i.  e.  trochaic  trimeter  catalectic  with  anacrusis  (2529),  syncope  (2541),  and  protraction 
(2516). 

2603.  (2.)  Horace  seems  to  have  changed  his  practice  with  reference  to  the  first 
foot.     In  i,  4  the  first  foot  is  a  spondee  in  nine  lines  out  of  ten;  in  2,  18,  it  is  a  spon- 
dee in  only  two  lines  out  of  twenty. 

THE  IAMBIC  TETRAMETER  ACATALECTIC  (or  Octonarius). 

2604.  This  verse  consists  of  four  iambic  dipodies,  or  eight  complete  iam- 
bic feet.     The  substitutions  enumerated  in  2581  are  admitted  in  the  first 
seven  feet;  but  the  last  foot  is  always  an  iambus.     The  principal  break  in 
the  line  is  usually  a  diaeresis  after  the  fourth  foot  (which  in  that  case  must 
be  a  pure  iambus),  or  a  caesura  after  the  arsis  of  the  fifth.   The  full  scheme  is : 

'  z  ^  i  e  -L 

wwwl^^^lwww  I  w  w  w  \  ^  \L>  \s 
>wwl>v^w|>Wwl>v^  I  >  w  w 
ww  J_  I  >->w_t_  I  ww  _L  I  ww_^  I  ww  _L 

*/W  V>  V-/I  WW  W  V_y|  WW  W    W  I  WW  W  W  I  WW  W  W 

2605.  The  following  lines  are  examples  of  this  metre  : 

EnTm  vllro,  Dalve,  nll|locist  $  segniti|ae  neque  I  soc6r|diae, 
quant(um)  in|telle|xi  mddo  |  senis  fll  sent^nltiam  |  de  nujptiis: 
quae  si|non  ajstu  pro|viden|tur  ||  m(e)aut|erum  |  pessum  |  dabunt. 

(T.  Andr.  206.) 


I  w^-ft 
lv/JL.I>l 
471 


2606-2611.]     Appendix  (E>):  Prosody. 


2606.  Compare  in  English : 

He  smote  the  rock,  and  forth  a  tide  of  crystal  waters  streamed  amain ; 
Up  sprang  the  flowrets  from  the  ground,  and  Nature  smiled  o'er  all  the 
plain. 

2607.  (i.)  The  iambic  octonarius  is  chiefly  a  comic  verse.      Terence  has  about 
eight  hundred  lines  in  this  measure,  Plautus  only  about  three  hundred,  Varro  a  few. 

2608.  (2. )  Substitutions  are  much  less  common  than  in  the  senarius,  especially  in 
the  even  feet. 


2609.  (3.)  When  there  is  a  diaeresis  after  the  fourth  foot,  so  that  the  line  is  divided 
into  two  equal  halves,  the  verse  is  asynartetic  (2535).  There  seems,  however,  to  be  no 
certain  instance  of  hiatus  in  the  diaeresis  in  the  Terentian  plays. 


IAMBIC  SEPTENARIUS. 

(A.)  Early  Usage. 

2610.  The  IAMBIC  SEPTENARIUS  consists  of  seven  and  a  half 
iambic  feet.  In  any  of  the  complete  feet  the  substitutes  mentioned  in 
2581  are  admitted.  There  is  usually  a  diaeresis  after  the  fourth  foot, 
which  in  that  case  must  be  a  pure  iambus.  If  there  is  not  such  a 
diaeresis,  there  is  generally  a  caesura  after  the  arsis  of  the  fifth  foot. 
The  scheme  of  substitution  is  :  — 


i  e_L.  i 

I 


w  v/ 


_L.  I  w^-L  I  ww_i.  I  ww_L   I 

Iwwwwlwwwwlwwvi/wl 


±  lex 


W    W    N^ 


I 

wl 


2611.  Examples  of  the  Septenarius  are  the  lines: 

Spera|bit  sum|ptum  sibi  |  senex  ||  leva|t(um)  ess(e)  halrunc  abi|tu: 
n(e)    ill(e)   haud  |  scit   hoc  |  paulum  |  lucri  ||    quant(um)    e|i  dalmn(i) 

adpdrltet. 
Tu  n6s|cies  I  quod  scis,  I  Dromo,  ||  si  sapiles.     Mu|tum  di|ces. 

(T.  Hau.  746.) 


Compare  in  English  : 

*  Now  who  be  ye  would  cross  Lochgyle,  this  dark  and  stormy  water  ?  " 

(Campbell.) 
472 


Versification.  [261 2-2  617. 


2612.  (i.)  The  Iambic  Septenarius  of  the  early  comedy  is  not  properly  a  "tetra- 
meter catalectic  "  like  the  Greek,  for  the  penultimate  syllable  is  sometimes  resolved, 
which  is  never  the  case  in  the  Greek  catalectic  tetrameter.     For  the  same  reason  the 
ordinary  anacrustic  (2529)  scheme  of  the  early  Septenarius  is  erroneous  ;  for  a  triseme 
cannot  be  resolved. 

2613.  (2.)  When  there  is  a  diaeresis  after  the  fourth  foot,  the  verse  is  asynartetic 
(see  2535). 

2614.  (3.)  The  Septenarius  seems  not  to  have  been  used  in  tragedy. 

(B.)  Later  Usage. 

2615.  Varro  and  Catullus  (25)  employ  a  form  of  the  Septenarius 
which  conforms  more  closely  to  Greek  models,  keeping  the  arses  of 
the  even  feet  pure  and  rarely  admitting  resolutions.     There  is  regu- 
larly a  diaeresis  after  the  fourth  foot.     The  scheme  is  :  — 


or  anacrustically  (2529) 


2616.  Catullus  does  not  admit  resolutions  at  all,  save  in  one  very  doubtful  case 
(25,  5).  Varro  seems  to  admit  them  in  the  first  foot  only. 

IAMBIC  DIMETER  ACATALECTIC  (or  Quaternarius). 

2,617.  The  IAMBIC  DIMETER  ACATALECTIC  consists  of  two  complete 
iambic  dipodies  or  four  iambic  feet.  In  the  first  three  feet  the  tribrach, 
irrational  spondee,  irrational  dactyl  and  cyclic  anapaest  are  admitted  ;  but 
the  proceleusmatic  is  very  rare,  except  in  the  first  foot  of  the  Versus  Reizi- 
anus  (2625),  (of  which  a  Quaternarius  forms  the  first  colon).  The  scheme 
for  substitution  is  : 


\J    W    \J    I 


ww  _L  I     ww  _i. 
[ww  w  w]  I  [ww  w  w] 


ww 


>  w    I 

'    W     I 

_L    I 


WW  W  WJ 


Examples  are : 

Rogitalre  quasi  |  diffici|le  sit 
ww_L|www|>ww|w-t.  (T.  Eu.  209). 

Ast  6go  |  vicislsim  rf|ser5 
>Wwlw^.|>_L|w^.  (H.  Epod.  15,  24). 

Perunlxit  hoc  |  lafsonem 

w-L  I  w^_  |  w_L  |  w-i.  (H.  Epod.  3, 12). 

473 


2618-2625.]     Appendix  (E.):  Prosody. 


2618.  (i.)  The  verse  may  also  be  regarded  as  a  trochaic  dimeter  catalectic  with 
anacrusis  (2529),  with  the  normal  scheme: 


2619.  (2.)  Horace  admits  resolutions  only  four  times,  the  tribrach  once  in  the 
second  foot  and  the  dactyl  thrice  in  the  first. 

2620.  (3.)  Plautus  (except  in  a  few  instances),  Terence,  and  Horace  employ  the 
dimeter  only  as  a  dausula  (2536)  to  longer  verses.    Petronius,  Seneca,  and  Prudentius 
use  it  to  form  systems  (2547)  ;  but  it  is  rarely  so  employed  by  earlier  writers. 

THE  IAMBIC  DIMETER  CATALECTIC  (or  Ternarius). 

2621.  This  is  like  the  preceding  verse,  except  that  the  last  foot  is  incom- 
plete.   Examples  are  :  — 

Nequ(e)  id  |  perspicejre  quilvi 

w-L  |  >  vy  w  |  w  J_  _•_  (PI.  Cap.  784). 

Date;  m6x  |  eg(o)  hue  |  rev6r|tor 


.  iL  _L.  (T.  Andr.  485). 

2622.  (i.)  The  verse  may  also  be  regarded  as  a  syncopated  catalectic  trochaic 
dimeter  with  anacrusis  (2529).    The  normal  scheme  will  then  be :  — 


2623.  (2.)  Plautus  and  Terence  use  this  verse  as  a  dausula  (2536).    Petronius  is 
the  first  who  employs  it  to  form  systems  (2547). 

OTHER  IAMBIC  VERSES. 

2624.  Other  short  iambic  verses,   the   acatalectic   dipody   (e.  g.  eg(o) 
Ulum  |  fame,  |  eg(o)  Ilium  |  siti,  PL  Cas.  153),  and  the  catalectic  tripody 
(e.g.  indps  |  am£|tor,  PL  Tri.  256)  sometimes  occur,  but  are  rare. 

THE  VERSUS  REIZIANUS. 

2625.  This  is  a  composite  verse,  consisting  of  two  cola,  an  iambic  di- 
meter acatalectic  and  an  iambic  tripody  catalectic.     The  scheme  is  there- 
fore, 


>^ 


'] 


-ft      SJ- 


Examples  are:  — 

Sed  in  ae"|dibus  |  quid  tibi  I  meis  fl  n(am)  erat  I  nego|ti 
m(e)  abs6n|te,  nis(i)  e|go  ius|seram  ?  4^  volo  sci|re.     Tac(e) 
Quia  vejnimus  coc|t(um)  ad  nulptias.  44:  Quid  to,  |  malum,  cu|ras 

(PI.  Aul.  427.) 

474 


Versification.  [2626-2630. 


2626.  The  nature  of  the  second  colon  of  this  verse  has  long  been  disputed.     Reiz 
and  Christ  treat  it  substantially  as  above  ;   Sttidemund  regards  it  as  a  syncopated 
iambic  dimeter  catalectic  (w  _  \j  I  __  w  ),  Spengel  and  Gleditsch  as  anapaestic, 
Leo  as  logaoedic,  Klotz  as  sometimes  logaoedic  and  sometimes  anapaestic  1    The  view 
of  Christ  (Metric,  p.  348)  seems,  on  the  whole,  the  most  reasonable,  though  the  ques- 
tion cannot  be  said  to  be  fully  decided.     The  tribrach  is  rare  in  the  second  colon,  but 
there  seems  to  be  a  case  in  Plautus,  R.  675  b. 

2627.  For  other  iambic  verses  and  combinations  of  verses,  see  special  editions  of 
the  dramatists. 

TROCHAIC   RHYTHMS. 

2628.  These  are  descending  rhythms  in  f  time.     The  fundamental  foot 
is  the  trochee  J_  \^,  for  which  its  metrical  equivalent  the  tribrach  ^/  w  w 
the  irrational  spondee  _L  >,  the  cyclic  dactyl  J_  w^,  the  irrational  ana- 
paest   ^  v  >,  and  (rarely)  the  proceleusmatic   £  w  vyw,  are  sometimes 
substituted. 

THE  TROCHAIC  TETRAMETER  CATALECTIC  (or  Septenarius). 

2629.  The  TROCHAIC  TETRAMETER  CATALECTIC  is,  next  to  the 
iambic  trimeter,  the  verse  most  frequently  used  by  the  early  Roman 
dramatists.     It   consists  of  seven  and  a  half  trochaic  feet,  or  four 
trochaic  dipodies  (the  last  one  being  incomplete).     The  ictus  on  the 
second  thesis  of  each  dipody  was  probably  weaker  than  that  on  the 
first  thesis.     The  normal  scheme  is  :  — 


As  in  the  case  of  the  senarius,  we  may  distinguish  two  periods  in  the 
usage:  — 

(A.)   Early  Period. 

2630.  The  tribrach  is  admitted  in  any  of  the  complete  feet,  and  the 
irrational  spondee,  cyclic  dactyl,  and  irrational  anapaest  in  any  of  the  first 
six  feet.  Terence  does  not  admit  the  proceleusmatic  in  the  Septenarius  (nor 
in  any  other  kind  of  trochaic  verse),  but  Plautus  admits  it  in  the  first  foot. 
The  seventh  foot  of  the  Septenarius  is  usually  a  trochee,  but  the  tribrach 
sometimes  occurs  there.  The  principal  break  in  the  line  is  usually  a  diae- 
resis after  the  fourth  foot  (which  in  that  case  must  not  be  a  dactyl),  often 
accompanied  by  a  secondary  diaeresis  after  the  second  foot.  Sometimes, 
however,  the  principal  break  is  a  diaeresis  after  the  fifth  foot,  in  which  case 
there  is  generally  a  secondary  diaeresis  after  the  third  foot  or  a  caesura  in 
the  fourth.  The  full  scheme  of  substitutions  is  :  — 

j.e  I  .±.e  I  jLe  i  _i.e  i  -ie   i  .s-e  i  JL^  I^A 


475 


2631-2636.]      Appendix  (E.):  Prosody. 


The  following  lines  are  examples  of  the  Septenarius :  — 

S6quere  |  sis,  erfim  |  qui  luldificas  #  dictis  |  deli|ranti|bus 
qul  quoni(am)  |  erus  ^quod  |  impe|ravit  ^t  n6gle|xisti  |  p6rse|qul, 
nunc  ve|nis  eti(am)  |  ultr(6)  in|risum  ^  d6minum|:  quae  neque  j  ffe|ri 
pdssunt  |  neaue  fanjd(o)  timqu(am)  ac|cepit  $  quisquam  |  prefers,  | 
carnuifex.  (PI.  Am.  585.) 

^  w  wl^-ww  |JL>|  c/w>#  J->    |^>|-Lw|^_A 
Lw       -i_>         JL>        _L.>     J_w^_A 


2631.  (i.)  When  there  is  a  diaeresis  after  the  fourth  foot,  the  verse  is  asynartetic 
(2535).     In  Plautus  hiatus  in  the  diaeresis  is  not  rare  ;  but  there  seems  to  be  no  cer- 
tain instance  of  it  in  Terence  (see  Ph.  528,  Ad.  697). 

2632.  (2.)  An  anapaest  is  not  allowed  to  follow  a  dactyl. 

2633.  (3.)  The  seventh  foot  is  usually  a  trochee ;  rarely  a  tribrach  or  dactyl.    The 
tribrach  and  dactyl  are  seldom  found  in  the  fourth  foot. 

(B.)  Later  Usage. 

2634.  The  later  and  stricter  form  of  the  Septenarius  keeps  the  arses  of 
the  odd  feet  pure,  and  regularly  shows  a  diaeresis  after  the  fourth  foot. 

Resolutions  occur,  but  are  far  less  common  than  in  the  earlier  form  of  the 
verse.  The  strict  form  of  the  Septenarius  is  found  in  Varro,  Seneca,  and 
often  in  late  poets  (as  Ausonius,  Prudentius,  &c.). 

2635.  The  rhythm  of  the  Septenarius  may  be  illustrated  by  this  line  :  — 
"  Comrades,  leave  me  here  a  little,  while  as  yet  'tis  early  morn." 

(Tennyson.) 

THE  TROCHAIC  TETRAMETER  ACATALECTIC  (or 

Octonarius). 

2636.  The  TROCHAIC  TETRAMETER  ACATALECTIC  is  chiefly  confined  to 
the  lyrical  portions  of  the  early  comedy.    It  consists  of  four  complete  trochaic 
dipodies  or  eight  trochaic  feet.     The  tribrach,  irrational  spondee,  irrational 
anapaest  and  cyclic  dactyl  may  stand  in  any  foot  save  the  last.    The  last  foot 
is  regularly  a  trochee  or  a  tribrach,  though  (the  last  syllable  being  syllaba 
anceps,  2533)  an  apparent  spondee  or  anapaest,  but  not  a  dactyl,  may  arise. 
The  principal  break  in  the  line  is  regularly  a  diaeresis  after  the  fourth  foot 
(which  in  that  case  must  not  be  a  dactyl).     Occasionally,  however,  there  is 
instead  a  caesura  in  the  fourth  or  fifth  foot.     The  scheme  is :  — 


JL  WW  I   _2_  WW  I      J-  WW    I  -i_   WW  I       —  WW     I   -^ 

|vi/w>lv^ 
476 


Versification.  [2637—2643 


Example: — 

Cinse|o.  Sedlheiis  tu.|    Quid  vis  Fit  C5nsen  |  posse  |  m(e)  6ffir|mare? 

(T.  Eu.  217). 


Compare  in  English  :  — 

Over  stream  and  mount  and  valley  sweeps  the  merry,  careless  rover, 

Toying  with  the  fragrant  blossoms,  beating  down  the  heads  of  clover. 

2637.  (i.)  When  there  is  a  diaeresis  after  the  fourth  foot,  the  verse  is  asynartetic 

2638.  (2.)  The  Octonarius  is  essentially  a  lyric  metre,  and  is  much  less  common 
than  the  Septenarius. 

THE  TROCHAIC  TETRAMETER  CLAUDUS  (or  Season). 

2639.  This  verse  is  a  trochaic  tetrameter  acatalectic,  with  syncope  and 
protraction  in  the  seventh  foot.    The  normal  scheme  is : 

JL  w  I  j_  w  IJ.  w  I  j_wl_L  w  I  .i.  w  I  iL    |-Lw 

An  example  is:— 

Nee  co  ruscus  |  imber  |  alto  II  niibi'lo  ca|de'ns  |  mtiltus 

JL  w  I  j.  w  I  _L  w  I  _^>#_L  w  I  ^.  w  IL!    I -L  w 

(Varro,  Sat.fr.  557  Buech.). 

2640.  (i.)  Substitutions  are  much  rarer  in  this  verse  than  in  the  ordinary  trochaic 
octonarius. 

2641.  (2.)  The  Scazon  was  introduced  among  the  Greeks  by  Hipponax,  whence 
it  is  sometimes  called  the  Hipponactean.    Varro  seems  to  be  the  only  Roman  poet 
who  uses  it. 

THE  NINE-SYLLABLED  ALCAIC. 

2642.  This  verse  consists  of  two  complete  trochaic  dipodies,  with  ana- 
crusis.   The  second  foot  is  always  an  irrational  spondee.  The  scheme  is :  — 


An  example  is  :— 

Sil|vae*  lalboranjtgs  ge|luque. 

(H.1,9,3-) 

This  verse  occurs  only  in  Horace,  where  it  forms  the  third  line  of  the  Alcaic 
Strophe  (see  2736), 

THE  TROCHAIC  DIMETER  ACATALECTIC  (or  Quaternarius). 

2643.  This  verse  consists  of  two  complete  trochaic  dipodies.    It  is  very  rare,  but 
there  are  probably  a  few  instances  of  it  in  Plautus,  e.  g.  Per.  31 :  — 

Basili|c(6)  accipilere  |  victu 
I  -L.  ww  I  JL  \j  I  .*•  v/ 

477 


2644-2648.]      Appendix  (E.}:  Prosody. 


THE  TROCHAIC  DIMETER  CATALECTIC  (or  Ternarius). 

2644.  This  consists  of  two  trochaic  dipodies,  the  second  being  incomplete. 
It  occurs  in  the  early  dramatists  and  in  Horace.  The  scheme  for  Plautus 
and  Terence  is  :  — 

-L  e  I  ^   d  I    JL   w    1-t.A 

w  w  wl  o  w  w  l[o  w  v/JI 
.£.  ww  I  -L.  ww  1 


The  Horatian  scheme  is  :  — 

JLw|.^-\k/|-Lvy|.£.A 

Examples  are:  — 

Aut  unjd(e)  auxilium  pe|  tarn 

(T.  /%.  729). 

Non  e|bur  ne|qu(e)  atirejum 

(H.  2,  18,  i). 

2645.  (i.)  This  is  sometimes  called  the  Euripidean  verse,  from  its  use  by  Eurip- 
ides.    The  tribrach  in  the  third  foot  is  rare,  and  is  not  found  in  Terence.     Horace 
keeps  all  the  feet  pure. 

2646.  (2.)  Plautus  and  Terence  often  use  this  verse  between  trochaic  tetrameters, 
but  sometimes  employ  several  Ternarii  in  succession,  as  in  Plaut.  E.  3-6,  Cas. 
953-6,  /V.  211-13. 

THE  TROCHAIC  TRIPODY  ACATALECTIC. 

2647.  This  verse  is  confined  to  the  early  drama,  where  it  is  employed  as 
kdausula  (2536),  especially  with  Cretics.     It  consists  of  three  complete 
trochaic  feet.     The  same  substitutions  are  admitted  in  every  foot  that  are 
allowed  in  the  first  two  feet  of  the  Ternarius  (2644).     An  example  is  :  — 

Hati  bonum  |  tene5  |  s6rvom 

JLwwl  vy  w  >  I  J-  w 

(PI.  Most.  721). 
This  verse  is  sometimes  called  the  Ithyphallic. 

THE  TROCHAIC  TRIPODY  CATALECTIC. 

2648.  This  verse  is  employed  by  the  early  dramatists,  usually  either  as  a 
dausula  (2536)  or  in  groups  of  two  lines  each.     Terence  generally  uses  it  in 
the  former  way,  Plautus  in  the  latter.    The  scheme  of  substitutions  is  :  — 

L.  S  I-L  A 


478 


Versification.  [2649-2655. 


Example:— 

Qu(i)  impi|gerfu|i 

_Lv>  |_i-w|-LA 

(PL  JP.92S). 

In  one  instance  (-ff.  924  ff.)  Plautus  has  six  catalectic  tripodies  in  succession. 

OTHER  TROCHAIC  VERSES. 

2649.  The  Trochaic  Monometer  Acatalectic  is  sometimes  used  by  Plautus  as  a 
clausula  (2536)  to  Cretic  tetrameters.   ,It  consists  of  one  complete  trochaic  dipody, 
e.  g.  nimis  injepta'  s,  R.  681.    iure  inliustas,  Am.  247.    Terence  uses  the 
catalectic  monometer  twice  (Eu.   292,  Ph.  485)  at  the  beginning  of  a  scene,  e.  g. 
Dori|6.  Ph.  485.     Plautus  has  a  few  other  trochaic  verses  and  combinations  of 
verses,  for  which  see  special  editions  of  his  plays. 

LOGAOEDIC   RHYTHMS. 

2650.  Logaoedic  verse  consists  of  dactyls  and  trochees  combined 
in  the  same  metrical  series.     The  dactyls  are  "cyclic"  (see  2523), 
occupying  approximately  the  time  of  trochees,  and  hence  the  verse 
moves  in  f  time.     Except  in  the  "  Lesser  Alcaic  "  verse  (2663),  only 
one  dactyl  may  stand  in  a  single  series  ;  and  a  dactyl  must  not  occupy 
the  last  place  in  a  line. 

2651.  (i.)  The  name  "logaoedic"  (Gr.  \oyaoi8iit6s,  from  \6yos,  speech, 
prose,  and  dotS^j,  song)  may  refer  to  the  apparent  change  of  rhythm  (due  to 
the  mixture  of  dactyls  and  trochees),  in  which  logaoedic  verse  resembles 
prose  ;  but  this  is  a  disputed  point. 

2652.  (2.)  In  the  logaoedic  verses  of   Horace,  an   irrational  spondee 
almost  always  takes  the  place  of  a  trochee  before  the  first  dactyl  ;  and  if  an 
apparent  choriambus  (_L  ww  |  |J_;  see  2521)  is  followed  by  another  appa- 
rent choriambus  in  the  same  verse,  the  two  are  regularly  separated  by 
a  caesura.    These  rules  are  not  observed  by  Catullus. 

2653-  (3-)  Anacrusis   (2529)   and  syncope  (2541)  are  very  common  in 
logaoedic  verse. 

2654.  The  following  are  the  principal  logaoedic  rhythms  :  — 

DIPODY. 

THE  ADONIC. 

2655.  This  is  a  logaoedic  dipody,  with  the  scheme:— 


Examples  are:— 

T6rruit  |  tirbem  (H.  i,  2,  4). 

Rara  iu|v6ntus  (H.  i,  2,  24). 

479 


2656-2659-]     Appendix  {E.}:  Prosody. 

2656.  (i.)  Some  regard  the  Adonic  as  a  syncopated  catalectic  tripody  : 

J-ww|Ll|  JLA 

2657.  (2.)  A  Latin  Adonic  should  consist  of  a  disyllable  -f  a  trisyllable,  or  the 
reverse.    This  rule  did  not  hold  in  Greek,  where  such  lines  occur  as  o>  TW  "ASioj/n/. 
Elision  is  not  allowed  in  the  Latin  Adonic.     Late  Latin  poets  (like  Terentianus) 
sometimes  employ  the  Adonic  in  stichic  series  (2546). 

TRIPODIES. 
THE  ARISTOPHANIC. 

2658.  This  is  a  logaoedic  tripody  acatalectic,  with  a  dactyl  in  the  first 
place.    The  scheme  is  therefore  :  — 

.1  ww  |  _L  w  |  .1  w 
There  is  no  fixed  caesura.    Examples  are  :  — 

Quid  latet  |  tit  malrmae 

(H.i,8,i3). 

Funera  |  n5  vijnlis 

(H.i,8,is). 

Some  authorities  write  the  scheme  as: 

jLww|JLw|LL     JJ.A 

i  e.  a  syncopated  logaoedic  tetrapody  catalectic. 

THE  PHERECRATEAN  (or  Pherecratic). 

2659.  This  verse  is  used  by  Catullus  (34,  61),  and  by  Horace  (as  the 
third  line  of  the  Third  Asclepiadean  Strophe  :  see  2733).     It  is  a  logaoedic 
tripody,  with  the  dactyl  in  the  second  place.    The  scheme  is  :— 


W-JI 

are  admi 
is  very  ra 

GratS,  |  Ptfrrha,  sub  |  antr5 


The  trochee  and  iambus  are  admitted  in  the  first  foot  by  Catullus,  but  not 
by  Horace.  The  iambus  is  very  rare.  There  is  no  fixed  caesura.  Examples 
are:  — 


(H.  i,  5,  3). 

With  initial  trochee  :  Lutejumve  pa  |  paver 

(Cat.  61,  195). 

With  initial  iambus  :  Puel|lae*que  cajnamus 

(Cat.  34,  4)- 
480 


Versifica  tion.  [2660-2663. 


Some  authorities  prefer  to  regard  the  Pherecratean  as  a  syncopated  logaoedic 
tetrapody  catalectic,  with  the  scheme:  — 

Uw]| 

_L>  |J.ww|  Li  |±A 

U-JI 

TETRAPODIES. 
THE  GLYCONIC. 

2660.  This  verse  is  used  by  Catullus  (34,  61),  by  Horace  (in  the  First, 
Second,  and  Third  Asclepiadean  Strophes:  see  2731,  2732,  2733),  and  by 
Seneca  and  other  later  writers.  It  is  a  logaoedic  tetrapody  catalectic,  with  a 
dactyl  in  the  second  place.  The  scheme  is  :  — 


ti-ll 

The  trochee  and  iambus  in  the  first  foot  occur  in  Catullus,  but  not  in  Horace 
(except  in  the  doubtful  case,  i,  15,  36).  There  is  generally  a  trithemimeral 
caesura;  more  rarely  one  in  the  arsis  of  the  second  foot.  Examples  are:  — 

Que"m  mor|tis  ||  timujit  grajdtim 

(H.  i,  3,  17). 

With  initial  trochee  :  M6nti[tim  ||  domi|n(a)  tit  fojres 

(Cat.  34,  9). 

With  initial  iambus:  Piiel|l(ae)  e~t  II  puelr(I)  inte|gri 

•(Cat.  34,  2). 

2661.  (i.)  This  verse  in  composition  with  the  Pherecratean  forms  the  Priafean 
(2674). 

2662.  (2.)  In  admitting  the  trochee  and  iambus  in  the  first  foot,  Catullus  follows 
Greek  models,  while  Horace  adheres  to  the  stricter  Roman  usage,  as  laid  down  by  the 
grammarians  of  his  own  day.    Seneca  observes  the  same  rule  as  Horace,  but  some  of 
the  later  writers  (e.  g.  Terentianus)  revert  to  the  earlier  and  freer  usage. 

THE  LESSER  (or  DECASYLLABIC)  ALCAIC. 

2663.  This  verse  is  a  logaoedic  tetrapody  acatalectic,  with  dactyls  in  the 
first  and  second  places.     The  scheme  is  :  — 


There  is  no  fixed  caesura,  though  there  is  frequently  a  break  after  the  thesis, 
or  in  the  arsis,  of  the  second  foot.     Examples  are  :  — 

Flumina  |  constite|rint  a[cut5 

(H.i,  9,  4). 
Mbntibus  |  6t  Tibelrim  rejverti 

(H.  i,  29,  12). 
31  481 


2664-2666.]     Appendix  (£.):  Prosody. 

PENTAPODIES. 
THE  PHAL AEGEAN  (or  Hendecasy  liable). 

2664.  This  verse  is  a  logaoedic  pentapody  with  the  dactyl  in  the  seconc 
place.  The  Greek  poets  admitted  the  trochee  and  iambus,  as  well  as  the 
spondee,  in  the  first  foot,  and  Catullus  followed  their  example ;  but  in  Petro- 
nius,  Martial,  and  the  Pridpea  the  first  foot  is  always  a  spondee,  and  in  later 
writers  nearly  always.  Horace  does  not  use  the  Phalaecean.  There  is  no 
fixed  caesura,  though  the  penthemimeral  is  often  found.  The  scheme  is:— 


Examples  are:  — 

Cuius  |  vis  fie;rili; belle  |  munus 

(Mart.  3,  2,  i). 

With  initial  trochee:  Dg  di|e  faci  tis  me  i  so | dales 

(Cat.  47,  6). 

With  initial  iambus:  Agit  |  pessimus  |  omnijum  pojeta 

(Cat.  49,  5). 
Compare  in  English :  — 

"  Look,  I  come  to  the  test,  a  tiny  poem 
All  composed  in  a  metre  of  Catullus/' 

(Tennyson.) 

2665.  The  Phalaecean  is  a  favourite  metre  in  epigrams.     It  was  used  by  Sappno, 
Phalaecus  (from  whom  it  took  its  name),  and  other  Greek  poets,  and  was  introduced 
into  Roman  poetry  by  Laevius  and  Varro.     It  is  a  favourite  metre  with  Catullus,  and 
is  found  in  the  fragments  of  Cinna,  Cornificius  and  Bibaculus,  in  the  Priafea,  in 
Petronius,  Statius,  Martial,  &c.     In  Catullus  55,  a  spondee  is  often  employed  instead 
of  the  dactyl,  the  two  kinds  of  feet  alternating  in  the  latter  verses  of  the  poem ;  but 
this  innovation  seems  not  to  have  found  favour. 

THE  LESSER  SAPPHIC. 

2666.  This  verse  is  a  logaoedic  pentapody  acatalectic,  with  the  dactyl  in 
the  third  place.    The  scheme  is :  — 

The  trochee  in  the  second  foot  was  admitted  by  Alcaeus  and  Sappho,  and 
occurs  in  Catullus,  but  not  in  Horace.  In  Horace  the  caesura  regularly 
falls  after  the  thesis,  or  (less  frequently)  in  the  arsis,  of  the  dactyl ;  but  in 
Catullus,  as  in  Sappho  and  Alcaeus,  it  has  no  fixed  position.  Examples  of 
this  verse  are :  — 

With  masculine  caesura:  lam  sajtis  terjris  ||  nivis  |  atque  |  dirae 

(H.  I,  2,  I). 

482 


Versification.  [2667-2670, 


With  feminine  caesura:  PhoeMbe  |  silva|rtimque  ||  po|tens  Dijana 

(H.  C.  S.  i). 

With  trochee  in  second  foot:  Seti  Sa|cis  sa|gittife|rosve  |  ParthSs 

(Cat.  11,6). 

THE  GREATER  (or  HENDECASYLLABIC)  ALCAIC. 

2667.  This  verse  is  a  logaoedic  pentapody  catalectic,  with  anacrusis  and 
with  the  dactyl  in  the  third  foot.    The  scheme  is  :  — 


There  is  nearly  always  a  diaeresis  after  the  second  foot.    Examples  are  :«— 

O|m§tre  |  ptilchra  ft  fi'lia  |  piilchri|6r 

(H.  i,  16,  1). 

Vi|des  ut  |  alta  ft  st<St  nive  |  candi  |  dtim 

(H.  1,9,1). 

2668.  Alcaeus  admitted  a  trochee  in  the  second  foot,  and  allowed  the  anacrusis  to 
be  either  long  or  short  ;  but  Horace  admitted  only  the  spondee  in  the  second  foot,  and 
usually  (in  Bk.  4  always)  employed  a  long  anacrusis.     Horace  also  differed  from  his 
predecessor  in  assigning  a  fixed  place  to  the  caesura,  which  in  Alcaeus  has  no  regular 
position. 

COMPOSITE   LOGAOEDIC    VERSES. 
THE  LESSER  ASCLEPIADEAN. 

2669.  This  is  a  composite  verse,  consisting  of  two  series,  a  syncopated 
logaoedic  tripody  4-  a  logaoedic  tripody  catalectic.     There  is  regularly  a 
diaeresis  between  the  two  series.    The  scheme  is  :  — 


Examples  are  :—  - 

Ma6ce|n5s  ata|vis  ft  4dite|  rSgi|btSs 

(H.i,i,il. 
Quis  d6|sideri|5  #  sit  pudor  |  atit  mo|dtis 

(H.  I,  24,  1). 

THE  GREATER  ASCLEPIADEAN. 

2670.  This  is  a  composite  verse,  consisting  of  three  series.  It  differs  from 
the  preceding  (2669)  in  having  a  syncopated  logaoedic  dipody  (  J_ww  I  L!) 
inserted  between  the  two  tripodies.  The  three  series  are  regularly  separated 
by  diaeresis.  The  scheme  is  therefore  :  — 


Examples  are  :  — 

NQllaml,  Va're,  safer!  #  vlte  pri|6s  #  slveris  |  arbojr^m 
Circa  |  mfte  so|liim  ft  Tiburis  |  6t  ft  mo^nia  |  C§ti|lf.  ) 

(H.  i,  18,  1-2). 

483 


2671-2676.]     Appendix  (E.):  Prosody. 


THE  GREATER  SAPPHIC. 

2671.  This  is  a  composite  verse,  consisting  of  a  syncopated  logaoedic 
tetrapody  -f  a  syncopated  logaoedic  tetrapody  catalectic.    There  is  regularly 
a  diaeresis  between  the  two  series,  and  a  caesura  after  the  thesis  of  the  firbt 
dactyl.     The  scheme  is  :  — 

JLw|JL>|_Ulww|i£-    tt-LwwIJ-wliL    |J.A 

An  example  is  :  — 

Tg  de|6s  5|rS  ||  Sybalrin^cdr  prope|ris  a|man|d6 

(H.  i,  8,  2). 

2672.  (i.)  The  second  series  has  the  same  form  as  the  Aristophanic,  if  the  latter 
be  written  as  a  tetrapody  (see  2658  ad  Jin.). 

2673.  (2-)  Horace  (i,  8)  is  the  only  Latin  poet  who  makes  use  of  the  Greater 
Sapphic.     It  seems  to  be  an  imitation  of  the  Greek  Sapphic  :  — 

-LwwiLZ.    |±ww|    iL  |JLww|JL  w  |  il    |_LA,e.g. 

SeCre  viv  a&pai  Xaptres  Ka\\tKO/j.oi  re  Mo?<TCU 
but  if  so,  the  imitation  is  not  exact. 

THE  PRIAPEAN. 

2674.  This  verse  is  employed  by  Catullus  (17)  and  in  the  Pridpea  (86). 
It  consists  of  a  syncopated  logaoedic  tetrapody  +  a  syncopated  logaoedic 
tetrapody  catalectic.     There  is  regularly  a  diaeresis  between  the  two  parts, 
but  hiatus  and  syllaba  anceps  are  not  allowed  at  the  end  of  the  first  series. 
The  scheme  is  :  — 


Examples  are  :  — 

6  Co|l6nia  |  quae*  cu|p!s  It  ponte  |  ludere  1  16n|g6 

(Cat.  17,  i). 
Htinc  lu|ciim  tibi  |  dedi|c6  it  c6nse|croque  Pri|a|p6. 

(Cat.  Fr.). 

The  first  series  has  the  same  form  as  the  Glyconic  (2660),  and  the  second  series 
has  the  same  form  as  the  Pherecratean,  if  the  latter  be  written  as  a  tetrapody  (see 
2659  ad  Jin.). 

DACTYLO-TROCHAIC  RHYTHMS. 

2675.  DACTYLO-TROCHAIC  verse,  like  logaoedic,  is  composed  of 
dactyls  and  trochees  ;  but  whereas  in  logaoedic  verse  the  dactyls  and 
trochees  occur  within  the  same  metrical  series,  in  dactylo-trochaic  they 
always  form  separate  series.    Hence  dactylo-trochaic  verses  are  always 
composite,  consisting  of  two  or  more  series  in  combination. 

2676.  It  is  uncertain  whether  the  dactyls  in  dactylo-trochaic  verse  were  cyclic 
(2523)  or  whether  there  was  a  change  of  time  in  the  middle  of  the  verse. 

484 


Versification.  [2677-2682. 


THE  GREATER  ARCHILOCHIAN. 

2677.  This  verse  is  composed  of  a  dactylic  tetrameter  acatalectic  +  a 
trochaic  tripody.     There  is  regularly  a  diaeresis  after  the  first  colon,  and  a 
caesura  after  the  third  thesis.    The  fourth  foot  is  always  a  pure  dactyl.    The 
third  foot  is  very  often  a  spondee.     The  scheme  is  :  — 

.1  U-O  I -L  vTw  I    ±11  w-w|jLw^#±wi±w|J-W 
An  example  is  :  — 

S61vitur  |  acris  hi  1 6ms  II  gra|ta  vice  ||  vgris  |  e"t  Fa|voni 

(H.  1,4). 

In  Archilochus  the  verse  is  said  to  have  been  asynartetic  (2535)  ;  but  Horace  and 
Prudentius  do  not  allow  hiatus  or  syllaba  anceps  in  the  diaeresis,  and  Prudentius  some- 
times neglects  the  diaeresis  altogether. 

THE  IAMBELEGUS. 

2678.  This  verse  consists  of  a  trochaic  dimeter  catalectic  with  anacrusis 
-f-  a  Lesser  Archilochian  (2579).     No  resolutions  are  allowed  in  the  first 
colon,  and  the  dactyls  in  the  second  colon  are  never  replaced  by  spondees. 
There  is  regularly  a  diaeresis  between  the  two  cola.     The  scheme  is  :  — 

eiJ.wla.dllolj.AftXwwI-LwwIJ.TC 

An  example  is :  — 

Ru|plre  |  nee  ma|te~r  do  |  mum  ft  caSrula  |  tS  reve|he"t 

(H.Epod.  13,  16). 

2679.  This  verse  occurs  only  in  the  Second  Archilochian  Strophe  (2726)  of  Horace. 
Some  authorities  treat  the  first  colon  as  an  iambic  dimeter.     The  name  lambelegus 
was  given  to  the  verse  because  the  ancient  grammarians  regarded  it  as  a  dactylic  pen- 
tameter for  the  first  half  of  which  an  iambic  colon  had  been  substituted. 

THE  ELEGIAMBUS. 

2680.  This  verse  consists  of  the  same  cola  as  the  lambelegus  (2678),  but 
in  reverse  order.     Spondees  are  not  admitted  in  the  first  colon,  and  no  reso- 
lutions occur  in  the  second  colon.     There  is  regularly  a  diaeresis  between 
the  cola.     The  scheme  is  :  — 

_Lww|iw^i_Lx#e;_i  w|-^eiJLw|_i_A 

An  example  is :  — 

Scribere  |  v€rsicu|los  ||  almore  |  percus|siim  gralvi 

(H.  Epod.  11,2). 

2681.  This  verse  occurs  only  in  the  Third  Archilochian  Strophe  (2727)  of  Horace. 
The  name  Elegiambus  is  given  to  it  as  being  the  reverse  of  the  lambelegus  (see  2679). 

ANAPAESTIC   RHYTHMS. 

2682.  In  these  the  fundamental  foot  is  the  anapaest  ^/  w  _L,  for 

which  its  metrical  equivalents  the  spondee '_,  dactyl ^w  and  pro- 

celeusmatic  w  w  £,  w  are  sometimes  substituted. 

485 


2683-2686.]     Appendix  (E.) :  Prosody. 


2683.  The  anapaestic  verse  of  the  early  Latin  comedy  is  extremely  irregular,  and 
its  limits  are  often  hard  to  define.     Spondees  and  apparent  bacchii  (reduced  to  ana- 
paests by  the  law  of  iambic  shortening;  see  2470)  are  extremely  common,  and  metrical 
irregularities  of  various  kinds  abound.     The  Latin  language  has  so  few  anapaestic 
words  that  it  does  not  lend  itself  readily  to  this  rhythm.     Terence  wisely  abstained 
altogether  from  anapaestic  verse.      Varro,  Seneca,  and  Prudentius  and  other  late 
writers  wrote  anapaests  conforming  more  closely  to  Greek  models. 

THE  ANAPAESTIC  TETRAMETER  ACATALECTIC  (or  Octo- 

narius). 

2684.  This  consists  of  four  anapaestic  dipodies  or  eight  complete  ana- 
paestic feet.     There  is  regularly  a  diaeresis  after  the  fourth  foot,  and  the  last 
thesis  of  the  line  is  never  resolved.     Hiatus  and  syllaba  anceps  sometimes 
occur  in  the  diaeresis,  the  verse  being  asynartetic  (2535).    The  scheme  is  :  — 

w  w  «L  I  vs  w^u  I  vs  w  •£.  1  \j  \j  -t.  ft  ^  v-'  —  I  w  w  _£_  I  \j  \j  2.  |v^w.±. 
_  JLI  _  j.  I  _  JL  I  _  *.  ft  _  £  I  -  .*  I  ~  .1  -U,.* 

_  w  w  |  —  c/  w  !•_  w  w  I  _  w  w    4f  —  w  ^  I  —  c/  w  I  —  w  wl 

w  v'  v/-w  w  w  wv^w  v^  w  w  w  w  w« 


Examples  are  :  — 

Neque  qu6d  |  dubitem  |  neque  qudd  |  timeam  Jf  me  (6)  In  pe"c  | 
tore  con  I  ditumst  con  I  silium 

(PI.  Ps.  575). 

Quid  mihi  |  meliust  |  quid  magis  |  in  remst  fl:  qu(am)  a 
cdrlpore  vi|tam  se"|cludam 

(PI.  R.  220). 

2685.  The  proceleusmatic  is  very  rare  in  the  fourth  foot,  but  the  spondee  is  very 
common  there.     Some  editors  divide  the  anapaestic  octonarii  into  dimeters  (or  qua- 
ternarii)  and  write  them  as  such. 

THE  ANAPAESTIC  TETRAMETER  CATALECTIC 
(or  Septenarius). 

2686.  This  is  like  the  preceding,  except  that  the  last  foot  is  incomplete. 
The  seventh  thesis  may  be  resolved.     There  is  regularly  a  diaeresis  after  the 
fourth  foot,  and  hiatus  and  syllaba  anceps  sometimes  occur  in  the  diaeresis. 
The  scheme  is  :  —  « 


_  \i/w|   _ 


Examples  are  :  — 

Em  n5|m(o)  habet  holr(um)  ?  occijdistl.  #  die  igi|turquis  ha|bet 
ne;scis  '  ?L  Aul.  720). 

486 


Versification*  [2687-2690. 


Hunc  h6mi|nem  decet  I  aur(6)  £x|pend(i)  :  huic  ft  decgt  statu]am 
statu(i)  |  ex  au|ro 

(PI.  B.  640). 

THE  ANAPAESTIC  DIMETER  ACATALECTIC 
(or  Quaternarius). 

2687.  This  verse  consists  of  two  anapaestic  dipodies,  or  four  complete 
anapaestic  feet.  There  is  generally  a  diaeresis  after  the  second  foot,  and  the 
fourth  thesis  is  not  resolved.  The  scheme  is  :  — 


_±_  iff:    \j\jJ-     | 
_  J.  I    _   .1.  *     -  -L      I 


Examples  are  :  — 

Quod  lubet  |  n5n  lubet  fl  iam  c6n|tinuo. 
Ita  m(e)  Amor)  lass(um)  ani|mi  lu|dificat, 
fugat,  agit  |  appetit  If  raptat  |  retinet 

(PI.  Cist.  214). 

This  verse  is  often  used  to  form  systems,  which  frequently  end  in  a  paroemiac 
(see  2688). 

THE  ANAPAESTIC  DIMETER  CATALECTIC  (or  Paroemiac). 

2688.  This  verse  consists  of  two  anapaestic  dipodies  or  four  anapaestic 
feet,  the  last  foot  being  incomplete.  The  third  thesis  is  sometimes  resolved. 
There  is  no  fixed  caesura.  The  scheme  is  :  — 

\j  \j  JL\   \j  \j  _i_  |   \j  \j  JL  |  \j  71 
-  _L  I     _  ^     I     _   ±    | 


Examples  are :  — 

Voluc6r|  pede  cor|  pore  pul|  cher 

(Ausonius). 

Nimls  tan |  d(em)  eg(o)  abs  te  |  cont6|mnor. 
Quipp(e)  6go  |  te  ni|  conte"|mnam, 
stratio|ticus  homo|  qui  clue  jar  ? 

(PI.  Ps.  916). 

2689.  (i.)  The  Paroemiac  is  generally  used  to  close  a  system  of  acatalectic  ana- 
paestic dimeters ;  but  sometimes  several  paroemiacs  in  succession  form  a  system  (as  in 
the  second  example  above),  especially  in  Ausonius,  Prudentius,  and  other  late  poets. 

2690  (2.)  Other  anapaestic  verses  sometimes  occur,  especially  in  the  early  com- 
edy, but  they  are  rare. 

487 


2691-2696.]     Appendix  (£.) :  Prosody. 


CRETIC   RHYTHMS. 

2691.  These  are  rhythms  of  the  Hemiolic  class  (2527),  in  f  time. 
The  fundamental  foot  is  the  Cretic  (±  w_i_). 

Either  (but  not  both}  of  the  two  longs  of  a  Cretic  is  sometimes  resolved 
(giving  the  First  Paeon  J.  \j  w  w  or  the  Fourth  Paeon  w  w  y  —  )  ;  but 
there  is  rarely  more  than  one  resolution  in  a  single  verse.  The  middle  short 
is  sometimes  replaced  by  an  irrational  long  (giving  _i_  >  _._,  or  if  there  is 
resolution,  ^  y  >  _^  or  J.  >  w  \^)  ;  but  this  never  occurs  in  the  last  foot 
of  a  verse,  and  but  rarely  when  the  middle  syllable  is  the  penult  of  a  spondaic 
word  (e.  g.  n6s  nostras). 

2692.  (i.)  The  ictus  on  the  first  long  of  the  Cretic  was  probably  (at  least  in  most 
cases)  stronger  than  that  on  the  second.     The  first  long  and  the  short  form  the  thesis, 
the  second  long  the  arsis,  _/_  w  |  _._ 

2693.  (2.)  The  impetuous,  swinging  movement  of  the  Cretic  rhythm  fits  it  for  the 
expression  of  passionate  emotion. 

THE  CRETIC  TETRAMETER  ACATALECTIC. 

2694.  This  verse  consists  of  four  complete  Cretic  feet.     There  is  usually 
a  diaeresis  after  the  second  foot,  but  sometimes  there  is  instead  a  caesura 
after  the  first  long  of  the  third  foot.     Resolution  is  not  admitted  before  the 
diaeresis  or  the  end  of  the  line.     The  irrational  long  middle  syllable  is  ad- 
mitted in  the  first  and  third  feet.     The  scheme  is  :  — 

JL     >     JL.    I     '     w  jL.it    JL    5     -^1-1     ^.v. 
ww  o   ww  I  ww  41-  ww         ww  |  ww 

Examples  are  :  — 

Ut  malls  |  gatideant  J  atqu(e)  ex  in|c6mmodis 

(T.  Andr.  627). 

Deind(e)  uter|qu(e)  fmpera|t5r  ||  inmedil(um)  Exeunt 

(PI.  Am.  223). 

2695.  This  verse  is  common  in  the  cantica  of  the  early  drama,  and  is  often  repeated 
to  form  systems.     Hiatus  and  syllaba  anceps  sometimes  occur  in  the  diaeresis. 

THE  CRETIC  TETRAMETER  CATALECTIC. 

2696.  This  is  similar  to  the  preceding,  except  that  the  last  foot  is  incomplete. 
The  scheme  is  :  — 


Examples  are  :  — 

Si  cades,]  non  cades  ft  quin  cadamj  tecum 

(PI.  Most.  329). 

Nov(i)  eg(o)  hoc(  sae*culum  Jm6ribus|  quibus  sit 

(PI.  Tri.  283). 

488 


Versification.  [2697-2701. 


OTHER  CRETIC  VERSES. 

2697.  The  Cretic  trimeter  acatalectic  sometimes  occurs,  though  rarely :  e.  g. 

lam  revorjtar.   diustj  i(am)  id  mini 

(PL  Most.  338). 

More  frequent  is  the  dimeter  acatalectic,  which  has  the  scheme :  — 

-L    &    _±_   I    JL    w  _±. 

W  W  W  W    I     W  W 

This  is  often  compounded  with  a  trochaic  tripody  catalectic  :  e.  g. 

Hoc  ub(!)  Am|phitru(6)  erus  ^  c6nspi|catus|e*st 

(PI.  Am.  242), 

and  sometimes  with  a  trochaic  tripody  acatalectic  (e.  g.  PI.  Ps.  1248),  a  trochaic  di- 

pody  acatalectic  (e.  g.  PL  Cap.  214),  or  a  Thymelicus  w  w  w  (e.  g.  PL  Am. 

245).    For  other  kinds  of  Cretic  verses,  see  special  editions  of  the  early  dramatists. 

BACCHIAC   RHYTHMS. 

2698.  These  are  rhythms  of  the  Hemiolic  class  (2527),  in  |  time. 
The  fundamental  foot  is  the  Bacchlus  (w  _L  _L.).     Either  (or  both)  of 
the  two  longs  of  a  bacchlus  is  sometimes  resolved.     For  the  initial 
short  syllable  an  irrational  long  is  sometimes  substituted.     Occasion- 
ally two  shorts  are  so  substituted,  especially  in  the  first  foot  of  a  verse. 

2699.  (i.)  The  ictus  on  the  first  long  of  the  bacchlus  was  probably  stronger  than 
that  on  the  second  long. 

2700.  (2.)  The  bacchiac  rhythm,  like  the  Cretic,  has  an  impetuous  and  passionate 
character. 

THE  BACCHIAC  TETRAMETER  ACATALECTIC. 

2701.  This  verse  consists  of  four  complete  bacchiac  feet.    There  is  gen- 
erally a  caesura  after  the  first  long  of  the  second  or  third  foot,  or  (more 
rarely)  a  diaeresis  after  the  second  foot.     An  irrational  long  (or  two  snorts) 
may  be  substituted  for  the  initial  short  only  in  the  first  and  third  feet.     Re- 
solution is  not  allowed  before  the  caesura  or  the  end  of  the  verse.     The 
scheme  is :  — 

[OO]  ww  <7\j  I  w         vJw  I  [ww]  \J\j  <j\j  I 
Examples  are :  — 

Habe~nd(um)  et  |  ferund(um)  hoc  J);  ontist  cum  |  labore 

(PI.  Am.i-]$). 

At  tamen  ubi  |  fides  ?  ||    si  |  roges  nil  |  pude"nt  hie 

(T.  Andr.  637). 

Vetulae"  sunt  |  min(ae)  amb(ae).    At  J  bonas  fuis|se  crgdo 

(P\.B.  1129). 
489 


2702-2709.]    Appendix  (E^):  Prosody. 


2702.  (i.)  There  are  seldom  more  than  two  resolutions  in  the  same  verse,  and 
never  more  than  three.     Bacchiac  tetrameters  are  often  repeated  to  form  systems. 

2703.  (2.)  According  to  some  authorities,  bacchiac  tetrameters  catalectic  some- 
tinies  occur,  e.  g.  PI.  Cos.  656,  867,  Men.  969,  971,  Most.  313,  Poen.  244. 


OTHER  BACCHIAC  VERSES. 

imeters  are  occasionally  found, 
uple  is :  — 

Ad  aeta|t(em)  agundam 


2704.  (i.)  Bacchiac  dimeters  are  occasionally  found,  especially  as  clausulae  to 
bacchiac  systems.     An  example  is  :  — 


(PI.  Tri.  232). 

An  acatalectic  dimeter  is  not  seldom  compounded  with  a  catalectic  iambic  tri- 
pody:  e.g. 

Rerfn  ter  |  in  anno  J+  t(u)  has  t5n|sitllrf? 

(PI.  B.  1127). 

2705.  (2.)  Bacchiac  hexameters  occur  in  a  few  instances,  as:  — 

Satin  par] va  r6s  est  |  voluptalt(um)  in  vft(a)  at| qu(e)  in  a6ta |  t(e) agunda 

(PI.  Am.  633). 

2706.  (3.)  Hypermetrical  combination  of  bacchii  into  a  system  appears  to  occur  in 
Varro,  Sat.  Men.  fr.  405  Buech. 

CHORIAMBIC  RHYTHMS. 

2707.  In  these,  the  fundamental  foot  is  the  choriambus  (_Lww_i_). 
True  choriambic  verse  is  very  rare  in  Latin  poetry,  though  apparent  chori- 
ambi   of  the  form    J_  \j\j  I  _  or  J_  \j\^  |  \J_    are  common  in  logaoedic 
verse  (2652). 

Apparently,  however,  in  Terence,  Ad.  611-13, 

Ut  neque  quid  |  ml  faciam  |  n6c  quid  agam  JJ  certtim  |  sit. 
m6mbra  metu  I  debilia  |  sunt,  animus  ++  timdjre 
6bstipuit,  |  p6ctore  con|sistere  nil  JJ  consijli  quit, 

there  are  three  choriambic  trimeters,  the  first  two  with  iambic  close,  the  third  with 
trochaic.  In  the  second  line  there  is  syllaba  anceps  at  the  end  of  the  second  choriam- 
bus. In  Plautus,  Casina  629,  Menaechmi  no,  and  perhaps  Asinaria  133,  we  have 
a  choriambic  dimeter  -j-  an  acatalectic  trochaic  dipody. 

Owing  to  the  frequent  occurrence  of  the  apparent  choriambus  in  certain  kinds  of 
logaoedic  verse,  the  metricians  of  Horace's  day  regarded  them  as  really  choriambic. 
Hence  the  rule  mentioned  in  2652,  a  rule  unknown  to  Greek  writers  of  logaoedic 
verse. 

IONIC   RHYTHMS. 

2708.  In  these,  the  fundamental  foot  is  the  Ionic,  of  which  there  are  two 
forms,  the  Ionic  d  mdiore  _L_^.w,  so  called  because  it  begins  with  the 
greater  part  (i.  e.  the  thesis)  of  the  foot,  and  the  Ionic  d  minore  y  w  J_  _._, 
which  receives  its  name  from  the  fact  that  it  begins  with  the  less  important 
part  of  the  foot  (i.e.  the  arsis). 

2709.  (i.)  Ionics  a  minore  are  often  treated  as  Ionics  a  mdiore  with  anacrusis, 
\j\j  |  J_  _._  vy  \j>  &c.    See  2529  ad  fin. 

49° 


Versification.  [2  7 1 0-2  7 1 4. 


2710.  (2.)  Ionic  verse  shows  numerous  resolutions  and  irrational  longs,  especially 
in  early  Latin.     The  accumulation  of  short  syllables  imparts  to  the  verse  a  wild  and 
passionate  character. 

2711.  (3-)  Anaddsis  (Gr.  dvdK\a<ns,  "a  bending  back")  is  an  exchange  of 
place  between  a  short  syllable  and  the  preceding  long  (e.  g.  ±_  w  _._  ^  for 

-±-w.L-i-  f°r    v-»  w   _L_^|v/w-L  -i-)>  and 


is  very  frequent  in  Ionic  verse. 

THE  IONIC  a  maiore  TETRAMETER  CATALECTIC  (or 

Sotadeari). 

2712.  This  verse  consists  of  four  Ionic  d  maiore  feet,  the  last  foot  being 
incomplete.  In  the  early  Latin  poets,  beginning  with  Ennius,  the  Sotadean 
is  treated  with  much  freedom  :  resolution,  contraction  (2518),  anaclasis  (2711), 
and  irrational  longs  are  freely  admitted.  Examples  are  :  — 

Nam  quam  varia  |  sint  genera  po|gmat6rum,  |  Baebi, 
quamque  longe  |  distinct  (a)  ali  (a)  ab  aliis  sis,  |  nosce 

(Accius,  Didasc.  p.  305  M.). 

_L  —  w  \j\~t  I  -L  \j  \j  w  \j  I    —  w  —  >    I  .L  _  A 


Compare  in  Greek  :  — 

(reiuv  fjL€\l\f)v  HrjKLaSa.  |  8ej-ibv  KO.T  |  upov     (Sotades). 
2713.  Later  poets  (Petronius,  Martial,  Terentianus  Maurus)  are  more 
strict  in  their  usage,  admitting  (with  very  few  exceptions)  only  the  forms 
vi>  w  _  w  w,_Lwwww,_Lw  _  \j  besides  the  normal  _1  _  \j\j.  Hence 
their  scheme  is  :  — 

JL  —  w  w  |  J-  —  A 


Examples  are  :  — 

M611es,vete  |  rls  Delia  |ci  marm  rejclsi 

p6de  tendite,  |  ciirs(um)  addite,  |  cdnvolate  |  planta 

(Petron.  23). 

Laevius  and  Varro  employ  Ionic  d  maiore  systems  of  considerable  length. 

THE  IONIC  a  minore  TETRAMETER  CATALECTIC  (or 
Galliambic.  ) 

2714.  This  consists  of  four  Ionic  d  minore  feet,  the  last  one  incomplete. 
Anaclasis,  resolution,  and  contraction  are  extremely  common,  and  the  multi- 
plication of  short  syllables  gives  the  verse  a  peculiarly  wild  and  frenzied 
movement.  Catullus  very  rarely  admits  Ionics  that  are  not  anaclastic 
(never  in  the  first  half  of  the  verse,  except  the  doubtful  cases  63,  18;  54;  75)  ; 
but  Varro  is  less  strict  in  this  regard.  The  penultimate  long  is  nearly  always 
resolved.  There  is  rarely  more  than  one  resolution  in  the  same  half-verse. 
A  diaeresis  regularly  occurs  after  the  second  foot.  The  scheme  is  :  — 

491 


2  7  1  5~2  7  1  9-  J     Appendix  (E.)  :  Prosody. 


Examples  are  :  — 

Ades,  inquit,  |  O  Cybgbe,  ||  fera  mdnti|um  dea 

(Maecenas). 

ww  —  w|—  w—  —  ffv-'w  —  w  I—  *J  —  ~R 

Super  alt  a  |  vectus  Attis  ||  celeri  ra|te  maria 

(Catullus  63,  1). 


Quo  n5s  de|cet  cititis  J  celeraVe  |  tripudifs 

(/</.  63,  26). 

1-  \j  \  \j  \->  \j  —  ~R 


Ego  iuvenis,  |  eg(o)  aduliscens  J  eg(o)  ephebus,|  ego  pu6r 

(/</.  63,  63). 


Tibi  typana  |  non  in§m  ||  sonitd  majtri'  deiim 

(Varro,  ^a/.  Men.  132  Buech.). 


|  _  \j  JL  _ 

2715.  It  has  been  suggested  that  Catullus  probably  felt  the  rhythm  not  as  Ionic, 
but  as  trochaic  or  logaoedic  :  — 

L  I     _^  l.fl         H+wv/lvJ/ 

wHwwHH^tt      >     I     - 
or  the  like. 

This  view  has  much  in  its  favour;  but  the  true  nature  of  the  rhythm  is  still  matter 
of  dispute. 

2716.  Compare  the  Greek  :  — 

TaAAai  fi7j|rpby  openjs)   $i\6Qvpffot  |   Spo^uaSes, 
and  in  English  :  — 

"  Perished  many  a  maid  and  matron,  many  a  valorous  legionary, 
Fell  the  colony,  city  and  citadel,  London,  Verulam,  Camulodune*." 

(Tennyson). 

2717.  Horace  (3,  12)  employs  a  system  of  ten  pure  Ionics  a  minore,  e.  g.  :  — 

MiserSrum  (e)st   |  nequ(e)  amSri  J  dare  iddum  |  neque  dulci 
mala  vino  I  laver(e)  aut  ex|animari 
metu6ntis  |  patrua6  verjbera  linguae. 
There  is  generally  a  diaeresis  after  each  foot. 


Lyric  Metres  of  Horace. 

2718.  The  following  is  a  list  of  the  Horatian  lyric  metres  :  — 

2719.  (I.)  The  IAMBIC  TRIMETER  (see  2592  ff.).    Epode  17. 

492 


Versification.  [2720-2726. 


2720.  (II.)  The  IAMBIC  STROPHE,  an  iambic  trimeter  (2592)  followed 
by  an  iambic  dimeter  acatalectic  (2617)  :  — 


i-io. 

So  in  Archilochus,  e.  g.  :  — 

Tfi  Zeu  irdrep,  Zeu,  (rb^  /t£j>  ovpavov  tcpdros, 

ait  8'  Ipy'  &r'  dvepdiruv  6p$s.  (Fr.  88,  Bergk). 

2721.  (III.)  The   HIPPONACTEAN  or  TROCHAIC   STROPHE,  a  trochaic 
dimeter  catalectic  (2644)  followed  by  an  iambic  trimeter  catalectic  (2601)  :  — 


2722.  (IV.)  The   FIRST  PYTHIAMBIC  STROPHE,  a  dactylic  hexameter 
(2556)  followed  by  an  iambic  dimeter  acatalectic  (2617)  :  — 

&_Llw_i_|^-Llw-i-  Epodes  14  and  15. 

So  in  Archilochus,  e.  g. :  — 


irejra.pp.4vos  St'  offrecov.  (Fr.  84,  Bergk). 

2723.  (V.)  The  SECOND  PYTHIAMBIC  STROPHE,  a  dactylic  hexametei 
(2556)  followed  by  a  pure  iambic  trimeter  (2594)  :  — 

•L  VTW  I  -L  ww  I  -L  II  ww  I  JL  VT-W  I  JL  i-,1  |JL  _ 
o_L|^^.|wll±iw^_|w±|w^.  ^«&  1  6. 

So  the  Greek  epigrammatists,  e.  g.  :  — 


88oap  5e  7Tij/o?^  ov5e»/  &v  re/cot  ao^>6v.  (Nicaenetus). 

2724.  (VI.)  The  ALCMANIAN   STROPHE,  a  dactylic  hexameter  (2556) 
followed  by  a  dactylic  tetrameter  catalectic  (2578):  — 

-LwwI^wwI-^llvTwI-LvTwl  J-STvi  I  ±  - 

JL  wo  I  -i-  VTW  I  ^  str^  I  -1  w  A      c.  i,  7,  28;  .e/^  12. 

2725.  (VII.)  The  FIRST  ARCHILOCHIAN  STROPHE,  a  dactylic  hexameter 
(2556)  followed  by  a  Lesser  Archilochian  (2579):  — 

JL  VTW  I  L  ^,  I  -L  H  ww  I  -1  ww  I  JL  ww  |J._ 

JL  w  w  IJL  x  c.  4,  7. 


2726.  (VIII.)  The  SECOND  ARCHILOCHIAN  STROPHE,  a  dactylic  hexam- 
eter (2556)  followed  by  an  iambelegus  (2678)  :  — 

-1  vTw  I  JL  ^  I  -  II  wv>  I  ^-  ww  U  w  w  |JL__ 


13. 

493 


2727-2731*]     Appendix  (E.) :  Prosody. 

2727.  (IX.)  The  THIRD  ARCHILOCHIAN  STROPHE,  an  iambic  trimetei 
(2592)  followed  by  an  elegiambus  (2680)  :  — 


Epode  n. 

Compare  Archilochus  fr.  85,  Bergk  (elegiambus;  the  trimeter  is  lost)  :  — 
&\\d  n'  6  Au(njueA.fc,  e§  Vatpc,  So/iJ/arot  ir66os. 


2728.  (X.)  The  FOURTH  ARCHILOCHIAN  STROPHE,  a  Greater  Archilo- 
chian  (2677)  followed  by  an  iambic  trimeter  catalectic  (2601)  :  — 


rows  ykp  (f>t\6r7)Tos  epws  inrb  /copSirji/  tKvffOfls 

/car'  dx*.bv  o/i/xarwi/  exeuev  (Fr.  103,  Bergk). 


So  Archilochus,  e.  g.  :  — 

rows  ykp  (f>t\ 
TroAAV  /car'  d 

See,  however,  2677  ad  fin. 

SCLEPIA 
ichically 

_Lw|  ±A       C.  1,1  ;  3,  30;  4,  8. 


2729.  (XI.)  The  LESSER  ASCLEPIADEAN  METRE,  a  series  of  Lesser  As- 
clepiadeans  (2669)  employed  stichically  (2546)  :  — 


So  Alcaeus,  e.g.:  — 

ijA0es  ^/c  irepdrcov  yas 

(Fr.  33,  Bergk). 


2730.  (XII.)  The  GREATER  ASCLEPIADEAN  METRE,  a  series  of  Greater 
Asclepiadeans  (2670)  employed  stichically  (2546)  :  — 

J.  >  |J.  vw  |  iL  ft  ±  ww  |  L!  ft  ±  ww  |  L  w  |  -  A 

<?.  I,  II,  18;  4,  10. 
So  Alcaeus,  e.  g.  :  — 

fjLTjSfv  &\\o  Qvretffris  irp6repov  SevSpiov  d/tWAw 

(Fr.  44,  Bergk). 

Many  editors  hold  (with  Meineke)  that  the  Horatian  odes  were  written  in  tetra- 
stichs  (2545),  and  hence  that  this  metre  and  the  preceding  were  employed  by  Horace 
in  strophes  of  four  lines  each.  Catullus  (30)  seems  to  use  the  Greater  Asclepiadean 
by  distichs,  and  so  apparently  Sappho  (fr.  69,  Bergk).  But  as  to  these  points  there  is 
still  much  dispute. 

2731.  (XIII.)  The  FIRST  ASCLEPIADEAN  STROPHE,  a  Glyconic  (2660) 
followed  by  a  Lesser  Asclepiadean  (2669)  :  — 


C.  i,  3,  13,  19,  36;  3,  9,  15,  19,  24,  25,  28  ;  4,  1,  3. 
494 


Versification.  L2732~2735- 


Cf.  Alcaeus:  — 

vvv  5'  [OUT']  OVTOS  &n 


TOV  air'  fyas  irv^arov  \l6ov.  (Fr.  82,  Bergk). 

In  one  instance,  C.  4,  i,  35,  elision  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  Glyconic. 

2732.  (XIV.)  The  SECOND  ASCLEPIADEAN  STROPHE,  three  Lesser  As- 
clepiadeans  (2669)  followed  by  a  Glyconic  (2660)  :  — 

JL  >  I  _L  ww  I  iL  ft  _Lww  |  JL  w  |  .L  A 
±  >  |  _L  ww  I  iL  ft  _Lww  |  -L  w  |  _L  A 
J_  >  |  _L  ww  I  i_L  ft  J_ww  |  ±  w  |  J_  A 
_L>|_Lww|  -Lw|_L  A 

C.  I,  6,  15,  24,  33;  2,  12;  3,  10,  16;  4,  5,  12. 

2733.  (XV.)  The  THIRD  ASCLEPIADEAN  STROPHE,  two  Lesser  Asclepia- 
deans  (2669),  a  Pherecratean  (2659)  and  a  Glyconic  (2660)  :  — 


_L>|J_ww|_Lv^|  ±  A 

C.  i,  5,  14,  21,  23;  3,7,  13;  4,  13. 

Compare  Alcaeus  (Pherecratean  followed  by  Glyconic  ;  apparently  two 
Lesser  Asclepiadeans  preceded,  but  they  are  lost)  :  — 

\drayes  tror4ovrai 

KvKixvav  &TTO  T?jfoj/.  (Fr.  43,  Bergk). 

2734.   (XVI.)  The  GREATER  SAPPHIC  STROPHE,  an  Aristophanic  (2658) 
followed  by  a  Greater  Sapphic  (267  1  )  :  — 


C.  i,  8. 

2735.    (XVII).    The  SAPPHIC  STROPHE,  three  Lesser  Sapphics  (2666) 
and  an  Adonic  (2655):  — 


C.  I,  2,  10,  12,  20,  22,  25,  30,  32,  38  ;  2,  2,  4,  6,  8,  io,  16;  3,  8,  n,  14,  18, 
20,  22,  27  ;  4,  2,  6,  ii  ;  Carmen  Saeculare.     Also  in  Catullus  n  and  51. 

So  Sappho  :  — 

Qalveral  /tot  KTJVOS  tffos  Qeoiaiv 

^/j.fj.€V  &vep  offris  evavrlos  roi 

i£dv€i  ttal  Tr\aaiov  S8v  <(>Q)veti- 

tras  uTra/cotJet.  (Fr.  2,  Bergk). 

495 


2736-2738.]     Appendix  (E.} :  Prosody. 


Sappho  apparently  treated  the  third  Sapphic  and  the  Adonic  as  continuous  ;  but 
Horace  and  Catullus  allow  syllaba  anceps  (and  Horace  in  four  cases,  i,  2,  47  ;  i, 
12,  7,  and  31  ;  I,  22,  15,  hiatus)  at  the  end  of  the  third  line.  On  the  other  hand,  both 
Catullus  and  Horace  sometimes  join  the  third  line  to  the  fourth  (by  dividing  a  word, 
Hor.  i,  2,  19  ;  25,  ii  ;  2,  16,  7;  Cat.  n,  n  ;  by  elision  Hor.  4,  2,  23  ;  Car.  Saec.  47  ; 
Cat.  ii,  19),  and  in  a  few  instances  the  second  to  the  third  (Hor.  2,  2,  18;  16,  34  ;  4,  2, 
22  ;  Cat.  n,  22,  all  by  elision)  by  synapheia  (see  2510).  In  Horace,  the  last  foot  of  the 
third  line  is  nearly  always  an  irrational  spondee. 

2736.  (XVIII.)  The  ALCAIC  STROPHE,  two  Greater  Alcaics  (2667),  a 
nine-syllabled  Alcaic  (2642)  and  a  Lesser  Alcaic  (2663):  — 


C.  i,  9,  16,  17,  26,  27,  29,  31,  34,  35,  37  ;  2,  i,  3,  5,  7,  9,  n,  13,  14,  15,  17, 
19,  20  ;  3,  i,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  17,  21,  23,  26,  29  ;  4,  4,  9,  14,  15. 
So  Alcaeus:  — 


rb  /nil/  7&p  ei/fley  Kvfj.a 

rb  8'  ei/0ep  '  &fjLH€s 

pat  Qopfoeea  <rvv  ^eAak<£.  (Fr.  18,  Bergk). 

In  the  Greek  poets  the  last  two  lines  are  sometimes  joined  by  synapheia 
(2510),  and  Horace  has  elision  at  the  end  of  the  third  verse  in  2,  3,  27  ; 
3>  29»  35«  BU*  he  frequently  admits  hiatus  in  that  place. 

2737.  (XIX.)  The  IONIC  SYSTEM,  a  system  of  ten  pure  Ionics  d  minore 
(see  2717):  — 

L  _  .  i  w  —  —  .  i  ww  —  —  .  i  ww_  — 

__  |ww  --  |ww-L^lw^jL  — 

_  C.3,12. 


Lyric  Strophes  of  Catullus. 

2738.  Catullus  in  34  uses  a  strophe  consisting  of  three  Glyconics  (2660) 
followed  by  a  Pherecratean  (2659)  :  — 


_L>   |_Lww|_Lw 

In  61  he  employs  a  strophe  consisting  of  four  Glyconics  followed  by  a 
Pherecratean. 

496 


Versification. 


[2739. 


2739.    Index  of  Horatian  Odes  and  their  Metres. 

The  Roman  numerals  in  the  table  refer  to  the  numbers  assigned  to  the 
various  strophes  in  2719-2737. 


BOOK. 

ODE. 

METRE. 

BOOK. 

ODE. 

METRE. 

BOOK. 

ODE. 

METRE. 

I 

I 

XL 

2 

I 

XVIII. 

3 

23 

XVIII. 

2 

XVII. 

2 

XVII. 

24 

XIII. 

3 

4 

XIII. 
X. 

3 

4 

XVIII. 
XVII. 

3 

XIII. 
XVIII. 

5 

XV. 

XVIII. 

27 

XVII. 

6 

XIV. 

6 

XVII. 

28 

XIII. 

7 

VI. 

7 

XVIII. 

29 

XVIII. 

8 

XVI. 

8 

XVII. 

3° 

XI. 

9 

XVIII. 

9 

XVIII. 

10 

XVII. 

10 

XVII. 

ii 

XII. 

ii 

XVIII. 

4 

i 

XIII. 

12 

XVII. 

12 

XIV. 

2 

XVII. 

*3 

XIII. 

13 

XVIII. 

3 

XIII. 

14 

XV. 

XVIII. 

4 

XVIII. 

XIV. 

I  c 

XVIII. 

5 

XIV. 

ID 

XVIII. 

16 

XVII. 

6 

XVII. 

17 

XVIII. 

17 

XVIII. 

7 

VII. 

18 

XII. 

18 

III. 

g 

XI. 

19 

XIII. 

19 

XVIII. 

9 

XVIII. 

20 

XVII. 

20 

XVIII. 

10 

XII. 

21 

XV. 

ii 

XVII. 

22 

XVII. 

3 

1-6 

XVIII. 

12 

XIV. 

23 

XV. 

7 

XV. 

'3 

XV. 

24 

XIV. 

8 

XVII. 

14  • 

XVIII. 

3 

XVII. 
XVIII. 

9 

10 

XIII. 
XIV. 

XVIII. 

27 

XVIII. 

ii 

XVII. 

Carmen 

} 

28 

VI. 

12 

XIX. 

Saecu- 

V 

XVII. 

29 

XVIII. 

13 

XV. 

lare  .  . 

) 

3° 

XVII. 

14 

XVII. 

31 
32 

XVIII. 
XVII. 

11 

XIII. 
XIV. 

Epodes 

I-IO 
II 

II. 

IX. 

33 

XIV. 

17 

XVIII. 

12 

VI. 

34 

XVIII. 

18 

XVII. 

J3 

VIII. 

35 

XVIII. 

iq 

XIII. 

14 

IV. 

36 

XIII. 

20 

XVII. 

15 

IV. 

37 

XVIII. 

21 

XVIII. 

16 

V. 

38 

XVII. 

22 

XVII. 

17 

I. 

32 


497 


2  7 4°-2  745-]      List  of  A bbreviations. 


ABBREVIATIONS  USED  IN  CITING  THE  AUTHORS. 

2740.  In  Part  First,  in  which  authors  are  occasionally  cited,  but  without 
direct  reference  to  their  works,  the  usual  abbreviations  are  employed:  as 
Plaut.,  Ter.,  Cic.,  Verg.,  Hor.,  &c.,  &c. 

2741.  In  Part  Second,  the  principles  adopted  are  as  follows: 

2742.  (i.)  A  reference  consisting  of  figures  alone  (as,  2,  2,  3),  denotes 
book,  chapter,  and  section  of  Caesar  de  Bella  Gallico. 

2743.  (2.)  A  reference  to  a  work  (in  italics),  without  a  preceding  abbre- 
viation for  the  author's  name  (as,  TD,  i,  2;  Mil.  3),  denotes  the  book  and 
section,  or  the  section  only,  of  a  work  by  Cicero.     The  abbreviations  used 
to  denote  his  works  are  given  in  the  list  below  (2745). 

2744.  (3.)  A  reference  made  to  Vergil  (V.),  followed  by  figures  alone,  is 
a  reference  to  the  Aeneid ' :  as,  V.  i,  20.     Similarly,  H.  stands  alone  for  the 
Odes  of  Horace  ;  O.  alone  for  the  Metamorphoses  of  Ovid  ;  and  Ta.  alone  for 
the  Annals  of  Tacitus. 

2745.  (4.)  Roman  letters  are  used  in  the  abbreviations  of  the  names  of 
authors,  italics  in  the  abbreviations  of  the  names  of  their  works,  as  in  the  fol- 
lowing List :  — 

LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS. 


Abbreriations. 

Authors  and  Works. 

Abbreviations. 

Authors  and  Works. 

Caes. 

Caesar. 

Fin. 

de  Flnibus. 

C. 

de  Bella  Ctvlli. 

Fl.  or  Place. 

pro  Placed.                \s1s. 

See  2742. 

de  Bella  Gallico. 

HR. 

de  Haruspicum  Respon- 

Cat. 

Catullus. 

IP. 

de  Imperio  Pompel. 

See  2743. 

Cicero. 

Inv. 

de  Inventione. 

Ac. 

Academica. 

L. 

Laelius. 

ad  Br. 

Agr. 

ad  Briituni  Epistulae, 
de  lege  Agr  arid. 

LAgr. 

Leg. 

de  lege  Agrdrid. 
de  Legibus. 

Arch. 
Att. 

pro  Arc  hid. 
ad  Atticum  Epistulae. 

Lig. 
Marc. 

pro  Ligdrio. 
pro  Marcello. 

Balb. 

pro  Balbo. 

Mil. 

pro  Milone. 

Br. 

Brutus. 

Mur. 

pro  Murend. 

c. 

in  Catiltnam. 

O. 

Orator. 

Caec. 

pro  Caecmd. 

Off. 

de  Officils.           \Jdritm. 

Caecil. 

Divindtio  in  Caecilium. 

OG. 

de  Optimo  Genere  Ord- 

Cael. 

pro  Caelio. 

OP. 

de  Ordtorid  Partitione. 

CM. 

Cato  Maior. 

Par. 

Paradoxa.                \bus. 

Clu. 

pro  Cluentio. 

PC. 

de  Provinciis  Consuldri- 

D. 

pro  Deiotaro. 

Ph. 

Philippicae. 

Div, 

de  Dvvindtione. 

Pis. 

in  Plsonem. 

DN. 

de  Deorum  Ndturd. 

PI.  or  Plane. 

pro  Plancio. 

DC, 

de  Ordtore. 

Q.  or  Quint. 

pro  Qulntio.  [Epistulae. 

Fam. 

ad  Famrlidres  Epistulae. 

Q_Fr. 

ad    Quintum    Frdtrem 

Fai. 

de  Fdto. 

RA. 

pro  Roscio  Amerind. 

498 


I 


List  of  Abbreviations. 


[2745 


RC. 

pro  Roscio  Comoedo. 

Most. 

Mostelldria. 

RP. 

de  Re  Publicd.   [nis  reo. 

Per. 

Persa. 

Rab. 

pro  Rabirio  perduellio- 

Poen. 

Poemdus. 

RabP. 

pro  Rabirio  Posthumo. 

Ps. 

Pseudolus. 

Scaur. 

pro  Scauro. 

R. 

Rudens. 

Sest. 

pro  Sestio. 

St. 

Stichus. 

Sull. 

pro  Sulld. 

Tri. 

Trinummus. 

T.  or  Top. 

Topica.                     [nes. 

Tni. 

Tmculentus. 

TD. 

Tusculdnae  Dispntdtio- 

Vid. 

Vlduldria. 

Tim. 

Tul. 

Timaeus. 
pro  Tullio. 

Plin.  Ep. 
PI  in.  NH. 

Pliny's  Epistulae. 
Pliny's  Ndturdlis  His- 

V.  a.  pr. 

in  Verrem  dctio  I. 

Prop. 

Propertius.          \toriae. 

V. 

in  Verrem  dctio  II. 

Publil.  Syr. 

Publilius  Syrus. 

Corn.,Cornif. 
E. 

Cornificius. 
Ennius. 

Quint,  or  ) 
Quintil.     ( 

Quintilian. 

Fest. 

Festus. 

S. 

Sallust. 

Cell. 

Gellius. 

C. 

Catilma.      _    [Lepidi. 

H. 

Horace. 

Fr.  Lep. 

Fragmenta  Ordtionis 

AP. 

Ars  Poetic  a. 

Fr.  Phil. 

Fragmenta  Ordtionis 

See  2744. 

Carmina. 

I. 

lugnrtha.         \Philippl. 

E. 

Epistulae. 

Sen. 

Seneca. 

Epod. 
S. 

Epodoi. 
Sermones. 

Ben. 
Ep. 

de  Benefiviis. 
Epistulae. 

J. 

Juvenal. 

St. 

Statius. 

L. 

Livy. 

Th. 

Thebais. 

Lucil. 

Lucilius. 

Suet. 

Suetonius. 

Lucr. 

Lucretius. 

Aug. 

Augustus. 

Macrob. 

Macrobius. 

Cal. 

Caligula. 

Sat. 

Saturnalia. 

CL 

Claudius. 

Mart. 

Martial. 

Galb. 

Galba. 

N. 

Nepos. 

lul. 

liilius. 

O. 

Ovid. 

Tib. 

Tiberius. 

A. 

Am  ores. 

T. 

Terence. 

AA. 

Ars  Amdtoria. 

Ad. 

Adelphoe. 

F. 

FdstL 

Andr. 

Andria. 

See  2744. 

Metamorphoses. 

Eu. 

Eimuchus. 

Tr. 

Trlstia. 

Hec. 

Ifecyra. 

PI. 

Plautus. 

Hau. 

Hauton  Timorumenos. 

Am. 

Amphitruo. 

Ph. 

Phormio. 

As. 

Asindria. 

Ta. 

Tacitus. 

Aid. 

Aululdria. 

See  2744. 

Anndles. 

B. 

B  ace  hides. 

A.  or  Agr, 

Agricola. 

Cap. 

Captlm. 

D. 

Dialogus. 

Cos. 

Casina. 

G. 

Germdnia. 

Cist. 

Cistelldria. 

H. 

ffistoriae. 

Cu.  or  Cur. 

Curculio. 

Tib. 

Tibullus. 

E. 

Epidicus. 

V, 

Vergil. 

Men. 

Menaechml. 

See  2744. 

Aeneis. 

Mer. 

Mercdtor. 

E. 

Eclogae. 

MG. 

Miles  Gloriosus. 

G. 

Georgica. 

499 


INDEX    OF    SUBJECTS. 


THE  REFERENCES  ARE  TO  SECTIONS. 


Abbreviations, 

C.  for  Gaius,  20 ;  Cn.  for  Gnaeus, 
20;  Q.  for  Gaia,  20;  K.  for  Kalen- 

dae,  20. 
Ability, 

verbal  expressions  of,  in  indie,  with 
infin.,  1495,  X496|  m  impf-  indie.,  1497; 
in  conditional  periods,  2074,  2101 ;  words 
of,  with  gerundive  construction,  2254. 
Ablative  case, 

defined,  419;  sing.,  how  formed,  425, 
426;  plur.,  how  formed,  428;  lacking, 
see  Defective ;  of  words  in  -tu- 
(-su-),  235,  430 

-a-  stems,  in  -ad,  426,  443  ;  in  -eis, 
440,  443  ;  in  -ais  and  -eis,  441  ;  in 
-IS  for  ilS,  440  ;  in  -abus,  442 ;  in- 
scriptional  forms,  443 ;  Greek  nouns, 

-o-  stems,  in  -6d,  426,  465;  in 
-ais,  -eis,  -ois,  458 ;  in  -obus,  464 ; 
inscriptional  forms,  465  ;  Greek  nouns, 
466. 

Consonant  stems,  for  -e-,  no  certain 
evidence  is  cited,  502  ;  substs.,  in  -i 
and  -ei,  502,  507  ;  adjs.,  in  -i,  503, 
622,  626 ;  in  -id,  426,  507 ;  inscrip- 
tional forms,  507;  Greek  nouns,  508- 
512. 

-i-  stems,  substs.,  in  -I,  -e,  552-558, 
561,  5i7-527,  531;  adjs.,  in -i, -6,558- 
561,  525-537,  634-636  ;  adjs.,  in  -I  alone, 
559,  629;  pres.  part.,  in  -I,  -e,  560, 
633 ;  inscriptional  forms,  564 ;  Greek 
nouns,  565. 

-u-  stems,  in  -uo  (-ud),  593 ;  in 
-ubus,  592  ;  inscriptional  forms,  593. 

Pronouns,  peculiar  and  inscriptional 
forms,  of  ego,  tu,  sui,  648,  650,  651; 
of  meus,  tuus,  suus,  653-655;  of 


qui,  quis,  688-690 ;  of  aliquis,  &c., 
692. 


Ablative  case  —  continued. 

Uses  of,  1296-1400;  general,  1296- 
1301;  meaning  of,  1297,  1299,  1300;  as 
adv.,  703-707,  1376;  combined  with 
ace.,  1199,  1303. 

Ablative  proper,  1297,  1302-1330, 
attached  to  subst.,  1301,  1313,  1314; 
of  separation,  want,  departure,  1302- 
1306,  1293,  1294;  denoting  place  from 
which,  with  town  and  island  names, 
1307-1310;  denoting  origin  and  place 
from  which,  with  country  names,  1309, 
1310;  in  dates,  1307;  domo,  rure, 
humo,  1311;  of  source,  stuff,  or  ma- 
terial, 1312-1315;  of  the  doer  of  an 
action,  1318,  1319,  1476,  1477,  2243; 
of  cause,  influence,  or  motive,  1316- 
1319;  with  facio  and  sum,  denoting 
that  with  which  or  to  which  something 
is  done,  1315;  causa,  gratia,  &CM 
1257,  1317;  denoting  person,  equivalent 
to  abstract,  1319;  of  comparison,  1320- 
1330;  with  alter,  alius,  1323;  with 
compar.  advs.,  1327;  in  expressions  of 
age,  1329;  opiniSne,  exspectati- 
one,  spe,  1330;  amplius,  longius, 
plus,  minus,  1328,1329;  with  judicial 
verbs,  1280-1282. 

Locative  ablative,  1299,  1331-1355  ; 
attached  to  subst.,  1301,  1331  ;  in  dates, 
T3°7>  T33i ;  domi,  ruri,  humi,  orbi, 
1337;  belli,  militiae,  1338;  joined 
with  loc.  adv.,  1340;  of  place  where 
with  town  and  island  names,  1331-1335, 
1342, 1343;  of  place  where,  with  forum, 
urbs,  oppidum,  &c.,  1332,  1333  ;  of 
place  where,  with  other  appellatives, 
1344, 1347  ;  of  place  where,  with  country 
names,  1336,  1347;  with  teneo,  reci- 
pi5,  &c.,  1348;  with  fido,  confido, 
glSrior,  laetor,  nitor,  sto,  fretus, 
1349 ;  of  time  at  which,  1341,  1350, 
1351 ;  of  time  within  which,  1352-1354; 
of  time  during  which,  1355. 

Instrumental    ablative     I3OO»   1356- 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Ablative  case—  continued. 

1399;  of  accompaniment,  1356,  1357; 
with  iunctus,  coniunctus,  1357; 
of  manner,  1358-1361 ;  absolute,  1362- 
1374,  see  also  1533,  1900,  2110,  2121; 
of  quality,  1375  ;  of  the  route  taken, 
1376;  of  instrument  or  means,  1377- 
1384,  1476,1477;  with  fruor,  fungor, 
potior,  utor,  vescor,  usus  est, 
opus  est,  1379-1384 ;  of  specifica- 
tion, 1385  ;  with  verbs  of  fulness,  1386; 
with  adjs.  of  fulness,  1387  ;  of  mea- 
sure, exchange,  price,  1388-1392 ;  with 
dignus,  indignus,  &c.,  1392;  of 
amount  of  difference,  1393-1399,  H53> 
1154,  1459;  of  time  before  or  after 
which,  1394,  1154;  with  absum  and 
disto,  1153;  of  intervallum  and 
spatium  in  designations  of  distance, 
1399,  °f  persons,  instead  of  abl.  with 
ab,  1477. 

Combined  with  other  abls.  in  same  sen- 
tence, 1400 ;  with  in  and  sub  after  verbs 
of  rest,  1423 ;  with  in  after  verbs  of 
motion,  1424;  of  gerundive  construction 
and  gerund,  2265-2268;  supine  in  -u 
as,  235,  2269,  2277. 

Abounding, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1293  ;  with  abl., 
1386;  adjs.  of,  with  gen.,  1263,  1264; 
with  abl.,  1387. 

Abridgement, 

of  sentences,  1057,  2111. 

Abstaining, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1294;  with  abl., 
1302-1306,  1294;  with  quin,  1986. 

Abstract, 

substs.,  defined,  7  ;  plur.  of,  416, 
1109;  subst.  suffixes  denoting  quality, 
246-264;  adj.  suffixes  denoting  quality, 
281-297;  suffixes  denoting  action,  212- 
237,  249,  285  ;  abstract  in  rel.  sentence 
instead  of  in  main  sentence,  1800. 

Acatalectic  verse, 
defined,  2537. 

Accent, 

general  rules  of,  84-91  ;  in  gen.  and 
voc.  of  -O-  decl.,  87 ;  on  final  syllable, 
88 ;  marks  of,  29,  3 ;  30 ;  85  ;  of  proclit- 
ics and  enclitics,  92-94 ;  of  preps.,  92 ; 
of  rel.  and  indef.  prons.,  92  ;  of  com- 
pounds of  facio,  394 ;  in  verse,  2548. 

Accentual, 

verse,  2548  ;  verse,  in  carmina, 
2549;  theory  of  the  Saturnian,  2553. 

Accompaniment, 
abl.  of,  1356,  1357. 


Accomplishing, 

verbs  of,  with  subjv.,  1579,  1712;  with 
purpose  clause,  1951;  with  result  clause, 
1955,  1965  ;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2196. 
Accusative  case, 

defined,  419 ;  sing.,  of  neut.  nouns, 
how  formed,  423  ;  plur.,  of  neut.  nouns, 
how  formed,  423 ;  sing,  and  plur.,  of 
gender  nouns,  how  formed,  424  ;  lack- 
ing, see  Defective  ;  ending  in  d,  149. 

-a-  stems,  in  -am,  436;  inscrip- 
tional  forms,  443;  Greek  nouns,  444, 

445- 

-o-  stems,  in  -om  and  -um,  452 ; 
in  -a-,  130,  2;  461;  inscriptional  forms, 
465  ;  Greek  nouns,  466. 

Consonant  stems,  in  -is,  505,  507, 
622;  inscriptional  forms,  507;  Greek 
nouns,  508-512. 

-i-  stems,  in  -im,  -em,  547-551, 
517-525;  inscriptional  forms,  564; 
Greek  nouns,  565. 

-U-  stems,  inscriptional  forms,  593. 

Adverbs  from,  699-702,  549,  1156. 

Pronouns,  peculiar  and  inscriptional 
forms,  of  ego,  tu,  sui,  648,  650,  651  ; 
of  meus,  tuus,  suus,  653-655  ;  of 
hie,  663-665  ;  of  ille,  iste,  667 ;  of 
illic,  istic,  670 ;  of  is,  673 ;  of  idem, 
677;  of  ipse,  680. 

Uses  of,  1124-1174;  general,  1124- 
1131. 

Of  the  object,  1132-1150;  with  com- 
pounds of  ad,  circum,  ex,  in,  ob, 
per,  prae,  praeter,  trans,  1137; 
double,  with  verbs  compounded  with 
preps.,  1138,  1198;  with  verbs  of  feeling, 
commonly  intrans.,  1139;  emphasizing 
or  defining,  1140-1146,  1173,  1475;  of 
kindred  derivation  with  verb,  1 140,  1 1 73 ; 
of  kindred  meaning  with  verb,  1141  ; 
neut.,  of  adj.,  with  verb,  1142;  with 
verbs  of  smelling  and  tasting,  1 143 ; 
neut.,  of  pron.,  with  verbal  expression, 
1144,  1840,  1851  ;  of  appellative,  used 
adverbially,  1145;  attached  to  subst., 
1129,  1146;  of  part  concerned,  1147; 
of  thing  put  on  or  off,  1148;  of  excla- 
mation, 1149,  1150,  21 12  ;  with  verb  not 
expressed,  1150. 

Of  space  and  time,  1151-1156,  1475  ; 
with  abhinc,  1154;  with  ordinals, 
1155-;  expressing  '  time  at  which,'  1156; 
of  aim  of  motion,  1157-1166  ;  of  end  of 
motion  with  in  and  sub,  1423 ;  with 
verbs  of  rest,  1424;  with  names  of 
towns,  islands,  peninsulas,  1157-1160; 


502 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Accusative  case  —  continued. 
with  names  of  countries,  1161;  with 
appellatives,  1159, 1 161 ;  domum,rus, 
foras,  1162-1164;  exsequias,  infi- 
tias,  malam  crucem,  malam  rem, 
1165. 

Two  accusatives  combined,  1167- 
1174;  of  obj.  and  pred.,  1167,  1168; 
with  verbs  of  teaching,  hiding,  demand- 
ing, questioning,  1169-1171;  with  verbs 
of  wishing,  reminding,  inducing,  accus- 
ing, 1172;  defining  ace.  and  ace.  of  per- 
son, 1 1 73 ;  ace.  of  extent  or  duration  or 
aim  of  motion  and  ace.  of  object,  1174. 
With  verbs  otherwise  taking  dat., 
1184,  1185  ;  with  compounds  of  verbs 
of  intrans.  use,  1191  ;  combined  with 
dat.  or  abl.,  1199, 1303;  with  propior, 
proximus,  prope,  &c.,  1201  ;  with 
nomen  do,  &c.,  1214;  pred.,  instead 
of  dat.,  1221,  1224;  with  prep.,  instead 
of  objective  gen.,  1261 ;  with  verbs  of 
remembering  and  forgetting,  1288  ;  with 
verbs  of  reminding,  1291;  with  per,  to 
express  instrument,  1378;  with  abu- 
tor,  fungor,  fruor,  perfruor,  po- 
tior,  1380;  with  opus  est,  1383;  with 
usus  est,  1384 ;  with  post  and  ante 
in  expressions  of  time,  1394-1397;  of 
extent,  with  verbs  of  surpassing,  1398; 
with  comparatives,  1398 ;  with  preps., 
see  Prepositions. 

With  infin.,  1134,  2172-2203,  2312, 
2313,2321,  2330-2334;  infin.  as  subst. 
ace.,  2204-2206;  ace.  subj.  of  infin. 
omitted,  2183  ;  pred.  noun  referring  to 
unexpressed  subj.  of  infin.  in,  2213 ; 
use  of  reflexive  pron.  in  construction 
of  ace.  with  infin.,  2338-2340 ;  obj.  of 
gerundive,  2247;  ace.  of  gerundive  and 
gerund,  use  of,  2250-2253,  2243  ;  obj. 
of  gerund,  2242,  2255,  2259,  2265 ; 
supine  in  -um  as,  235,  1166,  2269; 
following  supine  in  -um,  2272. 

Accusing, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1172; 
with  gen.,  1280-1282;  with  abl.,  1280- 
1282;  with  quod,  1852;  with  cur, 
1852  ;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2185. 

Acquitting, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1 1 72 ; 
with  gen.,  1280-1282;  with  abl.,  1280- 
1282. 

Action, 

suffixes  denoting,  212-237,  249,  285  ; 
words  denoting,  range  of  meaning  of, 


Action  —  continued. 

Conceivable,  subjv.  of,  in  simple  sen- 
tence, 1554-1562  ;  in  subordinate  sen- 
tence, 1731 ;  in  rel.  characteristic  or 
result  sentences,  1818 ;  in  quarn  sen- 
tences, 1888;  in  quamquam  sentences, 
1901 ;  in  sentences  of  result  with  ut, 
1947;  in  sentences  of  purpose  with  ut, 
1962 ;  in  sentences  with  quando,  2010 ; 
tense  of,  in  subordinate  sentence,  1753. 

Congruent  and  coincident,  1733  ;  co- 
incident, introduced  by  quod,  quia, 
1850;  introduced  by  qui,  1826;  intro- 
duced by  cum,  1874. 

Repeated,  subjv.  of,  1 730 ;  non-occur- 
rent,  tense  of,  in  subordinate  sentence, 
1753  ;  defined^  2024;  treated,  2091-2108, 
see  Conditional ;  pres.,  &c.,  see 
Present,  &c. ;  continued,  see  Con- 
tinued. 
Active  voice, 

defined,  723,  1469;  pereo,  veneo, 
£15,  meaning  of,  1471 ;  of  coepi  and 
desino,  1483 ;  perf.  partic.  with  force 
of,  907,  1485  ;  deponents  having,  1488, 
1489 ;  deponents  having  pres.  system  in, 
1488  ;  changed  to  pass.,  1472-1480. 
Adjectives, 

defined,  8 ;  iambic  shortening  of  the 
endings  of,  129,  130;  used  substan- 
Jtively,  with  -e,  -i  in  abl.  sing.,  558,  561, 
631 ;  pres.  partic.  used  as,  with  -I  in  abl. 
sing.,  560,  633  ;  formation  of,  180-203  ; 
roots  and  stems,  183-198;  without  for- 
mative suffix,  195, 198, 199;  with  forma- 
tive suffix,  195-198,  200-203. 

Suffixes  of,  280-360;  primitive,  with 
act.  meaning,  281-290.  293,  294,  296; 
primitive,  with  pass,  meaning,  291- 
297,  282,  283,  305  ;  denominative,  298- 
360,  287;  of  material  or  resemblance, 
299-301;  of  appurtenance,  302-330 ;  of 
supply,  331-338;  diminutive,  339,340; 
of  the  conipar.,  342-348 ;  of  the  superl., 
342-345,  349-352;  comparison  of,  see 
Comparison. 

Compound,  formation  and  meaning 
of,  379-390,  see  Composition;  in- 
flection of,  398-643,  see  Gender, 
Number,  Case,  Declension;  of 
'one,'  'two,'  'three'  endings,  611. 

Agreement  of,  1082-1098;  used  sub- 
stantively,  1099-1104,  1106,  1093,  1203, 
1250;  with  ace.  appended,  1130;  neut. 
ace.  of,  denoting  manner,  1142;  pred., 
with  verbs  of  making,  choosing,  naming, 
&c.,  1167;  with  dat-j  "83,  1200-1204; 


5°3 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Adjectives  —  contimted. 
with  ace.,  1201;  with  ace.  and  prep., 
1201;  with  gen.,  1202-1204,  1238,  1245, 
1263-1270;  with  abl.,  1202,  1306;  with 
loc.,  1339;  instead  of  gen.,  1233,  1262; 
compar.,  with  abl.  or  with  quam, 
1320-1330 ;  prepositional  expressions 
equivalent  to,  1428  ;  two  adjs.  compared, 
1457 ;  explanatory,  put  in  rel.  sen- 
tence, 1810;  rel.  sentence  coordinated 
with,  1820;  quamquam  with,  1900; 
quam  vis  with,  1903  ;  infin.  with,  2166 ; 
gerundive  used  as,  2248,  2249 ;  with  ace. 
of  gerundive  construction  or  gerund, 
2252 ;  with  dat.  of  gerundive  construc- 
tion, 2254  ;  with  gen.  of  gerundive 
construction  or  gerund,  2258;  with 
supine  in  -u,  2274;  partic.  as,  2283, 
2284;  adj.  relatives,  see  Relative; 
pred.,  see  Predicate  ;  attributive,  see 
Attributive;  numeral,  see  Nume- 
ral adjectives. 

Adjunct, 

adverbial,  defined,  1053. 

Admiring, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1286. 

Adonic, 

the,  2655-2657. 

Advantage, 

dat.  of,  1178,  1205-1210. 

Adverbial, 

adjunct,  defined,  1053;  ace.,  1140- 
1146;  ablatives,  iure,  ratione,  &c., 
J358. 

Adverbs, 

defined,  10,  696  ;  diminutives  of,  341 ; 
comparison  of,  361-364;  compounded 
with  nouns  or  noun  stems,  382,  383,  385  ; 
compounded  with  verbs,  396;  in  -im, 
549,  700,  710;  origin  of,  696-710,  712; 
from  ace.,  699-702,  549,  1156;  from  abl., 
703-707  ;  from  loc.,  708,  709,  1340  ;  from 
prons.,  706,  710;  from  adjs.,  701,  702, 
704,  705;  from  partic.,  704,  1372;  de- 
noting route  by  which,  707,  1376 ;  of 
manner,  700,  704,  710 ;  of  place  at  which, 
708,  709;  of  place  to  which,  710;  of 
place  from  which,  710;  sentences  as, 
712;  correlative,  711,  1831;  adjs.  used 
with  force  of,  1142-1146. 

With  gen.,  1242, 1248, 1253,  1254 ;  ace. 
of  appellative  used  as,  1145;  compar., 
followed  by  abl.  or  quam,  1327-1330; 
development  into  preps.,  696, 1402-1404; 
preps,  with  force  of,  1407,  1408,  1432; 
words  used  as  preps,  and  advs.,  1412- 
1416,  1421 ;  prepositional  expressions 


Adverbs  —  continued. 
equivalent  to,  1428;  function  of,  1438; 
with  meaning  of  adj.,  1439 ;  with  partic. 
used  as  substs.,  1440 ;  with  substs.,  1441 ; 
used  in  place  of  substs.,  1442 ;  use  of 
neg.  advs.,  1443-1453;  neg.  advs.,  two 
in  one  sentence,  1452,  1453;  two  advs., 
compared,  1457;  used  as  connectives, 
1687-1692,  2133-2159;  postpositive, 
1688;  subordinate  sentences  as,  1715; 
quo,  unde,  &c.,  in  place  of  rel.  pron. 
with  prep.,  1793  >  indef.  rel.,  introducing 
indie.,  1814  ;  numeral,  2404,  2405  ;  nu- 
meral, forms  in  -iens,  -ies,  2414. 

Adversative, 

words,  use  of,  1676-1686,  2131,  2150- 

2153- 
Advising, 

verbs  of,  case  with,  1181-1185;  ^th 
purpose  clause,  1950. 


Affirmative, 

expressed  by  two  negatives,  1452; 
answer,  expected  with  -ne,  -n,  1504; 
answer,  expected  with  nonne,  1506; 
answer,  expected  with  num,  1507; 
answer,  how  expressed,  1511,  1512; 
meaning  of  baud  scio  an,  &c.,  1782; 
coordination,  2159;  sentence,  aliquis 
in,  2390 ;  sentence,  quivis,  quilibet, 
utervis,  uterlibet  in,  2401. 
Agent, 

suffixes  denoting,  204-211 ;  of  action, 
see  Doer. 
Agreement, 

of  subst.,  1077-1081  ;  of  mobile 
substs.,  1078;  explaining  two  or  more 
substs.,  1079;  collective  or  distributive, 
explaining  plur.,  1080 ;  in  apposition 
with  thought  or  clause,  1081. 

Of  adjective,  1082-1098  ;  with  persons 
or  things  implied  in  subst.,  1083  ;  attrib- 
utive, with  one  of  several  substs.,  1084  ; 
attributive,  sing,  with  plur.  subst.,  1085; 
with  combined  adj.  and  subst.,  1086; 
pred.,  with  substs.  denoting  persons, 
1088;  with  substs.  denoting  things, 
1089;  with  substs.  denoting  persons 
and  things,  1090 ;  with  nearest  subst., 
1091;  absente  npbis,  1092;  neut. 
adj.  used  as  subst.  in  pred.,  1093. 

Of  verb,  1062-1076,  1080,  1807;  in 
plur.  with  several  sing,  subjs.,  1064, 
1065;  in  sing,  with  several  sing,  subjs., 
1066, 1067;  witn  mixed  subjs.,  sing,  and 


5°4 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Agreement  —  continued. 
plur.,  1068;  with  sing.  subj.  and  abl. 
with  cum,  1069;  when  subjs.  are  con- 
nected by  nee  .  .  .  nee,  aut,  aut  .  .  . 
aut,  1070;  with  collectives,  1071;  agree- 
ing with  appositiveor  pred.  subst.,  1072  ; 
when  subjs.  are  of  different  pers.,  1076; 
agreeing  with  subst.  introduced  by 
quam,  &c.,  1073;  age,  &c.,  1075; 
agreeing  in  pers.  with  antec.  of  rel.  or 
implied  antec.,  1807. 

Of  pronouns,  demonstrative,  deter- 
minative, rel.,  1093-1098,  1801-1811  ; 
agreement  determined  by  sense,  1095, 
1804;  with  several  substs.,  1096,  1803; 
agreeing  with  pred.  subst.,  1097,  1806; 
in  agreement,  equivalent  to  gen.,  1098. 

Aim, 

of  motion,  denoted  by  ace.,  1157- 
ii 66;  of  motion,  ace.  of,  combined 
with  a  second  ace.,  1174;  verbs  of,  with 
purpose  clause,  1949. 

Alcaic, 

strophe,  2545  ;  the  nine-syllabled, 
2642  ;  the  lesser  (decasyllabic),  2663 ; 
the  greater  (hendecasyllabic),  2667, 
2668;  in  Horace,  2736. 

Alcmanian,  verse,  2577  ;  strophe,  2724. 

Alphabet, 

treated,  16-29;  source  of,  18;  changes 
in,  17,  19,  21,  25;  letters  of,  gender, 
412:  see  Pronunciation. 

Amphibrach,  2522. 

Anaclasis,  2711. 

Anacrusis,  2529,  2530. 

Analogical  lengthening,  123. 

Anapaest,  defined,  2521;  cyclic,  2523. 

Anapaestic, 

rhythms,  2682-2690;  tetrameter  acat- 
alectic,  2684,  2685  ;  tetrameter  catalectic, 
2686;  dimeter  acatalectic,  2687;  dimeter 
catalectic,  2688,  2689. 

Anaphora,  1692. 

Anaptyctical  vowel,  172;  in,  b. 

Annahstic  present,  1591. 

Answers, 

forms  of  expected,  1504-1510,  1563  ; 
yes  and  no,  how  expressed,  1511-1514; 
of  alternative  questions,  how  expressed, 
1525. 

Antecedent, 

defined,  1796;  position  of,  1796-1798, 
omitted,  1798,  1799;  indef.,  1799;  im- 
plied in  possess.,  1807  ;  rules  for  agree- 
ment of  rel.  with,  1082-1098, 1801-1811 ; 
see  also  Relative. 

Antepenult, 

defined,  175;  when  accented,  86,  2. 


Antibacchius,  2522. 
Antispast,  2522. 
Antitheses, 

asyndeton  in,  1640. 
Anxiety, 

expressions  of,  with  ut,  ne  clauses, 

1957,  i958- 

Apex,  29,  3. 

Aphaeresis,  no,  112,  168. 

Apocope,  no,  113,  168. 

Apodosis, 

defined,  1061 ;  fut.  perf.  in,  coinci- 
dent in  time  with  fut.  perf.  in  prot., 
1627;  with  tarn,  non  minus,  non 
magis,  aeque,  perinde,  iuxta, 
1889,  1890 ;  correlative  lacking  in, 
1890 ;  see  Conditional,  Relative, 
Conjunctive. 

Appeal, 

questions  of,  in  pres.  indie.,  1531;  in 
fut.,  1531,  1623;  in  subjv.,  1563;  in 
subordinate  sentence,  1731;  tense  of, 
in  subordinate  sentence,  1753;  in  in- 
direct question,  1786;  in  ind.  disc., 

2313,  2314.     . 

Accusative  in,  1150. 
Appellatives, 

defined,  5 ;  in  ace.  with  expressions 
of  motion,  1161 ;  loc.  of,  1337-1341; 
used  without  prep,  to  denote  place 
where,  1344-1347;  used  with  prep,  to 
denote  place  where,  1347. 
Appointing, 

see  Making. 
Appositive, 

defined,  1045 ;  verb  agreeing  with, 
1072  ;  agreement  of,  1077-1081 ;  to  a 
thought  or  clause,  1081 ;  with  loc.,  1333, 
1340,  1341;  gen.  as,  with  possess,  pron., 
1235;  gen.  used  for,  1256;  dat.  used 
for,  1213;  to  a  rel.,  1809;  sentence 
with  quod  as,  1845  5  inf"1-  as  subst. 
ace.  in  apposition,  2204  ;  infin.  as  subst. 
nom.  in  apposition,  2207 ;  appositive 
partic.,  2293-2296. 
Appurtenance, 

adj.  suffixes  denoting,  302-330. 
Archilochian, 

verse,  2578-2580;  the  lesser,  2579; 
the  greater,  2677;  strophe,  in  Horace, 
2725-2728. 

Aristophanic,  2658. 
Arsis,  2520. 

Ascending  rhythms,  2528. 
Asclepiadean, 

the  lesser,  2669;  the  greater,  2670;  in 
Horace,  2729-2733. 


505 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Asking, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1169- 
1171 ;  with  ace.  and  prepositional 
phrase,  1170  ;  with  indirect  ques- 
tion, 1774;  with  gerundive  construc- 
tion, 2250. 

Asseverations, 

.  _  pres.  subjv.  in,  1542;  fut.  in,  1622; 
ita  .  .  .  ut  in,  1542,  1622,  1937;  ex- 
pressed by  nam,  2155. 

Assimilation, 

of  vowels,  144-,  of  consonants,  163- 
166;  subjv.  of,  1728;  subjv.  of,  se- 
quence of  tenses  in,  1770—1772. 

Assumption, 

expressed  by  subjv.  of  desire,  1553; 
expressed  by  fut.,  1620. 

Asynartetic  verses,  2535. 

Asyndetic, 

coordination,  defined,  1637 ;  in  simple 
sentences,  1638-1642  ;  between  sen- 
tences or  periods,  2123-2127. 

Asyndeton, 

enumerative,  2126  ;  of  summary, 
2127;  see  Asyndetic. 

Atonic  syllable,  102. 

Attraction, 

of  verb,  subst.,  adj.,  pron.,  partic.,  see 
Agreement, 

subjv.  of,  1728 ;  sequence  of  tenses  in, 
1770-1772;  in  cum  sentences,  1859; 
in  quoniam  sentences,  1882-1884  ;  in 
quam  sentences,  1888 ;  in  quam- 
quam  sentences,  1901 ;  in  sentences 
with  postquam,  ubT,  ut,  &c.,  1924  ; 
with  dum,  donee,  quoad,  quam- 
diu,  1994. 

Attribute, 

defined,  1039;  kinds  of,  1040-1043; 
attached  to  proper  name,  1044 ;  with 
loc.,  1332,  1333;  with  domum, 
dom5s,  1164. 

Attributive, 

subst.,  agreement  of,  1077-1081  ;  adj., 
agreement  of,  1082-1098,  see  Agree- 
ment ;  subordinate  sentence  as,  1715  ; 
use  of  antequam,  1920;  gerundive, 
2248,  2249;  partic.,  2282-2286. 

Avoiding, 

verbs  of,  with  ne  and  subjv.,  1960. 

Bacchiac  rhythms,  2698-2706. 

Bacchius,  21:21. 

Begin, 

verbs  meaning,  with  infin.,  2160. 
Believing, 

verbs  of,  with  dat.,  1181,  1182. 


Benefiting, 

verbs  of,  case  with,  1205-1210. 
Birth, 

place  of,  in  abl.,  1309  ;  verbs  of,  with 
abl.,^312. 
Blaming, 

verbs  of,  used  with  quod,  1852. 
Books, 

pres.  used  in,  1592  ;  see  Titles. 
Brachycatalectic  verse,  2538. 
Bucolic  diaeresis,  2559. 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1274 ;  with  abl., 
1388-1392. 

Caesura, 

2542-2544;   hiatus  in,  2477;  mascu- 
line and  feminine,  2557  ;  after  the  third 
trochee,  2558. 
Calling,    • 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1167; 
with  indef.  subj.,  1033. 
Can, 

verbs  meaning,  with  infin.,  2169. 
Capability, 

suffixes  denoting,  284,  292-294. 
Capable, 

adjs.   meaning,  with  gerundive  con- 
struction or  gerund,  2252. 
Cardinal  numerals, 

decl.  of,  637-642,  431  ;  list  of,  2404, 
2405;    some  forms  of,  2415-2418;  in 
dates,  2419;  in  combination  with  sin- 
gull,  2420. 
Case, 

endings,  function  of,  398;  endings, 
lacking  in  prons.,  645  ;  the  cases,  defined, 
419,  420;  oblique  cases,  defined,  419; 
nouns,  defective  in,  see  Defective; 
rules  for  formation  of  the  cases  of  nouns, 
general,  422-428;  in  -a-  stems,  436- 
443  ;  in  -o-  stems,  452-465  ;  in  cons, 
stems,  495-507;  in  -i-  stems,  540-564  ; 
in  -u-  stems,  590-595 ;  in  -e-  stems, 
602-607  ;  principal  and  secondary  cases, 
iiii,  1112;  see  Agreement,  Nom- 
inative, &c.,  Prepositions. 
Catalectic  verse, 

defined,  2537  ;  in  syllabam,  &c.,  2539. 
Catalexis,  2537. 
Catullus, 

lyric  strophes  of,  2738. 
Causal, 

sentences,  defined,  1716;  mood  in, 
1721;  subjv.  of  ind.  disc,  and  attrac- 
tion in,  1722,  2319;  tense  of,  after  sec- 
ondary, 1756  ;  words,  use  of,  2133,  2154- 
2158;  see  Cause. 


.506 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Causative, 

verbs,  368  ;  use  of  verb,  2304. 

Cause, 

gen.  of,  1232-1238;  abl.  of,  1316- 
1319;  expressed  by  abl.  abs.,  1317, 
1367  ;  coordinated  member  denoting, 
1703  ;  rel.  sentences  0^1824-1830  ;  ex- 
pressed by  sentence  with  quod,  quia, 
1838-1858;  expressed  by  sentence  with 
cum,  1859,  1874-1880;  expressed  by 
sentence  with  quoniam,  1882,  1884  ; 
expressed  by  sentence  with  postquam, 
ub!,  ut,  &c.,  1926,  1930;  expressed  by 
sentence  with  dum,  1998  ;  expressed  by 
sentence  with  quando,  quandoque, 
2010,  2013,  2014;  expressed  by  abl.  of 
gerundive  construction  or  gerund,  2266 ; 
expressed  by  partic.,  2295,  1317  ;  other- 
wise expressed,  1317. 

Cease, 

verbs  meaning,  with  infin.,  2169. 

Change, 

in  characters  of  alphabet,  17, 19,  21, 25  ; 
in  sound  of  vowels,  95-145 ;  in  sound 
of  diphthongs,  95-101  ;  in  sound  of  con- 
sonants, 146-174;  see  Substitution, 
Development,  Disappearance, 
Assimilation,  Dissimilation,  In- 
terchange, Lengthening,  Short- 
ening, Weakening,  Hiatus, 
Contraction,  Elision,  Affinities. 

Characteristic, 

rel.  sentences  of,  1818-1823. 

Charge, 

gen.  of,  1280-1282. 

Choliambus,  2597-2600. 

Choosing, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1167; 
with  pred.  abl.,  1363. 

Choriambic  rhythms,  2707. 

Choriambus,  2521. 

Circumflex  accent,  174-177. 

Circumstances, 

expressed  by  abl.  abs.,  1362,  1365  ; 
by  abl.  of  gerundive  construction  or 
gerund,  2266. 

Cities, 

see  Towns. 

Claudus, 

trochaic  tetrameter,  2639-2641. 

Clause, 

defined,  1055;  subst.  in  apposition 
to,  1081;  see  Sentence,  Subordi- 
nate. 

Clausula,  2536. 


Climax, 

asyndeton  in,  1639;  introduced  by 
ver5,  1684. 

Cognate, 

see  Kindred. 

Coincident  action, 

defined,  1733  ;  introduced  by  qui, 
1826;  introduced  by  quod,  quia,  ^^\ 
introduced  by  cum,  1864,  1874  ;  intro- 
duced by  dum,  1998. 

Collectives, 

defined,  6  ;  suffixes  forming,  228,  249; 
with  sing,  and  plur.  verb,  1071,  1080; 
with  plur.  subst.,  1080;  words  denoting 
person  used  as,  1099 ;  used  in  abl.  with 
ab,  1477. 

Colon,  2532. 

Combination, 

of  sentences,  1055  ;  of  substs.  by  a 
prep.,  1426-1428;  of  different  copula* 
tives,  1662-1666. 

Command, 

ace.  in,  1150;  intimated  by  question, 
1531;  expressed  by  subjv.,  1547-1552; 
expressed  by  imper.,  1571-1586;  accom- 
panied by  voc.  or  voc.  nom.,  1571  ;  ex- 
pressed by  fut.,  1624 ;  introduced  by 
proinde,  proin,  2157;  verbs  of,  case 
with,  1 181-1185  ;  subjv.  coordinated  with 
verbs  of,  1708;  verbs  of,  with  purpose 
clause,  1950;  verbs  of,  with  ace.  and 
infin.,  2200-2202. 

Common, 

names,  defined,  5;  quantity,  defini- 
tion and  sign  of,  30  ;  gender,  nouns  of, 
410. 

Comparative, 

of  adjectives,  diminutive  formed  from 
stem  of,  340 ;  formed  from  stems  and 
roots,  342  ;  stem  of,  346,  470  ;  suffixes 
of,  346-348;  doubled  suffix  of,  348; 
lacking,  358,  360;  formed  by  magis, 
360 ;  declension  and  case  forms  of,  621- 
623,  503,  505,  507  ;  used  as  adverbs, 
701  ;  of  adverbs,  ending  of,  361,  363, 
364 ;  lacking,  364. 

Use  of,  1455-1464  ;  general  function 
of,  1455;  used  in  comparison  of  adjs. 
and  advs.,  1457,  1458;  combined  with  a 
positive,  1458  ;  modified  by  abl.  of  differ- 
ence, 1393, 1459 ;  modified  by  ace.,  1398 ; 
expressing  disproportion,  1460, 1461 ;  in 
neg.  sentence,  for  superl.,  1462 ;  empha- 
sized by  magis,  1463;  modified  by 
aeque,  1463;  with  abl.,  for  positive! 


5°7 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Comparative  —  continued. 

1464;  strengthening  a  superl.,  1468; 
agreeing  with  a  rel.,  1810;  followed  by 
quam,  quam  ut,  quam  qui,  1896; 
quo  of  purpose  with,  1974;  followed  by 
quasi,  2122  ;  followed  by  abl.of  gerun- 
dive construction,  2268;  double,  with 
quam  .  .  .  tarn,  1893;  with  quanto 
.  .  .  tanto,  1973- 

Sentence,  defined,  1716  ;  with  ut,  co- 
ordinated member  equivalent  to,  1704; 
Suisquam  and  ullus  in,  2402  ;  period 
equality,  tarn  .  .  .  quam,  &c.  in, 
1889,   1895;    of  inequality,   1894;  with 
quo  and  eo,  1973- 
Comparison, 

of  adjs.,  342-360 ;  in  -ior,  issimus, 
343  ;  of  adjs.  in  -ilis,  345,  359;  of  adjs. 
in  -er,  344 ;  with  superl.  in  -rimus, 
344,  350;  with  superl.  in  -limus,  345, 
350;  with  superl.  in  -timus,  351;  with 
superl.  in  -mus  or  -imus,  352;  with 
compar.  in  -eri  or  -er,  347,  348 ;  with 
compar.  and  superl.  from  different  forms 
of  same  stem  or  from  different  stems, 
353-355;  without  positive,  356,  357; 
without  compar.,  358;  without  superl., 
359;  with  magis  and  maxime,  360  ; 
not  admitted,  360. 

Of  adverbs,  361-364  ;  with  superl.  in 
-ed,  362 ;  with  superl.  in  -5  or  -um, 
362 ;  without  positive,  363 ;  without 
compar.,  364;  without  superl.,  364. 

Of  participles,  2284. 

Use  of  degrees  of,  1454-1468,  see 
Positive,  Comparative,  Super- 
lative. 

Ablative  of,  1320-1330;  atque,  et 
in.  16^3,  1654  ;  periods  of,  with  quam, 
1888-1898  ;  with  tamquam,  1908- 
1910 ;  conditional  periods  of.}  2117- 

2122. 

Compensation,  121. 
Complement, 

the  essential,  defined,  1177;   the  es- 
sential,  uses    of,    1180-1204;    the   op- 
tional, defined,  1178;  the  optional,  uses 
of,  1205-1218;  see  Dative. 
Complem  entary, 

dat.,  see  Dative ;  final  clauses,  1948- 
1960;  consecutive  clauses,  1948,  1965- 
1969 ;    infin.,    2168-2171,    2223-2225, 
1953- 
Completed, 

action,  tenses  of,  1603,  1605,  1614, 
1626,  2218. 


Complex, 

sentence,  defined,  1058;  varieties  of, 
1058-1061  ;  treated,  1714-2122,  see 
Sentence. 

Composition, 

treated,  376-396;  of  nouns,  379-390; 
real  compounds,  379-385  ;  apparent 
compounds,  386-390;  of  verbs,  391- 
396 ;  real  compounds,  391,  392,  790 ; 
apparent  compounds,  393-396,  790  ;  verb 
with  verb,  394 ;  subst.  with  verb,  395  ; 
adv.  with  verb,  396 ;  of  partic.,  2284. 

Compound, 

words,  defined,  181;  containing  mute 
or  f  followed  by  1  or  r,  178  ;  direct,  de- 
fined, 377;  indirect,  defined,  377;  real, 
defined,  378;  apparent,  defined,  378; 
determinative,  defined,  382-384 ;  objec- 
tive, defined,  384  ;  possess.,  defined,  385  ; 
compound  formative  suffixes,  defined, 
200  ;  compound  verbs,  with  stem  differ- 
ing from  simple,  821-823;  perf.  of,  823  ; 
reduplication  in,  860,  861  ;  forms  of, 
922-1020;  cases  with,  1137,  1138,  1187, 
1191,  1194-1199,  1209;  formation  of, 
1402-1409  ;  compound  sentence,  defined, 
1056;  abridged,  1057;  treated,  1636- 
1713;  see  Sentence,  Composition. 

Compounds, 

of  die,  due,  accent  of,  88 ;  of  roots 
fac-,  ag-,  cap-,  ^70 ;  of  faciS,  accent 
of,  394;  of  faci5,  form  of,  394;  in 
-cola  and  -gena,  gen.  plur.  of,  439; 
in  -fer  and  -ger,  decl.  of,  454,  616 ; 
of  do,  756,  757;  of  eo,  763-767;  of 
ed5,  771;  in  -fio  and  -ficior,  790; 
of  duco,  imper.  of,  846 ;  of  ne,  1444, 
1445  ?  changes  within,  174. 

Conative, 

use  of  verb,  2301-2303. 

Conceivable, 

action,  subjv.  of,  in  main  sentence, 
1554-1562  ;  in  subordinate  sentence, 
1731  ;  tense  of,  in  subordinate  sentence, 
1753;  in  rel.  characteristic  or  result 
sentences,  1818  ;  in  quam  sentences, 
1888,  1896  ;  in  quamquam  sentences, 
1901 ;  in  sentences  of  result  with  ut, 
1947  ;  in  sentences  of  purpose  with  ut, 
1962 ;  with  dum,  donee,  quoad, 
quamdiu,  1994 ;  in  sentences  with 
quando,  2010. 

Concession, 

expressed  by  abl.  abs.,  1367;  ex- 
pressed by  subjv.  of  desire,  1553;  ex- 
pressed by  imper.,  1571 ;  expressed  by 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Concession  —  continued. 
fut.,  1620  ;  coordinated  member  equiva- 
lent to  clause  of,  1702,  1710;  rel.  sen- 
tences of,  1824-1830 ;  expressed  by 
sentence  with  quod,  1843  ;  expressed 
by  sentence  with  quamquam,  1900 ; 
expressed  by  sentence  with  quamvis, 
1904  ;  expressed  by  sentence  with 
quamlibet,  1907;  expressed  by  sen- 
tence with  ut,  ne,  1963;  expressed  by 
sentence  with  etsi,  tametsi,  &c., 
2116;  expressed  by  partic.,  2295;  ille 
(quidem),  hie,  is,  iste  in,  2361. 
Concessive, 

sentences,  defined,  1716;  tense  of, 
after  secondary,  1756;  cum,  1876-1880; 
ut  .  .  .  ita,  sic,  1938 ;  protases,  2116; 
conjunctions  and  advs.,  use  of,  2133, 
2150-2153. 
Conclusion, 

introduced  by  ergo,  itaque,  igitur, 
2158;  see  Conditional. 
Concrete,  • 

substs.,  defined,  5. 
Condemning, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1280-1282;  with 
abl.,  1280-1282;  with  quod,  1852. 
Conditional, 

sentences,  defined,  1716;  subjv.  of 
ind.  disc,  and  attraction  in.  1722  ;  subjv0 
of  repeated  action  in,  1 730 ;  wish  in  form 
of,  with  si,  6  si,  1546 ;  unchanged  after 
primary  tense,  1753 ;  with  si,  si  forte, 
for  indirect  question,  1777;  rel.  sen- 
tences equivalent  to,  1812;  cum  sen- 
tences equivalent  to,  1859;  expressed  by 
Ut,  ne  .  .  .  sic,  proviso,  1964. 

Periods,  2016-2021;  development  of, 
2016;  words  introducing  prot.,  2019- 
2021 ;  classes  of,  2022-2024. 

Indeterminate  protases,  2025-2090 ; 
indie,  use,  2025-2071. 

Present  indicative  in  prot.,  2026-2033  > 
with  apod,  in  pres.  indie.,  2026 ;  with 
apod,  in  perf.  indie.,  2027  ;  with  apod,  in 
impf.  indie.,  2028  ;  with  apod,  in  plup. 
indie.,  2029 ;  with  apod,  in  fut.,  2030 ; 
with  apod,  in  fut.  perf.,  2031 ;  with 
apod,  in  imper.,  2032 ;  with  apod,  in 
pres.  subjv.,  2033. 

Perfect  indicative  in  prot.,  2034-2041 ; 
with  apod,  in  pres.  indie.,  2034 ;  with 
apod,  in  perf.  indie.,  2035  5  with  apod, 
in  plup.  indie.,  2036  ;  with  apod,  in  fut., 
2037  ;  with  apod,  in  imper.,  2038  ;  with 
apod,  in  pres.  subjv.,  2039 ;  with  apod. 

S°9 


Conditional  —  continued. 


in  impf.  subjv.,  2040;   with  apod,  in 
plup.  subjv.,  2041. 

Imperfect  indicative  in  prot.,  2042- 
2047  ;  with  apod,  in  pres.  indie.,  2042  ; 
with  apod,  in  perf.  indie.,  2043;  with 
apod,  in  impf.  indie.,  2044;  with  apod, 
in  fut.,  2045  ;  with  apod,  in  pres.  subjv., 
2046  ;  with  apod,  in  impf.  subjv.,  2047. 

Pluperfect  indicative  in  prot.,  2048- 
2051 ;  with  apod,  in  pres.  indie.,  2048; 
with  apod,  in  perf.  indie.,  2049  ?  with 
apod,  in  impf.  indie.,  2050  ;  with  apod, 
in  impf.  subjv.,  2051.' 

Future  in  prot.,  2052-2058;  with 
apod,  in  pres.  indie.,  2052;  with  apod, 
in  perf.  indie.,  2053;  with  apod,  in  fut., 
2054;  with  apod,  in  fut.  perf.,  2055; 
with  apod,  in  imper.,  2056  ;  with  apod, 
in  pres.  subjv.,  2057 ;  with  apod,  in 
perf.  subjv.,  2058. 

Future  perfect  in  prot.,  2059-2064; 
with  apod,  in  pres.  indie.,  2059;  with 
apod,  in  perf.  indie.,  2060 ;  with  apod, 
in  fut.,  2061 ;  with  apod,  in  fut.  perf., 
2062;  with  apod,  in  imper.,  2063  ;  with 
apod,  in  pres.  subjv.,  2064. 

General,  2034,  2035,  2044>  2050, 2054, 
2069-2071 ;  special  uses,  2065-2067  ; 
n5n,  si  ...  2067  ;  with  miror,  mi- 
rum  est,  2068;  use  of  subjv.  for  in- 
die., 2069-2071. 

Indeterminate  protases,  subjv.  use, 
2072-2090 ;  indie,  for  subjv.  in  expres- 
sions of  ability,  duty,  &c.,  2074;  non- 
occurrent  action  viewed  as  occurrent, 
2075. 

Prot.  in  pres.  subjv.,  2076-2083 ;  prot. 
in  perf.  subjv.,  2084-2088 ;  apod,  in  pres. 
subjv.,  2076,  2084;  apod,  in  perf.  subjv., 
2077,  2085  '  aP°d-  in  pres.  indie.,  2078 ; 
apod,  in  fut.,  2079,  2°86 ;  apod,  in  fut. 
perf.,  2080;  apod,  in  periphrastic,  2081, 
2087 ;  apod,  in  impf.  subjv.,  2082,  2088  ; 
apod,  in  plup.  subjv.,  2083  ;  conversion 
to  past  time,  2089;  periods  of  exempli- 
fication, 2054,  2090. 

Protases  of  action  non-occurrent,  2024, 
2091-2108;  force  of  tenses,  2091-2093 ; 
prot.  in  impf.  subjv.,  2094-2097  ;  prot. 
in  plup.  subjv.,  2096,  2098-2107 ;  peri- 
phrastic prot.,  2108;  apod,  in  impf. 
subjv.,  2094,  2097,  2108  ;  apod,  in  plup. 
subjv.,  2095,  2098 »  2108;  apod,  in  pres. 
subjv.,  2098  ;  periphrastic  apod.,  2096, 
2100 ;  apod,  in  impf.  indie.,  2101,  2102, 
2104,  2106  ;  apod,  in  perf.  indie.,  2101. 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Conditional  —  continued. 
2103-2105  ;  apod,  in  plup.  indie.,  2104, 

2107. 

Variation  of  prot.,  2109-2111 ;  varia- 
tion of  apod.,  2112-2115  ;  forms  which 
apod,  may  take,  2018 ;  coordinated 
member  equivalent  to  prot.,  1574,  1701  ; 
imper.  as  prot.,  1574;  prot.  expressed 
by  abl.  abs.,  2295  ;  prot.  expressed  by 
partic.,  2295;  conditional  comparisons, 
2117-2122  ;  protases  in  ind.  disc.,  2326- 
2329 ;  apodoses  in  ind.  disc.,  2370-2334  ; 
sentence,  quisquam  and  ullus  in, 
2402. 

Conjugation, 

defined,  397 ;  of  sum,  744-750 ;  of 
possum,  ;44j  751-753?  of  do,  744, 
754-7575  «  bibo,  ser5,  sisto,  744, 
758 ;  of  inquam,  759-761 ;  of  e5, 
759,  762-767  ;  of  queo,  nequeo,  759, 
768;  of  ed5,  769-771 ;  of  void,  772- 
774  ;  of  n515,  772,  775-777  ;  of  malo, 
772,  778,  7795  of  fero,  772,  780,  781 ; 
of  verbs  in  -ere  (third  conjug.),  782- 
784  ;  of  aid,  785-787  ;  of  fI5,  785,  788- 
790 ;  of  verbs  in  -io,  -ere,  784-791 ;  of 
verbs  in  -are  (first  conjug.),  792,  793; 
of  verbs  in  -ere  (sec.  conjug.),  794, 
795;  of  verbs  in  -ire  (fourth  conjug.), 
796,  797 ;  of  deponent  verbs,  798-801 ; 
of  periphrastic  forms,  802-804;  see 
Stems,  Person,  Formation. 

Conjunctional, 

see  Conjunctive. 

Conjunctions, 

defined,  13 ;  origin  of,  696 ;  copula- 
tive, use  of,  1644-1661,  1687-1692, 
1881,  2133-2149  ;  combination  of  differ- 
ent, 1662-1666;  disjunctive,  use  of, 
1667-1675,  2133-2149;  adversative,  use 
of,  1676-1686,  2133,  2150-2153;  post- 
positive, 1676  ;  quamquam  as,  1899, 
1900;  quamvis  as,  1904,  1905;  qui, 
1976;  concessive,  use  of,  2133,  2150- 
2153;  causal  and  illative,  use  of,  2133, 
2154-2158  ;  affirmative  coordination, 
2159;  see  Connectives. 

Conjunctive, 

particle  sentences,  1838-2122;  intro- 
duced by  quod,  quia,  1838=1858 ;  by 
n5n  quod,  non  qu5,  &c.,  1855  ;  by 
cum,  1859-1881 ;  by  quoniam,  1882- 
1884 ;  by  quotiens,  quotienscum- 
que,  1885-1887;  by  quam,  1888- 
1898 ;  by  quantus,  ut,  1892 ;  by  ] 
quamquam,  1899-1902;  by  quam- 


Con  junctive  —  continued. 
vis,  1903-1906;  by  quamlibet,  1907; 
by  tamquam,  1908-1910  ;  by  quem- 
admodum,  1908 ;  by  antequam, 
priusquam,  1911-1921;  by  pridie 
quam,  postridie  quam,  1922;  by 
postquam,  ubl,  ut,  cum  primum, 
i923~1934;  by  uti,  ut,  ne,  1935-1970; 
by  ubl,  1971 ;  by  quo,  qui,  1972- 
1976;  by  quanto,  1973;  by  quo- 
minus,  1977,  1978 ;  by  qu5  setius, 
1979;  by  quin,  1980-1990-  by  dum, 
donee,  quoad,  quamdiu,  1991- 
2009 ;  by  modo,  2003 ;  by  quando, 
quandSque,  2010-2014;  by  si,  nisi, 
&c.,  2015-2115  ;  by  etsi,  tametsi, 
tamenetsi,  etiamsi,  si,  2116;  by 
quasi,  quam  si,  tamquam  si,  &c., 
2117-2122;  particle  sentences,  in  ind. 
disc.,  2315,  2317,  2319. 

Connection, 

of  the  parts  of  sentence,  1636-1692 ;  of 
sentences  or  periods,  2123-2159 ;  rela- 
tionship, &c.,  words  of,  with  gen.,  i~o3. 

Connectives, 

compound  sentence  without,  1636- 
1642 ;  separate  sentences  or  periods 
without,  2124-2127;  relatives  as,  2131; 
demonstrative  and  determinative  words 
as,  2129,  2130;  concessive  words  as, 
2150-2153  ;  disjunctive  words  as,  1667- 
1675,  2134-2149;  copulative  words  as, 
1644-1661,  2134-2149 ;  adversative 
words  as,  1676-1686,  2150-2153;  other 
words  than  conjunctions  as,  1687-1692; 
causal  words  as,  2154-2158;  illative 
words  as,  2154-2158 ;  affirmative  coor 
dination,  2159. 

Consecutive, 

sentences,  defined,  1716;  tense  of, 
after  secondary,  1757-1759;  comple- 
mentary, 1948,  1965-1969;  pure,  1948, 
1970. 

Consonants, 

cons,  and  vowel  i  and  u,  22-28;  x  a 
double  cons.,  how  sounded,  70  ;  x  makes 
long  syllable,  177;  doubled  cons.,  how 
written  and  how  pronounced,  So  ;  dou- 
bled, never  ends  a  word,  177  ;  doubled, 
makes  long  syllable,  177;  pronunciation 
°f»  53~72  5  classification  of  the  con- 
sonants, 73-79  ;  consonant  changes, 
146-174,  see  Substitution,  Devel- 
opment, Disappearance,  Assim- 
ilation, Dissimilation,  Inter- 
change ;  mute  or  f  followed  by  1  or  r, 


510 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Consonants  —  continued. 
how   affecting  preceding  short  vowel, 
178;  cons,  roots,  defined,  188  ;   cons, 
stems  of  substs.,  decl.  of,  467-512,  see 
Declension  ;  cons,  stems  of  substs., 
general  rules   of  gender  of,   570-584; 
cons,  stems  of  adjs.,  decl.  of,  621-626, 
467-512.     See  also  Glides. 
Contempt, 

expressed  by  diminutives,  269;  ex- 
pressed by  nesciS  quid,  &c.,  1789; 
expressed  by  hie,  2350;  expressed  by 
iste,  2357;  expressed  by  homo,  2365 ; 
expressed  by  quidam,  2393. 
Continued  action, 

tenses  of,    1587,    1594,   1619,  2218; 
with  cum,   1864,  1865;  see  Incom- 
plete action. 
Continuants  or  Continuous, 

sounds,   defined,    74 ;   classified,  74 ; 
subst.  stems  in,  decl.  of,  481-493. 
Contraction, 

of  vowels,  115,   118;  of  verb  forms, 
885-893  ;  in  versification,  2518. 
Contrary  to  fact, 

see  Non-occurrent. 
Contrasts, 

asyndeton   in,    1640;    introduced  by 
et,  2140;  hie  and  ille  in,  2352;  ipse 
in,  2374,  2375. 
Convicting, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1280-1282;  with 
abl.,  1280-1282. 
Coordination, 

of  sentences,  1055-1060,  1636;  asyn- 
detic, 1637-1642 ;  constructions,  history 
of,  1693-1695,  1705,  1706,  1740,1957; 
treated,  1636-1692  ;  without  connective, 
1636-1642;  with  copulative  conjunc- 
tions, 1643-1666;  with  disjunctive  con- 
junctions, 1667-1675  ;  with  adversative 
conjunctions,  1676-1686  ;  with  other 
words  as  connectives,  1687-1692;  inter- 
mediate coordinate  sentence,  treated, 
1693-1713;  coordination  instead  of  ace. 
and  infin.,  1696;  question  or  exclama- 
tion in,  1697;  instead  of  rel.  sentence, 
1698;  instead  of  temporal  expression, 
1699;  instead  of  result  clause,  1700  ;  in- 
stead of  condition,  1701,  2110;  instead  of 
concessive  clause,  1702;  instead  of 
causal  clause,  1 703 ;  instead  of  compar. 
clause  with  ut,  1704;  subjv.  of  desire 
in,  1705;  ne  in,  1706;  with  verbs  of 
wishing,  T  707  ;  with  verbs  of  request, 
exhortation,  command,  &c.,  1708;  with 


Coordination  —  continued. 
oportet,  optumum  est,  &c.,  1709; 
with  permitto,  concedo,  sino,  li- 
cet, 1710;  with  cave,  &c.,  1711 ;  with 
cedo,  do,  persuaded,  cur5,  fac, 
&c.,  1712;  with  verbs  in  general,  1713; 
of  questions,  1787;  of  imper.,  1787, 
1710-1712;  of  rel.  sentence  with  subst., 
adj.,  or  partic.,  1820 ;  of  rel.  sen- 
tences, 1832,  1833;  affirmative,  2159; 
expressed  by  quamquam,  etsi, 
tametsi,  2153 ;  expressed  by  quippe, 
1690. 

Copulative, 

words,  use  of,  1644-1661,  1687-1692, 
1 88 1,  2133-2149  ;  combination  of  differ- 
ent, 1662-1666. 

Correlative, 

prons.,  table  of,  695,  1831;  advs., 
table  of,  711,  1831;  sentences,  1831; 
idcirco,  ideo,  &c.,  1855,  1858; 
quoniam  .  .  .  continue,  &c.,  1883; 
quotiens  . .  .  totiens,  &c.,  1886; 
quam  . . .  tarn,  &c.,  1889, 1890;  tam- 
quam  .  .  .  sic,  ita,  1908;  ut  .  .  .  ita, 
item,  &c.,  1937;  adversative,  ut  .  .  . 
ita,  sic,  1938;  conditional,  ut,  ne  .  .  . 
sic,  1964;  tantus  .  .  .  ut,  &c.,  1970; 
quo  .  .  .  e5,  hoc,  1973;  quanto  .  .  . 
tanto,  1973;  dum  .  .  .  subito,  re- 
pente,  iam,  &c.,  1995;  dum,  &c., 
.  .  .  tamdiu,  &c.,  1999;  dum,  &c., 
.  .  .  usque,  &c.,  2004;  quando  .  . . 
turn,  2011;  sic  ...  si,  2015;  si ... 

igitur,  &c.,  2018,  2067;  etsi,  &c 

tamen,  2116;  lacking  in  apod.,  1890, 
1937- 

Correption,  2517. 

Costing, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1274;  with  abl., 
1388-1392. 

Countries; 

names  of,  in  plur.,  1107;  in  ace.  with 
expressions  of  motion,  1161;  used  ad- 
jectively,  1233;  abl.  of,  attached  to  a 
subst.,  1309 ;  denoting  place  from  which, 
1309,  1310;  place  in  or  at  which,  1336, 
1347. 

Cretic, 

defined,  2521 ;  rhythms,  2691-2697. 

Curses, 

duim,  &c.  in,  756. 

Customary, 

action,  expressed  by  pres.,  1588;  ex« 
pressed  by  impf.,  1596. 

Cyclic  feet,  2523. 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Dactyl, 

defined,  2521 ;  cyclic,  2523. 
Dactylic, 

rhythms,  2555-2580;  hexameter, 
2556-2569;  pentameter,  2570-2576; 
tetrameter  acatalectic,  2577;  tetrame- 
ter catalectic,  2578;  trimeter  catalectic, 
2579- 
Dactylo-trochaic  rhythms, 

2675—2681. 
Danger, 

expressions  of,  with  ut,  ne  clauses, 
1957,  1958. 
Dates, 

expressed  by  abl.,  1307;  expressed  by 
loc.,  1307,  1331;  cardinals  and  ordinals 
in,  2419;  marked  by  names  of  consuls, 
2419. 
Dative  case, 

defined,  419:  plur.,  how  formed, 
428  ;  lacking,  see  Defective,  substan- 
tives, lacking  cases. 

-a-  stems,  in  -i,  618-620,  656,  693; 
in  -eis,  440,  443 ;  in  -is  for  -iis,  440 ; 
in  -ais  and  -eis,  441 ;  in  -abus,  442; 
inscriptional  forms,  443;  Greek  nouns, 
444. 

-o-  stems,  in  -i,  618-620, 656, 693  ;  in 
-ais,  -eis,  -ois,  458;  in  -obus,  464; 
inscriptional  forms,  465;  Greek  nouns, 
466. 

Consonant  stems,  in  -e,  501,  507; 
inscriptional  forms,  507;  Greek  nouns, 
508-512. 

-i-  stems,  inscriptional  forms,  564; 
Greek  nouns,  565. 

-U-  stems,  in  -ubus,  592;  inscrip- 
tional forms,  593. 

-e-  stems,  in  -e,  602,  606;  in  -I, 
606 ;  sing.,  of  res,  fides,  160,  602. 

Pronouns,  peculiar  and  inscriptional 
forms,  of  ego,  tu,  sui,  651 ;  of  meus, 
tuus,  suus,  653,  654;  of  hie,  663- 
665 ;  of  ille,  iste,  667,  668 ;  of  lllic, 
istic,  670;  of  is,  672-674,  160;  of 
idem,  677,  678;  of  qui,  quis,  688, 
690. 

Uses  of,  1175-1225;  general,  1175- 
1179. 

The  complementary,  1180-1218;  as 
essential  complement,  1180-1204;  as 
optional  complement,  1205-1218;  made 
subj.  in  pass.,  1480,  1181 ;  with  verbs  of 
intrans.  use  denoting  state,  disposition, 
feeling,  quality,  1181,  1184,  1185  ;  with 
sum  and  a  pred.  noun,  1 183 ;  with  verbs 


Dative  case — continued. 
of  union,  contention,  difference,  1186, 
1357  ;  with  verbs  combined  with  ad- 
versum,  obviam,  praesto,  bene, 
male,  satis,  1187;  with  verbs  of 
intrans.  use  compounded  with  a  prep., 
1188-1191  ;  with  verbs  of  trans,  use, 
1192  ;  with  verbs  of  trans,  use  com- 
pounded with  a  prep.,  1194-1199;  with 
adjs.,  1200-1204  ;  with  verbs  of  trans. 
or  intrans.  use  to  denote  person  or  thing 
interested,  benefited,  harmed,  1205, 
1315  ;  with  similis,  1204;  with  inter- 
jections, 1206;  with  sentences,  1207; 
with  verbs  denoting  "warding  off,  rob- 
bing, ridding,  1209;  with  verbs  of 
motion,  1210  ;  emotional,  1211  ;  of  pos- 
sessor, 1212-1216,  1478,  2181,  2243; 
with  compounds  of  sum,  1212  ;  with 
mih!  est  nomen,  &c.,  1213,  1214; 
of  the  doer  of  an  action,  1215,  1216, 
1478,  2181,  2243;  of  relation,  1217, 
1218. 

The  predicative,  1219-1224;  of  ten- 
dency or  result,  1219-1222;  with  verbs 
of  considering  or  accounting,  1222  ;  of 
purpose  or  intention,  1223-1225. 

Double,  1213,  1214,  1219-1225;  com- 
bined with  ace.,  1199,  1201,  1214,  1221, 
1224;  combined  with  nom.,  1213,  1214, 
1 22 1,  1224;  attached  to  subst.,  1183, 
1208,  1225;  used  with  conscius, 
1265  ;  with  refert,  1278  ;  with  imper- 
sonal verbs  in  pass..  1181  ;  pred.  noun 
in,  2214  ;  of  gerundive  construction  and 
gerund,  2254-2257 ;  supine  in  -u  as, 
2269;  following  supine  in  -um,  2272; 
with  idem,  2373. 

Decasyllabic  Alcaic,  2663. 

Declarations, 

neg.  adv.  in,  1443;  indie,  used  in, 
1493;  verbal  expressions  denoting  abil- 
ity, duty,  propriety,  necessity,  &c.  in, 
1495-1497  ;  confounded  with  questions 
and  exclamations,  1502;  sub jv.  used  in, 
1540-1562;  expressed  by  indie,  in  rel. 
sentence,  1813;  expressed  by  quod, 
1838. 

Declarative, 

sentence,  defined,  1025  ;  in  ind.  disc., 
mood  of,  2312. 

Declension, 
defined,  397. 

Substantives,  432-607;  -a-  stems, 
432-445  ;  -a-  stems,  Greek  nouns,  444, 
445 ;  -P-  stems,  446-466 ;  -o-  stems, 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Declension  —  continued. 
Greek  nouns,  466  ;  cons,  stems,  467- 5 12  ; 
guttural  mute  stems  (-g-,  -C-),  471- 
473  ;  lingual  mute  stems  (-d-,  -t-), 
474-478;  labial  mute  stems  (-b-,  -p-), 
479,  480;  stems  in  -1-,  -n-,  481-486; 
stems  in  -r-,  -S-,  487-493  ;  stems  in 
-U-  or  -v-,  494 ;  cons,  stems,  Greek 
nouns,  508-512;  case  endings^of  cons, 
stems,  495-507,866  Nominative,  &c  ; 
-i-  stems,  513-569;  parisyllables  with 
nom.  in  -is,  517-522  ;  parisyllables  with 
nom.  in -68,523,  524;  parisyllables  with 
stems  in  -bri-,  -cri-,  -tri-,  525  ;  pari- 
syllabic  neuters  with  nom.  in  -e,  526-528; 
imparisyllables  with  stem  in  -ci-,  531  ; 
imparisyllables  with  stem  in  -di-,  532  ; 
imparisyllables  with  stem  in  -ti-,  533 ; 
imparisyllables  with  stem  in  -bi-,534  ; 
imparisyllables  with  stem  in  -pi-,  535  ; 
imparisyllables  with  stem  in  -li-,  536; 
imparisyllables  with  stem  in  -ri-,  537, 
538  ;  imparisyllables  with  stem  in  -si-, 
539 ;  -i-  stems,  Greek  nouns,  565  ; 
case  endings  of  -i-  stems,  540-564,  see 
Nominative,  &c. ;  -u-  stems,  585- 
595  ;  -e-  stems,  596-607. 

Adjectives,  608-643,  432-569;  stems 
in  -o-  and  -a-  ('  three  endings  '),  613- 
620,  432-466  ;  cons,  stems  of  '  two  end- 
ings'  (the  compar.),  621-623,  503,  505, 
507;  cons,  stems  of  'one  ending,' 624- 
626,  467-512,  561  ;  -i-  stems,  627-636, 
529-569 ;  adjs.  used  as  substs.,  558, 
561  ;  numeral  adjs.,  637-643. 

Present  participles,  632,  633,  560, 
562-564. 

Pronouns,  644-694 ;  personal,  644- 
651  ;  reflexive,  644-651  ;  possess.,  652- 
655;  demonstrative,  656-670;  deter- 
minative, 656-659,671-675  ;  of  identity, 
656-659,  676-678  ;  intensive,  656-659, 
679,  680;  rel.,  interrogative,  indef., 
656-659,  681-694. 

See  Gender,  Number,  Case. 
Decreeing, 

see  Resolve. 
Defective, 

substs.,  in  number,  416,  417,  see  also 

477,  489,  493,  5l8,  523,  524,  534,  545  ; 
words  of  4th  decl.,  no  sing.,  588  ;  words 


lacking  in  5th  decl.,  597,  600,  604-607  ; 
adjs.,  in  number,  62?  ;  in  case,  430,  431, 
356  ;  cases  lacking  in  cons,  stems,  472, 


Defective  —  continued. 
623-626 ;    cases  lacking  in   -i-  stems, 
531-537,  627,  634-636;  in  comparison, 
356-360 ;    advs.,    in    comparison,    363, 
364;  prons.,  in  case,  692  ;  verbs,  805-817, 
900,  905,  907,  922-1019. 
Denning, 

ace.,  1140-1146,  1173,  1475- 
Definite, 

perf.,  use   of,  1602,   1605-1613 ;    se- 
quence of,  1717,  1754;  see  Perfect. 

Time,  in  cum  sentences,  1861-1867  ; 
in  sentences  with  ubl,  Ut,  simul  at- 
que,  1933,  1934. 
Definition, 

gen.  of,  1255-1259;  perf.  subjv.  in, 
with  antequam,  1913. 
Degree, 

denoted  by  advs.,  1438 ;  of  compar- 
ison, see  Comparison ;  of  difference, 
see  Difference. 
Delaying, 

verbs    of.    with    qum,    1986;    see 
Hindering. 
Deliberating, 

verbs -of,  with  indirect  question,  1774. 
Deliberation, 

questions  of,  in  pres.  ind.,  1531 ;  in 
fut.,  1531,  1623;  in  subjv.,  1563;  in 
subordinate  sentence,  1731  ;  tense  of, 
in  secondary  sentence,  1753  ;  in  indirect 
question,  1786,  1774. 
Demanding, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1169- 
1171 ;  with  ace.  and  prepositional  phrase, 
1170  ;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2194. 
Demonstrative, 

prons.,  decl.  of,  656-670;  agreement 
of,  1095-1098,  see  Agreement ;  with 
a  compar.,  1326 ;  omitted  in  rel.  sen- 
tence, 1798;  as  connectives,  2128-2130: 
correlative  prons.,  1831  ;  use  of  hie, 
2347-2355;  use  of  iste,  2356,  2357; 
use  of'ille,  2358-2364;  see  hie,  &c. ; 
advs.,  711. 
Denominative, 

denned,  198;  substs.,  2^6-279,  226, 
227,  232 ;  adjs.,  298-360,  287  ;  verbs, 
formation  of,  365-375,  839,  840  :  inflec- 
tion of,  792-797  ;  list  of,  987-1022.  see 
Verbs,  Formation. 
Dentals, 

77 ;  stems,  474~478. 
Dependent, 

see  Subordinate. 


33 


5*3 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Deponents, 

defined,  725,  1486 ;  imper.  of,  297, 
731  ;  prin.  parts  of,  735;  how  desig- 
nated, 736,  737 ;  inflection  of,  798-801  ; 
in  -i,  list  of,  977-986  ;  act.  forms  of, 
798  ;  with  act.  and  pass,  endings,  800, 
1488,  1489;  semi-deponents,  801,  1488; 
perf.  partic.  of,  with  act.  and  pass,  mean- 
ing, 9°7>  1364,  1492;  with  reflexive, 
pass.,  or  reciprocal  force,  1487;  with 
pass,  meaning,  1490;  pass,  of,  how  ex- 
pressed, 1491  ;  perf. with pres.force,228o. 

Deprive, 

verbs  meaning,  with  abl.,  1302-1306. 

Descending  rhythms,  2528. 

Descriptions, 

impf.  in,  1599;  asyndeton  in,  1639; 
in  indie,  in  rel.  sentence,  1813  ;  ex- 
pressed by  abl.  abs.,  1367 ;  expressed 
by  partic.,  2295. 

Desiderative, 

verbs,  definition  and  formation  of, 
375  ;  defective,  810. 

Desire, 

subjv.  of,  1540-1553;  in  coordina- 
tion, 1705-1713;  in  rel.  sentences 
of  purpose,  1817;  in  sentences  with 
potius  quam,  &c.,  1897 ;  in  sen- 
tences of  purpose  with  ut,  1947;  in 
sentences  with  dum,  2005. 

Verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1286  ;  with  pur- 
pose clause,  1950  ;  with  ace.  and  infin., 
2189-2192,  2228. 

See  Wish,  Wishing,  Desirous. 

Desirous, 

adjs.  meaning,  gen.  with,  1263,  1264. 
Determinative, 

compounds,  defined  and  classified, 
382-384. 

Pronouns.,  decl.  of,  656-659,  671-675  ; 
agreement  of,  1094-1098,  see  Agree- 
ment; omitted  in  rel.  sentence,  1798; 
as  connectives,  2128-2130;  correlative 
prons.,  1831  ;  use  and  force  of,  2365- 
2370,  2361  ;  see  is. 

Adverbs,  711. 
Development 

of  vowel  before  cons.,  172;  of  vowel 
between   consonants,     172;    of    cons., 
167;  p  between  m  and  s,  m  and  t, 
167. 
Diaeresis, 

defined,  2542,  2543 ;  bucolic,  2559. 
Dialysis,  2501. 
Diastole,  2505. 


Dicolic  verses,  2535. 
Difference, 

verbs  of,  case  with,  1186  ;  amount  of, 
abl.  of,  i393-!399»  iJ53»  ll$4>  i459>see 
Extent;  quo  .  .  .  eo,  1973. 
Difficult, 

adjs.  meaning,   with   supine    in   -u, 
2274. 
Diiambus, 

defined,  2522. 
Dimeter, 

defined,    2536;    iambic,    2617-2623; 
trochaic,  2643-2646  ;    anapaestic,  2687- 
2689;  cretic,  2697;  bacchiac,  2704. 
Diminutive, 

substs.,    suffixes    forming,    267-278 ; 
meanings  of,  267-270;  gender  of,  270; 
adjs.,  339,  340 ;   formed  from  compar. 
stems,  340;  advs.,  341. 
Diphthongs, 

defined,  47;  the,  49;  origin  of,  48, 

120;  pronunciation  of,  49,  50;  quantity 

of,  47,  125;  quantity  of,  before  a  vowel, 

125  ;  ei  in  inscriptions  to  denote  l,  29,  2. 

Diphthong,   95-101;   change  of  au, 

97;  change  of  ou,  100 ;  change  of  eu, 

101 ;  change  of  ai,  ae,  96 ;  change  of 

ai,   118,   2;   change  of  oi,   oe,  99; 

change  of  ei,  98,  764,  789. 

Dipody, 

defined,  2531 ;  iambic,  2624  ;  trochaic, 
2649;  logaoedic,  2655-2658. 
Direct, 

compound,  defined,  377,  see  Com- 
position; quotation,  1723,  see  Quo- 
tations ;     discourse,     defined,    2308  ; 
question,  see  Questions. 
Direction, 

expressed  by  subjv.,  1547-1551  ;  in- 
troduced by  uti,  ut,  ne,  &c.,  1547; 
expressed  by  fut.,  1624  ;  verbs  of,  subjv. 
coordinated  with,  1708;  introduced  by 
proinde,  proin,  2157. 
Disadvantage, 

dat.  of,  1178,  1205-1210. 
Disappearance, 

of  vowel,  110-113;  initial,  112;  me- 
dial, 1 1 1 ;  final,  1 1 3  ;  of  cons.,  168-171; 
initial,  169;  medial,  170, 659;  final,i7i, 
426,  648,  705. 
Disapprobation, 

questions   of,    1566-1569;    expressed 
by  infin.,  2216. 
Disjunctive, 

words,  use  of,  1667-1675,  2133-2149. 


5*4 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Displeasing, 

expressions    of,    case    with,     1181- 
1185. 
Dispondee, 

2522. 
Disproportion, 

expressed    by    positive,     1454 ;     ex- 
pressed by  compar.,  1460,  1461  ;  corn- 
par,    denoting,    followed    by    quam, 
quam  ut,  quam  qui,  1896. 
Dissimilation, 

of   1  to  r,   to  avoid  repetition   of  a 
liquid,    173,   i  ;  by  dropping  a  sound, 
'73.  2- 
Distance, 

designations  of,  abl.  of  intervallum 
and  spatium  in,  1399;    see  Space, 
Time. 
Distich, 

defined,  2545  ;  elegiac,  2573. 
Distress, 

mental,   verbs  of,  with  gen.,    1283- 
1286  ;  with  loc.  and  abl.,  1339,  1344. 
Distributive, 

numerals,  suffix  of,  317  ;  decl.  of,  643  ; 
list  of,  2404,  2405  ;  some  forms  of, 
2418;  uses  of,  2420-2422;  words,  with 
plur.  subst.,  1080;  with  sing,  and  plur. 
verb,  1080. 
Disyllabic, 

preps.,   position   of,   1434 ;    perfects 
and    perf.  partic.,   quantity   of    penult 
vowel  of,  2434-2436. 
Ditrochee,  2522. 
Doer, 

of  action,   expressed  by  dat.,   1215, 
1216,   1478,  2181,  2243;  expressed  by 
abl.  with  ab,  1318,  1476,  1477,  2243; 
expressed  by  abl.  alone,  1319,  1477. 
Doing, 

verbs  of,  with   quod,   quia,  intro- 
ducing  coincident    action,    1850;    with 
qui,  1826;  with  cum,  1874. 
Double, 

questions,  see  Alternative  ;  class, 
of  rhythms,  2527. 
Doubt, 

questions  of,  in  pres.  indie.,  1531 ; 
in  fut.,  1531,  1623;  in  subjv.,  1563;  in 
subordinate  sentence,  1731 ;  tense  of,  in 
subordinate  sentence,  1753;  in  indirect 
question,  1786;  fortasse,  &c.,  and 
subjv.,  1554;  verbs  of,  loc.  and  abl. 
with,  1339,  1344;  indirect  question 
with,  1774;  with  quin,  1986. 


Dreading, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1286. 
Dual,  415. 
Dubitative, 

see  Appeal. 
Duration, 

of  time,  denoted  by  ace.,  1151-1156, 
1475  !  acc-  °f»  combined  with  a  second 
ace.,  1174;  denoted  by  abl.,  1355. 
Duty, 

verbal  expressions  of,  in  indie.,  1495- 
1497;  in  conditional  periods,  2074, 
2101. 

Easy, 

adjs.  meaning,  cases  with,  1200;  with 
gerundive  construction  or  gerund,  2252 ; 
with  supine  in  -u,  2274. 
Ecthlipsis,  2493. 
Effect, 

suffixes  denoting,  213,  217,  224,  241. 
Effort, 

see  Striving. 
Elegiac  distich,  2573. 
Elegiambus,  2680,  2681. 
Elision, 

within    a   word,    115,  up;  between 
words,   2481-2495;    at   end   of  verse, 
2533,  2568. 
Emotion, 

verbs  of,  with  quod,  quia,  1851; 
with  cum,  1857,  1875;  Wltn  acc>  and 
infin.,  2187,  2188,  2184;  with  perf. 
infin.,  2231. 

Emotional  dative,  1211. 
Emphasizing, 

ace.,  1140-1146,  1173,  1475. 
Enclitics, 

the,  93  ;  defined,  93 ;  accent  of, 
93;  quantity  of,  2433;  -met,  650, 
655  ;  -pte,  655 ;  -ce,  662,  663,  669, 
670,  2015;  dum,  with  imper.,  1573, 
1992  ;  at  end  of  verse,  2568  ;  see  -que, 
&c. 
End, 

of  motion,  see  Motion. 
Endeavour, 

verbs  meaning,  with  infin.,  2169. 
Endings, 

case,  function  of,  398 ;  lacking,  in 
prons.,  645  ;  of  nouns  and  verbs,  short- 
ened in  the  classical  period,  132  ;  'one,' 
'two,'  'three,'  adjs.  of,  see  Adjec- 
tives; see  Person,  Declension, 
Suffix. 


5T5 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Enlargement, 

of    simple    sentence,  1037-1054;    of 
subj.,  1038-1047;  of  pred.,  1048-1054. 
Entreaty, 

expressed  by  imper.,  1571 ;  verbs  of, 
subjv.  coordinated  with,  1708. 
Enumerative  asyndeton,  2126. 
Envy, 

verbs  of,  with  dat.,  1181. 
Epicenes,  411. 
Epistolary, 

impf.,  1601 ;  plup.,  1616. 
Epitrite,  2522. 
Equal  class, 

of  rhythms,  2527. 
Essential, 

complement,  see  Complement. 
Ethical, 

see  Emotional. 
Euripidean  verse,  2644-2646. 
Exchange, 

abl.  of,  1388-1392. 
Exclamation, 

nom.  of,  1117;  ace.  of,  1149,  1150, 
2i  12  ;  gen.  of,  1295;  verbal  expressions 
denoting  ability,  duty,  propriety,  neces- 
sity in,  1495-1497;  indie,  in,  1499; 
confounded  with  questions  and  decla- 
rations, 1502;  introduced  by  prons.  and 
unde,  ub!,  quo,  cur,  qui,  quin, 
quam,  quando,  quotiens,  1526, 
1527;  introduced  by  ut,  1528;  two  or 
more  exclamations  with  one  verb,  1530; 
as  member  of  coordinate  sentence,  1697; 
subordinate,  or  indirect,  1773,  see 
Questions ;  mirum  quantum, 
&c.,  1790;  in  apod,  of  conditional 
sentence,  2018  ;  infin.  of,  2216. 
Exclamatory, 

sentence,    defined,    1025 ;    questions, 
1566-1569. 
Exemplification, 

periods  of,  2054,  2090. 
Exhortation, 

intimated  by  question,  1531;  ex- 
pressed by  subjv.,  1547-1551;  intro- 
duced by  uti,  ut,  ne,  nemo,  nihil, 
&c.,  1547;  expressed  by  imper.,  1571; 
expressed  by  fut,  1624;  verbs  of,'subjv. 
coordinated  with,  1708. 
Expectation, 

expressions  of,   with   si,   Si    forte, 
1777  ;  see  Hope. 
Explanatory, 

cum,  1859,  1874-1880. 


Explosives,  73. 
Extent, 

of  space,  denoted  by  ace.,  1151-1156, 
1475 ;  ace.  of,  combined  with  a  second 
ace..  1174;  with  verbs  of  surpassing, 
1398. 

Faithful, 

adjs.  meaning,  cases  with,  1200. 
Favour, 

verbs  of,  with  dat.,  1181,  1182. 
Fearing, 

verbs  of,  with  indirect  question,  1774, 
1959;  with  ut,  ne  clauses,  1957,  1958; 
with  ace.  and  infin.,  1959;  with  comple* 
mentary  infin.,  1959,  2169. 
Feeling, 

verbs  of,  with  ace.,  1139;  with  gen., 
1283-1286;  with  loc.  and  abl.,  1339, 
1344 ;  animi  with  verbs  and  adjs.  of, 
J339>  see  Emotion,  Mental  dis- 
tress, &c. 
Feet, 

metrical,    defined,    2519;     kinds    of, 
2521,    2522;    cyclic,    2523;    irrational, 
2524;  groups  of,  2531,  2532. 
Feminine, 

gender,  general  rules  of,  407;  for 
cons,  and  -i-  stems,  577-581 ;  caesura, 
2557- 

Figures  of  prosody,  2473-2510. 
Final, 

disappearance,  of  vowel,  113;  of 
cons.,  171. 

Syllable,  vowel  of,  shortened,  132; 
retained  long,  132;  with  accent,  88; 
quantity  of,  2437-2457;  of  verse, 
syllaba  anceps,  2533,  2534. 

e  from  i,  107,  b;  short  vowel  fol- 
lowed by  word  beginning  with  two  con- 
sonants or  double  cons.,  2458. 

Sentences,  defined,  1716;  comple- 
mentary, 1948-1960;  pure,  1948,  .1961- 
1964 ;  tense  of,  after  perf.  definite, 

1754- 
Fitness, 

adj.  suffixes  implying,  298,  302-330; 

adjs.  denoting,  cases  with,   1200;  adjs. 

denoting,  with   gerund  and  gerundive, 

2252. 
Flowers, 

names  of,  gender,  407,  408,  573. 
Forgetting, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1287-1291  ;  with 

ace.,  1288;  with  'nfin.,  2169. 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Formation, 

one  of  the  divisions  of  Latin  grammar, 
treated,  i,  180-396;  defined,  180;  roots 
and  stems,  183-198 ;  of  nouns,  with- 
out formative  suffix,  195,  198,  199 ; 
with  formative  suffix,  195-198,  200- 
203. 

Substantives,  204-279,  296,  308,  309, 
313,  3*4,  333>  3345  primitive,  204-245  ; 
denominative,  246-279,  226,  227,  232; 
suffixes  denoting  agent,  204-211 ;  action, 
212-237,  249 ;  instrument  or  means, 
238-245,  213,  224;  concrete  effect,  213, 
217,  224,  241;  result,  213,  222,  231, 
234-236,  239,  249,  296  ;  collectives,  228, 
249;  quality,  246-264;  person  con- 
cerned, 265,  309 ;  place,  266,  228,  241, 
242,  245,  249,  308,  309,  314,  334; 
diminutive  suffixes,  267-278 ;  suffixes 
forming  patronymics,  279. 

Adjectives,  280-360  ;  primitive,  280- 
297,  305;  denominative,  298-360,  287; 
suffixes  denoting  act.  quality,  281-290, 
293,  294,  296;  pass,  quality,  291-297, 
282,  283  ;  material  or  resemblance,  299- 
301  ;  appurtenance,  302-330 ;  supply, 
331-338;  diminutives,  339,  340;  corn- 
par,  and  superl.  suffixes,  342-360 ; 
suffixes  denoting  place,  317,  321, 
347- 

Adverbs,  diminutives,  341  ;  compar. 
and  superl.  endings,  361-364. 

Verb  stem,  824-919;  variable  vowel, 
824-827 ;  theme,  738-740  ;  of  denomi- 
native verbs,  365-375,  839,  840;  fre- 
quentatives  or  intensives,  371-374  ; 
desideratives,  375  ;  meditatives,  375, 970 ; 
inceptives  or  Inchoatives,  834,  see  In- 
ceptives;  pres.  indie.,  828-840;  pres. 
subjv.,  841-843  ;  imper.,  844-846  ;  impf. 
indie.,  847,  848;  impf.  subjv.,  849,  850  ; 
fut.,  851-853;  perf.  indie.,  854-875; 
perf.  stem  without  suffix,  858-866;  perf. 
stem  in  -s-,  867,  868;  perf.  stem  in 
-v-  or  -u-,  869-875 ;  perf.  subjv.,  876- 
878  ;  perf.  imper.,  879,  813  ;  plup.  in- 
die., 880;  plup.  subjv.,  881  ;  fut.  perf., 
882-884 ;  short  or  old  forms,  in  perf. 
system,  885-893;  infin.,  894-898;  ge- 
rundive and  gerund,  899  ;  supine,  900  ; 
pres.  partic.,  901-903  ;  fut.  partic.,  904, 
905  ;  perf.  partic.,  906-919. 

See  Composition. 
Formative  suffix, 

defined,  195,  see  Suffix. 
Fractions, 

how  expressed,  2424-2428. 


Free, 

verbs  meaning,  with  abl.,  1302-1306 } 
adjs.  meaning,  with  abl.,  1306. 

Frequentative, 

verbs,  definition  and  formation  of, 
37T~374  ?  conative  use  of,  2303. 

Friendly, 

adjs.  meaning,  cases  with,  1200. 

Friendship, 

words  of,  with  gen.,  1203. 

Fulness, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1293 ;  with  abl., 
1386;  adjs.  of,  with  gen.,  1263,  I264* 
1387;  with  abl.,  1387. 

Future  action, 

expressed  by  pres.,  1593,  2026,  2030: 
expressed  by  perf.,  1541,  1549,  1551; 
1558,  1612,  2027. 

Future  Perfect  tense, 

lacking  in  subjv.  and  imper.,  716; 
formation  of,  882-884;  short  or  old 
forms,  885-893;  fuerit  vlcturus, 
803;  infin.,  887;  dat.  of  possessor  with, 
1216,  1478  ;  uses  of,  in  simple  sentence, 
1626-1632,  1607,  1609;  in  prot.  and 
apod.,  of  coincident  action,  1627;  de- 
noting fut.  resulting  state,  1628;  ex- 
pressing rapidity  of  action,  1629 ;  de- 
noting action  postponed,  1630;  denoting 
action  which  will  have  occurred  while 
something  takes  place,  1631 ;  not  differ- 
ing from  fut.,  1632 ;  of  inceptives,  1607; 
pass.,  with  fuero,  &c.,  1609;  perf. 
used  as,  1612  ;  sequence  of,  1717,  1740- 
1746,  1751,  1753;  in  subordinate  sen- 
tence, rel.  time,  1733,  1736;  independ- 
ent, 1738;  with  cum,  1860-1862;  with 
antequam,  priusquam,  1915  ;  with 
ubl,  simul  atque,  &c.,  1934;  with 
dum,  2006 ;  with  donee,  donicum, 
2009;  in  conditional  prot.,  2023,  2059- 
2064;  in  conditional  apod.,  2023,  2031, 
2055,  2062,  2080  ;  represented  by  fore 
and  perf.  partic.,  2234 ;  of  direct  discourse 
represented  by  plup.  or  perf.  subjv.  in 
ind.  disc.,  2324. 

Futures, 

virtual,  1718. 

Future  tense, 

lacking  in  subjv.,  716;  imper.,  716, 
1575;  formation  of,  8^1-853;  -it,  68; 
-5r,  -ar,  68 ;  dat.  of  possessor  with, 
1216, 1478  ;  uses  of,  in  simple  sentence, 
1619-1625;  of  fut.  action,  1619;  ex- 
pressing prediction,  will,  threat,  &c., 
1619;  of  diffident  assertion,  1620;  in 


51? 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Future  tense  —  continued. 
predictions,  1621 ;  in  asseverations,  1622 ; 
in  questions  of  appeal,  1623;  expressing 
exhortation,  request,  command,  &c., 
1624;  sequence  of,  1717,  1740-1746, 
I75I>  I753>  m  subordinate  sentence, 
1625;  fut.  perf.  with  force  of,  1632; 
rel.  time,  1733-1735;  independent, 
1738;  with  cum,  1860-1862;  with 
antequam,  priusquam,  1913, 1916  ; 
with  ubf,  simul  atque,  &c.,  1934; 
with  dum,  donee,  quoad,  quam- 
diu,  1996,  2000,  2002,  2009 ;  in  con- 
ditional prot.,  2023,  2052-2058 ;  in 
conditional  apod.,  2023,  2030,  2037, 
2045,  2054,  2061,  2079,  2086;  periphras- 
tic, in  conditional  prot.,  2092,  2108;  in 
conditional  apod.,  2074,  2081,  2087, 
2093,  2097»  2IO°  >  °f  direct  discourse 
represented  by  impf.  or  pres.  subjy. 
in  ind.  disc.,  2324  ;  infin.,  see  Infini- 
tive ;  partic.,  see  Participles. 

Gall  iambic,  2714-2716. 

Gender, 

kinds  of,  402;  defined,  403;  nouns, 
defined,  402,  398;  mobile  nouns,  409; 
nouns  of  common,  410;  epicenes,  411 ; 
variable,  413,  586,  597;  general  rules 
of,  402-413;  of  diminutives,  270;  of 
inanimate  things,  403 ;  of  Greek  words, 
570;  of  -a-  stems,  432,  433;  of  -o- 
stems,  446,  447;  general  rules  of,  for 
cons,  and  -i-  stems,  570-584;  of  cons, 
stems,  467,  471-494  5  'of  -1'  stems,  513, 
5*7-539,  545?  of  -u"  stems>  585>  5^6, 
588 ;  of  -e-  stems,  596,  597 ;  agreement 
of  adj.  and  partic.  in,  1082-1098;  agree- 
ment of  rel.  pron.  in,  1082-1098,  1801- 
1811,  see  Relative  ;  agreement  of  de- 
monstrative and  determinative  prons. 
in,  1082-1098,  see  Demonstrative, 
Determinative  ;  agreement  of  subst. 
in,  1077-1081 ;  see  Neuter. 

General, 

truth,  expressed  by  pres.,  1588;  ex- 
pressed by  impf.,  1599;  fut.  in,  1620; 
in  subordinate  sentence,  tense  of,  1748, 
1760;  with  antequam,  priusquam, 
1912-1914;  introduced  parenthetically 
by  Ut,  1940;  introduced  by  sic,  ita, 
2159;  conditions,  2034,  2035,  2044,  2050, 
2054.  2069-2071 ;  subj.,  in  ist  pers.  plur. 
and  2d  pers.  sing.,  omitted,  1030. 

Genitive  case, 

defined,  419 ;  phir.,  how  formed,  427; 
Stem  of  noun  seen  in,  421  ;  stem  of  noun 


Genitive  case  —  continued. 
indicated  by,  421 ;  lacking,  see  Defec- 
tive ;  stem  vowel  of  -o-  stems  length- 
ened in,  56,  462. 

-a-  stems,  in  -ius,  -ius,  162,  618- 
620,  656,  657,  694;_in  -ai,  160,  437, 
in  -as,  437;  in  -um,  439;  inscrip- 
tional  forms,  443;  Greek  nouns,  443- 

445- 

-o-  stems,  in  -Ius,  -ius,  127,  7; 
6i_8_-62o,  656,  657,  694;  in  -ai,  -ei, 
-61,  458;  of  words  in  -ius,  -ium, 
form  and  accent  of,  87,  456,  457;  in 
-um,  -6m,  462,  463,  465,  640,  641, 
643;  inscriptional  forms,  465;  Greek 
nouns,  466. 

Consonant  stems,  in  -uum,  492,  506; 
in  -om,  494,  507;  in  -ium,  477,  478, 
489,  492,  494,  506,  507 ;  inscriptional 
forms,  507;  Greek  nouns,  508-512. 

-i-  stems,  in  -um,  527-337,  563, 629, 
631,  633,  636;  inscriptional  forms,  564  ; 
Greek  nouns,  565. 

-U-  stems,  in  -uis,  590;  in  -ti,  590; 
in  -om,  591 ;  in  -um,  591 ;  inscrip- 
tional forms,  593. 

-e-  stems,  in  -e,  602,  606;  in  -es, 
602,  606;  in  -i,  602,  606;  of  res, 
fides,  160,  602. 

Present  participles,  in  -um,  563. 

Pronouns,  peculiar  and  inscriptional, 
forms,  of  ego,  tu,  sui,  646,  649;  of 
meus,  tuus,  suus,  653;  of  hie.  663, 
665 ;  of  ille,  iste,  667,  668 ;  of  illic, 
istic,  670;  of  is,  672-674;  of  idem, 
677 ;  of  qui,  quis,  688,  690 ;  of  neu- 
ter, 694. 

Uses  of,  1226-1295;  general,  1226.  * 

With  substantives,  1227-1262;  com- 
bined with  one  or  more  genitives  limit- 
ing same  subst.,  1228;  with  limited 
subst.  omitted,  1229;  of  the  subj., 
cause,  origin,  owner,  1232-1238,  1207; 
of  personal  and  reflexive  prons.,  1234; 
of  word  in  apposition  with  possess, 
pron.,  1235;  as  pred.  with  verbs  mean- 
ing am,  belong,  become,  &c.,  1236, 
1237;  with  communis,  proprius, 
ahenus,  sacer,  totus,  1238 ;  of 
quality,  attributively  and  predicatively, 
1239,  1240;  partitive,  1241-1254;  with 
advs.,  1242,  1248,  1253,  1254 ;  partitive, 
with  adjs.,  1245 ;  partitive,  in  pred., 
1251;  partitive,  nostrum,  vestrum, 
2335  ;  of  definition,  1255-1259 ;  with 
causa,  gratia,  nomine,  ergo,  1257; 
with  quidquid  est,  &c.,  1259;  the 


518 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Genitive  case  —  continued. 
objective,    1260-1262;    objective,  nos- 
tri,  vestri,  2335. 

With  adjectives,  1263-1270,  1203 
1204;  with  conscius  and  dat.,  1265; 
with  partic.,  1266;  with  similis,  1204; 
with  dignus,  indignus,  1269. 

With  verbs,  1271-1294;  with  verbs _pf 
valuing,  &c.,  1271-1275,  1279;  with  re- 
fert  and  interest,  1276-1279 ;  with  ju- 
dicial verbs,  1280-1282;  with  miseret, 
paenitet,  piget,  pudet,  taedet, 
1283, 1284;  withmisereor,  misered, 
miseresco,  1285;  with  personal  verbs 
of  desiring,  loathing,  admiring,  dread- 
ing, 1286;  with  verbs  of  memory,  1287- 
1291;  with  verbs  of  participation  and 
mastery,  1292;  with  verbs  of  fulness 
and  want,  1293;  with  verbs  of  separat- 
ing and  abstaining,  1294. 

Of  exclamation,  1295  ;  with  mihl 
est  nomen,  nomen  do,  &c.,  1213, 
1214;  with  opus,  1383;  with  post 
and  intra  in  expressions  of  time, 
I3q6;  with  preps.,  1406,  1413,  1419, 
1420,  1232  ;  possess.,  with  infin.,  1237, 
2208,  221 1,  1232  ;  of  gerundive  construc- 
tion and  gerund,  2258-2264,  2164. 

Genus, 

far,  duplex,  sescuplex^  2527. 

Gerund. 

no  plur.  of,  416;  a  verbal  noun,  732, 
2237;  formation  of,  899;  dat.  of  doer  of 
action  with,  1215,  1478,  2243;  abl.  with 
ab  with,  2243  >  in  reflexive  sense, 
1482;  treated,  2237-2268;  character  of, 
2237-2239 ;  with  and  without  obj., 

2241,  2242;     of   verbs    of   trans,    use, 

2242,  2255,    2259>   2265 ;    use  of  ace. 
of,  with   ad,  2252,   2164;  with   other 
preps.,    2253;    use    of   dat.    of,   2255, 
2257;    in    gen.,    2259;    denoting    pur- 
pose,  2263 ;     with    causa   expressing  | 
purpose,  2164;   use   °f  abl.   of,   2265- 
2268 ;     denoting    means,    cause,    &c., 
2266;    with    preps.,    2267;    in   abl.    of 
separation,  2268. 

Gerundive, 

a  verbal  noun,  732,  2237;  formation 
of,  899,  288 ;  originally  neither  act  nor 
pass.,  288,  2238;  dat.  of  possessor  with, 
1215,  1478,  2243;  abl.  with  ab  with, 
2243;  treated,  2237-2268;  character  of, 
2237-2239;  the  construction,  2240;  use 
of  nom.  of,  2243-2249,  2251;  with 
sum,  2243;  inflection  of,  with  sum, 


Gerundive  —  continued. 
804 ;  with  sum  in  conditional  periods, 
2101;  fruendus,  fungendus,  &c., 
2244;  habeo  with,  2245;  impersonally, 
2246,  2180,  2244;  impersonally  with 
obj.,  2247;  adjectively,  288,  2248;  de- 
noting possibility,  2249;  with  pass., 
2251;  use  of  ace.  of,  2250-2253,  2243; 
with  verbs,  2250;  with  ad,  2252,  2164; 
with  other  preps.,  2253;  use  of  dat.  of, 
2254,  2256,  1208;  use  of  gen.  of,  2258- 
2264;  witn  subst.  or  adj.,  2258,  2259; 
with  nostri,  &c.,  2260,  2261 ;  predi- 
cately  with  sum,  2262;  with  causa 
expressing  purpose,  2164;  alone,  denot- 
ing purpose,  2263;  with  judicial  verbs, 
2264 ;  use  of  abl.  of,  2265-2268 ;  denot- 
ing means,  cause,  &c.,  2266;  with  preps., 
2267 ;  in  abl.  of  separation,  2268 ;  with 
compar.  expression,  2268. 

Giving, 

verbs  of,  subjv.  coordinated  with, 
1712;  with  gerundive  construction, 
2250. 

Glides,  consonantal,  167. 

Glyconic,  2660-2662. 

Gnomic,  see  Often. 

Gradation, 

quantitative  vowel,  135  ;  qualitative, 
145. 

Grave  accent,  90. 

Greek, 

characters  of  the  alphabet,  17,  18 ; 
words,  eu  in,  101 ;  changed  in  Latin, 
172,  2;  quantity  in,  125;  127,  8,  9; 
patronymics,  279;  nouns,  gender  of, 
406,  408,  570 ;  nouns  of  -a-  decl.,  forms 
of,  443-445 ;  of  -o-  decl.,  466  ;  of  cons, 
decl.,  508-512  ;  of  -i-  decl.,  565;  idiom, 
imitated  in  Latin  with  dat.  of  volens, 
&c.,  1218;  ace.,  see  Part  concerned. 

Grief, 

verbs  of,  with  quod,  quia,  1851  ; 
with  cum,  1851,  1875;  with  ace.  and 
infin.,  2187,  2188,  2184. 

Gutturals, 

44,  77  ;  guttural  mute  stems,  decl.  of, 
471-473- 

Haplology,  179. 
Happening, 

verbs  of,  case  with.  1181-1185;  qui 

with,  1826,  1850;  quod  with,  introduc- 
ing coincident  action,  1850  ;  cum  with, 
1874,  1850  ;  with  result  clause,  1965  ; 
with  result  clause,  how  translated,  1966. 


519 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Hardening,  2503. 
Harming, 

verbs  of,  case  with,  1205-1210. 
Having, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1167. 
Hearing, 

verbs  of,  in  pres.  of  past  action,  1592 ; 
with  indirect  question,  1774. 
Helping, 

expressions  of,  case  with,  1181-1185. 
Hemiolic  class, 

of  rhythms,  2527. 

Hendecasyllabic  Alcaic,  2667, 2668. 
Hendecasyllable,  2664,  2665. 
Hephthemimeral  caesura,  2544. 
Hephthemimeris,  2531. 
Hesitate, 

verbs    meaning,    with    quin,    1987; 
with  infin.,  2169. 
Hexameter, 

defined,    2536;    dactylic,    2556-2569; 
bacchiac,  2705. 
Hexapody,  2531. 
Hiatus, 

w  thin    a    word,    114-116;    between 
•  '-rls.  247^-2480 ;  at  end  of  verse,  2533. 
Hidden  quantity,  2459-2463. 
Hiding, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1169- 
1171 ;  with  ace.  and  prepositional  phrase, 
1170. 
Hindering, 

verbs  of,  with  ne,  1960,  1977;  with 
quominus,  1960,  1977 ;  with  quin, 
1986;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2203;  with 
ace.  of  gerundive  construction  or  gerund, 
2252. 
Hipponactean  verse, 

2597-2600,    2639-2641;    strophe,    in 
Horace,  2721. 
Hiring, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1274 ;  with  abl., 
1388-1392. 
Historical, 

perf.,  1602-1604,  see  Perfect ;  infin., 
see    Intimation;    pres.,  see   Vivid 
narration. 
Hope, 

expressions  of,  with   si,   si   forte, 
1777;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2186;  with 
pres.  infin.,  2186. 
Horace, 

lyric  metres  of,  2718-2737,  2739. 
Hortatory, 
see  Desire. 


Hostility, 

words  of,  with  gen.,  1203. 
Hypothesis, 

expressed    by   abl.    abs.,   1367;    ex- 
pressed by  partic.,  2295  ;  variation   of 
prot.,  2109-2111. 
Hypermetrical  verse,  2568. 

lambelegus,  2678,  2679. 

Iambic, 

words,  last  syllable  of,  shortened  in 
verse,  129;  shortening,  law  of,  129, 
2470;  rhythms,  2581-2627;  trimeter 
(senarius),  2583-2596 ;  choliarnbus, 
2597-2600;  trimeter  catalectic,  2601- 
2603  ;  tetrameter  acatalectic,  2604-2609 ; 
septenarius,  2610-2616  ;  dimeter  acata- 
lectic, 2617-2620  ;  dimeter  catalectic, 
2621-2623;  acatalectic  dipody  and  cata- 
lectic tripody,  2624 ;  versus  Reizianus, 
2625,  2626 ;  trimeter,  in  Horace,  2719 ; 
strophe,  in  Horace,  2720. 

Iambus,  2521. 

Ictus, 

2511  ;  in  combination  with  word 
accent,  2548. 

Identity, 

pron.  of,  decl.  of,  676-678;  use  of, 
2371-2373  ;  see  idem. 

Illative, 

words,  use  of,  2133,  2154-2158. 

Illustrations, 

ut  in,  1941 ;  introduced  by  nam, 
2155. 

Imparisyllables, 

defined,  469 ;  decl.  of,  cons,  stems, 
471-512;  -i-  stems,  529-569;  gender 
of,  571-584- 

Imperative, 

with  short  final  vowel.  130.4;  ten^e 
of,  716,  1  =  75;  of  dico,  duco,  facio, 
113,  846;  of  compounds  of  duco,  846; 
accent  of  compounds  of  die,  due,  88; 
endings  of,  297,  731 ;  in  -d,  748  ;  forma- 
tion of,  844-846  ;  perf.,  879,  813  ;  sing., 
of  more  than  one,  1075  >  with  quin, 
1527;  in  commands,  1571-1^80;  ac- 
companied by  amabS,  age,  sane,  &c., 
1572,  1573,  1992;  in  protasis  of  con- 
ditional sentence,  1574,  2032  2038, 
2056,  2063  ;  use  of  third  person  and 
longer  forms,  1575-1578  ;  the  fut., 
1575 ;  fac,  fac  ut,  cura  ut,  vide, 
&c.,  1579;  periphrastic  perf.  pass., 
1580;  in  prohibitions,  1581-1586;  ndn 


520 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Imperative  —  continued. 

used  with,  1582;  noil,  1583;  fuge, 
parce,  mitte,  &c.,  with  infin.,  1584; 
cave,  cave  ne,  fac  ne,  &c.,  1585  ; 
in  laws,  treaties,  &c.,  1575,  1586;  asyn- 
deton in,  1641  ;  in  coordination,  1574, 
1697,  1710-1712,  1787;  primary,  1717; 
sentence,  defined,  1025;  in  ind.  disc., 
2312. 

Imperfect  tense, 

indicative,  formation  of,  847,  848 ;  -at, 
1^2;  dat.  of  possessor  with,  1216,  1478; 
uses  of,  in  simple  sentence,  1594-1601, 
1495-1497;  of  action  not  performed  in 
the  past,  1495  ;  of  action  not  performed 
at  present  time,  1497;  of  past  action 
going  on,  1594;  of  past  action  lasting 
while  something  occurs,  1595 ;  of  re- 
peated or  customary  action,  1596;  of 
past  action  still  continued  in  past,  1597  ; 
of  action  suddenly  recognized,  1598  ;  in 
descriptions  and  general  truths,  1599  ;  in 
letters  and  messages,  1601  ;  in  conative 
use,  2302  ;  sequence  of,  1717,  1740-1745, 
1747,  1760,  2322,2328;  in  subordinate 
sentence,  rel.  time.  1733-1735;  indepen- 
dent, 1738 ;  with  cum,  1860, 1861, 1864, 
1865 ;  with  antequam,  priusquam, 
1918  ;  with  postquam,  ubi,  ut,  &c., 
19^0,  1932,  1933;  with  dum,  donee, 
quoad, ~quamdiu,  1997,  2001,  2002, 
2009;  in  conditional  prot.,  2023,  2042- 
2047,  2068;  in  conditional  apod.,  2023, 
2028,  2044,  2050,  2101,  2102,  2104,  2106. 
Subjunctive,  formation  of,  849,  850  ; 
-et,  132 ;  in  wishes,  1544,  1545;  in  ex- 
pressions of  obligation  or  necessity, 
1552;  of  action  conceivable,  1559,  1560, 
1565;  of  past  action,  1545,  1559,  1563, 
1565,  1567,  1569;  of  repeated  action, 
1730  ;  in  subordinate  sentence,  following 
secondary,  1747,  1762,  1766,  1771,  2322; 
referring  to  fut.  time,  1743,  1749,  2324; 
following  primary,  1751,  i75S>  2329* 
following  pres.  of  vivid  narration  and 
pres.  of  quotation,  1752;  following  perf. 
definite,  1754;  following  perf.  infin.  or 
perf.  partic.,  1767;  secondary,  1762; 
with  indef.  rel.  pron.  or  adv.,  1814; 
with  cum,  1872,  1873;  witn  quo- 
tiens,  quotienscumque,  1887; 
with  antequam,  priusquam,  1914, 
1917,  1919,  1920;  with  postea  quam, 
postquam,  &c.,  1924;  with  dum, 
donee,  quoad,  quamdiu,  1997, 


2002,     2003,     2005,     2007-2009;     with 
modo,  2003;  in  conditional  prot.  of 


Imperfect  tense  —  continued. 

indeterminate  protases,  2024,  2071, 
2089;  in  conditional  prot.  of  action  non- 
occurrent,  2091,  2092,  2094-2097 ;  in 
conditional  apod,  of  indeterminate  pro- 
tases, 2024,  2040,2047,2051,  2068,2071, 
2073,  2o82>  2o88,  2089;  m  conditional 
apod,  of  action  non-occurrent,  2091, 
2092,  2094,  2098;  with  quasi,  tam- 
quam  si,  &c.,  2120;  in  conditional 
apod,  of  direct  discourse,  how  repre- 
sented in  ind.  disc.,  2331-2334. 

Impersonal, 

verbs,  forms  of,  815-817;  defined, 
1034;  classified,  815,816, 1034;  in  pass., 
with  dat.,  1181;  used  personally,  1181, 
1284;  of  mental  distress,  with  gen., 
1283;  verbs  of  trans,  use  used  as,  1479; 
verbs  of  intrans.  use  used  as,  724,  763, 
1479;  with  infin.  as  subj.,  2208-2210; 
use  of  abl.  of  perf.  partic.,  1372;  in 
with  supine,  2273;  construction,  with 
verbs  of  perceiving,  knowing,  thinking, 
saying,  2177-2182;  fruendum,  fun- 
gendum,  &c.,  2244;  °f  other  gerun- 
dives, 2180,  2246,  2247. 

Imprecation, 

expressed  by  imper.,  1571  ;  in  verse, 
2549. 

Inceptives, 

defective,  808;  formation  of,  834; 
the,  927,  939,  965,  968,  976,  980,  984; 
meaning  of  perf.  of,  1607;  quantity  of 
vowel  preceding  -SCO,  2462. 

Inchoatives, 

see  Inceptives. 

Incomplete  action, 

expressed  by  gerundive  construction, 
2240:  expressed  by  perf.  partic.,  2280; 
see  Continued. 

Indeclinable, 

adis.,  431,  637,  642;  centum,  637; 
see  Defective. 

Indefinite, 

advs.,  711;  prons.,  decl.  and  list  of, 
658,  659,  681-694;  adj.  and  subst. 
forms  of,  686;  abl,  qui,  quicum,  689; 
table  of  correlative  prons.,  695  ;  ques- 
tions introduced  by  ecquis,  &c.,  1509; 
nescio  quis,  nescio  unde,  scio  ut, 
&c.,  1788.  1789;  rel.  prons.  and  advs., 
followed  by  indie.,  1814;  use  of,  2388- 
2403,  see  quis,  &c. 

Use  of  2nd  pers.  sing.,  in  commands 
and  prohibitions,  1550,  1551;  of  action 
conceivable,  1556,  1558,  1559;  of  re- 


521 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Indefinite  —  continued. 
peated  action,  1730;  in  cum  sentences 
1859,  1860;  with  antequam,  prius- 
quam,  1912;  with  postquam,  ubl, 
ut,  &c.,  1924;  with  sive  .  .  .  sive, 
2019;  in  conditional  sentences,  2070. 

Antecedent,  omitted,  1799;  multi, 
quidam,  &c.,  used  with  sunt  qui,  &c., 
1822;  abl.  qui  used  with  quippe,  ut, 
1828;  adv.,  quamquam,  1899;  adv., 
quamvis,  1903;  adv.,  quamlibet, 
1907;  use  of  ut  quisque,  1939;  use  of 
quo  quisque,  1973;  adv.,  quando, 
2010;  time,  with  quando,  2011 ;  time, 
denoted  by  impf.  subjv.  of  action  non- 
occurrent,  2091;  subj.,  of  infin.,  not 
expressed,  2212;  expressed,  2212;  un- 
expressed, with  pred.  noun  in  ace., 
2213;  in  ist  pers.  plur.  and  2nd  pers. 
sing.,  omitted,  1030. 

Independent, 

time,  of  subordinate  sentence,  1738, 
1744. 

Indeterminate, 

meaning,  verbs  of,  1035;  w^tn  pred. 
nom.,  forming  pred.,  1035;  rel.  agreeing 
with  pred.  subst.,  1806;  period,  defined, 
2024 ;  protases,  defined,  2023  ;  treated, 
2025-2090,  see  Conditional;  in  pres. 
or  perf.  subjv.  in  ind.  disc,  after  secon- 
dary, 2328;  apodoses  to,  in  ind.  disc., 

Indicative  mood, 

tenses  of,  716  ;  how  translated,  717. 

Formation  of  tenses  of,  pres.,  828- 
840;  impf.,  847,  848;  perf.,  854-875; 
stem  without  suffix,  858-866  ;  stem  in 
-S-,  867,  868 ;  stem  in  -v-  or  -u-, 
869-875;  fut.,  851-853;  plup.,  880; 
fut.  perf.,  882-884 ;  short  or  old  forms, 
885-893. 

Uses  of,  in  declarations,  1493  >  tne 
neg.  of,  1494 ;  in  verbal  expressions  de- 
noting ability,  duty,  propriety,  neces- 
sity, &c.,  1495-1497;  in  questions  and 
exclamations,  1499-1533,  see  Ques- 
tions ;  use  of  tenses  in  simple  sentence, 
1587-1633,  see  Present,  &c. ;  in 
subordinate  sentence,  1732-1739;  tenses 
of,  sequence  after,  1717,  1746-1761; 
general  rule  for  indie,  in  subordinate 
sentence,  1721;  in  ind.  disc.,  1729, 
2318;  with  si,  si  forte,  1777;  with 
nesciS  quis,  &c.,  1788,  1789;  with 
mirum  quantum,  &c.,  1790;  in  rel. 
sentence  equivalent  to  conditional  prot., 
1812  ;  in  rel.  sentence  of  simple  declara- 


Indicative  mood  —  continued. 
tion  or  description,  1813;  in  rel.  sen- 
tence introduced  by  indef.  pron.  or  adv., 
1814;  with  sunt  qui,  &c.,  1823;  with 
qui  tamen,  1825;  in  rel.  sentence  re- 
sembling causal  sentence,  1826;  with 
quippe  qui,  ut  qui,  ut  pote  qui, 
1827  ;  with  quippe  qui  (adv.),  ut  qui, 
1828;  quod  attinet  ad,  &c.,  1830; 
with  quod,  quia,  1838-1858;  with 
cum,  1859-1871,  1873-1876,  1881 ; 
with  quoniam,_i  882-1 884;  with  quo- 
tiens,  quotienscumque,  1885, 
1886;  with  quam,  1888-1895  ;  with 
quantum,  ut,  1892;  with  quam- 
quam, 1899,  1900;  with  quamvis, 
1905,  1906;  with  tamquam,  1908; 
with  quemadmodum,  1908 ;  with 
antequam,  priusquam,  1911-1921; 
with  pridie  quam,  postridie  quam, 
1922  ;  with  postquam,  ubl,  ut,  cum 
primum,  1923-1934;  with  uti,  ut, 
1935-1946;  with  ubf,i97i  ;  with  quo, 
qui,  1972,  1973,  1976 ;  with  quanto, 
1973;  with  dum,  donee,  quoad, 
quamdiu,  1991-2009 ;  with  quando, 
2010-2014;  in  conditional  periods  of  in- 
determinate protases,  2023,  2025-2071, 
2074,  2078-2081,  2086,  2087,  2090;  in 
conditional  periods  of  action  non-occur- 
rent,  2092,2097,  2100-2108,  2112-2114; 
with  etsi,  tametsi,  tamenetsi, 
etiamsi,  si,  2116. 
Indirect  compound, 

defined,  377,  see  Composition. 
Indirect  discourse, 

defined,  1723,  2309;  verbs  introduc- 
ing, 1724,  2309;  with  main  verb  not 
expressed,  1725,  2310,  2319;  verb  of 
saying,  introduced  by  qui,  quod, 
cum,  put  illogically  in  subjv.,  1727, 
2320;  subjv.  of  attraction,  1728; 
sequence  of  tenses  in,  1770-1772;  in 
quod  sentences,  1838,  2319;  in  quia 
sentences,  2319 ;  in  quoniam  sen- 
tences, 1882-1884 ;  in  quamquam 
sentences,  1901 ;  in  tamquam  sen-  • 
tences,  1909 ;  in  antequam,  prius- 
quam sentences,  1916,  1919,  i92i_; 
in  sentences  with  postquam,  ubl, 
ut,  &c.,  1924;  with  non  dubito, 
1987;  with  dum,  donee,  quoad, 
quamdiu,  1994, 1995,  2005,  2007,  2008 ; 
in  sentences  with  quando,  2010;  fut. 
perf.  of  main  sentence  how  represented 
in,  2234;  mood  of  main  sentence  in, 
2312-2314 ;  declarative  sentences  in, 


522 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Indirect  discourse  —  continued. 
2312;  imper.  sentences  in,  2312;  in- 
terrogative sentences  in,  23 1 2  ;  rhetorical 
questions  in,  2313;  original  subjv.  ques- 
tions in,  2314;  mood  of  subordinate 
sentences  in,  1722-1729,  2315-2320; 
indie,  in,  1729,  1995,  2318;  rel.  sen- 
tence equivalent  to  main  sentence  in 
ace.  with  infin.,  2316;  sentences  intro- 
duced by  conjunctive  particles  in  ace. 
with  infin.,  2317;  tense  of  infin.  in, 
2321;  tense  of  subjv.  in,  2322-2324; 
fut.  and  fut.  perf.  of  subordinate  sen- 
tence how  represented  in,  2324;  use  of 
prons.  in,  2325,  2341,  2342;  conditional 
protases  in,  2326-2329;  conditional 
apodoses  in,  2330-2334;  see  Infini- 
tive. 

Indirect  object, 

see  Complement. 
Indirect  question, 

see  Questions. 
Induced  lengthening, 

122. 

Infinitive, 

in  -e,  -e,  134,  2  ;  gender  of,  412 ;  the 
infinitives,  verbal  nouns,  732,  2160- 
2163;  fut.  act.  and  pass,  and  perf.  pass., 
732,  898,  2273 ;  short  or  old  forms  of, 
885-893;  the  fut.  perf.,  887;  formation 
of,  894-898 ;  pass,  in  -ier,  897. 

Use  of,  treated,  2160-2236;  origin 
and  character  of,  2160-2163;  old  and 
poetical  use  of,  2164-2166;  of  purpose, 
2164,  2165  ;  with  adjs.,  2166;  ordinary 
use  of,  2167-2215;  the  complementary, 
2168-2171,  2223,  1953;  ace.  with,  2172- 
2203;  ace.  with,  origin  of  construction 
of,  1134,  2172,  2173  ;  ^h  verbs  of  per- 
ceiving, knowing,  thinking,  saying, 
2175-2184,  2219,  2226  :  with  verbs  of 
accusing,  2185;  with  verbs  of  hoping, 
promising,  threatening,  2186;  with 
verbs  of  emotion,  2187,  2188,  2184;  with 
verbs  of  desire,  2189-2192,  2228 ;  with 
verbs  of  resolving,  2191 ;  with  verbs  of 
demanding,  2194 ;  with  suadeo,  per- 
suadeo,  precor,  2195  »  witn  veros  of 
accomplishing,  2196 ;  with  verbs  of 
teaching  and  training,  2197;  with  verbs 
of  bidding,  forbidding,  allowing,  2198- 
2202 ;  with  verbs  of  hindering,  2203. 
1960;  as  subst.  ace.,  2204-2206;  as  subj., 
2207-2215;  of  exclamation,  2216;  use  of 
pres.,  2218-222?  2236;  use  of  perf., 


Infinitive  —  continued. 
2218,  2220,  2223-2231 ;  use  of  fut., 
2218,  2232-2236;  fut.  pass.,  use  of, 
2273 ;  with  verbs  signifying  represent, 
2299;  in  declarative  sentences  in  ind. 
disc.,  2312;  in  rhetorical  questions  in 
ind.  disc.,  2313  ;  in  rel.  sentences  equiva- 
lent to  main  sentences  in  ind.  disc., 
2316;  in  conjunctive  particle  sentences 
in  ind.  disc.,  2317;  force  of  tenses  in 
ind.  disc.,  2321;  use  of  tenses  in  con- 
ditional apodoses  in  ind.  disc.,  2330- 
2334;  use  of  reflexive  pron.  in  con- 
struction of  ace.  with  infin.,  2338-2340 ; 
partic.  in  agreement  with,  1373;  act. 
and  pass.,  with  forms  of  coepi  and 
desino,  1483;  with  forms  of  pos- 
sum, queo,  nequeo,  1484;  with 
noli,  fuge,  parce,  mitte,  &c.,  1583, 
1584;  of  intimation,  1534-1539;  use_d 
interrogatively,  1538;  after  cum,  ubl, 
ut,  postquam,  1539,  1868,  1869, 
1924;  after  donee,  2009;  sequence 
after,  1717,  1766-1769;  with  dignus, 
indignus,  idoneus,  aptus,  1819; 
with  quam,  1898  ;  with  verbs  of 
fearing,  1959 ;  with  sequitur,  effici- 
tur,  1965;  with  non  dubitS,  1987. 

Inflection, 

defined,  397;  of  the  noun,  398-712, 
see  Gender,  Number,  Case,  De- 
clension ;  of  the  verb,  713-1022,  see 
Conjugation,  Formation,  Verbs. 

Influence, 

abl.  of,  1316-1319;  otherwise  ex- 
pressed, 1317;  see  Inducing. 

Initial, 

disappearance,  of  vowel,  1 12  ;  of  cons., 

T  1.69-. 

Injuring, 

expressions  of,  case  with,  1181-1185. 

Inscriptions, 

cons,  i,  how  represented  in,  29,  2 ;  i 
longa  in,  24;  long  vowel,  how  repre- 
sented in,  29  ;  the  apex  in,  29 ;  ou  in, 
zoo  ;  ai  in,  96 ;  e  in,  29,  i ;  oi,  oe,  ei 
in,  99;  final  m  dropped  in,  61,  443, 
465,  564 ;  final  s  dropped  in,  465, 
507,  564,  593;  ablatives  in  -ad,  -6d, 
-id,  -ud,  in,  426,  443,  465,  507,  593; 
case  forms  of  -a-  decl.  in.  443 ;  of  -o- 
decl.  in,  465;  of  cons.  decl.  in  507; 
of  -i-  decl.  in,  564 ;  of  -u-  decl.  in, 
593;  of  ego,  tu,  sui  in,  651;  of 
meus,  tuus,  suus  in,  654;  of  me  in, 
665;  of  ille  in,  668;  of  is  in,  674;  of 


523 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Inscriptions  — continued. 
Idem  in,  678;  of  qui,  quis  in,  690; 
person  endings  in,  729;  form  of  sum 
in,   748;    form  of  possum   in,    753; 
forms  of  CO  in,  764,  765 ;  form  of  tull 
in,  781;   fut.  perf.  in,  884,  888;    perf. 
subjv.  in,  877,  887;  pass,  infin.  in,  897, 
965;  use  of  nom.  in,  1114. 
Instrument, 

suffixes  denoting,  238-245,  213,  224; 
abl.  of,  1377-1384,  1476,  1477. 
Instrumental  case, 

meaning  of,  1300;  uses  of,  1356-1399, 
see  Ablative. 
Intensive, 

verbs,    definition   and   formation    of, 
371-374;  Pr<>n.,  decl.  of,  656,  657,  679, 
680;  use  of,  2374-2384;  see  ipse. 
Intention, 

dat.  of,  1223-1225. 
Interest, 

dat.    of,    1205-1210;    expressed    by 
emotional  dat.,  1211. 
Interjections, 

defined,  14;  used  with  nom.,  1117, 
1123;  used  with  voc.,  1123;  used  with 
dat.,  1206;  used  with  ace.,  1149,  II5°> 
used  with  gen.,  1295 ;  hiatus  after,  2475  ; 
monosyllabic,  not  elided,  2484. 
Intermediate, 

coordinate    sentence,   treated,   1693- 

T  1713- 

Interrogations, 

neg.  adv.  in,  1443;  as  aP°d.  in  tarn 
.  .  .  quam  sentences,  1889. 

Interrogative  adverbs,  711,  1526. 

Interrogative  implication, 
infin.  of  intimation  with,  1538. 

Interrogative  pronouns, 

decl.  of,  658,  659,  681-694;  adj.  and 
subst.  forms  of,  683-685 ;  use  of,  in 
simple  sentences,  1526-1533,  1787- 
1791;  in  subjv.  questions,  1563-1570; 
in  indirect  question,  1785,  1786;  quid 
tib!  hanc  curatiost  rem,  1136: 
of  kindred  meaning  with  verb,  1144, 
1840,  1851 ;  with  verbs  of  intrans.  use, 
1183-1186;  with  emotional  dat.,  1211; 
with  refert,  interest,  1276-1279; 
rel.  developed  from,  1795,  1808?  differ- 
ence between  uter  and  quis,  qui, 
2385  ;  difference  between  quis,  quid, 
and  qui,  quod,  2386. 

Interrogative  sentences, 

defined,  1025 ;  quisquam  and  ullus 
in,  2402;  see  Questions. 


Interrogative  subjunctive, 

1563-1569;   in  subordinate  sentence. 
1731 ;  in  indirect  question,  1786. 
Intimation, 

infin.  of,  1534-1539,  1717,  1868,  1869, 
1924,  2009. 
Intransitive  use, 

verbs  of,  used  impersonally  in  pass., 
724,  1479;  verbs  of  trans,  use  used  as, 
1133;  used  transitively,  1137,  1139, 
1191;  with  dat.,  1181-1191,1205;  use 
of  gerundive  of,  2246. 
Ionic, 

rhythms,  2708-2717;  a  maiore,  2708- 
2713;  aminore,  2708,  2709,  2714-2717; 
system,  in  Horace,  2737. 
Ionic  a  maiore, 

defined,  2521 ;  see  Ionic. 
Ionic  a  minore, 

defined,  2521 ;  see  Ionic. 
Irrational  syllables  and  feet, 

2524. 
Irregular, 

verbs,  defined,  743;  conjugated,  744- 
781,  see  Conjugation. 
Islands, 

names  of,  in  ace.,  with  expressions  of 
motion,  1157,  1158;  constructions  with, 
to  denote  place  from  which,  1307-1310; 
constructions  with,  to  denote  place  in 
or  at  which,  _  1331-1336,  1342,  1343; 
rel.  advs.,  ubl,  quo,  unde,  referring 
to,  1793. 
Iterative, 

see  Frequentative. 
Ithyphallic  verse,  2647. 

Joy, 

verbs  of,  with  quod,   quia,    1851; 
with  cum,  1851,  1875;  with  ace.  and 
infin.,  2187,  2188,  2184. 
Judicial, 

verbs,  with  gen.,  1280-1282;  with  abl., 
1280-1282;  with  gen.  of  gerundive  con- 
struction, 2264. 

Keeping, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1167; 
with  pred.  abl.,  1363. 
Kindred, 

derivation,  ace.  of,  1140,  1173;  mean 
ing,  ace.  of,  1141. 
Know  how, 

verbs  meaning,  with  infin.,  2169. 


S24 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Knowing, 

verbs  of,  coordinated,  1696;  with  in- 
direct question,  1774;  with  ace.  and 
infin.,  2175;  time  of  infin.  with,  2219, 
2226 ;  adjs.  meaning,  gen.  with,  1263, 
1264. 
Known, 

adjs.  meaning,  cases  with,  1200. 

Labials, 

45,  77 ;  labial  mute  stems,  decl.  of, 
479,  480. 

Labiodental,  77. 
Lacking, 

adjs.  of,  with  gen.,  1263;   with  abl., 
1306 ;  verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1293 ;  with 
abl.,  1293,  1302-1306. 
Lamentation, 

expressed  by  infin.,  2216. 
Laws, 

duim,  &c.  in,  756;  forms  of  perf. 
subjv.  and  fut.  perf.  in,  887 ;  infin.  in 
-ier  in,  897;  imper.  in,  1575,  1586; 
use  of  -que  in,  1649;  use  of  ast  in, 
1685;  extra  quam  in,  1894;  quo 
of  purpose  in,  1974;  quandoque  in, 
2012,  2014. 
Learn, 

verbs  meaning,  with  infin.,  2169. 
Leaving, 

verbs  of,  infin.  of  purpose  with,  2165. 
Legal, 

see  Laws. 
Lengthening, 

of  vowels,  121-123;  by   compensa- 
tion, 121  ;  in  gen.  plur.,  123,  462. 
Letters, 

tenses  in,  1601,  1616 ;   of  alphabet, 
see  Alphabet. 
Letting, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1274 ;  with  abl., 
1388-1392. 
Lightening,  168. 
Like, 

adjs.  meaning,  cases  with,  1200. 
Loathing, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1286. 
Local  sentences,  1716. 
Locative  case, 

defined,  420 ;  in  what  words  used, 
420 ;  form  of,  in  -a-  stems,  438,  443  ; 
in  -o-  steins,  457,  460;  in  cons,  stems, 
504;  in  -i- stems,  554;  in  -u-  stems, 
594;  of  hie,  665;  of  qui,  quis,  689; 
used  as  adv.,  708,  709,  1340;  meaning 


Locative  case  —  continued. 
of,  1299;  uses  of,  1331-1355;  attached 
to  subst.,  1301,  1331 ;  in  dates,  1307, 
1331;  of  names  of  towns  and  islands, 
1331-1335;  meaning  near,  1331;  with 
attribute,  1332,  1333 ;  of  names  of 
countries,  1336;  dorm,  run,  humi, 
orbi,  1337 ;  belli,  militiae,  1338 ; 
of  other  appellatives,  1339;  joined  with 
loc.  adv.,  1340 ;  denoting  time  when, 
1341;  as  abl.,  1342-1355,  see  Abla- 
tive ;  quin,  use  of,  1980-1990 ;  si, 
2015. 

Logaoedic  rhythms,  2650-2674. 

Loss, 

see  Disappearance. 

Main, 

sentences,   in    ind.    disc.,   mood    of, 
2312-2314. 
Making, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1167; 
with  pred.  abl.,  1363. 
Manner, 

expressed  by  neut.  ace.  of  adj.,  1142; 
abl.  of,  1358-1361 ;  expressed  by  abl. 
abs.,  1367  ;  denoted  by  advs.,  700,  704, 
710,  1438  ;  denoted  by  abl.  of  gerun- 
dive construction  or  gerund,  2266 ;  ex- 
pressed by  partic.,  2295. 
Masculine, 

gender,  general  rules  for,  405,  406; 
for    cons,    and    -i-    stems,    571-576; 
caesura,   2557. 
Mastery, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1292 ;  with  abl., 
1379  ;  with  ace.,  1380. 
Material, 

substs.,  defined,  6 ;  substs.,  plur.  of, 
416,  1108;  adj.  suffixes  denoting,  299- 
301;  abl.  of,  1312-1315,  1426;  ex- 
pressed by  gen.,  1232;  expressed  by 
adj.,  1427. 
Maxims, 

imper.  in,  1575,  1586. 
Means, 

suffixes  denoting,  238-245,  213,  224 ; 
expressed  by  abl.  abs.,  1367;  abl.  of, 
I377~I384  ;  expressed  by  cum,  1874; 
expressed  by  quod,  quia,  1850;  ex- 
pressed by  qui,  1826;  expressed  by 
abl.  of  gerundive  construction  or  ger- 
und, 2266;  expressed  by  partic.,  2295. 
Measure, 

abl.  of,  1388-1392 ;  expressed  by  gen., 
1255  ;  unit  of,  defined,  2515. 


525 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Medial, 

disappearance,    of   vowel,    112;    of 
cons.,  170. 
Meditative, 

verbs,  definition  and  formation  of, 
375  ?  the,  970- 
Memory, 

adjs.  of,  with  gen.,   1263;   verbs  of, 
with  gen.,  1287-1291;  with  ace.,  1286, 
1291  ;  with  de  and  abl.,  1289,  1291. 
Mental  distress, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1283-1286. 
Metre,  2512. 
Metrical  lengthening, 

I23,  2. 

Middle, 

see  Reflexive. 

Military, 

expressions,  dat.  in,  1223,  1225  ;  abl. 
in,  1356. 

Mobile, 

nouns,  defined,  409;  substs.,  agree- 
ment of,  1078. 

Modal  sentences,  1716. 

Modesty, 

plur.  of,  1074. 

Molossus,  2522. 

Monometer, 

defined,  2536 ;  trochaic,  2649. 

Monopody,  2531. 

Monosyllables, 

defective  in  case,  430;  quantity  of, 
2430-2433  ;  rarely  elided,  2484,  2485, 
2487,  2494,  2495. 

Months, 

names  of,  adjs.,  627  ;  decl.  of,  627. 

Moods, 

names  of,  715  ;  subjv.  in  simple  sen- 
tence, syntax  of,  1540-1570,  se'e  Sub- 
junctive ;  imper.,  uses  of,  1571-1586, 
see  Imperative  ;  indie,  in  simple 
sentence,  syntax  of,  1493-1533,  see  In- 
dicative ;  of  subordinate  sentence, 
1720-1731  ;  indie,  in  subordinate  sen- 
tence, general  rule,  1721  ;  indie,  in  sub- 
ordinate sentence,  in  ind.  disc.,  1729, 
2318  ;  subjv.  of  repeated  action  in 
subordinate  sentence,  1730 ;  subjv.  of 
wish,  action  conceivable,  interrogation 
in  subordinate  sentence,  1731  ;  subjv. 
in  indirect  question,  1773-1786  ;  moods 
in  rel.  sentence,  1812-1830;  use  of 
moods  in  ind.  disc,  and  subjv.  of  attrac- 
tion, 1722-1729,  2312-2320;  see  quod, 
cum,  &c. 


Mora,  2515. 

Motion, 

aim  of,  denoted  by  ace.,  1157-1166; 
end  of,  denoted  by  dat.,  1210 ;  from, 
how  expressed,  1307-1311  ;  abl.  of  route 
taken  with  verbs  of,  1376;  verbs  of, 
with  in  and  sub  and  ace.,  1423 ;  with 
in  and  sub  and  abl.,  1424 ;  with  infin. 
of  purpose,  2164;  with  supine  in  -um, 
1166,  2270. 

Motive, 

abl.  of,  1316-1319;  expressed  by  abl. 
a.bs.,  1367,  1317;  otherwise  expressed, 
1317;  introduced  by  quod,  1853  >  ex" 
pressed  by  tamquam,  1909. 

Mountains, 

names  of,  gender,  405,  406. 

Multiplicatives,  2423. 

Mutes, 

73  ;  mute  stems,  decl.  of,  471-480, 
see  Declension. 

Names, 

of  characters  of  alphabet,  16 ;  proper, 
defined,  5 ;  plur.  of,  416,  1105  ;  form  of 
gen.  and  voc.  of,  in  -o-  decl  ,  87,  457, 
459 ;  with  accent  on  final  syllable,  83  ; 
ending  in  -aius,  -eius,  -oius,  de- 
clensional forms  of,  4^8  ;  with  attribute 
attached,  1044;  see  Greek;  common, 
defined,  5  ;  of  males,  gender  of,  405  ;  of 
females,  gender  of,  407. 
Naming, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1167; 
with  indef.  subj.,  1033. 
Narration, 

vivid,  pres.  of,  1590;  asyndeton  in, 
1639;  see  Present. 
Nasals,  76. 
Near, 

adjs.    meaning,    cases    with,    1200- 
1203. 
Necessary, 

adjs.    meaning,    cases    with.    1200- 
1203. 
Necessity, 

verbal  expressions  of,  in  conditional 
periods,  2074,2101;  verbal  expressions 
of,  subjv.  coordinated  with,  1709 ;  verbal 
expressions  of,  in  indie.,  1495-1497; 
expressed  by  subjv.,  1552. 
Need, 

adjs.  of,  with  gen.,  1263 ;  verbs  mean- 
ing, with  abL,  1302-1306;  with  gen., 
1293. 


526 


Index  Oj   Subjects. 


Negative, 

advs.,  general  use  of,  1443-1453 ;  with 
wishes,  1540;  with  exhortations,  prohi- 
bitions, &c.,  1547;  two  in  one  sentence, 
1452,  1453,  1660,  1661  ;  non,  with 
subjv.  of  action  conceivable,  1554;  ne, 
non,  in  subjv.  questions,  1563,  1566; 
ne,  neve,  neque,  non,  nemo,  with 
imper.,  1581,  1582,  1586;  conjs.,  use  of, 
1657-1661,  2141-2144;  combination  of, 
with  affirm,  conjs.,  1665 ;  ne  in  coordi- 
nated subjv.,  1706 ;  necne  and  an  non 
in  indirect  questions,  1778;  meaning  of 
baud  scio  an,  &c.,  1782  ;  ut  ne,  ne, 
ut  n5n,  &c.,  of  purpose  and  result, 
1947 ;  in  conditional  prot.,  2020,  2021  ; 
non,  position  of,  in  conditional  sen- 
tences, 2067;  apod,  in  tarn  .  .  .  quam 
sentences,  1889;  implied  by  perf.,  1610; 
answer,  expected  with  -ne,  -n,  1504; 
expected  with  nonne,  1506  ;  expected 
with  num,  1507  ;  how  expressed,  1513; 
sentence,  quivis.  quilibet,  utervis, 
uterlibet  in,  2401 ;  sentence,  quis- 
quam  in,  2402. 

Neglect, 

verbs  meaning,  with  infin.,  2169. 

Neuter, 

gender,  defined,  402  ;  general  rule  for, 
412  ;  for  cons,  and  -i-  stems,  582-584  ; 
nom.  and  ace.  plur.,  form  of,  423 ;  in 
-a,  130,  2;  461 ;  of  -u-  stems,  586;  of 
adjs.,  as  substs.,use  of,  1093,  noi,  1106, 
1250;  ace.,  of  pron.,  with  verbal  ex- 
pressions, 1144;  word,  with  partitive 
gen.,  1247;  adjs.,  in  gen.  with  verbs  of 
valuing,  1271 ;  use  of  gerundive  in,  2180, 
2244,  2246,  2247. 

Nine-syllabled  Alcaic,  2642. 

Nominative  case, 

defined,  419;  sing.,  of  gender  nouns, 
how  formed,  422,  448,  495,  587,  598 ; 
sing.,  of  nouns  with  stems  in  -a-,  -1-, 
-n-,  -r-,  -s-,  how  formed,  422,  434, 
496-500 ;  sing.,  of  neut.  nouns,  how 
formed,  423,  448,  496 ;  plur.,  of  neut. 
nouns,  how  formed,  423;  lacking,  see 
Defective  ;  of  fern,  and  neut.  in  -a, 
-a,  130,  i  and  2;  in  -or,  -or,  132; 
ending  in  d,  149:  171,  2. 

-a-  stems,  with  long  final  vowel, 
v$o,  i;  436,  445  ;  in  -as,  436;  inscrip- 
tional  forms,  443;  Greek  nouns,  444, 

445- 

-O-  stems  in  -OS  and  -us,  452  ; 
in  -us,  -er,  -r,  453,  454,  613-617; 


Nominative  case  — continued. 
in  -ei,  -els,    -Is,   461,  465  ;   in  -ai, 
-el,  -6i,  458 ;  neut.  piur.,  in  -a,  65, 
461;    inscriptional   forms,   465;    Greek 
nouns,  466. 

Consonant  stems,  sing.,  how  formed, 
495-500;  plur.,  in  -is,  505,  507;  in- 
scriptional forms,  507 ;  Greek  nouns, 
508-512. 

-i-  stems,  sing.,  how  formed,  540- 
546 ;  plur.,  in  -es,  -is,  -eis,  -ia,  -ia, 
562,  564 ;  inscriptional  forms,  564 ; 
Greek  nouns,  565. 

-U-  stems,  inscriptional  forms,  593. 

Pronouns,  without  case  ending,  645; 
peculiar  and  inscriptional  forms,  of 
tuus,  meus,  suus,  653  ;  of  hie,  663- 
665 ;  of  ille,  iste,  667,  668 ;  of  illic, 
istic,  670 ;  of  is,  673,  674 ;  of  idem, 
677,  678;  of  ipse,  680;  of  qui,  quis, 
688,  690 ;  alis,  alid,  for  alius,  aliud, 
619. 

Uses  of,  1113-1123;  subj.  of  verb, 
1113,  1027;  general,  1113;  as  subj.,  in 
titles,  &c.,  1114-1116;  in  exclamations, 
1117;  as  case  of  address,  1118-1123; 
combined  with  voc.,  1121;  with  mih! 
est  nomen,  &c.,  1213.  1214;  pred., 
instead  of  dat.,  1221,  1224;  with  opus 
est,  1383;  as  subj.  of  infin.,  1535;  ac- 
companying imper.,  1571  ;  pred.  noun 
with  infin.  in,  2184;  pred.,  see  Predi- 
cate J  of  gerundive  construction,  2243- 
2249,  2251. 
Non-occurrent, 

action,  tense  of,  in  subordinate  sen- 
tence, 1753,  2329;  protases  of,  defined, 
2024;  treated,  2091-2118,  see  Con- 
ditional; apodoses  of,  in  ind.  disc., 
233*-2334- 
Notation,  2406-2411. 

Nouns, 

defined,  3-8  ;  endings  of,  with  short- 
ened vowel,  129,  130;  with  long  vowel 
retained,  132;  formation  of,  180-203; 
roots  and  stems,  183-198 ;  without  form- 
ative suffix,  195,  198,  199;  with  forma- 
tive suffix,  195-198,  200-203 ;  suffixes 
of,  204-364,  see  Formation;  com- 
pound, formation  and  meaning  of,  379- 
390;  gender  nouns,  defined,  398,  402; 
mobile,  defined,  409  ;  epicenes,  411 ;  of 
common  gender,  410  ;  inflection  of,  398- 
712,  see  Gender,  Number.  Case, 
Declension  ;  with  two  forms  of  stem, 
401,  4T3>  47o,  475,  53'»  545>  566-569, 


527 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Nouns  —  continued. 
603;    agreement    of,    1077-1098,    see 
Agreement ;  use  of,  1099-1468,  see 
Ablative,  &c.,  Substantives,  Ad- 
jectives. 

Nouns  of  the  verb, 

enumerated,  732;  formation  of,  894- 
919,  see  Formation;  sequence  of 
tenses  following,  1766-1769;  uses  of, 
2160-2299 ;  see  Infinitive,  Gerund, 
Gerundive,  Supine,  Participles. 

Number, 

in  nouns,  defined,  414;  in  verbs,  de- 
fined, 722;  dual  forms,  415;  nouns 
defective  in,  see  Defective ;  sing,  and 
plur.,  with  different  meaning,  418,  480; 
agreement  of  verb  in,  1062-1076;  agree- 
ment of  subst.  in,  1077-1081 ;  agreement 
of  adj.  and  partic.  in,  1082-1098;  agree- 
ment of  rel.  pron.  in,  1082-1098,  1801- 
1811,  see  Relative;  agreement  of 
demonstrative  and  determinative  prons. 
in,  1082-1098,  see  Demonstrative, 
Determinative;  sing.,  in  collective 
sense,  1099;  sing.,  of  a  class,  1100; 
sing.,  of  neut.  adjs.  used  as  substs., 
not,  1093,  1250  ;  plur.,  of  a  class,  1104; 
plur.,  of  proper  names,  1105,  416  ;  plur., 
of  neut.  adjs.  used  as  substs.,  1106; 
plur.,  of  names  of  countries,  1107;  plur., 
of  material  substs.,  1108,  416;  plur.,  of 
abstracts,  1109,  416;  plur.,  in  generali- 
zations and  in  poetry,  mo;  denoted 
by  gen.  of  quality,  1239;  denoted  by 
advs.,  1438. 

Numeral  adjectives, 

decl.  of,  637-643 ;  agreeing  with  a 
rel.,  1810;  kinds  of,  2404;  table  of, 
2405  ;  see  Numerals. 

Numeral  adverbs, 

2404;  table  of,  2405  ;  forms  in  -iens, 
-ies,  2414. 

Numerals, 

cardinals,  decl.  of,  637-642,  431  ; 
ordinals  and  distributives,  decl.  of,  643  ; 
kinds  of,  2404 ;  table  of,  2405 ;  nota- 
tion, 2406-2411 ;  some  forms  of,  2412- 
2418:  some  uses  of  cardinals  and 
ordinals,  2419;  some  uses  of  distribu- 
tives, 2420-2422  ;  multiplicatives,  pro- 
portionals, and  adjs.  derived  from 
numerals,  2423  ;  fractions,  2424-2428  ; 
see  Numeral  Adjectives,  Car- 
dinal numerals,  Ordinal,  Dis- 
tributive. 
Numeri  Italici,  2549. 


Obeying, 

expressions  of,  case  with,  1181-1185. 
Object, 

of  a  subst.,  defined,  1046;  of  a  verb, 
direct,  becomes  nom.  in  pass.,  1125  ; 
constructions  of,  1132-1150,  1167-1174, 
see  Accusative  ;  subordinate  sen- 
tence as,  1715;  expressed  by  sentence 
with  quod,  1845  1  complementary 
clause  as,  1948 ;  infin.  as,  2167-2206, 
see  Infinitive;  of  gerundive,  2247; 
of  gerund,  2242,  2255,  2259,  2265  ;  in- 
direct, see  Complement.' 
Objective, 

compounds,  defined,  384  ;  gen.,  1260- 
1262;  gen.,  nostri,  vestri  used  as, 

2335- 
Obligation, 

expressions    of,    in    indie,    with    in- 
fin.,   1495-1497;    expressed    by  subjv., 
1552;    expressed    by   gerundive,  2243, 
2248. 
Obligatory, 

use  of  verb,  2306. 
Oblique  cases,  419. 
Octonarius, 

defined,    2536;    iambic,    2604-2609; 
trochaic,  2636-2638;  anapaestic,  2684, 
2685. 
Office, 

suffixes  denoting,  216,  235  ;  titles  of, 
with  gerundive  construction,  2254. 
Often, 

perf.  expressing  action  often  or  never 
done,  1611. 
Omission, 

of  prep.,  with  several  substs.,  1430 ; 
of  antecedent   of  rel.,   1798,  1799;    of 
subj.  ace.  of  infin.,  2183,  2184. 
Open  vowels,  46. 
Optative, 

see  Wish. 
Oratio  Obliqua, 

see  Indirect  Discourse. 
Order, 

see  Command. 
Ordinal, 

numerals,  decl.  of,  643  ;  in  ace.,  to 
express  time,  1155  ;  with  post  and 
ante  in  expressions  of  time,  1394-1397; 
list  of,  2404,  2405  ;  in  dates,  2419;  some 
forms  of,  2412-2418;  with  subst.  not 
used  in  sing.,  2419;  quisque  with, 
2397- 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Origin, 

adj.  suffixes  implying,  298,  302-330; 
gen.  of,  1232-1238;  expressed  by  abl., 
1312-1315,    1309,  1426;    expressed   by 
adj.,  1427. 
Ought, 

verbs  meaning,  with  infin.,  2169. 
Owner, 

gen.  of,  1232-1238. 

Paeon,  2521,  2522. 
Palatal,  44,  77- 
Palimbacchius,  2522. 
Pardoning, 

expressions  of,  case  with,  1181-1185. 
Parentage, 

denoted  by  abl.,  1312. 
Parentheses, 

asyndeton  in,  1642;  introduced  by 
nam,  et,  &c.,  1642;  quod  sciam, 
qui  quidem,  1829;  with  ut,  sicut, 
prout,  1905,  1940,  1942,  2017;  ex- 
pressed by  purpose  clause  with  ut,  ne, 
1962;  si  placet,  &c.,  2113. 
Parisyllables, 

defined,  515;  decl.  of,  517-528,  54°~ 
569,  see  Declension ;  gender  of,  577- 

579- 
Paroemiac,  2688,  2689. 

Part  concerned, 

ace.  of,  1147. 

Participation, 

adjs.  of,  with  gen.,  1263, 1264;  verbs 
of,  with  gen.,  1292. 

Participles, 

defined.  732,  2278;  suffix,  -nus,  296, 
316-322;  in  -mino-,  297;  agreement 
of,  1082-1093,  see  Agreement;  in 
dat.,  to  denote  person  viewing  or  judg- 
ing, 1217;  cause  or  motive  expressed 
by,  1317;  question  with.  1533;  rel.  sen- 
tence coordinated  with,  1820;  quam- 
quam  with,  iqoo  ;  quamlibet  with, 
1907;  quamvis.  with,  1907:  intimat- 
ing condition,  2110;  quasi,  tarn- 
quam,  ut,  velut  with,  2121;  with 
gerundive  construction,  2254;  uses  of, 
treated,  2278-2299;  character  of,  2278; 
time  of,  2279-2281 ;  the  attributive, 
2282-2286  ;  expressing  permanent  con- 
dition, 2282 ;  compared,  &c.,  2284  ;  the 
subst.,  2287-2292;  the  appositive,  2293- 
2296;  representing  rel.  sentence,  2294; 
expressing  time,  means,  &c.,  2295  ;  the 
predicative,  2297-2299. 

34  529 


Participles  — continued. 

Present,  stem  of,  543,  632  ;  abl.  sing, 
of,  560,  633;  decl.  of,  632,  633;  gen. 
plur.  of,  in  -urn,  563;  of  sum,  749; 
formation  or,  901-903;  with  gen.,  1266; 
in  abl.  abs.,  1362 ;  in  reflexive  sense, 
1482;  with  verbs  signifying  represent 
and  verbs  of  senses,  2298,  2299. 

Perfect,  formation  of,  906-919,  lack- 
ing, 8ri,  905,  907,922-1019;  advs.  from, 
704,  1372;  dat.  of  possessor  with,  1216, 
1478;  of  origin,  with  abl.,  1312;  in  abl. 
abs.,  1362, 1364 ;  of  deponents,  907, 1364, 
1492,  2280;  abl.  neut.  of,  used  imper- 
sonally, 1372;  agreeing  with  sentence  or 
infin.,  1373;  with  usus  est  and  opus 
est,  1382;  used  as  subst.,  r44o;  with 
act.  meaning,  1485;  with  fui,  fueram, 
fuero,  1609;  sequence  after,  1766, 
1767;  of  contemporaneous  action,  2280; 
translated  as  abstract,  2285,  2286;  with 
habeo,  facio,  do,  &c.,  1606,  2297; 
quantity  of  penult  vowel  in  disyllabics, 
2434-2436. 

Future,  formation  of,  904,  905 ;  with 
sum,  802,  803;  with  sum,  use  of, 
1633,  1737,  1742,  1746,  17475  use  of, 
in  conditional  sentences,  2074,  2081, 
2087,  2092,  2993,  2097,  2100,  2108; 
in  abl.  abs.,  1362;  as  adj.,  2283. 
Perfect  active,  907. 

Particles, 

interrogative,  see  Interrogative; 
exclamatory,  see  Questions ;  of 
wishes,  1540;  conjunctive  particle  sen- 
tence, 1838-2122,  see  Conjunctive. 

Partitive, 

gen. ,1241-1254;  nostrfim,vestrum 
used  as,  2335. 

Parts, 

of  speech,  2-r5  ;  prin.,  of  verbs,  733- 
735  ;  prin.,  classification  of  verbs  accord- 
ing to,  920-1022,  see  Verbs. 

Passive  voice, 

defined,  723. 1472;  of  verbs  of  intrans. 
use,  724,  763,  1479;  nom.  of,  for  ace.  of 
ict.,  1125,  1473;  of  compound  verbs, 
with  ace.,  1138;  of  verbs  of  feeling, 
commonly  intransitive,  1139;  two  ac- 
cusatives of  the  act.  in,  1167-1171, 
1474;  act.  of  a  different  verb  serving 
as,  1471;  defining  ace.  or  ace.  of  extent 
or  duration  made  subj.  in,  1475;  verbs 
of  trans,  use  used  impersonally  in,  1479; 
the  doer  of  the  action  how  expressed 
with,  1318,  1319,  1476-1478,  2181,  2243; 
use  of,  1472-1485;  complementary  dak 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Passive  voice  —  continued. 
of  act.  made  subj.  in,  1181,  1480,  2202  ; 
with  reflexive  meaning,  1481, 1487, 1148; 
of  coepi  and  desino,  1483 ;  perf. 
partic.  with  act.  meaning,  1485;  depo- 
nents with  force  of,  1487;  deponents 
with  meaning  of,  1490;  perf.  partic.  of 
deponents  with  act.  and  pass,  meaning, 
907,  1364,  1492;  forms  with  fui,  &c., 
1609;  of  verbs  of  perceiving,  knowing, 
thinking,  saying,  &c.,  personal  and  im- 
personal constructions  of,  2177-2182; 
of  iubeo,  veto,  sino,  used  personally, 
2201;  with  gerundive,  2251;  fut.  infin., 
formation  and  use  of,  2273. 

Patronymics, 

suffixes  forming,  279;  gen.  plur.  of, 

439- 

Pauses,  2540. 

Penalty, 

denoted  by  gen.,  1282;  denoted  by 
abl.,  1282. 

Pentameter, 

defined,  2536  ;  dactylic,  2570-2576. 

Pentapody, 

defined,  2531  ;  logaoedic,  2664-2668. 

Penthemimeral  caesura,  2544. 

Penthemimeris,  2531. 

Penult, 

defined,  175;  when  accented,  86, 
87;  quantity  of,  in  polysyllables,  2434- 
2436. 

Perceiving, 

verbs  of,  coordinated,  1696;  in  pres. 
with  postquam,  ubf,  ut,  &c.,  1926; 
with  ace.  and  infin.,  2175;  time  of  infin' 
with,  2219,  2226. 

Perfect  tense, 

indicative,  formation  of,  854-875 ; 
stem  without  suffix,  858-866;  stem  in 
-S-,  867,  868;  stem  in  -v-  or  -u-,  869- 
875 ;  short  or  old  forms,  885-893 ; 
-runt  and  -re  in  3rd  pers.  plur.,  727; 
quantity  of  vowel  preceding  -runt,  -re, 
856,  857;  -it,  857,  68;  reduplication  of, 
858-861,  922-932,  989,  995,  ion;  quan- 
tity of  penult  vowel  in  disyllabic  per- 
fects, 2434-2436. 

Dative  of  possessor  with,  1216,  1478; 
in  simple  sentence,  uses  of,  1602-1613, 
1616;  definite,  defined,  1602;  historical, 
defined,  1602;  historical,  function  of, 
1603  ;  historical,  for  plup.,  1604 ;  definite, 
function  of,  1605;  definite,  expressed  by 
habed  and  partic.,  1606  ;  definite,  of  in 
ceptives,  1607 ;  definite,  denoting  pres 


Perfect  tense  —  continued. 
resulting  state,  1608 ;  definite,  pass,  with 
fui,  &c.,  1609;  definite,  other  uses  of, 
1610-1616,  2027,  2030 ;  sequence  of, 
1717, 1740-1761,2322-2324;  2326-2329; 
in  subordinate  sentence,  rel.  time,  1733  ; 
1736;  independent,  1738;  with  cum, 
1860,  1861,  1866,  1867,  1869,  1871;  with 
antequam,  priusquam,  1912,  1917, 
1920  ;  with  postquam,  ubl,  ut,  &c., 
1925, 1927, 1929, 1930, 1932;  with  dum, 
dSnec,  quoad,  quamdiu,  1998,  2001, 
2002,  2006,  2007,  2009;  in  conditional 
prot.,  2023,  2034-2041,  2066-2068 ;  in 
conditional  apod.,  2023,  2027, 2035,  2043, 
2049,  2053,  2060,  2101,  2103-2105. 

Subjunctive,  formation  of,  876-878; 
shorter  old  forms,  885-893;  in  wishes, 
1541,  1543;  in  exhortations,  prohibi- 
tions, &c.,  1549,  1551;  of  action  con- 
ceivable, 1557,  1558;  with  force  of  fut., 
1541,  1549,  1551,  1558;  of  repeated 
action,  1730;  sequence  of,  1764,  1765; 
in  subordinate  sentence,  following  pri- 
mary, 1746,  1762,  1766,  1771,  2323  ;  fol- 
lowing pres.  of  vivid  narration  and  pres. 
of  quotation,  1752;  following  perf.  defi- 
nite, 1754  ;  following  secondary,  in  rel., 
causal,  and  concessive  sentences,  1756  ; 
following  secondary,  in  consecutive  sen- 
tences, 1757  ;  following  secondary,  in  in- 
direct question,  1760;  following  secon- 
dary, in  ind.  disc.,  2328 ;  in  sequence  with 
adjacent  verb,  1761;  of  action  non- 
occtirrent,  in  pres.  sequence,  1763;  in 
sequence  with  perf.  infin.,  1768;  with 
antequam,  priusquam,  1913,  1916, 
1919;  with  ut  purpose,  1962;  in  con- 
ditional prot.,  2023,  2070,  2072,  2084- 
2088,  2090;  in  conditional  apod.,  2023, 
2058,  2073,  2077>  2085,  2090;  with 
quasi,  tamquam  si,  &c.,  2119;  in 
ind.  disc,  representing  a  fut.  perf.,  2324. 

Imperative,  formation  of,  813,  879; 
pass.,  1580. 

Infinitive,  see  Infinitive. 

Participle,  see  Participles. 
Periods, 

connection  of,  2123-2159. 
Periphrastic, 

forms  of  the  verb,  802-804  ;  fut.  partic. 
with  form  of  sum,  802,  803  ;  fut.  partic. 
with  form  of  sum,  use  of,  1633,  1737, 
1742,  1746,  1747;  in  conditional  sen- 
tences, 2074,  2081,  2087,  2092,  2093, 
2097,  2100,  2108 ;  gerundive  with 


530 


Inaex  of  Subjects. 


Periphrastic  —  continued. 
sum,  804,  2101,  2243;  circumlocu- 
tions for  perf.  pass.,  fut.  act.,  fut.  pass, 
infin.,  732,  898,  2273;  P^t  P_ass-  im- 
per.,  1580;  perf.  with  habeo,  1606, 
2297;  fore,  futurum  esse,  ut, 
2233;  fore  with  perf.  partic.,  2234; 
forms  in  conditional  apodoses  of  ac- 
tion non-occurrent  in  ind.  disc.,  2331- 
2334. 

Permission, 

verbs  of,  subjv.  coordinated  with, 
1710;  verbs  of,  with  pyrpose  clause, 
1950;  expressed  by  quamvis,  1904; 
expressed  by  quamhbet,  1907. 

Permissive, 

use  of  verb,  2307. 

Person, 

in  verbs,  defined,  721 ;  in  imper.,  731 ; 
3rd  pers.  plur.,  in  indef.  sense,  1033 ; 
agreement  of  verb  in,  1062 ;  when  sub- 
jects are  of  different  pers.,  1076  ;  when 
subj.  is  rel.,  1807 ;  use  of  n5s  for  ego, 
1074  ;  order  of  persons,  1076 ;  pers.  of 
qui,  1792. 

Personal  pronouns, 

decl.  of,  644-651 ;  possess.,  652-655  ; 
when  used  with  ist  and  2nd  pers., 
1029;  possess,  used  instead  of  gen., 
1234,  1262;  gen.  of,  used  possessively, 
1234;  _preps.  following,  1435;  use  of 
nostrSm,  vestrum,  nostri,  vestri, 
2335  ;  possess,  omitted,  2346;  possess, 
meaning  proper,  appropriate,  favour- 
able, 2346 ;  ipse  with,  2376 ;  see 
ego,  &c. 

Personal  verbs, 

impersonal  verbs  used  as,  1181,  1284; 
verbs  of  intrans.  use  used  as,  in  pass., 
1181,  1480,  2203;  verbs  of  perceiving, 
knowing,  thinking,  saying  as,  in  pass., 
2177-2182;  iubeo,  veto,  sin5  as,  in 
pass.,  2201. 

Person  endings, 

vowel  of,  short,  129,  130  ;  vowel  of, 
long,  132  ;  -mino  in  imper.,  297,  731  ; 
-mini  in  2nd  pers.  plur.,  297,  730 ; 
function  of,  713,  721 ;  table  of,  726 ; 
-runt  and  -re  in  perf.,  727 ;  of  ist  and 
2nd  pers.,  728;  -ris  and  -re  in  2nd 
pers.  pass.,  730 ;  in  inscriptions,  729 ; 
3rd  pers.  plur.  -ont,  -unt,  827. 

Persuading, 

verbs  of,  case  with,  1181-1185 ; 
subjv.  coordinated  with,  1712. 

Phalaecean,  2664,  2665. 

Pherecratean,  2659. 


Phonetic, 

see  Sound. 

Pity, 

see  Mental  distress. 

Place, 

subst.  suffixes  denoting,  266,  228, 
241,  242,  245,  249 ;  adj.  suffixes  de- 
noting, 317,  321,  347;  advs.  denoting, 
708,  709, 1438 ;  expressed  by  loc.,  1331- 
1341 ;  expressed  by  loc.  abl.,  1342-1349  ; 
expressed  by  attributive  prepositional 
phrase,  1426,  1233  ;  expressed  by  adj., 
1427,  1233  ;  expressed  by  gen.,  1427, 
1232  ;  from  which,  advs.  denoting,  710; 
from  which,  how  expressed,  1307-1311  ; 
to  which,  advs.  denoting,  710  ;  to  which, 
how  expressed,  1157-1166,  1210;  rel. 
advs.,  ub!,  quo,  unde,  1793. 

Places, 

names  of,  see  Towns. 

Plants, 

names  of,  gender,  407,  408,  573. 

Pleasing, 

expressions  of,  case  with,  1181-1185. 

Plenty, 

see  Fulness. 

Pluperfect  tense, 

indicative,  formation  of,  880 ;  short 
or  old  forms.  885-893  ;  dat.  with,  1216, 
1478;  uses  of,  in  simple  sentence,  1614- 
1618,  1607,  1609;  of  past  action  com- 
pleted, 1614 ;  expressing  past  resulting 
state,  1615  ;  in  letters,  1616;  for  perf., 
1617  ;  of  time  anterior  to  past  repeated 
action,  1618 ;  of  inceptives,  1607 ;  pass, 
with  fueram,  &c.,  1609 ;  sequence  of, 
1717,  1740-1745,  1747,  1748,  1755-1760, 
2322-2324,  2326-2329;  in  subordinate 
sentence,  rel.  time,  1733,  *736;  inde- 
pendent, 1738 ;  with  cum,  i86c,  1861  ; 
with  antequam,  priusquam,  1918  ; 
with  postquam,  ub!,  ut,  &c.,  1928, 
1929,  1932,  1933 ;  with  dum,  donee, 
1997,  2009  ;  in  conditional  prot.,  2023, 
2048-2051  ;  in  conditional  apod.,  2023, 
2029,  2036,  2104,  2107. 

Subjunctive,  formation  of,  881 ;  -et, 
68;  short  or  old  forms,  885-893;  in 
wishes,  1544;  in  expressions  of  obliga- 
tion or  necessity,  1552;  of  action  con- 
ceivable, 1561;  of  repeated  action,  1730; 
sequence  of,  1762,  1763;  insubordinate 
sentence,  following  secondary,  1747, 
1762,  1766,  1771,  2322;  following  pres. 
of  vivid  narration  and  pres.  of  quota- 
tion, 1752:  following  primary,  1753, 
2329;  following  perf.  definite,  1754? 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Pluperfect  tense  —  continued. 
following  perf.  infin.,  or  perf.  partic., 
1767;  with  cum,  1872,  1873;  with 
quotiens,  quotienscumque,  1887; 
with  antequam,  priusquam,  1914, 
1920,  1921 ;  with  postea  quam, 
postquam,  &c.,  1924;  with  donee, 
2009;  with  indef.  rel.  pron.  or  adv..  1814^ 
in  conditional  prot.,  2024,  2071,  2089, 
2091,  2096,  2098-2107  ;  in  conditional 
apod.,  2024,  2041,  2071,  2073,  2083, 
2089,  2091,  2095,  2O995  with  quasi, 
tamquam  si,  &c.,  2120;  in  ind.  disc, 
representing  a  fut.  perf.,  2324 ;  in 
conditional  apod,  of  direct  discourse, 
how  represented  in  ind.  disc.,  2331- 

2334- 

Plural  number, 

in  nouns,  defined,  414 ;  lacking,  see 
Defective;  with  different  meaning 
from  sing.,  418,  480 ;  of  material 
substs.,  416,  1108;  of  abstracts,  416, 
1109;  of  proper  names,  416,  1105;  of 
names  of  countries,  1107;  in  generali- 
zations and  in  poetry,  mo;  adjs.  in, 
used  as  substs.,  1103,  1104,  1106;  in 
substs.,  in  agreement,  1077-1081 ;  in 
adjs.,  prons.,  and  partic.,  in  agreement, 
1082-1098;  in  verbs,  defined,  722;  with 
sing,  and  plur.  subjects,  1062-1076; 
of  modesty,  1074;  of  gerundive  with 
nostri,  &c.,  2261. 

Polysyllables, 

quantity  of  penult  in,  2434-2436  ; 
quantity  of  final  syllable  in,  2437-2457. 

Position, 

syllables  long  by,  177;  syllable  con- 
taining vowel  before  mute  or  f  followed 
by  1  or  r,  178;  final  short  vowel  before 
word  beginning  with  two  consonants  or 
double  cons.,  2458;  final  s  does  not  al- 
ways make,  2468;  of  preps.,  1433-1437- 

Positive, 

expressing  disproportion,  1454;  used 
in  comparison  of  adjs.  and  advs.,  1457, 
1458;  combined  with  a  compar.,  14^8; 
expressed  by  compar.  with  abl.,  1464; 
see  Comparison,  Affirmative. 

Possession, 

adj.  suffixes  implying,  298,  302-330; 
expressed  by  dat.,  1207,  1212-1216;  ex- 
pressed by  gen.,  1232-1238. 

Possessive  compounds,  385. 

Possessive  pronouns, 

decl.  of,  652-655  ;  agreement  of,  1082- 
1098  ;  used  instead  of  gen.  of  personal 
or  reflexive  pron.,  1234,  1262 ;  with 


Possessive  pronouns  —  continued. 
word  in  apposition  in  gen.,  1235  ;  with 
refert  and  interest,  1277  ;  gen.  of, 
with  infin.,  1237,  2208,  2211  ;  implying 
antecedent  to  rel.,  1807  ;  of  reflexive, 
referring  to  subj.  of  verb,  2336  ;  of  re- 
flexive, referring  to  word  not  subj.  of 
verb,  2337  ;  of  reflexive,  in  construction 
of  ace.  with  infin.,  2338-2340  ;  of  reflex- 
ive, in  subordinate  clauses,  2341-2343  ; 
omitted,  2346  ;  meaning  proper,  appro- 
priate, favourable,  2346 ;  see  meus,  &c. 

Possessor, 

dat.  of,  1212-1216,  1478,  2181,  2243. 

Possibility, 

expressed  by  subjv.,  1554-1562  ;  de- 
noted by  gerundive,  2249 ;  verbal  ex- 
pressions of,  see  Ability. 

Postpositive, 

words,  1676,  1688;  preps.,  1433-1436. 

Posttonic  syllable, 

102. 

Potential, 

use  of  verb,  2305  ;  see  Action  con- 
ceivable. 
Prayer, 

duim,  &c.    in,  756  ;  forms  of  perf. 
subjv.  and  fut.  perf.  in,  887  ;  expressed 
by  imper.,  1571  ;  in  verse,  2549. 
Predicate, 

defined,  1023,  1035 ;  omitted,  1036 ; 
enlarged,  1048-1054;  pred.  subst.,  verb 
agreeing  with,  1072  ;  agreement  of  pred. 
subst.,  1077-1081  ;  in  oblique  case, 
1052,  1363 ;  pred.  adj.,  agreement  of, 
1082-1098  ;  pred.  nom.,  with  verb  of  in- 
determinate meaning,  1035  ;  with  other 
verbs,  1051  ;  infin.  as  pred.  nom.,  2207  ; 
noun,  in  nom.  with  complementary 
infin.,  2171  ;  in  ace.,  referring  to  subj. 
ace.  2174;  in  nom.,  with  verbs  of  per- 
ceiving, knowing,  &c.,  used  in  pass., 
2177  \  m  nom.,  with  verbs  of  perceiving, 
knowing,  &c.,  used  in  act.,  2184;  m 
ace.,  referring  to  unexpressed  indef.  subj. 
of  infin.,  2213;  in  dat.,  with  implied 
subj.  of  infin.,  2214 ;  in  ace.,  with  verbs 
of  making,  choosing,  naming,  &c.,  1167, 
1168;  pred.  uses  of  gen.,  1236,  1237, 
1239,  1251  ;  pred.  use  of  abl.  of  quality, 
1375  ;  with  utor,  1381  ;  pred.  partic. 
with  usus  est,  opus  est,  1382 ;  pred. 
use  of  prepositional  expressions,  1428 ; 
pron.  agreeing  with  pred.  subst.,  1097, 
1806 ;  pred.  use  of  gen.  of  gerundive 
construction,  2262-2264;  see  Predi- 
cative. 


532 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Predicative, 

dat.,  1219-1225;  partic.,  2297-2299. 
Prefixes, 

advs.  as  verbal,  1402-1409. 

Prepositions, 

defined,  u,  696,  1402;  as  proclitics, 
92  ;  accent  of,  when  following  case,  92; 
how  written  in  inscriptions  and  mss., 
92 ;  as  positive,  357 ;  compounded 
with  nouns  or  noun  stems,  381-383,  385, 
390;  compounded  with  verbs,  391,  392  ; 
inseparable,  392,  1409;  origin  of,  696, 
1402-1404;  function  of,  1405  ;  inflected 
forms  of  substs.  used  as,  1406,  1413, 
1419,  1420 ;  trace  of  adverbial  use  in 
tmesis,  1407  ;  use  as  advs.  and  as  preps, 
discussed,  1412-1416,  1421;  used  with 
ace.,  1410-1416;  used  with  abl.,  1415- 
1421 ;  used  with  abl.  proper,  1297, 
1415,  1419-1421;  used  with  loc.  abl., 
1299, 1416  ;  used  with  instrumental  abl., 
1300 ;  with  ace.  or  abl.,  1422-1425, 
1415  ;  substs.  combined  by,  1426-1428; 
repetition  of,  with  two  or  more  substs., 
1429  ;  omission  of,  with  a  second  subst., 
1430;  two,  with  one  subst.,  1431,  1432  ; 
position  of,  1433-1437  j  in  oaths,  1437  ; 
verbs  compounded  with,  cases  after, 
1137,  1138, 1188-1191,  1194-1199,  1209; 
with  infin.  as  obj.,  2205  ;  with  gerundive 
construction  or  gerund  in  ace.,  2252, 
2253 ;  in  abl.,  2267 ;  with  subst.  and 
partic.,  2285,  2286  ;  for  special  uses  of 
different  preps.,  see  Index  of  Latin 
Words. 

Present  stems, 

used  as  roots,  190-194,  855  ;  roots 
used  as,  738~743,  828,  844. 

Present  system, 

of  verbs,  formation  of,  828-853. 

Present  tense, 

indicative  formation  of,  828-840 ;  -It, 
-at, -et,  132;  -5r,  132;  dat.  of  posses- 
sor with,  1216,  1478,  2181  ;  uses  of,  in 
simple  sentence,  1587-1593,  1601  ;  of 
pres.  action,  1587;  of  customary  or  re- 
peated action,  or  general  truth,  1588  ;  of 
past  action,  still  continued,  1589;  of 
vivid  narration,  1590,  1639;  the  annal- 
istic,  1 591 ;  of  verbs  of  hearing,  seeing, 
saying,  1592;  in  quotations,  1592;  of 
fut.  action,  1593,  2026;  in  letters, 
1601  ;  sequence  of,  1717,  1740-1746, 
1749-1753,  2322-2324,  2326-2329;  in 
subordinate  sentence,  rel.  time,  1733- 
1735;  independent,  1738;  with  cum, 
1860-1862,  1866,  1867, 1869,  1871 ;  with 


Present  tense  —  continued. 
quoniam,  1883 ;  with  antequam, 
priusquam,  1915,  1918;  with  post- 
quam,  ubl,  ut,  &c.,  1926,  1927,  1930, 
1932;  with  dum,  donee,  quoad, 
quamdiu,  1995,  2000,  2001, 2006,  2007, 
2009 ;  in  conditional  prot.,  2023,  2026- 
2033,  2065-2068,  2074  ;  in  conditional 
apod.,  2023,  2026,  2034,  2042,  2048,  2052, 
2059,  2078.^ 

Subjunctive,  formation  of,  841-843  ; 
-it,  -at,  -et,  132 ;  -ar,  132 ;  in  wishes, 
1541,  1542;  in  exhortations,  prohibi- 
tions, &c.,  1548,  1550,  1551  ;  of  action 
conceivable,  1556;  of  repeated  action, 
1730;  primary,  1762;  referring  to  fut. 
time,  1743.  J749  >  following  perf .  definite, 
1754  ;  following  secondary  in  rel.,  causal, 
and  concessive  sentences,  1756;  follow- 
ing secondary  in  consecutive  sentences, 
1757;  following  secondary  in  indirect 
question,  1760;  following  secondary  in 
ind.  disc.,  2328  ;  in  sequence  with  adja- 
cent verb,  1761 ;  of  action  non-occurrent, 
in  pres.  sequence,  1/63;  in  sequence 
with  perf.  infin.,  1768;  with  ante- 
quam, priusquam,  1912, 1915, 1919; 
with  ut  purpose,  1962 ;  with  dum, 
donee,  quoad,  2003,  2005, 20°7  >  w*tn 
modo,  2003  ;  in  conditional  prot.,  2023, 
2070,  2072,  2076-2083,  2090,  2093, 2096 ; 
in  conditional  apod.,  2023,  2033,  2039, 
2046,  2057,  2064,  2070,  2076,  2084,  2090  ; 
with  quasi,  tamquam  si,  &c.,  2119 ; 
in  ind.  disc,  representing  a  fut.,  2324. 
Infinitive,  see  Infinitive. 
Participle,  see  Participles. 

Preventing, 

see  Hindering. 

Priapean,  2674. 

Price, 

gen.  of,  1271 ;  abl.  of,  1388-1392. 

Primary  tenses,  1717,  1762. 

Primitive, 

defined,  198;  substs.,  204-245,  see 
Substantives;  adjs.,  280-297,  305, 
see  Adjectives ;  verbs,  theme  in^  738- 
741;  inflection  of,  743-791;  formation 
of  pres.  stem  of,  828-838 ;  list  of,  922- 
986,  see  Verbs. 

Principal  cases,  nix,  1112. 

Principal  parts, 

of  the  verb,  733-735;  classification 
of  verbs  according  to,  920-1022,  see 
Verbs. 

Privation, 

see  Separation. 


533 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Proceleusmatic,  2521. 
Proclitics,  92. 
Prohibitions, 

expressed  by  subjv.,  1547-1551;  ex- 
pressed by  imper.,  1581-1586 ;  expressed 
by  fut.,  1624;    peri,  infin.  with  volo, 
n515  in,  2224. 
Promise, 

expressed  by  fut.,  1619;  implication 
of,  in  fut.  perf.,  1629. 
Promising, 

verbs  of,  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2186 ; 
with  pres.  infin.,  2186,  2221,  2236. 
Pronominal, 

see  Pronouns. 
Pronoun, 

questions,  1526-1530;  questions,  in- 
direct, 1785. 
Pronouns, 

defined,  9;  as  proclitics,  92;  inflec- 
tion of,  644-694;  personal,  644-651: 
reflexive,  644-651;  possess.,  652-65,; 
demonstrative,  656-670;  determinative, 
656-659,  671-675;  of  identity,  656-659, 
676-678;  intensive,  656-659,  679,  680; 
rel.,  interrogative,  indef.,  656-659,  681- 
694 ;  interrogative,  adj.  and  subst.  forms 
of,  683-685 ;  indef.,  adj.  and  subst. 
forms  of,  686;  reduplicated,  650;  cor- 
relative, 695,  1831 ;  advs.  from,  696- 
698,  701,  702,  704-710. 

Agreement  of,  1093-1098,  1801-1811, 
see  Agreement ;  adj.,  equivalent  to 
gen.,  1098,  1234,  1262;  used  in  neut. 
ace.  with  verbal  expressions,  1144; 
as  connectives,  2129-2132;  use  of,  in 
ind.  disc.,  2325,  2338-2342;  use  of, 
2335-2403;  use  of  personal,  2335;  use 
of  reflexive,  2336-2345;  use  of  possess., 
2346 ;  use  of  hie,  2347-2355  ;  use  of 
iste,  2356,  2357;  use  of  me,  2358- 
2364;  use  of  is,  2365-2370;  use  of 
idem,  2371-2373;  use  of  ipse,  2374-  \ 
2384;  use  of  uter,  quis,  2385,  2386; 
use  of  rel.,  1792-1837;  use  of  indef. 
quis,  qui,  2388,  2389;  use  of  ali- 
quis,  2390,  2391;  use  of  quidam, 
2392,  2393  ;  use  of  quisque,  2394- 
2398;  use  of  uterque,  2399.  2400; 
use  of  quivis,  quilibet,  utervis, 
uterlibet,  2401;  use  of  quisquam, 
ullus,  2402;  use  of  nemo,  nihil, 
nullus,  neuter,  2403 ;  place  of  recip- 
rocal taken  by  inter  n5s,  &c.,  invi- 
cem,  &c.,  2344,  2345 ;  see  Relative, 
&c.,  qui,  &c. 


Pronunciation, 

of  names  of  characters  of  alphabet,  16, 
31-72;  of  vowels,  33,  37-42;  of  diph- 
thongs, 47,  49;  of  consonants,  53-72  ; 
change  of  sound  of  vowels,  103-145  ; 
of  diphthongs,  95-101 ;  of  consonants, 
146-174;  rules  of  vowel  quantity,  34- 
36,  2429-2472,  see  Quantity;  divi- 
sion of  syllables,  175;  long  and  short 
syllables,  177,  178;  of  es,  CSt  in 
combination  with  other  words,  747 ; 
see  also  Accent,  Substitution, 
Development,  Disappearance, 
Assimilation,  Dissimilation,  In- 
terchange. "Lengthening,  Short- 
ening, Weakening,  Hiatus, 
Contraction,  Elision. 

Proper, 

names,  defined,  5;  of  -o-  decl.,form 
and  accent  of  voc.  and  gen.  sine;,  of,  87 ; 
456-459;  with  accent  on  final  syllable, 
88;  plur.  of,  416,  1105;  ending  in, 
-aius,  -eius,  -5ius,  declensional 
forms  of,  458;  with  attribute  attached, 
1044;  see  Greek. 

Proportionals,  2423. 

Propriety, 

verbal  expressions  of,  in  indie.,  1495- 
1497;  subjv.  coordinated  with  verbal 
expressions  of,  1709;  verbal  expressions 
of,  in  conditional  periods,  2074,  2I°i; 
expressed  by  subjv.,  1547-1552;  ex- 
pressed by  gerundive  construction,  2243, 
2248. 

Prosody, 

2429-2739;  see  Quantity,  Figures 
of  prosody,  Versification. 

Protasis, 

defined,  1 06 1 ;  fut.  perf.  in,  coincident 
in  time  with  fut.  perf.  in  apod.,  1627; 
concessive,  2116;  see  Conditional, 
Relative,  Conjunctive. 

Protest, 

introduced  by  sentence  with  quod, 
1842. 

Protestations, 

subjv.  in,  1542;  fut.  in,  1622;  ita  .  .  . 
ut,  1542,  1622,  1937. 

Protraction,  2516. 

Proviso, 

introduced  by  ut,  ne  .  .  .  ita, 
1964 ;  by  dum,  2003 ;  by  modo, 
2003. 

Punishment, 
see  Penalty 


534 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Purpose, 

dat.  of,  1223-1225;  clauses,  tense  of, 
after  perf.  definite,  1754;  rel.  sentences 
of,  1817;  expressed  by  quod,  id, 
1840;  sentences  of,  with  priusquam, 
1919 ;  sentences  of,  with  ut,  ne,  £c., 
1947-1964;  sentences  of,  with  quo, 
1974;  sentences  of,  with  adv.  qui, 
1976 ;  sentences  of,  with  dum,  donee, 
&c.,  2005-2009;  infin.  of,  2164,  2165; 
expressed  by  ace.  of  gerundive  construc- 
tion, 2250 ;  expressed  by  dat.  of 
gerundive  construction,  2256 ;  ex- 
pressed by  gerundive  construction  or 
gerund  with  causa,  2164,  2258>  227°; 
expressed  by  gen.  of  gerundive  con- 
struction alone,  2263 ;  expressed  by 
gen.  of  gerund  alone,  2263  <  expressed 
by  ace.  of  gerundive  construction  or 
gerund  with  ad,  2164,  2270;  denoted 
by  supine,  1166,  2270;  expressed  by 
partic.,  2295;  use  of  reflexive  pron.  in 
subjv.  clauses  of,  2341,  2342. 

Pyrrhic,  2522. 

Pythiambic  strophe, 
in  Horace,  2722,  2723. 

Qualitative, 

vowel  changes,  136-143;  gradation,  145. 

Quality, 

subst.  suffixes  denoting,  246-264 ; 
adj.  suffixes  denoting,  281-297  ;  gen. 
of,  1239,  1240;  abl.  of,  1375. 

Quantitative, 

vowel  gradation,  135;  verse,  2548; 
theory  of  the  Saturnian,  2551. 

Quantity, 

of  diphthongs,  47,  125  ;  how  denoted 
in  inscriptions,  24,  29  ;  how  denoted  in 
books,  30,  2514;  common,  definition  and 
sign  of,  30,  2514;  pronunciation  of  long 
and  short  vowels,  33,  38-40  ;  change  in 
quantity  of  vowels  "and  preservation  of 
long  quantity,  123-133  ;  long  and  short 
syllables,  177;  of  syllable  containing 
vowel  before  mute  or  f  followed  by  1 
or  r,  178;  general  principles  of  vowel 
quantity,  35-36;  vowel  before  another 
vowel  or  n,  35  ;  diphthong  before  a 
vowel,  12^ ;  compounds  of  prae,  i2jj  ; 
gen.  in  ai,  127,  7 ;  length  of  e  in  digl, 
rgi,  fidei,  61,  127,  4.  601, 602  \  the  end- 
ings -ai,  -als,  -51,  -61s,  -el,  -eis,  127, 
7;  gen.  in -ius, -ius,  127,6;  618,656, 
657,  694;  vowel  before  nf,  ns,  cons,  i, 
gn,  122  ;  as  determining  accent,  86-88; 
-it  in  perf.,  857  ;  I,  i,  in' perf.  subj.  877  ; 


Quantity  —  continued. 
878  ;  i,  i,  in  fut.  perf.,  883, 884 ;  rules  of, 
in  classical  Latin,  2429-2463  ;  monosyl- 
lables, 2430-2433  ;  penults,  2434-2436  ; 
final  syllables  ending  in  vowel,  2437- 
2446 ;  final  syllables  ending  in  single 
cons,  not  s,  2447-2450 ;  final  syllables 
ending  in  s,  2451-2457;  position,  2458; 
hidden,  2459-2463 ;  some  peculiarities 
of,  in  old  Latin,  2464-2469 ;  law  of 
Iambic  shortening,  2470-2472 ;  in  ver- 
sification, 2514-2518. 

Quaternarius, 

iambic,  2617-2620;  trochaic,  2643; 
anapaestic,  2687. 

Questioning, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1169- 
1171  ;  with  ace.  and  prepositional 
phrase,  1170;  with  indirect  question, 

1774- 
Questions, 

indie,  in,  1499;  commoner  in  Latin 
than  in  English,  1500;  two,  short 
(quid  est,  quid  vero,  &c.)  leading 
to  longer,  1500  ;  kinds  of,  1501. 

Yes  or  No  questions,  1501-1525  ;  con- 
founded with  exclamations  and  declara- 
tions, 1502;  without  interrogative  par- 
ticle, 1502;  with  non,  1502;  with  -ne, 
-n,  1503-1505;  with  nonne,  1503, 
1506;  with  nonne  .  .  .  non  .  .  .  non, 
1506;  with  num,  1503,  1507;  with 
numne,  1507;  an,  arine,  an  non 
in  single,  1503,  1508 ;  with  ecquis, 
ecquS,  ecquando,  en  umquam, 
1509;  with  satin,  satin  ut,  1510; 
how  answered,  1511-1514. 

Alternative,  history  of,  1515-1517; 
without  interrogative  particle,  1518; 
with  utrum,  -ne,  -n,  and  an,  anne, 
an  non,  1519;  with  necne,  1520; 
with  several  alternatives,  1521;  with 
utrum,  and  -ne  and  an,  1522;  with 
utrumne  .  .  .  an,  1522 ;  with  no  air 
ternative  expressed,  1523;  how  an- 
swered, 1525. 

Pronoun  questions,  1526-1530  ;  intro- 
duced by  interrogative  advs.,  1526; 
with  ut,  /tow,  1528;  with  quisne,  &c., 
1529  ;  two  or  more  with  one  verb,  1530. 

Subjunctive  questions,  1563-1570;  of 
appeal,  1563;  in  alternative  form,  1564; 
asking  whether  action  is  conceivable, 
1565  ;  in  exclamative  sentences,  with 
no  interrogative  word  or  with  -ne,  1566, 
1567;  with  uti,  ut,  1568  ;  with  uti,  ut, 
and  -ne,  -n,  1569;  in  subordinate 


535 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Questions  —  continued. 
sentence,  1731 ;  tense  of,  in  subordinate 
sentence,  1753. 

Indirect,  defined,  1773 »  subjv.  in, 
1773;  expressions  introducing,  1774; 
with  verbs  of  fearing,  1774,  1959;  se- 
quence of  tenses  in,  1760;  Yes  or  No 
questions  as,  1775-1777;  introduced  by 
si,  si  forte,  1777;  alternative  ques- 
tions as,  1778-1784;  introduced  by  qui 
scio  an,  qui  scis  an,  quis  scit  an, 
1781  ;  introduced  by  haud  scio  an, 
1782;  without  interrogative  particle, 
1784;  pron.  questions  as,  1785;  origi- 
nal subjv.  questions  as,  1786;  rel.  con- 
structions distinguished  from,  1791 ;  use 
of  reflexive  pron.  in,  2341,  2342. 

Accusative  without  verb  in,  1150; 
verbal  expressions  denoting  ability,  duty, 
propriety,  necessity  in,  1495-1497  ; 
in  indie,  pres.  or  fut.,  intimating  com- 
mand, exhortation,  deliberation,  appeal, 
1531,  1623;  set  forms  expressing  curi- 
osity, incredulity,  wrath,  captiousness, 
1532;  threats  introduced  by  scfn  qu5 
modo,  1532;  united  with  partic.,  abl. 
abs.,  or  subordinate  sentence,  1533  ;  co- 
ordinate with  imper.  or  te  rog5,  scln, 
&c.,  1697,  1787;  introduced  by  indef. 
nesci5  quis,  &c.,  1 788, 1 789 ;  mirum 
quantum,  &c.,  1790;  direct,  defined, 
1723  ;  question  and  answer,  original  form 
of  rel.  sentence,  1795  >  m  aP°d-  of  con- 
ditional sentence,  2018 ;  introduced  by 
nam,  2155;  in  ind.  disc.,  2312-2314; 
use  of  uter,  quis,  qui,  2385,  2386. 


Reason, 

introduced  by  quod,  1853;  introduced 
bv  non  quo,  &c.,  1855  ;  introduced  by 
quoniam,  1884;  expressed  by  tam- 
quam,  1909  ;  coordinated  members  de- 
noting, 1703  ;  see  Cause. 
Recessive  accent, 

89-9.. 
Reciprocal, 

action,  deponents  expressing,  1487, 
see  Reflexive  :  pron.,  place  taken  by 
inter  n5s,  &c.,  mvicem,  &c.,  2344, 
2345  ;  relations,  expressed  by  uterque 
and  alter,  2400. 

Redundant  verbs,  818-823,  924-1019. 
Reduplication, 

defined,  189;  in  prons.,  650;  in  verb 
roots,  758,  828,  829;  in  pert.,  858-861, 
922-932,989,995,  ion. 


Reflexive  pronouns, 

decl.  of ,  644-65 1 ;  possess.,  652-655  ; 
possess,  used  instead  of  gen.,  1234, 
1262;  gen.  of,  used  possessively,  1234; 
preps,  following,  1435 ;  referring  to 
subj.  of  verb,  2336;  referring  to  word 
not  the  subj.  of  verb,  2337;  in  construc- 
tion of  ace.  with  infin.,  2338-2340;  in 
subordinate  clauses,  2341-2343;  inter 
se,  invicem  inter  se,  invicem  se, 
inyicem,  and  expressions  with  alter, 
alius,  for  reciprocal,  2344,  2345 ;  pos- 
sess, omitted,  2346;  possess,  meaning 
groper,  appropriate,  favourable,  2346 ; 
is  used  for,  2370;  ipse  with,  2376;  see 

SUl,  SUUS. 

Reflexive  verbs, 

1481 ;  pres.  partic.  of,  in  reflexive 
sense,  1482 ;  gerund  of,  in  reflexive 
sense,  1482;  deponents,  1487;  with  ace., 
1148. 

Reizianus  versus,  2625,  2626. 
Relation, 

dat.  of,  1217,  1218. 
Relationship, 

words  of,  with  gen.,  1203. 
Relative  adverbs, 

711 ;  in  place  of  rel.  pron.  and  prep., 
1793  5  correlative  prons.  and  advs.,  1831 ; 
adv.,  uti,  ut,  1935  ;  quoad,  1991. 
Relative  conjunctive  particles, 
1794;  sentences  introduced  by,  1838- 

2122.  * 

Relative  pronouns, 

decl.  of.  658,  659,  681-694;  agree- 
ment of,  1094-1098,  1801-1811;  agree- 
ment determined  by  sense,  1095,  1804; 
with  several  substs.,  1096,  1803  ;  refer- 
ring to  proper  name  and  explanatory 
appellative  combined,  1805;  agreeing 
with  pred.  subst.,  1097,  1806;  equivalent 
to  gen.,  1098;  verb  agreeing  in  pers. 
with  antec.  of  rel.,  1807;  verb  agreeing 
in  pers.  with  antec.  of  rel.  implied  in 
possess.,  1807 ;  rel.  attracted  to  case  of 
antec.,  1808;  word  in  appos.  with  rel., 
1809;  word  explanatory  of  antec.  agree- 
ing with  rel.,  1810  ;  quod,  id  quod, 
quae  res,  1811  :  rel.  introducing  main 
sentence,  1835  ;  rel.  introducing  main 
sentence  put  in  ace.  with  infin.  in  ind. 
disc.,  2316  ;  with  a  compar.,  1321,  1326; 
preps,  following,  1434,  1435;  introduc- 
ing rel.  sentence,  1792;  representing 
any  pers.,  1792;  rel.  advs.  instead  of, 
1793;  developed  from  interrogative 


536 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Relative  pronouns  —  continued. 
pron.,  1795,  l8°8  ?  quod  before  si,  &c., 
1837  ;  as  connectives,  2128,  2131,  2132  ; 
see  qui. 

Relative  sentence, 

treated,  1792-1837;  introduced  by 
rel.  words,  1792-1794;  development  of, 
1795;  preceding  main  sentence,  1795; 
with  subst.  in  both  members,  1795,  1796; 
following  main  sentence,  1796  ;  urbem 
quam  statuo  vostra  est,  1797 ; 
with  determinative,  demonstrative, 
subst.,  omitted.  1798;  qua  prudential 
es,  nihil  te  fugiet,  1800;  indie,  in, 
1721;  tense  of,  after  secondary,  1756; 
subjv.  of  ind.  disc,  and  attraction  in, 
1722, 1815  ;  subjv.  of  repeated  action  in, 
1730,  1815;  equivalent  to  conditional 
prot.,  indie,  or  subjv.  in,  1812,  2110; 
of  simple  declarations  or  descriptions, 
indie,  in,  1813 ;  introduced  by  indef. 
prons.  and  advs.,  indie,  in,  1814;  of 
purpose,  subjv.  in,  1817  ;  of  characteris- 
tic or  result,  subjv.  in,  1818-1823;  with 
dignus,  indignus,  idoneus,  aptus, 
1819;  coordinated  with  subst.,  adj..  or 
partic.,  1820;  with  antec.  omitted,  indef.  ] 
antec.,  or  nemo  est  qui,  nihil  est 
quod,  &c.,  1799,  1821,  1822;  sunt 
qui,  &c.,  with  indie.,  1823;  of  cause,  : 
reason,  proof,  concession,  subjv.  in,  ; 
1824-1830;  qui  tamen  with  indie.,  j 
1825  ;  sentences  with  indie.,  resembling  ! 
causal  sentences,  1826;  quippe  qui,  ut 
qui,  ut  pote  qui,  with  indie,  and 
subjv.,  1827;  quippe  qui  (adv.),  ut  , 
qui,  1828;  parenthetical  subjv.,  quod 
sciam,  qui  quidem,  1829;  quod 
attinet  ad,  &c.,  1830;  following  prae- 
Ut,  1945  ;  coordination  of  rel.  sentences, 
with  rel.  omitted,  1832,  1833;  with  rel. 
repeated,  1833;  with  second  rel.  re- 
placed by  is,  hie,  &c.,  1833;  subordi- 
nation of,  1834;  equivalent  to  main 
sentence,  1835  ;  equivalent  to  main  sen- , 
tence,  in  ind.  disc.,  2316;  other  rel.  i 
sentences  in  ind.  disc.,  2315,  2318,  2319; 
quo  facto,  &c.,  1836;  coordinated 
member  equivalent  to,  1698;  represented 
by  partic.,  2294. 

Relative  time, 

of  subordinate  sentence,  1732,  1741. 

Remembering, 

adjs.  meaning,  with  gen.,  1263,  1264; 
verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1287-1291;  with 
ace.,  1288;  with  de  and  abl.,  1289, 
1290;  with  infin.,  2169. 


Reminding, 

verbs  of,  cases  with,  1172,  1291. 
Remove, 

verbs  meaning,  with  abl.,  1302-1306; 
with  dat.,  1195,  1209. 

Repeated, 

action  (ter  in  ann5,  &c.),  1353;  ex- 
pressed by  pres.  indie.,  1588;  by  impf. 
indie.,  1596;  subjv.  of,  1730;  subjv.  of, 
in  cum  sentences,  1859, 1860;  subjv.  of, 
in  sentences  with  quotiens,  quo- 
tienscumque,  1887;  subjv.  of,  in  sen- 
tences with  dum,  donee,  quoad, 
quamdiu,  1994,  2002,  2009;  with 
postquam,  ubi,  ut,  1932;  in  general 
conditions,  2026,  2034,  2035,  2037,  2044, 
2050,  2071. 

Represent, 

verbs  meaning,  with  pr-es.  partic.  used 
predicatively,  2298,  2299;  with  infin., 
2299. 

Request, 

expressed  by  imper.,  1571;  expressed 
by  fut.,  1624;  verbs  of,  subjv.  coordi- 
nated with,  1708;  with  purpose  clause, 
1950. 

Resemblance, 

adj.  suffixes  denoting,  299-301. 

Resisting, 

verbs  of,  with  dat.,  1181 ;  with  ng  and 
subjv.,  1960;  with  quominus,  1977; 
with  quin,  1986. 

Resolution,  2518. 

Resolve, 

verbs  meaning,  with  purpose  clause, 
1950;  with  infin.,  1953,2169;  with  ace. 
and  infin.,  2193. 

Rest, 

verbs  of,  followed  by  in  or  sub  and 
abl.,  1423;  followed  by  in  and  ace., 
1424. 

Restraining, 

verbs  of,  with  ne,  1960,  1977;  with 
quominus,  1960,  1977 ;  with  quin, 
1986;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2203;  with 
ace.  of  gerundive  construction  or  ger- 
und. 2252. 

Result, 

clauses,  tense  of,  after  secondary, 
1757-1759;  rel.  sentences  of,  1818-1823; 
with  dignus,  indignus,  &c.,  1819; 
after  assertions  or  questions  of  exist- 
ence or  non-existence,  1821,  1822;  sen- 
tences with  ut,  ut  non,  &c.,  1947, 
1948,  1965-1970  ;  tantum  abest, 
1969 ;  quam  ut,  1896 ;  coordinated 


537 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Result  —  continued. 
member  equivalent  to  clause  of,   1700; 
dat.  of,  1219-1222;    suffixes  denoting, 
213,  222,  231,  234-236,  239,  249,  296. 

Rhetorical  questions, 
see  Appeal. 

Rhythm, 

defined,  2511;  kinds  of,  2525-2528; 
Numeri  Italic!,  2549 ;  Saturnian,  2550- 
2554;  dactylic,  2555-2580;  iambic, 
2581-2627;  trochaic,  2628-2649;  logaoe- 
dic,  2650-2674;  dactyl o-trochaic,  2675- 
2681;  anapaestic,  2682-2690;  cretic, 
2691-2697;  bacchiac,  2698- -2706;  chor- 
iambic,  2707;  ionic,  2708-2717. 

Rhythmical  sentence,  2532,  2533. 

Rhythmical  series,  2532,  2533. 

Rivers, 

names  of,  gender,  405, 406;  decl.,  518, 
519,  549,  554,  556- 

Roots, 

defined,  183;  nature  of,  184;  three 
kinds,  noun  roots,  verb  roots,  pron. 
roots,  186;  two  or  more  forms  of  one 
root,  187;  vowel  and  cons,  roots,  188; 
reduplicated,  189;  reduplicated  in  verbs, 
758,  828,  829;  pres.  stems  used  as, 
190-194,  855;  used  as  stems,  195,  198, 
199;  used  as  stems  in  verbs,  738-743, 
844;  root  stem,  defined,  195  ;  root  verbs, 
defined,  743;  root  verbs,  inflected,  744- 
781,  828  ;  prin.  parts  of  root  verbs,  922. 

Route  taken, 

advs.  denoting,  707,  1376;  abl.  of, 
1376. 


Sapphic, 

strophe,  2545;  the  lesser,  2666;  the 
greater,  2671-2673;  in  Horace,  2734, 
2735- 

Saturnian,  2550-2554. 

Saying, 

verbs  of,  with  indef.  subj.,  1033;  in 
pres.  of  past  action,  1592;  in  plup., 
1617;  ind.  disc,  with,  1724,  2309;  illo- 
gically  in  subjv.  in  clause  introduced  by 
qui,  quod,  cum,  1727,  2320;  coordi- 
nated, 1696;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2175  ; 
time  of  infin.  with,  2219,  2226  ;  see  In- 
direct discourse. 

Scazon, 

choliambus,  2597-2600;  trochaic  te- 
trameter, 2630-2641. 

Secondary  cases,  mi,  1112. 


Secondary  tenses, 

1717,  1762;  rules  for  use  of,  1740- 
1772;  subordinate  to  indie.,  1746-1761; 
subordinate  to  subjv.,  1762-1765  ;  sub- 
ordinate to  noun  of  verb,  1766-1769; 
subjv.  in  ind.  disc,  or  by  attraction, 
1770-1772,2322-2324,  2326-2329;  perf. 
def.  and  pres.  of  vivid  narration,  1717, 
17^2,  1754;  secondary  sequence  with 
primary,  1751-1753;  primary  sequence 
with  secondary,  1755-1760. 

Seeing, 

verbs  of,  in  pres.  of  past  action,  1592; 
with  indirect  question,  1774;  *n  Pres- 
with  postquam,  ubi,  ut,  &c.,  1926. 

Selling, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1274;  with  abl., 
1388-1392. 

Semi-deponents,  Soi,  1488. 

Semi-elision,  2497. 

Semi-hiatus,  2497. 

Semiquinaria  caesura,  2544. 

Semiseptenaria  caesura,  2544. 

Semiternaria  caesura,  2544. 

Semivowels,  52. 

Senarius, 

defined,  2536  ;  iambic,  2583-2596. 

Sentence, 

defined,  1023;  simple,  defined,  1024; 
simple,  enlarged,  1037-1054;  simple, 
combined,  1055;  simple,  treated,  1099- 
1635 ;  declarative,  defined,  1025  ;  ex- 
clamatory, defined,  1025;  imper.,  de- 
fined, 1025;  coordinate  and  subordinate, 
1055-1061;  subordinate,  history  of, 
1693-1695,  1705,  1706,  1957,  see  Sub- 
ordinate sentences;  compound,  de- 
fined, 1056;  compound,  abridged,  1057; 
compound,  treated,  1636-1713;  com- 
plex, defined,  1058  ;  complex,  varie- 
ties of,  1058-1061;  as  advs.,  712;  inter- 
rogative, defined,  1025,  see  Questions; 
coordinate,  treated.  1636-1692;  inter- 
mediate coordinate,  treated,  1693-1713, 
see  Coordination;  complex,  treated, 
1714-2122;  compar.,  defined,  1716; 
local,  defined,  1716;  temporal,  defined, 
1716,  see  Temporal;  modal,  defined, 
1716;  correlative,  1831;  main,  intro- 
duced by  rel.  pron.,  1835-1837;  con- 
junctive particle,  1838-2122,  see 
Conjunctive ;  connection  of  sen- 
tences, 2123-2159;  rhythmical,  2532, 
2533;  se?  Conditional,  Causal, 
Concessive,  Final,  Consecutive, 
Relative  sentence. 


538 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Separating, 

verbs  of,  with  dat.,  1195,  1209;  with 
gen.,  1294;  with  abl.,  1302-1306,  1294; 
with  gerundive  construction  or  gerund, 
2268;  adjs.  of,  with  gen.,  1263;  with 
abl.,  1306. 
Separation, 

expressed  by  supine  in  -u,  2277 ;  see 
Separating. 
Septenarius, 

defined,    2536;    iambic,    2610-2616; 
trochaic,  2629-2635;  anapaestic,  2686. 
Sequence  of  tenses, 

1745-1772  ;  subjv.  subordinate  to 
indie.,  1746-1761;  subjv.  subordinate  to 
subjv.,  1762-1765;  subjv.  subordinate 
to  noun  of  verb,  1766-1769;  subjv.  in 
ind.  disc,  or  by  attraction,  1770-1772, 
2322-2324,  2326-2329. 
Series, 

rhythmical,     2532,     2533;     stichic, 
2546. 
Service, 

adjs.  of,  with  dat.,  1200. 
Serving, 

verbs  of,  with  dat.,  1181,  1182. 
Sharing, 

verbs  meaning,  with  gen.,  1263. 
Shortening, 

of  vowels,  124-132  ;  of  vowel  before 
another  vowel,  124 ;  in  final  syllable, 
129-132  ;  in  nom.  of  -a-  stems,  130,  i ; 
436  ;  in  neut.  plur.,  130,  2  ;  461  ;  in 
abl.  ending  e  of  cons,  stems,  502  ;  in 
verb  endings,  130,  132  ;  in  nom.  ending 
-or,  132 ;  in  mihf,  tibf,  sibl,  ibf, 
ubf,  alicubf,  necubi,  sicubi,  ubi- 
nam,  ubivis,  ubicumque,  ibidem, 
129,  2  ;  in  iambic  words  in  verse,  129, 
i  ;  before  -n  for  -sn,  129,  i ;  in  perf. 
ending  -erunt,  857  ;  in  perf.  subjv., 
876;  variations  or  quantity,  134;  in 
first  syllable  of  ille,  illic,  quippe, 
immo,  &c.,  2469 ;  iambic,  rule  of, 
2470-2472  ;  vowel  before  another  vowel 
retained  long,  127 ;  long  vowel  in  spe- 
cific endings  in  Old  Latin,  132. 
Showing, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1167. 
Sibilants, 

79- 
Simple, 

words,  defined,  181;  formative  suf- 
fixes, defined,  200;  sentence,  defined, 
1024,  see  Sentence. 


Singular  number, 

in  nouns,  defined,  414;  lacking,  see 
Defective;  with  different  meaning 
from  plur.,  418,  480;  in  substs.,  in 
agreement,  1077-1081,  see  Agree- 
ment; in  adjs.,  prons.,  partic.,  in 
agreement,  1082-1098,  see  Agree- 
ment; in  collective  sense,  1099;  of  a 
class,  noo;  neut.,  of  adjs.  used  as 
substs.,  1093,  1101,1250;  of  other  adjs. 
used  as  substs.,  1102,'  1103;  in  verbs, 
defined,  722;  in  verbs,  in  agreement, 
1062-1076,  1080,  see  Agreement; 
of  gerundive,  with  nostri,  &c.,  2260. 

Smell, 

verbs  of,  with  ace.,  1143. 

Softening,  2504. 

Sonants,  75. 

Sotadean,  2712,  2713. 

Sound, 

one  of  the  divisions  of  Latin  Gram- 
mar, treated,  i,  16-179;  change  of, 
in  vowels,  55-113;  change  of,  in  diph- 
thongs, 80-88;  change  of,  in  conso- 
nants, 114-154;  see  Substitution, 
Development,  Disappearance, 
Assimilation,  Dissimilation,  In- 
terchange, Lengthening,  Short- 
ening, Weakening,  Hiatus, 
Contraction,  Elision,  Affinities, 
Pronunciation,  Accent,  Quan- 
tity. 

Sounds, 

continuous,  defined,  51;  momentary, 
defined,  51;  classified,  54. 

Source, 

abl.  of,  1312-1315,  1426;  expressed 
by  gen.,  1232 ;  expressed  by  adj.,  1427. 

Space, 

extent  of,  denoted  by  ace.,  1151-1156, 
!398>  1475  5  denoted  by  abl.,  1153, 1399. 

Sparing, 

expressions  of,  case  with,  1181-1185. 

Specification, 

abl.  of,  1385;  ace.  of,  see  Part 
concerned;  gen.  of,  see  Genitive. 

Spirants,  78. 

Spondaic  verse, 

defined,  2556;  use,  2566,  2567. 

Spondee, 

defined,  2521;  irrational,  2524. 

Statements, 

general,  with  antequam,  prius- 
quam,  1912-1914;  particular,  with 
antequam,  priusquam,  1915-1921. 


539 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Stems, 

defined,  195  ;  roots  used  as,  195,  198, 
199 ;  root  used  as  stem  in  root  verbs, 
738-743,  828,  844  ;  pres.,  used  as  roots, 
190-194,  855;  new,  how  formed,  196; 
root  stem,  defined,  195 ;  stem  vowel  re- 
tained before  ending,  in  verbs,  367,  840; 
retained  in  nouns,  400 ;  noun  stems 
classified,  399;  noun  stems,  how  found, 
421;  how  indicated,  421;  nouns  with 
two  forms  of  stem  or  two  stems,  401, 
413,  470,  475,  53i.  545,  566-569,  603, 
632;  prons.  with,  645,  652,  672;  verbs 
with,  720,  818-823,  924-1019 ;  -a- 
stems  of  substs.,  decl.  of,  432-445 ;  -o- 
stems  of  substs.,  decl.  of,  446-466;  cons, 
stems  of  substs.,  decl.  of,  467-512,  see 
Declension ;  -i-  stems  of  substs., 
decl.  of,  513-569,  see  Declension; 
mixed,  513;  -u-  stems,  decl.  of,  585- 
595;  -e-  stems,  decl.  of,  596-607;  -o- 
and  -a-  stems  of  adjs.,  decl.  of,  613- 
620,  432-466 ;  cons,  stems  of  adjs., 
decl.  of,  621-626,  467-512,  see  De- 
clension ;  -i-  stems  of  adjs.,  decl.  of, 

.  627-636,  529-569,  see  Declension; 
of  pres.  partic.  632;  of  personal  prons., 
645  ;  of  hie,  662 ;  of  is,  672  ;  of  ipse, 
679;  of  qui,  quis,  681,  687-689;  of 
the  verb,  number  of,  718;  defective 
verbs,  805-817;  formation  of,  824-919, 
365-375,  see  formation ;  verbs  ar- 
ranged according  to  prin.  parts,  920- 
1022,  see  Verbs. 

Stichic  series,  2546. 

Stipulation, 

verbs  of,  with  purpose  clause,  1950. 

Striving, 

verbs  of,  with  purpose  clause,  1950; 
with  complementary  infin.,  1953. 

Strophe, 

defined,2545 ;  AlcaicandSapphic,2545. 

Stuff, 

abl.  of,  1312-1315;  gen.  of,  1255. 

Subject, 

of  sentence,  defined,  1023 ;  subst.  or 
equivalent  word  or  words,  1026;  in 
nom.,  1027 ;  when  expressed  and  when 
omitted,  1028-1034 ;  enlarged,  1038- 
1047;  subordinate  sentence  as,  1715; 
quod  sentence  as,  1845;  cum  sentence 
as,  1871 ;  complementary  clause  as,  1948  ; 
infin.  as,  2167,  2207-2215;  perf.  partic. 
as,  2289;  nom.,  of  infin.,  1535  ;  ace.,  of 
infin.,  2173  ;  of  infin.,  omitted,  1537, 
2183;  gen.  of,  1232-1238. 


Subjunctive  mood, 

tenses  of,  716;  how  translated,  717. 

Formation  of  tenses  of,  pres.,  841- 
843  ;  impf.,  849,  850 ;  perf.,  876-878  ; 
plup.,  881 ;  shorter  old  forms,  885-893. 

Uses  of,  forms  of  possum  and  de- 
beo  in,  1498;  of  desire,  1540-1553;  in 
wishes,  1540-1546;  in  exhortation,  di- 
rection, statement  of  propriety,  obliga- 
tion, necessity,  prohibition,  1547-1552; 
expressing  willingness,  assumption,  con- 
cession, 1553;  of  action  conceivable,  in 
simple  sentences,  1554-1562;  accom- 
panied by  fortasse,  &c.,  1554;  ve- 
lim,  nolim,  malim,  1555;  vellem, 
nollem,  mallem,  1560;  in  questions, 
in  simple  sentences,  1563-1569;  tenses 
of,  in  simple  sentences,  1634,  1635 ; 
tenses  of,  in  subordinate  sentences, 
1740-1772;  sequence  of  tenses.  1740- 
1745  ;  subordinate  to  indie.,  1746-1761 ; 
subordinate  to  subjv.,  1762-1765  ;  sub- 
ordinate to  noun  of  verb,  1 766-1 769  ; 
tenses  of,  in  ind.  disc,  and  by  attrac- 
tion, 1770-1772,  2322-2324;  tenses  ot, 
in  conditional  protases  in  ind.  disc.. 
2326-2329;  in  coordination,  1705-1713, 
see  Coordination ;  in  ind.  disc.,  1722- 
1727,  2312-2324,  2326-2329;  of  attrac- 
tion or  assimilation,  1728;  of  repeated 
action,  1730;  of  wish,  action  conceivable, 
interrogation,  in  subordinate  sentence, 
1731  ;  of  indirect  question,  1773-1786, 
see  Questions  ;  indie,  questions  appar- 
ently indirect,  1787-1791  ;  si,  si  forte 
with,  1777;  rel.  sentence  equivalent  to 
conditional  prot.,  1812  ;  with  indef.  rel. 
prons.  and  advs.,  1814 ;  rel.  sentences 
of  purpose  in,  1816,  1817  ;  rel.  sentences 
of  characteristic  or  result  in, 1816, 1818- 
1823;  with  dignus,  indignus,  ido- 
neus,  1819 ;  coordinated  with  subst., 
adj.,  or  partic.,  1820;  withantec.  omitted, 
indef.  antec.,  or  nemo  est  qui,  nihil 
est  quod,  &c.,  1821,  1822  ;  rel.  sen- 
tences of  cause,  reason,  proof,  conces- 
sion in,  1824-1830;  quippe  qui,  ut 
qui,  ut  pote  qui  with,  1827  ;  paren- 
thetical, quod  sciam,  qui  quidem, 
1829;  with  quod,  quia,  1838-1858; 
with  cum,  1859,  1870,  1872,  1873, 
1877-1881  ;  with  quoniam,  1882- 
1884  ;  with  quotiens,  quotiens- 
cumque,  1887;  with  quam,  1896, 
1897;  with  quamquam,  1900,  1901; 
with  quamvis,  1904,  1905;  with 
quamlibet,  1907;  with  tamquam, 


54< 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Subjunctive  mood  —  continued. 
1909 ;  with  antequam,  priusquam, 
1911-1921;  with  pridie  quam,  1922; 
with  ub!,  ut  quisque,  1932;  with 
uti,  ut,  ne,  1947-1970;  with  ubl, 
1971  ;  with  quo,  qui,  1972,  1974-1976; 
with  quominus,  1977,  1978;  with 
quo  setius,  1979;  with  quin,  1980- 
1990;  with  dum,  donee,  quoad, 
quamdiu,  1991-2009;  with  modo, 
2003;  with  quando,  2010;  in  con- 
ditional periods,  2023-2115  ;  with  etsi, 
tametsl,  tamenetsi,  etiamsi,  si, 
2116;  with  quasi,  quam  si,  tam- 
quam  si,  &c.,  2117-2122;  use  of 
reflexive  in  subordinate  clauses  con- 
taining, 2341,  2342. 

Subordinate  constructions, 

history  of,  1693-1695,  1705,  1706, 
1740,  1957. 

Subordinate  relations, 

expressed  coordinately,  1693-1713, 
see  Coordination. 

Subordinate  sentences, 

1055,  1058-1061;  question  in,  1533; 
treated,  1714-2122  ;  how  expressed, 
1714;  value  of,  1715;  names  of,  1716; 
tenses  of  indie,  in,  1732-1739  ;  tenses  of 
subjv.  in,  1740-1772;  mood  of,  1720- 
1731,  1773-2122;  following  supine  in 
-um,  2272 ;  introduced  by  supine  in 
-U,  2275;  mo°d  °f>  m  md-  disc.,  2315- 
2320;  use  of  reflexive  pron.  in,  2341- 
2343  ;  is  used  for  reflexive  in,  2370. 

Subordination, 

of  rel.  sentence,  1834. 

Substantives, 

defined,  4-7  ;  abstract,  7 ;  concrete, 
5  ;  material,  6 ;  endings  of,  law  of 
iimbic  shortening  applied  to,  129-132; 
formation  of,  180-203  ;  roots  and  stems, 
183-198  :  without  formative  suffix,  195, 
198,  199;  with  formative  suffix,  195-198, 
200-203  !  suffixes  of,  204-279,  see  Suf- 
fix ;  compound,  formation  and  meaning 
of,  379-390;  inflection  of,  398-607,  see 
Gender,  Number,  Case,  Declen- 
sion ;  adjs.  used  as,  with  -e,  -i  in  abl. 
sing.,  558,  561,  631 ;  advs.  from,  696- 
700,  703,  708,  710. 

Modifiers  of,  1038-1047;  obj.  of,  de- 
fined, 1046 ;  pred.,  see  Predicate ; 
agreement  of,  1077-1081,  see  Agree- 
ment. 

Uses  of,  1099-1468  ;  used  adjectively, 
1042;  adjs.  used  as,  1099-1104,  1106, 


Substantives  —  continued. 
1093,  1250;  with  ace.  appended,  1129, 
1136;  with  dat.  appended,  1183,  1208, 
1225;  with  gen.,  1227-1262;  with  abl. 
appended,  1301,  1307,  1309,  1314,  1342, 
1375-1377;  with  loc.  appended,  1301, 
1331  ;  omitted  in  abl.  abs.  1371;  used 
alone  as  abl.  abs.,  1372;  used  as  preps., 
1406;  combination  of,  by  a  prep.,  1426- 
1428  ;  prepositional  expressions  equiva- 
lent to,  1428;  repetition  of  prep,  with 
several,  1429;  omission  of  prep,  with 
several,  1430 ;  two  preps,  with  one 
subst.,  1431,  1432  ;  qualified  by  adv., 
1439-1441 ;  advs.  used  as,  1442 ;  sub- 
ordinate sentences  with  value  of,  1715; 
expressed  in  both  members  of  rel.  sen- 
tence, 1795,  1796;  put  before  the  rel., 
1797;  omitted  before  rel.,  1798;  rel. 
sentence  coordinated  with,  1820  ;  quod 
clause  with  value  of,  1845  '  complemen- 
tary clause  with  value  of,  1948;  infin. 
as  subst.  ace.,  2204-2206 ;  with  ace.  of 
gerundive  construction  or  gerund,  2252  ; 
with  dat.  of  gerundive  construction 
2254 ;  with  gen.  of  gerundive  construc- 
tion or  gerund,  2258  ;  the  subst.  partic., 
2287-2292. 

Substitution, 

of  consonants,  147-164,  passim  ;  of  1 
for  d  or  r,  147,  148;  of  r  for  s,  154; 
of  h  for  guttural  aspirate,  152;  of  b 
for  p,  164,  2;  of  g  for  c,  164,  6;  of  d 
for  t,  149,  2. 

Suffix, 

formative,  defined,  195 ;  nouns  with, 
195-198,  200-203  ;  nouns  without,  195, 
198,  199;  simple  and  compound,  de- 
fined, 200;  preceded  by  vowel,  202. 

Substantive  suffixes,  204-279;  primi- 
tive, 204-245;  denominative,  246-279, 
226,  227,  232;  denoting  agent,  204-211 ; 
denoting  action,  212-237,  249;  forming 
collectives,  228,  249 ;  denoting  concrete 
effect,  213,  217,  224,  241;  denoting  in- 
strument or  means,  238-245,  213,  224; 
denoting  result,  213,  222,  231,  234-236, 
239,  249,  296;  denoting  quality,  246- 
264;  denoting  person  concerned,  265, 
309;  denoting  place,  266,  228,  241,  242, 
245,  249,  308,  309,  314,  334;  forming 
diminutives,  267-278;  denoting  patrony- 
mics, 279. 

Adjective  suffixes,  280-360;  primi- 
tive, 280-297,  305  ;  denominative,  298- 
360,  287;  denoting  active  quality,  281- 
290,  293,  294,  296;  denoting  passive 


541 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Suffix  —  continued. 
quality,  291-297,  282,  283;  denoting 
material  or  resemblance,  299-301;  de- 
noting appurtenance,  302-330 ;  denoting 
supply,  331-338;  forming  diminutives, 
339,  340  ;  compar.  suffixes,  346-348  ; 
superl.  suffixes,  349-352;  denoting 
place,  317,  321,  347. 

Adverb  suffixes,  diminutive,  341 ;  of 
compar.  and  superl.,  361-364. 

Verbal  suffixes,  denominative,  365- 
375 ;  frequentative  or  intensive,  371-374 ; 
desiderative,  375;  meditative,  375;  in- 
ceptive or  inchoative,  834;  -no,  -to, 
-io,  832,  833.  835-838. 

Pronoun  suffix -met,  650,655  ;  -pte, 
655;  -ce,  662-664,  669,  670. 
Summary, 

asyndeton  of,  2127. 
Superlative, 

Of  adjs.,  suffixes  of,  349-352 ;  of  adjs. 
in  -er,  344,  350;  of  adjs.  in  -ills,  345, 
350, 359;  lacking,  359,  360 ;  formed  from 
stems  and  roots,  342;  formed  by  max- 
ime,  360. 

Of  adverbs,  endings  of,  361-363; 
lacking,  364;  with  gen.,  1242. 

Use  of  summus,  &c.,  1249;  abl. 
with  words  of  superl.  meaning,  1393; 
used  when  two  things  are  compared, 
1456;  expressed  by  compar.  and  neg., 
1462 ;  of  more  than  two  things,  1465 ; 
strengthened  by  unus,  quam, 
maxime,  &c.,  1466,  1892,  1903;  de- 
noting high  degree,  1467 ;  absolute,  1467 ; 
of  eminence,  1467,  1468;  strengthened 
by  a  compar.,  1468;  accompanied 
by  vel,  1671 ;  agreeing  with  a  rel., 
1810;  tarn  . . .  quam  qui,  quantus, 
Ut,  &c.,  1892;  double,  with  quam  .  .  . 
tarn,  1893;  represented  by  quamvis 
with  adj.  or  adv.,  1903;  ut  quisque, 
quisque  with,  1939. 
Supine, 

ace.  or  abl.  of  substs.  in  -tu-  (-SU-), 
235,  2269;   the  supines,  verbal  nouns, 
732,  2269;  formation  of,  900;  lacking, 
900;  denoting  purpose,  1166,  2270;  use 
of  supine  in  -um,  2269-2273;  use  of 
supine  in  -u,  2269,  2274-2277. 
Surds,  75. 
Surprise, 

expressed  by  dat.,  1211;  questions  of, 
1532, 1566-1569;  verbs  of,  with  quod, 
quia,  1851;  with  cum,  1851,  1875; 
with  ace.  and  infin.,  2187,  2188,  2184; 
expressed  by  infin.,  2216. 


Syllaba  anceps,  2533,  2534. 

Syllabic  function,  22,  82,  83. 

Syllables, 

final,  vowel  of  shortened,  129-132; 
see  Shortening;  vowel  of  retained 
long,  132;  quantity  of,  177;  contain- 
ing h,  qu,  177  ;  containing  short  vowel 
before  mute  or  f  followed  by  1  or  r,  1 78 ; 
division  of,  17^;  names  of,  175;  irra- 
tional, 2524  ;  see  Accent,  Atonic. 

Synaeresis,  2500. 

Synaloepha,  2498. 

Synapheia,  2510. 

Syncope, 

defined,  in,  168,  2508;  in  versifica- 
tion, 2541. 

Synecdochical, 

ace.,  see  Part  concerned. 

Synizesis,  117,  2499. 

System, 

the  pres  ,  828-853,  365-367,  738-740; 
the  p_erf.,  854-919,  738-740,  see  For- 
mation ;  in  versification,  defined,  2547. 
Systol6,  2507. 


Taking  away, 

verbs  of,  with  dat.,  1209;  with  infin. 
of  purpose,  2165. 
Taking  up, 

verbs  of,  with  infin.  of  purpose,  2165. 
Taste, 

verbs  of,  with  ace.,  1143. 
Teaching, 

verbs  of,  with  two  accusatives,  1169- 
1171  ;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2197. 
Telling, 

verbs  of,  with  indirect  question,  1774. 
Temporal, 

sentences,  defined,  1716;  subjv.  of 
ind.  disc,  and  attraction  in,  1722,  2319; 
subjv.  of  repeated  action  in,  1730; 
cum,  1859-1873;  quoniam,  1882, 
1883 ;  antequam,  priusquam, 
&c.,  1911-1922 ;  dum,  donee,  quoad, 
quamdiu,  I99i:_quand5,  2010-2012; 
postquam,  ubf,  ut,  &c.,  1923-1934  ; 
coordinated  member  equivalent  to,  1699. 
Tempus, 

in  versification,  2515. 
Tendency, 

dat.  of,  1219-1222. 
Tenses, 

of  the  indie.,  716  ;  of  the  subjv.,  716; 
of  the  imper.,  716;  meanings  of,  717; 
from  two  stems,  720  ;  formation  of,  824- 


542 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Tenses  —  continued. 
919,  see  Formation;  primary  and 
secondary,  1717;  sequence  of,  1740-1745. 
In  simple  sentences,  pres.  indie., 
1587-1593,  1601 ;  impf.  indie.,  1594- 
1601,  1495-1497;  fut.,  1619-1625; 
perf.  indie.,  1602-1613,  1616 ;  plup.  in- 
die., 1614-1618,  1607,  1609;  fut.  perf., 
1626-1632,  1607,  1609;  subjv.,  1634, 
1635,  1540-1569. 

In  subordinate  sentences,  mdic.,  1732- 
1739;  subjv.,general  remarks,  1740-1745; 
subjv.  subordinate  to  indie.,  1746-1761  ; 
subjv.  subordinate  to  subjv.,  1762-1765  ; 
subjv.  subordinate  to  noun  of  the  verb, 
1766-1769;  subjv.  in  ind.  disc,  or  by 
attraction,  1770-1772,  2322-2324  ;  condi- 
tional protases  in  ind.  disc.,  2326-2329  ; 
use  in  indirect  questions,  1773-1791  ; 
use  in  rel.  sentence,  1792-1837;  use 
with  conjunctive  particles,  1838-2122. 

Of  infin.,  2218-2236,  2321;  con- 
ditional apodoses  in  ind.  disc.,  2330- 
2334;  of  partic.,  2278-2299;  see  Pres- 
ent, &c. 

Ternarius, 

iambic,  2621-2623 ;  trochaic,  2644- 
2646. 

Tetrameter, 

defined,  2536;  dactylic,  2577,  2578; 
iambic,  2604-2609;  trochaic,  2629- 
2641  ;  anapaestic,  2684-2686 ;  cretic, 
2694-2696;  bacchiac,  2701-2703;  ionic, 
2712-2716. 

Tetrapody, 

defined,  2531 ;  logaoedic,  2660-2663. 

Tetraseme,  2516. 

Tetrastich,  2545. 

Thanks, 

expressed  by  fut.,  1622 ;  it  a  .  .  .  ut 
in,  1542,  1622,  1937. 

Theme, 

of  verb,  738-740. 

Thesis,  2520. 

Thinking, 

verbs  of,  with  indef.  subjv.,  1033; 
with  two  accusatives,  1167 ;  coordinated, 
1696;  ind.  disc,  with,  1724;  illogically 
in  subjv.  in  rel.  clause,  1727,  2320  ;  with 
ace.  and  infin.,  2175  '»  time  of  infin.  with, 
2219,  2226 ;  see  Indirect  Discourse, 

Threat, 

introduced  by  question,  1532;  ex- 
pressed by  fut.,  1619;  implication  of  in 
fut.  perf.,  1629. 


543 


Threatening, 

expressions  of,  case  with,  1181-1185; 
with  ace.  and  infin.,  2186;  with  pres. 
infin.,  2186. 

Thymelicus,  2697. 

Time, 

duration  of,  denoted  by  ace.,  1151- 
1156 ;  ace.  of  duration  of  made  subj.  in 
pass.,  1475  ;  duration  of,  denoted  by 
abl.,  1355  ;  at  which,  denoted  by  ace., 
1156  ;  at  which,  denoted  by  loc.,  1341 ; 
at  which,  denoted  by  abl.,  1^50,  1351, 
1353;  within  which,  denoted  by  abl., 
1352-1354  ;  before  or  after  which,  1394- 
1397,  1154;  denoted  by  advs.,  1438;  rel., 
of  subordinate  sentence,  1732,  1741; 
independent,  of  subordinate  sentence, 
1738,  1744 ;  antequam  with  nouns 
denoting,  1920 ;  postquam  with  nouns 
denoting,  1929;  denoted  by  abl.  of 
gerundive  construction  or  gerund,  2266 ; 
of  partic.,  2279-2281 ;  expressed  by  abl. 
abs.,  1367;  expressed  by  partic.,  2295; 
see  Temporal. 

A,  in  versification,  defined,  2515. 

Titles, 

of  books,  use  of  nom.  in,  1114-1116  ; 
of  office,  with  gerundive  construction, 
2254. 

Tmesis, 

defined,  1407,  2509;  in  quicumque, 
692. 

Towns, 

names  of,  form  of  loc.  case  of,  438, 
46o,  504,  554;  decl.  of,  >5i8,  549,  554, 
557 ;  m  ace.  with  expressions  of  motion, 
1157-1160;  used  adjectively,  1233; 
constructions  with,  to  denote  place  from 
which,  1307-1310;  constructions  with, 
to  denote  place  in  or  at  which,  1331- 
*336i  I342>  1343?  rel-  advs.,  ubf,  quo, 
unde,  referring  to,  1793. 

Transfer  of  quantity, 
133- 

Transition, 

expressed  by  quid  quod,  1849  ;  ex- 
pressed by  quoniam,  1884;  hie  and 
ille  in,  2353,  2360. 

Transitive  use, 

verbs  of,  defined,  1133;  used  intran- 
sitively, 1 133, 1479 ;  verbs  usually  intran- 
sitive used  as,  1137,  1139,  1191;  with 
double  ace.,  1138;  with  dat.,  1192-1199, 
1205-1210;  used  impersonally,  i479;.use 
of  gerundive  of,  2180,  2246,  2247 ;  use 
of  gerund  of,  2242,  2255, 2259>  2265. 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Trees, 

names  of,  gender,  407,  408,  573. 
Trial, 

expressions  of,  with  si,  si  forte, 
1777. 

Tribrach,  2521. 
Trimeter, 

defined,  2536;  dactylic,  2579;  iambic 
(senarius),  2583-2596;   the  choliambus, 
2597-2600;    iambic,     catalectic,    2601- 
2603;  cretic,  2697. 
Tripody, 

defined,  2531 ;  iambic,  2624 ;  trochaic, 
2647,  2648  ;  fogaoedic,  2659. 
Triseme,  2516. 
Tristich,  2545. 

Trithemimeral  caesura,  2544. 
Trithemimeris,  2531. 
Trochaic, 

rhythms,  2628-2649  ;  tetrameter  cata- 
lectic, 2629-2635 ;  tetrameter  acatalectic, 
2636-26^8 ;  tetrameter  claudus,  2639- 
2641;  nine-syllabled  Alcaic,  2642;  di- 
meter acatalectic,  2643  >  dimeter  cata- 
lectic, 2644-2646;  tripody  acatalectic, 
2647 ;  tripody  catalectic,  2648 ;  mono- 
meter,  &c.,  2649;  dactylo- trochaic, 
2675-2681;  strophe,  in  Horace,  2721. 
Trochee,  2521. 
Trusting, 

verbs  of,  case  with,  1181-1185. 
Try, 

verbs  meaning,  with  infin.,  2169. 

Undertaking, 

verbs  of,  with  gerundive  construction, 
2250. 
Unfulfilled, 

wishes,   tenses   of,   1544,  1545  ;  con- 
ditions, see  Non-occurrent. 
Union, 

verbs  of,  case  with,  1186. 
Unit  of  Measure,  2515. 
Unsyllabic  function, 

22,  82,  83. 

Useful, 

adjs.  meaning,  cases  with,  1200 ; 
with  gerundive  construction  or  gerund, 
2252. 

Value, 

abl.  of,  1388-1392. 
Valuing, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1271-1275. 


Variable, 

vowel,  824-827,  839,  840,  758,  759, 

3.66. 

Variations  of  quantity,  134. 
Velars,  44,  77. 
Verbs, 

defined,  12;  endings  of,  shortened, 
129 ;  endings  of,  retained  long,  132 ; 
reduplicated  verb  roots,  758,  828,  829; 
reduplicated  perf.,  858-861,  923-932 ; 
primitive,  theme  in,  738-741  ;  com- 
pounded with  nouns  or  noun  stems, 
38.4,  3955  with  preps.,  391,  392,  396; 
with  verb  stems,  394;  with  advs.,  396; 
root  verbs,  defined,  743  ;  irregular,  de- 
fined, 743 ;  inflected,  744-781  ;  semi- 
deponents,  80 1,  1488. 

Inflection  of,  713-1022;  the  stem, 
714-720;  the  person  ending,  721-731; 
nouns  of  the  verb,  732;  prin.  parts, 
733-735;  designation  of  the  verb,  736, 
737;  theme  of  the  verb,  738-740;  ar- 
rangement of  the  verb,  741,  742;  in- 
flection of  primitive  verbs,  743-791  ; 
inflection  of  denominative  verbs,  792- 
797 ;  deponent,  798-801 ;  periphrastic 
forms,  802-804;  defective  verbs,  805- 
817,  907,  922-1019;  redundant  verbs, 
818-823,  924-1019. 

Formation  of  stems  of,  824-919;  va- 
riable vowel,  824-827;  pres.  indie,  of 
root  verbs,  828;  pres.  indie,  of  verbs  in 
-ere,  829-838 ;  pres.  indie,  of  denomi- 
natives, 339,  840;  pres.  subjv.,  841- 
843;  imper.,  844-846;  impf.  indie., 
847,848;  impf.  subjv.,  849,  850;  fut., 
851-853;  perf.  indie.,  854-875;  perf. 
subjv.,  876-878;  perf.  imper.,  879; 
plup.  indie.,  880;  plup.  subjv.,  881 ; 
fut.  perf .,  882-884 ;  short  or  old  forms, 
885-893 ;  infin.,  894-898 ;  gerundive 
and  gerund,  899;  supine,  900;  pres. 
partic.,  901-903;  fut.  partic.,  904,  905  ; 
perf.  partic.,  906-919;  formation  of  de- 
nominative verbs,  365-375. 

List  of,  920-1022 ;  root  verbs,  922  ,• 
verbs  in  -ere,  perf.  stem  without  suf- 
fix, 923-951 ;  verbs  in  -ere,  perf.  stem 
in  -s-,  952-961 ;  verbs  in  -ere,  perf. 
stem  in  -v-,  962-970;  verbs  in  -ere, 
perf.  stem  in  -u-,  971-976;  deponents 
in  -I,  977-986;  verbs  in  -are,  perf. 
stem  without  suffix,  989,  990;  verbs  in 
-are,  perf.  stem  in  -y-,  991,  992;  verbs 
in  -are,  perf.  stem  in  -u-,  993;  depo- 
nents in  -an,  994;  verbs  in  -ere,  perf. 
stem  without  suffix,  985-998 ;  verbs  in 


544 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Verbs  —  continued. 
-ere,  perf.  stem  in  -s-,  999,  1000 ; 
verbs  in  -ere,  perf.  stem  in  -v-,  1001- 
1003;  verbs  in  -ere,  perf.  stem  in  -u-, 
1004-1007;  deponents  in  -eri,  1008- 
1010;  verbs  in  -ire,  perf.  stem  without 
suffix,  1011-1013;  verbs  in  -ire,  perf. 
stem  in  -s-,  1014,  1015;  verbs  in  -ire, 
perf.  stem  in  -V-,  1016-1018;  verbs  in 
-ire,  perf.  stem  in  -U-,  1019;  depo- 
nents in  -iri,  1020-1022. 

Use  of,  1469-2299;  in  3rd  pers.  with 
indef.  subjv.,  1033;  omitted,  1036; 
agreement  of,  1062-1076,  1080,  1807, 
see  Agreement;  gen.  with,  1271- 
1294,  see  Genitive;  compounded, 
1402-1409,  see  Prepositions;  se- 
quence of  tenses  following  noun  of, 
1766-1769;  use  of  nouns  of,  2160-2299; 
with  ace.  of  gerund  and  gerundive, 
2250,  2252;  with  abl  ,  2254-2257  ;  some 
occasional  peculiarities  of,  2300-2307  ; 
conative  use,  2301-2303 ;  causative  use, 
2304 ;  potential  use,  2305 ;  obligatory 
1156,2306;  permissive  use,  2307;  cases 
with,  see  Ablative,  &c.,  Preposi- 
tions; of  transitive  and  intransitive 
use,  see  Transitive  use,  Intransi- 
tive use;  impersonal,  see  Imper- 
sonal ;  see  Subjunctive,  &c., 
Present,  &c. 

Verse, 

defined,  2533;  treatment  of  end  of, 
2533;  di colic,  2535  ;  asynartetic,  2535; 
names  of,  2536;  catalectic  and  acata- 
lectic,  2537;  brachycatalectic.  2538; 
catalectic  in  syllabam,  &c.,  2539; 
verses  combined  to  make  strophe, 
2545;  accentual  and  quantitative, 
2548;  spondaic,  2556,  2566,  2567; 
hypermetrical,  2568. 

Versification,  2511-2739. 

Vivid  narration, 

pres.  of,  1590,  see  Present. 

Vocative  case, 

defined,  420;  in  what  words  used, 
420  ;  origin  of  form  of,  in  -o-  decl.,  71, 
76;  form  and  accent  of,  in  -o-  decl., 
172,  452,  454,  458,  459;  forms  of,  in 
Greek  words  of  -a-  decl.,  445 ;  in 
Greek  words  of  cons,  decl.,  509,  512; 
in  Greek  words  of  -i-  decl.,  565  ;  of 
meus,  652;  use  of,  1119-1123;  nom. 
used  as,  1118-112^;  combined  with  nom., 
1 1 21 ;  used  in  pred  ,  1122  ;  accompanied 
by  5,  pro,  eho,  heus,  au,  &c.,  1123  ; 


Vocative  case  — continued. 
use  of  tu,  1118, 1566, 1571 ;  accompany- 
ing imper.,  1571 ;  as  apod.,  2112. 

Voice, 

in  verbs,  defined,  723,  1469,  1472;  see 
Active,  Passive. 

Voiced  and  Unvoiced, 

75- 
Vowels, 

cons,  and  vowel  i  and  u,  22,  52; 
long  and  short,  how  denoted,  29 ; 
classification  of,  43-46;  pronunciation 
°f>  33>  3"-425  vowel  changes,  95- 
145  f  see  Lengthening,  Shorten- 
ing, Weakening,  Diphthongs, 
Development,  Disappearance, 
Hiatus,  Contraction,  Elision, 
Assimilation,  Dissimilation, 
Gradation,  Interchange ;  rules 
of  vowel  quantity,  35,  36,  2429-2472 ; 
vowel  roots,  defined,  188;  stem  vowel 
retained  before  ending,  in  verbs,  367, 
840 ;  in  nouns,  400 ;  variable,  824- 
827,  758>  759,  829,  839,  840,  366;  long 
vowel  in  perf.  stem,  862-865,  936-946  ; 
vowel  stems,  substs.  and  adjs.,  see'  -i- 
stems. 


Want, 

verbs  of,  with  gen.,  1293;  with  abl., 
1302-1306,  1293;   adjs.  of,  with  gen., 
1263  ;  with  abl.,  1306. 
Warding  off, 

verbs  of,  with  dat.,  1209. 
Weakening, 

of  vowels,  102-109;  in  medial  sylla- 
bles, 10^-106;  in  final  syllables,  107  ;  of 
diphthongs,  108,  see  Diphthongs. 
Weeping, 

verbs  of,  used  transitively,  1139. 
Will, 

expressed  by  fut.,   1619;    shall  and 
•will,    1619;     verbs    of,    with    purpose 
clause,    1949;    with   infin.,  2169;   w^tn 
perf.  infin.,  2225. 
Willingness, 

expressed  by  subjv.  of  desire,  1553. 
Winds, 

names  of,  gender,  405. 
Wish, 

expressed  by  subjv.,  1540-1546;  in- 
troduced by  utinam,  uti,  ut,  qui, 
modo,  ne,  non,  nee,  1540;  with  si, 
6  si,  1546;  expressed  by  subjv.  in  sub- 


35 


545 


Index  of  Subjects. 


Wish  —  continued. 
ordinate  sentence,  1731 ;  expressed  by 
imper.,  1571 ;   as  prot.  of  conditional 
period,  2110. 

Wishing, 

verbs  of,  with  double  ace.,  1172; 
subjv.  coordinated  with,  1707;  with 
Ut,  ne,  1950;  with  infin.,  2169;  with 
ace.  and  infin.,  2189,  2190,  2228; 
with  perf.  act.  infin.,  2223,  2224;  with 
perf.  pass,  infin.,  2229;  see  Desire. 

Without, 

expressed  by  partic.  and  neg.,  2296. 

Wondering, 

verbs  of,  with  indirect  question,  1774; 
with  quod,  quia,  1851;  with  cum, 


Wondering  —  continued. 
1851,  1875;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2187, 
2188,  2184. 

Words, 

simple,  defined,  181 ;  compound,  de- 
fined, 1 8 1 ;  gender  words,  398, 402 ;  their 
sound,  2^179  >  thdr  formation,  180-396  : 
their  inflection,  397-1022. 

Yes, 

how  expressed,  1511,  1512. 
Yes  or  No  Questions, 

1501-1525;     in    indirect    questions, 
1775-1777;  see  Questions. 
Yielding, 

expressions  of,  case  with,  1181-1185. 


INDEX   OF   LATIN   WORDS. 


THE   REFERENCES  ARE  TO   SECTIONS. 


a,  the  vowel,  pronunciation  of,  33,  38,  40, 
41,  43  ;  final,  quantity  of,  2437-2439. 

a,  weakened  to  e,  104;  weakened  to  i, 
104;  weakened  to  u,  104. 

a,  how  denoted  in  inscriptions,  29,  i 
and  3. 

ab  (a),  prep.,  1417;  form  of,  164,  2; 
witn  abl.  proper,  1297  ;  in  expressions 
of  distance,  1153  5  a^ter  alienus,  1202  ; 
expressions  with,  used  with  adjs.,  1268  ; 
with  abl.  of  separation,  &c.,  1304  ;  with 
town  names,  1308 ;  denoting  origin, 
1309  ;  expressing  source,  1312;  express- 
ing cause,  &c.,  1317;  expressing  doer  of 
action,  1318, 1476, 1477,  2243;  with  act. 
verbs  equivalent  to  pass.,  1318;  with 
things  and  animals,  1318,  1477;  with 
gerundive  construction  or  gerund,  2267  ; 
with  subst.  and  partic.,  2285,  2286 ; 
quantity  of,  2430,  2432. 

abep,  forms  of,  766. 

abhinc,  with  ace.,  1154;  with  abl.,  1154. 

abies,  gender  and  decl.  of,  477 ;  quantity 
of  e  in,  2456. 

abigo,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 

abnueo,  forms  of,  819. 

aboleo,  prin.  parts  of,  1003. 

abolesco,  prin.  parts  of,  968. 

abs,  prep.,  1417;  pronunciation  of,  54, 
164  ;  form  of,  710. 

absconds,  perf.  of,  860. 

absens,  749,  902. 

absente  npbis,  1092. 

absiste,  with  infin.,for  noli,  1584,  2170. 

absorbed,  forms  of,  1006. 

absque,  apsque,  1421,  1701,  2110. 

absum,  with  abl.  of  amount  of  differ- 
ence, 1153;  with  dat.,  1212;  paulum 
abest,  &c.,  with  quin,  1986. 

abunde,  with  partitive  gen.,  1248. 

abutor,  with  ace.,  1380. 

ac,  quantity,  2433;  see  atque. 

accedit,  with  quod,  1845  ;  with  ut, 
1965. 


Accheruns,in  ace.,  1157;  in  loc.,  1336; 
in  abl.,  1307,  1336,  1343. 

accidp,  forms  of,  930;  tense  after,  1758; 
accidit  with  result  clause,  1965, 
1966. 

accidp,  prin.  parts  of,  930. 

accipiS,  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2175; 
accepimus  with  pres.  infin.,  2220. 

accitus,  919. 

accommodatus,  with  dat.  of  person 
and  ace.  with  ad  of  thing,  1201 ;  with 
gerundive  construction,  2254. 

accumb5,  prin.  parts  of,  974. 

acer,  comparison  of,  344 ;  decl.  of,  627- 
629. 

acesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

acies,  decl.  of,  606,  607. 

acquiesce,  defective,  905. 

acuo,  form  of,  367,  839,  840;  perf.  of, 
865 ;  prin.  parts  of,  947. 

acus,  gender  of,  588 ;  decl.  of,  592. 

ad,  prep.,  1410;  in  comp.,  form  of,  148  ; 
position  or,  frequently  following  a  rela- 
tive, 1435 ;  compounds  of,  with  ace., 
1137;     compounds  of,  with  dat.,  1188, 
1189,  1194;   compounds  of,  other  con- 
structions with,  1190,  1191,1196,  1198; 
with  urbem  or  oppidum,  1159;  sig- 
nifying motion    towards    or    nearness, 
1 1 60;  with  country  names  and  appella- 
tives, 1161 ;  expressions  with,  used  with 
adjs.,    1 201,    1268;    adque    adque, 
1408;   ad  id  introductory  to  sentence 
with  quod,  1847;  with  gerundive  con- 
struction or  gerund,  2164,  2252,  2270; 
with  subst.  and  partic.,  2285,  22^6. 

adaeque,  correlative  of  ut,  1937. 

adamussim,  form  of,  549,  698,  699. 

addo,  with  q,uod,  1846. 

adeo,  verb,  conjug.  of,  763,  766. 

adeo,  adv.,  correlative  of  ut,  ut  non, 
1970. 

adeps  (adips),  decl.  of,  480 ;  gender  of, 
480,  580. 


547 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


adfatim,  form  of,  549,  699 ;  with  parti- 
tive gem,  1248. 
adfinis,  decl.  of,  558;  with  gen.,  1263; 

with  dat.,  1268. 

adgredior,  forms  of,  791,  799,  986. 
adbuc,  form  of,  93  ;    with  partitive  gen., 

1253;  with  compar.,  1459. 
adicio,  with  quod,  1846. 
adigo,  construction  with,  1198. 
adimo,  perf.  of,  823;  with  infin.  as  obj., 

2206. 
adipiscor,  980 ;  with  gen.,  1292;  adep- 

tus  as  pass.,  1492. 
adiuero,  adiuerit,  891. 
adlegS,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 
adlicio,  prin.  parts  of,  956. 
admodum,  adv.,  698,  699. 
adnexuerant,  960. 
adolesco.  prin.  parts  of,  968. 
ador,  gender  of,  575. 
adorior,  forms  of,  791. 
ad  ravim,  adv.,  549. 
adsentio,  adsentior,  800,  1015,  1488 ; 

with  baud,  1449. 

adspergo,  constructions  with,  1199. 
adsuefaci5,  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2197. 
adulo,  1489. 

adulor,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  1184. 
adultus,  with  act.  meaning,  907,  1485. 
advenio,  forms  of,  822. 
adyersum,  prep.,  1410;  verbs  combined 

with,  followed  by  dat.,  1187. 
adversus,  prep.,  1410;  used  after  im- 

pius,   1201  ;    expression  with,  instead 

of  objective  gen.,   1261. 
adverts,  see  animum  adverts, 
advesperascit,  perf.  of,  872. 
advorsum  quam,  1895. 
ae,  diphthong,  pronunciation  of,  49,  96 ; 

for  earlier  ai,  96 ;  change  of  sound  of  to 

g,  96 ;  weakened  to  ei  and  1, 108. 
aedpe,  decl.  of,  558. 
aedis,  sing,  and  plur.  of,  meaning,  418  ; 

decl.  of,  522,  540,  541. 
aegre  .  .  .  cum,  1869. 
Aegyptus,  use  of  ace.  of,  1161;  use  of 

loc.  of,  1336. 
aemulus,  with  gen.,  1263 ;  with  dat., 

1183,  1268. 

aequalis,  decl.  of,  558. 
aeque,  with  abl.,  1392;   with  compar., 

1463;  followed  by  et,   1653;  aeque 

. . .  quam,   1890 ;   correlative  of  ut, 

I937- 

aequius  erat,  1497. 
aequius   est,    implying    non-occurrent 

action,  1495,  1496. 


aequus,  constructions  with,  1201 ;  agree- 
ing with  abl.  of  quality,  1240;  aequi 
as  gen.  of  value,  1275  ;  with  abl.,  1392  ; 
aequum  est,  erat,  implying  non- 
occurrent  action,  1495,  1497 ;  aequum 
est  with  infin.,  2211;  aequum  est 
with  perf.  pass,  and  act.  infin.,  2230. 

aes,  form  of,  58 ;  decl.  of,  4;-©,  491  ; 
dat.  in  -I,  501;  gender  of,  491,  572; 
use  of  plur.  of,  ito8. 

aestimo,  with  gen.  of  value,  1271 ;  with 
abl.  of  value,  1273,  1390. 

age,  used  of  several  persons,  1075;  witn 
imper.,  1572 ;  age  sis,  1572 ;  asyndeton 
with,  1641. 

agedum,    93,  1572,  1573. 

agidum,  with  imper.,  1572. 

agite  dum,  1573. 

agnosco,  fut.  partic.  of,  905 ;  perf.  partic. 
of,  919;  prin.  parts  of,  965. 

ago,  pres.  stem  of,  829;  perf.  of,  863; 
perf.  partic.  of,  916 ;  prin.  parts  of,  937  ; 
compounds  of,  937  ;  gratias  ago  with 
quod  and  cum,  1852,  1875. 

ai,  diphthong,  pronunciation  of,  50,  96 ; 
weakened  to  ae,  ei,  I,  96. 

ai,  weakened  to  e,  96. 

aio,  form  of,  23;  15^,  2;  conjug.  of,  785, 
786;  oldformsof,787;  defective, 786, 805. 

albeo,  defective,  809. 

ales,  decl.  of,  506. 

alesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

algeo,  perf.  of,  868;  prin.  parts  of,  1000. 

algescd,  prin.. parts  of,  959. 

alias,  adv.,  702 ;  with  fut.  perf.,  1630. 

alicubi,  quantity,  129,  2;  form  of,  709. 

alienus,  formation  or,  319;  with  gen., 
1202,  1238;  with  dat.,  1200;  with  abl., 
1306;  with  ab  and  abl.,  1202;  with 
cfomus,  1337. 

aliquamdiu,  accent  of,  92. 

aliquis,  aliqui,  decl.  of,  692 ;  with 
correlatives,  695;  sing,  defining  plur. 
subst.,  1080 ;  neut.  ace.  used  adverbi- 
ally, 1144;  common  use  of,  2390; 
equivalent  to  aliquis  alius,  2391.' 

Alis,  use  of  ace.  of,  1161;  use  of  abl.  of, 
1347. 

aliter,  followed  by  et,  1653;  non  ali- 
ter,  correlative  of  ut,  1937;  with  si, 

2021. 

alius,  gen.  sing,  of,  127,  6:  618-620; 
decl.  of,  618-620  ;  alis,  alid,  619 ; 
aliut,  659;  alius  modi,  619;  sing, 
defining  plur.  subst.,  1080;  abl.  of  com- 
parison with,  132-5;  followed  by  et, 
1653;  alii  .  .  .  alii,  1687;  alii  sunt 


548 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


qui,  1822 ;  use  of,  expressing  reciprocal 
relations,  2344. 

allex  (allec),  gender  and  decl.  of,  473; 
quantity  of  e  in,  2448. 

A  Ilia,  gender  of,  406. 

alo,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 

Alpes,  gender  of,  406;  no  sing.,  417. 

alter,  formation  or,  347;  gen.  sing,  of, 
127,6;  618-620  ;  decl.  of,  616,  618-620  ; 
sing,  defining  plur.  subst.,  1080;  abl.  of 
comparison  with.  1323;  use  of,  express- 
ing reciprocal  relations,  2344,  2400, 

alternis,  adv.,  704. 

alteruter,  decl.  of,  694. 

altus,  comparison  of,  343;  with  ace. 
appended.  1130. 

alvos  (alvus),  gender  of,  447. 

amabilis,  formation  of,  294;  comparison 
of,  359. 

ambi-,  inseparable  prep.,  392,  1409. 

ambio,  forms  of,  763,  766,  888,  919. 

ambo,  dual,  415;  decl.  of,  442,  464, 
640. 

amens,  decl.  of,  533,  559. 

amicio,  prin.  parts  of,  1019. 

amnis,  decl.  of,  517,  555;  gender  of, 
517,  579. 

amo,  no  supine,  900;  with  baud,  1449; 
amabo  with  imper.,  1572. 

amplector,  pres.  stem  of,  835;  prin. 
parts  of,  985  ;  with  reflexive  force,  1487. 

amplius,  with  partitive  gen.,  1248;  with- 
out quam,  1328;  with  quam,  1328; 
with  abl.,  1328  ;  in  expressions  of  age, 
1329. 

an,  use  in  single  questions,  1503,  1508; 
anne,  an  non,  1503,  1508;  in  alterna- 
tive questions,  1519,  1521,  1522:  baud 
sci5  an,  &c.,  1449,  1554,  1782;  in 
second  half  of  indirect  alternative  ques- 
tion, 1778;  utrum  ...  ne  ...  an, 
utrumne  .  .  .  an,  1779;  qui  scio 
an,  &c.,  1781;  in  single  indirect  ques- 
tion, 1783;  as  disjunctive  conjunction, 
1667,  1675  ?  an  ...  an  in  indirect 
questions,  1776;  followed  by  quis, 
qui,  indef.,  2388;  quantity,  2433. 

an-,  inseparable,  392,  1409. 

Anactorium,  abl.  of,  with  in,  1334. 

anas,  decl.  of,  477 ;  quantity  of  second  a 
in,  2455. 

anates,  epicene,  411. 

anceps,  decl.  of,  533,  559,  635. 

Andros,  how  used  in  abl.,  1308,  1334. 

ang5,  defective,  808. 

angor,  with  quod,  quia,  quom,  1851; 
with  ace.  and  infin.,  2188. 


anguis,  decl.  of,  556;  gender  of,  579. 

ammas,  pres.  partic.,  902. 

animum  adverto,  construction  with, 
1198. 

animus,  loc.  and  abl.  of,  1339,  1344. 

ante,  prep.,  1410;  compounds  of,  with 
dat.,  u&8,  1189,  1194;  compounds  of, 
other  constructions  with,  1190,  1191, 
1196;  expression  with,  instead  of  parti- 
tive gen.,  1246;  in  expressions  of  time, 
1394-1396;  ante  quam  for  potius 
quam,  1897;  with  gerundive  construc- 
tion and  gerund,  2253;  with  subst.  and 
partic.,  2285,  2286. 

ante  Ivit,  767. 

antequam,  with  pres.  indie,  of  fut.  action, 
1593;  with  fut.  perf.,  1626;  general 
statement  of  use,  1911 ;  in  general  state- 
ments, 1912-1914;  in  particular  state- 
ments, 1915-1921. 

antiques  (antlcus,  antlquom,  anti- 

cum),  327,  452. 
|  apage,  805. 

apeno,  prin.  parts  of,  1019. 

apis,  decl.  of,  563. 

apiscor,  prin.  parts  of,  980  ;  compounds 
of,  980  ;  with  gen.,  1292. 

apium,  gender  of,  408. 

appareo,  defective,  905. 

applico,  prin.  parts  of,  993. 

aptus,  constructions  with,  1201 ;  with 
qui,  1819;  with  infin.,  1819;  with  ace. 
of  gerundive  construction  or  gerund, 
2252. 

apud  (aput),  prep.,  1410;  form  of, 
119;  not  compounded,  1406. 

aqua,  use  of  plur.  of,  1108. 

Arar,  decl.  of,  519,  544,  556. 

arbitro,  1489. 

arbor  (arbos),  form  of,  154;  decl.  of, 
489,  491  ;  gender  of,  575,  576. 

arceo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006;  compounds 
of,  1006. 

arcesso  (accerso),  perf.  of,  870  ;  forms 
of,  970. 

arcus,  decl.  of,  592. 

ardeo,  defective,  905 ;  prin.  parts  of, 
1000;  with  infin.,  2170. 

ardesco,  prin.  parts  of,  959. 

are sco,  prin.  parts  of.  976. 

arguo,  stem  of,  367;  prin.  parts  of, 
947;  with  double  ace.,  1172;  used  per- 
sonally in  pass.,  2178  ;  with  ace.  and  in- 
fin., 2185  ;  with  gen.  of  gerundive  con- 
struction, 2264. 

aries,  gender  and  decl.  of,  477;  quantity 
of  e  in, 2456. 


549 


Index' of  Latin    Words. 


Arpinas,  accent  of,  88  ;  decl.  of,  533. 
artua,  nom.  and  ace.  plur.,  586. 
artus,  decl.  of,  592. 
as,  form  of,  171,1;  decl.  of,  539;  stems  of, 

569;  gender  of,  539,  578 ;  assis  as  gen. 

of  value,  1272 ;  meaning  and  divisions 

of.  2427. 
ast,  1685. 
at,  use  of,  1676, 1685,  2151 ;  correlative  of 

si,  2018. 
atque,  connecting  substs.  with  sing,  or 

plur.  verb,  1064-1066;  after  a  compar., 

1324,  1654;  after  words  of  likeness  and 

unlikeness,  1653;   in  comparisons  after 

positive,    1654;    use  of,  as  copulative 

conj.,  1644, 1647, 1652-1655,  2147,  2148; 

force   of,  1652;    atque  .  .  .  atque, 

1652;    meaning    but,    1655;    atque, 

(ac),    n5n,    &c.,    1659;    -que  .  .  . 

atque,  1664;  atque  .  .  .  et,  1664; 

atque  .  .  .  -que,  1664 ;  neque  .  .  . 

ac,  1665  ;  simul  atque,  1923-1934  ; 

idem  atque,  2373. 
atqui,  form  of,  706;  use  of,  2152. 
atquin,  2152. 
atteruisse,  963. 
attingo,  forms  of,  925. 
attendee,  995. 
attribuo,  with  gerundive  construction, 

2250. 
au,  diphthong,  pronunciation  of,  47,  49 ; 

change    of    sound    of,    to    6    and    u, 

97,  108. 

au,  with  voc.  nom.  and  voc.,  1123. 
aucupo,  1489. 
audeo,  forms  of,  801,  1488. 
audio,    conjug.    of,    796,    797 ;    audio 

cum,  1870 ;  used  personally  in  pass., 

2178. 

augep,  prin.  parts  of,  999. 
auspicatd,  as  adv.,  704,  1372. 
auspico,  1489. 
aut,  connecting  substs.  with  sing,  or  plur. 

verb,  1070;   aut  .  .  .  aut  connecting 

substs.  with  sing,  or  plur.  verb,  1070  ; 

use  of,  1667-1669,  2149. 
autem,    introducing   parenthesis,   1642 ; 

position  of,  1676  ;  common  use  of,  1677  ; 

in  questions,  1678;  with  si,  sin,  2021  ; 

introducing  adversative  sentence,  2151. 
auxilium,    sing,    and    plur.   of,   mean- 
ing,   418 ;    dat.    of,   with   verb,    1220, 

I223- 

avS,  navS,  805. 
aveo,  defective,  809. 
avis,  decl.  of,  521,  555. 
axis,  gender  of,  579. 


b,  sound  of  before  S  or  t,  54,  164;  from 
V,  f,  or  p,  161  ;  assimilation  of,  164, 
2  and  4  ;  monosyllables  ending  in,  with 
vowel  short,  2432. 

balbutio,  defective,  810. 

balsamum,  gender  of,  408. 

batuo,  367. 

belli,  loc.,  460  ;  use  of,  1338. 

bellq,  with  dat.,  1186. 

Bellius,  form  of,  161. 

bellum,  form  of,  161. 

bellus,  comparison  of,  358. 

bene,  comparison  of,  363 ;  verbs  com- 
bined with,  followed  by  dat.,  1187; 
quantity,  2440. 

beneficus,  comparison  of,  353. 

benevolens,  comparison  of,  354. 

benevolus,  comparison  of,  354;  con- 
structions with,  1201. 

bes,  decl.  of,  539;  meaning  of,  2427. 

beto,  bito,  defective,  808;  pres.  stem 
of,  835. 

bibo,  conjug.  of,  744,  758 ;  root  verb,  re- 
duplicated, 744,  758;  form  of  bibit. 
828 ;  perf.  of,  859,  2435  ;  perf.  of  com- 

rnds  of,   860 ;    prin.   parts   of,   922 ; 
bibere,   with    infin.    of  purpose, 

^2164;  ministro  bibere,  2164. 
biceps,  form  of,  104;  decl.  of,  533. 
bilis,  decl.  of,  521,  555. 
I  bini,  Jormation  of,  317;   decl.  of,  643; 

binfim,  462,  643;  use  of,  2405,  2420. 
bipennis,  decl.  of,  551. 
bipes,  decl.  of,  532,  636. 
bis,  quantity,  2433. 
bis  tanto  quam,  1895. 
blandior,  prin.  parts  of,  1021. 
boletus,  gender  of,  408. 
bonus,  form  of,    161 ;   comparison  of, 

355  ;  decl.  of,  613 ;  boni  as  gen.  of 

value,  1275. 

bos,  gender  and  decl.  of,  494. 
breyis,  decl.  of,  630,  631. 
burim,  548;  gender  of,  579. 
Burrus,  for  later  Pyrrhus,  21. 

C,  the  sign,  earliest  form  of,  20 ;  used  as 
abbreviation,  20;  sound  of,  20,  55;  q 
written  for,  20,  690 ;  medial,  how 
treated,  170,  4;  medial,  disappearance 
of,  170,  1-5  ;  changed  to  g,  causing  de- 
velopment of  vowel,  164,  6. 

cado,  compounds  of,  860,  930;  prin. 
parts  of,  930 ;  followed  by  ab  and  abl., 
1318. 

caedes,  decl.  of,  523,  563;  form  caedis, 
541. 


55° 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


caedo,  perf.  of,  858 ;  prin.  parts  of.  930; 
compounds  of,  930. 

caelebs,  defective,  624. 

caelestis,  -um  in  gen.  plur.,  563. 

caehcolum,  gen.,  439,  2449. 

caelite,  caelites,  decl.  of,  477,  626. 

caleS,  defective,  905  ;  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

calesc5,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

calix,  decl.  of,  473  ;  gender  of,  473,  581. 

callis,  gender  of,  579. 

calved,  defective,  809. 

calx,  heel,  decl.  of,  531 ;  gender  of,  531, 
581. 

calx,  limestone,  decl.  of,  531 ;  gender  of, 
531,  581. 

canalis,  decl. of,  520, 554 ;  gender.of,  579. 

candeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

candesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

caneo,  defective,  809. 

canesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

canis  (canes),  gender  and  decl.  of,  486, 
500,  566. 

cano,  prin.  parts  of,  924. 

capax,  with  gen.,  1267. 

capesso,  prin.  parts  of,  970. 

capid,  conjug.  of,  784;  pres.  stem  of, 
832,  836  ;  perf.  of,  863  ;  forms  capso, 
&c.,  887 ;  prin.  parts  of,  940;  com- 
pounds of,  940 

cardo,  decl.  of,  485  ;  gender  of,  485,  574. 

carduus,  gender  of,  408. 

careo,  defective,  905 ;  prin.  parts  of,  1006; 
constructions  with,  1303,  1304. 

carnifex,  form  of,  108. 

caro.  decl.  of,  545  ;  gender  of,  545,  574. 

carp 6,  prin.  parts  of,  953  ;  compounds 
of,  953. 

Carthagini,  see  Karthagim. 

Carystus,  how  used  in  abl.,  1308. 

casses,  gender  of,  579. 

caudex,  see  codex. 

caulis,  gender  of,  579. 

causa,  gen.  of  definition  with  causa, 
1257;  causa  expressing  cause,  &c., 
1317;  causa  resembling  prep.,  1406; 
nulla  causa  est  quin,  1983 ;  causa 
with  gerundive  construction  or  gerund, 
2164,  2258,  2270. 

cautes,  decl.  of,  523. 

caved,  perf.  of,  864 ;  prin.  parts  of, 
996;  €avl,  used  _of  several  persons, 
107=;;  cav€,  cave  ne,  cavetS  n5, 
&c.,  with  subjv.,  1585,  1711,  1950, 
1960. 

-ce  (-c),  enclitic,  93,  "3  '•>  m  hic»  663> 
659;  in  istic,  illic,  669,  670;  in  sic, 
2015  ;  quantity,  2433.  ' 


cedo,  805  ;  coordinated,  1712  ;  with  short 

o,  2443. 

ced5,  prin.  parts  of,  958. 
celo,  with  double  ace.,  1169;   with   dS 

and  abl.,  1170;  constructions  with  pass. 

of,  1171. 

cenatus,  with  act.  meaning,  907. 
censeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1005  ;  coordinated, 

1708;  with  purpose  clause,  1950;  with 

ace.  and  infin.,  2175,  2193. 
centum,  indeclinable,  637. 
cerno,  pres.  stem  of,  833  ;  prin.  parts  of, 

964;  cernitur,  impersonally,  2181. 
certe,   in  answers,   1512;    correlative  of 

si,  2018. 

certo,  verb,  with  dat.,  1186. 
certo,  adv.,  in  answers,  1512. 
cesor,  form  for  censor,  63. 
ceterum,  use  of,  1676,  1683. 
cetus,  decl.  of,  508. 
ceu,  2118. 

ch,  sound  of,  72 ;  use  of,  72. 
Chersonesus,  in  loc.,  1336. 
cicer,  gender  of,  573. 
cicur,  defective,  624. 
cieo,  forms  of,  821  ;  perf.  partic.  of,  918  j 

prin.  parts  of,  1002;  defective,  1002. 
cing_6,  prin.  parts  of,  954. 
circa,  adv.  and  prep.,  707,  1410,  1412} 

with  gerundive  construction  or  gerund, 

2253. 
circiter,  prep.,  1410;  not  compounded, 

1406. 
circum,  prep.,  1410  ;  compounds  of,  with 

ace.,  1137;  with  double  ace.,  1138;  with 

dat.,    1194,    1195;    other  constructions 

with,   1196. 
circumdo,  conjug.  of,  757;  constructions 

with,  1 199. 

circumfodio,  forms  of,  791. 
circumfundo,  constructions  with,  1199. 
circum  sto,  perf.  of,  860. 
cis,  comparison  of,    357;    prep.,    1410; 

quantity,  2433. 
citerior,  formation  of,  348  ;  comparison 

"f,  357-   t 
citimus,  formation  of,  351;  comparison 

.of»  357- 

citius  quarn,  1897. 
cito,  with  iambic  shortening  of  the  final 

o,  130,  3  ;  2442. 

citra,  prep,  and  adv.,  1410,  1412. 
citus,  918,  2436. 
civis,  decl.  of,  321,  555. 
clades,  decl.  of,  523 ;  form  cladis,  541. 
clam,  as  adv.,   1415;   with  ace.,   14155 

with  abl.,  1415. 


551 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


clang5,  defective,  808. 

clarescS,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

classis,  decl.  of,  521,  555. 

claudo,  claudeS,  defective,  808. 

claud5,  cludS,  prin.  parts  of,  958  ;  com- 
pounds of,  958  ;  form  cludS,  109. 

clavis,  decl.  of,  519,  551,  555. 

Clodius,  form  of,  97. 

clueS,  defective,  809. 

Cn.,  abbreviation  for  Gnaeus,  18. 

codex,  form  of,  97. 

coemo,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 

coeo,  with  dat.,  1186. 

coepi,  defective,  812;  synopsis  of,  812; 
forms  of  pres.  system,  99,  813,  940; 
form  coepl,  120,  813,  863 ;  form 
coepturus,  814;  prin.  parts  of,  940; 
use  of  act.  and  pass,  of,  1483. 

coerced,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

cSgnSsco,  form  of,  169,  2  ;  perf.  partic. 
of,  919;  prin.  parts  of,  965;  used  per- 
sonally in  pass.,  2178. 

cSgp,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 

coins,  decl.  of,  556;  gender  of,  579. 

colS,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 

colus,  gender  of,  447. 

com-,  compounds  of,  with  dat.,   IT 88, 

1189,  1194;    other   constructions  with, 

1190,  1196,  1197. 
COmburS,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 
comedo,  conjug.  of,  771. 

comitia,    with  gerundive    construction, 

2254. 

comminiscor,  prin.  parts  of,  980. 
commiserescit,  construction  with,  1283. 
commodum,  ace.  as  adv.,  701,  1156. 
commonefaciS,  with  double  ace.,  1291; 

with  ace.  and  gen.  or  de  and  abl.,  1291. 
commoneo,    with    double  ace.,    1291 ; 

with  ace.  and  gen.  or  de  and  abl.,  1291. 
communis,    constructions  with,    1202, 

1238. 
commutS,  with  abl.,  1389;  with  cum, 

1389. 

cSmS,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 
compare,  construction  with,  1197. 
compectus,  980. 
compede,   compedium,   532;   stems 

of,  569;  gender  of,  532,  572. 
compercS,  forms  of,  930  ;  comperce 

with  infin.  for  noli,  1584. 
comperio,  comperior,  forms  of,  1012  ; 

used  personally  in  pass.,  2178. 
compesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976;    con- 

pesce  with  infin.  for  noli,  1584. 
compingo,  prin.  parts  of,  938;  perf.  of, 

863. 


complector,  pres.  stem  of,  835;  prin. 

parts  of,  985. 
compleS,  with  gen.,  1293;   with  abl., 

1386. 

complico,  prin.  parts  of,  993. 
complures,  decl.  of,  623. 
compos,  defective,  624  ;  with  gen.,  1263  ; 

quantity  of  second  O  in,  2457. . 
comprimo,  prin.  parts  of,  958. 
compungS,  prin.  parts  of,  954. 
concedS,  coordinated,  1710;    with  pur- 
pose clause,  1950;  with  ace.  and  infin., 

1954  ;  used  personally  in  pass.,  2178. 
concido,  perf.  of,  860. 
concinS,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 
concitus  (concitus),  919. 
concolor,  decl.  of,  537,  559. 
concors,  decl.  of,  532,  559. 
concreduS,  756. 
concupiscS,  prin.  parts  of,  968. 
concurrS,  with  dat.,  1186. 
condigne,  with  abl.,  1392. 
condono,  with  double  ace.,  1172. 
cSnficior,  confiS,  790. 
confidS,  forms  of,  801,  1488;  with  dat., 

1181  ;  with  abl.,  1349. 
confiteor,  prin.  parts  of,  1010. 
cSnfrico,  prin.  parts  of,  993. 
cSnf  ringo,  prin.  parts  of,  938. 
cojigruS,  prin.  parts  of,  947  ;  congru- 

ere  for  congruere,  819. 
coniveo,  prin.  parts  of,  1000. 
conloco,  with  in  and  abl.,  1424;   with 

gerundive  construction,  2250;  with  su- 
pine, 2271. 

conquirS,  prin.  parts  of,  967. 
conrigd,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 
conrumptus,  938. 
conscius,  with  gen.,  1263;   with  gen. 

and  dat.  or  dat.  alone,  1265;  with  gen. 

of    gerundive  construction    or   gerund, 

2258. 

consero,  prin.  parts  of,  922.  • 

conspergo,  prin.  parts  of,  958. 
constitu5,  prin.  parts  of,  947  ;  with  in 

and   abl.,   1424;    with    purpose  clause, 

1950  ;  with  infin..  1953,  2169. 
c6nsulo,,prin.  parts  of,  972. 
consultus,  adj.,  with  gen.,  1263;  with 

iure,  1268. 

contages,  decl.  of,  603.  • 

contends,  with  dat.,  1186  ;  with  purpose 

clause,  1951 ;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  1954; 

with  infin.,  2169. 
conticescS,  conticlsco,  prin.  parts  of, 

976. 
contineo,  with  quin,  1986. 


552 


Index  of  Latin    Words. 


contingo,  prin.  parts  of,  925. 

continue,  correlative  of  si,  2067. 

contra,  torm  of,  707;  prep,  and  adv., 
1410,  1428  ;  position  of,  1434;  contra 
quam,  1895  5  quantity  of  final  vowel 
of,  2467. 

contremisco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

contundo,  perf.  of,  861,  931 ;  perf. 
partic.  of,  931. 

coquo,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

coram,  adv.,  702;  prep.,  1417;  with  in- 
strumental abl.,  1300. 

corbis,  gender  of,  579. 

cornu,  gender  of,  586;  decl.  of,  589. 

cortex,  gender  of,  581. 

cos,  deci.  of,  430,  477 ;  gender  of,  477, 
576. 

cosol,  form  for  consul,  63. 

cottidianus,  accompanying  hie,  2350. 

cdturnix,  with  5  shortened,  134. 

coxendix  (coxendix),  gender  and  decl. 

of,  473- 

crassus,  with  ace.  appended,  1130. 

crebresco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

credo,  conjug.  of,  757;  with  dat.  of  per- 
son and  gen.  of  thing,  1292. 

creduam,  &c.,  756. 

crep5,  prin.  parts  of,  993;  form  of  com- 
pounds of,  993. 

cresco,  prin.  parts  of,  965 ;  cretus 
with  abl.,  1312. 

c  rim  en,  abl.  of,  with  judicial  verbs,  1280. 

crudesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

crux,  gender  and  decl.  of,  473;  malam 
crucem  and  in  malam  crucem, 
1165. 

cub 6,  forms  of,  993  ;  compounds  of,  993. 

cucumis,  decl.  of,  491,  499,  518,   548, 


554  5  gender  of,  579. 
cudo, 


prin.  parts  of,  942. 

cum,  conj.,  quom,  157;  in  expressions 
of  time  after  which,  1397;  with  infin., 
1539,  1868,  1869,  2317;  with  perf.  indie, 
of  anterior  time,  1613  ;  with  fut.  perf., 
1626 ;  pres.  of  vivid  narration  com- 
bined with,  1752  ;  general  statement 
of  uses,  1859  ;  temporal,  1860-1873  ;  of 
indef.  time,  with  indie.,  1860;  of  indef. 
time,  with  subjv.,  1860;  of  definite  time, 
1861-1867;  cum  interea,  interim, 
etiam  turn,  nondum,  hauddum, 
quidem,  tamen,  nihilominus, 
1868 ;  introducing  main  idea,  1869 ; 
attributively  with  words  denoting  time 
or  with  est,  &c.,  1870 ;  audio  cum, 
1870;  memini  cum,  1870;  in  ex- 
pressions equivalent  to  subst.  of  time, 


1871 ;  witl\  subjv.,  vS?2 ;  use  with  indie, 
and  with  sub)''.,  compared,  1873  ;  ex- 
planatory, causa1,  concessive,  1874-1880 , 
of  coincident  action,  1874  ;  with  verbs 
of  emotion  and  gratulor  and  gratias 
ago,  1875  ;  quippe  cum,  ut  pote 
cum,  1879;  cum  .  .  .  tamen,  1880; 
cum  .  .  .  turn,  1831,  1881  ;  cum 
primum,  cum  extemplo,  1923- 
1934 ;  introducing  conditional  prot., 
2110. 

cum,  prep.,  1417;  making  verb  plur., 
1069;  with  instrumental  abl.,  1300; 
with  abl.  of  accompaniment,  1356;  with 
iunctus  and  coniunctus,  1357 ;  with 
abl.  of  manner,  1358,  1359;  with  verbs 
of  exchanging,  1389 ;  with  a  relative, 
1435;  intimating  prot.  of  conditional 
period,  2110  ;  with  gerundive  construc- 
tion or  gerund,  2267;  idem  cum,  2573; 
cum  e5  followed  by  quod,  1847. 

cunctor,  with  quin,  1986 ;  with  infin., 
2169. 

cunctus,  used  partitively,  1244;  with 
loc.  abl.,  1346. 

cupidus,  with  gen.  of  gerund  or  gerun' 
dive  construction,  2258. 

cupio,  forms  of,  791,  969;  pres.  stem  of, 
836 ;  use  of  dat.  of  pres.  partic.  of,  1218; 
with  infin.,  2169;  with  ace.  and  infin., 
2189,  2190;  with  perf.  pass,  infin., 
2229. 

cur,  in  questions,  1526;  with  verbs  of 
accusing,  1852. 

cur5,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  1184  ;  cura  ut, 
curato  ut,  with  subjv.,  1 579 ;  cura  ng, 
curato  ne,  with  subjv.,  1585;  with 
subjv.  coordinated,  1712;  with  purpose 
clause,  1951;  n5n  euro  with  infin., 
2169  >  witn  Per^  infin.,  2225  ;  with 
gerundive  construction,  2250;  with  perf. 
partic., "2297  ;  in  causative  use,  2304. 

curro,  perf.  of  compounds  of,  860 ;  prin. 
parts  of,  932. 

Cyprus,  use  of  ace.  of,  1158. 

d,  changed  to  1,  147;  from  t,  149,  2; 
166;  initial,  disappearance  of,  169,  3; 
medial,  treatment  of,  166,  170,  8  and 
12;  659;  final,  disappearance  of,  149, 
426;  assimilation  of,  166  ;  assimilation 
of  ad-  in  comp.,  166;  dt,  the  com- 
bination, its  treatment,  159 ;  in  abl. 
sing.,  426,  443,  465,  507,  593,  648;  in 
ace.  sing.,  648  ;  for  t  in  inscriptions, 
729;  monosyllables  ending  in,  with 
vowel  short,  2432. 


553 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


damma,  gender  of,  433. 

danunt,  756,  833. 

dapis,  decl.  of,  480. 

de,  prep.,  1417;  with  abl.  proper,  1297; 
comparison  of,  357;  compounds  of ,  with 
dat.,  1194,  1195;  compounds  of,  other 
constructions  with,  11965  expressions 
with,  used  with  adjs.,  1268;  with 
memim  and  recorder,  1289 ;  with 
venit  in  mentem,  1290;  expressing 
source,  1312;  with  abl.  of  material, 
1314;  expressing  cause,  &c.,  1317; 
susque  deque,  1408;  position  of, 
1435;  de  eS  introductory  to  sentence 
with  quod,  1847;  introducing  ace.  and 
infin.,  2176;  with  gerundive  construction 
or  gerund,  2267;  expression  with,  in- 
stead of  partitive  gen.,  1246. 

dea,  decl.  of,  442. 

debeo,  usual  and  open  forms  of,  1004 ; 
with  dat.,  1 193 ;  implying  non-occurrent 
action,  1496  \  in  subjv.,  1498  ;  with 
infin.,  2169;  in  past  tense  with  pres. 
infin.,  translation  of,  2222;  with  perf. 
infin.,  2223. 

decerno,  with  subj.  coordinated,  1708; 
with  purpose  clause,  1950;  with  ace. 
and  infin.,  1954,  2193;  w^  mfin>> 
1953,  2169. 

decerpS,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

decet,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  1184;  with  abl., 
1392;  implying  non-occurrent  action, 
1496;  with  subjv.  coordinated,  1709; 
with  subj.  infin.,  2209 ;  with  perf.  pass, 
and  act.  infin.,  2230. 

decimus,  form  of,  2412 ;  formation  of, 

352- 

decorus,  with  abl.,  1392. 
decumbo,  prin.  parts  of,  974. 
decumus,  2412. 
defetlscor,  prin.  parts  of,  984. 
defit,.&c.,  790. 
defrico,  prin.  parts  of,  993. 

degener,  decl.  of,  537,  559,  636. 
degp,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 
dehibuisti,  1004. 
deinde,      disyllabic,      93 ;      primum 

(primS)  .  .  .  deinde  .  .  .  turn,  1687. 
deleo,  defective,  900;  prin.  parts  of,  1001. 
demo,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 
demum,  turn,  correlative  of  si,  2018. 
denarius,  gen.  plur.  of,  462. 
denique,  turn,  correlative  of  si,  2018. 
denote,    with    gerundive    construction, 

2250. 
dens,  decl.  of,  533,  543 ;  gender  of,  580. 


denso,  denseo,  820. 

dcpeciscor,  980. 

depsS,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 

derupier,  975. 

descends,  prin.  parts  of,  950. 

*deses,  defective,  624. 

desidero,  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2190. 

desino,  forms  of,  893,  964 ;  use  of  act. 
and  pass,  of,  1483;  with  infin.,  2169; 
with  o  shortened,  2443. 

despondep,  prin.  parts  of,  995. 

desum,  with  dat.,  1212 ;  nSri  desunt 
qui,  1822. 

detendo,  forms  of,  924. 

deterior,  formation  of,  348;  comparison 
of,  357- 

deterreo,  with  ne,  1960,  1977;  with 
quSminus,  1960,  1977;  with  quin, 
1986. 

deterrimus,  comparison  of,  357. 

detineS,  prin.  parts  of,  1004. 

detondeo,  forms  of,  995. 

detraho,  with  dat.,  1209. 

deunx,  decl.  of,  531 ;  meaning  of,  2427. 

deus  (divos,  dius),  declension  of,  450, 
_462,  2449. 

devortor,  forms  of,  801. 

dextans,  decl.  of,  533;  gender  of,  580; 
meaning  of,  2427. 

dexter,  formation  of,  347;  decl.  of,  616. 

dexterior,  formation  of.  348. 

dextimus,  formation  of,  351. 

Dfana,  quantity  of  i  in,  127,  8. 

dicS,  imper.  of,  113,  846;  imper.  of  com- 
pounds of,  88  ;  form  dixti,  886 ;  form 
dixe,  886;  prin.  parts  of,  953;  use  of 
dixerim,  dico,  1555;  dicam  after 
vel,  1670 ;  used  personally  in  pass., 
2178;  dicitur,  impersonally,  2181; 
dici,  subj.  of,  omitted  with  verbs  of 
desire,  2190. 

dies,  gen.  and  dat.  sing.,  127,  3  ;  gender 
of,  597;  decl.  of,  601,  602;  repeated  in 
rel.  sentence,  1796. 

differo,  with  dat.,  1186;  with  quin, 
1986. 

difficilis,  comparison  of,  345,  359  ;  dif- 
ficile est,  implying  non-occurrent 
action,  1496 ;  with  ace.  of  gerundive 
construction  or  gerund,  2274 ;  with 
supine  in  -u,  2274. 

diffido,  forms  of,  801,  1488. 

diffindS,  perf  of,  861. 

dignus.  with  abl.,  1269, 1392  ;  with  gen., 
1269;  with  ace.,  1144,  1392;  with  qui, 
1819;  with  infin.,  1819;  with  Ut,  1819; 
with  supine  in  -u,  2276. 


554 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


dlligo,  perf.  of,  823 ;  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

dimicS,  forms  of,  993. 

dinosco  (dignSscS),  965. 

dirrumptus,  938. 

dis,  decl.  of,  533,  559. 

dis-,  inseparable  prep.,  392,  1409. 

discS,  form  of,  170;  pres.  stem  of,  834; 

perf.  of  compounds  of,  860  ;  prin.  parts 

of,  927. 

discolor,  decl.  of,  537. 
discors,  decl.  of,  532,  559. 
discrepS,  withdat,  1186;  discrepavit, 

993- 

discumbS,  prin.  parts  of,  974. 

dispandS,  dispendo,  forms  of,  950. 

dispar,  decl.  of,  537,  561. 

dispennite,  950.' 

displiceS,  prin.  parts  of,  1004. 

dissentio,  with  dat.,  1186. 

dissicio,  form  of,  104,  940. 

dissideo,  prin.  parts  of,  997. 

dissimilis,  comparison  of,  345  ;  agreeing 
with  abl.  of  quality,  1240. 

distendp,  forms  of.  924. 

distS,  with  abl,  of  amount  of  difference, 
1153;  with  dat.,  1186. 

diu,  comparison  of,  364. 

dm,  open  sky,  quantity  of  i  in,  127,  2 

dms,  quantity  of  i  in,  127,  2. 

dives,  decl.  of,  477,625;  defective,  624; 
with  gen.,  1264;  with  abl.,  1268,  1387. 

divido,  prin.  parts  of,  958. 

divus  (divos),  see  deus. 

dS,  two  verbs,  754;  root  verb,  744;  conjug. 
of,  744,  754;  duim,  &c.,  756,  841; 
quantity  of  a  in,  755  ;  old  forms  of,  756, 
841 ;  interduS,  concreduo,  cre- 
duam,  &c.,  756;  compounds  of,  757; 
perf.  of,  859,  2435  ;  perf.  of  compounds 
of,  860;  perf.  partic.  of,  918,  243 ''-.•; 
prin.  parts  of,  922  ;  with  venum, 
1165;  npmen  do,  case  with,  1214; 
with  subjv.  coordinated,  1712;  do  bi- 
bere  with  infin.  of  purpose,  2164  ;  with 
infin.  as  obj.,  2206;  with  ace.  of  gerun- 
dive construction,  2250 ;  with  supine, 
2271  ;  with  perf.  partic.,  2297  ;  form  do 
not  elided  before  short  vowel,  2487 ; 
form  dem  not  elided  before  short 
vowel,  2495. 

doceS,  defective,  900 ;  prin.  parts  of, 
1004;  with  de  and  abl.,  1170;  with 
double  ace.,  1169;  constructions  with 
pass,  of,  1171;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2175, 
2197;  used  personally  in  pass.,  2178. 

dodrans,  decl.  of,  533;  gender  of,  580; 
meaning  of,  2427. 


doleS,  defective,  905 ;  prin.  parts  of, 
1006;  with  ace.,  1139;  with  quod, 
quia,  quom,  1851;  with  ace.  and  in- 
fin., 2188. 

-dolescS,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

domS,  prin.  parts  of,  993. 

domus,  gender  of,  447,  588 ;  decl.  of,  594  • 
domi,  594,  708;  use  of,  1337;  domS, 
as  adv.,  703;  use  of,  1311;  with  in, 
1337;  domui,  loc.,  594,  1337;  do- 
mum,  use  of,  1162-1164,  1129,  699; 
domos,  1163. 

donee,  form  of,  1991  ;  meaning  all  the 
time  while,  2002  ;  meaning  until,  1993, 
2007-2009. 

doneque,  doneque  cum,  2007. 

dSnicum,  1991,  2007,  2009. 

dSnique,  form  of,  use  of,  1991,  2007, 
2009. 

dSnS,  with  double  ace.,  1172  ;  other  con- 
structions with,  1199. 

-dormlscS,  prin.  parts  of,  968. 

dos,  decl.  of,  430,  477;  dat.  sing,  in  -ei, 
502  ;  gender  of,  576. 

dubito,  with  an,  1782 ;  with  quin,  1986, 
1987;  nSn  dubitS  quin  as  expan- 
sion of  apod..  2114;  with  infin  ,  1987, 
2169;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  1987;  with 
indirect  question,  1987. 

ducS,  imper.  0^113,846;  imper.  of  com- 
pounds of,  173,  846;  prin.  parts  of,  953; 
with  prS  and  abl.,  1168;  withdat.,  1222; 
with  gen.  of  value,  1271. 

duelli,  loc.,  1338. 

dum,  enclitic,  93  j  with  imper.,  1572, 
1573;  with  pres.  indie,  of  fut.  action, 
1593;  meanings  of,  1991-1993;  dum 
.  .  .  dum,  one  -while  .  .  .  another, 
1992;  use  of,  when  meaning  in  the  time 
while,  1993-1998;  with  pres.  indie., 
1995;  with  fut.,  1996;  with  impf.  and 
plup.  indie,  and  impf.  subjv.,  1997; 
denoting  cause,  1998  ;  meaning  all 
the  time -while,  1993,  1994,  1999-2001; 
of  proviso,  with  or  without  modo, 
quidem,  1993,  1994,  2003,  2110  ; 
meaning  until,  1993,  J994>  2004, 
2005  ;  indie,  with  dum,  while,  where 
subjv.  with  dum,  until,  is  expected, 
2006*. 

dumi,  gender  of,  408. 

duo,  dual,  415;  decl.  of,  442,  464,  639, 
640;  with  ex  or  de,  1246;  with  short 
final  vowel,  2442. 

duplex,  decl.  of,  531. 

duresco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

Duria,  gender  of,  406. 


555 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


C,  the  vowel,  pronunciation  of,  33,  38-41, 
43,  44;  final,  quantity  of,  2437,  2440, 
2441. 

e,  disappearance  of,  113;  weakening  of, 
in  unaccented  syllables,  103-105;  in 
perf.  par  tic.,  910 ;  development  of, 
in,  b, 

e,  how  denoted  in  inscriptions,  29,  i  and 
3;  from  a,  96  ;  from  ae,  104  ;  from  ai, 
96;  weakened  to  l,  103. 

e  (ex),  quantity  of,  2430;  see  ex. 

eapse,  &c.,  680. 

ebur,  gender  and  decl.  of,  489. 

ecastor,  with  ace.,  1149. 

ecce,  combined  with  iste,  ille,  667; 
combined  with  is,  673;  with  nom., 
1117;  with  ace.,  1149;  with  dat., 
1206. 

ecfodio,  forms  of,  791. 

ecquis,  ecqui,  decl.  of,  692;  in  ques- 
tions, 1509. 

ecquando,  in  questions,  1509. 

ecqud,  in  questions,  1509. 

edepol,  with  ace.,  1149. 

editus,  with  abl.,  1312. 

edo,  con  jug.  of,  769,  770;  pass,  forms  of, 
770;  compounds  of,  771;  form  esus, 
137;  form  of  est,  828;  forms  edim, 
&c.,  841;  form  of  essem,  &c.,  850; 
form  of  esse,  895 ;  prin.  parts  of, 
922. 

efficio,  prin.  parts  of,  940;  with  pur- 
pose clause,  1951;  with  result  clause, 
1965. 

effigies,  decl.  of,  607. 

effit,  &c.,  790. 

effulge5,  forms  of,  1000. 

egeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006;  compound 
of,  1006;  with  gen.,  1293,  1305;  with 
abl.,  1303,  1304. 

ego,  decl.  of,  644-651;  length  of  o  in, 
645,  2442;  ml,  132;  mini,  60,  2446; 
when  used,  1029;  dat.  of,  with  ace.  of 
exclamation,  1150;  with  subjv.  ques- 
tions, 1566;  me,  subj.  of  infin.,  omitted, 
2183;  nos,  subj.  of  infin.,  omitted, 
2183;  nostri  with  gerundive,  2260; 
represented  by  se  in  ind.  disc.,  2325  ; 
use  of  nostnSm,  nostri,  2335;  inter 
nos  expressing  reciprocal  relation,  2344  ; 
ipse  with,  2376. 
egomet,  93. 

ehem,  with  voc.  nom.  and  voc.,  1123. 
eheu,    quantity  of   e   in,   127,  8  ;   with 
voc.  nom.  and  voc.,  1123;  with  ace., 
1149. 
eho,  with  voc.  nom.  and  voc.,  1123. 


ei,  diphthong,  pronunciation  of,  50 ; 
origin  and  change  of,  98,  764,  789; 
in  inscriptions  to  denote  i,  29. 

ei,  interjection,  with  dat.,  1206. 

eia,  with  voc.  nom.  and  voc.,  1123. 

eicip,  prin.  parts  of,  940. 

elicip,  prin.  parts  of,  975. 

eluvies,  decl.  of,  607. 

em,  combined  with  ille,  667;  with  ace., 
1149;  with  dat.,  1206. 

emineo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

em5,  defective,  900  ;  prin.  parts  of,  937  ; 
compounds  of,  823,  937,  953. 

emorior,  forms  of,  791. 

emungo,  prin.  parts  of,  954. 

en,  with  nom.  of  exclamation,  1117  ;  with 
ace.,  1149;  en  umquam  in  questions, 
1509. 

endo,  1402,  1422;  with  short  final  vowel, 
2442. 

eneco,  forms  of,  993. 

enim,  introducing  parenthesis,  1642  ;  po- 
sition of,  1688  ;  meaning  indeed ',  verily, 
&c.,  1688;  use  of,  1688,  2154,  2155. 

enimvero,  in  answers,  1512. 

ensis,  decl.  of,  522;  gender  of,  579. 

eo,  verb,  conjug.  of,  759,  762  ;  pass,  forms 
of,  763 ;  compounds  of,  763-767,  895 ; 
old  and  inscriptional  forms  of,  764,  765  ; 
forms  with  v,  767,  823;  forms  is,  &c., 
eis,  &c.,  764;  form  of  it,  828;  form  of 
earn,  &c.,  842;  gerundive  of,  899;  no 
supine,  900  ;  pres.  partic.  of,  902  ;  perf. 

-  partic.  of,  918,  2436  ;  prin.  parts  of,  922. 
With  exsequias,  infitias,  malam 
crucem,  malam  rem,  venum, 
1165;  l  with  imper.,  1^72;  i,  asyndeton 
with,  1641;  i  nunc,  1641  ;  with  infin. 
of  purpose,  2164;  with  supine,  2271; 
iri  with  supine,  2273  ;  with  o  short- 
ened, 2443  ;  quantity  in  iit,  2450. 

eo,  adv.,  710  ;  with  gen.,  1254. 

Ephesus,  loc.  and  abl.  of,  1334. 

Epidamnus,  loc.  and  abl.  of,  1334. 

Epidaurus,  loc.  and  abl.  of,  1334. 

erga,  prep.,  1410 ;  used  after  benevolus, 
1 20 1  ;  expression  with,  instead  of  ob- 
jective gen.,  1261. 

ergo,  gen.  of  definition  with,  1257 ;  re- 
sembling prep.,  1406 ;  denoting  infer- 
ence, 1688,  2158;  ergo  igitur,  1689; 
itaque  ergo,  1689;  with  gen.  of  ge- 
rundive construction  or  gerund,  2258; 
with  shortened  o,  2442. 

erigp,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

eripio,  prin.  parts  of,  975. 

escit,  escunt,  748. 


556 


Index  of  Latin    Words. 


esurio,  defective,  905. 

et,  connecting  substs.  with  sing,  or  plur. 
verb,  1064-1066;  et  .  .  .  et  connecting 
substs.  with  sing,  or  plur.  verb,  1064- 
1066  ;  introducing  parenthesis,  1642  ; 
meaning  also,  and  also,  1648;  meaning 
but,  1655  ;  use  of,  as  copulative  conj., 
1644-1647,  1655,  1656,  2134-2140;  after 
alius,  aequo,  &c.,  1653 ;  et  non,  &c., 
1659;  et  .  .  .  -que,  1663;  -que  .  .  . 
et,  1664 :  neque  .  .  .  et,  et  .  .  . 
neque,  1665;  atque  .  .  .  et,.  1664; 
simul  et,  1923-1934. 

etenim,  use  of,  1688,  2154,  2155. 

etiam,  form  of,  153,  4;  with  compar., 
1459;  in  answers,  1512;  after  vel, 
1670;  with  sed,  verum,  1680;  cum 
etiam  turn,  1868. 

etiamsi,  2116. 

etsi,  with  abl.  abs.,  1374;  concessive, 
2116;  coordinating,  2153. 

CU,  diphthong,  pronunciation  of,  49 ; 
change  of  and  preservation  of,  101. 

euge,  with  ace.,  1149. 

evilesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

ex,  prep.,  1417;  form  of,  710;  com- 
pounds of,  with  ace.,  1137  ;  compounds 
of,  with  dat.,  1194,  1195;  compounds 
of,  other  constructions  with,  1196;  ex- 
pression with,  instead  of  partitive  gen., 
1246;  with  abl.  proper,  1297;  with  abl. 
of  separation,  &c.,  1304  ;  with  town  and 
island  names,  1308 ;  expressing  source, 
1312;  with  abl.  of  material,  1314;  de- 
noting cause,  &c.,  1317;  expressing 
manner,  1361 ;  ex  eo  introductory  to 
sentence  with  quod,  1847;  with  gerun- 
dive construction  or  gerund,  2267. 

examussim,  form  of,  549,  698,  699. 

excitus,  excitus,  919. 

excubaverant,  993. 

exedo,  conjug.  of,  771. 

exerceo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

exheres.  decl.  of,  475  ;  with  gen.,  1263. 

exicaveris,  993. 

exolesco,  prin.  parts  of,  968. 

exos,  2457. 

exosus,  814;  with  act.  meaning,  907. 

exosus  sum,  813. 

expergiscor,  prin.  parts  of,  980. 

expenor,  prin.  parts  of,  1020. 

explico,  prin.  parts  of,  993. 

explodS  (explaudo),  958. 

expungo,  prin.  parts  of,  954. 

exsequias,  with  eo,  1165. 

exsilio,  forms  of,  1019. 

exsolvo,  construction  with,  1303,  1304. 


exsorbep,  forms  of,  1006. 

exspectatione,  with  compar.,  1330. 

exsultas,  pres.  partic.,  902. 

extemplo,  cum  extemplo,  1923-1934. 

extendo,  forms  of,  924. 

extera,  defective,  356. 

exteri,  use  of,  347. 

exterior,  formation  of,  348  ;  comparison 
of,  356. 

extimus,  formation  of,  351 ;  comparison 
of,  356. 

extra,  form  of,  707;  prep.,  1410;  extra 
quam,  1894. 

extremus,  formation  of,  352;  compari- 
son of,  356 ;  with  partitive  meaning, 
1249 ;  extremus  est  with  result 
clause,  1965. 

exuo,  prin.  parts  of,  947;  constructions 
with,  1199. 

f,  changed  to  h,  150;  nf,  quantity  of 
vowel  preceding,  122,  a;  fl,  fr,  178. 

facesso,  forms  of,  970. 

facies,  decl.  of,  606,  607. 

facile,  comparison  of,  361. 

facilis,  comparison  of,  345,  359;  with 
gerundive  construction  or  gerund,  2274; 
with  supine  in  -u,  2274;  facile  est 
implying  non-occurrent  action,  1496. 

faciS,  parts  supplied  by  fio,  788,  1471; 
pass,  of,  788  ;  pres.  stem  of,  836  ;  in 
composition,  394,  790,  940 ;  imper.  of, 
96,  846;  perf.  of,  863;  forms  faxim, 
&c.,  887,  888;  form  faxitur,  888; 
prin.  parts  of,  940  ;  with  gen.  of  value, 
1271 ;  with  abl.,  1315 ;  fac,  facito, 
fac  ut,  facito  ut  with  subjv.,  1579, 
1712;  fac  ne  with  subjv.,  1585;  with 
purpose  clause,  1951 ;  with  result  clause, 
1965,  1967  ;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2196; 
with  perf.  partic.,  2297 ;  with  pres. 
partic.  used  predicatively,  2298  ;  in 
causative  use,  2304. 

fallS,  prin.  parts  of,  932. 

falsus,  comparison  of,  358. 

fames,  decl.  of,  524,  603. 

famul,  in,  £,  455. 

far,  form  of,  171  ;  decl.  of,  430,  489;  gen- 
der of,  583. 

farciS,  prin.  parts  of,  1014;  compounds 
of,  1014. 

fari,  805. 

fas,  defective,  430;  gender  of,  578;  fas 
est  implying  non-occurrent  action, 
1496 ;  with  supine  in  -u,  2274. 

fascis,  gender  of,  579. 

fastidiosus,  with  gen.,  1263. 


557 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


fateor,  priii.  parts  of,  1010;  compounds 
of,  1010. 

fatisco,  defective,  808. 

faveo,  prin.  parts  of,  996. 

febris,  decl.  of,  519,  550,  555. 

fel,  gender  and  decl.  of,  430,  482;  quan- 
tity, 2433. 

femur,  gender  and  decl.  of,  489. 

fere,  quantity,  2440. 

feriS,  defective,  Sio. 

ferme,  quantity,  2440. 

ferS,  conjug.  of,  772,  780,  781  ;  fcrm  tuli, 
860,  2435;  form  tetuli,  781,  860;  form 
toll,  781  ;  compound  forms,  rettuli, 
retuli,  781,  861  ;  defective,  780,  807,  900; 
form  of  fert,  828  ;  form  of  feram,  &c., 
842;  form  of  fer,  &c.,  844;  prin.  parts 
of,  922;  f  erunt,  they  say,  1033;  used 
reflexively,  1481,  1482;  moleste  ferS 
with  quod,  quia,  quom,  1851. 

f  ertilis,  comparison  of,  359  ;  with  gen., 
1263. 

f  erveo,  fervo,  821,  866  ;  prin.  parts  of, 
998. 

fervescS,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

ficus,  gender  of,  408. 

fiielis,  constructions  with,  1201. 

fiJes,  gen.  and  dat.  sing,  of,  160;  defec- 
tive, 600;  decl.  of,  602. 

fido,  forms  of,  801;  with  abl.,  1349. 

figS,  prin.  parts  of,  958. 

filia,  decl.  of,  442;  with  familias,  437. 

filius,  gen.  sing,  of,  456  ;  voc.  sing,  of, 
459  ;  nom.  plur.  fill,  461  ;  dat.  and  abl. 
sing,  fills,  464;  with  familias,  437. 

findS,  perf.  of,  86  1,  2435  ;  prin.  parts  of, 
934  ;  with  o  shortened,  2443. 

fingS,  prin.  parts  of,  954. 

finis,  difference  of  meaning  in  sing,  and 
plur.,  418  ;  decl.  of,  556  ;  gender  of, 
579;  fini  as  prep,  with  abl.,  1406,  1419; 
as  subst.  with  gen.,  1419;  position  of, 
1419;  fine  with  gen.,  1419. 

fi5,  conjug.  of,  785,  788;  quantity  of  i  in, 
127;   supplying  parts   of   facio,   788, 
1471;   form  fio,  789;  form  fieri,  789, 
895;  fiere,  789,  895;  quantity  of  i  in 
fieri,    &c.,   789;   in   composition,    394, 
790;    defective,   807;    fit   with   quo- 
minus,  1977. 

flagitS,  with  double  ace.,  1169  ;  with  ab 
and  abl.,  1170  ;  constructions  with  pass. 
of,  1171  ;  with  ut,  1950. 

flaveS,  defective.  809. 

fleets,  pres.  stem  of,  835  ;  prin.  parts  of, 


fleS,  prin.  parts  of,  1001  ;  with  ace.,  1139. 


-fllgo,  forms  of,  953. 

flS,  prin.  parts  of,  991. 

flocci,  as  gen.  of  value,  1272. 

floreS,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

flSrescS,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

fluS,  prin.  parts  of,  958. 

fodiS,  forms  of,  791  ;  pres.  stem  of,  836; 

prin.  parts  of,  946. 
follis,  gender  of,  579. 
foras,  use  of,  1162. 
forceps,  decl.  of,  480;  gender  of,  580. 
forfex,  gender  of,  581. 
fornix,  gender  of,  581. 
forsan,  with  subjv.,  1554. 
forsitan,  form  of,  712 ;  with  subjv.,  1554. 
fortasse,  with  subjv.,  1554;  introducing 

concessive    period,    2150;    with    subj. 

infin.,  2209. 

foveS,  prin.  parts  of,  996. 
frangS,  perf.  of,  863;  prin.  parts  of,  938 ; 

compounds  of,  938. 
fremS,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 
fretus,  with  abl.,  1349. 
fricS,  prin.  parts  of,  993  ;  compounds  of, 

993- 

frigescS,  prin.  parts  of,  959. 
frugl,  comparison  of,  35^;  indeclinable, 

431 ;  as  adj.,  431 ;  with  bonae,  1220. 
frupr,  prin.  parts  of,  978  ;  with  abl.,  1379; 

with  ace.,  1380;  use  of  gerundive  of,  2244. 
frustra,  frustra,  701,  707,  2467. 
fugiS,  pres.  stem  of,  836  ;  defective,  905  ; 

prin.  parts  of,  940 ;  f uge  with  infin.  for 

noli,  1584,  2170. 
fulgeS,  forms  of,  1000. 
funds,  prin.  parts  of,  944. 
fungor,  prin.  parts  of,  979 ;  with  abl., 

1379 ;  with  ace.,  1380  ;  use  of  gerundive 

of,  2244. 

funis,  gender  of,  579. 
furfur,  gender  of,  583. 
fustis,  decl.  of,  521,  555  ;  gender  of,  579, 

g,  introduction  of,  20 ;  form  of,  20  ;  fol- 
lowed by  v,  27  ;  sound  of,  20,  57;  from 
C,  164,  6;  initial  before  n,  disappear- 
ance of,  169,  2;  medial,  disappearance 
of,  170,  i ;  assimilation  of,  166,  9;  gn, 
quantity  of  vowel  preceding,  122,  c. 

Gaia,  abbreviated,  20. 

Gaius,  abbreviated,  20 ;  quantity  of  a 
in,  127,  c;  decl.  of,  127,  7;  458. 

gannio,  defective,  810. 

gaudeS,  forms  of,  801,  1488 ;  with 
quod,  quia,  quom,  1851 ;  with  si, 
2068  ;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2188  ;  with 
perf.  infin.,  2231. 


558 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


gem5,  prin.  parts  of,  972;    with  ace., 

1139. 

generatus,  with  abl.,  1312. 
genius,  voc.  sing,  of,  459. 
genii,  gender  of,  586 ;  decl.  of,  592. 
gero,    form    of,    154;    prin.    parts    of, 

953' 
gignd,  forms  of.  973 ;  genitus  with  abl., 

1312. 
glis,  decl.  of,  538,  544;  stems  of,  569; 

gender  of,  579. 
glisco,  defective,  808. 
gldrnus,  62,  491. 
glorior,  with  abl.,  1349. 
glubS,  defective,  808. 
Gnaeus,    abbreviated,    20 ;    diphthong 

before  vowel  in,  125. 
gracilis,  comparison  of,  345. 
gradior,  conjug.  of,  799 ;  compounds  of, 

791,  799,  986;  pres.  stem  of,  836;  prin. 

parts  of,  986. 
gratia,  sing,  and  plur.  of,  meaning,  418 ; 

gratia,  gen.  of  definition  with,  1257; 

gratia,  expressing  cause,  &c.,   i3i_75 

gratia,resembling  prep., 1406 ;  gratias 

ag5  with  quod  and  cum,  1852,  1875; 

ea  gratia  .  .  .  quod,  1854;  gratia 

with  gen.  of  gerundive  construction  or 

gerund,  2258. 
gratulor,  with  quod,  1852 ;  with  cum, 

1852,  1875. 
grave  est,  implying  non-occurrent  action, 

1496. 

grex,  decl.  of,  472  ;  gender  of,  581. 
grus,  gender  and  decl.  of,  494. 

h,  from  guttural  aspirate,  152;  not  a 
cons.,  177;  medial,  disappearance  of, 
151 ;  elision  before,  2482,  2493. 

habeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1004;  compounds 
of,  1004;  with  pro  and  abl.,  1168  ;  with 
dat.,  1222;  with  gen.  of  value,  1271; 
habeto,  1576;  with  perf.  partic.,  1606, 
2297;  with  gerundive,  2245,  2250. 

Hadria,  gender  of,  433. 

haereo,  defective,  905;  prin.  parts  of, 
1000 ;  with  dat.,  1186. 

hau,  use  of,  1450. 

baud,  see  haut. 

hauddum,  following  cum,  1868. 

haurio,  fut.  partic.  of,  905;  forms  of, 
1014. 

hauscio,  formation  of,  396,  1450. 

haut,  baud,  with  adjs.,  advs.,  verbs, 
1449;  baud  scio  an,  &c.,  1449,  1554 
1782. 


havS,  avg,  805. 

icbeo,  defective,  809. 

hebes,  decl.  of,  533,  635. 

leia,  with  voc.  nom.  and  voc.,  1123;  with 
short  final  vowel,  2438. 

lem,  with  voc.  nom.  and  voc.,  1123. 

icrcle,  in  answers,  1513. 

heri,  here,  1341. 

heu,  with  nom.  of  exclamation,  1117; 
with  ace.,  1149;  with  gen.,  1295. 

tieus,  with  voc.  nom.  and  voc.,  1123. 

trie,  decl.  of,  658-665 ;  nom.  plur.,  hisce, 
461,  664, 665 ;  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  hibus, 
664,  665  ;  formation  of,  659,  662  ;  with 
short  vowel,  664,  2466 ;  inscriptional 
forms  of,  665  ;  full  form  with  -ce,  663 ; 

hoice,  658;  hicine,  663:  with  correla- 
tives, 695;  huius,  quantity,  153,  2. 

Adj.  equivalent  to  gen.,  1098  ;  rules 
for  agreement  of,  1094-1098  ;  neut.  ace. 
used  adverbially,  1156;  neut.  with  par- 
titive gen.,  1248;  huius  as  gen.  of 
value,  1272;  with  rel.,  1797;  correlative 
of  qui,  1831;  used  instead  of  repeated 
rel.,  1833;  correlative  of  ut,  ut  non, 
1970;  hoc  .  .  .  quo,  1973;  as  connec- 
tive, 2129,  2130 ;  hoc  ipsum,  totum 
hoc,  as  attribute  of  infin.,  2215  ;  point- 
ing out  what  is  near  in  place,  time,  or 
thought,  2347 ;  referring  to  the  speaker, 
2348;  haec  meaning  the  realm,  our 
country,  &c.,  2349;  expressing  some- 
thing familiar,  with  shade  of  contempt, 
2350;  referring  to  words  of  a  sentence, 
2351;  hie  and  ille  contrasted,  2352- 
2355  ;  in  concessions,  2361 ;  idem  used 
with,  2372. 

hie,  adv.,  708, 1340  ;  defined  by  loc.,  1340; 
quantity  of  vowel  in,  2466. 

hiemps  (hiems),  form  of,  167,  495; 
decl.  of,  430. 

hinc,  adv.,  710;  as  coordinating  word, 
1691. 

hisco,  defective,  808. 

Hispalis,  decl.  of,  518,  549,  554  ;  in  abl. 
with  in,  1335. 

homo,  homines  sunt  qui,  1822 ; 
hominem  as  indef.,  2212;  expressing 
feeling,  as  admiration  or  contempt,  2365  ; 
with  short  final  vowel,  2442,  form,  144. 

honorificus,  comparison  of,  353. 

horreS,  prin.  parts  of,  1006;  with  ace., 

1139- 

horresc5,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 
hosticapas,  nom.,  436. 
hostis,  dec!,  of,  517,  552. 
I  hue,  with  gen.,  1254. 


559 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


humilis,  comparison  of,  345. 
humus,  gender  of,  447;    numi,   loc., 

460  ;  use  of  humi,  1337 ;  hum5,  use 

of,  1311. 

i,  as  vowel  and  as  cons.,  how  represented, 
22,  24,  26 ;  the  vowel,  pronunciation  of, 
33,  38-41  ;  the  cons.,  pronunciation  of, 
59;  the  cons.,  how  represented,  24,  26  ; 
the  doubled  consonant,  how  represented, 


23;   the   cons.,  medial,    disappearance 

of,  153,  2;   ii  (cons,  and  vowel),  the 

combination,  52;  interchange  of  vowel 

and  cons.,   153,   4;   i  longa,  23,   24; 

final,    quantity    of,    129,  2437,   2445, 

2446. 
i,  intermediate  sound  between  u  and,  23, 

103;  from  a,  104;  from  e,  103;  from 

O,  105;  medial,  disappearance  of,  in; 

weakened  to  e,  107,  b ;  in  perf.  subjv., 

878  ;  in  fut.  perf.,  883. 
1,  how  denoted  in  inscriptions,  29,  2  ;  from 

ai,  ae,  108,  a;  from  oi,  oe,  108,  «; 

from   ei,   108,   a,    764,   789;  in  perf. 

subjv.,  877  ;  in  fut.  perf.,  884. 
iaceo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 
iacio,  form  of,  in  compounds,  52,  104, 

940 ;    pres.    stem    of,   836 ;   perf.    of, 

863 ;    defective,  905 ;   prin.    parts  of, 

940. 

iamdiu,  accent  of,  92. 
ibl,  quantity,  129,  2;  2446;  form  of,  709; 

ubi  .  .  .  ib!,  1831. 
ibidem,  quantity,  129,  2. 
ici,  forms  of,  937. 
idcirco,    as    coordinating   word,    1691 ; 

idcirco  .  .  .  quod  (quia),  1854, 1855, 

2067;  before  ut,  ne,  1961 ;   correlative 

of  si,  2018,  2067. 
idem,   decl.  of,  676-678;  abl.  of,  with 

loci,  1252;   correlative  of  qui,  1831  ; 

used    instead   of    repeated  rel.,    1833; 

connecting  two  different  predicates   to 

same  person  or  thing,  2371 ;  used  with 

hie,  &c.,  2372  ;  followed  by  qui,  &c., 

meaning  the  same  as,  2373. 
ideo,  as  coordinating  word,  1691 ;   ideo 

.  .  .  quod,  1854 ;    ideo  .  .  .  quia, 

1854,  1855,  1858,  2067;  before  ut,  ne, 

1961 ;  correlative  of  si,  2067. 
idoneus,  with  dat.  and  ace.,  1201 ;  with 

qui,  1819;  with  infin.,  1819. 
idus,  gender  of,  588. 
iecur,  gender  and  decl.  of,  489. 
igitur,  position  of,  1688  ;  ergo  igitur, 


1689  ;    correlative  of  si,  2018 ;   use  of, 


1688,  2158 


ignis,  decl.  of,  521,  555. 

ignore,  with  baud,  1449. 

Ignosco,  form  of,  170,  6;  fut.  partic.  of, 
905  ;  prin.  parts  of,  965. 

ilicet,  form  of,  712  ;  with  ace.,  1149. 

ilico,  adv.,  698,  703;  correlative  of  si, 
2067;  with  shortened  o,  2442. 

ille,  decl.  of.,  656-659,  666-668;  illut, 
659  ;  old  and  inscriptional  forms 
of,  667,  668  ;  combined  with  ecce 
and  em,  667  ;  with  correlatives, 
695.  _ 

Adj.  equivalent  to  gen.,  1098;  rules 
for  agreement  of,  1094-1098;  neut.  with 
partitive  gen.,  1248;  with  subjv.  ques- 
tions, 1566;  with  rel.,  1797;  correlative 
of  qui,  1831  ;  used  instead  of  repeated 
rel.,  1833  ;  correlative  of  ut,  ut  non, 
1970 ;  of  ind.  disc,  representing  tu  and 
yos  of  direct  discourse,  2325  ;  hlC  and 
ille  contrasted,  2352-2355  ;  pointing  to 
what  is  remote  in  place,  time,  or 
thought,  2358  ;  pointing  out  a  celebrity, 
2359;  indicating  change  of  subj.,  2360; 
in  concessions,  2361  ;  in  poetry,  to 
repeat  a  thing  with  emphasis,  2362  ;  in 
poetry,  to  emphasize  the  second  of  two 
ideas,  2363 ;  in  poetry,  to  anticipate  the 
real  subj.,  2364;  idem  used  with, 
2372  ;  first  syllable  of,  shortened,  2469. 

illi,  illic,  adv.,  708  ;  use  of,  1340  ;  quan- 
ty  of  second  i,  2466. 

illic,  decl.  of,  669,  670;  rare  forms  of, 
670;  quantity  of  second  i,  2466;  first 
syllable  of,  shortened,  2469. 

imber,  form  of,  in,  6;  decl.  of,  525, 
542,  556- 

Imbros,  in  abl.  with  in,  1334. 

imbuo,  prin.  parts  of,  947. 

immane  quantum,  1790. 

immemor,  decl.  of,  537,  559. 

immineo,  defective,  809. 

immo,  in  answers,  1514  ;  with  shortened 
O,  2442;  first  syllable  of,  shortened, 
2469. 

impar,  decl.  of,  537,  561. 

impedi5,  with  ne,  1960,  1977;  with 
quominus,  1960,  1977;  with  ace.  and 
infin.,  2203. 

impero,  use  of,  2202. 

impertio,  constructions  with,  1199. 

impingo,  prin.  parts  of,  938 ;  perf.  of, 
863. 

impius,  constructions  with,  1201. 

impleo,  with  gen.,  1293  ;  with  abl.,  1386. 

implico,  prin.  parts  of,  993 


impos,  quantity  of  O  in,  2457. 

560 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


imposisse,  972. 

impubes  (impubis),  decl.  of,  491, 
624,  625. 

imus,  comparison  of,  356  ;  with  partitive 
meaning,  1249. 

in,  comparison  of,  357  ;  compounds  of, 
with  ace.,  1137;  compounds  of,  with 
dat.,  1188,  1189,  1194;  compounds  of, 
other  constructions  with,  1190,  1191, 
1196,  1198  ;  with  ace.  of  names  of  towns 
and  islands,  1158;  with  urbern  and 
oppidum,  1159;  with  country  names 
and  appellatives,  1161  ;  with  domum, 
domes,  1164;  with  malam  crucem 
and  malam  rem,  1165;  used  after 
adjs.,  1201,  1268  ;  expressions  with,  for 
dat.  of  tendency  or  result,  1221 ;  expres- 
sion with,  instead  of  partitive  gen., 
1246 ;  expression  with,  instead  of  ob- 
jective gen.,  1261 ;  with  urbe  and 
pppid5,  1333  ;  with  abl.  of  town  and 
island  names,  1334,  1335  ;  with  abl.,  of 
domus,  1337;  with  loc.  abl.,  1299, 
1346,  1347 ;  in  expressions  of  time, 
1353 ;  older  endo,  1402,  1422 ;  older 
indu,  1422  ;  with  ace.  and  abl.,  1423, 
1424 ;  in  eo  introductory  to  sentence 
with  quod,  1847;  with  ace.  of  gerun- 
dive construction  or  gerund,  2253  ;  with 
abl.  of  gerundive  construction  or  gerund, 
2267 ;  quantity,  2433. 

in-,  privative,  with  gerundives,  2249. 

incertum  an,  1782. 

incesso,  prin.  parts  of,  970. 

incidp,  defective,  905. 

incipio,  prin.  parts  of,  940. 

incitus  (incitus),  919. 

inclutus  (inclitus),  919;  comparison 
of,  358. 

increpavit,  mcreparit,  993. 

incubavere,  incuoitus,  993. 

incumbS,  prin.  parts  of,  974. 

incutio,  prin.  parts  of,  961. 

inde,  enclitic,  93  ;  with  partitive  gen., 
1253  ;  as  coordinating  word,  1691  ;  first 
syllable  of,  shortened,  2469. 

indigeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006  ;  with  gen., 
129^,  1305  ;  with  abl.,  1293. 

indignor,  with  quod,  quia,  quom, 
18,1  ;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2188. 

indignus,  with  abl.,  1269,  1392;  with 
gen.,  1269;  with  qui,  1819;  with  infin.. 
1819;  with  ut,  1819;  with  supine  in  -u, 
2276. 

indoles,  decl.  of,  523. 

indo  nSmen,  case  with,  1214. 

indu,  1422,  2444. 


indulges,  prin.  parts  of,  999. 

induo,  prin.  parts  of,  947  ;  constructions 
with,  1199. 

ineptio,  defective,  810. 

iners,  form  of,  73  ;  decl.  of,  533. 

infera,  defective,  356. 

inferi,  use  of,  347. 

inferior,  formation  of,  348  ;  comparison 
of,  356. 

inferne,  with  short  final  vowel,  2440. 

infimus.  comparison  of,  356  ;  with  parti- 
tive meaning,  1249. 

infinitum  est,  implying  non-occurrent 
action,  1496. 

infit,  790. 

infitias,  defective,  430;  with  eo,  1165. 

infra,  form  of,  93 ;  not  compounded, 
1406;  prep,  and  adv.,  1410, 1412;  infra 
quam,  1894. 

infrico,  prin.  parts  of,  993. 

inger,  imper.  of  ingero,  846. 

ingruS,  prin.  parts  of,  947. 

iniquus,  constructions  with,  1201. 

inlicio,  prin.  parts  of,  956. 

inlido.  prin.  parts  of,  958. 

inmitto,  construction  with,  1198. 

inops,  decl.  of,  535,  559,  636 ;  with  gen., 
1263. 

inperco  (im-),  forms  of,  930. 

inquam,  conjug.  of,  759-761  ;  with  di- 
rect quotations,  760 ;  defective,  760, 
805  ;  form  of  inquit,  828 ;  prin.  parts 
of,  922 ;  3rd  pers.  sing,  with  indef. 
subj.,  1033. 

inquies,  defective,  430,  477. 

inscius,  with  gen.,  1263. 

insilio,  prin.  parts  of,  1019. 

insinuo,  construction  with,  1198. 

inspergo,  constructions  with,  1199. 

instar,  defective,  430. 

insuper  quam,  1895. 

intellego,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

inter,  form  of,  710;  prep.,  1410;  com- 
pounds of,  with  dat.,  1188,  1189,  1194; 
compounds  of,  other  constructions  with, 
1190,  1191,  1196;  expression  with,  in- 
stead of  partitive  gen.,  1246;  position 
of,  1434  ;  with  infin.  as  obj.,  220;  ;  with 
gerundive  construction  or  gerund,  2253; 
inter  nos,  inter  vos,  inter  se,  ex- 
pressing reciprocal  relations,  2344. 

intercede,  with  ne,  1960. 

intercludo,  cases  with,  1199, 1303,  1304; 
with  quominus,  1977;  with  nS,  1977. 

interdico,  cases  with,  1199;  with  pur- 
pose clause,  1950  ;  with  ne,  1960. 

interduo,  756. 


Index  of  Latin    Words. 


interea,  with  partitive  gen.,  1253  ;  cum 
interea,  1868. 

interemo,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 

intereo,  followed  by  ab  and  abl.,  1318. 

interest,  constructions  with,  1276-1279. 

interfieri,  790. 

interim,  cum  interim,  1868. 

interior,  formation  of,  348;  comparison 
of,  357. 

interlego,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 

intermitt5,  with  qum,  1986. 

internSsco,  prin.  parts  of,  965. 

interrogo,  with  double  ace.,  1169;  with 
de  and  abl.,  1170;  constructions  with 
pass,  of,  1171. 

intervallum,  use  of  abl.  of,  1399. 

intibus,  gender  of,  408, 

intimus,  formation  of,  351;  comparison 
of,  357  ;  with  partitive  meaning,  1249. 

intonp,  prin.  parts  of,  993. 

intra,  in  expressions  of  time,  1396;  prep., 
1410 ;  intra  .  .  .  quam,  1929. 

invehp,  used  reflexively,  1482. 

invenio,  used  personally  in  pass.,  2178. 

inveterascS,  prin.  parts  of,  968. 

invicem,  adv.,  699;  invicem  inter 
se,  invicem  se,  invicem,  expressing 
reciprocal  relations,  2345. 

invictus,  comparison  of,  358. 

invitus,  comparison  of,  358  ;  use  of  dat. 
of,  1218. 

•o,  with  voc.  nom.  and  voc.,  1123. 

ipse,  the  superlative  ipsissumus,  358; 
decl.  of,  656,  657,  679,  680;  gen.  of, 
in  apposition  with  possess,  pron.,  1235; 
with  abl.  abs.,  1366;  ipsum,  hoc 
ipsum,  as  attribute  of  infin.,  2215; 
in  contrasts,  2374,  2375  ;  with  personals 
and  reflexives,  2376  ;  standing  for  se  or 
suus,  2377 ;  meaning  actual,  positive, 
even,  2379;  meaning  regular,  proper, 
real,  2380;  and  et  ipse,  meaning  as 
well,  likewise,  too,  2381;  meaning  alone, 
mere,  2382  ;  meaning  exactly,  just,  pre- 
cisely, right,  2383  ;  meaning  of  oneself, 
voluntarily,  of  one1  s  own  motion,  2384. 

ipsissumus,  358. 

ipsus,  680. 

irascor,  with  quod,  quia,  quom,  1851. 

is,  dat.  sing,  of,  127,  672;  decl.  of,  656- 
659,  671-674-;  it,  659;  stems  of,  672;    j 
old  and  inscriptional  forms  of,  673,  674 ;    j 
combined  with  ecce,  673 ;  in  table  of  ] 
correlatives,  695 ;  eius,  quantity,  i  ^3,  2.   j 
Adj.   equivalent   to   gen.,    1098 ;    id 
quod,  1811;  is,  eius  modi  followed  I 
by  rel.   sentence   of   characteristic   or 


result,  1818 ;  rules  for  agreement  of, 
1094-1098;  ace.  used  adverbially,  1129 
1144,  1146,  1156,  1840;  neut.  with  par- 
titive gen.,  1248;  abl.  of,  with  loci, 
1252;  with  rel.,  1797;  correlative  of 
qui,  1831 ;  used  instead  of  repeated  rel.. 
1833  ;  correlative  of  ut,  ut  non,  1970  ; 
eo  .  .  .  quo,  1973 ;  as  connective, 
2129.  2130;  eum,  subj.  of  infin., 
omitted,  2183 ;  in  concessions,  2361  ; 
referring  to  something  named  in  con- 
text,  2365  ;  referring  to  something 
named  before  or  after,  2366;  with  con- 
nective, denoting  important  addition, 
2367 ;  indicating  something  restrained 
or  restricted  by  a  rel.  or  indef.,  2368; 
used  for  reflexive,  2370  ;  quantity,  2433. 

iste,  form  of,  771,  i;  decl.  of,  656-659, 
666,  667 ;  istut,  659 ;  old  forms  of,  667 ; 
combined  with  ecce,  667;  with  corre- 
latives, 695. 

With  rel.,  1797;  correlative  of  ut, 
Ut  non,  1970;  pointing  out  something 
connected  with  person  addressed,  2356  ; 
expressing  contempt,  2357;  in  con- 
cessions, 2361 ;  idem  used  with,  2372  ; 
first  syllable  of,  shortened,  2469. 

isti,  istic,  adv.,  708,  1340;  quantity  of 
second  i,  2466. 

istic,  decl.  of,  669,  670;  rare  forms  of, 
670 ;  quantity  of  second  i,  2466. 

istice  (istic),  pron.,  93. 

istice  (istic),  adv.,  93. 

istuc,  form  of,  659:  idem  used  with, 
2372  ;  with  long  u,  2448. 

ita,  ita  enimvero,  ita  vero,  in  answers, 
1512;  non  ita  in  answers,  1513;  cor- 
relative of  ut,  ut  non,  1831,  1937, 
1970;  correlative  of  tamquam,  1908; 
preceding  quin,  1988 ;  correlative  of 
dum,  quoad,  quamdiu,  1999:  cor- 
relative of  dum  ne,  2003  ;  correlative 
of  si,  2018  ;  correlative  of  quasi, 
tamquam  si,  &c.,  2118;  expressing 
affirmative  coordination,  2159;  intro- 
ducing ace.  and  infin.,  2176;  with  short 
final  vowel,  2438. 

itaque,  position  of,  1688;  itaque  ergo, 
ergo  itaque,  1689;  use  of,  1688, 
2158. 

item,  correlative  of  ut,  1831, 1937. 

iter,  decl.  of,  500;  gender  of,  573. 

itidem,  correlative  of  ut,  1937. 

iubar,  gender  and  decl.  of,  489. 

iubeo,  form  of  iussi,ioo;  forms  of,  1000; 
with  subjv.  coordinated,  1708,  2200; 
with  ace.  and  infin.,  2198;  with  ut. 


562 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


2200  ;  used  personally  in  pass.,  2201 ; 

in  causative  use,  2304. 
iudicium,  abl.  of,  with  judicial  verbs, 

1280. 

iudico,  used  personally  in  pass.,  2178. 
iuncus,  gender  of,  408. 
iungo,  prin.   parts  of,   954 ;    with  dat., 

1186;   iunctus  with  cum,  1357. 
luppiter,    form   of.  94;    formation    of, 

389;  decl.  of,  494,  500. 
iuratus,  with  active  meaning,  907. 
iuro,  with  fut.  infin.,  2235;  with  pres.  in- 

fin.,  2236. 
ius,  right,  decl.  of,  491,  496,  498  ;  dat. 

sing,  in  -e,  501,  507  ;  iure  consul- 
_tus,  peritus,  1268. 
JUS,  broth,  decl.  of,  491. 
iuvenis,  comparison  of,  353,  354;  gen- 
der and  decl.  of,  486,  500,  566. 
iuvo,  perf.  of,  864 ;  form  iuerint,  891 ; 

fut.  partic.  of,  905;  prin.  parts  of,  990. 
iuxta,  not  compounded,  1406  ;  prep,  and 

adv.,  1410,  1412;  iuxta  quam,  1890. 

j,  the  character,  26. 

k,  supplanted  by  C,  20;  used  as  abbrevia- 
tion, 20. 

kalendae,  abbreviated,  20;  no  sing.,  4 17. 
Karthagini,  504,  708,  1331 ;  -e,  1343. 

1,  doubled,    pronunciation  of,  60  ;   anap- 

tyctical   vowel  inserted  before,   172,    i  ; 

from  d  or  r,  147,  166,  7;  preceded  by 

mute  or  f,  178. 
labor,  prin.  parts  of,  983. 
lac,  decl.  of,  478. 
lacesso,  prin.  parts  of,  970. 
*lacio,  pres.  stem  of,  836. 
lacteo,  defective,  809. 
lacus,  decl.  of,  592. 
laedo,  prin.  parts  of,  958;  compounds  of, 

958. 

Laenas,  accent  of,  88. 
laetor,    with   abl.,    1349;   with    quod, 

quia,    quom,   1851;    with  ace.  and 

infin.,  2188. 

lamentor,  with  ace.,  1139. 
languesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 
lanx,  decl.  of,  531. 
lar,  gender  and  decl.  of,  489. 
largior,  prin.  parts  of,  1021. 
largiter,  with  partitive  gen.,  1248. 
largus,  with  gen.,  1264. 
lateo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 
latescS,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 
latus,  partic.,  form  of,  169,  4; 


latus,  adj.,  with  ace.  appended,  1130. 
laudo,  conjug.  of,  792,  793  ;  use  of  pass. 

of,  1491. 
lavo,  forms  of,  820,  864,990;  prin.  parts 

of,  990. 
lego,  prin.  parts  of,  937  ;  compounds  of, 

937. 
Lemnus,  use  of  ace.  of,  1158;    use  of 

abl.  of,  1334  ;  use  of  loc.  of,  1334. 
lenlbunt,  852. 
Lethe,  gender  of,  406. 

levo,  with  gen.,  1294;  with  abl.,  1303, 

1304. 

lex,  abl.  of,  with  judicial  verbs,  1280. 
liber,  libri,  in  titles  of  books,  11155  use 

of  abl.  of,  1345. 
liber,  with  gen.,  1306;  with  abl.,  1306; 

with  p_rep.,  1306. 
liberalis,  with  gen.  1263. 
libero,  constructions  with,  1303,   1304; 

used  personally  in  pass.,  2178. 
libet,  form  of,  28. 
lice 6,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 
liceor,  prin.  parts  of,  1009. 
licet,  forms  of,  816,  817;  implying  nqn- 

occurrent  action,    1496;    si   licuerit, 

1632;  coordinated,  1710;  as  correlative 

of  quamvis,  1904;  with  subj.  infin., 

2209, 2214 ;  with  concessive  partic.,  2295. 
lien,  gender  of,  583. 
Liger,  decl.  of,  519,  544,  556-     , 
Im5,  pres.  stem  of,  832, 833 ;  perf.  partic. 

of,  918;  fo.-ns  of,  964. 
linquo,  prin.  parts  of,  938. 
linter,  see  lunter. 
liqueo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 
liquesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 
lis,  form  of,  169,  4;  decl.  of,  533;  stems 

of,  569. 

littera,  sing,  and  plur.  of,  meaning,  418. 
litus,  918,  2436. 
liveo,  defective,  809. 
loco,  with  in  and  abl.,  1424  ;  with  gerun- 
dive, 2250. 

locuples,  decl.  of,  533. 
locus,  form  of,  169,  4  ;  use  of  abl.  of,  1344, 

1345  ;  repeated  in  rel.  sentence,  1796. 
longe,   705 ;    longe    ab,    1308 ;    with 

compar.,  1459 ;  with  superl.,  1466. 
longius,    without   quam,    1328;   with 

quam,  1328;  with  abl.,  1328. 
longus,    with     ace.    appended,     1130; 

longus    est    implying    non-occurrent 

action,  1496. 

loquor,  prin.  parts  of,  978. 
lubet  (libet),  forms  of,  816,  817. 


563 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


Juceo,  prin.  parts  of,  999. 

lucescit,  impersonal,  1034. 

lucesco,  lucisco,  prin.  parts  of,  959. 

lucet,  impersonal,  1034. 

ludo,  prin.  parts  of,  958. 

lues,  decl.  of,  430. 

Iuge5,  prin.  parts  of,  999;   with  ace., 

1139;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2188. 
lunter  (linter),  decl.  of,  525;  gender  of, 

luo,  prin.  parts  of,  947. 
luxuries,  decl.  of,  605. 

m,  development  of  an  anaptyctical  vowel 
before,  172,  2;  final,  how  treated,  61 ; 
assimilation  of,  164,  3;  monosyllables 
ending  in,  with  vowel  short,  2432  ;  final, 
elided,  2493-2495. 

madeo.  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

madesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

Maecenas,  accent  of,  88. 

maere5,  defective,  809;  with  ace.,  1139; 
with  quod,  quia,  quom,  1851. 

mage,  form  of,  363. 

magis,  form  of,  363;  assign  of  compar., 
360;  magis  .  .  .  quam,  1457;  with 
compar.,  1463 ;  magis  quod,  &c., 
.  .  .  quam  qu5,  &c.,  1855 ;  non 
magis  quam,  1889. 

magister,  formation  of,  348. 

magnificus,  comparison  of,  353. 

magnus,  comparison  of,  353;  agreeing 
with  dat.  of  tendency  or  result,  1220^ 
magm  as  gen.  of  value,  1271,  1279; 
magnd  as  abl.  of  value,  1273,  1390, 
1391 ;  magnum  est  implying  non- 
occurrent  action,  1496. 

maior,  form  of,  23;  166,9;  comparison 
of,  353 ;  agreeing  with  dat.  of  tendency 
or  result,  1 220 ;  in  expressions  of  age, 
1329. 

male,  comparison  of,  363 ;  verbs  com- 
bined with,  followed  by  dat.,  1187;  in- 
timating negation,  1451 ;  quantity,  2440. 

maledicens,  comparison  of,  354. 

maledicus,  comparison  of,  354. 

maleficus,  comparison  of,  358. 

malevolus,  comparison  of,  358. 

malo,  form  of,  170,  2  ;  formation  of,  396; 
conjug.  of,  772,  775,  778,  779;  form  of 
malim,  &c.. 841;  prin.  parts  of,  922; 
use  of  malim,  malp,  1555;  use  of 
mallem,  1560;  coordination  of  forms 
of,  1707;  with  Ut,  1950;  with  infin., 
2169;  with  acc<  an{*  taina-i  2189,  2190. 

malus,  comparison  of,  355;  malam 
crucem  and  malam  rem,  1165. 


manceps,  decl.  of,  480. 

mando,  prin.  parts  of,  950;  with  subjv. 

coordinated,  1 708  ;  with  purpose  clause, 

1950. 

maneo,  prin.  parts  of,  1000. 
manus,  gender  of,  588. 
marcesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 
mare,  declension  of,  526,  527,  546,  552, 

marg5,  gender  of,  574. 
marmor,  gender  of,  489,  575. 
Marspiter,  formation  of,  389. 
mas,  decl.  of,  538,  544. 
mature,  comparison  of,  363. 
mature sco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 
maturus,  comparison  of,  344. 
maxime,  as  sign  of  superl.,  360;  with 

superl.,  1466. 
maximus,  form  of,  28;     formation  of, 

351 ;  comparison  of,  353  ;  agreeing  with 

dat.     of    tendency    or    result,     1220; 

maxim!   as    gen.     of    value,     1271  ; 

maximus  natu,  superl.  of  senex, 

353; 

medius,  with  partitive  meaning,  1249, 

with  loc.  abl.,  1346. 
mel,   gender    and    decl.   of,    430,  482; 

quantity,  2433. 
melior,   comparison   of,  355 ;  decl.  of, 

503,   505,   622. 
menus,  form  of,  107,  c;  comparison  of, 

363;  melius  est  implying  non-occur- 

rent  action,    1496 ;  melius   est  with 

perf.  infin.,  2231. 
melos,  decl.  of,  508. 
memini,   defective,  812 ;    synopsis    of, 

812;    no  pass.,  813;   perf.  imper.  act. 

memento,    mementote,  813,  879; 

meminens,  perf.   act.   partic.,    907 ; 

with  gen.,  1287;  with  ace.,  1288;  with 

de  and  abl.,  1289;  meaning  of,  1607; 

with   secondary  sequence,   1769;   me- 
mini  cum,  1870;  with  infin.,  2169; 

with  ace.  and  infin.,  2175;  with  pres. 

infin.,  2220. 
memor,  decl.  of,    537,   559,   636;  with 

gen.,  1263. 

memoria  teneo,  with  pres.  infin.,  2220. 
memoro,  used  personally  in  pass.,  2178; 

memoratur,  impersonally,  2181. 
Menandru,  gen. ,466. 
mens,  decl.  of,  533 ;    venit  in  men- 

tem,  1290  ;  use  of  mentis,  1339. 
mensis,  decl.  of,  492,  500,  566;  gender 

of,  579. 

mentior,  prin.  parts  of,  1021. 
merces,  gender  of,  572. 


564 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


mereo,  mereor,  prin.  parts  of,  1004; 
two  inflections,  1488. 

merges,  gender  of,  572. 

mergp,  prin.  parts  of,  958. 

n.eridies,  defective,  597;  gender  of,  597. 

meritus,  comparison  of,  358. 

merx  (merces,  mers),  decl.  of,  531. 

Messalla,  formation  of,  274. 

messis,  decl.  of,  520,  551. 

metior,  prin.  parts  of,  1022. 

meto,  pres.  stem  of,  835. 

rnetuo,  367;  prin.  parts  of,  947;  with 
ut,  1957;  with  quin,  1986. 

metus  est  si,  2068. 

meus,  voc.  mi,  459,  652;  mihf,  quan- 
tity, 60,  2446 ;  decl.  of,  652-655  ;  mea, 
with  refert,  interest,  1277;  meum 
as  attribute  of  infin.,  2215  ;  represented 
by  suus  in  ind.  disc.,  2325  ;  used  instead 
of  gen.,  1234,  1262. 

mico,  prin.  parts  of,  993;  compounds 
of,  993. 

mini  est  nomen,  case  with,  1213. 

Miletus,  in  loc.,  1334. 

militiae,  loc.,  438,  1338. 

mille,  decl.  of,  642. 

mina,  form  of,  172,  2 

minime,  comparison  of,  363;  intimating 
negation,  1451;  in  answers,  1513. 

minimus,  formation  of,  352  ;  comparison 
of,  355 ;  minimum  with  partitive  gen., 
1248  ;  minimi  as  gen.  of  value,  1271 ; 
minimo  asabl.  of  value,  1391 ;  mini- 
mus natu,  superl.  of  iuvenis,  353. 

minister,  formation  of,  348. 

ministro  bibere,  2164. 

minor,  comparison  of,  355  ;  minus  with 
partitive  gen.,  1248;  minoris  as  gen. 
of  value,  1271,  1274;  in  expressions  of 
age,  1329. 

minor,  verb,  with  fut.  infin.,  2235  »  w^tn 
pres.  infin.,  2236. 

minuo,  pres.  stem  of,  833;  prin.  parts 
of,  948. 

minus,  form  of,  363;  without  quam, 
1328;  with  quam,  1328;  with  abl., 
1328;  in  expressions  of  age,  1329.; 
intimating  negation,  1451 ;  nihil  mi- 
nus in  answers,  1513;  with  nihilo, 
1676, 1686,  2151 :  non  minus  quam, 
1889;  with  si,  2021. 

mira  sunt,  with  si,  2068. 

mirificus,  comparison  of,  358. 

miror,  conjug.  of,  798;  with  gen.,  1286; 
pass,  of,  how  expressed,  1491 ;  with 
quod,  quia,  quom,  1851;  with  si, 
2068 ;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2188. 


mirum  est,  with  si,  2068. 

mirum  quantum,  as  adv.,  712,  1790. 

mirum  quin,  1984. 

mis,  646. 

misceo,  form  of,  1004;  prin.  parts  of, 
1004  ;  with  dat.,  1186. 

misereo,  with  gen.,  1285;  forms  of,  815, 
1009;  impersonal,  1034;  impersonal, 
construction  with,  1283 ;  used  person- 
ally, 1284. 

misereor,  forms  of,  815.  1009;  used  im- 
personally, 1009;  with  gen.,  1285;  con- 
struction with  miseretur,  1283. 

miserescit,  defective,  815;  construction 
with,  1283. 

mitto,  prin.  parts  of,  958 ;  mitte  with 
infin.  for  noli,  1584  ;  quod  mitto, 
&c.,  1840  ;  with  infin.  of  purpose,  2164 ; 
with  ace.  and  infin.,  2175  >  Per^  partic. 
of,  used  with  facid,  2297. 

mobilis,  comparison  of,  359. 

modius,  gen.  plur.  of,  462. 

modo,  with  iambic  shortening  in,  130, 
3;  2442;  with  wishes,  1540;  with 
imper.,  1572;  with  n5n,  1661,  1680- 
1682  ;  modo  .  .  .  modo,  1687  > 
with  si,  2019  :  with  dum  and  subjv., 
2003,  2110;  alone  with  subjv.,  2003, 
2110. 

moles  (mSlis),  decl.  of,  523;  form  of, 

moleste    fero,    with    quod,    quia, 

quom,  1851. 

molior,  prin.  parts  of,  1021. 
mold,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 
moneo,  conjug.  of,  794,  795  ;  prin.  parts 

of,  1004;  with  double  ace.,  1172,  1291  ; 

with  ace.  and  gen.  or  de  and  abl.,  1291 ; 

with    subjv.    coordinated,    1708;    with 

purpose    clause,    1950;    with  ace.   and 

infin.,  1954. 
mons,  gender  of,  580. 
mordeo,  perf .  of,  858,  859 ;  prin.  parts 

of,  995. 
morior,  forms  of,  791,  799 ;  compounds 

of,  forms  of,  791,  799 ;  pres.  stem  of, 

836 ;  fut.  partic.  of,  905  ;  perf.  partic. 

of,  910 ;  prin.  parts  of,  981  ;  mortuus 

used  actively,  1364. 
mos,  decl.  of,  491 ;  m5s  est  with  result 

clause,   1965 ;    mos    est    with  infin., 

2211. 
moved,  with  shortened  forms,  891 ;  prin. 

parts  of,  996;   m5tus,  form  of,  82; 

case   constructions    with,    1303,    1304; 

with   purpose  clause,   1951  ;  moveoi 

with  quominus,  1977. 


565 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


mox,  with  fut.  perf.,  1630. 

mulceo,  prin.  parts  of,  1000. 

mulgeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1000. 

multiplex,  decl.  of,  531. 

multum,  comparison  of,  363. 

multus,  comparison  of,  355  ;  multum 
with  partitive  gen.,  1248;  mult5  with 
compar.,  1459 ;  multi  sunt  qui,  &c., 
1822 ;  n5n  multum  abest  with 
quin,  1986. 

municeps,  decl.  of,  479,  480,  495,  507. 

munificus,  comparison  of,  358. 

munus,  dat.  of,  with  verb,  1223. 

mut5,  with  abl.,  1389 ;  with  cum, 
1389. 

n,  adultermum,  before  c,  g,  q,  x,  62 ; 
ncn,'i7o,  5 ;  before  s,  63,  155  :  after  m, 
172, 2  ;  inconiunx,  122,  e;  medial,  dis- 
appearance of,  170,  6;  final  ns,  disap- 
pearance of,  171,  4  ;  assimilation  of,  166, 
5 ;  nf,  ns,  gn,  quantity  of  vowel  preced- 
ing, 122,  dropped  in  pres.  partic.,  902. 

nam,  introducing  parenthesis,  1642;  with 
et,  1648;  position  of,  1688;  causal  or 
illative,  2154;  asseverative,  2155  ;  intro- 
ducing question,  2155  ;  introducing  ex- 
planation, illustration,  &c.,  2155. 

namque,  position  of,  1688,  2155  ;  use 
of,  2154,  2I55- 

nam  quis,  692. 

nanciscor,  prin.  parts  of,  980. 

nascor,  prin.  parts  of,  980 ;  with  abl., 
1312  ;  with  prep,  and  abl.,  1312 ;  con- 
structions of  natus  in  expressions  of 
age,  1329  ;  natus  used  actively,  1364. 

natu  maximus,  superl.  of  senex,  353. 

natu    minimus,  superl.  of  iuvenis, 

353- 

nauci,  as  gen.  of  value,  1272. 

navis,  decl.  of,  519,  551,  555. 

navus,  form  of,  169,  2. 

ne,  with  subjv.,  1447;  ne  .  .  .  quidem, 
1447 ;  non  modo  (non  solum)  .  .  . 
sed  ne  .  .  .  quidem,  1682  ;  ne  .  .  . 
quidem  after  a  neg.,  1661 ;  with 
wishes,  1540;  with  subjv.  in  exhorta- 
tions, 1547;  with  subjv.  questions, 
1563;  with  imper.,  1447,  1581,  1586; 
with  coordinated  subjv.,  1706;  in  pur- 
pose clauses,  1947  ;  with  expressions  of 
fear,  1958;  ut  ne,  1947;  ne  non, 
1957;  with  dum  and  subjv.,  2003; 
with  subjv.,  following  supine  in  -um, 
2272;  followed  by  quis,  qui,  indef., 
2388 ;  see  ut. 


-ne  (-n),  enclitic  and  interrogative,  93, 
170,2;  tutine,  650;  hicine,  &c.,  663; 
illicine,  &c.,  670;  answer  expected 
with,  1503,  1504;  position  of,  1505; 
numne,  1307;  anne,  1503,  1508;  in 
first  half  of  alternative  question,  1517, 
1519;  necne,  1520,1778;  utrum  .  .  . 
ne  .  .  .  an,  1522;  utrumne,  1522; 
-ne  .  .  .  -ne,  1524;  with  quis,  uter, 
quantus,  1529;  with  subjv.  questions, 
1567  ;  with  ut,  utl,  in  questions,  1569  ; 
in  indirect  questions,  1775  ;  -ne  .  .  . 
-ne  in  indirect  questions,  1776 ;  utrum 
.  .  .  -ne  .  .  .  an,  utrumne  ...  an 
in  indirect  questions,  1779;  m  second 
member  of  indirect  alternative  question, 
1780 ;  appended  to  infin.  of  exclamation, 
2216;  quantity,  2433. 

nec,  and  not,  but  not,  1445 ;  nee  .  .  . 
nec  connecting  substs.  with  sing,  or 
plur.  verb,  1070  ;  in  sense  of  non,  1446 ; 
necne,  1520,  1778 ;  with  wishes,  1540; 
for  ne  .  .  .  quidem,  1658 ;  nec  .  .  . 
quidem,  1658 ;  in  purpose  clauses, 
1947  ;  quantity,  2433 ;  see  neque. 

necdum,  1446. 

necessarius,  constructions  with,  1201. 

necesse  est,  implying  non-occurrent 
action,  1496;  coordinated,  1709;  with 
infin.,  2211. 

neco,  forms  of,  993. 

nec  opinans,  1446. 

necto,  pres.  stem  of,  835 ;  forms  of,  960. 

necubi,  quantity,  129;  form  of,  146,  709. 

nedum,  with  subjv.,  1962. 

nefas,  defective,  430 ;  gender  of,  578; 
with  supine  jn  -u,  2274 ;  nefas  est 
with  infin.,  2211. 

neglego,  perf.  of,  823  ;  prin.  parts  of, 

953- 

neg5,  translation  of,  1445;  use<^  person, 
ally  in  pass.,  2178. 

negotium  do,  with  purpose  clause,  1950. 

negotium  est,  with  infin.,  2211. 

nem5,  form  of,  118,  150;  decl.  of,  430, 
485;  forms  of  nullus  used  for,  485; 
translation  of,  1445;  with  non,  1452; 
with  subjv.  in  exhortations,  1547  ;  with 
imper.,  1586;  after  et,  atque,  -que, 
1659;  nemo  est  qui,  1822$  utnemo, 
nemo  ut,  1947;  nemo  quisquam, 
2402;  nemo  for  non  quisquam, 
and  nemo  umquam  for  numquam 
quisquam,  2403. 

nempe,  first  syllable  of,  shortened,  2469. 

neo,  pres.  stem  of,  837 ;  form  neunt, 
837;  prin.  parts  of,  1001. 


566 


Index  of  Latin  Words. 


nequam,  comparison  of,  353  ;  indeclin- 
able, 431 ;  as  adj.,  431. 

neque,  with  imper.,  1581;  introducing 
parenthesis,  1642;  as  copulative  conj., 
1644,  T657>  2141-2144;  neque  .  .  . 
neque,  1657;  preferred  to  et  non, 
1659;  nee  .  .  .  n5n,  1660;  neque 
.  .  .  baud,  1660;  after  a  neg.,  1661; 
neque  .  .  .  et,  et  .  .  .  neque,  1665; 
neque  .  .  .  -que,  1665;  neque  .  .  . 
ac,  1665;  in  purpose  clauses,  1947;  see 
nee. 

nequeo,  conjug.  of,  768;  form  of  ne- 
quit,  828;  pass,  forms  of,  768,  1484; 
prin.  parts  of,  922;  translation  of,  1445. 

nesciS,  formation  of,  396;  translation  of, 
1445;  ^h  nisi,  2020;  with  infin., 
2169;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2175;  with 

0  shortened,  2443;  nescio  an,  1782; 
nescio  quis,  &c.,  1788, 1789;  nescio 
quomodo,  as  adv.,   712,  1788,  1789; 
nescio  quo  pacto,  as  adv.,  712, 1788, 
1789. 

neu,  1674;  see  neve. 

neuter,  form  of,  120;  gen.  sing,  of,  127, 

6;    618-620,  657,  694;    decl.  of,   618- 

620,  694 ;  translation  of,   1445 ;  use  of 

sing,  and  plur.,  2403. 
neve,  form  of,  1674;  with  imper.,  1581, 

1586;  in  purpose  clauses,  1947. 
nex,  gender  of,  581. 
ni,  2020;  with  mirum,  2068. 
nigresc5,  inceptive  verb,  prin.  parts  of, 

S76. 
il,  form  of,  144,  150,  455;  used  ad- 
verbially, 1144;  with  partitive  gen., 
1248;  translation  of,  1445;  with  non, 
1452;  for  nemo,  1462;  nihil  minus 
in  answers,  1513;  with  subjv.  in  exhor- 
tations, 1547;  after  et,  atque,  -que, 
1659;  nihil  est  quod,  1822,  1841; 
nihil  habeo  quod,  1822;  ut  nihil, 
nihil  ut,  1947,  nihil  quicquam, 
2402;  used  for  non  quicquam,  2403; 
nihil  abest,  with  quin,  1986;  nihil 
aliud  quam,  1895;  nihili,  as  gen. 
of  value,  1272;  nihilo,  as  abl.  of 
value,  1391;  nihilo  minus,  1676, 
1686;  cum  nihilominus,  1868;  ni- 
hilo minus  introducing  adversative 
sentence,  2151;  nihilum,  form  of, 
1150,  455;  nil,  form  of,  151,  455;  with 

1  in  second  syllable,  2448. 
nimio,  with  compar.,  1459. 
nimis,  with  partitive  gen.,  1248. 
nimium,  with  partitive  gen.,  1248. 


nisi,  introducing  subst.  with  which  verb 
agrees,  1073;  with  abl.  abs.,  1374;  nisi 
quod,  1848;  nisi  quia,  1848;  nisi  si, 
2020 ;  in  adversative  sense,  after  nescio, 
with  tamen,  2020;  as  neg.  of  si,  2016, 
2020;  nisi  forte,  vero,  2020;  co- 
ordinating, 2153;  nisi  forte  with  infin. 
in.  ind.  disc.,  2317;  followed  by  quis, 
qui,  indef.,  2388;  with  short  final 
vowel,  2445. 

niteo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

nitor,  prin.  parts  of,  983;  with  abl.,  1349 ; 
with  baud,  1449;  with  purpose  clause, 
1951 ;  with  infin.,  1953,  2I^9- 

nix,  gender  and  decl.  of,  494,  500;  use  of 
plur.  of,  1 1 08. 

n5,  prin.  parts  of,  991. 

nobilis,  comparison  of,  359. 

noceo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

noctu,  533,  703. 

noenu,  form  of,  99,  699,  1444,  2444;  use 
of.  1444. 

noenum,  form  of,  99,  455,  699,  1444; 
use  of,  1444. 

nolo,  form  of,  775,  396;  conjug.  of,  772, 
775-777;  form  of  n51im,  &c.,  841; 
imper.  of,  844  ;  prin.  parts  of,  922 ;  trans- 
lation of,  1445;  use  of  nolim,  nolo, 
1555;  use  of  nSllem,  1560;  use  of 
noli,  nolite,  1583,  1584;  nolim  with 
subjv.,  1585;  coordination  of  forms  of, 
1707;  with  infin.,  2169;  with  ace.  and 
infin.,  2189,  2190,  2228;  with  perf.  act. 
infin.,  in  prohibitions,  2224 ;  with  perf. 
pass,  infin.,  2229. 

nomen,  decl.  of,  481;  mini,  est  n5- 
men,  case  with,  1213;  nomen  do, 
indp,  &c.,  case  with,  1214;  gen.  of 
definition  with,  1256;  gen.  of  definition 
with  nomine,  1257;  abl.  of,  with 
judicial  verbs,  1280;  nomine  resem- 
bling prep.,  1406. 

nomus,  892. 

non,  formation,  99,  455,  699,  1444;  com- 
mon use  of,  1443,  J494?  non,  nemo, 
&c.,  1452;  nemo  non,  &c.,  1452; 
non  .  .  .  n5n,  1452;  in  questions, 
1502;  nonne  .  .  .  non,  1506;  an 
non,  1508,  1519;  with  and  without 
particles  in  answers,  1513;  with  wishes, 
1540;  with  subjv.  in  exhortations,  1547  ; 
with  subjv.  of  action  conceivable,  1554; 
with  subjv.  questions,  1563,  1566;  with 
imper.,  1582;  with  fut.  expressing  pro- 
hibition, 1624;  after  et,  atque  (ac), 


-que,  1659;  ut  non,  1947;  ne  n5n, 
1957;  with  dum  and  subjv.,  2003;  s* 


567 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


non,  2020  ;  non  aliter,  correlative  of 


*937> 


quam,    1895  ; 


*9 

non  dubito,  constructions  with,  1986, 
1987;  nondum  .  .  .  cum,  1869; 
cum  .  .  .  nondum,  1868  ;  non 
magis  .  .  .  quam,  1889  ;  non  mi- 
nus .  .  .  quam,  1889;  non  modo, 
after  a  neg.,  1661  ;  n5n  modo,  fol- 
lowed by  sed  etiam,  &c.,  1680;  non 
modo,  meaning  non  dicam,  1681  ; 
non  modo,  followed  by  ne  .  .  . 
quidem,  vix,  1682  ;  non  multum 
abest,  with  quin,  1986;  non  quod, 
non  quo,  &c.,  1855,  1989  ;  non  secus, 
correlative  of  ut,  1937;  non  secus, 
correlative  of  quasi,  tamquam  si, 
&c..  2118;  non  solum,  followed  by 
sed  etiam,  &c.,  1680  ;  non  solum, 
followed  by  ne  .  .  .  quidem,  vix, 
1682  ;  non  tantum,  1680. 

ndnne,  answer  expected  with,  1503, 
1506;  nonne  .  .  .  non,  1506;  in  in- 
direct questions,  1775. 

nonnihil5,  as  abl.  of  price,  1391. 

non  nulli  sunt  qui,  1822. 

nos,  decl.  of,  644-651;  used  for  ego, 
1074;  see  ego. 

nosco,  form  of,  169  ;  prin.  parts  of,  965  ; 
compounds  of,  965. 

noster,  decl.  of,  652  ;  used  for  meus, 
1074  ;  nostra  with  refert,  interest, 
1277;  represented  by  suus  in  ind. 
disc.,  2325  ;  used  instead  of  gen.,  1234, 
1262. 

nostras,  accent  of,  88. 

n5tesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

novus,  comparison  of,  358. 

nox,  decl.  of,  533;  stems  of,  569;  adv., 

noxms,  with  gen.,  1264. 

nubo,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

nudiustertius,  form  of,  712. 

nudo,  constructions  with,  1303,  1304. 

nudus,  with  gen.,  1263  ;  with  abl.,  1306  ; 
with  prep.,  1306. 

nullus,  form  of,  119;  forms  of,  used  for 
nemo,  485  ;  gen.  sing,  of,  127,  6  ;  618- 
620;  decl.  of,  618-620;  translation  of, 
1445;  for  non  or  ne,  1448;  with  non, 
1452;  ut  nullus,  nullus  ut,  1947; 


nulla  causa  est  quin, 
for  non  ullus,  2403. 


983  ;  used 


num,  an  ace.,  1156;  answer  expected 


with,     1503,    1507 ;    numne, 
numquid,    1507;   num 


1507 
num, 


1524;  in  indirect  questions,  1775  ;  fol- 


lowed by  quis,  qui,  indef .,  2388. 


Numidia,  in  loc.,  1336. 

nummus,  gen.  plur.  of,  462. 

numquam,  translation  of,  1445  >  with 
non,  1452;  with  subjv.  in  exhortations, 
1547 ;  with  subjv.  of  action  conceivable, 
I556. 

nunc,  an  ace.,  1156. 

nuntio,  form  of,  100;  with  ut,  1950; 
with  ace.  and  infin.,  2175  »  used  person- 
ally in  pass.,  2178;  nuntiatur,  im- 
personally, 2181. 

-nuo,  defective,  905;  prin.  parts  of,  947. 

nuper,  comparison  of,  364;  form  of, 
in,  «. 

nusquam,  with  partitive  gen.,  1253; 
translation  of,  1445. 

O,  the  vowel,  pronunciation  of,  33,  38-41, 
43-45?  final,  quantity  of,  2437,  2442, 
2443-_ 

O  and  p,  weakening  of,  105,  107,  c,  452, 
827;  in  contraction,  118,  3;  combina- 
tion into  diphthongs,  120;  analogical 
lengthening,  123;  iambic  shortening, 
129,  130;  qualitative  changes  of,  140, 
141,  143;  qualitative  gradation,  145. 

5,  with  nom.  of  exclamation,  1117;  with 
voc.  nom.  and  voc.,  1123;  with  ace., 
1149;  6  utinam,  5  si,  with  wishes, 
1541,  1546. 

ob,  prep.  1410;  form  of,i64,  2;  compounds 
of,  with  ace.,  1137;  compounds  of,  with 
dat.,  1188,  1189,  1194;  compounds  of, 
other  constructions  with,  1190,  1191, 
1196;  expressing  cause,  &c.,  1317;  with 
gerundive  construction  or  gerund,  2253. 

obcumbS,  prin.  parts  of,  974. 

obeo,  construction  with,  1191. 

obice,  decl.  of,  473  :  gender  of,  581. 

obliviscor,  prin.  parts  of,  980;  cases 
with,  1287,  1288. 

obmutesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

obsideo,  prin.  parts  of,  997. 

obsisto,  with  ne,  1960, 1977;  with  quo- 
minus.  1960,  1977. 

obsolesco,  prin.  parts  of,  968. 

obsto,  with  ne,  1960,  1977;  with  quo- 
minus,  1960,  1977. 

obsurdesc5,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

obtund5  (op-),  forms  of,  931. 

obviam,  verbs  combined  with,  followed 
by  dat.,  1187. 

occalesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

occido,  prin.  parts  of,  930. 

occino,  perf.  of,  823  ;  forms  of,  972. 


OCCU15,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 
568 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


ocior,  comparison  of,  357. 
ocius,  comparison  of,  363. 
octo,  with  shortened  final  o,  2442. 


6di,    defective,   812;    synopsis    of,    812; 

forms  osus  sum,  fui,  813;  no  pass., 

813;  form  5sus,  814;  form  osurus, 

814;  meaning  of,  1607. 
oe,  diphthong,  pronunciation  of,  47,  49 ; 

changes  of,  99. 
officio,  with  ne,  1960;  with  quomi- 

nus,  1960. 
6he,  quantity  of  o  in,  127,  8;  quantity  of 

e  in,  2440. 
oi,  diphthong,  pronunciation  of,  49,  50 ; 

changes  of,  99. 
olesster,  gender  of,  408. 
oleo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 
olus,  ollus,  olle,  667,  668. 
omitte,  with  infin.,  for  noil,  1584. 
omnino,  use  of,  2150. 
omnis,  gen.    in    appos.    with    possess. 

pron.,   1235;    omnium  with  gen.  of 

pron.,     1234;    used    parti  lively,    1244; 

with  loc.   abl.,   1346;    first   syllable  of, 

shortened,  2469. 
onustus,   with  gen.,   1387;    with  abl., 

i387- 

Opera,  use  of  abl.  of,  1378. 

operio,  prin.  parts  of,  1019. 

opinione,  with  compar.,  1330. 

opis,  decl.  of,  430,  480. 

Oportet,  forms  of,  816;  implying  non- 
occurrent  action,  1496;  coordinated, 
1709;  with  subj.  in  fin.,  2209;  in  past 
tense  with  pres.  infin.,  translation  of, 
2222;  with  perf.  pass,  and  act.  infin., 
2230. 

opperior,  prin.  parts  of,  1020. 

Oppidum,  pred.  in  agreement  with,  1072 ; 
ace.  of,  with  in  or  ad,  1159;  pppido 
and  in  oppido,  1333;  oppidum,  463. 

oppingo,  prin.  parts  of,  938 ;  perf.  of, 
863. 

oppugno,  construction  with,  1191. 

Ops,  decl.  of,  480. 

opstipesco  (ob-),  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

optabile  est,  implying  non-occurrent 
action,  1496. 

optabilius  est,  implying  non-occurrent 
action,  1496. 

optime,  comparison  of,  363. 

optimus,  form  of,  28,  103  ;  formation 
of.  351  ;  comparison  of,  355 ;  optimum 
est  implying  non-occurrent  action,  1496 ; 
optumum  est  coordinated,  1709. 

Opt5,  coordination  of  forms  of,  1707  ;  with 
ut,  1950;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2190. 


opus  est,  with  abl.,  1379;  with  partic., 

1382  ;   with  subj.  nom.  or   ace.,   1383 ; 

with    gen.,     1383;    coordinated,    1709; 

with   supine  in   -u,  2276;   with  subst. 

and  partic.,  2286. 

orbis,  gender  of,  579;  loc.  orbi,  1337. 
orbp,  constructions  with,  1303,  1304. 
ordior,  prin.  parts  of,  1022. 
5rd6,  gender  of,  574. 
orior,  forms  of,  791,   799;  gerundive  of, 

899;    prin.  parts   of,   981;    ortus  and 

oriundus    with    abl.,    1312 ;    ortus 

used  actively,  1364. 
5r6,  coordinated,    1708;    with  ut,   1950; 

with  ace.  and  infin.,  2194. 
OS.  decl.  of,  492;  gender  of,  576;  plur. 

ossua,  586;  quantity,  2433. 
6s,  decl.  of,  430,  491  ;  gender  of,  576. 
ostendo,  forms  of,  924. 
OU,  diphthong,  pronunciation  of,  47,  50; 

changes  of,  100. 

p,  changed  to  b,  164,  2  ;  development  of, 
between  m  and  s,  m  and  t,  167  ;  as- 
similation of,  164,  3  and  4;  166,  2. 

paciscor,  prin.  parts  of,  980  ;  com- 
pounds of,  980;  pactus  used  pas- 
sively, 1364. 

paene  ut,  1947. 

paenitet,  forms  of,  81^,  817;  impersonal, 
1034  ;  construction  with,  1283;  used  per- 
sonally, 1284;  with  subj.  infin.,  2209; 
with  perf.  infin..  2231. 

palam,  as  adv.  and  prep.,  1421. 

palled,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

pallesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

palus,  decl.  of,  475  ;  gender  of,  584. 

pando,  prin.  parts  of,  950;  compounds 
of,  950. 

pango,  perf.  of,  858,  863;  forms  of,  925. 

papaver,  gender  of,  573. 

par,  decl.  of,  537,  544,  561 ;  agreeing  with 
abl.  of  quality,  1240;  par  est  implying 
non-occurrent  action,  1496;  with  infin., 
221 1 ;  with  gerundive  construction,  2254; 
with  long  vowel,  2448. 

parco,  defective,  905;  forms  of,  930; 
compounds  of,  930 ;  parce  with  infin. 
for  noli,  1584,  2170. 

parcus,  with  gen.,  1264. 

pareo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

paricidas,  nom.,  436  ;  see  133. 

paries,  quantity  of  e  in,  2456. 

pario,  forms  of,  791 ;  pres.  stem  of,  836; 
fut.  partic.  of,  905  ;  prin.  parts  of,  928. 

pariter,  followed  by  et,  1653;  correlative 
of  ut,  1937. 


569 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


pars,  decl.  of,  530,  533;  use  of  abl.  of, 
1345;  pars  .  . .  pars,  1687. 

particeps,  decl.  of,  480,  624, 625. 

partim,  ace.  as  adv.,  549,  699;  with  par- 
titive gen.,  1248. 

partior,  conjug.  of,  798;  prin.  parts  of, 
1 02 1 ;  partitus  used  passively,  1364. 

partus,  decl.  of,  592. 

parum,  with  partitive  gen.,  1248;  inti- 
mating negation,  1451. 

parve,  comparison  of,  363. 

parvus,  comparison  of,  355;  parvi  as 
gen.  of  value,  1271,  1279;  parvo  as 
abl.  of  value,  1391. 

pasco,  prin.  parts  of,  965;  used  reflex- 
ively,  1482. 

passus,  gen.  plur.  passum,  591. 

pate5,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

patior,  pres.  stem  of,  836 ;  prin.  parts  of, 
986;  compounds  of,  986;  with  ace.  and 
infin.,  2198  ;  non  patior  with  purpose 
clause,  1950. 

pauci  sunt  qui,  1822. 

paulum,  with  partitive  gen.,  1248 ;  pau- 
lum  abest,  with  quin,  1986. 

pauper,  comparison  of,  344 ;  decl.  of, 
489,  624,  625  ;  with  gen.,  1264. 

pavesco,  prin.  parts  of,  939. 

pectS,  pres.  stem  of,  832,  835;  prin. 
parts  of,  960. 

peior,  comparison  of,  355. 

peius,  comparison  of,  363. 

pelagus,  decl.  of,  493,  508. 

pellicid,  prin.  parts  of,  956. 

pello,  prin.  parts  of,  932  ;  compounds  of, 
932;  constructions  with,  1303,  1304. 

pelvis,  decl.  of,  550. 

pende5,  perf.  of,  859;  prin.  parts  of,  995. 

p end5,  prin.  parts  of,  930;  with  gen.  of 
value,  1271. 

penes,  prep.,  1410 ;  position  of,  1434 ; 
quantity  of  second  e  in,  2456. 

penus,  gender  of,  588. 

per,  prep.,  1410;  after  its  case,  178; 
compounds  of,  with  ace.,  1137;  with 
ace.  of  duration  of  time,  1151  ;  express- 
ing cause,  &c.,  1317  ;  denoting  place, 
1346;  expressing  manner,  1361;  ex- 
pressing instrument,  1378;  position  of, 
1437;  quantity,  2433. 

perago,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 

percellS,  perf.  of,  861,  2435;  Prin-  P^5 
°f,  935- 

percitus,  919. 

perd5,  forms  of,  757;  forms  of,  supplied 
by  pereo,  757,  1471 ;  with  infin.  as 
obj.,  2206. 


peregri,  1340. 

peremo,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 

pereo,  supplying  forms  of  perdo, 
757,  1471;  followed  by  ab  and  abl., 
1318. 

perfrico,  prin.  parts  of,  993. 

perfruor,  with  abl.,  1379 ;  with  ace.,  1380. 

pergo,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

perinde,  pronunciation  of,  93  ;  correla- 
tive of  ut,  1937;  correlative  of  quasi, 
tamquam  si,  &c.,  2118;  perinde 
.  .  .  quam,  1890. 

peritus,  with  gen.,  1263;  with  iure, 
1268,  1385;  with  infin.,  2166;  with  gen. 
of  gerundive  construction  or  gerund, 
2258. 

perlego,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 

permagni,  as  gen.  of  estimation,  1279. 

permagno,  as  abl.  of  value,  1273,  1390, 

I39I- 

permitto,  coordinated,  1710;  with  pur- 
pose clause,  1950,  2202;  with  ace.  and 
infin.,  2202;  with  gerundive  construc- 
tion, 2250. 

permulsus,  1000. 

pernicies,  decl.  of,  606. 

perosus,  814;  with  act.  meaning,  907. 

perSsus  sum,  813. 

perpes,  decl.  of,  533. 

perpetior,  pnn.  parts  of,  986. 

perplaced,  prin.  parts  of,  1004. 

persuaded,  with  purpose  clause,  1950? 
with  ace.  and  infin.,  1954,  2195. 

pertundo,  forms  of,  931. 

pervenio,  forms  of,  822. 

pes,  compounds  of,  decl.  of,  532,  636. 

pessime,  comparison  of,  363. 

pessimus,  formation  of,  351 ;  compari- 
son of,  355. 

pessumdo,  conjug.  of,  757. 

peto,  forms  of,  895,  967;  quantity  in 
petiit,  2450 ;  with  subjv.  coordinated, 
1708  ;  with  gerundive  construction,  2250. 

ph,  sound  of,  19  ;  use  of,  Jz. 

piget,  forms  of,  815,  817;  impersonal, 
1034;  construction  with,  1283;  used 
personally,  1284. 

pili,  as  gen.  of  value,  1272. 

pingo,  prin.  parts  of,  954. 

piper,  gender  of,  573. 

pis5,  pinso,  forms  of,  819,  972. 

placeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1004;  compounds 
of,  1004;  si  placuerit,  1632;  coordi- 
nation of  forms  of,  1707;  placet  with 
purpose  clause,  1950;  si  placet,  2113; 
placet  with  subj.  infin.,  2209;  placl- 
tus,  with  act.  meaning,  907. 


570 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


plango,  prin.  parts  of,  954. 

plaudS,  prin.  parts  of,  958 ;  compounds 

of,  958. 
plebs  (pleps,  plebes),  pronunciation 

of,  54  ;  decl.  of,  524,  534,  603. 
plenus,  with  gen.,  1263;  with  abl.,  1268, 

1387. 

-pie 5,  prin.  parts  of,  1001. 
plerique,  use  of.  1244;   with  abl.  abs., 

1366. 

plerumque,  with  partitive  gen.,  1248. 
-plico,  prin.  parts  of,  993;    compounds 

of,  993. 
pluit,  defective,  815  ;  form  pluvit,  823; 

prin.  parts  of,  947;  impersonal,  1034. 
plurimum,  comparison  of,  363. 
plurimus,  formation  0^352;  comparison 

of,    355  ;    plurimum    with    partitive 

gen.,  1248;  plurimi  as  gen.  of  value, 

1271 ;  quam  plurim5  as  abl.  of  value, 

1391- 
plus,  adj.  and  adv.,  comparison  of,  355, 

363;  defective,  355;  decl.  of,  623  ;  with 

partitive  gen.,  1248  ;  pluris  as  gen.  of 

value,  1271, 1274, 1279;  without  quam, 

1328;   with  quam,   1328;    with   abl., 

1328;    plures  with  subjv.   of    action 

conceivable,  1556. 
pol,  quantity,  2433. 
polleo,  defective,  809. 
polliceor,   with  ace.  and   infin.,  2186; 

with  fut.  infin.,  2235  ;  with  pres.  infin., 

2236. 
pone,    not   compounded,    1406;    prep., 

1410. 
pono,    form    of,    in;    forms    of,    972; 

nomen  pono,  case  with,  1214;  with 

in  and  abl.,  1424. 
populo,  populor,  800,  1488. 
por-,  inseparable  prep.,  392,  1409. 
porrigo,  porgo,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 
porticus,  gender  of,  588. 
pos,  prep.  1410. 
posco,  form  of,  170,  10;  pres.  stem  of, 

834;  perf.  of  compounds  of,  860;  prin. 

parts  of,  927;  with  double  ace.,  1169; 

with  ab  and  abl.,  1170;  constructions 

with  pass,  of,  1171. 
possum,  conjug.  of,  744,  751;  form  of, 

752,  753  ;  potis  sum,  &c.,  for,    752  ; 

defective,  753  ;   old  and  rare  forms  of, 

753;   pass,  forms  of,  753,  1484;    prin. 

Eirts    of,    922 ;    potens,    922 ;    with 
aud,  1449 ;  with  super!.,  1466,  1892  ; 
implying    non-occurrent    action,    1496 ; 
iff  subjv.,  1498 ;    si  potuero,    1632 ; 
quod    (quantum)  .  .  .  possum, 


1830  ;  non  po_ssum  qum  (ut  non), 
&c.,  1985  ;  non  possum  in  condi- 
tions, 2074 ;  in  past  tense  with  pres. 
infin.,  translation  of,  2222 ;  with  perf. 
infin.,  2223  ;  use  of  pres.  infin.  of,  for 
fut.,  2236  ;  in  perf.  infin.  in  conditional 
apodoses  in  ind.  disc.,  2333. 

post,  forms  of,  1410 ;  compounds  of, 
with  dat.,  1195  ;  in  expressions  of  time, 
1394-1397  ;  followed  by  quam  or  cum 
in  expressions  of  time,  1397 ;  with  fut. 
perf.,  1630;  with  subst.  and  partic., 
2285,  2286. 

poste,  prep.,  1410. 

postea,  with  partitive  gen.,  1253. 

postera,  defective,  356. 

posteri,  use  of,  347. 

posterior,  formation  of,  348  ;  compari- 
son of,  356. 

posthabeS,  prin.  parts  of,  1004. 

postid,  with  partitive  gen.,  1253  ;  prep., 
1410. 

postidea,  with  partitive  gen.,  125^. 

postquam,  postea  quam,  posquam, 
with  infin.,  1539,  1924;  with  indie,  and 
subjv.,  1923-1931. 

pdstremus,  formation  of,  352  ;  compar- 
ison of,  356;  with  partitive  meaning, 
1249. 

postridie,  as  adv.,  1341 ;  with  gen., 
1413,  1232;  with  ace.,  1406,  1413; 
postridie  quam,  1922. 

postulS,  with  subjv.  coordinated,  1708; 
with  ut,  1950 ;  used  personally  in 
pass.,  2178;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  1953, 
2194. 

postumus,  formation  of,  351 ;  compari- 
son of,  356. 

pote,  forms  of,  used  with  or  without 
sum,  752 ;  ut  pote  qui,  1827 ;  ut 
pote  cum,  1879. 

potior,  forms  of,  791,  799;  prin.  parts 
of,  981;  with  gen.,  1292;  with  abl., 
1379;  with  ace.,  n8o;  use  of  gerundive 
of,  2244. 

potis,  with  or  without  sum,  752. 

potius,  after  vel,  1670;  with  sive, 
1672;  potius  quam,  1897. 

potus,  with  act.  meaning,  907. 

prae,  prep.,  1417  ;  comparison  of,  357  ; 
compounds  of,  with  ace.,  1137;  com- 
pounds of,  with  dat.,  1188,  1189,  1194  ; 
compounds  of,  other  constructions  with, 
1190,  1191,  1196;  with  abl.  proper, 
1297;  expressing  cause,  &c.,  13*7; 
prae  quam,  1895  >  prae  quam 
quod,  1895. 


571 


Index  of  Latin    Words. 


praebeo,  form  of,  118,  2;  125;  forms 
of,  1004. 

praecino,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 

praecipio,  with  subjv.  coordinated,  1708 ; 
with  purpose  clause,  1950;  with  ace. 
and  infin.,  2194. 

praecox,  decl.  of,  531. 

praehibeo,  with  short  diphthong,  125  ; 
form  of,  1004. 

praelego,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 

praemordeo,  forms  of,  995. 

Praeneste,  decl.  of,  557. 

praesagus,  with  gen.,  1264. 

praescius,  with  gen.,  1264. 

praesideo,  prin.  parts  of,  997. 

praesidium,  dat.  of,  with  verb,  1220, 
1223. 

praesto,  prin.  parts  of,  989 ;  with  purpose 
clause,  1951 ;  praestat  with  subj. 
infin.,  2209. 

praesto,  adv.,  verbs  combined  with,  fol- 
lowed by  dat.,  1187. 

praestolor,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  1184. 

praeter,  form  of,  710 ;  prep.,  1410 ; 
compounds  of,  with  ace.,  1137;  praeter 
quam  quod,  1848,  1895  >  praeter 
quam,  1895  ;  with  infin.  as  obj.,  2205. 

praetermittS,  with  qum,  1986. 

praeterquam,  introducing  subst.  with 
which  verb  agrees,  1073. 

praeut,  1945. 

prande5,  perf.  of,  866  ;  prin.  parts  of, 
998;  pransus,  with  act.  meaning,  907. 

precor,  with  subjv.  coordinated,  1708; 
with  purpose  clause,  1950 ;  with  ace. 
and  infin.,  2195. 

prehendS,  125  ;  orpraehendo,  pren- 
do,  950. 

premo,  prin.  parts  of,  958  ;  compounds 
of,  958. 

pridie,  as  adv.,  1341 ;  with  ace..  1406, 
1413;  with  gen.,  1413,  1232;  pridie 
quam,  1922. 

primum,  362,  701  ;  primum  (prime) 
.  .  .  deinde  .  .  .  turn,  1687 ;  ubf,  ut, 
cum  primum,  1923-1934. 

primus,  formation  of,  352 ;  compari- 
son of,  357 ;  with  partitive  meaning, 
1249. 

prior,  comparison  of,  357. 

prius  quam,  for  potius  quam,  1897. 

priusquam,  with  fut.  perf.,  1626 ;  with 
pres.  indie,  of  fut.  action,  1593  ;  general 
statement  of  use,  1911  ;  in  general 
statements,  1912-1914;  in  particular 
statements,  1915-1921. 

privo,  constructions  with,  1303,  1304. 


pro,  prep.,  1417  ;  with  abl.  proper,  1297; 
following  duco,  habeo,  puto,  1168; 
expressions  with,  for  dat.  of  tendency 
or  result,  1221  ;  quam  pr5,  1461  ; 
pro  eo  introductory  to  sentence  with 
quod,  1847  ;  pro  quam,  1895 ;  with 
gerundive  construction  or  gerund,  2267. 

pro,  interjection,  with  nom.  of  exclama- 
tion, 1117;  with  voc.  nom.  and  voc., 
1123  ;  with  ace.,  1150. 

procul,  as  adv.  and  prep.,  1421. 

procumbo,  prin.  parts  of,  974. 

procurro,  perf.  of,  860. 

prodigus,  with  gen.,  1264. 

prodmunt,  833. 

proficiscor,  prin.  parts  of,  980 ;  pro- 
fectus,  used  actively,  1364. 

profusus,  with  gen.,  1263. 

prognatus,  with  abl.,  1312. 

progredior,  forms  of,  791,  799. 

pronibeo,  forms  prohibessis,  &c., 
887  ;  contracted,  1004  ;  case  construc- 
tions with,  1303,  1304;  with  ne,  1960; 
with  qupminus,  1960,  1977;  with 
ace.  and  infin.,  2203. 

proin,  introducing  command,  2157. 

proinde,  disyllabic  in  verse,  93,  7;  cor- 
relative of  quasi,  tamquam  si,  &c., 
2118;  introducing  command,  2157. 

promittS,  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2175; 
with  fut.  infin.  2235. 

promo,  perf.  of,  823;  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

prope,  prep.,  1410;  comparison  0^357; 
with  ace.,  1201  ;  prope  Ut,  1947. 

propendeo,  prin.  parts  of,  995. 

propero,  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2190. 

propior,  comparison  of,  357;  with  ace., 

1201. 

propius,  prep.,  1410;  with  ace.,  1201. 

proprius,  constructions  with,  1202,  1238. 

propter,  prep.,  1410  ;  expressing  cause, 
&c.,  1317;  not  compounded,  1406; 
position  of,  1434  ;  with  gerundive  con- 
struction or  gerund,  2253 ;  with  subst. 
and  partic.,  2286. 

propterea,  as  coordinating  word,  1691 ; 
propterea  .  .  .  quod,  1854;  prop- 
terea .  .  .  quia,  1854,  1858;  before 
ut,  ne,  1961. 

prout.  1942. 

providus,  with  gen.,  1263. 

proxime,  prep.  1410;  with  ace.,  1201.  _ 

proximus,  formation  of,  351 ;  compari- 
son of,  357;  with  ace.,  1201. 

prudens,  form  of,  in  ;  with  gen.,  1263. 

-pte_,  enclitic,  655. 

pubes,  decl.  of,  491,  523,  624,  625. 


572 


Index  of  Latin    Words. 


pudet,  forms  of,  815,  817;  impersonal,  ] 
1034;  construction  with,  1283;  used  j 
personally,  1284;  with  subj.  infin.,  2209. 

pugno,  with  dat.,  1186. 

pung5,  perf.  of,  823,  858;  prin.  parts  of, 
925. 

puppis,  decl.  of,  519,  550,  555. 

putesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

put5,  with  pr5  and  abl.,  1168;  with  gen. 
of  value,  1271;  coordinated,  1696;  used 
personally  in  pass.,  2 1 78;  putari,  subj.  ; 
of,  omitted  with  verbs  of  desire.  2190;  j 
puta,  for  instance,  with   short   final 
vowel,  2438. 

putus,  919. 

q,  written  for  c,  20,  690 ;  followed  by  U, 
27  64  1 77,  see  qu. 

qu,  before  consonants  or  when  final, 
changed  to  c,  158  ;  other  changes,  156; 
170,  3  and  4. 

qua  .  .  .  qua,  1687. 

quaad,  1991. 

quadrans,  decl.  of,  533 ;  gender  of,  580; 
meaning  of,  2427. 

quaere,  prin.  parts  of,  967 ;  prin.  parts  of 
compounds  of,  967  ;  si  quaeris,  2113. 

quaeso,  with  imper.,  1572. 

qualis,  in  questions,  1526;  agreement  of , 
1802 ;  tails  .  .  .  qualis,  1831. 

quam,  form  of,  702  ;  introducing  subst. 
with  which  verb  agrees,  1073;  after  a  corn- 
par.,  1324-1327,  1329;  after  alius  and 
alter,  1323;  after  amplius,  longius, 
plus,  minus,  1328;  in  expressions  of 
time,  1397;  in  comparisons,  1457,  1458; 
quam  pro,  after  compar.,  1461 ;  with 
superl.,  1466,  1892;  in  questions,  1526  ; 
moods  with,  1888  ;  in  compar.  period  of 
equality,  1889;  tarn  .  .  .  quam,  1831, 
1889;  non  minus,  n5n  magis  .  .  . 
quam.  1889 ;  aeque, . . .  quam,  1890 ; 
perinde  .  .  .  quam,  1890  ;  iuxta 
.  .  .  quam,  1890;  tarn  .  .  .  quam 
coordinating  words,  1891 ;  tarn  .  .  . 
quam  qui,  1892;  quam  .  .  .  tarn 
with  double  compar.  or  superl.,  1893; 
m  compar.  period  of  inequality,  1894; 
supra  quam,  1894;  infra  quam, 
1894;  ultra  quam,  1894;  extra 
quam,  1894;  nihil  aliud,  non  aliud 
quam,  1895;  secus  quam,  1895; 
bis  tantS  quam,  1895 ;  prae  quam, 
1895;  contra  quam,  1895;  praeter 
quam  quod,  1895;  super  quam 
quod,  1895;  Insuper  quam,  1895; 
pro  quam,  1895  >  advorsum  quam, 


1895;  magis  quod,  &c.,  .  .  .  quam 
quo,  &c.,  1855;  quam,  quam  ut, 
quam  qui,  with  subjv.  after  compar. 
denoting  disproportion,  1896;  potius, 
citius  (ante,  prius)  quam,  potius 
quam  ut,  1897 ;  with  infin.,  1898 ; 
priusquam,  antequam,  1593,  1626, 
1911-1921;  pridie  quam,  postridie 
quam,  1922;  postquam,  postea 
quam,  posquam,  1923-1931 ;  intra 
.  .  .  quam,  1929 ;  tamdiu  . . .  quam, 
1999;  quam  si,  2117. 

quamdiu,  accent  of,  92  ;  use  of,  1991, 
1994,  1999-2001. 

quamlibet,  use  of,  1907. 

quamquam,  with  abl.  abs.,  1374,  1900; 
as  adv.,  1899;  as  conj.  with  indie., 
subjv.,  adj.,  partic.,  1899-1902;  coordi- 
nating, 2153;  with  infin.  in  ind.  disc., 
2317. 

quamvis,  with  abl.  abs.,  1374;  use  of, 
1903-1907. 

quando,  used  with  accusative  of  ex- 
clamation, 1150;  in  questions,  1526; 
nescio  quando,  1788;  as  indef.  adv., 
2010;  temporal,  2010,  2011;  causal, 
2013 ;  with  quidem,  2013 ;  as  prot.  of 
conditional  period,  2110;  followed  by 
quis,  qui,  indef.,  2388 ;  with  shortened 
o,  2442. 

quandpque,  2012,  2014. 

quants  .  .  .  tanto,  1831,  1973. 

quantum,  introducing  subst.  with  which 
verb  agrees,  1073;  quantum  .  .  . 
tantum,  1831. 

quantus,  neut.  with  partitive  gen., 
1248;  quantum  est  with  gen.,  1259; 
quanti  as  gen.  of  value,  1271,  1274, 
1279;  in  questions,  1326;  with  -ne, 
1529;  agreement  of,  1802;  quantum 
.  .  .  possum,  &c.,  1830,  1892. 

quasi,  with  abl.  abs.,  1374:  in  figurative 
expressions,  1944;  in  conditional  com- 
parisons, 211 7-2120 ;  with  partic.,  nouns, 
and  abridged  expressions,  2121 ;  after  a 
compar.,  2122;  in  actual  comparisons, 
2122;  followed  by  si,  2118;  idem 
quasi,  2373;  with  short  final  vowel, 

2445- 

quatiS,  pres.  stem  of,  836;  prin.  parts 
of,  961;  compounds  of,  961.- 

-que,  enclitic,  93  ;  connecting  substs. 
with  sing,  or  plur.  verb,  1064-1066; 
use  of,  as  copulative  conj,,  1644,  1646, 
1647, 1649-1651,  1655, 1656,  2145,  2146, 
-que  .  .  .  -que,  1650 ;  meaning  tut, 
1655;  -que  non,  &c.,  1659;  ct  .  .  . 


573 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


-que,  1663;  -que  .  .  .  et,  1664; 
-que  .  .  .  atque,  1664;  atque  .  .  . 
-que,  1664;  nequc  .  .  .  -que,  1665; 
quantity,  2433,  25°6;  at  end  of  verse, 
2568. 

quemadmodum,  with  infin.  in  ind. 
disc.,  2317. 

queo,  conjug.  of,  759,  768;  used  with 
neg.,  768  ;  pass,  forms  of,  768,  1484 ; 
form  of  queam,  &c.,  842  ;  perf .  partic. 
of,  918,  2436;  prin.  parts  of,  922. 

queror,  conjug.  of,  798;  prin.  parts  of, 
978  ;  with  ace.,  1139. 

qui,  decl.  of,  681-683;  quot,  659 ;  sterns 
of,  68 1,  687  ;  rel.,  682  ;  interrogative 
adj.,  683;  interrogative  subst.,  685; 
quoius,  quoi,  658,  688  ;  dat.  and  abl. 
plur.  quis,  688 ;  inscriptional  forms  of, 
690;  derivatives  of,  691,  692;  with  cor- 
relatives, 695  ;  neut.  ace.  used  adverb- 
ially, 1144,  1840;  neut.  with  partitive 
gen.,  1248;  quod  est  with  gen.,  1259; 
in  questions,  1526;  use  of,  1792;  rules 
for  agreement  of,  1094-1098, 1801-1811 ; 
agreeing  with  antecedent  implied  in 
possess.,  1807;  id  quod,  1811  ;  quae 
res,  i8ri;  equivalent  to  conditional 
prot.,  1812;  with  indie.,  1813-1815; 
with  subjv.  denoting  purpose,  1816, 
1817;  with  subjv.  of  characteristic  or 
result,  1818-1823;  with  dignus,  in- 
dignus,  idoneus,  agtus,  1819  ;  est 
qui,  nem5  est  qui,  non  habeo 
quod,  &c.,  1822  ;  est  qui,  &c.,  with 
indie.,  1823;  with  subjv.  of  cause  or 
concession,  1824;  qui  tamen,  1825; 
with  indie,  instead  of  causal  subjv., 
1826;  quippe  qui,  1827,  1828;  ut 
qui,  1827,  1828 ;  ut  pote  qui,  1827  ; 

3uod  sciam,  &c.,  1829;  qui  qui- 
em,  1829 ;  quod  attinet  ad,  quod 
.  .  .  possum,  1830 ;  correlatives  of, 
1831;  omitted  in  second  clause,  1832, 
1833 ;  repeated,  1833 ;  place  supplied 
by  is,  &c.,  in  second  clause,  1833;  in- 
troducing main  sentence,  1835,  2131, 
2316;  formulas  quo  fact5,  &c.,  1836; 
preceding  si,  &c.,  1837,  2132;  tarn 
.  .  .  quam  qui,  1892;  quam  qui, 
1896;  prae  quam  quod,  1895 ;  re- 
ferring to  is,  2368 ;  idem  qui,  the 
same  as,  2373;  quis,  qui,  distinguished 
from  uter,  2385 ;  quis,  quid,  dis 
tinguished  from  qui,  quod,  2386;  in- 
def'.,  after  si,  &c.,  686,  2388;  qui 
(plur.)  not  elided  before  short  vowel, 
2487. 


qui,  adv.,  form  and  use  of,  689,  706, 
1972;  in  questions,  1526;  with  wishes, 
1541;  quippe  qui,  1828;  ut  qui, 
1828  ;  with  subjv.,  1976. 

quia,  form  of,  701 ;  nisi  quia,  1848;  use 
of,  1854-1858  ;  with  infin.  in  ind.  disc., 
2317  ;  with  short  final  vowel,  2438. 

quicumque,  decl.  of,  692 ;  tmesis  in, 
692;  quodcumque  est  with  gen., 
1259;  agreement  of,  1802;  with  indie., 
1814;  referring  to  is,  2368. 

quidam,  decl.  of,  692 ;  with  ex  or  de, 
1246  ;  quidam  sunt  qui,  &c.,  1822 ; 
usual  force  of,  2392 ;  used  to  soften 
metaphor  or  expressing  contempt,  2393. 

quidem,  with  ne,  1447,  1661,  1682; 
with  sane  in  answers,  1512;  with  non 
and  minime  in  answers,  1513;  qui 
quidem,  1829;  cum  quidem,  1868; 
with  dum  and  subjv.,  2003;  with 
quando,  2013;  with  si,  2019;  intro- 
ducing concessive  period,  2150  ;  follow- 
ing ille  in  concessions,  2361. 

quies,  decl.  of,  477  ;  gender  of,  572. 

quiesco,  perf.  of,  871 ;  prin.  parts  of, 
968. 

quilibet,  decl.  of,  692  ;  use  of,  2401. 

quin,  form  of,  113,  1980;  in  questions, 
1526,  1531,  1981  ;  with  imper.  or  indie., 
1527;  non  quin,  1855,  1989;  with 
subjv.  in  question,  1982  ;  nulla  causa 
est  quin,  1983;  mirum  quin,  1984; 
with  non  possum,  &c.,  1985  ;  with 
other  verbs  and  expressions,  1986-1990  ; 
quantity  of,  2430. 

quincunx,  decl.  of,  531 ;  meaning  of, 
2427. 

quinquatrus,  gender  of,  588. 

quintus,  form  of,  170,  4  ;  2412. 

quippe,  1690,  2156;  quippe  qui,  1827, 
1828;  quippe  cum,  1879;  first  syl- 
lable shortened,  2469. 

Quiris,  accent  of,  88  ;  decl.  of,  533  ; 
quantity  of  second  i  in,  2452. 

quis,  decl.  of,  684,  686;  quit,  659; 
stems  of,  681,  687;  interrogative  subst., 
684;  interrogative  adj.,  685;  feminine, 
quis,  quae,  684;  quai,  687;  quoius, 
quoi,  &c.,  658,  688;  dat.  and  abl. 
plur.  quis,  688;  nom.  plur.  ques, 
688  ;  inscriptional  forms  of,  690 ;  deri- 
vatives of.  691,  692  ;  with  correlatives, 
695;  adj.  equivalent  to  gen.,  1098; 
rules  for  agreement  of,  1094-1098; 
quid  tib!  with  subst.  in  -tip  and  est, 
1136;  neut.  ace.  used  adverbially,  1144  f 
neut.  with  partitive  gen.,  1248;  abl.  of, 


574 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


with  loci,  1252;  quid  for  quis,  1462; 
quid  est,  quid  dicis,  quid,  quid 
ver5,  &c.,  1500;  in  questions,  1526; 
with  -ne,  1529;  nesciS  quis,  1788, 
1789;  scio  quid  as  indef.,  1788  ;  quis 
est  qui,  1822  ;  quid  est  quod,  &c., 
1841;  quid  quod,  1849;  quis,  qui 
distinguished  from  uter,  238^  ;  quis, 
quid  distinguished  from  qui,  quod, 
2386 ;  indef.,  after  si,  &c.,  686,  2388  ; 
quantity,  2433. 

quisnam,  decl.  of,  692. 

quispiam,  decl.  of,  692;  use  of,  2389. 

quisquam,  decl.  of,  692 ;  with  haud, 
1449;  use  of,  2402,  2403  ;  nemo  quis- 
quam and  nihil  quicquam,  2402. 

quisque,  decl.  of,  692;  with  abl.  abs., 
1366;  with  ut,  when,  1932;  with  ut, 
as,  1939;  with  superl.,  1939;  usual 
force  of,  2394;  in  both  rel.  and  demon- 
strative sentence,  2395  ;  in  rel.  sentence 
alone,  2396;  following  se,  suus,  su- 
perl., or  ordinal,  2397;  equivalent  to 
quicumque,  quisquis,  2398;  cu- 
iusque  generis,  cuiusque  modi, 
2398. 

quisquis,  decl.  of,  692  ;  quidquid  est 
with  gen.,  1259;  with  indie.,  1814;  for 
quisque.  2398. 

qui  vis,  decl.  of,  692;  use  of,  2401. 

qu5,  adv.,  with  ace.  of  exclamation, 
1150;  with  gen.,  1254;  in  questions, 
1526  ;  instead  of  rel.  pron.  with  prep., 
J793  5  QUO  .  .  .  eo,  1831 ;  non  quo, 
npn  eo  quo,  n5n  quo  non,  1855; 
with  indie.,  1973;  with  subjv.,  1974; 
qu5  ne,  1975  ;  followed  by  quis,  qui, 
indef.,  2388. 

quoad,  form  of,  1991 ;  use  of,  meaning 
all  the  time  -while ',  1994,  1999-2001  ; 
meaning  tintil,  2007,  2008. 

quod,  conj.,  origin  of,  1838;  with  declar- 
ative and  causal  sense,  1838  ;  resembling 
pron.  quod,  1839-1842 ;  with  venio, 
mitto,  1840;  quid  est  quod,  &c., 
5841 ;  meaning  as  to  -what,  1842  ;  mean- 
ing in  case,  1843,  2110;  with  indie,  and 
.subjv.,  1838;  meaning  the  fact  that, 
1844-1852;  addo  quod,  1846;  adicio 
quod,  1846  ;  nisi  quod,  1848  ;  prae- 
ter  quam  quod,  1848,  1895 ;  super 
quam  quod,  1848,  1895;  tantum 
quod,  1848;  quid  quod,  1849;  witn 
gaudeo,  &c.,  1851;  with  verbs  of 
praising,  &c.,  1852  ;  meaning  because, 
1853;  with  correlatives  eo,  ideo,  &c., 
1854,  1855 ;  non  quod,  sed  quod, 


&c.,  1855 ;  magis  quod  .  .  .  quam 
quod,  &c.,  1855  ;  non  quod  non, 
1855  ;  following  supine  in  -um,  2272. 

quoias,  formation  of,  329. 

quoius,  in  questions,  1526. 

quom,  see  cum. 

quominus,  use  of,  1977,  1978. 

quoniam,  form  of,  153,  4;  1882:  use 
of,  1882-1884. 

quoque,  with  sed,  1680. 

qudr,  see  cur. 

quo  setius,  1979. 

quot,  indeclinable,  431 ;  as  adj.,  431 ;  not 
used  partitively,  1244;  nescio  quot, 
1788;  tot  ...  quot,  1831. 

quotiens,  in  questions,  1526;  with  perf. 
indie,  of  anterior  time,  1613;  totiens 
.  .  .  quotiens,  1831,  1886;  mood 
with,  1885-1887. 

quotienscumque,  use  of,  1885-1887. 

r,  development  of  short  vowel  before, 
in,  b;  varies  with  d,  148;  before  i, 
94;  changed  to  1,  166,  7  ;  from  s,  154, 
488:  medial,  disappearance  of,  170,  9; 
preceded  by  mute  or  f,  178. 

rabies,  decl.  of,  606. 

rado,  prin.  parts  of,  958. 

rapid,  pres.  stem  of,  836;  prin.  parts  of, 
975 ;  compounds  of,  975. 

rauciS,  defective,  905. 

re-,  compounds  with,  perf.  of,  781,  861. 

reapse,  680. 

receptui,  1225. 

recido,  defective,  905.       ^ 

recipio,  loc.  abl.  with,  1348. 

recorder,  with  gen.,  1287 ;  with  ace., 
1288;  with  de  and  abl.,  1289;  with 
infin.,  2169  ;  witn  acc<  and  infin.,  2175. 

recumbo,  prin.  parts  of,  974. 

recuso,  with  ne,  1960,  1977  ;  with  quo- 
minus,  1960,  1977;  with  quin,  1986. 

red-  (re-),  inseparable  prep.,  392,  1409. 

reddo,  conjug.  of,  757;  with  infin.  as 
obj.,  2206  ;  with  perf.  partic.,  2297. 

redinunt,  833. 

redux,  decl.  of,  531,  635. 

refello,  prin.  parts  of,  932. 

re  fert  (refert),  forms  of,  816;  con- 
structions with,  1276-1279;  with  subj. 
infin.,  2209. 

refertus,  with  gen.,  1263,  1387;  with 
abl.,  1268,  1387. 

reg5,  conjug.  of,  782,  783;  no  supine, 
900 ;  prin.  parts  of,  953;  compounds  of. 


953. 
slego,  prin.  parts  of,  937. 


575 


Index  of  Latin    Words. 


relicuus    (reliquus),    with    partitive 

meaning,    1249. 
renes,  gender  of,  583. 
renideS,  defective.  809. 
reor,  perf.  partic.  of,  918,  2436;   prin. 

parts  of,  1008. 
reparco,  forms  of,  930. 
repello,  prin.  parts  of,  932. 
reperio,  prin.  parts  of,  ion. 
replied,  prin.  parts  of,  993. 
repS,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 
reprimo,  with  quin,  1986. 
repugno,  with  ne,   1960,   1977 ;  with 

quominus,  1960,  1977. 
requies,  decl.  of,  477,  603;  gender  of, 

572. 
res,  gen.  and  dat.  sing,  of,  127,  4 ;  decl. 

of,  601,  602;   malam   rem  and  in 

malam  rem,   1165;  repeated  in  rel. 

sentence,  1796  ;  quae  res,  1811  ;  form 

re  not  elided  before  short  vowel,  2487  ; 

form  rem  not  elided  before  short  vowel, 

resides,  prin.  parts  of,  997. 
resipiscS,  prin.  parts  of,  968. 
resists,    with    ne,    1960,    1977;    with 

quominus,  1960,  1977. 
reson5,  forms  of,  993. 
respondeS,  prin.  parts  of,  995. 
restis,  decl.  of,  520,  550. 
rete,  decl.  of,  528,  557. 
retendS,  forms  of,  924. 
reticeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1004. 
retineo,  with  quin,  1986. 
rettuli,  retuli,  781,  861. 
retundo,  prin.  parts  of,  931. 
reus,  with  gen.,  1263. 
revivesco  (-vivisco),  959. 
revortor,  forms  of,  801. 
Rhodus,  in  loc.,  1334. 
rideS,  prin.  parts  of,  1000. 
rigeS,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 
vigescS,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 
robur,  gender  of,  408:  decl.  of,  489. 
rodS,  prin.  parts  of,  958. 
rogo,  with  double  ace.,  1169 ;  with  de  and 

abl.,  1170;  constructions  with  pass,  of, 

1171;  with  gerundive  construction,  2250. 
tube  SCO;  prin.  parts  of,  976. 
rubus,  gender  of,  408. 
rudens,  gender  of,  580. 
rudis,  with  gen.,  1263. 
rum  ex,  gender  of,  408. 
rumpS,  prin.  parts  of,  938;  compounds 

of,  938. 
ruo,   perf.   partic.  of,  918,   2436;   prin. 

parts  of,  947. 


rursum,  russum,  rusum,  accusatives 

as  adverbs,  ;oi. 
rus,  decl._of,  430,  491 ;  loc.  run,  504; 

use  of  run,  1337;  ace.  as  adv.,  699; 

ace.  without  prep.,  1162;    use  of  abl. 

rure,    1311;    use  of   loc.    abl.   rure, 

1344,  13455  Hire  as  adv.,  703. 

S,  sound  of,  65  ;  followed  by  u,  27,  65  ; 
(and  ss)  used  for  z,  21,  67;  intervo- 
calic, 155;  ss  from  tt,  159;  changed 
to  r,  154,  488;  (and  st),  initial,  dis- 
appearance of,  169,  4;  medial,  disap- 
pearance of,  170,  2;  final,  disappearance 
of,  66,  171 ;  ns,  quantity  of  vowel  pre- 
ceding, 122,  a;  final  syllables  in,  quan- 
tity of  vowel  of,  2451-2457;  does  not 
always  make  position,  2468. 

sacer,  comparison  of,  358;  constructions 
with,  1202,  1238. 

saepe,  comparison  of,  364. 

saepiS,  prin.  parts  of,  1014. 

Sagra,  gender  of,  406. 

sal,  decl.  of,  430,  482 ;  gender  of,  583. 

salio,  prin.  parts  of,  1019;  compounds  of, 
1019. 

sam,  pron.,  675. 

Samnis,  accent  of,  88  ;  decl.  of,  533  ; 
quantity  of  i  in,  2452. 

sane i5,  forms  of,  1014. 

sane,  introducing  concessive  period, 
2150;  sane  quam,  1790;  sane, 
sane  quidem,  in  answers,  1512; 
with  imper.,  1572. 

sanesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

sanguTs,  form  of,  171,  4;  decl.  of, 
486;  gender  of,  579;  quantity  of  i  in, 
24^52. 

sapio,  pres.  stem  of,  836;  prin.  parts  of, 
969  ;  compounds  of,  969. 

sarciS,  prin   parts  of,  1014. 

sas  (for  suas),  653. 

satin,  in  questions,  1510. 

satis,  verbs  combined  with,  followed  by 
dat.,  1187;  with  partitive  gen.,  1248; 
satis  est  implving  non-occurrent 
action,  1496 ;  satis  est,  &c.,  with 
perf.  infin.,  2231. 

satisdo,  conjug.  of,  757. 

satius  est,  implying  non-occurrent 
action,  1496. 

scalpS,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

scando,  prin.  parts  of,  950;  compounds 
of,  950. 

scilicet,  form  of,  712 ;  in  answers,  1512. 

scindo,  perf.  of,  859,  860,  2435;  prin. 
parts  of,  934. 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


SCio,  pres.  stem  of,  837 ;  imper.  of,  846 ; 
fut.  scib5,  852;  prin.  parts  of,  1016; 
with  haud,  1449,  1554,  1782  ;  scito, 
scitote,  1576;  scfn,  coordinated, 
1787  ;  scio  quid,  &c.,  as  indef.,  1788; 
with  infin.,  2169;  with  ace.  and  infin., 
2175  ;  with  o  shortened,  2443. 

scirpus,  gender  of,  408. 

scisco,  prin.  parts  of,  965. 

scribo,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

sculpS,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

seed,  prin.  parts  of,  993  ;  compound  of, 
993. 

securis,  decl.  of,  520,  550,  554. 

securus,  with  gen.,  1264. 

secus,  comparison  of,  364;  defective, 
430;  secus  quam,  1895;  n°n  se' 
cus,  correlative  of  ut,  1937;  of  quasi, 
tamquam  si,  &c.,  2118. 

sed,  set,  use  of,  1676,  1679;  after  non 
modo,  &c.,  1680-1682;  coordinating 
rel.  sentence,  1820;  npn  quod,  &c., 
.  .  .  sed,  &c.,  1855  ;  introducing  ad- 
versative sentence,  2151. 

sed-  (se-),  as  inseparable  prep.,  392, 
1409  ;  as  prep.,  1417. 

sedeo,  perf.  of,  862 ;  prin.  parts  of, 
997 ;  compounds  of,  997. 

sedes,  decl.  of,  476,  566. 

seges,  gender  of,  572. 

Seleucia,  abl.  of,  with  in,  1334. 

sementis,  decl.  of,  519,  551,  555. 

semis,  decl.  of,  539;  meaning  of,  2427. 

senatus,  gen.  sing,  senati,  senatuos, 

59°,  593-     . 

senesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

senex,  comparison  of,  353;  decl.  of, 
500. 

sentes,  gender  of,  579. 

sentio,  prin.  parts  of,  1015. 

sepelio,  prin.  parts  of,  1017. 

septemplex,  decl.  of,  531. 

septunx,  2427. 

sequor,  prin.  parts  of,  978. 

series,  decl.  of,  607. 

ser5,  string,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 

sero,  sow,  conjug.  of,  744,  758;  root 
verb,  reduplicated,  744,  758  ;  form  of 
serit,  828 ;  perf.  partic.  of,  918,  2436 ; 
prin.  parts  of,  922 ;  prin.  parts  of  com- 
pounds of,  922 ;  satus  with  abl.,  1312. 

sestertius,  gen.  plur.  of,  462. 

setius,  comparison  of,  364 ;  with  qu5, 
1979. 

seu,  see  sive. 

sextans,  gender  of,  580;  meaning  of, 
2427. 


si,  sei,  adv.,  708;  with  wishes,  1546; 
with  pres.  indie,  of  fut.  action,  1593; 
with  tut.  perf.,  1626 ;  si  or  si  forte  in 
questions,  1777;  form  of,  2015;  correla- 
tives of,  2015,  2018;  with  quidem, 
2019 ;  with  modo,  2019 ;  with  tamen, 
2019;  si  (sive)  .  .  .  sive,  2019; 
neg.  of,  si  non,  nisi,  nisi  si,  ni,  2020 ; 
si  autem,  minus,  aliter,  2021;  in 
conditions,  2025-2115;  with  miror, 
mirum  est,  mira  sunt,  gaude5, 
terreo,  metus  est,  2068;  si  placet, 
&c.,  2113;  etsi,  si,  &c.,  concessive, 
2116;  quasi,  quam  si,  tamquam  si, 
&c.,  2117-2122  ;  si  npn  with  infin.  in 
ind.  disc.,  2317  ;  siquis  referring  to  is, 
2368 ;  followed  by  quis,  qui,  indef., 
2388. 

Sic,  form  of,  113, 2015  ;  adv.,  708;  correl- 
ative of  tamquam,  1908;  correlative 
of  ut,  1831,  1937,  1970;  preceding 
quin,  1988;  correlative  of  si,  2015, 
2018;  correlative  of  quasi,  tamquam 
Si,  &c.,  2118;  expressing  affirmative 
coordination,  2159;  introducing  ace  and 
infin.,  2176. 

sicubi,  quantity,  129,2 ;  form  of,  129,  709. 

sicunde,  form  of,  146,  710. 

sicut,  after  quam  vis,  1905  ;  form  of, 
1937;  meaning  since,  1946. 

sicuti,  with  short  final  vowel,  2445. 

Sicyoni,  Sicyone,  1331. 

sido,  prin.  parts  of,  943. 

sileo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

silex,  gender  of,  j;8i. 

similis,  comparison  of,  345 ;  construc- 
tions with,  1204;  agreeing  with  abl.  of 
quality,  1240. 

similiter,  correlative  of  ut,  1937;  cor- 
relative of  quasi,  tamquam  'si,  &c., 
2118. 

simplex,  decl.  of,  531. 

simul,  as  adv.  and  prep.,  701,  1421 , 
with  et,  1648;  simul  .  .  .  simul, 
1687. 

simul  atque,  ac,  et,  ut,  and  simul, 
_use  of,  1923-1934, 1613. 

sin,  2021. 

sine,  prep.,  1417;  with  abl.  proper,  1297-, 
position  of,  1434 ;  intimating  prot.  of 
conditional  period,  2110;  with  gerun- 
dive construction  or  gerund,  2267. 

sino,  pres.  stem  of,  833 ;  forms  of,  893, 
964;  perf.  partic.  of,  918,  2436;  with 
subjv.  coordinated,  1710;  with  purpose 
clause,  1950;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2198} 
used  personally  in  pass.,  2201. 


37 


577 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


SIS  (for  si  vis),  774;  with  imper.,  1572  ; 

parenthetical,  2113. 
Sis,  determinative  pron.,  675. 

sisto,  conjug.  of,  744,  758;  root  verb, 
reduplicated,  744,  758  ;  form  of  sistit, 
828 ;  perf.  of,  133,  859,  2435  ;  perf .  of 
compounds  of,  860 ;  perf.  partic.  of, 
918,  2436;  prin.  parts  of,  922. 

Sitis,  decl.  of  518,  548,  554. 

Sive,  conjunction,  use  of,  1667,  1672, 
1673  ;  followed  by  quis,  qui,  indef., 
2388;  see  si. 

societas,  formation,  103,  a. 

socors,  decl.  of,  559. 

sodes,  with  imper.,  1572. 

soled,  forms  of,  801,  1488. 

solum,  with  nSn,  1680,  1682. 

solus,  gen.  sing,  of,  126,  6;  618-620;  decl. 
of,  618-620;  gen.  in  apposition  with  pos- 
sess, pron.,  1235 ;  solus  est  qui,  1822. 

solvo,  prin.  parts  of,  947  ;  constructions 
with,  1303,  1304. 

sono,  forms  of,  820  ;  defective,  905 ; 
prin.  parts  of,  993 ;  compound  of,  993. 

sorbeo,  forms  of,  1006 ;  compounds  of, 
1006. 

sors,  decl.  of,  533,  543,  556. 

sortior,  prin.  parts  of,  1021. 

Sos,  determinative  pron.,  675. 

sospes,  decl.  of,  477,  624.  625. 

SpargS,  prin.  parts  of,  958  ;  compounds 
of,  958. 

Sparta,  abl.  of,  with  in,  1334 

spatium,  use  of  abl.  of,  1399. 

species,  decl.  of,  606,  607. 

speciS,  spicio,  pres.  stem  of,  836 ; 
forms  of,  956. 

specus,  gender  of,  588  ;  decl.  of,  592. 

sperno,  pres.  stem  of,  833 ;  prin.  parts 
of,  964. 

sperS,  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2175,  2186; 
with  fut.  infin.,  2235  ;  with  pres.  infin., 
2236. 

spes,  defective,  600,  602;  spe  with 
compar.,  1330 ;  form  spe  not  elided 
before  short  vowel,  2487  ;  form  spem 
not  elided  before  short  vowel,  2495. 

spolio,  constructions  with,  1303,  1304. 

spondeo,  perf.  of,  173, 2;  859;  prin.  parts 
of,  995  ;  compounds  of,  995. 

spud,  prin.  parts  of,  947. 

squaleo,  defective,  809. 

sta,  stuc  (for  ista,  istuc),  667. 

statuo,  367 ;  prin.  parts  of,  947 ;  com- 
pounds of,  947  ;  with  in  and  abl.,  1424 ; 
with  purpose  clause,  ig^o;  with  infin., 
1953,  2169;  with  ace.  and  infin..  1954. 


sterno,  prin.  parts  of,  964. 

sternuo,  pres.  stem  of,  833 ;  prin.  parts 
of,  948. 

StertS,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 

stingUO,  prin.  parts  of,  954. 

Stirps,  gender  of,  580. 

St5,  pres.  stem  of,  837  ;  perf.  of,  173,  2; 
859,  2435  ;  perf.  of  compounds  of,  860  ; 
defective,  905  ;  prin.  parts  of,  989  ;  with 
abl.,  1349 ;  stat  per  aliquem  with 
quominus,  1977  ;  form  stS  not  elided 
before  short  vowel,  2487;  form  stem 
not  elided  before  short  vowel,  2495. 

StrepS,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 

strides,  perf.  of,  862  ;  prin.  parts  of,  997. 

strigilis,  decl.  of,  519,  551,  555. 

Stringo,  prin.  parts  of,  954. 

struo,  perf. of,  1 64, 15865, 867;  prin.  parts 
of,  953- 

Studeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006;  with  pur- 
pose clause,  1951;  with  infin.,  2169; 
with  ace.  and  infin.,  2190. 

StudiSsus,  with  gen.  of  gerundive  con- 
struction or  gerund,  2258. 

StupeS,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

stupesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

Styx,  gender  of,  406. 

SUadep,  prin.  parts  of,  1000  ;  with  subjv. 
coordinated,  1712  ;  with  purpose  clause, 
1950  ;  with  ace.  and  infin.,  2195. 

sub,  form  of,  164,  2  ;  compounds  of, 
with  dat,  1188,  1189,  IT94>  compounds 
of,  other  constructions  with,  1190,  1 191, 
1196;  with  loc.  abl.,  1299;  with  ace. 
and  abl.,  1422,  1423. 

subcumbo,  prin.  parts  of,  974. 

subinde,  pronunciation  of,  93. 

subito,  with  cum,  1869. 

subrepsit,  975. 

subrupio,  forms  of,  975. 

subter,  with  ace.,  1410  ;  with  abl.,  1416. 

subtundS,  forms  of,  931. 

suesco,  perf.  of,  871 ;  prin.  parts  of,  968. 

SUgS,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

sui,  decl.  of,  644-651 ;  use  of  gen.  of,  1234 ; 
se,  subj.  of  infin.,  omitted,  2183;  sui 
with  gerundive,  2260,  2261 ;  in  ind.  disc, 
representing  ego  and  nos  of  direct  dis- 
course, 2325  ;  referring  to  subj.  of  verb, 
2336  ;  referring  to  word  not  subj .  of  verb, 
2337 ;  use  in  construction  of  ace.  with 
infin.,  2338-2340;  use  in  subordinate 
clauses,  234 1-2343;  inter  se,  invicem 
inter  se,  invicem  se,  expressing 
reciprocal  relations,  2344,  2345;  is  used 
for,  2370 ;  ipse  with,  2376 ;  ipse  stand- 
ing for,  2377;  se  quisque,  2397. 


578 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


Sulla,  formation  of,  274. 

sultis  (for  si  voltis),  774;  with  imper., 
1572;  parenthetical,  2113. 

sum,  form  esum,  746;  conjugation  of, 
744,  745 ;  old  forms  of,  748  ;  pronun- 
ciation of  es,  and  est  after  a  vowel 
or  -m,  747,  2496 ;  pronunciation  cf 
es,  and  est  after  -s,  747,  2496;  sont, 
748;  escit,  &c.,  748;  siem,  &c.,  748, 
841 ;  estod,  748  ;  form  of  eram,  ero, 
&c.,  154,  746,  848;  es  for  ess,  747; 
partic.  of,  749,  902  ;  in  compounds,  749, 
902  ;  no  gerund  or  gerundive  of,  749 ; 
no  perf.  partic.  or  supine  of,  750,  900 ; 
fuam,  &c.,  750,  842;  fore,  &c.,  750, 
803;  fuit,  &c.,  126,  750,  865;  with 
potis,  pote,  752;  no  perf.  system 
of,  745,  807;  form  est,  828;  suffix  of 
pres.  subjv.  -i-  and  -ie-,  841 ;  form  of 
sim,  &c.,  841 ;  form  of  es,  &c. 
(imper.),  844;  form  of  essem,  &c., 
850 ;  form  of  esse,  895  ;  prin.  parts  of, 
922  ;  root  verb,  744. 

Used  impersonally,  1034;  omitted, 
1036 ;  fut.  partic.  with,  802,  803,  1633, 
1737, 1742,  1746,  1747  ;  gerundive  with, 
804,  2101,  2243  >  dat.  °f  possessor  with, 
1212;  dat.  of  tendency  or  result  with, 
1219;  gen.  of  value  with,  1271;  abl. 
with,  1315;  combinations  with  est  im- 
plying non-occurrent  action,  1496  ;  use 
of  es,  est5,  1576;  fui,  fueram, 
fuerS,  with  perf.  partic.,  1609;  est 
qui,  1822;  with  attributive  cum  sen- 
tence, 1870,  1871  ;  with  attributive 
postquam  or  ut  sentence,  1927; 
esse,  subj.  of,  omitted  with  verbs  of 
desire,  2190;  fore  or  futurum  esse 
ut  as  circumlocution,  2233 ;  fore  with 
perf.  partic.,  2234;  predicate  use  of 
gen.  of  gerundive  construction  with, 
2262 ;  futurus  as  adj.,  2283  ;  futurus 
as  subst.,  2292;  esse  and  fuisse  with 
fut.  partic.,  and  futurum  fuisse  ut 
in  conditional  apodoses  in  ind.  disc., 
2331,  2334;  form  sim  not  elided  before 
short  vowel,  2495. 

sum,  pron.,  675. 

summus,  formation  of,  352  ;  compari- 
son of,  356 ;  with  partitive  meaning, 
1243. 

sumo,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

Sunium,  in  loc.,  1334. 

SUO,  prin.  parts  of,  947. 

supellex,  decl.  of,  545,  556. 

super,  compounds  of,  with  dat.,  1188, 
1189,  1194;  compounds  of,  other  con- 


structions with,  1190,  1191,  1196;  with 
ace.  and  abl.,  1422,  1425;  super  id 
introductory  to  sentence  with  quod, 
1847;  super  quam  quod,  1848,1895; 
with  ace.  of  gerundive  construction  or 
gerund,  2253  ;  with  abl.  of  gerundive 
construction  or  gerund,  2267. 

supera,  defective,  356. 

superbio,  defective,  810. 

superfit,  &c.,  790. 

superi,  use  of,  347;  no  sing.,  417. 

superior,  formation  of,  348 ;  comparison 
of,  356. 

supefne,  with  short  final  vowel, 
2440. 

superseded,  constructions  with,  1303, 
1304. 

superstes,  decl.  of,  477,  624,  625. 

supplex,  decl.  of,  531. 

supra,  prep.,  1410 ;  supra  quam, 
1894. 

supremus,  formation  of,  352  ;  compari- 
son of,  356.^ 

surgo,  surrigo,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

surpuit,  &c.,  975. 

sus,  gender  and  decl.  of,  494. 

suscenseo,  with  quod,  quia,  quom, 
1851. 

suscipio,  with  gerundive,  2250. 

susque  deque,  1408. 

suus,  form  of,  107,  c;  decl.  of,  652-655  ; 
used  instead  of  gen.,  1234,  1262  ;  in  ind. 
disc,  representing  meus,  noster  of 
direct  discourse,  2325  ;  referring  to  subj. 
of  verb,  2336 ;  referring  to  word  not  subj. 
of  verb,  2337  ;  use  in  construction  of  ace. 
with  infin.,  2338-2340;  use  in  subor- 
dinate clauses,  2341-2343;  omitted, 
2346 ;  meaning  proper,  appropriate, 
favourable,  2346;  ipse  standing  for, 
2377 ;  suus  quisque,  2397. 

t,  sound  of,  68  ;  varies  with  1,  147;  with 
r,  148 ;  with  t,  149,  2  ;  initial,  disap- 
pearance of,  169,  i  ;  tt,  treatment  of, 
159,  160;  assimilation  of,  166;  dt,  the 
combination,  its  treatment,  159,  160 ; 
final,  in  it,  illut,  &c.,  659;  monosyl- 
lables ending  in,  with  vowel  short,  2432. 

tabes,  decl.  of,  523,  603. 

tabescS,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

taceo,  prin.  parts  of,  1004. 

taedet,  forms  of,  815  ;  impersonal,  1034; 
construction  with,  1283;  used  personally, 
1284. 

tag5,  925. 

talentum,  gen.  plur.  of,  462. 


579 


Index  of  Latin    Words. 


talis,  followed  by  rel.  sentence  of  result, 
1818;  talis  .  .  .  qualis,  1831 ;  correl- 
ative of  ut,  ut  non,  1970. 

talpa,  gender  of,  433. 

tam,  form  of,  702;  tam  .  .  .  quam, 
correlatives,  1831 ;  tam  .  .  .  quam, 
use  of,  1889,  1891 ;  tam  .  .  .  quam 
qui,  1892;  quam  .  .  .  tam,  1893; 
correlative  of  ut,  ut  non,  1970 ;  pre- 
ceding quin,  1988. 

tamdiu,  correlative  of  dum,  quoad, 
quamdiu,  quam,  donee,  1999. 2004. 

tamen,  with  abl.  abs.,  1374;  common 
use  of,  1676,  1686;  qui  tamen,  1825; 
cum  tamen,  1868 ;  cum  . . .  tamen, 
1880;  correlative  of  si,  2018;  with  si, 
2019 ;  with  nisi,  2020 ;  correlative  of 
etsi,  tametsi,  &c.,  2116;  introducing 
adversative  sentence,  2151 ;  after  partic. 
expressing  concession,  2295. 

tamenetsi,  2116. 

tametsi,  concessive,  2116;  coordinating, 
2153. 

tamquam,  in  periods  of  comparison, 
1908 ;  introducing  reason,  1909 ;  with 
or  without  si  in  conditional  compari- 
sons, 2117-2121. 

tandem,  form  of,  164,  3. 

tango,  prin.  parts  of,  925 ;  forms  tagd, 
&c.,  925  ;  compounds  of,  925. 

tantisper,  1999. 

tantopere,  correlative  of  ut,  ut  non, 
1970. 

tantum,  with  non,  1680;  quantum 
.  .  .  tantum,  1831 ;  tantum  quod, 
1848;  tantum  abest  ut  .  .  .  ut, 
1969;  correlative  of  dum,  quoad, 
quamdiu,  1999. 

tantummodo,  1999. 

tantundem,  with  partitive  gen.,  1248. 

tantus,  form  of,  147 ;  tantum  with 
gen.,  1248,  1259 ;  tanti  as  gen.  of 
value,  1271,  1274,  1279;  correlative  of 
Ut,  ut  n5n,  1970 ;  quanto  . .  .  tanto, 
1973:  preceding  quin,  1988. 

teges,  gender  of,  572. 

teg5,  defective,  900  ;  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

temno,  defective,  808 ;  pres.  stem  of, 
833  ;  prin.  parts  of,  955. 

temperi,  comparison  of,  364. 

tempero,  with  ne,  1960 ;  with  quin, 
1986. 

tempts,  with  purpose  clause,  1951;  with 
infin.,  1953. 

tendp,    prin.    parts  of,  924 ;   form    of 

tennitur,   166,  4;  924;  compounds  of, 
924;  with  perf.  infin.,  2225. 


teneo,  prin.  parts  of,  1004  ;  compounds 
of,  1004  ;  with  loc.  abl.,  1348  ;  with  ne, 
1960;  with  quominus,  1977;  with 
quin,  1986;  memoria  teneo  with 
pres.  infin.,  2220. 

tenus,  with  abl.  proper,  1297,  1420;  as 
subst.  with  gen.,  1406,  1420;  position 
of,  1420. 

tepesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

ter,  quantity,  2433. 

teres,  decl.  of,  533,  559  635. 

tergeo,  tergo,  forms  of,  1000. 

tero,  prin.  parts  of,  963. 

terreo,  prin.  parts  of,  1004;  with  si, 
2068. 

terunci,  as  gen.  of  value,  1272. 

texo,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 

th,  sound  of,  72;  use  of,  19. 

Tiberis,  decl.  of,  518,  549,  554. 

timeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006;  with  ut, 
.r957. 

tmgo,  pnn.  parts  of,  954. 

tis,  646. 

tollo,  form  of,  166,  6;  833;  supplying 
parts  of  fero,  780  ;  prin.  parts  of,  926. 


tondeo,    perf.   of,  859;    prin.   parts  of, 

995  ;  compounds  of,  995. 
tond,  forms  of,  993  ;  tonat,  defective, 


815  ;  tonat,  impersonal,  1034. 
torpesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 
torqueo,  prin.  parts  of,  999. 
torquis,  gender  of,  579. 
torreo,  prin.  parts  of,  1004. 
tot,  indeclinable,  431  ;  as  adj.,  431 ;  not 

used  partitively,  1244 ;  tot  .  .  .  quot, 

1831. 

totidem,  not  used  partitively,  1244. 
totiens  .  .  .  quotiens,  1831,  1886. 
totus,  gen.  sing,  of,  127,  6;  618-620:  decl. 

of,  618-620;  construction    with,    1202, 

1238;    with    loc.   abl.,   1346;    totum 

h5c  as  attribute  of  infin.,  2215. 
tradux,  gender  of,  581. 
traho,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 
trans,  compounds  of,  with  ace.,  1137; 

compounds  of,  with  double  ace.,  1138; 

as  adv..  1402  ;  prep.,  1410. 
tremisco,   tremesco,  prin.  parts  of, 

976,  834. 

tremo,  pnn.  parts  of,  972. 
tres,   decl.  of,  639;   with    ex   or   de, 

1246. 
tribuo,  367 ;  prin.  parts  of,  947 ;  nomen 

tribuS,  case  with,  1214. 
tribus,  gender  of,  588  ;  decl.  of,  592. 
triens,    gender    of,    580 ;    meaning    of, 

2427. 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


triplex,  decl.  of,  531. 

trudo,  prin.  parts  of,  958. 

trux,  decl.  of,  531,  635. 

tu,  decl.  of,  644-651;  when  expressed, 
1029;  used  in  address,  1118;  dat.  with 
ace.  of  exclamation,  1150;  with  subjv. 
questions,  1566  ;  with  imper.,  1571  ;  te, 
subj.  of  infin.,  omitted,  2183;  vos,  subj. 
of  infin.,  omitted,  2183  ;  te  as  indef., 
2212;  vostri  with  gerundive,  2260, 
2261 ;  represented  by  ille  or  is  in  ind. 
disc.,  2325 ;  use  of  vestrum,  vestri, 
2335  ;  inter  vos  expressing  reciprocal 
relation,  2344. 

tuber,  gender  of,  573. 

tueor.  prin.  parts  of,  1009. 

turn,  form  of,  701, 1156;  primum  (pri- 
mo)  .  .  .  deinde  .  .  .  turn,  1687; 
turn  .  .  .  turn,  1687;  cum  .  .  . 
turn,  1831,  1881 ;  correlative  of  quan- 
do,  201 1  ;  correlative  of  si,  2018;  turn 
denique,  turn  demum,  correlatives 
of  si,  2018. 

tumesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

tundd,  prin.  parts  of,  931  j  compounds 
cf  931  5  Pe^  of,  2435. 

turb5,  gender  of,  574. 

turgeo,  forms  of,  1000. 

turris,  decl.  of,  517,  550,  555. 

tussi5,  defective,  810. 

tussis,  decl.  of,  517, 548,  554. 

tuus,  decl.  0^652-655;  tua  with  refert, 
interest,  1277 ;  tuum  as  attribute  of 
infin.,  2215;  used  instead  of  gen.,  1234, 
1262. 

u,  as  vowel  and  as  cons.,  how  represented, 
22,  26  ;  the  vowel,  pronunciation  of,  27, 
33,  38-41 ;  used  for  y,  21  ;  after  q,  g, 
S,  27,  177,  2504;  intermediate  sound, 
28  ;  interchange  of  vowel  and  cons., 
52;  final,  quantity  of,  2437,  2444. 

tl,  change  of,  especially  before  b,  p,  m, 
f,  to  i,  28,  103;  from  a,  104, /;  from 
o,  105,  107,  452,  827 ;  weakened  to  i, 
105  ;  followed  by  o,  107,  f,  157,  4^2, 
827 ;  medial  u,  from  -av-,  -ov-,  iv, 
1 06. 

a,  how  denoted  in  inscriptions,  29,  i,  3  ; 
from  au,  97;  from  ou,  100;  from  oi, 
oe,  99. 

uber,  udder,  gender  of,  573. 

uber,/rwzV/«/,  decl.  of,  537,  636. 

ubf,  quantity,  129, 2446 ;  form  of,  146, 709; 
in  questions,  1526;  with  infin.,  1539; 
with  perf.  indie,  of  anterior  action,  1613  ; 
with  fut.  perf.,  1626 ;  nescio  ubf, 


1788;  instead  of  rel.  pron.  with  prep., 
1793;  ub*  •  •  •  ib!,  1831;  ubipri- 
murn,  1923;  use  of,  meaning  -when, 
1923-1926,  1932-1934;  use  of,  meaning 
•where,  1971 ;  introducing  conditional 
prot.,  21 1  o. 

ubicumque,  quantity,  129,  2. 

ubinam,  quantity,  129,  2  ;  with  partitive 
gen.,  1253. 

ubique,  quantity,  129,  2. 

ubivis,  quantity,  129,  2. 

ui,  diphthong,  pronunciation  of,  49;  mon- 
ophthong, 95. 

ulciscor,  prin.  parts  of,  980. 

ullus,  formation  of,  274 ;  gen.  sing,  of, 
162,  618-620;  decl.  of,  618-620;  with 
baud,  1449;  use  of,  2402,  2403. 

uls,  comparison  of,  357;  prep.,  1410. 

ulterior,  formation  of,  348 ;  comparison 

°f,  357- 

ultimus,  formation  of,  3151;  compar- 
ison of,  357 ;  with  partitive  meaning, 
1249. 

ultra,  prep,  and  adv.,  1410, 1412;  position 
of,  1434;  ultra  quam,  1894. 

urneo,  defective,  809. 

umquam,  with  baud,  1449 ;  with  en  in 
questions,  1509. 

uncia,  2427. 

unde,  form  of,  146,  710;  with  ace.  of 
exclamation,  1150;  in  questions,  1526; 
nescio  unde,  1788;  instead  of  rel. 
pron.  with  prep.,  1793  5  ^rs*  syllable  of, 
shortened,  2469. 

unguis,  decl.  of,  556;  gender  of ,  579. 

unguo  (ungo),  prin.  parts  of,  954. 

Gnus,  form  of,  87 ;  gen.  sing,  of,  127,  6; 
618-620,  638;  decl.  of,  618-620,  638; 
gen.  in  apposition  with  possess,  pron., 
1235 ;  with  ex  or  de,  1246  ;  with  gen., 
1246;  with  superl.,  1466;  unus  est 
qui,  1822. 

unusquisque,  decl.  of,  692. 

urbs,  pred.  in  agreement  with,  1072 ;  ace. 
of,  with  in  or  ad,  1159;  gen.  of  defini- 
tion with,  1256;  urbe  and  in  urbe, 

J333- 

urgeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1000. 
uro,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 
usque,    as    prep.,    1414;    correlative  of 

dum,    quoad,    quamdiu,    donee, 

1999,   2004;    usque  eo,  usque  ad 

eum  fmem,  2004. 
usus  est,  with  abl.,  1379;  with  partic., 

1382;  with  ace.,  1384;  by  what  authors 

used,    1384 ;    with  subst.   and  partic., 

2286. 


58' 


Index  of  Latin    Words. 


bt,  utei,  uti,  form  of,  1935 ;  with  gen., 
1254;  with  satin  in  questions,  1510; 
in  wishes,  1540;  with  subjv.  in  exhorta- 
tions, 1547;  with  questions,  1568,  1569; 
coordinated  member  equivalent  to  result 
clause  with,  1700;  scio  Ut  as  indef., 
1788;  with  dignus,  indignus,  1819; 
quam  ut,  1896;  general  statement  of 
use  in  subordinate  clause,  1947,  1948; 
ut  ne,  1947;  ut  non,  1947;  nemo 
Ut,  vix  ut,  &c.,  1947;  in  complemen- 
tary final  clauses,  1949-1960;  after  ex- 
pressions of  fear,  &c.,  1957,  1958;  in 
pure  final  clauses,  1961-1964;  in  paren- 
thetical clauses,  1962 ;  expressing  as- 
sumption or  concession,  1963,  2110;  in 
provisos,  1964;  in  complementary  con- 
secutive clauses,  1965-1969;  tantum 
abest  ut  .  .  .  ut,  1969  ;  in  pure  con- 
secutive clauses,  1970;  after  non  pos- 
sum, &c.,  1985. 

How,  in  questions  and  exclamations, 
1528. 

As,  with  infin.,  1539;  with  fut.  perf., 
1626;  coordinated  member  equivalent 
to  comparative  sentence  with,  1704;  ut 
qui,  1827,  1828;  ut  pote  qui,  1827; 
ut  .  .  .  ita,  sic,  item,  1831 ;  ut  pote 
cum,  1879 ;  with  superl.,  1892 ;  ut  or 
sicut  after  quamvis,  1905;  correla- 
tives of,  1937;  sicuti,  sicut,  veluti, 
velut,  1937  ;  with  adversative  cor- 
relation, 1938;  with  quisque,  1939; 
introducing  parenthesis,  1940;  in  illus- 
trations, 1941 ;  ut,  prout,  making 
allowance,  1942 ;  meaning  as  indeed, 
as  in  fact,  1943 ;  meaning  like,  1944 ; 
praeut,  1945;  sicut,  since,  1946; 
with  infin.  in  ind.  disc.,  2317  ;  idem 
Ut,  2373. 

ut,  ut  primum,  simul  ut,  when, 
.  use  of,  1923-1934;  with  quisque, 
1932. 

Ut,  -where,  1936. 

Ut,  ut  si,  in  conditional  comparisons, 

2117,   2121. 

uter,  form  of,  146 ;  formation  of,  347 ; 
gen.  sing,  of,  162,  618-620,  657,  693; 
decl.  of,  618-620,  693  ;  as  rel.  or  indef., 
693 ;  in  questions,  1526 ;  with  -ne, 
1529;  distinguished  from  quis,  qui, 
2385. 

uter,  decl.  of,  525. 

utercumque,  decl.  of,  694. 

uterlibet,  decl.  of,  694;  use  of,  2401. 

Uterque,  gen.  sing,  of,  127,  6;  657,  694  ; 
decl.  of,  69-1;  utriusque  with  gen.  of 


pron.,  iij4;  as  subst.  and  as  adj.,  1243: 


of  two  individuals,  2399;  utrique,  or 
two  sets,  2399;  utrique,  of  two  indi- 
viduals, 2399 ;  combined  with  different 
case  of  alter  or  different  case  of  same 
word  to  express  reciprocal  relations, 
2400. 

utervis,  decl.  of,  694 ;  use  of,  2401. 

utilis,  comparison  of,  359;  constructions 
with,  1201. 

utinam,  in  wishes,  1540. 

Utor,  prin.  parts  of,  983;  with  abl.,  1379, 
1381  ;  use  of  gerundive  of,  2244. 

utrum  .  .  .  an,  anne,  an  non,  1517, 
1519 ;  utrum  ...  an  ...  an,  1521 ; 
utrum  .  .  .  -ne  .  .  .  an,  1522; 
utrumne  .  .  .  an,  1522;  utrum, 
alone,  1523;  as  pron.,  1522;  utrum 
.  .  .  -ne  .  .  .  an,  utrumne  .  .  . 
an,  1779;  followed  by  quis,  qui,  in- 
def., 2388. 

v,  the  character,  as  vowel  and  as  cons., 
22;  as  cons.,  25,  26;  sound  of,  69; 
after  q,  g,  s,  27,  177;  interchange  of 
vowel  and  cons.,  52;  changed  to  b,  161 ; 
medial,  disappearance  of,  153,  i. 

vac5,  constructions  with,  1303,  1304. 

vacuus,  with  gen.,  1264;  with  abl., 
1306  ;  with  prep.,  1306. 

vadS,  defective,  808;  prin.  parts  of, 
958. 

vae,  with  dat.,  1206. 

vafer,  comparison  of, ,358. 

vah,  with  nom.  of  exclamation,  1117. 

valeo,  defective,  905 ;  prin.  parts  of, 
1006. 

valesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

valles  (vallis),  541. 

vanesco,  prin.  parts  of,  976. 

vannus,  gender  of,  447. 

vas,  gender  and  decl.  of,  475. 

vas,  decl.  of,  492;  gender  of,  578. 

vates,  decl.  of,  478,  566. 

-ve,  enclitic,  93;  appended  to  ne,  1581, 
1586,  1674;  use  of,  1667,  1674;  quan- 
tity, 2433 ;  at  end  of  verse,  2568. 

vecors,  decl.  of,  532. 

vectis,  gender  of,  579. 

veho,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

vel,  with  superl.,  1466,  1671;  meaning  if 
you  -will,  even,  perhaps,  for  instance, 
1671;  use  of,  1667,  1669,  1670;  fol- 
lowed by  etiam,  potius,  dicam, 
1670;  in  sense  of  aut,  1670;  quantity, 

vellb,  see  vollo. 


582 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


veluti,  velut,  1937;  velut  si,  in  con- 
ditional comparisons,  2117-2121. 

vendo,  formation  of,  395  ;  forms  of, 
757;  forms  of,  supplied  by  veneo,  757, 
1471  ;  venum  do  used  for,  1165. 

veneo,  formation  of,  395 ;  supplying 
forms  of  vendo,  757,  1471 ;  venum 
eo  used  for,  1165  ;  followed  by  ab  and 
abl.,  1318. 

venio,  perf.  of,  862  ;  prin.  parts  of,  1013; 
compounds  of,  822;  venit  in  men- 
tern,  1290;  quod  venio,  &c.,  1840; 
with  infin.  of  purpose,  2164;  with  su- 
pine, 2271. 

venter,  decl.  of,  525. 

venum  do,  use  of,  for  vendo,  1165. 

venum  eo,  use  of,  for  veneo,  1165. 

vepres,  gender  of,  579. 

ver,  gender  and  decl.  of,  489. 

verberis,    decl.    of,   489 ;    gender    of, 

vereor,  conjug.  of,  798 ;  prin.  parts  of, 
1009;  with  gen.,  1286;  with  ut,  ne, 
1957, 1958;  vereor  ne  as  expansion  of 
apod..  2114;  with  infin.,  1959,  2169; 
with  indirect  question,  1959. 

vergo,  defective,  808. 

vermis,  gender  of,  579. 

vero,  use  of,  1684;  with  nisi,  2020;  in- 
troducing adversative  sentence,  2151  ; 
position  of,  1676 ;  non  hercle  vero, 
minime  vero,  1513;  ver5,  ita 
enimvero,  ita  ver5,  in  answers,  1512. 

verro,  see  vorro. 

versicolor,  decl.  of,  537. 

versus,  prep.,  1414;  position  of,  1414. 

verto  (vorto),  prin.  parts  of,  950. 

veru,  gender  of,  586;  decl.  of,  592. 

verum,  in  answers,  1512;  with  et, 
1648  ;  verum  or  verum  etiam  after 
non  modo,  &c.,  1680;  common  use 
of,  i67q;  introducing  adversative  sen- 
tence, 2151. 

vescor,  with  abl.,  1379;  use  of  gerun- 
dive of,  2244. 

vesperascit,  prin.  parts  of,  968. 

vesperi,  vespere,  use  of,  703,  1341. 

vester,  decl.  of,  652;  vestra  with  re- 
fert,  interest,  1277;  used  instead  of 
gen.,  1234,  1262. 

vet5,  forms  of,  993 ;  used  personally 
in  pass.,  2201  ;  with  o  shortened, 
2443 


vetus,  comparison  of,  358;  decl.  of,  491, 


503,  626. 
vicem,  resembling  prep.,  1406. 
viciniae,  loc.,  1339,  1340. 


vicis,  decl.  of,  430,  473- 

videlicet,  form  of,  712. 

vide5,  perf.  of,  862 ;  prin.  parts  of,  997 ; 
vide,  vide  ut  with  subjv.,  1579;  vide 
ne,  videto  ne  with  subjv.,  1585, 
1958;  in  pres.  indie,  after  postquam, 
&c.,  1926;  with  purpose  clause,  1951; 
si  videtur,  2113  >  w^h  acc-  anc*  infin., 
2175;  videorwith  infin.,  2169;  videor 
personally,  2i79j  videtur  imperson- 
ally, 2181 ;  videri,  subj.  of,  omitted 
with  verbs  of  desire,  2190. 

vigeo,  prin.  parts  of,  1006. 

vigil,  gender  and  decl.  of,  636,  482,  544, 
561. 

vinciS,  prin.  parts  of,  1014. 

vinco,  prin.  parts  of,  938. 

virus,  gender  and  decl.  of,  493. 

vis,  decl.  of,  430, 518,  548,  554;  stems  of, 
569. 

viscus,  gender  and  decl.  of,  491. 

viso,  pres.  stem  of,  835 ;  prin.  parts  of, 
945- 

vitis,  decl.  of,  522. 

vito,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  1184;  with  n5, 
1960. 

vive  scp,  prin.  parts  of.  959. 

vivo,  prin.  parts  of,  953. 

vix,  1451;  non  modo  (non  solum) 
.  .  .  sed  vix,  1682;  vix  .  .  .  cum, 
1869;  vix  ut,  1947;  with  gerundives, 
2249;  vixdum  .  .  .  cum,  1869. 

vollo  (vello),  perf.  of,  866 ;  prin.  parts 
of,  951. 

vo!5,  conjug.  of,  772,  773 ;  forms  volt, 
vult,  voltis,  vultis,  774 ;  forms 
yellem,  &c.,  i4_6 ;  sis,  774 ;  sis  with 
imper.,  1572;  sis  parenthetical,  2113; 
sultis,  774;  sultiswith  imper.,  1572; 
sultis  parenthetical,  2113  ;  form  of 
volt,  828 ;  form  of  velim,  &c.,  841 ; 
prin.  parts  of,  922  ;  use  of  dat.  of  partic. 
of,  1218;  use  of  velim,  void,  1555; 
use  of  vellem,  1560;  vo!5,  velim, 
with  subjv.,  1579;  si  voluero,  1632; 
coordination  of  forms  of,  1707,  1787; 
quam  vis,  &c.,  1374,  1903-1906;  with 
ut,  1950;  with  infin.,  2169;  with  ace. 
and  infin.,  1954,  2189,  2190,  2228;  with 
perf.  act.  infin.,  2223,  2224»  2228;  with 
perf.  pass,  infin.,  2229 ;  in  conative  use, 

23°3' 

volturius,  voc.  sing,  of,  459. 
volucris,  stems  of,  490,  500,  566. 


volvo,  prin.  parts  of,  947. 
vomis,  decl.  of,  491,  499;   gender  of, 
579- 

583 


Index  of  Latin   Words. 


vomo,  prin.  parts  of,  972. 

vorro,  verro,  prin.  parts  of,  950. 

versus,  prep.,  1414;  position  of,  1414. 

vorto,  see  verto. 

vos,  decl.  of,  644-651;  see  tu. 

voster.  see  vaster. 

vostras,  accent  of,  88. 

voto,  see  veto. 

voveo,  prin.  parts  of,  996. 


X,  double  cons.,  70;  sound  of,  70;  re- 
sult of  assimilation,  164;  makes  posi- 
tion, 177. 

y,  introduction  of,  17;  represented  by  u, 
21 ;  pronunciation  of,  33,  42. 

z,  introduction  of,  17;  represented  by  8 
and  ss,  21  ;  makes  position,  177. 


MORRIS   8c  MORGAN'S 

LATIN   SERIES   FOR 
SCHOOLS    AND    COLLEGES 


ESSENTIALS  OF  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS.     Henry   C.    Pearson,   Teachers' 

College,  New  York.      90  cents. 
A  SCHOOL  LATIN   GRAMMAR.      Morris  H.  Morgan,  Harvard  University. 

$1.00. 

A  FIRST  LATIN  WRITER.     M.  A.  Abbott,  Groton  School.      60  cents. 
CONNECTED  PASSAGES  FOR  LATIN  PROSE  WRITING.     Maurice  W.  Mather, 

Harvard  University,  and  Arthur  L.  Wheeler,  Bryn  Mawr  College. 

$1.00. 
CAESAR.      EPISODES  FROM  THE  GALLIC  AND  CIVIL  WARS.     Maurice  W. 

Mather,  Harvard  University.     $1.25. 

CICERO.  TEN  ORATIONS  WITH  EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  EPISTLES  TO 
SERVE  AS  ILLUSTRATIONS.  J.  Remsen  Bishop,  Eastern  High  School, 
Detroit,  Frederick  A.  King,  Hughes  High  School,  Cincinnati,  and 
Nathan  W  Helm,  Phillips  Exeter  Academy,  Exeter,  N.  H. 
$1.25.  Six  Orations  only,  $1.00. 

SELECTIONS  FROM  LATIN  PROSE  AUTHORS  FOR  SIGHT  READING.  Susan 
Braley  Franklin  and  Ella  Catherine  Greene,  Miss  Baldwin's  School, 
Bryn  Mawr.  40  cents. 

CICERO.      CATO  MAIOR.    Frank  G.  Moore,  Columbia  University.    80  cents. 

CICERO.      LAELIUS  DE  AMICITIA.      Clifton  Price,  University  of  California. 

75  cents. 

SELECTIONS  FROM  LIVY.      Harry  E.  Burton,  Dartmouth  College.      $1.50. 
HORACE.      ODES,  EPODES  AND  CARMEN  SAECULARE.      Clifford  H.  Moore, 

Harvard  University.      $1.50. 

HORACE.     SATIRES.      Edward  P.  Morris,  Yale  University.      $1.00. 
HORACE.      ODES,  EPODES  AND  CARMEN  SAECULARE  AND  SATIRES.      Moore 

and  Morris.      $2.00. 

LUCRETIUS.      William  A.  Merrill,  University  of  California.      $2.25. 
LATIN    LITERATURE    OF    THE    EMPIRE.      Alfred  Gudeman,  University  of 

Pennsylvania. 

Vol.  I.        Prose:  Velleius  to  Boethius          .          .          .          $1.80 

Vol.  II.      Poetry:  Pseudo-Vergiliana  to  Claudianus        .  1. 80 

SELECTIONS  FROM   THE    PUBLIC   AND    PRIVATE   LAW   OF   THE   ROMANS. 

James  J.  Robinson,  Yale  University.      $1.25. 


AMERICAN     BOOK    COMPANY 

(249) 


SELECTIONS  FROM 
THE  WORKS  OF  OVID 

Edited    by   FRANK  J.   MILLER,  Ph.D.    (Yale), 
Professor  of  Latin,  University  of  Chicago 


Annotated  Edition  .     .     .  $1.40 


Text  Edition      ....  $0.50 


THESE  selections    are    fairly    representative,    and    are 
edited  in  such  a  way  as   to  illustrate  the   style   and 
subject-matter  of  each  poem,  and  at  the  same  time  to 
show    the   exact    relation    of  every    part    to    the    complete 
work. 

^[  The  book  includes  over  3,800  lines  from  the  Meta- 
morphoses, thus  more  than  meeting  the  requirements  in  Ovid 
of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board,  and  in  addition 
the  following :  Selections  from  Heroides,  Amores,  Ars 
Amatoria,  Remedia  Amoris,  Fasti,  Tristia,  and  Epistulae  ex 
Ponto  ;  Life  of  Ovid,  Poetic  Forms  of  Ovid's  Works;  with 
notes  on  the  selections,  and  vocabulary. 
^J  The  notes  have  been  prepared  with  special  reference  to 
the  needs  of  both  the  school  and  the  college  student.  They 
include  :  General  assistance  in  the  translation  of  difficult 
and  obscure  passages  ;  judicious  references  on  points  of  syntax 
to  all  the  modern  school  grammars  in  common  use  ;  notes 
and  comments  upon  points  of  antiquarian  interest ;  and  sug- 
gestions and  illustrations  of  the  relations  of  Ovid's  stories  to 
their  earlier  sources,  and  especially  of  their  effect  upon  English 
literature. 

^[  The  vocabulary,  which  has  been  prepared  especially 
for  this  volume,  gives  the  literal  meaning  of  each  word, 
and  also  all  of  the  typical  meanings  which  occur  in  the 
text.  Generous  assistance  in  word  derivation  is  offered 
as  well. 


AMERICAN    BOOK     COMPANY 

(262) 


LIVY    AND    HORACE 


SELECTIONS  FROM  LIVY $1.50 

Edited  by  HARRY  E.  BURTON,   Ph.D.,  Professor  of 
Latin,  Dartmouth  College.      Text  Edition,  $0.35 


THESE  selections  are  intended  to  give  a  more  compre- 
hensive idea  of  Livy's  genius  and  versatility  than  can  be 
had  from  the  reading  of  any  one  or  two  books,  and 
also  to  provide  material  dealing  with  the  more  significant  and 
interesting  periods  of  the  early  history  of  Rome.  The  pas- 
sages are  varied  in  nature,  and  are  not  confined  to  military 
history ;  they  are  not  so  short  as  to  appear  fragmentary.  Each 
subject  is  presented  in  a  series  of  continuous  chapters,  the 
notes  supplying  introductory  and  explanatory  material  for  a 
proper  understanding  of  the  period.  There  is  a  comprehen- 
sive introduction,  and  a  complete  system  of  cross-reference. 


HORACE.     ODES,  EPODES,  AND  CARMEN 

SAECULARE #1.50 

Edited  by  CLIFFORD  H.   MOORE,   Ph.D.,    Professor 
of  Latin,  Harvard  University.     Text  Edition,  $0.40 


WHILE  elementary  matters  have  not  been  neglected  in 
this  edition,  particular  attention  has  been  devoted  to 
the  literary  side  of  Horace's  work,  and  to  his  literary 
relations.  The  introduction,  besides  dealing  with  the  poet's 
life  and  writings,  discusses  his  lyric  metres  and  peculi- 
arities of  syntax.  The  commentary  is  not  limited  to  the 
baldest  aids,  but  is  intended  to  give  such  assistance  in 
interpretation  as  may  help  students,  to  some  appreciation  of 
Horace's  art  and  charm.  The  relation  of  the  poet  to  his 
Greek  models,  and  especially  his  influence  on  subsequent 
Latin  literature,  are  clearly  shown. 


AMERICAN     BOOK     COMPANY 

(273) 


I       C       E       R       O 


CICERO.    CATO  MAIOR  DE  SENECTUTE,  £0.80 

Edited  by  FRANK  G.  MOORE,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Pro- 
fessor of  Latin  and  of  Roman  Archaeology,  Dartmouth 
College.  Text  Edition,  $0.30 


A^  edition  embodying  much  new  critical  material, 
and  abundant  grammatical  helps.  Unusual  attention 
has  been  paid  to  those  rhetorical  features  which  are 
most  likely  to  be  misunderstood,  to  the  confusion  of  the 
argument,  while  at  the  same  time  both  grammar  and  rhetoric 
have  been  treated  as  a  means  to  an  end.  The  text  is  sup- 
plied with  very  full  footnotes.  The  scholarly  introduction 
sets  forth  the  character  of  Cato  clearly  and  impressively,  and 
is  supplemented  by  a  comparative  list  of  distinguished  old  men, 
and  by  verses  by  Pope  Leo  XIII  on  Frugality  and  the  Green 
Old  Age.  There  are  critical  notes,  and  an  index. 


CICERO.     LAELIUS  DE  AMICITIA    .     .     .  $0.75 

Edited  by  CLIFTON  PRICE,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor 
of  Latin,  University  of  California.     Text  Edition,  $o.  30 


THIS  edition  enables  the  student  to  understand  and  inter- 
pret the  text,  and  contains  enough  elementary  matter  to 
adapt  it  to  use  in  the  best  preparatory  schools,  and  at 
the  same  time  enough  advanced  material  for  the  first  year  in 
college.  The  book  is  complete  in  itself,  the  grammatical 
principles  being  stated  in  the  notes.  The  notes  at  the  bottom 
of  the  page  have  been  made  very  comprehensive,  and  the 
proper  balance  has  been  preserved  between  the  notes  on  syntax 
and  those  on  interpretation.  The  system  of  cross-reference, 
and  the  emphasis  laid  on  the  figures  of  speech  and  grammar, 
form  strong  features  of  the  book. 


AMERICAN    BOOK     COMPANY 

(274) 


LATIN     DICTIONARIES 


HARPER'S  LATIN  DICTIONARY 

Founded    on    the    translation    of    Freund's    Latin-German 
Lexicon.      Edited  by    E.    A.    ANDREWS,  LL.D.      Revised, 
Enlarged,    and  in  great  part  Rewritten  by  CHARLTON  T. 
LEWIS,   Ph.D.,  and  CHARLES  SHORT,  LL.D. 
Royal  Octavo,  2030  pages.     Sheep,  $6.50;    Full  Russia,  $10.00 

^j  The  translation  of  Dr.  Freund's  great  Latin-German 
Lexicon,  edited  by  the  late  Dr.  E.  A.  Andrews,  and  pub- 
lished in  1850,  has  been  from  that  time  in  extensive  and 
satisfactory  use  throughout  England  and  America.  Mean- 
while great  advances  have  been  made  in  the  science  on  which 
lexicography  depends.  The  present  work  embodies  the  latest 
advances  in  philological  study  and  research,  and  is  in  every 
r-spect  the  most  complete  and  satisfactory  Latin  Dictionary 
published. 

LEWIS'S  LATIN  DICTIONARY  FOR  SCHOOLS 

By  CHARLTON  T.  LEWIS,  Ph.D. 

Large  Octavo,  1 200  pages.     Cloth,  $4.50  j  Half  Leather,    $5.00 

^|  This  dictionary  is  not  an  abridgment,  but  an  entirely  new 
and  independent  work,  designed  to  include  all  of  the  student's 
needs,  after  acquiring  the  elements  of  grammar,  for  the  inter- 
pretation of  the  Latin  authors  commonly  read  in  school. 

LEWIS'S  ELEMENTARY  LATIN  DICTIONARY 

By  CHARLTON  T.  LEWIS,  Ph.D. 

Crown  Octavo,  952  pages.     Half  Leather $2.00 

^[  This  work  is  sufficiently  full  to  meet  the  needs  of  students 
in  secondary  or  preparatory  schools,  and  also  in  the  first  and 
second  years'  work  in  colleges. 

SMITH'S  ENGLISH-LATIN  DICTIONARY 

A  Complete  and  Critical    English-Latin    Dictionary.     By 
WILLIAM    SMITH,    LL.D.,    and    THEOPHILUS    D.  HALL, 
M.A.,   Fellow  of  University  College,   London.     With  a 
Dictionary  of.  Proper  Names. 
Royal  Octavo,  765  pages.     Sheep $4.00 


AMERICAN     BOOK    COMPANY 


GREEK     DICTIONARIES 


LIDDELL  AND   SCOTT'S   GREEK-ENGLISH 
LEXICON 

Compiled  by  HENRY  GEORGE  LIDDELL,  D.D.,  and 
ROBERT  SCOTT,  D.D  ,  assisted  by  HENRY  DRISLER,  LL.D. 
Imperial  Quarto,  1794  pages.  Sheep $10.00 

^[  The  present  edition  of  this  great  work  has  been  thoroughly 
revised,  and  large  additions  made  to  it.  The  editors  have 
been  favored  with  the  cooperation  of  many  scholars,  and 
several  important  articles  have  been  entirely  rewritten. 

LIDDELL  AND  SCOTT'S    GREEK-ENGLISH 
LEXICON — Intermediate 
Royal  Octavo,   910  pages.      Cloth,  $3-5°  ;  Half  Leather,    $4.00 

^j  This  abridgment  will  not  only  meet  every  need  encountered 
in  preparatory  schools,  but  will  also  satisfy  the  requirements 
of  most  college  students. 

LIDDELL  AND  SCOTT'S   GREEK-ENGLISH 

LEXICON— Abridged 

Crown  Octavo,  832  pages.      Half  Leather $1.25 

^[  This  abridgment  is  intended  chiefly  for  use  by  students 
in  secondary  and  college  preparatory  schools. 

THAYER'S  GREEK-ENGLISH  LEXICON  OF 
THE  NEW  TESTAMENT 

Being  Grimm's  Wilke's  Clavis  Novi  Testamenti.     Trans- 
lated,  Revised,   and  Enlarged  by  JOSEPH  HENRY  THAYER, 
D.D.,  LL.D.     Royal  Octavo,  727  pages. 
Cloth,  $5.00  ;   Half  Leather $6.50 

YONGE'S  ENGLISH-GREEK  LEXICON 

By  C.   D.  YONGE.     Edited    by  HENRY  DRISLER,  LL.D. 

Royal  Octavo,  903  pages.      Sheep $4.50 

AUTENRIETH'S  HOMERIC  DICTIONARY 

Translated  and  Edited  by  ROBERT  P.  KEEP,  Ph.D.  New 
Edition.  Revised  by  ISAAC  FLAGG,  Ph.D.  izmo,  312 
pages.  Illustrated.  Cloth $1.10 


AMERICAN     BOOK     COMPANY 


SMYTH'S   GREEK  SERIES 

FOR 
COLLEGES    AND    SCHOOLS 


BEGINNER'S  GREEK   BOOK.      A.  R.  Benner,  Phillips  Academy,  Andover, 
and  H.  W.  Smyth,  Harvard  University.      $1.25. 

BRIEF  GREEK  SYNTAX.     Louis  Bevier,  Jr.,  Rutgers  College.     $0.90. 

GREEK  PROSE  COMPOSITION  FOR  SCHOOLS.      C.  W.  Gleason,  Volkmann 
School,  Boston.      $0.80. 

GREEK  PROSE  COMPOSITION  FOR  COLLEGES.      Edward  H.  Spieker,  Johns 
H  opkins  U  niversity .     $1.30. 

AESCHYLUS.     PROMETHEUS.    J.  E.  Harry,  University  of  Cincinnati.     $1.50. 

ARISTOPHANES.      CLOUDS.      L.  L.  Forman,  Cornell  University. 

DEMOSTHENES.      ON  THE  CROWN.      M.   W.  Humphreys,   University  of 
Virginia. 

EURIPIDES.     IPHIGENIA  IN  TAURIS.     W.  N.   Bates,  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania.    $1.25. 

EURIPIDES.     MEDEA.      M.  L.  Earle,  Columbia  University.     $1.25. 

HERODOTUS.     Books  VII.-VIII.     C.  F.  Smith  and  A.  G.  Laird,   Uni- 
versity of  Wisconsin.     $1.75. 

HOMER.     ILIAD.     J.  R.  S.  Sterrett,  Cornell  University. 

BOOKS  I.-III.  AND  SELECTIONS.     $1.60.     BOOKS  I.-III.      $1.20. 

LYSIAS.     C.  D.  Adams,  Dartmouth  College.     $1.50. 

PLATO.      APOLOGY  AND  CRITO.      Isaac  Flagg,  University  of  California. 
#1.40. 

PLATO.     EUTHYPHRO.     W.  A.  Heidel,  Wesleyan  University.      $1.00. 

THEOCRITUS.      H.  R.  Fairclough   and  A.  T.  Murray,  Leland   Stanford, 
Jr.,  University. 

THUCYDIDES.     Books  II.-III.     W.  A.  Lamberton,   University  of  Penn- 
sylvania.    $1.75. 

XENOPHON.     ANABASIS.     Books  I.-IV.     M.  W.  Mather,  formerly  of  Har- 
vard University,  and  J.  W.  Hewitt,  Wesleyan  University.     $1.50. 

XENOPHON.      HELLENIC  A   (Selections).      C.  L.  Brownson,  College  of  the 
City  of  New  York.     $1.65. 

GREEK  ARCHAEOLOGY.     H.  N.  Fowler,  Western  Reserve  University,  and 
J.  R.  Wheeler,  Columbia  University.     $2.00. 

GREEK  LITERATURE.     W.  C.  Wright,  Bryn  Mawr  College.     $1.50. 

GREEK  RELIGION.     Arthur  Fairbanks,  Director  of  the  Boston  Museum  of 
Fine  Arts.     $1.50. 

GREEK  SCULPTURE.     R.  B.  Richardson,  late   Director   of  the   American 
School  of  Classical  Studies,  Athens.     $1.50. 

Others  in  preparation. 


AMERICAN     BOOK     COMPANY 

(285) 


DESCRIPTIVE 

CATALOGUE    OF     HIGH 

SCHOOL  AND   COLLEGE 

TEXTBOOKS 

Published  Complete  and  in   Sections 


WE  issue  a  Catalogue  of  High  School  and  College  Text- 
books, which  we  have  tried  to  make  as  valuable  and 
as  useful  to  teachers  as  possible.       In  this   catalogue 
are  set  forth  briefly  and  clearly  the  scope  and  leading  charac- 
teristics of  each  of  our  best  textbooks.      In  most  cases  there 
are  also  given  testimonials  from  well-known  teachers,  which 
have  been  selected  quite  as  much  for  their  descriptive  qualities 
as  for  their  value  as  commendations. 

^|  For  the  convenience  of  teachers  this  Catalogue  is  also 
published  in  separate  sections  treating  of  the  various 
branches  of  study.  These  pamphlets  are  entitled:  Eng- 
lish, Mathematics,  History  and  Political  Science,  Science, 
Modern  Foreign  Languages,  Ancient  Languages,  Com- 
mercial Subjects,  and  Philosophy  and  Education.  A 
single  pamphlet  is  devoted  to  the  Newest  Books  in  all 
subjects. 

^j  Teachers  seeking  the  newest  and  best  books  for  their 
classes  are  invited  to  send  for  our  Complete  High  School  and 
College  Catalogue,  or  for  such  sections  as  may  be  of  greatest 
interest. 

^|  Copies  of  our  price  lists,  or  of  special  circulars,  in  which 
these  books  are  described  at  greater  length  than  the  space 
limitations  of  the  catalogue  permit,  will  be  mailed  to  any 
address  on  request. 

^[  All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  the  nearest 
of  the  following  offices  of  the  company:  New  York,  Cincin- 
nati, Chicago,  Boston,  Atlanta,  San  Francisco. 


AMERICAN     BOOK     COMPANY 

(3") 


THIS  BOOK 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN 


TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWE1 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 
on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 


Renewed  boo 


iate  recall. 


LD  21A-50m-12,'GO 
(B6221slO)476B 


University  of  California 
Berkeley 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


COHEflB72Bb 


ITY  OF  CAUFORNIA  LIBRARY 


